<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Nathalie.mainville</id>
	<title>wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Nathalie.mainville"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/Special:Contributions/Nathalie.mainville"/>
	<updated>2026-04-05T19:42:49Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.35.2</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=145136</id>
		<title>PFAN - News and Updates</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=145136"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T14:19:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 2026 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[fr:PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= News =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''News'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|We are delighted to welcome Marilyne Guertin, from Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of January 13, 2026, she succeeds Marie-Chantal L’Ecuyer-Coelho as BAnQ’s representative and co-chair of the Committee. Marie-Chantal will replace Izidor Cirnatiu, who is leaving the Committee after seven years of involvement. We would like to express our sincere gratitude to Izidor for his commitment to the PFAN. His expertise and dedication were essential to the creation of the Committee and its many achievements. Thank you, Izidor, and welcome, Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome Marie-Chantal L'Écuyer-Coelho of the Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of September 23, 2024, she replaces Daniel Paradis as BAnQ representative and co-chair of the committee.  We would like to thank Daniel Paradis for his great contribution to PFAN. His participation and expertise have greatly influenced the creation and many accomplishments of the committee.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome to Bernard Lemieux of the Université de Montréal on the PFAN Standards Committee. As of March 28, 2023, he officially replaces Philippe Brosseau as one of the representatives of the Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. We warmly thank Philippe for his contribution to the committee. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additions and changes on the PFAN wiki =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the wiki, '''Added content''' is identified by the tag &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. '''Updated content''' is identified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#372_Field_of_activity|New example with $2 rvmgf]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN training&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN|Decision trees to help with romanization (in French only]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Maintenance_of_existing_undifferentiated_records:|Instructions and example for a non-differentiated BAnQ record without a Canadiana number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Modified content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Modification of example under CIP (specific category)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Details for the languages of ISO 15919:2001 (Information and documentation -- Transliteration of Devanagari and related Indian scripts into Latin characters)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Correction of the examples in step 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Participating Libraries&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|Updating respondents]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new French terms (Compilation and Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#377_Associated_language|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_Information|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ on geographic names&lt;br /&gt;
|'''updated content''' : [[FAQ_on_geographic_names|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script|16.2.2.5, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Geographical Names Database]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Removal of the phrases &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfield $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0 or $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0, $1, $3, $4 or $i.&amp;quot; in various fields.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Point 2.c. on variants under step 2 for modifications.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers (field 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)|Question about Canadiana generic numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Bibliographic_file_maintenance_.28BFM.29_.5BNew.5D|Bibliographic file maintenance (BFM)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3.,Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification of the statement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX_-_See_From_Tracings_-_General_Information|Clarification on cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Establishing_certain_entities_in_the_name_authority_file|Establishing certain entities in the name authority file]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|Instructions for name authority records for families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|Instruction for obsolete subfields $l and $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#023_Cluster_ISSN|023 field, Cluster ISSN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|Instruction for subfield $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Recording_Attributes_of_Work_and_Expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Recording Attributes of Work and Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Preferred_Title_Consisting_Solely_of_the_Name_of_One_Type_of_Composition|6.14.2.5.2, Preferred Title Consisting Solely of the Name of One Type of Composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choice_of_language|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choice of language]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Singular_or_Plural_Form|6.14.2.5.2.2, Singular or Plural Form]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Part_Identified_Both_by_a_Number_and_by_a_Title_or_Other_Verbal_Designation.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Part Identified Both by a Number and by a Title or Other Verbal Designation, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Two_or_More_Parts.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Two or More Parts, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.8.3.2C_Complete_Works_of_a_Single_Type_of_Composition_for_One_Specific_Medium_or_Various_Media|6.14.2.8.3, Complete Works of a Single Type of Composition for One Specific Medium or Various Media]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.3.2C_Recording_Medium_of_Performance|6.15.1.3, Recording Medium of Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.5.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.5, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.1, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.3, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Serial_Number|6.16.1.3.1, Serial Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Thematic_Index_Number|6.16.1.3.3, Thematic Index Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_Transcriptions.2C_Etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, Transcriptions, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.27.1.9.2C_Additions_to_access_points_representing_works|6.27.1.9, Additions to access points representing works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2C_General_Guidelines_on_Constructing_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1, General Guidelines on Constructing Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2.2C_Musical_Works_With_Lyrics.2C_Libretto.2C_Text.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Musical Works With Lyrics, Libretto, Text, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.2C_Additional_Elements_in_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1.9, Additional Elements in Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.3.2C_Authorized_Access_Point_Representing_an_Expression_of_Musical_Work|6.28.3, Authorized Access Point Representing an Expression of Musical Work]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.4.2C_Variant_Access_Point_Representing_a_Musical_Work_or_Expression|6.28.4, Variant Access Point Representing a Musical Work or Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Medium_of_performance|Clarification of existing authority records.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.1.3.2C_Recording_Relationship_to_Related_Corporate_Body|32.1.1.3, Recording Relationship to Related Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Establishing certain entities in the name authority file&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Group_1_-_Name_Authority_Group_Headings|Category “Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named” revised for “Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual” (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Suppression of: prefer a notice that already has an 016 to one that doesn't.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_FAQ_on_Compilations_of_Works_by_One_Agent|FAQ on Compilations of Works by One Agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#10.0.2C_Identifying_families|10.0, Identifying families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Children_and_Grandchildren_of_Royal_Persons|9.4.1.4.3, Children and Grandchildren of Royal Persons]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual|Clarifications made in field 008/32, 371, 377 and 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link for Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|New example of how to cite a website subpage]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Editing the note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_on_romanization|FAQ on romanization]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Steering Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Standards Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership_2|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Details about the number to be provided in 667 note at Step 2, Record to be deleted]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|LAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Library_and_Archives_Canada|Link for LAC Wiki]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles|Clarification of certain principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.2C_Related_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|32.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#When_a_corporate_body_has_gone_through_a_name_change.2C_or_several_name_changes.2C_and_there_are_authority_records.2C_in_Canadiana.2C_for_the_other_names.2C_which_relationships_should_be_recorded_in_an_authority_record_.28field_5XX.29.3F_In_which_cases_should_cataloguers_revise_the_authority_records_for_those_related_corporate_bodies.3F|Question 7 on related corporate bodies]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|New respondents for some institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Correction of an example in field 008/15]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Maintenance_of_existing_undifferentiated_records:|Important clarification added in field 008/32 regarding existing undifferentiated records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for the term &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; added to field 1XX of the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|Clarification of associated group name changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for FrPBN-coded authority records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#How_do_I_determine_the_usage_for_an_agent_name_in_WMS.3F|Question 8 on the usage of an agent's name]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New document for the romanization of Hebrew]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification added for field 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#General|008/32, General]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information|Clarification for counties in the United States]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#386_Creator.2Fcontributor_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|Details added to field 046]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Details added for an URI included in a 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#PFAN_eligibility_criteria_.5BNew.5D|Eligibility criteria and expectations of new members]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Correction of the PQ numbers for French Canadian literature]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|New instruction for subfields $q and $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#053_LC_classification_number_.5BNew.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#065_Other_Classification_Number_.5BNew.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|Clarification for the second indicator]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Amharic table]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#375_Gender|Do not use this field]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link to &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 on cancelled or hybrid conference]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarifications added for fields 046 and 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/032&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Records_coded_as_undifferentiated_that_actually_represent_only_one_identity|Clarification added for records coded &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; by mistake]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation|New document on the romanization of Yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#043_Geographic_Area_Code_.5BNew.5D|Local Geographic area code]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_of_Promulgation_of_a_Law.2C_Etc._.5BNew.5D|6.29.1.29, Date of Promulgation of a Law, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2C_Name_of_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|11.2, Name of Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information_.5BNEW.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources of information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)#FAQ_on_geographic_names|FAQ on geographic names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation_.5BNew.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name9|008/32]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Two new 667 field examples (for undifferentiated name authority records representing a single identity and those undergoing partial modifications)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|Cross-references (4XX and 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_on_Canadiana_numbers_(field_016)#Who_do_I_contact_if_I_need_a_new_list_of_Canadiana_numbers_for_field_016.3F_.5BNew.5D|Question 4 on obtaining a new list of Canadian numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new terms (Lyrics and Libretto)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Clarifications added for Chinese]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#385_Audience_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications_.5BNEW.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles_.5BNEW.5D|General Principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNEW.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|022]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|024]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|046]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#335_Extension_Plan_.5BNew.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|375]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|384]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|385]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Char|386]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|510]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#530_See_Also_From_Tracing-Uniform_Title|530]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Two new languages (Korean and Japanese)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Add an instruction to 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Project_2._Records_created_and_revised_as_part_of_the_Universities_Mentoring_Project|Clarifications added for the Universities Mentoring Project ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D|Simple 4XX &amp;quot;see&amp;quot; cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Membership of the Steering Committee]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|New article on PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Addition of romanization tables from BnF (Armenian, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Georgian, Macedonian, Russian, Ukrainian]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation|RVM examples are replaced by RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Clarifications added for the instruction on 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions|Clarifications added on point 3 and example 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Correction of an example]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for records derived from LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_records_derived_from_LC.2FNAF|Clarification of the example of a 670 field]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Discussion Lists&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|New PFAN-MUSIQUE-L discussion list.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Added information in different fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Core RDA Elements for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Core_RDA_Elements_for_PFAN|Additional information under Related Corporate Bodies element.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Mandatory MARC Fields for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Mandatory_MARC_Fields_for_PFAN|Added information in 510, 511, 551 fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New introduction.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-03-11''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=145135</id>
		<title>PFAN - News and Updates</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=145135"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T14:19:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 2026 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[fr:PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= News =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''News'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|We are delighted to welcome Marilyne Guertin, from Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of January 13, 2026, she succeeds Marie-Chantal L’Ecuyer-Coelho as BAnQ’s representative and co-chair of the Committee. Marie-Chantal will replace Izidor Cirnatiu, who is leaving the Committee after seven years of involvement. We would like to express our sincere gratitude to Izidor for his commitment to the PFAN. His expertise and dedication were essential to the creation of the Committee and its many achievements. Thank you, Izidor, and welcome, Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome Marie-Chantal L'Écuyer-Coelho of the Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of September 23, 2024, she replaces Daniel Paradis as BAnQ representative and co-chair of the committee.  We would like to thank Daniel Paradis for his great contribution to PFAN. His participation and expertise have greatly influenced the creation and many accomplishments of the committee.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome to Bernard Lemieux of the Université de Montréal on the PFAN Standards Committee. As of March 28, 2023, he officially replaces Philippe Brosseau as one of the representatives of the Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. We warmly thank Philippe for his contribution to the committee. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additions and changes on the PFAN wiki =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the wiki, '''Added content''' is identified by the tag &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. '''Updated content''' is identified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#372_Field_of_activity|New example with $2 rvmgf]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN training&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN|Decision trees to help with romanization (in French only]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Maintenance_of_existing_undifferentiated_records:|Instructions and example for a non-differentiated BAnQ record without a Canadiana number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Modified content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Modification of example under CIP (specific category)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Details for the languages of ISO 15919:2001 (Information and documentation -- Transliteration of Devanagari and related Indian scripts into Latin characters)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Correction of the examples in step 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Participating Libraries&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|Updating respondents]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new French terms (Compilation and Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#377_Associated_language|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_Information|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ on geographic names&lt;br /&gt;
|'''updated content''' : [[FAQ_on_geographic_names|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script|16.2.2.5, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Geographical Names Database]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Removal of the phrases &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfield $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0 or $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0, $1, $3, $4 or $i.&amp;quot; in various fields.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Point 2.c. on variants under step 2 for modifications.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers (field 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)|Question about Canadiana generic numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Bibliographic_file_maintenance_.28BFM.29_.5BNew.5D|Bibliographic file maintenance (BFM)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3.,Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification of the statement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX_-_See_From_Tracings_-_General_Information|Clarification on cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Establishing_certain_entities_in_the_name_authority_file|Establishing certain entities in the name authority file]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|Instructions for name authority records for families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|Instruction for obsolete subfields $l and $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#023_Cluster_ISSN|023 field, Cluster ISSN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|Instruction for subfield $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Recording_Attributes_of_Work_and_Expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Recording Attributes of Work and Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Preferred_Title_Consisting_Solely_of_the_Name_of_One_Type_of_Composition|6.14.2.5.2, Preferred Title Consisting Solely of the Name of One Type of Composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choice_of_language|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choice of language]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Singular_or_Plural_Form|6.14.2.5.2.2, Singular or Plural Form]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Part_Identified_Both_by_a_Number_and_by_a_Title_or_Other_Verbal_Designation.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Part Identified Both by a Number and by a Title or Other Verbal Designation, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Two_or_More_Parts.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Two or More Parts, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.8.3.2C_Complete_Works_of_a_Single_Type_of_Composition_for_One_Specific_Medium_or_Various_Media|6.14.2.8.3, Complete Works of a Single Type of Composition for One Specific Medium or Various Media]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.3.2C_Recording_Medium_of_Performance|6.15.1.3, Recording Medium of Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.5.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.5, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.1, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.3, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Serial_Number|6.16.1.3.1, Serial Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Thematic_Index_Number|6.16.1.3.3, Thematic Index Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_Transcriptions.2C_Etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, Transcriptions, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.27.1.9.2C_Additions_to_access_points_representing_works|6.27.1.9, Additions to access points representing works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2C_General_Guidelines_on_Constructing_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1, General Guidelines on Constructing Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2.2C_Musical_Works_With_Lyrics.2C_Libretto.2C_Text.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Musical Works With Lyrics, Libretto, Text, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.2C_Additional_Elements_in_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1.9, Additional Elements in Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.3.2C_Authorized_Access_Point_Representing_an_Expression_of_Musical_Work|6.28.3, Authorized Access Point Representing an Expression of Musical Work]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.4.2C_Variant_Access_Point_Representing_a_Musical_Work_or_Expression|6.28.4, Variant Access Point Representing a Musical Work or Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Medium_of_performance|Clarification of existing authority records.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.1.3.2C_Recording_Relationship_to_Related_Corporate_Body|32.1.1.3, Recording Relationship to Related Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Establishing certain entities in the name authority file&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Group_1_-_Name_Authority_Group_Headings|Category “Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named” revised for “Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual” (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Suppression of: prefer a notice that already has an 016 to one that doesn't.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_FAQ_on_Compilations_of_Works_by_One_Agent|FAQ on Compilations of Works by One Agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#10.0.2C_Identifying_families|10.0, Identifying families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Children_and_Grandchildren_of_Royal_Persons|9.4.1.4.3, Children and Grandchildren of Royal Persons]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual|Clarifications made in field 008/32, 371, 377 and 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link for Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|New example of how to cite a website subpage]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Editing the note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_on_romanization|FAQ on romanization]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Steering Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Standards Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership_2|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Details about the number to be provided in 667 note at Step 2, Record to be deleted]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|LAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Library_and_Archives_Canada|Link for LAC Wiki]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles|Clarification of certain principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.2C_Related_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|32.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#When_a_corporate_body_has_gone_through_a_name_change.2C_or_several_name_changes.2C_and_there_are_authority_records.2C_in_Canadiana.2C_for_the_other_names.2C_which_relationships_should_be_recorded_in_an_authority_record_.28field_5XX.29.3F_In_which_cases_should_cataloguers_revise_the_authority_records_for_those_related_corporate_bodies.3F|Question 7 on related corporate bodies]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|New respondents for some institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Correction of an example in field 008/15]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Maintenance_of_existing_undifferentiated_records:|Important clarification added in field 008/32 regarding existing undifferentiated records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for the term &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; added to field 1XX of the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|Clarification of associated group name changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for FrPBN-coded authority records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#How_do_I_determine_the_usage_for_an_agent_name_in_WMS.3F|Question 8 on the usage of an agent's name]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New document for the romanization of Hebrew]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification added for field 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#General|008/32, General]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information|Clarification for counties in the United States]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#386_Creator.2Fcontributor_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|Details added to field 046]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Details added for an URI included in a 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#PFAN_eligibility_criteria_.5BNew.5D|Eligibility criteria and expectations of new members]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Correction of the PQ numbers for French Canadian literature]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|New instruction for subfields $q and $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#053_LC_classification_number_.5BNew.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#065_Other_Classification_Number_.5BNew.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|Clarification for the second indicator]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Amharic table]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#375_Gender|Do not use this field]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link to &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 on cancelled or hybrid conference]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarifications added for fields 046 and 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/032&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Records_coded_as_undifferentiated_that_actually_represent_only_one_identity|Clarification added for records coded &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; by mistake]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation|New document on the romanization of Yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#043_Geographic_Area_Code_.5BNew.5D|Local Geographic area code]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_of_Promulgation_of_a_Law.2C_Etc._.5BNew.5D|6.29.1.29, Date of Promulgation of a Law, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2C_Name_of_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|11.2, Name of Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information_.5BNEW.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources of information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)#FAQ_on_geographic_names|FAQ on geographic names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation_.5BNew.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name9|008/32]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Two new 667 field examples (for undifferentiated name authority records representing a single identity and those undergoing partial modifications)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|Cross-references (4XX and 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_on_Canadiana_numbers_(field_016)#Who_do_I_contact_if_I_need_a_new_list_of_Canadiana_numbers_for_field_016.3F_.5BNew.5D|Question 4 on obtaining a new list of Canadian numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new terms (Lyrics and Libretto)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Clarifications added for Chinese]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#385_Audience_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications_.5BNEW.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles_.5BNEW.5D|General Principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNEW.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|022]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|024]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|046]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#335_Extension_Plan_.5BNew.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|375]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|384]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|385]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Char|386]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|510]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#530_See_Also_From_Tracing-Uniform_Title|530]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Two new languages (Korean and Japanese)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Add an instruction to 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Project_2._Records_created_and_revised_as_part_of_the_Universities_Mentoring_Project|Clarifications added for the Universities Mentoring Project ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D|Simple 4XX &amp;quot;see&amp;quot; cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Membership of the Steering Committee]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|New article on PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Addition of romanization tables from BnF (Armenian, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Georgian, Macedonian, Russian, Ukrainian]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation|RVM examples are replaced by RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Clarifications added for the instruction on 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions|Clarifications added on point 3 and example 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Correction of an example]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for records derived from LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_records_derived_from_LC.2FNAF|Clarification of the example of a 670 field]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Discussion Lists&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|New PFAN-MUSIQUE-L discussion list.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Added information in different fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Core RDA Elements for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Core_RDA_Elements_for_PFAN|Additional information under Related Corporate Bodies element.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Mandatory MARC Fields for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Mandatory_MARC_Fields_for_PFAN|Added information in 510, 511, 551 fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New introduction.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-03-11''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=145134</id>
		<title>PFAN - News and Updates</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=145134"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T14:19:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 2026 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[fr:PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= News =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''News'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|We are delighted to welcome Marilyne Guertin, from Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of January 13, 2026, she succeeds Marie-Chantal L’Ecuyer-Coelho as BAnQ’s representative and co-chair of the Committee. Marie-Chantal will replace Izidor Cirnatiu, who is leaving the Committee after seven years of involvement. We would like to express our sincere gratitude to Izidor for his commitment to the PFAN. His expertise and dedication were essential to the creation of the Committee and its many achievements. Thank you, Izidor, and welcome, Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome Marie-Chantal L'Écuyer-Coelho of the Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of September 23, 2024, she replaces Daniel Paradis as BAnQ representative and co-chair of the committee.  We would like to thank Daniel Paradis for his great contribution to PFAN. His participation and expertise have greatly influenced the creation and many accomplishments of the committee.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome to Bernard Lemieux of the Université de Montréal on the PFAN Standards Committee. As of March 28, 2023, he officially replaces Philippe Brosseau as one of the representatives of the Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. We warmly thank Philippe for his contribution to the committee. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additions and changes on the PFAN wiki =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the wiki, '''Added content''' is identified by the tag &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. '''Updated content''' is identified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#372_Field_of_activity|New example with $2 rvmgf]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN training&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN|Decision trees to help with romanization (in French only]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Maintenance_of_existing_undifferentiated_records:|Instructions and example for a non-differentiated BAnQ record without a Canadiana number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Modified content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Modification of the example under CIP (specific category)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Details for the languages of ISO 15919:2001 (Information and documentation -- Transliteration of Devanagari and related Indian scripts into Latin characters)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Correction of the examples in step 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Participating Libraries&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|Updating respondents]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new French terms (Compilation and Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#377_Associated_language|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_Information|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ on geographic names&lt;br /&gt;
|'''updated content''' : [[FAQ_on_geographic_names|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script|16.2.2.5, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Geographical Names Database]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Removal of the phrases &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfield $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0 or $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0, $1, $3, $4 or $i.&amp;quot; in various fields.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Point 2.c. on variants under step 2 for modifications.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers (field 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)|Question about Canadiana generic numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Bibliographic_file_maintenance_.28BFM.29_.5BNew.5D|Bibliographic file maintenance (BFM)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3.,Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification of the statement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX_-_See_From_Tracings_-_General_Information|Clarification on cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Establishing_certain_entities_in_the_name_authority_file|Establishing certain entities in the name authority file]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|Instructions for name authority records for families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|Instruction for obsolete subfields $l and $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#023_Cluster_ISSN|023 field, Cluster ISSN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|Instruction for subfield $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Recording_Attributes_of_Work_and_Expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Recording Attributes of Work and Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Preferred_Title_Consisting_Solely_of_the_Name_of_One_Type_of_Composition|6.14.2.5.2, Preferred Title Consisting Solely of the Name of One Type of Composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choice_of_language|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choice of language]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Singular_or_Plural_Form|6.14.2.5.2.2, Singular or Plural Form]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Part_Identified_Both_by_a_Number_and_by_a_Title_or_Other_Verbal_Designation.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Part Identified Both by a Number and by a Title or Other Verbal Designation, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Two_or_More_Parts.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Two or More Parts, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.8.3.2C_Complete_Works_of_a_Single_Type_of_Composition_for_One_Specific_Medium_or_Various_Media|6.14.2.8.3, Complete Works of a Single Type of Composition for One Specific Medium or Various Media]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.3.2C_Recording_Medium_of_Performance|6.15.1.3, Recording Medium of Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.5.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.5, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.1, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.3, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Serial_Number|6.16.1.3.1, Serial Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Thematic_Index_Number|6.16.1.3.3, Thematic Index Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_Transcriptions.2C_Etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, Transcriptions, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.27.1.9.2C_Additions_to_access_points_representing_works|6.27.1.9, Additions to access points representing works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2C_General_Guidelines_on_Constructing_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1, General Guidelines on Constructing Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2.2C_Musical_Works_With_Lyrics.2C_Libretto.2C_Text.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Musical Works With Lyrics, Libretto, Text, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.2C_Additional_Elements_in_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1.9, Additional Elements in Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.3.2C_Authorized_Access_Point_Representing_an_Expression_of_Musical_Work|6.28.3, Authorized Access Point Representing an Expression of Musical Work]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.4.2C_Variant_Access_Point_Representing_a_Musical_Work_or_Expression|6.28.4, Variant Access Point Representing a Musical Work or Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Medium_of_performance|Clarification of existing authority records.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.1.3.2C_Recording_Relationship_to_Related_Corporate_Body|32.1.1.3, Recording Relationship to Related Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Establishing certain entities in the name authority file&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Group_1_-_Name_Authority_Group_Headings|Category “Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named” revised for “Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual” (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Suppression of: prefer a notice that already has an 016 to one that doesn't.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_FAQ_on_Compilations_of_Works_by_One_Agent|FAQ on Compilations of Works by One Agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#10.0.2C_Identifying_families|10.0, Identifying families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Children_and_Grandchildren_of_Royal_Persons|9.4.1.4.3, Children and Grandchildren of Royal Persons]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual|Clarifications made in field 008/32, 371, 377 and 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link for Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|New example of how to cite a website subpage]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Editing the note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_on_romanization|FAQ on romanization]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Steering Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Standards Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership_2|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Details about the number to be provided in 667 note at Step 2, Record to be deleted]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|LAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Library_and_Archives_Canada|Link for LAC Wiki]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles|Clarification of certain principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.2C_Related_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|32.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#When_a_corporate_body_has_gone_through_a_name_change.2C_or_several_name_changes.2C_and_there_are_authority_records.2C_in_Canadiana.2C_for_the_other_names.2C_which_relationships_should_be_recorded_in_an_authority_record_.28field_5XX.29.3F_In_which_cases_should_cataloguers_revise_the_authority_records_for_those_related_corporate_bodies.3F|Question 7 on related corporate bodies]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|New respondents for some institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Correction of an example in field 008/15]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Maintenance_of_existing_undifferentiated_records:|Important clarification added in field 008/32 regarding existing undifferentiated records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for the term &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; added to field 1XX of the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|Clarification of associated group name changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for FrPBN-coded authority records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#How_do_I_determine_the_usage_for_an_agent_name_in_WMS.3F|Question 8 on the usage of an agent's name]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New document for the romanization of Hebrew]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification added for field 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#General|008/32, General]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information|Clarification for counties in the United States]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#386_Creator.2Fcontributor_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|Details added to field 046]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Details added for an URI included in a 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#PFAN_eligibility_criteria_.5BNew.5D|Eligibility criteria and expectations of new members]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Correction of the PQ numbers for French Canadian literature]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|New instruction for subfields $q and $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#053_LC_classification_number_.5BNew.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#065_Other_Classification_Number_.5BNew.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|Clarification for the second indicator]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Amharic table]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#375_Gender|Do not use this field]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link to &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 on cancelled or hybrid conference]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarifications added for fields 046 and 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/032&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Records_coded_as_undifferentiated_that_actually_represent_only_one_identity|Clarification added for records coded &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; by mistake]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation|New document on the romanization of Yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#043_Geographic_Area_Code_.5BNew.5D|Local Geographic area code]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_of_Promulgation_of_a_Law.2C_Etc._.5BNew.5D|6.29.1.29, Date of Promulgation of a Law, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2C_Name_of_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|11.2, Name of Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information_.5BNEW.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources of information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)#FAQ_on_geographic_names|FAQ on geographic names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation_.5BNew.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name9|008/32]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Two new 667 field examples (for undifferentiated name authority records representing a single identity and those undergoing partial modifications)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|Cross-references (4XX and 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_on_Canadiana_numbers_(field_016)#Who_do_I_contact_if_I_need_a_new_list_of_Canadiana_numbers_for_field_016.3F_.5BNew.5D|Question 4 on obtaining a new list of Canadian numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new terms (Lyrics and Libretto)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Clarifications added for Chinese]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#385_Audience_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications_.5BNEW.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles_.5BNEW.5D|General Principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNEW.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|022]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|024]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|046]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#335_Extension_Plan_.5BNew.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|375]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|384]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|385]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Char|386]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|510]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#530_See_Also_From_Tracing-Uniform_Title|530]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Two new languages (Korean and Japanese)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Add an instruction to 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Project_2._Records_created_and_revised_as_part_of_the_Universities_Mentoring_Project|Clarifications added for the Universities Mentoring Project ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D|Simple 4XX &amp;quot;see&amp;quot; cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Membership of the Steering Committee]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|New article on PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Addition of romanization tables from BnF (Armenian, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Georgian, Macedonian, Russian, Ukrainian]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation|RVM examples are replaced by RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Clarifications added for the instruction on 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions|Clarifications added on point 3 and example 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Correction of an example]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for records derived from LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_records_derived_from_LC.2FNAF|Clarification of the example of a 670 field]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Discussion Lists&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|New PFAN-MUSIQUE-L discussion list.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Added information in different fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Core RDA Elements for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Core_RDA_Elements_for_PFAN|Additional information under Related Corporate Bodies element.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Mandatory MARC Fields for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Mandatory_MARC_Fields_for_PFAN|Added information in 510, 511, 551 fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New introduction.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-03-11''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145133</id>
		<title>PFAN - Name Authority Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145133"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T14:17:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 008/32 Undifferentiated personal name */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by N. Mainville, LAC, )}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Manual}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Name Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Series Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Fixed Fields =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Descriptive cataloging code  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;All new name authority records created and contributed by PFAN catalogers must use code 008/10 “z” and include subfield $e rda in the 040 (Cataloging source) field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an existing NAR using code “a”, “b”, “c”, or “d” is modified in any way, evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA, changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1: If an existing NAR using code “c” is modified only to change or add a 5XX field, catalogers are strongly encouraged, but not required, to evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA,&lt;br /&gt;
changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2: Existing undifferentiated name authority records coded 008/10 “c” may be modified to remove one or more identities in order to create differentiated RDA authority records. When modifying&lt;br /&gt;
an existing undifferentiated name authority record for this purpose, the updated undifferentiated name authority record must retain the existing 008/10 code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F10 Descriptive Cataloging Rules|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Subject heading system/thesaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR 008/11 is set to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/11 value “v” (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/11 value “n” (Not applicable), representing past practice, change the value to “v.” In the Manual, see also 008/15 for instructions on changing that value to “a” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/11&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (Not applicable) to name authority records for corporate names representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point. Also assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; in 008/15, and make a 667 note indicating the form of the access point used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples of corporate names not appropriate for use as subject headings:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F15 Heading use-subject added entry|Manual 008/15]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]].&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created NARs. Make these changes also when modifying&lt;br /&gt;
existing name authority records for any reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F11 Subject Heading System.2FThesaurus|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Heading use-subject added entry ==&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;General&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; is set to &amp;quot;b.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/15 value “a” (Appropriate) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/15 value “b” (Not appropriate), representing past practice, change the value to “a.” In the Manual, see also 008/11 for instructions on changing that value to “v” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Background:'' For Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental&lt;br /&gt;
bodies, Religious officials, and Popes, descriptive catalogers may be required to establish an authorized&lt;br /&gt;
access point for the corporate name for the office as well as a personal name for the office holder. It is&lt;br /&gt;
subject cataloging policy to assign only the personal name, not the corporate name, as a subject access&lt;br /&gt;
point. This policy was established for collocation purposes (cf. [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
may be used in descriptive cataloging as an access point, but in subject cataloging only the personal name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
would be used as a subject access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; (Not appropriate) to name authority records for corporate entities representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the entry. Also assign value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; in 008/11, and make a 667 note indicating the form used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F11 Subject heading system.2Fthesaurus|Manual 008/11]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;NARs and subject usage.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Correct existing records when making any other change to the records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19]&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F15 Heading Use-Subject Added Entry|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Undifferentiated personal name ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== General === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use 008/32 code “b” (undifferentiated) in an RDA name authority record. Assign 008/32 value “a” for personal name NARs. Use code “n” for families, corporate bodies, and places. For works and expressions, assign value “a” if the access point begins with a personal name, otherwise assign value “n”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the past, personal name NARs could be coded as undifferentiated using 008/32 value “b” when the cataloger had no acceptable way of differentiating multiple persons with the same preferred name. Since then, PFAN have followed these guidelines for personal name NARs:&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not create new undifferentiated records coded 008/32 “b”. All personal name authority records coded RDA should be differentiated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not add a new identity to an existing personal name authority record coded 008/32 “b.”&lt;br /&gt;
* Instead, apply [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] to create a unique authorized access point for the person, using suitable additional elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' If the only record found for an entity is an undifferentiated record (with field 008/32 coded &amp;quot;b&amp;quot;) from a university with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN », do not use it.  Create a new authority record for the entity.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated record to LAC by emailing the OCLC control number to pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca with the subject line: Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may happen that an existing undifferentiated name authority record, especially one that has been imported from LC/NAF, contains pairs of 670 fields used to group information about each individual covered by the NAR. The first 670 in the pair is an “identifying” 670 field containing a term descriptive of the person's relationship to the title cited in the second 670 of the pair. The data in the identifying 670 field is contained in subfield $a and enclosed in square brackets. The second 670 in the pair is a “citation” 670 that contains the normal data elements in a resource being cataloged citation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Added entry for Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Editor of Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, an existing undifferentiated name authority record may include a 667 note indicating that the record is undifferentiated and identifying the resource(s) associated with other persons with the same name. In this case, the record generally does not include 670 fields for persons other than the first one identified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When information is found to distinguish a person in an existing undifferentiated from LAC or BAnQ name record:&lt;br /&gt;
* Always create a new name authority record for that person, with distinguishing information, and add an indication that the person was formerly on an undifferentiated record (see &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_notes_on_records_for_identities_previously_on_undifferentiated_records|667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records]]&amp;quot; below). If an authority record already exists for that person with the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer the &amp;quot;citation&amp;quot; 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary. Do not transfer the “identifying” 670 to the new NAR.&lt;br /&gt;
* Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the undifferentiated NAR is not being deleted because multiple identities remain, delete the pair of 670 fields pertaining to the newly created NAR (i.e., in the undifferentiated NAR, delete both the &amp;quot;identifying&amp;quot; 670 and the &amp;quot;citation&amp;quot; 670).&lt;br /&gt;
* If more than one identity remains in the undifferentiated NAR, and there is not sufficient information in the NAR to create new NARs for each name, leave the NAR coded AACR2.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an undifferentiated name authority record from BAnQ is not deleted and needs to be modified at a later date, assign a Canadiana number to it if it does not already have one.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to facilitate machine processing of authority records (e.g., matching, linking), when only one identity is left on an undifferentiated personal name authority record (i.e., other identities are being&lt;br /&gt;
disambiguated and removed), take the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Create a new NAR for the remaining single identity. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ») and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.  The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. In the new record:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer the citation 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 note:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note  « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assure that the undifferentiated NAR only contains information relevant to the single identity remaining (e.g., 670s). If applicable, delete field 667 indicating that the record is undifferentiated.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add that information in the 667 note on the undifferentiated record to assure that a duplicate NAR will not be created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of differentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated LAC record''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New notice for the author of Histoire du département de la Manche:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation. Remained identify is for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number] $z [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of undifferentiated record derived from LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Esperanza:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the illustrator of Reptiles:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the illustrator of Reptiles :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008red/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example of an undifferentiated BAnQ record''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a [No Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;New notice for Christian Bergeron (Sociologue) :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1056D8391F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian $c (Sociologue)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : 1063E5020F.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'individualisation des épreuves de la vie dans la modernité avancée, 2013 : $b page de titre (Christian Bergeron; Doctorat en sociologie; Université Laval [département déterminé selon la discipline])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 $b (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation. There are two undifferentiated identities remaining in the entry:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1063E5020F [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add a 667 note to a new NAR to identify the Canadiana number of the authority record in which information about that person had been recorded:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Records coded as undifferentiated that actually represent only one identity ====&lt;br /&gt;
Occasionally an existing record will be coded undifferentiated, but new research indicates that in fact the record represents only one identity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may also happen that we suspect that the value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; has been mistakenly coded in field 008/32. In such cases, proceed as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 field to the undifferentiated NAR indicating that it has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a new name authority record for the identity. The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 note: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number..)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the note 667 &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated record that represents a single identity''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation  :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;New authority record after disambiguation&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [no Canadiana number, use OCLC number from undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-13]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F32 Undifferentiated personal name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/33 Level of establishment  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Provisional''' (008/33 value “c”) records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Code an NAR as provisional (008/33 value “c”) if the authorized access point cannot be formulated satisfactorily because of inadequate information. If the necessary information later becomes available, re-evaluate the NAR and upgrade it to fully established (008/33 value “a”). In no case should a provisional-level authority record be created with an access point that conflicts with an existing NAR according to PFAN normalization rules.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Special administrative regions of Hong Kong and Macau'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Because there is uncertainty about whether Hong Kong and Macau will continue to have two official languages, code all NARs for government bodies in these two places, at the level of the special administrative region and below, as provisional (008/33 value “c”), regardless of the language in which the authorized access point has been established. If a form in the second of the two official languages becomes available, add that form as a variant access point rather than revising the existing authorized access point. Consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] and the [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html related policy statement] for instructions on choosing the language of the referred name. Please note that this policy for provisional status does not apply to non-government bodies.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional information for PFAN participants'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN participants may also create provisional records in the following two exceptional situations:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library does not have the language expertise to establish the authorized access point as a fully established authority record; this would include situations where the library lacked adequate reference sources for research or where the cataloger was not confident of the correct grammatical form for the access point.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library is unable, due to limited resources or other constraints, to complete related authority work or to determine the appropriate reference structure that is required for fully established authority records.&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preliminary''' (008/33 value “d”) records:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Preliminary authority records (008/33 value “d”) generally are the result of retrospective projects. PFAN catalogers are expected to routinely upgrade NARs coded preliminary when making other modifications to the record. Because of this maintenance requirement, PFAN participants are asked to contact the PFAN Standards Committee before embarking on projects that may result in large numbers of NARs coded preliminary being added to the NACO Authority File.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;As needed, catalogers may upgrade NARs coded preliminary when working with earlier/later corporate body records, even if the access points in the records being upgraded are not used in the local bibliographic database. Occasionally catalogers may need to create a new NAR without having an item in hand, e.g., for an earlier or later name heading using information from reference sources, or a heading based on information found in field 245 subfield “c” of bibliographic records when resolving NAR conflicts. Do not code these occasional NARs as “preliminary”.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records&lt;br /&gt;
are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, series data elements should be viewed on the publication and series authority records should be coded “a” (full). In post-cataloging authority work it is permissible to create SARs without the piece in hand; these records are coded “d” (preliminary). When a publication in the series has been examined and the preliminary authority record reviewed and updated as necessary, upgrade the SAR to full level.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F33_Level_of_establishment|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Cataloging source ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever value is originally input into this field remains; do not change this value when updating a record unless the original value was incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas « blanc » pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou « c » (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a). --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F39_Cataloging_source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 National Bibliographic Agency Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 016 is mandatory whenever a cataloguer creates, updates or uses an authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an authority record, and when updating or using an existing record without a Canadiana number in field 016, first check the LC/NAF to see if the same entity is represented by an authority record, and if this authority record includes a Canadiana number. Note that the authorized access point, in the LC/NAF, may be different from the Canadiana access point.  If the LC/NAF record does include a Canadiana number, add this number to the Canadiana record, changing the final E to an F (or adding an F at the end of the Canadiana number, if there is no final letter). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When updating or using an existing authority record that includes a Canadiana number, please check that the language code F is present at the end of the field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Duplicates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not “reuse” a Canadiana number. Once an authority record has been created for a given entity, and once a Canadiana number has been attributed, do not change the data in this authority record to describe a DIFFERENT entity. For instance, do not change the authority record for “Dupont, Jean” to transform it into an authority record describing “Tremblay, Marie” (except if the person's name has changed). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, ask that the duplicate be deleted (see [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Procedures for duplicates]]). DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no field 016 in the record to be deleted, please add one, using the number 0000X0000F. Do not record this number in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
See also the “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Duplicates|Duplicates]]” section in this Manual, field 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, delete it. DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Partially modified batch-loaded authority records'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Batch-loaded authority records which are partially modified, according to the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]], will include Canadiana number 1111X1111F. This temporary number is added in order to allow the cataloguer to save the record, until such time as the entire record is evaluated to make sure it follows all PFAN standards. This number will have to be replaced by a unique number once the record is evaluated, when the 667 note “CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN” is deleted. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 International Standard Serial Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Record the ISSN whenever it is available from the item in hand, from analytic bibliographic records, or from the collected set bibliographic record for the series; otherwise, recording the ISSN is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it is known there are separate ISSN assigned to different formats of a series represented by a single SAR, prefer to record in 022 subfield $a the ISSN that is the linking ISSN (ISSN-L) for the different formats. Identify ISSN for specific formats in separate 667 fields, following this pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the title of a publication has changed, confirm that an ISSN appearing on the publication belongs to the new title and not to the earlier title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An incorrect ISSN can be given in a 667 field (e.g., “ISSN 1122-3344 is not a valid ISSN for this publication”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-11-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Other standard identifier =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the guidelines in [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf NACO Best Practices] for the 024 Field. As a general rule, limit the number of 024 fields in a NACO authority record to five. Do not routinely delete or change existing 024 fields when adding new ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are not required to maintain identifiers coded in the 024 field of PFAN authority records. When an 024 field is present in an authority record that is being reported for deletion (for example, in the case of a duplicate), catalogers should transfer the field to the record that is to be retained. When two authority records are being collapsed into one, and each record has a different 024 field, catalogers should include both 024 fields in the updated record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Coded cartographic mathematical data =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for countries, states, counties'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for outside limits (bounding boxes or polygons) should generally be used with larger geographic entities such as countries, states, and counties to identify the coordinates of the entity. The&lt;br /&gt;
coordinates may be recorded in either degrees/minutes/seconds, decimal degrees, decimal minutes, and/or decimal seconds. Styles should not be mixed in a single 034 field, but the field may be repeated to&lt;br /&gt;
represent the different styles (see below for conversion utilities); the order of 034 fields when both styles are given does not matter. To facilitate the reuse of coordinates in geographic applications, the point (not the comma) should be used as the decimal point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrees/minutes/seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees''': record in the form hddd.dddddd (hemisphere-degrees.decimal degrees)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees with plus ou minus''': record in the form +-ddd.dddddd (hemisphere[+/-]-degrees.decimal degrees) (“+” or N and E, “-” for S and W ; the plus sign is optional)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example with +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example without the optional plus sign)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal minutes''': record in the form hdddmm.mmmm (hemisphere-degrees-minutes.decimal minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss.sss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds.decimal seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for cities, towns, and townships'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for cities, towns, and townships should generally be recorded as center points rather than outside limits. For the 034 field, the longitude and latitude that form the central axis are recorded&lt;br /&gt;
twice to define the center point (i.e., the contents of $d and $e are identical, the contents of $f and $g are identical).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing degrees/minutes/seconds)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees with plus/minus)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Coordinate Conversion Tools'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN institutions are encouraged to provide both degrees/minutes/seconds and decimal degrees when available. Numerous conversion tools are available on the Web to derive one from the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 has been defined for recording the source of the coordinate information– codes for commonly used sources are available from: [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/cartographic-data.html ''Cartographic Data Source Codes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 citation to the source would not be required if the only information from the source is recorded in field 034; a 670 citation should be made if necessary to record information beyond coordinates, such as variant names, hierarchy, time period of applicability, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#034_Coded_Carographic_Mathematical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 System Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#035_System_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Cataloging source =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Language of cataloging'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $b fre added automatically by WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $d – Modifying agency'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $d [MARC 21 code] is added automatically by WMS when modifying NARs or SARs unless your institution's is already the last MARC subfield $d in the 040 field. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $e – Description conventions'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All new authority records created and submitted by PFAN cataloguers must have the code &amp;quot;z&amp;quot; in Field 008/10 and include the $e rda subfield in Field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding the subfield $e manually, add it after subfield $b and before $c. It is not necessary to move the subfield $e to this position if it is already present elsewhere in the 040 or if it is being added by a macro or a template. Subfield $e rda is automatically added by the system in NARs and SARs when fixed field 008/10 (Rules) is set to “z” (Other).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#040_Cataloging_Source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Authentication Code =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This field is found in all authority records used by LAC. Do not modify or delete this field when code CaOONL appears in field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers (other than LAC cataloguers) derive an authority record from an LAC record which includes field 042, they must remember to delete this field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the Canadiana authority file, cataloguers must add 042 $a nlc every time they create, derive or revise an authority record. This code identifies the “virtual” Canadian authority file, which is spread across two separate authority files (LC/NAF and Canadiana). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#042_Authentication_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Geographic Area Code &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 043 can only be used in authority records for geographical names (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield b – Local GAC code and Subfield $2 – Source of local code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For sites located in Quebec, PFAN participants can use subfield $b to record a local code from the list below, representing the administrative region of Quebec where the site is located. This code is formed by the geographic region code &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; and a two-letter sub-entity local code (e.g., qa) that identifies the administrative region and replaces the last two characters of the &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; code (e.g., &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot;). (e.g. &amp;quot;n-cn-qa&amp;quot;). Subfield $b is recorded after subfield $a and is followed by subfield $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#043_Geographic_Area_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Special coded dates =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: When encoding date information, give the fullest information about the date that is readily available (the date in field 046 may be more precise than a date used in the 100 subfield $d). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2nd_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;When&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; revising existing authority records, record dates in field 046 even if the heading itself does not have dates in 100 subfield $d, when the information is readily available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording dates in field 046, use the Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) schema in all cases except for centuries; supply dates using the pattern yyyy, yyyy-mm, or yyyy-mm-dd. See date table in [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html LAC-BanQ PS 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt; For the full EDTF specification, see [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophonist)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bryant, W. Blues around the clock [SR] 1945: $b label (Johnny Hicks, tenor sax)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Discogs website, May 27, 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; tenor sax player who performed with Tab Smith in the 1940s)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording B.C. dates in the 046 field, precede the digits by a hyphen (minus sign). Because there is no year “zero” in the common era calendar, subtract one year from the actual B.C. date, e.g., the year 50 B.C. is recorded -0049.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a century in the 046 field, use the first two digits of the hundred year span (e.g., use “16” to represent the 17th century, 1600–1699). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the 1st century A.D. is represented by value “00” and B.C. centuries have a hyphen &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;minus &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sign)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; before the digits (e.g., “-04” for the 5th century B.C.). An approximate century (e.g., active approximately 12th century) cannot be recorded in the 046 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Repeatability:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Field 046 is repeatable, but the 046 subfields used to record the dates are not repeatable. Generally, one 046 field with dates conforming to the EDTF schema should be sufficient. However, century dates follow the ISO 8601 standard, not EDTF. When recording century dates in addition to more precise dates, it is therefore necessary to repeat the 046 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Conflicting dates'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, resources consulted may present conflicting dates (e.g., conflicting birth or death dates for a person, or start or end dates for a corporate body). In these situations, the 046 field should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information. It is not necessary to record all the conflicting dates using field 046, nor is it necessary to give a 046 field for each resource consulted. Evaluation of the conflicting dates should generally result in a single 046 field, containing the date(s) the cataloger judges to be most accurate in representing the entity. At the cataloger's discretion, the date(s) recorded in that 046 field may incorporate the conflicting date information and need not correspond exactly to the date(s) selected for the authorized access point.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Similarly, any dates added to the authorized access point should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information, recorded in conformance with the instructions in RDA and the PFAN Policy Statements. If one date predominates in the resources consulted, that date may be considered the most appropriate to use in the authorized access point. If a single date does not predominate, the cataloger may decide to use the “approximately yyyy”, “yyyy?”, or “yyyy or yyyy” format in the authorized access point. In some cases, dates corresponding to the period of activity of the person (RDA 9.19.1.5) may be considered the best choice.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 157 B.C. as the approximate date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary. authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 1907 as the date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Same example as above, reflecting a different decision the cataloger might have made for recording 046 subfield $f)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Because the 046 field will be based on information from multiple sources, justification cannot be accurately expressed in subfield $v/$u at the end of the 046 field. The conflicting dates should be recorded in 670 fields. If an existing record has subfield $v/$u as 046 field justification, and the 046 field is being updated as described above, the subfield $v/$u should be removed, and the justification converted to a 670 field, if the conflicting dates are not already justified in an existing 670 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Uncertain dates resulting from date calculations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, a calculation may be required to determine which dates to record in the 046 field and the authorized access point. Such calculations may result in uncertain dates.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the consulted resources provide only the person's date of death and their age (in years) at the time of death, as often happens with obituaries, their year of birth will correspond to one of two consecutive years. To calculate those years, first subtract the age from the year of death, then use the resulting year plus its preceding year as the two alternatives for the year of birth.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger subtracted 75, the age at death, from 1994, the year of death; the resulting year, 1919, and the year preceding it, 1918, represent the two possible alternatives for the year of birth)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If non-Gregorian dates are found in consulted resources, uncertain dates may result from calendar conversion differences. Gregorian calendar dates are used in the 046 field and authorized access point. A single date in a non-Gregorian calendar may correspond to one of two Gregorian dates. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(The Hijri calendar date 1346 H converts to either 1967 or 1968 in the Gregorian calendar.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of date scheme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add subfield $2 edtf except after a century. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfields $q – Establishment date, $r – Termination date,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Start period, and $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Record dates associated with a one-time conference, etc., or a single instance of a&lt;br /&gt;
series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] and [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), use subfields $s and $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Use the establishment date  ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) and the termination date ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) of a series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]) in subfields $q and $r, if that information is known.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on using $s and $t for start and end periods in fields 368, and 370-376, see the instructions provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following represents PFAN practice on recording sources of information in $u and $v in fields where they are defined, and/or in field 670: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;670s must be used to support information used as part of a heading in 1XX and 4XX fields.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;For fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $v is optional if the same information/source is already cited in the 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use $v if the information/source is not cited in a 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $u is optional, and should always be preceded by $v&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Use a 670 field if needed to justify information recorded in other fields for which subfields $u and/or $v are not defined or defined differently. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the same basic citation principles when recording data in subfield $v (Source of information) of fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 that currently apply to field 670 subfield $a (Source citation).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Supply specific citation information (page number, sub-page of website) in subfield $v if, in the cataloger's judgment, this greater specificity is needed to find the information within the source cited. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information in fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 is in the same form as found in the source, there is no need to cite usage information. If the information recorded in those fields is in a different form from that in the source, use 670 $b (Information found). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For tangibles sources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information was derived from a tangible source (e.g., a print book, removable digital media) subfield $v should contain sufficient information for a cataloger to find the item cited in a catalog&lt;br /&gt;
or bibliographic database. This can usually be limited to title proper and imprint or date. If that combination is not unique, the title citation may be preceded by the creator's name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For online resources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide information sufficient to find the resource via a search engine. Include either title and publication date (if it is a formally-published resource, such as an e-book) or a suitable description of the&lt;br /&gt;
document and date accessed (for a less formal resource). Optionally include subfield $u. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-03)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Library of Congress Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#050_Library_of_Congress_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 LC classification number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used in personal name authority records to record LC classification numbers for individual literary authors, including authors of children's literature. It may also be used '''exceptionally'' in personal and corporate name authority records to record biography numbers in the ML410-429 range of the LC classification when the choice of index or cutter is not obvious. Field 053 must always include a $5 subfield.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class PS8000 numbers should not be recorded in field 053. For the use of PS8000 numbers in name authority records, see section 065 of this Manual. An authority record for a Canadian literary author may contain both a 053 and a 065 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Library and Archives Canada Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#055_Library_and_Archives_Canada_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Other Classification Number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 065 is used to record PS8000 class numbers. Field 065 must always include a subfield $2 and a subfield $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [MARC code of institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Number source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2, record &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; to indicate that the number comes from the PS8000 class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#065_Other_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 080 Universal Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#080_Universal_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Dewey Decimal Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#082_Dewey_Decimal_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Dewey Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#083_Dewey_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Government Document Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#086_Government_Document_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Government Document Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#087_Government_Document_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Headings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for any reason, delete a final mark of punctuation in the 1XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging&lt;br /&gt;
instructions (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: in order to minimize the impact of database maintenance with associated bibliographic records and/or related authority records, catalogers are urged to refrain from making unnecessary changes to 1XXs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN series practice: Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the title proper of a multipart monograph, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choosing a monographic series title proper:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has more than one form of series title, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has the series title in more than one language or script on the same source, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has series title pages in more than one language and or script, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#Consider spacing and changes in typography when determining where the series title begins and ends. Also consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Establishing an SAR access point:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Determine choice of authorized access point based on [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] and its associated LAC-BAnQ PS.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclude from the authorized access point the following information included in the series statement in the bibliographic record for the component part:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;initial article in subfields $a, $t, $n, and $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;other title information;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;statement of responsibility;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;parallel title(s);&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;numeric/chronological designations.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a parenthetical qualifier(s) if appropriate according to the guidelines in LAC-BAnQ PS 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on converting an existing NAR to an SAR, see Should an SAR be made? in the Introduction of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Heading - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for families'''&lt;br /&gt;
'''''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “3” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a family. See in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_Nonpublic_general_note|667]] section, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]], for subject usage instructions in NARs for families.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Additions to the name are contained in a single set of parentheses separated by colons.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# The term for the type of family is added after the name and is contained in subfield $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $d (date) follows the term for the type of family.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $c is used for place associated with family and follows the date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $g is used for prominent member of family. Give authorized access point for the person as found in the 1XX of the NAR without any internal subfield coding.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for persons'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “0” or “1” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] provides guidance for the placement of words indicating relationship (e.g., Jr.) and MARC defines subfield $q as “Forme développée du nom de personne.” When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Subfield $d (date) should always be the last element in a 100 string unless the term (Esprit) is being added to the name. Add $c (Esprit) as the last element in a 100 string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Example:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Generally add subfield $c before subfield $q when also adding words, numerals, etc. indicating relationship. (See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] for treatment of Portuguese names)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) For exceptional situations, such as when subfield $a contains only a surname or only a forename or the name includes a prefix, etc. consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2020-12-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#100_Heading-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Content Type =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 336 may only be used in NARs and SARs for expressions. 336 is always accompanied by a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2 give “rdacontent/fre.” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Content type term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use terms from [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html/view RDA 6.9.1.3]. The list of terms is also available in the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Content type code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If giving subfield $b instead of/or in addition to subfield $a, use the code from the MARC format [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#336_Content_Type|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Other attributes of person or corporate body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary for terms in subfields $a, $b, and $c, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a, $b and $c. When terms in subfields $a and $b do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record professions or occupations in subfield $c (Other designation). Profession or occupation may be recorded in field [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#374_Occupation|374]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record titles of royalty, nobility or religious rank ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) in subfield $d in the form used in the authorized or variant access points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#368_Other_Attributes_of_Person_or_Corporate_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Associated place =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For jurisdictions or other place names with authority records in Canadiana or, failing that, the form found in the RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. The form of place name in the 370 field may differ from the form of place name added to a preferred name of place or an access point per RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Authorized access point for the place includes type of jurisdiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name for the larger place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Other place name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no authorized access point for the place in Canadiana or RVM, it is not necessary to create an NAR in order to code the 370 field. Record the place in the 370 field following RDA and the LAC-BAnQ PSs, including consulting appropriate sources and adding additional elements (e.g., type of jurisdiction) to break conflicts. Do not add a subfield $2 if no NAR is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of the associated place has changed, the name of the place that applied in the time of the entity being established in the 1XX may optionally be recorded in place of, or in addition to, the current form of name. It is not necessary to follow subject cataloging policies to use the latest form of name only.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person born in the city of Calcutta before its name changed to Kolkata; cataloger has chosen to record the form of name that applied at the time the person was born)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person residing in the city of Milan during the Renaissance, prior to the formation of the modern country of Italy; cataloger has chosen to record the current form of name for the country)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For non-jurisdictions, prefer names from an authorized vocabulary such as RVM and identify the source in subfield $2. If the name is not found in an authorized vocabulary, record it in field 370 without&lt;br /&gt;
giving a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
When determining when to create a name authority record for a geographic name, consult the “Name Authority Records (NARs)” section of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1], Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary&lt;br /&gt;
source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfield $c – Associated country&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Generally, do not use subfield $c to record places that are not sovereign entities. Such places may be recorded in subfield $f or other subfields as appropriate.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Martinique is an overseas department of France)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if a sovereign entity has (or previously had) one or more constituent countries, any of the constituent countries associated with the 1XX may optionally be recorded in subfield $c in addition to, or instead of, the larger sovereign entity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Great Britain who has strong ties to Wales; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with the Soviet Union, particularly the Kirghiz Soviet Socialist Republic; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Aruba, a constituent country of the Netherlands; cataloger has chosen not to record the Netherlands)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with India prior to its independence from Great Britain; cataloger has chosen not to record Great Britain)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entity names of First Nations in Canada and Indian tribes recognized by the United States government as legal entities may be included in subfield $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Record the place of origin of the work in field 370, unless it is merely a place of publication or other place associated with a manifestation (use field 643, when appropriate, for the latter). Although the “place of origin” of a serial work may be the same as the place of publication of the component part for which the SAR (or serial bibliographic record) was created, use judgment in distinguishing between place of origin of the work and a place of publication not actually related to the work itself.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-24]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-22)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#370_Associated_Place|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Address =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice:&lt;br /&gt;
* Supply based on cataloger's judgment, if the information is readily available and not already being recorded in field 370 subfield $e (Place of residence/headquarters).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* In cases where subfield $a is not recorded, include at a minimum subfield $m (Electronic mail address) or subfield $b (City).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not record physical &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or e-mail&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; addresses for living persons.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Catalogers are not required to maintain address information when updating a record that contains an address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record multiple addresses, with or without ranges of dates, in separate occurrences of field 371.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Electronic mail address'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $m should contain only an e-mail address. Do not add an internet address for the 1XX in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#371_Address|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Field of activity =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM heading string for field of activity, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an entity from Canadiana for field of activity, remove any subfield coding not authorized for use in the 372 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point in Canadiana:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Field of activity in 372:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall&lt;br /&gt;
best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''372 fields with a term from RVM and a non-controlled vocabulary term'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#372_Field_of_Activity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Associated group =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the Canadiana or LC/NACO Authority File, recording the source in subfield $2. Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 373 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of an associated group has changed, record the group name(s) that applied at the time of the entity being established in the 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with subfield $2 and dates:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with different vocabulary sources:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Although the MARC format does not specify a form of date in these subfields, the following practice is recommended for consistency. Input dates using the Gregorian calendar in the form yyyy. If more specific dates are necessary, consider recording them in another field (e.g., 670, 678). It is&lt;br /&gt;
not necessary to reformulate dates in existing NARs to conform to this practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&amp;lt;!--(2023-06-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#373_Associated_Group|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Occupation =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.16.1.3 for instructions on recording profession or occupation as an element. See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.19.1.6 for instructions using a profession or occupation term in an access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Codes from either the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/occupation.html/view Occupation Term Source Codes] or the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/subject.html/view Subject Source Codes] lists may be recorded in subfield $2 for the 374 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#374_Occupation|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Gender =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not use this field in new authority records. Whenever an existing record must be changed for any reason, delete any occurrence of field 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Family information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Name of prominent member'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When giving the name of the prominent member of the family in 376 subfield $b, give the form for the person as found in subfield $g of the 100 field of the NAR for the family. Do not include any internal subfield coding in subfield $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start''' period and Subfield $t – End period&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Associated language =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer language codes over language terms, using codes from the Code List for Languages in MARC21.  Use subfield $l (Language term) only to provide information not available in the [https://loc.gov/marc/languages/language_code.html MARC Code List for Languages]. Encode multiple languages for a person or corporate body only if more than one language is used for publication, communication, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Optionally, record an ISO 639-3 language code (or codes) in an additional 377 field. This practice is especially recommended when an ISO 639-3 code will identify a language more specifically than the MARC code does. For more information, see the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of the code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 is not required when the MARC Code List for Languages is used as the language source code (second indicator value “#”). PFAN institutions may supply an additional 377 field from another language code list by using second indicator value “7,” with subfield $2 containing a code for a language source list taken from the list in [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/language.html/view Language Code and Term Source Codes]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(ISO 639-3 code for Achi (acr); assigned a collective code (myn) for Mayan languages in the MARC Code List for Languages)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#377_Associated_Language|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Fuller form of personal name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode the fuller form of name in the 378 field when this information is readily available, even if the same information is already present in the 100 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the Information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#378_Fuller_Form_of_Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Form of work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMGF, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on recording form of work as an element in a work-level series authority record, see LAC-BAnQ PS 6.3.1.3.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#380_Form_of_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Other distinguishing characteristics of work or expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used to record the RDA elements other distinguishing characteristic of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) and other distinguishing characteristic of expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Other characteristics of expressions that are unique to musical works (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4-6.18.1.6]) may also be recorded in the 381 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Franklin number recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Other distinguishing characteristic of expression of musical work'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some terms recorded for other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression may be appropriate to record in field 381 and another MARC field for which there is no corresponding RDA element. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a corporate body (such as a publisher) used as an other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression could be recorded in either the 373 field (associated group), the 381 field or both.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 381 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as associated group and other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA has no specific element for places associated with expressions, but field 370 subfield $f (Other associated place) and subfield $g (Place of origin of work or expression) may be used in authority records for expressions. Some places associated with works or expressions would be considered other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression in RDA and could be recorded in the 370 field, the 381 field, or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Places used as other distinguishing characteristic of a legal work; recorded in 370 and 381 fields)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the RDA element place of origin of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.6]) in a 370 field (see Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]] section).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When other distinguishing characteristic of work or other distinguishing characteristic of expression has been used in an authorized access point and is also being recorded as an element in a 3XX&lt;br /&gt;
field, use the 381 field to record the other distinguishing characteristic. Optionally, also record the same information in any other appropriate 3XX field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#381_Other_Distinguishing_Characteristics_of_Work_or_Expression|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 Medium of performance =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the medium of performance using thesaurus terms from &amp;quot;Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM (RVMMEM)&amp;quot;. Record the medium of performance by applying the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html RDA 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6], the associated LAC-BAnQ PSs. ''Note:'' The 382 field may also be used in authority records for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. If considered important for identification and access, provide an additional 382 that does not apply these guidelines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#382_Medium_of_Performance|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numeric designation of musical work &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available. Create separate 383 fields for different numbering schemes associated with a single work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#383_Numeric_Designation_of_Musical_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Key =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available for works. In case of doubt, do not encode. Do not encode for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Audience characteristics =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the intended audience of a work or expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. In particular, consult instruction sheet L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ##  $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvmt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a: If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term and term from a controlled vocabulary)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''or''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-10-14]&amp;lt;!--(2022-10-14)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Creator/contributor characteristics &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record demographic characteristics of one or more creators or contributors associated with a work or expression, in particular for characteristics common to a group of creators or contributors associated with a work or expression. The field will most commonly be used in authority records for collection aggregates embodying two or more expressions of two or more independent works by different agents, and for individual works named by title alone (e.g., works of unknown authorship; monographic series).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the draft Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html].  In particular, consult instruction sheet L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator and Contributor Characteristics, available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled demographic term)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While this field will be used primarily for aggregated works and for individual works named by title alone, there are situations when it will be appropriate for an individual work by one or more named creators. For example, for a musical work composed during childhood or adolescence, it would not be appropriate to record “Enfants” or “Adolescents” as a characteristic in the composer’s authority record. Instead, demographic characteristics applicable to only some of a creator’s works should be recorded in the authority records for those works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Work composed 2003-2005, completed when the composer was 14 years old)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014 $b page 4 de la couverture (Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled term and terms from one controlled vocabulary)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $i – Relationship information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, use subfield $i to record a term designating the nature of the relationship between the demographic groups recorded in the field and the work or expression. Prefer a term from a controlled vocabulary, such as the MARC relator terms, RDA relationship designators, or RBMS relationship designators. Capitalize the first letter of the relationship term and record it in the singular. Follow the relationship term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998- February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record multiple subfield $i’s in a single 386 field. If multiple relationship terms apply to a single group of creators or contributors (e.g., a work with authors and artists from the same demographic group or an expression with editors and translators from the same demographic group), repeat the field, using different relationship terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(A compilation of works by authors and artists from Massachusetts)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different relationship terms apply to some of the creators and contributors (e.g., authors are in one demographic group and artists are in another), repeat the field, using different relationship terms. If the same relationship term applies to more than one demographic group, either repeat subfield $a in one field, or repeat the field. For clarity, when in doubt, repeat the 386 field as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Score containing works by Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler, and Strauss, with lyrics also printed as text in German and English translation)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-11]&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Time Period of Creation =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the time period of creation or origin of a work or expression. The name of the time period may specify or imply a place for which the time period is relevant. It may also specify the name of an event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMFAST, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM subject heading string, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For compilations, the field may be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the works/expressions contained within the compilation, considered collectively (using first indicator value “1”). It may also be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the compilation itself (using first indicator value “2”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR for a collection of Renaissance poetry compiled in the nineteenth century)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 388 field may be used in conjunction with, or instead of, the 046 field. When specific date(s) of creation or origin are not known, or span a long period of time, recording textual chronological terms in the 388 field may be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the indicator value differs, repeat the field. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR with 388 fields containing terms from different vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-07] &amp;lt;!--(2022-11-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX - See From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for another reason, delete any final mark of punctuation in a 4XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging rules (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying NARs or SARs that contain obsolete codes such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all 4XX references require justification; see “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Justifying_variant_access_points|Justifying variant access points]]” in the 670 section of this document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not make a 4XX that normalizes to the same form as another 4XX on the same authority record or a 1XX on any name authority record. See the section “NACO normalization” in the [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf/view DCM Z1] Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice guidelines for RDA:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Record variants found in the manifestation being cataloged:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Use cataloger's judgment;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; No limitation on the number or form of references;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Instead of or in addition to adding variants, consider providing access by adding 37X fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Example showing 378 without a variant for the fuller form of name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Establish additional NARs for the authorized access points needed to support elements used in 4XX variant access points (e.g., parent body associated with subordinate body being established).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally provide a variant form 4XX access point for a former 1XX authorized access point, unless the former authorized access point was egregiously incorrect. See the section “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX$w|Subfield $w – Control subfield]]” for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Use the established form of components in 4XX variant access points, except for non-Latin script variants, which may represent a mixture of scripts or may be entirely in a non-Latin script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally, do not remove variants unless egregiously incorrect (e.g., a non-Latin script variant that does not represent the same person).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If a form found on the manifestation being cataloged includes a variant form of a component of a 4XX variant access point, that form may be used in its entirety as an additional 4XX variant access point, provided that it is not divided into its component parts through the use of subfields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When changing the form of a superordinate body, a geographic name, or a personal name in a 1XX, update all of the existing NARs that use that component in a 4XX, unless the 4XX represents the former authorized access point (e.g., $w/2=e). ''Exception:'' Do not apply this instruction in the case of migrated authority records that have not been re-evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point for a person (100) is changed because the person has changed his or her name, record the earlier form of name in a 400 with $w nne if the variant is valid under RDA instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Name changed upon election as pope)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When an authorized access point for a person (100) is updated to close the date, it is recommended to save the former form with the open date in a 4XX field with $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) based on CIP cataloging is changed because its form on the published resource is different from that on the CIP galley, a 4XX from the previous authorized access point form with subfield $w nne may be added unless the former 1XX form was egregiously incorrect (e.g., the author's date of birth was given as 1775 instead of 1975 in the CIP galley).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) is changed because of a change in cataloging instructions, record the earlier form in a 4XX using $w. If the variant form is a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nne. If the variant form is not a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA; 100 form changed based on usage and dates of birth and death added because 100 was being changed)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429  av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nnea&amp;quot; because the abbreviation &amp;quot;ca.&amp;quot; is not valid for period of activity in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When changing an authorized access point because dates were recorded inaccurately or a cataloger entered a typo in the authorized access point, do not add the inaccurate form as a cross reference.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, providing authorized access points for the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Variant access points may be recorded in any SAR, including those for series-like phrases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the volumes of a multipart monograph have different forms of the common title, use a 4XX reference rather than a 5XX reference for the form of the title not chosen as the title proper of the multipart monograph.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27] &amp;lt;!--(2024-03-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D |''Manual 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX - See Also From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying a NAR that contain codes that are no longer used such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d” or “f,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers applying RDA instructions may use subfield $i in conjunction with subfield $w code “r” for relationship designators. When applying RDA relationship designators in 5XXs, supply terms from Appendix I, J or K; capitalize the initial letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the use of relationship designators and/or $w codes in a specific 5XX field, see the section in this Manual for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the conventions in the authority format for use of subfield $w. Do not supply subfield $w unless a value other than “n” would be appropriate in one of the positions. When supplying subfield $w,&lt;br /&gt;
give it as the first subfield in the field. Supply character positions preceding, but not succeeding, the value, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = to indicate a reference from an earlier authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = to indicate a reference from a later authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = to indicate that a subfield $i or subfield $4 is used to denote relationship information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = to indicate a see also reference for multiple pseudonyms (record also contains a 663 field)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A see also reference tracing (5XX) must not normalize to the same as another see also reference in the same authority record, unless both 5XX fields contain a relationship designator in subfield $i, and&lt;br /&gt;
the texts of the relationship designators are different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500  See Also From Tracing - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” when providing relationship links between a personal name and 1) the name of another person, family, or corporate body or 2) the authorized access point for a work or expression. This technique may also be used to relate authorized access points for works and expressions containing personal names. When using a term from Appendix I, J or K in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording pseudonymous relationships for personal names when only two authority records are involved, catalogers may either 1) use subfield $i and code “r” in subfield $w or 2) use simple see-also references. For more information on these techniques and instructions on recording multiple pseudonyms (i.e., those involving a 663 field), see the [http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/pseud.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA Practice for Creating NARs for Persons Who Use Pseudonyms]. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are reminded that when a variant name (400) and an authorized access point (100) are in conflict an addition should be made to either the 400 or 100 to resolve the conflict (e.g., fuller form of name, date of activity, etc.); the previous practice of changing the 400 to a 500 to resolve the conflict is no longer an option. When catalogers encounter a variant form in a 500 field in the course of updating a NAR, they should resolve the conflict and change the field to a 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510  See Also From Tracing - Corporate Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511  See Also From Tracing - Meeting Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html BAC-BAnQ PS 11.13.1.8] for guidance on relating authority records for ongoing conferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530  See Also From Tracing - Uniform Title =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded &amp;quot;r&amp;quot; when providing relationship links between authorized access points for works or expressions. When supplying RDA Appendix J terms in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551  See Also From Tracing - Geographic Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” until relationship designators for places are developed. (Currently RDA has a placeholder for Appendix L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Series Numbering Peculiarities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#641_Series_Numbering_Peculiarities|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Series Numbering Example =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#642_Series_Numbering_Example|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Series Place and Publisher/Issuing Body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#643_Series_Place_and_Publisher.2FIssuing_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Series Analysis Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#644_Series_Analysis_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Series Tracing Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#645_Series_Tracing_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Series Classification Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#646_Series_Classification_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Complex See Also Reference - Name =&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 663 field contains the explanatory text and authorized access points for relationships between a 100 (established name) and other 100s (established names) that cannot be adequately conveyed by one or more simple see also references generated from 500 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, this situation occurs when a person uses more than two identities, when more than one person shares an identity with one or more others, or when multiple persons use the same pseudonym independent of each other or as a result of some other arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text of the 663 may be adjusted to fit extraordinary situations; however, keep the text as simple as possible, allowing the MARC fields and coding to convey the information desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use the 663 technique to show relationships between corporate bodies or between persons and corporate bodies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is found in the [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA and AACR2 practice for creating NARs for persons who use pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Only two identities ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When only two NARs are created for a person, the NARs are generally connected with 500 see also references and no 663 field. However, when one of the NARs is for a joint pseudonym or a pseudonym used by several persons working independently of each other, the 663 technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== More than two identities - &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; authorized access point and references ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more than two authorized access points are created for the same person, identify a “basic” authorized access point using the 663 field technique. This decision is based on the desire to simplify the reference structure and to assist catalogers in determining which name to use as the subject of biographical or critical works. The “basic” authorized access point should be determined by the predominantly used form of name or, lacking sufficient evidence, by choosing the real name of the person as the “basic” form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the authority record for the “basic” name authority record add 500 see also references with a subfield w coded “nnnc” from all other names used. Justify the 500 in 670 citations according to normal practice. Provide a 663 field listing all the other names with the following text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name] $b [established form of&lt;br /&gt;
name]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On each of the other name authority records, trace a 500 see also reference with subfield $w coded “nnnc” from the “basic” name, justifying that reference in a 670 citation, according to normal practice. Other names may be mentioned in the 670 if it is convenient to do so. Provide a 663 field with the following or similar text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name chosen as the basic heading]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the author uses another new name, create a new name authority record for that name and also add it to the reference structure and 663 listing on the authority record for the “basic” name. References to the new name in the 500 and 663 fields are only added to the “basic” NAR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Joint pseudonyms ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A joint pseudonym represents one identity used by two or more persons working in collaboration with each other. If a person uses a joint pseudonym and another name (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for joint pseudonym:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer.  Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on joint pseudonym NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on joint pseudonym NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonyms used by multiple persons ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When multiple persons working independently of each other use the same pseudonym and one or more other names (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for pseudonym used by multiple persons:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; NAR for first 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;(''Author has a pseudonym used by multiple persons and individual pseudonyms'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#663_Complex_See_Also_Reference-Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Nonpublic general note =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give information of permanent value and general interest that would be useful also to PFAN institutions and outside of PFAN. A representative listing of notes is given below. Generally, wording is recommended but not prescriptive unless specified in the instructions. The separate 667 fields may be given in any order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use OCLC record)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [reason for coding].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date updated].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Used for official language changes'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Appendice 1 in this manual for information and instructions about 667 fields added to authority records as part of a special project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for persons with identities not established ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a person uses two or more identities in manifestations, name authority records may be created for each identity. In the interest of efficiency, catalogers may use a 667 field to list pseudonyms not found in publications instead of creating NARs for these unused pseudonyms. In this case, list the unused pseudonyms in a 667 field following the phrase: “Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This note may also be added to an NAR for a person who has multiple NARs for multiple identities when some of the pseudonyms are not found in publications. In this case, list only the unused pseudonyms in the 667 field, and follow appropriate instructions for the other pseudonyms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is available in the manual, 663 section, and the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/ LC/PCC Practice for Creating NARs for Persons who use Pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for series of conferences, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 field on the NAR for the collective conference when there are authority records for both collective and individual instances of an ongoing conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs and subject usage ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply these instructions when creating new NARs and revising existing NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Add notes indicating subject cataloging usage when an authorized access point is not appropriate for use as a subject heading for these situations:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Heads of state, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This instruction applies to NARS for corporate bodies representing the office when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point for the corporate body. See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Government Officials)] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html RDA 11.2.2.26 (Religious Officials)] for instructions on the corporate bodies. Use this 667 note on the NAR for the corporate body to indicate subject cataloging usage:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [personal name heading].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value “n” in 008/11 and value “b” in 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|008/11]] and [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|008/15]] in this manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Earlier/later linear jurisdictional name changes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;politique d'indexation du RVM&amp;quot; is to assign as a subject access point or as a geographic subdivision only the latest name of a political jurisdiction that has had one or more earlier names, as long&lt;br /&gt;
as the territorial identity remains essentially unchanged (see &amp;quot;Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval&amp;quot;, 5.14.3.1). When creating a NAR with an earlier/later authorized access point for a place in in this situation, catalogers must add a 667 subject usage note to the authority record with the earlier place name and adjust the appropriate 008 fields (008/11 and 008/15).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NARs for fictitious characters'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access points for families are not valid for subject use. In an NAR for a family, 008/11 should be set to value “n” and 008/15 should be set to “b.” Per LAC-BAnQ PS 9.0, when creating an NAR&lt;br /&gt;
for a family add this 667 field noting subject usage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Add this note to a name authority record for a city section indicating that it is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision (see SHM H 835 for more information):&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) NARs for families&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Authorized access points for family names are valid for subject use. For family name authority records that reflect past practice (which considered them invalid for subject use), update the records to set the 008/11 values to “v” and 008/15 values to “a” and delete the following subject usage note:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Non-Latin script reference notes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In an authority record that contains a non-Latin script variant access point, use the 667 field with a note stating: “Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.” If there are multiple non-Latin script variant access points, use a note stating: “Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.” Assign 008/29 value “b” to indicate that the variant access point is not evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Duplicates ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add the following note to a name authority record that has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number from the record to keep&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#667_Nonpublic_General_Note|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Sources found =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of this field is to record information about the name or title represented in the 1XX field. It includes facts that contribute to the identification of the entity, that justify the choice of the name&lt;br /&gt;
or title and any additional elements used to construct the authorized access point (1XX). The information also justifies, as needed, variant forms of the name or title (4XX), other identifying elements (046, 3XX,&lt;br /&gt;
and 678), and clarifies relationships between the 1XX and other entities in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Functions of the 670 field:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information, from sources (e.g., books, phone calls, websites), in support of the choice and form of the authorized access point, variants, and other identifying elements&lt;br /&gt;
* To store information that may be used to break a conflict later&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information on relationships between entities (e.g., a person is the author of a work, a corporate body was absorbed by another corporate body)&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify a person with works in diverse subject areas or of diverse forms&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify different individuals whose access points must remain identical for now (i.e., undifferentiated personal names) &lt;br /&gt;
* To clarify whether different forms of a name or of a title are simply variations or reflect a  change in the name or title&lt;br /&gt;
* To record research required by the current guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
* To facilitate authority and bibliographic file maintenance, i.e., the information in 670 fields aids in making decisions about duplicate authorized access points and misattributions&lt;br /&gt;
* To support machine manipulation based on algorithms using information in the 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, the first 670 field cites the resource for which the authority record is being established, i.e., the resource being cataloged. If the resource being cataloged or consulted provides no information to&lt;br /&gt;
justify the authorized access point, variants, or other elements recorded in the NAR, see the 675 section of this Manual for instructions on citing the resource in a 675 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give subsequent 670 fields in any order, adding new fields after existing ones. Do not routinely delete or change existing 670 fields when adding new 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding subsequent 670 fields, prefer objective, authoritative sources (e.g., an encyclopedia) and those sources that provide firsthand information (e.g., an author's blog). Use sources that provide additional information rather than repeating information that is already present in other 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Best practices for 670 fields:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* In subfield $b, summarize and edit information found as needed to avoid extraneous or repetitive information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Avoid citing subjective information or information that is of dubious value in identifying an entity within a bibliographic context.&lt;br /&gt;
* Exercise caution when recording information about living persons that may be private or controversial in nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 fields in existing NARs may not conform to these guidelines. For example, 670 fields in older NARs may lack subfield $b with justifying information. 670 fields in NARs that were part of a special project may not conform to these guidelines and/or may contain information that seems unusual or incorrect. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' The examples given throughout the following text have various conventions in regard to punctuation and style. These conventions are not prescriptive and should be considered as best practices to facilitate the exchange of information in a shared database environment. Catalogers are expected to use judgment and common sense. Punctuation and style need not be consistent from record to record as long as the information is clear and accurate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format of 670 fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the exception of the eszett (ß or ſʒ) and the euro sign (€), all characters found in the [http://www.loc.gov/marc/specifications/specchartables.html MARC code table] are valid for use in authority records contributed to the Canadiana Authority File ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html voir LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). When pasting data from a website into a 670 field, verify that all characters are valid for use in the record. Some non-valid characters resemble those that are valid. For example, the invalid en dash (–) resembles the valid hyphenminus (-).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a substitution for a symbol that cannot be reproduced is given in brackets (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html LAC-BAnQ PS for 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS for 1.7.5]),  an explanation of that interpolation may also be provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data must be given in romanized form. Normally it is understood that the cataloger has provided the romanization; therefore, when transcribing romanization found in the source, add after it the bracketed&lt;br /&gt;
phrase ['''forme romanisée''']. In such languages as Arabic and Hebrew, where vowels are commonly omitted from the orthography of texts, the cataloger supplies the missing vowels when transcribing data. When&lt;br /&gt;
transcribing text that does include the vowels, add after it in brackets ['''vocalisé'''] or ['''en partie vocalisé'''] as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a cataloger chooses to provide nonroman script variant access points, the 670 $b should contain both the nonroman script transcription(s) found in the source, and the systematically romanized form(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When authority records are created using automated authority generation programs, additional information may be included. This data may also be formatted in a different way than instructed in this document. Generally, this data should be retained as generated to maintain the cost effectiveness of this process unless the data is confusing or causes validation errors. The exceptions to this are names and&lt;br /&gt;
titles for which NARs are created. Follow the instructions in those sections for recording this data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Source citation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The title proper of the resource being cited, complete enough for later identification in an online catalog. Abbreviations and ellipses may be used. Precede a generic or indistinctive title with the creator's name that would begin the authorized access point for the work. If the authorized access point for the work is the same as the title proper plus a qualifier, it may be provided instead of the title proper to avoid ambiguity. When information in subfield $a of a 670 field is provided to justify an authorized or variant access point, follow the additional instructions at ''Recording names and titles''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The date of publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Multipart monographs.'' If the part is the first part, give the date of publication as an open date.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Serials other than monographic series.'' Generally, use a chronological designation instead of a publication date. If there is no designation date, use the numeric designation and the date of publication. Indicate, following the designation statement, if a “surrogate” was used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Integrating resources.'' Apply the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] for source of the title proper of a website. Identify the iteration from which information was taken (e.g., “viewed on”dates for updating websites, update number or release number for updating loose-leafs).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Information found'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $b:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The specific location(s) of the information found. For multipart resources with numbered parts, provide the designation of the part and the location within the part (e.g., v. 6, page 10; map recto, label). Abbreviations or spelled-out forms may be used (e.g., t.p. or title page, v. 6 or volume 6).&lt;br /&gt;
# Information found. Following the location, cite the information found there, enclosed in parentheses. As appropriate, give multiple occurrences of information from the same source following the location of the information. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George ; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' If the authorized access point is built from Cataloguing in Publication data, include &amp;quot;CIP&amp;quot; in the location statement (e.g., formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Takao Tanabe, 2026 : $b page de titre du CIP de BAC (Sherri Shinobu Kajiwara) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Kajiwara, Sherri S.; personne associée au Canada et au Japon)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Internet resources.''' For websites, provide the name of the location within the website if appropriate (e.g., about us; history, timeline; government, executive branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Multiple locations within a resource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' When adding new information to a 670 field created for a CIP, indicate that the new information is from the published resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; personne associée au Canada) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; personne associée au Canada) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs.''' For NARs, generally, use “etc.” to avoid giving more than two locations or a sequence of locations (e.g., p. 316, etc., for sequence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs.''' For SARs, always give each location separately.&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' In post-cataloging authority work without the piece in hand, use the location “ressource non disponible.” If the piece is examined again and the authority record is updated, it is allowable to edit the corresponding 670 field to provide a location and additional forms of series titles as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions from the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may optionally provide a uniform resource identifier (URI) in subfield $u of the 670 citation to link to the cited resource if it contains significant information related to the established entity&lt;br /&gt;
that cannot be cited succinctly in the authority record. Note that use of a URI in the 670 $u does not take the place of the requirement to cite relevant data in subfields $a and $b of the 670 field needed to support the authorized access point (including additions) or variants (this information will continue to be available if the site changes or disappears). However, information found in online sources may be added to the 046 or 3XX fields with the appropriate citations in subfields $v and $u and not repeated in a 670 when that information is not used in the 1XX or a 4XX. If a URI is included in a 670, it must be given in subfield $u. The subfield $u should contain only the URI and no additional data (e.g., do not enclose the URI within parentheses and do not include words in the subfield $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording names and titles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record names or series titles used in the authorized access point or variant access points in full, as they appear in the source, without abbreviation by the cataloger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When preparing an authority record for the text of a law or a subject compilation of laws, if a source being cited contains an official short title or citation title, cite that title, preceded by the term&lt;br /&gt;
“citation title” and its exact location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For corporate name authorities, include in the data cited all the hierarchy required to justify needed variant access points, Use judgment in deciding what information (e.g., subordinate body's name) is extraneous to the record being created and should not be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all of the above categories, if the only presentation of the name or title on the chief source of information is in the bibliographic title given in subfield $a of the 670 citation, repetition of the name in&lt;br /&gt;
subfield $b may be omitted, provided no important information is lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If information about an earlier or later name or title is found in the same source as the name or title in the authorized access point, give all the information in the 670 field. Do not separate the&lt;br /&gt;
information about the earlier or later name or title in order to give it in a 675 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To facilitate international contribution and use of authority records, when recording dates, generally use the spelled out or [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abbreviated] forms for months. (For dates recorded using automated authority generation programs, see the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Format of 670 fields]] section of this document.) Do not change the style of dates in existing records. As a best practice, if a date is not included in subfield $d of the 100 field, consider adding a 046 field if dates are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying variant access points ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justify names or titles given as variant access points by information cited from sources. However, justification is not required in the following cases:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variant access points made on the basis of the cataloger's awareness of different romanizations or orthographies;&lt;br /&gt;
# A variant title derived from the resource being cataloged, from other resources cataloged under the same access point, or from information in standard reference sources;&lt;br /&gt;
# References for authorized access points of corporate bodies reflecting changes due to national orthographic reform, changes in names due to an official language change, or changes involving only a parent body to which the body being established is subordinate.&lt;br /&gt;
# Optional references from AACR2 or pre-AACR 2 forms on SARs and on retrospective NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying other elements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information recorded in the 046, 3XX, or 678 field of the authority record should generally be justified unless it is otherwise obvious from information recorded in subfield $a of a 670 citation or it can&lt;br /&gt;
be easily inferred from other identifying elements recorded, including the preferred name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the 046 field and many of the 3XX fields, a subfield $u or subfield $v recorded in the same field may be used instead of or in addition to a 670. See the 046 section of this document for guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
on subfield $u and subfield $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording other data ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data to record in the authority record. Do not abbreviate or translate attributes such as title of the person ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) that appear in conjunction with personal names in statements of responsibility and that potentially could be used as part of the access point. Other data may be abbreviated or summarized. Generally informally translate other data from foreign languages into English, paraphrasing or summarizing as convenient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data other than forms of the title/phrase to record in the permanent authority record. Numbering and names of issuing bodies are not required but may be given.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special types of citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most commonly occurring citations are listed below. If these are not appropriate, devise others as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When converting information found in obsolete or non-active MARC fields (e.g., 664, 665, 666) into a 670 note, cite Canadiana in a citation such as those provided in the examples below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date of conversion] $b ([data converted from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([data moved from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC and fichier interne de BAnQ [BAnQ internal file]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cite these files in zone 670 as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; usage: [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''NARs''. Give the date of the search, using month names or abbreviations. In parentheses, prefaced by the label '''point d'accès :''' or '''points d'accès :''', give the access point (or access points) found, even if it is the same as the current authorized access point. If it is judged useful to mention one or more variants found in an authority record, give them with the label '''variante :''' or '''variantes :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different forms of the name appear in the bibliographic records, record the access point and also any forms found, including usage identical to the authorized access point. Separate the access point from the other forms, and preface the other forms with an appropriate label, e.g., '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' or '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not normally cite specific bibliographic records or the exact location of the variations found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''SARs.''. Give the date of the search, using month abbreviations, followed by the citation of the bibliographic record. In parentheses give the series statement found in that record.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] LC/NAF has been cited previously under other names, e.g., Base de données LC/NACO and Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] &amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot; for bibliographic records refers to the transcribed forms of name usually found in statements of responsibility of bibliographic records. It may also appear in other parts of the bibliographic record such as a title proper or a quoted note. Because of changes in cataloging instructions, catalogers should be careful when taking information from the publication statement, distribution statement, etc. and the series statement.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (or «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») for bibliographic records refers to a form of the name that may not represent a transcribed form. For example, in AACR2 records, a publisher's name that appeared on the resource as “ABC Publishing Company” might have been recorded in the publication statement as “ABC Pub. Co.” Normally, there is no need to cite such a form in a 670 field..&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citing other files or catalogs.''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an access point is found in a manual catalog or online database, use judgment in creating a 670 citation. Begin the 670 field with a designation of the catalog/database in which these other bibliographic records were found. There is no prescribed formulation of such citations; examples are listed below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, , [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Geographical Names Database'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide the name of the database and the date searched in subfield $a. The name of the database may be cited as an acronym or in full. In subfield $b provide names given for the entity, feature designation or class (e.g., ADM1, PPL, civil) coordinates, and name of larger place if appropriate. (Other relevant information may also be provided.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the feature designation or class, it is acceptable to use either the code (e.g., PPL) or its spelled-out form (e.g., populated place). For foreign names, convey the name type (e.g., conventional, approved, short, etc.) within brackets or parentheses after the name. Repeat the brackets or parentheses after each name of this type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Variant names (including non-roman script names) may be given in a single listing as shown below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the coordinates, it is acceptable to use the DMS format (degrees, minutes, seconds), the DD format (decimal degrees), or both formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has opted to record the DMS coordinates)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The coordinates may be recorded as found. However, if the database displays the coordinates using colons to separate the DMS components and positive and negative values to convey the hemisphere, it is acceptable to translate the coordinates to traditional DMS format if desired. Use the degree sign (not superscript zero) to show degrees, the soft sign (modifier letter prime) for minutes, and the hard sign (modifier letter double prime) for seconds. For coordinates of latitude, a negative value corresponds to the Southern hemisphere. For coordinates of longitude, a negative value corresponds to the Western hemisphere.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has recorded the DMS coordinates as found)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has translated the DMS coordinates to traditional format from: -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, 22:53:01, 121:02:54; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Non-bibliographic sources'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the non-bibliographic source, the date, and the information. The source can be given specifically (« Lettre de l'auteur » , « Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur » , etc.) or in general terms (« Information de l'auteur » , « Information de l'éditeur » , etc.).  When noting a specific source, it isn't necessary to show how information was received, e.g, that letter was received via FAX rather than via mail. When a telephone call to a publisher/agency/organization is cited, usually give the name of the group called, rather than the title or name of the person contacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''Citations for republication SARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an SAR is for a republication only, begin the 670 with the term for the type of republication and a slash. Do not include a 670 for a republication if the SAR covers both the original and one or more republications. Do not add additional 670 fields for other types of republications cataloged later. (See 64X Series Treatment, Republications for more information about republications.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations for undifferentiated NARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on existing 670 citations found in undifferentiated NARs, see in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32 Undifferentiated Personal Name]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-19]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#670_Source_Data_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Title related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 672 field may be used to record a title that is related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in an authority record for a corporate body, 672 fields may be used to record titles for which the corporate body is a creator, issuing body, or subject. The primary purpose of the 672 field is to document that there is a relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 672 field does not negate the need to use the 670 field for the title for which the authority record is being created, nor to use the 670 fields to justify information recorded in the 1XX and 4XX such as preferred and variant forms of name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 672 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 672 fields when inputting new 672 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 672 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 fields with titles proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Cervantes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with preferred title)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with variant title for the work associated with the Catalan expression of the work and date of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Remainder of title'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a title proper, subfield $b may be used to record the other title information or parallel title proper to eliminate confusion for titles needing further identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains other title information)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains parallel title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $f – Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $f is used to record a date appropriate to the entity recorded in $a (e.g., use date of work for a preferred title and date of publication for a title proper). Do not use brackets in $f when recording a supplied date of publication or production. Do not give a date of distribution, date of manufacture, or copyright date in $f.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for work:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of  work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for expression:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of French expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for manifestation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of publication of manifestation of Polish expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Bibliographic record control number'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $w is used to record bibliographic record control numbers (e.g., 001, 010, and 016 fields in bibliographic records). It is recommended that catalogers provide $w when readily available. Subfield $w should be repeated for each instance of a separate control number (e.g., an LCCN and an OCLC record number should be provided in separate subfields). For further instructions on inputting record control numbers, see the subfield $w section within the CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MARC 21 Format for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' subfield $w should only be used with titles for the manifestation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Title not related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 673 field may be used to record a title that is not related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. For example, in an authority record for a person, the 673 may be used to record the titles of works written by a different person with a similar name. The primary purpose of the 673 field is to document that there is no relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 673 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 673 field does not negate the need to use the 675 field as described in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#675_Sources_not_found|675 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 673 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 673 fields when inputting new 673 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 673 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 673 field. For specific subfields in the 673 field, apply the same instructions given in the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#672 Title related to the entity|672 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961- &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with different Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)### 47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with the National Gallery in London)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT NOT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #4 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Although the National of Art is not the creator, it is the publisher so this title should be record in a 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-25]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#673_Title_Not_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Sources not found =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:''Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In April 2012 this field was redefined as: “Citation for a consulted source in which no information is found related in any manner to the entity represented by the authority record or related entities.” PFAN catalogers are not required to change any existing 675 fields simply to meet this new definition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a new NAR always cite the resource being cataloged in the 675 field if the item being cataloged provides no information related in any manner to the entity represented in the authority record. Also cite in the 675 field other sources consulted that contain no information, when that very lack of information is considered worth recording for future users of the authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, it is not always necessary to include in the 675 field every reference source consulted; use judgment in deciding what sources are important enough to retain in the permanent record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#675_Source_Data_Not_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Biographical or historical data =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When supplying biographical or historical data in a 678 note field, construct the note in concise but complete sentences, keeping in mind that the information will be used in public displays.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In anticipation of LAC building the file in WMS and the batch addition of authority records from other institutions, the contents of all 665 fields in LAC and BAnQ records have been moved to 678 field. The original 665 field may have contained instructions on the access point(s) to be used as author and subject heading :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec) ; Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec) ; Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec) ; Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Delete these instructions in 678 field if they have been retained. Consider adding a 667 field as a subject heading if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification of field 678'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, a 678 field must be justified by a 670 field. If it is not justified and its contents are appropriate for a biographical or historical note, retain the field and add a 670 note citing the internal file of the institution that provided 678 field as follows :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [ [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|abréviation de la bibliothèque participante]] ], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the record has been modified after being migrated, the record history must be consulted to determine who originally added zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Existing Field 678 which will be deleted as the content is not appropriate for a biographical note.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;670 field added:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not repeat this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#678_Biographical_or_Historical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Heading linking entries =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' This section does not apply to the 781 field used in 151 name authority records to provide geographic subdivision information. See Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#781_Subdivision_linking_entry|781 section]], for instructions for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of an established heading linking entry 7XX field in an NAR or SAR is limited to recording the authorized access point from a national bibliography or in a separate national authority file or a separate equivalence.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form of heading in a 7XX field may match the 1XX form or a 4XX form in the same authority record. This is appropriate when the 7XX field form represents a form found in a different authority file than Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source of the heading in the 7XX field may be specified using either second indicator value “7” with subfield $2 or a second indicator value that specifies the source. For access points coming from the LC/NAF file, prefer the second indicator with the value &amp;quot;0&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-17]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Subdivision linking entry =&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN optional practice:'' For a geographic name heading that may also be used as a geographic subdivision, determine the form in which the heading is to be used as a geographic subdivision following the guidelines in instruction sheet [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 of the ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Enter the text of the geographic subdivision form in a 781 field with second indicator 0. For a geographic heading that is used directly, such as a country, enter the data in a single $z subfield. For a geographic heading that is used indirectly through a larger geographic entity, such as a city, enter the data in two successive $z subfields. Use no other subfields. Make no changes to values in bytes of the 008.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a record for a geographic name heading that is not appropriate for use as a subject added entry (008/15 value Ab@), such as the earlier name of a jurisdiction that has undergone a linear name change, for example, '''Ceylon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a NAR for a place name that is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision, such as a city section, for example, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Add a 781 field to an existing record when making any other change to it. If revising an existing record that contains a 667 field subject cataloging usage note indicating the proper geographic subdivision form, delete the 667 field and replace it with a 781 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-11]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#781_Subdivision_Heading_Linking_Entry-Geographic_Subdivision|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 1: Undifferentiated entities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 2: Special projects =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This appendix presents information regarding some special projects involving authority records created or modified in the Canadiana authority file. The records created or modified within the context of these special projects may include some fields or some values not normally attributed according to current cataloguing policies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instructions regarding changes to these records are given here in order to indicate whether these fields and values are to be kept or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 1. Records created or revised as part of the UQAM records revision project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is an authority records revision project, led by UQAM. These records have been created or modified in Canadiana by UQAM's cataloguing “traitement documentaire” team. These records were then revised by two librarians and a library technician, also at UQAM. This project ended March 31, 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records may be modified, like any other name authority records, according to current cataloguing policies.&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers update these records, they should:&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the value of position Leader/17 to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (full record);&lt;br /&gt;
* Delete field 667 &amp;quot;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;quot;;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Evaluate the record as they would evaluate any batch-loaded record. However, as the record is being revised, the authorized access point may be modified, if it does not follow the current PFAN practices (for instance, birth or death dates may be added, if available and if omitted from the access point).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 2. Records created and revised as part of the Universities Mentoring Project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General Information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This mentoring project &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;that, as of February,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; allows university libraries to create name authority records that are revised by another university.  Authority records created or modified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;mentored libraries&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; are revised by library technicians &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;at the mentoring university.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abbreviation, e.g. UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;, etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records should not be modified.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15] &amp;lt;!--(2022-07-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145132</id>
		<title>PFAN - Name Authority Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145132"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T14:16:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by N. Mainville, LAC, )}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Manual}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Name Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Series Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Fixed Fields =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Descriptive cataloging code  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;All new name authority records created and contributed by PFAN catalogers must use code 008/10 “z” and include subfield $e rda in the 040 (Cataloging source) field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an existing NAR using code “a”, “b”, “c”, or “d” is modified in any way, evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA, changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1: If an existing NAR using code “c” is modified only to change or add a 5XX field, catalogers are strongly encouraged, but not required, to evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA,&lt;br /&gt;
changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2: Existing undifferentiated name authority records coded 008/10 “c” may be modified to remove one or more identities in order to create differentiated RDA authority records. When modifying&lt;br /&gt;
an existing undifferentiated name authority record for this purpose, the updated undifferentiated name authority record must retain the existing 008/10 code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F10 Descriptive Cataloging Rules|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Subject heading system/thesaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR 008/11 is set to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/11 value “v” (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/11 value “n” (Not applicable), representing past practice, change the value to “v.” In the Manual, see also 008/15 for instructions on changing that value to “a” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/11&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (Not applicable) to name authority records for corporate names representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point. Also assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; in 008/15, and make a 667 note indicating the form of the access point used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples of corporate names not appropriate for use as subject headings:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F15 Heading use-subject added entry|Manual 008/15]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]].&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created NARs. Make these changes also when modifying&lt;br /&gt;
existing name authority records for any reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F11 Subject Heading System.2FThesaurus|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Heading use-subject added entry ==&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;General&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; is set to &amp;quot;b.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/15 value “a” (Appropriate) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/15 value “b” (Not appropriate), representing past practice, change the value to “a.” In the Manual, see also 008/11 for instructions on changing that value to “v” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Background:'' For Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental&lt;br /&gt;
bodies, Religious officials, and Popes, descriptive catalogers may be required to establish an authorized&lt;br /&gt;
access point for the corporate name for the office as well as a personal name for the office holder. It is&lt;br /&gt;
subject cataloging policy to assign only the personal name, not the corporate name, as a subject access&lt;br /&gt;
point. This policy was established for collocation purposes (cf. [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
may be used in descriptive cataloging as an access point, but in subject cataloging only the personal name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
would be used as a subject access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; (Not appropriate) to name authority records for corporate entities representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the entry. Also assign value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; in 008/11, and make a 667 note indicating the form used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F11 Subject heading system.2Fthesaurus|Manual 008/11]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;NARs and subject usage.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Correct existing records when making any other change to the records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19]&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F15 Heading Use-Subject Added Entry|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Undifferentiated personal name ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== General === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use 008/32 code “b” (undifferentiated) in an RDA name authority record. Assign 008/32 value “a” for personal name NARs. Use code “n” for families, corporate bodies, and places. For works and expressions, assign value “a” if the access point begins with a personal name, otherwise assign value “n”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the past, personal name NARs could be coded as undifferentiated using 008/32 value “b” when the cataloger had no acceptable way of differentiating multiple persons with the same preferred name. Since then, PFAN have followed these guidelines for personal name NARs:&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not create new undifferentiated records coded 008/32 “b”. All personal name authority records coded RDA should be differentiated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not add a new identity to an existing personal name authority record coded 008/32 “b.”&lt;br /&gt;
* Instead, apply [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] to create a unique authorized access point for the person, using suitable additional elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' If the only record found for an entity is an undifferentiated record (with field 008/32 coded &amp;quot;b&amp;quot;) from a university with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN », do not use it.  Create a new authority record for the entity.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated record to LAC by emailing the OCLC control number to pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca with the subject line: Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may happen that an existing undifferentiated name authority record, especially one that has been imported from LC/NAF, contains pairs of 670 fields used to group information about each individual covered by the NAR. The first 670 in the pair is an “identifying” 670 field containing a term descriptive of the person's relationship to the title cited in the second 670 of the pair. The data in the identifying 670 field is contained in subfield $a and enclosed in square brackets. The second 670 in the pair is a “citation” 670 that contains the normal data elements in a resource being cataloged citation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Added entry for Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Editor of Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, an existing undifferentiated name authority record may include a 667 note indicating that the record is undifferentiated and identifying the resource(s) associated with other persons with the same name. In this case, the record generally does not include 670 fields for persons other than the first one identified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When information is found to distinguish a person in an existing undifferentiated from LAC or BAnQ name record:&lt;br /&gt;
* Always create a new name authority record for that person, with distinguishing information, and add an indication that the person was formerly on an undifferentiated record (see &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_notes_on_records_for_identities_previously_on_undifferentiated_records|667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records]]&amp;quot; below). If an authority record already exists for that person with the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer the &amp;quot;citation&amp;quot; 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary. Do not transfer the “identifying” 670 to the new NAR.&lt;br /&gt;
* Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the undifferentiated NAR is not being deleted because multiple identities remain, delete the pair of 670 fields pertaining to the newly created NAR (i.e., in the undifferentiated NAR, delete both the &amp;quot;identifying&amp;quot; 670 and the &amp;quot;citation&amp;quot; 670).&lt;br /&gt;
* If more than one identity remains in the undifferentiated NAR, and there is not sufficient information in the NAR to create new NARs for each name, leave the NAR coded AACR2.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an undifferentiated name authority record from BAnQ is not deleted and needs to be modified at a later date, assign a Canadiana number to it if it does not already have one.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to facilitate machine processing of authority records (e.g., matching, linking), when only one identity is left on an undifferentiated personal name authority record (i.e., other identities are being&lt;br /&gt;
disambiguated and removed), take the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Create a new NAR for the remaining single identity. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ») and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.  The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. In the new record:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer the citation 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 note:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note  « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assure that the undifferentiated NAR only contains information relevant to the single identity remaining (e.g., 670s). If applicable, delete field 667 indicating that the record is undifferentiated.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add that information in the 667 note on the undifferentiated record to assure that a duplicate NAR will not be created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of differentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated LAC record''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New notice for the author of Histoire du département de la Manche:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation. Remained identify is for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number] $z [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of undifferentiated record derived from LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Esperanza:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the illustrator of Reptiles:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the illustrator of Reptiles :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008red/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example of an undifferentiated BAnQ record''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a [No Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;New notice for Christian Bergeron (Sociologue) :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1056D8391F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian $c (Sociologue)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : 1063E5020F.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'individualisation des épreuves de la vie dans la modernité avancée, 2013 : $b page de titre (Christian Bergeron; Doctorat en sociologie; Université Laval [département déterminé selon la discipline])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 $b (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation. There are two undifferentiated identities remaining in the entry:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1063E5020F [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add a 667 note to a new NAR to identify the Canadiana number of the authority record in which information about that person had been recorded:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Records coded as undifferentiated that actually represent only one identity ====&lt;br /&gt;
Occasionally an existing record will be coded undifferentiated, but new research indicates that in fact the record represents only one identity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may also happen that we suspect that the value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; has been mistakenly coded in field 008/32. In such cases, proceed as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 field to the undifferentiated NAR indicating that it has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a new name authority record for the identity. The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 note: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number..)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the note 667 &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated record that represents a single identity''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation  :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;New authority record after disambiguation&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [no Canadiana number, use OCLC number from undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F32 Undifferentiated personal name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/33 Level of establishment  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Provisional''' (008/33 value “c”) records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Code an NAR as provisional (008/33 value “c”) if the authorized access point cannot be formulated satisfactorily because of inadequate information. If the necessary information later becomes available, re-evaluate the NAR and upgrade it to fully established (008/33 value “a”). In no case should a provisional-level authority record be created with an access point that conflicts with an existing NAR according to PFAN normalization rules.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Special administrative regions of Hong Kong and Macau'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Because there is uncertainty about whether Hong Kong and Macau will continue to have two official languages, code all NARs for government bodies in these two places, at the level of the special administrative region and below, as provisional (008/33 value “c”), regardless of the language in which the authorized access point has been established. If a form in the second of the two official languages becomes available, add that form as a variant access point rather than revising the existing authorized access point. Consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] and the [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html related policy statement] for instructions on choosing the language of the referred name. Please note that this policy for provisional status does not apply to non-government bodies.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional information for PFAN participants'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN participants may also create provisional records in the following two exceptional situations:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library does not have the language expertise to establish the authorized access point as a fully established authority record; this would include situations where the library lacked adequate reference sources for research or where the cataloger was not confident of the correct grammatical form for the access point.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library is unable, due to limited resources or other constraints, to complete related authority work or to determine the appropriate reference structure that is required for fully established authority records.&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preliminary''' (008/33 value “d”) records:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Preliminary authority records (008/33 value “d”) generally are the result of retrospective projects. PFAN catalogers are expected to routinely upgrade NARs coded preliminary when making other modifications to the record. Because of this maintenance requirement, PFAN participants are asked to contact the PFAN Standards Committee before embarking on projects that may result in large numbers of NARs coded preliminary being added to the NACO Authority File.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;As needed, catalogers may upgrade NARs coded preliminary when working with earlier/later corporate body records, even if the access points in the records being upgraded are not used in the local bibliographic database. Occasionally catalogers may need to create a new NAR without having an item in hand, e.g., for an earlier or later name heading using information from reference sources, or a heading based on information found in field 245 subfield “c” of bibliographic records when resolving NAR conflicts. Do not code these occasional NARs as “preliminary”.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records&lt;br /&gt;
are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, series data elements should be viewed on the publication and series authority records should be coded “a” (full). In post-cataloging authority work it is permissible to create SARs without the piece in hand; these records are coded “d” (preliminary). When a publication in the series has been examined and the preliminary authority record reviewed and updated as necessary, upgrade the SAR to full level.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F33_Level_of_establishment|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Cataloging source ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever value is originally input into this field remains; do not change this value when updating a record unless the original value was incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas « blanc » pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou « c » (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a). --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F39_Cataloging_source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 National Bibliographic Agency Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 016 is mandatory whenever a cataloguer creates, updates or uses an authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an authority record, and when updating or using an existing record without a Canadiana number in field 016, first check the LC/NAF to see if the same entity is represented by an authority record, and if this authority record includes a Canadiana number. Note that the authorized access point, in the LC/NAF, may be different from the Canadiana access point.  If the LC/NAF record does include a Canadiana number, add this number to the Canadiana record, changing the final E to an F (or adding an F at the end of the Canadiana number, if there is no final letter). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When updating or using an existing authority record that includes a Canadiana number, please check that the language code F is present at the end of the field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Duplicates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not “reuse” a Canadiana number. Once an authority record has been created for a given entity, and once a Canadiana number has been attributed, do not change the data in this authority record to describe a DIFFERENT entity. For instance, do not change the authority record for “Dupont, Jean” to transform it into an authority record describing “Tremblay, Marie” (except if the person's name has changed). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, ask that the duplicate be deleted (see [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Procedures for duplicates]]). DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no field 016 in the record to be deleted, please add one, using the number 0000X0000F. Do not record this number in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
See also the “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Duplicates|Duplicates]]” section in this Manual, field 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, delete it. DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Partially modified batch-loaded authority records'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Batch-loaded authority records which are partially modified, according to the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]], will include Canadiana number 1111X1111F. This temporary number is added in order to allow the cataloguer to save the record, until such time as the entire record is evaluated to make sure it follows all PFAN standards. This number will have to be replaced by a unique number once the record is evaluated, when the 667 note “CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN” is deleted. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 International Standard Serial Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Record the ISSN whenever it is available from the item in hand, from analytic bibliographic records, or from the collected set bibliographic record for the series; otherwise, recording the ISSN is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it is known there are separate ISSN assigned to different formats of a series represented by a single SAR, prefer to record in 022 subfield $a the ISSN that is the linking ISSN (ISSN-L) for the different formats. Identify ISSN for specific formats in separate 667 fields, following this pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the title of a publication has changed, confirm that an ISSN appearing on the publication belongs to the new title and not to the earlier title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An incorrect ISSN can be given in a 667 field (e.g., “ISSN 1122-3344 is not a valid ISSN for this publication”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-11-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Other standard identifier =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the guidelines in [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf NACO Best Practices] for the 024 Field. As a general rule, limit the number of 024 fields in a NACO authority record to five. Do not routinely delete or change existing 024 fields when adding new ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are not required to maintain identifiers coded in the 024 field of PFAN authority records. When an 024 field is present in an authority record that is being reported for deletion (for example, in the case of a duplicate), catalogers should transfer the field to the record that is to be retained. When two authority records are being collapsed into one, and each record has a different 024 field, catalogers should include both 024 fields in the updated record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Coded cartographic mathematical data =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for countries, states, counties'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for outside limits (bounding boxes or polygons) should generally be used with larger geographic entities such as countries, states, and counties to identify the coordinates of the entity. The&lt;br /&gt;
coordinates may be recorded in either degrees/minutes/seconds, decimal degrees, decimal minutes, and/or decimal seconds. Styles should not be mixed in a single 034 field, but the field may be repeated to&lt;br /&gt;
represent the different styles (see below for conversion utilities); the order of 034 fields when both styles are given does not matter. To facilitate the reuse of coordinates in geographic applications, the point (not the comma) should be used as the decimal point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrees/minutes/seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees''': record in the form hddd.dddddd (hemisphere-degrees.decimal degrees)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees with plus ou minus''': record in the form +-ddd.dddddd (hemisphere[+/-]-degrees.decimal degrees) (“+” or N and E, “-” for S and W ; the plus sign is optional)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example with +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example without the optional plus sign)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal minutes''': record in the form hdddmm.mmmm (hemisphere-degrees-minutes.decimal minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss.sss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds.decimal seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for cities, towns, and townships'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for cities, towns, and townships should generally be recorded as center points rather than outside limits. For the 034 field, the longitude and latitude that form the central axis are recorded&lt;br /&gt;
twice to define the center point (i.e., the contents of $d and $e are identical, the contents of $f and $g are identical).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing degrees/minutes/seconds)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees with plus/minus)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Coordinate Conversion Tools'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN institutions are encouraged to provide both degrees/minutes/seconds and decimal degrees when available. Numerous conversion tools are available on the Web to derive one from the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 has been defined for recording the source of the coordinate information– codes for commonly used sources are available from: [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/cartographic-data.html ''Cartographic Data Source Codes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 citation to the source would not be required if the only information from the source is recorded in field 034; a 670 citation should be made if necessary to record information beyond coordinates, such as variant names, hierarchy, time period of applicability, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#034_Coded_Carographic_Mathematical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 System Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#035_System_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Cataloging source =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Language of cataloging'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $b fre added automatically by WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $d – Modifying agency'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $d [MARC 21 code] is added automatically by WMS when modifying NARs or SARs unless your institution's is already the last MARC subfield $d in the 040 field. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $e – Description conventions'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All new authority records created and submitted by PFAN cataloguers must have the code &amp;quot;z&amp;quot; in Field 008/10 and include the $e rda subfield in Field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding the subfield $e manually, add it after subfield $b and before $c. It is not necessary to move the subfield $e to this position if it is already present elsewhere in the 040 or if it is being added by a macro or a template. Subfield $e rda is automatically added by the system in NARs and SARs when fixed field 008/10 (Rules) is set to “z” (Other).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#040_Cataloging_Source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Authentication Code =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This field is found in all authority records used by LAC. Do not modify or delete this field when code CaOONL appears in field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers (other than LAC cataloguers) derive an authority record from an LAC record which includes field 042, they must remember to delete this field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the Canadiana authority file, cataloguers must add 042 $a nlc every time they create, derive or revise an authority record. This code identifies the “virtual” Canadian authority file, which is spread across two separate authority files (LC/NAF and Canadiana). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#042_Authentication_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Geographic Area Code &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 043 can only be used in authority records for geographical names (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield b – Local GAC code and Subfield $2 – Source of local code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For sites located in Quebec, PFAN participants can use subfield $b to record a local code from the list below, representing the administrative region of Quebec where the site is located. This code is formed by the geographic region code &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; and a two-letter sub-entity local code (e.g., qa) that identifies the administrative region and replaces the last two characters of the &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; code (e.g., &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot;). (e.g. &amp;quot;n-cn-qa&amp;quot;). Subfield $b is recorded after subfield $a and is followed by subfield $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#043_Geographic_Area_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Special coded dates =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: When encoding date information, give the fullest information about the date that is readily available (the date in field 046 may be more precise than a date used in the 100 subfield $d). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2nd_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;When&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; revising existing authority records, record dates in field 046 even if the heading itself does not have dates in 100 subfield $d, when the information is readily available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording dates in field 046, use the Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) schema in all cases except for centuries; supply dates using the pattern yyyy, yyyy-mm, or yyyy-mm-dd. See date table in [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html LAC-BanQ PS 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt; For the full EDTF specification, see [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophonist)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bryant, W. Blues around the clock [SR] 1945: $b label (Johnny Hicks, tenor sax)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Discogs website, May 27, 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; tenor sax player who performed with Tab Smith in the 1940s)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording B.C. dates in the 046 field, precede the digits by a hyphen (minus sign). Because there is no year “zero” in the common era calendar, subtract one year from the actual B.C. date, e.g., the year 50 B.C. is recorded -0049.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a century in the 046 field, use the first two digits of the hundred year span (e.g., use “16” to represent the 17th century, 1600–1699). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the 1st century A.D. is represented by value “00” and B.C. centuries have a hyphen &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;minus &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sign)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; before the digits (e.g., “-04” for the 5th century B.C.). An approximate century (e.g., active approximately 12th century) cannot be recorded in the 046 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Repeatability:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Field 046 is repeatable, but the 046 subfields used to record the dates are not repeatable. Generally, one 046 field with dates conforming to the EDTF schema should be sufficient. However, century dates follow the ISO 8601 standard, not EDTF. When recording century dates in addition to more precise dates, it is therefore necessary to repeat the 046 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Conflicting dates'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, resources consulted may present conflicting dates (e.g., conflicting birth or death dates for a person, or start or end dates for a corporate body). In these situations, the 046 field should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information. It is not necessary to record all the conflicting dates using field 046, nor is it necessary to give a 046 field for each resource consulted. Evaluation of the conflicting dates should generally result in a single 046 field, containing the date(s) the cataloger judges to be most accurate in representing the entity. At the cataloger's discretion, the date(s) recorded in that 046 field may incorporate the conflicting date information and need not correspond exactly to the date(s) selected for the authorized access point.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Similarly, any dates added to the authorized access point should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information, recorded in conformance with the instructions in RDA and the PFAN Policy Statements. If one date predominates in the resources consulted, that date may be considered the most appropriate to use in the authorized access point. If a single date does not predominate, the cataloger may decide to use the “approximately yyyy”, “yyyy?”, or “yyyy or yyyy” format in the authorized access point. In some cases, dates corresponding to the period of activity of the person (RDA 9.19.1.5) may be considered the best choice.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 157 B.C. as the approximate date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary. authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 1907 as the date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Same example as above, reflecting a different decision the cataloger might have made for recording 046 subfield $f)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Because the 046 field will be based on information from multiple sources, justification cannot be accurately expressed in subfield $v/$u at the end of the 046 field. The conflicting dates should be recorded in 670 fields. If an existing record has subfield $v/$u as 046 field justification, and the 046 field is being updated as described above, the subfield $v/$u should be removed, and the justification converted to a 670 field, if the conflicting dates are not already justified in an existing 670 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Uncertain dates resulting from date calculations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, a calculation may be required to determine which dates to record in the 046 field and the authorized access point. Such calculations may result in uncertain dates.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the consulted resources provide only the person's date of death and their age (in years) at the time of death, as often happens with obituaries, their year of birth will correspond to one of two consecutive years. To calculate those years, first subtract the age from the year of death, then use the resulting year plus its preceding year as the two alternatives for the year of birth.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger subtracted 75, the age at death, from 1994, the year of death; the resulting year, 1919, and the year preceding it, 1918, represent the two possible alternatives for the year of birth)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If non-Gregorian dates are found in consulted resources, uncertain dates may result from calendar conversion differences. Gregorian calendar dates are used in the 046 field and authorized access point. A single date in a non-Gregorian calendar may correspond to one of two Gregorian dates. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(The Hijri calendar date 1346 H converts to either 1967 or 1968 in the Gregorian calendar.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of date scheme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add subfield $2 edtf except after a century. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfields $q – Establishment date, $r – Termination date,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Start period, and $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Record dates associated with a one-time conference, etc., or a single instance of a&lt;br /&gt;
series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] and [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), use subfields $s and $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Use the establishment date  ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) and the termination date ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) of a series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]) in subfields $q and $r, if that information is known.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on using $s and $t for start and end periods in fields 368, and 370-376, see the instructions provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following represents PFAN practice on recording sources of information in $u and $v in fields where they are defined, and/or in field 670: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;670s must be used to support information used as part of a heading in 1XX and 4XX fields.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;For fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $v is optional if the same information/source is already cited in the 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use $v if the information/source is not cited in a 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $u is optional, and should always be preceded by $v&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Use a 670 field if needed to justify information recorded in other fields for which subfields $u and/or $v are not defined or defined differently. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the same basic citation principles when recording data in subfield $v (Source of information) of fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 that currently apply to field 670 subfield $a (Source citation).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Supply specific citation information (page number, sub-page of website) in subfield $v if, in the cataloger's judgment, this greater specificity is needed to find the information within the source cited. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information in fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 is in the same form as found in the source, there is no need to cite usage information. If the information recorded in those fields is in a different form from that in the source, use 670 $b (Information found). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For tangibles sources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information was derived from a tangible source (e.g., a print book, removable digital media) subfield $v should contain sufficient information for a cataloger to find the item cited in a catalog&lt;br /&gt;
or bibliographic database. This can usually be limited to title proper and imprint or date. If that combination is not unique, the title citation may be preceded by the creator's name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For online resources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide information sufficient to find the resource via a search engine. Include either title and publication date (if it is a formally-published resource, such as an e-book) or a suitable description of the&lt;br /&gt;
document and date accessed (for a less formal resource). Optionally include subfield $u. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-03)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Library of Congress Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#050_Library_of_Congress_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 LC classification number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used in personal name authority records to record LC classification numbers for individual literary authors, including authors of children's literature. It may also be used '''exceptionally'' in personal and corporate name authority records to record biography numbers in the ML410-429 range of the LC classification when the choice of index or cutter is not obvious. Field 053 must always include a $5 subfield.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class PS8000 numbers should not be recorded in field 053. For the use of PS8000 numbers in name authority records, see section 065 of this Manual. An authority record for a Canadian literary author may contain both a 053 and a 065 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Library and Archives Canada Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#055_Library_and_Archives_Canada_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Other Classification Number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 065 is used to record PS8000 class numbers. Field 065 must always include a subfield $2 and a subfield $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [MARC code of institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Number source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2, record &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; to indicate that the number comes from the PS8000 class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#065_Other_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 080 Universal Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#080_Universal_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Dewey Decimal Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#082_Dewey_Decimal_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Dewey Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#083_Dewey_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Government Document Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#086_Government_Document_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Government Document Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#087_Government_Document_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Headings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for any reason, delete a final mark of punctuation in the 1XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging&lt;br /&gt;
instructions (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: in order to minimize the impact of database maintenance with associated bibliographic records and/or related authority records, catalogers are urged to refrain from making unnecessary changes to 1XXs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN series practice: Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the title proper of a multipart monograph, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choosing a monographic series title proper:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has more than one form of series title, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has the series title in more than one language or script on the same source, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has series title pages in more than one language and or script, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#Consider spacing and changes in typography when determining where the series title begins and ends. Also consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Establishing an SAR access point:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Determine choice of authorized access point based on [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] and its associated LAC-BAnQ PS.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclude from the authorized access point the following information included in the series statement in the bibliographic record for the component part:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;initial article in subfields $a, $t, $n, and $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;other title information;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;statement of responsibility;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;parallel title(s);&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;numeric/chronological designations.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a parenthetical qualifier(s) if appropriate according to the guidelines in LAC-BAnQ PS 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on converting an existing NAR to an SAR, see Should an SAR be made? in the Introduction of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Heading - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for families'''&lt;br /&gt;
'''''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “3” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a family. See in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_Nonpublic_general_note|667]] section, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]], for subject usage instructions in NARs for families.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Additions to the name are contained in a single set of parentheses separated by colons.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# The term for the type of family is added after the name and is contained in subfield $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $d (date) follows the term for the type of family.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $c is used for place associated with family and follows the date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $g is used for prominent member of family. Give authorized access point for the person as found in the 1XX of the NAR without any internal subfield coding.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for persons'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “0” or “1” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] provides guidance for the placement of words indicating relationship (e.g., Jr.) and MARC defines subfield $q as “Forme développée du nom de personne.” When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Subfield $d (date) should always be the last element in a 100 string unless the term (Esprit) is being added to the name. Add $c (Esprit) as the last element in a 100 string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Example:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Generally add subfield $c before subfield $q when also adding words, numerals, etc. indicating relationship. (See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] for treatment of Portuguese names)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) For exceptional situations, such as when subfield $a contains only a surname or only a forename or the name includes a prefix, etc. consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2020-12-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#100_Heading-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Content Type =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 336 may only be used in NARs and SARs for expressions. 336 is always accompanied by a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2 give “rdacontent/fre.” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Content type term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use terms from [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html/view RDA 6.9.1.3]. The list of terms is also available in the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Content type code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If giving subfield $b instead of/or in addition to subfield $a, use the code from the MARC format [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#336_Content_Type|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Other attributes of person or corporate body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary for terms in subfields $a, $b, and $c, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a, $b and $c. When terms in subfields $a and $b do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record professions or occupations in subfield $c (Other designation). Profession or occupation may be recorded in field [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#374_Occupation|374]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record titles of royalty, nobility or religious rank ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) in subfield $d in the form used in the authorized or variant access points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#368_Other_Attributes_of_Person_or_Corporate_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Associated place =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For jurisdictions or other place names with authority records in Canadiana or, failing that, the form found in the RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. The form of place name in the 370 field may differ from the form of place name added to a preferred name of place or an access point per RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Authorized access point for the place includes type of jurisdiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name for the larger place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Other place name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no authorized access point for the place in Canadiana or RVM, it is not necessary to create an NAR in order to code the 370 field. Record the place in the 370 field following RDA and the LAC-BAnQ PSs, including consulting appropriate sources and adding additional elements (e.g., type of jurisdiction) to break conflicts. Do not add a subfield $2 if no NAR is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of the associated place has changed, the name of the place that applied in the time of the entity being established in the 1XX may optionally be recorded in place of, or in addition to, the current form of name. It is not necessary to follow subject cataloging policies to use the latest form of name only.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person born in the city of Calcutta before its name changed to Kolkata; cataloger has chosen to record the form of name that applied at the time the person was born)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person residing in the city of Milan during the Renaissance, prior to the formation of the modern country of Italy; cataloger has chosen to record the current form of name for the country)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For non-jurisdictions, prefer names from an authorized vocabulary such as RVM and identify the source in subfield $2. If the name is not found in an authorized vocabulary, record it in field 370 without&lt;br /&gt;
giving a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
When determining when to create a name authority record for a geographic name, consult the “Name Authority Records (NARs)” section of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1], Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary&lt;br /&gt;
source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfield $c – Associated country&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Generally, do not use subfield $c to record places that are not sovereign entities. Such places may be recorded in subfield $f or other subfields as appropriate.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Martinique is an overseas department of France)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if a sovereign entity has (or previously had) one or more constituent countries, any of the constituent countries associated with the 1XX may optionally be recorded in subfield $c in addition to, or instead of, the larger sovereign entity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Great Britain who has strong ties to Wales; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with the Soviet Union, particularly the Kirghiz Soviet Socialist Republic; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Aruba, a constituent country of the Netherlands; cataloger has chosen not to record the Netherlands)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with India prior to its independence from Great Britain; cataloger has chosen not to record Great Britain)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entity names of First Nations in Canada and Indian tribes recognized by the United States government as legal entities may be included in subfield $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Record the place of origin of the work in field 370, unless it is merely a place of publication or other place associated with a manifestation (use field 643, when appropriate, for the latter). Although the “place of origin” of a serial work may be the same as the place of publication of the component part for which the SAR (or serial bibliographic record) was created, use judgment in distinguishing between place of origin of the work and a place of publication not actually related to the work itself.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-24]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-22)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#370_Associated_Place|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Address =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice:&lt;br /&gt;
* Supply based on cataloger's judgment, if the information is readily available and not already being recorded in field 370 subfield $e (Place of residence/headquarters).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* In cases where subfield $a is not recorded, include at a minimum subfield $m (Electronic mail address) or subfield $b (City).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not record physical &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or e-mail&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; addresses for living persons.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Catalogers are not required to maintain address information when updating a record that contains an address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record multiple addresses, with or without ranges of dates, in separate occurrences of field 371.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Electronic mail address'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $m should contain only an e-mail address. Do not add an internet address for the 1XX in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#371_Address|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Field of activity =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM heading string for field of activity, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an entity from Canadiana for field of activity, remove any subfield coding not authorized for use in the 372 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point in Canadiana:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Field of activity in 372:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall&lt;br /&gt;
best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''372 fields with a term from RVM and a non-controlled vocabulary term'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#372_Field_of_Activity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Associated group =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the Canadiana or LC/NACO Authority File, recording the source in subfield $2. Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 373 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of an associated group has changed, record the group name(s) that applied at the time of the entity being established in the 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with subfield $2 and dates:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with different vocabulary sources:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Although the MARC format does not specify a form of date in these subfields, the following practice is recommended for consistency. Input dates using the Gregorian calendar in the form yyyy. If more specific dates are necessary, consider recording them in another field (e.g., 670, 678). It is&lt;br /&gt;
not necessary to reformulate dates in existing NARs to conform to this practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&amp;lt;!--(2023-06-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#373_Associated_Group|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Occupation =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.16.1.3 for instructions on recording profession or occupation as an element. See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.19.1.6 for instructions using a profession or occupation term in an access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Codes from either the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/occupation.html/view Occupation Term Source Codes] or the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/subject.html/view Subject Source Codes] lists may be recorded in subfield $2 for the 374 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#374_Occupation|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Gender =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not use this field in new authority records. Whenever an existing record must be changed for any reason, delete any occurrence of field 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Family information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Name of prominent member'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When giving the name of the prominent member of the family in 376 subfield $b, give the form for the person as found in subfield $g of the 100 field of the NAR for the family. Do not include any internal subfield coding in subfield $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start''' period and Subfield $t – End period&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Associated language =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer language codes over language terms, using codes from the Code List for Languages in MARC21.  Use subfield $l (Language term) only to provide information not available in the [https://loc.gov/marc/languages/language_code.html MARC Code List for Languages]. Encode multiple languages for a person or corporate body only if more than one language is used for publication, communication, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Optionally, record an ISO 639-3 language code (or codes) in an additional 377 field. This practice is especially recommended when an ISO 639-3 code will identify a language more specifically than the MARC code does. For more information, see the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of the code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 is not required when the MARC Code List for Languages is used as the language source code (second indicator value “#”). PFAN institutions may supply an additional 377 field from another language code list by using second indicator value “7,” with subfield $2 containing a code for a language source list taken from the list in [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/language.html/view Language Code and Term Source Codes]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(ISO 639-3 code for Achi (acr); assigned a collective code (myn) for Mayan languages in the MARC Code List for Languages)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#377_Associated_Language|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Fuller form of personal name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode the fuller form of name in the 378 field when this information is readily available, even if the same information is already present in the 100 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the Information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#378_Fuller_Form_of_Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Form of work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMGF, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on recording form of work as an element in a work-level series authority record, see LAC-BAnQ PS 6.3.1.3.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#380_Form_of_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Other distinguishing characteristics of work or expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used to record the RDA elements other distinguishing characteristic of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) and other distinguishing characteristic of expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Other characteristics of expressions that are unique to musical works (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4-6.18.1.6]) may also be recorded in the 381 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Franklin number recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Other distinguishing characteristic of expression of musical work'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some terms recorded for other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression may be appropriate to record in field 381 and another MARC field for which there is no corresponding RDA element. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a corporate body (such as a publisher) used as an other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression could be recorded in either the 373 field (associated group), the 381 field or both.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 381 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as associated group and other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA has no specific element for places associated with expressions, but field 370 subfield $f (Other associated place) and subfield $g (Place of origin of work or expression) may be used in authority records for expressions. Some places associated with works or expressions would be considered other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression in RDA and could be recorded in the 370 field, the 381 field, or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Places used as other distinguishing characteristic of a legal work; recorded in 370 and 381 fields)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the RDA element place of origin of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.6]) in a 370 field (see Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]] section).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When other distinguishing characteristic of work or other distinguishing characteristic of expression has been used in an authorized access point and is also being recorded as an element in a 3XX&lt;br /&gt;
field, use the 381 field to record the other distinguishing characteristic. Optionally, also record the same information in any other appropriate 3XX field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#381_Other_Distinguishing_Characteristics_of_Work_or_Expression|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 Medium of performance =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the medium of performance using thesaurus terms from &amp;quot;Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM (RVMMEM)&amp;quot;. Record the medium of performance by applying the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html RDA 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6], the associated LAC-BAnQ PSs. ''Note:'' The 382 field may also be used in authority records for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. If considered important for identification and access, provide an additional 382 that does not apply these guidelines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#382_Medium_of_Performance|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numeric designation of musical work &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available. Create separate 383 fields for different numbering schemes associated with a single work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#383_Numeric_Designation_of_Musical_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Key =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available for works. In case of doubt, do not encode. Do not encode for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Audience characteristics =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the intended audience of a work or expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. In particular, consult instruction sheet L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ##  $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvmt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a: If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term and term from a controlled vocabulary)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''or''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-10-14]&amp;lt;!--(2022-10-14)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Creator/contributor characteristics &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record demographic characteristics of one or more creators or contributors associated with a work or expression, in particular for characteristics common to a group of creators or contributors associated with a work or expression. The field will most commonly be used in authority records for collection aggregates embodying two or more expressions of two or more independent works by different agents, and for individual works named by title alone (e.g., works of unknown authorship; monographic series).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the draft Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html].  In particular, consult instruction sheet L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator and Contributor Characteristics, available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled demographic term)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While this field will be used primarily for aggregated works and for individual works named by title alone, there are situations when it will be appropriate for an individual work by one or more named creators. For example, for a musical work composed during childhood or adolescence, it would not be appropriate to record “Enfants” or “Adolescents” as a characteristic in the composer’s authority record. Instead, demographic characteristics applicable to only some of a creator’s works should be recorded in the authority records for those works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Work composed 2003-2005, completed when the composer was 14 years old)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014 $b page 4 de la couverture (Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled term and terms from one controlled vocabulary)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $i – Relationship information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, use subfield $i to record a term designating the nature of the relationship between the demographic groups recorded in the field and the work or expression. Prefer a term from a controlled vocabulary, such as the MARC relator terms, RDA relationship designators, or RBMS relationship designators. Capitalize the first letter of the relationship term and record it in the singular. Follow the relationship term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998- February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record multiple subfield $i’s in a single 386 field. If multiple relationship terms apply to a single group of creators or contributors (e.g., a work with authors and artists from the same demographic group or an expression with editors and translators from the same demographic group), repeat the field, using different relationship terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(A compilation of works by authors and artists from Massachusetts)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different relationship terms apply to some of the creators and contributors (e.g., authors are in one demographic group and artists are in another), repeat the field, using different relationship terms. If the same relationship term applies to more than one demographic group, either repeat subfield $a in one field, or repeat the field. For clarity, when in doubt, repeat the 386 field as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Score containing works by Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler, and Strauss, with lyrics also printed as text in German and English translation)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-11]&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Time Period of Creation =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the time period of creation or origin of a work or expression. The name of the time period may specify or imply a place for which the time period is relevant. It may also specify the name of an event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMFAST, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM subject heading string, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For compilations, the field may be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the works/expressions contained within the compilation, considered collectively (using first indicator value “1”). It may also be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the compilation itself (using first indicator value “2”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR for a collection of Renaissance poetry compiled in the nineteenth century)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 388 field may be used in conjunction with, or instead of, the 046 field. When specific date(s) of creation or origin are not known, or span a long period of time, recording textual chronological terms in the 388 field may be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the indicator value differs, repeat the field. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR with 388 fields containing terms from different vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-07] &amp;lt;!--(2022-11-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX - See From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for another reason, delete any final mark of punctuation in a 4XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging rules (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying NARs or SARs that contain obsolete codes such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all 4XX references require justification; see “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Justifying_variant_access_points|Justifying variant access points]]” in the 670 section of this document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not make a 4XX that normalizes to the same form as another 4XX on the same authority record or a 1XX on any name authority record. See the section “NACO normalization” in the [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf/view DCM Z1] Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice guidelines for RDA:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Record variants found in the manifestation being cataloged:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Use cataloger's judgment;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; No limitation on the number or form of references;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Instead of or in addition to adding variants, consider providing access by adding 37X fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Example showing 378 without a variant for the fuller form of name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Establish additional NARs for the authorized access points needed to support elements used in 4XX variant access points (e.g., parent body associated with subordinate body being established).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally provide a variant form 4XX access point for a former 1XX authorized access point, unless the former authorized access point was egregiously incorrect. See the section “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX$w|Subfield $w – Control subfield]]” for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Use the established form of components in 4XX variant access points, except for non-Latin script variants, which may represent a mixture of scripts or may be entirely in a non-Latin script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally, do not remove variants unless egregiously incorrect (e.g., a non-Latin script variant that does not represent the same person).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If a form found on the manifestation being cataloged includes a variant form of a component of a 4XX variant access point, that form may be used in its entirety as an additional 4XX variant access point, provided that it is not divided into its component parts through the use of subfields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When changing the form of a superordinate body, a geographic name, or a personal name in a 1XX, update all of the existing NARs that use that component in a 4XX, unless the 4XX represents the former authorized access point (e.g., $w/2=e). ''Exception:'' Do not apply this instruction in the case of migrated authority records that have not been re-evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point for a person (100) is changed because the person has changed his or her name, record the earlier form of name in a 400 with $w nne if the variant is valid under RDA instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Name changed upon election as pope)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When an authorized access point for a person (100) is updated to close the date, it is recommended to save the former form with the open date in a 4XX field with $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) based on CIP cataloging is changed because its form on the published resource is different from that on the CIP galley, a 4XX from the previous authorized access point form with subfield $w nne may be added unless the former 1XX form was egregiously incorrect (e.g., the author's date of birth was given as 1775 instead of 1975 in the CIP galley).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) is changed because of a change in cataloging instructions, record the earlier form in a 4XX using $w. If the variant form is a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nne. If the variant form is not a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA; 100 form changed based on usage and dates of birth and death added because 100 was being changed)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429  av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nnea&amp;quot; because the abbreviation &amp;quot;ca.&amp;quot; is not valid for period of activity in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When changing an authorized access point because dates were recorded inaccurately or a cataloger entered a typo in the authorized access point, do not add the inaccurate form as a cross reference.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, providing authorized access points for the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Variant access points may be recorded in any SAR, including those for series-like phrases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the volumes of a multipart monograph have different forms of the common title, use a 4XX reference rather than a 5XX reference for the form of the title not chosen as the title proper of the multipart monograph.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27] &amp;lt;!--(2024-03-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D |''Manual 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX - See Also From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying a NAR that contain codes that are no longer used such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d” or “f,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers applying RDA instructions may use subfield $i in conjunction with subfield $w code “r” for relationship designators. When applying RDA relationship designators in 5XXs, supply terms from Appendix I, J or K; capitalize the initial letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the use of relationship designators and/or $w codes in a specific 5XX field, see the section in this Manual for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the conventions in the authority format for use of subfield $w. Do not supply subfield $w unless a value other than “n” would be appropriate in one of the positions. When supplying subfield $w,&lt;br /&gt;
give it as the first subfield in the field. Supply character positions preceding, but not succeeding, the value, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = to indicate a reference from an earlier authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = to indicate a reference from a later authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = to indicate that a subfield $i or subfield $4 is used to denote relationship information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = to indicate a see also reference for multiple pseudonyms (record also contains a 663 field)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A see also reference tracing (5XX) must not normalize to the same as another see also reference in the same authority record, unless both 5XX fields contain a relationship designator in subfield $i, and&lt;br /&gt;
the texts of the relationship designators are different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500  See Also From Tracing - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” when providing relationship links between a personal name and 1) the name of another person, family, or corporate body or 2) the authorized access point for a work or expression. This technique may also be used to relate authorized access points for works and expressions containing personal names. When using a term from Appendix I, J or K in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording pseudonymous relationships for personal names when only two authority records are involved, catalogers may either 1) use subfield $i and code “r” in subfield $w or 2) use simple see-also references. For more information on these techniques and instructions on recording multiple pseudonyms (i.e., those involving a 663 field), see the [http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/pseud.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA Practice for Creating NARs for Persons Who Use Pseudonyms]. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are reminded that when a variant name (400) and an authorized access point (100) are in conflict an addition should be made to either the 400 or 100 to resolve the conflict (e.g., fuller form of name, date of activity, etc.); the previous practice of changing the 400 to a 500 to resolve the conflict is no longer an option. When catalogers encounter a variant form in a 500 field in the course of updating a NAR, they should resolve the conflict and change the field to a 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510  See Also From Tracing - Corporate Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511  See Also From Tracing - Meeting Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html BAC-BAnQ PS 11.13.1.8] for guidance on relating authority records for ongoing conferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530  See Also From Tracing - Uniform Title =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded &amp;quot;r&amp;quot; when providing relationship links between authorized access points for works or expressions. When supplying RDA Appendix J terms in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551  See Also From Tracing - Geographic Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” until relationship designators for places are developed. (Currently RDA has a placeholder for Appendix L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Series Numbering Peculiarities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#641_Series_Numbering_Peculiarities|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Series Numbering Example =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#642_Series_Numbering_Example|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Series Place and Publisher/Issuing Body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#643_Series_Place_and_Publisher.2FIssuing_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Series Analysis Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#644_Series_Analysis_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Series Tracing Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#645_Series_Tracing_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Series Classification Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#646_Series_Classification_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Complex See Also Reference - Name =&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 663 field contains the explanatory text and authorized access points for relationships between a 100 (established name) and other 100s (established names) that cannot be adequately conveyed by one or more simple see also references generated from 500 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, this situation occurs when a person uses more than two identities, when more than one person shares an identity with one or more others, or when multiple persons use the same pseudonym independent of each other or as a result of some other arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text of the 663 may be adjusted to fit extraordinary situations; however, keep the text as simple as possible, allowing the MARC fields and coding to convey the information desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use the 663 technique to show relationships between corporate bodies or between persons and corporate bodies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is found in the [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA and AACR2 practice for creating NARs for persons who use pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Only two identities ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When only two NARs are created for a person, the NARs are generally connected with 500 see also references and no 663 field. However, when one of the NARs is for a joint pseudonym or a pseudonym used by several persons working independently of each other, the 663 technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== More than two identities - &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; authorized access point and references ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more than two authorized access points are created for the same person, identify a “basic” authorized access point using the 663 field technique. This decision is based on the desire to simplify the reference structure and to assist catalogers in determining which name to use as the subject of biographical or critical works. The “basic” authorized access point should be determined by the predominantly used form of name or, lacking sufficient evidence, by choosing the real name of the person as the “basic” form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the authority record for the “basic” name authority record add 500 see also references with a subfield w coded “nnnc” from all other names used. Justify the 500 in 670 citations according to normal practice. Provide a 663 field listing all the other names with the following text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name] $b [established form of&lt;br /&gt;
name]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On each of the other name authority records, trace a 500 see also reference with subfield $w coded “nnnc” from the “basic” name, justifying that reference in a 670 citation, according to normal practice. Other names may be mentioned in the 670 if it is convenient to do so. Provide a 663 field with the following or similar text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name chosen as the basic heading]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the author uses another new name, create a new name authority record for that name and also add it to the reference structure and 663 listing on the authority record for the “basic” name. References to the new name in the 500 and 663 fields are only added to the “basic” NAR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Joint pseudonyms ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A joint pseudonym represents one identity used by two or more persons working in collaboration with each other. If a person uses a joint pseudonym and another name (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for joint pseudonym:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer.  Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on joint pseudonym NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on joint pseudonym NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonyms used by multiple persons ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When multiple persons working independently of each other use the same pseudonym and one or more other names (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for pseudonym used by multiple persons:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; NAR for first 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;(''Author has a pseudonym used by multiple persons and individual pseudonyms'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#663_Complex_See_Also_Reference-Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Nonpublic general note =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give information of permanent value and general interest that would be useful also to PFAN institutions and outside of PFAN. A representative listing of notes is given below. Generally, wording is recommended but not prescriptive unless specified in the instructions. The separate 667 fields may be given in any order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use OCLC record)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [reason for coding].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date updated].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Used for official language changes'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Appendice 1 in this manual for information and instructions about 667 fields added to authority records as part of a special project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for persons with identities not established ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a person uses two or more identities in manifestations, name authority records may be created for each identity. In the interest of efficiency, catalogers may use a 667 field to list pseudonyms not found in publications instead of creating NARs for these unused pseudonyms. In this case, list the unused pseudonyms in a 667 field following the phrase: “Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This note may also be added to an NAR for a person who has multiple NARs for multiple identities when some of the pseudonyms are not found in publications. In this case, list only the unused pseudonyms in the 667 field, and follow appropriate instructions for the other pseudonyms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is available in the manual, 663 section, and the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/ LC/PCC Practice for Creating NARs for Persons who use Pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for series of conferences, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 field on the NAR for the collective conference when there are authority records for both collective and individual instances of an ongoing conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs and subject usage ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply these instructions when creating new NARs and revising existing NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Add notes indicating subject cataloging usage when an authorized access point is not appropriate for use as a subject heading for these situations:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Heads of state, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This instruction applies to NARS for corporate bodies representing the office when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point for the corporate body. See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Government Officials)] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html RDA 11.2.2.26 (Religious Officials)] for instructions on the corporate bodies. Use this 667 note on the NAR for the corporate body to indicate subject cataloging usage:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [personal name heading].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value “n” in 008/11 and value “b” in 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|008/11]] and [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|008/15]] in this manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Earlier/later linear jurisdictional name changes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;politique d'indexation du RVM&amp;quot; is to assign as a subject access point or as a geographic subdivision only the latest name of a political jurisdiction that has had one or more earlier names, as long&lt;br /&gt;
as the territorial identity remains essentially unchanged (see &amp;quot;Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval&amp;quot;, 5.14.3.1). When creating a NAR with an earlier/later authorized access point for a place in in this situation, catalogers must add a 667 subject usage note to the authority record with the earlier place name and adjust the appropriate 008 fields (008/11 and 008/15).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NARs for fictitious characters'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access points for families are not valid for subject use. In an NAR for a family, 008/11 should be set to value “n” and 008/15 should be set to “b.” Per LAC-BAnQ PS 9.0, when creating an NAR&lt;br /&gt;
for a family add this 667 field noting subject usage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Add this note to a name authority record for a city section indicating that it is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision (see SHM H 835 for more information):&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) NARs for families&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Authorized access points for family names are valid for subject use. For family name authority records that reflect past practice (which considered them invalid for subject use), update the records to set the 008/11 values to “v” and 008/15 values to “a” and delete the following subject usage note:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Non-Latin script reference notes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In an authority record that contains a non-Latin script variant access point, use the 667 field with a note stating: “Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.” If there are multiple non-Latin script variant access points, use a note stating: “Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.” Assign 008/29 value “b” to indicate that the variant access point is not evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Duplicates ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add the following note to a name authority record that has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number from the record to keep&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#667_Nonpublic_General_Note|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Sources found =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of this field is to record information about the name or title represented in the 1XX field. It includes facts that contribute to the identification of the entity, that justify the choice of the name&lt;br /&gt;
or title and any additional elements used to construct the authorized access point (1XX). The information also justifies, as needed, variant forms of the name or title (4XX), other identifying elements (046, 3XX,&lt;br /&gt;
and 678), and clarifies relationships between the 1XX and other entities in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Functions of the 670 field:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information, from sources (e.g., books, phone calls, websites), in support of the choice and form of the authorized access point, variants, and other identifying elements&lt;br /&gt;
* To store information that may be used to break a conflict later&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information on relationships between entities (e.g., a person is the author of a work, a corporate body was absorbed by another corporate body)&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify a person with works in diverse subject areas or of diverse forms&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify different individuals whose access points must remain identical for now (i.e., undifferentiated personal names) &lt;br /&gt;
* To clarify whether different forms of a name or of a title are simply variations or reflect a  change in the name or title&lt;br /&gt;
* To record research required by the current guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
* To facilitate authority and bibliographic file maintenance, i.e., the information in 670 fields aids in making decisions about duplicate authorized access points and misattributions&lt;br /&gt;
* To support machine manipulation based on algorithms using information in the 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, the first 670 field cites the resource for which the authority record is being established, i.e., the resource being cataloged. If the resource being cataloged or consulted provides no information to&lt;br /&gt;
justify the authorized access point, variants, or other elements recorded in the NAR, see the 675 section of this Manual for instructions on citing the resource in a 675 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give subsequent 670 fields in any order, adding new fields after existing ones. Do not routinely delete or change existing 670 fields when adding new 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding subsequent 670 fields, prefer objective, authoritative sources (e.g., an encyclopedia) and those sources that provide firsthand information (e.g., an author's blog). Use sources that provide additional information rather than repeating information that is already present in other 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Best practices for 670 fields:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* In subfield $b, summarize and edit information found as needed to avoid extraneous or repetitive information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Avoid citing subjective information or information that is of dubious value in identifying an entity within a bibliographic context.&lt;br /&gt;
* Exercise caution when recording information about living persons that may be private or controversial in nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 fields in existing NARs may not conform to these guidelines. For example, 670 fields in older NARs may lack subfield $b with justifying information. 670 fields in NARs that were part of a special project may not conform to these guidelines and/or may contain information that seems unusual or incorrect. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' The examples given throughout the following text have various conventions in regard to punctuation and style. These conventions are not prescriptive and should be considered as best practices to facilitate the exchange of information in a shared database environment. Catalogers are expected to use judgment and common sense. Punctuation and style need not be consistent from record to record as long as the information is clear and accurate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format of 670 fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the exception of the eszett (ß or ſʒ) and the euro sign (€), all characters found in the [http://www.loc.gov/marc/specifications/specchartables.html MARC code table] are valid for use in authority records contributed to the Canadiana Authority File ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html voir LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). When pasting data from a website into a 670 field, verify that all characters are valid for use in the record. Some non-valid characters resemble those that are valid. For example, the invalid en dash (–) resembles the valid hyphenminus (-).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a substitution for a symbol that cannot be reproduced is given in brackets (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html LAC-BAnQ PS for 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS for 1.7.5]),  an explanation of that interpolation may also be provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data must be given in romanized form. Normally it is understood that the cataloger has provided the romanization; therefore, when transcribing romanization found in the source, add after it the bracketed&lt;br /&gt;
phrase ['''forme romanisée''']. In such languages as Arabic and Hebrew, where vowels are commonly omitted from the orthography of texts, the cataloger supplies the missing vowels when transcribing data. When&lt;br /&gt;
transcribing text that does include the vowels, add after it in brackets ['''vocalisé'''] or ['''en partie vocalisé'''] as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a cataloger chooses to provide nonroman script variant access points, the 670 $b should contain both the nonroman script transcription(s) found in the source, and the systematically romanized form(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When authority records are created using automated authority generation programs, additional information may be included. This data may also be formatted in a different way than instructed in this document. Generally, this data should be retained as generated to maintain the cost effectiveness of this process unless the data is confusing or causes validation errors. The exceptions to this are names and&lt;br /&gt;
titles for which NARs are created. Follow the instructions in those sections for recording this data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Source citation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The title proper of the resource being cited, complete enough for later identification in an online catalog. Abbreviations and ellipses may be used. Precede a generic or indistinctive title with the creator's name that would begin the authorized access point for the work. If the authorized access point for the work is the same as the title proper plus a qualifier, it may be provided instead of the title proper to avoid ambiguity. When information in subfield $a of a 670 field is provided to justify an authorized or variant access point, follow the additional instructions at ''Recording names and titles''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The date of publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Multipart monographs.'' If the part is the first part, give the date of publication as an open date.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Serials other than monographic series.'' Generally, use a chronological designation instead of a publication date. If there is no designation date, use the numeric designation and the date of publication. Indicate, following the designation statement, if a “surrogate” was used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Integrating resources.'' Apply the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] for source of the title proper of a website. Identify the iteration from which information was taken (e.g., “viewed on”dates for updating websites, update number or release number for updating loose-leafs).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Information found'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $b:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The specific location(s) of the information found. For multipart resources with numbered parts, provide the designation of the part and the location within the part (e.g., v. 6, page 10; map recto, label). Abbreviations or spelled-out forms may be used (e.g., t.p. or title page, v. 6 or volume 6).&lt;br /&gt;
# Information found. Following the location, cite the information found there, enclosed in parentheses. As appropriate, give multiple occurrences of information from the same source following the location of the information. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George ; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' If the authorized access point is built from Cataloguing in Publication data, include &amp;quot;CIP&amp;quot; in the location statement (e.g., formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Takao Tanabe, 2026 : $b page de titre du CIP de BAC (Sherri Shinobu Kajiwara) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Kajiwara, Sherri S.; personne associée au Canada et au Japon)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Internet resources.''' For websites, provide the name of the location within the website if appropriate (e.g., about us; history, timeline; government, executive branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Multiple locations within a resource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' When adding new information to a 670 field created for a CIP, indicate that the new information is from the published resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; personne associée au Canada) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; personne associée au Canada) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs.''' For NARs, generally, use “etc.” to avoid giving more than two locations or a sequence of locations (e.g., p. 316, etc., for sequence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs.''' For SARs, always give each location separately.&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' In post-cataloging authority work without the piece in hand, use the location “ressource non disponible.” If the piece is examined again and the authority record is updated, it is allowable to edit the corresponding 670 field to provide a location and additional forms of series titles as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions from the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may optionally provide a uniform resource identifier (URI) in subfield $u of the 670 citation to link to the cited resource if it contains significant information related to the established entity&lt;br /&gt;
that cannot be cited succinctly in the authority record. Note that use of a URI in the 670 $u does not take the place of the requirement to cite relevant data in subfields $a and $b of the 670 field needed to support the authorized access point (including additions) or variants (this information will continue to be available if the site changes or disappears). However, information found in online sources may be added to the 046 or 3XX fields with the appropriate citations in subfields $v and $u and not repeated in a 670 when that information is not used in the 1XX or a 4XX. If a URI is included in a 670, it must be given in subfield $u. The subfield $u should contain only the URI and no additional data (e.g., do not enclose the URI within parentheses and do not include words in the subfield $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording names and titles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record names or series titles used in the authorized access point or variant access points in full, as they appear in the source, without abbreviation by the cataloger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When preparing an authority record for the text of a law or a subject compilation of laws, if a source being cited contains an official short title or citation title, cite that title, preceded by the term&lt;br /&gt;
“citation title” and its exact location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For corporate name authorities, include in the data cited all the hierarchy required to justify needed variant access points, Use judgment in deciding what information (e.g., subordinate body's name) is extraneous to the record being created and should not be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all of the above categories, if the only presentation of the name or title on the chief source of information is in the bibliographic title given in subfield $a of the 670 citation, repetition of the name in&lt;br /&gt;
subfield $b may be omitted, provided no important information is lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If information about an earlier or later name or title is found in the same source as the name or title in the authorized access point, give all the information in the 670 field. Do not separate the&lt;br /&gt;
information about the earlier or later name or title in order to give it in a 675 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To facilitate international contribution and use of authority records, when recording dates, generally use the spelled out or [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abbreviated] forms for months. (For dates recorded using automated authority generation programs, see the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Format of 670 fields]] section of this document.) Do not change the style of dates in existing records. As a best practice, if a date is not included in subfield $d of the 100 field, consider adding a 046 field if dates are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying variant access points ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justify names or titles given as variant access points by information cited from sources. However, justification is not required in the following cases:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variant access points made on the basis of the cataloger's awareness of different romanizations or orthographies;&lt;br /&gt;
# A variant title derived from the resource being cataloged, from other resources cataloged under the same access point, or from information in standard reference sources;&lt;br /&gt;
# References for authorized access points of corporate bodies reflecting changes due to national orthographic reform, changes in names due to an official language change, or changes involving only a parent body to which the body being established is subordinate.&lt;br /&gt;
# Optional references from AACR2 or pre-AACR 2 forms on SARs and on retrospective NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying other elements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information recorded in the 046, 3XX, or 678 field of the authority record should generally be justified unless it is otherwise obvious from information recorded in subfield $a of a 670 citation or it can&lt;br /&gt;
be easily inferred from other identifying elements recorded, including the preferred name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the 046 field and many of the 3XX fields, a subfield $u or subfield $v recorded in the same field may be used instead of or in addition to a 670. See the 046 section of this document for guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
on subfield $u and subfield $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording other data ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data to record in the authority record. Do not abbreviate or translate attributes such as title of the person ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) that appear in conjunction with personal names in statements of responsibility and that potentially could be used as part of the access point. Other data may be abbreviated or summarized. Generally informally translate other data from foreign languages into English, paraphrasing or summarizing as convenient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data other than forms of the title/phrase to record in the permanent authority record. Numbering and names of issuing bodies are not required but may be given.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special types of citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most commonly occurring citations are listed below. If these are not appropriate, devise others as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When converting information found in obsolete or non-active MARC fields (e.g., 664, 665, 666) into a 670 note, cite Canadiana in a citation such as those provided in the examples below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date of conversion] $b ([data converted from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([data moved from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC and fichier interne de BAnQ [BAnQ internal file]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cite these files in zone 670 as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; usage: [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''NARs''. Give the date of the search, using month names or abbreviations. In parentheses, prefaced by the label '''point d'accès :''' or '''points d'accès :''', give the access point (or access points) found, even if it is the same as the current authorized access point. If it is judged useful to mention one or more variants found in an authority record, give them with the label '''variante :''' or '''variantes :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different forms of the name appear in the bibliographic records, record the access point and also any forms found, including usage identical to the authorized access point. Separate the access point from the other forms, and preface the other forms with an appropriate label, e.g., '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' or '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not normally cite specific bibliographic records or the exact location of the variations found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''SARs.''. Give the date of the search, using month abbreviations, followed by the citation of the bibliographic record. In parentheses give the series statement found in that record.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] LC/NAF has been cited previously under other names, e.g., Base de données LC/NACO and Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] &amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot; for bibliographic records refers to the transcribed forms of name usually found in statements of responsibility of bibliographic records. It may also appear in other parts of the bibliographic record such as a title proper or a quoted note. Because of changes in cataloging instructions, catalogers should be careful when taking information from the publication statement, distribution statement, etc. and the series statement.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (or «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») for bibliographic records refers to a form of the name that may not represent a transcribed form. For example, in AACR2 records, a publisher's name that appeared on the resource as “ABC Publishing Company” might have been recorded in the publication statement as “ABC Pub. Co.” Normally, there is no need to cite such a form in a 670 field..&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citing other files or catalogs.''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an access point is found in a manual catalog or online database, use judgment in creating a 670 citation. Begin the 670 field with a designation of the catalog/database in which these other bibliographic records were found. There is no prescribed formulation of such citations; examples are listed below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, , [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Geographical Names Database'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide the name of the database and the date searched in subfield $a. The name of the database may be cited as an acronym or in full. In subfield $b provide names given for the entity, feature designation or class (e.g., ADM1, PPL, civil) coordinates, and name of larger place if appropriate. (Other relevant information may also be provided.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the feature designation or class, it is acceptable to use either the code (e.g., PPL) or its spelled-out form (e.g., populated place). For foreign names, convey the name type (e.g., conventional, approved, short, etc.) within brackets or parentheses after the name. Repeat the brackets or parentheses after each name of this type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Variant names (including non-roman script names) may be given in a single listing as shown below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the coordinates, it is acceptable to use the DMS format (degrees, minutes, seconds), the DD format (decimal degrees), or both formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has opted to record the DMS coordinates)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The coordinates may be recorded as found. However, if the database displays the coordinates using colons to separate the DMS components and positive and negative values to convey the hemisphere, it is acceptable to translate the coordinates to traditional DMS format if desired. Use the degree sign (not superscript zero) to show degrees, the soft sign (modifier letter prime) for minutes, and the hard sign (modifier letter double prime) for seconds. For coordinates of latitude, a negative value corresponds to the Southern hemisphere. For coordinates of longitude, a negative value corresponds to the Western hemisphere.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has recorded the DMS coordinates as found)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has translated the DMS coordinates to traditional format from: -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, 22:53:01, 121:02:54; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Non-bibliographic sources'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the non-bibliographic source, the date, and the information. The source can be given specifically (« Lettre de l'auteur » , « Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur » , etc.) or in general terms (« Information de l'auteur » , « Information de l'éditeur » , etc.).  When noting a specific source, it isn't necessary to show how information was received, e.g, that letter was received via FAX rather than via mail. When a telephone call to a publisher/agency/organization is cited, usually give the name of the group called, rather than the title or name of the person contacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''Citations for republication SARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an SAR is for a republication only, begin the 670 with the term for the type of republication and a slash. Do not include a 670 for a republication if the SAR covers both the original and one or more republications. Do not add additional 670 fields for other types of republications cataloged later. (See 64X Series Treatment, Republications for more information about republications.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations for undifferentiated NARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on existing 670 citations found in undifferentiated NARs, see in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32 Undifferentiated Personal Name]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-19]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#670_Source_Data_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Title related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 672 field may be used to record a title that is related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in an authority record for a corporate body, 672 fields may be used to record titles for which the corporate body is a creator, issuing body, or subject. The primary purpose of the 672 field is to document that there is a relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 672 field does not negate the need to use the 670 field for the title for which the authority record is being created, nor to use the 670 fields to justify information recorded in the 1XX and 4XX such as preferred and variant forms of name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 672 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 672 fields when inputting new 672 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 672 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 fields with titles proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Cervantes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with preferred title)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with variant title for the work associated with the Catalan expression of the work and date of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Remainder of title'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a title proper, subfield $b may be used to record the other title information or parallel title proper to eliminate confusion for titles needing further identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains other title information)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains parallel title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $f – Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $f is used to record a date appropriate to the entity recorded in $a (e.g., use date of work for a preferred title and date of publication for a title proper). Do not use brackets in $f when recording a supplied date of publication or production. Do not give a date of distribution, date of manufacture, or copyright date in $f.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for work:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of  work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for expression:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of French expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for manifestation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of publication of manifestation of Polish expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Bibliographic record control number'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $w is used to record bibliographic record control numbers (e.g., 001, 010, and 016 fields in bibliographic records). It is recommended that catalogers provide $w when readily available. Subfield $w should be repeated for each instance of a separate control number (e.g., an LCCN and an OCLC record number should be provided in separate subfields). For further instructions on inputting record control numbers, see the subfield $w section within the CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MARC 21 Format for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' subfield $w should only be used with titles for the manifestation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Title not related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 673 field may be used to record a title that is not related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. For example, in an authority record for a person, the 673 may be used to record the titles of works written by a different person with a similar name. The primary purpose of the 673 field is to document that there is no relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 673 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 673 field does not negate the need to use the 675 field as described in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#675_Sources_not_found|675 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 673 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 673 fields when inputting new 673 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 673 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 673 field. For specific subfields in the 673 field, apply the same instructions given in the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#672 Title related to the entity|672 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961- &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with different Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)### 47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with the National Gallery in London)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT NOT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #4 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Although the National of Art is not the creator, it is the publisher so this title should be record in a 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-25]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#673_Title_Not_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Sources not found =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:''Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In April 2012 this field was redefined as: “Citation for a consulted source in which no information is found related in any manner to the entity represented by the authority record or related entities.” PFAN catalogers are not required to change any existing 675 fields simply to meet this new definition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a new NAR always cite the resource being cataloged in the 675 field if the item being cataloged provides no information related in any manner to the entity represented in the authority record. Also cite in the 675 field other sources consulted that contain no information, when that very lack of information is considered worth recording for future users of the authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, it is not always necessary to include in the 675 field every reference source consulted; use judgment in deciding what sources are important enough to retain in the permanent record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#675_Source_Data_Not_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Biographical or historical data =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When supplying biographical or historical data in a 678 note field, construct the note in concise but complete sentences, keeping in mind that the information will be used in public displays.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In anticipation of LAC building the file in WMS and the batch addition of authority records from other institutions, the contents of all 665 fields in LAC and BAnQ records have been moved to 678 field. The original 665 field may have contained instructions on the access point(s) to be used as author and subject heading :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec) ; Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec) ; Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec) ; Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Delete these instructions in 678 field if they have been retained. Consider adding a 667 field as a subject heading if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification of field 678'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, a 678 field must be justified by a 670 field. If it is not justified and its contents are appropriate for a biographical or historical note, retain the field and add a 670 note citing the internal file of the institution that provided 678 field as follows :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [ [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|abréviation de la bibliothèque participante]] ], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the record has been modified after being migrated, the record history must be consulted to determine who originally added zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Existing Field 678 which will be deleted as the content is not appropriate for a biographical note.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;670 field added:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not repeat this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#678_Biographical_or_Historical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Heading linking entries =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' This section does not apply to the 781 field used in 151 name authority records to provide geographic subdivision information. See Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#781_Subdivision_linking_entry|781 section]], for instructions for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of an established heading linking entry 7XX field in an NAR or SAR is limited to recording the authorized access point from a national bibliography or in a separate national authority file or a separate equivalence.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form of heading in a 7XX field may match the 1XX form or a 4XX form in the same authority record. This is appropriate when the 7XX field form represents a form found in a different authority file than Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source of the heading in the 7XX field may be specified using either second indicator value “7” with subfield $2 or a second indicator value that specifies the source. For access points coming from the LC/NAF file, prefer the second indicator with the value &amp;quot;0&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-17]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Subdivision linking entry =&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN optional practice:'' For a geographic name heading that may also be used as a geographic subdivision, determine the form in which the heading is to be used as a geographic subdivision following the guidelines in instruction sheet [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 of the ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Enter the text of the geographic subdivision form in a 781 field with second indicator 0. For a geographic heading that is used directly, such as a country, enter the data in a single $z subfield. For a geographic heading that is used indirectly through a larger geographic entity, such as a city, enter the data in two successive $z subfields. Use no other subfields. Make no changes to values in bytes of the 008.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a record for a geographic name heading that is not appropriate for use as a subject added entry (008/15 value Ab@), such as the earlier name of a jurisdiction that has undergone a linear name change, for example, '''Ceylon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a NAR for a place name that is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision, such as a city section, for example, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Add a 781 field to an existing record when making any other change to it. If revising an existing record that contains a 667 field subject cataloging usage note indicating the proper geographic subdivision form, delete the 667 field and replace it with a 781 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-11]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#781_Subdivision_Heading_Linking_Entry-Geographic_Subdivision|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 1: Undifferentiated entities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 2: Special projects =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This appendix presents information regarding some special projects involving authority records created or modified in the Canadiana authority file. The records created or modified within the context of these special projects may include some fields or some values not normally attributed according to current cataloguing policies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instructions regarding changes to these records are given here in order to indicate whether these fields and values are to be kept or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 1. Records created or revised as part of the UQAM records revision project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is an authority records revision project, led by UQAM. These records have been created or modified in Canadiana by UQAM's cataloguing “traitement documentaire” team. These records were then revised by two librarians and a library technician, also at UQAM. This project ended March 31, 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records may be modified, like any other name authority records, according to current cataloguing policies.&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers update these records, they should:&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the value of position Leader/17 to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (full record);&lt;br /&gt;
* Delete field 667 &amp;quot;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;quot;;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Evaluate the record as they would evaluate any batch-loaded record. However, as the record is being revised, the authorized access point may be modified, if it does not follow the current PFAN practices (for instance, birth or death dates may be added, if available and if omitted from the access point).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 2. Records created and revised as part of the Universities Mentoring Project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General Information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This mentoring project &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;that, as of February,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; allows university libraries to create name authority records that are revised by another university.  Authority records created or modified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;mentored libraries&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; are revised by library technicians &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;at the mentoring university.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abbreviation, e.g. UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;, etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records should not be modified.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15] &amp;lt;!--(2022-07-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145131</id>
		<title>PFAN - Name Authority Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145131"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T14:15:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by N. Mainville, LAC, )}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Manual}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Name Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Series Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Fixed Fields =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Descriptive cataloging code  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;All new name authority records created and contributed by PFAN catalogers must use code 008/10 “z” and include subfield $e rda in the 040 (Cataloging source) field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an existing NAR using code “a”, “b”, “c”, or “d” is modified in any way, evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA, changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1: If an existing NAR using code “c” is modified only to change or add a 5XX field, catalogers are strongly encouraged, but not required, to evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA,&lt;br /&gt;
changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2: Existing undifferentiated name authority records coded 008/10 “c” may be modified to remove one or more identities in order to create differentiated RDA authority records. When modifying&lt;br /&gt;
an existing undifferentiated name authority record for this purpose, the updated undifferentiated name authority record must retain the existing 008/10 code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F10 Descriptive Cataloging Rules|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Subject heading system/thesaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR 008/11 is set to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/11 value “v” (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/11 value “n” (Not applicable), representing past practice, change the value to “v.” In the Manual, see also 008/15 for instructions on changing that value to “a” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/11&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (Not applicable) to name authority records for corporate names representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point. Also assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; in 008/15, and make a 667 note indicating the form of the access point used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples of corporate names not appropriate for use as subject headings:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F15 Heading use-subject added entry|Manual 008/15]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]].&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created NARs. Make these changes also when modifying&lt;br /&gt;
existing name authority records for any reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F11 Subject Heading System.2FThesaurus|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Heading use-subject added entry ==&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;General&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; is set to &amp;quot;b.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/15 value “a” (Appropriate) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/15 value “b” (Not appropriate), representing past practice, change the value to “a.” In the Manual, see also 008/11 for instructions on changing that value to “v” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Background:'' For Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental&lt;br /&gt;
bodies, Religious officials, and Popes, descriptive catalogers may be required to establish an authorized&lt;br /&gt;
access point for the corporate name for the office as well as a personal name for the office holder. It is&lt;br /&gt;
subject cataloging policy to assign only the personal name, not the corporate name, as a subject access&lt;br /&gt;
point. This policy was established for collocation purposes (cf. [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
may be used in descriptive cataloging as an access point, but in subject cataloging only the personal name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
would be used as a subject access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; (Not appropriate) to name authority records for corporate entities representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the entry. Also assign value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; in 008/11, and make a 667 note indicating the form used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F11 Subject heading system.2Fthesaurus|Manual 008/11]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;NARs and subject usage.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Correct existing records when making any other change to the records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19]&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F15 Heading Use-Subject Added Entry|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Undifferentiated personal name ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== General === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use 008/32 code “b” (undifferentiated) in an RDA name authority record. Assign 008/32 value “a” for personal name NARs. Use code “n” for families, corporate bodies, and places. For works and expressions, assign value “a” if the access point begins with a personal name, otherwise assign value “n”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the past, personal name NARs could be coded as undifferentiated using 008/32 value “b” when the cataloger had no acceptable way of differentiating multiple persons with the same preferred name. Since then, PFAN have followed these guidelines for personal name NARs:&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not create new undifferentiated records coded 008/32 “b”. All personal name authority records coded RDA should be differentiated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not add a new identity to an existing personal name authority record coded 008/32 “b.”&lt;br /&gt;
* Instead, apply [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] to create a unique authorized access point for the person, using suitable additional elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' If the only record found for an entity is an undifferentiated record (with field 008/32 coded &amp;quot;b&amp;quot;) from a university with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN », do not use it.  Create a new authority record for the entity.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated record to LAC by emailing the OCLC control number to pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca with the subject line: Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may happen that an existing undifferentiated name authority record, especially one that has been imported from LC/NAF, contains pairs of 670 fields used to group information about each individual covered by the NAR. The first 670 in the pair is an “identifying” 670 field containing a term descriptive of the person's relationship to the title cited in the second 670 of the pair. The data in the identifying 670 field is contained in subfield $a and enclosed in square brackets. The second 670 in the pair is a “citation” 670 that contains the normal data elements in a resource being cataloged citation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Added entry for Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Editor of Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, an existing undifferentiated name authority record may include a 667 note indicating that the record is undifferentiated and identifying the resource(s) associated with other persons with the same name. In this case, the record generally does not include 670 fields for persons other than the first one identified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When information is found to distinguish a person in an existing undifferentiated from LAC or BAnQ name record:&lt;br /&gt;
* Always create a new name authority record for that person, with distinguishing information, and add an indication that the person was formerly on an undifferentiated record (see &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_notes_on_records_for_identities_previously_on_undifferentiated_records|667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records]]&amp;quot; below). If an authority record already exists for that person with the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer the &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;citation&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not transfer the “identifying” 670 to the new NAR.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the undifferentiated NAR is not being deleted because multiple identities remain, delete the pair of 670 fields pertaining to the newly created NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(i.e., in the undifferentiated NAR, delete both the &amp;quot;identifying&amp;quot; 670 and the &amp;quot;citation&amp;quot; 670)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If more than one identity remains in the undifferentiated NAR, and there is not sufficient information in the NAR to create new NARs for each name, leave the NAR coded AACR2.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an undifferentiated name authority record from BAnQ is not deleted and needs to be modified at a later date, assign a Canadiana number to it if it does not already have one.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to facilitate machine processing of authority records (e.g., matching, linking), when only one identity is left on an undifferentiated personal name authority record (i.e., other identities are being&lt;br /&gt;
disambiguated and removed), take the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Create a new NAR for the remaining single identity. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ») and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.  The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. In the new record:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer the citation 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 note:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note  « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assure that the undifferentiated NAR only contains information relevant to the single identity remaining (e.g., 670s). If applicable, delete field 667 indicating that the record is undifferentiated.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add that information in the 667 note on the undifferentiated record to assure that a duplicate NAR will not be created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of differentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated LAC record''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New notice for the author of Histoire du département de la Manche:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation. Remained identify is for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number] $z [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of undifferentiated record derived from LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Esperanza:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the illustrator of Reptiles:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the illustrator of Reptiles :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008red/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example of an undifferentiated BAnQ record''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a [No Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;New notice for Christian Bergeron (Sociologue) :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1056D8391F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian $c (Sociologue)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : 1063E5020F.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'individualisation des épreuves de la vie dans la modernité avancée, 2013 : $b page de titre (Christian Bergeron; Doctorat en sociologie; Université Laval [département déterminé selon la discipline])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 $b (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation. There are two undifferentiated identities remaining in the entry:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1063E5020F [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add a 667 note to a new NAR to identify the Canadiana number of the authority record in which information about that person had been recorded:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Records coded as undifferentiated that actually represent only one identity ====&lt;br /&gt;
Occasionally an existing record will be coded undifferentiated, but new research indicates that in fact the record represents only one identity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may also happen that we suspect that the value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; has been mistakenly coded in field 008/32. In such cases, proceed as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 field to the undifferentiated NAR indicating that it has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a new name authority record for the identity. The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 note: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number..)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the note 667 &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated record that represents a single identity''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation  :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;New authority record after disambiguation&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [no Canadiana number, use OCLC number from undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F32 Undifferentiated personal name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/33 Level of establishment  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Provisional''' (008/33 value “c”) records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Code an NAR as provisional (008/33 value “c”) if the authorized access point cannot be formulated satisfactorily because of inadequate information. If the necessary information later becomes available, re-evaluate the NAR and upgrade it to fully established (008/33 value “a”). In no case should a provisional-level authority record be created with an access point that conflicts with an existing NAR according to PFAN normalization rules.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Special administrative regions of Hong Kong and Macau'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Because there is uncertainty about whether Hong Kong and Macau will continue to have two official languages, code all NARs for government bodies in these two places, at the level of the special administrative region and below, as provisional (008/33 value “c”), regardless of the language in which the authorized access point has been established. If a form in the second of the two official languages becomes available, add that form as a variant access point rather than revising the existing authorized access point. Consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] and the [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html related policy statement] for instructions on choosing the language of the referred name. Please note that this policy for provisional status does not apply to non-government bodies.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional information for PFAN participants'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN participants may also create provisional records in the following two exceptional situations:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library does not have the language expertise to establish the authorized access point as a fully established authority record; this would include situations where the library lacked adequate reference sources for research or where the cataloger was not confident of the correct grammatical form for the access point.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library is unable, due to limited resources or other constraints, to complete related authority work or to determine the appropriate reference structure that is required for fully established authority records.&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preliminary''' (008/33 value “d”) records:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Preliminary authority records (008/33 value “d”) generally are the result of retrospective projects. PFAN catalogers are expected to routinely upgrade NARs coded preliminary when making other modifications to the record. Because of this maintenance requirement, PFAN participants are asked to contact the PFAN Standards Committee before embarking on projects that may result in large numbers of NARs coded preliminary being added to the NACO Authority File.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;As needed, catalogers may upgrade NARs coded preliminary when working with earlier/later corporate body records, even if the access points in the records being upgraded are not used in the local bibliographic database. Occasionally catalogers may need to create a new NAR without having an item in hand, e.g., for an earlier or later name heading using information from reference sources, or a heading based on information found in field 245 subfield “c” of bibliographic records when resolving NAR conflicts. Do not code these occasional NARs as “preliminary”.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records&lt;br /&gt;
are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, series data elements should be viewed on the publication and series authority records should be coded “a” (full). In post-cataloging authority work it is permissible to create SARs without the piece in hand; these records are coded “d” (preliminary). When a publication in the series has been examined and the preliminary authority record reviewed and updated as necessary, upgrade the SAR to full level.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F33_Level_of_establishment|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Cataloging source ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever value is originally input into this field remains; do not change this value when updating a record unless the original value was incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas « blanc » pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou « c » (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a). --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F39_Cataloging_source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 National Bibliographic Agency Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 016 is mandatory whenever a cataloguer creates, updates or uses an authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an authority record, and when updating or using an existing record without a Canadiana number in field 016, first check the LC/NAF to see if the same entity is represented by an authority record, and if this authority record includes a Canadiana number. Note that the authorized access point, in the LC/NAF, may be different from the Canadiana access point.  If the LC/NAF record does include a Canadiana number, add this number to the Canadiana record, changing the final E to an F (or adding an F at the end of the Canadiana number, if there is no final letter). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When updating or using an existing authority record that includes a Canadiana number, please check that the language code F is present at the end of the field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Duplicates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not “reuse” a Canadiana number. Once an authority record has been created for a given entity, and once a Canadiana number has been attributed, do not change the data in this authority record to describe a DIFFERENT entity. For instance, do not change the authority record for “Dupont, Jean” to transform it into an authority record describing “Tremblay, Marie” (except if the person's name has changed). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, ask that the duplicate be deleted (see [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Procedures for duplicates]]). DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no field 016 in the record to be deleted, please add one, using the number 0000X0000F. Do not record this number in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
See also the “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Duplicates|Duplicates]]” section in this Manual, field 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, delete it. DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Partially modified batch-loaded authority records'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Batch-loaded authority records which are partially modified, according to the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]], will include Canadiana number 1111X1111F. This temporary number is added in order to allow the cataloguer to save the record, until such time as the entire record is evaluated to make sure it follows all PFAN standards. This number will have to be replaced by a unique number once the record is evaluated, when the 667 note “CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN” is deleted. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 International Standard Serial Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Record the ISSN whenever it is available from the item in hand, from analytic bibliographic records, or from the collected set bibliographic record for the series; otherwise, recording the ISSN is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it is known there are separate ISSN assigned to different formats of a series represented by a single SAR, prefer to record in 022 subfield $a the ISSN that is the linking ISSN (ISSN-L) for the different formats. Identify ISSN for specific formats in separate 667 fields, following this pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the title of a publication has changed, confirm that an ISSN appearing on the publication belongs to the new title and not to the earlier title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An incorrect ISSN can be given in a 667 field (e.g., “ISSN 1122-3344 is not a valid ISSN for this publication”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-11-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Other standard identifier =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the guidelines in [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf NACO Best Practices] for the 024 Field. As a general rule, limit the number of 024 fields in a NACO authority record to five. Do not routinely delete or change existing 024 fields when adding new ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are not required to maintain identifiers coded in the 024 field of PFAN authority records. When an 024 field is present in an authority record that is being reported for deletion (for example, in the case of a duplicate), catalogers should transfer the field to the record that is to be retained. When two authority records are being collapsed into one, and each record has a different 024 field, catalogers should include both 024 fields in the updated record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Coded cartographic mathematical data =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for countries, states, counties'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for outside limits (bounding boxes or polygons) should generally be used with larger geographic entities such as countries, states, and counties to identify the coordinates of the entity. The&lt;br /&gt;
coordinates may be recorded in either degrees/minutes/seconds, decimal degrees, decimal minutes, and/or decimal seconds. Styles should not be mixed in a single 034 field, but the field may be repeated to&lt;br /&gt;
represent the different styles (see below for conversion utilities); the order of 034 fields when both styles are given does not matter. To facilitate the reuse of coordinates in geographic applications, the point (not the comma) should be used as the decimal point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrees/minutes/seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees''': record in the form hddd.dddddd (hemisphere-degrees.decimal degrees)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees with plus ou minus''': record in the form +-ddd.dddddd (hemisphere[+/-]-degrees.decimal degrees) (“+” or N and E, “-” for S and W ; the plus sign is optional)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example with +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example without the optional plus sign)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal minutes''': record in the form hdddmm.mmmm (hemisphere-degrees-minutes.decimal minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss.sss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds.decimal seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for cities, towns, and townships'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for cities, towns, and townships should generally be recorded as center points rather than outside limits. For the 034 field, the longitude and latitude that form the central axis are recorded&lt;br /&gt;
twice to define the center point (i.e., the contents of $d and $e are identical, the contents of $f and $g are identical).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing degrees/minutes/seconds)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees with plus/minus)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Coordinate Conversion Tools'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN institutions are encouraged to provide both degrees/minutes/seconds and decimal degrees when available. Numerous conversion tools are available on the Web to derive one from the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 has been defined for recording the source of the coordinate information– codes for commonly used sources are available from: [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/cartographic-data.html ''Cartographic Data Source Codes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 citation to the source would not be required if the only information from the source is recorded in field 034; a 670 citation should be made if necessary to record information beyond coordinates, such as variant names, hierarchy, time period of applicability, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#034_Coded_Carographic_Mathematical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 System Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#035_System_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Cataloging source =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Language of cataloging'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $b fre added automatically by WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $d – Modifying agency'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $d [MARC 21 code] is added automatically by WMS when modifying NARs or SARs unless your institution's is already the last MARC subfield $d in the 040 field. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $e – Description conventions'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All new authority records created and submitted by PFAN cataloguers must have the code &amp;quot;z&amp;quot; in Field 008/10 and include the $e rda subfield in Field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding the subfield $e manually, add it after subfield $b and before $c. It is not necessary to move the subfield $e to this position if it is already present elsewhere in the 040 or if it is being added by a macro or a template. Subfield $e rda is automatically added by the system in NARs and SARs when fixed field 008/10 (Rules) is set to “z” (Other).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#040_Cataloging_Source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Authentication Code =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This field is found in all authority records used by LAC. Do not modify or delete this field when code CaOONL appears in field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers (other than LAC cataloguers) derive an authority record from an LAC record which includes field 042, they must remember to delete this field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the Canadiana authority file, cataloguers must add 042 $a nlc every time they create, derive or revise an authority record. This code identifies the “virtual” Canadian authority file, which is spread across two separate authority files (LC/NAF and Canadiana). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#042_Authentication_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Geographic Area Code &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 043 can only be used in authority records for geographical names (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield b – Local GAC code and Subfield $2 – Source of local code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For sites located in Quebec, PFAN participants can use subfield $b to record a local code from the list below, representing the administrative region of Quebec where the site is located. This code is formed by the geographic region code &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; and a two-letter sub-entity local code (e.g., qa) that identifies the administrative region and replaces the last two characters of the &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; code (e.g., &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot;). (e.g. &amp;quot;n-cn-qa&amp;quot;). Subfield $b is recorded after subfield $a and is followed by subfield $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#043_Geographic_Area_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Special coded dates =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: When encoding date information, give the fullest information about the date that is readily available (the date in field 046 may be more precise than a date used in the 100 subfield $d). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2nd_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;When&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; revising existing authority records, record dates in field 046 even if the heading itself does not have dates in 100 subfield $d, when the information is readily available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording dates in field 046, use the Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) schema in all cases except for centuries; supply dates using the pattern yyyy, yyyy-mm, or yyyy-mm-dd. See date table in [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html LAC-BanQ PS 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt; For the full EDTF specification, see [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophonist)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bryant, W. Blues around the clock [SR] 1945: $b label (Johnny Hicks, tenor sax)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Discogs website, May 27, 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; tenor sax player who performed with Tab Smith in the 1940s)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording B.C. dates in the 046 field, precede the digits by a hyphen (minus sign). Because there is no year “zero” in the common era calendar, subtract one year from the actual B.C. date, e.g., the year 50 B.C. is recorded -0049.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a century in the 046 field, use the first two digits of the hundred year span (e.g., use “16” to represent the 17th century, 1600–1699). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the 1st century A.D. is represented by value “00” and B.C. centuries have a hyphen &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;minus &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sign)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; before the digits (e.g., “-04” for the 5th century B.C.). An approximate century (e.g., active approximately 12th century) cannot be recorded in the 046 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Repeatability:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Field 046 is repeatable, but the 046 subfields used to record the dates are not repeatable. Generally, one 046 field with dates conforming to the EDTF schema should be sufficient. However, century dates follow the ISO 8601 standard, not EDTF. When recording century dates in addition to more precise dates, it is therefore necessary to repeat the 046 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Conflicting dates'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, resources consulted may present conflicting dates (e.g., conflicting birth or death dates for a person, or start or end dates for a corporate body). In these situations, the 046 field should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information. It is not necessary to record all the conflicting dates using field 046, nor is it necessary to give a 046 field for each resource consulted. Evaluation of the conflicting dates should generally result in a single 046 field, containing the date(s) the cataloger judges to be most accurate in representing the entity. At the cataloger's discretion, the date(s) recorded in that 046 field may incorporate the conflicting date information and need not correspond exactly to the date(s) selected for the authorized access point.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Similarly, any dates added to the authorized access point should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information, recorded in conformance with the instructions in RDA and the PFAN Policy Statements. If one date predominates in the resources consulted, that date may be considered the most appropriate to use in the authorized access point. If a single date does not predominate, the cataloger may decide to use the “approximately yyyy”, “yyyy?”, or “yyyy or yyyy” format in the authorized access point. In some cases, dates corresponding to the period of activity of the person (RDA 9.19.1.5) may be considered the best choice.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 157 B.C. as the approximate date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary. authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 1907 as the date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Same example as above, reflecting a different decision the cataloger might have made for recording 046 subfield $f)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Because the 046 field will be based on information from multiple sources, justification cannot be accurately expressed in subfield $v/$u at the end of the 046 field. The conflicting dates should be recorded in 670 fields. If an existing record has subfield $v/$u as 046 field justification, and the 046 field is being updated as described above, the subfield $v/$u should be removed, and the justification converted to a 670 field, if the conflicting dates are not already justified in an existing 670 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Uncertain dates resulting from date calculations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, a calculation may be required to determine which dates to record in the 046 field and the authorized access point. Such calculations may result in uncertain dates.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the consulted resources provide only the person's date of death and their age (in years) at the time of death, as often happens with obituaries, their year of birth will correspond to one of two consecutive years. To calculate those years, first subtract the age from the year of death, then use the resulting year plus its preceding year as the two alternatives for the year of birth.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger subtracted 75, the age at death, from 1994, the year of death; the resulting year, 1919, and the year preceding it, 1918, represent the two possible alternatives for the year of birth)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If non-Gregorian dates are found in consulted resources, uncertain dates may result from calendar conversion differences. Gregorian calendar dates are used in the 046 field and authorized access point. A single date in a non-Gregorian calendar may correspond to one of two Gregorian dates. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(The Hijri calendar date 1346 H converts to either 1967 or 1968 in the Gregorian calendar.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of date scheme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add subfield $2 edtf except after a century. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfields $q – Establishment date, $r – Termination date,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Start period, and $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Record dates associated with a one-time conference, etc., or a single instance of a&lt;br /&gt;
series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] and [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), use subfields $s and $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Use the establishment date  ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) and the termination date ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) of a series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]) in subfields $q and $r, if that information is known.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on using $s and $t for start and end periods in fields 368, and 370-376, see the instructions provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following represents PFAN practice on recording sources of information in $u and $v in fields where they are defined, and/or in field 670: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;670s must be used to support information used as part of a heading in 1XX and 4XX fields.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;For fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $v is optional if the same information/source is already cited in the 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use $v if the information/source is not cited in a 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $u is optional, and should always be preceded by $v&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Use a 670 field if needed to justify information recorded in other fields for which subfields $u and/or $v are not defined or defined differently. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the same basic citation principles when recording data in subfield $v (Source of information) of fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 that currently apply to field 670 subfield $a (Source citation).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Supply specific citation information (page number, sub-page of website) in subfield $v if, in the cataloger's judgment, this greater specificity is needed to find the information within the source cited. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information in fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 is in the same form as found in the source, there is no need to cite usage information. If the information recorded in those fields is in a different form from that in the source, use 670 $b (Information found). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For tangibles sources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information was derived from a tangible source (e.g., a print book, removable digital media) subfield $v should contain sufficient information for a cataloger to find the item cited in a catalog&lt;br /&gt;
or bibliographic database. This can usually be limited to title proper and imprint or date. If that combination is not unique, the title citation may be preceded by the creator's name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For online resources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide information sufficient to find the resource via a search engine. Include either title and publication date (if it is a formally-published resource, such as an e-book) or a suitable description of the&lt;br /&gt;
document and date accessed (for a less formal resource). Optionally include subfield $u. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-03)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Library of Congress Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#050_Library_of_Congress_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 LC classification number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used in personal name authority records to record LC classification numbers for individual literary authors, including authors of children's literature. It may also be used '''exceptionally'' in personal and corporate name authority records to record biography numbers in the ML410-429 range of the LC classification when the choice of index or cutter is not obvious. Field 053 must always include a $5 subfield.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class PS8000 numbers should not be recorded in field 053. For the use of PS8000 numbers in name authority records, see section 065 of this Manual. An authority record for a Canadian literary author may contain both a 053 and a 065 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Library and Archives Canada Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#055_Library_and_Archives_Canada_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Other Classification Number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 065 is used to record PS8000 class numbers. Field 065 must always include a subfield $2 and a subfield $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [MARC code of institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Number source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2, record &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; to indicate that the number comes from the PS8000 class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#065_Other_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 080 Universal Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#080_Universal_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Dewey Decimal Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#082_Dewey_Decimal_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Dewey Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#083_Dewey_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Government Document Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#086_Government_Document_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Government Document Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#087_Government_Document_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Headings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for any reason, delete a final mark of punctuation in the 1XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging&lt;br /&gt;
instructions (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: in order to minimize the impact of database maintenance with associated bibliographic records and/or related authority records, catalogers are urged to refrain from making unnecessary changes to 1XXs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN series practice: Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the title proper of a multipart monograph, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choosing a monographic series title proper:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has more than one form of series title, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has the series title in more than one language or script on the same source, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has series title pages in more than one language and or script, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#Consider spacing and changes in typography when determining where the series title begins and ends. Also consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Establishing an SAR access point:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Determine choice of authorized access point based on [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] and its associated LAC-BAnQ PS.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclude from the authorized access point the following information included in the series statement in the bibliographic record for the component part:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;initial article in subfields $a, $t, $n, and $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;other title information;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;statement of responsibility;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;parallel title(s);&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;numeric/chronological designations.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a parenthetical qualifier(s) if appropriate according to the guidelines in LAC-BAnQ PS 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on converting an existing NAR to an SAR, see Should an SAR be made? in the Introduction of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Heading - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for families'''&lt;br /&gt;
'''''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “3” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a family. See in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_Nonpublic_general_note|667]] section, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]], for subject usage instructions in NARs for families.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Additions to the name are contained in a single set of parentheses separated by colons.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# The term for the type of family is added after the name and is contained in subfield $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $d (date) follows the term for the type of family.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $c is used for place associated with family and follows the date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $g is used for prominent member of family. Give authorized access point for the person as found in the 1XX of the NAR without any internal subfield coding.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for persons'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “0” or “1” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] provides guidance for the placement of words indicating relationship (e.g., Jr.) and MARC defines subfield $q as “Forme développée du nom de personne.” When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Subfield $d (date) should always be the last element in a 100 string unless the term (Esprit) is being added to the name. Add $c (Esprit) as the last element in a 100 string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Example:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Generally add subfield $c before subfield $q when also adding words, numerals, etc. indicating relationship. (See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] for treatment of Portuguese names)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) For exceptional situations, such as when subfield $a contains only a surname or only a forename or the name includes a prefix, etc. consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2020-12-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#100_Heading-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Content Type =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 336 may only be used in NARs and SARs for expressions. 336 is always accompanied by a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2 give “rdacontent/fre.” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Content type term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use terms from [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html/view RDA 6.9.1.3]. The list of terms is also available in the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Content type code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If giving subfield $b instead of/or in addition to subfield $a, use the code from the MARC format [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#336_Content_Type|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Other attributes of person or corporate body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary for terms in subfields $a, $b, and $c, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a, $b and $c. When terms in subfields $a and $b do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record professions or occupations in subfield $c (Other designation). Profession or occupation may be recorded in field [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#374_Occupation|374]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record titles of royalty, nobility or religious rank ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) in subfield $d in the form used in the authorized or variant access points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#368_Other_Attributes_of_Person_or_Corporate_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Associated place =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For jurisdictions or other place names with authority records in Canadiana or, failing that, the form found in the RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. The form of place name in the 370 field may differ from the form of place name added to a preferred name of place or an access point per RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Authorized access point for the place includes type of jurisdiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name for the larger place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Other place name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no authorized access point for the place in Canadiana or RVM, it is not necessary to create an NAR in order to code the 370 field. Record the place in the 370 field following RDA and the LAC-BAnQ PSs, including consulting appropriate sources and adding additional elements (e.g., type of jurisdiction) to break conflicts. Do not add a subfield $2 if no NAR is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of the associated place has changed, the name of the place that applied in the time of the entity being established in the 1XX may optionally be recorded in place of, or in addition to, the current form of name. It is not necessary to follow subject cataloging policies to use the latest form of name only.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person born in the city of Calcutta before its name changed to Kolkata; cataloger has chosen to record the form of name that applied at the time the person was born)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person residing in the city of Milan during the Renaissance, prior to the formation of the modern country of Italy; cataloger has chosen to record the current form of name for the country)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For non-jurisdictions, prefer names from an authorized vocabulary such as RVM and identify the source in subfield $2. If the name is not found in an authorized vocabulary, record it in field 370 without&lt;br /&gt;
giving a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
When determining when to create a name authority record for a geographic name, consult the “Name Authority Records (NARs)” section of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1], Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary&lt;br /&gt;
source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfield $c – Associated country&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Generally, do not use subfield $c to record places that are not sovereign entities. Such places may be recorded in subfield $f or other subfields as appropriate.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Martinique is an overseas department of France)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if a sovereign entity has (or previously had) one or more constituent countries, any of the constituent countries associated with the 1XX may optionally be recorded in subfield $c in addition to, or instead of, the larger sovereign entity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Great Britain who has strong ties to Wales; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with the Soviet Union, particularly the Kirghiz Soviet Socialist Republic; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Aruba, a constituent country of the Netherlands; cataloger has chosen not to record the Netherlands)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with India prior to its independence from Great Britain; cataloger has chosen not to record Great Britain)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entity names of First Nations in Canada and Indian tribes recognized by the United States government as legal entities may be included in subfield $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Record the place of origin of the work in field 370, unless it is merely a place of publication or other place associated with a manifestation (use field 643, when appropriate, for the latter). Although the “place of origin” of a serial work may be the same as the place of publication of the component part for which the SAR (or serial bibliographic record) was created, use judgment in distinguishing between place of origin of the work and a place of publication not actually related to the work itself.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-24]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-22)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#370_Associated_Place|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Address =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice:&lt;br /&gt;
* Supply based on cataloger's judgment, if the information is readily available and not already being recorded in field 370 subfield $e (Place of residence/headquarters).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* In cases where subfield $a is not recorded, include at a minimum subfield $m (Electronic mail address) or subfield $b (City).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not record physical &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or e-mail&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; addresses for living persons.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Catalogers are not required to maintain address information when updating a record that contains an address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record multiple addresses, with or without ranges of dates, in separate occurrences of field 371.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Electronic mail address'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $m should contain only an e-mail address. Do not add an internet address for the 1XX in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#371_Address|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Field of activity =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM heading string for field of activity, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an entity from Canadiana for field of activity, remove any subfield coding not authorized for use in the 372 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point in Canadiana:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Field of activity in 372:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall&lt;br /&gt;
best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''372 fields with a term from RVM and a non-controlled vocabulary term'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#372_Field_of_Activity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Associated group =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the Canadiana or LC/NACO Authority File, recording the source in subfield $2. Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 373 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of an associated group has changed, record the group name(s) that applied at the time of the entity being established in the 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with subfield $2 and dates:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with different vocabulary sources:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Although the MARC format does not specify a form of date in these subfields, the following practice is recommended for consistency. Input dates using the Gregorian calendar in the form yyyy. If more specific dates are necessary, consider recording them in another field (e.g., 670, 678). It is&lt;br /&gt;
not necessary to reformulate dates in existing NARs to conform to this practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&amp;lt;!--(2023-06-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#373_Associated_Group|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Occupation =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.16.1.3 for instructions on recording profession or occupation as an element. See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.19.1.6 for instructions using a profession or occupation term in an access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Codes from either the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/occupation.html/view Occupation Term Source Codes] or the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/subject.html/view Subject Source Codes] lists may be recorded in subfield $2 for the 374 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#374_Occupation|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Gender =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not use this field in new authority records. Whenever an existing record must be changed for any reason, delete any occurrence of field 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Family information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Name of prominent member'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When giving the name of the prominent member of the family in 376 subfield $b, give the form for the person as found in subfield $g of the 100 field of the NAR for the family. Do not include any internal subfield coding in subfield $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start''' period and Subfield $t – End period&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Associated language =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer language codes over language terms, using codes from the Code List for Languages in MARC21.  Use subfield $l (Language term) only to provide information not available in the [https://loc.gov/marc/languages/language_code.html MARC Code List for Languages]. Encode multiple languages for a person or corporate body only if more than one language is used for publication, communication, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Optionally, record an ISO 639-3 language code (or codes) in an additional 377 field. This practice is especially recommended when an ISO 639-3 code will identify a language more specifically than the MARC code does. For more information, see the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of the code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 is not required when the MARC Code List for Languages is used as the language source code (second indicator value “#”). PFAN institutions may supply an additional 377 field from another language code list by using second indicator value “7,” with subfield $2 containing a code for a language source list taken from the list in [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/language.html/view Language Code and Term Source Codes]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(ISO 639-3 code for Achi (acr); assigned a collective code (myn) for Mayan languages in the MARC Code List for Languages)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#377_Associated_Language|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Fuller form of personal name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode the fuller form of name in the 378 field when this information is readily available, even if the same information is already present in the 100 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the Information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#378_Fuller_Form_of_Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Form of work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMGF, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on recording form of work as an element in a work-level series authority record, see LAC-BAnQ PS 6.3.1.3.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#380_Form_of_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Other distinguishing characteristics of work or expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used to record the RDA elements other distinguishing characteristic of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) and other distinguishing characteristic of expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Other characteristics of expressions that are unique to musical works (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4-6.18.1.6]) may also be recorded in the 381 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Franklin number recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Other distinguishing characteristic of expression of musical work'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some terms recorded for other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression may be appropriate to record in field 381 and another MARC field for which there is no corresponding RDA element. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a corporate body (such as a publisher) used as an other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression could be recorded in either the 373 field (associated group), the 381 field or both.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 381 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as associated group and other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA has no specific element for places associated with expressions, but field 370 subfield $f (Other associated place) and subfield $g (Place of origin of work or expression) may be used in authority records for expressions. Some places associated with works or expressions would be considered other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression in RDA and could be recorded in the 370 field, the 381 field, or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Places used as other distinguishing characteristic of a legal work; recorded in 370 and 381 fields)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the RDA element place of origin of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.6]) in a 370 field (see Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]] section).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When other distinguishing characteristic of work or other distinguishing characteristic of expression has been used in an authorized access point and is also being recorded as an element in a 3XX&lt;br /&gt;
field, use the 381 field to record the other distinguishing characteristic. Optionally, also record the same information in any other appropriate 3XX field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#381_Other_Distinguishing_Characteristics_of_Work_or_Expression|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 Medium of performance =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the medium of performance using thesaurus terms from &amp;quot;Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM (RVMMEM)&amp;quot;. Record the medium of performance by applying the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html RDA 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6], the associated LAC-BAnQ PSs. ''Note:'' The 382 field may also be used in authority records for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. If considered important for identification and access, provide an additional 382 that does not apply these guidelines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#382_Medium_of_Performance|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numeric designation of musical work &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available. Create separate 383 fields for different numbering schemes associated with a single work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#383_Numeric_Designation_of_Musical_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Key =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available for works. In case of doubt, do not encode. Do not encode for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Audience characteristics =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the intended audience of a work or expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. In particular, consult instruction sheet L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ##  $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvmt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a: If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term and term from a controlled vocabulary)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''or''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-10-14]&amp;lt;!--(2022-10-14)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Creator/contributor characteristics &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record demographic characteristics of one or more creators or contributors associated with a work or expression, in particular for characteristics common to a group of creators or contributors associated with a work or expression. The field will most commonly be used in authority records for collection aggregates embodying two or more expressions of two or more independent works by different agents, and for individual works named by title alone (e.g., works of unknown authorship; monographic series).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the draft Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html].  In particular, consult instruction sheet L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator and Contributor Characteristics, available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled demographic term)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While this field will be used primarily for aggregated works and for individual works named by title alone, there are situations when it will be appropriate for an individual work by one or more named creators. For example, for a musical work composed during childhood or adolescence, it would not be appropriate to record “Enfants” or “Adolescents” as a characteristic in the composer’s authority record. Instead, demographic characteristics applicable to only some of a creator’s works should be recorded in the authority records for those works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Work composed 2003-2005, completed when the composer was 14 years old)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014 $b page 4 de la couverture (Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled term and terms from one controlled vocabulary)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $i – Relationship information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, use subfield $i to record a term designating the nature of the relationship between the demographic groups recorded in the field and the work or expression. Prefer a term from a controlled vocabulary, such as the MARC relator terms, RDA relationship designators, or RBMS relationship designators. Capitalize the first letter of the relationship term and record it in the singular. Follow the relationship term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998- February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record multiple subfield $i’s in a single 386 field. If multiple relationship terms apply to a single group of creators or contributors (e.g., a work with authors and artists from the same demographic group or an expression with editors and translators from the same demographic group), repeat the field, using different relationship terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(A compilation of works by authors and artists from Massachusetts)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different relationship terms apply to some of the creators and contributors (e.g., authors are in one demographic group and artists are in another), repeat the field, using different relationship terms. If the same relationship term applies to more than one demographic group, either repeat subfield $a in one field, or repeat the field. For clarity, when in doubt, repeat the 386 field as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Score containing works by Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler, and Strauss, with lyrics also printed as text in German and English translation)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-11]&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Time Period of Creation =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the time period of creation or origin of a work or expression. The name of the time period may specify or imply a place for which the time period is relevant. It may also specify the name of an event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMFAST, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM subject heading string, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For compilations, the field may be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the works/expressions contained within the compilation, considered collectively (using first indicator value “1”). It may also be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the compilation itself (using first indicator value “2”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR for a collection of Renaissance poetry compiled in the nineteenth century)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 388 field may be used in conjunction with, or instead of, the 046 field. When specific date(s) of creation or origin are not known, or span a long period of time, recording textual chronological terms in the 388 field may be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the indicator value differs, repeat the field. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR with 388 fields containing terms from different vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-07] &amp;lt;!--(2022-11-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX - See From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for another reason, delete any final mark of punctuation in a 4XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging rules (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying NARs or SARs that contain obsolete codes such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all 4XX references require justification; see “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Justifying_variant_access_points|Justifying variant access points]]” in the 670 section of this document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not make a 4XX that normalizes to the same form as another 4XX on the same authority record or a 1XX on any name authority record. See the section “NACO normalization” in the [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf/view DCM Z1] Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice guidelines for RDA:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Record variants found in the manifestation being cataloged:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Use cataloger's judgment;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; No limitation on the number or form of references;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Instead of or in addition to adding variants, consider providing access by adding 37X fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Example showing 378 without a variant for the fuller form of name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Establish additional NARs for the authorized access points needed to support elements used in 4XX variant access points (e.g., parent body associated with subordinate body being established).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally provide a variant form 4XX access point for a former 1XX authorized access point, unless the former authorized access point was egregiously incorrect. See the section “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX$w|Subfield $w – Control subfield]]” for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Use the established form of components in 4XX variant access points, except for non-Latin script variants, which may represent a mixture of scripts or may be entirely in a non-Latin script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally, do not remove variants unless egregiously incorrect (e.g., a non-Latin script variant that does not represent the same person).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If a form found on the manifestation being cataloged includes a variant form of a component of a 4XX variant access point, that form may be used in its entirety as an additional 4XX variant access point, provided that it is not divided into its component parts through the use of subfields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When changing the form of a superordinate body, a geographic name, or a personal name in a 1XX, update all of the existing NARs that use that component in a 4XX, unless the 4XX represents the former authorized access point (e.g., $w/2=e). ''Exception:'' Do not apply this instruction in the case of migrated authority records that have not been re-evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point for a person (100) is changed because the person has changed his or her name, record the earlier form of name in a 400 with $w nne if the variant is valid under RDA instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Name changed upon election as pope)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When an authorized access point for a person (100) is updated to close the date, it is recommended to save the former form with the open date in a 4XX field with $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) based on CIP cataloging is changed because its form on the published resource is different from that on the CIP galley, a 4XX from the previous authorized access point form with subfield $w nne may be added unless the former 1XX form was egregiously incorrect (e.g., the author's date of birth was given as 1775 instead of 1975 in the CIP galley).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) is changed because of a change in cataloging instructions, record the earlier form in a 4XX using $w. If the variant form is a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nne. If the variant form is not a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA; 100 form changed based on usage and dates of birth and death added because 100 was being changed)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429  av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nnea&amp;quot; because the abbreviation &amp;quot;ca.&amp;quot; is not valid for period of activity in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When changing an authorized access point because dates were recorded inaccurately or a cataloger entered a typo in the authorized access point, do not add the inaccurate form as a cross reference.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, providing authorized access points for the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Variant access points may be recorded in any SAR, including those for series-like phrases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the volumes of a multipart monograph have different forms of the common title, use a 4XX reference rather than a 5XX reference for the form of the title not chosen as the title proper of the multipart monograph.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27] &amp;lt;!--(2024-03-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D |''Manual 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX - See Also From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying a NAR that contain codes that are no longer used such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d” or “f,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers applying RDA instructions may use subfield $i in conjunction with subfield $w code “r” for relationship designators. When applying RDA relationship designators in 5XXs, supply terms from Appendix I, J or K; capitalize the initial letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the use of relationship designators and/or $w codes in a specific 5XX field, see the section in this Manual for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the conventions in the authority format for use of subfield $w. Do not supply subfield $w unless a value other than “n” would be appropriate in one of the positions. When supplying subfield $w,&lt;br /&gt;
give it as the first subfield in the field. Supply character positions preceding, but not succeeding, the value, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = to indicate a reference from an earlier authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = to indicate a reference from a later authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = to indicate that a subfield $i or subfield $4 is used to denote relationship information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = to indicate a see also reference for multiple pseudonyms (record also contains a 663 field)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A see also reference tracing (5XX) must not normalize to the same as another see also reference in the same authority record, unless both 5XX fields contain a relationship designator in subfield $i, and&lt;br /&gt;
the texts of the relationship designators are different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500  See Also From Tracing - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” when providing relationship links between a personal name and 1) the name of another person, family, or corporate body or 2) the authorized access point for a work or expression. This technique may also be used to relate authorized access points for works and expressions containing personal names. When using a term from Appendix I, J or K in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording pseudonymous relationships for personal names when only two authority records are involved, catalogers may either 1) use subfield $i and code “r” in subfield $w or 2) use simple see-also references. For more information on these techniques and instructions on recording multiple pseudonyms (i.e., those involving a 663 field), see the [http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/pseud.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA Practice for Creating NARs for Persons Who Use Pseudonyms]. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are reminded that when a variant name (400) and an authorized access point (100) are in conflict an addition should be made to either the 400 or 100 to resolve the conflict (e.g., fuller form of name, date of activity, etc.); the previous practice of changing the 400 to a 500 to resolve the conflict is no longer an option. When catalogers encounter a variant form in a 500 field in the course of updating a NAR, they should resolve the conflict and change the field to a 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510  See Also From Tracing - Corporate Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511  See Also From Tracing - Meeting Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html BAC-BAnQ PS 11.13.1.8] for guidance on relating authority records for ongoing conferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530  See Also From Tracing - Uniform Title =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded &amp;quot;r&amp;quot; when providing relationship links between authorized access points for works or expressions. When supplying RDA Appendix J terms in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551  See Also From Tracing - Geographic Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” until relationship designators for places are developed. (Currently RDA has a placeholder for Appendix L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Series Numbering Peculiarities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#641_Series_Numbering_Peculiarities|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Series Numbering Example =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#642_Series_Numbering_Example|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Series Place and Publisher/Issuing Body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#643_Series_Place_and_Publisher.2FIssuing_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Series Analysis Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#644_Series_Analysis_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Series Tracing Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#645_Series_Tracing_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Series Classification Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#646_Series_Classification_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Complex See Also Reference - Name =&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 663 field contains the explanatory text and authorized access points for relationships between a 100 (established name) and other 100s (established names) that cannot be adequately conveyed by one or more simple see also references generated from 500 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, this situation occurs when a person uses more than two identities, when more than one person shares an identity with one or more others, or when multiple persons use the same pseudonym independent of each other or as a result of some other arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text of the 663 may be adjusted to fit extraordinary situations; however, keep the text as simple as possible, allowing the MARC fields and coding to convey the information desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use the 663 technique to show relationships between corporate bodies or between persons and corporate bodies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is found in the [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA and AACR2 practice for creating NARs for persons who use pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Only two identities ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When only two NARs are created for a person, the NARs are generally connected with 500 see also references and no 663 field. However, when one of the NARs is for a joint pseudonym or a pseudonym used by several persons working independently of each other, the 663 technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== More than two identities - &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; authorized access point and references ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more than two authorized access points are created for the same person, identify a “basic” authorized access point using the 663 field technique. This decision is based on the desire to simplify the reference structure and to assist catalogers in determining which name to use as the subject of biographical or critical works. The “basic” authorized access point should be determined by the predominantly used form of name or, lacking sufficient evidence, by choosing the real name of the person as the “basic” form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the authority record for the “basic” name authority record add 500 see also references with a subfield w coded “nnnc” from all other names used. Justify the 500 in 670 citations according to normal practice. Provide a 663 field listing all the other names with the following text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name] $b [established form of&lt;br /&gt;
name]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On each of the other name authority records, trace a 500 see also reference with subfield $w coded “nnnc” from the “basic” name, justifying that reference in a 670 citation, according to normal practice. Other names may be mentioned in the 670 if it is convenient to do so. Provide a 663 field with the following or similar text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name chosen as the basic heading]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the author uses another new name, create a new name authority record for that name and also add it to the reference structure and 663 listing on the authority record for the “basic” name. References to the new name in the 500 and 663 fields are only added to the “basic” NAR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Joint pseudonyms ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A joint pseudonym represents one identity used by two or more persons working in collaboration with each other. If a person uses a joint pseudonym and another name (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for joint pseudonym:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer.  Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on joint pseudonym NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on joint pseudonym NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonyms used by multiple persons ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When multiple persons working independently of each other use the same pseudonym and one or more other names (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for pseudonym used by multiple persons:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; NAR for first 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;(''Author has a pseudonym used by multiple persons and individual pseudonyms'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#663_Complex_See_Also_Reference-Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Nonpublic general note =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give information of permanent value and general interest that would be useful also to PFAN institutions and outside of PFAN. A representative listing of notes is given below. Generally, wording is recommended but not prescriptive unless specified in the instructions. The separate 667 fields may be given in any order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use OCLC record)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [reason for coding].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date updated].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Used for official language changes'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Appendice 1 in this manual for information and instructions about 667 fields added to authority records as part of a special project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for persons with identities not established ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a person uses two or more identities in manifestations, name authority records may be created for each identity. In the interest of efficiency, catalogers may use a 667 field to list pseudonyms not found in publications instead of creating NARs for these unused pseudonyms. In this case, list the unused pseudonyms in a 667 field following the phrase: “Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This note may also be added to an NAR for a person who has multiple NARs for multiple identities when some of the pseudonyms are not found in publications. In this case, list only the unused pseudonyms in the 667 field, and follow appropriate instructions for the other pseudonyms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is available in the manual, 663 section, and the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/ LC/PCC Practice for Creating NARs for Persons who use Pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for series of conferences, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 field on the NAR for the collective conference when there are authority records for both collective and individual instances of an ongoing conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs and subject usage ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply these instructions when creating new NARs and revising existing NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Add notes indicating subject cataloging usage when an authorized access point is not appropriate for use as a subject heading for these situations:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Heads of state, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This instruction applies to NARS for corporate bodies representing the office when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point for the corporate body. See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Government Officials)] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html RDA 11.2.2.26 (Religious Officials)] for instructions on the corporate bodies. Use this 667 note on the NAR for the corporate body to indicate subject cataloging usage:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [personal name heading].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value “n” in 008/11 and value “b” in 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|008/11]] and [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|008/15]] in this manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Earlier/later linear jurisdictional name changes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;politique d'indexation du RVM&amp;quot; is to assign as a subject access point or as a geographic subdivision only the latest name of a political jurisdiction that has had one or more earlier names, as long&lt;br /&gt;
as the territorial identity remains essentially unchanged (see &amp;quot;Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval&amp;quot;, 5.14.3.1). When creating a NAR with an earlier/later authorized access point for a place in in this situation, catalogers must add a 667 subject usage note to the authority record with the earlier place name and adjust the appropriate 008 fields (008/11 and 008/15).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NARs for fictitious characters'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access points for families are not valid for subject use. In an NAR for a family, 008/11 should be set to value “n” and 008/15 should be set to “b.” Per LAC-BAnQ PS 9.0, when creating an NAR&lt;br /&gt;
for a family add this 667 field noting subject usage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Add this note to a name authority record for a city section indicating that it is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision (see SHM H 835 for more information):&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) NARs for families&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Authorized access points for family names are valid for subject use. For family name authority records that reflect past practice (which considered them invalid for subject use), update the records to set the 008/11 values to “v” and 008/15 values to “a” and delete the following subject usage note:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Non-Latin script reference notes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In an authority record that contains a non-Latin script variant access point, use the 667 field with a note stating: “Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.” If there are multiple non-Latin script variant access points, use a note stating: “Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.” Assign 008/29 value “b” to indicate that the variant access point is not evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Duplicates ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add the following note to a name authority record that has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number from the record to keep&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#667_Nonpublic_General_Note|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Sources found =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of this field is to record information about the name or title represented in the 1XX field. It includes facts that contribute to the identification of the entity, that justify the choice of the name&lt;br /&gt;
or title and any additional elements used to construct the authorized access point (1XX). The information also justifies, as needed, variant forms of the name or title (4XX), other identifying elements (046, 3XX,&lt;br /&gt;
and 678), and clarifies relationships between the 1XX and other entities in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Functions of the 670 field:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information, from sources (e.g., books, phone calls, websites), in support of the choice and form of the authorized access point, variants, and other identifying elements&lt;br /&gt;
* To store information that may be used to break a conflict later&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information on relationships between entities (e.g., a person is the author of a work, a corporate body was absorbed by another corporate body)&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify a person with works in diverse subject areas or of diverse forms&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify different individuals whose access points must remain identical for now (i.e., undifferentiated personal names) &lt;br /&gt;
* To clarify whether different forms of a name or of a title are simply variations or reflect a  change in the name or title&lt;br /&gt;
* To record research required by the current guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
* To facilitate authority and bibliographic file maintenance, i.e., the information in 670 fields aids in making decisions about duplicate authorized access points and misattributions&lt;br /&gt;
* To support machine manipulation based on algorithms using information in the 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, the first 670 field cites the resource for which the authority record is being established, i.e., the resource being cataloged. If the resource being cataloged or consulted provides no information to&lt;br /&gt;
justify the authorized access point, variants, or other elements recorded in the NAR, see the 675 section of this Manual for instructions on citing the resource in a 675 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give subsequent 670 fields in any order, adding new fields after existing ones. Do not routinely delete or change existing 670 fields when adding new 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding subsequent 670 fields, prefer objective, authoritative sources (e.g., an encyclopedia) and those sources that provide firsthand information (e.g., an author's blog). Use sources that provide additional information rather than repeating information that is already present in other 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Best practices for 670 fields:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* In subfield $b, summarize and edit information found as needed to avoid extraneous or repetitive information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Avoid citing subjective information or information that is of dubious value in identifying an entity within a bibliographic context.&lt;br /&gt;
* Exercise caution when recording information about living persons that may be private or controversial in nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 fields in existing NARs may not conform to these guidelines. For example, 670 fields in older NARs may lack subfield $b with justifying information. 670 fields in NARs that were part of a special project may not conform to these guidelines and/or may contain information that seems unusual or incorrect. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' The examples given throughout the following text have various conventions in regard to punctuation and style. These conventions are not prescriptive and should be considered as best practices to facilitate the exchange of information in a shared database environment. Catalogers are expected to use judgment and common sense. Punctuation and style need not be consistent from record to record as long as the information is clear and accurate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format of 670 fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the exception of the eszett (ß or ſʒ) and the euro sign (€), all characters found in the [http://www.loc.gov/marc/specifications/specchartables.html MARC code table] are valid for use in authority records contributed to the Canadiana Authority File ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html voir LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). When pasting data from a website into a 670 field, verify that all characters are valid for use in the record. Some non-valid characters resemble those that are valid. For example, the invalid en dash (–) resembles the valid hyphenminus (-).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a substitution for a symbol that cannot be reproduced is given in brackets (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html LAC-BAnQ PS for 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS for 1.7.5]),  an explanation of that interpolation may also be provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data must be given in romanized form. Normally it is understood that the cataloger has provided the romanization; therefore, when transcribing romanization found in the source, add after it the bracketed&lt;br /&gt;
phrase ['''forme romanisée''']. In such languages as Arabic and Hebrew, where vowels are commonly omitted from the orthography of texts, the cataloger supplies the missing vowels when transcribing data. When&lt;br /&gt;
transcribing text that does include the vowels, add after it in brackets ['''vocalisé'''] or ['''en partie vocalisé'''] as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a cataloger chooses to provide nonroman script variant access points, the 670 $b should contain both the nonroman script transcription(s) found in the source, and the systematically romanized form(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When authority records are created using automated authority generation programs, additional information may be included. This data may also be formatted in a different way than instructed in this document. Generally, this data should be retained as generated to maintain the cost effectiveness of this process unless the data is confusing or causes validation errors. The exceptions to this are names and&lt;br /&gt;
titles for which NARs are created. Follow the instructions in those sections for recording this data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Source citation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The title proper of the resource being cited, complete enough for later identification in an online catalog. Abbreviations and ellipses may be used. Precede a generic or indistinctive title with the creator's name that would begin the authorized access point for the work. If the authorized access point for the work is the same as the title proper plus a qualifier, it may be provided instead of the title proper to avoid ambiguity. When information in subfield $a of a 670 field is provided to justify an authorized or variant access point, follow the additional instructions at ''Recording names and titles''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The date of publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Multipart monographs.'' If the part is the first part, give the date of publication as an open date.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Serials other than monographic series.'' Generally, use a chronological designation instead of a publication date. If there is no designation date, use the numeric designation and the date of publication. Indicate, following the designation statement, if a “surrogate” was used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Integrating resources.'' Apply the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] for source of the title proper of a website. Identify the iteration from which information was taken (e.g., “viewed on”dates for updating websites, update number or release number for updating loose-leafs).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Information found'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $b:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The specific location(s) of the information found. For multipart resources with numbered parts, provide the designation of the part and the location within the part (e.g., v. 6, page 10; map recto, label). Abbreviations or spelled-out forms may be used (e.g., t.p. or title page, v. 6 or volume 6).&lt;br /&gt;
# Information found. Following the location, cite the information found there, enclosed in parentheses. As appropriate, give multiple occurrences of information from the same source following the location of the information. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George ; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' If the authorized access point is built from Cataloguing in Publication data, include &amp;quot;CIP&amp;quot; in the location statement (e.g., formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Takao Tanabe, 2026 : $b page de titre du CIP de BAC (Sherri Shinobu Kajiwara) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Kajiwara, Sherri S.; personne associée au Canada et au Japon)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Internet resources.''' For websites, provide the name of the location within the website if appropriate (e.g., about us; history, timeline; government, executive branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Multiple locations within a resource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' When adding new information to a 670 field created for a CIP, indicate that the new information is from the published resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; personne associée au Canada) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; personne associée au Canada) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs.''' For NARs, generally, use “etc.” to avoid giving more than two locations or a sequence of locations (e.g., p. 316, etc., for sequence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs.''' For SARs, always give each location separately.&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' In post-cataloging authority work without the piece in hand, use the location “ressource non disponible.” If the piece is examined again and the authority record is updated, it is allowable to edit the corresponding 670 field to provide a location and additional forms of series titles as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions from the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may optionally provide a uniform resource identifier (URI) in subfield $u of the 670 citation to link to the cited resource if it contains significant information related to the established entity&lt;br /&gt;
that cannot be cited succinctly in the authority record. Note that use of a URI in the 670 $u does not take the place of the requirement to cite relevant data in subfields $a and $b of the 670 field needed to support the authorized access point (including additions) or variants (this information will continue to be available if the site changes or disappears). However, information found in online sources may be added to the 046 or 3XX fields with the appropriate citations in subfields $v and $u and not repeated in a 670 when that information is not used in the 1XX or a 4XX. If a URI is included in a 670, it must be given in subfield $u. The subfield $u should contain only the URI and no additional data (e.g., do not enclose the URI within parentheses and do not include words in the subfield $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording names and titles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record names or series titles used in the authorized access point or variant access points in full, as they appear in the source, without abbreviation by the cataloger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When preparing an authority record for the text of a law or a subject compilation of laws, if a source being cited contains an official short title or citation title, cite that title, preceded by the term&lt;br /&gt;
“citation title” and its exact location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For corporate name authorities, include in the data cited all the hierarchy required to justify needed variant access points, Use judgment in deciding what information (e.g., subordinate body's name) is extraneous to the record being created and should not be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all of the above categories, if the only presentation of the name or title on the chief source of information is in the bibliographic title given in subfield $a of the 670 citation, repetition of the name in&lt;br /&gt;
subfield $b may be omitted, provided no important information is lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If information about an earlier or later name or title is found in the same source as the name or title in the authorized access point, give all the information in the 670 field. Do not separate the&lt;br /&gt;
information about the earlier or later name or title in order to give it in a 675 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To facilitate international contribution and use of authority records, when recording dates, generally use the spelled out or [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abbreviated] forms for months. (For dates recorded using automated authority generation programs, see the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Format of 670 fields]] section of this document.) Do not change the style of dates in existing records. As a best practice, if a date is not included in subfield $d of the 100 field, consider adding a 046 field if dates are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying variant access points ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justify names or titles given as variant access points by information cited from sources. However, justification is not required in the following cases:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variant access points made on the basis of the cataloger's awareness of different romanizations or orthographies;&lt;br /&gt;
# A variant title derived from the resource being cataloged, from other resources cataloged under the same access point, or from information in standard reference sources;&lt;br /&gt;
# References for authorized access points of corporate bodies reflecting changes due to national orthographic reform, changes in names due to an official language change, or changes involving only a parent body to which the body being established is subordinate.&lt;br /&gt;
# Optional references from AACR2 or pre-AACR 2 forms on SARs and on retrospective NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying other elements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information recorded in the 046, 3XX, or 678 field of the authority record should generally be justified unless it is otherwise obvious from information recorded in subfield $a of a 670 citation or it can&lt;br /&gt;
be easily inferred from other identifying elements recorded, including the preferred name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the 046 field and many of the 3XX fields, a subfield $u or subfield $v recorded in the same field may be used instead of or in addition to a 670. See the 046 section of this document for guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
on subfield $u and subfield $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording other data ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data to record in the authority record. Do not abbreviate or translate attributes such as title of the person ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) that appear in conjunction with personal names in statements of responsibility and that potentially could be used as part of the access point. Other data may be abbreviated or summarized. Generally informally translate other data from foreign languages into English, paraphrasing or summarizing as convenient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data other than forms of the title/phrase to record in the permanent authority record. Numbering and names of issuing bodies are not required but may be given.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special types of citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most commonly occurring citations are listed below. If these are not appropriate, devise others as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When converting information found in obsolete or non-active MARC fields (e.g., 664, 665, 666) into a 670 note, cite Canadiana in a citation such as those provided in the examples below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date of conversion] $b ([data converted from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([data moved from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC and fichier interne de BAnQ [BAnQ internal file]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cite these files in zone 670 as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; usage: [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''NARs''. Give the date of the search, using month names or abbreviations. In parentheses, prefaced by the label '''point d'accès :''' or '''points d'accès :''', give the access point (or access points) found, even if it is the same as the current authorized access point. If it is judged useful to mention one or more variants found in an authority record, give them with the label '''variante :''' or '''variantes :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different forms of the name appear in the bibliographic records, record the access point and also any forms found, including usage identical to the authorized access point. Separate the access point from the other forms, and preface the other forms with an appropriate label, e.g., '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' or '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not normally cite specific bibliographic records or the exact location of the variations found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''SARs.''. Give the date of the search, using month abbreviations, followed by the citation of the bibliographic record. In parentheses give the series statement found in that record.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] LC/NAF has been cited previously under other names, e.g., Base de données LC/NACO and Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] &amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot; for bibliographic records refers to the transcribed forms of name usually found in statements of responsibility of bibliographic records. It may also appear in other parts of the bibliographic record such as a title proper or a quoted note. Because of changes in cataloging instructions, catalogers should be careful when taking information from the publication statement, distribution statement, etc. and the series statement.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (or «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») for bibliographic records refers to a form of the name that may not represent a transcribed form. For example, in AACR2 records, a publisher's name that appeared on the resource as “ABC Publishing Company” might have been recorded in the publication statement as “ABC Pub. Co.” Normally, there is no need to cite such a form in a 670 field..&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citing other files or catalogs.''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an access point is found in a manual catalog or online database, use judgment in creating a 670 citation. Begin the 670 field with a designation of the catalog/database in which these other bibliographic records were found. There is no prescribed formulation of such citations; examples are listed below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, , [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Geographical Names Database'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide the name of the database and the date searched in subfield $a. The name of the database may be cited as an acronym or in full. In subfield $b provide names given for the entity, feature designation or class (e.g., ADM1, PPL, civil) coordinates, and name of larger place if appropriate. (Other relevant information may also be provided.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the feature designation or class, it is acceptable to use either the code (e.g., PPL) or its spelled-out form (e.g., populated place). For foreign names, convey the name type (e.g., conventional, approved, short, etc.) within brackets or parentheses after the name. Repeat the brackets or parentheses after each name of this type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Variant names (including non-roman script names) may be given in a single listing as shown below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the coordinates, it is acceptable to use the DMS format (degrees, minutes, seconds), the DD format (decimal degrees), or both formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has opted to record the DMS coordinates)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The coordinates may be recorded as found. However, if the database displays the coordinates using colons to separate the DMS components and positive and negative values to convey the hemisphere, it is acceptable to translate the coordinates to traditional DMS format if desired. Use the degree sign (not superscript zero) to show degrees, the soft sign (modifier letter prime) for minutes, and the hard sign (modifier letter double prime) for seconds. For coordinates of latitude, a negative value corresponds to the Southern hemisphere. For coordinates of longitude, a negative value corresponds to the Western hemisphere.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has recorded the DMS coordinates as found)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has translated the DMS coordinates to traditional format from: -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, 22:53:01, 121:02:54; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Non-bibliographic sources'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the non-bibliographic source, the date, and the information. The source can be given specifically (« Lettre de l'auteur » , « Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur » , etc.) or in general terms (« Information de l'auteur » , « Information de l'éditeur » , etc.).  When noting a specific source, it isn't necessary to show how information was received, e.g, that letter was received via FAX rather than via mail. When a telephone call to a publisher/agency/organization is cited, usually give the name of the group called, rather than the title or name of the person contacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''Citations for republication SARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an SAR is for a republication only, begin the 670 with the term for the type of republication and a slash. Do not include a 670 for a republication if the SAR covers both the original and one or more republications. Do not add additional 670 fields for other types of republications cataloged later. (See 64X Series Treatment, Republications for more information about republications.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations for undifferentiated NARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on existing 670 citations found in undifferentiated NARs, see in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32 Undifferentiated Personal Name]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-19]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#670_Source_Data_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Title related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 672 field may be used to record a title that is related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in an authority record for a corporate body, 672 fields may be used to record titles for which the corporate body is a creator, issuing body, or subject. The primary purpose of the 672 field is to document that there is a relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 672 field does not negate the need to use the 670 field for the title for which the authority record is being created, nor to use the 670 fields to justify information recorded in the 1XX and 4XX such as preferred and variant forms of name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 672 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 672 fields when inputting new 672 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 672 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 fields with titles proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Cervantes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with preferred title)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with variant title for the work associated with the Catalan expression of the work and date of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Remainder of title'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a title proper, subfield $b may be used to record the other title information or parallel title proper to eliminate confusion for titles needing further identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains other title information)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains parallel title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $f – Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $f is used to record a date appropriate to the entity recorded in $a (e.g., use date of work for a preferred title and date of publication for a title proper). Do not use brackets in $f when recording a supplied date of publication or production. Do not give a date of distribution, date of manufacture, or copyright date in $f.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for work:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of  work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for expression:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of French expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for manifestation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of publication of manifestation of Polish expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Bibliographic record control number'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $w is used to record bibliographic record control numbers (e.g., 001, 010, and 016 fields in bibliographic records). It is recommended that catalogers provide $w when readily available. Subfield $w should be repeated for each instance of a separate control number (e.g., an LCCN and an OCLC record number should be provided in separate subfields). For further instructions on inputting record control numbers, see the subfield $w section within the CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MARC 21 Format for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' subfield $w should only be used with titles for the manifestation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Title not related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 673 field may be used to record a title that is not related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. For example, in an authority record for a person, the 673 may be used to record the titles of works written by a different person with a similar name. The primary purpose of the 673 field is to document that there is no relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 673 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 673 field does not negate the need to use the 675 field as described in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#675_Sources_not_found|675 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 673 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 673 fields when inputting new 673 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 673 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 673 field. For specific subfields in the 673 field, apply the same instructions given in the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#672 Title related to the entity|672 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961- &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with different Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)### 47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with the National Gallery in London)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT NOT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #4 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Although the National of Art is not the creator, it is the publisher so this title should be record in a 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-25]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#673_Title_Not_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Sources not found =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:''Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In April 2012 this field was redefined as: “Citation for a consulted source in which no information is found related in any manner to the entity represented by the authority record or related entities.” PFAN catalogers are not required to change any existing 675 fields simply to meet this new definition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a new NAR always cite the resource being cataloged in the 675 field if the item being cataloged provides no information related in any manner to the entity represented in the authority record. Also cite in the 675 field other sources consulted that contain no information, when that very lack of information is considered worth recording for future users of the authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, it is not always necessary to include in the 675 field every reference source consulted; use judgment in deciding what sources are important enough to retain in the permanent record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#675_Source_Data_Not_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Biographical or historical data =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When supplying biographical or historical data in a 678 note field, construct the note in concise but complete sentences, keeping in mind that the information will be used in public displays.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In anticipation of LAC building the file in WMS and the batch addition of authority records from other institutions, the contents of all 665 fields in LAC and BAnQ records have been moved to 678 field. The original 665 field may have contained instructions on the access point(s) to be used as author and subject heading :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec) ; Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec) ; Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec) ; Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Delete these instructions in 678 field if they have been retained. Consider adding a 667 field as a subject heading if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification of field 678'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, a 678 field must be justified by a 670 field. If it is not justified and its contents are appropriate for a biographical or historical note, retain the field and add a 670 note citing the internal file of the institution that provided 678 field as follows :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [ [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|abréviation de la bibliothèque participante]] ], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the record has been modified after being migrated, the record history must be consulted to determine who originally added zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Existing Field 678 which will be deleted as the content is not appropriate for a biographical note.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;670 field added:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not repeat this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#678_Biographical_or_Historical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Heading linking entries =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' This section does not apply to the 781 field used in 151 name authority records to provide geographic subdivision information. See Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#781_Subdivision_linking_entry|781 section]], for instructions for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of an established heading linking entry 7XX field in an NAR or SAR is limited to recording the authorized access point from a national bibliography or in a separate national authority file or a separate equivalence.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form of heading in a 7XX field may match the 1XX form or a 4XX form in the same authority record. This is appropriate when the 7XX field form represents a form found in a different authority file than Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source of the heading in the 7XX field may be specified using either second indicator value “7” with subfield $2 or a second indicator value that specifies the source. For access points coming from the LC/NAF file, prefer the second indicator with the value &amp;quot;0&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-17]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Subdivision linking entry =&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN optional practice:'' For a geographic name heading that may also be used as a geographic subdivision, determine the form in which the heading is to be used as a geographic subdivision following the guidelines in instruction sheet [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 of the ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Enter the text of the geographic subdivision form in a 781 field with second indicator 0. For a geographic heading that is used directly, such as a country, enter the data in a single $z subfield. For a geographic heading that is used indirectly through a larger geographic entity, such as a city, enter the data in two successive $z subfields. Use no other subfields. Make no changes to values in bytes of the 008.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a record for a geographic name heading that is not appropriate for use as a subject added entry (008/15 value Ab@), such as the earlier name of a jurisdiction that has undergone a linear name change, for example, '''Ceylon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a NAR for a place name that is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision, such as a city section, for example, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Add a 781 field to an existing record when making any other change to it. If revising an existing record that contains a 667 field subject cataloging usage note indicating the proper geographic subdivision form, delete the 667 field and replace it with a 781 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-11]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#781_Subdivision_Heading_Linking_Entry-Geographic_Subdivision|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 1: Undifferentiated entities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 2: Special projects =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This appendix presents information regarding some special projects involving authority records created or modified in the Canadiana authority file. The records created or modified within the context of these special projects may include some fields or some values not normally attributed according to current cataloguing policies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instructions regarding changes to these records are given here in order to indicate whether these fields and values are to be kept or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 1. Records created or revised as part of the UQAM records revision project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is an authority records revision project, led by UQAM. These records have been created or modified in Canadiana by UQAM's cataloguing “traitement documentaire” team. These records were then revised by two librarians and a library technician, also at UQAM. This project ended March 31, 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records may be modified, like any other name authority records, according to current cataloguing policies.&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers update these records, they should:&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the value of position Leader/17 to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (full record);&lt;br /&gt;
* Delete field 667 &amp;quot;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;quot;;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Evaluate the record as they would evaluate any batch-loaded record. However, as the record is being revised, the authorized access point may be modified, if it does not follow the current PFAN practices (for instance, birth or death dates may be added, if available and if omitted from the access point).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 2. Records created and revised as part of the Universities Mentoring Project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General Information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This mentoring project &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;that, as of February,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; allows university libraries to create name authority records that are revised by another university.  Authority records created or modified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;mentored libraries&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; are revised by library technicians &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;at the mentoring university.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abbreviation, e.g. UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;, etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records should not be modified.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15] &amp;lt;!--(2022-07-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145130</id>
		<title>PFAN - Name Authority Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145130"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T14:10:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by N. Mainville, LAC, )}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Manual}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Name Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Series Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Fixed Fields =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Descriptive cataloging code  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;All new name authority records created and contributed by PFAN catalogers must use code 008/10 “z” and include subfield $e rda in the 040 (Cataloging source) field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an existing NAR using code “a”, “b”, “c”, or “d” is modified in any way, evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA, changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1: If an existing NAR using code “c” is modified only to change or add a 5XX field, catalogers are strongly encouraged, but not required, to evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA,&lt;br /&gt;
changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2: Existing undifferentiated name authority records coded 008/10 “c” may be modified to remove one or more identities in order to create differentiated RDA authority records. When modifying&lt;br /&gt;
an existing undifferentiated name authority record for this purpose, the updated undifferentiated name authority record must retain the existing 008/10 code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F10 Descriptive Cataloging Rules|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Subject heading system/thesaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR 008/11 is set to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/11 value “v” (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/11 value “n” (Not applicable), representing past practice, change the value to “v.” In the Manual, see also 008/15 for instructions on changing that value to “a” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/11&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (Not applicable) to name authority records for corporate names representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point. Also assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; in 008/15, and make a 667 note indicating the form of the access point used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples of corporate names not appropriate for use as subject headings:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F15 Heading use-subject added entry|Manual 008/15]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]].&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created NARs. Make these changes also when modifying&lt;br /&gt;
existing name authority records for any reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F11 Subject Heading System.2FThesaurus|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Heading use-subject added entry ==&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;General&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; is set to &amp;quot;b.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/15 value “a” (Appropriate) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/15 value “b” (Not appropriate), representing past practice, change the value to “a.” In the Manual, see also 008/11 for instructions on changing that value to “v” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Background:'' For Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental&lt;br /&gt;
bodies, Religious officials, and Popes, descriptive catalogers may be required to establish an authorized&lt;br /&gt;
access point for the corporate name for the office as well as a personal name for the office holder. It is&lt;br /&gt;
subject cataloging policy to assign only the personal name, not the corporate name, as a subject access&lt;br /&gt;
point. This policy was established for collocation purposes (cf. [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
may be used in descriptive cataloging as an access point, but in subject cataloging only the personal name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
would be used as a subject access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; (Not appropriate) to name authority records for corporate entities representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the entry. Also assign value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; in 008/11, and make a 667 note indicating the form used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F11 Subject heading system.2Fthesaurus|Manual 008/11]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;NARs and subject usage.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Correct existing records when making any other change to the records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19]&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F15 Heading Use-Subject Added Entry|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Undifferentiated personal name ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== General === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use 008/32 code “b” (undifferentiated) in an RDA name authority record. Assign 008/32 value “a” for personal name NARs. Use code “n” for families, corporate bodies, and places. For works and expressions, assign value “a” if the access point begins with a personal name, otherwise assign value “n”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the past, personal name NARs could be coded as undifferentiated using 008/32 value “b” when the cataloger had no acceptable way of differentiating multiple persons with the same preferred name. Since then, PFAN have followed these guidelines for personal name NARs:&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not create new undifferentiated records coded 008/32 “b”. All personal name authority records coded RDA should be differentiated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not add a new identity to an existing personal name authority record coded 008/32 “b.”&lt;br /&gt;
* Instead, apply [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] to create a unique authorized access point for the person, using suitable additional elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' If the only record found for an entity is an undifferentiated record (with field 008/32 coded &amp;quot;b&amp;quot;) from a university with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN », do not use it.  Create a new authority record for the entity.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated record to LAC by emailing the OCLC control number to pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca with the subject line: Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may happen that an existing undifferentiated name authority record, especially one that has been imported from LC/NAF, contains pairs of 670 fields used to group information about each individual covered by the NAR. The first 670 in the pair is an “identifying” 670 field containing a term descriptive of the person's relationship to the title cited in the second 670 of the pair. The data in the identifying 670 field is contained in subfield $a and enclosed in square brackets. The second 670 in the pair is a “citation” 670 that contains the normal data elements in a resource being cataloged citation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Added entry for Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Editor of Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, an existing undifferentiated name authority record may include a 667 note indicating that the record is undifferentiated and identifying the resource(s) associated with other persons with the same name. In this case, the record generally does not include 670 fields for persons other than the first one identified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When information is found to distinguish a person in an existing undifferentiated from LAC or BAnQ name record:&lt;br /&gt;
* Always create a new name authority record for that person, with distinguishing information, and add an indication that the person was formerly on an undifferentiated record (see &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_notes_on_records_for_identities_previously_on_undifferentiated_records|667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records]]&amp;quot; below). If an authority record already exists for that person with the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer the &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;citation&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not transfer the “identifying” 670 to the new NAR.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the undifferentiated NAR is not being deleted because multiple identities remain, delete the pair of 670 fields pertaining to the newly created NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(i.e., in the undifferentiated NAR, delete both the &amp;quot;identifying&amp;quot; 670 and the &amp;quot;citation&amp;quot; 670)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If more than one identity remains in the undifferentiated NAR, and there is not sufficient information in the NAR to create new NARs for each name, leave the NAR coded AACR2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to facilitate machine processing of authority records (e.g., matching, linking), when only one identity is left on an undifferentiated personal name authority record (i.e., other identities are being&lt;br /&gt;
disambiguated and removed), take the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Create a new NAR for the remaining single identity. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ») and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.  The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. In the new record:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer the citation 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 note:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note  « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assure that the undifferentiated NAR only contains information relevant to the single identity remaining (e.g., 670s). If applicable, delete field 667 indicating that the record is undifferentiated.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add that information in the 667 note on the undifferentiated record to assure that a duplicate NAR will not be created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of differentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated LAC record''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New notice for the author of Histoire du département de la Manche:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation. Remained identify is for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number] $z [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of undifferentiated record derived from LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Esperanza:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the illustrator of Reptiles:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the illustrator of Reptiles :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008red/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example of an undifferentiated BAnQ record''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a [No Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;New notice for Christian Bergeron (Sociologue) :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1056D8391F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian $c (Sociologue)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : 1063E5020F.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'individualisation des épreuves de la vie dans la modernité avancée, 2013 : $b page de titre (Christian Bergeron; Doctorat en sociologie; Université Laval [département déterminé selon la discipline])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 $b (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation. There are two undifferentiated identities remaining in the entry:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1063E5020F [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add a 667 note to a new NAR to identify the Canadiana number of the authority record in which information about that person had been recorded:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Records coded as undifferentiated that actually represent only one identity ====&lt;br /&gt;
Occasionally an existing record will be coded undifferentiated, but new research indicates that in fact the record represents only one identity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may also happen that we suspect that the value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; has been mistakenly coded in field 008/32. In such cases, proceed as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 field to the undifferentiated NAR indicating that it has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a new name authority record for the identity. The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 note: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number..)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the note 667 &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated record that represents a single identity''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation  :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;New authority record after disambiguation&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [no Canadiana number, use OCLC number from undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F32 Undifferentiated personal name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/33 Level of establishment  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Provisional''' (008/33 value “c”) records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Code an NAR as provisional (008/33 value “c”) if the authorized access point cannot be formulated satisfactorily because of inadequate information. If the necessary information later becomes available, re-evaluate the NAR and upgrade it to fully established (008/33 value “a”). In no case should a provisional-level authority record be created with an access point that conflicts with an existing NAR according to PFAN normalization rules.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Special administrative regions of Hong Kong and Macau'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Because there is uncertainty about whether Hong Kong and Macau will continue to have two official languages, code all NARs for government bodies in these two places, at the level of the special administrative region and below, as provisional (008/33 value “c”), regardless of the language in which the authorized access point has been established. If a form in the second of the two official languages becomes available, add that form as a variant access point rather than revising the existing authorized access point. Consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] and the [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html related policy statement] for instructions on choosing the language of the referred name. Please note that this policy for provisional status does not apply to non-government bodies.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional information for PFAN participants'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN participants may also create provisional records in the following two exceptional situations:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library does not have the language expertise to establish the authorized access point as a fully established authority record; this would include situations where the library lacked adequate reference sources for research or where the cataloger was not confident of the correct grammatical form for the access point.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library is unable, due to limited resources or other constraints, to complete related authority work or to determine the appropriate reference structure that is required for fully established authority records.&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preliminary''' (008/33 value “d”) records:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Preliminary authority records (008/33 value “d”) generally are the result of retrospective projects. PFAN catalogers are expected to routinely upgrade NARs coded preliminary when making other modifications to the record. Because of this maintenance requirement, PFAN participants are asked to contact the PFAN Standards Committee before embarking on projects that may result in large numbers of NARs coded preliminary being added to the NACO Authority File.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;As needed, catalogers may upgrade NARs coded preliminary when working with earlier/later corporate body records, even if the access points in the records being upgraded are not used in the local bibliographic database. Occasionally catalogers may need to create a new NAR without having an item in hand, e.g., for an earlier or later name heading using information from reference sources, or a heading based on information found in field 245 subfield “c” of bibliographic records when resolving NAR conflicts. Do not code these occasional NARs as “preliminary”.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records&lt;br /&gt;
are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, series data elements should be viewed on the publication and series authority records should be coded “a” (full). In post-cataloging authority work it is permissible to create SARs without the piece in hand; these records are coded “d” (preliminary). When a publication in the series has been examined and the preliminary authority record reviewed and updated as necessary, upgrade the SAR to full level.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F33_Level_of_establishment|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Cataloging source ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever value is originally input into this field remains; do not change this value when updating a record unless the original value was incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas « blanc » pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou « c » (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a). --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F39_Cataloging_source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 National Bibliographic Agency Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 016 is mandatory whenever a cataloguer creates, updates or uses an authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an authority record, and when updating or using an existing record without a Canadiana number in field 016, first check the LC/NAF to see if the same entity is represented by an authority record, and if this authority record includes a Canadiana number. Note that the authorized access point, in the LC/NAF, may be different from the Canadiana access point.  If the LC/NAF record does include a Canadiana number, add this number to the Canadiana record, changing the final E to an F (or adding an F at the end of the Canadiana number, if there is no final letter). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When updating or using an existing authority record that includes a Canadiana number, please check that the language code F is present at the end of the field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Duplicates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not “reuse” a Canadiana number. Once an authority record has been created for a given entity, and once a Canadiana number has been attributed, do not change the data in this authority record to describe a DIFFERENT entity. For instance, do not change the authority record for “Dupont, Jean” to transform it into an authority record describing “Tremblay, Marie” (except if the person's name has changed). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, ask that the duplicate be deleted (see [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Procedures for duplicates]]). DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no field 016 in the record to be deleted, please add one, using the number 0000X0000F. Do not record this number in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
See also the “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Duplicates|Duplicates]]” section in this Manual, field 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, delete it. DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Partially modified batch-loaded authority records'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Batch-loaded authority records which are partially modified, according to the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]], will include Canadiana number 1111X1111F. This temporary number is added in order to allow the cataloguer to save the record, until such time as the entire record is evaluated to make sure it follows all PFAN standards. This number will have to be replaced by a unique number once the record is evaluated, when the 667 note “CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN” is deleted. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 International Standard Serial Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Record the ISSN whenever it is available from the item in hand, from analytic bibliographic records, or from the collected set bibliographic record for the series; otherwise, recording the ISSN is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it is known there are separate ISSN assigned to different formats of a series represented by a single SAR, prefer to record in 022 subfield $a the ISSN that is the linking ISSN (ISSN-L) for the different formats. Identify ISSN for specific formats in separate 667 fields, following this pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the title of a publication has changed, confirm that an ISSN appearing on the publication belongs to the new title and not to the earlier title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An incorrect ISSN can be given in a 667 field (e.g., “ISSN 1122-3344 is not a valid ISSN for this publication”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-11-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Other standard identifier =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the guidelines in [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf NACO Best Practices] for the 024 Field. As a general rule, limit the number of 024 fields in a NACO authority record to five. Do not routinely delete or change existing 024 fields when adding new ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are not required to maintain identifiers coded in the 024 field of PFAN authority records. When an 024 field is present in an authority record that is being reported for deletion (for example, in the case of a duplicate), catalogers should transfer the field to the record that is to be retained. When two authority records are being collapsed into one, and each record has a different 024 field, catalogers should include both 024 fields in the updated record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Coded cartographic mathematical data =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for countries, states, counties'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for outside limits (bounding boxes or polygons) should generally be used with larger geographic entities such as countries, states, and counties to identify the coordinates of the entity. The&lt;br /&gt;
coordinates may be recorded in either degrees/minutes/seconds, decimal degrees, decimal minutes, and/or decimal seconds. Styles should not be mixed in a single 034 field, but the field may be repeated to&lt;br /&gt;
represent the different styles (see below for conversion utilities); the order of 034 fields when both styles are given does not matter. To facilitate the reuse of coordinates in geographic applications, the point (not the comma) should be used as the decimal point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrees/minutes/seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees''': record in the form hddd.dddddd (hemisphere-degrees.decimal degrees)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees with plus ou minus''': record in the form +-ddd.dddddd (hemisphere[+/-]-degrees.decimal degrees) (“+” or N and E, “-” for S and W ; the plus sign is optional)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example with +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example without the optional plus sign)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal minutes''': record in the form hdddmm.mmmm (hemisphere-degrees-minutes.decimal minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss.sss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds.decimal seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for cities, towns, and townships'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for cities, towns, and townships should generally be recorded as center points rather than outside limits. For the 034 field, the longitude and latitude that form the central axis are recorded&lt;br /&gt;
twice to define the center point (i.e., the contents of $d and $e are identical, the contents of $f and $g are identical).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing degrees/minutes/seconds)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees with plus/minus)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Coordinate Conversion Tools'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN institutions are encouraged to provide both degrees/minutes/seconds and decimal degrees when available. Numerous conversion tools are available on the Web to derive one from the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 has been defined for recording the source of the coordinate information– codes for commonly used sources are available from: [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/cartographic-data.html ''Cartographic Data Source Codes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 citation to the source would not be required if the only information from the source is recorded in field 034; a 670 citation should be made if necessary to record information beyond coordinates, such as variant names, hierarchy, time period of applicability, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#034_Coded_Carographic_Mathematical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 System Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#035_System_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Cataloging source =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Language of cataloging'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $b fre added automatically by WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $d – Modifying agency'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $d [MARC 21 code] is added automatically by WMS when modifying NARs or SARs unless your institution's is already the last MARC subfield $d in the 040 field. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $e – Description conventions'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All new authority records created and submitted by PFAN cataloguers must have the code &amp;quot;z&amp;quot; in Field 008/10 and include the $e rda subfield in Field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding the subfield $e manually, add it after subfield $b and before $c. It is not necessary to move the subfield $e to this position if it is already present elsewhere in the 040 or if it is being added by a macro or a template. Subfield $e rda is automatically added by the system in NARs and SARs when fixed field 008/10 (Rules) is set to “z” (Other).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#040_Cataloging_Source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Authentication Code =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This field is found in all authority records used by LAC. Do not modify or delete this field when code CaOONL appears in field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers (other than LAC cataloguers) derive an authority record from an LAC record which includes field 042, they must remember to delete this field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the Canadiana authority file, cataloguers must add 042 $a nlc every time they create, derive or revise an authority record. This code identifies the “virtual” Canadian authority file, which is spread across two separate authority files (LC/NAF and Canadiana). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#042_Authentication_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Geographic Area Code &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 043 can only be used in authority records for geographical names (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield b – Local GAC code and Subfield $2 – Source of local code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For sites located in Quebec, PFAN participants can use subfield $b to record a local code from the list below, representing the administrative region of Quebec where the site is located. This code is formed by the geographic region code &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; and a two-letter sub-entity local code (e.g., qa) that identifies the administrative region and replaces the last two characters of the &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; code (e.g., &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot;). (e.g. &amp;quot;n-cn-qa&amp;quot;). Subfield $b is recorded after subfield $a and is followed by subfield $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#043_Geographic_Area_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Special coded dates =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: When encoding date information, give the fullest information about the date that is readily available (the date in field 046 may be more precise than a date used in the 100 subfield $d). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2nd_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;When&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; revising existing authority records, record dates in field 046 even if the heading itself does not have dates in 100 subfield $d, when the information is readily available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording dates in field 046, use the Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) schema in all cases except for centuries; supply dates using the pattern yyyy, yyyy-mm, or yyyy-mm-dd. See date table in [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html LAC-BanQ PS 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt; For the full EDTF specification, see [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophonist)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bryant, W. Blues around the clock [SR] 1945: $b label (Johnny Hicks, tenor sax)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Discogs website, May 27, 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; tenor sax player who performed with Tab Smith in the 1940s)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording B.C. dates in the 046 field, precede the digits by a hyphen (minus sign). Because there is no year “zero” in the common era calendar, subtract one year from the actual B.C. date, e.g., the year 50 B.C. is recorded -0049.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a century in the 046 field, use the first two digits of the hundred year span (e.g., use “16” to represent the 17th century, 1600–1699). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the 1st century A.D. is represented by value “00” and B.C. centuries have a hyphen &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;minus &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sign)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; before the digits (e.g., “-04” for the 5th century B.C.). An approximate century (e.g., active approximately 12th century) cannot be recorded in the 046 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Repeatability:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Field 046 is repeatable, but the 046 subfields used to record the dates are not repeatable. Generally, one 046 field with dates conforming to the EDTF schema should be sufficient. However, century dates follow the ISO 8601 standard, not EDTF. When recording century dates in addition to more precise dates, it is therefore necessary to repeat the 046 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Conflicting dates'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, resources consulted may present conflicting dates (e.g., conflicting birth or death dates for a person, or start or end dates for a corporate body). In these situations, the 046 field should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information. It is not necessary to record all the conflicting dates using field 046, nor is it necessary to give a 046 field for each resource consulted. Evaluation of the conflicting dates should generally result in a single 046 field, containing the date(s) the cataloger judges to be most accurate in representing the entity. At the cataloger's discretion, the date(s) recorded in that 046 field may incorporate the conflicting date information and need not correspond exactly to the date(s) selected for the authorized access point.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Similarly, any dates added to the authorized access point should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information, recorded in conformance with the instructions in RDA and the PFAN Policy Statements. If one date predominates in the resources consulted, that date may be considered the most appropriate to use in the authorized access point. If a single date does not predominate, the cataloger may decide to use the “approximately yyyy”, “yyyy?”, or “yyyy or yyyy” format in the authorized access point. In some cases, dates corresponding to the period of activity of the person (RDA 9.19.1.5) may be considered the best choice.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 157 B.C. as the approximate date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary. authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 1907 as the date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Same example as above, reflecting a different decision the cataloger might have made for recording 046 subfield $f)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Because the 046 field will be based on information from multiple sources, justification cannot be accurately expressed in subfield $v/$u at the end of the 046 field. The conflicting dates should be recorded in 670 fields. If an existing record has subfield $v/$u as 046 field justification, and the 046 field is being updated as described above, the subfield $v/$u should be removed, and the justification converted to a 670 field, if the conflicting dates are not already justified in an existing 670 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Uncertain dates resulting from date calculations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, a calculation may be required to determine which dates to record in the 046 field and the authorized access point. Such calculations may result in uncertain dates.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the consulted resources provide only the person's date of death and their age (in years) at the time of death, as often happens with obituaries, their year of birth will correspond to one of two consecutive years. To calculate those years, first subtract the age from the year of death, then use the resulting year plus its preceding year as the two alternatives for the year of birth.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger subtracted 75, the age at death, from 1994, the year of death; the resulting year, 1919, and the year preceding it, 1918, represent the two possible alternatives for the year of birth)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If non-Gregorian dates are found in consulted resources, uncertain dates may result from calendar conversion differences. Gregorian calendar dates are used in the 046 field and authorized access point. A single date in a non-Gregorian calendar may correspond to one of two Gregorian dates. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(The Hijri calendar date 1346 H converts to either 1967 or 1968 in the Gregorian calendar.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of date scheme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add subfield $2 edtf except after a century. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfields $q – Establishment date, $r – Termination date,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Start period, and $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Record dates associated with a one-time conference, etc., or a single instance of a&lt;br /&gt;
series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] and [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), use subfields $s and $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Use the establishment date  ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) and the termination date ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) of a series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]) in subfields $q and $r, if that information is known.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on using $s and $t for start and end periods in fields 368, and 370-376, see the instructions provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following represents PFAN practice on recording sources of information in $u and $v in fields where they are defined, and/or in field 670: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;670s must be used to support information used as part of a heading in 1XX and 4XX fields.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;For fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $v is optional if the same information/source is already cited in the 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use $v if the information/source is not cited in a 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $u is optional, and should always be preceded by $v&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Use a 670 field if needed to justify information recorded in other fields for which subfields $u and/or $v are not defined or defined differently. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the same basic citation principles when recording data in subfield $v (Source of information) of fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 that currently apply to field 670 subfield $a (Source citation).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Supply specific citation information (page number, sub-page of website) in subfield $v if, in the cataloger's judgment, this greater specificity is needed to find the information within the source cited. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information in fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 is in the same form as found in the source, there is no need to cite usage information. If the information recorded in those fields is in a different form from that in the source, use 670 $b (Information found). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For tangibles sources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information was derived from a tangible source (e.g., a print book, removable digital media) subfield $v should contain sufficient information for a cataloger to find the item cited in a catalog&lt;br /&gt;
or bibliographic database. This can usually be limited to title proper and imprint or date. If that combination is not unique, the title citation may be preceded by the creator's name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For online resources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide information sufficient to find the resource via a search engine. Include either title and publication date (if it is a formally-published resource, such as an e-book) or a suitable description of the&lt;br /&gt;
document and date accessed (for a less formal resource). Optionally include subfield $u. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-03)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Library of Congress Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#050_Library_of_Congress_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 LC classification number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used in personal name authority records to record LC classification numbers for individual literary authors, including authors of children's literature. It may also be used '''exceptionally'' in personal and corporate name authority records to record biography numbers in the ML410-429 range of the LC classification when the choice of index or cutter is not obvious. Field 053 must always include a $5 subfield.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class PS8000 numbers should not be recorded in field 053. For the use of PS8000 numbers in name authority records, see section 065 of this Manual. An authority record for a Canadian literary author may contain both a 053 and a 065 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Library and Archives Canada Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#055_Library_and_Archives_Canada_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Other Classification Number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 065 is used to record PS8000 class numbers. Field 065 must always include a subfield $2 and a subfield $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [MARC code of institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Number source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2, record &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; to indicate that the number comes from the PS8000 class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#065_Other_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 080 Universal Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#080_Universal_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Dewey Decimal Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#082_Dewey_Decimal_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Dewey Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#083_Dewey_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Government Document Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#086_Government_Document_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Government Document Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#087_Government_Document_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Headings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for any reason, delete a final mark of punctuation in the 1XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging&lt;br /&gt;
instructions (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: in order to minimize the impact of database maintenance with associated bibliographic records and/or related authority records, catalogers are urged to refrain from making unnecessary changes to 1XXs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN series practice: Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the title proper of a multipart monograph, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choosing a monographic series title proper:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has more than one form of series title, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has the series title in more than one language or script on the same source, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has series title pages in more than one language and or script, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#Consider spacing and changes in typography when determining where the series title begins and ends. Also consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Establishing an SAR access point:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Determine choice of authorized access point based on [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] and its associated LAC-BAnQ PS.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclude from the authorized access point the following information included in the series statement in the bibliographic record for the component part:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;initial article in subfields $a, $t, $n, and $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;other title information;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;statement of responsibility;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;parallel title(s);&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;numeric/chronological designations.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a parenthetical qualifier(s) if appropriate according to the guidelines in LAC-BAnQ PS 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on converting an existing NAR to an SAR, see Should an SAR be made? in the Introduction of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Heading - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for families'''&lt;br /&gt;
'''''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “3” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a family. See in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_Nonpublic_general_note|667]] section, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]], for subject usage instructions in NARs for families.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Additions to the name are contained in a single set of parentheses separated by colons.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# The term for the type of family is added after the name and is contained in subfield $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $d (date) follows the term for the type of family.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $c is used for place associated with family and follows the date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $g is used for prominent member of family. Give authorized access point for the person as found in the 1XX of the NAR without any internal subfield coding.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for persons'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “0” or “1” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] provides guidance for the placement of words indicating relationship (e.g., Jr.) and MARC defines subfield $q as “Forme développée du nom de personne.” When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Subfield $d (date) should always be the last element in a 100 string unless the term (Esprit) is being added to the name. Add $c (Esprit) as the last element in a 100 string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Example:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Generally add subfield $c before subfield $q when also adding words, numerals, etc. indicating relationship. (See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] for treatment of Portuguese names)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) For exceptional situations, such as when subfield $a contains only a surname or only a forename or the name includes a prefix, etc. consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2020-12-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#100_Heading-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Content Type =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 336 may only be used in NARs and SARs for expressions. 336 is always accompanied by a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2 give “rdacontent/fre.” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Content type term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use terms from [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html/view RDA 6.9.1.3]. The list of terms is also available in the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Content type code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If giving subfield $b instead of/or in addition to subfield $a, use the code from the MARC format [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#336_Content_Type|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Other attributes of person or corporate body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary for terms in subfields $a, $b, and $c, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a, $b and $c. When terms in subfields $a and $b do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record professions or occupations in subfield $c (Other designation). Profession or occupation may be recorded in field [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#374_Occupation|374]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record titles of royalty, nobility or religious rank ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) in subfield $d in the form used in the authorized or variant access points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#368_Other_Attributes_of_Person_or_Corporate_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Associated place =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For jurisdictions or other place names with authority records in Canadiana or, failing that, the form found in the RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. The form of place name in the 370 field may differ from the form of place name added to a preferred name of place or an access point per RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Authorized access point for the place includes type of jurisdiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name for the larger place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Other place name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no authorized access point for the place in Canadiana or RVM, it is not necessary to create an NAR in order to code the 370 field. Record the place in the 370 field following RDA and the LAC-BAnQ PSs, including consulting appropriate sources and adding additional elements (e.g., type of jurisdiction) to break conflicts. Do not add a subfield $2 if no NAR is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of the associated place has changed, the name of the place that applied in the time of the entity being established in the 1XX may optionally be recorded in place of, or in addition to, the current form of name. It is not necessary to follow subject cataloging policies to use the latest form of name only.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person born in the city of Calcutta before its name changed to Kolkata; cataloger has chosen to record the form of name that applied at the time the person was born)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person residing in the city of Milan during the Renaissance, prior to the formation of the modern country of Italy; cataloger has chosen to record the current form of name for the country)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For non-jurisdictions, prefer names from an authorized vocabulary such as RVM and identify the source in subfield $2. If the name is not found in an authorized vocabulary, record it in field 370 without&lt;br /&gt;
giving a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
When determining when to create a name authority record for a geographic name, consult the “Name Authority Records (NARs)” section of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1], Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary&lt;br /&gt;
source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfield $c – Associated country&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Generally, do not use subfield $c to record places that are not sovereign entities. Such places may be recorded in subfield $f or other subfields as appropriate.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Martinique is an overseas department of France)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if a sovereign entity has (or previously had) one or more constituent countries, any of the constituent countries associated with the 1XX may optionally be recorded in subfield $c in addition to, or instead of, the larger sovereign entity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Great Britain who has strong ties to Wales; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with the Soviet Union, particularly the Kirghiz Soviet Socialist Republic; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Aruba, a constituent country of the Netherlands; cataloger has chosen not to record the Netherlands)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with India prior to its independence from Great Britain; cataloger has chosen not to record Great Britain)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entity names of First Nations in Canada and Indian tribes recognized by the United States government as legal entities may be included in subfield $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Record the place of origin of the work in field 370, unless it is merely a place of publication or other place associated with a manifestation (use field 643, when appropriate, for the latter). Although the “place of origin” of a serial work may be the same as the place of publication of the component part for which the SAR (or serial bibliographic record) was created, use judgment in distinguishing between place of origin of the work and a place of publication not actually related to the work itself.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-24]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-22)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#370_Associated_Place|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Address =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice:&lt;br /&gt;
* Supply based on cataloger's judgment, if the information is readily available and not already being recorded in field 370 subfield $e (Place of residence/headquarters).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* In cases where subfield $a is not recorded, include at a minimum subfield $m (Electronic mail address) or subfield $b (City).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not record physical &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or e-mail&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; addresses for living persons.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Catalogers are not required to maintain address information when updating a record that contains an address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record multiple addresses, with or without ranges of dates, in separate occurrences of field 371.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Electronic mail address'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $m should contain only an e-mail address. Do not add an internet address for the 1XX in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#371_Address|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Field of activity =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM heading string for field of activity, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an entity from Canadiana for field of activity, remove any subfield coding not authorized for use in the 372 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point in Canadiana:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Field of activity in 372:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall&lt;br /&gt;
best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''372 fields with a term from RVM and a non-controlled vocabulary term'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#372_Field_of_Activity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Associated group =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the Canadiana or LC/NACO Authority File, recording the source in subfield $2. Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 373 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of an associated group has changed, record the group name(s) that applied at the time of the entity being established in the 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with subfield $2 and dates:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with different vocabulary sources:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Although the MARC format does not specify a form of date in these subfields, the following practice is recommended for consistency. Input dates using the Gregorian calendar in the form yyyy. If more specific dates are necessary, consider recording them in another field (e.g., 670, 678). It is&lt;br /&gt;
not necessary to reformulate dates in existing NARs to conform to this practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&amp;lt;!--(2023-06-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#373_Associated_Group|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Occupation =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.16.1.3 for instructions on recording profession or occupation as an element. See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.19.1.6 for instructions using a profession or occupation term in an access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Codes from either the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/occupation.html/view Occupation Term Source Codes] or the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/subject.html/view Subject Source Codes] lists may be recorded in subfield $2 for the 374 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#374_Occupation|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Gender =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not use this field in new authority records. Whenever an existing record must be changed for any reason, delete any occurrence of field 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Family information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Name of prominent member'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When giving the name of the prominent member of the family in 376 subfield $b, give the form for the person as found in subfield $g of the 100 field of the NAR for the family. Do not include any internal subfield coding in subfield $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start''' period and Subfield $t – End period&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Associated language =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer language codes over language terms, using codes from the Code List for Languages in MARC21.  Use subfield $l (Language term) only to provide information not available in the [https://loc.gov/marc/languages/language_code.html MARC Code List for Languages]. Encode multiple languages for a person or corporate body only if more than one language is used for publication, communication, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Optionally, record an ISO 639-3 language code (or codes) in an additional 377 field. This practice is especially recommended when an ISO 639-3 code will identify a language more specifically than the MARC code does. For more information, see the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of the code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 is not required when the MARC Code List for Languages is used as the language source code (second indicator value “#”). PFAN institutions may supply an additional 377 field from another language code list by using second indicator value “7,” with subfield $2 containing a code for a language source list taken from the list in [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/language.html/view Language Code and Term Source Codes]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(ISO 639-3 code for Achi (acr); assigned a collective code (myn) for Mayan languages in the MARC Code List for Languages)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#377_Associated_Language|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Fuller form of personal name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode the fuller form of name in the 378 field when this information is readily available, even if the same information is already present in the 100 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the Information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#378_Fuller_Form_of_Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Form of work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMGF, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on recording form of work as an element in a work-level series authority record, see LAC-BAnQ PS 6.3.1.3.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#380_Form_of_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Other distinguishing characteristics of work or expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used to record the RDA elements other distinguishing characteristic of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) and other distinguishing characteristic of expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Other characteristics of expressions that are unique to musical works (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4-6.18.1.6]) may also be recorded in the 381 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Franklin number recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Other distinguishing characteristic of expression of musical work'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some terms recorded for other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression may be appropriate to record in field 381 and another MARC field for which there is no corresponding RDA element. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a corporate body (such as a publisher) used as an other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression could be recorded in either the 373 field (associated group), the 381 field or both.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 381 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as associated group and other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA has no specific element for places associated with expressions, but field 370 subfield $f (Other associated place) and subfield $g (Place of origin of work or expression) may be used in authority records for expressions. Some places associated with works or expressions would be considered other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression in RDA and could be recorded in the 370 field, the 381 field, or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Places used as other distinguishing characteristic of a legal work; recorded in 370 and 381 fields)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the RDA element place of origin of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.6]) in a 370 field (see Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]] section).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When other distinguishing characteristic of work or other distinguishing characteristic of expression has been used in an authorized access point and is also being recorded as an element in a 3XX&lt;br /&gt;
field, use the 381 field to record the other distinguishing characteristic. Optionally, also record the same information in any other appropriate 3XX field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#381_Other_Distinguishing_Characteristics_of_Work_or_Expression|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 Medium of performance =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the medium of performance using thesaurus terms from &amp;quot;Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM (RVMMEM)&amp;quot;. Record the medium of performance by applying the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html RDA 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6], the associated LAC-BAnQ PSs. ''Note:'' The 382 field may also be used in authority records for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. If considered important for identification and access, provide an additional 382 that does not apply these guidelines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#382_Medium_of_Performance|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numeric designation of musical work &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available. Create separate 383 fields for different numbering schemes associated with a single work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#383_Numeric_Designation_of_Musical_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Key =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available for works. In case of doubt, do not encode. Do not encode for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Audience characteristics =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the intended audience of a work or expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. In particular, consult instruction sheet L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ##  $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvmt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a: If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term and term from a controlled vocabulary)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''or''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-10-14]&amp;lt;!--(2022-10-14)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Creator/contributor characteristics &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record demographic characteristics of one or more creators or contributors associated with a work or expression, in particular for characteristics common to a group of creators or contributors associated with a work or expression. The field will most commonly be used in authority records for collection aggregates embodying two or more expressions of two or more independent works by different agents, and for individual works named by title alone (e.g., works of unknown authorship; monographic series).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the draft Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html].  In particular, consult instruction sheet L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator and Contributor Characteristics, available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled demographic term)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While this field will be used primarily for aggregated works and for individual works named by title alone, there are situations when it will be appropriate for an individual work by one or more named creators. For example, for a musical work composed during childhood or adolescence, it would not be appropriate to record “Enfants” or “Adolescents” as a characteristic in the composer’s authority record. Instead, demographic characteristics applicable to only some of a creator’s works should be recorded in the authority records for those works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Work composed 2003-2005, completed when the composer was 14 years old)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014 $b page 4 de la couverture (Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled term and terms from one controlled vocabulary)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $i – Relationship information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, use subfield $i to record a term designating the nature of the relationship between the demographic groups recorded in the field and the work or expression. Prefer a term from a controlled vocabulary, such as the MARC relator terms, RDA relationship designators, or RBMS relationship designators. Capitalize the first letter of the relationship term and record it in the singular. Follow the relationship term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998- February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record multiple subfield $i’s in a single 386 field. If multiple relationship terms apply to a single group of creators or contributors (e.g., a work with authors and artists from the same demographic group or an expression with editors and translators from the same demographic group), repeat the field, using different relationship terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(A compilation of works by authors and artists from Massachusetts)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different relationship terms apply to some of the creators and contributors (e.g., authors are in one demographic group and artists are in another), repeat the field, using different relationship terms. If the same relationship term applies to more than one demographic group, either repeat subfield $a in one field, or repeat the field. For clarity, when in doubt, repeat the 386 field as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Score containing works by Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler, and Strauss, with lyrics also printed as text in German and English translation)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-11]&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Time Period of Creation =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the time period of creation or origin of a work or expression. The name of the time period may specify or imply a place for which the time period is relevant. It may also specify the name of an event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMFAST, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM subject heading string, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For compilations, the field may be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the works/expressions contained within the compilation, considered collectively (using first indicator value “1”). It may also be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the compilation itself (using first indicator value “2”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR for a collection of Renaissance poetry compiled in the nineteenth century)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 388 field may be used in conjunction with, or instead of, the 046 field. When specific date(s) of creation or origin are not known, or span a long period of time, recording textual chronological terms in the 388 field may be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the indicator value differs, repeat the field. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR with 388 fields containing terms from different vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-07] &amp;lt;!--(2022-11-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX - See From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for another reason, delete any final mark of punctuation in a 4XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging rules (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying NARs or SARs that contain obsolete codes such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all 4XX references require justification; see “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Justifying_variant_access_points|Justifying variant access points]]” in the 670 section of this document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not make a 4XX that normalizes to the same form as another 4XX on the same authority record or a 1XX on any name authority record. See the section “NACO normalization” in the [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf/view DCM Z1] Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice guidelines for RDA:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Record variants found in the manifestation being cataloged:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Use cataloger's judgment;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; No limitation on the number or form of references;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Instead of or in addition to adding variants, consider providing access by adding 37X fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Example showing 378 without a variant for the fuller form of name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Establish additional NARs for the authorized access points needed to support elements used in 4XX variant access points (e.g., parent body associated with subordinate body being established).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally provide a variant form 4XX access point for a former 1XX authorized access point, unless the former authorized access point was egregiously incorrect. See the section “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX$w|Subfield $w – Control subfield]]” for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Use the established form of components in 4XX variant access points, except for non-Latin script variants, which may represent a mixture of scripts or may be entirely in a non-Latin script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally, do not remove variants unless egregiously incorrect (e.g., a non-Latin script variant that does not represent the same person).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If a form found on the manifestation being cataloged includes a variant form of a component of a 4XX variant access point, that form may be used in its entirety as an additional 4XX variant access point, provided that it is not divided into its component parts through the use of subfields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When changing the form of a superordinate body, a geographic name, or a personal name in a 1XX, update all of the existing NARs that use that component in a 4XX, unless the 4XX represents the former authorized access point (e.g., $w/2=e). ''Exception:'' Do not apply this instruction in the case of migrated authority records that have not been re-evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point for a person (100) is changed because the person has changed his or her name, record the earlier form of name in a 400 with $w nne if the variant is valid under RDA instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Name changed upon election as pope)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When an authorized access point for a person (100) is updated to close the date, it is recommended to save the former form with the open date in a 4XX field with $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) based on CIP cataloging is changed because its form on the published resource is different from that on the CIP galley, a 4XX from the previous authorized access point form with subfield $w nne may be added unless the former 1XX form was egregiously incorrect (e.g., the author's date of birth was given as 1775 instead of 1975 in the CIP galley).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) is changed because of a change in cataloging instructions, record the earlier form in a 4XX using $w. If the variant form is a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nne. If the variant form is not a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA; 100 form changed based on usage and dates of birth and death added because 100 was being changed)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429  av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nnea&amp;quot; because the abbreviation &amp;quot;ca.&amp;quot; is not valid for period of activity in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When changing an authorized access point because dates were recorded inaccurately or a cataloger entered a typo in the authorized access point, do not add the inaccurate form as a cross reference.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, providing authorized access points for the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Variant access points may be recorded in any SAR, including those for series-like phrases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the volumes of a multipart monograph have different forms of the common title, use a 4XX reference rather than a 5XX reference for the form of the title not chosen as the title proper of the multipart monograph.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27] &amp;lt;!--(2024-03-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D |''Manual 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX - See Also From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying a NAR that contain codes that are no longer used such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d” or “f,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers applying RDA instructions may use subfield $i in conjunction with subfield $w code “r” for relationship designators. When applying RDA relationship designators in 5XXs, supply terms from Appendix I, J or K; capitalize the initial letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the use of relationship designators and/or $w codes in a specific 5XX field, see the section in this Manual for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the conventions in the authority format for use of subfield $w. Do not supply subfield $w unless a value other than “n” would be appropriate in one of the positions. When supplying subfield $w,&lt;br /&gt;
give it as the first subfield in the field. Supply character positions preceding, but not succeeding, the value, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = to indicate a reference from an earlier authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = to indicate a reference from a later authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = to indicate that a subfield $i or subfield $4 is used to denote relationship information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = to indicate a see also reference for multiple pseudonyms (record also contains a 663 field)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A see also reference tracing (5XX) must not normalize to the same as another see also reference in the same authority record, unless both 5XX fields contain a relationship designator in subfield $i, and&lt;br /&gt;
the texts of the relationship designators are different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500  See Also From Tracing - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” when providing relationship links between a personal name and 1) the name of another person, family, or corporate body or 2) the authorized access point for a work or expression. This technique may also be used to relate authorized access points for works and expressions containing personal names. When using a term from Appendix I, J or K in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording pseudonymous relationships for personal names when only two authority records are involved, catalogers may either 1) use subfield $i and code “r” in subfield $w or 2) use simple see-also references. For more information on these techniques and instructions on recording multiple pseudonyms (i.e., those involving a 663 field), see the [http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/pseud.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA Practice for Creating NARs for Persons Who Use Pseudonyms]. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are reminded that when a variant name (400) and an authorized access point (100) are in conflict an addition should be made to either the 400 or 100 to resolve the conflict (e.g., fuller form of name, date of activity, etc.); the previous practice of changing the 400 to a 500 to resolve the conflict is no longer an option. When catalogers encounter a variant form in a 500 field in the course of updating a NAR, they should resolve the conflict and change the field to a 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510  See Also From Tracing - Corporate Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511  See Also From Tracing - Meeting Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html BAC-BAnQ PS 11.13.1.8] for guidance on relating authority records for ongoing conferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530  See Also From Tracing - Uniform Title =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded &amp;quot;r&amp;quot; when providing relationship links between authorized access points for works or expressions. When supplying RDA Appendix J terms in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551  See Also From Tracing - Geographic Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” until relationship designators for places are developed. (Currently RDA has a placeholder for Appendix L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Series Numbering Peculiarities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#641_Series_Numbering_Peculiarities|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Series Numbering Example =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#642_Series_Numbering_Example|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Series Place and Publisher/Issuing Body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#643_Series_Place_and_Publisher.2FIssuing_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Series Analysis Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#644_Series_Analysis_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Series Tracing Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#645_Series_Tracing_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Series Classification Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#646_Series_Classification_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Complex See Also Reference - Name =&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 663 field contains the explanatory text and authorized access points for relationships between a 100 (established name) and other 100s (established names) that cannot be adequately conveyed by one or more simple see also references generated from 500 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, this situation occurs when a person uses more than two identities, when more than one person shares an identity with one or more others, or when multiple persons use the same pseudonym independent of each other or as a result of some other arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text of the 663 may be adjusted to fit extraordinary situations; however, keep the text as simple as possible, allowing the MARC fields and coding to convey the information desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use the 663 technique to show relationships between corporate bodies or between persons and corporate bodies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is found in the [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA and AACR2 practice for creating NARs for persons who use pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Only two identities ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When only two NARs are created for a person, the NARs are generally connected with 500 see also references and no 663 field. However, when one of the NARs is for a joint pseudonym or a pseudonym used by several persons working independently of each other, the 663 technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== More than two identities - &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; authorized access point and references ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more than two authorized access points are created for the same person, identify a “basic” authorized access point using the 663 field technique. This decision is based on the desire to simplify the reference structure and to assist catalogers in determining which name to use as the subject of biographical or critical works. The “basic” authorized access point should be determined by the predominantly used form of name or, lacking sufficient evidence, by choosing the real name of the person as the “basic” form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the authority record for the “basic” name authority record add 500 see also references with a subfield w coded “nnnc” from all other names used. Justify the 500 in 670 citations according to normal practice. Provide a 663 field listing all the other names with the following text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name] $b [established form of&lt;br /&gt;
name]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On each of the other name authority records, trace a 500 see also reference with subfield $w coded “nnnc” from the “basic” name, justifying that reference in a 670 citation, according to normal practice. Other names may be mentioned in the 670 if it is convenient to do so. Provide a 663 field with the following or similar text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name chosen as the basic heading]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the author uses another new name, create a new name authority record for that name and also add it to the reference structure and 663 listing on the authority record for the “basic” name. References to the new name in the 500 and 663 fields are only added to the “basic” NAR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Joint pseudonyms ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A joint pseudonym represents one identity used by two or more persons working in collaboration with each other. If a person uses a joint pseudonym and another name (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for joint pseudonym:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer.  Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on joint pseudonym NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on joint pseudonym NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonyms used by multiple persons ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When multiple persons working independently of each other use the same pseudonym and one or more other names (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for pseudonym used by multiple persons:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; NAR for first 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;(''Author has a pseudonym used by multiple persons and individual pseudonyms'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#663_Complex_See_Also_Reference-Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Nonpublic general note =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give information of permanent value and general interest that would be useful also to PFAN institutions and outside of PFAN. A representative listing of notes is given below. Generally, wording is recommended but not prescriptive unless specified in the instructions. The separate 667 fields may be given in any order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use OCLC record)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [reason for coding].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date updated].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Used for official language changes'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Appendice 1 in this manual for information and instructions about 667 fields added to authority records as part of a special project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for persons with identities not established ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a person uses two or more identities in manifestations, name authority records may be created for each identity. In the interest of efficiency, catalogers may use a 667 field to list pseudonyms not found in publications instead of creating NARs for these unused pseudonyms. In this case, list the unused pseudonyms in a 667 field following the phrase: “Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This note may also be added to an NAR for a person who has multiple NARs for multiple identities when some of the pseudonyms are not found in publications. In this case, list only the unused pseudonyms in the 667 field, and follow appropriate instructions for the other pseudonyms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is available in the manual, 663 section, and the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/ LC/PCC Practice for Creating NARs for Persons who use Pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for series of conferences, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 field on the NAR for the collective conference when there are authority records for both collective and individual instances of an ongoing conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs and subject usage ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply these instructions when creating new NARs and revising existing NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Add notes indicating subject cataloging usage when an authorized access point is not appropriate for use as a subject heading for these situations:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Heads of state, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This instruction applies to NARS for corporate bodies representing the office when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point for the corporate body. See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Government Officials)] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html RDA 11.2.2.26 (Religious Officials)] for instructions on the corporate bodies. Use this 667 note on the NAR for the corporate body to indicate subject cataloging usage:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [personal name heading].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value “n” in 008/11 and value “b” in 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|008/11]] and [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|008/15]] in this manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Earlier/later linear jurisdictional name changes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;politique d'indexation du RVM&amp;quot; is to assign as a subject access point or as a geographic subdivision only the latest name of a political jurisdiction that has had one or more earlier names, as long&lt;br /&gt;
as the territorial identity remains essentially unchanged (see &amp;quot;Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval&amp;quot;, 5.14.3.1). When creating a NAR with an earlier/later authorized access point for a place in in this situation, catalogers must add a 667 subject usage note to the authority record with the earlier place name and adjust the appropriate 008 fields (008/11 and 008/15).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NARs for fictitious characters'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access points for families are not valid for subject use. In an NAR for a family, 008/11 should be set to value “n” and 008/15 should be set to “b.” Per LAC-BAnQ PS 9.0, when creating an NAR&lt;br /&gt;
for a family add this 667 field noting subject usage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Add this note to a name authority record for a city section indicating that it is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision (see SHM H 835 for more information):&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) NARs for families&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Authorized access points for family names are valid for subject use. For family name authority records that reflect past practice (which considered them invalid for subject use), update the records to set the 008/11 values to “v” and 008/15 values to “a” and delete the following subject usage note:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Non-Latin script reference notes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In an authority record that contains a non-Latin script variant access point, use the 667 field with a note stating: “Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.” If there are multiple non-Latin script variant access points, use a note stating: “Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.” Assign 008/29 value “b” to indicate that the variant access point is not evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Duplicates ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add the following note to a name authority record that has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number from the record to keep&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#667_Nonpublic_General_Note|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Sources found =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of this field is to record information about the name or title represented in the 1XX field. It includes facts that contribute to the identification of the entity, that justify the choice of the name&lt;br /&gt;
or title and any additional elements used to construct the authorized access point (1XX). The information also justifies, as needed, variant forms of the name or title (4XX), other identifying elements (046, 3XX,&lt;br /&gt;
and 678), and clarifies relationships between the 1XX and other entities in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Functions of the 670 field:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information, from sources (e.g., books, phone calls, websites), in support of the choice and form of the authorized access point, variants, and other identifying elements&lt;br /&gt;
* To store information that may be used to break a conflict later&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information on relationships between entities (e.g., a person is the author of a work, a corporate body was absorbed by another corporate body)&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify a person with works in diverse subject areas or of diverse forms&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify different individuals whose access points must remain identical for now (i.e., undifferentiated personal names) &lt;br /&gt;
* To clarify whether different forms of a name or of a title are simply variations or reflect a  change in the name or title&lt;br /&gt;
* To record research required by the current guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
* To facilitate authority and bibliographic file maintenance, i.e., the information in 670 fields aids in making decisions about duplicate authorized access points and misattributions&lt;br /&gt;
* To support machine manipulation based on algorithms using information in the 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, the first 670 field cites the resource for which the authority record is being established, i.e., the resource being cataloged. If the resource being cataloged or consulted provides no information to&lt;br /&gt;
justify the authorized access point, variants, or other elements recorded in the NAR, see the 675 section of this Manual for instructions on citing the resource in a 675 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give subsequent 670 fields in any order, adding new fields after existing ones. Do not routinely delete or change existing 670 fields when adding new 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding subsequent 670 fields, prefer objective, authoritative sources (e.g., an encyclopedia) and those sources that provide firsthand information (e.g., an author's blog). Use sources that provide additional information rather than repeating information that is already present in other 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Best practices for 670 fields:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* In subfield $b, summarize and edit information found as needed to avoid extraneous or repetitive information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Avoid citing subjective information or information that is of dubious value in identifying an entity within a bibliographic context.&lt;br /&gt;
* Exercise caution when recording information about living persons that may be private or controversial in nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 fields in existing NARs may not conform to these guidelines. For example, 670 fields in older NARs may lack subfield $b with justifying information. 670 fields in NARs that were part of a special project may not conform to these guidelines and/or may contain information that seems unusual or incorrect. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' The examples given throughout the following text have various conventions in regard to punctuation and style. These conventions are not prescriptive and should be considered as best practices to facilitate the exchange of information in a shared database environment. Catalogers are expected to use judgment and common sense. Punctuation and style need not be consistent from record to record as long as the information is clear and accurate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format of 670 fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the exception of the eszett (ß or ſʒ) and the euro sign (€), all characters found in the [http://www.loc.gov/marc/specifications/specchartables.html MARC code table] are valid for use in authority records contributed to the Canadiana Authority File ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html voir LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). When pasting data from a website into a 670 field, verify that all characters are valid for use in the record. Some non-valid characters resemble those that are valid. For example, the invalid en dash (–) resembles the valid hyphenminus (-).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a substitution for a symbol that cannot be reproduced is given in brackets (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html LAC-BAnQ PS for 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS for 1.7.5]),  an explanation of that interpolation may also be provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data must be given in romanized form. Normally it is understood that the cataloger has provided the romanization; therefore, when transcribing romanization found in the source, add after it the bracketed&lt;br /&gt;
phrase ['''forme romanisée''']. In such languages as Arabic and Hebrew, where vowels are commonly omitted from the orthography of texts, the cataloger supplies the missing vowels when transcribing data. When&lt;br /&gt;
transcribing text that does include the vowels, add after it in brackets ['''vocalisé'''] or ['''en partie vocalisé'''] as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a cataloger chooses to provide nonroman script variant access points, the 670 $b should contain both the nonroman script transcription(s) found in the source, and the systematically romanized form(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When authority records are created using automated authority generation programs, additional information may be included. This data may also be formatted in a different way than instructed in this document. Generally, this data should be retained as generated to maintain the cost effectiveness of this process unless the data is confusing or causes validation errors. The exceptions to this are names and&lt;br /&gt;
titles for which NARs are created. Follow the instructions in those sections for recording this data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Source citation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The title proper of the resource being cited, complete enough for later identification in an online catalog. Abbreviations and ellipses may be used. Precede a generic or indistinctive title with the creator's name that would begin the authorized access point for the work. If the authorized access point for the work is the same as the title proper plus a qualifier, it may be provided instead of the title proper to avoid ambiguity. When information in subfield $a of a 670 field is provided to justify an authorized or variant access point, follow the additional instructions at ''Recording names and titles''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The date of publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Multipart monographs.'' If the part is the first part, give the date of publication as an open date.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Serials other than monographic series.'' Generally, use a chronological designation instead of a publication date. If there is no designation date, use the numeric designation and the date of publication. Indicate, following the designation statement, if a “surrogate” was used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Integrating resources.'' Apply the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] for source of the title proper of a website. Identify the iteration from which information was taken (e.g., “viewed on”dates for updating websites, update number or release number for updating loose-leafs).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Information found'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $b:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The specific location(s) of the information found. For multipart resources with numbered parts, provide the designation of the part and the location within the part (e.g., v. 6, page 10; map recto, label). Abbreviations or spelled-out forms may be used (e.g., t.p. or title page, v. 6 or volume 6).&lt;br /&gt;
# Information found. Following the location, cite the information found there, enclosed in parentheses. As appropriate, give multiple occurrences of information from the same source following the location of the information. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George ; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' If the authorized access point is built from Cataloguing in Publication data, include &amp;quot;CIP&amp;quot; in the location statement (e.g., formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Takao Tanabe, 2026 : $b page de titre du CIP de BAC (Sherri Shinobu Kajiwara) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Kajiwara, Sherri S.; personne associée au Canada et au Japon)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Internet resources.''' For websites, provide the name of the location within the website if appropriate (e.g., about us; history, timeline; government, executive branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Multiple locations within a resource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' When adding new information to a 670 field created for a CIP, indicate that the new information is from the published resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; personne associée au Canada) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; personne associée au Canada) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs.''' For NARs, generally, use “etc.” to avoid giving more than two locations or a sequence of locations (e.g., p. 316, etc., for sequence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs.''' For SARs, always give each location separately.&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' In post-cataloging authority work without the piece in hand, use the location “ressource non disponible.” If the piece is examined again and the authority record is updated, it is allowable to edit the corresponding 670 field to provide a location and additional forms of series titles as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions from the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may optionally provide a uniform resource identifier (URI) in subfield $u of the 670 citation to link to the cited resource if it contains significant information related to the established entity&lt;br /&gt;
that cannot be cited succinctly in the authority record. Note that use of a URI in the 670 $u does not take the place of the requirement to cite relevant data in subfields $a and $b of the 670 field needed to support the authorized access point (including additions) or variants (this information will continue to be available if the site changes or disappears). However, information found in online sources may be added to the 046 or 3XX fields with the appropriate citations in subfields $v and $u and not repeated in a 670 when that information is not used in the 1XX or a 4XX. If a URI is included in a 670, it must be given in subfield $u. The subfield $u should contain only the URI and no additional data (e.g., do not enclose the URI within parentheses and do not include words in the subfield $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording names and titles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record names or series titles used in the authorized access point or variant access points in full, as they appear in the source, without abbreviation by the cataloger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When preparing an authority record for the text of a law or a subject compilation of laws, if a source being cited contains an official short title or citation title, cite that title, preceded by the term&lt;br /&gt;
“citation title” and its exact location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For corporate name authorities, include in the data cited all the hierarchy required to justify needed variant access points, Use judgment in deciding what information (e.g., subordinate body's name) is extraneous to the record being created and should not be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all of the above categories, if the only presentation of the name or title on the chief source of information is in the bibliographic title given in subfield $a of the 670 citation, repetition of the name in&lt;br /&gt;
subfield $b may be omitted, provided no important information is lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If information about an earlier or later name or title is found in the same source as the name or title in the authorized access point, give all the information in the 670 field. Do not separate the&lt;br /&gt;
information about the earlier or later name or title in order to give it in a 675 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To facilitate international contribution and use of authority records, when recording dates, generally use the spelled out or [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abbreviated] forms for months. (For dates recorded using automated authority generation programs, see the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Format of 670 fields]] section of this document.) Do not change the style of dates in existing records. As a best practice, if a date is not included in subfield $d of the 100 field, consider adding a 046 field if dates are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying variant access points ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justify names or titles given as variant access points by information cited from sources. However, justification is not required in the following cases:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variant access points made on the basis of the cataloger's awareness of different romanizations or orthographies;&lt;br /&gt;
# A variant title derived from the resource being cataloged, from other resources cataloged under the same access point, or from information in standard reference sources;&lt;br /&gt;
# References for authorized access points of corporate bodies reflecting changes due to national orthographic reform, changes in names due to an official language change, or changes involving only a parent body to which the body being established is subordinate.&lt;br /&gt;
# Optional references from AACR2 or pre-AACR 2 forms on SARs and on retrospective NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying other elements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information recorded in the 046, 3XX, or 678 field of the authority record should generally be justified unless it is otherwise obvious from information recorded in subfield $a of a 670 citation or it can&lt;br /&gt;
be easily inferred from other identifying elements recorded, including the preferred name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the 046 field and many of the 3XX fields, a subfield $u or subfield $v recorded in the same field may be used instead of or in addition to a 670. See the 046 section of this document for guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
on subfield $u and subfield $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording other data ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data to record in the authority record. Do not abbreviate or translate attributes such as title of the person ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) that appear in conjunction with personal names in statements of responsibility and that potentially could be used as part of the access point. Other data may be abbreviated or summarized. Generally informally translate other data from foreign languages into English, paraphrasing or summarizing as convenient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data other than forms of the title/phrase to record in the permanent authority record. Numbering and names of issuing bodies are not required but may be given.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special types of citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most commonly occurring citations are listed below. If these are not appropriate, devise others as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When converting information found in obsolete or non-active MARC fields (e.g., 664, 665, 666) into a 670 note, cite Canadiana in a citation such as those provided in the examples below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date of conversion] $b ([data converted from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([data moved from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC and fichier interne de BAnQ [BAnQ internal file]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cite these files in zone 670 as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; usage: [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''NARs''. Give the date of the search, using month names or abbreviations. In parentheses, prefaced by the label '''point d'accès :''' or '''points d'accès :''', give the access point (or access points) found, even if it is the same as the current authorized access point. If it is judged useful to mention one or more variants found in an authority record, give them with the label '''variante :''' or '''variantes :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different forms of the name appear in the bibliographic records, record the access point and also any forms found, including usage identical to the authorized access point. Separate the access point from the other forms, and preface the other forms with an appropriate label, e.g., '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' or '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not normally cite specific bibliographic records or the exact location of the variations found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''SARs.''. Give the date of the search, using month abbreviations, followed by the citation of the bibliographic record. In parentheses give the series statement found in that record.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] LC/NAF has been cited previously under other names, e.g., Base de données LC/NACO and Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] &amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot; for bibliographic records refers to the transcribed forms of name usually found in statements of responsibility of bibliographic records. It may also appear in other parts of the bibliographic record such as a title proper or a quoted note. Because of changes in cataloging instructions, catalogers should be careful when taking information from the publication statement, distribution statement, etc. and the series statement.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (or «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») for bibliographic records refers to a form of the name that may not represent a transcribed form. For example, in AACR2 records, a publisher's name that appeared on the resource as “ABC Publishing Company” might have been recorded in the publication statement as “ABC Pub. Co.” Normally, there is no need to cite such a form in a 670 field..&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citing other files or catalogs.''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an access point is found in a manual catalog or online database, use judgment in creating a 670 citation. Begin the 670 field with a designation of the catalog/database in which these other bibliographic records were found. There is no prescribed formulation of such citations; examples are listed below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, , [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Geographical Names Database'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide the name of the database and the date searched in subfield $a. The name of the database may be cited as an acronym or in full. In subfield $b provide names given for the entity, feature designation or class (e.g., ADM1, PPL, civil) coordinates, and name of larger place if appropriate. (Other relevant information may also be provided.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the feature designation or class, it is acceptable to use either the code (e.g., PPL) or its spelled-out form (e.g., populated place). For foreign names, convey the name type (e.g., conventional, approved, short, etc.) within brackets or parentheses after the name. Repeat the brackets or parentheses after each name of this type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Variant names (including non-roman script names) may be given in a single listing as shown below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the coordinates, it is acceptable to use the DMS format (degrees, minutes, seconds), the DD format (decimal degrees), or both formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has opted to record the DMS coordinates)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The coordinates may be recorded as found. However, if the database displays the coordinates using colons to separate the DMS components and positive and negative values to convey the hemisphere, it is acceptable to translate the coordinates to traditional DMS format if desired. Use the degree sign (not superscript zero) to show degrees, the soft sign (modifier letter prime) for minutes, and the hard sign (modifier letter double prime) for seconds. For coordinates of latitude, a negative value corresponds to the Southern hemisphere. For coordinates of longitude, a negative value corresponds to the Western hemisphere.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has recorded the DMS coordinates as found)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has translated the DMS coordinates to traditional format from: -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, 22:53:01, 121:02:54; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Non-bibliographic sources'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the non-bibliographic source, the date, and the information. The source can be given specifically (« Lettre de l'auteur » , « Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur » , etc.) or in general terms (« Information de l'auteur » , « Information de l'éditeur » , etc.).  When noting a specific source, it isn't necessary to show how information was received, e.g, that letter was received via FAX rather than via mail. When a telephone call to a publisher/agency/organization is cited, usually give the name of the group called, rather than the title or name of the person contacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''Citations for republication SARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an SAR is for a republication only, begin the 670 with the term for the type of republication and a slash. Do not include a 670 for a republication if the SAR covers both the original and one or more republications. Do not add additional 670 fields for other types of republications cataloged later. (See 64X Series Treatment, Republications for more information about republications.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations for undifferentiated NARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on existing 670 citations found in undifferentiated NARs, see in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32 Undifferentiated Personal Name]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-19]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#670_Source_Data_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Title related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 672 field may be used to record a title that is related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in an authority record for a corporate body, 672 fields may be used to record titles for which the corporate body is a creator, issuing body, or subject. The primary purpose of the 672 field is to document that there is a relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 672 field does not negate the need to use the 670 field for the title for which the authority record is being created, nor to use the 670 fields to justify information recorded in the 1XX and 4XX such as preferred and variant forms of name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 672 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 672 fields when inputting new 672 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 672 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 fields with titles proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Cervantes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with preferred title)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with variant title for the work associated with the Catalan expression of the work and date of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Remainder of title'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a title proper, subfield $b may be used to record the other title information or parallel title proper to eliminate confusion for titles needing further identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains other title information)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains parallel title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $f – Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $f is used to record a date appropriate to the entity recorded in $a (e.g., use date of work for a preferred title and date of publication for a title proper). Do not use brackets in $f when recording a supplied date of publication or production. Do not give a date of distribution, date of manufacture, or copyright date in $f.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for work:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of  work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for expression:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of French expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for manifestation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of publication of manifestation of Polish expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Bibliographic record control number'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $w is used to record bibliographic record control numbers (e.g., 001, 010, and 016 fields in bibliographic records). It is recommended that catalogers provide $w when readily available. Subfield $w should be repeated for each instance of a separate control number (e.g., an LCCN and an OCLC record number should be provided in separate subfields). For further instructions on inputting record control numbers, see the subfield $w section within the CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MARC 21 Format for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' subfield $w should only be used with titles for the manifestation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Title not related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 673 field may be used to record a title that is not related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. For example, in an authority record for a person, the 673 may be used to record the titles of works written by a different person with a similar name. The primary purpose of the 673 field is to document that there is no relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 673 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 673 field does not negate the need to use the 675 field as described in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#675_Sources_not_found|675 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 673 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 673 fields when inputting new 673 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 673 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 673 field. For specific subfields in the 673 field, apply the same instructions given in the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#672 Title related to the entity|672 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961- &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with different Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)### 47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with the National Gallery in London)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT NOT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #4 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Although the National of Art is not the creator, it is the publisher so this title should be record in a 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-25]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#673_Title_Not_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Sources not found =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:''Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In April 2012 this field was redefined as: “Citation for a consulted source in which no information is found related in any manner to the entity represented by the authority record or related entities.” PFAN catalogers are not required to change any existing 675 fields simply to meet this new definition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a new NAR always cite the resource being cataloged in the 675 field if the item being cataloged provides no information related in any manner to the entity represented in the authority record. Also cite in the 675 field other sources consulted that contain no information, when that very lack of information is considered worth recording for future users of the authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, it is not always necessary to include in the 675 field every reference source consulted; use judgment in deciding what sources are important enough to retain in the permanent record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#675_Source_Data_Not_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Biographical or historical data =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When supplying biographical or historical data in a 678 note field, construct the note in concise but complete sentences, keeping in mind that the information will be used in public displays.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In anticipation of LAC building the file in WMS and the batch addition of authority records from other institutions, the contents of all 665 fields in LAC and BAnQ records have been moved to 678 field. The original 665 field may have contained instructions on the access point(s) to be used as author and subject heading :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec) ; Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec) ; Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec) ; Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Delete these instructions in 678 field if they have been retained. Consider adding a 667 field as a subject heading if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification of field 678'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, a 678 field must be justified by a 670 field. If it is not justified and its contents are appropriate for a biographical or historical note, retain the field and add a 670 note citing the internal file of the institution that provided 678 field as follows :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [ [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|abréviation de la bibliothèque participante]] ], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the record has been modified after being migrated, the record history must be consulted to determine who originally added zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Existing Field 678 which will be deleted as the content is not appropriate for a biographical note.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;670 field added:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not repeat this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#678_Biographical_or_Historical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Heading linking entries =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' This section does not apply to the 781 field used in 151 name authority records to provide geographic subdivision information. See Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#781_Subdivision_linking_entry|781 section]], for instructions for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of an established heading linking entry 7XX field in an NAR or SAR is limited to recording the authorized access point from a national bibliography or in a separate national authority file or a separate equivalence.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form of heading in a 7XX field may match the 1XX form or a 4XX form in the same authority record. This is appropriate when the 7XX field form represents a form found in a different authority file than Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source of the heading in the 7XX field may be specified using either second indicator value “7” with subfield $2 or a second indicator value that specifies the source. For access points coming from the LC/NAF file, prefer the second indicator with the value &amp;quot;0&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-17]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Subdivision linking entry =&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN optional practice:'' For a geographic name heading that may also be used as a geographic subdivision, determine the form in which the heading is to be used as a geographic subdivision following the guidelines in instruction sheet [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 of the ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Enter the text of the geographic subdivision form in a 781 field with second indicator 0. For a geographic heading that is used directly, such as a country, enter the data in a single $z subfield. For a geographic heading that is used indirectly through a larger geographic entity, such as a city, enter the data in two successive $z subfields. Use no other subfields. Make no changes to values in bytes of the 008.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a record for a geographic name heading that is not appropriate for use as a subject added entry (008/15 value Ab@), such as the earlier name of a jurisdiction that has undergone a linear name change, for example, '''Ceylon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a NAR for a place name that is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision, such as a city section, for example, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Add a 781 field to an existing record when making any other change to it. If revising an existing record that contains a 667 field subject cataloging usage note indicating the proper geographic subdivision form, delete the 667 field and replace it with a 781 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-11]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#781_Subdivision_Heading_Linking_Entry-Geographic_Subdivision|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 1: Undifferentiated entities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 2: Special projects =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This appendix presents information regarding some special projects involving authority records created or modified in the Canadiana authority file. The records created or modified within the context of these special projects may include some fields or some values not normally attributed according to current cataloguing policies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instructions regarding changes to these records are given here in order to indicate whether these fields and values are to be kept or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 1. Records created or revised as part of the UQAM records revision project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is an authority records revision project, led by UQAM. These records have been created or modified in Canadiana by UQAM's cataloguing “traitement documentaire” team. These records were then revised by two librarians and a library technician, also at UQAM. This project ended March 31, 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records may be modified, like any other name authority records, according to current cataloguing policies.&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers update these records, they should:&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the value of position Leader/17 to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (full record);&lt;br /&gt;
* Delete field 667 &amp;quot;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;quot;;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Evaluate the record as they would evaluate any batch-loaded record. However, as the record is being revised, the authorized access point may be modified, if it does not follow the current PFAN practices (for instance, birth or death dates may be added, if available and if omitted from the access point).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 2. Records created and revised as part of the Universities Mentoring Project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General Information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This mentoring project &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;that, as of February,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; allows university libraries to create name authority records that are revised by another university.  Authority records created or modified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;mentored libraries&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; are revised by library technicians &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;at the mentoring university.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abbreviation, e.g. UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;, etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records should not be modified.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15] &amp;lt;!--(2022-07-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=145124</id>
		<title>PFAN - News and Updates</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=145124"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T13:49:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 2026 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[fr:PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= News =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''News'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|We are delighted to welcome Marilyne Guertin, from Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of January 13, 2026, she succeeds Marie-Chantal L’Ecuyer-Coelho as BAnQ’s representative and co-chair of the Committee. Marie-Chantal will replace Izidor Cirnatiu, who is leaving the Committee after seven years of involvement. We would like to express our sincere gratitude to Izidor for his commitment to the PFAN. His expertise and dedication were essential to the creation of the Committee and its many achievements. Thank you, Izidor, and welcome, Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome Marie-Chantal L'Écuyer-Coelho of the Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of September 23, 2024, she replaces Daniel Paradis as BAnQ representative and co-chair of the committee.  We would like to thank Daniel Paradis for his great contribution to PFAN. His participation and expertise have greatly influenced the creation and many accomplishments of the committee.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome to Bernard Lemieux of the Université de Montréal on the PFAN Standards Committee. As of March 28, 2023, he officially replaces Philippe Brosseau as one of the representatives of the Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. We warmly thank Philippe for his contribution to the committee. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additions and changes on the PFAN wiki =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the wiki, '''Added content''' is identified by the tag &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. '''Updated content''' is identified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#372_Field_of_activity|New example with $2 rvmgf]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN training&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN|Decision trees to help with romanization (in French only]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#372_Field_of_activity|Instructions and example for a non-differentiated BAnQ record without a Canadiana number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Modified content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Modification of the example under CIP (specific category)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Details for the languages of ISO 15919:2001 (Information and documentation -- Transliteration of Devanagari and related Indian scripts into Latin characters)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Correction of the examples in step 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Participating Libraries&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|Updating respondents]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new French terms (Compilation and Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#377_Associated_language|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_Information|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ on geographic names&lt;br /&gt;
|'''updated content''' : [[FAQ_on_geographic_names|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script|16.2.2.5, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Geographical Names Database]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Removal of the phrases &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfield $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0 or $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0, $1, $3, $4 or $i.&amp;quot; in various fields.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Point 2.c. on variants under step 2 for modifications.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers (field 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)|Question about Canadiana generic numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Bibliographic_file_maintenance_.28BFM.29_.5BNew.5D|Bibliographic file maintenance (BFM)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3.,Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification of the statement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX_-_See_From_Tracings_-_General_Information|Clarification on cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Establishing_certain_entities_in_the_name_authority_file|Establishing certain entities in the name authority file]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|Instructions for name authority records for families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|Instruction for obsolete subfields $l and $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#023_Cluster_ISSN|023 field, Cluster ISSN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|Instruction for subfield $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Recording_Attributes_of_Work_and_Expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Recording Attributes of Work and Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Preferred_Title_Consisting_Solely_of_the_Name_of_One_Type_of_Composition|6.14.2.5.2, Preferred Title Consisting Solely of the Name of One Type of Composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choice_of_language|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choice of language]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Singular_or_Plural_Form|6.14.2.5.2.2, Singular or Plural Form]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Part_Identified_Both_by_a_Number_and_by_a_Title_or_Other_Verbal_Designation.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Part Identified Both by a Number and by a Title or Other Verbal Designation, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Two_or_More_Parts.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Two or More Parts, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.8.3.2C_Complete_Works_of_a_Single_Type_of_Composition_for_One_Specific_Medium_or_Various_Media|6.14.2.8.3, Complete Works of a Single Type of Composition for One Specific Medium or Various Media]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.3.2C_Recording_Medium_of_Performance|6.15.1.3, Recording Medium of Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.5.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.5, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.1, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.3, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Serial_Number|6.16.1.3.1, Serial Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Thematic_Index_Number|6.16.1.3.3, Thematic Index Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_Transcriptions.2C_Etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, Transcriptions, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.27.1.9.2C_Additions_to_access_points_representing_works|6.27.1.9, Additions to access points representing works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2C_General_Guidelines_on_Constructing_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1, General Guidelines on Constructing Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2.2C_Musical_Works_With_Lyrics.2C_Libretto.2C_Text.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Musical Works With Lyrics, Libretto, Text, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.2C_Additional_Elements_in_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1.9, Additional Elements in Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.3.2C_Authorized_Access_Point_Representing_an_Expression_of_Musical_Work|6.28.3, Authorized Access Point Representing an Expression of Musical Work]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.4.2C_Variant_Access_Point_Representing_a_Musical_Work_or_Expression|6.28.4, Variant Access Point Representing a Musical Work or Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Medium_of_performance|Clarification of existing authority records.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.1.3.2C_Recording_Relationship_to_Related_Corporate_Body|32.1.1.3, Recording Relationship to Related Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Establishing certain entities in the name authority file&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Group_1_-_Name_Authority_Group_Headings|Category “Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named” revised for “Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual” (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Suppression of: prefer a notice that already has an 016 to one that doesn't.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_FAQ_on_Compilations_of_Works_by_One_Agent|FAQ on Compilations of Works by One Agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#10.0.2C_Identifying_families|10.0, Identifying families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Children_and_Grandchildren_of_Royal_Persons|9.4.1.4.3, Children and Grandchildren of Royal Persons]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual|Clarifications made in field 008/32, 371, 377 and 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link for Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|New example of how to cite a website subpage]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Editing the note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_on_romanization|FAQ on romanization]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Steering Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Standards Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership_2|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Details about the number to be provided in 667 note at Step 2, Record to be deleted]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|LAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Library_and_Archives_Canada|Link for LAC Wiki]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles|Clarification of certain principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.2C_Related_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|32.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#When_a_corporate_body_has_gone_through_a_name_change.2C_or_several_name_changes.2C_and_there_are_authority_records.2C_in_Canadiana.2C_for_the_other_names.2C_which_relationships_should_be_recorded_in_an_authority_record_.28field_5XX.29.3F_In_which_cases_should_cataloguers_revise_the_authority_records_for_those_related_corporate_bodies.3F|Question 7 on related corporate bodies]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|New respondents for some institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Correction of an example in field 008/15]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Maintenance_of_existing_undifferentiated_records:|Important clarification added in field 008/32 regarding existing undifferentiated records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for the term &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; added to field 1XX of the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|Clarification of associated group name changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for FrPBN-coded authority records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#How_do_I_determine_the_usage_for_an_agent_name_in_WMS.3F|Question 8 on the usage of an agent's name]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New document for the romanization of Hebrew]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification added for field 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#General|008/32, General]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information|Clarification for counties in the United States]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#386_Creator.2Fcontributor_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|Details added to field 046]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Details added for an URI included in a 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#PFAN_eligibility_criteria_.5BNew.5D|Eligibility criteria and expectations of new members]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Correction of the PQ numbers for French Canadian literature]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|New instruction for subfields $q and $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#053_LC_classification_number_.5BNew.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#065_Other_Classification_Number_.5BNew.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|Clarification for the second indicator]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Amharic table]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#375_Gender|Do not use this field]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link to &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 on cancelled or hybrid conference]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarifications added for fields 046 and 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/032&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Records_coded_as_undifferentiated_that_actually_represent_only_one_identity|Clarification added for records coded &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; by mistake]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation|New document on the romanization of Yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#043_Geographic_Area_Code_.5BNew.5D|Local Geographic area code]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_of_Promulgation_of_a_Law.2C_Etc._.5BNew.5D|6.29.1.29, Date of Promulgation of a Law, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2C_Name_of_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|11.2, Name of Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information_.5BNEW.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources of information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)#FAQ_on_geographic_names|FAQ on geographic names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation_.5BNew.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name9|008/32]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Two new 667 field examples (for undifferentiated name authority records representing a single identity and those undergoing partial modifications)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|Cross-references (4XX and 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_on_Canadiana_numbers_(field_016)#Who_do_I_contact_if_I_need_a_new_list_of_Canadiana_numbers_for_field_016.3F_.5BNew.5D|Question 4 on obtaining a new list of Canadian numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new terms (Lyrics and Libretto)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Clarifications added for Chinese]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#385_Audience_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications_.5BNEW.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles_.5BNEW.5D|General Principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNEW.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|022]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|024]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|046]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#335_Extension_Plan_.5BNew.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|375]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|384]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|385]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Char|386]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|510]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#530_See_Also_From_Tracing-Uniform_Title|530]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Two new languages (Korean and Japanese)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Add an instruction to 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Project_2._Records_created_and_revised_as_part_of_the_Universities_Mentoring_Project|Clarifications added for the Universities Mentoring Project ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D|Simple 4XX &amp;quot;see&amp;quot; cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Membership of the Steering Committee]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|New article on PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Addition of romanization tables from BnF (Armenian, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Georgian, Macedonian, Russian, Ukrainian]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation|RVM examples are replaced by RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Clarifications added for the instruction on 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions|Clarifications added on point 3 and example 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Correction of an example]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for records derived from LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_records_derived_from_LC.2FNAF|Clarification of the example of a 670 field]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Discussion Lists&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|New PFAN-MUSIQUE-L discussion list.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Added information in different fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Core RDA Elements for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Core_RDA_Elements_for_PFAN|Additional information under Related Corporate Bodies element.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Mandatory MARC Fields for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Mandatory_MARC_Fields_for_PFAN|Added information in 510, 511, 551 fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New introduction.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-03-11''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145121</id>
		<title>PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145121"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T13:47:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Mise à jour des notices indifférenciées existantes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par D. Paradis, 12 septembre)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par N. Mainville, 26 février)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours| 24 h (En cours d'édition par A. Dunnett, BAC, 24 mars)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Guide}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:PFAN - Name Authority Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  Notices d'autorité de nom ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notices d'autorité de collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--En octobre et novembre 2021, les passages du Guide concernant les collections ont été cachés par souci de cohérence avec la décision de ne pas permettre la création ni la révision des notices d'autorité de collections. DP 1er novembre 2021--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 008 Éléments de données de longueur fixe =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Règles de catalogage descriptif ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée de quelque façon que ce soit, évaluer la notice d'autorité et la modifier pour qu'elle soit conforme à RDA, en modifiant le codage de la zone 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1 : Si une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée uniquement par la modification ou l'ajout d'une zone 5XX, on encourage fortement les catalogueurs, bien qu'il n'y ait pas d'obligation, à évaluer la notice et à la modifier selon RDA, en changeant le 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2 : Les autorités de noms indifférenciés codées 008/10 «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;», peuvent être modifiées de manière à enlever une ou plusieurs identités afin de créer des notices différenciées conformes à RDA. Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié à cette fin, la notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié mise à jour doit conserver le code 008/10 existant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-24]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F10 R.C3.A8gles de catalogage descriptif|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Système de vedettes-matière / Thésaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone 008/11 de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) dans la zone 008/11 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) dans la zone 008/11, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/15 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;dans la zone 008/11 des&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples de noms de collectivités ne pouvant être utilisés comme vedettes-matière :''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis.  Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran.  Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois.  Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique.  Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; margin-left: 0px; padding-left: 15px; padding-top: 10px; padding-bottom: 10px; text-indent: 0px; line-height: 1.0; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;tats-Unis. Pr&amp;amp;eacute;sident (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;glise catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Church of England. Dioc&amp;amp;egrave;se de Londres. &amp;amp;Eacute;v&amp;amp;ecirc;que (1675-1713 : Compton)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F11 Syst.C3.A8me de vedettes-mati.C3.A8re .2F Th.C3.A9saurus|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Utilisation de la vedette – vedette-matière secondaire ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Généralités&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de famille&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Appropriée) dans la zone 008/15 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) dans la zone 008/15, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/11 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Contexte'' : Pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, les catalogueurs descriptifs peuvent être amenés à établir un point d'accès autorisé pour le nom de la collectivité pour la fonction ainsi qu'un nom personnel pour le titulaire de la fonction. La politique d'indexation est d'attribuer seulement le nom personnel, et non le nom de la collectivité, comme point d'accès matière. Cette politique a été établie à des fins de colocalisation (voir [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). Par exemple, le point d'accès :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
peut être utilisé dans le catalogage descriptif comme point d'accès, mais en indexation seul le nom personnel serait utilisé comme point d'accès matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) aux notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F15 Utilisation de la vedette - vedette-mati.C3.A8re secondaire|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Nom de personne non différencié ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser le code 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (non différencié) dans une notice d'autorité de nom RDA. Attribuer la valeur 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes. Utiliser le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les familles, les collectivités et les lieux. Pour les œuvres et les expressions, attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» si le point d'accès commence par un nom de personne, sinon attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par le passé, la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 permettait de coder les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes comme non différenciées lorsque le catalogueur n'avait aucun moyen acceptable de différencier plusieurs personnes portant le même nom privilégié. Depuis sa création, le PFAN a suivi ces directives pour les notices d’autorité de noms de personnes :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas créer de nouvelles notices non différenciées codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Toutes les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes codéees RDA doivent être différenciées.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas ajouter une nouvelle identité à une notice d'autorité de nom de personne existante codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&lt;br /&gt;
* Appliquer plutôt [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] pour créer un point d'accès autorisé unique pour la personne, en utilisant des éléments additionnels appropriés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mise à jour des notices indifférenciées existantes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' Pour une entité donnée, si la seule notice trouvée est une notice indifférenciée (dont la zone 008/32 est codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;») versée par une université et comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;», ne pas l'utiliser.  Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité pour l'entité.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler à BAC la notice indifférenciée en communiquant son numéro de contrôle OCLC par courriel à l'adresse pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca et en mentionnant comme objet : Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice indifférenciée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante, en particulier une notice qui a été importée du LC/NAF, comprenne des paires de zones 670 utilisées pour regrouper l'information sur chaque personne visée par la notice d'autorité de nom. La première zone 670 de chaque paire est une zone 670 d'identification qui comprend un terme décrivant la relation de la personne avec le titre cité dans la deuxième zone 670 de la paire. Les données de la zone 670 d'identification sont enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a et sont mises entre crochets. La deuxième zone 670 de la paire est une zone 670 de citation qui comprend les éléments de données normaux dans la citation d'une ressource cataloguée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Auteur de Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Point d'accès supplémentaire pour Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Éditeur intellectuel de Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut aussi arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante comprenne une note 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée et identifiant la ou les ressources associées aux autres personnes portant le même nom. Dans ce cas, la notice ne comprend généralement pas de zones 670 pour les personnes autres que la première qui a été identifiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque de l'information pour distinguer une personne dans une notice d'autorité existante indifférenciée provenant de BAC ou de BAnQ est trouvée :&lt;br /&gt;
* Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour cette personne avec des informations distinctives et ajouter une indication que la personne était auparavant sur une notice indifférenciée (voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées|Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées]]&amp;amp;nbsp;», ci-dessous). Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour zone 670 de citation se rapportant à cette personne depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire. Ne pas transférer la zone 670 d'identification vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
* Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* Si la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée n'est pas supprimée parce que plusieurs identités restent, supprimer les zones 670 qui se rapportent à la personne maintenant représentée sur la nouvelle notice d'autorité (c’est-à-dire, dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, supprimer à la fois la zone 670 d’identification et la zone 670 de citation) et, le cas échéant, éditer ou supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée pour supprimer la mention de cette personne.&lt;br /&gt;
* S'il reste plus d'une identité dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée et qu'il n'y a pas suffisamment d'information pour créer de nouvelles notices d'autorité de nom pour chaque nom, laisser la notice d'autorité de nom codée RCAA2.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d’autorité de nom indifférenciée de BAnQ n’est pas supprimée, qu'elle doit être modifiée ultérieurement et qu’elle ne comporte pas de numéro Canadiana, lui en attribuer un.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de faciliter le traitement automatisé des notices d'autorité (par exemple, appariement, liaison), lorsqu'il ne reste qu'une seule identité dans une notice d'autorité de nom de personne indifférenciée (c'est-à-dire lorsque les autres identités sont désambiguïsées et enlevées), procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'unique identité restante. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette identité, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;». Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Dans la nouvelle notice :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le cas échéant, transférer la citation 670 se rapportant à l'unique identité restante depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;S'assurer que la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée contient seulement de l'information se rapportant à l'unique identité restante (par exemple, les zones 670). Le cas échéant, supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, ajouter la notice 667 suivante pour garantir qu'une notice d'autorité de nom ne sera pas créée en double :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAC''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana] $z [Numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée dérivée du LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'autrice d'Esperanza :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAnQ''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a [aucun numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour Christian Bergeron (Sociologue) :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1056D8391F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian $c (Sociologue)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : 1063E5020F.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'individualisation des épreuves de la vie dans la modernité avancée, 2013 : $b page de titre (Christian Bergeron; Doctorat en sociologie; Université Laval [département déterminé selon la discipline])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 $b (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. Il reste deux identités non différenciées dans la notice :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1063E5020F [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter une note 667 à une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour identifier le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité dans laquelle l'information sur cette personne a déjà été enregistrée :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices codées comme indifférenciées qui ne représentent en fait qu'une seule identité ====&lt;br /&gt;
À l'occasion, il arrive qu'une notice soit codée comme étant indifférenciée, mais que de nouvelles recherches indiquent qu'en fait la notice ne représente qu'une seule identité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut également arriver qu’on soupçonne que la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été codée par erreur dans la zone 008/32. Dans ces situations, procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter une zone 667 à la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée indiquant qu'elle a été signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'identité. Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette personne, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple d'une notice indifférenciée versée qui ne représente qu'une seule identité''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [aucun numéro Canadiana, utiliser le numéro OCLC de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==008/33 Niveau de l'établissement==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''provisoires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Coder une notice d'autorité de nom comme provisoire (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») si le point d'accès autorisé ne peut être formulé de manière satisfaisante en raison d'informations insuffisantes. Si les informations nécessaires deviennent disponibles ultérieurement, réévaluer la notice d'autorité de nom et la mettre à jour pour qu'elle soit pleinement établie (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;»). En aucun cas, il ne faut créer une notice d'autorité de niveau provisoire avec un point d'accès qui entre en conflit avec une notice d'autorité de nom existante selon les règles de normalisation du PFAN.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Régions administratives spéciales de Hong Kong et de Macao'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Étant donné qu'il n'est pas certain que Hong Kong et Macao continueront à avoir deux langues officielles, coder toutes les notice d'autorité de nom pour les organismes gouvernementaux dans ces deux endroits, au niveau de la région administrative spéciale et en dessous, comme provisoires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;»), quelle que soit la langue dans laquelle le point d'accès autorisé a été établi. Si une forme dans la deuxième langue officielle devient disponible, ajouter cette forme comme variante de point d'accès plutôt que de réviser le point d'accès autorisé existant. Consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] et l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html énoncé de politique connexe] pour obtenir des instructions sur le choix de la langue du nom privilégié. Noter que cette politique concernant le statut provisoire ne s'applique pas aux organismes non gouvernementaux.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Informations supplémentaires pour les participants au PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN peuvent créer des notices provisoires dans les deux situations exceptionnelles suivantes :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'a pas l'expertise linguistique nécessaire pour établir le point d'accès autorisé comme une notice d'autorité pleinement établie; cela comprend les situations où la bibliothèque ne dispose pas de sources de référence adéquates pour la recherche ou lorsque le catalogueur n'est pas sûr de la forme grammaticale correcte du point d'accès.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'est pas en mesure, en raison de ressources limitées ou d'autres contraintes, de compléter le travail pour les autorités en relation ou de déterminer la structure de renvois appropriée qui est requise pour les notices d'autorité pleinement établies.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''préliminaires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité préliminaires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») sont généralement le résultat de projets rétrospectifs. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs du PFAN procèdent régulièrement à des mises à jour des notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils apportent d'autres modifications à la notice d'autorité. À cause de cette exigence de mise à jour, les participants au PFAN sont priés de communiquer avec le Comité des normes avant d'entreprendre des projets qui pourraient entraîner l'ajout massif de notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» au fichier d'autorité Canadiana.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Au besoin, les catalogueurs peuvent mettre à jour les notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils travaillent avec des notices de collectivités antérieures/postérieures, bien que le ou les points d'accès dans les notices mises à jour ne soient pas utilisés dans la base de données bibliographiques locale. À l'occasion, les catalogueurs peuvent avoir besoin de créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom sans avoir de ressource en main, par exemple pour un nom de collectivité antérieur ou postérieur, en utilisant des renseignements provenant de sources de référence, ou pour un point d'accès basé sur des renseignements trouvés dans la sous-zone «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» de la zone 245 de notices bibliographiques, lorsqu'ils résolvent des conflits entre notices d'autorité de noms. Ne pas coder ces notices d'autorité de noms occasionnelles comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaires&amp;amp;nbsp;» .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, les éléments de données des collections doivent être vérifiés sur la publication et les notices d'autorité de collections doivent être codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (complet). Dans le travail d'autorité post-catalogage, il est permis de créer des notices d'autorité de collections sans la ressource en main; ces notices sont codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» (préliminaire). Lorsqu'une publication appartenant à la collection a été examinée et que la notice d'autorité préliminaire a été revue et mise à jour au besoin, mettre la notice d'autorité de collection au niveau complet.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F33_Niveau_de_l.27.C3.A9tablissement |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Source du catalogage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quelle que soit la valeur codée à l'origine dans cette zone, ne pas changer cette valeur lors de la mise à jour d'une notice, sauf si la valeur d'origine est incorrecte. La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;blanc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F39_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 Numéro de contrôle de la notice d'autorité de BAC = &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 016 est obligatoire lorsque le catalogueur crée, met à jour ou utilise une autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité et lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante sans numéro Canadiana, vérifier dans le LC/NAF si la même entité est représentée par une autorité et si celle-ci comporte un numéro Canadiana. Noter que le point d'accès autorisé dans le LC/NAF pourrait avoir une forme différente de celui dans Canadiana. Si la notice dans le LC/NAF comporte un numéro Canadiana, ajouter ce numéro dans la notice Canadiana. Si le numéro se termine par le code de langue E, le changer pour le code F. S'il n'y a pas de code de langue, ajouter le code F à la fin du numéro.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante avec numéro Canadiana, vérifier que le code de langue F est présent à la fin de la zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Doublons'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» un numéro Canadiana. Une fois qu'une notice d'autorité pour une entité donnée a été créée et qu'un numéro Canadiana lui a été attribué, ne pas changer les données dans cette notice pour représenter une entité DIFFÉRENTE. Par exemple, ne pas changer une notice d'autorité pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Dupont, Jean&amp;amp;nbsp;» en une pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Tremblay, Marie&amp;amp;nbsp;» (sauf si le nom de la personne a changé).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, demander à faire supprimer la notice (voir [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dures_sur_les_doublons|Procédures sur les doublons]]). NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il y a une zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, enregistrer le numéro Canadiana qui s'y trouve dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il n'y a pas de zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, en ajouter une en utilisant le numéro 0000X0000F. Ne pas enregistrer ce numéro dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée. Dans ce Guide, voir aussi «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Doublons|Doublons]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, supprimer la notice. NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer le numéro Canadiana de la notice supprimée dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice conservée.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Notices versées en lot partiellement modifiées'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité versées en lot qui sont modifiées partiellement selon la [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]] comportent le numéro Canadiana 1111X1111F. Ce numéro temporaire est ajouté pour permettre l'enregistrement de la notice en attendant que celle-ci soit évaluée pour s'assurer qu'elle répond aux normes du PFAN. Ce numéro doit être remplacé par un numéro unique lorsque la notice est évaluée et que la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;» est supprimée.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 Numéro international normalisé des publications en série =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'ISSN chaque fois qu'il est fourni dans le document en main, dans les notices bibliographiques analytiques ou dans la notice bibliographique pour la collection cataloguée dans son ensemble; sinon, enregistrer l'ISSN est facultatif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on sait que des ISSN distincts ont été attribués à différents formats d'une collection représentée par une seule notice d'autorité, il est préférable d'enregistrer dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 022 l'ISSN qui est l'ISSN de liaison (ISSN-L) pour ces différents formats. Enregistrer les ISSN pour les formats spécifiques dans des zones 667 distinctes, en suivant ce modèle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre d'une publication a changé, il est important de s'assurer que l'ISSN figurant sur la publication appartient au nouveau titre et non au titre précédent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un ISSN incorrect peut être indiqué dans une zone 667 (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;L'ISSN 1122-3344 n'est pas un ISSN valide pour cette publication&amp;amp;nbsp;»).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Autre numéro ou code normalisé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les lignes directrices des [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf ''NACO 024 Best Practices Guidelines'']. En règle générale, limiter à cinq le nombre de zones 024 dans une notice d'autorité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 024 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les identifiants codés dans la zone 024 des notices d'autorité du PFAN. Lorsqu'une zone 024 est présente dans une notice &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;d'autorité&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; qui fait l'objet d'une suppression (par exemple, dans le cas d'un doublon), les catalogueurs doivent transférer le contenu de la zone dans la notice qui doit être conservée. Lorsque deux notices d'autorité sont regroupées en une seule et que chacune des notices comporte une zone 024 différente, les catalogueurs doivent inclure les deux zones 024 dans la notice conservée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Données mathématiques codées sur les documents cartographiques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des pays, provinces, États, comtés'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les coordonnées des limites extérieures (rectangles de délimitation ou polygones) doivent généralement être utilisées avec des entités géographiques telles que des pays, des provinces, des États et des comtés pour identifier les coordonnées de l'entité. Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées en degrés/minutes/secondes, en degrés décimaux, en minutes décimales et/ou en secondes décimales. Les styles ne doivent pas être mélangés dans une même zone 034, mais la zone peut être répétée pour représenter les différents styles (voir ci-dessous pour les utilitaires de conversion); l'ordre des zones 034 lorsque les deux styles sont donnés n'a pas d'importance. Pour faciliter la réutilisation des coordonnées dans les applications géographiques, il faut employer le point et non la virgule comme signe décimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés/minutes/secondes''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux''' : enregistrement sous la forme hddd.dddddd (hémisphère-degrés.degrés décimaux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux avec plus et moins''' : enregistrer sous la forme +-ddd.dddddd (hémisphère[+/-]-degrés.décimaux) («&amp;amp;nbsp;+&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour N et E, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour S et W; le signe plus est facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple avec +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple sans le signe plus facultatif)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Minutes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmm.mmmm (hémisphère-degrés-minutes.minutes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Secondes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss.sss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes.secondes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons doivent généralement être enregistrées comme des points centraux plutôt que comme des limites extérieures. Pour la zone 034, la longitude et la latitude qui forment l'axe central sont enregistrées deux fois pour définir le point central (c'est-à-dire que les contenus des sous-zones $d et $e sont identiques et les contenus des sous-zones $f et $g sont identiques).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés/minutes/secondes)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux avec plus/moins)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Outils de conversion des coordonnées'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les institutions membres du PFAN sont encouragées à fournir des degrés/minutes/secondes et des degrés décimaux lorsqu'ils sont disponibles. De nombreux outils de conversion sont disponibles sur le Web pour dériver les uns des autres. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $2 a été définie pour l'enregistrement de la source des codes d'information sur les coordonnées - les sources couramment utilisées sont disponibles dans : [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CDC.html/view ''Codes sources pour les données cartographiques'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une citation de la source dans la zone 670 n'est pas nécessaire si la seule information provenant de la source est enregistrée dans la zone 034; une citation dans la zone 670 doit être faite si nécessaire pour enregistrer des informations en plus des coordonnées, telles que les variantes de nom, la hiérarchie, la période d'applicabilité, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#034_Donn.C3.A9es_math.C3.A9matiques_cod.C3.A9es_sur_les_documents_cartographiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 Numéro de contrôle de système =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#035_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_syst.C3.A8me |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Source du catalogage =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs doivent consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour les instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité nouvelles ou existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Langue de catalogage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $b fre ajoutée automatiquement par WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $d – Organisme responsable des modifications'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $d [code MARC 21] est ajoutée automatiquement par WMS lorsque la dernière sous-zone MARC $d dans la zone 040 n'est pas déjà celle de l'institution qui a modifié la notice. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $e – Règles de description'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on ajoute manuellement la sous-zone $e, ajouter la sous-zone après la sous-zone $b et avant la sous-zone $c. Il n'est pas nécessaire de déplacer la sous-zone $e à cette position si elle est déjà présente ailleurs dans le 040 ou si elle est ajoutée par une macro ou un gabarit. Lorsque la zone fixe 008/10 (Règles de catalogage descriptif) est changée pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Autre), la sous-zone $e rda est automatiquement ajoutée par le système.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#040_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Code d'authenticité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Cette zone se retrouve dans les notices d'autorité utilisées par BAC. Ne pas modifier ou supprimer cette zone lorsque le code CaOONL figure dans la 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les catalogueurs autres que ceux de BAC dérivent une notice à partir d'une notice de BAC contenant une zone 042, ils doivent s'assurer de supprimer cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les catalogueurs doivent ajouter la zone 042 $a nlc dans Canadiana chaque fois qu'ils créent, révisent ou dérivent une notice d'autorité. Ce code identifie le fichier «&amp;amp;nbsp;virtuel&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'autorité nationale canadienne qui est divisé en deux bases de données (LC/NAF et Canadiana).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-08]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#042_Code_d.27authenticit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Code de région géographique &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 043 peut seulement être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms géographiques (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone b – Code local de région géographique et Sous-zone $2 – Source du code local'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les lieux situés au Québec, les participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser la sous-zone $b pour enregistrer un code local tiré de la liste ci-dessous et représentant la région administrative du Québec où le lieu est situé. Ce code est formé du code de région géographique « n-cn--- » et d'un code local de sous-entité de deux lettres (p. ex., qa) qui identifie la région administrative et remplace les deux derniers caractères du code « n-cn--- » (p. ex. « n-cn-qa »). La sous-zone $b est enregistrée à la suite de la sous-zone $a et est suivie par la sous-zone $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Dates spéciales codées =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Lors de l'encodage de l'information sur la date, donner l'information la plus complète possible sur la date lorsque celle-ci est facilement disponible (la date dans la zone 046 peut être plus précise qu'une date utilisée dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2e_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Lors&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la révision des notices d'autorité existantes, enregistrer les dates dans la zone 046 même si le point d'accès lui-même n'a pas de dates dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d, lorsque l'information est facilement disponible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des dates dans la zone 046, utiliser la norme Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) dans tous les cas, sauf pour les siècles; fournir les dates en utilisant le modèle aaaa, aaaa-mm ou aaaa-mm-jj. Voir le tableau d'exemples dans l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Pour les spécifications complètes de l'EDTF, voir [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophoniste)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Blues around the clock, 1945 : $b étiquette (Johnny Hicks, saxophone ténor)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web Discogs, consulté le 27 mai 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; saxophoniste ténor qui a joué avec Tab Smith dans les années 1940)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de dates avant Jésus-Christ dans la zone 046, faire précéder les chiffres d'un trait d'union (signe moins). Comme il n'y a pas d'an zéro dans le calendrier de l'ère commune, il faut soustraire une année de la date réelle avant Jésus-Christ; par exemple, l'an 50 av. J.-C. est enregistré comme suit : -0049.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ##  $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement d'un siècle dans la zone 046, utiliser les deux premiers chiffres de l'intervalle de cent ans (par exemple, utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;16&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour représenter le 17&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle, 1600-1699).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Noter que le 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;er&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle apr. J.-C. est représenté par la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;00&amp;amp;nbsp;» et que les siècles av. J.-C. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sont précédés d'&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;un trait d'union &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(signe moins)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; avant les chiffres (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-04&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le 5&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle av. J.-C.). Un siècle approximatif (par exemple, activité environ 12&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle) ne peut pas être enregistré dans la zone 046.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Répétabilité'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;La zone 046 est répétable, mais les sous-zones de la zone 046 utilisées pour enregistrer les dates ne le sont pas. En général, une seule zone 046 avec des dates conformes à la norme EDTF devrait être suffisante. Cependant, les dates de siècles suivent la norme ISO 8601 et non la norme EDTF. Lors de l'enregistrement de dates de siècles en plus de dates plus précises, il faut donc répéter la zone 046.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates divergentes'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, les ressources consultées peuvent présenter des dates divergentes (par exemple, des dates de naissance ou de décès divergentes pour une personne ou des dates de début ou de fin divergentes pour une collectivité). Dans ces situations, la zone 046 doit refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'enregistrer toutes les dates divergentes en utilisant la zone 046, ni d'enregistrer une zone 046 pour chaque ressource consultée. L'évaluation des dates divergentes doit généralement avoir pour résultat une seule zone 046, contenant la ou les dates que le catalogueur juge les plus exactes pour représenter l'entité. Le catalogueur peut décider d'enregistrer ou non la ou les dates divergentes dans la zone 046 et il n'est pas nécessaire que la ou les dates enregistrées dans la zone 046 correspondent exactement à celle ou celles choisies pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;De même, toute date ajoutée au point d'accès autorisé devrait refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates, enregistrées conformément aux instructions de RDA et des énoncés de politique du PFAN. On peut considérer qu'une date qui prédomine dans les ressources consultées est la plus appropriée pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé. Si aucune date ne prédomine, le catalogueur peut décider d'utiliser le format «&amp;amp;nbsp;approximativement aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa?&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa ou aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans le point d'accès autorisé. Dans certains cas, des dates correspondant à la période d'activité de la personne (RDA 9.19.1.5) peuvent être préférables.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 157 av. J-C. comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce que c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 1907 comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Même exemple que ci-dessus illustrant une décision différente que le catalogueur aurait pu prendre concernant l'enregistrement de la sous-zone $f de la zone 046)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;La zone 046 étant basée sur des informations provenant de sources multiples, la justification ne peut être formulée avec précision dans une sous-zone $v/$u à la fin d'une zone 046. Les dates divergentes doivent être enregistrées dans des zones 670. Si une notice existante comporte une sous-zone $v/$u comme justification d'une zone 046 et que cette zone 046 est mise à jour comme décrit ci-dessus, il faut supprimer la sous-zone $v/$u et convertir la justification en une zone 670 si les dates divergentes ne sont pas déjà justifiées dans des zones 670 existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, il peut être nécessaire d'effectuer un calcul pour déterminer les dates à enregistrer dans la zone 046 et le point d'accès autorisé. De tels calculs peuvent produire des dates incertaines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Si les ressources consultées ne fournissent que la date de décès de la personne et son âge (en années) au moment du décès, comme cela se voit souvent dans les notices nécrologiques, l'année de naissance de la personne correspondra à l'une de deux années consécutives. Pour calculer ces années, il faut d'abord soustraire l'âge de l'année de décès, puis utiliser l'année ainsi obtenue et l'année précédente comme les deux possibilités pour l'année de naissance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a soustrait 75, l'âge au décès, de 1994, l'année du décès; l'année obtenue, 1919, et l'année qui la précède, 1918, représentent les deux années de naissance possibles)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si des dates non-grégoriennes figurent dans les ressources consultées, la conversion de ces dates en dates grégoriennes peut produire des dates incertaines. Il faut utiliser les dates du calendrier grégorien dans la zone 046 et dans le point d'accès autorisé. Il se peut qu'une même date dans un calendrier non-grégorien corresponde à l'une de deux dates grégoriennes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La date de 1346 dans le calendrier hégirien correspond à 1967 ou 1968 dans le calendrier grégorien.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de la norme de la date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter la sous-zone $2 edtf, sauf après un siècle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zones $q – Date de fondation, $r – Date de cessation,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Début de la période d'activité et $t – Fin de la période d'activité'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer les dates associées à un congrès, etc., ponctuel ou à une occurrence isolée dans une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] et [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), dans les sous-zones $s et $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer la date de fondation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) et la date de cessation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) d'une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]), si cette information est connue, dans les sous-zones $q et $r.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'utilisation des sous-zones $s et $t pour le début et la fin de la période d'activité dans les zones 368 et 370-376, voir les directives présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les instructions suivantes représentent la pratique du PFAN sur l'enregistrement des sources d'information dans les sous-zones $u et $v des zones où elles sont définies, et/ou dans la zone 670 :&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046$u$v&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Les zones 670 doivent être utilisées pour appuyer l'information utilisée comme une partie du point d'accès dans les zones 1XX et 4XX.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pour les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $v est facultatif si la même information/source est déjà citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;utiliser la sous-zone $v si l'information/source n'est pas citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $u est facultatif et celle-ci doit toujours être précédée de la sous-zone $v.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser une zone 670 si c'est nécessaire pour justifier l'information enregistrée dans d'autres zones pour lesquelles les sous-zones $u et $v ne sont pas définies ou sont définies différemment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des données dans la sous-zone $v (Source d'information) des zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381, suivre les mêmes principes de base pour la citation que ceux qui s'appliquent actuellement pour la zone 670, sous-zone $a (Citation de la source).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Fournir une information précise sur la citation (numéro de page, sous-page d'un site Web) dans la sous-zone $v si, selon le jugement du catalogueur, cette plus grande précision est nécessaire pour trouver l'information à l'intérieur de la source citée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information dans les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 est sous la même forme que celle trouvée dans la source, il n'est pas nécessaire de la citer. Si l'information enregistrée dans ces zones est sous une forme différente de celle dans la source, utiliser 670 $b (Information trouvée).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les sources matérielles :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information provient d'une source matérielle (par exemple, un livre imprimé, un support numérique amovible), la sous-zone $v doit contenir suffisamment d'information pour qu'un catalogueur puisse trouver la ressource citée dans un catalogue ou une base de données bibliographiques. Ceci peut généralement se limiter au titre propre et au nom de l'éditeur ou à la date. Si cette combinaison n'est pas unique, la citation du titre peut être précédée du nom du créateur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les ressources en ligne :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fournir suffisamment d'information pour permettre de trouver la ressource via un moteur de recherche. Inclure soit le titre et la date de publication (si c'est une ressource publiée formellement, tel un livre numérique), soit une description appropriée du document et la date d'accès (pour une ressource moins formelle). Facultativement, inclure la sous-zone $u.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-03]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Cote de la Library of Congress =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#050_Cote_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 Indice de la classification de la Library of Congress &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes pour enregistrer les indices de la classification LC des auteurs littéraires individuels, y compris les auteurs de littérature de jeunesse. Elle peut aussi être utilisée '''exceptionnellement''' dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes et de collectivités pour enregistrer les indices de biographie dans la fourchette ML410-429 de la classification LC lorsque le choix de l'indice ou du Cutter n'est pas évident. La zone 053 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il ne faut pas enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000 dans la zone 053. Pour l'utilisation des indices de la classe PS8000 dans les notices d'autorité de noms, voir la section [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]] de ce Guide. Une notice d'autorité pour un auteur littéraire canadien peut contenir à la fois une zone 053 et une zone 065.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Cote de Bibliothèque et Archives Canada =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#055_Cote_de_Biblioth.C3.A8que_et_Archives_Canada |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Autre indice de classification &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 065 sert à enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000. La zone 065 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $2 et une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [Code MARC de l’institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de l'indice'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour indiquer que l'indice provient de la classe PS8000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#065_Autre_indice_de_classification |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Cote de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#082_Cote_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Indice de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#083_Indice_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Cote de publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#086_Cote_de_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Indice de classification d'une publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#087_Indice_de_classification_d.27une_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Vedette – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participant au programme PFAN sont invités à consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour obtenir des instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité existantes ou nouvelles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer la ponctuation de fin de zone dans la zone 1XX à moins qu'elle ne fasse partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou qu'elle ne soit requise par les instructions de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Afin de minimiser l'impact de la maintenance de la base de données sur les notices bibliographiques associées et/ou les notices d'autorité associées, les catalogueurs sont priés de s'abstenir d'apporter des changements qui ne sont pas essentiels aux zones 1XX.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour le titre propre d'une monographie en plusieurs parties, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choix du titre propre d'une collection pour une monographie :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte plus d'une forme de mention de collection, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource porte une mention de collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture dans la même source, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte des pages de titre pour la collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2915.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Tenir compte de l'espacement et des changements dans la typographie au moment de déterminer où le titre de la collection commence et se termine. Consulter également [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Établissement d'un point d'accès pour une collection :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Déterminer le choix du point d'accès autorisé en fonction de l'instruction [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] et des énoncés de politique de BAC/BAnQ pour cette instruction.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclure du point d'accès autorisé les renseignements suivants inclus dans la mention de collection dans la notice bibliographique de la partie composante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'article initial dans les sous-zones $a, $t, $n et $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les compléments de titre;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;la mention de responsabilité;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les titres parallèles;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;les désignations numériques/chronologiques.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter un ou plusieurs qualificatifs entre parenthèses, le cas échéant, conformément aux énoncés de politique de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour obtenir des instructions sur la conversion d'une notice d'autorité de nom en notice d'autorité de collection, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Should an SAR be made?&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Vedette – Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour les familles'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;3&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une famille. Voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Les ajouts au nom sont contenus dans une seule paire de parenthèses séparées par des deux-points. &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Le terme pour le type de famille est ajouté après le nom et il est enregistré dans la sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $d (date) suit le terme pour le type de famille.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $c est utilisée pour un lieu associé à une famille et suit la date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $g est utilisée pour un membre illustre d'une famille. Donner le point d'accès autorisé pour la personne tel que trouvé dans la 1XX de la notice d'autorité de nom sans garder aucun codage de sous-zone interne.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour des personnes'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] fournit des directives sur l'emplacement des mots indiquant une relation (par exemple, Jr.) et le MARC définit la sous-zone $q comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme développée du nom de personne.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) La sous-zone $d (date) doit toujours être le dernier élément dans une zone 100 sauf si le terme (Esprit) est ajouté au nom. Ajouter $c (Esprit) comme dernier élément d'une zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) En général ajouter la sous-zone $c avant la sous-zone $q lorsqu'on ajoute aussi des mots, des chiffres, etc., indiquant une relation. (Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5.] pour le traitement des noms portugais)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MAIS&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
3) Pour les situations exceptionnelles, par exemple lorsque la sous-zone $a ne contient qu'un nom de famille ou qu'un prénom ou que le nom inclut un préfixe, etc., consulter le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#100_Vedette_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Contenu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 336 peut seulement être utilisée pour les notices d'autorité représentant des expressions. La zone 336 est toujours suivie d'une sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;rdacontent/fre&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser les termes fournis dans [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html RDA 6.9.1.3]. La liste des termes est également disponible dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Code du type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si on enregistre une sous-zone $b à la place ou en plus d'une sous-zone $a, utiliser les codes fournis dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''] du MARC 21.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#336_Contenu |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Autres attributs associés à des personnes ou des collectivités =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé pour les termes dans les sous-zones $a, $b et $c. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a, $b et $c. Lorsque les termes dans les sous-zones $a et $b ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer de professions ou d'occupations dans la sous-zone $c (Autre désignation). La profession ou l'occupation peut être enregistrée dans la zone 374.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les titres de royauté, de noblesse ou de rang ecclésiastique ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) dans la sous-zone $d dans la forme utilisée dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'une période et Sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#368_Autres_attributs_associ.C3.A9s_.C3.A0_des_personnes_ou_des_collectivit.C3.A9s |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Lieu associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de juridictions ou d'autres lieux, utiliser la forme trouvée dans Canadiana ou, à défaut, celle trouvée dans le RVM, en enregistrant la source dans la sous-zone $2. La forme du nom de lieu utilisée dans la zone 370 peut différer de la forme du nom de lieu ajoutée à un nom privilégié de lieu ou à un point d'accès construit selon les instructions de RDA ou des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie du nom d'une localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut une autre désignation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de lieu)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié du lieu plus vaste)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom de lieu ajouté à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Autre nom de lieu dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité pour le lieu n'existe pas dans Canadiana ni dans le RVM, il n'est pas nécessaire d'en créer une pour enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370. Enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370 selon les instructions de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ, en consultant les sources appropriées et en ajoutant des éléments additionnels (par exemple, le type de juridiction) afin d'éviter les conflits. Ne pas ajouter de sous-zone $2 si aucune notice d'autorité n'a été créée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom du lieu associé a changé, le nom du lieu qui s'appliquait à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré à la place ou en plus de la forme actuelle du nom. Il n'est pas nécessaire de suivre les politiques d'indexation et d'utiliser uniquement la forme la plus récente du nom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemples :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne née dans la ville de Salisbury avant que son nom ne devienne Harare; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme de nom qui s'appliquait au moment de la naissance de la personne)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne résidant dans la ville de Milan pendant la Renaissance, avant la formation du pays moderne de l'Italie; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme actuelle du nom pour le pays)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de lieux qui ne sont pas des juridictions, préférer les noms provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM et identifier la source dans la sous-zone $2. Si le nom ne provient pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, l'enregistrer dans la zone 370 sans ajouter de sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zone $c – Pays associé&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;En général, ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $c pour enregistrer les lieux qui ne sont pas des entités souveraines. Ces lieux peuvent être enregistrés dans la sous-zone $f ou dans d'autres sous-zones selon le cas.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La Martinique est un département français d'outre-mer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, si une entité souveraine comporte (ou comportait auparavant) un ou plusieurs pays constitutifs, n'importe lequel des pays constitutifs associés à la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré dans la sous-zone $c en plus ou à la place de l'entité souveraine plus vaste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à la Grande-Bretagne qui a des liens étroits avec le Pays de Galles; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Union soviétique, en particulier au Kirghizistan; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à Aruba, un pays constitutif des Pays-Bas; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer les Pays-Bas)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Inde avant son indépendance de la Grande-Bretagne; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer la Grande-Bretagne)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms d'entités des Premières Nations au Canada ainsi que les tribus indiennes («&amp;amp;nbsp;Indian tribes&amp;amp;nbsp;») reconnues par le gouvernement des États-Unis comme des entités juridiques peuvent être incluses dans la sous-zone $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Enregistrer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre dans la zone 370, sauf s'il s'agit simplement d'un lieu de publication ou d'un autre lieu associé à une manifestation (auquel cas utiliser la zone 643, le cas échéant). Bien que le «&amp;amp;nbsp;lieu d'origine&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'une œuvre en série puisse être le même que le lieu de publication de l'œuvre pour laquelle la notice d'autorité de collection (ou la notice bibliographique de publication en série) a été créée, faire preuve de jugement pour distinguer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre d'un lieu de publication qui n'est pas réellement lié à l'œuvre elle-même.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Adresse =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Selon le jugement du catalogueur, fournir une adresse si les informations sont facilement disponibles et n'ont pas déjà été enregistrées dans la sous-zone $e (Lieu de résidence, de sièges sociaux) de la zone 370.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Dans les cas où la sous-zone $a n'est pas enregistrée, inclure au minimum la sous-zone $m (Adresse de courriel) ou la sous-zone $b (Ville). &lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas enregistrer les adresses physiques &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou courriels&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; des personnes vivantes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les informations reliées à l'adresse lors de la mise à jour d'une notice contenant une adresse.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer plusieurs adresses, avec ou sans plages de dates, dans des zones 371 distinctes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Adresse de courriel'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $m doit contenir uniquement une adresse de courriel. Ne pas ajouter d'adresse Internet pour la 1XX dans cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#371_Adresse |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Domaine d'activité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée pour le domaine d'activité, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une entité provenant de Canadiana est utilisée comme domaine d'activité, enlever tout codage de sous-zone qui n'est pas autorisé dans la zone 372.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Domaine d'activité dans la 372 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel que la plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Zones 372 avec un terme provenant du RVM et un terme de vocabulaire non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'un période et la sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Groupe associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le fichier d'autorité Canadiana ou le fichier LC/NAF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Dans la zone 373, le codage de sous-zone n'est pas employé pour les collectivités subordonnées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom d'un groupe associé a changé, enregistrer le ou les noms du groupe qui s'appliquaient à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates). Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec des sous-zones $2 et des dates :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec différentes sources de vocabulaires :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $ s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $ t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : même si le format MARC ne spécifie pas de forme de date dans ces sous-zones, la pratique suivante est recommandée par souci de cohérence. Enregistrer les dates selon le calendrier grégorien dans le format AAAA. Si une date plus précise est nécessaire, considérer la possibilité de l'enregistrer dans une autre zone (par exemple, 670, 678). Il n'est pas nécessaire de reformuler les dates déjà inscrites dans les notices d'autorité pour se conformer à cette pratique. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Profession =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;6.1.3 pour des instructions sur l'enregistrement de la profession ou de l'occupation comme élément. Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.19.1.6 pour des instructions sur l'utilisation d'un terme indiquant la profession ou l'occupation dans un point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : répéter la zone si nécessaire pour plus de clarté.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du terme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les codes enregistrés dans la sous-zone $2 de la zone 374 peuvent provenir soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-TIO.html/view ''Codes sources pour les termes de profession''], soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-VM-C.html/view ''Codes sources pour les vedettes-matière et termes d'indexation''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#374_Profession |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Sexe de la personne =&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Ne pas utiliser cette zone dans les nouvelles notices d'autorité. Lorsqu'une notice existante doit être modifiée pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer toute occurrence de la zone 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Renseignements sur la famille =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Personnalité importante de la famille'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement du nom d'un membre illustre d'une famille dans la sous-zone $b, utiliser la forme du nom de la personne telle que mentionnée dans la sous-zone $g de la zone 100 dans la notice d'autorité pour la famille. Les codages internes de sous-zones ne doivent pas être inclus dans la sous-zone $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Langue associée =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier les codes de langues plutôt que des termes, en utilisant la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21. La sous-zone $l (Nom de la langue) doit être utilisée uniquement pour fournir des informations non disponibles dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/LNG-C.html ''Liste des codes de langue''] du MARC 21. Enregistrer plusieurs codes de langue seulement si la personne ou la collectivité fait usage de plusieurs langages dans ses publications, communications, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;À titre facultatif, enregistrer un ou plusieurs codes de langue ISO 639-3 dans une zone 377 supplémentaire. Cette pratique est particulièrement recommandée lorsqu’un code ISO 639-3 permet d’identifier une langue plus précisément que le code MARC. Pour plus d’informations, voir les [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $2 n'est pas requise lorsque la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 est utilisée pour représenter la langue (le deuxième indicateur «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» mentionne déjà la source). Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent utiliser une autre source de codes de langue peuvent ajouter une zone 377 supplémentaire en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur et en mentionnant la source utilisée dans la sous-zone $2 . Cette source doit cependant provenir d'une des sources fournies dans la liste intitulée [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CTL.html ''Codes sources pour les codes et termes de langue''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Code ISO 639-3 pour la langue Achi : acr. Code pour cette même langue, laquelle fait partie des langues maya, dans la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 : myn)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Forme développée du nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer la forme développée du nom dans la zone 378 lorsque l'information est facilement disponible, même si l'information est déjà présente dans la zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#378_Forme_d.C3.A9velopp.C3.A9e_du_nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Genre de l'œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM ou le RVMGF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'enregistrement du genre de l'œuvre comme élément dans les notices d'autorité de collections représentant des œuvres (et non des expressions), voir l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.3.1.3.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#380_Genre_de_l.27.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Autres caractéristiques distinctes d'une œuvre ou d'une expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée pour enregistrer les éléments RDA Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) et Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Les autres caractéristiques distinctives des expressions qui sont spécifiques aux œuvres musicales (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4–6.18.1.6]) peuvent être aussi enregistrées dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Numéro de Franklin enregistré comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version enregistrée comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut être approprié que certains des termes enregistrés pour une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression soient enregistrés dans la zone 381 ou dans une autre zone MARC pour laquelle il n'y a pas d'élément RDA correspondant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, une collectivité (tel un éditeur) utilisée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ou d'une œuvre peut être enregistrée soit dans la zone 373 (Groupe associé), soit dans la zone 381, soit dans les deux zones. ''Note :'' Le codage de sous-zone pour les collectivités subordonnées n'est pas utilisé dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme groupe associé et comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA n'a pas d'élément particulier pour les lieux associés aux expressions, mais la zone 370 sous-zone $f (Autre lieu associé) et la sous-zone $g (Lieu d'origine de l'œuvre ou de l'expression) peuvent être utilisées dans les notices d'autorité pour les expressions. Dans certains cas, des lieux associés aux œuvres ou aux expressions sont considérés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression selon RDA et peuvent être enregistrés dans la zone 370, dans la zone 381 ou dans les deux zones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Lieux utilisés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre juridique; enregistrés dans les zones 370 et 381)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'élément RDA lieu d'origine d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.5]) dans une zone 370 (voir la section [[#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]] de ce Guide).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression a été utilisée dans un point d'accès autorisé et est aussi enregistrée comme élément dans une zone 3XX, utiliser la zone 381 pour enregistrer une autre caractéristique distinctive. À titre facultatif, enregistrer aussi la même information dans une autre zone 3XX appropriée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#381_Autres_caract.C3.A9ristiques_distinctes_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_ou_d.27une_expression |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en utilisant les termes du thésaurus ''Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM'' (RVMMEM). Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en appliquant les instructions de RDA ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6]) et les ÉP de BAC-BAnQ associés. ''Note :'' La zone 382 peut également être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité d'expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :''' Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère. Si c'est jugé important pour l'identification et l'accès, ajouter une zone 382 additionnelle qui ne répond pas aux présentes lignes directrices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-04-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#382_Distribution_d.27.C3.A9x.C3.A9cution_d.27une_.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numéro d'identification d'une œuvre &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou d'une expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; musicale =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible. Créer des zones 383 distinctes pour les différents systèmes de numérotation associés à une même œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#383_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27identification_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Tonalité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible pour les œuvres. En cas de doute, ne pas enregistrer. Ne pas enregistrer pour les expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Caractéristiques du public cible =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer le public cible d'une œuvre ou d'une expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices  du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a : Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Termes provenant de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé et terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-07-17]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Caractéristiques du créateur ou du collaborateur &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer les caractéristiques démographiques d'un ou plusieurs créateurs ou contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression, notamment pour enregistrer les caractéristiques communes à un groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression. Cette zone sera généralement utilisée dans des notices d'autorité établies pour des agrégats par regroupement matérialisant deux ou plusieurs expressions de deux ou plusieurs œuvres indépendantes créées par des agents différents, ainsi que pour les œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre (par exemple, les œuvres d'auteurs inconnus ou les collections de monographies). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Personnes âgées $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Terme démographique non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bien que cette zone soit principalement utilisée pour des œuvres agrégées et pour des œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre, il existe des situations où il est également approprié de l'utiliser pour une œuvre individuelle d'un ou plusieurs créateurs nommés. Par exemple, pour une œuvre musicale composée pendant l'enfance ou l'adolescence d'un créateur, il ne serait pas approprié d'enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;Enfants&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Adolescents&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme caractéristiques dans la notice d'autorité du compositeur. Au lieu de cela, les caractéristiques démographiques applicables uniquement à certaines des œuvres d'un créateur doivent être enregistrées dans les notices d'autorité établies pour ces œuvres.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Œuvre composée en 2003-2005, achevée lorsque le compositeur avait 14 ans)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Termes issus de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;''(Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau; terme non contrôlé et termes provenant du même vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $i – Information sur la relation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il est possible d'utiliser la sous-zone $i pour enregistrer un terme désignant la nature de la relation entre les groupes démographiques enregistrés dans la zone et l'œuvre ou l'expression. Préférer un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que les termes de relation du format MARC ou les indicateurs de relation RDA. Mettre une majuscule à la première lettre du terme de relation et utiliser la forme au singulier. Faire suivre le terme de relation par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998-February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer plusieurs occurrences de la sous-zone $i dans une même occurrence de la zone 386. Si plusieurs termes de relation s'appliquent à un seul groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs (par exemple, une œuvre réunissant des auteurs et des artistes du même groupe démographique ou une expression dont les éditeurs et les traducteurs appartiennent au même groupe démographique), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Compilation d'œuvres d'auteurs et d'artistes du Massachusetts)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différents termes de relation s'appliquent à différents créateurs et contributeurs (par exemple, si les auteurs font partie d'un groupe démographique et les artistes d'un autre), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents. Si le même terme de relation s'applique à plus d'un groupe démographique, répéter la sous-zone $a dans une même zone ou répéter la zone. Pour plus de clarté, en cas de doute, répéter la zone 386 autant que nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Partition comprenant des œuvres de Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler et Strauss, ainsi que les paroles imprimées sous forme de texte, en allemand et en traduction anglaise)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-12]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Période associée à la création =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine d'une œuvre ou d'une expression. Le nom de la période peut préciser ou sous-entendre un lieu pour lequel la période de temps est pertinente. Il peut aussi préciser le nom d'un événement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM ou le RVMFAST. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les compilations, la zone peut être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine des œuvres/expressions contenues dans la compilation, considérées collectivement (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur). Elle peut également être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine de la compilation elle-même (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;2&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour un recueil de poésie de la Renaissance compilé au XIXe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 388 peut être utilisée en conjonction avec ou à la place de la zone 046. Lorsque la ou les dates précises de création ou d'origine ne sont pas connues ou qu'elles s'étendent sur une longue période, il peut être utile d'enregistrer des termes chronologiques textuels dans la zone 388.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour une œuvre anonyme du XIVe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si la valeur de l'indicateur diffère, répéter la zone. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom avec zones 388 contenant des termes provenant de différents vocabulaires)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour une autre raison, supprimer tout signe de ponctuation à la fin d'une zone 4XX sauf s'il fait partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou est requis par les règles de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'est pas nécessaire de justifier tous les renvois 4XX; voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès|Justification des variantes de point d'accès]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 670 de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas faire un renvoi 4XX qui se normalise sous la même forme qu'une autre zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité ou une zone 1XX dans toute autre notice d'autorité de nom. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;NACO normalization&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratiques à privilégier pour le catalogage selon RDA :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Enregistrer les variantes trouvées dans la manifestation cataloguée :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Utiliser le jugement du catalogueur;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Il n'y a pas de limite quant au nombre ou à la forme des renvois;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Au lieu ou en plus d'ajouter des variantes, envisager de fournir un accès en ajoutant des zones 37X.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Exemple montrant une zone 378 sans une variante pour la forme développée du nom :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Établir des notices d'autorité de noms supplémentaires pour les points d'accès autorisés nécessaires pour soutenir les éléments utilisés dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX (par exemple, la collectivité supérieure associée à la collectivité subordonnée qui doit être établie).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, fournir une variante de point d'accès 4XX pour un ancien point d'accès autorisé 1XX, sauf si l'ancien point d'accès autorisé est manifestement incorrect. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#4XX$w|Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour plus d'information.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Utiliser la forme établie des composantes dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX, à l'exception des variantes en écriture non latine, qui peuvent présenter un mélange d'écritures ou être entièrement dans une écriture non latine.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, ne pas supprimer des variantes sauf si elles sont manifestement incorrectes (par exemple, une variante en écriture non latine qui ne représente pas la même personne).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si une forme trouvée dans la manifestation cataloguée inclut une variante de forme d'une composante d'une variante de point d'accès en 4XX, cette forme peut être utilisée dans son intégralité comme une variante de point d'accès supplémentaire en 4XX, à condition que des sous-zones ne soient pas utilisées pour diviser ses parties constitutives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on change la forme d'une collectivité hiérarchiquement supérieure, d'un nom géographique ou d'un nom de personne dans une 1XX, mettre à jour toutes les notices d'autorité existantes qui utilisent cette composante dans une zone 4XX, sauf si la 4XX représente l'ancien point d'accès autorisé (par exemple, $w/2=e). Exception : Ne pas appliquer cette instruction dans le cas des notices d'autorité migrées qui n'ont pas été réévaluées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est modifié parce que la personne a changé de nom, enregistrer l'ancienne forme du nom dans une zone 400 avec $w nne si la variante est valide selon les instructions de RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après l'élection comme pape)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est mis à jour pour fermer la date, il est recommandé d'enregistrer l'ancienne forme avec la date ouverte dans une zone 4XX avec $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) basé sur le catalogage CIP est modifié parce que sa forme sur la ressource publiée est différente de celle sur la demande CIP, une zone 4XX pour l'ancienne forme du point d'accès autorisé avec la sous-zone $w nne peut être ajoutée sauf si l'ancienne forme 1XX est manifestement incorrecte (par exemple, la date de naissance de l'auteur a été donnée comme étant 1775 au lieu de 1975 dans la demande CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) est modifié en raison d'un changement dans les instructions de catalogage, enregistrer l'ancienne forme dans une zone 4XX en utilisant $w. Si la variante de forme est un renvoi valide selon les instructions actuelles de RDA, utiliser $w nne. Si la variante de forme n'est pas un renvoi valide selon les instructions RDA actuelles, utiliser $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante n'est pas valide selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nne&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante est valide selon RDA; le changement de la forme en 100 est basé sur l'utilisation du nom et les dates de naissance et de mort ont été ajoutées parce que la 100 a été changée)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429 av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que l'abréviation «&amp;amp;nbsp;ca&amp;amp;nbsp;» n'est pas valide pour une période d'activité selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé est corrigé parce que des dates ont été enregistrées de manière inexacte ou qu'un catalogueur a introduit une faute de frappe dans le point d'accès autorisé, ne pas faire de renvoi à la forme incorrecte. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche des notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel des collections et la création et la tenue à jour des notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des variantes de point d'accès peuvent être enregistrées dans toute notice d'autorité de collection, y compris celles pour des phrases analogues à des collections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si les volumes d'une monographie en plusieurs parties portent des formes différentes du titre commun, faire un renvoi 4XX plutôt qu'un renvoi 5XX pour la forme de titre non choisie comme titre propre de la monographie en plusieurs parties.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w. Lorsqu'on utilise les indicateurs de relation RDA dans les zones 5XX, utiliser les termes des annexes I, J ou K; mettre une majuscule au premier terme et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour de l'information sur l'utilisation des indicateurs de relation et/ou les codes $w dans une zone 5XX spécifique, voir la section de ce Guide concernant cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les conventions du format autorités en ce qui concerne l'utilisation de la sous-zone $w. Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $w sauf si une valeur autre que «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» est appropriée dans l'une des positions. Lorsqu'on utilise la sous-zone $w, enregistrer la sous-zone comme première sous-zone de la zone. Fournir les positions de caractères qui précèdent la valeur mais pas celles qui lui succèdent, par exemple,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé antérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé ultérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = pour indiquer qu'une sous-zone $i ou une sous-zone $2 est utilisée pour donner de l'information sur la relation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = pour indiquer un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour des pseudonymes multiples (la notice comprend aussi une zone 663)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» (5XX) ne doit pas se normaliser sous la même forme qu'un autre renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la même notice d'autorité, sauf si les deux zones 5XX contiennent un indicateur de relation dans la sous-zone $i et que les textes des indicateurs de relation sont différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre un nom de personne et 1) le nom d'une autre personne, d'une famille ou d'une collectivité ou 2) le point d'accès autorisé pour une œuvre ou une expression. Cette technique peut également être utilisée pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres et des expressions et contenant des noms de personnes. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe I, J ou K dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on enregistre des relations entre noms de personnes impliquant des pseudonymes et que seulement deux notices d'autorité sont en cause, les catalogueurs peuvent soit 1) utiliser la sous-zone $i et le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w ou 2) utiliser des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» simples. Pour plus d'information sur ces techniques et des instructions sur l'enregistrement de pseudonymes multiples (c'est-à-dire ceux qui requièrent une zone 663), voir la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rappel aux catalogueurs : Lorsqu'une variante de nom (400) et un point d'accès autorisé (100) sont en conflit, il faut faire un ajout à la zone 400 ou à la zone 100 pour résoudre le conflit (par exemple, une forme développée du nom, une date d'activité, etc.); la pratique antérieure consistant à changer la zone 400 en 500 pour résoudre le conflit n'est plus une option. Lorsque les catalogueurs trouvent une variante de forme dans une zone 500 au cours de la mise à jour d'une notice d'autorité de nom, ils doivent résoudre le conflit et modifier la zone en 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de collectivité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de réunion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8] pour des directives sur les relations entre les notices d'autorité pour des séries de conférences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Titre uniforme =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés pour des œuvres ou des expressions. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe J dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $i avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w tant que les indicateurs de relation pour les lieux ne seront pas développés. (RDA a prévu un espace pour l'annexe L.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Traitement de collection – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 640 Dates de publication et/ou indication séquentielle de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#640_Dates_de_publication_et.2Fou_indication_s.C3.A9quentielle_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Exemple de numérotation de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#642_Exemple_de_num.C3.A9rotation_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Lieu et éditeur de la collection/organisme de publication =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#643_Lieu_et_.C3.A9diteur_de_la_collection.2Forganisme_de_publication |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Usage en matière d'analyse de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#644_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_d.27analyse_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Usage en matière de rappel de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#645_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_rappel_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Usage en matière de classification de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#646_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_classification_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Renvoi complexe «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 663 comprend le texte explicatif et les points d'accès autorisés pour les relations entre une zone 100 (nom établi) et d'autres zones 100 (noms établis) qui ne peuvent pas être correctement exprimées par un ou plusieurs renvois simples générés à partir de zones 500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Généralement, cette situation se produit lorsqu'une personne utilise plus de deux identités, lorsque plus d'une personne partage une identité avec une ou plusieurs autres personnes, ou lorsque plusieurs personnes utilisent le même pseudonyme indépendamment les unes des autres ou en raison d'un autre arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le texte de la zone 663 peut être adapté pour répondre à des situations exceptionnelles; toutefois, il faut garder le texte aussi simple que possible et laisser les zones et le codage MARC communiquer l'information souhaitée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la technique de la zone 663 pour établir des relations entre collectivités ou entre personnes et collectivités.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Seulement deux identités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque seulement deux notices d'autorité de noms sont créées pour une personne, les notices d'autorité de noms sont généralement reliées par des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500, sans aucune zone 663. Toutefois, lorsque l'une des notices d'autorité de noms est établie pour un pseudonyme commun ou un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment les unes des autres, la technique de la zone 663 est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Plus de deux identités - point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» et renvois ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plus de deux points d'accès autorisés sont créés pour la même personne, identifier un point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» en utilisant la technique de la zone 663. Cette décision est fondée sur le désir de simplifier la structure de renvois et d'aider les catalogueurs à déterminer le nom à utiliser comme sujet des œuvres biographiques ou critiques. Le point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» doit être déterminé par la forme de nom qui prédomine dans l'usage ou, en l'absence de preuves suffisantes, en choisissant le nom réel de la personne comme forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Dans la notice d'autorité pour la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», ajouter des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour tous les autres noms utilisés. Justifier les renvois en 500 par des zones 670 selon la pratique normale. Fournir une zone 663 énumérant tous les autres noms avec le texte suivant (celui-ci peut être modifié pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom] $b [forme établie du nom]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans chacune des autres notices d'autorité de noms, ajouter un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», en justifiant ce renvoi par une zone 670, selon la pratique normale. D'autres noms peuvent être mentionnés dans le 670 s'il est pratique de le faire. Fournir une zone 663 avec le texte suivant ou un texte similaire (le texte peut être ajusté pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom choisie comme vedette de base]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque l'auteur utilise un autre nouveau nom, créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour ce nom et l'ajouter à la structure de renvois ainsi qu'à la liste de la zone 663 dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;». Les renvois au nouveau nom dans les zones 500 et 663 sont ajoutés seulement dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes conjoints ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un pseudonyme conjoint est une identité utilisée par deux ou plusieurs personnes travaillant en collaboration. Si une personne utilise un pseudonyme conjoint et un autre nom (tel que trouvé dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes utilisés par plusieurs personnes ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment l'une de l'autre utilisent le même pseudonyme et un ou plusieurs autres noms (tels que trouvés dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisée par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(L'auteur a un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes et des pseudonymes individuels)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Note générale non destinée au public =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Donner des informations de valeur permanente et d'intérêt général qui seraient également utiles aux autres institutions du PFAN ou à celles qui n'y participent pas. Une liste représentative des notes est donnée ci-dessous. En général, le libellé est recommandé, mais n'est pas prescriptif, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions. Les zones 667 distinctes peuvent être données dans n'importe quel ordre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [raison de l'encodage].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date de la mise à jour].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Utilisée pour les changements de langue officielle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Annexe_2_:_Projets_sp.C3.A9ciaux|Annexe 2]] de ce Guide pour des informations et des instructions sur les zones 667 ajoutées aux notices d'autorité dans le cadre d'un projet spécial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes dont certaines identités ne sont pas établies ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une personne utilise deux ou plusieurs identités dans les manifestations, des notices d'autorité de noms peuvent être créées pour chaque identité. Dans un souci d'efficacité, les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser une zone 667 pour énumérer les pseudonymes non trouvés dans les publications au lieu de créer des notices d'autorité de noms pour ces pseudonymes inutilisés. Dans ce cas, énumérer les pseudonymes inutilisés dans une zone 667 après l'expression : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette note peut aussi être ajoutée dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne qui a plusieurs notices d'autorité de noms pour plusieurs identités lorsque certains des pseudonymes ne sont pas trouvés dans des publications. Dans ce cas, énumérer seulement les pseudonymes inutilisés dans la zone 667 et suivre les instructions appropriées pour les autres pseudonymes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, […] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la section [[#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom|663]] de ce Guide ainsi que dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les séries de congrès, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter une zone 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour une série de congrès lorsqu'il y a des notices d'autorité autant pour la série que pour les occurrences isolées du congrès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appliquer ces instructions lors de la création de nouvelles notices d'autorité de noms et lors de la révision de notices d'autorité de noms existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Ajouter des notes indiquant l'utilisation en indexation lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé n'est pas approprié pour utilisation comme vedette-matière dans ces situations :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Chefs d'État, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette instruction s'applique aux notices d'autorité de noms pour les collectivités représentant la fonction lorsque le nom du titulaire est inclus comme partie du point d'accès autorisé de la collectivité. Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Dignitaires gouvernementaux)] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html 11.2.2.26 (Dignitaires religieux)] pour les instructions sur les collectivités. Utiliser cette note 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour la collectivité pour indiquer l'utilisation en indexation :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [vedette du nom de la personne].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi les sections [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Changements linéaires entre noms antérieurs et ultérieurs d'une juridiction'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La politique d'indexation du RVM est d'employer comme point d'accès matière ou comme subdivision géographique uniquement le dernier nom d'une juridiction politique qui a eu un ou plusieurs noms antérieurs, aussi longtemps que l'identité territoriale demeure essentiellement la même (voir ''Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval'', 5.14.3.1). Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom ayant un point d'accès autorisé antérieur/ultérieur pour un lieu dans cette situation, les catalogueurs doivent ajouter une note 667 sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom antérieur du lieu et modifier les zones 008 appropriés (008/11 et 008/15).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Notices d'autorité de personnes fictives'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les points d'accès autorisés pour les personnes fictives ne doivent pas être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, la zone 008/11 doit être codée avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» et la zone 008/15 doit être codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;». Selon l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 9.0, lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, ajouter cette zone 667 pour indiquer l'utilisation comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une partie d'une ville, en indiquant qu'il n'est pas approprié de l'utiliser comme une subdivision géographique :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) Notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les points d'accès autorisés pour les noms de familles peuvent être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Pour les notices d'autorité de noms de familles qui reflètent la pratique antérieure (qui interdisait de les utiliser comme vedettes-matière), mettre à jour les notices pour attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et supprimer la note sur l’utilisation comme vedette-matière suivante :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes pour les renvois en écriture non latine ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans une notice d'autorité qui comprend une variante de point d'accès dans une écriture non latine, utiliser la zone 667 avec une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.&amp;amp;nbsp;» S'il y a plusieurs variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, utiliser une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» à la zone 008/29 pour indiquer que la variante de point d'accès n'a pas été évaluée. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Doublons&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Doublons ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice à conserver&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Source des données =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone a pour but d'enregistrer des informations sur le nom ou le titre représenté dans la zone 1XX. Elle comprend des renseignements qui contribuent à l'identification de l'entité et qui justifient le choix du nom ou du titre de même que tout élément supplémentaire utilisé pour construire le point d'accès autorisé (1XX). Les informations consignées justifient également, le cas échéant, des variantes de forme du nom ou du titre (4XX), d'autres éléments d'identification (046, 3XX et 678), et clarifient les relations entre la 1XX et les autres entités représentées dans le fichier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Fonctions de la zone 670 :'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations, provenant de sources (par exemple, livres, appels téléphoniques, sites Web), à l'appui du choix et de la forme du point d'accès autorisé, des variantes de point d'accès et d'autres éléments d'identification&lt;br /&gt;
* Stocker des informations qui pourront être utilisées pour résoudre un conflit par la suite&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations sur les relations entre entités (par exemple, une personne est l'auteur d'une œuvre, une collectivité a été absorbée par une autre collectivité)&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier une personne qui a produit des œuvres dans différents domaines ou sous des formes diverses&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier des personnes différentes dont les points d'accès doivent rester identiques pour le moment (c'est-à-dire des noms de personnes indifférenciés)&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour préciser si les différentes formes d'un nom ou d'un titre sont de simples variations ou reflètent un changement de nom ou de titre&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer les recherches requises par les lignes directrices actuelles&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour faciliter la maintenance des fichiers d'autorité et bibliographiques étant donné que les informations dans les zones 670 aident à la prise de décisions concernant les points d'accès autorisés en double et les attributions erronées&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour soutenir les manipulations informatiques basées sur des algorithmes utilisant les informations du 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, la première zone 670 cite la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est établie, c'est-à-dire la ressource en cours de catalogage. Si la ressource en cours de catalogage ou de consultation ne fournit aucune information justifiant le point d'accès autorisé, les variantes de point d'accès ou les autres éléments enregistrés dans la notice d'autorité, voir la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur la façon de citer la ressource dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les zones 670 suivantes dans n'importe quel ordre, en ajoutant les nouvelles zones après celles qui existent déjà. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 670 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670, préférer les sources objectives et faisant autorité (par exemple, une encyclopédie) et les sources qui fournissent des informations de première main (par exemple, un blogue d'auteur). Utiliser des sources qui fournissent des informations supplémentaires plutôt que celles qui répètent des informations déjà présentes dans les autres zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Pratiques à privilégier pour les zones 670 : '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans la sous-zone $b, résumer et modifier les informations trouvées, selon les besoins, pour éviter les informations superflues ou répétitives.&lt;br /&gt;
* Éviter de citer des informations subjectives ou des informations dont la valeur est douteuse pour identifier une entité dans un contexte bibliographique.&lt;br /&gt;
* Faire preuve de prudence lors de l'enregistrement d'informations sur des personnes vivantes lorsque ces informations sont susceptibles d'être de nature privée ou controversée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité existantes peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices. Par exemple, dans les zones 670 des notices d'autorité plus anciennes, la sous-zone $b contenant des informations justificatives pourrait être absente. Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité qui faisaient partie d'un projet spécial peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices et/ou peuvent contenir des informations qui semblent inhabituelles ou incorrectes.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Les exemples donnés tout au long du texte suivant présentent diverses conventions en ce qui concerne la ponctuation et le style. Ces conventions ne sont pas prescriptives et doivent être considérées comme des pratiques à privilégier pour faciliter l'échange d'informations dans le contexte d'une base de données partagée. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs fassent preuve de jugement et de bon sens. La ponctuation et le style ne doivent pas nécessairement être cohérents d'une notice à l'autre tant que l'information est claire et précise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format des zones 670 ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
À l'exception de l'eszett (ß ou ſʒ) et du symbole euro (€), tous les caractères figurant dans le [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/M9230.html tableau des codes MARC] peuvent être utilisés dans les notices d'autorité ajoutées au fichier d'autorité Canadiana (voir le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). Lorsque des données provenant d'un site Web sont copiées/collées dans une zone 670, vérifier que tous les caractères peuvent être utilisés dans la notice. Certains caractères non valides ressemblent à ceux qui sont valides. Par exemple, le tiret (–) non valide ressemble au trait d'union (-) valide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une substitution pour un symbole non reproductible est indiquée entre parenthèses (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.5]), une explication de cette interpolation peut également être fournie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les données doivent être fournies sous forme romanisée. Normalement, il est entendu que le catalogueur a fourni la romanisation; par conséquent, lors de la transcription de données trouvées dans la source sous forme romanisée, ajouter après celle-ci l'expression entre crochets ['''forme romanisée''']. Dans des langues telles que l'arabe et l'hébreu, où les voyelles sont généralement omises dans l'orthographe des textes, le catalogueur fournit les voyelles manquantes lors de la transcription des données. Lors de la transcription de texte qui inclut les voyelles, ajouter après entre parenthèses ['''vocalisé'''] ou ['''en partie vocalisé'''] selon le cas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un catalogueur choisit de fournir des variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, les 670 $b doivent contenir aussi bien la transcription du ou des textes en écriture non latine trouvés dans la source que la ou les formes systématiquement romanisées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les notices d'autorité sont créées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, il est possible que de l'information supplémentaire soit incluse. Ces données peuvent également être formatées d'une manière différente de celle indiquée dans le présent document. En général, ces données doivent être conservées telles qu'elles sont générées afin de maintenir la rentabilité de ce processus, à moins que les données ne prêtent à confusion ou ne provoquent des erreurs de validation. Les noms et les titres pour lesquels les notices d'autorité sont créées constituent l'exception à cette règle. Suivre les instructions de ces sections pour enregistrer ces données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Citation de la source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Le titre propre de la ressource citée, suffisamment complet pour permettre une identification ultérieure dans un catalogue en ligne. Des abréviations et des points de suspension peuvent être utilisés. Faire précéder un titre générique ou non distinctif du nom du créateur par lequel commencerait le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre. Si le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre est le même que le titre propre plus un qualificatif, il peut être fourni à la place du titre propre pour éviter toute ambiguïté. Lorsque des informations sont fournies dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 pour justifier un point d'accès autorisé ou une variante de point d'accès, suivre les instructions supplémentaires sous Enregistrement des noms et des titres. &lt;br /&gt;
# La date de publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Monographies en plusieurs parties. S'il s'agit de la première partie, indiquer la date de publication sous forme de date ouverte.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Publications en série autres que les collections de monographies. En général, utiliser une désignation chronologique au lieu d'une date de publication. S'il n'y a pas de désignation chronologique, utiliser la désignation numérique et la date de publication. Le cas échéant, indiquer à la suite de la désignation qu'un «&amp;amp;nbsp;substitut&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été utilisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:15px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ressources intégratrices. Appliquer les instructions de [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] pour la source du titre propre d'un site Web. Identifier l'itération à partir de laquelle les informations ont été prises (par exemple «&amp;amp;nbsp;consulté(e) le&amp;amp;nbsp;» suivi d'une date pour un site Web mis à jour de façon continue, le numéro de mise à jour ou le numéro de révision pour les publication à feuillets mobiles à mise à jour).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Informations trouvées'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $b :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# L'emplacement spécifique où les informations ont été trouvées. Pour les ressources en plusieurs parties avec parties numérotées, indiquer la désignation de la partie et l'emplacement dans la partie (par exemple, vol. 6, page 10; recto de la carte, étiquette). Des abréviations ou des formes au long peuvent être utilisées (par exemple, p. de t. ou page de titre, couv. ou couverture, vol. 6 ou volume 6). &lt;br /&gt;
# Informations trouvées. À la suite de l'emplacement, citer les informations qui y ont été trouvées, entre parenthèses. Le cas échéant, indiquer différentes occurrences d'informations provenant de la même source à la suite de l'emplacement de l'information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' Si le point d'accès autorisé est construit à partir des données de catalogage avant publication, inclure «&amp;amp;nbsp;CIP&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la mention de l'emplacement (par exemple, formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Takao Tanabe, 2026 : $b page de titre du CIP de BAC (Sherri Shinobu Kajiwara) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Kajiwara, Sherri S.; personne associée au Canada et au Japon)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Ressources Internet.''' Pour les sites Web, indiquer s'il y a lieu le nom de l'emplacement à l'intérieur du site (par exemple, À propos; Notre histoire, Chronologie; Government, Executive Branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Plusieurs emplacements dans une ressource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' Lorsqu'on ajoute de nouvelles informations à une zone 670 créée pour un CIP, indiquer que les nouvelles informations proviennent de la ressource publiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; personne associée au Canada) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; personne associée au Canada) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de noms, utiliser généralement «&amp;amp;nbsp;etc.&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour éviter de donner plus de deux emplacements ou une séquence d'emplacements (par exemple, p. 316, etc., pour la séquence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de collections, toujours indiquer chaque emplacement séparément.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Lors du travail d'autorité post-catalogage sans le document en main, utiliser l'emplacement « ressource non disponible ». Si le document est examiné à nouveau et que la notice d'autorité est mise à jour, il est permis de modifier la zone 670 correspondante afin de fournir un emplacement et des formes supplémentaires de titres de collection si nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source des informations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent facultativement fournir un identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) dans la sous-zone $u de la zone 670 pour établir un lien avec la ressource citée si celle-ci contient des informations importantes sur l'entité établie qui ne peuvent être citées succinctement dans la notice d'autorité. Noter que l'utilisation d'un URI dans la zone 670 $u ne supplée pas à l'obligation de citer dans les sous-zones $a et $b de la zone 670 les données pertinentes nécessaires pour justifier le point d'accès autorisé (y compris les ajouts) ou les variantes (cette information continuera d'être disponible si le site change ou disparaît). Toutefois, les informations trouvées dans les sources en ligne peuvent être ajoutées aux zones 046 ou 3XX avec les citations appropriées dans les sous-zones $v et $u et ne pas être répétées dans une 670 lorsque ces informations ne sont pas utilisées dans une 1XX ou une 4XX. Si un URI est inclus dans une 670, il doit être indiqué dans la sous-zone $u. La sous-zone $u doit contenir uniquement l'URI sans aucune autre donnée (par exemple, ne pas mettre l'URI entre parenthèses ni inclure de mots dans la sous-zone $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des noms et des titres ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer intégralement les noms ou les titres de collections utilisés dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès, comme ils apparaissent dans la source, sans abréviation par le catalogueur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la préparation d'une notice d'autorité pour le texte d'une loi ou d'un recueil de lois par sujet, si une source citée contient un titre abrégé ou un titre de référence officiels, citer ce titre, précédé du terme «&amp;amp;nbsp;titre de référence&amp;amp;nbsp;» et de son emplacement exact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les autorités de collectivités, inclure dans les données citées toute la hiérarchie requise pour justifier toutes les variantes de point d'accès nécessaires. Faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles informations (par exemple, le nom de l'organisme subordonné) sont étrangères à la notice créée et ne doivent pas être enregistrées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toutes les catégories ci-dessus, si la seule présentation du nom ou du titre sur la source d'information privilégiée se trouve dans le titre de la ressource donné dans la sous-zone $a de la 670, la répétition du nom dans la sous-zone $b peut être omise, à condition qu'aucune information importante ne soit perdue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si des informations sur un nom ou un titre antérieur ou postérieur se trouvent dans la même source que le nom ou le titre dans le point d'accès autorisé, donner toutes les informations dans la zone 670. Ne pas séparer les informations sur le nom ou le titre antérieur ou postérieur pour les donner dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour faciliter la contribution internationale et l'utilisation des notices d'autorité, lors de l'enregistrement des dates, utiliser généralement les noms de mois, sous forme longue ou [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abrégée]. (Pour les dates enregistrées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, voir la section [[#Format_des_zones_670|Format des zones 670]] de ce Guide). Ne pas modifier le style des dates dans les notices existantes. Comme pratique à privilégier, si une date n'est pas incluse dans la sous-zone $d de la zone 100, envisager d'ajouter une zone 046 si les dates sont disponibles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification des variantes de point d'accès ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justifier les noms ou les titres donnés comme variantes de point d'accès par des informations citées des sources. Toutefois, une justification n'est pas requise dans les cas suivants :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variantes de point d'accès reflétant différentes romanisations ou orthographes connues du catalogueur;&lt;br /&gt;
# Une variante de titre dérivée de la ressource cataloguée, d'autres ressources cataloguées sous le même point d'accès ou de sources de référence standard;&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois pour des points d'accès autorisés de collectivités reflétant des changements dus à une réforme orthographique nationale, des changements de noms dus à un changement de langue officielle ou des changements impliquant uniquement une collectivité supérieure à laquelle la collectivité en cours d'établissement est subordonnée.&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois facultatifs à partir de formes RCAA2 ou pré-RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité de collections et les notices d'autorité de noms rétrospectives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification d'autres éléments ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les informations enregistrées dans les zones 046, 3XX ou 678 de la notice d'autorité doivent généralement être justifiées, à moins qu'elles ne ressortent clairement dans les informations enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 ou qu'elles puissent être facilement déduites d'autres éléments d'identification enregistrés, y compris le nom privilégié.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour la zone 046 et plusieurs des zones 3XX, une sous-zone $u ou une sous-zone $v enregistrée dans la même zone peut être utilisée à la place ou en plus d'une 670. Voir la section [[#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]] de ce Guide pour les directives concernant les sous-zones $u et $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des autres données ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. Ne pas abréger ou traduire des attributs tels que le titre d'une personne ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) qui apparaissent en conjonction avec les noms de personnes dans les mentions de responsabilité et qui pourraient potentiellement être utilisés comme partie du point d'accès. Les autres données peuvent être abrégées ou résumées. En général, traduire les données en langues étrangères de manière informelle en français, en les paraphrasant ou en les résumant selon ce qui convient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données autres que les formes du titre (ou de la phrase analogue à une collection) à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. La numérotation et les noms des organismes de publication ne sont pas obligatoires mais peuvent être indiqués.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Types particuliers de citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les citations les plus courantes sont énumérées ci-dessous. Si celles-ci ne sont pas appropriées, en formuler d'autres selon les besoins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la conversion des informations trouvées dans des zones MARC obsolètes ou non actives (par exemple, 664, 665, 666) en une note 670, citer Canadiana dans une citation telle que celles fournies dans les exemples ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date de la conversion] $b ([données converties à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([données déplacées à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC et fichier interne de BAnQ'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La façon de citer ces fichiers dans la zone 670 est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; usage: [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de noms.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations. Entre parenthèses, précédé par la mention '''point d'accès :''' ou '''points d'accès :''' , mentionner le ou les points d'accès trouvés, même si le point d'accès autorisé actuel est identique. S'il est jugé utile de mentionner une ou plusieurs variantes de point d'accès trouvées dans une notice d'autorité, les mentionner en les faisant précéder de la mention '''variante :''' ou '''variantes :'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différentes formes du nom apparaissent dans les notices bibliographiques, enregistrer le point d'accès ainsi que toutes les formes trouvées, y compris les formes identiques au point d'accès autorisé. Séparer le point d'accès des autres formes de nom et faire précéder les autres formes d'une mention appropriée, par exemple, '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' ou '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas citer les notices bibliographiques ou l'emplacement exact des variations trouvées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de collections.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations, suivie de la citation de la notice bibliographique. Entre parenthèses, indiquer la mention de la collection qui se trouve dans cette notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 27 janv. 2021, Les Déchets ménagers, c1980 $b (Les Cahiers de l'AGHTM)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] Le fichier LC/NAF a aussi été cité antérieurement sous d'autres noms, par exemple Base de données LC/NACO et Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;usage&amp;amp;nbsp;» désigne les formes de noms transcrites que l'on trouve habituellement dans les mentions de responsabilité des notices bibliographiques. On peut également trouver ces formes dans d'autres parties de la notice bibliographique telles que le titre propre ou une note citée. En raison des changements apportés aux instructions de catalogage, les catalogueurs doivent être prudents lorsqu'ils prennent les informations de la mention de publication, de la mention de distribution, etc. et de la mention de collection.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») désigne une forme de nom qui ne correspond pas nécessairement à une forme transcrite. Par exemple, dans les notices RCAA2, le nom d'un éditeur qui figure sur la ressource comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Publishing Company&amp;amp;nbsp;» pourrait avoir été enregistré dans la mention de publication sous la forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Pub. Co&amp;amp;nbsp;». Normalement, il n'est pas nécessaire de citer une telle forme dans une zone 670.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Autres fichiers ou catalogues'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un point d'accès est trouvé dans un catalogue ou une base de données en ligne, utiliser son jugement pour créer une citation 670. Commencer la zone 670 par une désignation du catalogue ou de la base de données dans laquelle ces autres notices bibliographiques ont été trouvées. Il n'y a pas de formulation prescrite pour ces citations; des exemples sont donnés ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Bases de données toponymiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer le nom de la base de données et la date de la recherche dans la sous-zone $a. Le nom de la base de données peut être cité sous forme d'acronyme ou en toutes lettres. Dans la sous-zone $b, indiquer le ou les noms de l'entité, le type d'entité, la désignation ou la classe de l'élément (par exemple, ADM1, PPL, civil), les coordonnées et le nom du lieu plus vaste, s'il y a lieu. (D'autres informations pertinentes peuvent également être fournies.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement de la désignation ou de la classe de l'élément, il est possible d'utiliser soit le code (par exemple, PPL) ou sa forme en toutes lettres (par exemple, populated place). Pour les noms étrangers, indiquer le type de nom (par exemple, forme conventionnelle, forme approuvée, forme courte, etc.) entre crochets ou parenthèses après le nom. Répéter les crochets ou les parenthèses après chaque nom de ce type. Les noms de variantes (y compris les noms en caractères non latins) peuvent être donnés dans une seule liste, comme indiqué ci-dessous. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des coordonnées, il est possible d'utiliser le format DMS (degrés, minutes, secondes), le format DD (degrés décimaux) ou les deux formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a choisi d’enregistrer les coordonnées DMS)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées telles que trouvées. Toutefois, si la base de données affiche les coordonnées en utilisant des deux-points pour séparer les composantes DMS et des valeurs positives et négatives pour communiquer l'hémisphère, il est acceptable de traduire les coordonnées au format DMS traditionnel si souhaité. Utiliser le symbole du degré (et non le zéro en exposant) pour indiquer les degrés, le signe mou (lettre modificative prime) pour les minutes et le signe dur (lettre modificative double prime) pour les secondes. Pour les coordonnées de latitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère sud. Pour les coordonnées de longitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère occidental.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a enregistré les coordonnées DMS telles qu'elles ont été trouvées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a traduit les coordonnées DMS au format traditionnel à partir de : -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, 22:53:01, 121:02:54&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources non bibliographiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer la source non bibliographique, la date et les informations. La source peut être indiquée de manière spécifique («&amp;amp;nbsp;Lettre de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.) ou en termes généraux («&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.). Lorsqu'on indique une source spécifique, il n'est pas nécessaire de montrer comment l'information a été reçue, par exemple, que la lettre a été reçue par télécopieur plutôt que par courrier. Lorsqu'un appel téléphonique à un éditeur, une agence ou une organisation est cité, il convient généralement de donner le nom du groupe appelé, plutôt que le titre ou le nom de la personne contactée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de collections de rééditions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité de collection concerne uniquement une réédition, commencer la 670 par le terme correspondant au type de réédition et une barre oblique. Ne pas inclure une 670 pour une réédition si la notice d'autorité sujet couvre à la fois l'original et une ou plusieurs rééditions. Ne pas ajouter de zones 670 supplémentaires pour d'autres types de rééditions cataloguées ultérieurement. (Voir 64X Traitement de la collection, Rééditions pour plus d'informations sur les rééditions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciés'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour des informations sur les citations existantes dans les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciées, voir la section [[#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32 Nom de personne indifférencié]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Titre associé de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 672 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui est associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité de collectivité, des zones 672 peuvent être utilisées pour enregistrer des titres de ressources dont la collectivité est la créatrice, l'organisme de publication ou le sujet. Le but premier de la zone 672 consiste principalement à documenter le fait qu'il existe un lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 672 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 670 pour consigner le titre de la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est créée, ni d'utiliser des zones 670 pour justifier les informations enregistrées dans les zones 1XX et 4XX, telles que le nom privilégié et les variantes de noms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 672 peuvent être ajoutées après les zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 672 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 672 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans la classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 672 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zones 672 avec titres propres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Cervantes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre propre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre uniforme)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec une variante de titre pour l'œuvre associée à l'expression catalane de l'œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Reste du titre'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'on enregistre un titre propre, la sous-zone $b peut être utilisée pour enregistrer le complément de titre ou le titre propre parallèle afin d'éviter toute confusion lorsque des titres nécessitent une meilleure identification.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le complément de titre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le titre propre parallèle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $f – Date'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $f est utilisée pour enregistrer une date appropriée à l'entité enregistrée dans la sous-zone $a (par exemple, utiliser la date d'une œuvre pour un titre privilégié et la date de publication pour un titre propre). Ne pas utiliser les crochets carrés dans la sous-zone $f pour enregistrer une date de publication ou de production. Ne pas mettre de date de distribution, de date de fabrication ou de date de copyright en $f.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une œuvre :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de l'œuvre)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une expression :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date d'une expression française de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une manifestation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de publication d'une manifestation d'une expression polonaise de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Numéro de contrôle de la notice bibliographique'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $w est utilisée pour enregistrer des numéros de contrôle de notices bibliographiques (par exemple, les zones 001, 010 et 016 dans les notices bibliographiques). Il est recommandé de fournir la sous-zone $w lorsque l'information est facilement accessible. La sous-zone $w doit être répétée pour chaque numéro de contrôle distinct (par exemple, un LCCN et un numéro de notice OCLC doivent être fournis dans des sous-zones séparées). Pour plus d'instructions sur la saisie d'un numéro de contrôle dans la notice, voir la section sur la sous-zone $w dans le ''CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E. Format MARC 21 for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' la sous-zone $w doit seulement être utilisée pour les titres de manifestations.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Titre distinct de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui n'est pas associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom. Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité pour une personne, la zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer les titres d'œuvres écrites par une personne différente portant un nom semblable. L'objectif principal de la zone 673 est de documenter le fait qu'il n'existe aucun lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 673.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 673 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 675, comme le décrit la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 673 peuvent être ajoutées après des zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires non associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 673 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 673.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 673 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans le classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 673 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245. Pour les sous-zones spécifiques de la zone 673, appliquer les mêmes instructions que celles données dans la section [[#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Titre propre associé à un autre Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)###47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title propre associé à la National Gallery de Londres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
ET NON&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Même si la National Gallery of Art n'est pas la créatrice de la ressource mentionnée, elle en est l'éditrice et ce titre devrait donc être enregistré en 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#673_Titre_distinct_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Source des données non trouvées =&lt;br /&gt;
En avril 2012, cette zone a été redéfinie comme : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Citation d'une source consultée dans laquelle aucune information ne se trouve liée en aucune manière avec l'entité représentée par la notice d'autorité ou par des entités liées.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Les catalogueurs participant au PFAN ne sont pas tenus de modifier les zones 675 existantes simplement pour répondre à cette nouvelle définition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une nouvelle notice d'autorité, toujours citer la ressource cataloguée dans la zone 675 si la ressource cataloguée ne fournit aucune information liée de quelque façon que ce soit à l'entité représentée dans la notice d'autorité. Citer également dans la zone 675 d'autres sources consultées qui ne contiennent aucune information, lorsqu'on juge que cette absence même d'information mérite d'être consignée pour les futurs utilisateurs de la notice d'autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, il n'est pas toujours nécessaire d'inclure dans la zone 675 toutes les sources de référence consultées; il faut faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles sources sont suffisamment importantes pour être conservées de façon permanente dans la notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Données biographiques ou historiques =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsque des données biographiques ou historiques sont fournies dans une zone de note 678, rédiger la note en employant des phrases concises mais complètes et en gardant à l'esprit que l'information sera utilisée dans des affichages publics.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En prévision de la constitution par BAC du fichier dans WMS et de l'ajout en lot des notices d'autorité des autres institutions, le contenu de toutes les zones 665 dans les notices de BAC et de BAnQ a été déplacé vers la zone 678. Il se pourrait que la zone 665 originale ait contenu des instructions sur le ou les points d'accès à employer comme auteur et comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec); Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec); Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec); Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supprimer ces instructions dans la zone 678 si elles ont été conservées. Penser à ajouter la zone 667 sur l'emploi comme vedette-matière le cas échéant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification de la zone 678'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Généralement, une zone 678 doit être justifiée par une zone 670. Si elle n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu est approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, conserver la zone et ajouter une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678 comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [abréviation de la bibliothèque participante], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la notice a été modifiée après avoir été migrée, il faut consulter l'historique de la notice pour déterminer qui a ajouté la zone 678 à l'origine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la zone 678 n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, ne pas conserver la zone 678 sauf si une note appropriée peut être rédigée avec les informations dont on dispose. Noter que la zone 678 est facultative. Si le contenu de la zone doit être conservé parce qu'il ne se trouve nulle part ailleurs dans la notice, le transférer dans une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 678 existante qui sera supprimée car le contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 670 ajoutée :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Ne pas répéter cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#678_Donn.C3.A9es_biographiques_ou_historiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Liaison des vedettes établies – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note'' : Cette section ne s'applique pas à la zone 781 utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms 151 pour fournir des informations sur les subdivisions géographiques. Voir la section [[#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique|781]] de ce Guide pour les instructions relatives à cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;L'utilisation d'une vedette établie dans une zone de liaison 7XX dans une notice d'autorité de nom ou une notice d'autorité de collection est limitée à l'enregistrement du point d'accès autorisé à partir d'une bibliographie nationale ou d'un fichier d'autorité national ou équivalent séparé. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La forme de la vedette dans une zone 7XX peut correspondre à la forme dans la zone 1XX ou à une forme dans la zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité. Ceci est approprié lorsque la forme de la zone 7XX représente une forme se trouvant dans un fichier d'autorité différent de Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La source de la vedette dans la zone 7XX peut être précisée en utilisant soit la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur avec une sous-zone $2, soit une valeur pour le deuxième indicateur qui précise la source. Pour les points d'accès provenant du fichier LC/NAF, privilégier le deuxième indicateur avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Liaison des vedettes de subdivision - Subdivision géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pratique facultative du PFAN :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pour une vedette de nom géographique qui peut également être utilisée comme subdivision géographique, déterminer la forme sous laquelle la vedette doit être utilisée comme subdivision géographique en suivant les lignes directrices de la feuille d'instructions [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 du ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Entrer la forme de la subdivision géographique dans une zone 781 en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;6&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur. Pour une vedette géographique utilisée directement, comme un pays, saisir les données dans une seule sous-zone $z. Pour une vedette géographique qui est utilisée indirectement en subdivision d'une entité géographique plus vaste, telle qu'une ville, saisir les données dans deux sous-zones $z successives. Ne pas modifier les valeurs des positions de la zone 008. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice pour une vedette de nom géographique qui ne peut pas être utilisée comme vedette secondaire matière (008/15 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;»), comme le nom antérieur d'une juridiction qui a subi un changement de nom linéaire, par exemple, '''Ceylan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice d'autorité de nom pour un nom de lieu qui ne peut pas être utilisé comme une subdivision géographique, comme une section d'une ville, par exemple, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Ajouter une zone 781 à une notice existante lorsqu'une autre modification est faite dans la notice. Lors de la révision d'une notice existante qui contient une note d'utilisation pour l'indexation dans une zone 667 indiquant la forme de la subdivision géographique appropriée, supprimer la zone 667 et la remplacer par une zone 781.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 1 : Entités ambiguës =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 2 : Projets spéciaux =&lt;br /&gt;
Cette annexe fournit des informations sur les projets spéciaux impliquant des notices d'autorité créées et modifiées dans le fichier d'autorité Canadiana. Les notices créées ou modifiées pour ces projets peuvent contenir certaines zones et valeurs dans des zones qui ne sont généralement pas conformes aux politiques de catalogage actuelles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des instructions sur la modification de ces notices sont fournies afin d'indiquer si ces zones et valeurs doivent être conservées ou non.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 1. Notices créées ou révisées dans le cadre du projet de révision de notices de l'UQAM ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de révision de notices d'autorité dirigé par l'UQAM. Il s'agit des notices créées ou modifiées dans Canadiana par l'équipe du traitement documentaire de cette institution. Ces notices sont ensuite révisées par deux bibliothécaires et une technicienne de l'UQAM. Le projet s'est terminé le 31 mars 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces nouvelles notices présentaient les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles ont été ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices peuvent être modifiées de la même manière que les autres notices d'autorité de noms conformément aux politiques de catalogage en vigueur.&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un catalogueur modifie ces notices, il doit :&lt;br /&gt;
* changer la valeur du Guide/17 pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Notice d'autorité complète);&lt;br /&gt;
* supprimer la zone 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;amp;nbsp;»; &lt;br /&gt;
* évaluer la notice comme une notice versée en lot. Toutefois, comme la notice est en cours de révision, le point d'accès autorisé peut être modifié s'il n'est pas conforme aux pratiques du PFAN (p. ex., une date de naissance ou de décès peut être ajoutée si elle est disponible et a été omise dans le point d'accès).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 2. Notices créées et révisées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de mentorat &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui, depuis février 2021, permet aux&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; bibliothèques universitaires de créer des notices d'autorité de nom qui sont révisées par une autre institution universitaire. Les notices d'autorité créées ou modifiées par &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;les bibliothèques mentorées&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; sont révisées par des techniciens en documentation de l'Université &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui les mentore&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices présentent les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles sont ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abréviation, c'est-à-dire UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices ne doivent pas être modifiées.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=145120</id>
		<title>PFAN - Annonces et mises à jour</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=145120"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T13:33:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 2026 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - News and Updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annonces =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Annonce'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Nous sommes ravis d’accueillir Marilyne Guertin, de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 13 janvier 2026, elle succède à Marie Chantal L’Ecuyer Coelho à titre de représentante de BAnQ et de coprésidente du Comité. De son côté, Marie Chantal remplacera Izidor Cirnatiu, qui quitte le Comité après sept années d’implication. Nous tenons à exprimer notre sincère gratitude à Izidor pour son engagement au sein du PFAN. Son expertise et son engagement ont été essentiels à la création du Comité et à ses nombreuses réalisations. Merci Izidor, et bienvenue à Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une '''formation sur la romanisation''' sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 18 et 25 novembre prochains, de 10 h à 12 h. Cette activité a été préparée par Rachel Gagnon et Daniel Paradis, et sera présentée par Rachel Gagnon, bibliothécaire principale à Bibliothèque et Archives Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN, auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la romanisation selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter la formation générale offerte en 2020 et à savoir quand appliquer les tables de romanisation du PFAN.  Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; par conséquent, elle ne répétera pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 2 heures chacune.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''18 novembre''', la première partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les principes de bases et les définitions&lt;br /&gt;
* RDA et le début de la démarche&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de personnes&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''25 novembre''', la deuxième partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de familles&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de collectivités&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
* Les titres privilégiés pour les œuvres&lt;br /&gt;
* La foire aux questions&lt;br /&gt;
* Les zones MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/01367886-b1fd-434a-bccb-a4b86931f74f@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 1]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/5822e340-3ced-4d47-905e-2f658e7dc7f6@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Marie-Chantal L’Écuyer-Coelho de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 23 septembre 2024, elle remplace Daniel Paradis comme représentante de BAnQ et co-présidente du comité.  Nous remercions chaleureusement Daniel Paradis pour sa grande contribution au PFAN. Sa participation et son expertise ont grandement influencé la création et les nombreuses réalisations du Comité.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une formation gratuite sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales dans le fichier Canadiana sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 28 et 30 mai prochains, de 9 h à 12 h 30. Elle a été préparée et sera présentée par les spécialistes du catalogage de la musique que sont :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Rachel Gagnon, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
* Guillaume Lizotte, Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
* Daniel Paradis, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
* Lina Picard, Université de Montréal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter le module 6 de la formation générale donnée en 2020, lequel excluait les œuvres et les expressions musicales. Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; elle ne répétera donc pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées. Afin de mieux se préparer à la formation, il est quand même fortement recommandé de réviser le [[/wiki.gccollab.ca/PFAN - Formation PFAN|module 6 de la formation générale]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 3 heures et demie chacune. La première partie couvrira les attributs des œuvres et des expressions musicales, c’est-à-dire :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* titre privilégié d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* distribution d’exécution&lt;br /&gt;
* désignation numérique d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* tonalité et&lt;br /&gt;
* autre caractéristique d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La deuxième partie couvrira quant à elle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* la construction des points d'accès et des variantes de point d’accès représentant des œuvres et des expressions musicales&lt;br /&gt;
* les entités en relation ainsi que&lt;br /&gt;
* la maintenance du fichier Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/8148f230-56d9-4833-a25c-7f6baac6c2fb@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/cf33ae27-958d-40ab-baff-efe2f158a858@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Bernard Lemieux de l'Université de Montréal au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 28 mars 2023, il remplace officiellement Philippe Brosseau comme l'un des représentants du Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. Nous remercions chaleureusement Philippe pour sa contribution au comité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ajouts et modifications au wiki du PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le wiki, le '''contenu ajouté''' est identifié par l'étiquette &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. Le '''contenu modifié''' est identifié par du &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;texte en rouge&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9|Nouvel exemple avec $2 rvmgf]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Formation PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN|Arbres de décisions pour aider avec la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|Instruction et exemple pour une notice non différenciée de BAnQ sans numéro Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670.Format des zones 670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Format_des_zones_670|Modification de l'exemple sous CIP (catégorie de ressources spécifiques)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-30&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions pour les langues de la norme ISO 15919:2001 (Information et documentation -- Translittération du Devanagari et des écritures indiennes liées en caractères latins)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Correction des exemples de l'étape 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Bibliothèques participantes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Mise à jour des répondants]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Compilation et Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ sur les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_géographiques|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e|16.2.2.5, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Bases de données toponymiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Retrait des phrases &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser la sous-zone $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0 ou $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0, $1, $3, $4 ou $i.&amp;quot; dans différentes zones]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Point 2.c. sur les variantes de point d'accès sous l'étape 2 pour les modifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ sur les numéros Canadiana (zone 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_numéros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Quels_sont_les_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9riques_utilis.C3.A9s_dans_les_notices_Canadiana.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question sur les numéros Canadiana génériques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Entretien_du_fichier_bibliographique_.28EFB.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Entretien du fichier bibliographique (EFB)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3., Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification d'un énoncé]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_.E2.80.93_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision sur les renvois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Enregistrement_des_attributs_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_et_d.27une_expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Enregistrement des attributs d'une œuvre et d'une expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Titre_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9_constitu.C3.A9_uniquement_du_nom_d.27un_type_de_composition|6.14.2.5.2, Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type de composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choix_de_la_langue|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choix de la langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Forme_au_singulier_ou_au_pluriel|6.14.2.5.2.2, Forme au singulier ou au pluriel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Partie_identifi.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_fois_par_un_num.C3.A9ro_et_par_un_titre_ou_une_autre_d.C3.A9signation_verbale.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Partie identifiée à la fois par un numéro et par un titre ou une autre désignation verbale, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Deux_ou_plusieurs_parties.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Deux ou plusieurs parties, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.8.3.2C_.C5.92uvres_compl.C3.A8tes_d.27un_m.C3.AAme_type_de_composition_pour_une_m.C3.AAme_distribution_sp.C3.A9cifique_ou_diverses_distributions|6.14.2.8.3, Œuvres complètes d'un même type de composition pour une même distribution spécifique ou diverses distributions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|6.15.1.3, Enregistrement d'une distribution d'exécution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.5.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.5, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.1, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.3, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27ordre|6.16.1.3.1, Numéro d'ordre]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_de_catalogue_th.C3.A9matique|6.16.1.3.3, Numéro de catalogue thématique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_transcriptions.2C_etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, transcriptions, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.27.1.9.2C_Ajouts_aux_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres|6.27.1.9, Ajouts aux points d'accès représentant des œuvres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1, Lignes directrices générales sur la construction des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Œuvres musicales avec des paroles, un livret, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1.9, Éléments additionnels dans les points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.3.2C_Point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_expression_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale|6.28.3, Point d'accès autorisé représentant une expression d'une œuvre musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.4.2C_Variante_de_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_.C5.93uvre_ou_une_expression_musicale|6.28.4, Variante de point d'accès représentant une œuvre ou une expression musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|Précision pour les notices d'autorité existante]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.17.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_tonalit.C3.A9|6.17.1.3, Enregistrement d'une tonalité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#.C3.89tablissement_de_certaines_entit.C3.A9s_dans_le_fichier_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms|Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-mati.C3.A8re|Instruction pour les notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|Instruction pour les sous-zones obsolètes $l et $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#023_ISSN_de_regroupement|Zone 023, ISSN de regroupement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille|Instruction pour la sous-zone $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.E2.80.99une_relation_.C3.A0_une_collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation|32.1.1.3, Enregistrement d’une relation à une collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Groupe_1_-_Vedettes_du_groupe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_de_noms|Catégorie « Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named » révisée pour « Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual » (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Suppression de : préférer une notice qui a déjà une 016 à une qui n'en a pas.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_FAQ_sur_les_compilations_d%27œuvres_d%27un_même_agent|FAQ sur les compilations d'œuvres d'un même agent.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#10.0.2C_Identification_des_familles|10.0, Identification des familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Enfants_et_petits-enfants_de_personnes_royales|9.4.1.4.3, Enfants et petits-enfants de personnes royales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms|Précisions apportées dans les zones 008/32, 371, 377 et 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles| Lien pour Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Format_des_zones_670| Nouvel exemple illustrant comment citer une sous-page de site Web]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667| Modification de la note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Foire aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_la_romanisation| FAQ sur la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité directeur&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_directeur| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité des normes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_des_normes| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précision pour le numéro à indiquer dans la note 667 sous Étape 2, Notice à supprimer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Bibliothèque_et_Archives_Canada|Lien pour le wiki de BAC]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision pour certains principes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.2C_Collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|32.1, Collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Lorsqu.E2.80.99une_collectivit.C3.A9_a_port.C3.A9_plus_d.E2.80.99un_nom_et_qu.E2.80.99il_existe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_pour_les_autres_noms_dans_Canadiana.2C_lesquelles_doit-on_mettre_en_relation_avec_des_zones_5XX.3F_Dans_quels_cas_doit-on_r.C3.A9viser_les_autorit.C3.A9s_des_collectivit.C3.A9s_mises_en_relation.3F|Question 7 sur les collectivités en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Nouveaux répondants pour certaines institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Mise_.C3.A0_jour_des_notices_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_existantes|Précision importante concernant les notices indifférenciées existantes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.3.4.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_p.C3.A9riode_d.27activit.C3.A9_d.27une_personne_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.3.4.3, Enregistrement d'une période d'activité d'une personne]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour le terme &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; ajoutée à la zone 1XX de la liste]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9|Précision sur les changements de nom des groupes associés]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour les notices d'autorité codées FrPBN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Comment_d.C3.A9terminer_l.27usage_pour_le_nom_d.27un_agent_dans_WMS.3F|Question 8 sur l'usage du nom d'un agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation de l'hébreu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision ajoutée pour la zone 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#G.C3.A9n.C3.A9ralit.C3.A9s|Généralités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Précision concernant les comtés aux États-Unis]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur_.5BNouveau.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées dans la section Généralités; ajout de sections sur la répétabilité, les dates divergentes et les dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées pour un URI inclus dans la sous-zone $u]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Crit.C3.A8res_d.27admissibilit.C3.A9_au_PFAN_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Critères d'admissibilité et attentes envers les nouveaux membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Correction de l'indice PQ pour la littérature canadienne française]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Instruction sur les sous-zones $q et $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress_.5BNouveau.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21/053&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress|Précision concernant le deuxième indicateur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Table pour l'amharique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|Ne plus utiliser cette zone]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles|Lien vers &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Présentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 sur les congrès, etc., annulés ou hybrides]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précisions ajoutées aux zones 046 et 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_cod.C3.A9es_comme_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_qui_ne_repr.C3.A9sentent_en_fait_qu.27une_seule_identit.C3.A9|Précision ajoutée pour les notices codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» par erreur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation du yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique_.5BNouveau.5D|Code local de région géographique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_de_promulgation_d.E2.80.99une_loi.2C_etc._.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.29.1.29, Date de promulgation d’une loi, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2C_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2, Nom de collectivité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information_.5BNouveau.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources d'information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Doit-on_modifier_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions_d.27un_agent_.28p._ex._un_auteur_ou_un_compositeur.29_si_la_forme_retenue_pour_l.27agent_seul_est_diff.C3.A9rente_de_celle_utilis.C3.A9e_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions.3F|Question 4 sur la modification des points d'accès autorisés pour les œuvres et expressions d'un agent]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_g%C3%A9ographiques|FAQ sur les noms géographiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation_.5BNouveau.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667|Deux nouveaux exemples de notes 667 (pour les notices d'autorité de nom indifférenciées représentant une seule identité et celles faisant l'objet d'une modification partielle)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Renvois (4XX et 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ-Numéros Canadiana&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_num%C3%A9ros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Qui_contacter_lorsqu.27on_a_besoin_d.27une_nouvelle_liste_de_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_pour_la_zone_016.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question 4 sur l'obtention d'une nouvelle liste de numéros Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Livret et Paroles)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions ajoutées en ce qui concerne le chinois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible_.5BNouveau.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Communications_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Principles généraux]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|022]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9|024]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#335_Plan_d.27extension_.5BNouveau.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|375]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9|384]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible|385]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur|386]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9|510]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme|530]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Deux nouvelles langues (coréen et japonais)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Ajout d'une instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Projet_2._Notices_cr.C3.A9.C3.A9es_et_r.C3.A9vis.C3.A9es_dans_le_cadre_du_projet_de_mentorat_des_universit.C3.A9s|Précisions ajoutées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |Renvois « voir » (4XX) simples]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Composition|Composition du Comité directeur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Nouvel article sur le PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNouveau.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Ajout de tables de romanisation de la BnF pour l'arménien, le biélorusse, le bulgare, le géorgien, le macédonien, le russe et l'ukrainien]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|Remplacement d'exemples RVM par RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précisions apportées à l'instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions|Précisions apportées au point 3 et à l'exemple 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure pour les notices dérivées du LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_pour_les_notices_d.C3.A9riv.C3.A9es_du_LC.2FNAF|Précision apportée à l'exemple du modèle d'une note 670 ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#PFAN-MUSIQUE-L_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Liste de discussion PFAN-MUSIQUE-L]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Ajout d'information dans différentes zones.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Éléments RDA fondamentaux pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Éléments_RDA_fondamentaux_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous l'élément ''collectivités en relation''.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Zones MARC obligatoires pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Zones_MARC_obligatoires_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous les zones 510, 511, 551.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouvelle introduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-03-19''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=145119</id>
		<title>PFAN - Annonces et mises à jour</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=145119"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T13:32:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 2022 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - News and Updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annonces =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Annonce'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Nous sommes ravis d’accueillir Marilyne Guertin, de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 13 janvier 2026, elle succède à Marie Chantal L’Ecuyer Coelho à titre de représentante de BAnQ et de coprésidente du Comité. De son côté, Marie Chantal remplacera Izidor Cirnatiu, qui quitte le Comité après sept années d’implication. Nous tenons à exprimer notre sincère gratitude à Izidor pour son engagement au sein du PFAN. Son expertise et son engagement ont été essentiels à la création du Comité et à ses nombreuses réalisations. Merci Izidor, et bienvenue à Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une '''formation sur la romanisation''' sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 18 et 25 novembre prochains, de 10 h à 12 h. Cette activité a été préparée par Rachel Gagnon et Daniel Paradis, et sera présentée par Rachel Gagnon, bibliothécaire principale à Bibliothèque et Archives Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN, auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la romanisation selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter la formation générale offerte en 2020 et à savoir quand appliquer les tables de romanisation du PFAN.  Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; par conséquent, elle ne répétera pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 2 heures chacune.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''18 novembre''', la première partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les principes de bases et les définitions&lt;br /&gt;
* RDA et le début de la démarche&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de personnes&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''25 novembre''', la deuxième partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de familles&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de collectivités&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
* Les titres privilégiés pour les œuvres&lt;br /&gt;
* La foire aux questions&lt;br /&gt;
* Les zones MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/01367886-b1fd-434a-bccb-a4b86931f74f@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 1]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/5822e340-3ced-4d47-905e-2f658e7dc7f6@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Marie-Chantal L’Écuyer-Coelho de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 23 septembre 2024, elle remplace Daniel Paradis comme représentante de BAnQ et co-présidente du comité.  Nous remercions chaleureusement Daniel Paradis pour sa grande contribution au PFAN. Sa participation et son expertise ont grandement influencé la création et les nombreuses réalisations du Comité.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une formation gratuite sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales dans le fichier Canadiana sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 28 et 30 mai prochains, de 9 h à 12 h 30. Elle a été préparée et sera présentée par les spécialistes du catalogage de la musique que sont :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Rachel Gagnon, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
* Guillaume Lizotte, Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
* Daniel Paradis, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
* Lina Picard, Université de Montréal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter le module 6 de la formation générale donnée en 2020, lequel excluait les œuvres et les expressions musicales. Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; elle ne répétera donc pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées. Afin de mieux se préparer à la formation, il est quand même fortement recommandé de réviser le [[/wiki.gccollab.ca/PFAN - Formation PFAN|module 6 de la formation générale]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 3 heures et demie chacune. La première partie couvrira les attributs des œuvres et des expressions musicales, c’est-à-dire :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* titre privilégié d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* distribution d’exécution&lt;br /&gt;
* désignation numérique d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* tonalité et&lt;br /&gt;
* autre caractéristique d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La deuxième partie couvrira quant à elle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* la construction des points d'accès et des variantes de point d’accès représentant des œuvres et des expressions musicales&lt;br /&gt;
* les entités en relation ainsi que&lt;br /&gt;
* la maintenance du fichier Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/8148f230-56d9-4833-a25c-7f6baac6c2fb@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/cf33ae27-958d-40ab-baff-efe2f158a858@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Bernard Lemieux de l'Université de Montréal au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 28 mars 2023, il remplace officiellement Philippe Brosseau comme l'un des représentants du Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. Nous remercions chaleureusement Philippe pour sa contribution au comité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ajouts et modifications au wiki du PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le wiki, le '''contenu ajouté''' est identifié par l'étiquette &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. Le '''contenu modifié''' est identifié par du &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;texte en rouge&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9|Nouvel exemple avec $2 rvmgf]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Formation PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN|Arbres de décisions pour aider avec la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|Instruction et exemple pour une notice non différenciée de BAnQ sans numéro Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670-Format des zones 670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Format_des_zones_670|Modification de l'exemple sous CIP (catégorie de ressources spécifiques)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-30&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions pour les langues de la norme ISO 15919:2001 (Information et documentation -- Translittération du Devanagari et des écritures indiennes liées en caractères latins)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Correction des exemples de l'étape 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Bibliothèques participantes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Mise à jour des répondants]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Compilation et Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ sur les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_géographiques|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e|16.2.2.5, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Bases de données toponymiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Retrait des phrases &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser la sous-zone $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0 ou $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0, $1, $3, $4 ou $i.&amp;quot; dans différentes zones]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Point 2.c. sur les variantes de point d'accès sous l'étape 2 pour les modifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ sur les numéros Canadiana (zone 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_numéros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Quels_sont_les_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9riques_utilis.C3.A9s_dans_les_notices_Canadiana.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question sur les numéros Canadiana génériques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Entretien_du_fichier_bibliographique_.28EFB.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Entretien du fichier bibliographique (EFB)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3., Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification d'un énoncé]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_.E2.80.93_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision sur les renvois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Enregistrement_des_attributs_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_et_d.27une_expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Enregistrement des attributs d'une œuvre et d'une expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Titre_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9_constitu.C3.A9_uniquement_du_nom_d.27un_type_de_composition|6.14.2.5.2, Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type de composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choix_de_la_langue|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choix de la langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Forme_au_singulier_ou_au_pluriel|6.14.2.5.2.2, Forme au singulier ou au pluriel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Partie_identifi.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_fois_par_un_num.C3.A9ro_et_par_un_titre_ou_une_autre_d.C3.A9signation_verbale.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Partie identifiée à la fois par un numéro et par un titre ou une autre désignation verbale, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Deux_ou_plusieurs_parties.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Deux ou plusieurs parties, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.8.3.2C_.C5.92uvres_compl.C3.A8tes_d.27un_m.C3.AAme_type_de_composition_pour_une_m.C3.AAme_distribution_sp.C3.A9cifique_ou_diverses_distributions|6.14.2.8.3, Œuvres complètes d'un même type de composition pour une même distribution spécifique ou diverses distributions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|6.15.1.3, Enregistrement d'une distribution d'exécution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.5.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.5, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.1, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.3, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27ordre|6.16.1.3.1, Numéro d'ordre]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_de_catalogue_th.C3.A9matique|6.16.1.3.3, Numéro de catalogue thématique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_transcriptions.2C_etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, transcriptions, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.27.1.9.2C_Ajouts_aux_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres|6.27.1.9, Ajouts aux points d'accès représentant des œuvres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1, Lignes directrices générales sur la construction des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Œuvres musicales avec des paroles, un livret, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1.9, Éléments additionnels dans les points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.3.2C_Point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_expression_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale|6.28.3, Point d'accès autorisé représentant une expression d'une œuvre musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.4.2C_Variante_de_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_.C5.93uvre_ou_une_expression_musicale|6.28.4, Variante de point d'accès représentant une œuvre ou une expression musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|Précision pour les notices d'autorité existante]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.17.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_tonalit.C3.A9|6.17.1.3, Enregistrement d'une tonalité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#.C3.89tablissement_de_certaines_entit.C3.A9s_dans_le_fichier_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms|Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-mati.C3.A8re|Instruction pour les notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|Instruction pour les sous-zones obsolètes $l et $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#023_ISSN_de_regroupement|Zone 023, ISSN de regroupement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille|Instruction pour la sous-zone $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.E2.80.99une_relation_.C3.A0_une_collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation|32.1.1.3, Enregistrement d’une relation à une collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Groupe_1_-_Vedettes_du_groupe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_de_noms|Catégorie « Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named » révisée pour « Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual » (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Suppression de : préférer une notice qui a déjà une 016 à une qui n'en a pas.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_FAQ_sur_les_compilations_d%27œuvres_d%27un_même_agent|FAQ sur les compilations d'œuvres d'un même agent.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#10.0.2C_Identification_des_familles|10.0, Identification des familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Enfants_et_petits-enfants_de_personnes_royales|9.4.1.4.3, Enfants et petits-enfants de personnes royales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms|Précisions apportées dans les zones 008/32, 371, 377 et 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles| Lien pour Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Format_des_zones_670| Nouvel exemple illustrant comment citer une sous-page de site Web]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667| Modification de la note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Foire aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_la_romanisation| FAQ sur la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité directeur&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_directeur| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité des normes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_des_normes| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précision pour le numéro à indiquer dans la note 667 sous Étape 2, Notice à supprimer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Bibliothèque_et_Archives_Canada|Lien pour le wiki de BAC]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision pour certains principes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.2C_Collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|32.1, Collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Lorsqu.E2.80.99une_collectivit.C3.A9_a_port.C3.A9_plus_d.E2.80.99un_nom_et_qu.E2.80.99il_existe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_pour_les_autres_noms_dans_Canadiana.2C_lesquelles_doit-on_mettre_en_relation_avec_des_zones_5XX.3F_Dans_quels_cas_doit-on_r.C3.A9viser_les_autorit.C3.A9s_des_collectivit.C3.A9s_mises_en_relation.3F|Question 7 sur les collectivités en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Nouveaux répondants pour certaines institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Mise_.C3.A0_jour_des_notices_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_existantes|Précision importante concernant les notices indifférenciées existantes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.3.4.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_p.C3.A9riode_d.27activit.C3.A9_d.27une_personne_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.3.4.3, Enregistrement d'une période d'activité d'une personne]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour le terme &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; ajoutée à la zone 1XX de la liste]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9|Précision sur les changements de nom des groupes associés]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour les notices d'autorité codées FrPBN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Comment_d.C3.A9terminer_l.27usage_pour_le_nom_d.27un_agent_dans_WMS.3F|Question 8 sur l'usage du nom d'un agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation de l'hébreu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision ajoutée pour la zone 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#G.C3.A9n.C3.A9ralit.C3.A9s|Généralités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Précision concernant les comtés aux États-Unis]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur_.5BNouveau.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées dans la section Généralités; ajout de sections sur la répétabilité, les dates divergentes et les dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées pour un URI inclus dans la sous-zone $u]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Crit.C3.A8res_d.27admissibilit.C3.A9_au_PFAN_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Critères d'admissibilité et attentes envers les nouveaux membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Correction de l'indice PQ pour la littérature canadienne française]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Instruction sur les sous-zones $q et $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress_.5BNouveau.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21/053&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress|Précision concernant le deuxième indicateur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Table pour l'amharique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|Ne plus utiliser cette zone]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles|Lien vers &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Présentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 sur les congrès, etc., annulés ou hybrides]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précisions ajoutées aux zones 046 et 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_cod.C3.A9es_comme_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_qui_ne_repr.C3.A9sentent_en_fait_qu.27une_seule_identit.C3.A9|Précision ajoutée pour les notices codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» par erreur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation du yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique_.5BNouveau.5D|Code local de région géographique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_de_promulgation_d.E2.80.99une_loi.2C_etc._.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.29.1.29, Date de promulgation d’une loi, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2C_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2, Nom de collectivité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information_.5BNouveau.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources d'information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Doit-on_modifier_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions_d.27un_agent_.28p._ex._un_auteur_ou_un_compositeur.29_si_la_forme_retenue_pour_l.27agent_seul_est_diff.C3.A9rente_de_celle_utilis.C3.A9e_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions.3F|Question 4 sur la modification des points d'accès autorisés pour les œuvres et expressions d'un agent]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_g%C3%A9ographiques|FAQ sur les noms géographiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation_.5BNouveau.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667|Deux nouveaux exemples de notes 667 (pour les notices d'autorité de nom indifférenciées représentant une seule identité et celles faisant l'objet d'une modification partielle)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Renvois (4XX et 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ-Numéros Canadiana&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_num%C3%A9ros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Qui_contacter_lorsqu.27on_a_besoin_d.27une_nouvelle_liste_de_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_pour_la_zone_016.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question 4 sur l'obtention d'une nouvelle liste de numéros Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Livret et Paroles)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions ajoutées en ce qui concerne le chinois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible_.5BNouveau.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Communications_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Principles généraux]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|022]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9|024]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#335_Plan_d.27extension_.5BNouveau.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|375]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9|384]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible|385]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur|386]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9|510]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme|530]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Deux nouvelles langues (coréen et japonais)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Ajout d'une instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Projet_2._Notices_cr.C3.A9.C3.A9es_et_r.C3.A9vis.C3.A9es_dans_le_cadre_du_projet_de_mentorat_des_universit.C3.A9s|Précisions ajoutées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |Renvois « voir » (4XX) simples]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Composition|Composition du Comité directeur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Nouvel article sur le PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNouveau.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Ajout de tables de romanisation de la BnF pour l'arménien, le biélorusse, le bulgare, le géorgien, le macédonien, le russe et l'ukrainien]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|Remplacement d'exemples RVM par RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précisions apportées à l'instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions|Précisions apportées au point 3 et à l'exemple 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure pour les notices dérivées du LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_pour_les_notices_d.C3.A9riv.C3.A9es_du_LC.2FNAF|Précision apportée à l'exemple du modèle d'une note 670 ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#PFAN-MUSIQUE-L_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Liste de discussion PFAN-MUSIQUE-L]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Ajout d'information dans différentes zones.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Éléments RDA fondamentaux pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Éléments_RDA_fondamentaux_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous l'élément ''collectivités en relation''.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Zones MARC obligatoires pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Zones_MARC_obligatoires_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous les zones 510, 511, 551.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouvelle introduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-03-19''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=145118</id>
		<title>PFAN - Annonces et mises à jour</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=145118"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T13:32:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 2026 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - News and Updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annonces =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Annonce'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Nous sommes ravis d’accueillir Marilyne Guertin, de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 13 janvier 2026, elle succède à Marie Chantal L’Ecuyer Coelho à titre de représentante de BAnQ et de coprésidente du Comité. De son côté, Marie Chantal remplacera Izidor Cirnatiu, qui quitte le Comité après sept années d’implication. Nous tenons à exprimer notre sincère gratitude à Izidor pour son engagement au sein du PFAN. Son expertise et son engagement ont été essentiels à la création du Comité et à ses nombreuses réalisations. Merci Izidor, et bienvenue à Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une '''formation sur la romanisation''' sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 18 et 25 novembre prochains, de 10 h à 12 h. Cette activité a été préparée par Rachel Gagnon et Daniel Paradis, et sera présentée par Rachel Gagnon, bibliothécaire principale à Bibliothèque et Archives Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN, auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la romanisation selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter la formation générale offerte en 2020 et à savoir quand appliquer les tables de romanisation du PFAN.  Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; par conséquent, elle ne répétera pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 2 heures chacune.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''18 novembre''', la première partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les principes de bases et les définitions&lt;br /&gt;
* RDA et le début de la démarche&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de personnes&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''25 novembre''', la deuxième partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de familles&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de collectivités&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
* Les titres privilégiés pour les œuvres&lt;br /&gt;
* La foire aux questions&lt;br /&gt;
* Les zones MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/01367886-b1fd-434a-bccb-a4b86931f74f@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 1]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/5822e340-3ced-4d47-905e-2f658e7dc7f6@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Marie-Chantal L’Écuyer-Coelho de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 23 septembre 2024, elle remplace Daniel Paradis comme représentante de BAnQ et co-présidente du comité.  Nous remercions chaleureusement Daniel Paradis pour sa grande contribution au PFAN. Sa participation et son expertise ont grandement influencé la création et les nombreuses réalisations du Comité.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une formation gratuite sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales dans le fichier Canadiana sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 28 et 30 mai prochains, de 9 h à 12 h 30. Elle a été préparée et sera présentée par les spécialistes du catalogage de la musique que sont :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Rachel Gagnon, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
* Guillaume Lizotte, Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
* Daniel Paradis, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
* Lina Picard, Université de Montréal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter le module 6 de la formation générale donnée en 2020, lequel excluait les œuvres et les expressions musicales. Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; elle ne répétera donc pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées. Afin de mieux se préparer à la formation, il est quand même fortement recommandé de réviser le [[/wiki.gccollab.ca/PFAN - Formation PFAN|module 6 de la formation générale]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 3 heures et demie chacune. La première partie couvrira les attributs des œuvres et des expressions musicales, c’est-à-dire :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* titre privilégié d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* distribution d’exécution&lt;br /&gt;
* désignation numérique d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* tonalité et&lt;br /&gt;
* autre caractéristique d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La deuxième partie couvrira quant à elle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* la construction des points d'accès et des variantes de point d’accès représentant des œuvres et des expressions musicales&lt;br /&gt;
* les entités en relation ainsi que&lt;br /&gt;
* la maintenance du fichier Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/8148f230-56d9-4833-a25c-7f6baac6c2fb@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/cf33ae27-958d-40ab-baff-efe2f158a858@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Bernard Lemieux de l'Université de Montréal au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 28 mars 2023, il remplace officiellement Philippe Brosseau comme l'un des représentants du Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. Nous remercions chaleureusement Philippe pour sa contribution au comité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ajouts et modifications au wiki du PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le wiki, le '''contenu ajouté''' est identifié par l'étiquette &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. Le '''contenu modifié''' est identifié par du &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;texte en rouge&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9|Nouvel exemple avec $2 rvmgf]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Formation PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN|Arbres de décisions pour aider avec la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|Instruction et exemple pour une notice non différenciée de BAnQ sans numéro Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670-Format des zones 670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Format_des_zones_670|Modification de l'exemple sous CIP (catégorie de ressources spécifiques)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-30&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions pour les langues de la norme ISO 15919:2001 (Information et documentation -- Translittération du Devanagari et des écritures indiennes liées en caractères latins)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Correction des exemples de l'étape 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Bibliothèques participantes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Mise à jour des répondants]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Compilation et Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ sur les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_géographiques|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e|16.2.2.5, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Bases de données toponymiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Retrait des phrases &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser la sous-zone $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0 ou $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0, $1, $3, $4 ou $i.&amp;quot; dans différentes zones]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Point 2.c. sur les variantes de point d'accès sous l'étape 2 pour les modifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ sur les numéros Canadiana (zone 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_numéros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Quels_sont_les_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9riques_utilis.C3.A9s_dans_les_notices_Canadiana.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question sur les numéros Canadiana génériques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Entretien_du_fichier_bibliographique_.28EFB.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Entretien du fichier bibliographique (EFB)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3., Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification d'un énoncé]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_.E2.80.93_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision sur les renvois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Enregistrement_des_attributs_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_et_d.27une_expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Enregistrement des attributs d'une œuvre et d'une expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Titre_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9_constitu.C3.A9_uniquement_du_nom_d.27un_type_de_composition|6.14.2.5.2, Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type de composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choix_de_la_langue|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choix de la langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Forme_au_singulier_ou_au_pluriel|6.14.2.5.2.2, Forme au singulier ou au pluriel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Partie_identifi.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_fois_par_un_num.C3.A9ro_et_par_un_titre_ou_une_autre_d.C3.A9signation_verbale.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Partie identifiée à la fois par un numéro et par un titre ou une autre désignation verbale, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Deux_ou_plusieurs_parties.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Deux ou plusieurs parties, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.8.3.2C_.C5.92uvres_compl.C3.A8tes_d.27un_m.C3.AAme_type_de_composition_pour_une_m.C3.AAme_distribution_sp.C3.A9cifique_ou_diverses_distributions|6.14.2.8.3, Œuvres complètes d'un même type de composition pour une même distribution spécifique ou diverses distributions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|6.15.1.3, Enregistrement d'une distribution d'exécution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.5.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.5, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.1, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.3, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27ordre|6.16.1.3.1, Numéro d'ordre]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_de_catalogue_th.C3.A9matique|6.16.1.3.3, Numéro de catalogue thématique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_transcriptions.2C_etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, transcriptions, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.27.1.9.2C_Ajouts_aux_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres|6.27.1.9, Ajouts aux points d'accès représentant des œuvres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1, Lignes directrices générales sur la construction des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Œuvres musicales avec des paroles, un livret, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1.9, Éléments additionnels dans les points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.3.2C_Point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_expression_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale|6.28.3, Point d'accès autorisé représentant une expression d'une œuvre musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.4.2C_Variante_de_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_.C5.93uvre_ou_une_expression_musicale|6.28.4, Variante de point d'accès représentant une œuvre ou une expression musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|Précision pour les notices d'autorité existante]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.17.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_tonalit.C3.A9|6.17.1.3, Enregistrement d'une tonalité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#.C3.89tablissement_de_certaines_entit.C3.A9s_dans_le_fichier_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms|Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-mati.C3.A8re|Instruction pour les notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|Instruction pour les sous-zones obsolètes $l et $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#023_ISSN_de_regroupement|Zone 023, ISSN de regroupement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille|Instruction pour la sous-zone $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.E2.80.99une_relation_.C3.A0_une_collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation|32.1.1.3, Enregistrement d’une relation à une collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Groupe_1_-_Vedettes_du_groupe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_de_noms|Catégorie « Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named » révisée pour « Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual » (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Suppression de : préférer une notice qui a déjà une 016 à une qui n'en a pas.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_FAQ_sur_les_compilations_d%27œuvres_d%27un_même_agent|FAQ sur les compilations d'œuvres d'un même agent.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#10.0.2C_Identification_des_familles|10.0, Identification des familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Enfants_et_petits-enfants_de_personnes_royales|9.4.1.4.3, Enfants et petits-enfants de personnes royales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms|Précisions apportées dans les zones 008/32, 371, 377 et 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles| Lien pour Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Format_des_zones_670| Nouvel exemple illustrant comment citer une sous-page de site Web]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667| Modification de la note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Foire aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_la_romanisation| FAQ sur la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité directeur&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_directeur| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité des normes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_des_normes| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précision pour le numéro à indiquer dans la note 667 sous Étape 2, Notice à supprimer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Bibliothèque_et_Archives_Canada|Lien pour le wiki de BAC]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision pour certains principes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.2C_Collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|32.1, Collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Lorsqu.E2.80.99une_collectivit.C3.A9_a_port.C3.A9_plus_d.E2.80.99un_nom_et_qu.E2.80.99il_existe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_pour_les_autres_noms_dans_Canadiana.2C_lesquelles_doit-on_mettre_en_relation_avec_des_zones_5XX.3F_Dans_quels_cas_doit-on_r.C3.A9viser_les_autorit.C3.A9s_des_collectivit.C3.A9s_mises_en_relation.3F|Question 7 sur les collectivités en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Nouveaux répondants pour certaines institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Mise_.C3.A0_jour_des_notices_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_existantes|Précision importante concernant les notices indifférenciées existantes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.3.4.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_p.C3.A9riode_d.27activit.C3.A9_d.27une_personne_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.3.4.3, Enregistrement d'une période d'activité d'une personne]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour le terme &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; ajoutée à la zone 1XX de la liste]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9|Précision sur les changements de nom des groupes associés]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour les notices d'autorité codées FrPBN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Comment_d.C3.A9terminer_l.27usage_pour_le_nom_d.27un_agent_dans_WMS.3F|Question 8 sur l'usage du nom d'un agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation de l'hébreu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision ajoutée pour la zone 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#G.C3.A9n.C3.A9ralit.C3.A9s|Généralités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Précision concernant les comtés aux États-Unis]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur_.5BNouveau.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées dans la section Généralités; ajout de sections sur la répétabilité, les dates divergentes et les dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées pour un URI inclus dans la sous-zone $u]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Crit.C3.A8res_d.27admissibilit.C3.A9_au_PFAN_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Critères d'admissibilité et attentes envers les nouveaux membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Correction de l'indice PQ pour la littérature canadienne française]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Instruction sur les sous-zones $q et $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress_.5BNouveau.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21/053&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress|Précision concernant le deuxième indicateur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Table pour l'amharique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|Ne plus utiliser cette zone]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles|Lien vers &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Présentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 sur les congrès, etc., annulés ou hybrides]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précisions ajoutées aux zones 046 et 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_cod.C3.A9es_comme_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_qui_ne_repr.C3.A9sentent_en_fait_qu.27une_seule_identit.C3.A9|Précision ajoutée pour les notices codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» par erreur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation du yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique_.5BNouveau.5D|Code local de région géographique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_de_promulgation_d.E2.80.99une_loi.2C_etc._.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.29.1.29, Date de promulgation d’une loi, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2C_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2, Nom de collectivité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information_.5BNouveau.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources d'information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Doit-on_modifier_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions_d.27un_agent_.28p._ex._un_auteur_ou_un_compositeur.29_si_la_forme_retenue_pour_l.27agent_seul_est_diff.C3.A9rente_de_celle_utilis.C3.A9e_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions.3F|Question 4 sur la modification des points d'accès autorisés pour les œuvres et expressions d'un agent]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_g%C3%A9ographiques|FAQ sur les noms géographiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation_.5BNouveau.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667|Deux nouveaux exemples de notes 667 (pour les notices d'autorité de nom indifférenciées représentant une seule identité et celles faisant l'objet d'une modification partielle)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Renvois (4XX et 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ-Numéros Canadiana&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_num%C3%A9ros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Qui_contacter_lorsqu.27on_a_besoin_d.27une_nouvelle_liste_de_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_pour_la_zone_016.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question 4 sur l'obtention d'une nouvelle liste de numéros Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Livret et Paroles)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions ajoutées en ce qui concerne le chinois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible_.5BNouveau.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Communications_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Principles généraux]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|022]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9|024]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#335_Plan_d.27extension_.5BNouveau.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|375]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9|384]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible|385]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur|386]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9|510]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme|530]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Deux nouvelles langues (coréen et japonais)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Ajout d'une instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Projet_2._Notices_cr.C3.A9.C3.A9es_et_r.C3.A9vis.C3.A9es_dans_le_cadre_du_projet_de_mentorat_des_universit.C3.A9s|Précisions ajoutées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |Renvois « voir » (4XX) simples]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Composition|Composition du Comité directeur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Nouvel article sur le PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNouveau.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Ajout de tables de romanisation de la BnF pour l'arménien, le biélorusse, le bulgare, le géorgien, le macédonien, le russe et l'ukrainien]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|Remplacement d'exemples RVM par RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précisions apportées à l'instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions|Précisions apportées au point 3 et à l'exemple 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure pour les notices dérivées du LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_pour_les_notices_d.C3.A9riv.C3.A9es_du_LC.2FNAF|Précision apportée à l'exemple du modèle d'une note 670 ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#PFAN-MUSIQUE-L_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Liste de discussion PFAN-MUSIQUE-L]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Ajout d'information dans différentes zones.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Éléments RDA fondamentaux pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Éléments_RDA_fondamentaux_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous l'élément ''collectivités en relation''.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Zones MARC obligatoires pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Zones_MARC_obligatoires_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous les zones 510, 511, 551.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouvelle introduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-03-13''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145117</id>
		<title>PFAN - Name Authority Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145117"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T13:29:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Special types of citations */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by N. Mainville, LAC, )}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Manual}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Name Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Series Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Fixed Fields =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Descriptive cataloging code  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;All new name authority records created and contributed by PFAN catalogers must use code 008/10 “z” and include subfield $e rda in the 040 (Cataloging source) field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an existing NAR using code “a”, “b”, “c”, or “d” is modified in any way, evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA, changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1: If an existing NAR using code “c” is modified only to change or add a 5XX field, catalogers are strongly encouraged, but not required, to evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA,&lt;br /&gt;
changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2: Existing undifferentiated name authority records coded 008/10 “c” may be modified to remove one or more identities in order to create differentiated RDA authority records. When modifying&lt;br /&gt;
an existing undifferentiated name authority record for this purpose, the updated undifferentiated name authority record must retain the existing 008/10 code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F10 Descriptive Cataloging Rules|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Subject heading system/thesaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR 008/11 is set to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/11 value “v” (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/11 value “n” (Not applicable), representing past practice, change the value to “v.” In the Manual, see also 008/15 for instructions on changing that value to “a” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/11&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (Not applicable) to name authority records for corporate names representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point. Also assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; in 008/15, and make a 667 note indicating the form of the access point used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples of corporate names not appropriate for use as subject headings:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F15 Heading use-subject added entry|Manual 008/15]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]].&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created NARs. Make these changes also when modifying&lt;br /&gt;
existing name authority records for any reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F11 Subject Heading System.2FThesaurus|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Heading use-subject added entry ==&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;General&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; is set to &amp;quot;b.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/15 value “a” (Appropriate) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/15 value “b” (Not appropriate), representing past practice, change the value to “a.” In the Manual, see also 008/11 for instructions on changing that value to “v” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Background:'' For Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental&lt;br /&gt;
bodies, Religious officials, and Popes, descriptive catalogers may be required to establish an authorized&lt;br /&gt;
access point for the corporate name for the office as well as a personal name for the office holder. It is&lt;br /&gt;
subject cataloging policy to assign only the personal name, not the corporate name, as a subject access&lt;br /&gt;
point. This policy was established for collocation purposes (cf. [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
may be used in descriptive cataloging as an access point, but in subject cataloging only the personal name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
would be used as a subject access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; (Not appropriate) to name authority records for corporate entities representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the entry. Also assign value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; in 008/11, and make a 667 note indicating the form used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F11 Subject heading system.2Fthesaurus|Manual 008/11]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;NARs and subject usage.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Correct existing records when making any other change to the records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19]&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F15 Heading Use-Subject Added Entry|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Undifferentiated personal name ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== General === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use 008/32 code “b” (undifferentiated) in an RDA name authority record. Assign 008/32 value “a” for personal name NARs. Use code “n” for families, corporate bodies, and places. For works and expressions, assign value “a” if the access point begins with a personal name, otherwise assign value “n”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the past, personal name NARs could be coded as undifferentiated using 008/32 value “b” when the cataloger had no acceptable way of differentiating multiple persons with the same preferred name. Since then, PFAN have followed these guidelines for personal name NARs:&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not create new undifferentiated records coded 008/32 “b”. All personal name authority records coded RDA should be differentiated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not add a new identity to an existing personal name authority record coded 008/32 “b.”&lt;br /&gt;
* Instead, apply [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] to create a unique authorized access point for the person, using suitable additional elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' If the only record found for an entity is an undifferentiated record (with field 008/32 coded &amp;quot;b&amp;quot;) from a university with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN », do not use it.  Create a new authority record for the entity.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated record to LAC by emailing the OCLC control number to pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca with the subject line: Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may happen that an existing undifferentiated name authority record, especially one that has been imported from LC/NAF, contains pairs of 670 fields used to group information about each individual covered by the NAR. The first 670 in the pair is an “identifying” 670 field containing a term descriptive of the person's relationship to the title cited in the second 670 of the pair. The data in the identifying 670 field is contained in subfield $a and enclosed in square brackets. The second 670 in the pair is a “citation” 670 that contains the normal data elements in a resource being cataloged citation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Added entry for Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Editor of Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, an existing undifferentiated name authority record may include a 667 note indicating that the record is undifferentiated and identifying the resource(s) associated with other persons with the same name. In this case, the record generally does not include 670 fields for persons other than the first one identified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When information is found to distinguish a person in an existing undifferentiated from LAC or BAnQ name record:&lt;br /&gt;
* Always create a new name authority record for that person, with distinguishing information, and add an indication that the person was formerly on an undifferentiated record (see &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_notes_on_records_for_identities_previously_on_undifferentiated_records|667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records]]&amp;quot; below). If an authority record already exists for that person with the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer the &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;citation&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not transfer the “identifying” 670 to the new NAR.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the undifferentiated NAR is not being deleted because multiple identities remain, delete the pair of 670 fields pertaining to the newly created NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(i.e., in the undifferentiated NAR, delete both the &amp;quot;identifying&amp;quot; 670 and the &amp;quot;citation&amp;quot; 670)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If more than one identity remains in the undifferentiated NAR, and there is not sufficient information in the NAR to create new NARs for each name, leave the NAR coded AACR2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to facilitate machine processing of authority records (e.g., matching, linking), when only one identity is left on an undifferentiated personal name authority record (i.e., other identities are being&lt;br /&gt;
disambiguated and removed), take the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Create a new NAR for the remaining single identity. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ») and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.  The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. In the new record:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer the citation 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 note:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note  « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assure that the undifferentiated NAR only contains information relevant to the single identity remaining (e.g., 670s). If applicable, delete field 667 indicating that the record is undifferentiated.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add that information in the 667 note on the undifferentiated record to assure that a duplicate NAR will not be created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of differentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated LAC record''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New notice for the author of Histoire du département de la Manche:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number] $z [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of undifferentiated record derived from LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Esperanza:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the illustrator of Reptiles:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the illustrator of Reptiles :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008red/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add a 667 note to a new NAR to identify the Canadiana number of the authority record in which information about that person had been recorded:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Records coded as undifferentiated that actually represent only one identity ====&lt;br /&gt;
Occasionally an existing record will be coded undifferentiated, but new research indicates that in fact the record represents only one identity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may also happen that we suspect that the value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; has been mistakenly coded in field 008/32. In such cases, proceed as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 field to the undifferentiated NAR indicating that it has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a new name authority record for the identity. The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 note: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number..)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the note 667 &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated record that represents a single identity''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation  :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;New authority record after disambiguation&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [no Canadiana number, use OCLC number from undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F32 Undifferentiated personal name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/33 Level of establishment  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Provisional''' (008/33 value “c”) records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Code an NAR as provisional (008/33 value “c”) if the authorized access point cannot be formulated satisfactorily because of inadequate information. If the necessary information later becomes available, re-evaluate the NAR and upgrade it to fully established (008/33 value “a”). In no case should a provisional-level authority record be created with an access point that conflicts with an existing NAR according to PFAN normalization rules.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Special administrative regions of Hong Kong and Macau'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Because there is uncertainty about whether Hong Kong and Macau will continue to have two official languages, code all NARs for government bodies in these two places, at the level of the special administrative region and below, as provisional (008/33 value “c”), regardless of the language in which the authorized access point has been established. If a form in the second of the two official languages becomes available, add that form as a variant access point rather than revising the existing authorized access point. Consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] and the [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html related policy statement] for instructions on choosing the language of the referred name. Please note that this policy for provisional status does not apply to non-government bodies.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional information for PFAN participants'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN participants may also create provisional records in the following two exceptional situations:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library does not have the language expertise to establish the authorized access point as a fully established authority record; this would include situations where the library lacked adequate reference sources for research or where the cataloger was not confident of the correct grammatical form for the access point.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library is unable, due to limited resources or other constraints, to complete related authority work or to determine the appropriate reference structure that is required for fully established authority records.&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preliminary''' (008/33 value “d”) records:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Preliminary authority records (008/33 value “d”) generally are the result of retrospective projects. PFAN catalogers are expected to routinely upgrade NARs coded preliminary when making other modifications to the record. Because of this maintenance requirement, PFAN participants are asked to contact the PFAN Standards Committee before embarking on projects that may result in large numbers of NARs coded preliminary being added to the NACO Authority File.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;As needed, catalogers may upgrade NARs coded preliminary when working with earlier/later corporate body records, even if the access points in the records being upgraded are not used in the local bibliographic database. Occasionally catalogers may need to create a new NAR without having an item in hand, e.g., for an earlier or later name heading using information from reference sources, or a heading based on information found in field 245 subfield “c” of bibliographic records when resolving NAR conflicts. Do not code these occasional NARs as “preliminary”.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records&lt;br /&gt;
are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, series data elements should be viewed on the publication and series authority records should be coded “a” (full). In post-cataloging authority work it is permissible to create SARs without the piece in hand; these records are coded “d” (preliminary). When a publication in the series has been examined and the preliminary authority record reviewed and updated as necessary, upgrade the SAR to full level.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F33_Level_of_establishment|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Cataloging source ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever value is originally input into this field remains; do not change this value when updating a record unless the original value was incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas « blanc » pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou « c » (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a). --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F39_Cataloging_source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 National Bibliographic Agency Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 016 is mandatory whenever a cataloguer creates, updates or uses an authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an authority record, and when updating or using an existing record without a Canadiana number in field 016, first check the LC/NAF to see if the same entity is represented by an authority record, and if this authority record includes a Canadiana number. Note that the authorized access point, in the LC/NAF, may be different from the Canadiana access point.  If the LC/NAF record does include a Canadiana number, add this number to the Canadiana record, changing the final E to an F (or adding an F at the end of the Canadiana number, if there is no final letter). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When updating or using an existing authority record that includes a Canadiana number, please check that the language code F is present at the end of the field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Duplicates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not “reuse” a Canadiana number. Once an authority record has been created for a given entity, and once a Canadiana number has been attributed, do not change the data in this authority record to describe a DIFFERENT entity. For instance, do not change the authority record for “Dupont, Jean” to transform it into an authority record describing “Tremblay, Marie” (except if the person's name has changed). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, ask that the duplicate be deleted (see [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Procedures for duplicates]]). DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no field 016 in the record to be deleted, please add one, using the number 0000X0000F. Do not record this number in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
See also the “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Duplicates|Duplicates]]” section in this Manual, field 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, delete it. DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Partially modified batch-loaded authority records'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Batch-loaded authority records which are partially modified, according to the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]], will include Canadiana number 1111X1111F. This temporary number is added in order to allow the cataloguer to save the record, until such time as the entire record is evaluated to make sure it follows all PFAN standards. This number will have to be replaced by a unique number once the record is evaluated, when the 667 note “CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN” is deleted. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 International Standard Serial Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Record the ISSN whenever it is available from the item in hand, from analytic bibliographic records, or from the collected set bibliographic record for the series; otherwise, recording the ISSN is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it is known there are separate ISSN assigned to different formats of a series represented by a single SAR, prefer to record in 022 subfield $a the ISSN that is the linking ISSN (ISSN-L) for the different formats. Identify ISSN for specific formats in separate 667 fields, following this pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the title of a publication has changed, confirm that an ISSN appearing on the publication belongs to the new title and not to the earlier title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An incorrect ISSN can be given in a 667 field (e.g., “ISSN 1122-3344 is not a valid ISSN for this publication”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-11-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Other standard identifier =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the guidelines in [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf NACO Best Practices] for the 024 Field. As a general rule, limit the number of 024 fields in a NACO authority record to five. Do not routinely delete or change existing 024 fields when adding new ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are not required to maintain identifiers coded in the 024 field of PFAN authority records. When an 024 field is present in an authority record that is being reported for deletion (for example, in the case of a duplicate), catalogers should transfer the field to the record that is to be retained. When two authority records are being collapsed into one, and each record has a different 024 field, catalogers should include both 024 fields in the updated record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Coded cartographic mathematical data =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for countries, states, counties'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for outside limits (bounding boxes or polygons) should generally be used with larger geographic entities such as countries, states, and counties to identify the coordinates of the entity. The&lt;br /&gt;
coordinates may be recorded in either degrees/minutes/seconds, decimal degrees, decimal minutes, and/or decimal seconds. Styles should not be mixed in a single 034 field, but the field may be repeated to&lt;br /&gt;
represent the different styles (see below for conversion utilities); the order of 034 fields when both styles are given does not matter. To facilitate the reuse of coordinates in geographic applications, the point (not the comma) should be used as the decimal point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrees/minutes/seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees''': record in the form hddd.dddddd (hemisphere-degrees.decimal degrees)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees with plus ou minus''': record in the form +-ddd.dddddd (hemisphere[+/-]-degrees.decimal degrees) (“+” or N and E, “-” for S and W ; the plus sign is optional)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example with +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example without the optional plus sign)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal minutes''': record in the form hdddmm.mmmm (hemisphere-degrees-minutes.decimal minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss.sss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds.decimal seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for cities, towns, and townships'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for cities, towns, and townships should generally be recorded as center points rather than outside limits. For the 034 field, the longitude and latitude that form the central axis are recorded&lt;br /&gt;
twice to define the center point (i.e., the contents of $d and $e are identical, the contents of $f and $g are identical).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing degrees/minutes/seconds)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees with plus/minus)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Coordinate Conversion Tools'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN institutions are encouraged to provide both degrees/minutes/seconds and decimal degrees when available. Numerous conversion tools are available on the Web to derive one from the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 has been defined for recording the source of the coordinate information– codes for commonly used sources are available from: [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/cartographic-data.html ''Cartographic Data Source Codes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 citation to the source would not be required if the only information from the source is recorded in field 034; a 670 citation should be made if necessary to record information beyond coordinates, such as variant names, hierarchy, time period of applicability, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#034_Coded_Carographic_Mathematical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 System Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#035_System_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Cataloging source =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Language of cataloging'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $b fre added automatically by WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $d – Modifying agency'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $d [MARC 21 code] is added automatically by WMS when modifying NARs or SARs unless your institution's is already the last MARC subfield $d in the 040 field. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $e – Description conventions'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All new authority records created and submitted by PFAN cataloguers must have the code &amp;quot;z&amp;quot; in Field 008/10 and include the $e rda subfield in Field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding the subfield $e manually, add it after subfield $b and before $c. It is not necessary to move the subfield $e to this position if it is already present elsewhere in the 040 or if it is being added by a macro or a template. Subfield $e rda is automatically added by the system in NARs and SARs when fixed field 008/10 (Rules) is set to “z” (Other).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#040_Cataloging_Source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Authentication Code =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This field is found in all authority records used by LAC. Do not modify or delete this field when code CaOONL appears in field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers (other than LAC cataloguers) derive an authority record from an LAC record which includes field 042, they must remember to delete this field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the Canadiana authority file, cataloguers must add 042 $a nlc every time they create, derive or revise an authority record. This code identifies the “virtual” Canadian authority file, which is spread across two separate authority files (LC/NAF and Canadiana). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#042_Authentication_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Geographic Area Code &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 043 can only be used in authority records for geographical names (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield b – Local GAC code and Subfield $2 – Source of local code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For sites located in Quebec, PFAN participants can use subfield $b to record a local code from the list below, representing the administrative region of Quebec where the site is located. This code is formed by the geographic region code &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; and a two-letter sub-entity local code (e.g., qa) that identifies the administrative region and replaces the last two characters of the &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; code (e.g., &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot;). (e.g. &amp;quot;n-cn-qa&amp;quot;). Subfield $b is recorded after subfield $a and is followed by subfield $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#043_Geographic_Area_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Special coded dates =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: When encoding date information, give the fullest information about the date that is readily available (the date in field 046 may be more precise than a date used in the 100 subfield $d). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2nd_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;When&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; revising existing authority records, record dates in field 046 even if the heading itself does not have dates in 100 subfield $d, when the information is readily available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording dates in field 046, use the Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) schema in all cases except for centuries; supply dates using the pattern yyyy, yyyy-mm, or yyyy-mm-dd. See date table in [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html LAC-BanQ PS 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt; For the full EDTF specification, see [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophonist)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bryant, W. Blues around the clock [SR] 1945: $b label (Johnny Hicks, tenor sax)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Discogs website, May 27, 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; tenor sax player who performed with Tab Smith in the 1940s)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording B.C. dates in the 046 field, precede the digits by a hyphen (minus sign). Because there is no year “zero” in the common era calendar, subtract one year from the actual B.C. date, e.g., the year 50 B.C. is recorded -0049.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a century in the 046 field, use the first two digits of the hundred year span (e.g., use “16” to represent the 17th century, 1600–1699). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the 1st century A.D. is represented by value “00” and B.C. centuries have a hyphen &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;minus &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sign)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; before the digits (e.g., “-04” for the 5th century B.C.). An approximate century (e.g., active approximately 12th century) cannot be recorded in the 046 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Repeatability:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Field 046 is repeatable, but the 046 subfields used to record the dates are not repeatable. Generally, one 046 field with dates conforming to the EDTF schema should be sufficient. However, century dates follow the ISO 8601 standard, not EDTF. When recording century dates in addition to more precise dates, it is therefore necessary to repeat the 046 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Conflicting dates'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, resources consulted may present conflicting dates (e.g., conflicting birth or death dates for a person, or start or end dates for a corporate body). In these situations, the 046 field should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information. It is not necessary to record all the conflicting dates using field 046, nor is it necessary to give a 046 field for each resource consulted. Evaluation of the conflicting dates should generally result in a single 046 field, containing the date(s) the cataloger judges to be most accurate in representing the entity. At the cataloger's discretion, the date(s) recorded in that 046 field may incorporate the conflicting date information and need not correspond exactly to the date(s) selected for the authorized access point.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Similarly, any dates added to the authorized access point should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information, recorded in conformance with the instructions in RDA and the PFAN Policy Statements. If one date predominates in the resources consulted, that date may be considered the most appropriate to use in the authorized access point. If a single date does not predominate, the cataloger may decide to use the “approximately yyyy”, “yyyy?”, or “yyyy or yyyy” format in the authorized access point. In some cases, dates corresponding to the period of activity of the person (RDA 9.19.1.5) may be considered the best choice.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 157 B.C. as the approximate date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary. authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 1907 as the date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Same example as above, reflecting a different decision the cataloger might have made for recording 046 subfield $f)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Because the 046 field will be based on information from multiple sources, justification cannot be accurately expressed in subfield $v/$u at the end of the 046 field. The conflicting dates should be recorded in 670 fields. If an existing record has subfield $v/$u as 046 field justification, and the 046 field is being updated as described above, the subfield $v/$u should be removed, and the justification converted to a 670 field, if the conflicting dates are not already justified in an existing 670 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Uncertain dates resulting from date calculations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, a calculation may be required to determine which dates to record in the 046 field and the authorized access point. Such calculations may result in uncertain dates.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the consulted resources provide only the person's date of death and their age (in years) at the time of death, as often happens with obituaries, their year of birth will correspond to one of two consecutive years. To calculate those years, first subtract the age from the year of death, then use the resulting year plus its preceding year as the two alternatives for the year of birth.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger subtracted 75, the age at death, from 1994, the year of death; the resulting year, 1919, and the year preceding it, 1918, represent the two possible alternatives for the year of birth)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If non-Gregorian dates are found in consulted resources, uncertain dates may result from calendar conversion differences. Gregorian calendar dates are used in the 046 field and authorized access point. A single date in a non-Gregorian calendar may correspond to one of two Gregorian dates. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(The Hijri calendar date 1346 H converts to either 1967 or 1968 in the Gregorian calendar.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of date scheme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add subfield $2 edtf except after a century. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfields $q – Establishment date, $r – Termination date,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Start period, and $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Record dates associated with a one-time conference, etc., or a single instance of a&lt;br /&gt;
series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] and [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), use subfields $s and $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Use the establishment date  ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) and the termination date ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) of a series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]) in subfields $q and $r, if that information is known.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on using $s and $t for start and end periods in fields 368, and 370-376, see the instructions provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following represents PFAN practice on recording sources of information in $u and $v in fields where they are defined, and/or in field 670: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;670s must be used to support information used as part of a heading in 1XX and 4XX fields.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;For fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $v is optional if the same information/source is already cited in the 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use $v if the information/source is not cited in a 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $u is optional, and should always be preceded by $v&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Use a 670 field if needed to justify information recorded in other fields for which subfields $u and/or $v are not defined or defined differently. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the same basic citation principles when recording data in subfield $v (Source of information) of fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 that currently apply to field 670 subfield $a (Source citation).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Supply specific citation information (page number, sub-page of website) in subfield $v if, in the cataloger's judgment, this greater specificity is needed to find the information within the source cited. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information in fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 is in the same form as found in the source, there is no need to cite usage information. If the information recorded in those fields is in a different form from that in the source, use 670 $b (Information found). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For tangibles sources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information was derived from a tangible source (e.g., a print book, removable digital media) subfield $v should contain sufficient information for a cataloger to find the item cited in a catalog&lt;br /&gt;
or bibliographic database. This can usually be limited to title proper and imprint or date. If that combination is not unique, the title citation may be preceded by the creator's name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For online resources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide information sufficient to find the resource via a search engine. Include either title and publication date (if it is a formally-published resource, such as an e-book) or a suitable description of the&lt;br /&gt;
document and date accessed (for a less formal resource). Optionally include subfield $u. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-03)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Library of Congress Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#050_Library_of_Congress_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 LC classification number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used in personal name authority records to record LC classification numbers for individual literary authors, including authors of children's literature. It may also be used '''exceptionally'' in personal and corporate name authority records to record biography numbers in the ML410-429 range of the LC classification when the choice of index or cutter is not obvious. Field 053 must always include a $5 subfield.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class PS8000 numbers should not be recorded in field 053. For the use of PS8000 numbers in name authority records, see section 065 of this Manual. An authority record for a Canadian literary author may contain both a 053 and a 065 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Library and Archives Canada Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#055_Library_and_Archives_Canada_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Other Classification Number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 065 is used to record PS8000 class numbers. Field 065 must always include a subfield $2 and a subfield $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [MARC code of institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Number source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2, record &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; to indicate that the number comes from the PS8000 class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#065_Other_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 080 Universal Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#080_Universal_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Dewey Decimal Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#082_Dewey_Decimal_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Dewey Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#083_Dewey_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Government Document Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#086_Government_Document_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Government Document Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#087_Government_Document_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Headings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for any reason, delete a final mark of punctuation in the 1XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging&lt;br /&gt;
instructions (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: in order to minimize the impact of database maintenance with associated bibliographic records and/or related authority records, catalogers are urged to refrain from making unnecessary changes to 1XXs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN series practice: Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the title proper of a multipart monograph, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choosing a monographic series title proper:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has more than one form of series title, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has the series title in more than one language or script on the same source, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has series title pages in more than one language and or script, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#Consider spacing and changes in typography when determining where the series title begins and ends. Also consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Establishing an SAR access point:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Determine choice of authorized access point based on [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] and its associated LAC-BAnQ PS.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclude from the authorized access point the following information included in the series statement in the bibliographic record for the component part:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;initial article in subfields $a, $t, $n, and $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;other title information;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;statement of responsibility;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;parallel title(s);&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;numeric/chronological designations.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a parenthetical qualifier(s) if appropriate according to the guidelines in LAC-BAnQ PS 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on converting an existing NAR to an SAR, see Should an SAR be made? in the Introduction of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Heading - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for families'''&lt;br /&gt;
'''''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “3” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a family. See in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_Nonpublic_general_note|667]] section, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]], for subject usage instructions in NARs for families.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Additions to the name are contained in a single set of parentheses separated by colons.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# The term for the type of family is added after the name and is contained in subfield $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $d (date) follows the term for the type of family.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $c is used for place associated with family and follows the date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $g is used for prominent member of family. Give authorized access point for the person as found in the 1XX of the NAR without any internal subfield coding.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for persons'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “0” or “1” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] provides guidance for the placement of words indicating relationship (e.g., Jr.) and MARC defines subfield $q as “Forme développée du nom de personne.” When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Subfield $d (date) should always be the last element in a 100 string unless the term (Esprit) is being added to the name. Add $c (Esprit) as the last element in a 100 string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Example:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Generally add subfield $c before subfield $q when also adding words, numerals, etc. indicating relationship. (See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] for treatment of Portuguese names)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) For exceptional situations, such as when subfield $a contains only a surname or only a forename or the name includes a prefix, etc. consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2020-12-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#100_Heading-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Content Type =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 336 may only be used in NARs and SARs for expressions. 336 is always accompanied by a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2 give “rdacontent/fre.” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Content type term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use terms from [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html/view RDA 6.9.1.3]. The list of terms is also available in the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Content type code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If giving subfield $b instead of/or in addition to subfield $a, use the code from the MARC format [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#336_Content_Type|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Other attributes of person or corporate body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary for terms in subfields $a, $b, and $c, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a, $b and $c. When terms in subfields $a and $b do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record professions or occupations in subfield $c (Other designation). Profession or occupation may be recorded in field [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#374_Occupation|374]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record titles of royalty, nobility or religious rank ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) in subfield $d in the form used in the authorized or variant access points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#368_Other_Attributes_of_Person_or_Corporate_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Associated place =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For jurisdictions or other place names with authority records in Canadiana or, failing that, the form found in the RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. The form of place name in the 370 field may differ from the form of place name added to a preferred name of place or an access point per RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Authorized access point for the place includes type of jurisdiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name for the larger place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Other place name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no authorized access point for the place in Canadiana or RVM, it is not necessary to create an NAR in order to code the 370 field. Record the place in the 370 field following RDA and the LAC-BAnQ PSs, including consulting appropriate sources and adding additional elements (e.g., type of jurisdiction) to break conflicts. Do not add a subfield $2 if no NAR is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of the associated place has changed, the name of the place that applied in the time of the entity being established in the 1XX may optionally be recorded in place of, or in addition to, the current form of name. It is not necessary to follow subject cataloging policies to use the latest form of name only.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person born in the city of Calcutta before its name changed to Kolkata; cataloger has chosen to record the form of name that applied at the time the person was born)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person residing in the city of Milan during the Renaissance, prior to the formation of the modern country of Italy; cataloger has chosen to record the current form of name for the country)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For non-jurisdictions, prefer names from an authorized vocabulary such as RVM and identify the source in subfield $2. If the name is not found in an authorized vocabulary, record it in field 370 without&lt;br /&gt;
giving a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
When determining when to create a name authority record for a geographic name, consult the “Name Authority Records (NARs)” section of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1], Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary&lt;br /&gt;
source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfield $c – Associated country&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Generally, do not use subfield $c to record places that are not sovereign entities. Such places may be recorded in subfield $f or other subfields as appropriate.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Martinique is an overseas department of France)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if a sovereign entity has (or previously had) one or more constituent countries, any of the constituent countries associated with the 1XX may optionally be recorded in subfield $c in addition to, or instead of, the larger sovereign entity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Great Britain who has strong ties to Wales; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with the Soviet Union, particularly the Kirghiz Soviet Socialist Republic; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Aruba, a constituent country of the Netherlands; cataloger has chosen not to record the Netherlands)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with India prior to its independence from Great Britain; cataloger has chosen not to record Great Britain)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entity names of First Nations in Canada and Indian tribes recognized by the United States government as legal entities may be included in subfield $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Record the place of origin of the work in field 370, unless it is merely a place of publication or other place associated with a manifestation (use field 643, when appropriate, for the latter). Although the “place of origin” of a serial work may be the same as the place of publication of the component part for which the SAR (or serial bibliographic record) was created, use judgment in distinguishing between place of origin of the work and a place of publication not actually related to the work itself.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-24]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-22)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#370_Associated_Place|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Address =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice:&lt;br /&gt;
* Supply based on cataloger's judgment, if the information is readily available and not already being recorded in field 370 subfield $e (Place of residence/headquarters).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* In cases where subfield $a is not recorded, include at a minimum subfield $m (Electronic mail address) or subfield $b (City).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not record physical &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or e-mail&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; addresses for living persons.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Catalogers are not required to maintain address information when updating a record that contains an address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record multiple addresses, with or without ranges of dates, in separate occurrences of field 371.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Electronic mail address'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $m should contain only an e-mail address. Do not add an internet address for the 1XX in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#371_Address|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Field of activity =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM heading string for field of activity, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an entity from Canadiana for field of activity, remove any subfield coding not authorized for use in the 372 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point in Canadiana:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Field of activity in 372:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall&lt;br /&gt;
best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''372 fields with a term from RVM and a non-controlled vocabulary term'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#372_Field_of_Activity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Associated group =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the Canadiana or LC/NACO Authority File, recording the source in subfield $2. Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 373 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of an associated group has changed, record the group name(s) that applied at the time of the entity being established in the 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with subfield $2 and dates:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with different vocabulary sources:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Although the MARC format does not specify a form of date in these subfields, the following practice is recommended for consistency. Input dates using the Gregorian calendar in the form yyyy. If more specific dates are necessary, consider recording them in another field (e.g., 670, 678). It is&lt;br /&gt;
not necessary to reformulate dates in existing NARs to conform to this practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&amp;lt;!--(2023-06-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#373_Associated_Group|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Occupation =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.16.1.3 for instructions on recording profession or occupation as an element. See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.19.1.6 for instructions using a profession or occupation term in an access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Codes from either the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/occupation.html/view Occupation Term Source Codes] or the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/subject.html/view Subject Source Codes] lists may be recorded in subfield $2 for the 374 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#374_Occupation|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Gender =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not use this field in new authority records. Whenever an existing record must be changed for any reason, delete any occurrence of field 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Family information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Name of prominent member'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When giving the name of the prominent member of the family in 376 subfield $b, give the form for the person as found in subfield $g of the 100 field of the NAR for the family. Do not include any internal subfield coding in subfield $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start''' period and Subfield $t – End period&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Associated language =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer language codes over language terms, using codes from the Code List for Languages in MARC21.  Use subfield $l (Language term) only to provide information not available in the [https://loc.gov/marc/languages/language_code.html MARC Code List for Languages]. Encode multiple languages for a person or corporate body only if more than one language is used for publication, communication, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Optionally, record an ISO 639-3 language code (or codes) in an additional 377 field. This practice is especially recommended when an ISO 639-3 code will identify a language more specifically than the MARC code does. For more information, see the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of the code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 is not required when the MARC Code List for Languages is used as the language source code (second indicator value “#”). PFAN institutions may supply an additional 377 field from another language code list by using second indicator value “7,” with subfield $2 containing a code for a language source list taken from the list in [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/language.html/view Language Code and Term Source Codes]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(ISO 639-3 code for Achi (acr); assigned a collective code (myn) for Mayan languages in the MARC Code List for Languages)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#377_Associated_Language|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Fuller form of personal name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode the fuller form of name in the 378 field when this information is readily available, even if the same information is already present in the 100 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the Information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#378_Fuller_Form_of_Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Form of work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMGF, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on recording form of work as an element in a work-level series authority record, see LAC-BAnQ PS 6.3.1.3.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#380_Form_of_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Other distinguishing characteristics of work or expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used to record the RDA elements other distinguishing characteristic of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) and other distinguishing characteristic of expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Other characteristics of expressions that are unique to musical works (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4-6.18.1.6]) may also be recorded in the 381 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Franklin number recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Other distinguishing characteristic of expression of musical work'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some terms recorded for other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression may be appropriate to record in field 381 and another MARC field for which there is no corresponding RDA element. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a corporate body (such as a publisher) used as an other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression could be recorded in either the 373 field (associated group), the 381 field or both.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 381 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as associated group and other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA has no specific element for places associated with expressions, but field 370 subfield $f (Other associated place) and subfield $g (Place of origin of work or expression) may be used in authority records for expressions. Some places associated with works or expressions would be considered other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression in RDA and could be recorded in the 370 field, the 381 field, or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Places used as other distinguishing characteristic of a legal work; recorded in 370 and 381 fields)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the RDA element place of origin of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.6]) in a 370 field (see Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]] section).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When other distinguishing characteristic of work or other distinguishing characteristic of expression has been used in an authorized access point and is also being recorded as an element in a 3XX&lt;br /&gt;
field, use the 381 field to record the other distinguishing characteristic. Optionally, also record the same information in any other appropriate 3XX field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#381_Other_Distinguishing_Characteristics_of_Work_or_Expression|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 Medium of performance =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the medium of performance using thesaurus terms from &amp;quot;Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM (RVMMEM)&amp;quot;. Record the medium of performance by applying the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html RDA 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6], the associated LAC-BAnQ PSs. ''Note:'' The 382 field may also be used in authority records for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. If considered important for identification and access, provide an additional 382 that does not apply these guidelines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#382_Medium_of_Performance|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numeric designation of musical work &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available. Create separate 383 fields for different numbering schemes associated with a single work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#383_Numeric_Designation_of_Musical_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Key =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available for works. In case of doubt, do not encode. Do not encode for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Audience characteristics =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the intended audience of a work or expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. In particular, consult instruction sheet L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ##  $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvmt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a: If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term and term from a controlled vocabulary)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''or''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-10-14]&amp;lt;!--(2022-10-14)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Creator/contributor characteristics &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record demographic characteristics of one or more creators or contributors associated with a work or expression, in particular for characteristics common to a group of creators or contributors associated with a work or expression. The field will most commonly be used in authority records for collection aggregates embodying two or more expressions of two or more independent works by different agents, and for individual works named by title alone (e.g., works of unknown authorship; monographic series).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the draft Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html].  In particular, consult instruction sheet L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator and Contributor Characteristics, available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled demographic term)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While this field will be used primarily for aggregated works and for individual works named by title alone, there are situations when it will be appropriate for an individual work by one or more named creators. For example, for a musical work composed during childhood or adolescence, it would not be appropriate to record “Enfants” or “Adolescents” as a characteristic in the composer’s authority record. Instead, demographic characteristics applicable to only some of a creator’s works should be recorded in the authority records for those works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Work composed 2003-2005, completed when the composer was 14 years old)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014 $b page 4 de la couverture (Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled term and terms from one controlled vocabulary)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $i – Relationship information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, use subfield $i to record a term designating the nature of the relationship between the demographic groups recorded in the field and the work or expression. Prefer a term from a controlled vocabulary, such as the MARC relator terms, RDA relationship designators, or RBMS relationship designators. Capitalize the first letter of the relationship term and record it in the singular. Follow the relationship term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998- February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record multiple subfield $i’s in a single 386 field. If multiple relationship terms apply to a single group of creators or contributors (e.g., a work with authors and artists from the same demographic group or an expression with editors and translators from the same demographic group), repeat the field, using different relationship terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(A compilation of works by authors and artists from Massachusetts)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different relationship terms apply to some of the creators and contributors (e.g., authors are in one demographic group and artists are in another), repeat the field, using different relationship terms. If the same relationship term applies to more than one demographic group, either repeat subfield $a in one field, or repeat the field. For clarity, when in doubt, repeat the 386 field as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Score containing works by Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler, and Strauss, with lyrics also printed as text in German and English translation)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-11]&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Time Period of Creation =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the time period of creation or origin of a work or expression. The name of the time period may specify or imply a place for which the time period is relevant. It may also specify the name of an event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMFAST, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM subject heading string, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For compilations, the field may be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the works/expressions contained within the compilation, considered collectively (using first indicator value “1”). It may also be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the compilation itself (using first indicator value “2”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR for a collection of Renaissance poetry compiled in the nineteenth century)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 388 field may be used in conjunction with, or instead of, the 046 field. When specific date(s) of creation or origin are not known, or span a long period of time, recording textual chronological terms in the 388 field may be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the indicator value differs, repeat the field. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR with 388 fields containing terms from different vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-07] &amp;lt;!--(2022-11-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX - See From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for another reason, delete any final mark of punctuation in a 4XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging rules (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying NARs or SARs that contain obsolete codes such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all 4XX references require justification; see “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Justifying_variant_access_points|Justifying variant access points]]” in the 670 section of this document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not make a 4XX that normalizes to the same form as another 4XX on the same authority record or a 1XX on any name authority record. See the section “NACO normalization” in the [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf/view DCM Z1] Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice guidelines for RDA:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Record variants found in the manifestation being cataloged:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Use cataloger's judgment;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; No limitation on the number or form of references;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Instead of or in addition to adding variants, consider providing access by adding 37X fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Example showing 378 without a variant for the fuller form of name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Establish additional NARs for the authorized access points needed to support elements used in 4XX variant access points (e.g., parent body associated with subordinate body being established).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally provide a variant form 4XX access point for a former 1XX authorized access point, unless the former authorized access point was egregiously incorrect. See the section “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX$w|Subfield $w – Control subfield]]” for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Use the established form of components in 4XX variant access points, except for non-Latin script variants, which may represent a mixture of scripts or may be entirely in a non-Latin script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally, do not remove variants unless egregiously incorrect (e.g., a non-Latin script variant that does not represent the same person).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If a form found on the manifestation being cataloged includes a variant form of a component of a 4XX variant access point, that form may be used in its entirety as an additional 4XX variant access point, provided that it is not divided into its component parts through the use of subfields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When changing the form of a superordinate body, a geographic name, or a personal name in a 1XX, update all of the existing NARs that use that component in a 4XX, unless the 4XX represents the former authorized access point (e.g., $w/2=e). ''Exception:'' Do not apply this instruction in the case of migrated authority records that have not been re-evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point for a person (100) is changed because the person has changed his or her name, record the earlier form of name in a 400 with $w nne if the variant is valid under RDA instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Name changed upon election as pope)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When an authorized access point for a person (100) is updated to close the date, it is recommended to save the former form with the open date in a 4XX field with $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) based on CIP cataloging is changed because its form on the published resource is different from that on the CIP galley, a 4XX from the previous authorized access point form with subfield $w nne may be added unless the former 1XX form was egregiously incorrect (e.g., the author's date of birth was given as 1775 instead of 1975 in the CIP galley).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) is changed because of a change in cataloging instructions, record the earlier form in a 4XX using $w. If the variant form is a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nne. If the variant form is not a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA; 100 form changed based on usage and dates of birth and death added because 100 was being changed)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429  av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nnea&amp;quot; because the abbreviation &amp;quot;ca.&amp;quot; is not valid for period of activity in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When changing an authorized access point because dates were recorded inaccurately or a cataloger entered a typo in the authorized access point, do not add the inaccurate form as a cross reference.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, providing authorized access points for the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Variant access points may be recorded in any SAR, including those for series-like phrases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the volumes of a multipart monograph have different forms of the common title, use a 4XX reference rather than a 5XX reference for the form of the title not chosen as the title proper of the multipart monograph.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27] &amp;lt;!--(2024-03-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D |''Manual 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX - See Also From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying a NAR that contain codes that are no longer used such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d” or “f,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers applying RDA instructions may use subfield $i in conjunction with subfield $w code “r” for relationship designators. When applying RDA relationship designators in 5XXs, supply terms from Appendix I, J or K; capitalize the initial letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the use of relationship designators and/or $w codes in a specific 5XX field, see the section in this Manual for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the conventions in the authority format for use of subfield $w. Do not supply subfield $w unless a value other than “n” would be appropriate in one of the positions. When supplying subfield $w,&lt;br /&gt;
give it as the first subfield in the field. Supply character positions preceding, but not succeeding, the value, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = to indicate a reference from an earlier authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = to indicate a reference from a later authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = to indicate that a subfield $i or subfield $4 is used to denote relationship information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = to indicate a see also reference for multiple pseudonyms (record also contains a 663 field)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A see also reference tracing (5XX) must not normalize to the same as another see also reference in the same authority record, unless both 5XX fields contain a relationship designator in subfield $i, and&lt;br /&gt;
the texts of the relationship designators are different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500  See Also From Tracing - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” when providing relationship links between a personal name and 1) the name of another person, family, or corporate body or 2) the authorized access point for a work or expression. This technique may also be used to relate authorized access points for works and expressions containing personal names. When using a term from Appendix I, J or K in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording pseudonymous relationships for personal names when only two authority records are involved, catalogers may either 1) use subfield $i and code “r” in subfield $w or 2) use simple see-also references. For more information on these techniques and instructions on recording multiple pseudonyms (i.e., those involving a 663 field), see the [http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/pseud.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA Practice for Creating NARs for Persons Who Use Pseudonyms]. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are reminded that when a variant name (400) and an authorized access point (100) are in conflict an addition should be made to either the 400 or 100 to resolve the conflict (e.g., fuller form of name, date of activity, etc.); the previous practice of changing the 400 to a 500 to resolve the conflict is no longer an option. When catalogers encounter a variant form in a 500 field in the course of updating a NAR, they should resolve the conflict and change the field to a 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510  See Also From Tracing - Corporate Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511  See Also From Tracing - Meeting Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html BAC-BAnQ PS 11.13.1.8] for guidance on relating authority records for ongoing conferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530  See Also From Tracing - Uniform Title =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded &amp;quot;r&amp;quot; when providing relationship links between authorized access points for works or expressions. When supplying RDA Appendix J terms in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551  See Also From Tracing - Geographic Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” until relationship designators for places are developed. (Currently RDA has a placeholder for Appendix L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Series Numbering Peculiarities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#641_Series_Numbering_Peculiarities|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Series Numbering Example =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#642_Series_Numbering_Example|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Series Place and Publisher/Issuing Body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#643_Series_Place_and_Publisher.2FIssuing_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Series Analysis Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#644_Series_Analysis_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Series Tracing Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#645_Series_Tracing_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Series Classification Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#646_Series_Classification_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Complex See Also Reference - Name =&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 663 field contains the explanatory text and authorized access points for relationships between a 100 (established name) and other 100s (established names) that cannot be adequately conveyed by one or more simple see also references generated from 500 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, this situation occurs when a person uses more than two identities, when more than one person shares an identity with one or more others, or when multiple persons use the same pseudonym independent of each other or as a result of some other arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text of the 663 may be adjusted to fit extraordinary situations; however, keep the text as simple as possible, allowing the MARC fields and coding to convey the information desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use the 663 technique to show relationships between corporate bodies or between persons and corporate bodies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is found in the [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA and AACR2 practice for creating NARs for persons who use pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Only two identities ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When only two NARs are created for a person, the NARs are generally connected with 500 see also references and no 663 field. However, when one of the NARs is for a joint pseudonym or a pseudonym used by several persons working independently of each other, the 663 technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== More than two identities - &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; authorized access point and references ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more than two authorized access points are created for the same person, identify a “basic” authorized access point using the 663 field technique. This decision is based on the desire to simplify the reference structure and to assist catalogers in determining which name to use as the subject of biographical or critical works. The “basic” authorized access point should be determined by the predominantly used form of name or, lacking sufficient evidence, by choosing the real name of the person as the “basic” form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the authority record for the “basic” name authority record add 500 see also references with a subfield w coded “nnnc” from all other names used. Justify the 500 in 670 citations according to normal practice. Provide a 663 field listing all the other names with the following text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name] $b [established form of&lt;br /&gt;
name]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On each of the other name authority records, trace a 500 see also reference with subfield $w coded “nnnc” from the “basic” name, justifying that reference in a 670 citation, according to normal practice. Other names may be mentioned in the 670 if it is convenient to do so. Provide a 663 field with the following or similar text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name chosen as the basic heading]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the author uses another new name, create a new name authority record for that name and also add it to the reference structure and 663 listing on the authority record for the “basic” name. References to the new name in the 500 and 663 fields are only added to the “basic” NAR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Joint pseudonyms ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A joint pseudonym represents one identity used by two or more persons working in collaboration with each other. If a person uses a joint pseudonym and another name (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for joint pseudonym:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer.  Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on joint pseudonym NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on joint pseudonym NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonyms used by multiple persons ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When multiple persons working independently of each other use the same pseudonym and one or more other names (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for pseudonym used by multiple persons:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; NAR for first 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;(''Author has a pseudonym used by multiple persons and individual pseudonyms'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#663_Complex_See_Also_Reference-Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Nonpublic general note =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give information of permanent value and general interest that would be useful also to PFAN institutions and outside of PFAN. A representative listing of notes is given below. Generally, wording is recommended but not prescriptive unless specified in the instructions. The separate 667 fields may be given in any order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use OCLC record)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [reason for coding].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date updated].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Used for official language changes'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Appendice 1 in this manual for information and instructions about 667 fields added to authority records as part of a special project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for persons with identities not established ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a person uses two or more identities in manifestations, name authority records may be created for each identity. In the interest of efficiency, catalogers may use a 667 field to list pseudonyms not found in publications instead of creating NARs for these unused pseudonyms. In this case, list the unused pseudonyms in a 667 field following the phrase: “Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This note may also be added to an NAR for a person who has multiple NARs for multiple identities when some of the pseudonyms are not found in publications. In this case, list only the unused pseudonyms in the 667 field, and follow appropriate instructions for the other pseudonyms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is available in the manual, 663 section, and the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/ LC/PCC Practice for Creating NARs for Persons who use Pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for series of conferences, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 field on the NAR for the collective conference when there are authority records for both collective and individual instances of an ongoing conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs and subject usage ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply these instructions when creating new NARs and revising existing NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Add notes indicating subject cataloging usage when an authorized access point is not appropriate for use as a subject heading for these situations:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Heads of state, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This instruction applies to NARS for corporate bodies representing the office when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point for the corporate body. See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Government Officials)] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html RDA 11.2.2.26 (Religious Officials)] for instructions on the corporate bodies. Use this 667 note on the NAR for the corporate body to indicate subject cataloging usage:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [personal name heading].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value “n” in 008/11 and value “b” in 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|008/11]] and [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|008/15]] in this manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Earlier/later linear jurisdictional name changes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;politique d'indexation du RVM&amp;quot; is to assign as a subject access point or as a geographic subdivision only the latest name of a political jurisdiction that has had one or more earlier names, as long&lt;br /&gt;
as the territorial identity remains essentially unchanged (see &amp;quot;Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval&amp;quot;, 5.14.3.1). When creating a NAR with an earlier/later authorized access point for a place in in this situation, catalogers must add a 667 subject usage note to the authority record with the earlier place name and adjust the appropriate 008 fields (008/11 and 008/15).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NARs for fictitious characters'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access points for families are not valid for subject use. In an NAR for a family, 008/11 should be set to value “n” and 008/15 should be set to “b.” Per LAC-BAnQ PS 9.0, when creating an NAR&lt;br /&gt;
for a family add this 667 field noting subject usage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Add this note to a name authority record for a city section indicating that it is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision (see SHM H 835 for more information):&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) NARs for families&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Authorized access points for family names are valid for subject use. For family name authority records that reflect past practice (which considered them invalid for subject use), update the records to set the 008/11 values to “v” and 008/15 values to “a” and delete the following subject usage note:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Non-Latin script reference notes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In an authority record that contains a non-Latin script variant access point, use the 667 field with a note stating: “Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.” If there are multiple non-Latin script variant access points, use a note stating: “Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.” Assign 008/29 value “b” to indicate that the variant access point is not evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Duplicates ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add the following note to a name authority record that has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number from the record to keep&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#667_Nonpublic_General_Note|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Sources found =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of this field is to record information about the name or title represented in the 1XX field. It includes facts that contribute to the identification of the entity, that justify the choice of the name&lt;br /&gt;
or title and any additional elements used to construct the authorized access point (1XX). The information also justifies, as needed, variant forms of the name or title (4XX), other identifying elements (046, 3XX,&lt;br /&gt;
and 678), and clarifies relationships between the 1XX and other entities in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Functions of the 670 field:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information, from sources (e.g., books, phone calls, websites), in support of the choice and form of the authorized access point, variants, and other identifying elements&lt;br /&gt;
* To store information that may be used to break a conflict later&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information on relationships between entities (e.g., a person is the author of a work, a corporate body was absorbed by another corporate body)&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify a person with works in diverse subject areas or of diverse forms&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify different individuals whose access points must remain identical for now (i.e., undifferentiated personal names) &lt;br /&gt;
* To clarify whether different forms of a name or of a title are simply variations or reflect a  change in the name or title&lt;br /&gt;
* To record research required by the current guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
* To facilitate authority and bibliographic file maintenance, i.e., the information in 670 fields aids in making decisions about duplicate authorized access points and misattributions&lt;br /&gt;
* To support machine manipulation based on algorithms using information in the 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, the first 670 field cites the resource for which the authority record is being established, i.e., the resource being cataloged. If the resource being cataloged or consulted provides no information to&lt;br /&gt;
justify the authorized access point, variants, or other elements recorded in the NAR, see the 675 section of this Manual for instructions on citing the resource in a 675 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give subsequent 670 fields in any order, adding new fields after existing ones. Do not routinely delete or change existing 670 fields when adding new 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding subsequent 670 fields, prefer objective, authoritative sources (e.g., an encyclopedia) and those sources that provide firsthand information (e.g., an author's blog). Use sources that provide additional information rather than repeating information that is already present in other 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Best practices for 670 fields:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* In subfield $b, summarize and edit information found as needed to avoid extraneous or repetitive information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Avoid citing subjective information or information that is of dubious value in identifying an entity within a bibliographic context.&lt;br /&gt;
* Exercise caution when recording information about living persons that may be private or controversial in nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 fields in existing NARs may not conform to these guidelines. For example, 670 fields in older NARs may lack subfield $b with justifying information. 670 fields in NARs that were part of a special project may not conform to these guidelines and/or may contain information that seems unusual or incorrect. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' The examples given throughout the following text have various conventions in regard to punctuation and style. These conventions are not prescriptive and should be considered as best practices to facilitate the exchange of information in a shared database environment. Catalogers are expected to use judgment and common sense. Punctuation and style need not be consistent from record to record as long as the information is clear and accurate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format of 670 fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the exception of the eszett (ß or ſʒ) and the euro sign (€), all characters found in the [http://www.loc.gov/marc/specifications/specchartables.html MARC code table] are valid for use in authority records contributed to the Canadiana Authority File ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html voir LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). When pasting data from a website into a 670 field, verify that all characters are valid for use in the record. Some non-valid characters resemble those that are valid. For example, the invalid en dash (–) resembles the valid hyphenminus (-).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a substitution for a symbol that cannot be reproduced is given in brackets (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html LAC-BAnQ PS for 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS for 1.7.5]),  an explanation of that interpolation may also be provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data must be given in romanized form. Normally it is understood that the cataloger has provided the romanization; therefore, when transcribing romanization found in the source, add after it the bracketed&lt;br /&gt;
phrase ['''forme romanisée''']. In such languages as Arabic and Hebrew, where vowels are commonly omitted from the orthography of texts, the cataloger supplies the missing vowels when transcribing data. When&lt;br /&gt;
transcribing text that does include the vowels, add after it in brackets ['''vocalisé'''] or ['''en partie vocalisé'''] as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a cataloger chooses to provide nonroman script variant access points, the 670 $b should contain both the nonroman script transcription(s) found in the source, and the systematically romanized form(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When authority records are created using automated authority generation programs, additional information may be included. This data may also be formatted in a different way than instructed in this document. Generally, this data should be retained as generated to maintain the cost effectiveness of this process unless the data is confusing or causes validation errors. The exceptions to this are names and&lt;br /&gt;
titles for which NARs are created. Follow the instructions in those sections for recording this data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Source citation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The title proper of the resource being cited, complete enough for later identification in an online catalog. Abbreviations and ellipses may be used. Precede a generic or indistinctive title with the creator's name that would begin the authorized access point for the work. If the authorized access point for the work is the same as the title proper plus a qualifier, it may be provided instead of the title proper to avoid ambiguity. When information in subfield $a of a 670 field is provided to justify an authorized or variant access point, follow the additional instructions at ''Recording names and titles''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The date of publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Multipart monographs.'' If the part is the first part, give the date of publication as an open date.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Serials other than monographic series.'' Generally, use a chronological designation instead of a publication date. If there is no designation date, use the numeric designation and the date of publication. Indicate, following the designation statement, if a “surrogate” was used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Integrating resources.'' Apply the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] for source of the title proper of a website. Identify the iteration from which information was taken (e.g., “viewed on”dates for updating websites, update number or release number for updating loose-leafs).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Information found'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $b:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The specific location(s) of the information found. For multipart resources with numbered parts, provide the designation of the part and the location within the part (e.g., v. 6, page 10; map recto, label). Abbreviations or spelled-out forms may be used (e.g., t.p. or title page, v. 6 or volume 6).&lt;br /&gt;
# Information found. Following the location, cite the information found there, enclosed in parentheses. As appropriate, give multiple occurrences of information from the same source following the location of the information. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George ; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' If the authorized access point is built from Cataloguing in Publication data, include &amp;quot;CIP&amp;quot; in the location statement (e.g., formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Takao Tanabe, 2026 : $b page de titre du CIP de BAC (Sherri Shinobu Kajiwara) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Kajiwara, Sherri S.; personne associée au Canada et au Japon)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Internet resources.''' For websites, provide the name of the location within the website if appropriate (e.g., about us; history, timeline; government, executive branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Multiple locations within a resource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' When adding new information to a 670 field created for a CIP, indicate that the new information is from the published resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; personne associée au Canada) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; personne associée au Canada) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs.''' For NARs, generally, use “etc.” to avoid giving more than two locations or a sequence of locations (e.g., p. 316, etc., for sequence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs.''' For SARs, always give each location separately.&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' In post-cataloging authority work without the piece in hand, use the location “ressource non disponible.” If the piece is examined again and the authority record is updated, it is allowable to edit the corresponding 670 field to provide a location and additional forms of series titles as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions from the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may optionally provide a uniform resource identifier (URI) in subfield $u of the 670 citation to link to the cited resource if it contains significant information related to the established entity&lt;br /&gt;
that cannot be cited succinctly in the authority record. Note that use of a URI in the 670 $u does not take the place of the requirement to cite relevant data in subfields $a and $b of the 670 field needed to support the authorized access point (including additions) or variants (this information will continue to be available if the site changes or disappears). However, information found in online sources may be added to the 046 or 3XX fields with the appropriate citations in subfields $v and $u and not repeated in a 670 when that information is not used in the 1XX or a 4XX. If a URI is included in a 670, it must be given in subfield $u. The subfield $u should contain only the URI and no additional data (e.g., do not enclose the URI within parentheses and do not include words in the subfield $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording names and titles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record names or series titles used in the authorized access point or variant access points in full, as they appear in the source, without abbreviation by the cataloger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When preparing an authority record for the text of a law or a subject compilation of laws, if a source being cited contains an official short title or citation title, cite that title, preceded by the term&lt;br /&gt;
“citation title” and its exact location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For corporate name authorities, include in the data cited all the hierarchy required to justify needed variant access points, Use judgment in deciding what information (e.g., subordinate body's name) is extraneous to the record being created and should not be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all of the above categories, if the only presentation of the name or title on the chief source of information is in the bibliographic title given in subfield $a of the 670 citation, repetition of the name in&lt;br /&gt;
subfield $b may be omitted, provided no important information is lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If information about an earlier or later name or title is found in the same source as the name or title in the authorized access point, give all the information in the 670 field. Do not separate the&lt;br /&gt;
information about the earlier or later name or title in order to give it in a 675 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To facilitate international contribution and use of authority records, when recording dates, generally use the spelled out or [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abbreviated] forms for months. (For dates recorded using automated authority generation programs, see the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Format of 670 fields]] section of this document.) Do not change the style of dates in existing records. As a best practice, if a date is not included in subfield $d of the 100 field, consider adding a 046 field if dates are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying variant access points ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justify names or titles given as variant access points by information cited from sources. However, justification is not required in the following cases:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variant access points made on the basis of the cataloger's awareness of different romanizations or orthographies;&lt;br /&gt;
# A variant title derived from the resource being cataloged, from other resources cataloged under the same access point, or from information in standard reference sources;&lt;br /&gt;
# References for authorized access points of corporate bodies reflecting changes due to national orthographic reform, changes in names due to an official language change, or changes involving only a parent body to which the body being established is subordinate.&lt;br /&gt;
# Optional references from AACR2 or pre-AACR 2 forms on SARs and on retrospective NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying other elements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information recorded in the 046, 3XX, or 678 field of the authority record should generally be justified unless it is otherwise obvious from information recorded in subfield $a of a 670 citation or it can&lt;br /&gt;
be easily inferred from other identifying elements recorded, including the preferred name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the 046 field and many of the 3XX fields, a subfield $u or subfield $v recorded in the same field may be used instead of or in addition to a 670. See the 046 section of this document for guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
on subfield $u and subfield $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording other data ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data to record in the authority record. Do not abbreviate or translate attributes such as title of the person ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) that appear in conjunction with personal names in statements of responsibility and that potentially could be used as part of the access point. Other data may be abbreviated or summarized. Generally informally translate other data from foreign languages into English, paraphrasing or summarizing as convenient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data other than forms of the title/phrase to record in the permanent authority record. Numbering and names of issuing bodies are not required but may be given.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special types of citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most commonly occurring citations are listed below. If these are not appropriate, devise others as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When converting information found in obsolete or non-active MARC fields (e.g., 664, 665, 666) into a 670 note, cite Canadiana in a citation such as those provided in the examples below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date of conversion] $b ([data converted from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([data moved from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC and fichier interne de BAnQ [BAnQ internal file]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cite these files in zone 670 as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; usage: [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''NARs''. Give the date of the search, using month names or abbreviations. In parentheses, prefaced by the label '''point d'accès :''' or '''points d'accès :''', give the access point (or access points) found, even if it is the same as the current authorized access point. If it is judged useful to mention one or more variants found in an authority record, give them with the label '''variante :''' or '''variantes :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different forms of the name appear in the bibliographic records, record the access point and also any forms found, including usage identical to the authorized access point. Separate the access point from the other forms, and preface the other forms with an appropriate label, e.g., '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' or '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not normally cite specific bibliographic records or the exact location of the variations found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''SARs.''. Give the date of the search, using month abbreviations, followed by the citation of the bibliographic record. In parentheses give the series statement found in that record.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] LC/NAF has been cited previously under other names, e.g., Base de données LC/NACO and Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] &amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot; for bibliographic records refers to the transcribed forms of name usually found in statements of responsibility of bibliographic records. It may also appear in other parts of the bibliographic record such as a title proper or a quoted note. Because of changes in cataloging instructions, catalogers should be careful when taking information from the publication statement, distribution statement, etc. and the series statement.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (or «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») for bibliographic records refers to a form of the name that may not represent a transcribed form. For example, in AACR2 records, a publisher's name that appeared on the resource as “ABC Publishing Company” might have been recorded in the publication statement as “ABC Pub. Co.” Normally, there is no need to cite such a form in a 670 field..&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citing other files or catalogs.''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an access point is found in a manual catalog or online database, use judgment in creating a 670 citation. Begin the 670 field with a designation of the catalog/database in which these other bibliographic records were found. There is no prescribed formulation of such citations; examples are listed below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, , [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Geographical Names Database'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide the name of the database and the date searched in subfield $a. The name of the database may be cited as an acronym or in full. In subfield $b provide names given for the entity, feature designation or class (e.g., ADM1, PPL, civil) coordinates, and name of larger place if appropriate. (Other relevant information may also be provided.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the feature designation or class, it is acceptable to use either the code (e.g., PPL) or its spelled-out form (e.g., populated place). For foreign names, convey the name type (e.g., conventional, approved, short, etc.) within brackets or parentheses after the name. Repeat the brackets or parentheses after each name of this type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Variant names (including non-roman script names) may be given in a single listing as shown below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the coordinates, it is acceptable to use the DMS format (degrees, minutes, seconds), the DD format (decimal degrees), or both formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has opted to record the DMS coordinates)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The coordinates may be recorded as found. However, if the database displays the coordinates using colons to separate the DMS components and positive and negative values to convey the hemisphere, it is acceptable to translate the coordinates to traditional DMS format if desired. Use the degree sign (not superscript zero) to show degrees, the soft sign (modifier letter prime) for minutes, and the hard sign (modifier letter double prime) for seconds. For coordinates of latitude, a negative value corresponds to the Southern hemisphere. For coordinates of longitude, a negative value corresponds to the Western hemisphere.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has recorded the DMS coordinates as found)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has translated the DMS coordinates to traditional format from: -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, 22:53:01, 121:02:54; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Non-bibliographic sources'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the non-bibliographic source, the date, and the information. The source can be given specifically (« Lettre de l'auteur » , « Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur » , etc.) or in general terms (« Information de l'auteur » , « Information de l'éditeur » , etc.).  When noting a specific source, it isn't necessary to show how information was received, e.g, that letter was received via FAX rather than via mail. When a telephone call to a publisher/agency/organization is cited, usually give the name of the group called, rather than the title or name of the person contacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''Citations for republication SARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an SAR is for a republication only, begin the 670 with the term for the type of republication and a slash. Do not include a 670 for a republication if the SAR covers both the original and one or more republications. Do not add additional 670 fields for other types of republications cataloged later. (See 64X Series Treatment, Republications for more information about republications.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations for undifferentiated NARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on existing 670 citations found in undifferentiated NARs, see in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32 Undifferentiated Personal Name]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-19]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#670_Source_Data_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Title related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 672 field may be used to record a title that is related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in an authority record for a corporate body, 672 fields may be used to record titles for which the corporate body is a creator, issuing body, or subject. The primary purpose of the 672 field is to document that there is a relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 672 field does not negate the need to use the 670 field for the title for which the authority record is being created, nor to use the 670 fields to justify information recorded in the 1XX and 4XX such as preferred and variant forms of name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 672 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 672 fields when inputting new 672 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 672 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 fields with titles proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Cervantes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with preferred title)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with variant title for the work associated with the Catalan expression of the work and date of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Remainder of title'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a title proper, subfield $b may be used to record the other title information or parallel title proper to eliminate confusion for titles needing further identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains other title information)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains parallel title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $f – Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $f is used to record a date appropriate to the entity recorded in $a (e.g., use date of work for a preferred title and date of publication for a title proper). Do not use brackets in $f when recording a supplied date of publication or production. Do not give a date of distribution, date of manufacture, or copyright date in $f.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for work:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of  work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for expression:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of French expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for manifestation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of publication of manifestation of Polish expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Bibliographic record control number'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $w is used to record bibliographic record control numbers (e.g., 001, 010, and 016 fields in bibliographic records). It is recommended that catalogers provide $w when readily available. Subfield $w should be repeated for each instance of a separate control number (e.g., an LCCN and an OCLC record number should be provided in separate subfields). For further instructions on inputting record control numbers, see the subfield $w section within the CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MARC 21 Format for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' subfield $w should only be used with titles for the manifestation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Title not related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 673 field may be used to record a title that is not related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. For example, in an authority record for a person, the 673 may be used to record the titles of works written by a different person with a similar name. The primary purpose of the 673 field is to document that there is no relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 673 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 673 field does not negate the need to use the 675 field as described in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#675_Sources_not_found|675 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 673 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 673 fields when inputting new 673 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 673 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 673 field. For specific subfields in the 673 field, apply the same instructions given in the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#672 Title related to the entity|672 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961- &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with different Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)### 47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with the National Gallery in London)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT NOT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #4 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Although the National of Art is not the creator, it is the publisher so this title should be record in a 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-25]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#673_Title_Not_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Sources not found =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:''Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In April 2012 this field was redefined as: “Citation for a consulted source in which no information is found related in any manner to the entity represented by the authority record or related entities.” PFAN catalogers are not required to change any existing 675 fields simply to meet this new definition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a new NAR always cite the resource being cataloged in the 675 field if the item being cataloged provides no information related in any manner to the entity represented in the authority record. Also cite in the 675 field other sources consulted that contain no information, when that very lack of information is considered worth recording for future users of the authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, it is not always necessary to include in the 675 field every reference source consulted; use judgment in deciding what sources are important enough to retain in the permanent record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#675_Source_Data_Not_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Biographical or historical data =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When supplying biographical or historical data in a 678 note field, construct the note in concise but complete sentences, keeping in mind that the information will be used in public displays.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In anticipation of LAC building the file in WMS and the batch addition of authority records from other institutions, the contents of all 665 fields in LAC and BAnQ records have been moved to 678 field. The original 665 field may have contained instructions on the access point(s) to be used as author and subject heading :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec) ; Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec) ; Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec) ; Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Delete these instructions in 678 field if they have been retained. Consider adding a 667 field as a subject heading if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification of field 678'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, a 678 field must be justified by a 670 field. If it is not justified and its contents are appropriate for a biographical or historical note, retain the field and add a 670 note citing the internal file of the institution that provided 678 field as follows :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [ [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|abréviation de la bibliothèque participante]] ], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the record has been modified after being migrated, the record history must be consulted to determine who originally added zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Existing Field 678 which will be deleted as the content is not appropriate for a biographical note.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;670 field added:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not repeat this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#678_Biographical_or_Historical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Heading linking entries =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' This section does not apply to the 781 field used in 151 name authority records to provide geographic subdivision information. See Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#781_Subdivision_linking_entry|781 section]], for instructions for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of an established heading linking entry 7XX field in an NAR or SAR is limited to recording the authorized access point from a national bibliography or in a separate national authority file or a separate equivalence.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form of heading in a 7XX field may match the 1XX form or a 4XX form in the same authority record. This is appropriate when the 7XX field form represents a form found in a different authority file than Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source of the heading in the 7XX field may be specified using either second indicator value “7” with subfield $2 or a second indicator value that specifies the source. For access points coming from the LC/NAF file, prefer the second indicator with the value &amp;quot;0&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-17]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Subdivision linking entry =&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN optional practice:'' For a geographic name heading that may also be used as a geographic subdivision, determine the form in which the heading is to be used as a geographic subdivision following the guidelines in instruction sheet [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 of the ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Enter the text of the geographic subdivision form in a 781 field with second indicator 0. For a geographic heading that is used directly, such as a country, enter the data in a single $z subfield. For a geographic heading that is used indirectly through a larger geographic entity, such as a city, enter the data in two successive $z subfields. Use no other subfields. Make no changes to values in bytes of the 008.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a record for a geographic name heading that is not appropriate for use as a subject added entry (008/15 value Ab@), such as the earlier name of a jurisdiction that has undergone a linear name change, for example, '''Ceylon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a NAR for a place name that is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision, such as a city section, for example, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Add a 781 field to an existing record when making any other change to it. If revising an existing record that contains a 667 field subject cataloging usage note indicating the proper geographic subdivision form, delete the 667 field and replace it with a 781 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-11]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#781_Subdivision_Heading_Linking_Entry-Geographic_Subdivision|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 1: Undifferentiated entities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 2: Special projects =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This appendix presents information regarding some special projects involving authority records created or modified in the Canadiana authority file. The records created or modified within the context of these special projects may include some fields or some values not normally attributed according to current cataloguing policies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instructions regarding changes to these records are given here in order to indicate whether these fields and values are to be kept or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 1. Records created or revised as part of the UQAM records revision project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is an authority records revision project, led by UQAM. These records have been created or modified in Canadiana by UQAM's cataloguing “traitement documentaire” team. These records were then revised by two librarians and a library technician, also at UQAM. This project ended March 31, 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records may be modified, like any other name authority records, according to current cataloguing policies.&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers update these records, they should:&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the value of position Leader/17 to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (full record);&lt;br /&gt;
* Delete field 667 &amp;quot;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;quot;;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Evaluate the record as they would evaluate any batch-loaded record. However, as the record is being revised, the authorized access point may be modified, if it does not follow the current PFAN practices (for instance, birth or death dates may be added, if available and if omitted from the access point).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 2. Records created and revised as part of the Universities Mentoring Project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General Information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This mentoring project &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;that, as of February,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; allows university libraries to create name authority records that are revised by another university.  Authority records created or modified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;mentored libraries&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; are revised by library technicians &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;at the mentoring university.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abbreviation, e.g. UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;, etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records should not be modified.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15] &amp;lt;!--(2022-07-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145116</id>
		<title>PFAN - Name Authority Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145116"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T13:28:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Special types of citations */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by N. Mainville, LAC, )}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Manual}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Name Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Series Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Fixed Fields =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Descriptive cataloging code  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;All new name authority records created and contributed by PFAN catalogers must use code 008/10 “z” and include subfield $e rda in the 040 (Cataloging source) field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an existing NAR using code “a”, “b”, “c”, or “d” is modified in any way, evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA, changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1: If an existing NAR using code “c” is modified only to change or add a 5XX field, catalogers are strongly encouraged, but not required, to evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA,&lt;br /&gt;
changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2: Existing undifferentiated name authority records coded 008/10 “c” may be modified to remove one or more identities in order to create differentiated RDA authority records. When modifying&lt;br /&gt;
an existing undifferentiated name authority record for this purpose, the updated undifferentiated name authority record must retain the existing 008/10 code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F10 Descriptive Cataloging Rules|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Subject heading system/thesaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR 008/11 is set to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/11 value “v” (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/11 value “n” (Not applicable), representing past practice, change the value to “v.” In the Manual, see also 008/15 for instructions on changing that value to “a” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/11&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (Not applicable) to name authority records for corporate names representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point. Also assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; in 008/15, and make a 667 note indicating the form of the access point used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples of corporate names not appropriate for use as subject headings:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F15 Heading use-subject added entry|Manual 008/15]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]].&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created NARs. Make these changes also when modifying&lt;br /&gt;
existing name authority records for any reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F11 Subject Heading System.2FThesaurus|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Heading use-subject added entry ==&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;General&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; is set to &amp;quot;b.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/15 value “a” (Appropriate) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/15 value “b” (Not appropriate), representing past practice, change the value to “a.” In the Manual, see also 008/11 for instructions on changing that value to “v” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Background:'' For Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental&lt;br /&gt;
bodies, Religious officials, and Popes, descriptive catalogers may be required to establish an authorized&lt;br /&gt;
access point for the corporate name for the office as well as a personal name for the office holder. It is&lt;br /&gt;
subject cataloging policy to assign only the personal name, not the corporate name, as a subject access&lt;br /&gt;
point. This policy was established for collocation purposes (cf. [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
may be used in descriptive cataloging as an access point, but in subject cataloging only the personal name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
would be used as a subject access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; (Not appropriate) to name authority records for corporate entities representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the entry. Also assign value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; in 008/11, and make a 667 note indicating the form used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F11 Subject heading system.2Fthesaurus|Manual 008/11]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;NARs and subject usage.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Correct existing records when making any other change to the records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19]&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F15 Heading Use-Subject Added Entry|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Undifferentiated personal name ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== General === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use 008/32 code “b” (undifferentiated) in an RDA name authority record. Assign 008/32 value “a” for personal name NARs. Use code “n” for families, corporate bodies, and places. For works and expressions, assign value “a” if the access point begins with a personal name, otherwise assign value “n”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the past, personal name NARs could be coded as undifferentiated using 008/32 value “b” when the cataloger had no acceptable way of differentiating multiple persons with the same preferred name. Since then, PFAN have followed these guidelines for personal name NARs:&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not create new undifferentiated records coded 008/32 “b”. All personal name authority records coded RDA should be differentiated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not add a new identity to an existing personal name authority record coded 008/32 “b.”&lt;br /&gt;
* Instead, apply [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] to create a unique authorized access point for the person, using suitable additional elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' If the only record found for an entity is an undifferentiated record (with field 008/32 coded &amp;quot;b&amp;quot;) from a university with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN », do not use it.  Create a new authority record for the entity.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated record to LAC by emailing the OCLC control number to pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca with the subject line: Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may happen that an existing undifferentiated name authority record, especially one that has been imported from LC/NAF, contains pairs of 670 fields used to group information about each individual covered by the NAR. The first 670 in the pair is an “identifying” 670 field containing a term descriptive of the person's relationship to the title cited in the second 670 of the pair. The data in the identifying 670 field is contained in subfield $a and enclosed in square brackets. The second 670 in the pair is a “citation” 670 that contains the normal data elements in a resource being cataloged citation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Added entry for Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Editor of Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, an existing undifferentiated name authority record may include a 667 note indicating that the record is undifferentiated and identifying the resource(s) associated with other persons with the same name. In this case, the record generally does not include 670 fields for persons other than the first one identified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When information is found to distinguish a person in an existing undifferentiated from LAC or BAnQ name record:&lt;br /&gt;
* Always create a new name authority record for that person, with distinguishing information, and add an indication that the person was formerly on an undifferentiated record (see &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_notes_on_records_for_identities_previously_on_undifferentiated_records|667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records]]&amp;quot; below). If an authority record already exists for that person with the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer the &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;citation&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not transfer the “identifying” 670 to the new NAR.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the undifferentiated NAR is not being deleted because multiple identities remain, delete the pair of 670 fields pertaining to the newly created NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(i.e., in the undifferentiated NAR, delete both the &amp;quot;identifying&amp;quot; 670 and the &amp;quot;citation&amp;quot; 670)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If more than one identity remains in the undifferentiated NAR, and there is not sufficient information in the NAR to create new NARs for each name, leave the NAR coded AACR2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to facilitate machine processing of authority records (e.g., matching, linking), when only one identity is left on an undifferentiated personal name authority record (i.e., other identities are being&lt;br /&gt;
disambiguated and removed), take the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Create a new NAR for the remaining single identity. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ») and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.  The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. In the new record:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer the citation 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 note:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note  « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assure that the undifferentiated NAR only contains information relevant to the single identity remaining (e.g., 670s). If applicable, delete field 667 indicating that the record is undifferentiated.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add that information in the 667 note on the undifferentiated record to assure that a duplicate NAR will not be created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of differentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated LAC record''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New notice for the author of Histoire du département de la Manche:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number] $z [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of undifferentiated record derived from LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Esperanza:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the illustrator of Reptiles:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the illustrator of Reptiles :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008red/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add a 667 note to a new NAR to identify the Canadiana number of the authority record in which information about that person had been recorded:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Records coded as undifferentiated that actually represent only one identity ====&lt;br /&gt;
Occasionally an existing record will be coded undifferentiated, but new research indicates that in fact the record represents only one identity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may also happen that we suspect that the value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; has been mistakenly coded in field 008/32. In such cases, proceed as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 field to the undifferentiated NAR indicating that it has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a new name authority record for the identity. The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 note: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number..)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the note 667 &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated record that represents a single identity''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation  :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;New authority record after disambiguation&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [no Canadiana number, use OCLC number from undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F32 Undifferentiated personal name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/33 Level of establishment  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Provisional''' (008/33 value “c”) records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Code an NAR as provisional (008/33 value “c”) if the authorized access point cannot be formulated satisfactorily because of inadequate information. If the necessary information later becomes available, re-evaluate the NAR and upgrade it to fully established (008/33 value “a”). In no case should a provisional-level authority record be created with an access point that conflicts with an existing NAR according to PFAN normalization rules.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Special administrative regions of Hong Kong and Macau'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Because there is uncertainty about whether Hong Kong and Macau will continue to have two official languages, code all NARs for government bodies in these two places, at the level of the special administrative region and below, as provisional (008/33 value “c”), regardless of the language in which the authorized access point has been established. If a form in the second of the two official languages becomes available, add that form as a variant access point rather than revising the existing authorized access point. Consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] and the [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html related policy statement] for instructions on choosing the language of the referred name. Please note that this policy for provisional status does not apply to non-government bodies.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional information for PFAN participants'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN participants may also create provisional records in the following two exceptional situations:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library does not have the language expertise to establish the authorized access point as a fully established authority record; this would include situations where the library lacked adequate reference sources for research or where the cataloger was not confident of the correct grammatical form for the access point.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library is unable, due to limited resources or other constraints, to complete related authority work or to determine the appropriate reference structure that is required for fully established authority records.&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preliminary''' (008/33 value “d”) records:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Preliminary authority records (008/33 value “d”) generally are the result of retrospective projects. PFAN catalogers are expected to routinely upgrade NARs coded preliminary when making other modifications to the record. Because of this maintenance requirement, PFAN participants are asked to contact the PFAN Standards Committee before embarking on projects that may result in large numbers of NARs coded preliminary being added to the NACO Authority File.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;As needed, catalogers may upgrade NARs coded preliminary when working with earlier/later corporate body records, even if the access points in the records being upgraded are not used in the local bibliographic database. Occasionally catalogers may need to create a new NAR without having an item in hand, e.g., for an earlier or later name heading using information from reference sources, or a heading based on information found in field 245 subfield “c” of bibliographic records when resolving NAR conflicts. Do not code these occasional NARs as “preliminary”.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records&lt;br /&gt;
are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, series data elements should be viewed on the publication and series authority records should be coded “a” (full). In post-cataloging authority work it is permissible to create SARs without the piece in hand; these records are coded “d” (preliminary). When a publication in the series has been examined and the preliminary authority record reviewed and updated as necessary, upgrade the SAR to full level.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F33_Level_of_establishment|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Cataloging source ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever value is originally input into this field remains; do not change this value when updating a record unless the original value was incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas « blanc » pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou « c » (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a). --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F39_Cataloging_source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 National Bibliographic Agency Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 016 is mandatory whenever a cataloguer creates, updates or uses an authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an authority record, and when updating or using an existing record without a Canadiana number in field 016, first check the LC/NAF to see if the same entity is represented by an authority record, and if this authority record includes a Canadiana number. Note that the authorized access point, in the LC/NAF, may be different from the Canadiana access point.  If the LC/NAF record does include a Canadiana number, add this number to the Canadiana record, changing the final E to an F (or adding an F at the end of the Canadiana number, if there is no final letter). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When updating or using an existing authority record that includes a Canadiana number, please check that the language code F is present at the end of the field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Duplicates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not “reuse” a Canadiana number. Once an authority record has been created for a given entity, and once a Canadiana number has been attributed, do not change the data in this authority record to describe a DIFFERENT entity. For instance, do not change the authority record for “Dupont, Jean” to transform it into an authority record describing “Tremblay, Marie” (except if the person's name has changed). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, ask that the duplicate be deleted (see [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Procedures for duplicates]]). DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no field 016 in the record to be deleted, please add one, using the number 0000X0000F. Do not record this number in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
See also the “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Duplicates|Duplicates]]” section in this Manual, field 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, delete it. DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Partially modified batch-loaded authority records'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Batch-loaded authority records which are partially modified, according to the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]], will include Canadiana number 1111X1111F. This temporary number is added in order to allow the cataloguer to save the record, until such time as the entire record is evaluated to make sure it follows all PFAN standards. This number will have to be replaced by a unique number once the record is evaluated, when the 667 note “CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN” is deleted. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 International Standard Serial Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Record the ISSN whenever it is available from the item in hand, from analytic bibliographic records, or from the collected set bibliographic record for the series; otherwise, recording the ISSN is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it is known there are separate ISSN assigned to different formats of a series represented by a single SAR, prefer to record in 022 subfield $a the ISSN that is the linking ISSN (ISSN-L) for the different formats. Identify ISSN for specific formats in separate 667 fields, following this pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the title of a publication has changed, confirm that an ISSN appearing on the publication belongs to the new title and not to the earlier title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An incorrect ISSN can be given in a 667 field (e.g., “ISSN 1122-3344 is not a valid ISSN for this publication”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-11-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Other standard identifier =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the guidelines in [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf NACO Best Practices] for the 024 Field. As a general rule, limit the number of 024 fields in a NACO authority record to five. Do not routinely delete or change existing 024 fields when adding new ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are not required to maintain identifiers coded in the 024 field of PFAN authority records. When an 024 field is present in an authority record that is being reported for deletion (for example, in the case of a duplicate), catalogers should transfer the field to the record that is to be retained. When two authority records are being collapsed into one, and each record has a different 024 field, catalogers should include both 024 fields in the updated record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Coded cartographic mathematical data =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for countries, states, counties'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for outside limits (bounding boxes or polygons) should generally be used with larger geographic entities such as countries, states, and counties to identify the coordinates of the entity. The&lt;br /&gt;
coordinates may be recorded in either degrees/minutes/seconds, decimal degrees, decimal minutes, and/or decimal seconds. Styles should not be mixed in a single 034 field, but the field may be repeated to&lt;br /&gt;
represent the different styles (see below for conversion utilities); the order of 034 fields when both styles are given does not matter. To facilitate the reuse of coordinates in geographic applications, the point (not the comma) should be used as the decimal point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrees/minutes/seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees''': record in the form hddd.dddddd (hemisphere-degrees.decimal degrees)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees with plus ou minus''': record in the form +-ddd.dddddd (hemisphere[+/-]-degrees.decimal degrees) (“+” or N and E, “-” for S and W ; the plus sign is optional)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example with +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example without the optional plus sign)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal minutes''': record in the form hdddmm.mmmm (hemisphere-degrees-minutes.decimal minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss.sss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds.decimal seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for cities, towns, and townships'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for cities, towns, and townships should generally be recorded as center points rather than outside limits. For the 034 field, the longitude and latitude that form the central axis are recorded&lt;br /&gt;
twice to define the center point (i.e., the contents of $d and $e are identical, the contents of $f and $g are identical).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing degrees/minutes/seconds)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees with plus/minus)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Coordinate Conversion Tools'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN institutions are encouraged to provide both degrees/minutes/seconds and decimal degrees when available. Numerous conversion tools are available on the Web to derive one from the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 has been defined for recording the source of the coordinate information– codes for commonly used sources are available from: [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/cartographic-data.html ''Cartographic Data Source Codes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 citation to the source would not be required if the only information from the source is recorded in field 034; a 670 citation should be made if necessary to record information beyond coordinates, such as variant names, hierarchy, time period of applicability, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#034_Coded_Carographic_Mathematical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 System Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#035_System_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Cataloging source =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Language of cataloging'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $b fre added automatically by WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $d – Modifying agency'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $d [MARC 21 code] is added automatically by WMS when modifying NARs or SARs unless your institution's is already the last MARC subfield $d in the 040 field. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $e – Description conventions'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All new authority records created and submitted by PFAN cataloguers must have the code &amp;quot;z&amp;quot; in Field 008/10 and include the $e rda subfield in Field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding the subfield $e manually, add it after subfield $b and before $c. It is not necessary to move the subfield $e to this position if it is already present elsewhere in the 040 or if it is being added by a macro or a template. Subfield $e rda is automatically added by the system in NARs and SARs when fixed field 008/10 (Rules) is set to “z” (Other).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#040_Cataloging_Source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Authentication Code =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This field is found in all authority records used by LAC. Do not modify or delete this field when code CaOONL appears in field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers (other than LAC cataloguers) derive an authority record from an LAC record which includes field 042, they must remember to delete this field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the Canadiana authority file, cataloguers must add 042 $a nlc every time they create, derive or revise an authority record. This code identifies the “virtual” Canadian authority file, which is spread across two separate authority files (LC/NAF and Canadiana). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#042_Authentication_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Geographic Area Code &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 043 can only be used in authority records for geographical names (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield b – Local GAC code and Subfield $2 – Source of local code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For sites located in Quebec, PFAN participants can use subfield $b to record a local code from the list below, representing the administrative region of Quebec where the site is located. This code is formed by the geographic region code &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; and a two-letter sub-entity local code (e.g., qa) that identifies the administrative region and replaces the last two characters of the &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; code (e.g., &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot;). (e.g. &amp;quot;n-cn-qa&amp;quot;). Subfield $b is recorded after subfield $a and is followed by subfield $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#043_Geographic_Area_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Special coded dates =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: When encoding date information, give the fullest information about the date that is readily available (the date in field 046 may be more precise than a date used in the 100 subfield $d). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2nd_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;When&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; revising existing authority records, record dates in field 046 even if the heading itself does not have dates in 100 subfield $d, when the information is readily available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording dates in field 046, use the Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) schema in all cases except for centuries; supply dates using the pattern yyyy, yyyy-mm, or yyyy-mm-dd. See date table in [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html LAC-BanQ PS 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt; For the full EDTF specification, see [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophonist)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bryant, W. Blues around the clock [SR] 1945: $b label (Johnny Hicks, tenor sax)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Discogs website, May 27, 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; tenor sax player who performed with Tab Smith in the 1940s)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording B.C. dates in the 046 field, precede the digits by a hyphen (minus sign). Because there is no year “zero” in the common era calendar, subtract one year from the actual B.C. date, e.g., the year 50 B.C. is recorded -0049.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a century in the 046 field, use the first two digits of the hundred year span (e.g., use “16” to represent the 17th century, 1600–1699). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the 1st century A.D. is represented by value “00” and B.C. centuries have a hyphen &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;minus &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sign)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; before the digits (e.g., “-04” for the 5th century B.C.). An approximate century (e.g., active approximately 12th century) cannot be recorded in the 046 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Repeatability:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Field 046 is repeatable, but the 046 subfields used to record the dates are not repeatable. Generally, one 046 field with dates conforming to the EDTF schema should be sufficient. However, century dates follow the ISO 8601 standard, not EDTF. When recording century dates in addition to more precise dates, it is therefore necessary to repeat the 046 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Conflicting dates'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, resources consulted may present conflicting dates (e.g., conflicting birth or death dates for a person, or start or end dates for a corporate body). In these situations, the 046 field should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information. It is not necessary to record all the conflicting dates using field 046, nor is it necessary to give a 046 field for each resource consulted. Evaluation of the conflicting dates should generally result in a single 046 field, containing the date(s) the cataloger judges to be most accurate in representing the entity. At the cataloger's discretion, the date(s) recorded in that 046 field may incorporate the conflicting date information and need not correspond exactly to the date(s) selected for the authorized access point.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Similarly, any dates added to the authorized access point should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information, recorded in conformance with the instructions in RDA and the PFAN Policy Statements. If one date predominates in the resources consulted, that date may be considered the most appropriate to use in the authorized access point. If a single date does not predominate, the cataloger may decide to use the “approximately yyyy”, “yyyy?”, or “yyyy or yyyy” format in the authorized access point. In some cases, dates corresponding to the period of activity of the person (RDA 9.19.1.5) may be considered the best choice.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 157 B.C. as the approximate date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary. authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 1907 as the date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Same example as above, reflecting a different decision the cataloger might have made for recording 046 subfield $f)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Because the 046 field will be based on information from multiple sources, justification cannot be accurately expressed in subfield $v/$u at the end of the 046 field. The conflicting dates should be recorded in 670 fields. If an existing record has subfield $v/$u as 046 field justification, and the 046 field is being updated as described above, the subfield $v/$u should be removed, and the justification converted to a 670 field, if the conflicting dates are not already justified in an existing 670 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Uncertain dates resulting from date calculations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, a calculation may be required to determine which dates to record in the 046 field and the authorized access point. Such calculations may result in uncertain dates.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the consulted resources provide only the person's date of death and their age (in years) at the time of death, as often happens with obituaries, their year of birth will correspond to one of two consecutive years. To calculate those years, first subtract the age from the year of death, then use the resulting year plus its preceding year as the two alternatives for the year of birth.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger subtracted 75, the age at death, from 1994, the year of death; the resulting year, 1919, and the year preceding it, 1918, represent the two possible alternatives for the year of birth)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If non-Gregorian dates are found in consulted resources, uncertain dates may result from calendar conversion differences. Gregorian calendar dates are used in the 046 field and authorized access point. A single date in a non-Gregorian calendar may correspond to one of two Gregorian dates. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(The Hijri calendar date 1346 H converts to either 1967 or 1968 in the Gregorian calendar.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of date scheme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add subfield $2 edtf except after a century. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfields $q – Establishment date, $r – Termination date,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Start period, and $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Record dates associated with a one-time conference, etc., or a single instance of a&lt;br /&gt;
series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] and [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), use subfields $s and $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Use the establishment date  ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) and the termination date ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) of a series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]) in subfields $q and $r, if that information is known.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on using $s and $t for start and end periods in fields 368, and 370-376, see the instructions provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following represents PFAN practice on recording sources of information in $u and $v in fields where they are defined, and/or in field 670: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;670s must be used to support information used as part of a heading in 1XX and 4XX fields.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;For fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $v is optional if the same information/source is already cited in the 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use $v if the information/source is not cited in a 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $u is optional, and should always be preceded by $v&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Use a 670 field if needed to justify information recorded in other fields for which subfields $u and/or $v are not defined or defined differently. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the same basic citation principles when recording data in subfield $v (Source of information) of fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 that currently apply to field 670 subfield $a (Source citation).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Supply specific citation information (page number, sub-page of website) in subfield $v if, in the cataloger's judgment, this greater specificity is needed to find the information within the source cited. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information in fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 is in the same form as found in the source, there is no need to cite usage information. If the information recorded in those fields is in a different form from that in the source, use 670 $b (Information found). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For tangibles sources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information was derived from a tangible source (e.g., a print book, removable digital media) subfield $v should contain sufficient information for a cataloger to find the item cited in a catalog&lt;br /&gt;
or bibliographic database. This can usually be limited to title proper and imprint or date. If that combination is not unique, the title citation may be preceded by the creator's name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For online resources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide information sufficient to find the resource via a search engine. Include either title and publication date (if it is a formally-published resource, such as an e-book) or a suitable description of the&lt;br /&gt;
document and date accessed (for a less formal resource). Optionally include subfield $u. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-03)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Library of Congress Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#050_Library_of_Congress_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 LC classification number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used in personal name authority records to record LC classification numbers for individual literary authors, including authors of children's literature. It may also be used '''exceptionally'' in personal and corporate name authority records to record biography numbers in the ML410-429 range of the LC classification when the choice of index or cutter is not obvious. Field 053 must always include a $5 subfield.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class PS8000 numbers should not be recorded in field 053. For the use of PS8000 numbers in name authority records, see section 065 of this Manual. An authority record for a Canadian literary author may contain both a 053 and a 065 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Library and Archives Canada Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#055_Library_and_Archives_Canada_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Other Classification Number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 065 is used to record PS8000 class numbers. Field 065 must always include a subfield $2 and a subfield $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [MARC code of institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Number source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2, record &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; to indicate that the number comes from the PS8000 class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#065_Other_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 080 Universal Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#080_Universal_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Dewey Decimal Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#082_Dewey_Decimal_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Dewey Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#083_Dewey_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Government Document Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#086_Government_Document_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Government Document Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#087_Government_Document_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Headings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for any reason, delete a final mark of punctuation in the 1XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging&lt;br /&gt;
instructions (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: in order to minimize the impact of database maintenance with associated bibliographic records and/or related authority records, catalogers are urged to refrain from making unnecessary changes to 1XXs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN series practice: Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the title proper of a multipart monograph, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choosing a monographic series title proper:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has more than one form of series title, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has the series title in more than one language or script on the same source, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has series title pages in more than one language and or script, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#Consider spacing and changes in typography when determining where the series title begins and ends. Also consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Establishing an SAR access point:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Determine choice of authorized access point based on [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] and its associated LAC-BAnQ PS.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclude from the authorized access point the following information included in the series statement in the bibliographic record for the component part:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;initial article in subfields $a, $t, $n, and $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;other title information;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;statement of responsibility;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;parallel title(s);&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;numeric/chronological designations.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a parenthetical qualifier(s) if appropriate according to the guidelines in LAC-BAnQ PS 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on converting an existing NAR to an SAR, see Should an SAR be made? in the Introduction of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Heading - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for families'''&lt;br /&gt;
'''''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “3” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a family. See in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_Nonpublic_general_note|667]] section, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]], for subject usage instructions in NARs for families.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Additions to the name are contained in a single set of parentheses separated by colons.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# The term for the type of family is added after the name and is contained in subfield $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $d (date) follows the term for the type of family.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $c is used for place associated with family and follows the date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $g is used for prominent member of family. Give authorized access point for the person as found in the 1XX of the NAR without any internal subfield coding.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for persons'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “0” or “1” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] provides guidance for the placement of words indicating relationship (e.g., Jr.) and MARC defines subfield $q as “Forme développée du nom de personne.” When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Subfield $d (date) should always be the last element in a 100 string unless the term (Esprit) is being added to the name. Add $c (Esprit) as the last element in a 100 string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Example:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Generally add subfield $c before subfield $q when also adding words, numerals, etc. indicating relationship. (See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] for treatment of Portuguese names)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) For exceptional situations, such as when subfield $a contains only a surname or only a forename or the name includes a prefix, etc. consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2020-12-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#100_Heading-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Content Type =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 336 may only be used in NARs and SARs for expressions. 336 is always accompanied by a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2 give “rdacontent/fre.” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Content type term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use terms from [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html/view RDA 6.9.1.3]. The list of terms is also available in the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Content type code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If giving subfield $b instead of/or in addition to subfield $a, use the code from the MARC format [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#336_Content_Type|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Other attributes of person or corporate body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary for terms in subfields $a, $b, and $c, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a, $b and $c. When terms in subfields $a and $b do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record professions or occupations in subfield $c (Other designation). Profession or occupation may be recorded in field [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#374_Occupation|374]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record titles of royalty, nobility or religious rank ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) in subfield $d in the form used in the authorized or variant access points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#368_Other_Attributes_of_Person_or_Corporate_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Associated place =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For jurisdictions or other place names with authority records in Canadiana or, failing that, the form found in the RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. The form of place name in the 370 field may differ from the form of place name added to a preferred name of place or an access point per RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Authorized access point for the place includes type of jurisdiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name for the larger place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Other place name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no authorized access point for the place in Canadiana or RVM, it is not necessary to create an NAR in order to code the 370 field. Record the place in the 370 field following RDA and the LAC-BAnQ PSs, including consulting appropriate sources and adding additional elements (e.g., type of jurisdiction) to break conflicts. Do not add a subfield $2 if no NAR is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of the associated place has changed, the name of the place that applied in the time of the entity being established in the 1XX may optionally be recorded in place of, or in addition to, the current form of name. It is not necessary to follow subject cataloging policies to use the latest form of name only.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person born in the city of Calcutta before its name changed to Kolkata; cataloger has chosen to record the form of name that applied at the time the person was born)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person residing in the city of Milan during the Renaissance, prior to the formation of the modern country of Italy; cataloger has chosen to record the current form of name for the country)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For non-jurisdictions, prefer names from an authorized vocabulary such as RVM and identify the source in subfield $2. If the name is not found in an authorized vocabulary, record it in field 370 without&lt;br /&gt;
giving a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
When determining when to create a name authority record for a geographic name, consult the “Name Authority Records (NARs)” section of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1], Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary&lt;br /&gt;
source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfield $c – Associated country&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Generally, do not use subfield $c to record places that are not sovereign entities. Such places may be recorded in subfield $f or other subfields as appropriate.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Martinique is an overseas department of France)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if a sovereign entity has (or previously had) one or more constituent countries, any of the constituent countries associated with the 1XX may optionally be recorded in subfield $c in addition to, or instead of, the larger sovereign entity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Great Britain who has strong ties to Wales; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with the Soviet Union, particularly the Kirghiz Soviet Socialist Republic; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Aruba, a constituent country of the Netherlands; cataloger has chosen not to record the Netherlands)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with India prior to its independence from Great Britain; cataloger has chosen not to record Great Britain)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entity names of First Nations in Canada and Indian tribes recognized by the United States government as legal entities may be included in subfield $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Record the place of origin of the work in field 370, unless it is merely a place of publication or other place associated with a manifestation (use field 643, when appropriate, for the latter). Although the “place of origin” of a serial work may be the same as the place of publication of the component part for which the SAR (or serial bibliographic record) was created, use judgment in distinguishing between place of origin of the work and a place of publication not actually related to the work itself.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-24]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-22)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#370_Associated_Place|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Address =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice:&lt;br /&gt;
* Supply based on cataloger's judgment, if the information is readily available and not already being recorded in field 370 subfield $e (Place of residence/headquarters).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* In cases where subfield $a is not recorded, include at a minimum subfield $m (Electronic mail address) or subfield $b (City).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not record physical &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or e-mail&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; addresses for living persons.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Catalogers are not required to maintain address information when updating a record that contains an address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record multiple addresses, with or without ranges of dates, in separate occurrences of field 371.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Electronic mail address'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $m should contain only an e-mail address. Do not add an internet address for the 1XX in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#371_Address|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Field of activity =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM heading string for field of activity, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an entity from Canadiana for field of activity, remove any subfield coding not authorized for use in the 372 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point in Canadiana:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Field of activity in 372:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall&lt;br /&gt;
best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''372 fields with a term from RVM and a non-controlled vocabulary term'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#372_Field_of_Activity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Associated group =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the Canadiana or LC/NACO Authority File, recording the source in subfield $2. Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 373 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of an associated group has changed, record the group name(s) that applied at the time of the entity being established in the 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with subfield $2 and dates:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with different vocabulary sources:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Although the MARC format does not specify a form of date in these subfields, the following practice is recommended for consistency. Input dates using the Gregorian calendar in the form yyyy. If more specific dates are necessary, consider recording them in another field (e.g., 670, 678). It is&lt;br /&gt;
not necessary to reformulate dates in existing NARs to conform to this practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&amp;lt;!--(2023-06-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#373_Associated_Group|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Occupation =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.16.1.3 for instructions on recording profession or occupation as an element. See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.19.1.6 for instructions using a profession or occupation term in an access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Codes from either the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/occupation.html/view Occupation Term Source Codes] or the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/subject.html/view Subject Source Codes] lists may be recorded in subfield $2 for the 374 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#374_Occupation|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Gender =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not use this field in new authority records. Whenever an existing record must be changed for any reason, delete any occurrence of field 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Family information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Name of prominent member'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When giving the name of the prominent member of the family in 376 subfield $b, give the form for the person as found in subfield $g of the 100 field of the NAR for the family. Do not include any internal subfield coding in subfield $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start''' period and Subfield $t – End period&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Associated language =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer language codes over language terms, using codes from the Code List for Languages in MARC21.  Use subfield $l (Language term) only to provide information not available in the [https://loc.gov/marc/languages/language_code.html MARC Code List for Languages]. Encode multiple languages for a person or corporate body only if more than one language is used for publication, communication, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Optionally, record an ISO 639-3 language code (or codes) in an additional 377 field. This practice is especially recommended when an ISO 639-3 code will identify a language more specifically than the MARC code does. For more information, see the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of the code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 is not required when the MARC Code List for Languages is used as the language source code (second indicator value “#”). PFAN institutions may supply an additional 377 field from another language code list by using second indicator value “7,” with subfield $2 containing a code for a language source list taken from the list in [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/language.html/view Language Code and Term Source Codes]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(ISO 639-3 code for Achi (acr); assigned a collective code (myn) for Mayan languages in the MARC Code List for Languages)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#377_Associated_Language|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Fuller form of personal name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode the fuller form of name in the 378 field when this information is readily available, even if the same information is already present in the 100 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the Information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#378_Fuller_Form_of_Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Form of work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMGF, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on recording form of work as an element in a work-level series authority record, see LAC-BAnQ PS 6.3.1.3.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#380_Form_of_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Other distinguishing characteristics of work or expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used to record the RDA elements other distinguishing characteristic of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) and other distinguishing characteristic of expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Other characteristics of expressions that are unique to musical works (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4-6.18.1.6]) may also be recorded in the 381 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Franklin number recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Other distinguishing characteristic of expression of musical work'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some terms recorded for other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression may be appropriate to record in field 381 and another MARC field for which there is no corresponding RDA element. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a corporate body (such as a publisher) used as an other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression could be recorded in either the 373 field (associated group), the 381 field or both.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 381 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as associated group and other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA has no specific element for places associated with expressions, but field 370 subfield $f (Other associated place) and subfield $g (Place of origin of work or expression) may be used in authority records for expressions. Some places associated with works or expressions would be considered other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression in RDA and could be recorded in the 370 field, the 381 field, or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Places used as other distinguishing characteristic of a legal work; recorded in 370 and 381 fields)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the RDA element place of origin of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.6]) in a 370 field (see Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]] section).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When other distinguishing characteristic of work or other distinguishing characteristic of expression has been used in an authorized access point and is also being recorded as an element in a 3XX&lt;br /&gt;
field, use the 381 field to record the other distinguishing characteristic. Optionally, also record the same information in any other appropriate 3XX field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#381_Other_Distinguishing_Characteristics_of_Work_or_Expression|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 Medium of performance =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the medium of performance using thesaurus terms from &amp;quot;Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM (RVMMEM)&amp;quot;. Record the medium of performance by applying the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html RDA 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6], the associated LAC-BAnQ PSs. ''Note:'' The 382 field may also be used in authority records for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. If considered important for identification and access, provide an additional 382 that does not apply these guidelines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#382_Medium_of_Performance|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numeric designation of musical work &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available. Create separate 383 fields for different numbering schemes associated with a single work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#383_Numeric_Designation_of_Musical_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Key =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available for works. In case of doubt, do not encode. Do not encode for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Audience characteristics =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the intended audience of a work or expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. In particular, consult instruction sheet L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ##  $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvmt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a: If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term and term from a controlled vocabulary)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''or''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-10-14]&amp;lt;!--(2022-10-14)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Creator/contributor characteristics &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record demographic characteristics of one or more creators or contributors associated with a work or expression, in particular for characteristics common to a group of creators or contributors associated with a work or expression. The field will most commonly be used in authority records for collection aggregates embodying two or more expressions of two or more independent works by different agents, and for individual works named by title alone (e.g., works of unknown authorship; monographic series).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the draft Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html].  In particular, consult instruction sheet L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator and Contributor Characteristics, available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled demographic term)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While this field will be used primarily for aggregated works and for individual works named by title alone, there are situations when it will be appropriate for an individual work by one or more named creators. For example, for a musical work composed during childhood or adolescence, it would not be appropriate to record “Enfants” or “Adolescents” as a characteristic in the composer’s authority record. Instead, demographic characteristics applicable to only some of a creator’s works should be recorded in the authority records for those works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Work composed 2003-2005, completed when the composer was 14 years old)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014 $b page 4 de la couverture (Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled term and terms from one controlled vocabulary)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $i – Relationship information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, use subfield $i to record a term designating the nature of the relationship between the demographic groups recorded in the field and the work or expression. Prefer a term from a controlled vocabulary, such as the MARC relator terms, RDA relationship designators, or RBMS relationship designators. Capitalize the first letter of the relationship term and record it in the singular. Follow the relationship term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998- February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record multiple subfield $i’s in a single 386 field. If multiple relationship terms apply to a single group of creators or contributors (e.g., a work with authors and artists from the same demographic group or an expression with editors and translators from the same demographic group), repeat the field, using different relationship terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(A compilation of works by authors and artists from Massachusetts)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different relationship terms apply to some of the creators and contributors (e.g., authors are in one demographic group and artists are in another), repeat the field, using different relationship terms. If the same relationship term applies to more than one demographic group, either repeat subfield $a in one field, or repeat the field. For clarity, when in doubt, repeat the 386 field as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Score containing works by Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler, and Strauss, with lyrics also printed as text in German and English translation)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-11]&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Time Period of Creation =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the time period of creation or origin of a work or expression. The name of the time period may specify or imply a place for which the time period is relevant. It may also specify the name of an event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMFAST, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM subject heading string, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For compilations, the field may be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the works/expressions contained within the compilation, considered collectively (using first indicator value “1”). It may also be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the compilation itself (using first indicator value “2”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR for a collection of Renaissance poetry compiled in the nineteenth century)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 388 field may be used in conjunction with, or instead of, the 046 field. When specific date(s) of creation or origin are not known, or span a long period of time, recording textual chronological terms in the 388 field may be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the indicator value differs, repeat the field. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR with 388 fields containing terms from different vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-07] &amp;lt;!--(2022-11-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX - See From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for another reason, delete any final mark of punctuation in a 4XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging rules (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying NARs or SARs that contain obsolete codes such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all 4XX references require justification; see “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Justifying_variant_access_points|Justifying variant access points]]” in the 670 section of this document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not make a 4XX that normalizes to the same form as another 4XX on the same authority record or a 1XX on any name authority record. See the section “NACO normalization” in the [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf/view DCM Z1] Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice guidelines for RDA:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Record variants found in the manifestation being cataloged:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Use cataloger's judgment;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; No limitation on the number or form of references;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Instead of or in addition to adding variants, consider providing access by adding 37X fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Example showing 378 without a variant for the fuller form of name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Establish additional NARs for the authorized access points needed to support elements used in 4XX variant access points (e.g., parent body associated with subordinate body being established).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally provide a variant form 4XX access point for a former 1XX authorized access point, unless the former authorized access point was egregiously incorrect. See the section “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX$w|Subfield $w – Control subfield]]” for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Use the established form of components in 4XX variant access points, except for non-Latin script variants, which may represent a mixture of scripts or may be entirely in a non-Latin script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally, do not remove variants unless egregiously incorrect (e.g., a non-Latin script variant that does not represent the same person).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If a form found on the manifestation being cataloged includes a variant form of a component of a 4XX variant access point, that form may be used in its entirety as an additional 4XX variant access point, provided that it is not divided into its component parts through the use of subfields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When changing the form of a superordinate body, a geographic name, or a personal name in a 1XX, update all of the existing NARs that use that component in a 4XX, unless the 4XX represents the former authorized access point (e.g., $w/2=e). ''Exception:'' Do not apply this instruction in the case of migrated authority records that have not been re-evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point for a person (100) is changed because the person has changed his or her name, record the earlier form of name in a 400 with $w nne if the variant is valid under RDA instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Name changed upon election as pope)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When an authorized access point for a person (100) is updated to close the date, it is recommended to save the former form with the open date in a 4XX field with $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) based on CIP cataloging is changed because its form on the published resource is different from that on the CIP galley, a 4XX from the previous authorized access point form with subfield $w nne may be added unless the former 1XX form was egregiously incorrect (e.g., the author's date of birth was given as 1775 instead of 1975 in the CIP galley).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) is changed because of a change in cataloging instructions, record the earlier form in a 4XX using $w. If the variant form is a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nne. If the variant form is not a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA; 100 form changed based on usage and dates of birth and death added because 100 was being changed)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429  av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nnea&amp;quot; because the abbreviation &amp;quot;ca.&amp;quot; is not valid for period of activity in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When changing an authorized access point because dates were recorded inaccurately or a cataloger entered a typo in the authorized access point, do not add the inaccurate form as a cross reference.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, providing authorized access points for the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Variant access points may be recorded in any SAR, including those for series-like phrases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the volumes of a multipart monograph have different forms of the common title, use a 4XX reference rather than a 5XX reference for the form of the title not chosen as the title proper of the multipart monograph.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27] &amp;lt;!--(2024-03-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D |''Manual 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX - See Also From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying a NAR that contain codes that are no longer used such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d” or “f,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers applying RDA instructions may use subfield $i in conjunction with subfield $w code “r” for relationship designators. When applying RDA relationship designators in 5XXs, supply terms from Appendix I, J or K; capitalize the initial letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the use of relationship designators and/or $w codes in a specific 5XX field, see the section in this Manual for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the conventions in the authority format for use of subfield $w. Do not supply subfield $w unless a value other than “n” would be appropriate in one of the positions. When supplying subfield $w,&lt;br /&gt;
give it as the first subfield in the field. Supply character positions preceding, but not succeeding, the value, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = to indicate a reference from an earlier authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = to indicate a reference from a later authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = to indicate that a subfield $i or subfield $4 is used to denote relationship information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = to indicate a see also reference for multiple pseudonyms (record also contains a 663 field)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A see also reference tracing (5XX) must not normalize to the same as another see also reference in the same authority record, unless both 5XX fields contain a relationship designator in subfield $i, and&lt;br /&gt;
the texts of the relationship designators are different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500  See Also From Tracing - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” when providing relationship links between a personal name and 1) the name of another person, family, or corporate body or 2) the authorized access point for a work or expression. This technique may also be used to relate authorized access points for works and expressions containing personal names. When using a term from Appendix I, J or K in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording pseudonymous relationships for personal names when only two authority records are involved, catalogers may either 1) use subfield $i and code “r” in subfield $w or 2) use simple see-also references. For more information on these techniques and instructions on recording multiple pseudonyms (i.e., those involving a 663 field), see the [http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/pseud.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA Practice for Creating NARs for Persons Who Use Pseudonyms]. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are reminded that when a variant name (400) and an authorized access point (100) are in conflict an addition should be made to either the 400 or 100 to resolve the conflict (e.g., fuller form of name, date of activity, etc.); the previous practice of changing the 400 to a 500 to resolve the conflict is no longer an option. When catalogers encounter a variant form in a 500 field in the course of updating a NAR, they should resolve the conflict and change the field to a 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510  See Also From Tracing - Corporate Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511  See Also From Tracing - Meeting Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html BAC-BAnQ PS 11.13.1.8] for guidance on relating authority records for ongoing conferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530  See Also From Tracing - Uniform Title =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded &amp;quot;r&amp;quot; when providing relationship links between authorized access points for works or expressions. When supplying RDA Appendix J terms in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551  See Also From Tracing - Geographic Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” until relationship designators for places are developed. (Currently RDA has a placeholder for Appendix L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Series Numbering Peculiarities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#641_Series_Numbering_Peculiarities|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Series Numbering Example =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#642_Series_Numbering_Example|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Series Place and Publisher/Issuing Body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#643_Series_Place_and_Publisher.2FIssuing_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Series Analysis Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#644_Series_Analysis_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Series Tracing Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#645_Series_Tracing_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Series Classification Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#646_Series_Classification_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Complex See Also Reference - Name =&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 663 field contains the explanatory text and authorized access points for relationships between a 100 (established name) and other 100s (established names) that cannot be adequately conveyed by one or more simple see also references generated from 500 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, this situation occurs when a person uses more than two identities, when more than one person shares an identity with one or more others, or when multiple persons use the same pseudonym independent of each other or as a result of some other arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text of the 663 may be adjusted to fit extraordinary situations; however, keep the text as simple as possible, allowing the MARC fields and coding to convey the information desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use the 663 technique to show relationships between corporate bodies or between persons and corporate bodies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is found in the [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA and AACR2 practice for creating NARs for persons who use pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Only two identities ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When only two NARs are created for a person, the NARs are generally connected with 500 see also references and no 663 field. However, when one of the NARs is for a joint pseudonym or a pseudonym used by several persons working independently of each other, the 663 technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== More than two identities - &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; authorized access point and references ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more than two authorized access points are created for the same person, identify a “basic” authorized access point using the 663 field technique. This decision is based on the desire to simplify the reference structure and to assist catalogers in determining which name to use as the subject of biographical or critical works. The “basic” authorized access point should be determined by the predominantly used form of name or, lacking sufficient evidence, by choosing the real name of the person as the “basic” form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the authority record for the “basic” name authority record add 500 see also references with a subfield w coded “nnnc” from all other names used. Justify the 500 in 670 citations according to normal practice. Provide a 663 field listing all the other names with the following text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name] $b [established form of&lt;br /&gt;
name]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On each of the other name authority records, trace a 500 see also reference with subfield $w coded “nnnc” from the “basic” name, justifying that reference in a 670 citation, according to normal practice. Other names may be mentioned in the 670 if it is convenient to do so. Provide a 663 field with the following or similar text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name chosen as the basic heading]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the author uses another new name, create a new name authority record for that name and also add it to the reference structure and 663 listing on the authority record for the “basic” name. References to the new name in the 500 and 663 fields are only added to the “basic” NAR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Joint pseudonyms ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A joint pseudonym represents one identity used by two or more persons working in collaboration with each other. If a person uses a joint pseudonym and another name (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for joint pseudonym:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer.  Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on joint pseudonym NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on joint pseudonym NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonyms used by multiple persons ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When multiple persons working independently of each other use the same pseudonym and one or more other names (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for pseudonym used by multiple persons:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; NAR for first 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;(''Author has a pseudonym used by multiple persons and individual pseudonyms'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#663_Complex_See_Also_Reference-Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Nonpublic general note =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give information of permanent value and general interest that would be useful also to PFAN institutions and outside of PFAN. A representative listing of notes is given below. Generally, wording is recommended but not prescriptive unless specified in the instructions. The separate 667 fields may be given in any order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use OCLC record)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [reason for coding].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date updated].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Used for official language changes'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Appendice 1 in this manual for information and instructions about 667 fields added to authority records as part of a special project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for persons with identities not established ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a person uses two or more identities in manifestations, name authority records may be created for each identity. In the interest of efficiency, catalogers may use a 667 field to list pseudonyms not found in publications instead of creating NARs for these unused pseudonyms. In this case, list the unused pseudonyms in a 667 field following the phrase: “Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This note may also be added to an NAR for a person who has multiple NARs for multiple identities when some of the pseudonyms are not found in publications. In this case, list only the unused pseudonyms in the 667 field, and follow appropriate instructions for the other pseudonyms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is available in the manual, 663 section, and the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/ LC/PCC Practice for Creating NARs for Persons who use Pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for series of conferences, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 field on the NAR for the collective conference when there are authority records for both collective and individual instances of an ongoing conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs and subject usage ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply these instructions when creating new NARs and revising existing NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Add notes indicating subject cataloging usage when an authorized access point is not appropriate for use as a subject heading for these situations:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Heads of state, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This instruction applies to NARS for corporate bodies representing the office when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point for the corporate body. See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Government Officials)] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html RDA 11.2.2.26 (Religious Officials)] for instructions on the corporate bodies. Use this 667 note on the NAR for the corporate body to indicate subject cataloging usage:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [personal name heading].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value “n” in 008/11 and value “b” in 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|008/11]] and [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|008/15]] in this manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Earlier/later linear jurisdictional name changes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;politique d'indexation du RVM&amp;quot; is to assign as a subject access point or as a geographic subdivision only the latest name of a political jurisdiction that has had one or more earlier names, as long&lt;br /&gt;
as the territorial identity remains essentially unchanged (see &amp;quot;Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval&amp;quot;, 5.14.3.1). When creating a NAR with an earlier/later authorized access point for a place in in this situation, catalogers must add a 667 subject usage note to the authority record with the earlier place name and adjust the appropriate 008 fields (008/11 and 008/15).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NARs for fictitious characters'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access points for families are not valid for subject use. In an NAR for a family, 008/11 should be set to value “n” and 008/15 should be set to “b.” Per LAC-BAnQ PS 9.0, when creating an NAR&lt;br /&gt;
for a family add this 667 field noting subject usage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Add this note to a name authority record for a city section indicating that it is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision (see SHM H 835 for more information):&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) NARs for families&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Authorized access points for family names are valid for subject use. For family name authority records that reflect past practice (which considered them invalid for subject use), update the records to set the 008/11 values to “v” and 008/15 values to “a” and delete the following subject usage note:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Non-Latin script reference notes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In an authority record that contains a non-Latin script variant access point, use the 667 field with a note stating: “Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.” If there are multiple non-Latin script variant access points, use a note stating: “Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.” Assign 008/29 value “b” to indicate that the variant access point is not evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Duplicates ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add the following note to a name authority record that has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number from the record to keep&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#667_Nonpublic_General_Note|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Sources found =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of this field is to record information about the name or title represented in the 1XX field. It includes facts that contribute to the identification of the entity, that justify the choice of the name&lt;br /&gt;
or title and any additional elements used to construct the authorized access point (1XX). The information also justifies, as needed, variant forms of the name or title (4XX), other identifying elements (046, 3XX,&lt;br /&gt;
and 678), and clarifies relationships between the 1XX and other entities in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Functions of the 670 field:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information, from sources (e.g., books, phone calls, websites), in support of the choice and form of the authorized access point, variants, and other identifying elements&lt;br /&gt;
* To store information that may be used to break a conflict later&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information on relationships between entities (e.g., a person is the author of a work, a corporate body was absorbed by another corporate body)&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify a person with works in diverse subject areas or of diverse forms&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify different individuals whose access points must remain identical for now (i.e., undifferentiated personal names) &lt;br /&gt;
* To clarify whether different forms of a name or of a title are simply variations or reflect a  change in the name or title&lt;br /&gt;
* To record research required by the current guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
* To facilitate authority and bibliographic file maintenance, i.e., the information in 670 fields aids in making decisions about duplicate authorized access points and misattributions&lt;br /&gt;
* To support machine manipulation based on algorithms using information in the 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, the first 670 field cites the resource for which the authority record is being established, i.e., the resource being cataloged. If the resource being cataloged or consulted provides no information to&lt;br /&gt;
justify the authorized access point, variants, or other elements recorded in the NAR, see the 675 section of this Manual for instructions on citing the resource in a 675 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give subsequent 670 fields in any order, adding new fields after existing ones. Do not routinely delete or change existing 670 fields when adding new 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding subsequent 670 fields, prefer objective, authoritative sources (e.g., an encyclopedia) and those sources that provide firsthand information (e.g., an author's blog). Use sources that provide additional information rather than repeating information that is already present in other 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Best practices for 670 fields:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* In subfield $b, summarize and edit information found as needed to avoid extraneous or repetitive information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Avoid citing subjective information or information that is of dubious value in identifying an entity within a bibliographic context.&lt;br /&gt;
* Exercise caution when recording information about living persons that may be private or controversial in nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 fields in existing NARs may not conform to these guidelines. For example, 670 fields in older NARs may lack subfield $b with justifying information. 670 fields in NARs that were part of a special project may not conform to these guidelines and/or may contain information that seems unusual or incorrect. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' The examples given throughout the following text have various conventions in regard to punctuation and style. These conventions are not prescriptive and should be considered as best practices to facilitate the exchange of information in a shared database environment. Catalogers are expected to use judgment and common sense. Punctuation and style need not be consistent from record to record as long as the information is clear and accurate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format of 670 fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the exception of the eszett (ß or ſʒ) and the euro sign (€), all characters found in the [http://www.loc.gov/marc/specifications/specchartables.html MARC code table] are valid for use in authority records contributed to the Canadiana Authority File ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html voir LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). When pasting data from a website into a 670 field, verify that all characters are valid for use in the record. Some non-valid characters resemble those that are valid. For example, the invalid en dash (–) resembles the valid hyphenminus (-).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a substitution for a symbol that cannot be reproduced is given in brackets (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html LAC-BAnQ PS for 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS for 1.7.5]),  an explanation of that interpolation may also be provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data must be given in romanized form. Normally it is understood that the cataloger has provided the romanization; therefore, when transcribing romanization found in the source, add after it the bracketed&lt;br /&gt;
phrase ['''forme romanisée''']. In such languages as Arabic and Hebrew, where vowels are commonly omitted from the orthography of texts, the cataloger supplies the missing vowels when transcribing data. When&lt;br /&gt;
transcribing text that does include the vowels, add after it in brackets ['''vocalisé'''] or ['''en partie vocalisé'''] as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a cataloger chooses to provide nonroman script variant access points, the 670 $b should contain both the nonroman script transcription(s) found in the source, and the systematically romanized form(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When authority records are created using automated authority generation programs, additional information may be included. This data may also be formatted in a different way than instructed in this document. Generally, this data should be retained as generated to maintain the cost effectiveness of this process unless the data is confusing or causes validation errors. The exceptions to this are names and&lt;br /&gt;
titles for which NARs are created. Follow the instructions in those sections for recording this data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Source citation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The title proper of the resource being cited, complete enough for later identification in an online catalog. Abbreviations and ellipses may be used. Precede a generic or indistinctive title with the creator's name that would begin the authorized access point for the work. If the authorized access point for the work is the same as the title proper plus a qualifier, it may be provided instead of the title proper to avoid ambiguity. When information in subfield $a of a 670 field is provided to justify an authorized or variant access point, follow the additional instructions at ''Recording names and titles''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The date of publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Multipart monographs.'' If the part is the first part, give the date of publication as an open date.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Serials other than monographic series.'' Generally, use a chronological designation instead of a publication date. If there is no designation date, use the numeric designation and the date of publication. Indicate, following the designation statement, if a “surrogate” was used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Integrating resources.'' Apply the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] for source of the title proper of a website. Identify the iteration from which information was taken (e.g., “viewed on”dates for updating websites, update number or release number for updating loose-leafs).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Information found'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $b:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The specific location(s) of the information found. For multipart resources with numbered parts, provide the designation of the part and the location within the part (e.g., v. 6, page 10; map recto, label). Abbreviations or spelled-out forms may be used (e.g., t.p. or title page, v. 6 or volume 6).&lt;br /&gt;
# Information found. Following the location, cite the information found there, enclosed in parentheses. As appropriate, give multiple occurrences of information from the same source following the location of the information. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George ; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' If the authorized access point is built from Cataloguing in Publication data, include &amp;quot;CIP&amp;quot; in the location statement (e.g., formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Takao Tanabe, 2026 : $b page de titre du CIP de BAC (Sherri Shinobu Kajiwara) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Kajiwara, Sherri S.; personne associée au Canada et au Japon)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Internet resources.''' For websites, provide the name of the location within the website if appropriate (e.g., about us; history, timeline; government, executive branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Multiple locations within a resource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' When adding new information to a 670 field created for a CIP, indicate that the new information is from the published resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; personne associée au Canada) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; personne associée au Canada) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs.''' For NARs, generally, use “etc.” to avoid giving more than two locations or a sequence of locations (e.g., p. 316, etc., for sequence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs.''' For SARs, always give each location separately.&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' In post-cataloging authority work without the piece in hand, use the location “ressource non disponible.” If the piece is examined again and the authority record is updated, it is allowable to edit the corresponding 670 field to provide a location and additional forms of series titles as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions from the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may optionally provide a uniform resource identifier (URI) in subfield $u of the 670 citation to link to the cited resource if it contains significant information related to the established entity&lt;br /&gt;
that cannot be cited succinctly in the authority record. Note that use of a URI in the 670 $u does not take the place of the requirement to cite relevant data in subfields $a and $b of the 670 field needed to support the authorized access point (including additions) or variants (this information will continue to be available if the site changes or disappears). However, information found in online sources may be added to the 046 or 3XX fields with the appropriate citations in subfields $v and $u and not repeated in a 670 when that information is not used in the 1XX or a 4XX. If a URI is included in a 670, it must be given in subfield $u. The subfield $u should contain only the URI and no additional data (e.g., do not enclose the URI within parentheses and do not include words in the subfield $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording names and titles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record names or series titles used in the authorized access point or variant access points in full, as they appear in the source, without abbreviation by the cataloger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When preparing an authority record for the text of a law or a subject compilation of laws, if a source being cited contains an official short title or citation title, cite that title, preceded by the term&lt;br /&gt;
“citation title” and its exact location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For corporate name authorities, include in the data cited all the hierarchy required to justify needed variant access points, Use judgment in deciding what information (e.g., subordinate body's name) is extraneous to the record being created and should not be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all of the above categories, if the only presentation of the name or title on the chief source of information is in the bibliographic title given in subfield $a of the 670 citation, repetition of the name in&lt;br /&gt;
subfield $b may be omitted, provided no important information is lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If information about an earlier or later name or title is found in the same source as the name or title in the authorized access point, give all the information in the 670 field. Do not separate the&lt;br /&gt;
information about the earlier or later name or title in order to give it in a 675 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To facilitate international contribution and use of authority records, when recording dates, generally use the spelled out or [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abbreviated] forms for months. (For dates recorded using automated authority generation programs, see the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Format of 670 fields]] section of this document.) Do not change the style of dates in existing records. As a best practice, if a date is not included in subfield $d of the 100 field, consider adding a 046 field if dates are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying variant access points ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justify names or titles given as variant access points by information cited from sources. However, justification is not required in the following cases:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variant access points made on the basis of the cataloger's awareness of different romanizations or orthographies;&lt;br /&gt;
# A variant title derived from the resource being cataloged, from other resources cataloged under the same access point, or from information in standard reference sources;&lt;br /&gt;
# References for authorized access points of corporate bodies reflecting changes due to national orthographic reform, changes in names due to an official language change, or changes involving only a parent body to which the body being established is subordinate.&lt;br /&gt;
# Optional references from AACR2 or pre-AACR 2 forms on SARs and on retrospective NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying other elements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information recorded in the 046, 3XX, or 678 field of the authority record should generally be justified unless it is otherwise obvious from information recorded in subfield $a of a 670 citation or it can&lt;br /&gt;
be easily inferred from other identifying elements recorded, including the preferred name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the 046 field and many of the 3XX fields, a subfield $u or subfield $v recorded in the same field may be used instead of or in addition to a 670. See the 046 section of this document for guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
on subfield $u and subfield $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording other data ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data to record in the authority record. Do not abbreviate or translate attributes such as title of the person ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) that appear in conjunction with personal names in statements of responsibility and that potentially could be used as part of the access point. Other data may be abbreviated or summarized. Generally informally translate other data from foreign languages into English, paraphrasing or summarizing as convenient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data other than forms of the title/phrase to record in the permanent authority record. Numbering and names of issuing bodies are not required but may be given.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special types of citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most commonly occurring citations are listed below. If these are not appropriate, devise others as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When converting information found in obsolete or non-active MARC fields (e.g., 664, 665, 666) into a 670 note, cite Canadiana in a citation such as those provided in the examples below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date of conversion] $b ([data converted from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([data moved from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC and fichier interne de BAnQ [BAnQ internal file]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cite these files in zone 670 as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; usage: [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''NARs''. Give the date of the search, using month names or abbreviations. In parentheses, prefaced by the label '''point d'accès :''' or '''points d'accès :''', give the access point (or access points) found, even if it is the same as the current authorized access point. If it is judged useful to mention one or more variants found in an authority record, give them with the label '''variante :''' or '''variantes :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different forms of the name appear in the bibliographic records, record the access point and also any forms found, including usage identical to the authorized access point. Separate the access point from the other forms, and preface the other forms with an appropriate label, e.g., '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' or '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not normally cite specific bibliographic records or the exact location of the variations found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''SARs.''. Give the date of the search, using month abbreviations, followed by the citation of the bibliographic record. In parentheses give the series statement found in that record.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] LC/NAF has been cited previously under other names, e.g., Base de données LC/NACO and Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] &amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot; for bibliographic records refers to the transcribed forms of name usually found in statements of responsibility of bibliographic records. It may also appear in other parts of the bibliographic record such as a title proper or a quoted note. Because of changes in cataloging instructions, catalogers should be careful when taking information from the publication statement, distribution statement, etc. and the series statement.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (or «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») for bibliographic records refers to a form of the name that may not represent a transcribed form. For example, in AACR2 records, a publisher's name that appeared on the resource as “ABC Publishing Company” might have been recorded in the publication statement as “ABC Pub. Co.” Normally, there is no need to cite such a form in a 670 field..&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citing other files or catalogs.''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an access point is found in a manual catalog or online database, use judgment in creating a 670 citation. Begin the 670 field with a designation of the catalog/database in which these other bibliographic records were found. There is no prescribed formulation of such citations; examples are listed below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, , [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Geographical Names Database'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide the name of the database and the date searched in subfield $a. The name of the database may be cited as an acronym or in full. In subfield $b provide names given for the entity, feature designation or class (e.g., ADM1, PPL, civil) coordinates, and name of larger place if appropriate. (Other relevant information may also be provided.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the feature designation or class, it is acceptable to use either the code (e.g., PPL) or its spelled-out form (e.g., populated place). For foreign names, convey the name type (e.g., conventional, approved, short, etc.) within brackets or parentheses after the name. Repeat the brackets or parentheses after each name of this type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Variant names (including non-roman script names) may be given in a single listing as shown below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the coordinates, it is acceptable to use the DMS format (degrees, minutes, seconds), the DD format (decimal degrees), or both formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has opted to record the DMS coordinates)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The coordinates may be recorded as found. However, if the database displays the coordinates using colons to separate the DMS components and positive and negative values to convey the hemisphere, it is acceptable to translate the coordinates to traditional DMS format if desired. Use the degree sign (not superscript zero) to show degrees, the soft sign (modifier letter prime) for minutes, and the hard sign (modifier letter double prime) for seconds. For coordinates of latitude, a negative value corresponds to the Southern hemisphere. For coordinates of longitude, a negative value corresponds to the Western hemisphere.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has recorded the DMS coordinates as found)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has translated the DMS coordinates to traditional format from: -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, 22:53:01, 121:02:54; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Non-bibliographic sources'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the non-bibliographic source, the date, and the information. The source can be given specifically (« Lettre de l'auteur » , « Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur » , etc.) or in general terms (« Information de l'auteur » , « Information de l'éditeur » , etc.).  When noting a specific source, it isn't necessary to show how information was received, e.g, that letter was received via FAX rather than via mail. When a telephone call to a publisher/agency/organization is cited, usually give the name of the group called, rather than the title or name of the person contacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''Citations for republication SARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an SAR is for a republication only, begin the 670 with the term for the type of republication and a slash. Do not include a 670 for a republication if the SAR covers both the original and one or more republications. Do not add additional 670 fields for other types of republications cataloged later. (See 64X Series Treatment, Republications for more information about republications.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations for undifferentiated NARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on existing 670 citations found in undifferentiated NARs, see in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32 Undifferentiated Personal Name]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-11-21]&amp;lt;!--(2025-11-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#670_Source_Data_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Title related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 672 field may be used to record a title that is related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in an authority record for a corporate body, 672 fields may be used to record titles for which the corporate body is a creator, issuing body, or subject. The primary purpose of the 672 field is to document that there is a relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 672 field does not negate the need to use the 670 field for the title for which the authority record is being created, nor to use the 670 fields to justify information recorded in the 1XX and 4XX such as preferred and variant forms of name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 672 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 672 fields when inputting new 672 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 672 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 fields with titles proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Cervantes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with preferred title)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with variant title for the work associated with the Catalan expression of the work and date of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Remainder of title'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a title proper, subfield $b may be used to record the other title information or parallel title proper to eliminate confusion for titles needing further identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains other title information)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains parallel title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $f – Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $f is used to record a date appropriate to the entity recorded in $a (e.g., use date of work for a preferred title and date of publication for a title proper). Do not use brackets in $f when recording a supplied date of publication or production. Do not give a date of distribution, date of manufacture, or copyright date in $f.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for work:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of  work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for expression:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of French expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for manifestation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of publication of manifestation of Polish expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Bibliographic record control number'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $w is used to record bibliographic record control numbers (e.g., 001, 010, and 016 fields in bibliographic records). It is recommended that catalogers provide $w when readily available. Subfield $w should be repeated for each instance of a separate control number (e.g., an LCCN and an OCLC record number should be provided in separate subfields). For further instructions on inputting record control numbers, see the subfield $w section within the CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MARC 21 Format for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' subfield $w should only be used with titles for the manifestation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Title not related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 673 field may be used to record a title that is not related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. For example, in an authority record for a person, the 673 may be used to record the titles of works written by a different person with a similar name. The primary purpose of the 673 field is to document that there is no relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 673 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 673 field does not negate the need to use the 675 field as described in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#675_Sources_not_found|675 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 673 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 673 fields when inputting new 673 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 673 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 673 field. For specific subfields in the 673 field, apply the same instructions given in the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#672 Title related to the entity|672 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961- &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with different Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)### 47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with the National Gallery in London)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT NOT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #4 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Although the National of Art is not the creator, it is the publisher so this title should be record in a 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-25]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#673_Title_Not_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Sources not found =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:''Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In April 2012 this field was redefined as: “Citation for a consulted source in which no information is found related in any manner to the entity represented by the authority record or related entities.” PFAN catalogers are not required to change any existing 675 fields simply to meet this new definition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a new NAR always cite the resource being cataloged in the 675 field if the item being cataloged provides no information related in any manner to the entity represented in the authority record. Also cite in the 675 field other sources consulted that contain no information, when that very lack of information is considered worth recording for future users of the authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, it is not always necessary to include in the 675 field every reference source consulted; use judgment in deciding what sources are important enough to retain in the permanent record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#675_Source_Data_Not_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Biographical or historical data =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When supplying biographical or historical data in a 678 note field, construct the note in concise but complete sentences, keeping in mind that the information will be used in public displays.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In anticipation of LAC building the file in WMS and the batch addition of authority records from other institutions, the contents of all 665 fields in LAC and BAnQ records have been moved to 678 field. The original 665 field may have contained instructions on the access point(s) to be used as author and subject heading :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec) ; Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec) ; Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec) ; Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Delete these instructions in 678 field if they have been retained. Consider adding a 667 field as a subject heading if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification of field 678'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, a 678 field must be justified by a 670 field. If it is not justified and its contents are appropriate for a biographical or historical note, retain the field and add a 670 note citing the internal file of the institution that provided 678 field as follows :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [ [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|abréviation de la bibliothèque participante]] ], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the record has been modified after being migrated, the record history must be consulted to determine who originally added zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Existing Field 678 which will be deleted as the content is not appropriate for a biographical note.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;670 field added:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not repeat this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#678_Biographical_or_Historical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Heading linking entries =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' This section does not apply to the 781 field used in 151 name authority records to provide geographic subdivision information. See Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#781_Subdivision_linking_entry|781 section]], for instructions for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of an established heading linking entry 7XX field in an NAR or SAR is limited to recording the authorized access point from a national bibliography or in a separate national authority file or a separate equivalence.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form of heading in a 7XX field may match the 1XX form or a 4XX form in the same authority record. This is appropriate when the 7XX field form represents a form found in a different authority file than Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source of the heading in the 7XX field may be specified using either second indicator value “7” with subfield $2 or a second indicator value that specifies the source. For access points coming from the LC/NAF file, prefer the second indicator with the value &amp;quot;0&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-17]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Subdivision linking entry =&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN optional practice:'' For a geographic name heading that may also be used as a geographic subdivision, determine the form in which the heading is to be used as a geographic subdivision following the guidelines in instruction sheet [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 of the ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Enter the text of the geographic subdivision form in a 781 field with second indicator 0. For a geographic heading that is used directly, such as a country, enter the data in a single $z subfield. For a geographic heading that is used indirectly through a larger geographic entity, such as a city, enter the data in two successive $z subfields. Use no other subfields. Make no changes to values in bytes of the 008.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a record for a geographic name heading that is not appropriate for use as a subject added entry (008/15 value Ab@), such as the earlier name of a jurisdiction that has undergone a linear name change, for example, '''Ceylon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a NAR for a place name that is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision, such as a city section, for example, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Add a 781 field to an existing record when making any other change to it. If revising an existing record that contains a 667 field subject cataloging usage note indicating the proper geographic subdivision form, delete the 667 field and replace it with a 781 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-11]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#781_Subdivision_Heading_Linking_Entry-Geographic_Subdivision|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 1: Undifferentiated entities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 2: Special projects =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This appendix presents information regarding some special projects involving authority records created or modified in the Canadiana authority file. The records created or modified within the context of these special projects may include some fields or some values not normally attributed according to current cataloguing policies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instructions regarding changes to these records are given here in order to indicate whether these fields and values are to be kept or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 1. Records created or revised as part of the UQAM records revision project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is an authority records revision project, led by UQAM. These records have been created or modified in Canadiana by UQAM's cataloguing “traitement documentaire” team. These records were then revised by two librarians and a library technician, also at UQAM. This project ended March 31, 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records may be modified, like any other name authority records, according to current cataloguing policies.&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers update these records, they should:&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the value of position Leader/17 to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (full record);&lt;br /&gt;
* Delete field 667 &amp;quot;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;quot;;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Evaluate the record as they would evaluate any batch-loaded record. However, as the record is being revised, the authorized access point may be modified, if it does not follow the current PFAN practices (for instance, birth or death dates may be added, if available and if omitted from the access point).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 2. Records created and revised as part of the Universities Mentoring Project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General Information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This mentoring project &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;that, as of February,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; allows university libraries to create name authority records that are revised by another university.  Authority records created or modified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;mentored libraries&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; are revised by library technicians &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;at the mentoring university.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abbreviation, e.g. UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;, etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records should not be modified.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15] &amp;lt;!--(2022-07-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145115</id>
		<title>PFAN - Name Authority Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=145115"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T13:27:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Format of 670 fields */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by N. Mainville, LAC, )}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Manual}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Name Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Series Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Fixed Fields =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Descriptive cataloging code  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;All new name authority records created and contributed by PFAN catalogers must use code 008/10 “z” and include subfield $e rda in the 040 (Cataloging source) field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an existing NAR using code “a”, “b”, “c”, or “d” is modified in any way, evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA, changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1: If an existing NAR using code “c” is modified only to change or add a 5XX field, catalogers are strongly encouraged, but not required, to evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA,&lt;br /&gt;
changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2: Existing undifferentiated name authority records coded 008/10 “c” may be modified to remove one or more identities in order to create differentiated RDA authority records. When modifying&lt;br /&gt;
an existing undifferentiated name authority record for this purpose, the updated undifferentiated name authority record must retain the existing 008/10 code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F10 Descriptive Cataloging Rules|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Subject heading system/thesaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR 008/11 is set to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/11 value “v” (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/11 value “n” (Not applicable), representing past practice, change the value to “v.” In the Manual, see also 008/15 for instructions on changing that value to “a” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/11&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (Not applicable) to name authority records for corporate names representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point. Also assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; in 008/15, and make a 667 note indicating the form of the access point used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples of corporate names not appropriate for use as subject headings:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F15 Heading use-subject added entry|Manual 008/15]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]].&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created NARs. Make these changes also when modifying&lt;br /&gt;
existing name authority records for any reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F11 Subject Heading System.2FThesaurus|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Heading use-subject added entry ==&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;General&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; is set to &amp;quot;b.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/15 value “a” (Appropriate) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/15 value “b” (Not appropriate), representing past practice, change the value to “a.” In the Manual, see also 008/11 for instructions on changing that value to “v” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Background:'' For Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental&lt;br /&gt;
bodies, Religious officials, and Popes, descriptive catalogers may be required to establish an authorized&lt;br /&gt;
access point for the corporate name for the office as well as a personal name for the office holder. It is&lt;br /&gt;
subject cataloging policy to assign only the personal name, not the corporate name, as a subject access&lt;br /&gt;
point. This policy was established for collocation purposes (cf. [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
may be used in descriptive cataloging as an access point, but in subject cataloging only the personal name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
would be used as a subject access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; (Not appropriate) to name authority records for corporate entities representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the entry. Also assign value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; in 008/11, and make a 667 note indicating the form used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F11 Subject heading system.2Fthesaurus|Manual 008/11]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;NARs and subject usage.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Correct existing records when making any other change to the records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19]&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F15 Heading Use-Subject Added Entry|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Undifferentiated personal name ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== General === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use 008/32 code “b” (undifferentiated) in an RDA name authority record. Assign 008/32 value “a” for personal name NARs. Use code “n” for families, corporate bodies, and places. For works and expressions, assign value “a” if the access point begins with a personal name, otherwise assign value “n”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the past, personal name NARs could be coded as undifferentiated using 008/32 value “b” when the cataloger had no acceptable way of differentiating multiple persons with the same preferred name. Since then, PFAN have followed these guidelines for personal name NARs:&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not create new undifferentiated records coded 008/32 “b”. All personal name authority records coded RDA should be differentiated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not add a new identity to an existing personal name authority record coded 008/32 “b.”&lt;br /&gt;
* Instead, apply [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] to create a unique authorized access point for the person, using suitable additional elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' If the only record found for an entity is an undifferentiated record (with field 008/32 coded &amp;quot;b&amp;quot;) from a university with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN », do not use it.  Create a new authority record for the entity.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated record to LAC by emailing the OCLC control number to pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca with the subject line: Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may happen that an existing undifferentiated name authority record, especially one that has been imported from LC/NAF, contains pairs of 670 fields used to group information about each individual covered by the NAR. The first 670 in the pair is an “identifying” 670 field containing a term descriptive of the person's relationship to the title cited in the second 670 of the pair. The data in the identifying 670 field is contained in subfield $a and enclosed in square brackets. The second 670 in the pair is a “citation” 670 that contains the normal data elements in a resource being cataloged citation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Added entry for Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Editor of Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, an existing undifferentiated name authority record may include a 667 note indicating that the record is undifferentiated and identifying the resource(s) associated with other persons with the same name. In this case, the record generally does not include 670 fields for persons other than the first one identified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When information is found to distinguish a person in an existing undifferentiated from LAC or BAnQ name record:&lt;br /&gt;
* Always create a new name authority record for that person, with distinguishing information, and add an indication that the person was formerly on an undifferentiated record (see &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_notes_on_records_for_identities_previously_on_undifferentiated_records|667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records]]&amp;quot; below). If an authority record already exists for that person with the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer the &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;citation&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not transfer the “identifying” 670 to the new NAR.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the undifferentiated NAR is not being deleted because multiple identities remain, delete the pair of 670 fields pertaining to the newly created NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(i.e., in the undifferentiated NAR, delete both the &amp;quot;identifying&amp;quot; 670 and the &amp;quot;citation&amp;quot; 670)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If more than one identity remains in the undifferentiated NAR, and there is not sufficient information in the NAR to create new NARs for each name, leave the NAR coded AACR2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to facilitate machine processing of authority records (e.g., matching, linking), when only one identity is left on an undifferentiated personal name authority record (i.e., other identities are being&lt;br /&gt;
disambiguated and removed), take the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Create a new NAR for the remaining single identity. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ») and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.  The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. In the new record:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer the citation 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 note:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note  « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assure that the undifferentiated NAR only contains information relevant to the single identity remaining (e.g., 670s). If applicable, delete field 667 indicating that the record is undifferentiated.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add that information in the 667 note on the undifferentiated record to assure that a duplicate NAR will not be created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of differentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated LAC record''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New notice for the author of Histoire du département de la Manche:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number] $z [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of undifferentiated record derived from LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Esperanza:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the illustrator of Reptiles:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the illustrator of Reptiles :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008red/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add a 667 note to a new NAR to identify the Canadiana number of the authority record in which information about that person had been recorded:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Records coded as undifferentiated that actually represent only one identity ====&lt;br /&gt;
Occasionally an existing record will be coded undifferentiated, but new research indicates that in fact the record represents only one identity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may also happen that we suspect that the value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; has been mistakenly coded in field 008/32. In such cases, proceed as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 field to the undifferentiated NAR indicating that it has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a new name authority record for the identity. The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 note: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number..)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the note 667 &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated record that represents a single identity''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation  :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;New authority record after disambiguation&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [no Canadiana number, use OCLC number from undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F32 Undifferentiated personal name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/33 Level of establishment  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Provisional''' (008/33 value “c”) records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Code an NAR as provisional (008/33 value “c”) if the authorized access point cannot be formulated satisfactorily because of inadequate information. If the necessary information later becomes available, re-evaluate the NAR and upgrade it to fully established (008/33 value “a”). In no case should a provisional-level authority record be created with an access point that conflicts with an existing NAR according to PFAN normalization rules.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Special administrative regions of Hong Kong and Macau'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Because there is uncertainty about whether Hong Kong and Macau will continue to have two official languages, code all NARs for government bodies in these two places, at the level of the special administrative region and below, as provisional (008/33 value “c”), regardless of the language in which the authorized access point has been established. If a form in the second of the two official languages becomes available, add that form as a variant access point rather than revising the existing authorized access point. Consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] and the [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html related policy statement] for instructions on choosing the language of the referred name. Please note that this policy for provisional status does not apply to non-government bodies.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional information for PFAN participants'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN participants may also create provisional records in the following two exceptional situations:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library does not have the language expertise to establish the authorized access point as a fully established authority record; this would include situations where the library lacked adequate reference sources for research or where the cataloger was not confident of the correct grammatical form for the access point.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library is unable, due to limited resources or other constraints, to complete related authority work or to determine the appropriate reference structure that is required for fully established authority records.&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preliminary''' (008/33 value “d”) records:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Preliminary authority records (008/33 value “d”) generally are the result of retrospective projects. PFAN catalogers are expected to routinely upgrade NARs coded preliminary when making other modifications to the record. Because of this maintenance requirement, PFAN participants are asked to contact the PFAN Standards Committee before embarking on projects that may result in large numbers of NARs coded preliminary being added to the NACO Authority File.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;As needed, catalogers may upgrade NARs coded preliminary when working with earlier/later corporate body records, even if the access points in the records being upgraded are not used in the local bibliographic database. Occasionally catalogers may need to create a new NAR without having an item in hand, e.g., for an earlier or later name heading using information from reference sources, or a heading based on information found in field 245 subfield “c” of bibliographic records when resolving NAR conflicts. Do not code these occasional NARs as “preliminary”.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records&lt;br /&gt;
are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, series data elements should be viewed on the publication and series authority records should be coded “a” (full). In post-cataloging authority work it is permissible to create SARs without the piece in hand; these records are coded “d” (preliminary). When a publication in the series has been examined and the preliminary authority record reviewed and updated as necessary, upgrade the SAR to full level.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F33_Level_of_establishment|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Cataloging source ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever value is originally input into this field remains; do not change this value when updating a record unless the original value was incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas « blanc » pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou « c » (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a). --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F39_Cataloging_source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 National Bibliographic Agency Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 016 is mandatory whenever a cataloguer creates, updates or uses an authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an authority record, and when updating or using an existing record without a Canadiana number in field 016, first check the LC/NAF to see if the same entity is represented by an authority record, and if this authority record includes a Canadiana number. Note that the authorized access point, in the LC/NAF, may be different from the Canadiana access point.  If the LC/NAF record does include a Canadiana number, add this number to the Canadiana record, changing the final E to an F (or adding an F at the end of the Canadiana number, if there is no final letter). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When updating or using an existing authority record that includes a Canadiana number, please check that the language code F is present at the end of the field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Duplicates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not “reuse” a Canadiana number. Once an authority record has been created for a given entity, and once a Canadiana number has been attributed, do not change the data in this authority record to describe a DIFFERENT entity. For instance, do not change the authority record for “Dupont, Jean” to transform it into an authority record describing “Tremblay, Marie” (except if the person's name has changed). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, ask that the duplicate be deleted (see [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Procedures for duplicates]]). DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no field 016 in the record to be deleted, please add one, using the number 0000X0000F. Do not record this number in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
See also the “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Duplicates|Duplicates]]” section in this Manual, field 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, delete it. DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Partially modified batch-loaded authority records'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Batch-loaded authority records which are partially modified, according to the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]], will include Canadiana number 1111X1111F. This temporary number is added in order to allow the cataloguer to save the record, until such time as the entire record is evaluated to make sure it follows all PFAN standards. This number will have to be replaced by a unique number once the record is evaluated, when the 667 note “CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN” is deleted. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 International Standard Serial Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Record the ISSN whenever it is available from the item in hand, from analytic bibliographic records, or from the collected set bibliographic record for the series; otherwise, recording the ISSN is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it is known there are separate ISSN assigned to different formats of a series represented by a single SAR, prefer to record in 022 subfield $a the ISSN that is the linking ISSN (ISSN-L) for the different formats. Identify ISSN for specific formats in separate 667 fields, following this pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the title of a publication has changed, confirm that an ISSN appearing on the publication belongs to the new title and not to the earlier title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An incorrect ISSN can be given in a 667 field (e.g., “ISSN 1122-3344 is not a valid ISSN for this publication”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-11-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Other standard identifier =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the guidelines in [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf NACO Best Practices] for the 024 Field. As a general rule, limit the number of 024 fields in a NACO authority record to five. Do not routinely delete or change existing 024 fields when adding new ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are not required to maintain identifiers coded in the 024 field of PFAN authority records. When an 024 field is present in an authority record that is being reported for deletion (for example, in the case of a duplicate), catalogers should transfer the field to the record that is to be retained. When two authority records are being collapsed into one, and each record has a different 024 field, catalogers should include both 024 fields in the updated record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Coded cartographic mathematical data =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for countries, states, counties'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for outside limits (bounding boxes or polygons) should generally be used with larger geographic entities such as countries, states, and counties to identify the coordinates of the entity. The&lt;br /&gt;
coordinates may be recorded in either degrees/minutes/seconds, decimal degrees, decimal minutes, and/or decimal seconds. Styles should not be mixed in a single 034 field, but the field may be repeated to&lt;br /&gt;
represent the different styles (see below for conversion utilities); the order of 034 fields when both styles are given does not matter. To facilitate the reuse of coordinates in geographic applications, the point (not the comma) should be used as the decimal point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrees/minutes/seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees''': record in the form hddd.dddddd (hemisphere-degrees.decimal degrees)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees with plus ou minus''': record in the form +-ddd.dddddd (hemisphere[+/-]-degrees.decimal degrees) (“+” or N and E, “-” for S and W ; the plus sign is optional)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example with +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example without the optional plus sign)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal minutes''': record in the form hdddmm.mmmm (hemisphere-degrees-minutes.decimal minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss.sss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds.decimal seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for cities, towns, and townships'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for cities, towns, and townships should generally be recorded as center points rather than outside limits. For the 034 field, the longitude and latitude that form the central axis are recorded&lt;br /&gt;
twice to define the center point (i.e., the contents of $d and $e are identical, the contents of $f and $g are identical).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing degrees/minutes/seconds)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees with plus/minus)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Coordinate Conversion Tools'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN institutions are encouraged to provide both degrees/minutes/seconds and decimal degrees when available. Numerous conversion tools are available on the Web to derive one from the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 has been defined for recording the source of the coordinate information– codes for commonly used sources are available from: [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/cartographic-data.html ''Cartographic Data Source Codes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 citation to the source would not be required if the only information from the source is recorded in field 034; a 670 citation should be made if necessary to record information beyond coordinates, such as variant names, hierarchy, time period of applicability, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#034_Coded_Carographic_Mathematical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 System Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#035_System_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Cataloging source =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Language of cataloging'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $b fre added automatically by WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $d – Modifying agency'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $d [MARC 21 code] is added automatically by WMS when modifying NARs or SARs unless your institution's is already the last MARC subfield $d in the 040 field. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $e – Description conventions'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All new authority records created and submitted by PFAN cataloguers must have the code &amp;quot;z&amp;quot; in Field 008/10 and include the $e rda subfield in Field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding the subfield $e manually, add it after subfield $b and before $c. It is not necessary to move the subfield $e to this position if it is already present elsewhere in the 040 or if it is being added by a macro or a template. Subfield $e rda is automatically added by the system in NARs and SARs when fixed field 008/10 (Rules) is set to “z” (Other).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#040_Cataloging_Source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Authentication Code =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This field is found in all authority records used by LAC. Do not modify or delete this field when code CaOONL appears in field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers (other than LAC cataloguers) derive an authority record from an LAC record which includes field 042, they must remember to delete this field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the Canadiana authority file, cataloguers must add 042 $a nlc every time they create, derive or revise an authority record. This code identifies the “virtual” Canadian authority file, which is spread across two separate authority files (LC/NAF and Canadiana). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#042_Authentication_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Geographic Area Code &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 043 can only be used in authority records for geographical names (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield b – Local GAC code and Subfield $2 – Source of local code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For sites located in Quebec, PFAN participants can use subfield $b to record a local code from the list below, representing the administrative region of Quebec where the site is located. This code is formed by the geographic region code &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; and a two-letter sub-entity local code (e.g., qa) that identifies the administrative region and replaces the last two characters of the &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; code (e.g., &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot;). (e.g. &amp;quot;n-cn-qa&amp;quot;). Subfield $b is recorded after subfield $a and is followed by subfield $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#043_Geographic_Area_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Special coded dates =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: When encoding date information, give the fullest information about the date that is readily available (the date in field 046 may be more precise than a date used in the 100 subfield $d). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2nd_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;When&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; revising existing authority records, record dates in field 046 even if the heading itself does not have dates in 100 subfield $d, when the information is readily available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording dates in field 046, use the Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) schema in all cases except for centuries; supply dates using the pattern yyyy, yyyy-mm, or yyyy-mm-dd. See date table in [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html LAC-BanQ PS 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt; For the full EDTF specification, see [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophonist)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bryant, W. Blues around the clock [SR] 1945: $b label (Johnny Hicks, tenor sax)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Discogs website, May 27, 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; tenor sax player who performed with Tab Smith in the 1940s)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording B.C. dates in the 046 field, precede the digits by a hyphen (minus sign). Because there is no year “zero” in the common era calendar, subtract one year from the actual B.C. date, e.g., the year 50 B.C. is recorded -0049.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a century in the 046 field, use the first two digits of the hundred year span (e.g., use “16” to represent the 17th century, 1600–1699). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the 1st century A.D. is represented by value “00” and B.C. centuries have a hyphen &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;minus &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sign)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; before the digits (e.g., “-04” for the 5th century B.C.). An approximate century (e.g., active approximately 12th century) cannot be recorded in the 046 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Repeatability:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Field 046 is repeatable, but the 046 subfields used to record the dates are not repeatable. Generally, one 046 field with dates conforming to the EDTF schema should be sufficient. However, century dates follow the ISO 8601 standard, not EDTF. When recording century dates in addition to more precise dates, it is therefore necessary to repeat the 046 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Conflicting dates'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, resources consulted may present conflicting dates (e.g., conflicting birth or death dates for a person, or start or end dates for a corporate body). In these situations, the 046 field should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information. It is not necessary to record all the conflicting dates using field 046, nor is it necessary to give a 046 field for each resource consulted. Evaluation of the conflicting dates should generally result in a single 046 field, containing the date(s) the cataloger judges to be most accurate in representing the entity. At the cataloger's discretion, the date(s) recorded in that 046 field may incorporate the conflicting date information and need not correspond exactly to the date(s) selected for the authorized access point.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Similarly, any dates added to the authorized access point should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information, recorded in conformance with the instructions in RDA and the PFAN Policy Statements. If one date predominates in the resources consulted, that date may be considered the most appropriate to use in the authorized access point. If a single date does not predominate, the cataloger may decide to use the “approximately yyyy”, “yyyy?”, or “yyyy or yyyy” format in the authorized access point. In some cases, dates corresponding to the period of activity of the person (RDA 9.19.1.5) may be considered the best choice.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 157 B.C. as the approximate date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary. authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 1907 as the date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Same example as above, reflecting a different decision the cataloger might have made for recording 046 subfield $f)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Because the 046 field will be based on information from multiple sources, justification cannot be accurately expressed in subfield $v/$u at the end of the 046 field. The conflicting dates should be recorded in 670 fields. If an existing record has subfield $v/$u as 046 field justification, and the 046 field is being updated as described above, the subfield $v/$u should be removed, and the justification converted to a 670 field, if the conflicting dates are not already justified in an existing 670 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Uncertain dates resulting from date calculations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, a calculation may be required to determine which dates to record in the 046 field and the authorized access point. Such calculations may result in uncertain dates.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the consulted resources provide only the person's date of death and their age (in years) at the time of death, as often happens with obituaries, their year of birth will correspond to one of two consecutive years. To calculate those years, first subtract the age from the year of death, then use the resulting year plus its preceding year as the two alternatives for the year of birth.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger subtracted 75, the age at death, from 1994, the year of death; the resulting year, 1919, and the year preceding it, 1918, represent the two possible alternatives for the year of birth)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If non-Gregorian dates are found in consulted resources, uncertain dates may result from calendar conversion differences. Gregorian calendar dates are used in the 046 field and authorized access point. A single date in a non-Gregorian calendar may correspond to one of two Gregorian dates. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(The Hijri calendar date 1346 H converts to either 1967 or 1968 in the Gregorian calendar.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of date scheme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add subfield $2 edtf except after a century. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfields $q – Establishment date, $r – Termination date,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Start period, and $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Record dates associated with a one-time conference, etc., or a single instance of a&lt;br /&gt;
series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] and [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), use subfields $s and $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Use the establishment date  ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) and the termination date ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) of a series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]) in subfields $q and $r, if that information is known.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on using $s and $t for start and end periods in fields 368, and 370-376, see the instructions provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following represents PFAN practice on recording sources of information in $u and $v in fields where they are defined, and/or in field 670: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;670s must be used to support information used as part of a heading in 1XX and 4XX fields.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;For fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $v is optional if the same information/source is already cited in the 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use $v if the information/source is not cited in a 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $u is optional, and should always be preceded by $v&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Use a 670 field if needed to justify information recorded in other fields for which subfields $u and/or $v are not defined or defined differently. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the same basic citation principles when recording data in subfield $v (Source of information) of fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 that currently apply to field 670 subfield $a (Source citation).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Supply specific citation information (page number, sub-page of website) in subfield $v if, in the cataloger's judgment, this greater specificity is needed to find the information within the source cited. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information in fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 is in the same form as found in the source, there is no need to cite usage information. If the information recorded in those fields is in a different form from that in the source, use 670 $b (Information found). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For tangibles sources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information was derived from a tangible source (e.g., a print book, removable digital media) subfield $v should contain sufficient information for a cataloger to find the item cited in a catalog&lt;br /&gt;
or bibliographic database. This can usually be limited to title proper and imprint or date. If that combination is not unique, the title citation may be preceded by the creator's name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For online resources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide information sufficient to find the resource via a search engine. Include either title and publication date (if it is a formally-published resource, such as an e-book) or a suitable description of the&lt;br /&gt;
document and date accessed (for a less formal resource). Optionally include subfield $u. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-03)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Library of Congress Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#050_Library_of_Congress_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 LC classification number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used in personal name authority records to record LC classification numbers for individual literary authors, including authors of children's literature. It may also be used '''exceptionally'' in personal and corporate name authority records to record biography numbers in the ML410-429 range of the LC classification when the choice of index or cutter is not obvious. Field 053 must always include a $5 subfield.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class PS8000 numbers should not be recorded in field 053. For the use of PS8000 numbers in name authority records, see section 065 of this Manual. An authority record for a Canadian literary author may contain both a 053 and a 065 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Library and Archives Canada Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#055_Library_and_Archives_Canada_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Other Classification Number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 065 is used to record PS8000 class numbers. Field 065 must always include a subfield $2 and a subfield $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [MARC code of institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Number source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2, record &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; to indicate that the number comes from the PS8000 class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#065_Other_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 080 Universal Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#080_Universal_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Dewey Decimal Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#082_Dewey_Decimal_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Dewey Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#083_Dewey_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Government Document Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#086_Government_Document_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Government Document Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#087_Government_Document_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Headings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for any reason, delete a final mark of punctuation in the 1XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging&lt;br /&gt;
instructions (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: in order to minimize the impact of database maintenance with associated bibliographic records and/or related authority records, catalogers are urged to refrain from making unnecessary changes to 1XXs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN series practice: Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the title proper of a multipart monograph, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choosing a monographic series title proper:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has more than one form of series title, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has the series title in more than one language or script on the same source, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has series title pages in more than one language and or script, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#Consider spacing and changes in typography when determining where the series title begins and ends. Also consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Establishing an SAR access point:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Determine choice of authorized access point based on [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] and its associated LAC-BAnQ PS.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclude from the authorized access point the following information included in the series statement in the bibliographic record for the component part:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;initial article in subfields $a, $t, $n, and $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;other title information;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;statement of responsibility;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;parallel title(s);&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;numeric/chronological designations.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a parenthetical qualifier(s) if appropriate according to the guidelines in LAC-BAnQ PS 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on converting an existing NAR to an SAR, see Should an SAR be made? in the Introduction of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Heading - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for families'''&lt;br /&gt;
'''''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “3” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a family. See in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_Nonpublic_general_note|667]] section, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]], for subject usage instructions in NARs for families.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Additions to the name are contained in a single set of parentheses separated by colons.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# The term for the type of family is added after the name and is contained in subfield $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $d (date) follows the term for the type of family.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $c is used for place associated with family and follows the date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $g is used for prominent member of family. Give authorized access point for the person as found in the 1XX of the NAR without any internal subfield coding.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for persons'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “0” or “1” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] provides guidance for the placement of words indicating relationship (e.g., Jr.) and MARC defines subfield $q as “Forme développée du nom de personne.” When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Subfield $d (date) should always be the last element in a 100 string unless the term (Esprit) is being added to the name. Add $c (Esprit) as the last element in a 100 string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Example:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Generally add subfield $c before subfield $q when also adding words, numerals, etc. indicating relationship. (See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] for treatment of Portuguese names)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) For exceptional situations, such as when subfield $a contains only a surname or only a forename or the name includes a prefix, etc. consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2020-12-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#100_Heading-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Content Type =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 336 may only be used in NARs and SARs for expressions. 336 is always accompanied by a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2 give “rdacontent/fre.” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Content type term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use terms from [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html/view RDA 6.9.1.3]. The list of terms is also available in the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Content type code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If giving subfield $b instead of/or in addition to subfield $a, use the code from the MARC format [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#336_Content_Type|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Other attributes of person or corporate body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary for terms in subfields $a, $b, and $c, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a, $b and $c. When terms in subfields $a and $b do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record professions or occupations in subfield $c (Other designation). Profession or occupation may be recorded in field [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#374_Occupation|374]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record titles of royalty, nobility or religious rank ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) in subfield $d in the form used in the authorized or variant access points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#368_Other_Attributes_of_Person_or_Corporate_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Associated place =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For jurisdictions or other place names with authority records in Canadiana or, failing that, the form found in the RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. The form of place name in the 370 field may differ from the form of place name added to a preferred name of place or an access point per RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Authorized access point for the place includes type of jurisdiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name for the larger place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Other place name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no authorized access point for the place in Canadiana or RVM, it is not necessary to create an NAR in order to code the 370 field. Record the place in the 370 field following RDA and the LAC-BAnQ PSs, including consulting appropriate sources and adding additional elements (e.g., type of jurisdiction) to break conflicts. Do not add a subfield $2 if no NAR is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of the associated place has changed, the name of the place that applied in the time of the entity being established in the 1XX may optionally be recorded in place of, or in addition to, the current form of name. It is not necessary to follow subject cataloging policies to use the latest form of name only.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person born in the city of Calcutta before its name changed to Kolkata; cataloger has chosen to record the form of name that applied at the time the person was born)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person residing in the city of Milan during the Renaissance, prior to the formation of the modern country of Italy; cataloger has chosen to record the current form of name for the country)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For non-jurisdictions, prefer names from an authorized vocabulary such as RVM and identify the source in subfield $2. If the name is not found in an authorized vocabulary, record it in field 370 without&lt;br /&gt;
giving a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
When determining when to create a name authority record for a geographic name, consult the “Name Authority Records (NARs)” section of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1], Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary&lt;br /&gt;
source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfield $c – Associated country&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Generally, do not use subfield $c to record places that are not sovereign entities. Such places may be recorded in subfield $f or other subfields as appropriate.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Martinique is an overseas department of France)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if a sovereign entity has (or previously had) one or more constituent countries, any of the constituent countries associated with the 1XX may optionally be recorded in subfield $c in addition to, or instead of, the larger sovereign entity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Great Britain who has strong ties to Wales; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with the Soviet Union, particularly the Kirghiz Soviet Socialist Republic; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Aruba, a constituent country of the Netherlands; cataloger has chosen not to record the Netherlands)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with India prior to its independence from Great Britain; cataloger has chosen not to record Great Britain)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entity names of First Nations in Canada and Indian tribes recognized by the United States government as legal entities may be included in subfield $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Record the place of origin of the work in field 370, unless it is merely a place of publication or other place associated with a manifestation (use field 643, when appropriate, for the latter). Although the “place of origin” of a serial work may be the same as the place of publication of the component part for which the SAR (or serial bibliographic record) was created, use judgment in distinguishing between place of origin of the work and a place of publication not actually related to the work itself.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-24]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-22)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#370_Associated_Place|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Address =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice:&lt;br /&gt;
* Supply based on cataloger's judgment, if the information is readily available and not already being recorded in field 370 subfield $e (Place of residence/headquarters).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* In cases where subfield $a is not recorded, include at a minimum subfield $m (Electronic mail address) or subfield $b (City).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not record physical &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or e-mail&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; addresses for living persons.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Catalogers are not required to maintain address information when updating a record that contains an address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record multiple addresses, with or without ranges of dates, in separate occurrences of field 371.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Electronic mail address'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $m should contain only an e-mail address. Do not add an internet address for the 1XX in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#371_Address|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Field of activity =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM heading string for field of activity, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an entity from Canadiana for field of activity, remove any subfield coding not authorized for use in the 372 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point in Canadiana:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Field of activity in 372:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall&lt;br /&gt;
best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''372 fields with a term from RVM and a non-controlled vocabulary term'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#372_Field_of_Activity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Associated group =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the Canadiana or LC/NACO Authority File, recording the source in subfield $2. Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 373 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of an associated group has changed, record the group name(s) that applied at the time of the entity being established in the 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with subfield $2 and dates:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with different vocabulary sources:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Although the MARC format does not specify a form of date in these subfields, the following practice is recommended for consistency. Input dates using the Gregorian calendar in the form yyyy. If more specific dates are necessary, consider recording them in another field (e.g., 670, 678). It is&lt;br /&gt;
not necessary to reformulate dates in existing NARs to conform to this practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&amp;lt;!--(2023-06-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#373_Associated_Group|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Occupation =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.16.1.3 for instructions on recording profession or occupation as an element. See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.19.1.6 for instructions using a profession or occupation term in an access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Codes from either the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/occupation.html/view Occupation Term Source Codes] or the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/subject.html/view Subject Source Codes] lists may be recorded in subfield $2 for the 374 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#374_Occupation|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Gender =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not use this field in new authority records. Whenever an existing record must be changed for any reason, delete any occurrence of field 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Family information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Name of prominent member'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When giving the name of the prominent member of the family in 376 subfield $b, give the form for the person as found in subfield $g of the 100 field of the NAR for the family. Do not include any internal subfield coding in subfield $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start''' period and Subfield $t – End period&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Associated language =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer language codes over language terms, using codes from the Code List for Languages in MARC21.  Use subfield $l (Language term) only to provide information not available in the [https://loc.gov/marc/languages/language_code.html MARC Code List for Languages]. Encode multiple languages for a person or corporate body only if more than one language is used for publication, communication, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Optionally, record an ISO 639-3 language code (or codes) in an additional 377 field. This practice is especially recommended when an ISO 639-3 code will identify a language more specifically than the MARC code does. For more information, see the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of the code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 is not required when the MARC Code List for Languages is used as the language source code (second indicator value “#”). PFAN institutions may supply an additional 377 field from another language code list by using second indicator value “7,” with subfield $2 containing a code for a language source list taken from the list in [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/language.html/view Language Code and Term Source Codes]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(ISO 639-3 code for Achi (acr); assigned a collective code (myn) for Mayan languages in the MARC Code List for Languages)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#377_Associated_Language|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Fuller form of personal name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode the fuller form of name in the 378 field when this information is readily available, even if the same information is already present in the 100 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the Information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#378_Fuller_Form_of_Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Form of work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMGF, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on recording form of work as an element in a work-level series authority record, see LAC-BAnQ PS 6.3.1.3.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#380_Form_of_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Other distinguishing characteristics of work or expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used to record the RDA elements other distinguishing characteristic of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) and other distinguishing characteristic of expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Other characteristics of expressions that are unique to musical works (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4-6.18.1.6]) may also be recorded in the 381 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Franklin number recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Other distinguishing characteristic of expression of musical work'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some terms recorded for other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression may be appropriate to record in field 381 and another MARC field for which there is no corresponding RDA element. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a corporate body (such as a publisher) used as an other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression could be recorded in either the 373 field (associated group), the 381 field or both.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 381 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as associated group and other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA has no specific element for places associated with expressions, but field 370 subfield $f (Other associated place) and subfield $g (Place of origin of work or expression) may be used in authority records for expressions. Some places associated with works or expressions would be considered other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression in RDA and could be recorded in the 370 field, the 381 field, or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Places used as other distinguishing characteristic of a legal work; recorded in 370 and 381 fields)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the RDA element place of origin of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.6]) in a 370 field (see Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]] section).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When other distinguishing characteristic of work or other distinguishing characteristic of expression has been used in an authorized access point and is also being recorded as an element in a 3XX&lt;br /&gt;
field, use the 381 field to record the other distinguishing characteristic. Optionally, also record the same information in any other appropriate 3XX field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#381_Other_Distinguishing_Characteristics_of_Work_or_Expression|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 Medium of performance =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the medium of performance using thesaurus terms from &amp;quot;Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM (RVMMEM)&amp;quot;. Record the medium of performance by applying the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html RDA 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6], the associated LAC-BAnQ PSs. ''Note:'' The 382 field may also be used in authority records for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. If considered important for identification and access, provide an additional 382 that does not apply these guidelines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#382_Medium_of_Performance|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numeric designation of musical work &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available. Create separate 383 fields for different numbering schemes associated with a single work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#383_Numeric_Designation_of_Musical_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Key =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available for works. In case of doubt, do not encode. Do not encode for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Audience characteristics =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the intended audience of a work or expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. In particular, consult instruction sheet L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ##  $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvmt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a: If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term and term from a controlled vocabulary)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''or''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-10-14]&amp;lt;!--(2022-10-14)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Creator/contributor characteristics &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record demographic characteristics of one or more creators or contributors associated with a work or expression, in particular for characteristics common to a group of creators or contributors associated with a work or expression. The field will most commonly be used in authority records for collection aggregates embodying two or more expressions of two or more independent works by different agents, and for individual works named by title alone (e.g., works of unknown authorship; monographic series).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the draft Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html].  In particular, consult instruction sheet L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator and Contributor Characteristics, available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled demographic term)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While this field will be used primarily for aggregated works and for individual works named by title alone, there are situations when it will be appropriate for an individual work by one or more named creators. For example, for a musical work composed during childhood or adolescence, it would not be appropriate to record “Enfants” or “Adolescents” as a characteristic in the composer’s authority record. Instead, demographic characteristics applicable to only some of a creator’s works should be recorded in the authority records for those works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Work composed 2003-2005, completed when the composer was 14 years old)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014 $b page 4 de la couverture (Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled term and terms from one controlled vocabulary)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $i – Relationship information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, use subfield $i to record a term designating the nature of the relationship between the demographic groups recorded in the field and the work or expression. Prefer a term from a controlled vocabulary, such as the MARC relator terms, RDA relationship designators, or RBMS relationship designators. Capitalize the first letter of the relationship term and record it in the singular. Follow the relationship term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998- February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record multiple subfield $i’s in a single 386 field. If multiple relationship terms apply to a single group of creators or contributors (e.g., a work with authors and artists from the same demographic group or an expression with editors and translators from the same demographic group), repeat the field, using different relationship terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(A compilation of works by authors and artists from Massachusetts)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different relationship terms apply to some of the creators and contributors (e.g., authors are in one demographic group and artists are in another), repeat the field, using different relationship terms. If the same relationship term applies to more than one demographic group, either repeat subfield $a in one field, or repeat the field. For clarity, when in doubt, repeat the 386 field as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Score containing works by Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler, and Strauss, with lyrics also printed as text in German and English translation)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-11]&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Time Period of Creation =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the time period of creation or origin of a work or expression. The name of the time period may specify or imply a place for which the time period is relevant. It may also specify the name of an event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMFAST, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM subject heading string, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For compilations, the field may be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the works/expressions contained within the compilation, considered collectively (using first indicator value “1”). It may also be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the compilation itself (using first indicator value “2”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR for a collection of Renaissance poetry compiled in the nineteenth century)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 388 field may be used in conjunction with, or instead of, the 046 field. When specific date(s) of creation or origin are not known, or span a long period of time, recording textual chronological terms in the 388 field may be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the indicator value differs, repeat the field. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR with 388 fields containing terms from different vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-07] &amp;lt;!--(2022-11-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX - See From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for another reason, delete any final mark of punctuation in a 4XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging rules (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying NARs or SARs that contain obsolete codes such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all 4XX references require justification; see “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Justifying_variant_access_points|Justifying variant access points]]” in the 670 section of this document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not make a 4XX that normalizes to the same form as another 4XX on the same authority record or a 1XX on any name authority record. See the section “NACO normalization” in the [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf/view DCM Z1] Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice guidelines for RDA:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Record variants found in the manifestation being cataloged:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Use cataloger's judgment;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; No limitation on the number or form of references;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Instead of or in addition to adding variants, consider providing access by adding 37X fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Example showing 378 without a variant for the fuller form of name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Establish additional NARs for the authorized access points needed to support elements used in 4XX variant access points (e.g., parent body associated with subordinate body being established).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally provide a variant form 4XX access point for a former 1XX authorized access point, unless the former authorized access point was egregiously incorrect. See the section “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX$w|Subfield $w – Control subfield]]” for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Use the established form of components in 4XX variant access points, except for non-Latin script variants, which may represent a mixture of scripts or may be entirely in a non-Latin script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally, do not remove variants unless egregiously incorrect (e.g., a non-Latin script variant that does not represent the same person).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If a form found on the manifestation being cataloged includes a variant form of a component of a 4XX variant access point, that form may be used in its entirety as an additional 4XX variant access point, provided that it is not divided into its component parts through the use of subfields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When changing the form of a superordinate body, a geographic name, or a personal name in a 1XX, update all of the existing NARs that use that component in a 4XX, unless the 4XX represents the former authorized access point (e.g., $w/2=e). ''Exception:'' Do not apply this instruction in the case of migrated authority records that have not been re-evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point for a person (100) is changed because the person has changed his or her name, record the earlier form of name in a 400 with $w nne if the variant is valid under RDA instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Name changed upon election as pope)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When an authorized access point for a person (100) is updated to close the date, it is recommended to save the former form with the open date in a 4XX field with $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) based on CIP cataloging is changed because its form on the published resource is different from that on the CIP galley, a 4XX from the previous authorized access point form with subfield $w nne may be added unless the former 1XX form was egregiously incorrect (e.g., the author's date of birth was given as 1775 instead of 1975 in the CIP galley).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) is changed because of a change in cataloging instructions, record the earlier form in a 4XX using $w. If the variant form is a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nne. If the variant form is not a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA; 100 form changed based on usage and dates of birth and death added because 100 was being changed)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429  av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nnea&amp;quot; because the abbreviation &amp;quot;ca.&amp;quot; is not valid for period of activity in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When changing an authorized access point because dates were recorded inaccurately or a cataloger entered a typo in the authorized access point, do not add the inaccurate form as a cross reference.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, providing authorized access points for the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Variant access points may be recorded in any SAR, including those for series-like phrases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the volumes of a multipart monograph have different forms of the common title, use a 4XX reference rather than a 5XX reference for the form of the title not chosen as the title proper of the multipart monograph.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27] &amp;lt;!--(2024-03-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D |''Manual 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX - See Also From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying a NAR that contain codes that are no longer used such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d” or “f,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers applying RDA instructions may use subfield $i in conjunction with subfield $w code “r” for relationship designators. When applying RDA relationship designators in 5XXs, supply terms from Appendix I, J or K; capitalize the initial letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the use of relationship designators and/or $w codes in a specific 5XX field, see the section in this Manual for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the conventions in the authority format for use of subfield $w. Do not supply subfield $w unless a value other than “n” would be appropriate in one of the positions. When supplying subfield $w,&lt;br /&gt;
give it as the first subfield in the field. Supply character positions preceding, but not succeeding, the value, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = to indicate a reference from an earlier authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = to indicate a reference from a later authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = to indicate that a subfield $i or subfield $4 is used to denote relationship information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = to indicate a see also reference for multiple pseudonyms (record also contains a 663 field)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A see also reference tracing (5XX) must not normalize to the same as another see also reference in the same authority record, unless both 5XX fields contain a relationship designator in subfield $i, and&lt;br /&gt;
the texts of the relationship designators are different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500  See Also From Tracing - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” when providing relationship links between a personal name and 1) the name of another person, family, or corporate body or 2) the authorized access point for a work or expression. This technique may also be used to relate authorized access points for works and expressions containing personal names. When using a term from Appendix I, J or K in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording pseudonymous relationships for personal names when only two authority records are involved, catalogers may either 1) use subfield $i and code “r” in subfield $w or 2) use simple see-also references. For more information on these techniques and instructions on recording multiple pseudonyms (i.e., those involving a 663 field), see the [http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/pseud.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA Practice for Creating NARs for Persons Who Use Pseudonyms]. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are reminded that when a variant name (400) and an authorized access point (100) are in conflict an addition should be made to either the 400 or 100 to resolve the conflict (e.g., fuller form of name, date of activity, etc.); the previous practice of changing the 400 to a 500 to resolve the conflict is no longer an option. When catalogers encounter a variant form in a 500 field in the course of updating a NAR, they should resolve the conflict and change the field to a 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510  See Also From Tracing - Corporate Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511  See Also From Tracing - Meeting Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html BAC-BAnQ PS 11.13.1.8] for guidance on relating authority records for ongoing conferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530  See Also From Tracing - Uniform Title =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded &amp;quot;r&amp;quot; when providing relationship links between authorized access points for works or expressions. When supplying RDA Appendix J terms in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551  See Also From Tracing - Geographic Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” until relationship designators for places are developed. (Currently RDA has a placeholder for Appendix L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Series Numbering Peculiarities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#641_Series_Numbering_Peculiarities|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Series Numbering Example =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#642_Series_Numbering_Example|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Series Place and Publisher/Issuing Body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#643_Series_Place_and_Publisher.2FIssuing_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Series Analysis Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#644_Series_Analysis_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Series Tracing Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#645_Series_Tracing_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Series Classification Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#646_Series_Classification_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Complex See Also Reference - Name =&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 663 field contains the explanatory text and authorized access points for relationships between a 100 (established name) and other 100s (established names) that cannot be adequately conveyed by one or more simple see also references generated from 500 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, this situation occurs when a person uses more than two identities, when more than one person shares an identity with one or more others, or when multiple persons use the same pseudonym independent of each other or as a result of some other arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text of the 663 may be adjusted to fit extraordinary situations; however, keep the text as simple as possible, allowing the MARC fields and coding to convey the information desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use the 663 technique to show relationships between corporate bodies or between persons and corporate bodies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is found in the [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA and AACR2 practice for creating NARs for persons who use pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Only two identities ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When only two NARs are created for a person, the NARs are generally connected with 500 see also references and no 663 field. However, when one of the NARs is for a joint pseudonym or a pseudonym used by several persons working independently of each other, the 663 technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== More than two identities - &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; authorized access point and references ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more than two authorized access points are created for the same person, identify a “basic” authorized access point using the 663 field technique. This decision is based on the desire to simplify the reference structure and to assist catalogers in determining which name to use as the subject of biographical or critical works. The “basic” authorized access point should be determined by the predominantly used form of name or, lacking sufficient evidence, by choosing the real name of the person as the “basic” form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the authority record for the “basic” name authority record add 500 see also references with a subfield w coded “nnnc” from all other names used. Justify the 500 in 670 citations according to normal practice. Provide a 663 field listing all the other names with the following text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name] $b [established form of&lt;br /&gt;
name]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On each of the other name authority records, trace a 500 see also reference with subfield $w coded “nnnc” from the “basic” name, justifying that reference in a 670 citation, according to normal practice. Other names may be mentioned in the 670 if it is convenient to do so. Provide a 663 field with the following or similar text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name chosen as the basic heading]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the author uses another new name, create a new name authority record for that name and also add it to the reference structure and 663 listing on the authority record for the “basic” name. References to the new name in the 500 and 663 fields are only added to the “basic” NAR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Joint pseudonyms ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A joint pseudonym represents one identity used by two or more persons working in collaboration with each other. If a person uses a joint pseudonym and another name (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for joint pseudonym:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer.  Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on joint pseudonym NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on joint pseudonym NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonyms used by multiple persons ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When multiple persons working independently of each other use the same pseudonym and one or more other names (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for pseudonym used by multiple persons:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; NAR for first 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;(''Author has a pseudonym used by multiple persons and individual pseudonyms'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#663_Complex_See_Also_Reference-Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Nonpublic general note =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give information of permanent value and general interest that would be useful also to PFAN institutions and outside of PFAN. A representative listing of notes is given below. Generally, wording is recommended but not prescriptive unless specified in the instructions. The separate 667 fields may be given in any order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use OCLC record)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [reason for coding].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date updated].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Used for official language changes'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Appendice 1 in this manual for information and instructions about 667 fields added to authority records as part of a special project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for persons with identities not established ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a person uses two or more identities in manifestations, name authority records may be created for each identity. In the interest of efficiency, catalogers may use a 667 field to list pseudonyms not found in publications instead of creating NARs for these unused pseudonyms. In this case, list the unused pseudonyms in a 667 field following the phrase: “Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This note may also be added to an NAR for a person who has multiple NARs for multiple identities when some of the pseudonyms are not found in publications. In this case, list only the unused pseudonyms in the 667 field, and follow appropriate instructions for the other pseudonyms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is available in the manual, 663 section, and the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/ LC/PCC Practice for Creating NARs for Persons who use Pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for series of conferences, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 field on the NAR for the collective conference when there are authority records for both collective and individual instances of an ongoing conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs and subject usage ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply these instructions when creating new NARs and revising existing NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Add notes indicating subject cataloging usage when an authorized access point is not appropriate for use as a subject heading for these situations:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Heads of state, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This instruction applies to NARS for corporate bodies representing the office when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point for the corporate body. See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Government Officials)] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html RDA 11.2.2.26 (Religious Officials)] for instructions on the corporate bodies. Use this 667 note on the NAR for the corporate body to indicate subject cataloging usage:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [personal name heading].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value “n” in 008/11 and value “b” in 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|008/11]] and [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|008/15]] in this manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Earlier/later linear jurisdictional name changes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;politique d'indexation du RVM&amp;quot; is to assign as a subject access point or as a geographic subdivision only the latest name of a political jurisdiction that has had one or more earlier names, as long&lt;br /&gt;
as the territorial identity remains essentially unchanged (see &amp;quot;Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval&amp;quot;, 5.14.3.1). When creating a NAR with an earlier/later authorized access point for a place in in this situation, catalogers must add a 667 subject usage note to the authority record with the earlier place name and adjust the appropriate 008 fields (008/11 and 008/15).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NARs for fictitious characters'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access points for families are not valid for subject use. In an NAR for a family, 008/11 should be set to value “n” and 008/15 should be set to “b.” Per LAC-BAnQ PS 9.0, when creating an NAR&lt;br /&gt;
for a family add this 667 field noting subject usage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Add this note to a name authority record for a city section indicating that it is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision (see SHM H 835 for more information):&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) NARs for families&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Authorized access points for family names are valid for subject use. For family name authority records that reflect past practice (which considered them invalid for subject use), update the records to set the 008/11 values to “v” and 008/15 values to “a” and delete the following subject usage note:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Non-Latin script reference notes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In an authority record that contains a non-Latin script variant access point, use the 667 field with a note stating: “Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.” If there are multiple non-Latin script variant access points, use a note stating: “Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.” Assign 008/29 value “b” to indicate that the variant access point is not evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Duplicates ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add the following note to a name authority record that has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number from the record to keep&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#667_Nonpublic_General_Note|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Sources found =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of this field is to record information about the name or title represented in the 1XX field. It includes facts that contribute to the identification of the entity, that justify the choice of the name&lt;br /&gt;
or title and any additional elements used to construct the authorized access point (1XX). The information also justifies, as needed, variant forms of the name or title (4XX), other identifying elements (046, 3XX,&lt;br /&gt;
and 678), and clarifies relationships between the 1XX and other entities in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Functions of the 670 field:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information, from sources (e.g., books, phone calls, websites), in support of the choice and form of the authorized access point, variants, and other identifying elements&lt;br /&gt;
* To store information that may be used to break a conflict later&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information on relationships between entities (e.g., a person is the author of a work, a corporate body was absorbed by another corporate body)&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify a person with works in diverse subject areas or of diverse forms&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify different individuals whose access points must remain identical for now (i.e., undifferentiated personal names) &lt;br /&gt;
* To clarify whether different forms of a name or of a title are simply variations or reflect a  change in the name or title&lt;br /&gt;
* To record research required by the current guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
* To facilitate authority and bibliographic file maintenance, i.e., the information in 670 fields aids in making decisions about duplicate authorized access points and misattributions&lt;br /&gt;
* To support machine manipulation based on algorithms using information in the 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, the first 670 field cites the resource for which the authority record is being established, i.e., the resource being cataloged. If the resource being cataloged or consulted provides no information to&lt;br /&gt;
justify the authorized access point, variants, or other elements recorded in the NAR, see the 675 section of this Manual for instructions on citing the resource in a 675 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give subsequent 670 fields in any order, adding new fields after existing ones. Do not routinely delete or change existing 670 fields when adding new 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding subsequent 670 fields, prefer objective, authoritative sources (e.g., an encyclopedia) and those sources that provide firsthand information (e.g., an author's blog). Use sources that provide additional information rather than repeating information that is already present in other 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Best practices for 670 fields:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* In subfield $b, summarize and edit information found as needed to avoid extraneous or repetitive information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Avoid citing subjective information or information that is of dubious value in identifying an entity within a bibliographic context.&lt;br /&gt;
* Exercise caution when recording information about living persons that may be private or controversial in nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 fields in existing NARs may not conform to these guidelines. For example, 670 fields in older NARs may lack subfield $b with justifying information. 670 fields in NARs that were part of a special project may not conform to these guidelines and/or may contain information that seems unusual or incorrect. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' The examples given throughout the following text have various conventions in regard to punctuation and style. These conventions are not prescriptive and should be considered as best practices to facilitate the exchange of information in a shared database environment. Catalogers are expected to use judgment and common sense. Punctuation and style need not be consistent from record to record as long as the information is clear and accurate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format of 670 fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the exception of the eszett (ß or ſʒ) and the euro sign (€), all characters found in the [http://www.loc.gov/marc/specifications/specchartables.html MARC code table] are valid for use in authority records contributed to the Canadiana Authority File ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html voir LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). When pasting data from a website into a 670 field, verify that all characters are valid for use in the record. Some non-valid characters resemble those that are valid. For example, the invalid en dash (–) resembles the valid hyphenminus (-).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a substitution for a symbol that cannot be reproduced is given in brackets (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html LAC-BAnQ PS for 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS for 1.7.5]),  an explanation of that interpolation may also be provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data must be given in romanized form. Normally it is understood that the cataloger has provided the romanization; therefore, when transcribing romanization found in the source, add after it the bracketed&lt;br /&gt;
phrase ['''forme romanisée''']. In such languages as Arabic and Hebrew, where vowels are commonly omitted from the orthography of texts, the cataloger supplies the missing vowels when transcribing data. When&lt;br /&gt;
transcribing text that does include the vowels, add after it in brackets ['''vocalisé'''] or ['''en partie vocalisé'''] as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a cataloger chooses to provide nonroman script variant access points, the 670 $b should contain both the nonroman script transcription(s) found in the source, and the systematically romanized form(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When authority records are created using automated authority generation programs, additional information may be included. This data may also be formatted in a different way than instructed in this document. Generally, this data should be retained as generated to maintain the cost effectiveness of this process unless the data is confusing or causes validation errors. The exceptions to this are names and&lt;br /&gt;
titles for which NARs are created. Follow the instructions in those sections for recording this data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Source citation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The title proper of the resource being cited, complete enough for later identification in an online catalog. Abbreviations and ellipses may be used. Precede a generic or indistinctive title with the creator's name that would begin the authorized access point for the work. If the authorized access point for the work is the same as the title proper plus a qualifier, it may be provided instead of the title proper to avoid ambiguity. When information in subfield $a of a 670 field is provided to justify an authorized or variant access point, follow the additional instructions at ''Recording names and titles''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The date of publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Multipart monographs.'' If the part is the first part, give the date of publication as an open date.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Serials other than monographic series.'' Generally, use a chronological designation instead of a publication date. If there is no designation date, use the numeric designation and the date of publication. Indicate, following the designation statement, if a “surrogate” was used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Integrating resources.'' Apply the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] for source of the title proper of a website. Identify the iteration from which information was taken (e.g., “viewed on”dates for updating websites, update number or release number for updating loose-leafs).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Information found'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $b:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The specific location(s) of the information found. For multipart resources with numbered parts, provide the designation of the part and the location within the part (e.g., v. 6, page 10; map recto, label). Abbreviations or spelled-out forms may be used (e.g., t.p. or title page, v. 6 or volume 6).&lt;br /&gt;
# Information found. Following the location, cite the information found there, enclosed in parentheses. As appropriate, give multiple occurrences of information from the same source following the location of the information. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George ; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' If the authorized access point is built from Cataloguing in Publication data, include &amp;quot;CIP&amp;quot; in the location statement (e.g., formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Takao Tanabe, 2026 : $b page de titre du CIP de BAC (Sherri Shinobu Kajiwara) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Kajiwara, Sherri S.; personne associée au Canada et au Japon)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Internet resources.''' For websites, provide the name of the location within the website if appropriate (e.g., about us; history, timeline; government, executive branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Multiple locations within a resource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' When adding new information to a 670 field created for a CIP, indicate that the new information is from the published resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; personne associée au Canada) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; personne associée au Canada) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs.''' For NARs, generally, use “etc.” to avoid giving more than two locations or a sequence of locations (e.g., p. 316, etc., for sequence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs.''' For SARs, always give each location separately.&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' In post-cataloging authority work without the piece in hand, use the location “ressource non disponible.” If the piece is examined again and the authority record is updated, it is allowable to edit the corresponding 670 field to provide a location and additional forms of series titles as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions from the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may optionally provide a uniform resource identifier (URI) in subfield $u of the 670 citation to link to the cited resource if it contains significant information related to the established entity&lt;br /&gt;
that cannot be cited succinctly in the authority record. Note that use of a URI in the 670 $u does not take the place of the requirement to cite relevant data in subfields $a and $b of the 670 field needed to support the authorized access point (including additions) or variants (this information will continue to be available if the site changes or disappears). However, information found in online sources may be added to the 046 or 3XX fields with the appropriate citations in subfields $v and $u and not repeated in a 670 when that information is not used in the 1XX or a 4XX. If a URI is included in a 670, it must be given in subfield $u. The subfield $u should contain only the URI and no additional data (e.g., do not enclose the URI within parentheses and do not include words in the subfield $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording names and titles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record names or series titles used in the authorized access point or variant access points in full, as they appear in the source, without abbreviation by the cataloger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When preparing an authority record for the text of a law or a subject compilation of laws, if a source being cited contains an official short title or citation title, cite that title, preceded by the term&lt;br /&gt;
“citation title” and its exact location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For corporate name authorities, include in the data cited all the hierarchy required to justify needed variant access points, Use judgment in deciding what information (e.g., subordinate body's name) is extraneous to the record being created and should not be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all of the above categories, if the only presentation of the name or title on the chief source of information is in the bibliographic title given in subfield $a of the 670 citation, repetition of the name in&lt;br /&gt;
subfield $b may be omitted, provided no important information is lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If information about an earlier or later name or title is found in the same source as the name or title in the authorized access point, give all the information in the 670 field. Do not separate the&lt;br /&gt;
information about the earlier or later name or title in order to give it in a 675 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To facilitate international contribution and use of authority records, when recording dates, generally use the spelled out or [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abbreviated] forms for months. (For dates recorded using automated authority generation programs, see the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Format of 670 fields]] section of this document.) Do not change the style of dates in existing records. As a best practice, if a date is not included in subfield $d of the 100 field, consider adding a 046 field if dates are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying variant access points ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justify names or titles given as variant access points by information cited from sources. However, justification is not required in the following cases:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variant access points made on the basis of the cataloger's awareness of different romanizations or orthographies;&lt;br /&gt;
# A variant title derived from the resource being cataloged, from other resources cataloged under the same access point, or from information in standard reference sources;&lt;br /&gt;
# References for authorized access points of corporate bodies reflecting changes due to national orthographic reform, changes in names due to an official language change, or changes involving only a parent body to which the body being established is subordinate.&lt;br /&gt;
# Optional references from AACR2 or pre-AACR 2 forms on SARs and on retrospective NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying other elements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information recorded in the 046, 3XX, or 678 field of the authority record should generally be justified unless it is otherwise obvious from information recorded in subfield $a of a 670 citation or it can&lt;br /&gt;
be easily inferred from other identifying elements recorded, including the preferred name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the 046 field and many of the 3XX fields, a subfield $u or subfield $v recorded in the same field may be used instead of or in addition to a 670. See the 046 section of this document for guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
on subfield $u and subfield $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording other data ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data to record in the authority record. Do not abbreviate or translate attributes such as title of the person ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) that appear in conjunction with personal names in statements of responsibility and that potentially could be used as part of the access point. Other data may be abbreviated or summarized. Generally informally translate other data from foreign languages into English, paraphrasing or summarizing as convenient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data other than forms of the title/phrase to record in the permanent authority record. Numbering and names of issuing bodies are not required but may be given.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special types of citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most commonly occurring citations are listed below. If these are not appropriate, devise others as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When converting information found in obsolete or non-active MARC fields (e.g., 664, 665, 666) into a 670 note, cite Canadiana in a citation such as those provided in the examples below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date of conversion] $b ([data converted from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([data moved from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC and fichier interne de BAnQ [BAnQ internal file]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cite these files in zone 670 as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; usage: [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''NARs''. Give the date of the search, using month names or abbreviations. In parentheses, prefaced by the label '''point d'accès :''' or '''points d'accès :''', give the access point (or access points) found, even if it is the same as the current authorized access point. If it is judged useful to mention one or more variants found in an authority record, give them with the label '''variante :''' or '''variantes :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different forms of the name appear in the bibliographic records, record the access point and also any forms found, including usage identical to the authorized access point. Separate the access point from the other forms, and preface the other forms with an appropriate label, e.g., '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' or '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not normally cite specific bibliographic records or the exact location of the variations found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''SARs.''. Give the date of the search, using month abbreviations, followed by the citation of the bibliographic record. In parentheses give the series statement found in that record.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] LC/NAF has been cited previously under other names, e.g., Base de données LC/NACO and Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] &amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot; for bibliographic records refers to the transcribed forms of name usually found in statements of responsibility of bibliographic records. It may also appear in other parts of the bibliographic record such as a title proper or a quoted note. Because of changes in cataloging instructions, catalogers should be careful when taking information from the publication statement, distribution statement, etc. and the series statement.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (or «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») for bibliographic records refers to a form of the name that may not represent a transcribed form. For example, in AACR2 records, a publisher's name that appeared on the resource as “ABC Publishing Company” might have been recorded in the publication statement as “ABC Pub. Co.” Normally, there is no need to cite such a form in a 670 field..&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citing other files or catalogs.''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an access point is found in a manual catalog or online database, use judgment in creating a 670 citation. Begin the 670 field with a designation of the catalog/database in which these other bibliographic records were found. There is no prescribed formulation of such citations; examples are listed below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, , [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Geographical Names Database'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide the name of the database and the date searched in subfield $a. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;The name of the database may be cited as an acronym or in full.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; In subfield $b provide names given for the entity, feature designation or class (e.g., ADM1, PPL, civil) coordinates, and name of larger place if appropriate. (Other relevant information may also be provided.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording the feature designation or class, it is acceptable to use either the code (e.g., PPL) or its spelled-out form (e.g., populated place). For foreign names, convey the name type (e.g., conventional, approved, short, etc.) within brackets or parentheses after the name. Repeat the brackets or parentheses after each name of this type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Variant names (including non-roman script names) may be given in a single listing as shown below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording the coordinates, it is acceptable to use the DMS format (degrees, minutes, seconds), the DD format (decimal degrees), or both formats.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has opted to record the DMS coordinates)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;The coordinates may be recorded as found. However, if the database displays the coordinates using colons to separate the DMS components and positive and negative values to convey the hemisphere, it is acceptable to translate the coordinates to traditional DMS format if desired. Use the degree sign (not superscript zero) to show degrees, the soft sign (modifier letter prime) for minutes, and the hard sign (modifier letter double prime) for seconds. For coordinates of latitude, a negative value corresponds to the Southern hemisphere. For coordinates of longitude, a negative value corresponds to the Western hemisphere.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has recorded the DMS coordinates as found)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has translated the DMS coordinates to traditional format from: -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic names server&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, consulté le &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;17 août 2022&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;$b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;22:53:01, 121:02:54&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Non-bibliographic sources'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the non-bibliographic source, the date, and the information. The source can be given specifically (« Lettre de l'auteur » , « Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur » , etc.) or in general terms (« Information de l'auteur » , « Information de l'éditeur » , etc.).  When noting a specific source, it isn't necessary to show how information was received, e.g, that letter was received via FAX rather than via mail. When a telephone call to a publisher/agency/organization is cited, usually give the name of the group called, rather than the title or name of the person contacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''Citations for republication SARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an SAR is for a republication only, begin the 670 with the term for the type of republication and a slash. Do not include a 670 for a republication if the SAR covers both the original and one or more republications. Do not add additional 670 fields for other types of republications cataloged later. (See 64X Series Treatment, Republications for more information about republications.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations for undifferentiated NARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on existing 670 citations found in undifferentiated NARs, see in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32 Undifferentiated Personal Name]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-11-21]&amp;lt;!--(2025-11-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#670_Source_Data_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Title related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 672 field may be used to record a title that is related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in an authority record for a corporate body, 672 fields may be used to record titles for which the corporate body is a creator, issuing body, or subject. The primary purpose of the 672 field is to document that there is a relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 672 field does not negate the need to use the 670 field for the title for which the authority record is being created, nor to use the 670 fields to justify information recorded in the 1XX and 4XX such as preferred and variant forms of name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 672 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 672 fields when inputting new 672 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 672 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 fields with titles proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Cervantes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with preferred title)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with variant title for the work associated with the Catalan expression of the work and date of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Remainder of title'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a title proper, subfield $b may be used to record the other title information or parallel title proper to eliminate confusion for titles needing further identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains other title information)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains parallel title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $f – Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $f is used to record a date appropriate to the entity recorded in $a (e.g., use date of work for a preferred title and date of publication for a title proper). Do not use brackets in $f when recording a supplied date of publication or production. Do not give a date of distribution, date of manufacture, or copyright date in $f.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for work:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of  work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for expression:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of French expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for manifestation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of publication of manifestation of Polish expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Bibliographic record control number'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $w is used to record bibliographic record control numbers (e.g., 001, 010, and 016 fields in bibliographic records). It is recommended that catalogers provide $w when readily available. Subfield $w should be repeated for each instance of a separate control number (e.g., an LCCN and an OCLC record number should be provided in separate subfields). For further instructions on inputting record control numbers, see the subfield $w section within the CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MARC 21 Format for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' subfield $w should only be used with titles for the manifestation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Title not related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 673 field may be used to record a title that is not related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. For example, in an authority record for a person, the 673 may be used to record the titles of works written by a different person with a similar name. The primary purpose of the 673 field is to document that there is no relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 673 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 673 field does not negate the need to use the 675 field as described in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#675_Sources_not_found|675 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 673 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 673 fields when inputting new 673 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 673 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 673 field. For specific subfields in the 673 field, apply the same instructions given in the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#672 Title related to the entity|672 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961- &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with different Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)### 47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with the National Gallery in London)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT NOT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #4 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Although the National of Art is not the creator, it is the publisher so this title should be record in a 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-25]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#673_Title_Not_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Sources not found =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:''Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In April 2012 this field was redefined as: “Citation for a consulted source in which no information is found related in any manner to the entity represented by the authority record or related entities.” PFAN catalogers are not required to change any existing 675 fields simply to meet this new definition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a new NAR always cite the resource being cataloged in the 675 field if the item being cataloged provides no information related in any manner to the entity represented in the authority record. Also cite in the 675 field other sources consulted that contain no information, when that very lack of information is considered worth recording for future users of the authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, it is not always necessary to include in the 675 field every reference source consulted; use judgment in deciding what sources are important enough to retain in the permanent record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#675_Source_Data_Not_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Biographical or historical data =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When supplying biographical or historical data in a 678 note field, construct the note in concise but complete sentences, keeping in mind that the information will be used in public displays.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In anticipation of LAC building the file in WMS and the batch addition of authority records from other institutions, the contents of all 665 fields in LAC and BAnQ records have been moved to 678 field. The original 665 field may have contained instructions on the access point(s) to be used as author and subject heading :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec) ; Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec) ; Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec) ; Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Delete these instructions in 678 field if they have been retained. Consider adding a 667 field as a subject heading if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification of field 678'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, a 678 field must be justified by a 670 field. If it is not justified and its contents are appropriate for a biographical or historical note, retain the field and add a 670 note citing the internal file of the institution that provided 678 field as follows :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [ [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|abréviation de la bibliothèque participante]] ], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the record has been modified after being migrated, the record history must be consulted to determine who originally added zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Existing Field 678 which will be deleted as the content is not appropriate for a biographical note.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;670 field added:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not repeat this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#678_Biographical_or_Historical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Heading linking entries =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' This section does not apply to the 781 field used in 151 name authority records to provide geographic subdivision information. See Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#781_Subdivision_linking_entry|781 section]], for instructions for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of an established heading linking entry 7XX field in an NAR or SAR is limited to recording the authorized access point from a national bibliography or in a separate national authority file or a separate equivalence.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form of heading in a 7XX field may match the 1XX form or a 4XX form in the same authority record. This is appropriate when the 7XX field form represents a form found in a different authority file than Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source of the heading in the 7XX field may be specified using either second indicator value “7” with subfield $2 or a second indicator value that specifies the source. For access points coming from the LC/NAF file, prefer the second indicator with the value &amp;quot;0&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-17]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Subdivision linking entry =&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN optional practice:'' For a geographic name heading that may also be used as a geographic subdivision, determine the form in which the heading is to be used as a geographic subdivision following the guidelines in instruction sheet [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 of the ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Enter the text of the geographic subdivision form in a 781 field with second indicator 0. For a geographic heading that is used directly, such as a country, enter the data in a single $z subfield. For a geographic heading that is used indirectly through a larger geographic entity, such as a city, enter the data in two successive $z subfields. Use no other subfields. Make no changes to values in bytes of the 008.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a record for a geographic name heading that is not appropriate for use as a subject added entry (008/15 value Ab@), such as the earlier name of a jurisdiction that has undergone a linear name change, for example, '''Ceylon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a NAR for a place name that is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision, such as a city section, for example, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Add a 781 field to an existing record when making any other change to it. If revising an existing record that contains a 667 field subject cataloging usage note indicating the proper geographic subdivision form, delete the 667 field and replace it with a 781 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-11]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#781_Subdivision_Heading_Linking_Entry-Geographic_Subdivision|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 1: Undifferentiated entities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 2: Special projects =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This appendix presents information regarding some special projects involving authority records created or modified in the Canadiana authority file. The records created or modified within the context of these special projects may include some fields or some values not normally attributed according to current cataloguing policies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instructions regarding changes to these records are given here in order to indicate whether these fields and values are to be kept or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 1. Records created or revised as part of the UQAM records revision project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is an authority records revision project, led by UQAM. These records have been created or modified in Canadiana by UQAM's cataloguing “traitement documentaire” team. These records were then revised by two librarians and a library technician, also at UQAM. This project ended March 31, 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records may be modified, like any other name authority records, according to current cataloguing policies.&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers update these records, they should:&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the value of position Leader/17 to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (full record);&lt;br /&gt;
* Delete field 667 &amp;quot;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;quot;;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Evaluate the record as they would evaluate any batch-loaded record. However, as the record is being revised, the authorized access point may be modified, if it does not follow the current PFAN practices (for instance, birth or death dates may be added, if available and if omitted from the access point).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 2. Records created and revised as part of the Universities Mentoring Project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General Information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This mentoring project &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;that, as of February,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; allows university libraries to create name authority records that are revised by another university.  Authority records created or modified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;mentored libraries&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; are revised by library technicians &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;at the mentoring university.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abbreviation, e.g. UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;, etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records should not be modified.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15] &amp;lt;!--(2022-07-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145114</id>
		<title>PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145114"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T13:23:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Types particuliers de citations */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par D. Paradis, 12 septembre)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par N. Mainville, 26 février)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours| 24 h (En cours d'édition par A. Dunnett, BAC, 24 mars)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Guide}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:PFAN - Name Authority Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  Notices d'autorité de nom ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notices d'autorité de collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--En octobre et novembre 2021, les passages du Guide concernant les collections ont été cachés par souci de cohérence avec la décision de ne pas permettre la création ni la révision des notices d'autorité de collections. DP 1er novembre 2021--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 008 Éléments de données de longueur fixe =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Règles de catalogage descriptif ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée de quelque façon que ce soit, évaluer la notice d'autorité et la modifier pour qu'elle soit conforme à RDA, en modifiant le codage de la zone 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1 : Si une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée uniquement par la modification ou l'ajout d'une zone 5XX, on encourage fortement les catalogueurs, bien qu'il n'y ait pas d'obligation, à évaluer la notice et à la modifier selon RDA, en changeant le 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2 : Les autorités de noms indifférenciés codées 008/10 «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;», peuvent être modifiées de manière à enlever une ou plusieurs identités afin de créer des notices différenciées conformes à RDA. Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié à cette fin, la notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié mise à jour doit conserver le code 008/10 existant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-24]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F10 R.C3.A8gles de catalogage descriptif|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Système de vedettes-matière / Thésaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone 008/11 de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) dans la zone 008/11 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) dans la zone 008/11, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/15 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;dans la zone 008/11 des&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples de noms de collectivités ne pouvant être utilisés comme vedettes-matière :''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis.  Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran.  Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois.  Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique.  Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; margin-left: 0px; padding-left: 15px; padding-top: 10px; padding-bottom: 10px; text-indent: 0px; line-height: 1.0; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;tats-Unis. Pr&amp;amp;eacute;sident (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;glise catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Church of England. Dioc&amp;amp;egrave;se de Londres. &amp;amp;Eacute;v&amp;amp;ecirc;que (1675-1713 : Compton)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F11 Syst.C3.A8me de vedettes-mati.C3.A8re .2F Th.C3.A9saurus|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Utilisation de la vedette – vedette-matière secondaire ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Généralités&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de famille&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Appropriée) dans la zone 008/15 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) dans la zone 008/15, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/11 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Contexte'' : Pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, les catalogueurs descriptifs peuvent être amenés à établir un point d'accès autorisé pour le nom de la collectivité pour la fonction ainsi qu'un nom personnel pour le titulaire de la fonction. La politique d'indexation est d'attribuer seulement le nom personnel, et non le nom de la collectivité, comme point d'accès matière. Cette politique a été établie à des fins de colocalisation (voir [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). Par exemple, le point d'accès :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
peut être utilisé dans le catalogage descriptif comme point d'accès, mais en indexation seul le nom personnel serait utilisé comme point d'accès matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) aux notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F15 Utilisation de la vedette - vedette-mati.C3.A8re secondaire|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Nom de personne non différencié ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser le code 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (non différencié) dans une notice d'autorité de nom RDA. Attribuer la valeur 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes. Utiliser le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les familles, les collectivités et les lieux. Pour les œuvres et les expressions, attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» si le point d'accès commence par un nom de personne, sinon attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par le passé, la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 permettait de coder les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes comme non différenciées lorsque le catalogueur n'avait aucun moyen acceptable de différencier plusieurs personnes portant le même nom privilégié. Depuis sa création, le PFAN a suivi ces directives pour les notices d’autorité de noms de personnes :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas créer de nouvelles notices non différenciées codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Toutes les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes codéees RDA doivent être différenciées.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas ajouter une nouvelle identité à une notice d'autorité de nom de personne existante codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&lt;br /&gt;
* Appliquer plutôt [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] pour créer un point d'accès autorisé unique pour la personne, en utilisant des éléments additionnels appropriés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mise à jour des notices indifférenciées existantes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' Pour une entité donnée, si la seule notice trouvée est une notice indifférenciée (dont la zone 008/32 est codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;») versée par une université et comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;», ne pas l'utiliser.  Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité pour l'entité.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler à BAC la notice indifférenciée en communiquant son numéro de contrôle OCLC par courriel à l'adresse pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca et en mentionnant comme objet : Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice indifférenciée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante, en particulier une notice qui a été importée du LC/NAF, comprenne des paires de zones 670 utilisées pour regrouper l'information sur chaque personne visée par la notice d'autorité de nom. La première zone 670 de chaque paire est une zone 670 d'identification qui comprend un terme décrivant la relation de la personne avec le titre cité dans la deuxième zone 670 de la paire. Les données de la zone 670 d'identification sont enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a et sont mises entre crochets. La deuxième zone 670 de la paire est une zone 670 de citation qui comprend les éléments de données normaux dans la citation d'une ressource cataloguée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Auteur de Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Point d'accès supplémentaire pour Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Éditeur intellectuel de Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut aussi arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante comprenne une note 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée et identifiant la ou les ressources associées aux autres personnes portant le même nom. Dans ce cas, la notice ne comprend généralement pas de zones 670 pour les personnes autres que la première qui a été identifiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque de l'information pour distinguer une personne dans une notice d'autorité existante indifférenciée provenant de BAC ou de BAnQ est trouvée :&lt;br /&gt;
* Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour cette personne avec des informations distinctives et ajouter une indication que la personne était auparavant sur une notice indifférenciée (voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées|Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées]]&amp;amp;nbsp;», ci-dessous). Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour zone 670 de citation se rapportant à cette personne depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire. Ne pas transférer la zone 670 d'identification vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
* Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* Si la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée n'est pas supprimée parce que plusieurs identités restent, supprimer les zones 670 qui se rapportent à la personne maintenant représentée sur la nouvelle notice d'autorité (c’est-à-dire, dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, supprimer à la fois la zone 670 d’identification et la zone 670 de citation) et, le cas échéant, éditer ou supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée pour supprimer la mention de cette personne.&lt;br /&gt;
* S'il reste plus d'une identité dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée et qu'il n'y a pas suffisamment d'information pour créer de nouvelles notices d'autorité de nom pour chaque nom, laisser la notice d'autorité de nom codée RCAA2.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d’autorité de nom indifférenciée de BAnQ n’est pas supprimée, doit être modifiée ultérieurement et qu’elle ne comporte pas de numéro Canadiana, lui en attribuer un.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de faciliter le traitement automatisé des notices d'autorité (par exemple, appariement, liaison), lorsqu'il ne reste qu'une seule identité dans une notice d'autorité de nom de personne indifférenciée (c'est-à-dire lorsque les autres identités sont désambiguïsées et enlevées), procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'unique identité restante. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette identité, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;». Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Dans la nouvelle notice :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le cas échéant, transférer la citation 670 se rapportant à l'unique identité restante depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;S'assurer que la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée contient seulement de l'information se rapportant à l'unique identité restante (par exemple, les zones 670). Le cas échéant, supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, ajouter la notice 667 suivante pour garantir qu'une notice d'autorité de nom ne sera pas créée en double :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAC''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana] $z [Numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée dérivée du LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'autrice d'Esperanza :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAnQ''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a [aucun numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour Christian Bergeron (Sociologue) :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1056D8391F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian $c (Sociologue)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : 1063E5020F.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'individualisation des épreuves de la vie dans la modernité avancée, 2013 : $b page de titre (Christian Bergeron; Doctorat en sociologie; Université Laval)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 $b (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. Il reste deux identités non différenciées dans la notice :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1063E5020F [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter une note 667 à une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour identifier le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité dans laquelle l'information sur cette personne a déjà été enregistrée :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices codées comme indifférenciées qui ne représentent en fait qu'une seule identité ====&lt;br /&gt;
À l'occasion, il arrive qu'une notice soit codée comme étant indifférenciée, mais que de nouvelles recherches indiquent qu'en fait la notice ne représente qu'une seule identité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut également arriver qu’on soupçonne que la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été codée par erreur dans la zone 008/32. Dans ces situations, procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter une zone 667 à la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée indiquant qu'elle a été signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'identité. Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette personne, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple d'une notice indifférenciée versée qui ne représente qu'une seule identité''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [aucun numéro Canadiana, utiliser le numéro OCLC de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==008/33 Niveau de l'établissement==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''provisoires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Coder une notice d'autorité de nom comme provisoire (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») si le point d'accès autorisé ne peut être formulé de manière satisfaisante en raison d'informations insuffisantes. Si les informations nécessaires deviennent disponibles ultérieurement, réévaluer la notice d'autorité de nom et la mettre à jour pour qu'elle soit pleinement établie (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;»). En aucun cas, il ne faut créer une notice d'autorité de niveau provisoire avec un point d'accès qui entre en conflit avec une notice d'autorité de nom existante selon les règles de normalisation du PFAN.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Régions administratives spéciales de Hong Kong et de Macao'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Étant donné qu'il n'est pas certain que Hong Kong et Macao continueront à avoir deux langues officielles, coder toutes les notice d'autorité de nom pour les organismes gouvernementaux dans ces deux endroits, au niveau de la région administrative spéciale et en dessous, comme provisoires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;»), quelle que soit la langue dans laquelle le point d'accès autorisé a été établi. Si une forme dans la deuxième langue officielle devient disponible, ajouter cette forme comme variante de point d'accès plutôt que de réviser le point d'accès autorisé existant. Consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] et l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html énoncé de politique connexe] pour obtenir des instructions sur le choix de la langue du nom privilégié. Noter que cette politique concernant le statut provisoire ne s'applique pas aux organismes non gouvernementaux.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Informations supplémentaires pour les participants au PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN peuvent créer des notices provisoires dans les deux situations exceptionnelles suivantes :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'a pas l'expertise linguistique nécessaire pour établir le point d'accès autorisé comme une notice d'autorité pleinement établie; cela comprend les situations où la bibliothèque ne dispose pas de sources de référence adéquates pour la recherche ou lorsque le catalogueur n'est pas sûr de la forme grammaticale correcte du point d'accès.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'est pas en mesure, en raison de ressources limitées ou d'autres contraintes, de compléter le travail pour les autorités en relation ou de déterminer la structure de renvois appropriée qui est requise pour les notices d'autorité pleinement établies.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''préliminaires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité préliminaires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») sont généralement le résultat de projets rétrospectifs. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs du PFAN procèdent régulièrement à des mises à jour des notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils apportent d'autres modifications à la notice d'autorité. À cause de cette exigence de mise à jour, les participants au PFAN sont priés de communiquer avec le Comité des normes avant d'entreprendre des projets qui pourraient entraîner l'ajout massif de notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» au fichier d'autorité Canadiana.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Au besoin, les catalogueurs peuvent mettre à jour les notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils travaillent avec des notices de collectivités antérieures/postérieures, bien que le ou les points d'accès dans les notices mises à jour ne soient pas utilisés dans la base de données bibliographiques locale. À l'occasion, les catalogueurs peuvent avoir besoin de créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom sans avoir de ressource en main, par exemple pour un nom de collectivité antérieur ou postérieur, en utilisant des renseignements provenant de sources de référence, ou pour un point d'accès basé sur des renseignements trouvés dans la sous-zone «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» de la zone 245 de notices bibliographiques, lorsqu'ils résolvent des conflits entre notices d'autorité de noms. Ne pas coder ces notices d'autorité de noms occasionnelles comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaires&amp;amp;nbsp;» .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, les éléments de données des collections doivent être vérifiés sur la publication et les notices d'autorité de collections doivent être codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (complet). Dans le travail d'autorité post-catalogage, il est permis de créer des notices d'autorité de collections sans la ressource en main; ces notices sont codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» (préliminaire). Lorsqu'une publication appartenant à la collection a été examinée et que la notice d'autorité préliminaire a été revue et mise à jour au besoin, mettre la notice d'autorité de collection au niveau complet.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F33_Niveau_de_l.27.C3.A9tablissement |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Source du catalogage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quelle que soit la valeur codée à l'origine dans cette zone, ne pas changer cette valeur lors de la mise à jour d'une notice, sauf si la valeur d'origine est incorrecte. La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;blanc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F39_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 Numéro de contrôle de la notice d'autorité de BAC = &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 016 est obligatoire lorsque le catalogueur crée, met à jour ou utilise une autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité et lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante sans numéro Canadiana, vérifier dans le LC/NAF si la même entité est représentée par une autorité et si celle-ci comporte un numéro Canadiana. Noter que le point d'accès autorisé dans le LC/NAF pourrait avoir une forme différente de celui dans Canadiana. Si la notice dans le LC/NAF comporte un numéro Canadiana, ajouter ce numéro dans la notice Canadiana. Si le numéro se termine par le code de langue E, le changer pour le code F. S'il n'y a pas de code de langue, ajouter le code F à la fin du numéro.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante avec numéro Canadiana, vérifier que le code de langue F est présent à la fin de la zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Doublons'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» un numéro Canadiana. Une fois qu'une notice d'autorité pour une entité donnée a été créée et qu'un numéro Canadiana lui a été attribué, ne pas changer les données dans cette notice pour représenter une entité DIFFÉRENTE. Par exemple, ne pas changer une notice d'autorité pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Dupont, Jean&amp;amp;nbsp;» en une pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Tremblay, Marie&amp;amp;nbsp;» (sauf si le nom de la personne a changé).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, demander à faire supprimer la notice (voir [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dures_sur_les_doublons|Procédures sur les doublons]]). NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il y a une zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, enregistrer le numéro Canadiana qui s'y trouve dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il n'y a pas de zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, en ajouter une en utilisant le numéro 0000X0000F. Ne pas enregistrer ce numéro dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée. Dans ce Guide, voir aussi «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Doublons|Doublons]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, supprimer la notice. NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer le numéro Canadiana de la notice supprimée dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice conservée.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Notices versées en lot partiellement modifiées'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité versées en lot qui sont modifiées partiellement selon la [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]] comportent le numéro Canadiana 1111X1111F. Ce numéro temporaire est ajouté pour permettre l'enregistrement de la notice en attendant que celle-ci soit évaluée pour s'assurer qu'elle répond aux normes du PFAN. Ce numéro doit être remplacé par un numéro unique lorsque la notice est évaluée et que la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;» est supprimée.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 Numéro international normalisé des publications en série =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'ISSN chaque fois qu'il est fourni dans le document en main, dans les notices bibliographiques analytiques ou dans la notice bibliographique pour la collection cataloguée dans son ensemble; sinon, enregistrer l'ISSN est facultatif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on sait que des ISSN distincts ont été attribués à différents formats d'une collection représentée par une seule notice d'autorité, il est préférable d'enregistrer dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 022 l'ISSN qui est l'ISSN de liaison (ISSN-L) pour ces différents formats. Enregistrer les ISSN pour les formats spécifiques dans des zones 667 distinctes, en suivant ce modèle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre d'une publication a changé, il est important de s'assurer que l'ISSN figurant sur la publication appartient au nouveau titre et non au titre précédent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un ISSN incorrect peut être indiqué dans une zone 667 (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;L'ISSN 1122-3344 n'est pas un ISSN valide pour cette publication&amp;amp;nbsp;»).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Autre numéro ou code normalisé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les lignes directrices des [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf ''NACO 024 Best Practices Guidelines'']. En règle générale, limiter à cinq le nombre de zones 024 dans une notice d'autorité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 024 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les identifiants codés dans la zone 024 des notices d'autorité du PFAN. Lorsqu'une zone 024 est présente dans une notice &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;d'autorité&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; qui fait l'objet d'une suppression (par exemple, dans le cas d'un doublon), les catalogueurs doivent transférer le contenu de la zone dans la notice qui doit être conservée. Lorsque deux notices d'autorité sont regroupées en une seule et que chacune des notices comporte une zone 024 différente, les catalogueurs doivent inclure les deux zones 024 dans la notice conservée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Données mathématiques codées sur les documents cartographiques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des pays, provinces, États, comtés'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les coordonnées des limites extérieures (rectangles de délimitation ou polygones) doivent généralement être utilisées avec des entités géographiques telles que des pays, des provinces, des États et des comtés pour identifier les coordonnées de l'entité. Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées en degrés/minutes/secondes, en degrés décimaux, en minutes décimales et/ou en secondes décimales. Les styles ne doivent pas être mélangés dans une même zone 034, mais la zone peut être répétée pour représenter les différents styles (voir ci-dessous pour les utilitaires de conversion); l'ordre des zones 034 lorsque les deux styles sont donnés n'a pas d'importance. Pour faciliter la réutilisation des coordonnées dans les applications géographiques, il faut employer le point et non la virgule comme signe décimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés/minutes/secondes''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux''' : enregistrement sous la forme hddd.dddddd (hémisphère-degrés.degrés décimaux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux avec plus et moins''' : enregistrer sous la forme +-ddd.dddddd (hémisphère[+/-]-degrés.décimaux) («&amp;amp;nbsp;+&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour N et E, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour S et W; le signe plus est facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple avec +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple sans le signe plus facultatif)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Minutes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmm.mmmm (hémisphère-degrés-minutes.minutes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Secondes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss.sss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes.secondes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons doivent généralement être enregistrées comme des points centraux plutôt que comme des limites extérieures. Pour la zone 034, la longitude et la latitude qui forment l'axe central sont enregistrées deux fois pour définir le point central (c'est-à-dire que les contenus des sous-zones $d et $e sont identiques et les contenus des sous-zones $f et $g sont identiques).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés/minutes/secondes)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux avec plus/moins)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Outils de conversion des coordonnées'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les institutions membres du PFAN sont encouragées à fournir des degrés/minutes/secondes et des degrés décimaux lorsqu'ils sont disponibles. De nombreux outils de conversion sont disponibles sur le Web pour dériver les uns des autres. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $2 a été définie pour l'enregistrement de la source des codes d'information sur les coordonnées - les sources couramment utilisées sont disponibles dans : [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CDC.html/view ''Codes sources pour les données cartographiques'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une citation de la source dans la zone 670 n'est pas nécessaire si la seule information provenant de la source est enregistrée dans la zone 034; une citation dans la zone 670 doit être faite si nécessaire pour enregistrer des informations en plus des coordonnées, telles que les variantes de nom, la hiérarchie, la période d'applicabilité, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#034_Donn.C3.A9es_math.C3.A9matiques_cod.C3.A9es_sur_les_documents_cartographiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 Numéro de contrôle de système =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#035_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_syst.C3.A8me |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Source du catalogage =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs doivent consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour les instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité nouvelles ou existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Langue de catalogage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $b fre ajoutée automatiquement par WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $d – Organisme responsable des modifications'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $d [code MARC 21] est ajoutée automatiquement par WMS lorsque la dernière sous-zone MARC $d dans la zone 040 n'est pas déjà celle de l'institution qui a modifié la notice. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $e – Règles de description'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on ajoute manuellement la sous-zone $e, ajouter la sous-zone après la sous-zone $b et avant la sous-zone $c. Il n'est pas nécessaire de déplacer la sous-zone $e à cette position si elle est déjà présente ailleurs dans le 040 ou si elle est ajoutée par une macro ou un gabarit. Lorsque la zone fixe 008/10 (Règles de catalogage descriptif) est changée pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Autre), la sous-zone $e rda est automatiquement ajoutée par le système.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#040_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Code d'authenticité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Cette zone se retrouve dans les notices d'autorité utilisées par BAC. Ne pas modifier ou supprimer cette zone lorsque le code CaOONL figure dans la 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les catalogueurs autres que ceux de BAC dérivent une notice à partir d'une notice de BAC contenant une zone 042, ils doivent s'assurer de supprimer cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les catalogueurs doivent ajouter la zone 042 $a nlc dans Canadiana chaque fois qu'ils créent, révisent ou dérivent une notice d'autorité. Ce code identifie le fichier «&amp;amp;nbsp;virtuel&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'autorité nationale canadienne qui est divisé en deux bases de données (LC/NAF et Canadiana).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-08]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#042_Code_d.27authenticit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Code de région géographique &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 043 peut seulement être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms géographiques (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone b – Code local de région géographique et Sous-zone $2 – Source du code local'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les lieux situés au Québec, les participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser la sous-zone $b pour enregistrer un code local tiré de la liste ci-dessous et représentant la région administrative du Québec où le lieu est situé. Ce code est formé du code de région géographique « n-cn--- » et d'un code local de sous-entité de deux lettres (p. ex., qa) qui identifie la région administrative et remplace les deux derniers caractères du code « n-cn--- » (p. ex. « n-cn-qa »). La sous-zone $b est enregistrée à la suite de la sous-zone $a et est suivie par la sous-zone $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Dates spéciales codées =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Lors de l'encodage de l'information sur la date, donner l'information la plus complète possible sur la date lorsque celle-ci est facilement disponible (la date dans la zone 046 peut être plus précise qu'une date utilisée dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2e_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Lors&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la révision des notices d'autorité existantes, enregistrer les dates dans la zone 046 même si le point d'accès lui-même n'a pas de dates dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d, lorsque l'information est facilement disponible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des dates dans la zone 046, utiliser la norme Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) dans tous les cas, sauf pour les siècles; fournir les dates en utilisant le modèle aaaa, aaaa-mm ou aaaa-mm-jj. Voir le tableau d'exemples dans l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Pour les spécifications complètes de l'EDTF, voir [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophoniste)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Blues around the clock, 1945 : $b étiquette (Johnny Hicks, saxophone ténor)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web Discogs, consulté le 27 mai 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; saxophoniste ténor qui a joué avec Tab Smith dans les années 1940)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de dates avant Jésus-Christ dans la zone 046, faire précéder les chiffres d'un trait d'union (signe moins). Comme il n'y a pas d'an zéro dans le calendrier de l'ère commune, il faut soustraire une année de la date réelle avant Jésus-Christ; par exemple, l'an 50 av. J.-C. est enregistré comme suit : -0049.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ##  $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement d'un siècle dans la zone 046, utiliser les deux premiers chiffres de l'intervalle de cent ans (par exemple, utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;16&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour représenter le 17&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle, 1600-1699).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Noter que le 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;er&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle apr. J.-C. est représenté par la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;00&amp;amp;nbsp;» et que les siècles av. J.-C. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sont précédés d'&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;un trait d'union &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(signe moins)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; avant les chiffres (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-04&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le 5&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle av. J.-C.). Un siècle approximatif (par exemple, activité environ 12&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle) ne peut pas être enregistré dans la zone 046.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Répétabilité'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;La zone 046 est répétable, mais les sous-zones de la zone 046 utilisées pour enregistrer les dates ne le sont pas. En général, une seule zone 046 avec des dates conformes à la norme EDTF devrait être suffisante. Cependant, les dates de siècles suivent la norme ISO 8601 et non la norme EDTF. Lors de l'enregistrement de dates de siècles en plus de dates plus précises, il faut donc répéter la zone 046.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates divergentes'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, les ressources consultées peuvent présenter des dates divergentes (par exemple, des dates de naissance ou de décès divergentes pour une personne ou des dates de début ou de fin divergentes pour une collectivité). Dans ces situations, la zone 046 doit refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'enregistrer toutes les dates divergentes en utilisant la zone 046, ni d'enregistrer une zone 046 pour chaque ressource consultée. L'évaluation des dates divergentes doit généralement avoir pour résultat une seule zone 046, contenant la ou les dates que le catalogueur juge les plus exactes pour représenter l'entité. Le catalogueur peut décider d'enregistrer ou non la ou les dates divergentes dans la zone 046 et il n'est pas nécessaire que la ou les dates enregistrées dans la zone 046 correspondent exactement à celle ou celles choisies pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;De même, toute date ajoutée au point d'accès autorisé devrait refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates, enregistrées conformément aux instructions de RDA et des énoncés de politique du PFAN. On peut considérer qu'une date qui prédomine dans les ressources consultées est la plus appropriée pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé. Si aucune date ne prédomine, le catalogueur peut décider d'utiliser le format «&amp;amp;nbsp;approximativement aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa?&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa ou aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans le point d'accès autorisé. Dans certains cas, des dates correspondant à la période d'activité de la personne (RDA 9.19.1.5) peuvent être préférables.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 157 av. J-C. comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce que c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 1907 comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Même exemple que ci-dessus illustrant une décision différente que le catalogueur aurait pu prendre concernant l'enregistrement de la sous-zone $f de la zone 046)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;La zone 046 étant basée sur des informations provenant de sources multiples, la justification ne peut être formulée avec précision dans une sous-zone $v/$u à la fin d'une zone 046. Les dates divergentes doivent être enregistrées dans des zones 670. Si une notice existante comporte une sous-zone $v/$u comme justification d'une zone 046 et que cette zone 046 est mise à jour comme décrit ci-dessus, il faut supprimer la sous-zone $v/$u et convertir la justification en une zone 670 si les dates divergentes ne sont pas déjà justifiées dans des zones 670 existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, il peut être nécessaire d'effectuer un calcul pour déterminer les dates à enregistrer dans la zone 046 et le point d'accès autorisé. De tels calculs peuvent produire des dates incertaines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Si les ressources consultées ne fournissent que la date de décès de la personne et son âge (en années) au moment du décès, comme cela se voit souvent dans les notices nécrologiques, l'année de naissance de la personne correspondra à l'une de deux années consécutives. Pour calculer ces années, il faut d'abord soustraire l'âge de l'année de décès, puis utiliser l'année ainsi obtenue et l'année précédente comme les deux possibilités pour l'année de naissance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a soustrait 75, l'âge au décès, de 1994, l'année du décès; l'année obtenue, 1919, et l'année qui la précède, 1918, représentent les deux années de naissance possibles)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si des dates non-grégoriennes figurent dans les ressources consultées, la conversion de ces dates en dates grégoriennes peut produire des dates incertaines. Il faut utiliser les dates du calendrier grégorien dans la zone 046 et dans le point d'accès autorisé. Il se peut qu'une même date dans un calendrier non-grégorien corresponde à l'une de deux dates grégoriennes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La date de 1346 dans le calendrier hégirien correspond à 1967 ou 1968 dans le calendrier grégorien.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de la norme de la date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter la sous-zone $2 edtf, sauf après un siècle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zones $q – Date de fondation, $r – Date de cessation,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Début de la période d'activité et $t – Fin de la période d'activité'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer les dates associées à un congrès, etc., ponctuel ou à une occurrence isolée dans une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] et [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), dans les sous-zones $s et $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer la date de fondation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) et la date de cessation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) d'une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]), si cette information est connue, dans les sous-zones $q et $r.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'utilisation des sous-zones $s et $t pour le début et la fin de la période d'activité dans les zones 368 et 370-376, voir les directives présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les instructions suivantes représentent la pratique du PFAN sur l'enregistrement des sources d'information dans les sous-zones $u et $v des zones où elles sont définies, et/ou dans la zone 670 :&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046$u$v&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Les zones 670 doivent être utilisées pour appuyer l'information utilisée comme une partie du point d'accès dans les zones 1XX et 4XX.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pour les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $v est facultatif si la même information/source est déjà citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;utiliser la sous-zone $v si l'information/source n'est pas citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $u est facultatif et celle-ci doit toujours être précédée de la sous-zone $v.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser une zone 670 si c'est nécessaire pour justifier l'information enregistrée dans d'autres zones pour lesquelles les sous-zones $u et $v ne sont pas définies ou sont définies différemment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des données dans la sous-zone $v (Source d'information) des zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381, suivre les mêmes principes de base pour la citation que ceux qui s'appliquent actuellement pour la zone 670, sous-zone $a (Citation de la source).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Fournir une information précise sur la citation (numéro de page, sous-page d'un site Web) dans la sous-zone $v si, selon le jugement du catalogueur, cette plus grande précision est nécessaire pour trouver l'information à l'intérieur de la source citée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information dans les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 est sous la même forme que celle trouvée dans la source, il n'est pas nécessaire de la citer. Si l'information enregistrée dans ces zones est sous une forme différente de celle dans la source, utiliser 670 $b (Information trouvée).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les sources matérielles :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information provient d'une source matérielle (par exemple, un livre imprimé, un support numérique amovible), la sous-zone $v doit contenir suffisamment d'information pour qu'un catalogueur puisse trouver la ressource citée dans un catalogue ou une base de données bibliographiques. Ceci peut généralement se limiter au titre propre et au nom de l'éditeur ou à la date. Si cette combinaison n'est pas unique, la citation du titre peut être précédée du nom du créateur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les ressources en ligne :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fournir suffisamment d'information pour permettre de trouver la ressource via un moteur de recherche. Inclure soit le titre et la date de publication (si c'est une ressource publiée formellement, tel un livre numérique), soit une description appropriée du document et la date d'accès (pour une ressource moins formelle). Facultativement, inclure la sous-zone $u.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-03]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Cote de la Library of Congress =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#050_Cote_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 Indice de la classification de la Library of Congress &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes pour enregistrer les indices de la classification LC des auteurs littéraires individuels, y compris les auteurs de littérature de jeunesse. Elle peut aussi être utilisée '''exceptionnellement''' dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes et de collectivités pour enregistrer les indices de biographie dans la fourchette ML410-429 de la classification LC lorsque le choix de l'indice ou du Cutter n'est pas évident. La zone 053 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il ne faut pas enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000 dans la zone 053. Pour l'utilisation des indices de la classe PS8000 dans les notices d'autorité de noms, voir la section [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]] de ce Guide. Une notice d'autorité pour un auteur littéraire canadien peut contenir à la fois une zone 053 et une zone 065.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Cote de Bibliothèque et Archives Canada =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#055_Cote_de_Biblioth.C3.A8que_et_Archives_Canada |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Autre indice de classification &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 065 sert à enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000. La zone 065 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $2 et une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [Code MARC de l’institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de l'indice'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour indiquer que l'indice provient de la classe PS8000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#065_Autre_indice_de_classification |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Cote de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#082_Cote_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Indice de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#083_Indice_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Cote de publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#086_Cote_de_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Indice de classification d'une publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#087_Indice_de_classification_d.27une_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Vedette – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participant au programme PFAN sont invités à consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour obtenir des instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité existantes ou nouvelles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer la ponctuation de fin de zone dans la zone 1XX à moins qu'elle ne fasse partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou qu'elle ne soit requise par les instructions de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Afin de minimiser l'impact de la maintenance de la base de données sur les notices bibliographiques associées et/ou les notices d'autorité associées, les catalogueurs sont priés de s'abstenir d'apporter des changements qui ne sont pas essentiels aux zones 1XX.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour le titre propre d'une monographie en plusieurs parties, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choix du titre propre d'une collection pour une monographie :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte plus d'une forme de mention de collection, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource porte une mention de collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture dans la même source, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte des pages de titre pour la collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2915.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Tenir compte de l'espacement et des changements dans la typographie au moment de déterminer où le titre de la collection commence et se termine. Consulter également [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Établissement d'un point d'accès pour une collection :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Déterminer le choix du point d'accès autorisé en fonction de l'instruction [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] et des énoncés de politique de BAC/BAnQ pour cette instruction.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclure du point d'accès autorisé les renseignements suivants inclus dans la mention de collection dans la notice bibliographique de la partie composante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'article initial dans les sous-zones $a, $t, $n et $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les compléments de titre;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;la mention de responsabilité;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les titres parallèles;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;les désignations numériques/chronologiques.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter un ou plusieurs qualificatifs entre parenthèses, le cas échéant, conformément aux énoncés de politique de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour obtenir des instructions sur la conversion d'une notice d'autorité de nom en notice d'autorité de collection, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Should an SAR be made?&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Vedette – Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour les familles'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;3&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une famille. Voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Les ajouts au nom sont contenus dans une seule paire de parenthèses séparées par des deux-points. &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Le terme pour le type de famille est ajouté après le nom et il est enregistré dans la sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $d (date) suit le terme pour le type de famille.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $c est utilisée pour un lieu associé à une famille et suit la date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $g est utilisée pour un membre illustre d'une famille. Donner le point d'accès autorisé pour la personne tel que trouvé dans la 1XX de la notice d'autorité de nom sans garder aucun codage de sous-zone interne.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour des personnes'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] fournit des directives sur l'emplacement des mots indiquant une relation (par exemple, Jr.) et le MARC définit la sous-zone $q comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme développée du nom de personne.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) La sous-zone $d (date) doit toujours être le dernier élément dans une zone 100 sauf si le terme (Esprit) est ajouté au nom. Ajouter $c (Esprit) comme dernier élément d'une zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) En général ajouter la sous-zone $c avant la sous-zone $q lorsqu'on ajoute aussi des mots, des chiffres, etc., indiquant une relation. (Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5.] pour le traitement des noms portugais)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MAIS&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
3) Pour les situations exceptionnelles, par exemple lorsque la sous-zone $a ne contient qu'un nom de famille ou qu'un prénom ou que le nom inclut un préfixe, etc., consulter le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#100_Vedette_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Contenu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 336 peut seulement être utilisée pour les notices d'autorité représentant des expressions. La zone 336 est toujours suivie d'une sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;rdacontent/fre&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser les termes fournis dans [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html RDA 6.9.1.3]. La liste des termes est également disponible dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Code du type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si on enregistre une sous-zone $b à la place ou en plus d'une sous-zone $a, utiliser les codes fournis dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''] du MARC 21.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#336_Contenu |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Autres attributs associés à des personnes ou des collectivités =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé pour les termes dans les sous-zones $a, $b et $c. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a, $b et $c. Lorsque les termes dans les sous-zones $a et $b ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer de professions ou d'occupations dans la sous-zone $c (Autre désignation). La profession ou l'occupation peut être enregistrée dans la zone 374.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les titres de royauté, de noblesse ou de rang ecclésiastique ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) dans la sous-zone $d dans la forme utilisée dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'une période et Sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#368_Autres_attributs_associ.C3.A9s_.C3.A0_des_personnes_ou_des_collectivit.C3.A9s |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Lieu associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de juridictions ou d'autres lieux, utiliser la forme trouvée dans Canadiana ou, à défaut, celle trouvée dans le RVM, en enregistrant la source dans la sous-zone $2. La forme du nom de lieu utilisée dans la zone 370 peut différer de la forme du nom de lieu ajoutée à un nom privilégié de lieu ou à un point d'accès construit selon les instructions de RDA ou des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie du nom d'une localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut une autre désignation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de lieu)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié du lieu plus vaste)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom de lieu ajouté à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Autre nom de lieu dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité pour le lieu n'existe pas dans Canadiana ni dans le RVM, il n'est pas nécessaire d'en créer une pour enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370. Enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370 selon les instructions de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ, en consultant les sources appropriées et en ajoutant des éléments additionnels (par exemple, le type de juridiction) afin d'éviter les conflits. Ne pas ajouter de sous-zone $2 si aucune notice d'autorité n'a été créée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom du lieu associé a changé, le nom du lieu qui s'appliquait à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré à la place ou en plus de la forme actuelle du nom. Il n'est pas nécessaire de suivre les politiques d'indexation et d'utiliser uniquement la forme la plus récente du nom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemples :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne née dans la ville de Salisbury avant que son nom ne devienne Harare; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme de nom qui s'appliquait au moment de la naissance de la personne)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne résidant dans la ville de Milan pendant la Renaissance, avant la formation du pays moderne de l'Italie; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme actuelle du nom pour le pays)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de lieux qui ne sont pas des juridictions, préférer les noms provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM et identifier la source dans la sous-zone $2. Si le nom ne provient pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, l'enregistrer dans la zone 370 sans ajouter de sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zone $c – Pays associé&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;En général, ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $c pour enregistrer les lieux qui ne sont pas des entités souveraines. Ces lieux peuvent être enregistrés dans la sous-zone $f ou dans d'autres sous-zones selon le cas.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La Martinique est un département français d'outre-mer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, si une entité souveraine comporte (ou comportait auparavant) un ou plusieurs pays constitutifs, n'importe lequel des pays constitutifs associés à la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré dans la sous-zone $c en plus ou à la place de l'entité souveraine plus vaste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à la Grande-Bretagne qui a des liens étroits avec le Pays de Galles; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Union soviétique, en particulier au Kirghizistan; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à Aruba, un pays constitutif des Pays-Bas; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer les Pays-Bas)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Inde avant son indépendance de la Grande-Bretagne; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer la Grande-Bretagne)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms d'entités des Premières Nations au Canada ainsi que les tribus indiennes («&amp;amp;nbsp;Indian tribes&amp;amp;nbsp;») reconnues par le gouvernement des États-Unis comme des entités juridiques peuvent être incluses dans la sous-zone $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Enregistrer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre dans la zone 370, sauf s'il s'agit simplement d'un lieu de publication ou d'un autre lieu associé à une manifestation (auquel cas utiliser la zone 643, le cas échéant). Bien que le «&amp;amp;nbsp;lieu d'origine&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'une œuvre en série puisse être le même que le lieu de publication de l'œuvre pour laquelle la notice d'autorité de collection (ou la notice bibliographique de publication en série) a été créée, faire preuve de jugement pour distinguer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre d'un lieu de publication qui n'est pas réellement lié à l'œuvre elle-même.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Adresse =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Selon le jugement du catalogueur, fournir une adresse si les informations sont facilement disponibles et n'ont pas déjà été enregistrées dans la sous-zone $e (Lieu de résidence, de sièges sociaux) de la zone 370.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Dans les cas où la sous-zone $a n'est pas enregistrée, inclure au minimum la sous-zone $m (Adresse de courriel) ou la sous-zone $b (Ville). &lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas enregistrer les adresses physiques &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou courriels&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; des personnes vivantes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les informations reliées à l'adresse lors de la mise à jour d'une notice contenant une adresse.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer plusieurs adresses, avec ou sans plages de dates, dans des zones 371 distinctes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Adresse de courriel'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $m doit contenir uniquement une adresse de courriel. Ne pas ajouter d'adresse Internet pour la 1XX dans cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#371_Adresse |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Domaine d'activité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée pour le domaine d'activité, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une entité provenant de Canadiana est utilisée comme domaine d'activité, enlever tout codage de sous-zone qui n'est pas autorisé dans la zone 372.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Domaine d'activité dans la 372 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel que la plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Zones 372 avec un terme provenant du RVM et un terme de vocabulaire non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'un période et la sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Groupe associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le fichier d'autorité Canadiana ou le fichier LC/NAF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Dans la zone 373, le codage de sous-zone n'est pas employé pour les collectivités subordonnées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom d'un groupe associé a changé, enregistrer le ou les noms du groupe qui s'appliquaient à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates). Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec des sous-zones $2 et des dates :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec différentes sources de vocabulaires :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $ s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $ t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : même si le format MARC ne spécifie pas de forme de date dans ces sous-zones, la pratique suivante est recommandée par souci de cohérence. Enregistrer les dates selon le calendrier grégorien dans le format AAAA. Si une date plus précise est nécessaire, considérer la possibilité de l'enregistrer dans une autre zone (par exemple, 670, 678). Il n'est pas nécessaire de reformuler les dates déjà inscrites dans les notices d'autorité pour se conformer à cette pratique. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Profession =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;6.1.3 pour des instructions sur l'enregistrement de la profession ou de l'occupation comme élément. Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.19.1.6 pour des instructions sur l'utilisation d'un terme indiquant la profession ou l'occupation dans un point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : répéter la zone si nécessaire pour plus de clarté.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du terme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les codes enregistrés dans la sous-zone $2 de la zone 374 peuvent provenir soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-TIO.html/view ''Codes sources pour les termes de profession''], soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-VM-C.html/view ''Codes sources pour les vedettes-matière et termes d'indexation''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#374_Profession |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Sexe de la personne =&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Ne pas utiliser cette zone dans les nouvelles notices d'autorité. Lorsqu'une notice existante doit être modifiée pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer toute occurrence de la zone 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Renseignements sur la famille =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Personnalité importante de la famille'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement du nom d'un membre illustre d'une famille dans la sous-zone $b, utiliser la forme du nom de la personne telle que mentionnée dans la sous-zone $g de la zone 100 dans la notice d'autorité pour la famille. Les codages internes de sous-zones ne doivent pas être inclus dans la sous-zone $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Langue associée =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier les codes de langues plutôt que des termes, en utilisant la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21. La sous-zone $l (Nom de la langue) doit être utilisée uniquement pour fournir des informations non disponibles dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/LNG-C.html ''Liste des codes de langue''] du MARC 21. Enregistrer plusieurs codes de langue seulement si la personne ou la collectivité fait usage de plusieurs langages dans ses publications, communications, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;À titre facultatif, enregistrer un ou plusieurs codes de langue ISO 639-3 dans une zone 377 supplémentaire. Cette pratique est particulièrement recommandée lorsqu’un code ISO 639-3 permet d’identifier une langue plus précisément que le code MARC. Pour plus d’informations, voir les [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $2 n'est pas requise lorsque la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 est utilisée pour représenter la langue (le deuxième indicateur «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» mentionne déjà la source). Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent utiliser une autre source de codes de langue peuvent ajouter une zone 377 supplémentaire en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur et en mentionnant la source utilisée dans la sous-zone $2 . Cette source doit cependant provenir d'une des sources fournies dans la liste intitulée [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CTL.html ''Codes sources pour les codes et termes de langue''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Code ISO 639-3 pour la langue Achi : acr. Code pour cette même langue, laquelle fait partie des langues maya, dans la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 : myn)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Forme développée du nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer la forme développée du nom dans la zone 378 lorsque l'information est facilement disponible, même si l'information est déjà présente dans la zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#378_Forme_d.C3.A9velopp.C3.A9e_du_nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Genre de l'œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM ou le RVMGF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'enregistrement du genre de l'œuvre comme élément dans les notices d'autorité de collections représentant des œuvres (et non des expressions), voir l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.3.1.3.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#380_Genre_de_l.27.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Autres caractéristiques distinctes d'une œuvre ou d'une expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée pour enregistrer les éléments RDA Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) et Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Les autres caractéristiques distinctives des expressions qui sont spécifiques aux œuvres musicales (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4–6.18.1.6]) peuvent être aussi enregistrées dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Numéro de Franklin enregistré comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version enregistrée comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut être approprié que certains des termes enregistrés pour une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression soient enregistrés dans la zone 381 ou dans une autre zone MARC pour laquelle il n'y a pas d'élément RDA correspondant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, une collectivité (tel un éditeur) utilisée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ou d'une œuvre peut être enregistrée soit dans la zone 373 (Groupe associé), soit dans la zone 381, soit dans les deux zones. ''Note :'' Le codage de sous-zone pour les collectivités subordonnées n'est pas utilisé dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme groupe associé et comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA n'a pas d'élément particulier pour les lieux associés aux expressions, mais la zone 370 sous-zone $f (Autre lieu associé) et la sous-zone $g (Lieu d'origine de l'œuvre ou de l'expression) peuvent être utilisées dans les notices d'autorité pour les expressions. Dans certains cas, des lieux associés aux œuvres ou aux expressions sont considérés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression selon RDA et peuvent être enregistrés dans la zone 370, dans la zone 381 ou dans les deux zones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Lieux utilisés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre juridique; enregistrés dans les zones 370 et 381)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'élément RDA lieu d'origine d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.5]) dans une zone 370 (voir la section [[#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]] de ce Guide).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression a été utilisée dans un point d'accès autorisé et est aussi enregistrée comme élément dans une zone 3XX, utiliser la zone 381 pour enregistrer une autre caractéristique distinctive. À titre facultatif, enregistrer aussi la même information dans une autre zone 3XX appropriée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#381_Autres_caract.C3.A9ristiques_distinctes_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_ou_d.27une_expression |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en utilisant les termes du thésaurus ''Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM'' (RVMMEM). Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en appliquant les instructions de RDA ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6]) et les ÉP de BAC-BAnQ associés. ''Note :'' La zone 382 peut également être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité d'expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :''' Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère. Si c'est jugé important pour l'identification et l'accès, ajouter une zone 382 additionnelle qui ne répond pas aux présentes lignes directrices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-04-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#382_Distribution_d.27.C3.A9x.C3.A9cution_d.27une_.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numéro d'identification d'une œuvre &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou d'une expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; musicale =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible. Créer des zones 383 distinctes pour les différents systèmes de numérotation associés à une même œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#383_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27identification_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Tonalité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible pour les œuvres. En cas de doute, ne pas enregistrer. Ne pas enregistrer pour les expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Caractéristiques du public cible =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer le public cible d'une œuvre ou d'une expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices  du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a : Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Termes provenant de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé et terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-07-17]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Caractéristiques du créateur ou du collaborateur &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer les caractéristiques démographiques d'un ou plusieurs créateurs ou contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression, notamment pour enregistrer les caractéristiques communes à un groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression. Cette zone sera généralement utilisée dans des notices d'autorité établies pour des agrégats par regroupement matérialisant deux ou plusieurs expressions de deux ou plusieurs œuvres indépendantes créées par des agents différents, ainsi que pour les œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre (par exemple, les œuvres d'auteurs inconnus ou les collections de monographies). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Personnes âgées $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Terme démographique non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bien que cette zone soit principalement utilisée pour des œuvres agrégées et pour des œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre, il existe des situations où il est également approprié de l'utiliser pour une œuvre individuelle d'un ou plusieurs créateurs nommés. Par exemple, pour une œuvre musicale composée pendant l'enfance ou l'adolescence d'un créateur, il ne serait pas approprié d'enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;Enfants&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Adolescents&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme caractéristiques dans la notice d'autorité du compositeur. Au lieu de cela, les caractéristiques démographiques applicables uniquement à certaines des œuvres d'un créateur doivent être enregistrées dans les notices d'autorité établies pour ces œuvres.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Œuvre composée en 2003-2005, achevée lorsque le compositeur avait 14 ans)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Termes issus de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;''(Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau; terme non contrôlé et termes provenant du même vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $i – Information sur la relation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il est possible d'utiliser la sous-zone $i pour enregistrer un terme désignant la nature de la relation entre les groupes démographiques enregistrés dans la zone et l'œuvre ou l'expression. Préférer un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que les termes de relation du format MARC ou les indicateurs de relation RDA. Mettre une majuscule à la première lettre du terme de relation et utiliser la forme au singulier. Faire suivre le terme de relation par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998-February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer plusieurs occurrences de la sous-zone $i dans une même occurrence de la zone 386. Si plusieurs termes de relation s'appliquent à un seul groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs (par exemple, une œuvre réunissant des auteurs et des artistes du même groupe démographique ou une expression dont les éditeurs et les traducteurs appartiennent au même groupe démographique), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Compilation d'œuvres d'auteurs et d'artistes du Massachusetts)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différents termes de relation s'appliquent à différents créateurs et contributeurs (par exemple, si les auteurs font partie d'un groupe démographique et les artistes d'un autre), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents. Si le même terme de relation s'applique à plus d'un groupe démographique, répéter la sous-zone $a dans une même zone ou répéter la zone. Pour plus de clarté, en cas de doute, répéter la zone 386 autant que nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Partition comprenant des œuvres de Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler et Strauss, ainsi que les paroles imprimées sous forme de texte, en allemand et en traduction anglaise)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-12]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Période associée à la création =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine d'une œuvre ou d'une expression. Le nom de la période peut préciser ou sous-entendre un lieu pour lequel la période de temps est pertinente. Il peut aussi préciser le nom d'un événement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM ou le RVMFAST. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les compilations, la zone peut être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine des œuvres/expressions contenues dans la compilation, considérées collectivement (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur). Elle peut également être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine de la compilation elle-même (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;2&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour un recueil de poésie de la Renaissance compilé au XIXe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 388 peut être utilisée en conjonction avec ou à la place de la zone 046. Lorsque la ou les dates précises de création ou d'origine ne sont pas connues ou qu'elles s'étendent sur une longue période, il peut être utile d'enregistrer des termes chronologiques textuels dans la zone 388.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour une œuvre anonyme du XIVe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si la valeur de l'indicateur diffère, répéter la zone. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom avec zones 388 contenant des termes provenant de différents vocabulaires)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour une autre raison, supprimer tout signe de ponctuation à la fin d'une zone 4XX sauf s'il fait partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou est requis par les règles de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'est pas nécessaire de justifier tous les renvois 4XX; voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès|Justification des variantes de point d'accès]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 670 de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas faire un renvoi 4XX qui se normalise sous la même forme qu'une autre zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité ou une zone 1XX dans toute autre notice d'autorité de nom. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;NACO normalization&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratiques à privilégier pour le catalogage selon RDA :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Enregistrer les variantes trouvées dans la manifestation cataloguée :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Utiliser le jugement du catalogueur;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Il n'y a pas de limite quant au nombre ou à la forme des renvois;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Au lieu ou en plus d'ajouter des variantes, envisager de fournir un accès en ajoutant des zones 37X.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Exemple montrant une zone 378 sans une variante pour la forme développée du nom :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Établir des notices d'autorité de noms supplémentaires pour les points d'accès autorisés nécessaires pour soutenir les éléments utilisés dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX (par exemple, la collectivité supérieure associée à la collectivité subordonnée qui doit être établie).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, fournir une variante de point d'accès 4XX pour un ancien point d'accès autorisé 1XX, sauf si l'ancien point d'accès autorisé est manifestement incorrect. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#4XX$w|Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour plus d'information.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Utiliser la forme établie des composantes dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX, à l'exception des variantes en écriture non latine, qui peuvent présenter un mélange d'écritures ou être entièrement dans une écriture non latine.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, ne pas supprimer des variantes sauf si elles sont manifestement incorrectes (par exemple, une variante en écriture non latine qui ne représente pas la même personne).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si une forme trouvée dans la manifestation cataloguée inclut une variante de forme d'une composante d'une variante de point d'accès en 4XX, cette forme peut être utilisée dans son intégralité comme une variante de point d'accès supplémentaire en 4XX, à condition que des sous-zones ne soient pas utilisées pour diviser ses parties constitutives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on change la forme d'une collectivité hiérarchiquement supérieure, d'un nom géographique ou d'un nom de personne dans une 1XX, mettre à jour toutes les notices d'autorité existantes qui utilisent cette composante dans une zone 4XX, sauf si la 4XX représente l'ancien point d'accès autorisé (par exemple, $w/2=e). Exception : Ne pas appliquer cette instruction dans le cas des notices d'autorité migrées qui n'ont pas été réévaluées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est modifié parce que la personne a changé de nom, enregistrer l'ancienne forme du nom dans une zone 400 avec $w nne si la variante est valide selon les instructions de RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après l'élection comme pape)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est mis à jour pour fermer la date, il est recommandé d'enregistrer l'ancienne forme avec la date ouverte dans une zone 4XX avec $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) basé sur le catalogage CIP est modifié parce que sa forme sur la ressource publiée est différente de celle sur la demande CIP, une zone 4XX pour l'ancienne forme du point d'accès autorisé avec la sous-zone $w nne peut être ajoutée sauf si l'ancienne forme 1XX est manifestement incorrecte (par exemple, la date de naissance de l'auteur a été donnée comme étant 1775 au lieu de 1975 dans la demande CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) est modifié en raison d'un changement dans les instructions de catalogage, enregistrer l'ancienne forme dans une zone 4XX en utilisant $w. Si la variante de forme est un renvoi valide selon les instructions actuelles de RDA, utiliser $w nne. Si la variante de forme n'est pas un renvoi valide selon les instructions RDA actuelles, utiliser $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante n'est pas valide selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nne&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante est valide selon RDA; le changement de la forme en 100 est basé sur l'utilisation du nom et les dates de naissance et de mort ont été ajoutées parce que la 100 a été changée)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429 av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que l'abréviation «&amp;amp;nbsp;ca&amp;amp;nbsp;» n'est pas valide pour une période d'activité selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé est corrigé parce que des dates ont été enregistrées de manière inexacte ou qu'un catalogueur a introduit une faute de frappe dans le point d'accès autorisé, ne pas faire de renvoi à la forme incorrecte. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche des notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel des collections et la création et la tenue à jour des notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des variantes de point d'accès peuvent être enregistrées dans toute notice d'autorité de collection, y compris celles pour des phrases analogues à des collections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si les volumes d'une monographie en plusieurs parties portent des formes différentes du titre commun, faire un renvoi 4XX plutôt qu'un renvoi 5XX pour la forme de titre non choisie comme titre propre de la monographie en plusieurs parties.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w. Lorsqu'on utilise les indicateurs de relation RDA dans les zones 5XX, utiliser les termes des annexes I, J ou K; mettre une majuscule au premier terme et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour de l'information sur l'utilisation des indicateurs de relation et/ou les codes $w dans une zone 5XX spécifique, voir la section de ce Guide concernant cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les conventions du format autorités en ce qui concerne l'utilisation de la sous-zone $w. Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $w sauf si une valeur autre que «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» est appropriée dans l'une des positions. Lorsqu'on utilise la sous-zone $w, enregistrer la sous-zone comme première sous-zone de la zone. Fournir les positions de caractères qui précèdent la valeur mais pas celles qui lui succèdent, par exemple,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé antérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé ultérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = pour indiquer qu'une sous-zone $i ou une sous-zone $2 est utilisée pour donner de l'information sur la relation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = pour indiquer un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour des pseudonymes multiples (la notice comprend aussi une zone 663)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» (5XX) ne doit pas se normaliser sous la même forme qu'un autre renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la même notice d'autorité, sauf si les deux zones 5XX contiennent un indicateur de relation dans la sous-zone $i et que les textes des indicateurs de relation sont différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre un nom de personne et 1) le nom d'une autre personne, d'une famille ou d'une collectivité ou 2) le point d'accès autorisé pour une œuvre ou une expression. Cette technique peut également être utilisée pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres et des expressions et contenant des noms de personnes. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe I, J ou K dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on enregistre des relations entre noms de personnes impliquant des pseudonymes et que seulement deux notices d'autorité sont en cause, les catalogueurs peuvent soit 1) utiliser la sous-zone $i et le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w ou 2) utiliser des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» simples. Pour plus d'information sur ces techniques et des instructions sur l'enregistrement de pseudonymes multiples (c'est-à-dire ceux qui requièrent une zone 663), voir la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rappel aux catalogueurs : Lorsqu'une variante de nom (400) et un point d'accès autorisé (100) sont en conflit, il faut faire un ajout à la zone 400 ou à la zone 100 pour résoudre le conflit (par exemple, une forme développée du nom, une date d'activité, etc.); la pratique antérieure consistant à changer la zone 400 en 500 pour résoudre le conflit n'est plus une option. Lorsque les catalogueurs trouvent une variante de forme dans une zone 500 au cours de la mise à jour d'une notice d'autorité de nom, ils doivent résoudre le conflit et modifier la zone en 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de collectivité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de réunion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8] pour des directives sur les relations entre les notices d'autorité pour des séries de conférences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Titre uniforme =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés pour des œuvres ou des expressions. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe J dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $i avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w tant que les indicateurs de relation pour les lieux ne seront pas développés. (RDA a prévu un espace pour l'annexe L.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Traitement de collection – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 640 Dates de publication et/ou indication séquentielle de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#640_Dates_de_publication_et.2Fou_indication_s.C3.A9quentielle_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Exemple de numérotation de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#642_Exemple_de_num.C3.A9rotation_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Lieu et éditeur de la collection/organisme de publication =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#643_Lieu_et_.C3.A9diteur_de_la_collection.2Forganisme_de_publication |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Usage en matière d'analyse de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#644_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_d.27analyse_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Usage en matière de rappel de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#645_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_rappel_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Usage en matière de classification de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#646_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_classification_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Renvoi complexe «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 663 comprend le texte explicatif et les points d'accès autorisés pour les relations entre une zone 100 (nom établi) et d'autres zones 100 (noms établis) qui ne peuvent pas être correctement exprimées par un ou plusieurs renvois simples générés à partir de zones 500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Généralement, cette situation se produit lorsqu'une personne utilise plus de deux identités, lorsque plus d'une personne partage une identité avec une ou plusieurs autres personnes, ou lorsque plusieurs personnes utilisent le même pseudonyme indépendamment les unes des autres ou en raison d'un autre arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le texte de la zone 663 peut être adapté pour répondre à des situations exceptionnelles; toutefois, il faut garder le texte aussi simple que possible et laisser les zones et le codage MARC communiquer l'information souhaitée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la technique de la zone 663 pour établir des relations entre collectivités ou entre personnes et collectivités.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Seulement deux identités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque seulement deux notices d'autorité de noms sont créées pour une personne, les notices d'autorité de noms sont généralement reliées par des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500, sans aucune zone 663. Toutefois, lorsque l'une des notices d'autorité de noms est établie pour un pseudonyme commun ou un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment les unes des autres, la technique de la zone 663 est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Plus de deux identités - point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» et renvois ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plus de deux points d'accès autorisés sont créés pour la même personne, identifier un point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» en utilisant la technique de la zone 663. Cette décision est fondée sur le désir de simplifier la structure de renvois et d'aider les catalogueurs à déterminer le nom à utiliser comme sujet des œuvres biographiques ou critiques. Le point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» doit être déterminé par la forme de nom qui prédomine dans l'usage ou, en l'absence de preuves suffisantes, en choisissant le nom réel de la personne comme forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Dans la notice d'autorité pour la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», ajouter des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour tous les autres noms utilisés. Justifier les renvois en 500 par des zones 670 selon la pratique normale. Fournir une zone 663 énumérant tous les autres noms avec le texte suivant (celui-ci peut être modifié pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom] $b [forme établie du nom]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans chacune des autres notices d'autorité de noms, ajouter un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», en justifiant ce renvoi par une zone 670, selon la pratique normale. D'autres noms peuvent être mentionnés dans le 670 s'il est pratique de le faire. Fournir une zone 663 avec le texte suivant ou un texte similaire (le texte peut être ajusté pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom choisie comme vedette de base]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque l'auteur utilise un autre nouveau nom, créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour ce nom et l'ajouter à la structure de renvois ainsi qu'à la liste de la zone 663 dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;». Les renvois au nouveau nom dans les zones 500 et 663 sont ajoutés seulement dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes conjoints ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un pseudonyme conjoint est une identité utilisée par deux ou plusieurs personnes travaillant en collaboration. Si une personne utilise un pseudonyme conjoint et un autre nom (tel que trouvé dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes utilisés par plusieurs personnes ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment l'une de l'autre utilisent le même pseudonyme et un ou plusieurs autres noms (tels que trouvés dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisée par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(L'auteur a un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes et des pseudonymes individuels)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Note générale non destinée au public =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Donner des informations de valeur permanente et d'intérêt général qui seraient également utiles aux autres institutions du PFAN ou à celles qui n'y participent pas. Une liste représentative des notes est donnée ci-dessous. En général, le libellé est recommandé, mais n'est pas prescriptif, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions. Les zones 667 distinctes peuvent être données dans n'importe quel ordre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [raison de l'encodage].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date de la mise à jour].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Utilisée pour les changements de langue officielle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Annexe_2_:_Projets_sp.C3.A9ciaux|Annexe 2]] de ce Guide pour des informations et des instructions sur les zones 667 ajoutées aux notices d'autorité dans le cadre d'un projet spécial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes dont certaines identités ne sont pas établies ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une personne utilise deux ou plusieurs identités dans les manifestations, des notices d'autorité de noms peuvent être créées pour chaque identité. Dans un souci d'efficacité, les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser une zone 667 pour énumérer les pseudonymes non trouvés dans les publications au lieu de créer des notices d'autorité de noms pour ces pseudonymes inutilisés. Dans ce cas, énumérer les pseudonymes inutilisés dans une zone 667 après l'expression : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette note peut aussi être ajoutée dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne qui a plusieurs notices d'autorité de noms pour plusieurs identités lorsque certains des pseudonymes ne sont pas trouvés dans des publications. Dans ce cas, énumérer seulement les pseudonymes inutilisés dans la zone 667 et suivre les instructions appropriées pour les autres pseudonymes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, […] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la section [[#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom|663]] de ce Guide ainsi que dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les séries de congrès, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter une zone 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour une série de congrès lorsqu'il y a des notices d'autorité autant pour la série que pour les occurrences isolées du congrès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appliquer ces instructions lors de la création de nouvelles notices d'autorité de noms et lors de la révision de notices d'autorité de noms existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Ajouter des notes indiquant l'utilisation en indexation lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé n'est pas approprié pour utilisation comme vedette-matière dans ces situations :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Chefs d'État, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette instruction s'applique aux notices d'autorité de noms pour les collectivités représentant la fonction lorsque le nom du titulaire est inclus comme partie du point d'accès autorisé de la collectivité. Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Dignitaires gouvernementaux)] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html 11.2.2.26 (Dignitaires religieux)] pour les instructions sur les collectivités. Utiliser cette note 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour la collectivité pour indiquer l'utilisation en indexation :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [vedette du nom de la personne].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi les sections [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Changements linéaires entre noms antérieurs et ultérieurs d'une juridiction'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La politique d'indexation du RVM est d'employer comme point d'accès matière ou comme subdivision géographique uniquement le dernier nom d'une juridiction politique qui a eu un ou plusieurs noms antérieurs, aussi longtemps que l'identité territoriale demeure essentiellement la même (voir ''Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval'', 5.14.3.1). Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom ayant un point d'accès autorisé antérieur/ultérieur pour un lieu dans cette situation, les catalogueurs doivent ajouter une note 667 sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom antérieur du lieu et modifier les zones 008 appropriés (008/11 et 008/15).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Notices d'autorité de personnes fictives'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les points d'accès autorisés pour les personnes fictives ne doivent pas être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, la zone 008/11 doit être codée avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» et la zone 008/15 doit être codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;». Selon l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 9.0, lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, ajouter cette zone 667 pour indiquer l'utilisation comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une partie d'une ville, en indiquant qu'il n'est pas approprié de l'utiliser comme une subdivision géographique :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) Notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les points d'accès autorisés pour les noms de familles peuvent être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Pour les notices d'autorité de noms de familles qui reflètent la pratique antérieure (qui interdisait de les utiliser comme vedettes-matière), mettre à jour les notices pour attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et supprimer la note sur l’utilisation comme vedette-matière suivante :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes pour les renvois en écriture non latine ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans une notice d'autorité qui comprend une variante de point d'accès dans une écriture non latine, utiliser la zone 667 avec une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.&amp;amp;nbsp;» S'il y a plusieurs variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, utiliser une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» à la zone 008/29 pour indiquer que la variante de point d'accès n'a pas été évaluée. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Doublons&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Doublons ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice à conserver&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Source des données =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone a pour but d'enregistrer des informations sur le nom ou le titre représenté dans la zone 1XX. Elle comprend des renseignements qui contribuent à l'identification de l'entité et qui justifient le choix du nom ou du titre de même que tout élément supplémentaire utilisé pour construire le point d'accès autorisé (1XX). Les informations consignées justifient également, le cas échéant, des variantes de forme du nom ou du titre (4XX), d'autres éléments d'identification (046, 3XX et 678), et clarifient les relations entre la 1XX et les autres entités représentées dans le fichier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Fonctions de la zone 670 :'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations, provenant de sources (par exemple, livres, appels téléphoniques, sites Web), à l'appui du choix et de la forme du point d'accès autorisé, des variantes de point d'accès et d'autres éléments d'identification&lt;br /&gt;
* Stocker des informations qui pourront être utilisées pour résoudre un conflit par la suite&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations sur les relations entre entités (par exemple, une personne est l'auteur d'une œuvre, une collectivité a été absorbée par une autre collectivité)&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier une personne qui a produit des œuvres dans différents domaines ou sous des formes diverses&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier des personnes différentes dont les points d'accès doivent rester identiques pour le moment (c'est-à-dire des noms de personnes indifférenciés)&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour préciser si les différentes formes d'un nom ou d'un titre sont de simples variations ou reflètent un changement de nom ou de titre&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer les recherches requises par les lignes directrices actuelles&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour faciliter la maintenance des fichiers d'autorité et bibliographiques étant donné que les informations dans les zones 670 aident à la prise de décisions concernant les points d'accès autorisés en double et les attributions erronées&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour soutenir les manipulations informatiques basées sur des algorithmes utilisant les informations du 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, la première zone 670 cite la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est établie, c'est-à-dire la ressource en cours de catalogage. Si la ressource en cours de catalogage ou de consultation ne fournit aucune information justifiant le point d'accès autorisé, les variantes de point d'accès ou les autres éléments enregistrés dans la notice d'autorité, voir la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur la façon de citer la ressource dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les zones 670 suivantes dans n'importe quel ordre, en ajoutant les nouvelles zones après celles qui existent déjà. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 670 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670, préférer les sources objectives et faisant autorité (par exemple, une encyclopédie) et les sources qui fournissent des informations de première main (par exemple, un blogue d'auteur). Utiliser des sources qui fournissent des informations supplémentaires plutôt que celles qui répètent des informations déjà présentes dans les autres zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Pratiques à privilégier pour les zones 670 : '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans la sous-zone $b, résumer et modifier les informations trouvées, selon les besoins, pour éviter les informations superflues ou répétitives.&lt;br /&gt;
* Éviter de citer des informations subjectives ou des informations dont la valeur est douteuse pour identifier une entité dans un contexte bibliographique.&lt;br /&gt;
* Faire preuve de prudence lors de l'enregistrement d'informations sur des personnes vivantes lorsque ces informations sont susceptibles d'être de nature privée ou controversée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité existantes peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices. Par exemple, dans les zones 670 des notices d'autorité plus anciennes, la sous-zone $b contenant des informations justificatives pourrait être absente. Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité qui faisaient partie d'un projet spécial peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices et/ou peuvent contenir des informations qui semblent inhabituelles ou incorrectes.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Les exemples donnés tout au long du texte suivant présentent diverses conventions en ce qui concerne la ponctuation et le style. Ces conventions ne sont pas prescriptives et doivent être considérées comme des pratiques à privilégier pour faciliter l'échange d'informations dans le contexte d'une base de données partagée. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs fassent preuve de jugement et de bon sens. La ponctuation et le style ne doivent pas nécessairement être cohérents d'une notice à l'autre tant que l'information est claire et précise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format des zones 670 ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
À l'exception de l'eszett (ß ou ſʒ) et du symbole euro (€), tous les caractères figurant dans le [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/M9230.html tableau des codes MARC] peuvent être utilisés dans les notices d'autorité ajoutées au fichier d'autorité Canadiana (voir le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). Lorsque des données provenant d'un site Web sont copiées/collées dans une zone 670, vérifier que tous les caractères peuvent être utilisés dans la notice. Certains caractères non valides ressemblent à ceux qui sont valides. Par exemple, le tiret (–) non valide ressemble au trait d'union (-) valide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une substitution pour un symbole non reproductible est indiquée entre parenthèses (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.5]), une explication de cette interpolation peut également être fournie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les données doivent être fournies sous forme romanisée. Normalement, il est entendu que le catalogueur a fourni la romanisation; par conséquent, lors de la transcription de données trouvées dans la source sous forme romanisée, ajouter après celle-ci l'expression entre crochets ['''forme romanisée''']. Dans des langues telles que l'arabe et l'hébreu, où les voyelles sont généralement omises dans l'orthographe des textes, le catalogueur fournit les voyelles manquantes lors de la transcription des données. Lors de la transcription de texte qui inclut les voyelles, ajouter après entre parenthèses ['''vocalisé'''] ou ['''en partie vocalisé'''] selon le cas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un catalogueur choisit de fournir des variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, les 670 $b doivent contenir aussi bien la transcription du ou des textes en écriture non latine trouvés dans la source que la ou les formes systématiquement romanisées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les notices d'autorité sont créées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, il est possible que de l'information supplémentaire soit incluse. Ces données peuvent également être formatées d'une manière différente de celle indiquée dans le présent document. En général, ces données doivent être conservées telles qu'elles sont générées afin de maintenir la rentabilité de ce processus, à moins que les données ne prêtent à confusion ou ne provoquent des erreurs de validation. Les noms et les titres pour lesquels les notices d'autorité sont créées constituent l'exception à cette règle. Suivre les instructions de ces sections pour enregistrer ces données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Citation de la source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Le titre propre de la ressource citée, suffisamment complet pour permettre une identification ultérieure dans un catalogue en ligne. Des abréviations et des points de suspension peuvent être utilisés. Faire précéder un titre générique ou non distinctif du nom du créateur par lequel commencerait le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre. Si le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre est le même que le titre propre plus un qualificatif, il peut être fourni à la place du titre propre pour éviter toute ambiguïté. Lorsque des informations sont fournies dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 pour justifier un point d'accès autorisé ou une variante de point d'accès, suivre les instructions supplémentaires sous Enregistrement des noms et des titres. &lt;br /&gt;
# La date de publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Monographies en plusieurs parties. S'il s'agit de la première partie, indiquer la date de publication sous forme de date ouverte.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Publications en série autres que les collections de monographies. En général, utiliser une désignation chronologique au lieu d'une date de publication. S'il n'y a pas de désignation chronologique, utiliser la désignation numérique et la date de publication. Le cas échéant, indiquer à la suite de la désignation qu'un «&amp;amp;nbsp;substitut&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été utilisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:15px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ressources intégratrices. Appliquer les instructions de [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] pour la source du titre propre d'un site Web. Identifier l'itération à partir de laquelle les informations ont été prises (par exemple «&amp;amp;nbsp;consulté(e) le&amp;amp;nbsp;» suivi d'une date pour un site Web mis à jour de façon continue, le numéro de mise à jour ou le numéro de révision pour les publication à feuillets mobiles à mise à jour).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Informations trouvées'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $b :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# L'emplacement spécifique où les informations ont été trouvées. Pour les ressources en plusieurs parties avec parties numérotées, indiquer la désignation de la partie et l'emplacement dans la partie (par exemple, vol. 6, page 10; recto de la carte, étiquette). Des abréviations ou des formes au long peuvent être utilisées (par exemple, p. de t. ou page de titre, couv. ou couverture, vol. 6 ou volume 6). &lt;br /&gt;
# Informations trouvées. À la suite de l'emplacement, citer les informations qui y ont été trouvées, entre parenthèses. Le cas échéant, indiquer différentes occurrences d'informations provenant de la même source à la suite de l'emplacement de l'information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' Si le point d'accès autorisé est construit à partir des données de catalogage avant publication, inclure «&amp;amp;nbsp;CIP&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la mention de l'emplacement (par exemple, formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Takao Tanabe, 2026 : $b page de titre du CIP de BAC (Sherri Shinobu Kajiwara) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Kajiwara, Sherri S.; personne associée au Canada et au Japon)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Ressources Internet.''' Pour les sites Web, indiquer s'il y a lieu le nom de l'emplacement à l'intérieur du site (par exemple, À propos; Notre histoire, Chronologie; Government, Executive Branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Plusieurs emplacements dans une ressource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' Lorsqu'on ajoute de nouvelles informations à une zone 670 créée pour un CIP, indiquer que les nouvelles informations proviennent de la ressource publiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; personne associée au Canada) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; personne associée au Canada) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de noms, utiliser généralement «&amp;amp;nbsp;etc.&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour éviter de donner plus de deux emplacements ou une séquence d'emplacements (par exemple, p. 316, etc., pour la séquence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de collections, toujours indiquer chaque emplacement séparément.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Lors du travail d'autorité post-catalogage sans le document en main, utiliser l'emplacement « ressource non disponible ». Si le document est examiné à nouveau et que la notice d'autorité est mise à jour, il est permis de modifier la zone 670 correspondante afin de fournir un emplacement et des formes supplémentaires de titres de collection si nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source des informations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent facultativement fournir un identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) dans la sous-zone $u de la zone 670 pour établir un lien avec la ressource citée si celle-ci contient des informations importantes sur l'entité établie qui ne peuvent être citées succinctement dans la notice d'autorité. Noter que l'utilisation d'un URI dans la zone 670 $u ne supplée pas à l'obligation de citer dans les sous-zones $a et $b de la zone 670 les données pertinentes nécessaires pour justifier le point d'accès autorisé (y compris les ajouts) ou les variantes (cette information continuera d'être disponible si le site change ou disparaît). Toutefois, les informations trouvées dans les sources en ligne peuvent être ajoutées aux zones 046 ou 3XX avec les citations appropriées dans les sous-zones $v et $u et ne pas être répétées dans une 670 lorsque ces informations ne sont pas utilisées dans une 1XX ou une 4XX. Si un URI est inclus dans une 670, il doit être indiqué dans la sous-zone $u. La sous-zone $u doit contenir uniquement l'URI sans aucune autre donnée (par exemple, ne pas mettre l'URI entre parenthèses ni inclure de mots dans la sous-zone $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des noms et des titres ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer intégralement les noms ou les titres de collections utilisés dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès, comme ils apparaissent dans la source, sans abréviation par le catalogueur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la préparation d'une notice d'autorité pour le texte d'une loi ou d'un recueil de lois par sujet, si une source citée contient un titre abrégé ou un titre de référence officiels, citer ce titre, précédé du terme «&amp;amp;nbsp;titre de référence&amp;amp;nbsp;» et de son emplacement exact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les autorités de collectivités, inclure dans les données citées toute la hiérarchie requise pour justifier toutes les variantes de point d'accès nécessaires. Faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles informations (par exemple, le nom de l'organisme subordonné) sont étrangères à la notice créée et ne doivent pas être enregistrées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toutes les catégories ci-dessus, si la seule présentation du nom ou du titre sur la source d'information privilégiée se trouve dans le titre de la ressource donné dans la sous-zone $a de la 670, la répétition du nom dans la sous-zone $b peut être omise, à condition qu'aucune information importante ne soit perdue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si des informations sur un nom ou un titre antérieur ou postérieur se trouvent dans la même source que le nom ou le titre dans le point d'accès autorisé, donner toutes les informations dans la zone 670. Ne pas séparer les informations sur le nom ou le titre antérieur ou postérieur pour les donner dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour faciliter la contribution internationale et l'utilisation des notices d'autorité, lors de l'enregistrement des dates, utiliser généralement les noms de mois, sous forme longue ou [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abrégée]. (Pour les dates enregistrées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, voir la section [[#Format_des_zones_670|Format des zones 670]] de ce Guide). Ne pas modifier le style des dates dans les notices existantes. Comme pratique à privilégier, si une date n'est pas incluse dans la sous-zone $d de la zone 100, envisager d'ajouter une zone 046 si les dates sont disponibles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification des variantes de point d'accès ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justifier les noms ou les titres donnés comme variantes de point d'accès par des informations citées des sources. Toutefois, une justification n'est pas requise dans les cas suivants :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variantes de point d'accès reflétant différentes romanisations ou orthographes connues du catalogueur;&lt;br /&gt;
# Une variante de titre dérivée de la ressource cataloguée, d'autres ressources cataloguées sous le même point d'accès ou de sources de référence standard;&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois pour des points d'accès autorisés de collectivités reflétant des changements dus à une réforme orthographique nationale, des changements de noms dus à un changement de langue officielle ou des changements impliquant uniquement une collectivité supérieure à laquelle la collectivité en cours d'établissement est subordonnée.&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois facultatifs à partir de formes RCAA2 ou pré-RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité de collections et les notices d'autorité de noms rétrospectives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification d'autres éléments ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les informations enregistrées dans les zones 046, 3XX ou 678 de la notice d'autorité doivent généralement être justifiées, à moins qu'elles ne ressortent clairement dans les informations enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 ou qu'elles puissent être facilement déduites d'autres éléments d'identification enregistrés, y compris le nom privilégié.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour la zone 046 et plusieurs des zones 3XX, une sous-zone $u ou une sous-zone $v enregistrée dans la même zone peut être utilisée à la place ou en plus d'une 670. Voir la section [[#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]] de ce Guide pour les directives concernant les sous-zones $u et $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des autres données ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. Ne pas abréger ou traduire des attributs tels que le titre d'une personne ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) qui apparaissent en conjonction avec les noms de personnes dans les mentions de responsabilité et qui pourraient potentiellement être utilisés comme partie du point d'accès. Les autres données peuvent être abrégées ou résumées. En général, traduire les données en langues étrangères de manière informelle en français, en les paraphrasant ou en les résumant selon ce qui convient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données autres que les formes du titre (ou de la phrase analogue à une collection) à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. La numérotation et les noms des organismes de publication ne sont pas obligatoires mais peuvent être indiqués.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Types particuliers de citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les citations les plus courantes sont énumérées ci-dessous. Si celles-ci ne sont pas appropriées, en formuler d'autres selon les besoins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la conversion des informations trouvées dans des zones MARC obsolètes ou non actives (par exemple, 664, 665, 666) en une note 670, citer Canadiana dans une citation telle que celles fournies dans les exemples ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date de la conversion] $b ([données converties à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([données déplacées à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC et fichier interne de BAnQ'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La façon de citer ces fichiers dans la zone 670 est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; usage: [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de noms.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations. Entre parenthèses, précédé par la mention '''point d'accès :''' ou '''points d'accès :''' , mentionner le ou les points d'accès trouvés, même si le point d'accès autorisé actuel est identique. S'il est jugé utile de mentionner une ou plusieurs variantes de point d'accès trouvées dans une notice d'autorité, les mentionner en les faisant précéder de la mention '''variante :''' ou '''variantes :'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différentes formes du nom apparaissent dans les notices bibliographiques, enregistrer le point d'accès ainsi que toutes les formes trouvées, y compris les formes identiques au point d'accès autorisé. Séparer le point d'accès des autres formes de nom et faire précéder les autres formes d'une mention appropriée, par exemple, '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' ou '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas citer les notices bibliographiques ou l'emplacement exact des variations trouvées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de collections.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations, suivie de la citation de la notice bibliographique. Entre parenthèses, indiquer la mention de la collection qui se trouve dans cette notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 27 janv. 2021, Les Déchets ménagers, c1980 $b (Les Cahiers de l'AGHTM)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] Le fichier LC/NAF a aussi été cité antérieurement sous d'autres noms, par exemple Base de données LC/NACO et Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;usage&amp;amp;nbsp;» désigne les formes de noms transcrites que l'on trouve habituellement dans les mentions de responsabilité des notices bibliographiques. On peut également trouver ces formes dans d'autres parties de la notice bibliographique telles que le titre propre ou une note citée. En raison des changements apportés aux instructions de catalogage, les catalogueurs doivent être prudents lorsqu'ils prennent les informations de la mention de publication, de la mention de distribution, etc. et de la mention de collection.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») désigne une forme de nom qui ne correspond pas nécessairement à une forme transcrite. Par exemple, dans les notices RCAA2, le nom d'un éditeur qui figure sur la ressource comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Publishing Company&amp;amp;nbsp;» pourrait avoir été enregistré dans la mention de publication sous la forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Pub. Co&amp;amp;nbsp;». Normalement, il n'est pas nécessaire de citer une telle forme dans une zone 670.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Autres fichiers ou catalogues'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un point d'accès est trouvé dans un catalogue ou une base de données en ligne, utiliser son jugement pour créer une citation 670. Commencer la zone 670 par une désignation du catalogue ou de la base de données dans laquelle ces autres notices bibliographiques ont été trouvées. Il n'y a pas de formulation prescrite pour ces citations; des exemples sont donnés ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Bases de données toponymiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer le nom de la base de données et la date de la recherche dans la sous-zone $a. Le nom de la base de données peut être cité sous forme d'acronyme ou en toutes lettres. Dans la sous-zone $b, indiquer le ou les noms de l'entité, le type d'entité, la désignation ou la classe de l'élément (par exemple, ADM1, PPL, civil), les coordonnées et le nom du lieu plus vaste, s'il y a lieu. (D'autres informations pertinentes peuvent également être fournies.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement de la désignation ou de la classe de l'élément, il est possible d'utiliser soit le code (par exemple, PPL) ou sa forme en toutes lettres (par exemple, populated place). Pour les noms étrangers, indiquer le type de nom (par exemple, forme conventionnelle, forme approuvée, forme courte, etc.) entre crochets ou parenthèses après le nom. Répéter les crochets ou les parenthèses après chaque nom de ce type. Les noms de variantes (y compris les noms en caractères non latins) peuvent être donnés dans une seule liste, comme indiqué ci-dessous. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des coordonnées, il est possible d'utiliser le format DMS (degrés, minutes, secondes), le format DD (degrés décimaux) ou les deux formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a choisi d’enregistrer les coordonnées DMS)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées telles que trouvées. Toutefois, si la base de données affiche les coordonnées en utilisant des deux-points pour séparer les composantes DMS et des valeurs positives et négatives pour communiquer l'hémisphère, il est acceptable de traduire les coordonnées au format DMS traditionnel si souhaité. Utiliser le symbole du degré (et non le zéro en exposant) pour indiquer les degrés, le signe mou (lettre modificative prime) pour les minutes et le signe dur (lettre modificative double prime) pour les secondes. Pour les coordonnées de latitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère sud. Pour les coordonnées de longitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère occidental.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a enregistré les coordonnées DMS telles qu'elles ont été trouvées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a traduit les coordonnées DMS au format traditionnel à partir de : -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, 22:53:01, 121:02:54&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources non bibliographiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer la source non bibliographique, la date et les informations. La source peut être indiquée de manière spécifique («&amp;amp;nbsp;Lettre de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.) ou en termes généraux («&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.). Lorsqu'on indique une source spécifique, il n'est pas nécessaire de montrer comment l'information a été reçue, par exemple, que la lettre a été reçue par télécopieur plutôt que par courrier. Lorsqu'un appel téléphonique à un éditeur, une agence ou une organisation est cité, il convient généralement de donner le nom du groupe appelé, plutôt que le titre ou le nom de la personne contactée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de collections de rééditions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité de collection concerne uniquement une réédition, commencer la 670 par le terme correspondant au type de réédition et une barre oblique. Ne pas inclure une 670 pour une réédition si la notice d'autorité sujet couvre à la fois l'original et une ou plusieurs rééditions. Ne pas ajouter de zones 670 supplémentaires pour d'autres types de rééditions cataloguées ultérieurement. (Voir 64X Traitement de la collection, Rééditions pour plus d'informations sur les rééditions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciés'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour des informations sur les citations existantes dans les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciées, voir la section [[#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32 Nom de personne indifférencié]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Titre associé de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 672 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui est associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité de collectivité, des zones 672 peuvent être utilisées pour enregistrer des titres de ressources dont la collectivité est la créatrice, l'organisme de publication ou le sujet. Le but premier de la zone 672 consiste principalement à documenter le fait qu'il existe un lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 672 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 670 pour consigner le titre de la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est créée, ni d'utiliser des zones 670 pour justifier les informations enregistrées dans les zones 1XX et 4XX, telles que le nom privilégié et les variantes de noms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 672 peuvent être ajoutées après les zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 672 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 672 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans la classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 672 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zones 672 avec titres propres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Cervantes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre propre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre uniforme)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec une variante de titre pour l'œuvre associée à l'expression catalane de l'œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Reste du titre'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'on enregistre un titre propre, la sous-zone $b peut être utilisée pour enregistrer le complément de titre ou le titre propre parallèle afin d'éviter toute confusion lorsque des titres nécessitent une meilleure identification.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le complément de titre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le titre propre parallèle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $f – Date'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $f est utilisée pour enregistrer une date appropriée à l'entité enregistrée dans la sous-zone $a (par exemple, utiliser la date d'une œuvre pour un titre privilégié et la date de publication pour un titre propre). Ne pas utiliser les crochets carrés dans la sous-zone $f pour enregistrer une date de publication ou de production. Ne pas mettre de date de distribution, de date de fabrication ou de date de copyright en $f.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une œuvre :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de l'œuvre)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une expression :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date d'une expression française de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une manifestation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de publication d'une manifestation d'une expression polonaise de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Numéro de contrôle de la notice bibliographique'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $w est utilisée pour enregistrer des numéros de contrôle de notices bibliographiques (par exemple, les zones 001, 010 et 016 dans les notices bibliographiques). Il est recommandé de fournir la sous-zone $w lorsque l'information est facilement accessible. La sous-zone $w doit être répétée pour chaque numéro de contrôle distinct (par exemple, un LCCN et un numéro de notice OCLC doivent être fournis dans des sous-zones séparées). Pour plus d'instructions sur la saisie d'un numéro de contrôle dans la notice, voir la section sur la sous-zone $w dans le ''CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E. Format MARC 21 for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' la sous-zone $w doit seulement être utilisée pour les titres de manifestations.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Titre distinct de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui n'est pas associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom. Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité pour une personne, la zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer les titres d'œuvres écrites par une personne différente portant un nom semblable. L'objectif principal de la zone 673 est de documenter le fait qu'il n'existe aucun lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 673.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 673 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 675, comme le décrit la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 673 peuvent être ajoutées après des zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires non associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 673 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 673.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 673 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans le classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 673 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245. Pour les sous-zones spécifiques de la zone 673, appliquer les mêmes instructions que celles données dans la section [[#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Titre propre associé à un autre Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)###47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title propre associé à la National Gallery de Londres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
ET NON&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Même si la National Gallery of Art n'est pas la créatrice de la ressource mentionnée, elle en est l'éditrice et ce titre devrait donc être enregistré en 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#673_Titre_distinct_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Source des données non trouvées =&lt;br /&gt;
En avril 2012, cette zone a été redéfinie comme : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Citation d'une source consultée dans laquelle aucune information ne se trouve liée en aucune manière avec l'entité représentée par la notice d'autorité ou par des entités liées.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Les catalogueurs participant au PFAN ne sont pas tenus de modifier les zones 675 existantes simplement pour répondre à cette nouvelle définition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une nouvelle notice d'autorité, toujours citer la ressource cataloguée dans la zone 675 si la ressource cataloguée ne fournit aucune information liée de quelque façon que ce soit à l'entité représentée dans la notice d'autorité. Citer également dans la zone 675 d'autres sources consultées qui ne contiennent aucune information, lorsqu'on juge que cette absence même d'information mérite d'être consignée pour les futurs utilisateurs de la notice d'autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, il n'est pas toujours nécessaire d'inclure dans la zone 675 toutes les sources de référence consultées; il faut faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles sources sont suffisamment importantes pour être conservées de façon permanente dans la notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Données biographiques ou historiques =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsque des données biographiques ou historiques sont fournies dans une zone de note 678, rédiger la note en employant des phrases concises mais complètes et en gardant à l'esprit que l'information sera utilisée dans des affichages publics.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En prévision de la constitution par BAC du fichier dans WMS et de l'ajout en lot des notices d'autorité des autres institutions, le contenu de toutes les zones 665 dans les notices de BAC et de BAnQ a été déplacé vers la zone 678. Il se pourrait que la zone 665 originale ait contenu des instructions sur le ou les points d'accès à employer comme auteur et comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec); Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec); Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec); Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supprimer ces instructions dans la zone 678 si elles ont été conservées. Penser à ajouter la zone 667 sur l'emploi comme vedette-matière le cas échéant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification de la zone 678'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Généralement, une zone 678 doit être justifiée par une zone 670. Si elle n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu est approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, conserver la zone et ajouter une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678 comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [abréviation de la bibliothèque participante], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la notice a été modifiée après avoir été migrée, il faut consulter l'historique de la notice pour déterminer qui a ajouté la zone 678 à l'origine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la zone 678 n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, ne pas conserver la zone 678 sauf si une note appropriée peut être rédigée avec les informations dont on dispose. Noter que la zone 678 est facultative. Si le contenu de la zone doit être conservé parce qu'il ne se trouve nulle part ailleurs dans la notice, le transférer dans une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 678 existante qui sera supprimée car le contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 670 ajoutée :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Ne pas répéter cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#678_Donn.C3.A9es_biographiques_ou_historiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Liaison des vedettes établies – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note'' : Cette section ne s'applique pas à la zone 781 utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms 151 pour fournir des informations sur les subdivisions géographiques. Voir la section [[#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique|781]] de ce Guide pour les instructions relatives à cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;L'utilisation d'une vedette établie dans une zone de liaison 7XX dans une notice d'autorité de nom ou une notice d'autorité de collection est limitée à l'enregistrement du point d'accès autorisé à partir d'une bibliographie nationale ou d'un fichier d'autorité national ou équivalent séparé. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La forme de la vedette dans une zone 7XX peut correspondre à la forme dans la zone 1XX ou à une forme dans la zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité. Ceci est approprié lorsque la forme de la zone 7XX représente une forme se trouvant dans un fichier d'autorité différent de Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La source de la vedette dans la zone 7XX peut être précisée en utilisant soit la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur avec une sous-zone $2, soit une valeur pour le deuxième indicateur qui précise la source. Pour les points d'accès provenant du fichier LC/NAF, privilégier le deuxième indicateur avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Liaison des vedettes de subdivision - Subdivision géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pratique facultative du PFAN :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pour une vedette de nom géographique qui peut également être utilisée comme subdivision géographique, déterminer la forme sous laquelle la vedette doit être utilisée comme subdivision géographique en suivant les lignes directrices de la feuille d'instructions [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 du ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Entrer la forme de la subdivision géographique dans une zone 781 en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;6&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur. Pour une vedette géographique utilisée directement, comme un pays, saisir les données dans une seule sous-zone $z. Pour une vedette géographique qui est utilisée indirectement en subdivision d'une entité géographique plus vaste, telle qu'une ville, saisir les données dans deux sous-zones $z successives. Ne pas modifier les valeurs des positions de la zone 008. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice pour une vedette de nom géographique qui ne peut pas être utilisée comme vedette secondaire matière (008/15 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;»), comme le nom antérieur d'une juridiction qui a subi un changement de nom linéaire, par exemple, '''Ceylan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice d'autorité de nom pour un nom de lieu qui ne peut pas être utilisé comme une subdivision géographique, comme une section d'une ville, par exemple, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Ajouter une zone 781 à une notice existante lorsqu'une autre modification est faite dans la notice. Lors de la révision d'une notice existante qui contient une note d'utilisation pour l'indexation dans une zone 667 indiquant la forme de la subdivision géographique appropriée, supprimer la zone 667 et la remplacer par une zone 781.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 1 : Entités ambiguës =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 2 : Projets spéciaux =&lt;br /&gt;
Cette annexe fournit des informations sur les projets spéciaux impliquant des notices d'autorité créées et modifiées dans le fichier d'autorité Canadiana. Les notices créées ou modifiées pour ces projets peuvent contenir certaines zones et valeurs dans des zones qui ne sont généralement pas conformes aux politiques de catalogage actuelles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des instructions sur la modification de ces notices sont fournies afin d'indiquer si ces zones et valeurs doivent être conservées ou non.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 1. Notices créées ou révisées dans le cadre du projet de révision de notices de l'UQAM ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de révision de notices d'autorité dirigé par l'UQAM. Il s'agit des notices créées ou modifiées dans Canadiana par l'équipe du traitement documentaire de cette institution. Ces notices sont ensuite révisées par deux bibliothécaires et une technicienne de l'UQAM. Le projet s'est terminé le 31 mars 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces nouvelles notices présentaient les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles ont été ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices peuvent être modifiées de la même manière que les autres notices d'autorité de noms conformément aux politiques de catalogage en vigueur.&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un catalogueur modifie ces notices, il doit :&lt;br /&gt;
* changer la valeur du Guide/17 pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Notice d'autorité complète);&lt;br /&gt;
* supprimer la zone 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;amp;nbsp;»; &lt;br /&gt;
* évaluer la notice comme une notice versée en lot. Toutefois, comme la notice est en cours de révision, le point d'accès autorisé peut être modifié s'il n'est pas conforme aux pratiques du PFAN (p. ex., une date de naissance ou de décès peut être ajoutée si elle est disponible et a été omise dans le point d'accès).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 2. Notices créées et révisées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de mentorat &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui, depuis février 2021, permet aux&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; bibliothèques universitaires de créer des notices d'autorité de nom qui sont révisées par une autre institution universitaire. Les notices d'autorité créées ou modifiées par &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;les bibliothèques mentorées&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; sont révisées par des techniciens en documentation de l'Université &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui les mentore&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices présentent les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles sont ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abréviation, c'est-à-dire UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices ne doivent pas être modifiées.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145113</id>
		<title>PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145113"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T13:18:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 670 Source des données */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par D. Paradis, 12 septembre)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par N. Mainville, 26 février)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours| 24 h (En cours d'édition par A. Dunnett, BAC, 24 mars)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Guide}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:PFAN - Name Authority Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  Notices d'autorité de nom ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notices d'autorité de collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--En octobre et novembre 2021, les passages du Guide concernant les collections ont été cachés par souci de cohérence avec la décision de ne pas permettre la création ni la révision des notices d'autorité de collections. DP 1er novembre 2021--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 008 Éléments de données de longueur fixe =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Règles de catalogage descriptif ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée de quelque façon que ce soit, évaluer la notice d'autorité et la modifier pour qu'elle soit conforme à RDA, en modifiant le codage de la zone 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1 : Si une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée uniquement par la modification ou l'ajout d'une zone 5XX, on encourage fortement les catalogueurs, bien qu'il n'y ait pas d'obligation, à évaluer la notice et à la modifier selon RDA, en changeant le 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2 : Les autorités de noms indifférenciés codées 008/10 «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;», peuvent être modifiées de manière à enlever une ou plusieurs identités afin de créer des notices différenciées conformes à RDA. Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié à cette fin, la notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié mise à jour doit conserver le code 008/10 existant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-24]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F10 R.C3.A8gles de catalogage descriptif|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Système de vedettes-matière / Thésaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone 008/11 de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) dans la zone 008/11 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) dans la zone 008/11, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/15 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;dans la zone 008/11 des&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples de noms de collectivités ne pouvant être utilisés comme vedettes-matière :''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis.  Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran.  Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois.  Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique.  Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; margin-left: 0px; padding-left: 15px; padding-top: 10px; padding-bottom: 10px; text-indent: 0px; line-height: 1.0; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;tats-Unis. Pr&amp;amp;eacute;sident (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;glise catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Church of England. Dioc&amp;amp;egrave;se de Londres. &amp;amp;Eacute;v&amp;amp;ecirc;que (1675-1713 : Compton)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F11 Syst.C3.A8me de vedettes-mati.C3.A8re .2F Th.C3.A9saurus|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Utilisation de la vedette – vedette-matière secondaire ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Généralités&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de famille&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Appropriée) dans la zone 008/15 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) dans la zone 008/15, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/11 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Contexte'' : Pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, les catalogueurs descriptifs peuvent être amenés à établir un point d'accès autorisé pour le nom de la collectivité pour la fonction ainsi qu'un nom personnel pour le titulaire de la fonction. La politique d'indexation est d'attribuer seulement le nom personnel, et non le nom de la collectivité, comme point d'accès matière. Cette politique a été établie à des fins de colocalisation (voir [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). Par exemple, le point d'accès :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
peut être utilisé dans le catalogage descriptif comme point d'accès, mais en indexation seul le nom personnel serait utilisé comme point d'accès matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) aux notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F15 Utilisation de la vedette - vedette-mati.C3.A8re secondaire|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Nom de personne non différencié ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser le code 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (non différencié) dans une notice d'autorité de nom RDA. Attribuer la valeur 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes. Utiliser le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les familles, les collectivités et les lieux. Pour les œuvres et les expressions, attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» si le point d'accès commence par un nom de personne, sinon attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par le passé, la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 permettait de coder les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes comme non différenciées lorsque le catalogueur n'avait aucun moyen acceptable de différencier plusieurs personnes portant le même nom privilégié. Depuis sa création, le PFAN a suivi ces directives pour les notices d’autorité de noms de personnes :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas créer de nouvelles notices non différenciées codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Toutes les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes codéees RDA doivent être différenciées.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas ajouter une nouvelle identité à une notice d'autorité de nom de personne existante codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&lt;br /&gt;
* Appliquer plutôt [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] pour créer un point d'accès autorisé unique pour la personne, en utilisant des éléments additionnels appropriés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mise à jour des notices indifférenciées existantes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' Pour une entité donnée, si la seule notice trouvée est une notice indifférenciée (dont la zone 008/32 est codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;») versée par une université et comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;», ne pas l'utiliser.  Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité pour l'entité.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler à BAC la notice indifférenciée en communiquant son numéro de contrôle OCLC par courriel à l'adresse pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca et en mentionnant comme objet : Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice indifférenciée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante, en particulier une notice qui a été importée du LC/NAF, comprenne des paires de zones 670 utilisées pour regrouper l'information sur chaque personne visée par la notice d'autorité de nom. La première zone 670 de chaque paire est une zone 670 d'identification qui comprend un terme décrivant la relation de la personne avec le titre cité dans la deuxième zone 670 de la paire. Les données de la zone 670 d'identification sont enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a et sont mises entre crochets. La deuxième zone 670 de la paire est une zone 670 de citation qui comprend les éléments de données normaux dans la citation d'une ressource cataloguée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Auteur de Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Point d'accès supplémentaire pour Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Éditeur intellectuel de Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut aussi arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante comprenne une note 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée et identifiant la ou les ressources associées aux autres personnes portant le même nom. Dans ce cas, la notice ne comprend généralement pas de zones 670 pour les personnes autres que la première qui a été identifiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque de l'information pour distinguer une personne dans une notice d'autorité existante indifférenciée provenant de BAC ou de BAnQ est trouvée :&lt;br /&gt;
* Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour cette personne avec des informations distinctives et ajouter une indication que la personne était auparavant sur une notice indifférenciée (voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées|Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées]]&amp;amp;nbsp;», ci-dessous). Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour zone 670 de citation se rapportant à cette personne depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire. Ne pas transférer la zone 670 d'identification vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
* Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* Si la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée n'est pas supprimée parce que plusieurs identités restent, supprimer les zones 670 qui se rapportent à la personne maintenant représentée sur la nouvelle notice d'autorité (c’est-à-dire, dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, supprimer à la fois la zone 670 d’identification et la zone 670 de citation) et, le cas échéant, éditer ou supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée pour supprimer la mention de cette personne.&lt;br /&gt;
* S'il reste plus d'une identité dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée et qu'il n'y a pas suffisamment d'information pour créer de nouvelles notices d'autorité de nom pour chaque nom, laisser la notice d'autorité de nom codée RCAA2.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d’autorité de nom indifférenciée de BAnQ n’est pas supprimée, doit être modifiée ultérieurement et qu’elle ne comporte pas de numéro Canadiana, lui en attribuer un.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de faciliter le traitement automatisé des notices d'autorité (par exemple, appariement, liaison), lorsqu'il ne reste qu'une seule identité dans une notice d'autorité de nom de personne indifférenciée (c'est-à-dire lorsque les autres identités sont désambiguïsées et enlevées), procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'unique identité restante. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette identité, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;». Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Dans la nouvelle notice :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le cas échéant, transférer la citation 670 se rapportant à l'unique identité restante depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;S'assurer que la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée contient seulement de l'information se rapportant à l'unique identité restante (par exemple, les zones 670). Le cas échéant, supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, ajouter la notice 667 suivante pour garantir qu'une notice d'autorité de nom ne sera pas créée en double :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAC''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana] $z [Numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée dérivée du LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'autrice d'Esperanza :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAnQ''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a [aucun numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour Christian Bergeron (Sociologue) :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1056D8391F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian $c (Sociologue)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : 1063E5020F.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'individualisation des épreuves de la vie dans la modernité avancée, 2013 : $b page de titre (Christian Bergeron; Doctorat en sociologie; Université Laval)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 $b (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. Il reste deux identités non différenciées dans la notice :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1063E5020F [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter une note 667 à une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour identifier le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité dans laquelle l'information sur cette personne a déjà été enregistrée :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices codées comme indifférenciées qui ne représentent en fait qu'une seule identité ====&lt;br /&gt;
À l'occasion, il arrive qu'une notice soit codée comme étant indifférenciée, mais que de nouvelles recherches indiquent qu'en fait la notice ne représente qu'une seule identité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut également arriver qu’on soupçonne que la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été codée par erreur dans la zone 008/32. Dans ces situations, procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter une zone 667 à la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée indiquant qu'elle a été signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'identité. Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette personne, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple d'une notice indifférenciée versée qui ne représente qu'une seule identité''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [aucun numéro Canadiana, utiliser le numéro OCLC de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==008/33 Niveau de l'établissement==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''provisoires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Coder une notice d'autorité de nom comme provisoire (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») si le point d'accès autorisé ne peut être formulé de manière satisfaisante en raison d'informations insuffisantes. Si les informations nécessaires deviennent disponibles ultérieurement, réévaluer la notice d'autorité de nom et la mettre à jour pour qu'elle soit pleinement établie (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;»). En aucun cas, il ne faut créer une notice d'autorité de niveau provisoire avec un point d'accès qui entre en conflit avec une notice d'autorité de nom existante selon les règles de normalisation du PFAN.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Régions administratives spéciales de Hong Kong et de Macao'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Étant donné qu'il n'est pas certain que Hong Kong et Macao continueront à avoir deux langues officielles, coder toutes les notice d'autorité de nom pour les organismes gouvernementaux dans ces deux endroits, au niveau de la région administrative spéciale et en dessous, comme provisoires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;»), quelle que soit la langue dans laquelle le point d'accès autorisé a été établi. Si une forme dans la deuxième langue officielle devient disponible, ajouter cette forme comme variante de point d'accès plutôt que de réviser le point d'accès autorisé existant. Consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] et l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html énoncé de politique connexe] pour obtenir des instructions sur le choix de la langue du nom privilégié. Noter que cette politique concernant le statut provisoire ne s'applique pas aux organismes non gouvernementaux.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Informations supplémentaires pour les participants au PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN peuvent créer des notices provisoires dans les deux situations exceptionnelles suivantes :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'a pas l'expertise linguistique nécessaire pour établir le point d'accès autorisé comme une notice d'autorité pleinement établie; cela comprend les situations où la bibliothèque ne dispose pas de sources de référence adéquates pour la recherche ou lorsque le catalogueur n'est pas sûr de la forme grammaticale correcte du point d'accès.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'est pas en mesure, en raison de ressources limitées ou d'autres contraintes, de compléter le travail pour les autorités en relation ou de déterminer la structure de renvois appropriée qui est requise pour les notices d'autorité pleinement établies.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''préliminaires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité préliminaires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») sont généralement le résultat de projets rétrospectifs. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs du PFAN procèdent régulièrement à des mises à jour des notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils apportent d'autres modifications à la notice d'autorité. À cause de cette exigence de mise à jour, les participants au PFAN sont priés de communiquer avec le Comité des normes avant d'entreprendre des projets qui pourraient entraîner l'ajout massif de notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» au fichier d'autorité Canadiana.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Au besoin, les catalogueurs peuvent mettre à jour les notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils travaillent avec des notices de collectivités antérieures/postérieures, bien que le ou les points d'accès dans les notices mises à jour ne soient pas utilisés dans la base de données bibliographiques locale. À l'occasion, les catalogueurs peuvent avoir besoin de créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom sans avoir de ressource en main, par exemple pour un nom de collectivité antérieur ou postérieur, en utilisant des renseignements provenant de sources de référence, ou pour un point d'accès basé sur des renseignements trouvés dans la sous-zone «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» de la zone 245 de notices bibliographiques, lorsqu'ils résolvent des conflits entre notices d'autorité de noms. Ne pas coder ces notices d'autorité de noms occasionnelles comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaires&amp;amp;nbsp;» .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, les éléments de données des collections doivent être vérifiés sur la publication et les notices d'autorité de collections doivent être codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (complet). Dans le travail d'autorité post-catalogage, il est permis de créer des notices d'autorité de collections sans la ressource en main; ces notices sont codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» (préliminaire). Lorsqu'une publication appartenant à la collection a été examinée et que la notice d'autorité préliminaire a été revue et mise à jour au besoin, mettre la notice d'autorité de collection au niveau complet.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F33_Niveau_de_l.27.C3.A9tablissement |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Source du catalogage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quelle que soit la valeur codée à l'origine dans cette zone, ne pas changer cette valeur lors de la mise à jour d'une notice, sauf si la valeur d'origine est incorrecte. La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;blanc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F39_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 Numéro de contrôle de la notice d'autorité de BAC = &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 016 est obligatoire lorsque le catalogueur crée, met à jour ou utilise une autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité et lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante sans numéro Canadiana, vérifier dans le LC/NAF si la même entité est représentée par une autorité et si celle-ci comporte un numéro Canadiana. Noter que le point d'accès autorisé dans le LC/NAF pourrait avoir une forme différente de celui dans Canadiana. Si la notice dans le LC/NAF comporte un numéro Canadiana, ajouter ce numéro dans la notice Canadiana. Si le numéro se termine par le code de langue E, le changer pour le code F. S'il n'y a pas de code de langue, ajouter le code F à la fin du numéro.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante avec numéro Canadiana, vérifier que le code de langue F est présent à la fin de la zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Doublons'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» un numéro Canadiana. Une fois qu'une notice d'autorité pour une entité donnée a été créée et qu'un numéro Canadiana lui a été attribué, ne pas changer les données dans cette notice pour représenter une entité DIFFÉRENTE. Par exemple, ne pas changer une notice d'autorité pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Dupont, Jean&amp;amp;nbsp;» en une pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Tremblay, Marie&amp;amp;nbsp;» (sauf si le nom de la personne a changé).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, demander à faire supprimer la notice (voir [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dures_sur_les_doublons|Procédures sur les doublons]]). NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il y a une zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, enregistrer le numéro Canadiana qui s'y trouve dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il n'y a pas de zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, en ajouter une en utilisant le numéro 0000X0000F. Ne pas enregistrer ce numéro dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée. Dans ce Guide, voir aussi «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Doublons|Doublons]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, supprimer la notice. NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer le numéro Canadiana de la notice supprimée dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice conservée.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Notices versées en lot partiellement modifiées'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité versées en lot qui sont modifiées partiellement selon la [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]] comportent le numéro Canadiana 1111X1111F. Ce numéro temporaire est ajouté pour permettre l'enregistrement de la notice en attendant que celle-ci soit évaluée pour s'assurer qu'elle répond aux normes du PFAN. Ce numéro doit être remplacé par un numéro unique lorsque la notice est évaluée et que la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;» est supprimée.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 Numéro international normalisé des publications en série =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'ISSN chaque fois qu'il est fourni dans le document en main, dans les notices bibliographiques analytiques ou dans la notice bibliographique pour la collection cataloguée dans son ensemble; sinon, enregistrer l'ISSN est facultatif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on sait que des ISSN distincts ont été attribués à différents formats d'une collection représentée par une seule notice d'autorité, il est préférable d'enregistrer dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 022 l'ISSN qui est l'ISSN de liaison (ISSN-L) pour ces différents formats. Enregistrer les ISSN pour les formats spécifiques dans des zones 667 distinctes, en suivant ce modèle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre d'une publication a changé, il est important de s'assurer que l'ISSN figurant sur la publication appartient au nouveau titre et non au titre précédent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un ISSN incorrect peut être indiqué dans une zone 667 (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;L'ISSN 1122-3344 n'est pas un ISSN valide pour cette publication&amp;amp;nbsp;»).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Autre numéro ou code normalisé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les lignes directrices des [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf ''NACO 024 Best Practices Guidelines'']. En règle générale, limiter à cinq le nombre de zones 024 dans une notice d'autorité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 024 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les identifiants codés dans la zone 024 des notices d'autorité du PFAN. Lorsqu'une zone 024 est présente dans une notice &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;d'autorité&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; qui fait l'objet d'une suppression (par exemple, dans le cas d'un doublon), les catalogueurs doivent transférer le contenu de la zone dans la notice qui doit être conservée. Lorsque deux notices d'autorité sont regroupées en une seule et que chacune des notices comporte une zone 024 différente, les catalogueurs doivent inclure les deux zones 024 dans la notice conservée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Données mathématiques codées sur les documents cartographiques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des pays, provinces, États, comtés'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les coordonnées des limites extérieures (rectangles de délimitation ou polygones) doivent généralement être utilisées avec des entités géographiques telles que des pays, des provinces, des États et des comtés pour identifier les coordonnées de l'entité. Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées en degrés/minutes/secondes, en degrés décimaux, en minutes décimales et/ou en secondes décimales. Les styles ne doivent pas être mélangés dans une même zone 034, mais la zone peut être répétée pour représenter les différents styles (voir ci-dessous pour les utilitaires de conversion); l'ordre des zones 034 lorsque les deux styles sont donnés n'a pas d'importance. Pour faciliter la réutilisation des coordonnées dans les applications géographiques, il faut employer le point et non la virgule comme signe décimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés/minutes/secondes''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux''' : enregistrement sous la forme hddd.dddddd (hémisphère-degrés.degrés décimaux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux avec plus et moins''' : enregistrer sous la forme +-ddd.dddddd (hémisphère[+/-]-degrés.décimaux) («&amp;amp;nbsp;+&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour N et E, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour S et W; le signe plus est facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple avec +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple sans le signe plus facultatif)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Minutes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmm.mmmm (hémisphère-degrés-minutes.minutes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Secondes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss.sss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes.secondes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons doivent généralement être enregistrées comme des points centraux plutôt que comme des limites extérieures. Pour la zone 034, la longitude et la latitude qui forment l'axe central sont enregistrées deux fois pour définir le point central (c'est-à-dire que les contenus des sous-zones $d et $e sont identiques et les contenus des sous-zones $f et $g sont identiques).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés/minutes/secondes)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux avec plus/moins)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Outils de conversion des coordonnées'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les institutions membres du PFAN sont encouragées à fournir des degrés/minutes/secondes et des degrés décimaux lorsqu'ils sont disponibles. De nombreux outils de conversion sont disponibles sur le Web pour dériver les uns des autres. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $2 a été définie pour l'enregistrement de la source des codes d'information sur les coordonnées - les sources couramment utilisées sont disponibles dans : [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CDC.html/view ''Codes sources pour les données cartographiques'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une citation de la source dans la zone 670 n'est pas nécessaire si la seule information provenant de la source est enregistrée dans la zone 034; une citation dans la zone 670 doit être faite si nécessaire pour enregistrer des informations en plus des coordonnées, telles que les variantes de nom, la hiérarchie, la période d'applicabilité, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#034_Donn.C3.A9es_math.C3.A9matiques_cod.C3.A9es_sur_les_documents_cartographiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 Numéro de contrôle de système =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#035_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_syst.C3.A8me |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Source du catalogage =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs doivent consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour les instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité nouvelles ou existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Langue de catalogage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $b fre ajoutée automatiquement par WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $d – Organisme responsable des modifications'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $d [code MARC 21] est ajoutée automatiquement par WMS lorsque la dernière sous-zone MARC $d dans la zone 040 n'est pas déjà celle de l'institution qui a modifié la notice. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $e – Règles de description'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on ajoute manuellement la sous-zone $e, ajouter la sous-zone après la sous-zone $b et avant la sous-zone $c. Il n'est pas nécessaire de déplacer la sous-zone $e à cette position si elle est déjà présente ailleurs dans le 040 ou si elle est ajoutée par une macro ou un gabarit. Lorsque la zone fixe 008/10 (Règles de catalogage descriptif) est changée pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Autre), la sous-zone $e rda est automatiquement ajoutée par le système.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#040_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Code d'authenticité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Cette zone se retrouve dans les notices d'autorité utilisées par BAC. Ne pas modifier ou supprimer cette zone lorsque le code CaOONL figure dans la 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les catalogueurs autres que ceux de BAC dérivent une notice à partir d'une notice de BAC contenant une zone 042, ils doivent s'assurer de supprimer cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les catalogueurs doivent ajouter la zone 042 $a nlc dans Canadiana chaque fois qu'ils créent, révisent ou dérivent une notice d'autorité. Ce code identifie le fichier «&amp;amp;nbsp;virtuel&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'autorité nationale canadienne qui est divisé en deux bases de données (LC/NAF et Canadiana).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-08]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#042_Code_d.27authenticit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Code de région géographique &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 043 peut seulement être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms géographiques (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone b – Code local de région géographique et Sous-zone $2 – Source du code local'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les lieux situés au Québec, les participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser la sous-zone $b pour enregistrer un code local tiré de la liste ci-dessous et représentant la région administrative du Québec où le lieu est situé. Ce code est formé du code de région géographique « n-cn--- » et d'un code local de sous-entité de deux lettres (p. ex., qa) qui identifie la région administrative et remplace les deux derniers caractères du code « n-cn--- » (p. ex. « n-cn-qa »). La sous-zone $b est enregistrée à la suite de la sous-zone $a et est suivie par la sous-zone $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Dates spéciales codées =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Lors de l'encodage de l'information sur la date, donner l'information la plus complète possible sur la date lorsque celle-ci est facilement disponible (la date dans la zone 046 peut être plus précise qu'une date utilisée dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2e_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Lors&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la révision des notices d'autorité existantes, enregistrer les dates dans la zone 046 même si le point d'accès lui-même n'a pas de dates dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d, lorsque l'information est facilement disponible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des dates dans la zone 046, utiliser la norme Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) dans tous les cas, sauf pour les siècles; fournir les dates en utilisant le modèle aaaa, aaaa-mm ou aaaa-mm-jj. Voir le tableau d'exemples dans l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Pour les spécifications complètes de l'EDTF, voir [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophoniste)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Blues around the clock, 1945 : $b étiquette (Johnny Hicks, saxophone ténor)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web Discogs, consulté le 27 mai 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; saxophoniste ténor qui a joué avec Tab Smith dans les années 1940)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de dates avant Jésus-Christ dans la zone 046, faire précéder les chiffres d'un trait d'union (signe moins). Comme il n'y a pas d'an zéro dans le calendrier de l'ère commune, il faut soustraire une année de la date réelle avant Jésus-Christ; par exemple, l'an 50 av. J.-C. est enregistré comme suit : -0049.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ##  $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement d'un siècle dans la zone 046, utiliser les deux premiers chiffres de l'intervalle de cent ans (par exemple, utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;16&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour représenter le 17&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle, 1600-1699).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Noter que le 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;er&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle apr. J.-C. est représenté par la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;00&amp;amp;nbsp;» et que les siècles av. J.-C. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sont précédés d'&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;un trait d'union &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(signe moins)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; avant les chiffres (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-04&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le 5&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle av. J.-C.). Un siècle approximatif (par exemple, activité environ 12&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle) ne peut pas être enregistré dans la zone 046.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Répétabilité'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;La zone 046 est répétable, mais les sous-zones de la zone 046 utilisées pour enregistrer les dates ne le sont pas. En général, une seule zone 046 avec des dates conformes à la norme EDTF devrait être suffisante. Cependant, les dates de siècles suivent la norme ISO 8601 et non la norme EDTF. Lors de l'enregistrement de dates de siècles en plus de dates plus précises, il faut donc répéter la zone 046.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates divergentes'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, les ressources consultées peuvent présenter des dates divergentes (par exemple, des dates de naissance ou de décès divergentes pour une personne ou des dates de début ou de fin divergentes pour une collectivité). Dans ces situations, la zone 046 doit refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'enregistrer toutes les dates divergentes en utilisant la zone 046, ni d'enregistrer une zone 046 pour chaque ressource consultée. L'évaluation des dates divergentes doit généralement avoir pour résultat une seule zone 046, contenant la ou les dates que le catalogueur juge les plus exactes pour représenter l'entité. Le catalogueur peut décider d'enregistrer ou non la ou les dates divergentes dans la zone 046 et il n'est pas nécessaire que la ou les dates enregistrées dans la zone 046 correspondent exactement à celle ou celles choisies pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;De même, toute date ajoutée au point d'accès autorisé devrait refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates, enregistrées conformément aux instructions de RDA et des énoncés de politique du PFAN. On peut considérer qu'une date qui prédomine dans les ressources consultées est la plus appropriée pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé. Si aucune date ne prédomine, le catalogueur peut décider d'utiliser le format «&amp;amp;nbsp;approximativement aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa?&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa ou aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans le point d'accès autorisé. Dans certains cas, des dates correspondant à la période d'activité de la personne (RDA 9.19.1.5) peuvent être préférables.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 157 av. J-C. comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce que c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 1907 comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Même exemple que ci-dessus illustrant une décision différente que le catalogueur aurait pu prendre concernant l'enregistrement de la sous-zone $f de la zone 046)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;La zone 046 étant basée sur des informations provenant de sources multiples, la justification ne peut être formulée avec précision dans une sous-zone $v/$u à la fin d'une zone 046. Les dates divergentes doivent être enregistrées dans des zones 670. Si une notice existante comporte une sous-zone $v/$u comme justification d'une zone 046 et que cette zone 046 est mise à jour comme décrit ci-dessus, il faut supprimer la sous-zone $v/$u et convertir la justification en une zone 670 si les dates divergentes ne sont pas déjà justifiées dans des zones 670 existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, il peut être nécessaire d'effectuer un calcul pour déterminer les dates à enregistrer dans la zone 046 et le point d'accès autorisé. De tels calculs peuvent produire des dates incertaines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Si les ressources consultées ne fournissent que la date de décès de la personne et son âge (en années) au moment du décès, comme cela se voit souvent dans les notices nécrologiques, l'année de naissance de la personne correspondra à l'une de deux années consécutives. Pour calculer ces années, il faut d'abord soustraire l'âge de l'année de décès, puis utiliser l'année ainsi obtenue et l'année précédente comme les deux possibilités pour l'année de naissance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a soustrait 75, l'âge au décès, de 1994, l'année du décès; l'année obtenue, 1919, et l'année qui la précède, 1918, représentent les deux années de naissance possibles)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si des dates non-grégoriennes figurent dans les ressources consultées, la conversion de ces dates en dates grégoriennes peut produire des dates incertaines. Il faut utiliser les dates du calendrier grégorien dans la zone 046 et dans le point d'accès autorisé. Il se peut qu'une même date dans un calendrier non-grégorien corresponde à l'une de deux dates grégoriennes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La date de 1346 dans le calendrier hégirien correspond à 1967 ou 1968 dans le calendrier grégorien.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de la norme de la date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter la sous-zone $2 edtf, sauf après un siècle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zones $q – Date de fondation, $r – Date de cessation,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Début de la période d'activité et $t – Fin de la période d'activité'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer les dates associées à un congrès, etc., ponctuel ou à une occurrence isolée dans une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] et [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), dans les sous-zones $s et $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer la date de fondation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) et la date de cessation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) d'une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]), si cette information est connue, dans les sous-zones $q et $r.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'utilisation des sous-zones $s et $t pour le début et la fin de la période d'activité dans les zones 368 et 370-376, voir les directives présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les instructions suivantes représentent la pratique du PFAN sur l'enregistrement des sources d'information dans les sous-zones $u et $v des zones où elles sont définies, et/ou dans la zone 670 :&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046$u$v&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Les zones 670 doivent être utilisées pour appuyer l'information utilisée comme une partie du point d'accès dans les zones 1XX et 4XX.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pour les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $v est facultatif si la même information/source est déjà citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;utiliser la sous-zone $v si l'information/source n'est pas citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $u est facultatif et celle-ci doit toujours être précédée de la sous-zone $v.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser une zone 670 si c'est nécessaire pour justifier l'information enregistrée dans d'autres zones pour lesquelles les sous-zones $u et $v ne sont pas définies ou sont définies différemment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des données dans la sous-zone $v (Source d'information) des zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381, suivre les mêmes principes de base pour la citation que ceux qui s'appliquent actuellement pour la zone 670, sous-zone $a (Citation de la source).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Fournir une information précise sur la citation (numéro de page, sous-page d'un site Web) dans la sous-zone $v si, selon le jugement du catalogueur, cette plus grande précision est nécessaire pour trouver l'information à l'intérieur de la source citée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information dans les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 est sous la même forme que celle trouvée dans la source, il n'est pas nécessaire de la citer. Si l'information enregistrée dans ces zones est sous une forme différente de celle dans la source, utiliser 670 $b (Information trouvée).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les sources matérielles :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information provient d'une source matérielle (par exemple, un livre imprimé, un support numérique amovible), la sous-zone $v doit contenir suffisamment d'information pour qu'un catalogueur puisse trouver la ressource citée dans un catalogue ou une base de données bibliographiques. Ceci peut généralement se limiter au titre propre et au nom de l'éditeur ou à la date. Si cette combinaison n'est pas unique, la citation du titre peut être précédée du nom du créateur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les ressources en ligne :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fournir suffisamment d'information pour permettre de trouver la ressource via un moteur de recherche. Inclure soit le titre et la date de publication (si c'est une ressource publiée formellement, tel un livre numérique), soit une description appropriée du document et la date d'accès (pour une ressource moins formelle). Facultativement, inclure la sous-zone $u.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-03]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Cote de la Library of Congress =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#050_Cote_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 Indice de la classification de la Library of Congress &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes pour enregistrer les indices de la classification LC des auteurs littéraires individuels, y compris les auteurs de littérature de jeunesse. Elle peut aussi être utilisée '''exceptionnellement''' dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes et de collectivités pour enregistrer les indices de biographie dans la fourchette ML410-429 de la classification LC lorsque le choix de l'indice ou du Cutter n'est pas évident. La zone 053 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il ne faut pas enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000 dans la zone 053. Pour l'utilisation des indices de la classe PS8000 dans les notices d'autorité de noms, voir la section [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]] de ce Guide. Une notice d'autorité pour un auteur littéraire canadien peut contenir à la fois une zone 053 et une zone 065.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Cote de Bibliothèque et Archives Canada =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#055_Cote_de_Biblioth.C3.A8que_et_Archives_Canada |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Autre indice de classification &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 065 sert à enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000. La zone 065 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $2 et une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [Code MARC de l’institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de l'indice'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour indiquer que l'indice provient de la classe PS8000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#065_Autre_indice_de_classification |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Cote de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#082_Cote_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Indice de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#083_Indice_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Cote de publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#086_Cote_de_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Indice de classification d'une publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#087_Indice_de_classification_d.27une_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Vedette – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participant au programme PFAN sont invités à consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour obtenir des instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité existantes ou nouvelles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer la ponctuation de fin de zone dans la zone 1XX à moins qu'elle ne fasse partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou qu'elle ne soit requise par les instructions de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Afin de minimiser l'impact de la maintenance de la base de données sur les notices bibliographiques associées et/ou les notices d'autorité associées, les catalogueurs sont priés de s'abstenir d'apporter des changements qui ne sont pas essentiels aux zones 1XX.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour le titre propre d'une monographie en plusieurs parties, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choix du titre propre d'une collection pour une monographie :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte plus d'une forme de mention de collection, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource porte une mention de collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture dans la même source, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte des pages de titre pour la collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2915.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Tenir compte de l'espacement et des changements dans la typographie au moment de déterminer où le titre de la collection commence et se termine. Consulter également [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Établissement d'un point d'accès pour une collection :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Déterminer le choix du point d'accès autorisé en fonction de l'instruction [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] et des énoncés de politique de BAC/BAnQ pour cette instruction.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclure du point d'accès autorisé les renseignements suivants inclus dans la mention de collection dans la notice bibliographique de la partie composante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'article initial dans les sous-zones $a, $t, $n et $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les compléments de titre;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;la mention de responsabilité;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les titres parallèles;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;les désignations numériques/chronologiques.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter un ou plusieurs qualificatifs entre parenthèses, le cas échéant, conformément aux énoncés de politique de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour obtenir des instructions sur la conversion d'une notice d'autorité de nom en notice d'autorité de collection, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Should an SAR be made?&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Vedette – Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour les familles'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;3&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une famille. Voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Les ajouts au nom sont contenus dans une seule paire de parenthèses séparées par des deux-points. &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Le terme pour le type de famille est ajouté après le nom et il est enregistré dans la sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $d (date) suit le terme pour le type de famille.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $c est utilisée pour un lieu associé à une famille et suit la date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $g est utilisée pour un membre illustre d'une famille. Donner le point d'accès autorisé pour la personne tel que trouvé dans la 1XX de la notice d'autorité de nom sans garder aucun codage de sous-zone interne.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour des personnes'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] fournit des directives sur l'emplacement des mots indiquant une relation (par exemple, Jr.) et le MARC définit la sous-zone $q comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme développée du nom de personne.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) La sous-zone $d (date) doit toujours être le dernier élément dans une zone 100 sauf si le terme (Esprit) est ajouté au nom. Ajouter $c (Esprit) comme dernier élément d'une zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) En général ajouter la sous-zone $c avant la sous-zone $q lorsqu'on ajoute aussi des mots, des chiffres, etc., indiquant une relation. (Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5.] pour le traitement des noms portugais)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MAIS&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
3) Pour les situations exceptionnelles, par exemple lorsque la sous-zone $a ne contient qu'un nom de famille ou qu'un prénom ou que le nom inclut un préfixe, etc., consulter le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#100_Vedette_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Contenu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 336 peut seulement être utilisée pour les notices d'autorité représentant des expressions. La zone 336 est toujours suivie d'une sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;rdacontent/fre&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser les termes fournis dans [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html RDA 6.9.1.3]. La liste des termes est également disponible dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Code du type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si on enregistre une sous-zone $b à la place ou en plus d'une sous-zone $a, utiliser les codes fournis dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''] du MARC 21.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#336_Contenu |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Autres attributs associés à des personnes ou des collectivités =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé pour les termes dans les sous-zones $a, $b et $c. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a, $b et $c. Lorsque les termes dans les sous-zones $a et $b ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer de professions ou d'occupations dans la sous-zone $c (Autre désignation). La profession ou l'occupation peut être enregistrée dans la zone 374.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les titres de royauté, de noblesse ou de rang ecclésiastique ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) dans la sous-zone $d dans la forme utilisée dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'une période et Sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#368_Autres_attributs_associ.C3.A9s_.C3.A0_des_personnes_ou_des_collectivit.C3.A9s |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Lieu associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de juridictions ou d'autres lieux, utiliser la forme trouvée dans Canadiana ou, à défaut, celle trouvée dans le RVM, en enregistrant la source dans la sous-zone $2. La forme du nom de lieu utilisée dans la zone 370 peut différer de la forme du nom de lieu ajoutée à un nom privilégié de lieu ou à un point d'accès construit selon les instructions de RDA ou des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie du nom d'une localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut une autre désignation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de lieu)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié du lieu plus vaste)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom de lieu ajouté à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Autre nom de lieu dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité pour le lieu n'existe pas dans Canadiana ni dans le RVM, il n'est pas nécessaire d'en créer une pour enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370. Enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370 selon les instructions de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ, en consultant les sources appropriées et en ajoutant des éléments additionnels (par exemple, le type de juridiction) afin d'éviter les conflits. Ne pas ajouter de sous-zone $2 si aucune notice d'autorité n'a été créée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom du lieu associé a changé, le nom du lieu qui s'appliquait à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré à la place ou en plus de la forme actuelle du nom. Il n'est pas nécessaire de suivre les politiques d'indexation et d'utiliser uniquement la forme la plus récente du nom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemples :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne née dans la ville de Salisbury avant que son nom ne devienne Harare; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme de nom qui s'appliquait au moment de la naissance de la personne)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne résidant dans la ville de Milan pendant la Renaissance, avant la formation du pays moderne de l'Italie; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme actuelle du nom pour le pays)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de lieux qui ne sont pas des juridictions, préférer les noms provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM et identifier la source dans la sous-zone $2. Si le nom ne provient pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, l'enregistrer dans la zone 370 sans ajouter de sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zone $c – Pays associé&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;En général, ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $c pour enregistrer les lieux qui ne sont pas des entités souveraines. Ces lieux peuvent être enregistrés dans la sous-zone $f ou dans d'autres sous-zones selon le cas.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La Martinique est un département français d'outre-mer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, si une entité souveraine comporte (ou comportait auparavant) un ou plusieurs pays constitutifs, n'importe lequel des pays constitutifs associés à la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré dans la sous-zone $c en plus ou à la place de l'entité souveraine plus vaste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à la Grande-Bretagne qui a des liens étroits avec le Pays de Galles; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Union soviétique, en particulier au Kirghizistan; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à Aruba, un pays constitutif des Pays-Bas; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer les Pays-Bas)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Inde avant son indépendance de la Grande-Bretagne; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer la Grande-Bretagne)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms d'entités des Premières Nations au Canada ainsi que les tribus indiennes («&amp;amp;nbsp;Indian tribes&amp;amp;nbsp;») reconnues par le gouvernement des États-Unis comme des entités juridiques peuvent être incluses dans la sous-zone $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Enregistrer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre dans la zone 370, sauf s'il s'agit simplement d'un lieu de publication ou d'un autre lieu associé à une manifestation (auquel cas utiliser la zone 643, le cas échéant). Bien que le «&amp;amp;nbsp;lieu d'origine&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'une œuvre en série puisse être le même que le lieu de publication de l'œuvre pour laquelle la notice d'autorité de collection (ou la notice bibliographique de publication en série) a été créée, faire preuve de jugement pour distinguer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre d'un lieu de publication qui n'est pas réellement lié à l'œuvre elle-même.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Adresse =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Selon le jugement du catalogueur, fournir une adresse si les informations sont facilement disponibles et n'ont pas déjà été enregistrées dans la sous-zone $e (Lieu de résidence, de sièges sociaux) de la zone 370.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Dans les cas où la sous-zone $a n'est pas enregistrée, inclure au minimum la sous-zone $m (Adresse de courriel) ou la sous-zone $b (Ville). &lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas enregistrer les adresses physiques &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou courriels&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; des personnes vivantes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les informations reliées à l'adresse lors de la mise à jour d'une notice contenant une adresse.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer plusieurs adresses, avec ou sans plages de dates, dans des zones 371 distinctes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Adresse de courriel'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $m doit contenir uniquement une adresse de courriel. Ne pas ajouter d'adresse Internet pour la 1XX dans cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#371_Adresse |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Domaine d'activité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée pour le domaine d'activité, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une entité provenant de Canadiana est utilisée comme domaine d'activité, enlever tout codage de sous-zone qui n'est pas autorisé dans la zone 372.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Domaine d'activité dans la 372 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel que la plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Zones 372 avec un terme provenant du RVM et un terme de vocabulaire non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'un période et la sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Groupe associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le fichier d'autorité Canadiana ou le fichier LC/NAF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Dans la zone 373, le codage de sous-zone n'est pas employé pour les collectivités subordonnées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom d'un groupe associé a changé, enregistrer le ou les noms du groupe qui s'appliquaient à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates). Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec des sous-zones $2 et des dates :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec différentes sources de vocabulaires :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $ s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $ t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : même si le format MARC ne spécifie pas de forme de date dans ces sous-zones, la pratique suivante est recommandée par souci de cohérence. Enregistrer les dates selon le calendrier grégorien dans le format AAAA. Si une date plus précise est nécessaire, considérer la possibilité de l'enregistrer dans une autre zone (par exemple, 670, 678). Il n'est pas nécessaire de reformuler les dates déjà inscrites dans les notices d'autorité pour se conformer à cette pratique. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Profession =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;6.1.3 pour des instructions sur l'enregistrement de la profession ou de l'occupation comme élément. Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.19.1.6 pour des instructions sur l'utilisation d'un terme indiquant la profession ou l'occupation dans un point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : répéter la zone si nécessaire pour plus de clarté.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du terme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les codes enregistrés dans la sous-zone $2 de la zone 374 peuvent provenir soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-TIO.html/view ''Codes sources pour les termes de profession''], soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-VM-C.html/view ''Codes sources pour les vedettes-matière et termes d'indexation''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#374_Profession |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Sexe de la personne =&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Ne pas utiliser cette zone dans les nouvelles notices d'autorité. Lorsqu'une notice existante doit être modifiée pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer toute occurrence de la zone 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Renseignements sur la famille =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Personnalité importante de la famille'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement du nom d'un membre illustre d'une famille dans la sous-zone $b, utiliser la forme du nom de la personne telle que mentionnée dans la sous-zone $g de la zone 100 dans la notice d'autorité pour la famille. Les codages internes de sous-zones ne doivent pas être inclus dans la sous-zone $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Langue associée =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier les codes de langues plutôt que des termes, en utilisant la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21. La sous-zone $l (Nom de la langue) doit être utilisée uniquement pour fournir des informations non disponibles dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/LNG-C.html ''Liste des codes de langue''] du MARC 21. Enregistrer plusieurs codes de langue seulement si la personne ou la collectivité fait usage de plusieurs langages dans ses publications, communications, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;À titre facultatif, enregistrer un ou plusieurs codes de langue ISO 639-3 dans une zone 377 supplémentaire. Cette pratique est particulièrement recommandée lorsqu’un code ISO 639-3 permet d’identifier une langue plus précisément que le code MARC. Pour plus d’informations, voir les [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $2 n'est pas requise lorsque la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 est utilisée pour représenter la langue (le deuxième indicateur «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» mentionne déjà la source). Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent utiliser une autre source de codes de langue peuvent ajouter une zone 377 supplémentaire en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur et en mentionnant la source utilisée dans la sous-zone $2 . Cette source doit cependant provenir d'une des sources fournies dans la liste intitulée [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CTL.html ''Codes sources pour les codes et termes de langue''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Code ISO 639-3 pour la langue Achi : acr. Code pour cette même langue, laquelle fait partie des langues maya, dans la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 : myn)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Forme développée du nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer la forme développée du nom dans la zone 378 lorsque l'information est facilement disponible, même si l'information est déjà présente dans la zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#378_Forme_d.C3.A9velopp.C3.A9e_du_nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Genre de l'œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM ou le RVMGF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'enregistrement du genre de l'œuvre comme élément dans les notices d'autorité de collections représentant des œuvres (et non des expressions), voir l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.3.1.3.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#380_Genre_de_l.27.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Autres caractéristiques distinctes d'une œuvre ou d'une expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée pour enregistrer les éléments RDA Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) et Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Les autres caractéristiques distinctives des expressions qui sont spécifiques aux œuvres musicales (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4–6.18.1.6]) peuvent être aussi enregistrées dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Numéro de Franklin enregistré comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version enregistrée comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut être approprié que certains des termes enregistrés pour une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression soient enregistrés dans la zone 381 ou dans une autre zone MARC pour laquelle il n'y a pas d'élément RDA correspondant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, une collectivité (tel un éditeur) utilisée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ou d'une œuvre peut être enregistrée soit dans la zone 373 (Groupe associé), soit dans la zone 381, soit dans les deux zones. ''Note :'' Le codage de sous-zone pour les collectivités subordonnées n'est pas utilisé dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme groupe associé et comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA n'a pas d'élément particulier pour les lieux associés aux expressions, mais la zone 370 sous-zone $f (Autre lieu associé) et la sous-zone $g (Lieu d'origine de l'œuvre ou de l'expression) peuvent être utilisées dans les notices d'autorité pour les expressions. Dans certains cas, des lieux associés aux œuvres ou aux expressions sont considérés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression selon RDA et peuvent être enregistrés dans la zone 370, dans la zone 381 ou dans les deux zones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Lieux utilisés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre juridique; enregistrés dans les zones 370 et 381)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'élément RDA lieu d'origine d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.5]) dans une zone 370 (voir la section [[#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]] de ce Guide).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression a été utilisée dans un point d'accès autorisé et est aussi enregistrée comme élément dans une zone 3XX, utiliser la zone 381 pour enregistrer une autre caractéristique distinctive. À titre facultatif, enregistrer aussi la même information dans une autre zone 3XX appropriée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#381_Autres_caract.C3.A9ristiques_distinctes_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_ou_d.27une_expression |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en utilisant les termes du thésaurus ''Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM'' (RVMMEM). Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en appliquant les instructions de RDA ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6]) et les ÉP de BAC-BAnQ associés. ''Note :'' La zone 382 peut également être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité d'expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :''' Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère. Si c'est jugé important pour l'identification et l'accès, ajouter une zone 382 additionnelle qui ne répond pas aux présentes lignes directrices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-04-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#382_Distribution_d.27.C3.A9x.C3.A9cution_d.27une_.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numéro d'identification d'une œuvre &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou d'une expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; musicale =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible. Créer des zones 383 distinctes pour les différents systèmes de numérotation associés à une même œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#383_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27identification_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Tonalité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible pour les œuvres. En cas de doute, ne pas enregistrer. Ne pas enregistrer pour les expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Caractéristiques du public cible =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer le public cible d'une œuvre ou d'une expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices  du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a : Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Termes provenant de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé et terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-07-17]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Caractéristiques du créateur ou du collaborateur &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer les caractéristiques démographiques d'un ou plusieurs créateurs ou contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression, notamment pour enregistrer les caractéristiques communes à un groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression. Cette zone sera généralement utilisée dans des notices d'autorité établies pour des agrégats par regroupement matérialisant deux ou plusieurs expressions de deux ou plusieurs œuvres indépendantes créées par des agents différents, ainsi que pour les œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre (par exemple, les œuvres d'auteurs inconnus ou les collections de monographies). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Personnes âgées $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Terme démographique non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bien que cette zone soit principalement utilisée pour des œuvres agrégées et pour des œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre, il existe des situations où il est également approprié de l'utiliser pour une œuvre individuelle d'un ou plusieurs créateurs nommés. Par exemple, pour une œuvre musicale composée pendant l'enfance ou l'adolescence d'un créateur, il ne serait pas approprié d'enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;Enfants&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Adolescents&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme caractéristiques dans la notice d'autorité du compositeur. Au lieu de cela, les caractéristiques démographiques applicables uniquement à certaines des œuvres d'un créateur doivent être enregistrées dans les notices d'autorité établies pour ces œuvres.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Œuvre composée en 2003-2005, achevée lorsque le compositeur avait 14 ans)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Termes issus de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;''(Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau; terme non contrôlé et termes provenant du même vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $i – Information sur la relation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il est possible d'utiliser la sous-zone $i pour enregistrer un terme désignant la nature de la relation entre les groupes démographiques enregistrés dans la zone et l'œuvre ou l'expression. Préférer un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que les termes de relation du format MARC ou les indicateurs de relation RDA. Mettre une majuscule à la première lettre du terme de relation et utiliser la forme au singulier. Faire suivre le terme de relation par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998-February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer plusieurs occurrences de la sous-zone $i dans une même occurrence de la zone 386. Si plusieurs termes de relation s'appliquent à un seul groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs (par exemple, une œuvre réunissant des auteurs et des artistes du même groupe démographique ou une expression dont les éditeurs et les traducteurs appartiennent au même groupe démographique), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Compilation d'œuvres d'auteurs et d'artistes du Massachusetts)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différents termes de relation s'appliquent à différents créateurs et contributeurs (par exemple, si les auteurs font partie d'un groupe démographique et les artistes d'un autre), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents. Si le même terme de relation s'applique à plus d'un groupe démographique, répéter la sous-zone $a dans une même zone ou répéter la zone. Pour plus de clarté, en cas de doute, répéter la zone 386 autant que nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Partition comprenant des œuvres de Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler et Strauss, ainsi que les paroles imprimées sous forme de texte, en allemand et en traduction anglaise)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-12]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Période associée à la création =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine d'une œuvre ou d'une expression. Le nom de la période peut préciser ou sous-entendre un lieu pour lequel la période de temps est pertinente. Il peut aussi préciser le nom d'un événement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM ou le RVMFAST. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les compilations, la zone peut être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine des œuvres/expressions contenues dans la compilation, considérées collectivement (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur). Elle peut également être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine de la compilation elle-même (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;2&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour un recueil de poésie de la Renaissance compilé au XIXe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 388 peut être utilisée en conjonction avec ou à la place de la zone 046. Lorsque la ou les dates précises de création ou d'origine ne sont pas connues ou qu'elles s'étendent sur une longue période, il peut être utile d'enregistrer des termes chronologiques textuels dans la zone 388.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour une œuvre anonyme du XIVe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si la valeur de l'indicateur diffère, répéter la zone. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom avec zones 388 contenant des termes provenant de différents vocabulaires)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour une autre raison, supprimer tout signe de ponctuation à la fin d'une zone 4XX sauf s'il fait partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou est requis par les règles de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'est pas nécessaire de justifier tous les renvois 4XX; voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès|Justification des variantes de point d'accès]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 670 de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas faire un renvoi 4XX qui se normalise sous la même forme qu'une autre zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité ou une zone 1XX dans toute autre notice d'autorité de nom. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;NACO normalization&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratiques à privilégier pour le catalogage selon RDA :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Enregistrer les variantes trouvées dans la manifestation cataloguée :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Utiliser le jugement du catalogueur;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Il n'y a pas de limite quant au nombre ou à la forme des renvois;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Au lieu ou en plus d'ajouter des variantes, envisager de fournir un accès en ajoutant des zones 37X.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Exemple montrant une zone 378 sans une variante pour la forme développée du nom :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Établir des notices d'autorité de noms supplémentaires pour les points d'accès autorisés nécessaires pour soutenir les éléments utilisés dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX (par exemple, la collectivité supérieure associée à la collectivité subordonnée qui doit être établie).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, fournir une variante de point d'accès 4XX pour un ancien point d'accès autorisé 1XX, sauf si l'ancien point d'accès autorisé est manifestement incorrect. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#4XX$w|Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour plus d'information.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Utiliser la forme établie des composantes dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX, à l'exception des variantes en écriture non latine, qui peuvent présenter un mélange d'écritures ou être entièrement dans une écriture non latine.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, ne pas supprimer des variantes sauf si elles sont manifestement incorrectes (par exemple, une variante en écriture non latine qui ne représente pas la même personne).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si une forme trouvée dans la manifestation cataloguée inclut une variante de forme d'une composante d'une variante de point d'accès en 4XX, cette forme peut être utilisée dans son intégralité comme une variante de point d'accès supplémentaire en 4XX, à condition que des sous-zones ne soient pas utilisées pour diviser ses parties constitutives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on change la forme d'une collectivité hiérarchiquement supérieure, d'un nom géographique ou d'un nom de personne dans une 1XX, mettre à jour toutes les notices d'autorité existantes qui utilisent cette composante dans une zone 4XX, sauf si la 4XX représente l'ancien point d'accès autorisé (par exemple, $w/2=e). Exception : Ne pas appliquer cette instruction dans le cas des notices d'autorité migrées qui n'ont pas été réévaluées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est modifié parce que la personne a changé de nom, enregistrer l'ancienne forme du nom dans une zone 400 avec $w nne si la variante est valide selon les instructions de RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après l'élection comme pape)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est mis à jour pour fermer la date, il est recommandé d'enregistrer l'ancienne forme avec la date ouverte dans une zone 4XX avec $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) basé sur le catalogage CIP est modifié parce que sa forme sur la ressource publiée est différente de celle sur la demande CIP, une zone 4XX pour l'ancienne forme du point d'accès autorisé avec la sous-zone $w nne peut être ajoutée sauf si l'ancienne forme 1XX est manifestement incorrecte (par exemple, la date de naissance de l'auteur a été donnée comme étant 1775 au lieu de 1975 dans la demande CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) est modifié en raison d'un changement dans les instructions de catalogage, enregistrer l'ancienne forme dans une zone 4XX en utilisant $w. Si la variante de forme est un renvoi valide selon les instructions actuelles de RDA, utiliser $w nne. Si la variante de forme n'est pas un renvoi valide selon les instructions RDA actuelles, utiliser $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante n'est pas valide selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nne&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante est valide selon RDA; le changement de la forme en 100 est basé sur l'utilisation du nom et les dates de naissance et de mort ont été ajoutées parce que la 100 a été changée)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429 av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que l'abréviation «&amp;amp;nbsp;ca&amp;amp;nbsp;» n'est pas valide pour une période d'activité selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé est corrigé parce que des dates ont été enregistrées de manière inexacte ou qu'un catalogueur a introduit une faute de frappe dans le point d'accès autorisé, ne pas faire de renvoi à la forme incorrecte. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche des notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel des collections et la création et la tenue à jour des notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des variantes de point d'accès peuvent être enregistrées dans toute notice d'autorité de collection, y compris celles pour des phrases analogues à des collections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si les volumes d'une monographie en plusieurs parties portent des formes différentes du titre commun, faire un renvoi 4XX plutôt qu'un renvoi 5XX pour la forme de titre non choisie comme titre propre de la monographie en plusieurs parties.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w. Lorsqu'on utilise les indicateurs de relation RDA dans les zones 5XX, utiliser les termes des annexes I, J ou K; mettre une majuscule au premier terme et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour de l'information sur l'utilisation des indicateurs de relation et/ou les codes $w dans une zone 5XX spécifique, voir la section de ce Guide concernant cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les conventions du format autorités en ce qui concerne l'utilisation de la sous-zone $w. Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $w sauf si une valeur autre que «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» est appropriée dans l'une des positions. Lorsqu'on utilise la sous-zone $w, enregistrer la sous-zone comme première sous-zone de la zone. Fournir les positions de caractères qui précèdent la valeur mais pas celles qui lui succèdent, par exemple,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé antérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé ultérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = pour indiquer qu'une sous-zone $i ou une sous-zone $2 est utilisée pour donner de l'information sur la relation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = pour indiquer un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour des pseudonymes multiples (la notice comprend aussi une zone 663)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» (5XX) ne doit pas se normaliser sous la même forme qu'un autre renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la même notice d'autorité, sauf si les deux zones 5XX contiennent un indicateur de relation dans la sous-zone $i et que les textes des indicateurs de relation sont différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre un nom de personne et 1) le nom d'une autre personne, d'une famille ou d'une collectivité ou 2) le point d'accès autorisé pour une œuvre ou une expression. Cette technique peut également être utilisée pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres et des expressions et contenant des noms de personnes. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe I, J ou K dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on enregistre des relations entre noms de personnes impliquant des pseudonymes et que seulement deux notices d'autorité sont en cause, les catalogueurs peuvent soit 1) utiliser la sous-zone $i et le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w ou 2) utiliser des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» simples. Pour plus d'information sur ces techniques et des instructions sur l'enregistrement de pseudonymes multiples (c'est-à-dire ceux qui requièrent une zone 663), voir la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rappel aux catalogueurs : Lorsqu'une variante de nom (400) et un point d'accès autorisé (100) sont en conflit, il faut faire un ajout à la zone 400 ou à la zone 100 pour résoudre le conflit (par exemple, une forme développée du nom, une date d'activité, etc.); la pratique antérieure consistant à changer la zone 400 en 500 pour résoudre le conflit n'est plus une option. Lorsque les catalogueurs trouvent une variante de forme dans une zone 500 au cours de la mise à jour d'une notice d'autorité de nom, ils doivent résoudre le conflit et modifier la zone en 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de collectivité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de réunion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8] pour des directives sur les relations entre les notices d'autorité pour des séries de conférences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Titre uniforme =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés pour des œuvres ou des expressions. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe J dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $i avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w tant que les indicateurs de relation pour les lieux ne seront pas développés. (RDA a prévu un espace pour l'annexe L.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Traitement de collection – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 640 Dates de publication et/ou indication séquentielle de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#640_Dates_de_publication_et.2Fou_indication_s.C3.A9quentielle_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Exemple de numérotation de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#642_Exemple_de_num.C3.A9rotation_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Lieu et éditeur de la collection/organisme de publication =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#643_Lieu_et_.C3.A9diteur_de_la_collection.2Forganisme_de_publication |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Usage en matière d'analyse de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#644_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_d.27analyse_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Usage en matière de rappel de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#645_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_rappel_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Usage en matière de classification de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#646_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_classification_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Renvoi complexe «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 663 comprend le texte explicatif et les points d'accès autorisés pour les relations entre une zone 100 (nom établi) et d'autres zones 100 (noms établis) qui ne peuvent pas être correctement exprimées par un ou plusieurs renvois simples générés à partir de zones 500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Généralement, cette situation se produit lorsqu'une personne utilise plus de deux identités, lorsque plus d'une personne partage une identité avec une ou plusieurs autres personnes, ou lorsque plusieurs personnes utilisent le même pseudonyme indépendamment les unes des autres ou en raison d'un autre arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le texte de la zone 663 peut être adapté pour répondre à des situations exceptionnelles; toutefois, il faut garder le texte aussi simple que possible et laisser les zones et le codage MARC communiquer l'information souhaitée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la technique de la zone 663 pour établir des relations entre collectivités ou entre personnes et collectivités.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Seulement deux identités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque seulement deux notices d'autorité de noms sont créées pour une personne, les notices d'autorité de noms sont généralement reliées par des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500, sans aucune zone 663. Toutefois, lorsque l'une des notices d'autorité de noms est établie pour un pseudonyme commun ou un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment les unes des autres, la technique de la zone 663 est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Plus de deux identités - point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» et renvois ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plus de deux points d'accès autorisés sont créés pour la même personne, identifier un point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» en utilisant la technique de la zone 663. Cette décision est fondée sur le désir de simplifier la structure de renvois et d'aider les catalogueurs à déterminer le nom à utiliser comme sujet des œuvres biographiques ou critiques. Le point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» doit être déterminé par la forme de nom qui prédomine dans l'usage ou, en l'absence de preuves suffisantes, en choisissant le nom réel de la personne comme forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Dans la notice d'autorité pour la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», ajouter des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour tous les autres noms utilisés. Justifier les renvois en 500 par des zones 670 selon la pratique normale. Fournir une zone 663 énumérant tous les autres noms avec le texte suivant (celui-ci peut être modifié pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom] $b [forme établie du nom]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans chacune des autres notices d'autorité de noms, ajouter un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», en justifiant ce renvoi par une zone 670, selon la pratique normale. D'autres noms peuvent être mentionnés dans le 670 s'il est pratique de le faire. Fournir une zone 663 avec le texte suivant ou un texte similaire (le texte peut être ajusté pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom choisie comme vedette de base]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque l'auteur utilise un autre nouveau nom, créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour ce nom et l'ajouter à la structure de renvois ainsi qu'à la liste de la zone 663 dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;». Les renvois au nouveau nom dans les zones 500 et 663 sont ajoutés seulement dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes conjoints ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un pseudonyme conjoint est une identité utilisée par deux ou plusieurs personnes travaillant en collaboration. Si une personne utilise un pseudonyme conjoint et un autre nom (tel que trouvé dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes utilisés par plusieurs personnes ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment l'une de l'autre utilisent le même pseudonyme et un ou plusieurs autres noms (tels que trouvés dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisée par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(L'auteur a un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes et des pseudonymes individuels)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Note générale non destinée au public =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Donner des informations de valeur permanente et d'intérêt général qui seraient également utiles aux autres institutions du PFAN ou à celles qui n'y participent pas. Une liste représentative des notes est donnée ci-dessous. En général, le libellé est recommandé, mais n'est pas prescriptif, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions. Les zones 667 distinctes peuvent être données dans n'importe quel ordre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [raison de l'encodage].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date de la mise à jour].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Utilisée pour les changements de langue officielle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Annexe_2_:_Projets_sp.C3.A9ciaux|Annexe 2]] de ce Guide pour des informations et des instructions sur les zones 667 ajoutées aux notices d'autorité dans le cadre d'un projet spécial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes dont certaines identités ne sont pas établies ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une personne utilise deux ou plusieurs identités dans les manifestations, des notices d'autorité de noms peuvent être créées pour chaque identité. Dans un souci d'efficacité, les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser une zone 667 pour énumérer les pseudonymes non trouvés dans les publications au lieu de créer des notices d'autorité de noms pour ces pseudonymes inutilisés. Dans ce cas, énumérer les pseudonymes inutilisés dans une zone 667 après l'expression : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette note peut aussi être ajoutée dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne qui a plusieurs notices d'autorité de noms pour plusieurs identités lorsque certains des pseudonymes ne sont pas trouvés dans des publications. Dans ce cas, énumérer seulement les pseudonymes inutilisés dans la zone 667 et suivre les instructions appropriées pour les autres pseudonymes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, […] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la section [[#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom|663]] de ce Guide ainsi que dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les séries de congrès, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter une zone 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour une série de congrès lorsqu'il y a des notices d'autorité autant pour la série que pour les occurrences isolées du congrès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appliquer ces instructions lors de la création de nouvelles notices d'autorité de noms et lors de la révision de notices d'autorité de noms existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Ajouter des notes indiquant l'utilisation en indexation lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé n'est pas approprié pour utilisation comme vedette-matière dans ces situations :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Chefs d'État, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette instruction s'applique aux notices d'autorité de noms pour les collectivités représentant la fonction lorsque le nom du titulaire est inclus comme partie du point d'accès autorisé de la collectivité. Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Dignitaires gouvernementaux)] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html 11.2.2.26 (Dignitaires religieux)] pour les instructions sur les collectivités. Utiliser cette note 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour la collectivité pour indiquer l'utilisation en indexation :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [vedette du nom de la personne].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi les sections [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Changements linéaires entre noms antérieurs et ultérieurs d'une juridiction'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La politique d'indexation du RVM est d'employer comme point d'accès matière ou comme subdivision géographique uniquement le dernier nom d'une juridiction politique qui a eu un ou plusieurs noms antérieurs, aussi longtemps que l'identité territoriale demeure essentiellement la même (voir ''Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval'', 5.14.3.1). Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom ayant un point d'accès autorisé antérieur/ultérieur pour un lieu dans cette situation, les catalogueurs doivent ajouter une note 667 sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom antérieur du lieu et modifier les zones 008 appropriés (008/11 et 008/15).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Notices d'autorité de personnes fictives'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les points d'accès autorisés pour les personnes fictives ne doivent pas être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, la zone 008/11 doit être codée avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» et la zone 008/15 doit être codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;». Selon l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 9.0, lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, ajouter cette zone 667 pour indiquer l'utilisation comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une partie d'une ville, en indiquant qu'il n'est pas approprié de l'utiliser comme une subdivision géographique :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) Notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les points d'accès autorisés pour les noms de familles peuvent être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Pour les notices d'autorité de noms de familles qui reflètent la pratique antérieure (qui interdisait de les utiliser comme vedettes-matière), mettre à jour les notices pour attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et supprimer la note sur l’utilisation comme vedette-matière suivante :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes pour les renvois en écriture non latine ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans une notice d'autorité qui comprend une variante de point d'accès dans une écriture non latine, utiliser la zone 667 avec une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.&amp;amp;nbsp;» S'il y a plusieurs variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, utiliser une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» à la zone 008/29 pour indiquer que la variante de point d'accès n'a pas été évaluée. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Doublons&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Doublons ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice à conserver&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Source des données =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone a pour but d'enregistrer des informations sur le nom ou le titre représenté dans la zone 1XX. Elle comprend des renseignements qui contribuent à l'identification de l'entité et qui justifient le choix du nom ou du titre de même que tout élément supplémentaire utilisé pour construire le point d'accès autorisé (1XX). Les informations consignées justifient également, le cas échéant, des variantes de forme du nom ou du titre (4XX), d'autres éléments d'identification (046, 3XX et 678), et clarifient les relations entre la 1XX et les autres entités représentées dans le fichier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Fonctions de la zone 670 :'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations, provenant de sources (par exemple, livres, appels téléphoniques, sites Web), à l'appui du choix et de la forme du point d'accès autorisé, des variantes de point d'accès et d'autres éléments d'identification&lt;br /&gt;
* Stocker des informations qui pourront être utilisées pour résoudre un conflit par la suite&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations sur les relations entre entités (par exemple, une personne est l'auteur d'une œuvre, une collectivité a été absorbée par une autre collectivité)&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier une personne qui a produit des œuvres dans différents domaines ou sous des formes diverses&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier des personnes différentes dont les points d'accès doivent rester identiques pour le moment (c'est-à-dire des noms de personnes indifférenciés)&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour préciser si les différentes formes d'un nom ou d'un titre sont de simples variations ou reflètent un changement de nom ou de titre&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer les recherches requises par les lignes directrices actuelles&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour faciliter la maintenance des fichiers d'autorité et bibliographiques étant donné que les informations dans les zones 670 aident à la prise de décisions concernant les points d'accès autorisés en double et les attributions erronées&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour soutenir les manipulations informatiques basées sur des algorithmes utilisant les informations du 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, la première zone 670 cite la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est établie, c'est-à-dire la ressource en cours de catalogage. Si la ressource en cours de catalogage ou de consultation ne fournit aucune information justifiant le point d'accès autorisé, les variantes de point d'accès ou les autres éléments enregistrés dans la notice d'autorité, voir la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur la façon de citer la ressource dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les zones 670 suivantes dans n'importe quel ordre, en ajoutant les nouvelles zones après celles qui existent déjà. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 670 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670, préférer les sources objectives et faisant autorité (par exemple, une encyclopédie) et les sources qui fournissent des informations de première main (par exemple, un blogue d'auteur). Utiliser des sources qui fournissent des informations supplémentaires plutôt que celles qui répètent des informations déjà présentes dans les autres zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Pratiques à privilégier pour les zones 670 : '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans la sous-zone $b, résumer et modifier les informations trouvées, selon les besoins, pour éviter les informations superflues ou répétitives.&lt;br /&gt;
* Éviter de citer des informations subjectives ou des informations dont la valeur est douteuse pour identifier une entité dans un contexte bibliographique.&lt;br /&gt;
* Faire preuve de prudence lors de l'enregistrement d'informations sur des personnes vivantes lorsque ces informations sont susceptibles d'être de nature privée ou controversée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité existantes peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices. Par exemple, dans les zones 670 des notices d'autorité plus anciennes, la sous-zone $b contenant des informations justificatives pourrait être absente. Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité qui faisaient partie d'un projet spécial peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices et/ou peuvent contenir des informations qui semblent inhabituelles ou incorrectes.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Les exemples donnés tout au long du texte suivant présentent diverses conventions en ce qui concerne la ponctuation et le style. Ces conventions ne sont pas prescriptives et doivent être considérées comme des pratiques à privilégier pour faciliter l'échange d'informations dans le contexte d'une base de données partagée. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs fassent preuve de jugement et de bon sens. La ponctuation et le style ne doivent pas nécessairement être cohérents d'une notice à l'autre tant que l'information est claire et précise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format des zones 670 ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
À l'exception de l'eszett (ß ou ſʒ) et du symbole euro (€), tous les caractères figurant dans le [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/M9230.html tableau des codes MARC] peuvent être utilisés dans les notices d'autorité ajoutées au fichier d'autorité Canadiana (voir le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). Lorsque des données provenant d'un site Web sont copiées/collées dans une zone 670, vérifier que tous les caractères peuvent être utilisés dans la notice. Certains caractères non valides ressemblent à ceux qui sont valides. Par exemple, le tiret (–) non valide ressemble au trait d'union (-) valide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une substitution pour un symbole non reproductible est indiquée entre parenthèses (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.5]), une explication de cette interpolation peut également être fournie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les données doivent être fournies sous forme romanisée. Normalement, il est entendu que le catalogueur a fourni la romanisation; par conséquent, lors de la transcription de données trouvées dans la source sous forme romanisée, ajouter après celle-ci l'expression entre crochets ['''forme romanisée''']. Dans des langues telles que l'arabe et l'hébreu, où les voyelles sont généralement omises dans l'orthographe des textes, le catalogueur fournit les voyelles manquantes lors de la transcription des données. Lors de la transcription de texte qui inclut les voyelles, ajouter après entre parenthèses ['''vocalisé'''] ou ['''en partie vocalisé'''] selon le cas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un catalogueur choisit de fournir des variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, les 670 $b doivent contenir aussi bien la transcription du ou des textes en écriture non latine trouvés dans la source que la ou les formes systématiquement romanisées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les notices d'autorité sont créées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, il est possible que de l'information supplémentaire soit incluse. Ces données peuvent également être formatées d'une manière différente de celle indiquée dans le présent document. En général, ces données doivent être conservées telles qu'elles sont générées afin de maintenir la rentabilité de ce processus, à moins que les données ne prêtent à confusion ou ne provoquent des erreurs de validation. Les noms et les titres pour lesquels les notices d'autorité sont créées constituent l'exception à cette règle. Suivre les instructions de ces sections pour enregistrer ces données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Citation de la source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Le titre propre de la ressource citée, suffisamment complet pour permettre une identification ultérieure dans un catalogue en ligne. Des abréviations et des points de suspension peuvent être utilisés. Faire précéder un titre générique ou non distinctif du nom du créateur par lequel commencerait le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre. Si le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre est le même que le titre propre plus un qualificatif, il peut être fourni à la place du titre propre pour éviter toute ambiguïté. Lorsque des informations sont fournies dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 pour justifier un point d'accès autorisé ou une variante de point d'accès, suivre les instructions supplémentaires sous Enregistrement des noms et des titres. &lt;br /&gt;
# La date de publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Monographies en plusieurs parties. S'il s'agit de la première partie, indiquer la date de publication sous forme de date ouverte.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Publications en série autres que les collections de monographies. En général, utiliser une désignation chronologique au lieu d'une date de publication. S'il n'y a pas de désignation chronologique, utiliser la désignation numérique et la date de publication. Le cas échéant, indiquer à la suite de la désignation qu'un «&amp;amp;nbsp;substitut&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été utilisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:15px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ressources intégratrices. Appliquer les instructions de [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] pour la source du titre propre d'un site Web. Identifier l'itération à partir de laquelle les informations ont été prises (par exemple «&amp;amp;nbsp;consulté(e) le&amp;amp;nbsp;» suivi d'une date pour un site Web mis à jour de façon continue, le numéro de mise à jour ou le numéro de révision pour les publication à feuillets mobiles à mise à jour).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Informations trouvées'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $b :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# L'emplacement spécifique où les informations ont été trouvées. Pour les ressources en plusieurs parties avec parties numérotées, indiquer la désignation de la partie et l'emplacement dans la partie (par exemple, vol. 6, page 10; recto de la carte, étiquette). Des abréviations ou des formes au long peuvent être utilisées (par exemple, p. de t. ou page de titre, couv. ou couverture, vol. 6 ou volume 6). &lt;br /&gt;
# Informations trouvées. À la suite de l'emplacement, citer les informations qui y ont été trouvées, entre parenthèses. Le cas échéant, indiquer différentes occurrences d'informations provenant de la même source à la suite de l'emplacement de l'information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' Si le point d'accès autorisé est construit à partir des données de catalogage avant publication, inclure «&amp;amp;nbsp;CIP&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la mention de l'emplacement (par exemple, formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Takao Tanabe, 2026 : $b page de titre du CIP de BAC (Sherri Shinobu Kajiwara) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Kajiwara, Sherri S.; personne associée au Canada et au Japon)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Ressources Internet.''' Pour les sites Web, indiquer s'il y a lieu le nom de l'emplacement à l'intérieur du site (par exemple, À propos; Notre histoire, Chronologie; Government, Executive Branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Plusieurs emplacements dans une ressource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' Lorsqu'on ajoute de nouvelles informations à une zone 670 créée pour un CIP, indiquer que les nouvelles informations proviennent de la ressource publiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; personne associée au Canada) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; personne associée au Canada) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de noms, utiliser généralement «&amp;amp;nbsp;etc.&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour éviter de donner plus de deux emplacements ou une séquence d'emplacements (par exemple, p. 316, etc., pour la séquence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de collections, toujours indiquer chaque emplacement séparément.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Lors du travail d'autorité post-catalogage sans le document en main, utiliser l'emplacement « ressource non disponible ». Si le document est examiné à nouveau et que la notice d'autorité est mise à jour, il est permis de modifier la zone 670 correspondante afin de fournir un emplacement et des formes supplémentaires de titres de collection si nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source des informations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent facultativement fournir un identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) dans la sous-zone $u de la zone 670 pour établir un lien avec la ressource citée si celle-ci contient des informations importantes sur l'entité établie qui ne peuvent être citées succinctement dans la notice d'autorité. Noter que l'utilisation d'un URI dans la zone 670 $u ne supplée pas à l'obligation de citer dans les sous-zones $a et $b de la zone 670 les données pertinentes nécessaires pour justifier le point d'accès autorisé (y compris les ajouts) ou les variantes (cette information continuera d'être disponible si le site change ou disparaît). Toutefois, les informations trouvées dans les sources en ligne peuvent être ajoutées aux zones 046 ou 3XX avec les citations appropriées dans les sous-zones $v et $u et ne pas être répétées dans une 670 lorsque ces informations ne sont pas utilisées dans une 1XX ou une 4XX. Si un URI est inclus dans une 670, il doit être indiqué dans la sous-zone $u. La sous-zone $u doit contenir uniquement l'URI sans aucune autre donnée (par exemple, ne pas mettre l'URI entre parenthèses ni inclure de mots dans la sous-zone $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des noms et des titres ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer intégralement les noms ou les titres de collections utilisés dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès, comme ils apparaissent dans la source, sans abréviation par le catalogueur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la préparation d'une notice d'autorité pour le texte d'une loi ou d'un recueil de lois par sujet, si une source citée contient un titre abrégé ou un titre de référence officiels, citer ce titre, précédé du terme «&amp;amp;nbsp;titre de référence&amp;amp;nbsp;» et de son emplacement exact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les autorités de collectivités, inclure dans les données citées toute la hiérarchie requise pour justifier toutes les variantes de point d'accès nécessaires. Faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles informations (par exemple, le nom de l'organisme subordonné) sont étrangères à la notice créée et ne doivent pas être enregistrées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toutes les catégories ci-dessus, si la seule présentation du nom ou du titre sur la source d'information privilégiée se trouve dans le titre de la ressource donné dans la sous-zone $a de la 670, la répétition du nom dans la sous-zone $b peut être omise, à condition qu'aucune information importante ne soit perdue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si des informations sur un nom ou un titre antérieur ou postérieur se trouvent dans la même source que le nom ou le titre dans le point d'accès autorisé, donner toutes les informations dans la zone 670. Ne pas séparer les informations sur le nom ou le titre antérieur ou postérieur pour les donner dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour faciliter la contribution internationale et l'utilisation des notices d'autorité, lors de l'enregistrement des dates, utiliser généralement les noms de mois, sous forme longue ou [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abrégée]. (Pour les dates enregistrées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, voir la section [[#Format_des_zones_670|Format des zones 670]] de ce Guide). Ne pas modifier le style des dates dans les notices existantes. Comme pratique à privilégier, si une date n'est pas incluse dans la sous-zone $d de la zone 100, envisager d'ajouter une zone 046 si les dates sont disponibles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification des variantes de point d'accès ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justifier les noms ou les titres donnés comme variantes de point d'accès par des informations citées des sources. Toutefois, une justification n'est pas requise dans les cas suivants :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variantes de point d'accès reflétant différentes romanisations ou orthographes connues du catalogueur;&lt;br /&gt;
# Une variante de titre dérivée de la ressource cataloguée, d'autres ressources cataloguées sous le même point d'accès ou de sources de référence standard;&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois pour des points d'accès autorisés de collectivités reflétant des changements dus à une réforme orthographique nationale, des changements de noms dus à un changement de langue officielle ou des changements impliquant uniquement une collectivité supérieure à laquelle la collectivité en cours d'établissement est subordonnée.&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois facultatifs à partir de formes RCAA2 ou pré-RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité de collections et les notices d'autorité de noms rétrospectives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification d'autres éléments ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les informations enregistrées dans les zones 046, 3XX ou 678 de la notice d'autorité doivent généralement être justifiées, à moins qu'elles ne ressortent clairement dans les informations enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 ou qu'elles puissent être facilement déduites d'autres éléments d'identification enregistrés, y compris le nom privilégié.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour la zone 046 et plusieurs des zones 3XX, une sous-zone $u ou une sous-zone $v enregistrée dans la même zone peut être utilisée à la place ou en plus d'une 670. Voir la section [[#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]] de ce Guide pour les directives concernant les sous-zones $u et $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des autres données ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. Ne pas abréger ou traduire des attributs tels que le titre d'une personne ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) qui apparaissent en conjonction avec les noms de personnes dans les mentions de responsabilité et qui pourraient potentiellement être utilisés comme partie du point d'accès. Les autres données peuvent être abrégées ou résumées. En général, traduire les données en langues étrangères de manière informelle en français, en les paraphrasant ou en les résumant selon ce qui convient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données autres que les formes du titre (ou de la phrase analogue à une collection) à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. La numérotation et les noms des organismes de publication ne sont pas obligatoires mais peuvent être indiqués.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Types particuliers de citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les citations les plus courantes sont énumérées ci-dessous. Si celles-ci ne sont pas appropriées, en formuler d'autres selon les besoins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la conversion des informations trouvées dans des zones MARC obsolètes ou non actives (par exemple, 664, 665, 666) en une note 670, citer Canadiana dans une citation telle que celles fournies dans les exemples ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date de la conversion] $b ([données converties à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([données déplacées à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC et fichier interne de BAnQ'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La façon de citer ces fichiers dans la zone 670 est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; usage: [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de noms.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations. Entre parenthèses, précédé par la mention '''point d'accès :''' ou '''points d'accès :''' , mentionner le ou les points d'accès trouvés, même si le point d'accès autorisé actuel est identique. S'il est jugé utile de mentionner une ou plusieurs variantes de point d'accès trouvées dans une notice d'autorité, les mentionner en les faisant précéder de la mention '''variante :''' ou '''variantes :'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différentes formes du nom apparaissent dans les notices bibliographiques, enregistrer le point d'accès ainsi que toutes les formes trouvées, y compris les formes identiques au point d'accès autorisé. Séparer le point d'accès des autres formes de nom et faire précéder les autres formes d'une mention appropriée, par exemple, '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' ou '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas citer les notices bibliographiques ou l'emplacement exact des variations trouvées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de collections.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations, suivie de la citation de la notice bibliographique. Entre parenthèses, indiquer la mention de la collection qui se trouve dans cette notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 27 janv. 2021, Les Déchets ménagers, c1980 $b (Les Cahiers de l'AGHTM)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] Le fichier LC/NAF a aussi été cité antérieurement sous d'autres noms, par exemple Base de données LC/NACO et Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;usage&amp;amp;nbsp;» désigne les formes de noms transcrites que l'on trouve habituellement dans les mentions de responsabilité des notices bibliographiques. On peut également trouver ces formes dans d'autres parties de la notice bibliographique telles que le titre propre ou une note citée. En raison des changements apportés aux instructions de catalogage, les catalogueurs doivent être prudents lorsqu'ils prennent les informations de la mention de publication, de la mention de distribution, etc. et de la mention de collection.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») désigne une forme de nom qui ne correspond pas nécessairement à une forme transcrite. Par exemple, dans les notices RCAA2, le nom d'un éditeur qui figure sur la ressource comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Publishing Company&amp;amp;nbsp;» pourrait avoir été enregistré dans la mention de publication sous la forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Pub. Co&amp;amp;nbsp;». Normalement, il n'est pas nécessaire de citer une telle forme dans une zone 670.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Autres fichiers ou catalogues'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un point d'accès est trouvé dans un catalogue ou une base de données en ligne, utiliser son jugement pour créer une citation 670. Commencer la zone 670 par une désignation du catalogue ou de la base de données dans laquelle ces autres notices bibliographiques ont été trouvées. Il n'y a pas de formulation prescrite pour ces citations; des exemples sont donnés ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Bases de données toponymiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer le nom de la base de données et la date de la recherche dans la sous-zone $a. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Le nom de la base de données peut être cité sous forme d'acronyme ou en toutes lettres.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Dans la sous-zone $b, indiquer le ou les noms de l'entité, le type d'entité, la désignation ou la classe de l'élément (par exemple, ADM1, PPL, civil), les coordonnées et le nom du lieu plus vaste, s'il y a lieu. (D'autres informations pertinentes peuvent également être fournies.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de la désignation ou de la classe de l'élément, il est possible d'utiliser soit le code (par exemple, PPL) ou sa forme en toutes lettres (par exemple, populated place). Pour les noms étrangers, indiquer le type de nom (par exemple, forme conventionnelle, forme approuvée, forme courte, etc.) entre crochets ou parenthèses après le nom. Répéter les crochets ou les parenthèses après chaque nom de ce type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Les noms de variantes (y compris les noms en caractères non latins) peuvent être donnés dans une seule liste, comme indiqué ci-dessous. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement des coordonnées, il est possible d'utiliser le format DMS (degrés, minutes, secondes), le format DD (degrés décimaux) ou les deux formats.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a choisi d’enregistrer les coordonnées DMS)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées telles que trouvées. Toutefois, si la base de données affiche les coordonnées en utilisant des deux-points pour séparer les composantes DMS et des valeurs positives et négatives pour communiquer l'hémisphère, il est acceptable de traduire les coordonnées au format DMS traditionnel si souhaité. Utiliser le symbole du degré (et non le zéro en exposant) pour indiquer les degrés, le signe mou (lettre modificative prime) pour les minutes et le signe dur (lettre modificative double prime) pour les secondes. Pour les coordonnées de latitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère sud. Pour les coordonnées de longitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère occidental.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a enregistré les coordonnées DMS telles qu'elles ont été trouvées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a traduit les coordonnées DMS au format traditionnel à partir de : -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic names server&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, consulté le &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;17 août 2022&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;$b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;22:53:01, 121:02:54&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources non bibliographiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer la source non bibliographique, la date et les informations. La source peut être indiquée de manière spécifique («&amp;amp;nbsp;Lettre de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.) ou en termes généraux («&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.). Lorsqu'on indique une source spécifique, il n'est pas nécessaire de montrer comment l'information a été reçue, par exemple, que la lettre a été reçue par télécopieur plutôt que par courrier. Lorsqu'un appel téléphonique à un éditeur, une agence ou une organisation est cité, il convient généralement de donner le nom du groupe appelé, plutôt que le titre ou le nom de la personne contactée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de collections de rééditions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité de collection concerne uniquement une réédition, commencer la 670 par le terme correspondant au type de réédition et une barre oblique. Ne pas inclure une 670 pour une réédition si la notice d'autorité sujet couvre à la fois l'original et une ou plusieurs rééditions. Ne pas ajouter de zones 670 supplémentaires pour d'autres types de rééditions cataloguées ultérieurement. (Voir 64X Traitement de la collection, Rééditions pour plus d'informations sur les rééditions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciés'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour des informations sur les citations existantes dans les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciées, voir la section [[#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32 Nom de personne indifférencié]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Titre associé de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 672 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui est associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité de collectivité, des zones 672 peuvent être utilisées pour enregistrer des titres de ressources dont la collectivité est la créatrice, l'organisme de publication ou le sujet. Le but premier de la zone 672 consiste principalement à documenter le fait qu'il existe un lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 672 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 670 pour consigner le titre de la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est créée, ni d'utiliser des zones 670 pour justifier les informations enregistrées dans les zones 1XX et 4XX, telles que le nom privilégié et les variantes de noms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 672 peuvent être ajoutées après les zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 672 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 672 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans la classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 672 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zones 672 avec titres propres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Cervantes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre propre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre uniforme)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec une variante de titre pour l'œuvre associée à l'expression catalane de l'œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Reste du titre'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'on enregistre un titre propre, la sous-zone $b peut être utilisée pour enregistrer le complément de titre ou le titre propre parallèle afin d'éviter toute confusion lorsque des titres nécessitent une meilleure identification.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le complément de titre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le titre propre parallèle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $f – Date'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $f est utilisée pour enregistrer une date appropriée à l'entité enregistrée dans la sous-zone $a (par exemple, utiliser la date d'une œuvre pour un titre privilégié et la date de publication pour un titre propre). Ne pas utiliser les crochets carrés dans la sous-zone $f pour enregistrer une date de publication ou de production. Ne pas mettre de date de distribution, de date de fabrication ou de date de copyright en $f.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une œuvre :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de l'œuvre)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une expression :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date d'une expression française de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une manifestation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de publication d'une manifestation d'une expression polonaise de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Numéro de contrôle de la notice bibliographique'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $w est utilisée pour enregistrer des numéros de contrôle de notices bibliographiques (par exemple, les zones 001, 010 et 016 dans les notices bibliographiques). Il est recommandé de fournir la sous-zone $w lorsque l'information est facilement accessible. La sous-zone $w doit être répétée pour chaque numéro de contrôle distinct (par exemple, un LCCN et un numéro de notice OCLC doivent être fournis dans des sous-zones séparées). Pour plus d'instructions sur la saisie d'un numéro de contrôle dans la notice, voir la section sur la sous-zone $w dans le ''CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E. Format MARC 21 for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' la sous-zone $w doit seulement être utilisée pour les titres de manifestations.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Titre distinct de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui n'est pas associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom. Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité pour une personne, la zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer les titres d'œuvres écrites par une personne différente portant un nom semblable. L'objectif principal de la zone 673 est de documenter le fait qu'il n'existe aucun lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 673.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 673 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 675, comme le décrit la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 673 peuvent être ajoutées après des zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires non associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 673 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 673.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 673 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans le classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 673 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245. Pour les sous-zones spécifiques de la zone 673, appliquer les mêmes instructions que celles données dans la section [[#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Titre propre associé à un autre Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)###47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title propre associé à la National Gallery de Londres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
ET NON&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Même si la National Gallery of Art n'est pas la créatrice de la ressource mentionnée, elle en est l'éditrice et ce titre devrait donc être enregistré en 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#673_Titre_distinct_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Source des données non trouvées =&lt;br /&gt;
En avril 2012, cette zone a été redéfinie comme : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Citation d'une source consultée dans laquelle aucune information ne se trouve liée en aucune manière avec l'entité représentée par la notice d'autorité ou par des entités liées.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Les catalogueurs participant au PFAN ne sont pas tenus de modifier les zones 675 existantes simplement pour répondre à cette nouvelle définition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une nouvelle notice d'autorité, toujours citer la ressource cataloguée dans la zone 675 si la ressource cataloguée ne fournit aucune information liée de quelque façon que ce soit à l'entité représentée dans la notice d'autorité. Citer également dans la zone 675 d'autres sources consultées qui ne contiennent aucune information, lorsqu'on juge que cette absence même d'information mérite d'être consignée pour les futurs utilisateurs de la notice d'autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, il n'est pas toujours nécessaire d'inclure dans la zone 675 toutes les sources de référence consultées; il faut faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles sources sont suffisamment importantes pour être conservées de façon permanente dans la notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Données biographiques ou historiques =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsque des données biographiques ou historiques sont fournies dans une zone de note 678, rédiger la note en employant des phrases concises mais complètes et en gardant à l'esprit que l'information sera utilisée dans des affichages publics.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En prévision de la constitution par BAC du fichier dans WMS et de l'ajout en lot des notices d'autorité des autres institutions, le contenu de toutes les zones 665 dans les notices de BAC et de BAnQ a été déplacé vers la zone 678. Il se pourrait que la zone 665 originale ait contenu des instructions sur le ou les points d'accès à employer comme auteur et comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec); Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec); Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec); Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supprimer ces instructions dans la zone 678 si elles ont été conservées. Penser à ajouter la zone 667 sur l'emploi comme vedette-matière le cas échéant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification de la zone 678'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Généralement, une zone 678 doit être justifiée par une zone 670. Si elle n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu est approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, conserver la zone et ajouter une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678 comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [abréviation de la bibliothèque participante], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la notice a été modifiée après avoir été migrée, il faut consulter l'historique de la notice pour déterminer qui a ajouté la zone 678 à l'origine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la zone 678 n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, ne pas conserver la zone 678 sauf si une note appropriée peut être rédigée avec les informations dont on dispose. Noter que la zone 678 est facultative. Si le contenu de la zone doit être conservé parce qu'il ne se trouve nulle part ailleurs dans la notice, le transférer dans une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 678 existante qui sera supprimée car le contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 670 ajoutée :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Ne pas répéter cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#678_Donn.C3.A9es_biographiques_ou_historiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Liaison des vedettes établies – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note'' : Cette section ne s'applique pas à la zone 781 utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms 151 pour fournir des informations sur les subdivisions géographiques. Voir la section [[#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique|781]] de ce Guide pour les instructions relatives à cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;L'utilisation d'une vedette établie dans une zone de liaison 7XX dans une notice d'autorité de nom ou une notice d'autorité de collection est limitée à l'enregistrement du point d'accès autorisé à partir d'une bibliographie nationale ou d'un fichier d'autorité national ou équivalent séparé. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La forme de la vedette dans une zone 7XX peut correspondre à la forme dans la zone 1XX ou à une forme dans la zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité. Ceci est approprié lorsque la forme de la zone 7XX représente une forme se trouvant dans un fichier d'autorité différent de Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La source de la vedette dans la zone 7XX peut être précisée en utilisant soit la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur avec une sous-zone $2, soit une valeur pour le deuxième indicateur qui précise la source. Pour les points d'accès provenant du fichier LC/NAF, privilégier le deuxième indicateur avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Liaison des vedettes de subdivision - Subdivision géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pratique facultative du PFAN :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pour une vedette de nom géographique qui peut également être utilisée comme subdivision géographique, déterminer la forme sous laquelle la vedette doit être utilisée comme subdivision géographique en suivant les lignes directrices de la feuille d'instructions [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 du ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Entrer la forme de la subdivision géographique dans une zone 781 en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;6&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur. Pour une vedette géographique utilisée directement, comme un pays, saisir les données dans une seule sous-zone $z. Pour une vedette géographique qui est utilisée indirectement en subdivision d'une entité géographique plus vaste, telle qu'une ville, saisir les données dans deux sous-zones $z successives. Ne pas modifier les valeurs des positions de la zone 008. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice pour une vedette de nom géographique qui ne peut pas être utilisée comme vedette secondaire matière (008/15 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;»), comme le nom antérieur d'une juridiction qui a subi un changement de nom linéaire, par exemple, '''Ceylan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice d'autorité de nom pour un nom de lieu qui ne peut pas être utilisé comme une subdivision géographique, comme une section d'une ville, par exemple, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Ajouter une zone 781 à une notice existante lorsqu'une autre modification est faite dans la notice. Lors de la révision d'une notice existante qui contient une note d'utilisation pour l'indexation dans une zone 667 indiquant la forme de la subdivision géographique appropriée, supprimer la zone 667 et la remplacer par une zone 781.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 1 : Entités ambiguës =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 2 : Projets spéciaux =&lt;br /&gt;
Cette annexe fournit des informations sur les projets spéciaux impliquant des notices d'autorité créées et modifiées dans le fichier d'autorité Canadiana. Les notices créées ou modifiées pour ces projets peuvent contenir certaines zones et valeurs dans des zones qui ne sont généralement pas conformes aux politiques de catalogage actuelles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des instructions sur la modification de ces notices sont fournies afin d'indiquer si ces zones et valeurs doivent être conservées ou non.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 1. Notices créées ou révisées dans le cadre du projet de révision de notices de l'UQAM ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de révision de notices d'autorité dirigé par l'UQAM. Il s'agit des notices créées ou modifiées dans Canadiana par l'équipe du traitement documentaire de cette institution. Ces notices sont ensuite révisées par deux bibliothécaires et une technicienne de l'UQAM. Le projet s'est terminé le 31 mars 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces nouvelles notices présentaient les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles ont été ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices peuvent être modifiées de la même manière que les autres notices d'autorité de noms conformément aux politiques de catalogage en vigueur.&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un catalogueur modifie ces notices, il doit :&lt;br /&gt;
* changer la valeur du Guide/17 pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Notice d'autorité complète);&lt;br /&gt;
* supprimer la zone 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;amp;nbsp;»; &lt;br /&gt;
* évaluer la notice comme une notice versée en lot. Toutefois, comme la notice est en cours de révision, le point d'accès autorisé peut être modifié s'il n'est pas conforme aux pratiques du PFAN (p. ex., une date de naissance ou de décès peut être ajoutée si elle est disponible et a été omise dans le point d'accès).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 2. Notices créées et révisées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de mentorat &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui, depuis février 2021, permet aux&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; bibliothèques universitaires de créer des notices d'autorité de nom qui sont révisées par une autre institution universitaire. Les notices d'autorité créées ou modifiées par &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;les bibliothèques mentorées&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; sont révisées par des techniciens en documentation de l'Université &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui les mentore&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices présentent les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles sont ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abréviation, c'est-à-dire UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices ne doivent pas être modifiées.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145112</id>
		<title>PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145112"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T13:18:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Format des zones 670 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par D. Paradis, 12 septembre)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par N. Mainville, 26 février)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours| 24 h (En cours d'édition par A. Dunnett, BAC, 24 mars)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Guide}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:PFAN - Name Authority Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  Notices d'autorité de nom ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notices d'autorité de collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--En octobre et novembre 2021, les passages du Guide concernant les collections ont été cachés par souci de cohérence avec la décision de ne pas permettre la création ni la révision des notices d'autorité de collections. DP 1er novembre 2021--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 008 Éléments de données de longueur fixe =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Règles de catalogage descriptif ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée de quelque façon que ce soit, évaluer la notice d'autorité et la modifier pour qu'elle soit conforme à RDA, en modifiant le codage de la zone 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1 : Si une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée uniquement par la modification ou l'ajout d'une zone 5XX, on encourage fortement les catalogueurs, bien qu'il n'y ait pas d'obligation, à évaluer la notice et à la modifier selon RDA, en changeant le 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2 : Les autorités de noms indifférenciés codées 008/10 «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;», peuvent être modifiées de manière à enlever une ou plusieurs identités afin de créer des notices différenciées conformes à RDA. Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié à cette fin, la notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié mise à jour doit conserver le code 008/10 existant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-24]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F10 R.C3.A8gles de catalogage descriptif|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Système de vedettes-matière / Thésaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone 008/11 de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) dans la zone 008/11 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) dans la zone 008/11, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/15 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;dans la zone 008/11 des&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples de noms de collectivités ne pouvant être utilisés comme vedettes-matière :''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis.  Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran.  Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois.  Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique.  Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; margin-left: 0px; padding-left: 15px; padding-top: 10px; padding-bottom: 10px; text-indent: 0px; line-height: 1.0; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;tats-Unis. Pr&amp;amp;eacute;sident (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;glise catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Church of England. Dioc&amp;amp;egrave;se de Londres. &amp;amp;Eacute;v&amp;amp;ecirc;que (1675-1713 : Compton)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F11 Syst.C3.A8me de vedettes-mati.C3.A8re .2F Th.C3.A9saurus|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Utilisation de la vedette – vedette-matière secondaire ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Généralités&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de famille&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Appropriée) dans la zone 008/15 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) dans la zone 008/15, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/11 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Contexte'' : Pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, les catalogueurs descriptifs peuvent être amenés à établir un point d'accès autorisé pour le nom de la collectivité pour la fonction ainsi qu'un nom personnel pour le titulaire de la fonction. La politique d'indexation est d'attribuer seulement le nom personnel, et non le nom de la collectivité, comme point d'accès matière. Cette politique a été établie à des fins de colocalisation (voir [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). Par exemple, le point d'accès :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
peut être utilisé dans le catalogage descriptif comme point d'accès, mais en indexation seul le nom personnel serait utilisé comme point d'accès matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) aux notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F15 Utilisation de la vedette - vedette-mati.C3.A8re secondaire|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Nom de personne non différencié ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser le code 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (non différencié) dans une notice d'autorité de nom RDA. Attribuer la valeur 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes. Utiliser le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les familles, les collectivités et les lieux. Pour les œuvres et les expressions, attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» si le point d'accès commence par un nom de personne, sinon attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par le passé, la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 permettait de coder les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes comme non différenciées lorsque le catalogueur n'avait aucun moyen acceptable de différencier plusieurs personnes portant le même nom privilégié. Depuis sa création, le PFAN a suivi ces directives pour les notices d’autorité de noms de personnes :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas créer de nouvelles notices non différenciées codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Toutes les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes codéees RDA doivent être différenciées.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas ajouter une nouvelle identité à une notice d'autorité de nom de personne existante codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&lt;br /&gt;
* Appliquer plutôt [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] pour créer un point d'accès autorisé unique pour la personne, en utilisant des éléments additionnels appropriés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mise à jour des notices indifférenciées existantes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' Pour une entité donnée, si la seule notice trouvée est une notice indifférenciée (dont la zone 008/32 est codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;») versée par une université et comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;», ne pas l'utiliser.  Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité pour l'entité.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler à BAC la notice indifférenciée en communiquant son numéro de contrôle OCLC par courriel à l'adresse pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca et en mentionnant comme objet : Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice indifférenciée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante, en particulier une notice qui a été importée du LC/NAF, comprenne des paires de zones 670 utilisées pour regrouper l'information sur chaque personne visée par la notice d'autorité de nom. La première zone 670 de chaque paire est une zone 670 d'identification qui comprend un terme décrivant la relation de la personne avec le titre cité dans la deuxième zone 670 de la paire. Les données de la zone 670 d'identification sont enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a et sont mises entre crochets. La deuxième zone 670 de la paire est une zone 670 de citation qui comprend les éléments de données normaux dans la citation d'une ressource cataloguée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Auteur de Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Point d'accès supplémentaire pour Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Éditeur intellectuel de Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut aussi arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante comprenne une note 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée et identifiant la ou les ressources associées aux autres personnes portant le même nom. Dans ce cas, la notice ne comprend généralement pas de zones 670 pour les personnes autres que la première qui a été identifiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque de l'information pour distinguer une personne dans une notice d'autorité existante indifférenciée provenant de BAC ou de BAnQ est trouvée :&lt;br /&gt;
* Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour cette personne avec des informations distinctives et ajouter une indication que la personne était auparavant sur une notice indifférenciée (voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées|Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées]]&amp;amp;nbsp;», ci-dessous). Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour zone 670 de citation se rapportant à cette personne depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire. Ne pas transférer la zone 670 d'identification vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
* Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* Si la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée n'est pas supprimée parce que plusieurs identités restent, supprimer les zones 670 qui se rapportent à la personne maintenant représentée sur la nouvelle notice d'autorité (c’est-à-dire, dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, supprimer à la fois la zone 670 d’identification et la zone 670 de citation) et, le cas échéant, éditer ou supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée pour supprimer la mention de cette personne.&lt;br /&gt;
* S'il reste plus d'une identité dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée et qu'il n'y a pas suffisamment d'information pour créer de nouvelles notices d'autorité de nom pour chaque nom, laisser la notice d'autorité de nom codée RCAA2.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d’autorité de nom indifférenciée de BAnQ n’est pas supprimée, doit être modifiée ultérieurement et qu’elle ne comporte pas de numéro Canadiana, lui en attribuer un.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de faciliter le traitement automatisé des notices d'autorité (par exemple, appariement, liaison), lorsqu'il ne reste qu'une seule identité dans une notice d'autorité de nom de personne indifférenciée (c'est-à-dire lorsque les autres identités sont désambiguïsées et enlevées), procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'unique identité restante. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette identité, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;». Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Dans la nouvelle notice :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le cas échéant, transférer la citation 670 se rapportant à l'unique identité restante depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;S'assurer que la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée contient seulement de l'information se rapportant à l'unique identité restante (par exemple, les zones 670). Le cas échéant, supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, ajouter la notice 667 suivante pour garantir qu'une notice d'autorité de nom ne sera pas créée en double :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAC''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana] $z [Numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée dérivée du LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'autrice d'Esperanza :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAnQ''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a [aucun numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour Christian Bergeron (Sociologue) :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1056D8391F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian $c (Sociologue)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : 1063E5020F.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'individualisation des épreuves de la vie dans la modernité avancée, 2013 : $b page de titre (Christian Bergeron; Doctorat en sociologie; Université Laval)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 $b (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. Il reste deux identités non différenciées dans la notice :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1063E5020F [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter une note 667 à une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour identifier le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité dans laquelle l'information sur cette personne a déjà été enregistrée :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices codées comme indifférenciées qui ne représentent en fait qu'une seule identité ====&lt;br /&gt;
À l'occasion, il arrive qu'une notice soit codée comme étant indifférenciée, mais que de nouvelles recherches indiquent qu'en fait la notice ne représente qu'une seule identité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut également arriver qu’on soupçonne que la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été codée par erreur dans la zone 008/32. Dans ces situations, procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter une zone 667 à la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée indiquant qu'elle a été signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'identité. Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette personne, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple d'une notice indifférenciée versée qui ne représente qu'une seule identité''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [aucun numéro Canadiana, utiliser le numéro OCLC de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==008/33 Niveau de l'établissement==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''provisoires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Coder une notice d'autorité de nom comme provisoire (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») si le point d'accès autorisé ne peut être formulé de manière satisfaisante en raison d'informations insuffisantes. Si les informations nécessaires deviennent disponibles ultérieurement, réévaluer la notice d'autorité de nom et la mettre à jour pour qu'elle soit pleinement établie (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;»). En aucun cas, il ne faut créer une notice d'autorité de niveau provisoire avec un point d'accès qui entre en conflit avec une notice d'autorité de nom existante selon les règles de normalisation du PFAN.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Régions administratives spéciales de Hong Kong et de Macao'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Étant donné qu'il n'est pas certain que Hong Kong et Macao continueront à avoir deux langues officielles, coder toutes les notice d'autorité de nom pour les organismes gouvernementaux dans ces deux endroits, au niveau de la région administrative spéciale et en dessous, comme provisoires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;»), quelle que soit la langue dans laquelle le point d'accès autorisé a été établi. Si une forme dans la deuxième langue officielle devient disponible, ajouter cette forme comme variante de point d'accès plutôt que de réviser le point d'accès autorisé existant. Consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] et l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html énoncé de politique connexe] pour obtenir des instructions sur le choix de la langue du nom privilégié. Noter que cette politique concernant le statut provisoire ne s'applique pas aux organismes non gouvernementaux.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Informations supplémentaires pour les participants au PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN peuvent créer des notices provisoires dans les deux situations exceptionnelles suivantes :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'a pas l'expertise linguistique nécessaire pour établir le point d'accès autorisé comme une notice d'autorité pleinement établie; cela comprend les situations où la bibliothèque ne dispose pas de sources de référence adéquates pour la recherche ou lorsque le catalogueur n'est pas sûr de la forme grammaticale correcte du point d'accès.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'est pas en mesure, en raison de ressources limitées ou d'autres contraintes, de compléter le travail pour les autorités en relation ou de déterminer la structure de renvois appropriée qui est requise pour les notices d'autorité pleinement établies.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''préliminaires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité préliminaires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») sont généralement le résultat de projets rétrospectifs. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs du PFAN procèdent régulièrement à des mises à jour des notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils apportent d'autres modifications à la notice d'autorité. À cause de cette exigence de mise à jour, les participants au PFAN sont priés de communiquer avec le Comité des normes avant d'entreprendre des projets qui pourraient entraîner l'ajout massif de notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» au fichier d'autorité Canadiana.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Au besoin, les catalogueurs peuvent mettre à jour les notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils travaillent avec des notices de collectivités antérieures/postérieures, bien que le ou les points d'accès dans les notices mises à jour ne soient pas utilisés dans la base de données bibliographiques locale. À l'occasion, les catalogueurs peuvent avoir besoin de créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom sans avoir de ressource en main, par exemple pour un nom de collectivité antérieur ou postérieur, en utilisant des renseignements provenant de sources de référence, ou pour un point d'accès basé sur des renseignements trouvés dans la sous-zone «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» de la zone 245 de notices bibliographiques, lorsqu'ils résolvent des conflits entre notices d'autorité de noms. Ne pas coder ces notices d'autorité de noms occasionnelles comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaires&amp;amp;nbsp;» .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, les éléments de données des collections doivent être vérifiés sur la publication et les notices d'autorité de collections doivent être codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (complet). Dans le travail d'autorité post-catalogage, il est permis de créer des notices d'autorité de collections sans la ressource en main; ces notices sont codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» (préliminaire). Lorsqu'une publication appartenant à la collection a été examinée et que la notice d'autorité préliminaire a été revue et mise à jour au besoin, mettre la notice d'autorité de collection au niveau complet.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F33_Niveau_de_l.27.C3.A9tablissement |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Source du catalogage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quelle que soit la valeur codée à l'origine dans cette zone, ne pas changer cette valeur lors de la mise à jour d'une notice, sauf si la valeur d'origine est incorrecte. La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;blanc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F39_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 Numéro de contrôle de la notice d'autorité de BAC = &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 016 est obligatoire lorsque le catalogueur crée, met à jour ou utilise une autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité et lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante sans numéro Canadiana, vérifier dans le LC/NAF si la même entité est représentée par une autorité et si celle-ci comporte un numéro Canadiana. Noter que le point d'accès autorisé dans le LC/NAF pourrait avoir une forme différente de celui dans Canadiana. Si la notice dans le LC/NAF comporte un numéro Canadiana, ajouter ce numéro dans la notice Canadiana. Si le numéro se termine par le code de langue E, le changer pour le code F. S'il n'y a pas de code de langue, ajouter le code F à la fin du numéro.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante avec numéro Canadiana, vérifier que le code de langue F est présent à la fin de la zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Doublons'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» un numéro Canadiana. Une fois qu'une notice d'autorité pour une entité donnée a été créée et qu'un numéro Canadiana lui a été attribué, ne pas changer les données dans cette notice pour représenter une entité DIFFÉRENTE. Par exemple, ne pas changer une notice d'autorité pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Dupont, Jean&amp;amp;nbsp;» en une pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Tremblay, Marie&amp;amp;nbsp;» (sauf si le nom de la personne a changé).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, demander à faire supprimer la notice (voir [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dures_sur_les_doublons|Procédures sur les doublons]]). NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il y a une zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, enregistrer le numéro Canadiana qui s'y trouve dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il n'y a pas de zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, en ajouter une en utilisant le numéro 0000X0000F. Ne pas enregistrer ce numéro dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée. Dans ce Guide, voir aussi «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Doublons|Doublons]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, supprimer la notice. NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer le numéro Canadiana de la notice supprimée dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice conservée.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Notices versées en lot partiellement modifiées'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité versées en lot qui sont modifiées partiellement selon la [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]] comportent le numéro Canadiana 1111X1111F. Ce numéro temporaire est ajouté pour permettre l'enregistrement de la notice en attendant que celle-ci soit évaluée pour s'assurer qu'elle répond aux normes du PFAN. Ce numéro doit être remplacé par un numéro unique lorsque la notice est évaluée et que la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;» est supprimée.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 Numéro international normalisé des publications en série =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'ISSN chaque fois qu'il est fourni dans le document en main, dans les notices bibliographiques analytiques ou dans la notice bibliographique pour la collection cataloguée dans son ensemble; sinon, enregistrer l'ISSN est facultatif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on sait que des ISSN distincts ont été attribués à différents formats d'une collection représentée par une seule notice d'autorité, il est préférable d'enregistrer dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 022 l'ISSN qui est l'ISSN de liaison (ISSN-L) pour ces différents formats. Enregistrer les ISSN pour les formats spécifiques dans des zones 667 distinctes, en suivant ce modèle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre d'une publication a changé, il est important de s'assurer que l'ISSN figurant sur la publication appartient au nouveau titre et non au titre précédent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un ISSN incorrect peut être indiqué dans une zone 667 (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;L'ISSN 1122-3344 n'est pas un ISSN valide pour cette publication&amp;amp;nbsp;»).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Autre numéro ou code normalisé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les lignes directrices des [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf ''NACO 024 Best Practices Guidelines'']. En règle générale, limiter à cinq le nombre de zones 024 dans une notice d'autorité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 024 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les identifiants codés dans la zone 024 des notices d'autorité du PFAN. Lorsqu'une zone 024 est présente dans une notice &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;d'autorité&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; qui fait l'objet d'une suppression (par exemple, dans le cas d'un doublon), les catalogueurs doivent transférer le contenu de la zone dans la notice qui doit être conservée. Lorsque deux notices d'autorité sont regroupées en une seule et que chacune des notices comporte une zone 024 différente, les catalogueurs doivent inclure les deux zones 024 dans la notice conservée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Données mathématiques codées sur les documents cartographiques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des pays, provinces, États, comtés'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les coordonnées des limites extérieures (rectangles de délimitation ou polygones) doivent généralement être utilisées avec des entités géographiques telles que des pays, des provinces, des États et des comtés pour identifier les coordonnées de l'entité. Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées en degrés/minutes/secondes, en degrés décimaux, en minutes décimales et/ou en secondes décimales. Les styles ne doivent pas être mélangés dans une même zone 034, mais la zone peut être répétée pour représenter les différents styles (voir ci-dessous pour les utilitaires de conversion); l'ordre des zones 034 lorsque les deux styles sont donnés n'a pas d'importance. Pour faciliter la réutilisation des coordonnées dans les applications géographiques, il faut employer le point et non la virgule comme signe décimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés/minutes/secondes''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux''' : enregistrement sous la forme hddd.dddddd (hémisphère-degrés.degrés décimaux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux avec plus et moins''' : enregistrer sous la forme +-ddd.dddddd (hémisphère[+/-]-degrés.décimaux) («&amp;amp;nbsp;+&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour N et E, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour S et W; le signe plus est facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple avec +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple sans le signe plus facultatif)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Minutes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmm.mmmm (hémisphère-degrés-minutes.minutes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Secondes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss.sss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes.secondes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons doivent généralement être enregistrées comme des points centraux plutôt que comme des limites extérieures. Pour la zone 034, la longitude et la latitude qui forment l'axe central sont enregistrées deux fois pour définir le point central (c'est-à-dire que les contenus des sous-zones $d et $e sont identiques et les contenus des sous-zones $f et $g sont identiques).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés/minutes/secondes)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux avec plus/moins)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Outils de conversion des coordonnées'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les institutions membres du PFAN sont encouragées à fournir des degrés/minutes/secondes et des degrés décimaux lorsqu'ils sont disponibles. De nombreux outils de conversion sont disponibles sur le Web pour dériver les uns des autres. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $2 a été définie pour l'enregistrement de la source des codes d'information sur les coordonnées - les sources couramment utilisées sont disponibles dans : [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CDC.html/view ''Codes sources pour les données cartographiques'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une citation de la source dans la zone 670 n'est pas nécessaire si la seule information provenant de la source est enregistrée dans la zone 034; une citation dans la zone 670 doit être faite si nécessaire pour enregistrer des informations en plus des coordonnées, telles que les variantes de nom, la hiérarchie, la période d'applicabilité, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#034_Donn.C3.A9es_math.C3.A9matiques_cod.C3.A9es_sur_les_documents_cartographiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 Numéro de contrôle de système =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#035_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_syst.C3.A8me |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Source du catalogage =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs doivent consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour les instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité nouvelles ou existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Langue de catalogage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $b fre ajoutée automatiquement par WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $d – Organisme responsable des modifications'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $d [code MARC 21] est ajoutée automatiquement par WMS lorsque la dernière sous-zone MARC $d dans la zone 040 n'est pas déjà celle de l'institution qui a modifié la notice. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $e – Règles de description'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on ajoute manuellement la sous-zone $e, ajouter la sous-zone après la sous-zone $b et avant la sous-zone $c. Il n'est pas nécessaire de déplacer la sous-zone $e à cette position si elle est déjà présente ailleurs dans le 040 ou si elle est ajoutée par une macro ou un gabarit. Lorsque la zone fixe 008/10 (Règles de catalogage descriptif) est changée pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Autre), la sous-zone $e rda est automatiquement ajoutée par le système.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#040_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Code d'authenticité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Cette zone se retrouve dans les notices d'autorité utilisées par BAC. Ne pas modifier ou supprimer cette zone lorsque le code CaOONL figure dans la 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les catalogueurs autres que ceux de BAC dérivent une notice à partir d'une notice de BAC contenant une zone 042, ils doivent s'assurer de supprimer cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les catalogueurs doivent ajouter la zone 042 $a nlc dans Canadiana chaque fois qu'ils créent, révisent ou dérivent une notice d'autorité. Ce code identifie le fichier «&amp;amp;nbsp;virtuel&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'autorité nationale canadienne qui est divisé en deux bases de données (LC/NAF et Canadiana).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-08]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#042_Code_d.27authenticit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Code de région géographique &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 043 peut seulement être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms géographiques (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone b – Code local de région géographique et Sous-zone $2 – Source du code local'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les lieux situés au Québec, les participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser la sous-zone $b pour enregistrer un code local tiré de la liste ci-dessous et représentant la région administrative du Québec où le lieu est situé. Ce code est formé du code de région géographique « n-cn--- » et d'un code local de sous-entité de deux lettres (p. ex., qa) qui identifie la région administrative et remplace les deux derniers caractères du code « n-cn--- » (p. ex. « n-cn-qa »). La sous-zone $b est enregistrée à la suite de la sous-zone $a et est suivie par la sous-zone $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Dates spéciales codées =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Lors de l'encodage de l'information sur la date, donner l'information la plus complète possible sur la date lorsque celle-ci est facilement disponible (la date dans la zone 046 peut être plus précise qu'une date utilisée dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2e_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Lors&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la révision des notices d'autorité existantes, enregistrer les dates dans la zone 046 même si le point d'accès lui-même n'a pas de dates dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d, lorsque l'information est facilement disponible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des dates dans la zone 046, utiliser la norme Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) dans tous les cas, sauf pour les siècles; fournir les dates en utilisant le modèle aaaa, aaaa-mm ou aaaa-mm-jj. Voir le tableau d'exemples dans l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Pour les spécifications complètes de l'EDTF, voir [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophoniste)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Blues around the clock, 1945 : $b étiquette (Johnny Hicks, saxophone ténor)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web Discogs, consulté le 27 mai 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; saxophoniste ténor qui a joué avec Tab Smith dans les années 1940)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de dates avant Jésus-Christ dans la zone 046, faire précéder les chiffres d'un trait d'union (signe moins). Comme il n'y a pas d'an zéro dans le calendrier de l'ère commune, il faut soustraire une année de la date réelle avant Jésus-Christ; par exemple, l'an 50 av. J.-C. est enregistré comme suit : -0049.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ##  $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement d'un siècle dans la zone 046, utiliser les deux premiers chiffres de l'intervalle de cent ans (par exemple, utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;16&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour représenter le 17&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle, 1600-1699).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Noter que le 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;er&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle apr. J.-C. est représenté par la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;00&amp;amp;nbsp;» et que les siècles av. J.-C. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sont précédés d'&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;un trait d'union &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(signe moins)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; avant les chiffres (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-04&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le 5&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle av. J.-C.). Un siècle approximatif (par exemple, activité environ 12&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle) ne peut pas être enregistré dans la zone 046.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Répétabilité'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;La zone 046 est répétable, mais les sous-zones de la zone 046 utilisées pour enregistrer les dates ne le sont pas. En général, une seule zone 046 avec des dates conformes à la norme EDTF devrait être suffisante. Cependant, les dates de siècles suivent la norme ISO 8601 et non la norme EDTF. Lors de l'enregistrement de dates de siècles en plus de dates plus précises, il faut donc répéter la zone 046.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates divergentes'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, les ressources consultées peuvent présenter des dates divergentes (par exemple, des dates de naissance ou de décès divergentes pour une personne ou des dates de début ou de fin divergentes pour une collectivité). Dans ces situations, la zone 046 doit refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'enregistrer toutes les dates divergentes en utilisant la zone 046, ni d'enregistrer une zone 046 pour chaque ressource consultée. L'évaluation des dates divergentes doit généralement avoir pour résultat une seule zone 046, contenant la ou les dates que le catalogueur juge les plus exactes pour représenter l'entité. Le catalogueur peut décider d'enregistrer ou non la ou les dates divergentes dans la zone 046 et il n'est pas nécessaire que la ou les dates enregistrées dans la zone 046 correspondent exactement à celle ou celles choisies pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;De même, toute date ajoutée au point d'accès autorisé devrait refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates, enregistrées conformément aux instructions de RDA et des énoncés de politique du PFAN. On peut considérer qu'une date qui prédomine dans les ressources consultées est la plus appropriée pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé. Si aucune date ne prédomine, le catalogueur peut décider d'utiliser le format «&amp;amp;nbsp;approximativement aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa?&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa ou aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans le point d'accès autorisé. Dans certains cas, des dates correspondant à la période d'activité de la personne (RDA 9.19.1.5) peuvent être préférables.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 157 av. J-C. comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce que c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 1907 comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Même exemple que ci-dessus illustrant une décision différente que le catalogueur aurait pu prendre concernant l'enregistrement de la sous-zone $f de la zone 046)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;La zone 046 étant basée sur des informations provenant de sources multiples, la justification ne peut être formulée avec précision dans une sous-zone $v/$u à la fin d'une zone 046. Les dates divergentes doivent être enregistrées dans des zones 670. Si une notice existante comporte une sous-zone $v/$u comme justification d'une zone 046 et que cette zone 046 est mise à jour comme décrit ci-dessus, il faut supprimer la sous-zone $v/$u et convertir la justification en une zone 670 si les dates divergentes ne sont pas déjà justifiées dans des zones 670 existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, il peut être nécessaire d'effectuer un calcul pour déterminer les dates à enregistrer dans la zone 046 et le point d'accès autorisé. De tels calculs peuvent produire des dates incertaines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Si les ressources consultées ne fournissent que la date de décès de la personne et son âge (en années) au moment du décès, comme cela se voit souvent dans les notices nécrologiques, l'année de naissance de la personne correspondra à l'une de deux années consécutives. Pour calculer ces années, il faut d'abord soustraire l'âge de l'année de décès, puis utiliser l'année ainsi obtenue et l'année précédente comme les deux possibilités pour l'année de naissance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a soustrait 75, l'âge au décès, de 1994, l'année du décès; l'année obtenue, 1919, et l'année qui la précède, 1918, représentent les deux années de naissance possibles)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si des dates non-grégoriennes figurent dans les ressources consultées, la conversion de ces dates en dates grégoriennes peut produire des dates incertaines. Il faut utiliser les dates du calendrier grégorien dans la zone 046 et dans le point d'accès autorisé. Il se peut qu'une même date dans un calendrier non-grégorien corresponde à l'une de deux dates grégoriennes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La date de 1346 dans le calendrier hégirien correspond à 1967 ou 1968 dans le calendrier grégorien.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de la norme de la date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter la sous-zone $2 edtf, sauf après un siècle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zones $q – Date de fondation, $r – Date de cessation,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Début de la période d'activité et $t – Fin de la période d'activité'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer les dates associées à un congrès, etc., ponctuel ou à une occurrence isolée dans une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] et [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), dans les sous-zones $s et $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer la date de fondation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) et la date de cessation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) d'une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]), si cette information est connue, dans les sous-zones $q et $r.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'utilisation des sous-zones $s et $t pour le début et la fin de la période d'activité dans les zones 368 et 370-376, voir les directives présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les instructions suivantes représentent la pratique du PFAN sur l'enregistrement des sources d'information dans les sous-zones $u et $v des zones où elles sont définies, et/ou dans la zone 670 :&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046$u$v&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Les zones 670 doivent être utilisées pour appuyer l'information utilisée comme une partie du point d'accès dans les zones 1XX et 4XX.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pour les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $v est facultatif si la même information/source est déjà citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;utiliser la sous-zone $v si l'information/source n'est pas citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $u est facultatif et celle-ci doit toujours être précédée de la sous-zone $v.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser une zone 670 si c'est nécessaire pour justifier l'information enregistrée dans d'autres zones pour lesquelles les sous-zones $u et $v ne sont pas définies ou sont définies différemment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des données dans la sous-zone $v (Source d'information) des zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381, suivre les mêmes principes de base pour la citation que ceux qui s'appliquent actuellement pour la zone 670, sous-zone $a (Citation de la source).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Fournir une information précise sur la citation (numéro de page, sous-page d'un site Web) dans la sous-zone $v si, selon le jugement du catalogueur, cette plus grande précision est nécessaire pour trouver l'information à l'intérieur de la source citée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information dans les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 est sous la même forme que celle trouvée dans la source, il n'est pas nécessaire de la citer. Si l'information enregistrée dans ces zones est sous une forme différente de celle dans la source, utiliser 670 $b (Information trouvée).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les sources matérielles :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information provient d'une source matérielle (par exemple, un livre imprimé, un support numérique amovible), la sous-zone $v doit contenir suffisamment d'information pour qu'un catalogueur puisse trouver la ressource citée dans un catalogue ou une base de données bibliographiques. Ceci peut généralement se limiter au titre propre et au nom de l'éditeur ou à la date. Si cette combinaison n'est pas unique, la citation du titre peut être précédée du nom du créateur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les ressources en ligne :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fournir suffisamment d'information pour permettre de trouver la ressource via un moteur de recherche. Inclure soit le titre et la date de publication (si c'est une ressource publiée formellement, tel un livre numérique), soit une description appropriée du document et la date d'accès (pour une ressource moins formelle). Facultativement, inclure la sous-zone $u.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-03]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Cote de la Library of Congress =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#050_Cote_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 Indice de la classification de la Library of Congress &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes pour enregistrer les indices de la classification LC des auteurs littéraires individuels, y compris les auteurs de littérature de jeunesse. Elle peut aussi être utilisée '''exceptionnellement''' dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes et de collectivités pour enregistrer les indices de biographie dans la fourchette ML410-429 de la classification LC lorsque le choix de l'indice ou du Cutter n'est pas évident. La zone 053 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il ne faut pas enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000 dans la zone 053. Pour l'utilisation des indices de la classe PS8000 dans les notices d'autorité de noms, voir la section [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]] de ce Guide. Une notice d'autorité pour un auteur littéraire canadien peut contenir à la fois une zone 053 et une zone 065.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Cote de Bibliothèque et Archives Canada =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#055_Cote_de_Biblioth.C3.A8que_et_Archives_Canada |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Autre indice de classification &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 065 sert à enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000. La zone 065 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $2 et une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [Code MARC de l’institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de l'indice'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour indiquer que l'indice provient de la classe PS8000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#065_Autre_indice_de_classification |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Cote de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#082_Cote_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Indice de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#083_Indice_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Cote de publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#086_Cote_de_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Indice de classification d'une publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#087_Indice_de_classification_d.27une_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Vedette – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participant au programme PFAN sont invités à consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour obtenir des instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité existantes ou nouvelles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer la ponctuation de fin de zone dans la zone 1XX à moins qu'elle ne fasse partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou qu'elle ne soit requise par les instructions de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Afin de minimiser l'impact de la maintenance de la base de données sur les notices bibliographiques associées et/ou les notices d'autorité associées, les catalogueurs sont priés de s'abstenir d'apporter des changements qui ne sont pas essentiels aux zones 1XX.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour le titre propre d'une monographie en plusieurs parties, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choix du titre propre d'une collection pour une monographie :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte plus d'une forme de mention de collection, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource porte une mention de collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture dans la même source, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte des pages de titre pour la collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2915.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Tenir compte de l'espacement et des changements dans la typographie au moment de déterminer où le titre de la collection commence et se termine. Consulter également [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Établissement d'un point d'accès pour une collection :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Déterminer le choix du point d'accès autorisé en fonction de l'instruction [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] et des énoncés de politique de BAC/BAnQ pour cette instruction.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclure du point d'accès autorisé les renseignements suivants inclus dans la mention de collection dans la notice bibliographique de la partie composante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'article initial dans les sous-zones $a, $t, $n et $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les compléments de titre;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;la mention de responsabilité;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les titres parallèles;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;les désignations numériques/chronologiques.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter un ou plusieurs qualificatifs entre parenthèses, le cas échéant, conformément aux énoncés de politique de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour obtenir des instructions sur la conversion d'une notice d'autorité de nom en notice d'autorité de collection, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Should an SAR be made?&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Vedette – Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour les familles'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;3&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une famille. Voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Les ajouts au nom sont contenus dans une seule paire de parenthèses séparées par des deux-points. &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Le terme pour le type de famille est ajouté après le nom et il est enregistré dans la sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $d (date) suit le terme pour le type de famille.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $c est utilisée pour un lieu associé à une famille et suit la date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $g est utilisée pour un membre illustre d'une famille. Donner le point d'accès autorisé pour la personne tel que trouvé dans la 1XX de la notice d'autorité de nom sans garder aucun codage de sous-zone interne.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour des personnes'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] fournit des directives sur l'emplacement des mots indiquant une relation (par exemple, Jr.) et le MARC définit la sous-zone $q comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme développée du nom de personne.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) La sous-zone $d (date) doit toujours être le dernier élément dans une zone 100 sauf si le terme (Esprit) est ajouté au nom. Ajouter $c (Esprit) comme dernier élément d'une zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) En général ajouter la sous-zone $c avant la sous-zone $q lorsqu'on ajoute aussi des mots, des chiffres, etc., indiquant une relation. (Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5.] pour le traitement des noms portugais)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MAIS&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
3) Pour les situations exceptionnelles, par exemple lorsque la sous-zone $a ne contient qu'un nom de famille ou qu'un prénom ou que le nom inclut un préfixe, etc., consulter le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#100_Vedette_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Contenu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 336 peut seulement être utilisée pour les notices d'autorité représentant des expressions. La zone 336 est toujours suivie d'une sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;rdacontent/fre&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser les termes fournis dans [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html RDA 6.9.1.3]. La liste des termes est également disponible dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Code du type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si on enregistre une sous-zone $b à la place ou en plus d'une sous-zone $a, utiliser les codes fournis dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''] du MARC 21.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#336_Contenu |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Autres attributs associés à des personnes ou des collectivités =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé pour les termes dans les sous-zones $a, $b et $c. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a, $b et $c. Lorsque les termes dans les sous-zones $a et $b ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer de professions ou d'occupations dans la sous-zone $c (Autre désignation). La profession ou l'occupation peut être enregistrée dans la zone 374.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les titres de royauté, de noblesse ou de rang ecclésiastique ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) dans la sous-zone $d dans la forme utilisée dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'une période et Sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#368_Autres_attributs_associ.C3.A9s_.C3.A0_des_personnes_ou_des_collectivit.C3.A9s |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Lieu associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de juridictions ou d'autres lieux, utiliser la forme trouvée dans Canadiana ou, à défaut, celle trouvée dans le RVM, en enregistrant la source dans la sous-zone $2. La forme du nom de lieu utilisée dans la zone 370 peut différer de la forme du nom de lieu ajoutée à un nom privilégié de lieu ou à un point d'accès construit selon les instructions de RDA ou des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie du nom d'une localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut une autre désignation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de lieu)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié du lieu plus vaste)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom de lieu ajouté à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Autre nom de lieu dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité pour le lieu n'existe pas dans Canadiana ni dans le RVM, il n'est pas nécessaire d'en créer une pour enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370. Enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370 selon les instructions de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ, en consultant les sources appropriées et en ajoutant des éléments additionnels (par exemple, le type de juridiction) afin d'éviter les conflits. Ne pas ajouter de sous-zone $2 si aucune notice d'autorité n'a été créée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom du lieu associé a changé, le nom du lieu qui s'appliquait à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré à la place ou en plus de la forme actuelle du nom. Il n'est pas nécessaire de suivre les politiques d'indexation et d'utiliser uniquement la forme la plus récente du nom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemples :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne née dans la ville de Salisbury avant que son nom ne devienne Harare; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme de nom qui s'appliquait au moment de la naissance de la personne)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne résidant dans la ville de Milan pendant la Renaissance, avant la formation du pays moderne de l'Italie; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme actuelle du nom pour le pays)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de lieux qui ne sont pas des juridictions, préférer les noms provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM et identifier la source dans la sous-zone $2. Si le nom ne provient pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, l'enregistrer dans la zone 370 sans ajouter de sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zone $c – Pays associé&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;En général, ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $c pour enregistrer les lieux qui ne sont pas des entités souveraines. Ces lieux peuvent être enregistrés dans la sous-zone $f ou dans d'autres sous-zones selon le cas.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La Martinique est un département français d'outre-mer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, si une entité souveraine comporte (ou comportait auparavant) un ou plusieurs pays constitutifs, n'importe lequel des pays constitutifs associés à la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré dans la sous-zone $c en plus ou à la place de l'entité souveraine plus vaste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à la Grande-Bretagne qui a des liens étroits avec le Pays de Galles; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Union soviétique, en particulier au Kirghizistan; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à Aruba, un pays constitutif des Pays-Bas; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer les Pays-Bas)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Inde avant son indépendance de la Grande-Bretagne; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer la Grande-Bretagne)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms d'entités des Premières Nations au Canada ainsi que les tribus indiennes («&amp;amp;nbsp;Indian tribes&amp;amp;nbsp;») reconnues par le gouvernement des États-Unis comme des entités juridiques peuvent être incluses dans la sous-zone $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Enregistrer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre dans la zone 370, sauf s'il s'agit simplement d'un lieu de publication ou d'un autre lieu associé à une manifestation (auquel cas utiliser la zone 643, le cas échéant). Bien que le «&amp;amp;nbsp;lieu d'origine&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'une œuvre en série puisse être le même que le lieu de publication de l'œuvre pour laquelle la notice d'autorité de collection (ou la notice bibliographique de publication en série) a été créée, faire preuve de jugement pour distinguer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre d'un lieu de publication qui n'est pas réellement lié à l'œuvre elle-même.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Adresse =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Selon le jugement du catalogueur, fournir une adresse si les informations sont facilement disponibles et n'ont pas déjà été enregistrées dans la sous-zone $e (Lieu de résidence, de sièges sociaux) de la zone 370.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Dans les cas où la sous-zone $a n'est pas enregistrée, inclure au minimum la sous-zone $m (Adresse de courriel) ou la sous-zone $b (Ville). &lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas enregistrer les adresses physiques &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou courriels&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; des personnes vivantes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les informations reliées à l'adresse lors de la mise à jour d'une notice contenant une adresse.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer plusieurs adresses, avec ou sans plages de dates, dans des zones 371 distinctes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Adresse de courriel'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $m doit contenir uniquement une adresse de courriel. Ne pas ajouter d'adresse Internet pour la 1XX dans cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#371_Adresse |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Domaine d'activité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée pour le domaine d'activité, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une entité provenant de Canadiana est utilisée comme domaine d'activité, enlever tout codage de sous-zone qui n'est pas autorisé dans la zone 372.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Domaine d'activité dans la 372 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel que la plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Zones 372 avec un terme provenant du RVM et un terme de vocabulaire non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'un période et la sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Groupe associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le fichier d'autorité Canadiana ou le fichier LC/NAF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Dans la zone 373, le codage de sous-zone n'est pas employé pour les collectivités subordonnées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom d'un groupe associé a changé, enregistrer le ou les noms du groupe qui s'appliquaient à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates). Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec des sous-zones $2 et des dates :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec différentes sources de vocabulaires :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $ s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $ t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : même si le format MARC ne spécifie pas de forme de date dans ces sous-zones, la pratique suivante est recommandée par souci de cohérence. Enregistrer les dates selon le calendrier grégorien dans le format AAAA. Si une date plus précise est nécessaire, considérer la possibilité de l'enregistrer dans une autre zone (par exemple, 670, 678). Il n'est pas nécessaire de reformuler les dates déjà inscrites dans les notices d'autorité pour se conformer à cette pratique. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Profession =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;6.1.3 pour des instructions sur l'enregistrement de la profession ou de l'occupation comme élément. Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.19.1.6 pour des instructions sur l'utilisation d'un terme indiquant la profession ou l'occupation dans un point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : répéter la zone si nécessaire pour plus de clarté.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du terme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les codes enregistrés dans la sous-zone $2 de la zone 374 peuvent provenir soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-TIO.html/view ''Codes sources pour les termes de profession''], soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-VM-C.html/view ''Codes sources pour les vedettes-matière et termes d'indexation''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#374_Profession |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Sexe de la personne =&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Ne pas utiliser cette zone dans les nouvelles notices d'autorité. Lorsqu'une notice existante doit être modifiée pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer toute occurrence de la zone 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Renseignements sur la famille =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Personnalité importante de la famille'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement du nom d'un membre illustre d'une famille dans la sous-zone $b, utiliser la forme du nom de la personne telle que mentionnée dans la sous-zone $g de la zone 100 dans la notice d'autorité pour la famille. Les codages internes de sous-zones ne doivent pas être inclus dans la sous-zone $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Langue associée =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier les codes de langues plutôt que des termes, en utilisant la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21. La sous-zone $l (Nom de la langue) doit être utilisée uniquement pour fournir des informations non disponibles dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/LNG-C.html ''Liste des codes de langue''] du MARC 21. Enregistrer plusieurs codes de langue seulement si la personne ou la collectivité fait usage de plusieurs langages dans ses publications, communications, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;À titre facultatif, enregistrer un ou plusieurs codes de langue ISO 639-3 dans une zone 377 supplémentaire. Cette pratique est particulièrement recommandée lorsqu’un code ISO 639-3 permet d’identifier une langue plus précisément que le code MARC. Pour plus d’informations, voir les [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $2 n'est pas requise lorsque la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 est utilisée pour représenter la langue (le deuxième indicateur «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» mentionne déjà la source). Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent utiliser une autre source de codes de langue peuvent ajouter une zone 377 supplémentaire en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur et en mentionnant la source utilisée dans la sous-zone $2 . Cette source doit cependant provenir d'une des sources fournies dans la liste intitulée [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CTL.html ''Codes sources pour les codes et termes de langue''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Code ISO 639-3 pour la langue Achi : acr. Code pour cette même langue, laquelle fait partie des langues maya, dans la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 : myn)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Forme développée du nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer la forme développée du nom dans la zone 378 lorsque l'information est facilement disponible, même si l'information est déjà présente dans la zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#378_Forme_d.C3.A9velopp.C3.A9e_du_nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Genre de l'œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM ou le RVMGF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'enregistrement du genre de l'œuvre comme élément dans les notices d'autorité de collections représentant des œuvres (et non des expressions), voir l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.3.1.3.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#380_Genre_de_l.27.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Autres caractéristiques distinctes d'une œuvre ou d'une expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée pour enregistrer les éléments RDA Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) et Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Les autres caractéristiques distinctives des expressions qui sont spécifiques aux œuvres musicales (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4–6.18.1.6]) peuvent être aussi enregistrées dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Numéro de Franklin enregistré comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version enregistrée comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut être approprié que certains des termes enregistrés pour une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression soient enregistrés dans la zone 381 ou dans une autre zone MARC pour laquelle il n'y a pas d'élément RDA correspondant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, une collectivité (tel un éditeur) utilisée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ou d'une œuvre peut être enregistrée soit dans la zone 373 (Groupe associé), soit dans la zone 381, soit dans les deux zones. ''Note :'' Le codage de sous-zone pour les collectivités subordonnées n'est pas utilisé dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme groupe associé et comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA n'a pas d'élément particulier pour les lieux associés aux expressions, mais la zone 370 sous-zone $f (Autre lieu associé) et la sous-zone $g (Lieu d'origine de l'œuvre ou de l'expression) peuvent être utilisées dans les notices d'autorité pour les expressions. Dans certains cas, des lieux associés aux œuvres ou aux expressions sont considérés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression selon RDA et peuvent être enregistrés dans la zone 370, dans la zone 381 ou dans les deux zones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Lieux utilisés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre juridique; enregistrés dans les zones 370 et 381)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'élément RDA lieu d'origine d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.5]) dans une zone 370 (voir la section [[#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]] de ce Guide).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression a été utilisée dans un point d'accès autorisé et est aussi enregistrée comme élément dans une zone 3XX, utiliser la zone 381 pour enregistrer une autre caractéristique distinctive. À titre facultatif, enregistrer aussi la même information dans une autre zone 3XX appropriée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#381_Autres_caract.C3.A9ristiques_distinctes_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_ou_d.27une_expression |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en utilisant les termes du thésaurus ''Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM'' (RVMMEM). Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en appliquant les instructions de RDA ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6]) et les ÉP de BAC-BAnQ associés. ''Note :'' La zone 382 peut également être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité d'expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :''' Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère. Si c'est jugé important pour l'identification et l'accès, ajouter une zone 382 additionnelle qui ne répond pas aux présentes lignes directrices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-04-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#382_Distribution_d.27.C3.A9x.C3.A9cution_d.27une_.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numéro d'identification d'une œuvre &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou d'une expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; musicale =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible. Créer des zones 383 distinctes pour les différents systèmes de numérotation associés à une même œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#383_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27identification_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Tonalité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible pour les œuvres. En cas de doute, ne pas enregistrer. Ne pas enregistrer pour les expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Caractéristiques du public cible =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer le public cible d'une œuvre ou d'une expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices  du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a : Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Termes provenant de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé et terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-07-17]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Caractéristiques du créateur ou du collaborateur &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer les caractéristiques démographiques d'un ou plusieurs créateurs ou contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression, notamment pour enregistrer les caractéristiques communes à un groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression. Cette zone sera généralement utilisée dans des notices d'autorité établies pour des agrégats par regroupement matérialisant deux ou plusieurs expressions de deux ou plusieurs œuvres indépendantes créées par des agents différents, ainsi que pour les œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre (par exemple, les œuvres d'auteurs inconnus ou les collections de monographies). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Personnes âgées $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Terme démographique non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bien que cette zone soit principalement utilisée pour des œuvres agrégées et pour des œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre, il existe des situations où il est également approprié de l'utiliser pour une œuvre individuelle d'un ou plusieurs créateurs nommés. Par exemple, pour une œuvre musicale composée pendant l'enfance ou l'adolescence d'un créateur, il ne serait pas approprié d'enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;Enfants&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Adolescents&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme caractéristiques dans la notice d'autorité du compositeur. Au lieu de cela, les caractéristiques démographiques applicables uniquement à certaines des œuvres d'un créateur doivent être enregistrées dans les notices d'autorité établies pour ces œuvres.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Œuvre composée en 2003-2005, achevée lorsque le compositeur avait 14 ans)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Termes issus de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;''(Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau; terme non contrôlé et termes provenant du même vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $i – Information sur la relation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il est possible d'utiliser la sous-zone $i pour enregistrer un terme désignant la nature de la relation entre les groupes démographiques enregistrés dans la zone et l'œuvre ou l'expression. Préférer un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que les termes de relation du format MARC ou les indicateurs de relation RDA. Mettre une majuscule à la première lettre du terme de relation et utiliser la forme au singulier. Faire suivre le terme de relation par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998-February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer plusieurs occurrences de la sous-zone $i dans une même occurrence de la zone 386. Si plusieurs termes de relation s'appliquent à un seul groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs (par exemple, une œuvre réunissant des auteurs et des artistes du même groupe démographique ou une expression dont les éditeurs et les traducteurs appartiennent au même groupe démographique), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Compilation d'œuvres d'auteurs et d'artistes du Massachusetts)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différents termes de relation s'appliquent à différents créateurs et contributeurs (par exemple, si les auteurs font partie d'un groupe démographique et les artistes d'un autre), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents. Si le même terme de relation s'applique à plus d'un groupe démographique, répéter la sous-zone $a dans une même zone ou répéter la zone. Pour plus de clarté, en cas de doute, répéter la zone 386 autant que nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Partition comprenant des œuvres de Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler et Strauss, ainsi que les paroles imprimées sous forme de texte, en allemand et en traduction anglaise)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-12]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Période associée à la création =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine d'une œuvre ou d'une expression. Le nom de la période peut préciser ou sous-entendre un lieu pour lequel la période de temps est pertinente. Il peut aussi préciser le nom d'un événement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM ou le RVMFAST. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les compilations, la zone peut être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine des œuvres/expressions contenues dans la compilation, considérées collectivement (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur). Elle peut également être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine de la compilation elle-même (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;2&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour un recueil de poésie de la Renaissance compilé au XIXe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 388 peut être utilisée en conjonction avec ou à la place de la zone 046. Lorsque la ou les dates précises de création ou d'origine ne sont pas connues ou qu'elles s'étendent sur une longue période, il peut être utile d'enregistrer des termes chronologiques textuels dans la zone 388.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour une œuvre anonyme du XIVe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si la valeur de l'indicateur diffère, répéter la zone. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom avec zones 388 contenant des termes provenant de différents vocabulaires)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour une autre raison, supprimer tout signe de ponctuation à la fin d'une zone 4XX sauf s'il fait partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou est requis par les règles de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'est pas nécessaire de justifier tous les renvois 4XX; voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès|Justification des variantes de point d'accès]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 670 de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas faire un renvoi 4XX qui se normalise sous la même forme qu'une autre zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité ou une zone 1XX dans toute autre notice d'autorité de nom. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;NACO normalization&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratiques à privilégier pour le catalogage selon RDA :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Enregistrer les variantes trouvées dans la manifestation cataloguée :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Utiliser le jugement du catalogueur;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Il n'y a pas de limite quant au nombre ou à la forme des renvois;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Au lieu ou en plus d'ajouter des variantes, envisager de fournir un accès en ajoutant des zones 37X.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Exemple montrant une zone 378 sans une variante pour la forme développée du nom :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Établir des notices d'autorité de noms supplémentaires pour les points d'accès autorisés nécessaires pour soutenir les éléments utilisés dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX (par exemple, la collectivité supérieure associée à la collectivité subordonnée qui doit être établie).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, fournir une variante de point d'accès 4XX pour un ancien point d'accès autorisé 1XX, sauf si l'ancien point d'accès autorisé est manifestement incorrect. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#4XX$w|Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour plus d'information.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Utiliser la forme établie des composantes dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX, à l'exception des variantes en écriture non latine, qui peuvent présenter un mélange d'écritures ou être entièrement dans une écriture non latine.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, ne pas supprimer des variantes sauf si elles sont manifestement incorrectes (par exemple, une variante en écriture non latine qui ne représente pas la même personne).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si une forme trouvée dans la manifestation cataloguée inclut une variante de forme d'une composante d'une variante de point d'accès en 4XX, cette forme peut être utilisée dans son intégralité comme une variante de point d'accès supplémentaire en 4XX, à condition que des sous-zones ne soient pas utilisées pour diviser ses parties constitutives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on change la forme d'une collectivité hiérarchiquement supérieure, d'un nom géographique ou d'un nom de personne dans une 1XX, mettre à jour toutes les notices d'autorité existantes qui utilisent cette composante dans une zone 4XX, sauf si la 4XX représente l'ancien point d'accès autorisé (par exemple, $w/2=e). Exception : Ne pas appliquer cette instruction dans le cas des notices d'autorité migrées qui n'ont pas été réévaluées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est modifié parce que la personne a changé de nom, enregistrer l'ancienne forme du nom dans une zone 400 avec $w nne si la variante est valide selon les instructions de RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après l'élection comme pape)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est mis à jour pour fermer la date, il est recommandé d'enregistrer l'ancienne forme avec la date ouverte dans une zone 4XX avec $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) basé sur le catalogage CIP est modifié parce que sa forme sur la ressource publiée est différente de celle sur la demande CIP, une zone 4XX pour l'ancienne forme du point d'accès autorisé avec la sous-zone $w nne peut être ajoutée sauf si l'ancienne forme 1XX est manifestement incorrecte (par exemple, la date de naissance de l'auteur a été donnée comme étant 1775 au lieu de 1975 dans la demande CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) est modifié en raison d'un changement dans les instructions de catalogage, enregistrer l'ancienne forme dans une zone 4XX en utilisant $w. Si la variante de forme est un renvoi valide selon les instructions actuelles de RDA, utiliser $w nne. Si la variante de forme n'est pas un renvoi valide selon les instructions RDA actuelles, utiliser $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante n'est pas valide selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nne&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante est valide selon RDA; le changement de la forme en 100 est basé sur l'utilisation du nom et les dates de naissance et de mort ont été ajoutées parce que la 100 a été changée)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429 av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que l'abréviation «&amp;amp;nbsp;ca&amp;amp;nbsp;» n'est pas valide pour une période d'activité selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé est corrigé parce que des dates ont été enregistrées de manière inexacte ou qu'un catalogueur a introduit une faute de frappe dans le point d'accès autorisé, ne pas faire de renvoi à la forme incorrecte. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche des notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel des collections et la création et la tenue à jour des notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des variantes de point d'accès peuvent être enregistrées dans toute notice d'autorité de collection, y compris celles pour des phrases analogues à des collections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si les volumes d'une monographie en plusieurs parties portent des formes différentes du titre commun, faire un renvoi 4XX plutôt qu'un renvoi 5XX pour la forme de titre non choisie comme titre propre de la monographie en plusieurs parties.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w. Lorsqu'on utilise les indicateurs de relation RDA dans les zones 5XX, utiliser les termes des annexes I, J ou K; mettre une majuscule au premier terme et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour de l'information sur l'utilisation des indicateurs de relation et/ou les codes $w dans une zone 5XX spécifique, voir la section de ce Guide concernant cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les conventions du format autorités en ce qui concerne l'utilisation de la sous-zone $w. Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $w sauf si une valeur autre que «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» est appropriée dans l'une des positions. Lorsqu'on utilise la sous-zone $w, enregistrer la sous-zone comme première sous-zone de la zone. Fournir les positions de caractères qui précèdent la valeur mais pas celles qui lui succèdent, par exemple,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé antérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé ultérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = pour indiquer qu'une sous-zone $i ou une sous-zone $2 est utilisée pour donner de l'information sur la relation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = pour indiquer un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour des pseudonymes multiples (la notice comprend aussi une zone 663)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» (5XX) ne doit pas se normaliser sous la même forme qu'un autre renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la même notice d'autorité, sauf si les deux zones 5XX contiennent un indicateur de relation dans la sous-zone $i et que les textes des indicateurs de relation sont différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre un nom de personne et 1) le nom d'une autre personne, d'une famille ou d'une collectivité ou 2) le point d'accès autorisé pour une œuvre ou une expression. Cette technique peut également être utilisée pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres et des expressions et contenant des noms de personnes. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe I, J ou K dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on enregistre des relations entre noms de personnes impliquant des pseudonymes et que seulement deux notices d'autorité sont en cause, les catalogueurs peuvent soit 1) utiliser la sous-zone $i et le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w ou 2) utiliser des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» simples. Pour plus d'information sur ces techniques et des instructions sur l'enregistrement de pseudonymes multiples (c'est-à-dire ceux qui requièrent une zone 663), voir la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rappel aux catalogueurs : Lorsqu'une variante de nom (400) et un point d'accès autorisé (100) sont en conflit, il faut faire un ajout à la zone 400 ou à la zone 100 pour résoudre le conflit (par exemple, une forme développée du nom, une date d'activité, etc.); la pratique antérieure consistant à changer la zone 400 en 500 pour résoudre le conflit n'est plus une option. Lorsque les catalogueurs trouvent une variante de forme dans une zone 500 au cours de la mise à jour d'une notice d'autorité de nom, ils doivent résoudre le conflit et modifier la zone en 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de collectivité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de réunion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8] pour des directives sur les relations entre les notices d'autorité pour des séries de conférences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Titre uniforme =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés pour des œuvres ou des expressions. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe J dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $i avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w tant que les indicateurs de relation pour les lieux ne seront pas développés. (RDA a prévu un espace pour l'annexe L.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Traitement de collection – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 640 Dates de publication et/ou indication séquentielle de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#640_Dates_de_publication_et.2Fou_indication_s.C3.A9quentielle_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Exemple de numérotation de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#642_Exemple_de_num.C3.A9rotation_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Lieu et éditeur de la collection/organisme de publication =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#643_Lieu_et_.C3.A9diteur_de_la_collection.2Forganisme_de_publication |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Usage en matière d'analyse de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#644_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_d.27analyse_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Usage en matière de rappel de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#645_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_rappel_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Usage en matière de classification de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#646_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_classification_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Renvoi complexe «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 663 comprend le texte explicatif et les points d'accès autorisés pour les relations entre une zone 100 (nom établi) et d'autres zones 100 (noms établis) qui ne peuvent pas être correctement exprimées par un ou plusieurs renvois simples générés à partir de zones 500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Généralement, cette situation se produit lorsqu'une personne utilise plus de deux identités, lorsque plus d'une personne partage une identité avec une ou plusieurs autres personnes, ou lorsque plusieurs personnes utilisent le même pseudonyme indépendamment les unes des autres ou en raison d'un autre arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le texte de la zone 663 peut être adapté pour répondre à des situations exceptionnelles; toutefois, il faut garder le texte aussi simple que possible et laisser les zones et le codage MARC communiquer l'information souhaitée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la technique de la zone 663 pour établir des relations entre collectivités ou entre personnes et collectivités.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Seulement deux identités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque seulement deux notices d'autorité de noms sont créées pour une personne, les notices d'autorité de noms sont généralement reliées par des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500, sans aucune zone 663. Toutefois, lorsque l'une des notices d'autorité de noms est établie pour un pseudonyme commun ou un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment les unes des autres, la technique de la zone 663 est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Plus de deux identités - point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» et renvois ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plus de deux points d'accès autorisés sont créés pour la même personne, identifier un point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» en utilisant la technique de la zone 663. Cette décision est fondée sur le désir de simplifier la structure de renvois et d'aider les catalogueurs à déterminer le nom à utiliser comme sujet des œuvres biographiques ou critiques. Le point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» doit être déterminé par la forme de nom qui prédomine dans l'usage ou, en l'absence de preuves suffisantes, en choisissant le nom réel de la personne comme forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Dans la notice d'autorité pour la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», ajouter des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour tous les autres noms utilisés. Justifier les renvois en 500 par des zones 670 selon la pratique normale. Fournir une zone 663 énumérant tous les autres noms avec le texte suivant (celui-ci peut être modifié pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom] $b [forme établie du nom]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans chacune des autres notices d'autorité de noms, ajouter un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», en justifiant ce renvoi par une zone 670, selon la pratique normale. D'autres noms peuvent être mentionnés dans le 670 s'il est pratique de le faire. Fournir une zone 663 avec le texte suivant ou un texte similaire (le texte peut être ajusté pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom choisie comme vedette de base]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque l'auteur utilise un autre nouveau nom, créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour ce nom et l'ajouter à la structure de renvois ainsi qu'à la liste de la zone 663 dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;». Les renvois au nouveau nom dans les zones 500 et 663 sont ajoutés seulement dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes conjoints ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un pseudonyme conjoint est une identité utilisée par deux ou plusieurs personnes travaillant en collaboration. Si une personne utilise un pseudonyme conjoint et un autre nom (tel que trouvé dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes utilisés par plusieurs personnes ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment l'une de l'autre utilisent le même pseudonyme et un ou plusieurs autres noms (tels que trouvés dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisée par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(L'auteur a un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes et des pseudonymes individuels)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Note générale non destinée au public =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Donner des informations de valeur permanente et d'intérêt général qui seraient également utiles aux autres institutions du PFAN ou à celles qui n'y participent pas. Une liste représentative des notes est donnée ci-dessous. En général, le libellé est recommandé, mais n'est pas prescriptif, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions. Les zones 667 distinctes peuvent être données dans n'importe quel ordre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [raison de l'encodage].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date de la mise à jour].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Utilisée pour les changements de langue officielle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Annexe_2_:_Projets_sp.C3.A9ciaux|Annexe 2]] de ce Guide pour des informations et des instructions sur les zones 667 ajoutées aux notices d'autorité dans le cadre d'un projet spécial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes dont certaines identités ne sont pas établies ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une personne utilise deux ou plusieurs identités dans les manifestations, des notices d'autorité de noms peuvent être créées pour chaque identité. Dans un souci d'efficacité, les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser une zone 667 pour énumérer les pseudonymes non trouvés dans les publications au lieu de créer des notices d'autorité de noms pour ces pseudonymes inutilisés. Dans ce cas, énumérer les pseudonymes inutilisés dans une zone 667 après l'expression : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette note peut aussi être ajoutée dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne qui a plusieurs notices d'autorité de noms pour plusieurs identités lorsque certains des pseudonymes ne sont pas trouvés dans des publications. Dans ce cas, énumérer seulement les pseudonymes inutilisés dans la zone 667 et suivre les instructions appropriées pour les autres pseudonymes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, […] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la section [[#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom|663]] de ce Guide ainsi que dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les séries de congrès, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter une zone 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour une série de congrès lorsqu'il y a des notices d'autorité autant pour la série que pour les occurrences isolées du congrès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appliquer ces instructions lors de la création de nouvelles notices d'autorité de noms et lors de la révision de notices d'autorité de noms existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Ajouter des notes indiquant l'utilisation en indexation lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé n'est pas approprié pour utilisation comme vedette-matière dans ces situations :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Chefs d'État, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette instruction s'applique aux notices d'autorité de noms pour les collectivités représentant la fonction lorsque le nom du titulaire est inclus comme partie du point d'accès autorisé de la collectivité. Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Dignitaires gouvernementaux)] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html 11.2.2.26 (Dignitaires religieux)] pour les instructions sur les collectivités. Utiliser cette note 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour la collectivité pour indiquer l'utilisation en indexation :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [vedette du nom de la personne].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi les sections [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Changements linéaires entre noms antérieurs et ultérieurs d'une juridiction'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La politique d'indexation du RVM est d'employer comme point d'accès matière ou comme subdivision géographique uniquement le dernier nom d'une juridiction politique qui a eu un ou plusieurs noms antérieurs, aussi longtemps que l'identité territoriale demeure essentiellement la même (voir ''Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval'', 5.14.3.1). Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom ayant un point d'accès autorisé antérieur/ultérieur pour un lieu dans cette situation, les catalogueurs doivent ajouter une note 667 sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom antérieur du lieu et modifier les zones 008 appropriés (008/11 et 008/15).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Notices d'autorité de personnes fictives'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les points d'accès autorisés pour les personnes fictives ne doivent pas être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, la zone 008/11 doit être codée avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» et la zone 008/15 doit être codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;». Selon l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 9.0, lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, ajouter cette zone 667 pour indiquer l'utilisation comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une partie d'une ville, en indiquant qu'il n'est pas approprié de l'utiliser comme une subdivision géographique :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) Notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les points d'accès autorisés pour les noms de familles peuvent être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Pour les notices d'autorité de noms de familles qui reflètent la pratique antérieure (qui interdisait de les utiliser comme vedettes-matière), mettre à jour les notices pour attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et supprimer la note sur l’utilisation comme vedette-matière suivante :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes pour les renvois en écriture non latine ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans une notice d'autorité qui comprend une variante de point d'accès dans une écriture non latine, utiliser la zone 667 avec une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.&amp;amp;nbsp;» S'il y a plusieurs variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, utiliser une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» à la zone 008/29 pour indiquer que la variante de point d'accès n'a pas été évaluée. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Doublons&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Doublons ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice à conserver&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Source des données =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone a pour but d'enregistrer des informations sur le nom ou le titre représenté dans la zone 1XX. Elle comprend des renseignements qui contribuent à l'identification de l'entité et qui justifient le choix du nom ou du titre de même que tout élément supplémentaire utilisé pour construire le point d'accès autorisé (1XX). Les informations consignées justifient également, le cas échéant, des variantes de forme du nom ou du titre (4XX), d'autres éléments d'identification (046, 3XX et 678), et clarifient les relations entre la 1XX et les autres entités représentées dans le fichier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Fonctions de la zone 670 :'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations, provenant de sources (par exemple, livres, appels téléphoniques, sites Web), à l'appui du choix et de la forme du point d'accès autorisé, des variantes de point d'accès et d'autres éléments d'identification&lt;br /&gt;
* Stocker des informations qui pourront être utilisées pour résoudre un conflit par la suite&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations sur les relations entre entités (par exemple, une personne est l'auteur d'une œuvre, une collectivité a été absorbée par une autre collectivité)&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier une personne qui a produit des œuvres dans différents domaines ou sous des formes diverses&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier des personnes différentes dont les points d'accès doivent rester identiques pour le moment (c'est-à-dire des noms de personnes indifférenciés)&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour préciser si les différentes formes d'un nom ou d'un titre sont de simples variations ou reflètent un changement de nom ou de titre&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer les recherches requises par les lignes directrices actuelles&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour faciliter la maintenance des fichiers d'autorité et bibliographiques étant donné que les informations dans les zones 670 aident à la prise de décisions concernant les points d'accès autorisés en double et les attributions erronées&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour soutenir les manipulations informatiques basées sur des algorithmes utilisant les informations du 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, la première zone 670 cite la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est établie, c'est-à-dire la ressource en cours de catalogage. Si la ressource en cours de catalogage ou de consultation ne fournit aucune information justifiant le point d'accès autorisé, les variantes de point d'accès ou les autres éléments enregistrés dans la notice d'autorité, voir la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur la façon de citer la ressource dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les zones 670 suivantes dans n'importe quel ordre, en ajoutant les nouvelles zones après celles qui existent déjà. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 670 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670, préférer les sources objectives et faisant autorité (par exemple, une encyclopédie) et les sources qui fournissent des informations de première main (par exemple, un blogue d'auteur). Utiliser des sources qui fournissent des informations supplémentaires plutôt que celles qui répètent des informations déjà présentes dans les autres zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Pratiques à privilégier pour les zones 670 : '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans la sous-zone $b, résumer et modifier les informations trouvées, selon les besoins, pour éviter les informations superflues ou répétitives.&lt;br /&gt;
* Éviter de citer des informations subjectives ou des informations dont la valeur est douteuse pour identifier une entité dans un contexte bibliographique.&lt;br /&gt;
* Faire preuve de prudence lors de l'enregistrement d'informations sur des personnes vivantes lorsque ces informations sont susceptibles d'être de nature privée ou controversée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité existantes peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices. Par exemple, dans les zones 670 des notices d'autorité plus anciennes, la sous-zone $b contenant des informations justificatives pourrait être absente. Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité qui faisaient partie d'un projet spécial peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices et/ou peuvent contenir des informations qui semblent inhabituelles ou incorrectes.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Les exemples donnés tout au long du texte suivant présentent diverses conventions en ce qui concerne la ponctuation et le style. Ces conventions ne sont pas prescriptives et doivent être considérées comme des pratiques à privilégier pour faciliter l'échange d'informations dans le contexte d'une base de données partagée. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs fassent preuve de jugement et de bon sens. La ponctuation et le style ne doivent pas nécessairement être cohérents d'une notice à l'autre tant que l'information est claire et précise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format des zones 670 ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
À l'exception de l'eszett (ß ou ſʒ) et du symbole euro (€), tous les caractères figurant dans le [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/M9230.html tableau des codes MARC] peuvent être utilisés dans les notices d'autorité ajoutées au fichier d'autorité Canadiana (voir le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). Lorsque des données provenant d'un site Web sont copiées/collées dans une zone 670, vérifier que tous les caractères peuvent être utilisés dans la notice. Certains caractères non valides ressemblent à ceux qui sont valides. Par exemple, le tiret (–) non valide ressemble au trait d'union (-) valide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une substitution pour un symbole non reproductible est indiquée entre parenthèses (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.5]), une explication de cette interpolation peut également être fournie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les données doivent être fournies sous forme romanisée. Normalement, il est entendu que le catalogueur a fourni la romanisation; par conséquent, lors de la transcription de données trouvées dans la source sous forme romanisée, ajouter après celle-ci l'expression entre crochets ['''forme romanisée''']. Dans des langues telles que l'arabe et l'hébreu, où les voyelles sont généralement omises dans l'orthographe des textes, le catalogueur fournit les voyelles manquantes lors de la transcription des données. Lors de la transcription de texte qui inclut les voyelles, ajouter après entre parenthèses ['''vocalisé'''] ou ['''en partie vocalisé'''] selon le cas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un catalogueur choisit de fournir des variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, les 670 $b doivent contenir aussi bien la transcription du ou des textes en écriture non latine trouvés dans la source que la ou les formes systématiquement romanisées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les notices d'autorité sont créées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, il est possible que de l'information supplémentaire soit incluse. Ces données peuvent également être formatées d'une manière différente de celle indiquée dans le présent document. En général, ces données doivent être conservées telles qu'elles sont générées afin de maintenir la rentabilité de ce processus, à moins que les données ne prêtent à confusion ou ne provoquent des erreurs de validation. Les noms et les titres pour lesquels les notices d'autorité sont créées constituent l'exception à cette règle. Suivre les instructions de ces sections pour enregistrer ces données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Citation de la source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Le titre propre de la ressource citée, suffisamment complet pour permettre une identification ultérieure dans un catalogue en ligne. Des abréviations et des points de suspension peuvent être utilisés. Faire précéder un titre générique ou non distinctif du nom du créateur par lequel commencerait le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre. Si le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre est le même que le titre propre plus un qualificatif, il peut être fourni à la place du titre propre pour éviter toute ambiguïté. Lorsque des informations sont fournies dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 pour justifier un point d'accès autorisé ou une variante de point d'accès, suivre les instructions supplémentaires sous Enregistrement des noms et des titres. &lt;br /&gt;
# La date de publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Monographies en plusieurs parties. S'il s'agit de la première partie, indiquer la date de publication sous forme de date ouverte.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Publications en série autres que les collections de monographies. En général, utiliser une désignation chronologique au lieu d'une date de publication. S'il n'y a pas de désignation chronologique, utiliser la désignation numérique et la date de publication. Le cas échéant, indiquer à la suite de la désignation qu'un «&amp;amp;nbsp;substitut&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été utilisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:15px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ressources intégratrices. Appliquer les instructions de [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] pour la source du titre propre d'un site Web. Identifier l'itération à partir de laquelle les informations ont été prises (par exemple «&amp;amp;nbsp;consulté(e) le&amp;amp;nbsp;» suivi d'une date pour un site Web mis à jour de façon continue, le numéro de mise à jour ou le numéro de révision pour les publication à feuillets mobiles à mise à jour).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Informations trouvées'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $b :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# L'emplacement spécifique où les informations ont été trouvées. Pour les ressources en plusieurs parties avec parties numérotées, indiquer la désignation de la partie et l'emplacement dans la partie (par exemple, vol. 6, page 10; recto de la carte, étiquette). Des abréviations ou des formes au long peuvent être utilisées (par exemple, p. de t. ou page de titre, couv. ou couverture, vol. 6 ou volume 6). &lt;br /&gt;
# Informations trouvées. À la suite de l'emplacement, citer les informations qui y ont été trouvées, entre parenthèses. Le cas échéant, indiquer différentes occurrences d'informations provenant de la même source à la suite de l'emplacement de l'information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' Si le point d'accès autorisé est construit à partir des données de catalogage avant publication, inclure «&amp;amp;nbsp;CIP&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la mention de l'emplacement (par exemple, formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Takao Tanabe, 2026 : $b page de titre du CIP de BAC (Sherri Shinobu Kajiwara) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Kajiwara, Sherri S.; personne associée au Canada et au Japon)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Ressources Internet.''' Pour les sites Web, indiquer s'il y a lieu le nom de l'emplacement à l'intérieur du site (par exemple, À propos; Notre histoire, Chronologie; Government, Executive Branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Plusieurs emplacements dans une ressource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' Lorsqu'on ajoute de nouvelles informations à une zone 670 créée pour un CIP, indiquer que les nouvelles informations proviennent de la ressource publiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; personne associée au Canada) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; personne associée au Canada) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de noms, utiliser généralement «&amp;amp;nbsp;etc.&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour éviter de donner plus de deux emplacements ou une séquence d'emplacements (par exemple, p. 316, etc., pour la séquence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de collections, toujours indiquer chaque emplacement séparément.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Lors du travail d'autorité post-catalogage sans le document en main, utiliser l'emplacement « ressource non disponible ». Si le document est examiné à nouveau et que la notice d'autorité est mise à jour, il est permis de modifier la zone 670 correspondante afin de fournir un emplacement et des formes supplémentaires de titres de collection si nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source des informations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent facultativement fournir un identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) dans la sous-zone $u de la zone 670 pour établir un lien avec la ressource citée si celle-ci contient des informations importantes sur l'entité établie qui ne peuvent être citées succinctement dans la notice d'autorité. Noter que l'utilisation d'un URI dans la zone 670 $u ne supplée pas à l'obligation de citer dans les sous-zones $a et $b de la zone 670 les données pertinentes nécessaires pour justifier le point d'accès autorisé (y compris les ajouts) ou les variantes (cette information continuera d'être disponible si le site change ou disparaît). Toutefois, les informations trouvées dans les sources en ligne peuvent être ajoutées aux zones 046 ou 3XX avec les citations appropriées dans les sous-zones $v et $u et ne pas être répétées dans une 670 lorsque ces informations ne sont pas utilisées dans une 1XX ou une 4XX. Si un URI est inclus dans une 670, il doit être indiqué dans la sous-zone $u. La sous-zone $u doit contenir uniquement l'URI sans aucune autre donnée (par exemple, ne pas mettre l'URI entre parenthèses ni inclure de mots dans la sous-zone $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des noms et des titres ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer intégralement les noms ou les titres de collections utilisés dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès, comme ils apparaissent dans la source, sans abréviation par le catalogueur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la préparation d'une notice d'autorité pour le texte d'une loi ou d'un recueil de lois par sujet, si une source citée contient un titre abrégé ou un titre de référence officiels, citer ce titre, précédé du terme «&amp;amp;nbsp;titre de référence&amp;amp;nbsp;» et de son emplacement exact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les autorités de collectivités, inclure dans les données citées toute la hiérarchie requise pour justifier toutes les variantes de point d'accès nécessaires. Faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles informations (par exemple, le nom de l'organisme subordonné) sont étrangères à la notice créée et ne doivent pas être enregistrées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toutes les catégories ci-dessus, si la seule présentation du nom ou du titre sur la source d'information privilégiée se trouve dans le titre de la ressource donné dans la sous-zone $a de la 670, la répétition du nom dans la sous-zone $b peut être omise, à condition qu'aucune information importante ne soit perdue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si des informations sur un nom ou un titre antérieur ou postérieur se trouvent dans la même source que le nom ou le titre dans le point d'accès autorisé, donner toutes les informations dans la zone 670. Ne pas séparer les informations sur le nom ou le titre antérieur ou postérieur pour les donner dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour faciliter la contribution internationale et l'utilisation des notices d'autorité, lors de l'enregistrement des dates, utiliser généralement les noms de mois, sous forme longue ou [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abrégée]. (Pour les dates enregistrées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, voir la section [[#Format_des_zones_670|Format des zones 670]] de ce Guide). Ne pas modifier le style des dates dans les notices existantes. Comme pratique à privilégier, si une date n'est pas incluse dans la sous-zone $d de la zone 100, envisager d'ajouter une zone 046 si les dates sont disponibles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification des variantes de point d'accès ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justifier les noms ou les titres donnés comme variantes de point d'accès par des informations citées des sources. Toutefois, une justification n'est pas requise dans les cas suivants :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variantes de point d'accès reflétant différentes romanisations ou orthographes connues du catalogueur;&lt;br /&gt;
# Une variante de titre dérivée de la ressource cataloguée, d'autres ressources cataloguées sous le même point d'accès ou de sources de référence standard;&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois pour des points d'accès autorisés de collectivités reflétant des changements dus à une réforme orthographique nationale, des changements de noms dus à un changement de langue officielle ou des changements impliquant uniquement une collectivité supérieure à laquelle la collectivité en cours d'établissement est subordonnée.&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois facultatifs à partir de formes RCAA2 ou pré-RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité de collections et les notices d'autorité de noms rétrospectives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification d'autres éléments ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les informations enregistrées dans les zones 046, 3XX ou 678 de la notice d'autorité doivent généralement être justifiées, à moins qu'elles ne ressortent clairement dans les informations enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 ou qu'elles puissent être facilement déduites d'autres éléments d'identification enregistrés, y compris le nom privilégié.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour la zone 046 et plusieurs des zones 3XX, une sous-zone $u ou une sous-zone $v enregistrée dans la même zone peut être utilisée à la place ou en plus d'une 670. Voir la section [[#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]] de ce Guide pour les directives concernant les sous-zones $u et $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des autres données ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. Ne pas abréger ou traduire des attributs tels que le titre d'une personne ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) qui apparaissent en conjonction avec les noms de personnes dans les mentions de responsabilité et qui pourraient potentiellement être utilisés comme partie du point d'accès. Les autres données peuvent être abrégées ou résumées. En général, traduire les données en langues étrangères de manière informelle en français, en les paraphrasant ou en les résumant selon ce qui convient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données autres que les formes du titre (ou de la phrase analogue à une collection) à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. La numérotation et les noms des organismes de publication ne sont pas obligatoires mais peuvent être indiqués.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Types particuliers de citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les citations les plus courantes sont énumérées ci-dessous. Si celles-ci ne sont pas appropriées, en formuler d'autres selon les besoins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la conversion des informations trouvées dans des zones MARC obsolètes ou non actives (par exemple, 664, 665, 666) en une note 670, citer Canadiana dans une citation telle que celles fournies dans les exemples ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date de la conversion] $b ([données converties à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([données déplacées à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC et fichier interne de BAnQ'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La façon de citer ces fichiers dans la zone 670 est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; usage: [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de noms.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations. Entre parenthèses, précédé par la mention '''point d'accès :''' ou '''points d'accès :''' , mentionner le ou les points d'accès trouvés, même si le point d'accès autorisé actuel est identique. S'il est jugé utile de mentionner une ou plusieurs variantes de point d'accès trouvées dans une notice d'autorité, les mentionner en les faisant précéder de la mention '''variante :''' ou '''variantes :'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différentes formes du nom apparaissent dans les notices bibliographiques, enregistrer le point d'accès ainsi que toutes les formes trouvées, y compris les formes identiques au point d'accès autorisé. Séparer le point d'accès des autres formes de nom et faire précéder les autres formes d'une mention appropriée, par exemple, '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' ou '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas citer les notices bibliographiques ou l'emplacement exact des variations trouvées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de collections.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations, suivie de la citation de la notice bibliographique. Entre parenthèses, indiquer la mention de la collection qui se trouve dans cette notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 27 janv. 2021, Les Déchets ménagers, c1980 $b (Les Cahiers de l'AGHTM)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] Le fichier LC/NAF a aussi été cité antérieurement sous d'autres noms, par exemple Base de données LC/NACO et Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;usage&amp;amp;nbsp;» désigne les formes de noms transcrites que l'on trouve habituellement dans les mentions de responsabilité des notices bibliographiques. On peut également trouver ces formes dans d'autres parties de la notice bibliographique telles que le titre propre ou une note citée. En raison des changements apportés aux instructions de catalogage, les catalogueurs doivent être prudents lorsqu'ils prennent les informations de la mention de publication, de la mention de distribution, etc. et de la mention de collection.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») désigne une forme de nom qui ne correspond pas nécessairement à une forme transcrite. Par exemple, dans les notices RCAA2, le nom d'un éditeur qui figure sur la ressource comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Publishing Company&amp;amp;nbsp;» pourrait avoir été enregistré dans la mention de publication sous la forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Pub. Co&amp;amp;nbsp;». Normalement, il n'est pas nécessaire de citer une telle forme dans une zone 670.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Autres fichiers ou catalogues'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un point d'accès est trouvé dans un catalogue ou une base de données en ligne, utiliser son jugement pour créer une citation 670. Commencer la zone 670 par une désignation du catalogue ou de la base de données dans laquelle ces autres notices bibliographiques ont été trouvées. Il n'y a pas de formulation prescrite pour ces citations; des exemples sont donnés ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Bases de données toponymiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer le nom de la base de données et la date de la recherche dans la sous-zone $a. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Le nom de la base de données peut être cité sous forme d'acronyme ou en toutes lettres.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Dans la sous-zone $b, indiquer le ou les noms de l'entité, le type d'entité, la désignation ou la classe de l'élément (par exemple, ADM1, PPL, civil), les coordonnées et le nom du lieu plus vaste, s'il y a lieu. (D'autres informations pertinentes peuvent également être fournies.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de la désignation ou de la classe de l'élément, il est possible d'utiliser soit le code (par exemple, PPL) ou sa forme en toutes lettres (par exemple, populated place). Pour les noms étrangers, indiquer le type de nom (par exemple, forme conventionnelle, forme approuvée, forme courte, etc.) entre crochets ou parenthèses après le nom. Répéter les crochets ou les parenthèses après chaque nom de ce type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Les noms de variantes (y compris les noms en caractères non latins) peuvent être donnés dans une seule liste, comme indiqué ci-dessous. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement des coordonnées, il est possible d'utiliser le format DMS (degrés, minutes, secondes), le format DD (degrés décimaux) ou les deux formats.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a choisi d’enregistrer les coordonnées DMS)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées telles que trouvées. Toutefois, si la base de données affiche les coordonnées en utilisant des deux-points pour séparer les composantes DMS et des valeurs positives et négatives pour communiquer l'hémisphère, il est acceptable de traduire les coordonnées au format DMS traditionnel si souhaité. Utiliser le symbole du degré (et non le zéro en exposant) pour indiquer les degrés, le signe mou (lettre modificative prime) pour les minutes et le signe dur (lettre modificative double prime) pour les secondes. Pour les coordonnées de latitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère sud. Pour les coordonnées de longitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère occidental.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a enregistré les coordonnées DMS telles qu'elles ont été trouvées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a traduit les coordonnées DMS au format traditionnel à partir de : -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic names server&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, consulté le &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;17 août 2022&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;$b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;22:53:01, 121:02:54&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources non bibliographiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer la source non bibliographique, la date et les informations. La source peut être indiquée de manière spécifique («&amp;amp;nbsp;Lettre de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.) ou en termes généraux («&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.). Lorsqu'on indique une source spécifique, il n'est pas nécessaire de montrer comment l'information a été reçue, par exemple, que la lettre a été reçue par télécopieur plutôt que par courrier. Lorsqu'un appel téléphonique à un éditeur, une agence ou une organisation est cité, il convient généralement de donner le nom du groupe appelé, plutôt que le titre ou le nom de la personne contactée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de collections de rééditions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité de collection concerne uniquement une réédition, commencer la 670 par le terme correspondant au type de réédition et une barre oblique. Ne pas inclure une 670 pour une réédition si la notice d'autorité sujet couvre à la fois l'original et une ou plusieurs rééditions. Ne pas ajouter de zones 670 supplémentaires pour d'autres types de rééditions cataloguées ultérieurement. (Voir 64X Traitement de la collection, Rééditions pour plus d'informations sur les rééditions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciés'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour des informations sur les citations existantes dans les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciées, voir la section [[#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32 Nom de personne indifférencié]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-11-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Titre associé de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 672 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui est associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité de collectivité, des zones 672 peuvent être utilisées pour enregistrer des titres de ressources dont la collectivité est la créatrice, l'organisme de publication ou le sujet. Le but premier de la zone 672 consiste principalement à documenter le fait qu'il existe un lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 672 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 670 pour consigner le titre de la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est créée, ni d'utiliser des zones 670 pour justifier les informations enregistrées dans les zones 1XX et 4XX, telles que le nom privilégié et les variantes de noms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 672 peuvent être ajoutées après les zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 672 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 672 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans la classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 672 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zones 672 avec titres propres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Cervantes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre propre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre uniforme)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec une variante de titre pour l'œuvre associée à l'expression catalane de l'œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Reste du titre'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'on enregistre un titre propre, la sous-zone $b peut être utilisée pour enregistrer le complément de titre ou le titre propre parallèle afin d'éviter toute confusion lorsque des titres nécessitent une meilleure identification.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le complément de titre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le titre propre parallèle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $f – Date'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $f est utilisée pour enregistrer une date appropriée à l'entité enregistrée dans la sous-zone $a (par exemple, utiliser la date d'une œuvre pour un titre privilégié et la date de publication pour un titre propre). Ne pas utiliser les crochets carrés dans la sous-zone $f pour enregistrer une date de publication ou de production. Ne pas mettre de date de distribution, de date de fabrication ou de date de copyright en $f.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une œuvre :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de l'œuvre)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une expression :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date d'une expression française de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une manifestation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de publication d'une manifestation d'une expression polonaise de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Numéro de contrôle de la notice bibliographique'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $w est utilisée pour enregistrer des numéros de contrôle de notices bibliographiques (par exemple, les zones 001, 010 et 016 dans les notices bibliographiques). Il est recommandé de fournir la sous-zone $w lorsque l'information est facilement accessible. La sous-zone $w doit être répétée pour chaque numéro de contrôle distinct (par exemple, un LCCN et un numéro de notice OCLC doivent être fournis dans des sous-zones séparées). Pour plus d'instructions sur la saisie d'un numéro de contrôle dans la notice, voir la section sur la sous-zone $w dans le ''CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E. Format MARC 21 for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' la sous-zone $w doit seulement être utilisée pour les titres de manifestations.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Titre distinct de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui n'est pas associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom. Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité pour une personne, la zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer les titres d'œuvres écrites par une personne différente portant un nom semblable. L'objectif principal de la zone 673 est de documenter le fait qu'il n'existe aucun lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 673.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 673 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 675, comme le décrit la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 673 peuvent être ajoutées après des zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires non associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 673 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 673.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 673 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans le classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 673 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245. Pour les sous-zones spécifiques de la zone 673, appliquer les mêmes instructions que celles données dans la section [[#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Titre propre associé à un autre Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)###47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title propre associé à la National Gallery de Londres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
ET NON&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Même si la National Gallery of Art n'est pas la créatrice de la ressource mentionnée, elle en est l'éditrice et ce titre devrait donc être enregistré en 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#673_Titre_distinct_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Source des données non trouvées =&lt;br /&gt;
En avril 2012, cette zone a été redéfinie comme : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Citation d'une source consultée dans laquelle aucune information ne se trouve liée en aucune manière avec l'entité représentée par la notice d'autorité ou par des entités liées.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Les catalogueurs participant au PFAN ne sont pas tenus de modifier les zones 675 existantes simplement pour répondre à cette nouvelle définition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une nouvelle notice d'autorité, toujours citer la ressource cataloguée dans la zone 675 si la ressource cataloguée ne fournit aucune information liée de quelque façon que ce soit à l'entité représentée dans la notice d'autorité. Citer également dans la zone 675 d'autres sources consultées qui ne contiennent aucune information, lorsqu'on juge que cette absence même d'information mérite d'être consignée pour les futurs utilisateurs de la notice d'autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, il n'est pas toujours nécessaire d'inclure dans la zone 675 toutes les sources de référence consultées; il faut faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles sources sont suffisamment importantes pour être conservées de façon permanente dans la notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Données biographiques ou historiques =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsque des données biographiques ou historiques sont fournies dans une zone de note 678, rédiger la note en employant des phrases concises mais complètes et en gardant à l'esprit que l'information sera utilisée dans des affichages publics.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En prévision de la constitution par BAC du fichier dans WMS et de l'ajout en lot des notices d'autorité des autres institutions, le contenu de toutes les zones 665 dans les notices de BAC et de BAnQ a été déplacé vers la zone 678. Il se pourrait que la zone 665 originale ait contenu des instructions sur le ou les points d'accès à employer comme auteur et comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec); Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec); Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec); Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supprimer ces instructions dans la zone 678 si elles ont été conservées. Penser à ajouter la zone 667 sur l'emploi comme vedette-matière le cas échéant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification de la zone 678'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Généralement, une zone 678 doit être justifiée par une zone 670. Si elle n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu est approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, conserver la zone et ajouter une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678 comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [abréviation de la bibliothèque participante], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la notice a été modifiée après avoir été migrée, il faut consulter l'historique de la notice pour déterminer qui a ajouté la zone 678 à l'origine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la zone 678 n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, ne pas conserver la zone 678 sauf si une note appropriée peut être rédigée avec les informations dont on dispose. Noter que la zone 678 est facultative. Si le contenu de la zone doit être conservé parce qu'il ne se trouve nulle part ailleurs dans la notice, le transférer dans une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 678 existante qui sera supprimée car le contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 670 ajoutée :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Ne pas répéter cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#678_Donn.C3.A9es_biographiques_ou_historiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Liaison des vedettes établies – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note'' : Cette section ne s'applique pas à la zone 781 utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms 151 pour fournir des informations sur les subdivisions géographiques. Voir la section [[#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique|781]] de ce Guide pour les instructions relatives à cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;L'utilisation d'une vedette établie dans une zone de liaison 7XX dans une notice d'autorité de nom ou une notice d'autorité de collection est limitée à l'enregistrement du point d'accès autorisé à partir d'une bibliographie nationale ou d'un fichier d'autorité national ou équivalent séparé. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La forme de la vedette dans une zone 7XX peut correspondre à la forme dans la zone 1XX ou à une forme dans la zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité. Ceci est approprié lorsque la forme de la zone 7XX représente une forme se trouvant dans un fichier d'autorité différent de Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La source de la vedette dans la zone 7XX peut être précisée en utilisant soit la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur avec une sous-zone $2, soit une valeur pour le deuxième indicateur qui précise la source. Pour les points d'accès provenant du fichier LC/NAF, privilégier le deuxième indicateur avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Liaison des vedettes de subdivision - Subdivision géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pratique facultative du PFAN :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pour une vedette de nom géographique qui peut également être utilisée comme subdivision géographique, déterminer la forme sous laquelle la vedette doit être utilisée comme subdivision géographique en suivant les lignes directrices de la feuille d'instructions [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 du ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Entrer la forme de la subdivision géographique dans une zone 781 en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;6&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur. Pour une vedette géographique utilisée directement, comme un pays, saisir les données dans une seule sous-zone $z. Pour une vedette géographique qui est utilisée indirectement en subdivision d'une entité géographique plus vaste, telle qu'une ville, saisir les données dans deux sous-zones $z successives. Ne pas modifier les valeurs des positions de la zone 008. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice pour une vedette de nom géographique qui ne peut pas être utilisée comme vedette secondaire matière (008/15 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;»), comme le nom antérieur d'une juridiction qui a subi un changement de nom linéaire, par exemple, '''Ceylan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice d'autorité de nom pour un nom de lieu qui ne peut pas être utilisé comme une subdivision géographique, comme une section d'une ville, par exemple, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Ajouter une zone 781 à une notice existante lorsqu'une autre modification est faite dans la notice. Lors de la révision d'une notice existante qui contient une note d'utilisation pour l'indexation dans une zone 667 indiquant la forme de la subdivision géographique appropriée, supprimer la zone 667 et la remplacer par une zone 781.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 1 : Entités ambiguës =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 2 : Projets spéciaux =&lt;br /&gt;
Cette annexe fournit des informations sur les projets spéciaux impliquant des notices d'autorité créées et modifiées dans le fichier d'autorité Canadiana. Les notices créées ou modifiées pour ces projets peuvent contenir certaines zones et valeurs dans des zones qui ne sont généralement pas conformes aux politiques de catalogage actuelles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des instructions sur la modification de ces notices sont fournies afin d'indiquer si ces zones et valeurs doivent être conservées ou non.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 1. Notices créées ou révisées dans le cadre du projet de révision de notices de l'UQAM ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de révision de notices d'autorité dirigé par l'UQAM. Il s'agit des notices créées ou modifiées dans Canadiana par l'équipe du traitement documentaire de cette institution. Ces notices sont ensuite révisées par deux bibliothécaires et une technicienne de l'UQAM. Le projet s'est terminé le 31 mars 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces nouvelles notices présentaient les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles ont été ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices peuvent être modifiées de la même manière que les autres notices d'autorité de noms conformément aux politiques de catalogage en vigueur.&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un catalogueur modifie ces notices, il doit :&lt;br /&gt;
* changer la valeur du Guide/17 pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Notice d'autorité complète);&lt;br /&gt;
* supprimer la zone 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;amp;nbsp;»; &lt;br /&gt;
* évaluer la notice comme une notice versée en lot. Toutefois, comme la notice est en cours de révision, le point d'accès autorisé peut être modifié s'il n'est pas conforme aux pratiques du PFAN (p. ex., une date de naissance ou de décès peut être ajoutée si elle est disponible et a été omise dans le point d'accès).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 2. Notices créées et révisées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de mentorat &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui, depuis février 2021, permet aux&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; bibliothèques universitaires de créer des notices d'autorité de nom qui sont révisées par une autre institution universitaire. Les notices d'autorité créées ou modifiées par &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;les bibliothèques mentorées&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; sont révisées par des techniciens en documentation de l'Université &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui les mentore&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices présentent les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles sont ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abréviation, c'est-à-dire UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices ne doivent pas être modifiées.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145073</id>
		<title>PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145073"/>
		<updated>2026-03-16T18:03:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 008/32 Nom de personne non différencié */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par D. Paradis, 12 septembre)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par N. Mainville, 26 février)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours| 24 h (En cours d'édition par A. Dunnett, BAC, 24 mars)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Guide}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:PFAN - Name Authority Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  Notices d'autorité de nom ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notices d'autorité de collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--En octobre et novembre 2021, les passages du Guide concernant les collections ont été cachés par souci de cohérence avec la décision de ne pas permettre la création ni la révision des notices d'autorité de collections. DP 1er novembre 2021--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 008 Éléments de données de longueur fixe =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Règles de catalogage descriptif ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée de quelque façon que ce soit, évaluer la notice d'autorité et la modifier pour qu'elle soit conforme à RDA, en modifiant le codage de la zone 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1 : Si une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée uniquement par la modification ou l'ajout d'une zone 5XX, on encourage fortement les catalogueurs, bien qu'il n'y ait pas d'obligation, à évaluer la notice et à la modifier selon RDA, en changeant le 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2 : Les autorités de noms indifférenciés codées 008/10 «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;», peuvent être modifiées de manière à enlever une ou plusieurs identités afin de créer des notices différenciées conformes à RDA. Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié à cette fin, la notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié mise à jour doit conserver le code 008/10 existant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-24]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F10 R.C3.A8gles de catalogage descriptif|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Système de vedettes-matière / Thésaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone 008/11 de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) dans la zone 008/11 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) dans la zone 008/11, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/15 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;dans la zone 008/11 des&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples de noms de collectivités ne pouvant être utilisés comme vedettes-matière :''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis.  Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran.  Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois.  Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique.  Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; margin-left: 0px; padding-left: 15px; padding-top: 10px; padding-bottom: 10px; text-indent: 0px; line-height: 1.0; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;tats-Unis. Pr&amp;amp;eacute;sident (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;glise catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Church of England. Dioc&amp;amp;egrave;se de Londres. &amp;amp;Eacute;v&amp;amp;ecirc;que (1675-1713 : Compton)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F11 Syst.C3.A8me de vedettes-mati.C3.A8re .2F Th.C3.A9saurus|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Utilisation de la vedette – vedette-matière secondaire ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Généralités&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de famille&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Appropriée) dans la zone 008/15 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) dans la zone 008/15, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/11 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Contexte'' : Pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, les catalogueurs descriptifs peuvent être amenés à établir un point d'accès autorisé pour le nom de la collectivité pour la fonction ainsi qu'un nom personnel pour le titulaire de la fonction. La politique d'indexation est d'attribuer seulement le nom personnel, et non le nom de la collectivité, comme point d'accès matière. Cette politique a été établie à des fins de colocalisation (voir [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). Par exemple, le point d'accès :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
peut être utilisé dans le catalogage descriptif comme point d'accès, mais en indexation seul le nom personnel serait utilisé comme point d'accès matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) aux notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F15 Utilisation de la vedette - vedette-mati.C3.A8re secondaire|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Nom de personne non différencié ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser le code 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (non différencié) dans une notice d'autorité de nom RDA. Attribuer la valeur 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes. Utiliser le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les familles, les collectivités et les lieux. Pour les œuvres et les expressions, attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» si le point d'accès commence par un nom de personne, sinon attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par le passé, la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 permettait de coder les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes comme non différenciées lorsque le catalogueur n'avait aucun moyen acceptable de différencier plusieurs personnes portant le même nom privilégié. Depuis sa création, le PFAN a suivi ces directives pour les notices d’autorité de noms de personnes :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas créer de nouvelles notices non différenciées codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Toutes les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes codéees RDA doivent être différenciées.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas ajouter une nouvelle identité à une notice d'autorité de nom de personne existante codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&lt;br /&gt;
* Appliquer plutôt [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] pour créer un point d'accès autorisé unique pour la personne, en utilisant des éléments additionnels appropriés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mise à jour des notices indifférenciées existantes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' Pour une entité donnée, si la seule notice trouvée est une notice indifférenciée (dont la zone 008/32 est codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;») versée par une université et comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;», ne pas l'utiliser.  Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité pour l'entité.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler à BAC la notice indifférenciée en communiquant son numéro de contrôle OCLC par courriel à l'adresse pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca et en mentionnant comme objet : Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice indifférenciée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante, en particulier une notice qui a été importée du LC/NAF, comprenne des paires de zones 670 utilisées pour regrouper l'information sur chaque personne visée par la notice d'autorité de nom. La première zone 670 de chaque paire est une zone 670 d'identification qui comprend un terme décrivant la relation de la personne avec le titre cité dans la deuxième zone 670 de la paire. Les données de la zone 670 d'identification sont enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a et sont mises entre crochets. La deuxième zone 670 de la paire est une zone 670 de citation qui comprend les éléments de données normaux dans la citation d'une ressource cataloguée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Auteur de Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Point d'accès supplémentaire pour Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Éditeur intellectuel de Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut aussi arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante comprenne une note 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée et identifiant la ou les ressources associées aux autres personnes portant le même nom. Dans ce cas, la notice ne comprend généralement pas de zones 670 pour les personnes autres que la première qui a été identifiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque de l'information pour distinguer une personne dans une notice d'autorité existante indifférenciée provenant de BAC ou de BAnQ est trouvée :&lt;br /&gt;
* Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour cette personne avec des informations distinctives et ajouter une indication que la personne était auparavant sur une notice indifférenciée (voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées|Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées]]&amp;amp;nbsp;», ci-dessous). Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour zone 670 de citation se rapportant à cette personne depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire. Ne pas transférer la zone 670 d'identification vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
* Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* Si la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée n'est pas supprimée parce que plusieurs identités restent, supprimer les zones 670 qui se rapportent à la personne maintenant représentée sur la nouvelle notice d'autorité (c’est-à-dire, dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, supprimer à la fois la zone 670 d’identification et la zone 670 de citation) et, le cas échéant, éditer ou supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée pour supprimer la mention de cette personne.&lt;br /&gt;
* S'il reste plus d'une identité dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée et qu'il n'y a pas suffisamment d'information pour créer de nouvelles notices d'autorité de nom pour chaque nom, laisser la notice d'autorité de nom codée RCAA2.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d’autorité de nom indifférenciée de BAnQ n’est pas supprimée, doit être modifiée ultérieurement et qu’elle ne comporte pas de numéro Canadiana, lui en attribuer un.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de faciliter le traitement automatisé des notices d'autorité (par exemple, appariement, liaison), lorsqu'il ne reste qu'une seule identité dans une notice d'autorité de nom de personne indifférenciée (c'est-à-dire lorsque les autres identités sont désambiguïsées et enlevées), procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'unique identité restante. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette identité, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;». Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Dans la nouvelle notice :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le cas échéant, transférer la citation 670 se rapportant à l'unique identité restante depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;S'assurer que la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée contient seulement de l'information se rapportant à l'unique identité restante (par exemple, les zones 670). Le cas échéant, supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, ajouter la notice 667 suivante pour garantir qu'une notice d'autorité de nom ne sera pas créée en double :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAC''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana] $z [Numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée dérivée du LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'autrice d'Esperanza :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAnQ''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a [aucun numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour Christian Bergeron (Sociologue) :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1056D8391F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian $c (Sociologue)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : 1063E5020F.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'individualisation des épreuves de la vie dans la modernité avancée, 2013 : $b page de titre (Christian Bergeron; Doctorat en sociologie; Université Laval)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 $b (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. Il reste deux identités non différenciées dans la notice :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1063E5020F [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de : Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter une note 667 à une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour identifier le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité dans laquelle l'information sur cette personne a déjà été enregistrée :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices codées comme indifférenciées qui ne représentent en fait qu'une seule identité ====&lt;br /&gt;
À l'occasion, il arrive qu'une notice soit codée comme étant indifférenciée, mais que de nouvelles recherches indiquent qu'en fait la notice ne représente qu'une seule identité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut également arriver qu’on soupçonne que la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été codée par erreur dans la zone 008/32. Dans ces situations, procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter une zone 667 à la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée indiquant qu'elle a été signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'identité. Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette personne, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple d'une notice indifférenciée versée qui ne représente qu'une seule identité''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [aucun numéro Canadiana, utiliser le numéro OCLC de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==008/33 Niveau de l'établissement==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''provisoires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Coder une notice d'autorité de nom comme provisoire (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») si le point d'accès autorisé ne peut être formulé de manière satisfaisante en raison d'informations insuffisantes. Si les informations nécessaires deviennent disponibles ultérieurement, réévaluer la notice d'autorité de nom et la mettre à jour pour qu'elle soit pleinement établie (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;»). En aucun cas, il ne faut créer une notice d'autorité de niveau provisoire avec un point d'accès qui entre en conflit avec une notice d'autorité de nom existante selon les règles de normalisation du PFAN.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Régions administratives spéciales de Hong Kong et de Macao'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Étant donné qu'il n'est pas certain que Hong Kong et Macao continueront à avoir deux langues officielles, coder toutes les notice d'autorité de nom pour les organismes gouvernementaux dans ces deux endroits, au niveau de la région administrative spéciale et en dessous, comme provisoires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;»), quelle que soit la langue dans laquelle le point d'accès autorisé a été établi. Si une forme dans la deuxième langue officielle devient disponible, ajouter cette forme comme variante de point d'accès plutôt que de réviser le point d'accès autorisé existant. Consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] et l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html énoncé de politique connexe] pour obtenir des instructions sur le choix de la langue du nom privilégié. Noter que cette politique concernant le statut provisoire ne s'applique pas aux organismes non gouvernementaux.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Informations supplémentaires pour les participants au PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN peuvent créer des notices provisoires dans les deux situations exceptionnelles suivantes :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'a pas l'expertise linguistique nécessaire pour établir le point d'accès autorisé comme une notice d'autorité pleinement établie; cela comprend les situations où la bibliothèque ne dispose pas de sources de référence adéquates pour la recherche ou lorsque le catalogueur n'est pas sûr de la forme grammaticale correcte du point d'accès.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'est pas en mesure, en raison de ressources limitées ou d'autres contraintes, de compléter le travail pour les autorités en relation ou de déterminer la structure de renvois appropriée qui est requise pour les notices d'autorité pleinement établies.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''préliminaires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité préliminaires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») sont généralement le résultat de projets rétrospectifs. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs du PFAN procèdent régulièrement à des mises à jour des notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils apportent d'autres modifications à la notice d'autorité. À cause de cette exigence de mise à jour, les participants au PFAN sont priés de communiquer avec le Comité des normes avant d'entreprendre des projets qui pourraient entraîner l'ajout massif de notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» au fichier d'autorité Canadiana.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Au besoin, les catalogueurs peuvent mettre à jour les notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils travaillent avec des notices de collectivités antérieures/postérieures, bien que le ou les points d'accès dans les notices mises à jour ne soient pas utilisés dans la base de données bibliographiques locale. À l'occasion, les catalogueurs peuvent avoir besoin de créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom sans avoir de ressource en main, par exemple pour un nom de collectivité antérieur ou postérieur, en utilisant des renseignements provenant de sources de référence, ou pour un point d'accès basé sur des renseignements trouvés dans la sous-zone «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» de la zone 245 de notices bibliographiques, lorsqu'ils résolvent des conflits entre notices d'autorité de noms. Ne pas coder ces notices d'autorité de noms occasionnelles comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaires&amp;amp;nbsp;» .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, les éléments de données des collections doivent être vérifiés sur la publication et les notices d'autorité de collections doivent être codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (complet). Dans le travail d'autorité post-catalogage, il est permis de créer des notices d'autorité de collections sans la ressource en main; ces notices sont codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» (préliminaire). Lorsqu'une publication appartenant à la collection a été examinée et que la notice d'autorité préliminaire a été revue et mise à jour au besoin, mettre la notice d'autorité de collection au niveau complet.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F33_Niveau_de_l.27.C3.A9tablissement |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Source du catalogage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quelle que soit la valeur codée à l'origine dans cette zone, ne pas changer cette valeur lors de la mise à jour d'une notice, sauf si la valeur d'origine est incorrecte. La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;blanc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F39_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 Numéro de contrôle de la notice d'autorité de BAC = &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 016 est obligatoire lorsque le catalogueur crée, met à jour ou utilise une autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité et lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante sans numéro Canadiana, vérifier dans le LC/NAF si la même entité est représentée par une autorité et si celle-ci comporte un numéro Canadiana. Noter que le point d'accès autorisé dans le LC/NAF pourrait avoir une forme différente de celui dans Canadiana. Si la notice dans le LC/NAF comporte un numéro Canadiana, ajouter ce numéro dans la notice Canadiana. Si le numéro se termine par le code de langue E, le changer pour le code F. S'il n'y a pas de code de langue, ajouter le code F à la fin du numéro.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante avec numéro Canadiana, vérifier que le code de langue F est présent à la fin de la zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Doublons'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» un numéro Canadiana. Une fois qu'une notice d'autorité pour une entité donnée a été créée et qu'un numéro Canadiana lui a été attribué, ne pas changer les données dans cette notice pour représenter une entité DIFFÉRENTE. Par exemple, ne pas changer une notice d'autorité pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Dupont, Jean&amp;amp;nbsp;» en une pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Tremblay, Marie&amp;amp;nbsp;» (sauf si le nom de la personne a changé).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, demander à faire supprimer la notice (voir [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dures_sur_les_doublons|Procédures sur les doublons]]). NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il y a une zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, enregistrer le numéro Canadiana qui s'y trouve dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il n'y a pas de zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, en ajouter une en utilisant le numéro 0000X0000F. Ne pas enregistrer ce numéro dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée. Dans ce Guide, voir aussi «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Doublons|Doublons]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, supprimer la notice. NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer le numéro Canadiana de la notice supprimée dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice conservée.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Notices versées en lot partiellement modifiées'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité versées en lot qui sont modifiées partiellement selon la [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]] comportent le numéro Canadiana 1111X1111F. Ce numéro temporaire est ajouté pour permettre l'enregistrement de la notice en attendant que celle-ci soit évaluée pour s'assurer qu'elle répond aux normes du PFAN. Ce numéro doit être remplacé par un numéro unique lorsque la notice est évaluée et que la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;» est supprimée.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 Numéro international normalisé des publications en série =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'ISSN chaque fois qu'il est fourni dans le document en main, dans les notices bibliographiques analytiques ou dans la notice bibliographique pour la collection cataloguée dans son ensemble; sinon, enregistrer l'ISSN est facultatif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on sait que des ISSN distincts ont été attribués à différents formats d'une collection représentée par une seule notice d'autorité, il est préférable d'enregistrer dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 022 l'ISSN qui est l'ISSN de liaison (ISSN-L) pour ces différents formats. Enregistrer les ISSN pour les formats spécifiques dans des zones 667 distinctes, en suivant ce modèle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre d'une publication a changé, il est important de s'assurer que l'ISSN figurant sur la publication appartient au nouveau titre et non au titre précédent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un ISSN incorrect peut être indiqué dans une zone 667 (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;L'ISSN 1122-3344 n'est pas un ISSN valide pour cette publication&amp;amp;nbsp;»).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Autre numéro ou code normalisé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les lignes directrices des [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf ''NACO 024 Best Practices Guidelines'']. En règle générale, limiter à cinq le nombre de zones 024 dans une notice d'autorité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 024 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les identifiants codés dans la zone 024 des notices d'autorité du PFAN. Lorsqu'une zone 024 est présente dans une notice &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;d'autorité&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; qui fait l'objet d'une suppression (par exemple, dans le cas d'un doublon), les catalogueurs doivent transférer le contenu de la zone dans la notice qui doit être conservée. Lorsque deux notices d'autorité sont regroupées en une seule et que chacune des notices comporte une zone 024 différente, les catalogueurs doivent inclure les deux zones 024 dans la notice conservée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Données mathématiques codées sur les documents cartographiques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des pays, provinces, États, comtés'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les coordonnées des limites extérieures (rectangles de délimitation ou polygones) doivent généralement être utilisées avec des entités géographiques telles que des pays, des provinces, des États et des comtés pour identifier les coordonnées de l'entité. Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées en degrés/minutes/secondes, en degrés décimaux, en minutes décimales et/ou en secondes décimales. Les styles ne doivent pas être mélangés dans une même zone 034, mais la zone peut être répétée pour représenter les différents styles (voir ci-dessous pour les utilitaires de conversion); l'ordre des zones 034 lorsque les deux styles sont donnés n'a pas d'importance. Pour faciliter la réutilisation des coordonnées dans les applications géographiques, il faut employer le point et non la virgule comme signe décimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés/minutes/secondes''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux''' : enregistrement sous la forme hddd.dddddd (hémisphère-degrés.degrés décimaux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux avec plus et moins''' : enregistrer sous la forme +-ddd.dddddd (hémisphère[+/-]-degrés.décimaux) («&amp;amp;nbsp;+&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour N et E, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour S et W; le signe plus est facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple avec +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple sans le signe plus facultatif)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Minutes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmm.mmmm (hémisphère-degrés-minutes.minutes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Secondes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss.sss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes.secondes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons doivent généralement être enregistrées comme des points centraux plutôt que comme des limites extérieures. Pour la zone 034, la longitude et la latitude qui forment l'axe central sont enregistrées deux fois pour définir le point central (c'est-à-dire que les contenus des sous-zones $d et $e sont identiques et les contenus des sous-zones $f et $g sont identiques).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés/minutes/secondes)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux avec plus/moins)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Outils de conversion des coordonnées'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les institutions membres du PFAN sont encouragées à fournir des degrés/minutes/secondes et des degrés décimaux lorsqu'ils sont disponibles. De nombreux outils de conversion sont disponibles sur le Web pour dériver les uns des autres. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $2 a été définie pour l'enregistrement de la source des codes d'information sur les coordonnées - les sources couramment utilisées sont disponibles dans : [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CDC.html/view ''Codes sources pour les données cartographiques'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une citation de la source dans la zone 670 n'est pas nécessaire si la seule information provenant de la source est enregistrée dans la zone 034; une citation dans la zone 670 doit être faite si nécessaire pour enregistrer des informations en plus des coordonnées, telles que les variantes de nom, la hiérarchie, la période d'applicabilité, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#034_Donn.C3.A9es_math.C3.A9matiques_cod.C3.A9es_sur_les_documents_cartographiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 Numéro de contrôle de système =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#035_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_syst.C3.A8me |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Source du catalogage =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs doivent consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour les instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité nouvelles ou existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Langue de catalogage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $b fre ajoutée automatiquement par WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $d – Organisme responsable des modifications'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $d [code MARC 21] est ajoutée automatiquement par WMS lorsque la dernière sous-zone MARC $d dans la zone 040 n'est pas déjà celle de l'institution qui a modifié la notice. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $e – Règles de description'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on ajoute manuellement la sous-zone $e, ajouter la sous-zone après la sous-zone $b et avant la sous-zone $c. Il n'est pas nécessaire de déplacer la sous-zone $e à cette position si elle est déjà présente ailleurs dans le 040 ou si elle est ajoutée par une macro ou un gabarit. Lorsque la zone fixe 008/10 (Règles de catalogage descriptif) est changée pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Autre), la sous-zone $e rda est automatiquement ajoutée par le système.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#040_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Code d'authenticité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Cette zone se retrouve dans les notices d'autorité utilisées par BAC. Ne pas modifier ou supprimer cette zone lorsque le code CaOONL figure dans la 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les catalogueurs autres que ceux de BAC dérivent une notice à partir d'une notice de BAC contenant une zone 042, ils doivent s'assurer de supprimer cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les catalogueurs doivent ajouter la zone 042 $a nlc dans Canadiana chaque fois qu'ils créent, révisent ou dérivent une notice d'autorité. Ce code identifie le fichier «&amp;amp;nbsp;virtuel&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'autorité nationale canadienne qui est divisé en deux bases de données (LC/NAF et Canadiana).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-08]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#042_Code_d.27authenticit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Code de région géographique &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 043 peut seulement être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms géographiques (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone b – Code local de région géographique et Sous-zone $2 – Source du code local'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les lieux situés au Québec, les participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser la sous-zone $b pour enregistrer un code local tiré de la liste ci-dessous et représentant la région administrative du Québec où le lieu est situé. Ce code est formé du code de région géographique « n-cn--- » et d'un code local de sous-entité de deux lettres (p. ex., qa) qui identifie la région administrative et remplace les deux derniers caractères du code « n-cn--- » (p. ex. « n-cn-qa »). La sous-zone $b est enregistrée à la suite de la sous-zone $a et est suivie par la sous-zone $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Dates spéciales codées =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Lors de l'encodage de l'information sur la date, donner l'information la plus complète possible sur la date lorsque celle-ci est facilement disponible (la date dans la zone 046 peut être plus précise qu'une date utilisée dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2e_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Lors&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la révision des notices d'autorité existantes, enregistrer les dates dans la zone 046 même si le point d'accès lui-même n'a pas de dates dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d, lorsque l'information est facilement disponible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des dates dans la zone 046, utiliser la norme Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) dans tous les cas, sauf pour les siècles; fournir les dates en utilisant le modèle aaaa, aaaa-mm ou aaaa-mm-jj. Voir le tableau d'exemples dans l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Pour les spécifications complètes de l'EDTF, voir [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophoniste)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Blues around the clock, 1945 : $b étiquette (Johnny Hicks, saxophone ténor)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web Discogs, consulté le 27 mai 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; saxophoniste ténor qui a joué avec Tab Smith dans les années 1940)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de dates avant Jésus-Christ dans la zone 046, faire précéder les chiffres d'un trait d'union (signe moins). Comme il n'y a pas d'an zéro dans le calendrier de l'ère commune, il faut soustraire une année de la date réelle avant Jésus-Christ; par exemple, l'an 50 av. J.-C. est enregistré comme suit : -0049.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ##  $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement d'un siècle dans la zone 046, utiliser les deux premiers chiffres de l'intervalle de cent ans (par exemple, utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;16&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour représenter le 17&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle, 1600-1699).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Noter que le 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;er&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle apr. J.-C. est représenté par la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;00&amp;amp;nbsp;» et que les siècles av. J.-C. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sont précédés d'&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;un trait d'union &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(signe moins)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; avant les chiffres (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-04&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le 5&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle av. J.-C.). Un siècle approximatif (par exemple, activité environ 12&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle) ne peut pas être enregistré dans la zone 046.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Répétabilité'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;La zone 046 est répétable, mais les sous-zones de la zone 046 utilisées pour enregistrer les dates ne le sont pas. En général, une seule zone 046 avec des dates conformes à la norme EDTF devrait être suffisante. Cependant, les dates de siècles suivent la norme ISO 8601 et non la norme EDTF. Lors de l'enregistrement de dates de siècles en plus de dates plus précises, il faut donc répéter la zone 046.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates divergentes'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, les ressources consultées peuvent présenter des dates divergentes (par exemple, des dates de naissance ou de décès divergentes pour une personne ou des dates de début ou de fin divergentes pour une collectivité). Dans ces situations, la zone 046 doit refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'enregistrer toutes les dates divergentes en utilisant la zone 046, ni d'enregistrer une zone 046 pour chaque ressource consultée. L'évaluation des dates divergentes doit généralement avoir pour résultat une seule zone 046, contenant la ou les dates que le catalogueur juge les plus exactes pour représenter l'entité. Le catalogueur peut décider d'enregistrer ou non la ou les dates divergentes dans la zone 046 et il n'est pas nécessaire que la ou les dates enregistrées dans la zone 046 correspondent exactement à celle ou celles choisies pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;De même, toute date ajoutée au point d'accès autorisé devrait refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates, enregistrées conformément aux instructions de RDA et des énoncés de politique du PFAN. On peut considérer qu'une date qui prédomine dans les ressources consultées est la plus appropriée pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé. Si aucune date ne prédomine, le catalogueur peut décider d'utiliser le format «&amp;amp;nbsp;approximativement aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa?&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa ou aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans le point d'accès autorisé. Dans certains cas, des dates correspondant à la période d'activité de la personne (RDA 9.19.1.5) peuvent être préférables.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 157 av. J-C. comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce que c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 1907 comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Même exemple que ci-dessus illustrant une décision différente que le catalogueur aurait pu prendre concernant l'enregistrement de la sous-zone $f de la zone 046)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;La zone 046 étant basée sur des informations provenant de sources multiples, la justification ne peut être formulée avec précision dans une sous-zone $v/$u à la fin d'une zone 046. Les dates divergentes doivent être enregistrées dans des zones 670. Si une notice existante comporte une sous-zone $v/$u comme justification d'une zone 046 et que cette zone 046 est mise à jour comme décrit ci-dessus, il faut supprimer la sous-zone $v/$u et convertir la justification en une zone 670 si les dates divergentes ne sont pas déjà justifiées dans des zones 670 existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, il peut être nécessaire d'effectuer un calcul pour déterminer les dates à enregistrer dans la zone 046 et le point d'accès autorisé. De tels calculs peuvent produire des dates incertaines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Si les ressources consultées ne fournissent que la date de décès de la personne et son âge (en années) au moment du décès, comme cela se voit souvent dans les notices nécrologiques, l'année de naissance de la personne correspondra à l'une de deux années consécutives. Pour calculer ces années, il faut d'abord soustraire l'âge de l'année de décès, puis utiliser l'année ainsi obtenue et l'année précédente comme les deux possibilités pour l'année de naissance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a soustrait 75, l'âge au décès, de 1994, l'année du décès; l'année obtenue, 1919, et l'année qui la précède, 1918, représentent les deux années de naissance possibles)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si des dates non-grégoriennes figurent dans les ressources consultées, la conversion de ces dates en dates grégoriennes peut produire des dates incertaines. Il faut utiliser les dates du calendrier grégorien dans la zone 046 et dans le point d'accès autorisé. Il se peut qu'une même date dans un calendrier non-grégorien corresponde à l'une de deux dates grégoriennes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La date de 1346 dans le calendrier hégirien correspond à 1967 ou 1968 dans le calendrier grégorien.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de la norme de la date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter la sous-zone $2 edtf, sauf après un siècle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zones $q – Date de fondation, $r – Date de cessation,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Début de la période d'activité et $t – Fin de la période d'activité'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer les dates associées à un congrès, etc., ponctuel ou à une occurrence isolée dans une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] et [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), dans les sous-zones $s et $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer la date de fondation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) et la date de cessation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) d'une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]), si cette information est connue, dans les sous-zones $q et $r.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'utilisation des sous-zones $s et $t pour le début et la fin de la période d'activité dans les zones 368 et 370-376, voir les directives présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les instructions suivantes représentent la pratique du PFAN sur l'enregistrement des sources d'information dans les sous-zones $u et $v des zones où elles sont définies, et/ou dans la zone 670 :&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046$u$v&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Les zones 670 doivent être utilisées pour appuyer l'information utilisée comme une partie du point d'accès dans les zones 1XX et 4XX.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pour les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $v est facultatif si la même information/source est déjà citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;utiliser la sous-zone $v si l'information/source n'est pas citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $u est facultatif et celle-ci doit toujours être précédée de la sous-zone $v.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser une zone 670 si c'est nécessaire pour justifier l'information enregistrée dans d'autres zones pour lesquelles les sous-zones $u et $v ne sont pas définies ou sont définies différemment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des données dans la sous-zone $v (Source d'information) des zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381, suivre les mêmes principes de base pour la citation que ceux qui s'appliquent actuellement pour la zone 670, sous-zone $a (Citation de la source).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Fournir une information précise sur la citation (numéro de page, sous-page d'un site Web) dans la sous-zone $v si, selon le jugement du catalogueur, cette plus grande précision est nécessaire pour trouver l'information à l'intérieur de la source citée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information dans les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 est sous la même forme que celle trouvée dans la source, il n'est pas nécessaire de la citer. Si l'information enregistrée dans ces zones est sous une forme différente de celle dans la source, utiliser 670 $b (Information trouvée).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les sources matérielles :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information provient d'une source matérielle (par exemple, un livre imprimé, un support numérique amovible), la sous-zone $v doit contenir suffisamment d'information pour qu'un catalogueur puisse trouver la ressource citée dans un catalogue ou une base de données bibliographiques. Ceci peut généralement se limiter au titre propre et au nom de l'éditeur ou à la date. Si cette combinaison n'est pas unique, la citation du titre peut être précédée du nom du créateur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les ressources en ligne :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fournir suffisamment d'information pour permettre de trouver la ressource via un moteur de recherche. Inclure soit le titre et la date de publication (si c'est une ressource publiée formellement, tel un livre numérique), soit une description appropriée du document et la date d'accès (pour une ressource moins formelle). Facultativement, inclure la sous-zone $u.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-03]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Cote de la Library of Congress =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#050_Cote_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 Indice de la classification de la Library of Congress &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes pour enregistrer les indices de la classification LC des auteurs littéraires individuels, y compris les auteurs de littérature de jeunesse. Elle peut aussi être utilisée '''exceptionnellement''' dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes et de collectivités pour enregistrer les indices de biographie dans la fourchette ML410-429 de la classification LC lorsque le choix de l'indice ou du Cutter n'est pas évident. La zone 053 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il ne faut pas enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000 dans la zone 053. Pour l'utilisation des indices de la classe PS8000 dans les notices d'autorité de noms, voir la section [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]] de ce Guide. Une notice d'autorité pour un auteur littéraire canadien peut contenir à la fois une zone 053 et une zone 065.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Cote de Bibliothèque et Archives Canada =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#055_Cote_de_Biblioth.C3.A8que_et_Archives_Canada |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Autre indice de classification &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 065 sert à enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000. La zone 065 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $2 et une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [Code MARC de l’institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de l'indice'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour indiquer que l'indice provient de la classe PS8000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#065_Autre_indice_de_classification |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Cote de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#082_Cote_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Indice de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#083_Indice_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Cote de publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#086_Cote_de_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Indice de classification d'une publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#087_Indice_de_classification_d.27une_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Vedette – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participant au programme PFAN sont invités à consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour obtenir des instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité existantes ou nouvelles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer la ponctuation de fin de zone dans la zone 1XX à moins qu'elle ne fasse partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou qu'elle ne soit requise par les instructions de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Afin de minimiser l'impact de la maintenance de la base de données sur les notices bibliographiques associées et/ou les notices d'autorité associées, les catalogueurs sont priés de s'abstenir d'apporter des changements qui ne sont pas essentiels aux zones 1XX.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour le titre propre d'une monographie en plusieurs parties, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choix du titre propre d'une collection pour une monographie :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte plus d'une forme de mention de collection, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource porte une mention de collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture dans la même source, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte des pages de titre pour la collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2915.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Tenir compte de l'espacement et des changements dans la typographie au moment de déterminer où le titre de la collection commence et se termine. Consulter également [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Établissement d'un point d'accès pour une collection :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Déterminer le choix du point d'accès autorisé en fonction de l'instruction [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] et des énoncés de politique de BAC/BAnQ pour cette instruction.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclure du point d'accès autorisé les renseignements suivants inclus dans la mention de collection dans la notice bibliographique de la partie composante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'article initial dans les sous-zones $a, $t, $n et $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les compléments de titre;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;la mention de responsabilité;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les titres parallèles;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;les désignations numériques/chronologiques.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter un ou plusieurs qualificatifs entre parenthèses, le cas échéant, conformément aux énoncés de politique de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour obtenir des instructions sur la conversion d'une notice d'autorité de nom en notice d'autorité de collection, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Should an SAR be made?&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Vedette – Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour les familles'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;3&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une famille. Voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Les ajouts au nom sont contenus dans une seule paire de parenthèses séparées par des deux-points. &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Le terme pour le type de famille est ajouté après le nom et il est enregistré dans la sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $d (date) suit le terme pour le type de famille.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $c est utilisée pour un lieu associé à une famille et suit la date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $g est utilisée pour un membre illustre d'une famille. Donner le point d'accès autorisé pour la personne tel que trouvé dans la 1XX de la notice d'autorité de nom sans garder aucun codage de sous-zone interne.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour des personnes'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] fournit des directives sur l'emplacement des mots indiquant une relation (par exemple, Jr.) et le MARC définit la sous-zone $q comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme développée du nom de personne.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) La sous-zone $d (date) doit toujours être le dernier élément dans une zone 100 sauf si le terme (Esprit) est ajouté au nom. Ajouter $c (Esprit) comme dernier élément d'une zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) En général ajouter la sous-zone $c avant la sous-zone $q lorsqu'on ajoute aussi des mots, des chiffres, etc., indiquant une relation. (Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5.] pour le traitement des noms portugais)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MAIS&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
3) Pour les situations exceptionnelles, par exemple lorsque la sous-zone $a ne contient qu'un nom de famille ou qu'un prénom ou que le nom inclut un préfixe, etc., consulter le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#100_Vedette_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Contenu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 336 peut seulement être utilisée pour les notices d'autorité représentant des expressions. La zone 336 est toujours suivie d'une sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;rdacontent/fre&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser les termes fournis dans [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html RDA 6.9.1.3]. La liste des termes est également disponible dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Code du type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si on enregistre une sous-zone $b à la place ou en plus d'une sous-zone $a, utiliser les codes fournis dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''] du MARC 21.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#336_Contenu |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Autres attributs associés à des personnes ou des collectivités =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé pour les termes dans les sous-zones $a, $b et $c. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a, $b et $c. Lorsque les termes dans les sous-zones $a et $b ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer de professions ou d'occupations dans la sous-zone $c (Autre désignation). La profession ou l'occupation peut être enregistrée dans la zone 374.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les titres de royauté, de noblesse ou de rang ecclésiastique ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) dans la sous-zone $d dans la forme utilisée dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'une période et Sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#368_Autres_attributs_associ.C3.A9s_.C3.A0_des_personnes_ou_des_collectivit.C3.A9s |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Lieu associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de juridictions ou d'autres lieux, utiliser la forme trouvée dans Canadiana ou, à défaut, celle trouvée dans le RVM, en enregistrant la source dans la sous-zone $2. La forme du nom de lieu utilisée dans la zone 370 peut différer de la forme du nom de lieu ajoutée à un nom privilégié de lieu ou à un point d'accès construit selon les instructions de RDA ou des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie du nom d'une localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut une autre désignation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de lieu)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié du lieu plus vaste)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom de lieu ajouté à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Autre nom de lieu dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité pour le lieu n'existe pas dans Canadiana ni dans le RVM, il n'est pas nécessaire d'en créer une pour enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370. Enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370 selon les instructions de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ, en consultant les sources appropriées et en ajoutant des éléments additionnels (par exemple, le type de juridiction) afin d'éviter les conflits. Ne pas ajouter de sous-zone $2 si aucune notice d'autorité n'a été créée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom du lieu associé a changé, le nom du lieu qui s'appliquait à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré à la place ou en plus de la forme actuelle du nom. Il n'est pas nécessaire de suivre les politiques d'indexation et d'utiliser uniquement la forme la plus récente du nom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemples :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne née dans la ville de Salisbury avant que son nom ne devienne Harare; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme de nom qui s'appliquait au moment de la naissance de la personne)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne résidant dans la ville de Milan pendant la Renaissance, avant la formation du pays moderne de l'Italie; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme actuelle du nom pour le pays)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de lieux qui ne sont pas des juridictions, préférer les noms provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM et identifier la source dans la sous-zone $2. Si le nom ne provient pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, l'enregistrer dans la zone 370 sans ajouter de sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zone $c – Pays associé&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;En général, ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $c pour enregistrer les lieux qui ne sont pas des entités souveraines. Ces lieux peuvent être enregistrés dans la sous-zone $f ou dans d'autres sous-zones selon le cas.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La Martinique est un département français d'outre-mer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, si une entité souveraine comporte (ou comportait auparavant) un ou plusieurs pays constitutifs, n'importe lequel des pays constitutifs associés à la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré dans la sous-zone $c en plus ou à la place de l'entité souveraine plus vaste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à la Grande-Bretagne qui a des liens étroits avec le Pays de Galles; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Union soviétique, en particulier au Kirghizistan; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à Aruba, un pays constitutif des Pays-Bas; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer les Pays-Bas)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Inde avant son indépendance de la Grande-Bretagne; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer la Grande-Bretagne)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms d'entités des Premières Nations au Canada ainsi que les tribus indiennes («&amp;amp;nbsp;Indian tribes&amp;amp;nbsp;») reconnues par le gouvernement des États-Unis comme des entités juridiques peuvent être incluses dans la sous-zone $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Enregistrer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre dans la zone 370, sauf s'il s'agit simplement d'un lieu de publication ou d'un autre lieu associé à une manifestation (auquel cas utiliser la zone 643, le cas échéant). Bien que le «&amp;amp;nbsp;lieu d'origine&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'une œuvre en série puisse être le même que le lieu de publication de l'œuvre pour laquelle la notice d'autorité de collection (ou la notice bibliographique de publication en série) a été créée, faire preuve de jugement pour distinguer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre d'un lieu de publication qui n'est pas réellement lié à l'œuvre elle-même.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Adresse =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Selon le jugement du catalogueur, fournir une adresse si les informations sont facilement disponibles et n'ont pas déjà été enregistrées dans la sous-zone $e (Lieu de résidence, de sièges sociaux) de la zone 370.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Dans les cas où la sous-zone $a n'est pas enregistrée, inclure au minimum la sous-zone $m (Adresse de courriel) ou la sous-zone $b (Ville). &lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas enregistrer les adresses physiques &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou courriels&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; des personnes vivantes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les informations reliées à l'adresse lors de la mise à jour d'une notice contenant une adresse.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer plusieurs adresses, avec ou sans plages de dates, dans des zones 371 distinctes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Adresse de courriel'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $m doit contenir uniquement une adresse de courriel. Ne pas ajouter d'adresse Internet pour la 1XX dans cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#371_Adresse |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Domaine d'activité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée pour le domaine d'activité, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une entité provenant de Canadiana est utilisée comme domaine d'activité, enlever tout codage de sous-zone qui n'est pas autorisé dans la zone 372.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Domaine d'activité dans la 372 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel que la plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Zones 372 avec un terme provenant du RVM et un terme de vocabulaire non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'un période et la sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Groupe associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le fichier d'autorité Canadiana ou le fichier LC/NAF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Dans la zone 373, le codage de sous-zone n'est pas employé pour les collectivités subordonnées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom d'un groupe associé a changé, enregistrer le ou les noms du groupe qui s'appliquaient à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates). Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec des sous-zones $2 et des dates :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec différentes sources de vocabulaires :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $ s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $ t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : même si le format MARC ne spécifie pas de forme de date dans ces sous-zones, la pratique suivante est recommandée par souci de cohérence. Enregistrer les dates selon le calendrier grégorien dans le format AAAA. Si une date plus précise est nécessaire, considérer la possibilité de l'enregistrer dans une autre zone (par exemple, 670, 678). Il n'est pas nécessaire de reformuler les dates déjà inscrites dans les notices d'autorité pour se conformer à cette pratique. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Profession =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;6.1.3 pour des instructions sur l'enregistrement de la profession ou de l'occupation comme élément. Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.19.1.6 pour des instructions sur l'utilisation d'un terme indiquant la profession ou l'occupation dans un point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : répéter la zone si nécessaire pour plus de clarté.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du terme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les codes enregistrés dans la sous-zone $2 de la zone 374 peuvent provenir soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-TIO.html/view ''Codes sources pour les termes de profession''], soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-VM-C.html/view ''Codes sources pour les vedettes-matière et termes d'indexation''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#374_Profession |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Sexe de la personne =&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Ne pas utiliser cette zone dans les nouvelles notices d'autorité. Lorsqu'une notice existante doit être modifiée pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer toute occurrence de la zone 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Renseignements sur la famille =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Personnalité importante de la famille'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement du nom d'un membre illustre d'une famille dans la sous-zone $b, utiliser la forme du nom de la personne telle que mentionnée dans la sous-zone $g de la zone 100 dans la notice d'autorité pour la famille. Les codages internes de sous-zones ne doivent pas être inclus dans la sous-zone $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Langue associée =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier les codes de langues plutôt que des termes, en utilisant la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21. La sous-zone $l (Nom de la langue) doit être utilisée uniquement pour fournir des informations non disponibles dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/LNG-C.html ''Liste des codes de langue''] du MARC 21. Enregistrer plusieurs codes de langue seulement si la personne ou la collectivité fait usage de plusieurs langages dans ses publications, communications, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;À titre facultatif, enregistrer un ou plusieurs codes de langue ISO 639-3 dans une zone 377 supplémentaire. Cette pratique est particulièrement recommandée lorsqu’un code ISO 639-3 permet d’identifier une langue plus précisément que le code MARC. Pour plus d’informations, voir les [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $2 n'est pas requise lorsque la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 est utilisée pour représenter la langue (le deuxième indicateur «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» mentionne déjà la source). Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent utiliser une autre source de codes de langue peuvent ajouter une zone 377 supplémentaire en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur et en mentionnant la source utilisée dans la sous-zone $2 . Cette source doit cependant provenir d'une des sources fournies dans la liste intitulée [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CTL.html ''Codes sources pour les codes et termes de langue''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Code ISO 639-3 pour la langue Achi : acr. Code pour cette même langue, laquelle fait partie des langues maya, dans la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 : myn)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Forme développée du nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer la forme développée du nom dans la zone 378 lorsque l'information est facilement disponible, même si l'information est déjà présente dans la zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#378_Forme_d.C3.A9velopp.C3.A9e_du_nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Genre de l'œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM ou le RVMGF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'enregistrement du genre de l'œuvre comme élément dans les notices d'autorité de collections représentant des œuvres (et non des expressions), voir l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.3.1.3.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#380_Genre_de_l.27.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Autres caractéristiques distinctes d'une œuvre ou d'une expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée pour enregistrer les éléments RDA Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) et Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Les autres caractéristiques distinctives des expressions qui sont spécifiques aux œuvres musicales (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4–6.18.1.6]) peuvent être aussi enregistrées dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Numéro de Franklin enregistré comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version enregistrée comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut être approprié que certains des termes enregistrés pour une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression soient enregistrés dans la zone 381 ou dans une autre zone MARC pour laquelle il n'y a pas d'élément RDA correspondant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, une collectivité (tel un éditeur) utilisée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ou d'une œuvre peut être enregistrée soit dans la zone 373 (Groupe associé), soit dans la zone 381, soit dans les deux zones. ''Note :'' Le codage de sous-zone pour les collectivités subordonnées n'est pas utilisé dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme groupe associé et comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA n'a pas d'élément particulier pour les lieux associés aux expressions, mais la zone 370 sous-zone $f (Autre lieu associé) et la sous-zone $g (Lieu d'origine de l'œuvre ou de l'expression) peuvent être utilisées dans les notices d'autorité pour les expressions. Dans certains cas, des lieux associés aux œuvres ou aux expressions sont considérés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression selon RDA et peuvent être enregistrés dans la zone 370, dans la zone 381 ou dans les deux zones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Lieux utilisés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre juridique; enregistrés dans les zones 370 et 381)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'élément RDA lieu d'origine d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.5]) dans une zone 370 (voir la section [[#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]] de ce Guide).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression a été utilisée dans un point d'accès autorisé et est aussi enregistrée comme élément dans une zone 3XX, utiliser la zone 381 pour enregistrer une autre caractéristique distinctive. À titre facultatif, enregistrer aussi la même information dans une autre zone 3XX appropriée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#381_Autres_caract.C3.A9ristiques_distinctes_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_ou_d.27une_expression |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en utilisant les termes du thésaurus ''Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM'' (RVMMEM). Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en appliquant les instructions de RDA ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6]) et les ÉP de BAC-BAnQ associés. ''Note :'' La zone 382 peut également être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité d'expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :''' Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère. Si c'est jugé important pour l'identification et l'accès, ajouter une zone 382 additionnelle qui ne répond pas aux présentes lignes directrices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-04-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#382_Distribution_d.27.C3.A9x.C3.A9cution_d.27une_.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numéro d'identification d'une œuvre &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou d'une expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; musicale =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible. Créer des zones 383 distinctes pour les différents systèmes de numérotation associés à une même œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#383_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27identification_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Tonalité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible pour les œuvres. En cas de doute, ne pas enregistrer. Ne pas enregistrer pour les expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Caractéristiques du public cible =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer le public cible d'une œuvre ou d'une expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices  du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a : Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Termes provenant de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé et terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-07-17]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Caractéristiques du créateur ou du collaborateur &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer les caractéristiques démographiques d'un ou plusieurs créateurs ou contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression, notamment pour enregistrer les caractéristiques communes à un groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression. Cette zone sera généralement utilisée dans des notices d'autorité établies pour des agrégats par regroupement matérialisant deux ou plusieurs expressions de deux ou plusieurs œuvres indépendantes créées par des agents différents, ainsi que pour les œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre (par exemple, les œuvres d'auteurs inconnus ou les collections de monographies). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Personnes âgées $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Terme démographique non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bien que cette zone soit principalement utilisée pour des œuvres agrégées et pour des œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre, il existe des situations où il est également approprié de l'utiliser pour une œuvre individuelle d'un ou plusieurs créateurs nommés. Par exemple, pour une œuvre musicale composée pendant l'enfance ou l'adolescence d'un créateur, il ne serait pas approprié d'enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;Enfants&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Adolescents&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme caractéristiques dans la notice d'autorité du compositeur. Au lieu de cela, les caractéristiques démographiques applicables uniquement à certaines des œuvres d'un créateur doivent être enregistrées dans les notices d'autorité établies pour ces œuvres.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Œuvre composée en 2003-2005, achevée lorsque le compositeur avait 14 ans)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Termes issus de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;''(Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau; terme non contrôlé et termes provenant du même vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $i – Information sur la relation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il est possible d'utiliser la sous-zone $i pour enregistrer un terme désignant la nature de la relation entre les groupes démographiques enregistrés dans la zone et l'œuvre ou l'expression. Préférer un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que les termes de relation du format MARC ou les indicateurs de relation RDA. Mettre une majuscule à la première lettre du terme de relation et utiliser la forme au singulier. Faire suivre le terme de relation par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998-February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer plusieurs occurrences de la sous-zone $i dans une même occurrence de la zone 386. Si plusieurs termes de relation s'appliquent à un seul groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs (par exemple, une œuvre réunissant des auteurs et des artistes du même groupe démographique ou une expression dont les éditeurs et les traducteurs appartiennent au même groupe démographique), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Compilation d'œuvres d'auteurs et d'artistes du Massachusetts)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différents termes de relation s'appliquent à différents créateurs et contributeurs (par exemple, si les auteurs font partie d'un groupe démographique et les artistes d'un autre), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents. Si le même terme de relation s'applique à plus d'un groupe démographique, répéter la sous-zone $a dans une même zone ou répéter la zone. Pour plus de clarté, en cas de doute, répéter la zone 386 autant que nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Partition comprenant des œuvres de Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler et Strauss, ainsi que les paroles imprimées sous forme de texte, en allemand et en traduction anglaise)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-12]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Période associée à la création =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine d'une œuvre ou d'une expression. Le nom de la période peut préciser ou sous-entendre un lieu pour lequel la période de temps est pertinente. Il peut aussi préciser le nom d'un événement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM ou le RVMFAST. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les compilations, la zone peut être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine des œuvres/expressions contenues dans la compilation, considérées collectivement (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur). Elle peut également être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine de la compilation elle-même (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;2&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour un recueil de poésie de la Renaissance compilé au XIXe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 388 peut être utilisée en conjonction avec ou à la place de la zone 046. Lorsque la ou les dates précises de création ou d'origine ne sont pas connues ou qu'elles s'étendent sur une longue période, il peut être utile d'enregistrer des termes chronologiques textuels dans la zone 388.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour une œuvre anonyme du XIVe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si la valeur de l'indicateur diffère, répéter la zone. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom avec zones 388 contenant des termes provenant de différents vocabulaires)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour une autre raison, supprimer tout signe de ponctuation à la fin d'une zone 4XX sauf s'il fait partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou est requis par les règles de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'est pas nécessaire de justifier tous les renvois 4XX; voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès|Justification des variantes de point d'accès]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 670 de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas faire un renvoi 4XX qui se normalise sous la même forme qu'une autre zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité ou une zone 1XX dans toute autre notice d'autorité de nom. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;NACO normalization&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratiques à privilégier pour le catalogage selon RDA :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Enregistrer les variantes trouvées dans la manifestation cataloguée :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Utiliser le jugement du catalogueur;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Il n'y a pas de limite quant au nombre ou à la forme des renvois;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Au lieu ou en plus d'ajouter des variantes, envisager de fournir un accès en ajoutant des zones 37X.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Exemple montrant une zone 378 sans une variante pour la forme développée du nom :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Établir des notices d'autorité de noms supplémentaires pour les points d'accès autorisés nécessaires pour soutenir les éléments utilisés dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX (par exemple, la collectivité supérieure associée à la collectivité subordonnée qui doit être établie).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, fournir une variante de point d'accès 4XX pour un ancien point d'accès autorisé 1XX, sauf si l'ancien point d'accès autorisé est manifestement incorrect. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#4XX$w|Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour plus d'information.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Utiliser la forme établie des composantes dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX, à l'exception des variantes en écriture non latine, qui peuvent présenter un mélange d'écritures ou être entièrement dans une écriture non latine.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, ne pas supprimer des variantes sauf si elles sont manifestement incorrectes (par exemple, une variante en écriture non latine qui ne représente pas la même personne).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si une forme trouvée dans la manifestation cataloguée inclut une variante de forme d'une composante d'une variante de point d'accès en 4XX, cette forme peut être utilisée dans son intégralité comme une variante de point d'accès supplémentaire en 4XX, à condition que des sous-zones ne soient pas utilisées pour diviser ses parties constitutives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on change la forme d'une collectivité hiérarchiquement supérieure, d'un nom géographique ou d'un nom de personne dans une 1XX, mettre à jour toutes les notices d'autorité existantes qui utilisent cette composante dans une zone 4XX, sauf si la 4XX représente l'ancien point d'accès autorisé (par exemple, $w/2=e). Exception : Ne pas appliquer cette instruction dans le cas des notices d'autorité migrées qui n'ont pas été réévaluées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est modifié parce que la personne a changé de nom, enregistrer l'ancienne forme du nom dans une zone 400 avec $w nne si la variante est valide selon les instructions de RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après l'élection comme pape)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est mis à jour pour fermer la date, il est recommandé d'enregistrer l'ancienne forme avec la date ouverte dans une zone 4XX avec $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) basé sur le catalogage CIP est modifié parce que sa forme sur la ressource publiée est différente de celle sur la demande CIP, une zone 4XX pour l'ancienne forme du point d'accès autorisé avec la sous-zone $w nne peut être ajoutée sauf si l'ancienne forme 1XX est manifestement incorrecte (par exemple, la date de naissance de l'auteur a été donnée comme étant 1775 au lieu de 1975 dans la demande CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) est modifié en raison d'un changement dans les instructions de catalogage, enregistrer l'ancienne forme dans une zone 4XX en utilisant $w. Si la variante de forme est un renvoi valide selon les instructions actuelles de RDA, utiliser $w nne. Si la variante de forme n'est pas un renvoi valide selon les instructions RDA actuelles, utiliser $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante n'est pas valide selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nne&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante est valide selon RDA; le changement de la forme en 100 est basé sur l'utilisation du nom et les dates de naissance et de mort ont été ajoutées parce que la 100 a été changée)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429 av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que l'abréviation «&amp;amp;nbsp;ca&amp;amp;nbsp;» n'est pas valide pour une période d'activité selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé est corrigé parce que des dates ont été enregistrées de manière inexacte ou qu'un catalogueur a introduit une faute de frappe dans le point d'accès autorisé, ne pas faire de renvoi à la forme incorrecte. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche des notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel des collections et la création et la tenue à jour des notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des variantes de point d'accès peuvent être enregistrées dans toute notice d'autorité de collection, y compris celles pour des phrases analogues à des collections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si les volumes d'une monographie en plusieurs parties portent des formes différentes du titre commun, faire un renvoi 4XX plutôt qu'un renvoi 5XX pour la forme de titre non choisie comme titre propre de la monographie en plusieurs parties.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w. Lorsqu'on utilise les indicateurs de relation RDA dans les zones 5XX, utiliser les termes des annexes I, J ou K; mettre une majuscule au premier terme et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour de l'information sur l'utilisation des indicateurs de relation et/ou les codes $w dans une zone 5XX spécifique, voir la section de ce Guide concernant cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les conventions du format autorités en ce qui concerne l'utilisation de la sous-zone $w. Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $w sauf si une valeur autre que «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» est appropriée dans l'une des positions. Lorsqu'on utilise la sous-zone $w, enregistrer la sous-zone comme première sous-zone de la zone. Fournir les positions de caractères qui précèdent la valeur mais pas celles qui lui succèdent, par exemple,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé antérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé ultérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = pour indiquer qu'une sous-zone $i ou une sous-zone $2 est utilisée pour donner de l'information sur la relation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = pour indiquer un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour des pseudonymes multiples (la notice comprend aussi une zone 663)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» (5XX) ne doit pas se normaliser sous la même forme qu'un autre renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la même notice d'autorité, sauf si les deux zones 5XX contiennent un indicateur de relation dans la sous-zone $i et que les textes des indicateurs de relation sont différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre un nom de personne et 1) le nom d'une autre personne, d'une famille ou d'une collectivité ou 2) le point d'accès autorisé pour une œuvre ou une expression. Cette technique peut également être utilisée pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres et des expressions et contenant des noms de personnes. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe I, J ou K dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on enregistre des relations entre noms de personnes impliquant des pseudonymes et que seulement deux notices d'autorité sont en cause, les catalogueurs peuvent soit 1) utiliser la sous-zone $i et le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w ou 2) utiliser des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» simples. Pour plus d'information sur ces techniques et des instructions sur l'enregistrement de pseudonymes multiples (c'est-à-dire ceux qui requièrent une zone 663), voir la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rappel aux catalogueurs : Lorsqu'une variante de nom (400) et un point d'accès autorisé (100) sont en conflit, il faut faire un ajout à la zone 400 ou à la zone 100 pour résoudre le conflit (par exemple, une forme développée du nom, une date d'activité, etc.); la pratique antérieure consistant à changer la zone 400 en 500 pour résoudre le conflit n'est plus une option. Lorsque les catalogueurs trouvent une variante de forme dans une zone 500 au cours de la mise à jour d'une notice d'autorité de nom, ils doivent résoudre le conflit et modifier la zone en 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de collectivité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de réunion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8] pour des directives sur les relations entre les notices d'autorité pour des séries de conférences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Titre uniforme =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés pour des œuvres ou des expressions. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe J dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $i avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w tant que les indicateurs de relation pour les lieux ne seront pas développés. (RDA a prévu un espace pour l'annexe L.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Traitement de collection – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 640 Dates de publication et/ou indication séquentielle de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#640_Dates_de_publication_et.2Fou_indication_s.C3.A9quentielle_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Exemple de numérotation de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#642_Exemple_de_num.C3.A9rotation_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Lieu et éditeur de la collection/organisme de publication =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#643_Lieu_et_.C3.A9diteur_de_la_collection.2Forganisme_de_publication |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Usage en matière d'analyse de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#644_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_d.27analyse_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Usage en matière de rappel de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#645_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_rappel_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Usage en matière de classification de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#646_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_classification_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Renvoi complexe «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 663 comprend le texte explicatif et les points d'accès autorisés pour les relations entre une zone 100 (nom établi) et d'autres zones 100 (noms établis) qui ne peuvent pas être correctement exprimées par un ou plusieurs renvois simples générés à partir de zones 500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Généralement, cette situation se produit lorsqu'une personne utilise plus de deux identités, lorsque plus d'une personne partage une identité avec une ou plusieurs autres personnes, ou lorsque plusieurs personnes utilisent le même pseudonyme indépendamment les unes des autres ou en raison d'un autre arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le texte de la zone 663 peut être adapté pour répondre à des situations exceptionnelles; toutefois, il faut garder le texte aussi simple que possible et laisser les zones et le codage MARC communiquer l'information souhaitée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la technique de la zone 663 pour établir des relations entre collectivités ou entre personnes et collectivités.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Seulement deux identités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque seulement deux notices d'autorité de noms sont créées pour une personne, les notices d'autorité de noms sont généralement reliées par des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500, sans aucune zone 663. Toutefois, lorsque l'une des notices d'autorité de noms est établie pour un pseudonyme commun ou un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment les unes des autres, la technique de la zone 663 est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Plus de deux identités - point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» et renvois ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plus de deux points d'accès autorisés sont créés pour la même personne, identifier un point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» en utilisant la technique de la zone 663. Cette décision est fondée sur le désir de simplifier la structure de renvois et d'aider les catalogueurs à déterminer le nom à utiliser comme sujet des œuvres biographiques ou critiques. Le point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» doit être déterminé par la forme de nom qui prédomine dans l'usage ou, en l'absence de preuves suffisantes, en choisissant le nom réel de la personne comme forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Dans la notice d'autorité pour la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», ajouter des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour tous les autres noms utilisés. Justifier les renvois en 500 par des zones 670 selon la pratique normale. Fournir une zone 663 énumérant tous les autres noms avec le texte suivant (celui-ci peut être modifié pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom] $b [forme établie du nom]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans chacune des autres notices d'autorité de noms, ajouter un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», en justifiant ce renvoi par une zone 670, selon la pratique normale. D'autres noms peuvent être mentionnés dans le 670 s'il est pratique de le faire. Fournir une zone 663 avec le texte suivant ou un texte similaire (le texte peut être ajusté pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom choisie comme vedette de base]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque l'auteur utilise un autre nouveau nom, créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour ce nom et l'ajouter à la structure de renvois ainsi qu'à la liste de la zone 663 dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;». Les renvois au nouveau nom dans les zones 500 et 663 sont ajoutés seulement dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes conjoints ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un pseudonyme conjoint est une identité utilisée par deux ou plusieurs personnes travaillant en collaboration. Si une personne utilise un pseudonyme conjoint et un autre nom (tel que trouvé dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes utilisés par plusieurs personnes ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment l'une de l'autre utilisent le même pseudonyme et un ou plusieurs autres noms (tels que trouvés dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisée par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(L'auteur a un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes et des pseudonymes individuels)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Note générale non destinée au public =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Donner des informations de valeur permanente et d'intérêt général qui seraient également utiles aux autres institutions du PFAN ou à celles qui n'y participent pas. Une liste représentative des notes est donnée ci-dessous. En général, le libellé est recommandé, mais n'est pas prescriptif, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions. Les zones 667 distinctes peuvent être données dans n'importe quel ordre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [raison de l'encodage].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date de la mise à jour].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Utilisée pour les changements de langue officielle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Annexe_2_:_Projets_sp.C3.A9ciaux|Annexe 2]] de ce Guide pour des informations et des instructions sur les zones 667 ajoutées aux notices d'autorité dans le cadre d'un projet spécial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes dont certaines identités ne sont pas établies ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une personne utilise deux ou plusieurs identités dans les manifestations, des notices d'autorité de noms peuvent être créées pour chaque identité. Dans un souci d'efficacité, les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser une zone 667 pour énumérer les pseudonymes non trouvés dans les publications au lieu de créer des notices d'autorité de noms pour ces pseudonymes inutilisés. Dans ce cas, énumérer les pseudonymes inutilisés dans une zone 667 après l'expression : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette note peut aussi être ajoutée dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne qui a plusieurs notices d'autorité de noms pour plusieurs identités lorsque certains des pseudonymes ne sont pas trouvés dans des publications. Dans ce cas, énumérer seulement les pseudonymes inutilisés dans la zone 667 et suivre les instructions appropriées pour les autres pseudonymes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, […] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la section [[#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom|663]] de ce Guide ainsi que dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les séries de congrès, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter une zone 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour une série de congrès lorsqu'il y a des notices d'autorité autant pour la série que pour les occurrences isolées du congrès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appliquer ces instructions lors de la création de nouvelles notices d'autorité de noms et lors de la révision de notices d'autorité de noms existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Ajouter des notes indiquant l'utilisation en indexation lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé n'est pas approprié pour utilisation comme vedette-matière dans ces situations :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Chefs d'État, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette instruction s'applique aux notices d'autorité de noms pour les collectivités représentant la fonction lorsque le nom du titulaire est inclus comme partie du point d'accès autorisé de la collectivité. Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Dignitaires gouvernementaux)] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html 11.2.2.26 (Dignitaires religieux)] pour les instructions sur les collectivités. Utiliser cette note 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour la collectivité pour indiquer l'utilisation en indexation :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [vedette du nom de la personne].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi les sections [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Changements linéaires entre noms antérieurs et ultérieurs d'une juridiction'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La politique d'indexation du RVM est d'employer comme point d'accès matière ou comme subdivision géographique uniquement le dernier nom d'une juridiction politique qui a eu un ou plusieurs noms antérieurs, aussi longtemps que l'identité territoriale demeure essentiellement la même (voir ''Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval'', 5.14.3.1). Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom ayant un point d'accès autorisé antérieur/ultérieur pour un lieu dans cette situation, les catalogueurs doivent ajouter une note 667 sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom antérieur du lieu et modifier les zones 008 appropriés (008/11 et 008/15).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Notices d'autorité de personnes fictives'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les points d'accès autorisés pour les personnes fictives ne doivent pas être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, la zone 008/11 doit être codée avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» et la zone 008/15 doit être codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;». Selon l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 9.0, lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, ajouter cette zone 667 pour indiquer l'utilisation comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une partie d'une ville, en indiquant qu'il n'est pas approprié de l'utiliser comme une subdivision géographique :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) Notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les points d'accès autorisés pour les noms de familles peuvent être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Pour les notices d'autorité de noms de familles qui reflètent la pratique antérieure (qui interdisait de les utiliser comme vedettes-matière), mettre à jour les notices pour attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et supprimer la note sur l’utilisation comme vedette-matière suivante :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes pour les renvois en écriture non latine ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans une notice d'autorité qui comprend une variante de point d'accès dans une écriture non latine, utiliser la zone 667 avec une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.&amp;amp;nbsp;» S'il y a plusieurs variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, utiliser une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» à la zone 008/29 pour indiquer que la variante de point d'accès n'a pas été évaluée. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Doublons&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Doublons ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice à conserver&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Source des données =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone a pour but d'enregistrer des informations sur le nom ou le titre représenté dans la zone 1XX. Elle comprend des renseignements qui contribuent à l'identification de l'entité et qui justifient le choix du nom ou du titre de même que tout élément supplémentaire utilisé pour construire le point d'accès autorisé (1XX). Les informations consignées justifient également, le cas échéant, des variantes de forme du nom ou du titre (4XX), d'autres éléments d'identification (046, 3XX et 678), et clarifient les relations entre la 1XX et les autres entités représentées dans le fichier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Fonctions de la zone 670 :'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations, provenant de sources (par exemple, livres, appels téléphoniques, sites Web), à l'appui du choix et de la forme du point d'accès autorisé, des variantes de point d'accès et d'autres éléments d'identification&lt;br /&gt;
* Stocker des informations qui pourront être utilisées pour résoudre un conflit par la suite&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations sur les relations entre entités (par exemple, une personne est l'auteur d'une œuvre, une collectivité a été absorbée par une autre collectivité)&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier une personne qui a produit des œuvres dans différents domaines ou sous des formes diverses&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier des personnes différentes dont les points d'accès doivent rester identiques pour le moment (c'est-à-dire des noms de personnes indifférenciés)&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour préciser si les différentes formes d'un nom ou d'un titre sont de simples variations ou reflètent un changement de nom ou de titre&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer les recherches requises par les lignes directrices actuelles&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour faciliter la maintenance des fichiers d'autorité et bibliographiques étant donné que les informations dans les zones 670 aident à la prise de décisions concernant les points d'accès autorisés en double et les attributions erronées&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour soutenir les manipulations informatiques basées sur des algorithmes utilisant les informations du 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, la première zone 670 cite la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est établie, c'est-à-dire la ressource en cours de catalogage. Si la ressource en cours de catalogage ou de consultation ne fournit aucune information justifiant le point d'accès autorisé, les variantes de point d'accès ou les autres éléments enregistrés dans la notice d'autorité, voir la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur la façon de citer la ressource dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les zones 670 suivantes dans n'importe quel ordre, en ajoutant les nouvelles zones après celles qui existent déjà. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 670 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670, préférer les sources objectives et faisant autorité (par exemple, une encyclopédie) et les sources qui fournissent des informations de première main (par exemple, un blogue d'auteur). Utiliser des sources qui fournissent des informations supplémentaires plutôt que celles qui répètent des informations déjà présentes dans les autres zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Pratiques à privilégier pour les zones 670 : '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans la sous-zone $b, résumer et modifier les informations trouvées, selon les besoins, pour éviter les informations superflues ou répétitives.&lt;br /&gt;
* Éviter de citer des informations subjectives ou des informations dont la valeur est douteuse pour identifier une entité dans un contexte bibliographique.&lt;br /&gt;
* Faire preuve de prudence lors de l'enregistrement d'informations sur des personnes vivantes lorsque ces informations sont susceptibles d'être de nature privée ou controversée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité existantes peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices. Par exemple, dans les zones 670 des notices d'autorité plus anciennes, la sous-zone $b contenant des informations justificatives pourrait être absente. Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité qui faisaient partie d'un projet spécial peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices et/ou peuvent contenir des informations qui semblent inhabituelles ou incorrectes.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Les exemples donnés tout au long du texte suivant présentent diverses conventions en ce qui concerne la ponctuation et le style. Ces conventions ne sont pas prescriptives et doivent être considérées comme des pratiques à privilégier pour faciliter l'échange d'informations dans le contexte d'une base de données partagée. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs fassent preuve de jugement et de bon sens. La ponctuation et le style ne doivent pas nécessairement être cohérents d'une notice à l'autre tant que l'information est claire et précise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format des zones 670 ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
À l'exception de l'eszett (ß ou ſʒ) et du symbole euro (€), tous les caractères figurant dans le [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/M9230.html tableau des codes MARC] peuvent être utilisés dans les notices d'autorité ajoutées au fichier d'autorité Canadiana (voir le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). Lorsque des données provenant d'un site Web sont copiées/collées dans une zone 670, vérifier que tous les caractères peuvent être utilisés dans la notice. Certains caractères non valides ressemblent à ceux qui sont valides. Par exemple, le tiret (–) non valide ressemble au trait d'union (-) valide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une substitution pour un symbole non reproductible est indiquée entre parenthèses (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.5]), une explication de cette interpolation peut également être fournie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les données doivent être fournies sous forme romanisée. Normalement, il est entendu que le catalogueur a fourni la romanisation; par conséquent, lors de la transcription de données trouvées dans la source sous forme romanisée, ajouter après celle-ci l'expression entre crochets ['''forme romanisée''']. Dans des langues telles que l'arabe et l'hébreu, où les voyelles sont généralement omises dans l'orthographe des textes, le catalogueur fournit les voyelles manquantes lors de la transcription des données. Lors de la transcription de texte qui inclut les voyelles, ajouter après entre parenthèses ['''vocalisé'''] ou ['''en partie vocalisé'''] selon le cas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un catalogueur choisit de fournir des variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, les 670 $b doivent contenir aussi bien la transcription du ou des textes en écriture non latine trouvés dans la source que la ou les formes systématiquement romanisées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les notices d'autorité sont créées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, il est possible que de l'information supplémentaire soit incluse. Ces données peuvent également être formatées d'une manière différente de celle indiquée dans le présent document. En général, ces données doivent être conservées telles qu'elles sont générées afin de maintenir la rentabilité de ce processus, à moins que les données ne prêtent à confusion ou ne provoquent des erreurs de validation. Les noms et les titres pour lesquels les notices d'autorité sont créées constituent l'exception à cette règle. Suivre les instructions de ces sections pour enregistrer ces données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Citation de la source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Le titre propre de la ressource citée, suffisamment complet pour permettre une identification ultérieure dans un catalogue en ligne. Des abréviations et des points de suspension peuvent être utilisés. Faire précéder un titre générique ou non distinctif du nom du créateur par lequel commencerait le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre. Si le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre est le même que le titre propre plus un qualificatif, il peut être fourni à la place du titre propre pour éviter toute ambiguïté. Lorsque des informations sont fournies dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 pour justifier un point d'accès autorisé ou une variante de point d'accès, suivre les instructions supplémentaires sous Enregistrement des noms et des titres. &lt;br /&gt;
# La date de publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Monographies en plusieurs parties. S'il s'agit de la première partie, indiquer la date de publication sous forme de date ouverte.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Publications en série autres que les collections de monographies. En général, utiliser une désignation chronologique au lieu d'une date de publication. S'il n'y a pas de désignation chronologique, utiliser la désignation numérique et la date de publication. Le cas échéant, indiquer à la suite de la désignation qu'un «&amp;amp;nbsp;substitut&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été utilisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:15px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ressources intégratrices. Appliquer les instructions de [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] pour la source du titre propre d'un site Web. Identifier l'itération à partir de laquelle les informations ont été prises (par exemple «&amp;amp;nbsp;consulté(e) le&amp;amp;nbsp;» suivi d'une date pour un site Web mis à jour de façon continue, le numéro de mise à jour ou le numéro de révision pour les publication à feuillets mobiles à mise à jour).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Informations trouvées'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $b :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# L'emplacement spécifique où les informations ont été trouvées. Pour les ressources en plusieurs parties avec parties numérotées, indiquer la désignation de la partie et l'emplacement dans la partie (par exemple, vol. 6, page 10; recto de la carte, étiquette). Des abréviations ou des formes au long peuvent être utilisées (par exemple, p. de t. ou page de titre, couv. ou couverture, vol. 6 ou volume 6). &lt;br /&gt;
# Informations trouvées. À la suite de l'emplacement, citer les informations qui y ont été trouvées, entre parenthèses. Le cas échéant, indiquer différentes occurrences d'informations provenant de la même source à la suite de l'emplacement de l'information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' Si le point d'accès autorisé est construit à partir des données de catalogage avant publication, inclure «&amp;amp;nbsp;CIP&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la mention de l'emplacement (par exemple, formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The greenhouse approach, 2019: $b page de titre du CIP (Chitra Anand) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Canadienne)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Ressources Internet.''' Pour les sites Web, indiquer s'il y a lieu le nom de l'emplacement à l'intérieur du site (par exemple, À propos; Notre histoire, Chronologie; Government, Executive Branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Plusieurs emplacements dans une ressource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' Lorsqu'on ajoute de nouvelles informations à une zone 670 créée pour un CIP, indiquer que les nouvelles informations proviennent de la ressource publiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; Canadienne) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; Canadienne) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de noms, utiliser généralement «&amp;amp;nbsp;etc.&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour éviter de donner plus de deux emplacements ou une séquence d'emplacements (par exemple, p. 316, etc., pour la séquence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de collections, toujours indiquer chaque emplacement séparément.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Lors du travail d'autorité post-catalogage sans le document en main, utiliser l'emplacement « ressource non disponible ». Si le document est examiné à nouveau et que la notice d'autorité est mise à jour, il est permis de modifier la zone 670 correspondante afin de fournir un emplacement et des formes supplémentaires de titres de collection si nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source des informations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent facultativement fournir un identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) dans la sous-zone $u de la zone 670 pour établir un lien avec la ressource citée si celle-ci contient des informations importantes sur l'entité établie qui ne peuvent être citées succinctement dans la notice d'autorité. Noter que l'utilisation d'un URI dans la zone 670 $u ne supplée pas à l'obligation de citer dans les sous-zones $a et $b de la zone 670 les données pertinentes nécessaires pour justifier le point d'accès autorisé (y compris les ajouts) ou les variantes (cette information continuera d'être disponible si le site change ou disparaît). Toutefois, les informations trouvées dans les sources en ligne peuvent être ajoutées aux zones 046 ou 3XX avec les citations appropriées dans les sous-zones $v et $u et ne pas être répétées dans une 670 lorsque ces informations ne sont pas utilisées dans une 1XX ou une 4XX. Si un URI est inclus dans une 670, il doit être indiqué dans la sous-zone $u. La sous-zone $u doit contenir uniquement l'URI sans aucune autre donnée (par exemple, ne pas mettre l'URI entre parenthèses ni inclure de mots dans la sous-zone $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des noms et des titres ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer intégralement les noms ou les titres de collections utilisés dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès, comme ils apparaissent dans la source, sans abréviation par le catalogueur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la préparation d'une notice d'autorité pour le texte d'une loi ou d'un recueil de lois par sujet, si une source citée contient un titre abrégé ou un titre de référence officiels, citer ce titre, précédé du terme «&amp;amp;nbsp;titre de référence&amp;amp;nbsp;» et de son emplacement exact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les autorités de collectivités, inclure dans les données citées toute la hiérarchie requise pour justifier toutes les variantes de point d'accès nécessaires. Faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles informations (par exemple, le nom de l'organisme subordonné) sont étrangères à la notice créée et ne doivent pas être enregistrées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toutes les catégories ci-dessus, si la seule présentation du nom ou du titre sur la source d'information privilégiée se trouve dans le titre de la ressource donné dans la sous-zone $a de la 670, la répétition du nom dans la sous-zone $b peut être omise, à condition qu'aucune information importante ne soit perdue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si des informations sur un nom ou un titre antérieur ou postérieur se trouvent dans la même source que le nom ou le titre dans le point d'accès autorisé, donner toutes les informations dans la zone 670. Ne pas séparer les informations sur le nom ou le titre antérieur ou postérieur pour les donner dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour faciliter la contribution internationale et l'utilisation des notices d'autorité, lors de l'enregistrement des dates, utiliser généralement les noms de mois, sous forme longue ou [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abrégée]. (Pour les dates enregistrées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, voir la section [[#Format_des_zones_670|Format des zones 670]] de ce Guide). Ne pas modifier le style des dates dans les notices existantes. Comme pratique à privilégier, si une date n'est pas incluse dans la sous-zone $d de la zone 100, envisager d'ajouter une zone 046 si les dates sont disponibles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification des variantes de point d'accès ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justifier les noms ou les titres donnés comme variantes de point d'accès par des informations citées des sources. Toutefois, une justification n'est pas requise dans les cas suivants :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variantes de point d'accès reflétant différentes romanisations ou orthographes connues du catalogueur;&lt;br /&gt;
# Une variante de titre dérivée de la ressource cataloguée, d'autres ressources cataloguées sous le même point d'accès ou de sources de référence standard;&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois pour des points d'accès autorisés de collectivités reflétant des changements dus à une réforme orthographique nationale, des changements de noms dus à un changement de langue officielle ou des changements impliquant uniquement une collectivité supérieure à laquelle la collectivité en cours d'établissement est subordonnée.&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois facultatifs à partir de formes RCAA2 ou pré-RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité de collections et les notices d'autorité de noms rétrospectives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification d'autres éléments ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les informations enregistrées dans les zones 046, 3XX ou 678 de la notice d'autorité doivent généralement être justifiées, à moins qu'elles ne ressortent clairement dans les informations enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 ou qu'elles puissent être facilement déduites d'autres éléments d'identification enregistrés, y compris le nom privilégié.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour la zone 046 et plusieurs des zones 3XX, une sous-zone $u ou une sous-zone $v enregistrée dans la même zone peut être utilisée à la place ou en plus d'une 670. Voir la section [[#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]] de ce Guide pour les directives concernant les sous-zones $u et $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des autres données ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. Ne pas abréger ou traduire des attributs tels que le titre d'une personne ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) qui apparaissent en conjonction avec les noms de personnes dans les mentions de responsabilité et qui pourraient potentiellement être utilisés comme partie du point d'accès. Les autres données peuvent être abrégées ou résumées. En général, traduire les données en langues étrangères de manière informelle en français, en les paraphrasant ou en les résumant selon ce qui convient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données autres que les formes du titre (ou de la phrase analogue à une collection) à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. La numérotation et les noms des organismes de publication ne sont pas obligatoires mais peuvent être indiqués.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Types particuliers de citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les citations les plus courantes sont énumérées ci-dessous. Si celles-ci ne sont pas appropriées, en formuler d'autres selon les besoins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la conversion des informations trouvées dans des zones MARC obsolètes ou non actives (par exemple, 664, 665, 666) en une note 670, citer Canadiana dans une citation telle que celles fournies dans les exemples ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date de la conversion] $b ([données converties à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([données déplacées à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC et fichier interne de BAnQ'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La façon de citer ces fichiers dans la zone 670 est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; usage: [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de noms.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations. Entre parenthèses, précédé par la mention '''point d'accès :''' ou '''points d'accès :''' , mentionner le ou les points d'accès trouvés, même si le point d'accès autorisé actuel est identique. S'il est jugé utile de mentionner une ou plusieurs variantes de point d'accès trouvées dans une notice d'autorité, les mentionner en les faisant précéder de la mention '''variante :''' ou '''variantes :'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différentes formes du nom apparaissent dans les notices bibliographiques, enregistrer le point d'accès ainsi que toutes les formes trouvées, y compris les formes identiques au point d'accès autorisé. Séparer le point d'accès des autres formes de nom et faire précéder les autres formes d'une mention appropriée, par exemple, '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' ou '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas citer les notices bibliographiques ou l'emplacement exact des variations trouvées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de collections.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations, suivie de la citation de la notice bibliographique. Entre parenthèses, indiquer la mention de la collection qui se trouve dans cette notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 27 janv. 2021, Les Déchets ménagers, c1980 $b (Les Cahiers de l'AGHTM)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] Le fichier LC/NAF a aussi été cité antérieurement sous d'autres noms, par exemple Base de données LC/NACO et Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;usage&amp;amp;nbsp;» désigne les formes de noms transcrites que l'on trouve habituellement dans les mentions de responsabilité des notices bibliographiques. On peut également trouver ces formes dans d'autres parties de la notice bibliographique telles que le titre propre ou une note citée. En raison des changements apportés aux instructions de catalogage, les catalogueurs doivent être prudents lorsqu'ils prennent les informations de la mention de publication, de la mention de distribution, etc. et de la mention de collection.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») désigne une forme de nom qui ne correspond pas nécessairement à une forme transcrite. Par exemple, dans les notices RCAA2, le nom d'un éditeur qui figure sur la ressource comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Publishing Company&amp;amp;nbsp;» pourrait avoir été enregistré dans la mention de publication sous la forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Pub. Co&amp;amp;nbsp;». Normalement, il n'est pas nécessaire de citer une telle forme dans une zone 670.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Autres fichiers ou catalogues'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un point d'accès est trouvé dans un catalogue ou une base de données en ligne, utiliser son jugement pour créer une citation 670. Commencer la zone 670 par une désignation du catalogue ou de la base de données dans laquelle ces autres notices bibliographiques ont été trouvées. Il n'y a pas de formulation prescrite pour ces citations; des exemples sont donnés ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Bases de données toponymiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer le nom de la base de données et la date de la recherche dans la sous-zone $a. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Le nom de la base de données peut être cité sous forme d'acronyme ou en toutes lettres.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Dans la sous-zone $b, indiquer le ou les noms de l'entité, le type d'entité, la désignation ou la classe de l'élément (par exemple, ADM1, PPL, civil), les coordonnées et le nom du lieu plus vaste, s'il y a lieu. (D'autres informations pertinentes peuvent également être fournies.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de la désignation ou de la classe de l'élément, il est possible d'utiliser soit le code (par exemple, PPL) ou sa forme en toutes lettres (par exemple, populated place). Pour les noms étrangers, indiquer le type de nom (par exemple, forme conventionnelle, forme approuvée, forme courte, etc.) entre crochets ou parenthèses après le nom. Répéter les crochets ou les parenthèses après chaque nom de ce type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Les noms de variantes (y compris les noms en caractères non latins) peuvent être donnés dans une seule liste, comme indiqué ci-dessous. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement des coordonnées, il est possible d'utiliser le format DMS (degrés, minutes, secondes), le format DD (degrés décimaux) ou les deux formats.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a choisi d’enregistrer les coordonnées DMS)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées telles que trouvées. Toutefois, si la base de données affiche les coordonnées en utilisant des deux-points pour séparer les composantes DMS et des valeurs positives et négatives pour communiquer l'hémisphère, il est acceptable de traduire les coordonnées au format DMS traditionnel si souhaité. Utiliser le symbole du degré (et non le zéro en exposant) pour indiquer les degrés, le signe mou (lettre modificative prime) pour les minutes et le signe dur (lettre modificative double prime) pour les secondes. Pour les coordonnées de latitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère sud. Pour les coordonnées de longitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère occidental.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a enregistré les coordonnées DMS telles qu'elles ont été trouvées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a traduit les coordonnées DMS au format traditionnel à partir de : -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic names server&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, consulté le &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;17 août 2022&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;$b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;22:53:01, 121:02:54&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources non bibliographiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer la source non bibliographique, la date et les informations. La source peut être indiquée de manière spécifique («&amp;amp;nbsp;Lettre de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.) ou en termes généraux («&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.). Lorsqu'on indique une source spécifique, il n'est pas nécessaire de montrer comment l'information a été reçue, par exemple, que la lettre a été reçue par télécopieur plutôt que par courrier. Lorsqu'un appel téléphonique à un éditeur, une agence ou une organisation est cité, il convient généralement de donner le nom du groupe appelé, plutôt que le titre ou le nom de la personne contactée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de collections de rééditions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité de collection concerne uniquement une réédition, commencer la 670 par le terme correspondant au type de réédition et une barre oblique. Ne pas inclure une 670 pour une réédition si la notice d'autorité sujet couvre à la fois l'original et une ou plusieurs rééditions. Ne pas ajouter de zones 670 supplémentaires pour d'autres types de rééditions cataloguées ultérieurement. (Voir 64X Traitement de la collection, Rééditions pour plus d'informations sur les rééditions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciés'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour des informations sur les citations existantes dans les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciées, voir la section [[#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32 Nom de personne indifférencié]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-11-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Titre associé de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 672 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui est associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité de collectivité, des zones 672 peuvent être utilisées pour enregistrer des titres de ressources dont la collectivité est la créatrice, l'organisme de publication ou le sujet. Le but premier de la zone 672 consiste principalement à documenter le fait qu'il existe un lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 672 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 670 pour consigner le titre de la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est créée, ni d'utiliser des zones 670 pour justifier les informations enregistrées dans les zones 1XX et 4XX, telles que le nom privilégié et les variantes de noms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 672 peuvent être ajoutées après les zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 672 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 672 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans la classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 672 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zones 672 avec titres propres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Cervantes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre propre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre uniforme)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec une variante de titre pour l'œuvre associée à l'expression catalane de l'œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Reste du titre'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'on enregistre un titre propre, la sous-zone $b peut être utilisée pour enregistrer le complément de titre ou le titre propre parallèle afin d'éviter toute confusion lorsque des titres nécessitent une meilleure identification.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le complément de titre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le titre propre parallèle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $f – Date'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $f est utilisée pour enregistrer une date appropriée à l'entité enregistrée dans la sous-zone $a (par exemple, utiliser la date d'une œuvre pour un titre privilégié et la date de publication pour un titre propre). Ne pas utiliser les crochets carrés dans la sous-zone $f pour enregistrer une date de publication ou de production. Ne pas mettre de date de distribution, de date de fabrication ou de date de copyright en $f.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une œuvre :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de l'œuvre)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une expression :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date d'une expression française de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une manifestation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de publication d'une manifestation d'une expression polonaise de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Numéro de contrôle de la notice bibliographique'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $w est utilisée pour enregistrer des numéros de contrôle de notices bibliographiques (par exemple, les zones 001, 010 et 016 dans les notices bibliographiques). Il est recommandé de fournir la sous-zone $w lorsque l'information est facilement accessible. La sous-zone $w doit être répétée pour chaque numéro de contrôle distinct (par exemple, un LCCN et un numéro de notice OCLC doivent être fournis dans des sous-zones séparées). Pour plus d'instructions sur la saisie d'un numéro de contrôle dans la notice, voir la section sur la sous-zone $w dans le ''CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E. Format MARC 21 for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' la sous-zone $w doit seulement être utilisée pour les titres de manifestations.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Titre distinct de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui n'est pas associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom. Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité pour une personne, la zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer les titres d'œuvres écrites par une personne différente portant un nom semblable. L'objectif principal de la zone 673 est de documenter le fait qu'il n'existe aucun lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 673.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 673 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 675, comme le décrit la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 673 peuvent être ajoutées après des zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires non associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 673 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 673.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 673 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans le classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 673 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245. Pour les sous-zones spécifiques de la zone 673, appliquer les mêmes instructions que celles données dans la section [[#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Titre propre associé à un autre Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)###47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title propre associé à la National Gallery de Londres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
ET NON&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Même si la National Gallery of Art n'est pas la créatrice de la ressource mentionnée, elle en est l'éditrice et ce titre devrait donc être enregistré en 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#673_Titre_distinct_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Source des données non trouvées =&lt;br /&gt;
En avril 2012, cette zone a été redéfinie comme : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Citation d'une source consultée dans laquelle aucune information ne se trouve liée en aucune manière avec l'entité représentée par la notice d'autorité ou par des entités liées.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Les catalogueurs participant au PFAN ne sont pas tenus de modifier les zones 675 existantes simplement pour répondre à cette nouvelle définition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une nouvelle notice d'autorité, toujours citer la ressource cataloguée dans la zone 675 si la ressource cataloguée ne fournit aucune information liée de quelque façon que ce soit à l'entité représentée dans la notice d'autorité. Citer également dans la zone 675 d'autres sources consultées qui ne contiennent aucune information, lorsqu'on juge que cette absence même d'information mérite d'être consignée pour les futurs utilisateurs de la notice d'autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, il n'est pas toujours nécessaire d'inclure dans la zone 675 toutes les sources de référence consultées; il faut faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles sources sont suffisamment importantes pour être conservées de façon permanente dans la notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Données biographiques ou historiques =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsque des données biographiques ou historiques sont fournies dans une zone de note 678, rédiger la note en employant des phrases concises mais complètes et en gardant à l'esprit que l'information sera utilisée dans des affichages publics.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En prévision de la constitution par BAC du fichier dans WMS et de l'ajout en lot des notices d'autorité des autres institutions, le contenu de toutes les zones 665 dans les notices de BAC et de BAnQ a été déplacé vers la zone 678. Il se pourrait que la zone 665 originale ait contenu des instructions sur le ou les points d'accès à employer comme auteur et comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec); Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec); Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec); Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supprimer ces instructions dans la zone 678 si elles ont été conservées. Penser à ajouter la zone 667 sur l'emploi comme vedette-matière le cas échéant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification de la zone 678'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Généralement, une zone 678 doit être justifiée par une zone 670. Si elle n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu est approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, conserver la zone et ajouter une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678 comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [abréviation de la bibliothèque participante], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la notice a été modifiée après avoir été migrée, il faut consulter l'historique de la notice pour déterminer qui a ajouté la zone 678 à l'origine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la zone 678 n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, ne pas conserver la zone 678 sauf si une note appropriée peut être rédigée avec les informations dont on dispose. Noter que la zone 678 est facultative. Si le contenu de la zone doit être conservé parce qu'il ne se trouve nulle part ailleurs dans la notice, le transférer dans une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 678 existante qui sera supprimée car le contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 670 ajoutée :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Ne pas répéter cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#678_Donn.C3.A9es_biographiques_ou_historiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Liaison des vedettes établies – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note'' : Cette section ne s'applique pas à la zone 781 utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms 151 pour fournir des informations sur les subdivisions géographiques. Voir la section [[#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique|781]] de ce Guide pour les instructions relatives à cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;L'utilisation d'une vedette établie dans une zone de liaison 7XX dans une notice d'autorité de nom ou une notice d'autorité de collection est limitée à l'enregistrement du point d'accès autorisé à partir d'une bibliographie nationale ou d'un fichier d'autorité national ou équivalent séparé. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La forme de la vedette dans une zone 7XX peut correspondre à la forme dans la zone 1XX ou à une forme dans la zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité. Ceci est approprié lorsque la forme de la zone 7XX représente une forme se trouvant dans un fichier d'autorité différent de Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La source de la vedette dans la zone 7XX peut être précisée en utilisant soit la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur avec une sous-zone $2, soit une valeur pour le deuxième indicateur qui précise la source. Pour les points d'accès provenant du fichier LC/NAF, privilégier le deuxième indicateur avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Liaison des vedettes de subdivision - Subdivision géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pratique facultative du PFAN :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pour une vedette de nom géographique qui peut également être utilisée comme subdivision géographique, déterminer la forme sous laquelle la vedette doit être utilisée comme subdivision géographique en suivant les lignes directrices de la feuille d'instructions [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 du ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Entrer la forme de la subdivision géographique dans une zone 781 en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;6&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur. Pour une vedette géographique utilisée directement, comme un pays, saisir les données dans une seule sous-zone $z. Pour une vedette géographique qui est utilisée indirectement en subdivision d'une entité géographique plus vaste, telle qu'une ville, saisir les données dans deux sous-zones $z successives. Ne pas modifier les valeurs des positions de la zone 008. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice pour une vedette de nom géographique qui ne peut pas être utilisée comme vedette secondaire matière (008/15 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;»), comme le nom antérieur d'une juridiction qui a subi un changement de nom linéaire, par exemple, '''Ceylan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice d'autorité de nom pour un nom de lieu qui ne peut pas être utilisé comme une subdivision géographique, comme une section d'une ville, par exemple, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Ajouter une zone 781 à une notice existante lorsqu'une autre modification est faite dans la notice. Lors de la révision d'une notice existante qui contient une note d'utilisation pour l'indexation dans une zone 667 indiquant la forme de la subdivision géographique appropriée, supprimer la zone 667 et la remplacer par une zone 781.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 1 : Entités ambiguës =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 2 : Projets spéciaux =&lt;br /&gt;
Cette annexe fournit des informations sur les projets spéciaux impliquant des notices d'autorité créées et modifiées dans le fichier d'autorité Canadiana. Les notices créées ou modifiées pour ces projets peuvent contenir certaines zones et valeurs dans des zones qui ne sont généralement pas conformes aux politiques de catalogage actuelles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des instructions sur la modification de ces notices sont fournies afin d'indiquer si ces zones et valeurs doivent être conservées ou non.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 1. Notices créées ou révisées dans le cadre du projet de révision de notices de l'UQAM ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de révision de notices d'autorité dirigé par l'UQAM. Il s'agit des notices créées ou modifiées dans Canadiana par l'équipe du traitement documentaire de cette institution. Ces notices sont ensuite révisées par deux bibliothécaires et une technicienne de l'UQAM. Le projet s'est terminé le 31 mars 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces nouvelles notices présentaient les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles ont été ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices peuvent être modifiées de la même manière que les autres notices d'autorité de noms conformément aux politiques de catalogage en vigueur.&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un catalogueur modifie ces notices, il doit :&lt;br /&gt;
* changer la valeur du Guide/17 pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Notice d'autorité complète);&lt;br /&gt;
* supprimer la zone 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;amp;nbsp;»; &lt;br /&gt;
* évaluer la notice comme une notice versée en lot. Toutefois, comme la notice est en cours de révision, le point d'accès autorisé peut être modifié s'il n'est pas conforme aux pratiques du PFAN (p. ex., une date de naissance ou de décès peut être ajoutée si elle est disponible et a été omise dans le point d'accès).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 2. Notices créées et révisées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de mentorat &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui, depuis février 2021, permet aux&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; bibliothèques universitaires de créer des notices d'autorité de nom qui sont révisées par une autre institution universitaire. Les notices d'autorité créées ou modifiées par &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;les bibliothèques mentorées&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; sont révisées par des techniciens en documentation de l'Université &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui les mentore&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices présentent les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles sont ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abréviation, c'est-à-dire UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices ne doivent pas être modifiées.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=145033</id>
		<title>PFAN - Annonces et mises à jour</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=145033"/>
		<updated>2026-03-13T19:38:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - News and Updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annonces =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Annonce'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Nous sommes ravis d’accueillir Marilyne Guertin, de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 13 janvier 2026, elle succède à Marie Chantal L’Ecuyer Coelho à titre de représentante de BAnQ et de coprésidente du Comité. De son côté, Marie Chantal remplacera Izidor Cirnatiu, qui quitte le Comité après sept années d’implication. Nous tenons à exprimer notre sincère gratitude à Izidor pour son engagement au sein du PFAN. Son expertise et son engagement ont été essentiels à la création du Comité et à ses nombreuses réalisations. Merci Izidor, et bienvenue à Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une '''formation sur la romanisation''' sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 18 et 25 novembre prochains, de 10 h à 12 h. Cette activité a été préparée par Rachel Gagnon et Daniel Paradis, et sera présentée par Rachel Gagnon, bibliothécaire principale à Bibliothèque et Archives Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN, auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la romanisation selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter la formation générale offerte en 2020 et à savoir quand appliquer les tables de romanisation du PFAN.  Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; par conséquent, elle ne répétera pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 2 heures chacune.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''18 novembre''', la première partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les principes de bases et les définitions&lt;br /&gt;
* RDA et le début de la démarche&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de personnes&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''25 novembre''', la deuxième partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de familles&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de collectivités&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
* Les titres privilégiés pour les œuvres&lt;br /&gt;
* La foire aux questions&lt;br /&gt;
* Les zones MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/01367886-b1fd-434a-bccb-a4b86931f74f@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 1]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/5822e340-3ced-4d47-905e-2f658e7dc7f6@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Marie-Chantal L’Écuyer-Coelho de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 23 septembre 2024, elle remplace Daniel Paradis comme représentante de BAnQ et co-présidente du comité.  Nous remercions chaleureusement Daniel Paradis pour sa grande contribution au PFAN. Sa participation et son expertise ont grandement influencé la création et les nombreuses réalisations du Comité.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une formation gratuite sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales dans le fichier Canadiana sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 28 et 30 mai prochains, de 9 h à 12 h 30. Elle a été préparée et sera présentée par les spécialistes du catalogage de la musique que sont :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Rachel Gagnon, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
* Guillaume Lizotte, Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
* Daniel Paradis, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
* Lina Picard, Université de Montréal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter le module 6 de la formation générale donnée en 2020, lequel excluait les œuvres et les expressions musicales. Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; elle ne répétera donc pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées. Afin de mieux se préparer à la formation, il est quand même fortement recommandé de réviser le [[/wiki.gccollab.ca/PFAN - Formation PFAN|module 6 de la formation générale]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 3 heures et demie chacune. La première partie couvrira les attributs des œuvres et des expressions musicales, c’est-à-dire :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* titre privilégié d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* distribution d’exécution&lt;br /&gt;
* désignation numérique d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* tonalité et&lt;br /&gt;
* autre caractéristique d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La deuxième partie couvrira quant à elle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* la construction des points d'accès et des variantes de point d’accès représentant des œuvres et des expressions musicales&lt;br /&gt;
* les entités en relation ainsi que&lt;br /&gt;
* la maintenance du fichier Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/8148f230-56d9-4833-a25c-7f6baac6c2fb@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/cf33ae27-958d-40ab-baff-efe2f158a858@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Bernard Lemieux de l'Université de Montréal au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 28 mars 2023, il remplace officiellement Philippe Brosseau comme l'un des représentants du Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. Nous remercions chaleureusement Philippe pour sa contribution au comité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ajouts et modifications au wiki du PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le wiki, le '''contenu ajouté''' est identifié par l'étiquette &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. Le '''contenu modifié''' est identifié par du &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;texte en rouge&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9|Nouvel exemple avec $2 rvmgf]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Formation PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN|Arbres de décisions pour aider avec la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|Instruction et exemple pour une notice non différenciée de BAnQ sans numéro Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-30&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions pour les langues de la norme ISO 15919:2001 (Information et documentation -- Translittération du Devanagari et des écritures indiennes liées en caractères latins)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Correction des exemples de l'étape 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Bibliothèques participantes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Mise à jour des répondants]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Compilation et Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ sur les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_géographiques|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e|16.2.2.5, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Bases de données toponymiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Retrait des phrases &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser la sous-zone $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0 ou $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0, $1, $3, $4 ou $i.&amp;quot; dans différentes zones]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Point 2.c. sur les variantes de point d'accès sous l'étape 2 pour les modifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ sur les numéros Canadiana (zone 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_numéros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Quels_sont_les_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9riques_utilis.C3.A9s_dans_les_notices_Canadiana.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question sur les numéros Canadiana génériques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Entretien_du_fichier_bibliographique_.28EFB.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Entretien du fichier bibliographique (EFB)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3., Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification d'un énoncé]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_.E2.80.93_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision sur les renvois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Enregistrement_des_attributs_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_et_d.27une_expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Enregistrement des attributs d'une œuvre et d'une expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Titre_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9_constitu.C3.A9_uniquement_du_nom_d.27un_type_de_composition|6.14.2.5.2, Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type de composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choix_de_la_langue|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choix de la langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Forme_au_singulier_ou_au_pluriel|6.14.2.5.2.2, Forme au singulier ou au pluriel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Partie_identifi.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_fois_par_un_num.C3.A9ro_et_par_un_titre_ou_une_autre_d.C3.A9signation_verbale.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Partie identifiée à la fois par un numéro et par un titre ou une autre désignation verbale, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Deux_ou_plusieurs_parties.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Deux ou plusieurs parties, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.8.3.2C_.C5.92uvres_compl.C3.A8tes_d.27un_m.C3.AAme_type_de_composition_pour_une_m.C3.AAme_distribution_sp.C3.A9cifique_ou_diverses_distributions|6.14.2.8.3, Œuvres complètes d'un même type de composition pour une même distribution spécifique ou diverses distributions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|6.15.1.3, Enregistrement d'une distribution d'exécution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.5.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.5, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.1, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.3, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27ordre|6.16.1.3.1, Numéro d'ordre]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_de_catalogue_th.C3.A9matique|6.16.1.3.3, Numéro de catalogue thématique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_transcriptions.2C_etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, transcriptions, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.27.1.9.2C_Ajouts_aux_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres|6.27.1.9, Ajouts aux points d'accès représentant des œuvres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1, Lignes directrices générales sur la construction des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Œuvres musicales avec des paroles, un livret, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1.9, Éléments additionnels dans les points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.3.2C_Point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_expression_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale|6.28.3, Point d'accès autorisé représentant une expression d'une œuvre musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.4.2C_Variante_de_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_.C5.93uvre_ou_une_expression_musicale|6.28.4, Variante de point d'accès représentant une œuvre ou une expression musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|Précision pour les notices d'autorité existante]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.17.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_tonalit.C3.A9|6.17.1.3, Enregistrement d'une tonalité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#.C3.89tablissement_de_certaines_entit.C3.A9s_dans_le_fichier_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms|Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-mati.C3.A8re|Instruction pour les notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|Instruction pour les sous-zones obsolètes $l et $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#023_ISSN_de_regroupement|Zone 023, ISSN de regroupement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille|Instruction pour la sous-zone $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.E2.80.99une_relation_.C3.A0_une_collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation|32.1.1.3, Enregistrement d’une relation à une collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Groupe_1_-_Vedettes_du_groupe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_de_noms|Catégorie « Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named » révisée pour « Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual » (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Suppression de : préférer une notice qui a déjà une 016 à une qui n'en a pas.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_FAQ_sur_les_compilations_d%27œuvres_d%27un_même_agent|FAQ sur les compilations d'œuvres d'un même agent.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#10.0.2C_Identification_des_familles|10.0, Identification des familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Enfants_et_petits-enfants_de_personnes_royales|9.4.1.4.3, Enfants et petits-enfants de personnes royales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms|Précisions apportées dans les zones 008/32, 371, 377 et 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles| Lien pour Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Format_des_zones_670| Nouvel exemple illustrant comment citer une sous-page de site Web]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667| Modification de la note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Foire aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_la_romanisation| FAQ sur la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité directeur&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_directeur| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité des normes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_des_normes| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précision pour le numéro à indiquer dans la note 667 sous Étape 2, Notice à supprimer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Bibliothèque_et_Archives_Canada|Lien pour le wiki de BAC]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision pour certains principes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.2C_Collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|32.1, Collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Lorsqu.E2.80.99une_collectivit.C3.A9_a_port.C3.A9_plus_d.E2.80.99un_nom_et_qu.E2.80.99il_existe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_pour_les_autres_noms_dans_Canadiana.2C_lesquelles_doit-on_mettre_en_relation_avec_des_zones_5XX.3F_Dans_quels_cas_doit-on_r.C3.A9viser_les_autorit.C3.A9s_des_collectivit.C3.A9s_mises_en_relation.3F|Question 7 sur les collectivités en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Nouveaux répondants pour certaines institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Mise_.C3.A0_jour_des_notices_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_existantes|Précision importante concernant les notices indifférenciées existantes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.3.4.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_p.C3.A9riode_d.27activit.C3.A9_d.27une_personne_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.3.4.3, Enregistrement d'une période d'activité d'une personne]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour le terme &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; ajoutée à la zone 1XX de la liste]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9|Précision sur les changements de nom des groupes associés]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour les notices d'autorité codées FrPBN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Comment_d.C3.A9terminer_l.27usage_pour_le_nom_d.27un_agent_dans_WMS.3F|Question 8 sur l'usage du nom d'un agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation de l'hébreu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision ajoutée pour la zone 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#G.C3.A9n.C3.A9ralit.C3.A9s|Généralités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Précision concernant les comtés aux États-Unis]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur_.5BNouveau.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées dans la section Généralités; ajout de sections sur la répétabilité, les dates divergentes et les dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées pour un URI inclus dans la sous-zone $u]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Crit.C3.A8res_d.27admissibilit.C3.A9_au_PFAN_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Critères d'admissibilité et attentes envers les nouveaux membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Correction de l'indice PQ pour la littérature canadienne française]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Instruction sur les sous-zones $q et $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress_.5BNouveau.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21/053&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress|Précision concernant le deuxième indicateur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Table pour l'amharique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|Ne plus utiliser cette zone]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles|Lien vers &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Présentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 sur les congrès, etc., annulés ou hybrides]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précisions ajoutées aux zones 046 et 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_cod.C3.A9es_comme_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_qui_ne_repr.C3.A9sentent_en_fait_qu.27une_seule_identit.C3.A9|Précision ajoutée pour les notices codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» par erreur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation du yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique_.5BNouveau.5D|Code local de région géographique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_de_promulgation_d.E2.80.99une_loi.2C_etc._.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.29.1.29, Date de promulgation d’une loi, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2C_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2, Nom de collectivité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information_.5BNouveau.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources d'information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Doit-on_modifier_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions_d.27un_agent_.28p._ex._un_auteur_ou_un_compositeur.29_si_la_forme_retenue_pour_l.27agent_seul_est_diff.C3.A9rente_de_celle_utilis.C3.A9e_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions.3F|Question 4 sur la modification des points d'accès autorisés pour les œuvres et expressions d'un agent]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_g%C3%A9ographiques|FAQ sur les noms géographiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation_.5BNouveau.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667|Deux nouveaux exemples de notes 667 (pour les notices d'autorité de nom indifférenciées représentant une seule identité et celles faisant l'objet d'une modification partielle)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Renvois (4XX et 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ-Numéros Canadiana&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_num%C3%A9ros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Qui_contacter_lorsqu.27on_a_besoin_d.27une_nouvelle_liste_de_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_pour_la_zone_016.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question 4 sur l'obtention d'une nouvelle liste de numéros Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Livret et Paroles)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions ajoutées en ce qui concerne le chinois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible_.5BNouveau.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Communications_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Principles généraux]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|022]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9|024]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#335_Plan_d.27extension_.5BNouveau.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|375]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9|384]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible|385]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur|386]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9|510]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme|530]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Deux nouvelles langues (coréen et japonais)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Ajout d'une instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Projet_2._Notices_cr.C3.A9.C3.A9es_et_r.C3.A9vis.C3.A9es_dans_le_cadre_du_projet_de_mentorat_des_universit.C3.A9s|Précisions ajoutées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |Renvois « voir » (4XX) simples]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Composition|Composition du Comité directeur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Nouvel article sur le PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNouveau.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Ajout de tables de romanisation de la BnF pour l'arménien, le biélorusse, le bulgare, le géorgien, le macédonien, le russe et l'ukrainien]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|Remplacement d'exemples RVM par RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précisions apportées à l'instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions|Précisions apportées au point 3 et à l'exemple 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure pour les notices dérivées du LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_pour_les_notices_d.C3.A9riv.C3.A9es_du_LC.2FNAF|Précision apportée à l'exemple du modèle d'une note 670 ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#PFAN-MUSIQUE-L_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Liste de discussion PFAN-MUSIQUE-L]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Ajout d'information dans différentes zones.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Éléments RDA fondamentaux pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Éléments_RDA_fondamentaux_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous l'élément ''collectivités en relation''.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Zones MARC obligatoires pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Zones_MARC_obligatoires_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous les zones 510, 511, 551.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouvelle introduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-03-13''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=145032</id>
		<title>PFAN - Annonces et mises à jour</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=145032"/>
		<updated>2026-03-13T19:30:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 2026 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - News and Updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annonces =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Annonce'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Nous sommes ravis d’accueillir Marilyne Guertin, de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 13 janvier 2026, elle succède à Marie Chantal L’Ecuyer Coelho à titre de représentante de BAnQ et de coprésidente du Comité. De son côté, Marie Chantal remplacera Izidor Cirnatiu, qui quitte le Comité après sept années d’implication. Nous tenons à exprimer notre sincère gratitude à Izidor pour son engagement au sein du PFAN. Son expertise et son engagement ont été essentiels à la création du Comité et à ses nombreuses réalisations. Merci Izidor, et bienvenue à Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une '''formation sur la romanisation''' sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 18 et 25 novembre prochains, de 10 h à 12 h. Cette activité a été préparée par Rachel Gagnon et Daniel Paradis, et sera présentée par Rachel Gagnon, bibliothécaire principale à Bibliothèque et Archives Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN, auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la romanisation selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter la formation générale offerte en 2020 et à savoir quand appliquer les tables de romanisation du PFAN.  Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; par conséquent, elle ne répétera pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 2 heures chacune.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''18 novembre''', la première partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les principes de bases et les définitions&lt;br /&gt;
* RDA et le début de la démarche&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de personnes&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''25 novembre''', la deuxième partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de familles&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de collectivités&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
* Les titres privilégiés pour les œuvres&lt;br /&gt;
* La foire aux questions&lt;br /&gt;
* Les zones MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/01367886-b1fd-434a-bccb-a4b86931f74f@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 1]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/5822e340-3ced-4d47-905e-2f658e7dc7f6@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Marie-Chantal L’Écuyer-Coelho de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 23 septembre 2024, elle remplace Daniel Paradis comme représentante de BAnQ et co-présidente du comité.  Nous remercions chaleureusement Daniel Paradis pour sa grande contribution au PFAN. Sa participation et son expertise ont grandement influencé la création et les nombreuses réalisations du Comité.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une formation gratuite sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales dans le fichier Canadiana sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 28 et 30 mai prochains, de 9 h à 12 h 30. Elle a été préparée et sera présentée par les spécialistes du catalogage de la musique que sont :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Rachel Gagnon, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
* Guillaume Lizotte, Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
* Daniel Paradis, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
* Lina Picard, Université de Montréal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter le module 6 de la formation générale donnée en 2020, lequel excluait les œuvres et les expressions musicales. Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; elle ne répétera donc pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées. Afin de mieux se préparer à la formation, il est quand même fortement recommandé de réviser le [[/wiki.gccollab.ca/PFAN - Formation PFAN|module 6 de la formation générale]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 3 heures et demie chacune. La première partie couvrira les attributs des œuvres et des expressions musicales, c’est-à-dire :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* titre privilégié d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* distribution d’exécution&lt;br /&gt;
* désignation numérique d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* tonalité et&lt;br /&gt;
* autre caractéristique d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La deuxième partie couvrira quant à elle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* la construction des points d'accès et des variantes de point d’accès représentant des œuvres et des expressions musicales&lt;br /&gt;
* les entités en relation ainsi que&lt;br /&gt;
* la maintenance du fichier Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/8148f230-56d9-4833-a25c-7f6baac6c2fb@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/cf33ae27-958d-40ab-baff-efe2f158a858@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Bernard Lemieux de l'Université de Montréal au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 28 mars 2023, il remplace officiellement Philippe Brosseau comme l'un des représentants du Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. Nous remercions chaleureusement Philippe pour sa contribution au comité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ajouts et modifications au wiki du PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le wiki, le '''contenu ajouté''' est identifié par l'étiquette &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. Le '''contenu modifié''' est identifié par du &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;texte en rouge&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9|Nouvel exemple avec $2 rvmgf]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Formation PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN|Arbres de décisions pour aider avec la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|Instruction et exemple pour une notice non différenciée de BAnQ sans numéro Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-30&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions pour les langues de la norme ISO 15919:2001 (Information et documentation -- Translittération du Devanagari et des écritures indiennes liées en caractères latins)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Correction des exemples de l'étape 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Bibliothèques participantes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Mise à jour des répondants]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Compilation et Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ sur les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_géographiques|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e|16.2.2.5, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Bases de données toponymiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Retrait des phrases &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser la sous-zone $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0 ou $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0, $1, $3, $4 ou $i.&amp;quot; dans différentes zones]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Point 2.c. sur les variantes de point d'accès sous l'étape 2 pour les modifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ sur les numéros Canadiana (zone 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_numéros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Quels_sont_les_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9riques_utilis.C3.A9s_dans_les_notices_Canadiana.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question sur les numéros Canadiana génériques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Entretien_du_fichier_bibliographique_.28EFB.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Entretien du fichier bibliographique (EFB)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3., Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification d'un énoncé]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_.E2.80.93_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision sur les renvois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Enregistrement_des_attributs_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_et_d.27une_expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Enregistrement des attributs d'une œuvre et d'une expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Titre_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9_constitu.C3.A9_uniquement_du_nom_d.27un_type_de_composition|6.14.2.5.2, Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type de composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choix_de_la_langue|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choix de la langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Forme_au_singulier_ou_au_pluriel|6.14.2.5.2.2, Forme au singulier ou au pluriel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Partie_identifi.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_fois_par_un_num.C3.A9ro_et_par_un_titre_ou_une_autre_d.C3.A9signation_verbale.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Partie identifiée à la fois par un numéro et par un titre ou une autre désignation verbale, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Deux_ou_plusieurs_parties.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Deux ou plusieurs parties, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.8.3.2C_.C5.92uvres_compl.C3.A8tes_d.27un_m.C3.AAme_type_de_composition_pour_une_m.C3.AAme_distribution_sp.C3.A9cifique_ou_diverses_distributions|6.14.2.8.3, Œuvres complètes d'un même type de composition pour une même distribution spécifique ou diverses distributions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|6.15.1.3, Enregistrement d'une distribution d'exécution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.5.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.5, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.1, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.3, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27ordre|6.16.1.3.1, Numéro d'ordre]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_de_catalogue_th.C3.A9matique|6.16.1.3.3, Numéro de catalogue thématique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_transcriptions.2C_etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, transcriptions, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.27.1.9.2C_Ajouts_aux_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres|6.27.1.9, Ajouts aux points d'accès représentant des œuvres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1, Lignes directrices générales sur la construction des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Œuvres musicales avec des paroles, un livret, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1.9, Éléments additionnels dans les points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.3.2C_Point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_expression_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale|6.28.3, Point d'accès autorisé représentant une expression d'une œuvre musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.4.2C_Variante_de_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_.C5.93uvre_ou_une_expression_musicale|6.28.4, Variante de point d'accès représentant une œuvre ou une expression musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|Précision pour les notices d'autorité existante]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.17.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_tonalit.C3.A9|6.17.1.3, Enregistrement d'une tonalité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#.C3.89tablissement_de_certaines_entit.C3.A9s_dans_le_fichier_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms|Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-mati.C3.A8re|Instruction pour les notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|Instruction pour les sous-zones obsolètes $l et $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#023_ISSN_de_regroupement|Zone 023, ISSN de regroupement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille|Instruction pour la sous-zone $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.E2.80.99une_relation_.C3.A0_une_collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation|32.1.1.3, Enregistrement d’une relation à une collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Groupe_1_-_Vedettes_du_groupe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_de_noms|Catégorie « Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named » révisée pour « Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual » (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Suppression de : préférer une notice qui a déjà une 016 à une qui n'en a pas.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_FAQ_sur_les_compilations_d%27œuvres_d%27un_même_agent|FAQ sur les compilations d'œuvres d'un même agent.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#10.0.2C_Identification_des_familles|10.0, Identification des familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Enfants_et_petits-enfants_de_personnes_royales|9.4.1.4.3, Enfants et petits-enfants de personnes royales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms|Précisions apportées dans les zones 008/32, 371, 377 et 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles| Lien pour Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Format_des_zones_670| Nouvel exemple illustrant comment citer une sous-page de site Web]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667| Modification de la note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Foire aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_la_romanisation| FAQ sur la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité directeur&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_directeur| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité des normes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_des_normes| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précision pour le numéro à indiquer dans la note 667 sous Étape 2, Notice à supprimer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Bibliothèque_et_Archives_Canada|Lien pour le wiki de BAC]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision pour certains principes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.2C_Collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|32.1, Collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Lorsqu.E2.80.99une_collectivit.C3.A9_a_port.C3.A9_plus_d.E2.80.99un_nom_et_qu.E2.80.99il_existe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_pour_les_autres_noms_dans_Canadiana.2C_lesquelles_doit-on_mettre_en_relation_avec_des_zones_5XX.3F_Dans_quels_cas_doit-on_r.C3.A9viser_les_autorit.C3.A9s_des_collectivit.C3.A9s_mises_en_relation.3F|Question 7 sur les collectivités en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Nouveaux répondants pour certaines institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Mise_.C3.A0_jour_des_notices_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_existantes|Précision importante concernant les notices indifférenciées existantes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.3.4.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_p.C3.A9riode_d.27activit.C3.A9_d.27une_personne_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.3.4.3, Enregistrement d'une période d'activité d'une personne]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour le terme &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; ajoutée à la zone 1XX de la liste]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9|Précision sur les changements de nom des groupes associés]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour les notices d'autorité codées FrPBN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Comment_d.C3.A9terminer_l.27usage_pour_le_nom_d.27un_agent_dans_WMS.3F|Question 8 sur l'usage du nom d'un agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation de l'hébreu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision ajoutée pour la zone 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#G.C3.A9n.C3.A9ralit.C3.A9s|Généralités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Précision concernant les comtés aux États-Unis]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur_.5BNouveau.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées dans la section Généralités; ajout de sections sur la répétabilité, les dates divergentes et les dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées pour un URI inclus dans la sous-zone $u]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Crit.C3.A8res_d.27admissibilit.C3.A9_au_PFAN_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Critères d'admissibilité et attentes envers les nouveaux membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Correction de l'indice PQ pour la littérature canadienne française]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Instruction sur les sous-zones $q et $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress_.5BNouveau.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21/053&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress|Précision concernant le deuxième indicateur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Table pour l'amharique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|Ne plus utiliser cette zone]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles|Lien vers &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Présentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 sur les congrès, etc., annulés ou hybrides]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précisions ajoutées aux zones 046 et 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_cod.C3.A9es_comme_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_qui_ne_repr.C3.A9sentent_en_fait_qu.27une_seule_identit.C3.A9|Précision ajoutée pour les notices codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» par erreur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation du yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique_.5BNouveau.5D|Code local de région géographique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_de_promulgation_d.E2.80.99une_loi.2C_etc._.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.29.1.29, Date de promulgation d’une loi, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2C_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2, Nom de collectivité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information_.5BNouveau.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources d'information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Doit-on_modifier_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions_d.27un_agent_.28p._ex._un_auteur_ou_un_compositeur.29_si_la_forme_retenue_pour_l.27agent_seul_est_diff.C3.A9rente_de_celle_utilis.C3.A9e_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions.3F|Question 4 sur la modification des points d'accès autorisés pour les œuvres et expressions d'un agent]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_g%C3%A9ographiques|FAQ sur les noms géographiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation_.5BNouveau.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667|Deux nouveaux exemples de notes 667 (pour les notices d'autorité de nom indifférenciées représentant une seule identité et celles faisant l'objet d'une modification partielle)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Renvois (4XX et 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ-Numéros Canadiana&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_num%C3%A9ros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Qui_contacter_lorsqu.27on_a_besoin_d.27une_nouvelle_liste_de_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_pour_la_zone_016.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question 4 sur l'obtention d'une nouvelle liste de numéros Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Livret et Paroles)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions ajoutées en ce qui concerne le chinois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible_.5BNouveau.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Communications_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Principles généraux]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|022]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9|024]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#335_Plan_d.27extension_.5BNouveau.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|375]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9|384]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible|385]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur|386]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9|510]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme|530]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Deux nouvelles langues (coréen et japonais)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Ajout d'une instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Projet_2._Notices_cr.C3.A9.C3.A9es_et_r.C3.A9vis.C3.A9es_dans_le_cadre_du_projet_de_mentorat_des_universit.C3.A9s|Précisions ajoutées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |Renvois « voir » (4XX) simples]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Composition|Composition du Comité directeur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Nouvel article sur le PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNouveau.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Ajout de tables de romanisation de la BnF pour l'arménien, le biélorusse, le bulgare, le géorgien, le macédonien, le russe et l'ukrainien]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|Remplacement d'exemples RVM par RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précisions apportées à l'instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions|Précisions apportées au point 3 et à l'exemple 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure pour les notices dérivées du LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_pour_les_notices_d.C3.A9riv.C3.A9es_du_LC.2FNAF|Précision apportée à l'exemple du modèle d'une note 670 ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#PFAN-MUSIQUE-L_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Liste de discussion PFAN-MUSIQUE-L]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Ajout d'information dans différentes zones.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Éléments RDA fondamentaux pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Éléments_RDA_fondamentaux_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous l'élément ''collectivités en relation''.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Zones MARC obligatoires pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Zones_MARC_obligatoires_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous les zones 510, 511, 551.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouvelle introduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-03-11''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=145031</id>
		<title>PFAN - Annonces et mises à jour</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=145031"/>
		<updated>2026-03-13T19:28:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 2026 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - News and Updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annonces =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Annonce'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Nous sommes ravis d’accueillir Marilyne Guertin, de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 13 janvier 2026, elle succède à Marie Chantal L’Ecuyer Coelho à titre de représentante de BAnQ et de coprésidente du Comité. De son côté, Marie Chantal remplacera Izidor Cirnatiu, qui quitte le Comité après sept années d’implication. Nous tenons à exprimer notre sincère gratitude à Izidor pour son engagement au sein du PFAN. Son expertise et son engagement ont été essentiels à la création du Comité et à ses nombreuses réalisations. Merci Izidor, et bienvenue à Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une '''formation sur la romanisation''' sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 18 et 25 novembre prochains, de 10 h à 12 h. Cette activité a été préparée par Rachel Gagnon et Daniel Paradis, et sera présentée par Rachel Gagnon, bibliothécaire principale à Bibliothèque et Archives Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN, auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la romanisation selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter la formation générale offerte en 2020 et à savoir quand appliquer les tables de romanisation du PFAN.  Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; par conséquent, elle ne répétera pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 2 heures chacune.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''18 novembre''', la première partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les principes de bases et les définitions&lt;br /&gt;
* RDA et le début de la démarche&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de personnes&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''25 novembre''', la deuxième partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de familles&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de collectivités&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
* Les titres privilégiés pour les œuvres&lt;br /&gt;
* La foire aux questions&lt;br /&gt;
* Les zones MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/01367886-b1fd-434a-bccb-a4b86931f74f@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 1]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/5822e340-3ced-4d47-905e-2f658e7dc7f6@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Marie-Chantal L’Écuyer-Coelho de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 23 septembre 2024, elle remplace Daniel Paradis comme représentante de BAnQ et co-présidente du comité.  Nous remercions chaleureusement Daniel Paradis pour sa grande contribution au PFAN. Sa participation et son expertise ont grandement influencé la création et les nombreuses réalisations du Comité.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une formation gratuite sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales dans le fichier Canadiana sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 28 et 30 mai prochains, de 9 h à 12 h 30. Elle a été préparée et sera présentée par les spécialistes du catalogage de la musique que sont :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Rachel Gagnon, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
* Guillaume Lizotte, Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
* Daniel Paradis, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
* Lina Picard, Université de Montréal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter le module 6 de la formation générale donnée en 2020, lequel excluait les œuvres et les expressions musicales. Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; elle ne répétera donc pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées. Afin de mieux se préparer à la formation, il est quand même fortement recommandé de réviser le [[/wiki.gccollab.ca/PFAN - Formation PFAN|module 6 de la formation générale]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 3 heures et demie chacune. La première partie couvrira les attributs des œuvres et des expressions musicales, c’est-à-dire :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* titre privilégié d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* distribution d’exécution&lt;br /&gt;
* désignation numérique d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* tonalité et&lt;br /&gt;
* autre caractéristique d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La deuxième partie couvrira quant à elle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* la construction des points d'accès et des variantes de point d’accès représentant des œuvres et des expressions musicales&lt;br /&gt;
* les entités en relation ainsi que&lt;br /&gt;
* la maintenance du fichier Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/8148f230-56d9-4833-a25c-7f6baac6c2fb@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/cf33ae27-958d-40ab-baff-efe2f158a858@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Bernard Lemieux de l'Université de Montréal au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 28 mars 2023, il remplace officiellement Philippe Brosseau comme l'un des représentants du Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. Nous remercions chaleureusement Philippe pour sa contribution au comité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ajouts et modifications au wiki du PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le wiki, le '''contenu ajouté''' est identifié par l'étiquette &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. Le '''contenu modifié''' est identifié par du &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;texte en rouge&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9|Nouvel exemple avec $2 rvmgf]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Formation PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN|Arbres de décisions pour aider avec la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-30&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions pour les langues de la norme ISO 15919:2001 (Information et documentation -- Translittération du Devanagari et des écritures indiennes liées en caractères latins)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Correction des exemples de l'étape 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Bibliothèques participantes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Mise à jour des répondants]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Compilation et Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ sur les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_géographiques|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e|16.2.2.5, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Bases de données toponymiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Retrait des phrases &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser la sous-zone $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0 ou $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0, $1, $3, $4 ou $i.&amp;quot; dans différentes zones]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Point 2.c. sur les variantes de point d'accès sous l'étape 2 pour les modifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ sur les numéros Canadiana (zone 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_numéros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Quels_sont_les_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9riques_utilis.C3.A9s_dans_les_notices_Canadiana.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question sur les numéros Canadiana génériques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Entretien_du_fichier_bibliographique_.28EFB.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Entretien du fichier bibliographique (EFB)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3., Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification d'un énoncé]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_.E2.80.93_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision sur les renvois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Enregistrement_des_attributs_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_et_d.27une_expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Enregistrement des attributs d'une œuvre et d'une expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Titre_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9_constitu.C3.A9_uniquement_du_nom_d.27un_type_de_composition|6.14.2.5.2, Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type de composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choix_de_la_langue|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choix de la langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Forme_au_singulier_ou_au_pluriel|6.14.2.5.2.2, Forme au singulier ou au pluriel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Partie_identifi.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_fois_par_un_num.C3.A9ro_et_par_un_titre_ou_une_autre_d.C3.A9signation_verbale.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Partie identifiée à la fois par un numéro et par un titre ou une autre désignation verbale, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Deux_ou_plusieurs_parties.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Deux ou plusieurs parties, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.8.3.2C_.C5.92uvres_compl.C3.A8tes_d.27un_m.C3.AAme_type_de_composition_pour_une_m.C3.AAme_distribution_sp.C3.A9cifique_ou_diverses_distributions|6.14.2.8.3, Œuvres complètes d'un même type de composition pour une même distribution spécifique ou diverses distributions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|6.15.1.3, Enregistrement d'une distribution d'exécution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.5.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.5, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.1, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.3, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27ordre|6.16.1.3.1, Numéro d'ordre]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_de_catalogue_th.C3.A9matique|6.16.1.3.3, Numéro de catalogue thématique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_transcriptions.2C_etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, transcriptions, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.27.1.9.2C_Ajouts_aux_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres|6.27.1.9, Ajouts aux points d'accès représentant des œuvres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1, Lignes directrices générales sur la construction des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Œuvres musicales avec des paroles, un livret, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1.9, Éléments additionnels dans les points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.3.2C_Point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_expression_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale|6.28.3, Point d'accès autorisé représentant une expression d'une œuvre musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.4.2C_Variante_de_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_.C5.93uvre_ou_une_expression_musicale|6.28.4, Variante de point d'accès représentant une œuvre ou une expression musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|Précision pour les notices d'autorité existante]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.17.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_tonalit.C3.A9|6.17.1.3, Enregistrement d'une tonalité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#.C3.89tablissement_de_certaines_entit.C3.A9s_dans_le_fichier_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms|Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-mati.C3.A8re|Instruction pour les notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|Instruction pour les sous-zones obsolètes $l et $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#023_ISSN_de_regroupement|Zone 023, ISSN de regroupement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille|Instruction pour la sous-zone $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.E2.80.99une_relation_.C3.A0_une_collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation|32.1.1.3, Enregistrement d’une relation à une collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Groupe_1_-_Vedettes_du_groupe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_de_noms|Catégorie « Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named » révisée pour « Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual » (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Suppression de : préférer une notice qui a déjà une 016 à une qui n'en a pas.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_FAQ_sur_les_compilations_d%27œuvres_d%27un_même_agent|FAQ sur les compilations d'œuvres d'un même agent.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#10.0.2C_Identification_des_familles|10.0, Identification des familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Enfants_et_petits-enfants_de_personnes_royales|9.4.1.4.3, Enfants et petits-enfants de personnes royales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms|Précisions apportées dans les zones 008/32, 371, 377 et 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles| Lien pour Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Format_des_zones_670| Nouvel exemple illustrant comment citer une sous-page de site Web]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667| Modification de la note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Foire aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_la_romanisation| FAQ sur la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité directeur&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_directeur| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité des normes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_des_normes| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précision pour le numéro à indiquer dans la note 667 sous Étape 2, Notice à supprimer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Bibliothèque_et_Archives_Canada|Lien pour le wiki de BAC]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision pour certains principes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.2C_Collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|32.1, Collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Lorsqu.E2.80.99une_collectivit.C3.A9_a_port.C3.A9_plus_d.E2.80.99un_nom_et_qu.E2.80.99il_existe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_pour_les_autres_noms_dans_Canadiana.2C_lesquelles_doit-on_mettre_en_relation_avec_des_zones_5XX.3F_Dans_quels_cas_doit-on_r.C3.A9viser_les_autorit.C3.A9s_des_collectivit.C3.A9s_mises_en_relation.3F|Question 7 sur les collectivités en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Nouveaux répondants pour certaines institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Mise_.C3.A0_jour_des_notices_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_existantes|Précision importante concernant les notices indifférenciées existantes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.3.4.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_p.C3.A9riode_d.27activit.C3.A9_d.27une_personne_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.3.4.3, Enregistrement d'une période d'activité d'une personne]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour le terme &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; ajoutée à la zone 1XX de la liste]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9|Précision sur les changements de nom des groupes associés]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour les notices d'autorité codées FrPBN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Comment_d.C3.A9terminer_l.27usage_pour_le_nom_d.27un_agent_dans_WMS.3F|Question 8 sur l'usage du nom d'un agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation de l'hébreu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision ajoutée pour la zone 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#G.C3.A9n.C3.A9ralit.C3.A9s|Généralités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Précision concernant les comtés aux États-Unis]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur_.5BNouveau.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées dans la section Généralités; ajout de sections sur la répétabilité, les dates divergentes et les dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées pour un URI inclus dans la sous-zone $u]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Crit.C3.A8res_d.27admissibilit.C3.A9_au_PFAN_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Critères d'admissibilité et attentes envers les nouveaux membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Correction de l'indice PQ pour la littérature canadienne française]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Instruction sur les sous-zones $q et $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress_.5BNouveau.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21/053&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress|Précision concernant le deuxième indicateur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Table pour l'amharique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|Ne plus utiliser cette zone]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles|Lien vers &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Présentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 sur les congrès, etc., annulés ou hybrides]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précisions ajoutées aux zones 046 et 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_cod.C3.A9es_comme_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_qui_ne_repr.C3.A9sentent_en_fait_qu.27une_seule_identit.C3.A9|Précision ajoutée pour les notices codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» par erreur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation du yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique_.5BNouveau.5D|Code local de région géographique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_de_promulgation_d.E2.80.99une_loi.2C_etc._.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.29.1.29, Date de promulgation d’une loi, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2C_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2, Nom de collectivité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information_.5BNouveau.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources d'information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Doit-on_modifier_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions_d.27un_agent_.28p._ex._un_auteur_ou_un_compositeur.29_si_la_forme_retenue_pour_l.27agent_seul_est_diff.C3.A9rente_de_celle_utilis.C3.A9e_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions.3F|Question 4 sur la modification des points d'accès autorisés pour les œuvres et expressions d'un agent]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_g%C3%A9ographiques|FAQ sur les noms géographiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation_.5BNouveau.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667|Deux nouveaux exemples de notes 667 (pour les notices d'autorité de nom indifférenciées représentant une seule identité et celles faisant l'objet d'une modification partielle)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Renvois (4XX et 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ-Numéros Canadiana&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_num%C3%A9ros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Qui_contacter_lorsqu.27on_a_besoin_d.27une_nouvelle_liste_de_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_pour_la_zone_016.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question 4 sur l'obtention d'une nouvelle liste de numéros Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Livret et Paroles)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions ajoutées en ce qui concerne le chinois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible_.5BNouveau.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Communications_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Principles généraux]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|022]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9|024]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#335_Plan_d.27extension_.5BNouveau.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|375]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9|384]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible|385]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur|386]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9|510]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme|530]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Deux nouvelles langues (coréen et japonais)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Ajout d'une instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Projet_2._Notices_cr.C3.A9.C3.A9es_et_r.C3.A9vis.C3.A9es_dans_le_cadre_du_projet_de_mentorat_des_universit.C3.A9s|Précisions ajoutées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |Renvois « voir » (4XX) simples]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Composition|Composition du Comité directeur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Nouvel article sur le PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNouveau.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Ajout de tables de romanisation de la BnF pour l'arménien, le biélorusse, le bulgare, le géorgien, le macédonien, le russe et l'ukrainien]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|Remplacement d'exemples RVM par RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précisions apportées à l'instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions|Précisions apportées au point 3 et à l'exemple 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure pour les notices dérivées du LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_pour_les_notices_d.C3.A9riv.C3.A9es_du_LC.2FNAF|Précision apportée à l'exemple du modèle d'une note 670 ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#PFAN-MUSIQUE-L_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Liste de discussion PFAN-MUSIQUE-L]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Ajout d'information dans différentes zones.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Éléments RDA fondamentaux pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Éléments_RDA_fondamentaux_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous l'élément ''collectivités en relation''.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Zones MARC obligatoires pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Zones_MARC_obligatoires_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous les zones 510, 511, 551.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouvelle introduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-03-11''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN&amp;diff=145030</id>
		<title>PFAN - Formation PFAN</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN&amp;diff=145030"/>
		<updated>2026-03-13T19:26:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - PFAN Training]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:80%;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+  &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top; background-color:gray; color:white; border:solid 0 1px white; width:30%;&amp;quot;|Module&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top; background-color:gray; color:white; border:solid 0 1px white; width:35%;&amp;quot;|Présentation PowerPoint&lt;br /&gt;
Format PPTX&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top; background-color:gray; color:white; border:solid 0 1px white; width:35%;&amp;quot;|Présentation PowerPoint&lt;br /&gt;
Format PDF (sans les notes du présentateur)&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 1&lt;br /&gt;
Fondements du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Media:Module 1 Fondements du PFAN.pptx|Module 1 _ Fondements du PFAN.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_1___Fondements_du_PFAN.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 1 Fondements du PFAN.pdf|Module 1 _ Fondements du PFAN.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_1___Fondements_du_PFAN.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 2&lt;br /&gt;
Description des personnes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 2 Description des personnes.pptx|Module 2 _ Description des personnes.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_2___Description_des_personnes.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
||[[Media:Module 2 Description des personnes.pdf|Module 2 _ Description des personnes.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_2___Description_des_personnes.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 3 &lt;br /&gt;
Description des familles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Dernière mise à jour : 2020-05-04)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 3 Description des familles.pptx|Module 3 _ Description des familles.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_3___Description_des_familles.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
||[[Media:Module 3 Description des familles.pdf|Module 3 _ Description des familles.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_3___Description_des_familles.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 4&lt;br /&gt;
Description des collectivité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 4 Description des collectivités.pptx|Module 4 _ Description des collectivités.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_4___Description_des_collectivités.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
||[[Media:Module 4 Description des collectivités.pdf|Module 4 _ Description des collectivités.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_4___Description_des_collectivités.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 5&lt;br /&gt;
Description des lieux&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 5 Description des lieux.pptx|Module 5 _ Description des lieux.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_5___Description_des_lieux.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 5 Description des lieux.pdf|Module 5 _ Description des lieux.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_5___Description_des_lieux.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 6&lt;br /&gt;
Description des œuvres et des expressions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Dernière mise à jour : 2020-05-17)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 6 Description des oeuvres et des expressions.pptx|Module 6 _ Description des oeuvres et des expressions.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_6___Description_des_oeuvres_et_des_expressions.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 6 Description des oeuvres et des expressions.pdf|Module 6 _ Description des oeuvres et des expressions.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_6___Description_des_oeuvres_et_des_expressions.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 6a&lt;br /&gt;
Description des œuvres et des expressions musicales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2024-06-05; Corrections mineures : 2025-02-13)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 6a Description des oeuvres et des expressions musicales.pptx|Module 6a _ Description des oeuvres et des expressions musicales.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_6a_Description_des_oeuvres_et_des_expressions_musicales.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 6 Description des oeuvres et des expressions musicales.pdf|Module 6a _ Description des oeuvres et des expressions musicales.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_6___Description_des_oeuvres_et_des_expressions_musicales.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 7&lt;br /&gt;
Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 7 Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms.pptx|Module 7 _ Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_7___Changements_apportés_aux_notices_d'autorité_de_noms.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 7 Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms.pdf|Module 7 _ Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_7___Changements_apportés_aux_notices_d'autorité_de_noms.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 8&lt;br /&gt;
Administration du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Dernière mise à jour : 2020-05-04)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 8 Administration du PFAN.pptx|Module 8 _ Administration du PFAN.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_8___Administration_du_PFAN.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 8 Administration du PFAN.pdf|Module 8 _ Administration du PFAN.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_8___Administration_du_PFAN.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|La romanisation des noms&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Dernière mise à jour : 2025-11-17; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Corrections mineures : 2025-12-03)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Arbres de décisions'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Romanisation_Nom_privilégié_d'une_personne.pdf|&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Romanisation - Nom privilégié d'une personne&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Romanisation_Titre_privilégié_d'une_œuvre.pdf|&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Romanisation - Titre privilégié d'une œuvre&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Romanisation_des_noms.pptx|Romanisation_des_noms.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Romanisation_des_noms.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Romanisation_des_noms.pdf|Romanisation_des_noms.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Romanisation_des_noms.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145029</id>
		<title>PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145029"/>
		<updated>2026-03-13T18:55:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Notices codées comme indifférenciées qui ne représentent en fait qu'une seule identité */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par D. Paradis, 12 septembre)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par N. Mainville, 26 février)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours| 24 h (En cours d'édition par A. Dunnett, BAC, 24 mars)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Guide}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:PFAN - Name Authority Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  Notices d'autorité de nom ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notices d'autorité de collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--En octobre et novembre 2021, les passages du Guide concernant les collections ont été cachés par souci de cohérence avec la décision de ne pas permettre la création ni la révision des notices d'autorité de collections. DP 1er novembre 2021--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 008 Éléments de données de longueur fixe =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Règles de catalogage descriptif ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée de quelque façon que ce soit, évaluer la notice d'autorité et la modifier pour qu'elle soit conforme à RDA, en modifiant le codage de la zone 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1 : Si une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée uniquement par la modification ou l'ajout d'une zone 5XX, on encourage fortement les catalogueurs, bien qu'il n'y ait pas d'obligation, à évaluer la notice et à la modifier selon RDA, en changeant le 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2 : Les autorités de noms indifférenciés codées 008/10 «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;», peuvent être modifiées de manière à enlever une ou plusieurs identités afin de créer des notices différenciées conformes à RDA. Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié à cette fin, la notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié mise à jour doit conserver le code 008/10 existant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-24]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F10 R.C3.A8gles de catalogage descriptif|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Système de vedettes-matière / Thésaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone 008/11 de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) dans la zone 008/11 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) dans la zone 008/11, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/15 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;dans la zone 008/11 des&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples de noms de collectivités ne pouvant être utilisés comme vedettes-matière :''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis.  Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran.  Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois.  Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique.  Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; margin-left: 0px; padding-left: 15px; padding-top: 10px; padding-bottom: 10px; text-indent: 0px; line-height: 1.0; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;tats-Unis. Pr&amp;amp;eacute;sident (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;glise catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Church of England. Dioc&amp;amp;egrave;se de Londres. &amp;amp;Eacute;v&amp;amp;ecirc;que (1675-1713 : Compton)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F11 Syst.C3.A8me de vedettes-mati.C3.A8re .2F Th.C3.A9saurus|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Utilisation de la vedette – vedette-matière secondaire ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Généralités&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de famille&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Appropriée) dans la zone 008/15 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) dans la zone 008/15, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/11 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Contexte'' : Pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, les catalogueurs descriptifs peuvent être amenés à établir un point d'accès autorisé pour le nom de la collectivité pour la fonction ainsi qu'un nom personnel pour le titulaire de la fonction. La politique d'indexation est d'attribuer seulement le nom personnel, et non le nom de la collectivité, comme point d'accès matière. Cette politique a été établie à des fins de colocalisation (voir [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). Par exemple, le point d'accès :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
peut être utilisé dans le catalogage descriptif comme point d'accès, mais en indexation seul le nom personnel serait utilisé comme point d'accès matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) aux notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F15 Utilisation de la vedette - vedette-mati.C3.A8re secondaire|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Nom de personne non différencié ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser le code 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (non différencié) dans une notice d'autorité de nom RDA. Attribuer la valeur 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes. Utiliser le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les familles, les collectivités et les lieux. Pour les œuvres et les expressions, attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» si le point d'accès commence par un nom de personne, sinon attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par le passé, la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 permettait de coder les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes comme non différenciées lorsque le catalogueur n'avait aucun moyen acceptable de différencier plusieurs personnes portant le même nom privilégié. Depuis sa création, le PFAN a suivi ces directives pour les notices d’autorité de noms de personnes :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas créer de nouvelles notices non différenciées codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Toutes les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes codéees RDA doivent être différenciées.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas ajouter une nouvelle identité à une notice d'autorité de nom de personne existante codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&lt;br /&gt;
* Appliquer plutôt [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] pour créer un point d'accès autorisé unique pour la personne, en utilisant des éléments additionnels appropriés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mise à jour des notices indifférenciées existantes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' Pour une entité donnée, si la seule notice trouvée est une notice indifférenciée (dont la zone 008/32 est codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;») versée par une université et comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;», ne pas l'utiliser.  Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité pour l'entité.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler à BAC la notice indifférenciée en communiquant son numéro de contrôle OCLC par courriel à l'adresse pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca et en mentionnant comme objet : Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice indifférenciée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante, en particulier une notice qui a été importée du LC/NAF, comprenne des paires de zones 670 utilisées pour regrouper l'information sur chaque personne visée par la notice d'autorité de nom. La première zone 670 de chaque paire est une zone 670 d'identification qui comprend un terme décrivant la relation de la personne avec le titre cité dans la deuxième zone 670 de la paire. Les données de la zone 670 d'identification sont enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a et sont mises entre crochets. La deuxième zone 670 de la paire est une zone 670 de citation qui comprend les éléments de données normaux dans la citation d'une ressource cataloguée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Auteur de Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Point d'accès supplémentaire pour Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Éditeur intellectuel de Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut aussi arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante comprenne une note 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée et identifiant la ou les ressources associées aux autres personnes portant le même nom. Dans ce cas, la notice ne comprend généralement pas de zones 670 pour les personnes autres que la première qui a été identifiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque de l'information pour distinguer une personne dans une notice d'autorité existante indifférenciée provenant de BAC ou de BAnQ est trouvée :&lt;br /&gt;
* Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour cette personne avec des informations distinctives et ajouter une indication que la personne était auparavant sur une notice indifférenciée (voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées|Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées]]&amp;amp;nbsp;», ci-dessous). Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour zone 670 de citation se rapportant à cette personne depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire. Ne pas transférer la zone 670 d'identification vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
* Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* Si la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée n'est pas supprimée parce que plusieurs identités restent, supprimer les zones 670 qui se rapportent à la personne maintenant représentée sur la nouvelle notice d'autorité (c’est-à-dire, dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, supprimer à la fois la zone 670 d’identification et la zone 670 de citation) et, le cas échéant, éditer ou supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée pour supprimer la mention de cette personne.&lt;br /&gt;
* S'il reste plus d'une identité dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée et qu'il n'y a pas suffisamment d'information pour créer de nouvelles notices d'autorité de nom pour chaque nom, laisser la notice d'autorité de nom codée RCAA2.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d’autorité de nom indifférenciée de BAnQ n’est pas supprimée, doit être modifiée ultérieurement et qu’elle ne comporte pas de numéro Canadiana, lui en attribuer un.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de faciliter le traitement automatisé des notices d'autorité (par exemple, appariement, liaison), lorsqu'il ne reste qu'une seule identité dans une notice d'autorité de nom de personne indifférenciée (c'est-à-dire lorsque les autres identités sont désambiguïsées et enlevées), procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'unique identité restante. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette identité, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;». Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Dans la nouvelle notice :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le cas échéant, transférer la citation 670 se rapportant à l'unique identité restante depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;S'assurer que la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée contient seulement de l'information se rapportant à l'unique identité restante (par exemple, les zones 670). Le cas échéant, supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, ajouter la notice 667 suivante pour garantir qu'une notice d'autorité de nom ne sera pas créée en double :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAC''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana] $z [Numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée dérivée du LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'autrice d'Esperanza :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAnQ''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a [aucun numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de: Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de: L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour Christian Bergeron (Sociologue) :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1056D8391F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian $c (Sociologue)iècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : 1063E5020F.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'individualisation des épreuves de la vie dans la modernité avancée, 2013 : $b page de titre (Christian Bergeron; Doctorat en sociologie; Université Laval [département déterminé selon la discipline])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 $b (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. Il reste deux identités non différenciées dans la notice :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1063E5020F [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de: Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter une note 667 à une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour identifier le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité dans laquelle l'information sur cette personne a déjà été enregistrée :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices codées comme indifférenciées qui ne représentent en fait qu'une seule identité ====&lt;br /&gt;
À l'occasion, il arrive qu'une notice soit codée comme étant indifférenciée, mais que de nouvelles recherches indiquent qu'en fait la notice ne représente qu'une seule identité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut également arriver qu’on soupçonne que la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été codée par erreur dans la zone 008/32. Dans ces situations, procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter une zone 667 à la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée indiquant qu'elle a été signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'identité. Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette personne, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple d'une notice indifférenciée versée qui ne représente qu'une seule identité''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [aucun numéro Canadiana, utiliser le numéro OCLC de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==008/33 Niveau de l'établissement==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''provisoires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Coder une notice d'autorité de nom comme provisoire (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») si le point d'accès autorisé ne peut être formulé de manière satisfaisante en raison d'informations insuffisantes. Si les informations nécessaires deviennent disponibles ultérieurement, réévaluer la notice d'autorité de nom et la mettre à jour pour qu'elle soit pleinement établie (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;»). En aucun cas, il ne faut créer une notice d'autorité de niveau provisoire avec un point d'accès qui entre en conflit avec une notice d'autorité de nom existante selon les règles de normalisation du PFAN.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Régions administratives spéciales de Hong Kong et de Macao'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Étant donné qu'il n'est pas certain que Hong Kong et Macao continueront à avoir deux langues officielles, coder toutes les notice d'autorité de nom pour les organismes gouvernementaux dans ces deux endroits, au niveau de la région administrative spéciale et en dessous, comme provisoires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;»), quelle que soit la langue dans laquelle le point d'accès autorisé a été établi. Si une forme dans la deuxième langue officielle devient disponible, ajouter cette forme comme variante de point d'accès plutôt que de réviser le point d'accès autorisé existant. Consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] et l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html énoncé de politique connexe] pour obtenir des instructions sur le choix de la langue du nom privilégié. Noter que cette politique concernant le statut provisoire ne s'applique pas aux organismes non gouvernementaux.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Informations supplémentaires pour les participants au PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN peuvent créer des notices provisoires dans les deux situations exceptionnelles suivantes :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'a pas l'expertise linguistique nécessaire pour établir le point d'accès autorisé comme une notice d'autorité pleinement établie; cela comprend les situations où la bibliothèque ne dispose pas de sources de référence adéquates pour la recherche ou lorsque le catalogueur n'est pas sûr de la forme grammaticale correcte du point d'accès.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'est pas en mesure, en raison de ressources limitées ou d'autres contraintes, de compléter le travail pour les autorités en relation ou de déterminer la structure de renvois appropriée qui est requise pour les notices d'autorité pleinement établies.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''préliminaires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité préliminaires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») sont généralement le résultat de projets rétrospectifs. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs du PFAN procèdent régulièrement à des mises à jour des notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils apportent d'autres modifications à la notice d'autorité. À cause de cette exigence de mise à jour, les participants au PFAN sont priés de communiquer avec le Comité des normes avant d'entreprendre des projets qui pourraient entraîner l'ajout massif de notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» au fichier d'autorité Canadiana.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Au besoin, les catalogueurs peuvent mettre à jour les notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils travaillent avec des notices de collectivités antérieures/postérieures, bien que le ou les points d'accès dans les notices mises à jour ne soient pas utilisés dans la base de données bibliographiques locale. À l'occasion, les catalogueurs peuvent avoir besoin de créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom sans avoir de ressource en main, par exemple pour un nom de collectivité antérieur ou postérieur, en utilisant des renseignements provenant de sources de référence, ou pour un point d'accès basé sur des renseignements trouvés dans la sous-zone «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» de la zone 245 de notices bibliographiques, lorsqu'ils résolvent des conflits entre notices d'autorité de noms. Ne pas coder ces notices d'autorité de noms occasionnelles comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaires&amp;amp;nbsp;» .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, les éléments de données des collections doivent être vérifiés sur la publication et les notices d'autorité de collections doivent être codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (complet). Dans le travail d'autorité post-catalogage, il est permis de créer des notices d'autorité de collections sans la ressource en main; ces notices sont codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» (préliminaire). Lorsqu'une publication appartenant à la collection a été examinée et que la notice d'autorité préliminaire a été revue et mise à jour au besoin, mettre la notice d'autorité de collection au niveau complet.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F33_Niveau_de_l.27.C3.A9tablissement |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Source du catalogage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quelle que soit la valeur codée à l'origine dans cette zone, ne pas changer cette valeur lors de la mise à jour d'une notice, sauf si la valeur d'origine est incorrecte. La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;blanc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F39_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 Numéro de contrôle de la notice d'autorité de BAC = &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 016 est obligatoire lorsque le catalogueur crée, met à jour ou utilise une autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité et lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante sans numéro Canadiana, vérifier dans le LC/NAF si la même entité est représentée par une autorité et si celle-ci comporte un numéro Canadiana. Noter que le point d'accès autorisé dans le LC/NAF pourrait avoir une forme différente de celui dans Canadiana. Si la notice dans le LC/NAF comporte un numéro Canadiana, ajouter ce numéro dans la notice Canadiana. Si le numéro se termine par le code de langue E, le changer pour le code F. S'il n'y a pas de code de langue, ajouter le code F à la fin du numéro.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante avec numéro Canadiana, vérifier que le code de langue F est présent à la fin de la zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Doublons'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» un numéro Canadiana. Une fois qu'une notice d'autorité pour une entité donnée a été créée et qu'un numéro Canadiana lui a été attribué, ne pas changer les données dans cette notice pour représenter une entité DIFFÉRENTE. Par exemple, ne pas changer une notice d'autorité pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Dupont, Jean&amp;amp;nbsp;» en une pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Tremblay, Marie&amp;amp;nbsp;» (sauf si le nom de la personne a changé).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, demander à faire supprimer la notice (voir [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dures_sur_les_doublons|Procédures sur les doublons]]). NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il y a une zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, enregistrer le numéro Canadiana qui s'y trouve dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il n'y a pas de zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, en ajouter une en utilisant le numéro 0000X0000F. Ne pas enregistrer ce numéro dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée. Dans ce Guide, voir aussi «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Doublons|Doublons]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, supprimer la notice. NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer le numéro Canadiana de la notice supprimée dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice conservée.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Notices versées en lot partiellement modifiées'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité versées en lot qui sont modifiées partiellement selon la [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]] comportent le numéro Canadiana 1111X1111F. Ce numéro temporaire est ajouté pour permettre l'enregistrement de la notice en attendant que celle-ci soit évaluée pour s'assurer qu'elle répond aux normes du PFAN. Ce numéro doit être remplacé par un numéro unique lorsque la notice est évaluée et que la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;» est supprimée.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 Numéro international normalisé des publications en série =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'ISSN chaque fois qu'il est fourni dans le document en main, dans les notices bibliographiques analytiques ou dans la notice bibliographique pour la collection cataloguée dans son ensemble; sinon, enregistrer l'ISSN est facultatif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on sait que des ISSN distincts ont été attribués à différents formats d'une collection représentée par une seule notice d'autorité, il est préférable d'enregistrer dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 022 l'ISSN qui est l'ISSN de liaison (ISSN-L) pour ces différents formats. Enregistrer les ISSN pour les formats spécifiques dans des zones 667 distinctes, en suivant ce modèle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre d'une publication a changé, il est important de s'assurer que l'ISSN figurant sur la publication appartient au nouveau titre et non au titre précédent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un ISSN incorrect peut être indiqué dans une zone 667 (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;L'ISSN 1122-3344 n'est pas un ISSN valide pour cette publication&amp;amp;nbsp;»).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Autre numéro ou code normalisé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les lignes directrices des [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf ''NACO 024 Best Practices Guidelines'']. En règle générale, limiter à cinq le nombre de zones 024 dans une notice d'autorité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 024 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les identifiants codés dans la zone 024 des notices d'autorité du PFAN. Lorsqu'une zone 024 est présente dans une notice &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;d'autorité&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; qui fait l'objet d'une suppression (par exemple, dans le cas d'un doublon), les catalogueurs doivent transférer le contenu de la zone dans la notice qui doit être conservée. Lorsque deux notices d'autorité sont regroupées en une seule et que chacune des notices comporte une zone 024 différente, les catalogueurs doivent inclure les deux zones 024 dans la notice conservée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Données mathématiques codées sur les documents cartographiques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des pays, provinces, États, comtés'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les coordonnées des limites extérieures (rectangles de délimitation ou polygones) doivent généralement être utilisées avec des entités géographiques telles que des pays, des provinces, des États et des comtés pour identifier les coordonnées de l'entité. Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées en degrés/minutes/secondes, en degrés décimaux, en minutes décimales et/ou en secondes décimales. Les styles ne doivent pas être mélangés dans une même zone 034, mais la zone peut être répétée pour représenter les différents styles (voir ci-dessous pour les utilitaires de conversion); l'ordre des zones 034 lorsque les deux styles sont donnés n'a pas d'importance. Pour faciliter la réutilisation des coordonnées dans les applications géographiques, il faut employer le point et non la virgule comme signe décimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés/minutes/secondes''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux''' : enregistrement sous la forme hddd.dddddd (hémisphère-degrés.degrés décimaux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux avec plus et moins''' : enregistrer sous la forme +-ddd.dddddd (hémisphère[+/-]-degrés.décimaux) («&amp;amp;nbsp;+&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour N et E, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour S et W; le signe plus est facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple avec +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple sans le signe plus facultatif)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Minutes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmm.mmmm (hémisphère-degrés-minutes.minutes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Secondes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss.sss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes.secondes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons doivent généralement être enregistrées comme des points centraux plutôt que comme des limites extérieures. Pour la zone 034, la longitude et la latitude qui forment l'axe central sont enregistrées deux fois pour définir le point central (c'est-à-dire que les contenus des sous-zones $d et $e sont identiques et les contenus des sous-zones $f et $g sont identiques).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés/minutes/secondes)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux avec plus/moins)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Outils de conversion des coordonnées'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les institutions membres du PFAN sont encouragées à fournir des degrés/minutes/secondes et des degrés décimaux lorsqu'ils sont disponibles. De nombreux outils de conversion sont disponibles sur le Web pour dériver les uns des autres. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $2 a été définie pour l'enregistrement de la source des codes d'information sur les coordonnées - les sources couramment utilisées sont disponibles dans : [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CDC.html/view ''Codes sources pour les données cartographiques'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une citation de la source dans la zone 670 n'est pas nécessaire si la seule information provenant de la source est enregistrée dans la zone 034; une citation dans la zone 670 doit être faite si nécessaire pour enregistrer des informations en plus des coordonnées, telles que les variantes de nom, la hiérarchie, la période d'applicabilité, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#034_Donn.C3.A9es_math.C3.A9matiques_cod.C3.A9es_sur_les_documents_cartographiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 Numéro de contrôle de système =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#035_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_syst.C3.A8me |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Source du catalogage =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs doivent consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour les instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité nouvelles ou existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Langue de catalogage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $b fre ajoutée automatiquement par WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $d – Organisme responsable des modifications'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $d [code MARC 21] est ajoutée automatiquement par WMS lorsque la dernière sous-zone MARC $d dans la zone 040 n'est pas déjà celle de l'institution qui a modifié la notice. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $e – Règles de description'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on ajoute manuellement la sous-zone $e, ajouter la sous-zone après la sous-zone $b et avant la sous-zone $c. Il n'est pas nécessaire de déplacer la sous-zone $e à cette position si elle est déjà présente ailleurs dans le 040 ou si elle est ajoutée par une macro ou un gabarit. Lorsque la zone fixe 008/10 (Règles de catalogage descriptif) est changée pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Autre), la sous-zone $e rda est automatiquement ajoutée par le système.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#040_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Code d'authenticité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Cette zone se retrouve dans les notices d'autorité utilisées par BAC. Ne pas modifier ou supprimer cette zone lorsque le code CaOONL figure dans la 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les catalogueurs autres que ceux de BAC dérivent une notice à partir d'une notice de BAC contenant une zone 042, ils doivent s'assurer de supprimer cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les catalogueurs doivent ajouter la zone 042 $a nlc dans Canadiana chaque fois qu'ils créent, révisent ou dérivent une notice d'autorité. Ce code identifie le fichier «&amp;amp;nbsp;virtuel&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'autorité nationale canadienne qui est divisé en deux bases de données (LC/NAF et Canadiana).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-08]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#042_Code_d.27authenticit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Code de région géographique &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 043 peut seulement être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms géographiques (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone b – Code local de région géographique et Sous-zone $2 – Source du code local'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les lieux situés au Québec, les participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser la sous-zone $b pour enregistrer un code local tiré de la liste ci-dessous et représentant la région administrative du Québec où le lieu est situé. Ce code est formé du code de région géographique « n-cn--- » et d'un code local de sous-entité de deux lettres (p. ex., qa) qui identifie la région administrative et remplace les deux derniers caractères du code « n-cn--- » (p. ex. « n-cn-qa »). La sous-zone $b est enregistrée à la suite de la sous-zone $a et est suivie par la sous-zone $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Dates spéciales codées =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Lors de l'encodage de l'information sur la date, donner l'information la plus complète possible sur la date lorsque celle-ci est facilement disponible (la date dans la zone 046 peut être plus précise qu'une date utilisée dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2e_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Lors&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la révision des notices d'autorité existantes, enregistrer les dates dans la zone 046 même si le point d'accès lui-même n'a pas de dates dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d, lorsque l'information est facilement disponible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des dates dans la zone 046, utiliser la norme Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) dans tous les cas, sauf pour les siècles; fournir les dates en utilisant le modèle aaaa, aaaa-mm ou aaaa-mm-jj. Voir le tableau d'exemples dans l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Pour les spécifications complètes de l'EDTF, voir [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophoniste)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Blues around the clock, 1945 : $b étiquette (Johnny Hicks, saxophone ténor)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web Discogs, consulté le 27 mai 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; saxophoniste ténor qui a joué avec Tab Smith dans les années 1940)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de dates avant Jésus-Christ dans la zone 046, faire précéder les chiffres d'un trait d'union (signe moins). Comme il n'y a pas d'an zéro dans le calendrier de l'ère commune, il faut soustraire une année de la date réelle avant Jésus-Christ; par exemple, l'an 50 av. J.-C. est enregistré comme suit : -0049.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ##  $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement d'un siècle dans la zone 046, utiliser les deux premiers chiffres de l'intervalle de cent ans (par exemple, utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;16&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour représenter le 17&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle, 1600-1699).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Noter que le 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;er&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle apr. J.-C. est représenté par la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;00&amp;amp;nbsp;» et que les siècles av. J.-C. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sont précédés d'&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;un trait d'union &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(signe moins)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; avant les chiffres (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-04&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le 5&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle av. J.-C.). Un siècle approximatif (par exemple, activité environ 12&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle) ne peut pas être enregistré dans la zone 046.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Répétabilité'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;La zone 046 est répétable, mais les sous-zones de la zone 046 utilisées pour enregistrer les dates ne le sont pas. En général, une seule zone 046 avec des dates conformes à la norme EDTF devrait être suffisante. Cependant, les dates de siècles suivent la norme ISO 8601 et non la norme EDTF. Lors de l'enregistrement de dates de siècles en plus de dates plus précises, il faut donc répéter la zone 046.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates divergentes'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, les ressources consultées peuvent présenter des dates divergentes (par exemple, des dates de naissance ou de décès divergentes pour une personne ou des dates de début ou de fin divergentes pour une collectivité). Dans ces situations, la zone 046 doit refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'enregistrer toutes les dates divergentes en utilisant la zone 046, ni d'enregistrer une zone 046 pour chaque ressource consultée. L'évaluation des dates divergentes doit généralement avoir pour résultat une seule zone 046, contenant la ou les dates que le catalogueur juge les plus exactes pour représenter l'entité. Le catalogueur peut décider d'enregistrer ou non la ou les dates divergentes dans la zone 046 et il n'est pas nécessaire que la ou les dates enregistrées dans la zone 046 correspondent exactement à celle ou celles choisies pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;De même, toute date ajoutée au point d'accès autorisé devrait refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates, enregistrées conformément aux instructions de RDA et des énoncés de politique du PFAN. On peut considérer qu'une date qui prédomine dans les ressources consultées est la plus appropriée pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé. Si aucune date ne prédomine, le catalogueur peut décider d'utiliser le format «&amp;amp;nbsp;approximativement aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa?&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa ou aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans le point d'accès autorisé. Dans certains cas, des dates correspondant à la période d'activité de la personne (RDA 9.19.1.5) peuvent être préférables.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 157 av. J-C. comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce que c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 1907 comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Même exemple que ci-dessus illustrant une décision différente que le catalogueur aurait pu prendre concernant l'enregistrement de la sous-zone $f de la zone 046)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;La zone 046 étant basée sur des informations provenant de sources multiples, la justification ne peut être formulée avec précision dans une sous-zone $v/$u à la fin d'une zone 046. Les dates divergentes doivent être enregistrées dans des zones 670. Si une notice existante comporte une sous-zone $v/$u comme justification d'une zone 046 et que cette zone 046 est mise à jour comme décrit ci-dessus, il faut supprimer la sous-zone $v/$u et convertir la justification en une zone 670 si les dates divergentes ne sont pas déjà justifiées dans des zones 670 existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, il peut être nécessaire d'effectuer un calcul pour déterminer les dates à enregistrer dans la zone 046 et le point d'accès autorisé. De tels calculs peuvent produire des dates incertaines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Si les ressources consultées ne fournissent que la date de décès de la personne et son âge (en années) au moment du décès, comme cela se voit souvent dans les notices nécrologiques, l'année de naissance de la personne correspondra à l'une de deux années consécutives. Pour calculer ces années, il faut d'abord soustraire l'âge de l'année de décès, puis utiliser l'année ainsi obtenue et l'année précédente comme les deux possibilités pour l'année de naissance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a soustrait 75, l'âge au décès, de 1994, l'année du décès; l'année obtenue, 1919, et l'année qui la précède, 1918, représentent les deux années de naissance possibles)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si des dates non-grégoriennes figurent dans les ressources consultées, la conversion de ces dates en dates grégoriennes peut produire des dates incertaines. Il faut utiliser les dates du calendrier grégorien dans la zone 046 et dans le point d'accès autorisé. Il se peut qu'une même date dans un calendrier non-grégorien corresponde à l'une de deux dates grégoriennes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La date de 1346 dans le calendrier hégirien correspond à 1967 ou 1968 dans le calendrier grégorien.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de la norme de la date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter la sous-zone $2 edtf, sauf après un siècle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zones $q – Date de fondation, $r – Date de cessation,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Début de la période d'activité et $t – Fin de la période d'activité'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer les dates associées à un congrès, etc., ponctuel ou à une occurrence isolée dans une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] et [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), dans les sous-zones $s et $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer la date de fondation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) et la date de cessation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) d'une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]), si cette information est connue, dans les sous-zones $q et $r.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'utilisation des sous-zones $s et $t pour le début et la fin de la période d'activité dans les zones 368 et 370-376, voir les directives présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les instructions suivantes représentent la pratique du PFAN sur l'enregistrement des sources d'information dans les sous-zones $u et $v des zones où elles sont définies, et/ou dans la zone 670 :&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046$u$v&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Les zones 670 doivent être utilisées pour appuyer l'information utilisée comme une partie du point d'accès dans les zones 1XX et 4XX.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pour les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $v est facultatif si la même information/source est déjà citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;utiliser la sous-zone $v si l'information/source n'est pas citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $u est facultatif et celle-ci doit toujours être précédée de la sous-zone $v.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser une zone 670 si c'est nécessaire pour justifier l'information enregistrée dans d'autres zones pour lesquelles les sous-zones $u et $v ne sont pas définies ou sont définies différemment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des données dans la sous-zone $v (Source d'information) des zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381, suivre les mêmes principes de base pour la citation que ceux qui s'appliquent actuellement pour la zone 670, sous-zone $a (Citation de la source).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Fournir une information précise sur la citation (numéro de page, sous-page d'un site Web) dans la sous-zone $v si, selon le jugement du catalogueur, cette plus grande précision est nécessaire pour trouver l'information à l'intérieur de la source citée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information dans les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 est sous la même forme que celle trouvée dans la source, il n'est pas nécessaire de la citer. Si l'information enregistrée dans ces zones est sous une forme différente de celle dans la source, utiliser 670 $b (Information trouvée).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les sources matérielles :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information provient d'une source matérielle (par exemple, un livre imprimé, un support numérique amovible), la sous-zone $v doit contenir suffisamment d'information pour qu'un catalogueur puisse trouver la ressource citée dans un catalogue ou une base de données bibliographiques. Ceci peut généralement se limiter au titre propre et au nom de l'éditeur ou à la date. Si cette combinaison n'est pas unique, la citation du titre peut être précédée du nom du créateur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les ressources en ligne :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fournir suffisamment d'information pour permettre de trouver la ressource via un moteur de recherche. Inclure soit le titre et la date de publication (si c'est une ressource publiée formellement, tel un livre numérique), soit une description appropriée du document et la date d'accès (pour une ressource moins formelle). Facultativement, inclure la sous-zone $u.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-03]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Cote de la Library of Congress =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#050_Cote_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 Indice de la classification de la Library of Congress &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes pour enregistrer les indices de la classification LC des auteurs littéraires individuels, y compris les auteurs de littérature de jeunesse. Elle peut aussi être utilisée '''exceptionnellement''' dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes et de collectivités pour enregistrer les indices de biographie dans la fourchette ML410-429 de la classification LC lorsque le choix de l'indice ou du Cutter n'est pas évident. La zone 053 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il ne faut pas enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000 dans la zone 053. Pour l'utilisation des indices de la classe PS8000 dans les notices d'autorité de noms, voir la section [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]] de ce Guide. Une notice d'autorité pour un auteur littéraire canadien peut contenir à la fois une zone 053 et une zone 065.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Cote de Bibliothèque et Archives Canada =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#055_Cote_de_Biblioth.C3.A8que_et_Archives_Canada |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Autre indice de classification &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 065 sert à enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000. La zone 065 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $2 et une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [Code MARC de l’institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de l'indice'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour indiquer que l'indice provient de la classe PS8000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#065_Autre_indice_de_classification |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Cote de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#082_Cote_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Indice de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#083_Indice_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Cote de publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#086_Cote_de_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Indice de classification d'une publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#087_Indice_de_classification_d.27une_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Vedette – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participant au programme PFAN sont invités à consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour obtenir des instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité existantes ou nouvelles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer la ponctuation de fin de zone dans la zone 1XX à moins qu'elle ne fasse partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou qu'elle ne soit requise par les instructions de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Afin de minimiser l'impact de la maintenance de la base de données sur les notices bibliographiques associées et/ou les notices d'autorité associées, les catalogueurs sont priés de s'abstenir d'apporter des changements qui ne sont pas essentiels aux zones 1XX.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour le titre propre d'une monographie en plusieurs parties, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choix du titre propre d'une collection pour une monographie :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte plus d'une forme de mention de collection, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource porte une mention de collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture dans la même source, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte des pages de titre pour la collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2915.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Tenir compte de l'espacement et des changements dans la typographie au moment de déterminer où le titre de la collection commence et se termine. Consulter également [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Établissement d'un point d'accès pour une collection :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Déterminer le choix du point d'accès autorisé en fonction de l'instruction [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] et des énoncés de politique de BAC/BAnQ pour cette instruction.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclure du point d'accès autorisé les renseignements suivants inclus dans la mention de collection dans la notice bibliographique de la partie composante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'article initial dans les sous-zones $a, $t, $n et $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les compléments de titre;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;la mention de responsabilité;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les titres parallèles;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;les désignations numériques/chronologiques.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter un ou plusieurs qualificatifs entre parenthèses, le cas échéant, conformément aux énoncés de politique de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour obtenir des instructions sur la conversion d'une notice d'autorité de nom en notice d'autorité de collection, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Should an SAR be made?&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Vedette – Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour les familles'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;3&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une famille. Voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Les ajouts au nom sont contenus dans une seule paire de parenthèses séparées par des deux-points. &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Le terme pour le type de famille est ajouté après le nom et il est enregistré dans la sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $d (date) suit le terme pour le type de famille.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $c est utilisée pour un lieu associé à une famille et suit la date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $g est utilisée pour un membre illustre d'une famille. Donner le point d'accès autorisé pour la personne tel que trouvé dans la 1XX de la notice d'autorité de nom sans garder aucun codage de sous-zone interne.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour des personnes'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] fournit des directives sur l'emplacement des mots indiquant une relation (par exemple, Jr.) et le MARC définit la sous-zone $q comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme développée du nom de personne.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) La sous-zone $d (date) doit toujours être le dernier élément dans une zone 100 sauf si le terme (Esprit) est ajouté au nom. Ajouter $c (Esprit) comme dernier élément d'une zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) En général ajouter la sous-zone $c avant la sous-zone $q lorsqu'on ajoute aussi des mots, des chiffres, etc., indiquant une relation. (Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5.] pour le traitement des noms portugais)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MAIS&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
3) Pour les situations exceptionnelles, par exemple lorsque la sous-zone $a ne contient qu'un nom de famille ou qu'un prénom ou que le nom inclut un préfixe, etc., consulter le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#100_Vedette_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Contenu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 336 peut seulement être utilisée pour les notices d'autorité représentant des expressions. La zone 336 est toujours suivie d'une sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;rdacontent/fre&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser les termes fournis dans [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html RDA 6.9.1.3]. La liste des termes est également disponible dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Code du type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si on enregistre une sous-zone $b à la place ou en plus d'une sous-zone $a, utiliser les codes fournis dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''] du MARC 21.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#336_Contenu |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Autres attributs associés à des personnes ou des collectivités =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé pour les termes dans les sous-zones $a, $b et $c. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a, $b et $c. Lorsque les termes dans les sous-zones $a et $b ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer de professions ou d'occupations dans la sous-zone $c (Autre désignation). La profession ou l'occupation peut être enregistrée dans la zone 374.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les titres de royauté, de noblesse ou de rang ecclésiastique ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) dans la sous-zone $d dans la forme utilisée dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'une période et Sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#368_Autres_attributs_associ.C3.A9s_.C3.A0_des_personnes_ou_des_collectivit.C3.A9s |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Lieu associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de juridictions ou d'autres lieux, utiliser la forme trouvée dans Canadiana ou, à défaut, celle trouvée dans le RVM, en enregistrant la source dans la sous-zone $2. La forme du nom de lieu utilisée dans la zone 370 peut différer de la forme du nom de lieu ajoutée à un nom privilégié de lieu ou à un point d'accès construit selon les instructions de RDA ou des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie du nom d'une localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut une autre désignation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de lieu)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié du lieu plus vaste)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom de lieu ajouté à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Autre nom de lieu dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité pour le lieu n'existe pas dans Canadiana ni dans le RVM, il n'est pas nécessaire d'en créer une pour enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370. Enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370 selon les instructions de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ, en consultant les sources appropriées et en ajoutant des éléments additionnels (par exemple, le type de juridiction) afin d'éviter les conflits. Ne pas ajouter de sous-zone $2 si aucune notice d'autorité n'a été créée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom du lieu associé a changé, le nom du lieu qui s'appliquait à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré à la place ou en plus de la forme actuelle du nom. Il n'est pas nécessaire de suivre les politiques d'indexation et d'utiliser uniquement la forme la plus récente du nom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemples :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne née dans la ville de Salisbury avant que son nom ne devienne Harare; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme de nom qui s'appliquait au moment de la naissance de la personne)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne résidant dans la ville de Milan pendant la Renaissance, avant la formation du pays moderne de l'Italie; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme actuelle du nom pour le pays)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de lieux qui ne sont pas des juridictions, préférer les noms provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM et identifier la source dans la sous-zone $2. Si le nom ne provient pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, l'enregistrer dans la zone 370 sans ajouter de sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zone $c – Pays associé&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;En général, ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $c pour enregistrer les lieux qui ne sont pas des entités souveraines. Ces lieux peuvent être enregistrés dans la sous-zone $f ou dans d'autres sous-zones selon le cas.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La Martinique est un département français d'outre-mer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, si une entité souveraine comporte (ou comportait auparavant) un ou plusieurs pays constitutifs, n'importe lequel des pays constitutifs associés à la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré dans la sous-zone $c en plus ou à la place de l'entité souveraine plus vaste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à la Grande-Bretagne qui a des liens étroits avec le Pays de Galles; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Union soviétique, en particulier au Kirghizistan; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à Aruba, un pays constitutif des Pays-Bas; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer les Pays-Bas)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Inde avant son indépendance de la Grande-Bretagne; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer la Grande-Bretagne)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms d'entités des Premières Nations au Canada ainsi que les tribus indiennes («&amp;amp;nbsp;Indian tribes&amp;amp;nbsp;») reconnues par le gouvernement des États-Unis comme des entités juridiques peuvent être incluses dans la sous-zone $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Enregistrer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre dans la zone 370, sauf s'il s'agit simplement d'un lieu de publication ou d'un autre lieu associé à une manifestation (auquel cas utiliser la zone 643, le cas échéant). Bien que le «&amp;amp;nbsp;lieu d'origine&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'une œuvre en série puisse être le même que le lieu de publication de l'œuvre pour laquelle la notice d'autorité de collection (ou la notice bibliographique de publication en série) a été créée, faire preuve de jugement pour distinguer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre d'un lieu de publication qui n'est pas réellement lié à l'œuvre elle-même.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Adresse =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Selon le jugement du catalogueur, fournir une adresse si les informations sont facilement disponibles et n'ont pas déjà été enregistrées dans la sous-zone $e (Lieu de résidence, de sièges sociaux) de la zone 370.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Dans les cas où la sous-zone $a n'est pas enregistrée, inclure au minimum la sous-zone $m (Adresse de courriel) ou la sous-zone $b (Ville). &lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas enregistrer les adresses physiques &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou courriels&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; des personnes vivantes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les informations reliées à l'adresse lors de la mise à jour d'une notice contenant une adresse.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer plusieurs adresses, avec ou sans plages de dates, dans des zones 371 distinctes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Adresse de courriel'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $m doit contenir uniquement une adresse de courriel. Ne pas ajouter d'adresse Internet pour la 1XX dans cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#371_Adresse |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Domaine d'activité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée pour le domaine d'activité, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une entité provenant de Canadiana est utilisée comme domaine d'activité, enlever tout codage de sous-zone qui n'est pas autorisé dans la zone 372.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Domaine d'activité dans la 372 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel que la plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Zones 372 avec un terme provenant du RVM et un terme de vocabulaire non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'un période et la sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Groupe associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le fichier d'autorité Canadiana ou le fichier LC/NAF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Dans la zone 373, le codage de sous-zone n'est pas employé pour les collectivités subordonnées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom d'un groupe associé a changé, enregistrer le ou les noms du groupe qui s'appliquaient à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates). Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec des sous-zones $2 et des dates :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec différentes sources de vocabulaires :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $ s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $ t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : même si le format MARC ne spécifie pas de forme de date dans ces sous-zones, la pratique suivante est recommandée par souci de cohérence. Enregistrer les dates selon le calendrier grégorien dans le format AAAA. Si une date plus précise est nécessaire, considérer la possibilité de l'enregistrer dans une autre zone (par exemple, 670, 678). Il n'est pas nécessaire de reformuler les dates déjà inscrites dans les notices d'autorité pour se conformer à cette pratique. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Profession =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;6.1.3 pour des instructions sur l'enregistrement de la profession ou de l'occupation comme élément. Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.19.1.6 pour des instructions sur l'utilisation d'un terme indiquant la profession ou l'occupation dans un point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : répéter la zone si nécessaire pour plus de clarté.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du terme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les codes enregistrés dans la sous-zone $2 de la zone 374 peuvent provenir soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-TIO.html/view ''Codes sources pour les termes de profession''], soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-VM-C.html/view ''Codes sources pour les vedettes-matière et termes d'indexation''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#374_Profession |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Sexe de la personne =&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Ne pas utiliser cette zone dans les nouvelles notices d'autorité. Lorsqu'une notice existante doit être modifiée pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer toute occurrence de la zone 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Renseignements sur la famille =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Personnalité importante de la famille'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement du nom d'un membre illustre d'une famille dans la sous-zone $b, utiliser la forme du nom de la personne telle que mentionnée dans la sous-zone $g de la zone 100 dans la notice d'autorité pour la famille. Les codages internes de sous-zones ne doivent pas être inclus dans la sous-zone $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Langue associée =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier les codes de langues plutôt que des termes, en utilisant la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21. La sous-zone $l (Nom de la langue) doit être utilisée uniquement pour fournir des informations non disponibles dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/LNG-C.html ''Liste des codes de langue''] du MARC 21. Enregistrer plusieurs codes de langue seulement si la personne ou la collectivité fait usage de plusieurs langages dans ses publications, communications, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;À titre facultatif, enregistrer un ou plusieurs codes de langue ISO 639-3 dans une zone 377 supplémentaire. Cette pratique est particulièrement recommandée lorsqu’un code ISO 639-3 permet d’identifier une langue plus précisément que le code MARC. Pour plus d’informations, voir les [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $2 n'est pas requise lorsque la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 est utilisée pour représenter la langue (le deuxième indicateur «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» mentionne déjà la source). Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent utiliser une autre source de codes de langue peuvent ajouter une zone 377 supplémentaire en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur et en mentionnant la source utilisée dans la sous-zone $2 . Cette source doit cependant provenir d'une des sources fournies dans la liste intitulée [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CTL.html ''Codes sources pour les codes et termes de langue''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Code ISO 639-3 pour la langue Achi : acr. Code pour cette même langue, laquelle fait partie des langues maya, dans la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 : myn)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Forme développée du nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer la forme développée du nom dans la zone 378 lorsque l'information est facilement disponible, même si l'information est déjà présente dans la zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#378_Forme_d.C3.A9velopp.C3.A9e_du_nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Genre de l'œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM ou le RVMGF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'enregistrement du genre de l'œuvre comme élément dans les notices d'autorité de collections représentant des œuvres (et non des expressions), voir l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.3.1.3.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#380_Genre_de_l.27.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Autres caractéristiques distinctes d'une œuvre ou d'une expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée pour enregistrer les éléments RDA Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) et Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Les autres caractéristiques distinctives des expressions qui sont spécifiques aux œuvres musicales (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4–6.18.1.6]) peuvent être aussi enregistrées dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Numéro de Franklin enregistré comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version enregistrée comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut être approprié que certains des termes enregistrés pour une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression soient enregistrés dans la zone 381 ou dans une autre zone MARC pour laquelle il n'y a pas d'élément RDA correspondant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, une collectivité (tel un éditeur) utilisée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ou d'une œuvre peut être enregistrée soit dans la zone 373 (Groupe associé), soit dans la zone 381, soit dans les deux zones. ''Note :'' Le codage de sous-zone pour les collectivités subordonnées n'est pas utilisé dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme groupe associé et comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA n'a pas d'élément particulier pour les lieux associés aux expressions, mais la zone 370 sous-zone $f (Autre lieu associé) et la sous-zone $g (Lieu d'origine de l'œuvre ou de l'expression) peuvent être utilisées dans les notices d'autorité pour les expressions. Dans certains cas, des lieux associés aux œuvres ou aux expressions sont considérés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression selon RDA et peuvent être enregistrés dans la zone 370, dans la zone 381 ou dans les deux zones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Lieux utilisés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre juridique; enregistrés dans les zones 370 et 381)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'élément RDA lieu d'origine d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.5]) dans une zone 370 (voir la section [[#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]] de ce Guide).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression a été utilisée dans un point d'accès autorisé et est aussi enregistrée comme élément dans une zone 3XX, utiliser la zone 381 pour enregistrer une autre caractéristique distinctive. À titre facultatif, enregistrer aussi la même information dans une autre zone 3XX appropriée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#381_Autres_caract.C3.A9ristiques_distinctes_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_ou_d.27une_expression |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en utilisant les termes du thésaurus ''Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM'' (RVMMEM). Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en appliquant les instructions de RDA ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6]) et les ÉP de BAC-BAnQ associés. ''Note :'' La zone 382 peut également être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité d'expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :''' Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère. Si c'est jugé important pour l'identification et l'accès, ajouter une zone 382 additionnelle qui ne répond pas aux présentes lignes directrices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-04-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#382_Distribution_d.27.C3.A9x.C3.A9cution_d.27une_.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numéro d'identification d'une œuvre &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou d'une expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; musicale =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible. Créer des zones 383 distinctes pour les différents systèmes de numérotation associés à une même œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#383_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27identification_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Tonalité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible pour les œuvres. En cas de doute, ne pas enregistrer. Ne pas enregistrer pour les expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Caractéristiques du public cible =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer le public cible d'une œuvre ou d'une expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices  du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a : Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Termes provenant de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé et terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-07-17]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Caractéristiques du créateur ou du collaborateur &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer les caractéristiques démographiques d'un ou plusieurs créateurs ou contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression, notamment pour enregistrer les caractéristiques communes à un groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression. Cette zone sera généralement utilisée dans des notices d'autorité établies pour des agrégats par regroupement matérialisant deux ou plusieurs expressions de deux ou plusieurs œuvres indépendantes créées par des agents différents, ainsi que pour les œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre (par exemple, les œuvres d'auteurs inconnus ou les collections de monographies). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Personnes âgées $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Terme démographique non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bien que cette zone soit principalement utilisée pour des œuvres agrégées et pour des œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre, il existe des situations où il est également approprié de l'utiliser pour une œuvre individuelle d'un ou plusieurs créateurs nommés. Par exemple, pour une œuvre musicale composée pendant l'enfance ou l'adolescence d'un créateur, il ne serait pas approprié d'enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;Enfants&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Adolescents&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme caractéristiques dans la notice d'autorité du compositeur. Au lieu de cela, les caractéristiques démographiques applicables uniquement à certaines des œuvres d'un créateur doivent être enregistrées dans les notices d'autorité établies pour ces œuvres.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Œuvre composée en 2003-2005, achevée lorsque le compositeur avait 14 ans)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Termes issus de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;''(Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau; terme non contrôlé et termes provenant du même vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $i – Information sur la relation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il est possible d'utiliser la sous-zone $i pour enregistrer un terme désignant la nature de la relation entre les groupes démographiques enregistrés dans la zone et l'œuvre ou l'expression. Préférer un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que les termes de relation du format MARC ou les indicateurs de relation RDA. Mettre une majuscule à la première lettre du terme de relation et utiliser la forme au singulier. Faire suivre le terme de relation par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998-February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer plusieurs occurrences de la sous-zone $i dans une même occurrence de la zone 386. Si plusieurs termes de relation s'appliquent à un seul groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs (par exemple, une œuvre réunissant des auteurs et des artistes du même groupe démographique ou une expression dont les éditeurs et les traducteurs appartiennent au même groupe démographique), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Compilation d'œuvres d'auteurs et d'artistes du Massachusetts)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différents termes de relation s'appliquent à différents créateurs et contributeurs (par exemple, si les auteurs font partie d'un groupe démographique et les artistes d'un autre), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents. Si le même terme de relation s'applique à plus d'un groupe démographique, répéter la sous-zone $a dans une même zone ou répéter la zone. Pour plus de clarté, en cas de doute, répéter la zone 386 autant que nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Partition comprenant des œuvres de Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler et Strauss, ainsi que les paroles imprimées sous forme de texte, en allemand et en traduction anglaise)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-12]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Période associée à la création =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine d'une œuvre ou d'une expression. Le nom de la période peut préciser ou sous-entendre un lieu pour lequel la période de temps est pertinente. Il peut aussi préciser le nom d'un événement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM ou le RVMFAST. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les compilations, la zone peut être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine des œuvres/expressions contenues dans la compilation, considérées collectivement (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur). Elle peut également être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine de la compilation elle-même (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;2&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour un recueil de poésie de la Renaissance compilé au XIXe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 388 peut être utilisée en conjonction avec ou à la place de la zone 046. Lorsque la ou les dates précises de création ou d'origine ne sont pas connues ou qu'elles s'étendent sur une longue période, il peut être utile d'enregistrer des termes chronologiques textuels dans la zone 388.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour une œuvre anonyme du XIVe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si la valeur de l'indicateur diffère, répéter la zone. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom avec zones 388 contenant des termes provenant de différents vocabulaires)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour une autre raison, supprimer tout signe de ponctuation à la fin d'une zone 4XX sauf s'il fait partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou est requis par les règles de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'est pas nécessaire de justifier tous les renvois 4XX; voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès|Justification des variantes de point d'accès]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 670 de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas faire un renvoi 4XX qui se normalise sous la même forme qu'une autre zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité ou une zone 1XX dans toute autre notice d'autorité de nom. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;NACO normalization&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratiques à privilégier pour le catalogage selon RDA :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Enregistrer les variantes trouvées dans la manifestation cataloguée :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Utiliser le jugement du catalogueur;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Il n'y a pas de limite quant au nombre ou à la forme des renvois;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Au lieu ou en plus d'ajouter des variantes, envisager de fournir un accès en ajoutant des zones 37X.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Exemple montrant une zone 378 sans une variante pour la forme développée du nom :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Établir des notices d'autorité de noms supplémentaires pour les points d'accès autorisés nécessaires pour soutenir les éléments utilisés dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX (par exemple, la collectivité supérieure associée à la collectivité subordonnée qui doit être établie).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, fournir une variante de point d'accès 4XX pour un ancien point d'accès autorisé 1XX, sauf si l'ancien point d'accès autorisé est manifestement incorrect. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#4XX$w|Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour plus d'information.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Utiliser la forme établie des composantes dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX, à l'exception des variantes en écriture non latine, qui peuvent présenter un mélange d'écritures ou être entièrement dans une écriture non latine.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, ne pas supprimer des variantes sauf si elles sont manifestement incorrectes (par exemple, une variante en écriture non latine qui ne représente pas la même personne).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si une forme trouvée dans la manifestation cataloguée inclut une variante de forme d'une composante d'une variante de point d'accès en 4XX, cette forme peut être utilisée dans son intégralité comme une variante de point d'accès supplémentaire en 4XX, à condition que des sous-zones ne soient pas utilisées pour diviser ses parties constitutives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on change la forme d'une collectivité hiérarchiquement supérieure, d'un nom géographique ou d'un nom de personne dans une 1XX, mettre à jour toutes les notices d'autorité existantes qui utilisent cette composante dans une zone 4XX, sauf si la 4XX représente l'ancien point d'accès autorisé (par exemple, $w/2=e). Exception : Ne pas appliquer cette instruction dans le cas des notices d'autorité migrées qui n'ont pas été réévaluées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est modifié parce que la personne a changé de nom, enregistrer l'ancienne forme du nom dans une zone 400 avec $w nne si la variante est valide selon les instructions de RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après l'élection comme pape)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est mis à jour pour fermer la date, il est recommandé d'enregistrer l'ancienne forme avec la date ouverte dans une zone 4XX avec $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) basé sur le catalogage CIP est modifié parce que sa forme sur la ressource publiée est différente de celle sur la demande CIP, une zone 4XX pour l'ancienne forme du point d'accès autorisé avec la sous-zone $w nne peut être ajoutée sauf si l'ancienne forme 1XX est manifestement incorrecte (par exemple, la date de naissance de l'auteur a été donnée comme étant 1775 au lieu de 1975 dans la demande CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) est modifié en raison d'un changement dans les instructions de catalogage, enregistrer l'ancienne forme dans une zone 4XX en utilisant $w. Si la variante de forme est un renvoi valide selon les instructions actuelles de RDA, utiliser $w nne. Si la variante de forme n'est pas un renvoi valide selon les instructions RDA actuelles, utiliser $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante n'est pas valide selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nne&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante est valide selon RDA; le changement de la forme en 100 est basé sur l'utilisation du nom et les dates de naissance et de mort ont été ajoutées parce que la 100 a été changée)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429 av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que l'abréviation «&amp;amp;nbsp;ca&amp;amp;nbsp;» n'est pas valide pour une période d'activité selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé est corrigé parce que des dates ont été enregistrées de manière inexacte ou qu'un catalogueur a introduit une faute de frappe dans le point d'accès autorisé, ne pas faire de renvoi à la forme incorrecte. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche des notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel des collections et la création et la tenue à jour des notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des variantes de point d'accès peuvent être enregistrées dans toute notice d'autorité de collection, y compris celles pour des phrases analogues à des collections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si les volumes d'une monographie en plusieurs parties portent des formes différentes du titre commun, faire un renvoi 4XX plutôt qu'un renvoi 5XX pour la forme de titre non choisie comme titre propre de la monographie en plusieurs parties.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w. Lorsqu'on utilise les indicateurs de relation RDA dans les zones 5XX, utiliser les termes des annexes I, J ou K; mettre une majuscule au premier terme et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour de l'information sur l'utilisation des indicateurs de relation et/ou les codes $w dans une zone 5XX spécifique, voir la section de ce Guide concernant cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les conventions du format autorités en ce qui concerne l'utilisation de la sous-zone $w. Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $w sauf si une valeur autre que «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» est appropriée dans l'une des positions. Lorsqu'on utilise la sous-zone $w, enregistrer la sous-zone comme première sous-zone de la zone. Fournir les positions de caractères qui précèdent la valeur mais pas celles qui lui succèdent, par exemple,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé antérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé ultérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = pour indiquer qu'une sous-zone $i ou une sous-zone $2 est utilisée pour donner de l'information sur la relation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = pour indiquer un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour des pseudonymes multiples (la notice comprend aussi une zone 663)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» (5XX) ne doit pas se normaliser sous la même forme qu'un autre renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la même notice d'autorité, sauf si les deux zones 5XX contiennent un indicateur de relation dans la sous-zone $i et que les textes des indicateurs de relation sont différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre un nom de personne et 1) le nom d'une autre personne, d'une famille ou d'une collectivité ou 2) le point d'accès autorisé pour une œuvre ou une expression. Cette technique peut également être utilisée pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres et des expressions et contenant des noms de personnes. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe I, J ou K dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on enregistre des relations entre noms de personnes impliquant des pseudonymes et que seulement deux notices d'autorité sont en cause, les catalogueurs peuvent soit 1) utiliser la sous-zone $i et le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w ou 2) utiliser des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» simples. Pour plus d'information sur ces techniques et des instructions sur l'enregistrement de pseudonymes multiples (c'est-à-dire ceux qui requièrent une zone 663), voir la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rappel aux catalogueurs : Lorsqu'une variante de nom (400) et un point d'accès autorisé (100) sont en conflit, il faut faire un ajout à la zone 400 ou à la zone 100 pour résoudre le conflit (par exemple, une forme développée du nom, une date d'activité, etc.); la pratique antérieure consistant à changer la zone 400 en 500 pour résoudre le conflit n'est plus une option. Lorsque les catalogueurs trouvent une variante de forme dans une zone 500 au cours de la mise à jour d'une notice d'autorité de nom, ils doivent résoudre le conflit et modifier la zone en 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de collectivité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de réunion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8] pour des directives sur les relations entre les notices d'autorité pour des séries de conférences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Titre uniforme =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés pour des œuvres ou des expressions. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe J dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $i avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w tant que les indicateurs de relation pour les lieux ne seront pas développés. (RDA a prévu un espace pour l'annexe L.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Traitement de collection – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 640 Dates de publication et/ou indication séquentielle de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#640_Dates_de_publication_et.2Fou_indication_s.C3.A9quentielle_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Exemple de numérotation de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#642_Exemple_de_num.C3.A9rotation_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Lieu et éditeur de la collection/organisme de publication =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#643_Lieu_et_.C3.A9diteur_de_la_collection.2Forganisme_de_publication |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Usage en matière d'analyse de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#644_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_d.27analyse_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Usage en matière de rappel de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#645_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_rappel_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Usage en matière de classification de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#646_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_classification_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Renvoi complexe «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 663 comprend le texte explicatif et les points d'accès autorisés pour les relations entre une zone 100 (nom établi) et d'autres zones 100 (noms établis) qui ne peuvent pas être correctement exprimées par un ou plusieurs renvois simples générés à partir de zones 500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Généralement, cette situation se produit lorsqu'une personne utilise plus de deux identités, lorsque plus d'une personne partage une identité avec une ou plusieurs autres personnes, ou lorsque plusieurs personnes utilisent le même pseudonyme indépendamment les unes des autres ou en raison d'un autre arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le texte de la zone 663 peut être adapté pour répondre à des situations exceptionnelles; toutefois, il faut garder le texte aussi simple que possible et laisser les zones et le codage MARC communiquer l'information souhaitée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la technique de la zone 663 pour établir des relations entre collectivités ou entre personnes et collectivités.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Seulement deux identités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque seulement deux notices d'autorité de noms sont créées pour une personne, les notices d'autorité de noms sont généralement reliées par des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500, sans aucune zone 663. Toutefois, lorsque l'une des notices d'autorité de noms est établie pour un pseudonyme commun ou un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment les unes des autres, la technique de la zone 663 est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Plus de deux identités - point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» et renvois ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plus de deux points d'accès autorisés sont créés pour la même personne, identifier un point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» en utilisant la technique de la zone 663. Cette décision est fondée sur le désir de simplifier la structure de renvois et d'aider les catalogueurs à déterminer le nom à utiliser comme sujet des œuvres biographiques ou critiques. Le point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» doit être déterminé par la forme de nom qui prédomine dans l'usage ou, en l'absence de preuves suffisantes, en choisissant le nom réel de la personne comme forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Dans la notice d'autorité pour la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», ajouter des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour tous les autres noms utilisés. Justifier les renvois en 500 par des zones 670 selon la pratique normale. Fournir une zone 663 énumérant tous les autres noms avec le texte suivant (celui-ci peut être modifié pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom] $b [forme établie du nom]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans chacune des autres notices d'autorité de noms, ajouter un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», en justifiant ce renvoi par une zone 670, selon la pratique normale. D'autres noms peuvent être mentionnés dans le 670 s'il est pratique de le faire. Fournir une zone 663 avec le texte suivant ou un texte similaire (le texte peut être ajusté pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom choisie comme vedette de base]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque l'auteur utilise un autre nouveau nom, créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour ce nom et l'ajouter à la structure de renvois ainsi qu'à la liste de la zone 663 dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;». Les renvois au nouveau nom dans les zones 500 et 663 sont ajoutés seulement dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes conjoints ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un pseudonyme conjoint est une identité utilisée par deux ou plusieurs personnes travaillant en collaboration. Si une personne utilise un pseudonyme conjoint et un autre nom (tel que trouvé dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes utilisés par plusieurs personnes ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment l'une de l'autre utilisent le même pseudonyme et un ou plusieurs autres noms (tels que trouvés dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisée par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(L'auteur a un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes et des pseudonymes individuels)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Note générale non destinée au public =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Donner des informations de valeur permanente et d'intérêt général qui seraient également utiles aux autres institutions du PFAN ou à celles qui n'y participent pas. Une liste représentative des notes est donnée ci-dessous. En général, le libellé est recommandé, mais n'est pas prescriptif, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions. Les zones 667 distinctes peuvent être données dans n'importe quel ordre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [raison de l'encodage].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date de la mise à jour].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Utilisée pour les changements de langue officielle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Annexe_2_:_Projets_sp.C3.A9ciaux|Annexe 2]] de ce Guide pour des informations et des instructions sur les zones 667 ajoutées aux notices d'autorité dans le cadre d'un projet spécial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes dont certaines identités ne sont pas établies ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une personne utilise deux ou plusieurs identités dans les manifestations, des notices d'autorité de noms peuvent être créées pour chaque identité. Dans un souci d'efficacité, les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser une zone 667 pour énumérer les pseudonymes non trouvés dans les publications au lieu de créer des notices d'autorité de noms pour ces pseudonymes inutilisés. Dans ce cas, énumérer les pseudonymes inutilisés dans une zone 667 après l'expression : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette note peut aussi être ajoutée dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne qui a plusieurs notices d'autorité de noms pour plusieurs identités lorsque certains des pseudonymes ne sont pas trouvés dans des publications. Dans ce cas, énumérer seulement les pseudonymes inutilisés dans la zone 667 et suivre les instructions appropriées pour les autres pseudonymes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, […] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la section [[#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom|663]] de ce Guide ainsi que dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les séries de congrès, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter une zone 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour une série de congrès lorsqu'il y a des notices d'autorité autant pour la série que pour les occurrences isolées du congrès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appliquer ces instructions lors de la création de nouvelles notices d'autorité de noms et lors de la révision de notices d'autorité de noms existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Ajouter des notes indiquant l'utilisation en indexation lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé n'est pas approprié pour utilisation comme vedette-matière dans ces situations :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Chefs d'État, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette instruction s'applique aux notices d'autorité de noms pour les collectivités représentant la fonction lorsque le nom du titulaire est inclus comme partie du point d'accès autorisé de la collectivité. Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Dignitaires gouvernementaux)] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html 11.2.2.26 (Dignitaires religieux)] pour les instructions sur les collectivités. Utiliser cette note 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour la collectivité pour indiquer l'utilisation en indexation :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [vedette du nom de la personne].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi les sections [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Changements linéaires entre noms antérieurs et ultérieurs d'une juridiction'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La politique d'indexation du RVM est d'employer comme point d'accès matière ou comme subdivision géographique uniquement le dernier nom d'une juridiction politique qui a eu un ou plusieurs noms antérieurs, aussi longtemps que l'identité territoriale demeure essentiellement la même (voir ''Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval'', 5.14.3.1). Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom ayant un point d'accès autorisé antérieur/ultérieur pour un lieu dans cette situation, les catalogueurs doivent ajouter une note 667 sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom antérieur du lieu et modifier les zones 008 appropriés (008/11 et 008/15).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Notices d'autorité de personnes fictives'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les points d'accès autorisés pour les personnes fictives ne doivent pas être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, la zone 008/11 doit être codée avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» et la zone 008/15 doit être codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;». Selon l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 9.0, lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, ajouter cette zone 667 pour indiquer l'utilisation comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une partie d'une ville, en indiquant qu'il n'est pas approprié de l'utiliser comme une subdivision géographique :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) Notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les points d'accès autorisés pour les noms de familles peuvent être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Pour les notices d'autorité de noms de familles qui reflètent la pratique antérieure (qui interdisait de les utiliser comme vedettes-matière), mettre à jour les notices pour attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et supprimer la note sur l’utilisation comme vedette-matière suivante :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes pour les renvois en écriture non latine ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans une notice d'autorité qui comprend une variante de point d'accès dans une écriture non latine, utiliser la zone 667 avec une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.&amp;amp;nbsp;» S'il y a plusieurs variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, utiliser une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» à la zone 008/29 pour indiquer que la variante de point d'accès n'a pas été évaluée. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Doublons&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Doublons ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice à conserver&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Source des données =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone a pour but d'enregistrer des informations sur le nom ou le titre représenté dans la zone 1XX. Elle comprend des renseignements qui contribuent à l'identification de l'entité et qui justifient le choix du nom ou du titre de même que tout élément supplémentaire utilisé pour construire le point d'accès autorisé (1XX). Les informations consignées justifient également, le cas échéant, des variantes de forme du nom ou du titre (4XX), d'autres éléments d'identification (046, 3XX et 678), et clarifient les relations entre la 1XX et les autres entités représentées dans le fichier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Fonctions de la zone 670 :'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations, provenant de sources (par exemple, livres, appels téléphoniques, sites Web), à l'appui du choix et de la forme du point d'accès autorisé, des variantes de point d'accès et d'autres éléments d'identification&lt;br /&gt;
* Stocker des informations qui pourront être utilisées pour résoudre un conflit par la suite&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations sur les relations entre entités (par exemple, une personne est l'auteur d'une œuvre, une collectivité a été absorbée par une autre collectivité)&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier une personne qui a produit des œuvres dans différents domaines ou sous des formes diverses&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier des personnes différentes dont les points d'accès doivent rester identiques pour le moment (c'est-à-dire des noms de personnes indifférenciés)&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour préciser si les différentes formes d'un nom ou d'un titre sont de simples variations ou reflètent un changement de nom ou de titre&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer les recherches requises par les lignes directrices actuelles&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour faciliter la maintenance des fichiers d'autorité et bibliographiques étant donné que les informations dans les zones 670 aident à la prise de décisions concernant les points d'accès autorisés en double et les attributions erronées&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour soutenir les manipulations informatiques basées sur des algorithmes utilisant les informations du 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, la première zone 670 cite la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est établie, c'est-à-dire la ressource en cours de catalogage. Si la ressource en cours de catalogage ou de consultation ne fournit aucune information justifiant le point d'accès autorisé, les variantes de point d'accès ou les autres éléments enregistrés dans la notice d'autorité, voir la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur la façon de citer la ressource dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les zones 670 suivantes dans n'importe quel ordre, en ajoutant les nouvelles zones après celles qui existent déjà. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 670 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670, préférer les sources objectives et faisant autorité (par exemple, une encyclopédie) et les sources qui fournissent des informations de première main (par exemple, un blogue d'auteur). Utiliser des sources qui fournissent des informations supplémentaires plutôt que celles qui répètent des informations déjà présentes dans les autres zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Pratiques à privilégier pour les zones 670 : '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans la sous-zone $b, résumer et modifier les informations trouvées, selon les besoins, pour éviter les informations superflues ou répétitives.&lt;br /&gt;
* Éviter de citer des informations subjectives ou des informations dont la valeur est douteuse pour identifier une entité dans un contexte bibliographique.&lt;br /&gt;
* Faire preuve de prudence lors de l'enregistrement d'informations sur des personnes vivantes lorsque ces informations sont susceptibles d'être de nature privée ou controversée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité existantes peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices. Par exemple, dans les zones 670 des notices d'autorité plus anciennes, la sous-zone $b contenant des informations justificatives pourrait être absente. Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité qui faisaient partie d'un projet spécial peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices et/ou peuvent contenir des informations qui semblent inhabituelles ou incorrectes.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Les exemples donnés tout au long du texte suivant présentent diverses conventions en ce qui concerne la ponctuation et le style. Ces conventions ne sont pas prescriptives et doivent être considérées comme des pratiques à privilégier pour faciliter l'échange d'informations dans le contexte d'une base de données partagée. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs fassent preuve de jugement et de bon sens. La ponctuation et le style ne doivent pas nécessairement être cohérents d'une notice à l'autre tant que l'information est claire et précise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format des zones 670 ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
À l'exception de l'eszett (ß ou ſʒ) et du symbole euro (€), tous les caractères figurant dans le [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/M9230.html tableau des codes MARC] peuvent être utilisés dans les notices d'autorité ajoutées au fichier d'autorité Canadiana (voir le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). Lorsque des données provenant d'un site Web sont copiées/collées dans une zone 670, vérifier que tous les caractères peuvent être utilisés dans la notice. Certains caractères non valides ressemblent à ceux qui sont valides. Par exemple, le tiret (–) non valide ressemble au trait d'union (-) valide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une substitution pour un symbole non reproductible est indiquée entre parenthèses (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.5]), une explication de cette interpolation peut également être fournie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les données doivent être fournies sous forme romanisée. Normalement, il est entendu que le catalogueur a fourni la romanisation; par conséquent, lors de la transcription de données trouvées dans la source sous forme romanisée, ajouter après celle-ci l'expression entre crochets ['''forme romanisée''']. Dans des langues telles que l'arabe et l'hébreu, où les voyelles sont généralement omises dans l'orthographe des textes, le catalogueur fournit les voyelles manquantes lors de la transcription des données. Lors de la transcription de texte qui inclut les voyelles, ajouter après entre parenthèses ['''vocalisé'''] ou ['''en partie vocalisé'''] selon le cas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un catalogueur choisit de fournir des variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, les 670 $b doivent contenir aussi bien la transcription du ou des textes en écriture non latine trouvés dans la source que la ou les formes systématiquement romanisées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les notices d'autorité sont créées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, il est possible que de l'information supplémentaire soit incluse. Ces données peuvent également être formatées d'une manière différente de celle indiquée dans le présent document. En général, ces données doivent être conservées telles qu'elles sont générées afin de maintenir la rentabilité de ce processus, à moins que les données ne prêtent à confusion ou ne provoquent des erreurs de validation. Les noms et les titres pour lesquels les notices d'autorité sont créées constituent l'exception à cette règle. Suivre les instructions de ces sections pour enregistrer ces données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Citation de la source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Le titre propre de la ressource citée, suffisamment complet pour permettre une identification ultérieure dans un catalogue en ligne. Des abréviations et des points de suspension peuvent être utilisés. Faire précéder un titre générique ou non distinctif du nom du créateur par lequel commencerait le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre. Si le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre est le même que le titre propre plus un qualificatif, il peut être fourni à la place du titre propre pour éviter toute ambiguïté. Lorsque des informations sont fournies dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 pour justifier un point d'accès autorisé ou une variante de point d'accès, suivre les instructions supplémentaires sous Enregistrement des noms et des titres. &lt;br /&gt;
# La date de publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Monographies en plusieurs parties. S'il s'agit de la première partie, indiquer la date de publication sous forme de date ouverte.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Publications en série autres que les collections de monographies. En général, utiliser une désignation chronologique au lieu d'une date de publication. S'il n'y a pas de désignation chronologique, utiliser la désignation numérique et la date de publication. Le cas échéant, indiquer à la suite de la désignation qu'un «&amp;amp;nbsp;substitut&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été utilisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:15px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ressources intégratrices. Appliquer les instructions de [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] pour la source du titre propre d'un site Web. Identifier l'itération à partir de laquelle les informations ont été prises (par exemple «&amp;amp;nbsp;consulté(e) le&amp;amp;nbsp;» suivi d'une date pour un site Web mis à jour de façon continue, le numéro de mise à jour ou le numéro de révision pour les publication à feuillets mobiles à mise à jour).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Informations trouvées'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $b :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# L'emplacement spécifique où les informations ont été trouvées. Pour les ressources en plusieurs parties avec parties numérotées, indiquer la désignation de la partie et l'emplacement dans la partie (par exemple, vol. 6, page 10; recto de la carte, étiquette). Des abréviations ou des formes au long peuvent être utilisées (par exemple, p. de t. ou page de titre, couv. ou couverture, vol. 6 ou volume 6). &lt;br /&gt;
# Informations trouvées. À la suite de l'emplacement, citer les informations qui y ont été trouvées, entre parenthèses. Le cas échéant, indiquer différentes occurrences d'informations provenant de la même source à la suite de l'emplacement de l'information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' Si le point d'accès autorisé est construit à partir des données de catalogage avant publication, inclure «&amp;amp;nbsp;CIP&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la mention de l'emplacement (par exemple, formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The greenhouse approach, 2019: $b page de titre du CIP (Chitra Anand) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Canadienne)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Ressources Internet.''' Pour les sites Web, indiquer s'il y a lieu le nom de l'emplacement à l'intérieur du site (par exemple, À propos; Notre histoire, Chronologie; Government, Executive Branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Plusieurs emplacements dans une ressource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' Lorsqu'on ajoute de nouvelles informations à une zone 670 créée pour un CIP, indiquer que les nouvelles informations proviennent de la ressource publiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; Canadienne) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; Canadienne) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de noms, utiliser généralement «&amp;amp;nbsp;etc.&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour éviter de donner plus de deux emplacements ou une séquence d'emplacements (par exemple, p. 316, etc., pour la séquence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de collections, toujours indiquer chaque emplacement séparément.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Lors du travail d'autorité post-catalogage sans le document en main, utiliser l'emplacement « ressource non disponible ». Si le document est examiné à nouveau et que la notice d'autorité est mise à jour, il est permis de modifier la zone 670 correspondante afin de fournir un emplacement et des formes supplémentaires de titres de collection si nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source des informations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent facultativement fournir un identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) dans la sous-zone $u de la zone 670 pour établir un lien avec la ressource citée si celle-ci contient des informations importantes sur l'entité établie qui ne peuvent être citées succinctement dans la notice d'autorité. Noter que l'utilisation d'un URI dans la zone 670 $u ne supplée pas à l'obligation de citer dans les sous-zones $a et $b de la zone 670 les données pertinentes nécessaires pour justifier le point d'accès autorisé (y compris les ajouts) ou les variantes (cette information continuera d'être disponible si le site change ou disparaît). Toutefois, les informations trouvées dans les sources en ligne peuvent être ajoutées aux zones 046 ou 3XX avec les citations appropriées dans les sous-zones $v et $u et ne pas être répétées dans une 670 lorsque ces informations ne sont pas utilisées dans une 1XX ou une 4XX. Si un URI est inclus dans une 670, il doit être indiqué dans la sous-zone $u. La sous-zone $u doit contenir uniquement l'URI sans aucune autre donnée (par exemple, ne pas mettre l'URI entre parenthèses ni inclure de mots dans la sous-zone $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des noms et des titres ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer intégralement les noms ou les titres de collections utilisés dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès, comme ils apparaissent dans la source, sans abréviation par le catalogueur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la préparation d'une notice d'autorité pour le texte d'une loi ou d'un recueil de lois par sujet, si une source citée contient un titre abrégé ou un titre de référence officiels, citer ce titre, précédé du terme «&amp;amp;nbsp;titre de référence&amp;amp;nbsp;» et de son emplacement exact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les autorités de collectivités, inclure dans les données citées toute la hiérarchie requise pour justifier toutes les variantes de point d'accès nécessaires. Faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles informations (par exemple, le nom de l'organisme subordonné) sont étrangères à la notice créée et ne doivent pas être enregistrées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toutes les catégories ci-dessus, si la seule présentation du nom ou du titre sur la source d'information privilégiée se trouve dans le titre de la ressource donné dans la sous-zone $a de la 670, la répétition du nom dans la sous-zone $b peut être omise, à condition qu'aucune information importante ne soit perdue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si des informations sur un nom ou un titre antérieur ou postérieur se trouvent dans la même source que le nom ou le titre dans le point d'accès autorisé, donner toutes les informations dans la zone 670. Ne pas séparer les informations sur le nom ou le titre antérieur ou postérieur pour les donner dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour faciliter la contribution internationale et l'utilisation des notices d'autorité, lors de l'enregistrement des dates, utiliser généralement les noms de mois, sous forme longue ou [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abrégée]. (Pour les dates enregistrées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, voir la section [[#Format_des_zones_670|Format des zones 670]] de ce Guide). Ne pas modifier le style des dates dans les notices existantes. Comme pratique à privilégier, si une date n'est pas incluse dans la sous-zone $d de la zone 100, envisager d'ajouter une zone 046 si les dates sont disponibles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification des variantes de point d'accès ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justifier les noms ou les titres donnés comme variantes de point d'accès par des informations citées des sources. Toutefois, une justification n'est pas requise dans les cas suivants :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variantes de point d'accès reflétant différentes romanisations ou orthographes connues du catalogueur;&lt;br /&gt;
# Une variante de titre dérivée de la ressource cataloguée, d'autres ressources cataloguées sous le même point d'accès ou de sources de référence standard;&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois pour des points d'accès autorisés de collectivités reflétant des changements dus à une réforme orthographique nationale, des changements de noms dus à un changement de langue officielle ou des changements impliquant uniquement une collectivité supérieure à laquelle la collectivité en cours d'établissement est subordonnée.&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois facultatifs à partir de formes RCAA2 ou pré-RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité de collections et les notices d'autorité de noms rétrospectives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification d'autres éléments ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les informations enregistrées dans les zones 046, 3XX ou 678 de la notice d'autorité doivent généralement être justifiées, à moins qu'elles ne ressortent clairement dans les informations enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 ou qu'elles puissent être facilement déduites d'autres éléments d'identification enregistrés, y compris le nom privilégié.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour la zone 046 et plusieurs des zones 3XX, une sous-zone $u ou une sous-zone $v enregistrée dans la même zone peut être utilisée à la place ou en plus d'une 670. Voir la section [[#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]] de ce Guide pour les directives concernant les sous-zones $u et $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des autres données ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. Ne pas abréger ou traduire des attributs tels que le titre d'une personne ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) qui apparaissent en conjonction avec les noms de personnes dans les mentions de responsabilité et qui pourraient potentiellement être utilisés comme partie du point d'accès. Les autres données peuvent être abrégées ou résumées. En général, traduire les données en langues étrangères de manière informelle en français, en les paraphrasant ou en les résumant selon ce qui convient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données autres que les formes du titre (ou de la phrase analogue à une collection) à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. La numérotation et les noms des organismes de publication ne sont pas obligatoires mais peuvent être indiqués.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Types particuliers de citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les citations les plus courantes sont énumérées ci-dessous. Si celles-ci ne sont pas appropriées, en formuler d'autres selon les besoins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la conversion des informations trouvées dans des zones MARC obsolètes ou non actives (par exemple, 664, 665, 666) en une note 670, citer Canadiana dans une citation telle que celles fournies dans les exemples ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date de la conversion] $b ([données converties à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([données déplacées à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC et fichier interne de BAnQ'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La façon de citer ces fichiers dans la zone 670 est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; usage: [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de noms.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations. Entre parenthèses, précédé par la mention '''point d'accès :''' ou '''points d'accès :''' , mentionner le ou les points d'accès trouvés, même si le point d'accès autorisé actuel est identique. S'il est jugé utile de mentionner une ou plusieurs variantes de point d'accès trouvées dans une notice d'autorité, les mentionner en les faisant précéder de la mention '''variante :''' ou '''variantes :'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différentes formes du nom apparaissent dans les notices bibliographiques, enregistrer le point d'accès ainsi que toutes les formes trouvées, y compris les formes identiques au point d'accès autorisé. Séparer le point d'accès des autres formes de nom et faire précéder les autres formes d'une mention appropriée, par exemple, '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' ou '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas citer les notices bibliographiques ou l'emplacement exact des variations trouvées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de collections.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations, suivie de la citation de la notice bibliographique. Entre parenthèses, indiquer la mention de la collection qui se trouve dans cette notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 27 janv. 2021, Les Déchets ménagers, c1980 $b (Les Cahiers de l'AGHTM)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] Le fichier LC/NAF a aussi été cité antérieurement sous d'autres noms, par exemple Base de données LC/NACO et Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;usage&amp;amp;nbsp;» désigne les formes de noms transcrites que l'on trouve habituellement dans les mentions de responsabilité des notices bibliographiques. On peut également trouver ces formes dans d'autres parties de la notice bibliographique telles que le titre propre ou une note citée. En raison des changements apportés aux instructions de catalogage, les catalogueurs doivent être prudents lorsqu'ils prennent les informations de la mention de publication, de la mention de distribution, etc. et de la mention de collection.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») désigne une forme de nom qui ne correspond pas nécessairement à une forme transcrite. Par exemple, dans les notices RCAA2, le nom d'un éditeur qui figure sur la ressource comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Publishing Company&amp;amp;nbsp;» pourrait avoir été enregistré dans la mention de publication sous la forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Pub. Co&amp;amp;nbsp;». Normalement, il n'est pas nécessaire de citer une telle forme dans une zone 670.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Autres fichiers ou catalogues'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un point d'accès est trouvé dans un catalogue ou une base de données en ligne, utiliser son jugement pour créer une citation 670. Commencer la zone 670 par une désignation du catalogue ou de la base de données dans laquelle ces autres notices bibliographiques ont été trouvées. Il n'y a pas de formulation prescrite pour ces citations; des exemples sont donnés ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Bases de données toponymiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer le nom de la base de données et la date de la recherche dans la sous-zone $a. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Le nom de la base de données peut être cité sous forme d'acronyme ou en toutes lettres.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Dans la sous-zone $b, indiquer le ou les noms de l'entité, le type d'entité, la désignation ou la classe de l'élément (par exemple, ADM1, PPL, civil), les coordonnées et le nom du lieu plus vaste, s'il y a lieu. (D'autres informations pertinentes peuvent également être fournies.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de la désignation ou de la classe de l'élément, il est possible d'utiliser soit le code (par exemple, PPL) ou sa forme en toutes lettres (par exemple, populated place). Pour les noms étrangers, indiquer le type de nom (par exemple, forme conventionnelle, forme approuvée, forme courte, etc.) entre crochets ou parenthèses après le nom. Répéter les crochets ou les parenthèses après chaque nom de ce type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Les noms de variantes (y compris les noms en caractères non latins) peuvent être donnés dans une seule liste, comme indiqué ci-dessous. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement des coordonnées, il est possible d'utiliser le format DMS (degrés, minutes, secondes), le format DD (degrés décimaux) ou les deux formats.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a choisi d’enregistrer les coordonnées DMS)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées telles que trouvées. Toutefois, si la base de données affiche les coordonnées en utilisant des deux-points pour séparer les composantes DMS et des valeurs positives et négatives pour communiquer l'hémisphère, il est acceptable de traduire les coordonnées au format DMS traditionnel si souhaité. Utiliser le symbole du degré (et non le zéro en exposant) pour indiquer les degrés, le signe mou (lettre modificative prime) pour les minutes et le signe dur (lettre modificative double prime) pour les secondes. Pour les coordonnées de latitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère sud. Pour les coordonnées de longitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère occidental.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a enregistré les coordonnées DMS telles qu'elles ont été trouvées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a traduit les coordonnées DMS au format traditionnel à partir de : -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic names server&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, consulté le &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;17 août 2022&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;$b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;22:53:01, 121:02:54&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources non bibliographiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer la source non bibliographique, la date et les informations. La source peut être indiquée de manière spécifique («&amp;amp;nbsp;Lettre de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.) ou en termes généraux («&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.). Lorsqu'on indique une source spécifique, il n'est pas nécessaire de montrer comment l'information a été reçue, par exemple, que la lettre a été reçue par télécopieur plutôt que par courrier. Lorsqu'un appel téléphonique à un éditeur, une agence ou une organisation est cité, il convient généralement de donner le nom du groupe appelé, plutôt que le titre ou le nom de la personne contactée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de collections de rééditions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité de collection concerne uniquement une réédition, commencer la 670 par le terme correspondant au type de réédition et une barre oblique. Ne pas inclure une 670 pour une réédition si la notice d'autorité sujet couvre à la fois l'original et une ou plusieurs rééditions. Ne pas ajouter de zones 670 supplémentaires pour d'autres types de rééditions cataloguées ultérieurement. (Voir 64X Traitement de la collection, Rééditions pour plus d'informations sur les rééditions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciés'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour des informations sur les citations existantes dans les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciées, voir la section [[#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32 Nom de personne indifférencié]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-11-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Titre associé de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 672 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui est associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité de collectivité, des zones 672 peuvent être utilisées pour enregistrer des titres de ressources dont la collectivité est la créatrice, l'organisme de publication ou le sujet. Le but premier de la zone 672 consiste principalement à documenter le fait qu'il existe un lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 672 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 670 pour consigner le titre de la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est créée, ni d'utiliser des zones 670 pour justifier les informations enregistrées dans les zones 1XX et 4XX, telles que le nom privilégié et les variantes de noms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 672 peuvent être ajoutées après les zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 672 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 672 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans la classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 672 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zones 672 avec titres propres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Cervantes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre propre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre uniforme)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec une variante de titre pour l'œuvre associée à l'expression catalane de l'œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Reste du titre'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'on enregistre un titre propre, la sous-zone $b peut être utilisée pour enregistrer le complément de titre ou le titre propre parallèle afin d'éviter toute confusion lorsque des titres nécessitent une meilleure identification.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le complément de titre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le titre propre parallèle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $f – Date'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $f est utilisée pour enregistrer une date appropriée à l'entité enregistrée dans la sous-zone $a (par exemple, utiliser la date d'une œuvre pour un titre privilégié et la date de publication pour un titre propre). Ne pas utiliser les crochets carrés dans la sous-zone $f pour enregistrer une date de publication ou de production. Ne pas mettre de date de distribution, de date de fabrication ou de date de copyright en $f.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une œuvre :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de l'œuvre)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une expression :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date d'une expression française de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une manifestation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de publication d'une manifestation d'une expression polonaise de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Numéro de contrôle de la notice bibliographique'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $w est utilisée pour enregistrer des numéros de contrôle de notices bibliographiques (par exemple, les zones 001, 010 et 016 dans les notices bibliographiques). Il est recommandé de fournir la sous-zone $w lorsque l'information est facilement accessible. La sous-zone $w doit être répétée pour chaque numéro de contrôle distinct (par exemple, un LCCN et un numéro de notice OCLC doivent être fournis dans des sous-zones séparées). Pour plus d'instructions sur la saisie d'un numéro de contrôle dans la notice, voir la section sur la sous-zone $w dans le ''CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E. Format MARC 21 for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' la sous-zone $w doit seulement être utilisée pour les titres de manifestations.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Titre distinct de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui n'est pas associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom. Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité pour une personne, la zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer les titres d'œuvres écrites par une personne différente portant un nom semblable. L'objectif principal de la zone 673 est de documenter le fait qu'il n'existe aucun lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 673.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 673 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 675, comme le décrit la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 673 peuvent être ajoutées après des zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires non associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 673 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 673.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 673 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans le classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 673 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245. Pour les sous-zones spécifiques de la zone 673, appliquer les mêmes instructions que celles données dans la section [[#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Titre propre associé à un autre Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)###47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title propre associé à la National Gallery de Londres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
ET NON&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Même si la National Gallery of Art n'est pas la créatrice de la ressource mentionnée, elle en est l'éditrice et ce titre devrait donc être enregistré en 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#673_Titre_distinct_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Source des données non trouvées =&lt;br /&gt;
En avril 2012, cette zone a été redéfinie comme : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Citation d'une source consultée dans laquelle aucune information ne se trouve liée en aucune manière avec l'entité représentée par la notice d'autorité ou par des entités liées.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Les catalogueurs participant au PFAN ne sont pas tenus de modifier les zones 675 existantes simplement pour répondre à cette nouvelle définition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une nouvelle notice d'autorité, toujours citer la ressource cataloguée dans la zone 675 si la ressource cataloguée ne fournit aucune information liée de quelque façon que ce soit à l'entité représentée dans la notice d'autorité. Citer également dans la zone 675 d'autres sources consultées qui ne contiennent aucune information, lorsqu'on juge que cette absence même d'information mérite d'être consignée pour les futurs utilisateurs de la notice d'autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, il n'est pas toujours nécessaire d'inclure dans la zone 675 toutes les sources de référence consultées; il faut faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles sources sont suffisamment importantes pour être conservées de façon permanente dans la notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Données biographiques ou historiques =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsque des données biographiques ou historiques sont fournies dans une zone de note 678, rédiger la note en employant des phrases concises mais complètes et en gardant à l'esprit que l'information sera utilisée dans des affichages publics.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En prévision de la constitution par BAC du fichier dans WMS et de l'ajout en lot des notices d'autorité des autres institutions, le contenu de toutes les zones 665 dans les notices de BAC et de BAnQ a été déplacé vers la zone 678. Il se pourrait que la zone 665 originale ait contenu des instructions sur le ou les points d'accès à employer comme auteur et comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec); Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec); Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec); Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supprimer ces instructions dans la zone 678 si elles ont été conservées. Penser à ajouter la zone 667 sur l'emploi comme vedette-matière le cas échéant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification de la zone 678'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Généralement, une zone 678 doit être justifiée par une zone 670. Si elle n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu est approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, conserver la zone et ajouter une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678 comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [abréviation de la bibliothèque participante], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la notice a été modifiée après avoir été migrée, il faut consulter l'historique de la notice pour déterminer qui a ajouté la zone 678 à l'origine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la zone 678 n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, ne pas conserver la zone 678 sauf si une note appropriée peut être rédigée avec les informations dont on dispose. Noter que la zone 678 est facultative. Si le contenu de la zone doit être conservé parce qu'il ne se trouve nulle part ailleurs dans la notice, le transférer dans une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 678 existante qui sera supprimée car le contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 670 ajoutée :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Ne pas répéter cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#678_Donn.C3.A9es_biographiques_ou_historiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Liaison des vedettes établies – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note'' : Cette section ne s'applique pas à la zone 781 utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms 151 pour fournir des informations sur les subdivisions géographiques. Voir la section [[#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique|781]] de ce Guide pour les instructions relatives à cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;L'utilisation d'une vedette établie dans une zone de liaison 7XX dans une notice d'autorité de nom ou une notice d'autorité de collection est limitée à l'enregistrement du point d'accès autorisé à partir d'une bibliographie nationale ou d'un fichier d'autorité national ou équivalent séparé. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La forme de la vedette dans une zone 7XX peut correspondre à la forme dans la zone 1XX ou à une forme dans la zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité. Ceci est approprié lorsque la forme de la zone 7XX représente une forme se trouvant dans un fichier d'autorité différent de Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La source de la vedette dans la zone 7XX peut être précisée en utilisant soit la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur avec une sous-zone $2, soit une valeur pour le deuxième indicateur qui précise la source. Pour les points d'accès provenant du fichier LC/NAF, privilégier le deuxième indicateur avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Liaison des vedettes de subdivision - Subdivision géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pratique facultative du PFAN :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pour une vedette de nom géographique qui peut également être utilisée comme subdivision géographique, déterminer la forme sous laquelle la vedette doit être utilisée comme subdivision géographique en suivant les lignes directrices de la feuille d'instructions [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 du ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Entrer la forme de la subdivision géographique dans une zone 781 en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;6&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur. Pour une vedette géographique utilisée directement, comme un pays, saisir les données dans une seule sous-zone $z. Pour une vedette géographique qui est utilisée indirectement en subdivision d'une entité géographique plus vaste, telle qu'une ville, saisir les données dans deux sous-zones $z successives. Ne pas modifier les valeurs des positions de la zone 008. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice pour une vedette de nom géographique qui ne peut pas être utilisée comme vedette secondaire matière (008/15 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;»), comme le nom antérieur d'une juridiction qui a subi un changement de nom linéaire, par exemple, '''Ceylan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice d'autorité de nom pour un nom de lieu qui ne peut pas être utilisé comme une subdivision géographique, comme une section d'une ville, par exemple, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Ajouter une zone 781 à une notice existante lorsqu'une autre modification est faite dans la notice. Lors de la révision d'une notice existante qui contient une note d'utilisation pour l'indexation dans une zone 667 indiquant la forme de la subdivision géographique appropriée, supprimer la zone 667 et la remplacer par une zone 781.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 1 : Entités ambiguës =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 2 : Projets spéciaux =&lt;br /&gt;
Cette annexe fournit des informations sur les projets spéciaux impliquant des notices d'autorité créées et modifiées dans le fichier d'autorité Canadiana. Les notices créées ou modifiées pour ces projets peuvent contenir certaines zones et valeurs dans des zones qui ne sont généralement pas conformes aux politiques de catalogage actuelles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des instructions sur la modification de ces notices sont fournies afin d'indiquer si ces zones et valeurs doivent être conservées ou non.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 1. Notices créées ou révisées dans le cadre du projet de révision de notices de l'UQAM ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de révision de notices d'autorité dirigé par l'UQAM. Il s'agit des notices créées ou modifiées dans Canadiana par l'équipe du traitement documentaire de cette institution. Ces notices sont ensuite révisées par deux bibliothécaires et une technicienne de l'UQAM. Le projet s'est terminé le 31 mars 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces nouvelles notices présentaient les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles ont été ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices peuvent être modifiées de la même manière que les autres notices d'autorité de noms conformément aux politiques de catalogage en vigueur.&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un catalogueur modifie ces notices, il doit :&lt;br /&gt;
* changer la valeur du Guide/17 pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Notice d'autorité complète);&lt;br /&gt;
* supprimer la zone 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;amp;nbsp;»; &lt;br /&gt;
* évaluer la notice comme une notice versée en lot. Toutefois, comme la notice est en cours de révision, le point d'accès autorisé peut être modifié s'il n'est pas conforme aux pratiques du PFAN (p. ex., une date de naissance ou de décès peut être ajoutée si elle est disponible et a été omise dans le point d'accès).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 2. Notices créées et révisées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de mentorat &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui, depuis février 2021, permet aux&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; bibliothèques universitaires de créer des notices d'autorité de nom qui sont révisées par une autre institution universitaire. Les notices d'autorité créées ou modifiées par &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;les bibliothèques mentorées&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; sont révisées par des techniciens en documentation de l'Université &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui les mentore&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices présentent les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles sont ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abréviation, c'est-à-dire UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices ne doivent pas être modifiées.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145028</id>
		<title>PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=145028"/>
		<updated>2026-03-13T18:55:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Mise à jour des notices indifférenciées existantes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par D. Paradis, 12 septembre)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par N. Mainville, 26 février)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours| 24 h (En cours d'édition par A. Dunnett, BAC, 24 mars)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Guide}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:PFAN - Name Authority Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  Notices d'autorité de nom ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notices d'autorité de collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--En octobre et novembre 2021, les passages du Guide concernant les collections ont été cachés par souci de cohérence avec la décision de ne pas permettre la création ni la révision des notices d'autorité de collections. DP 1er novembre 2021--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 008 Éléments de données de longueur fixe =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Règles de catalogage descriptif ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée de quelque façon que ce soit, évaluer la notice d'autorité et la modifier pour qu'elle soit conforme à RDA, en modifiant le codage de la zone 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1 : Si une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée uniquement par la modification ou l'ajout d'une zone 5XX, on encourage fortement les catalogueurs, bien qu'il n'y ait pas d'obligation, à évaluer la notice et à la modifier selon RDA, en changeant le 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2 : Les autorités de noms indifférenciés codées 008/10 «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;», peuvent être modifiées de manière à enlever une ou plusieurs identités afin de créer des notices différenciées conformes à RDA. Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié à cette fin, la notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié mise à jour doit conserver le code 008/10 existant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-24]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F10 R.C3.A8gles de catalogage descriptif|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Système de vedettes-matière / Thésaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone 008/11 de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) dans la zone 008/11 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) dans la zone 008/11, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/15 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;dans la zone 008/11 des&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples de noms de collectivités ne pouvant être utilisés comme vedettes-matière :''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis.  Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran.  Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois.  Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique.  Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; margin-left: 0px; padding-left: 15px; padding-top: 10px; padding-bottom: 10px; text-indent: 0px; line-height: 1.0; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;tats-Unis. Pr&amp;amp;eacute;sident (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;glise catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Church of England. Dioc&amp;amp;egrave;se de Londres. &amp;amp;Eacute;v&amp;amp;ecirc;que (1675-1713 : Compton)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F11 Syst.C3.A8me de vedettes-mati.C3.A8re .2F Th.C3.A9saurus|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Utilisation de la vedette – vedette-matière secondaire ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Généralités&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de famille&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Appropriée) dans la zone 008/15 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) dans la zone 008/15, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/11 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Contexte'' : Pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, les catalogueurs descriptifs peuvent être amenés à établir un point d'accès autorisé pour le nom de la collectivité pour la fonction ainsi qu'un nom personnel pour le titulaire de la fonction. La politique d'indexation est d'attribuer seulement le nom personnel, et non le nom de la collectivité, comme point d'accès matière. Cette politique a été établie à des fins de colocalisation (voir [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). Par exemple, le point d'accès :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
peut être utilisé dans le catalogage descriptif comme point d'accès, mais en indexation seul le nom personnel serait utilisé comme point d'accès matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) aux notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F15 Utilisation de la vedette - vedette-mati.C3.A8re secondaire|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Nom de personne non différencié ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser le code 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (non différencié) dans une notice d'autorité de nom RDA. Attribuer la valeur 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes. Utiliser le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les familles, les collectivités et les lieux. Pour les œuvres et les expressions, attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» si le point d'accès commence par un nom de personne, sinon attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par le passé, la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 permettait de coder les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes comme non différenciées lorsque le catalogueur n'avait aucun moyen acceptable de différencier plusieurs personnes portant le même nom privilégié. Depuis sa création, le PFAN a suivi ces directives pour les notices d’autorité de noms de personnes :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas créer de nouvelles notices non différenciées codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Toutes les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes codéees RDA doivent être différenciées.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas ajouter une nouvelle identité à une notice d'autorité de nom de personne existante codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&lt;br /&gt;
* Appliquer plutôt [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] pour créer un point d'accès autorisé unique pour la personne, en utilisant des éléments additionnels appropriés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mise à jour des notices indifférenciées existantes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' Pour une entité donnée, si la seule notice trouvée est une notice indifférenciée (dont la zone 008/32 est codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;») versée par une université et comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;», ne pas l'utiliser.  Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité pour l'entité.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler à BAC la notice indifférenciée en communiquant son numéro de contrôle OCLC par courriel à l'adresse pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca et en mentionnant comme objet : Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice indifférenciée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante, en particulier une notice qui a été importée du LC/NAF, comprenne des paires de zones 670 utilisées pour regrouper l'information sur chaque personne visée par la notice d'autorité de nom. La première zone 670 de chaque paire est une zone 670 d'identification qui comprend un terme décrivant la relation de la personne avec le titre cité dans la deuxième zone 670 de la paire. Les données de la zone 670 d'identification sont enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a et sont mises entre crochets. La deuxième zone 670 de la paire est une zone 670 de citation qui comprend les éléments de données normaux dans la citation d'une ressource cataloguée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Auteur de Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Point d'accès supplémentaire pour Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Éditeur intellectuel de Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut aussi arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante comprenne une note 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée et identifiant la ou les ressources associées aux autres personnes portant le même nom. Dans ce cas, la notice ne comprend généralement pas de zones 670 pour les personnes autres que la première qui a été identifiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque de l'information pour distinguer une personne dans une notice d'autorité existante indifférenciée provenant de BAC ou de BAnQ est trouvée :&lt;br /&gt;
* Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour cette personne avec des informations distinctives et ajouter une indication que la personne était auparavant sur une notice indifférenciée (voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées|Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées]]&amp;amp;nbsp;», ci-dessous). Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour zone 670 de citation se rapportant à cette personne depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire. Ne pas transférer la zone 670 d'identification vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
* Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* Si la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée n'est pas supprimée parce que plusieurs identités restent, supprimer les zones 670 qui se rapportent à la personne maintenant représentée sur la nouvelle notice d'autorité (c’est-à-dire, dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, supprimer à la fois la zone 670 d’identification et la zone 670 de citation) et, le cas échéant, éditer ou supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée pour supprimer la mention de cette personne.&lt;br /&gt;
* S'il reste plus d'une identité dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée et qu'il n'y a pas suffisamment d'information pour créer de nouvelles notices d'autorité de nom pour chaque nom, laisser la notice d'autorité de nom codée RCAA2.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d’autorité de nom indifférenciée de BAnQ n’est pas supprimée, doit être modifiée ultérieurement et qu’elle ne comporte pas de numéro Canadiana, lui en attribuer un.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de faciliter le traitement automatisé des notices d'autorité (par exemple, appariement, liaison), lorsqu'il ne reste qu'une seule identité dans une notice d'autorité de nom de personne indifférenciée (c'est-à-dire lorsque les autres identités sont désambiguïsées et enlevées), procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'unique identité restante. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette identité, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;». Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Dans la nouvelle notice :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le cas échéant, transférer la citation 670 se rapportant à l'unique identité restante depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;S'assurer que la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée contient seulement de l'information se rapportant à l'unique identité restante (par exemple, les zones 670). Le cas échéant, supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, ajouter la notice 667 suivante pour garantir qu'une notice d'autorité de nom ne sera pas créée en double :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAC''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana] $z [Numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée dérivée du LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'autrice d'Esperanza :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAnQ''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a [aucun numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de: Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de: L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour Christian Bergeron (Sociologue) :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1056D8391F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian $c (Sociologue)iècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : 1063E5020F.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'individualisation des épreuves de la vie dans la modernité avancée, 2013 : $b page de titre (Christian Bergeron; Doctorat en sociologie; Université Laval [département déterminé selon la discipline])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a L'épreuve de la séparation et du divorce au Québec, 2014 $b (docteur en sociologie de l'Université Laval et maître en gérontologie de l'Université de Sherbrooke).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. Il reste deux identités non différenciées dans la notice :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;016 ## $a 1063E5020F [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Bergeron, Christian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur de: Le service d'animation spirituelle et d'engagement communautaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Son: Les centres de ressources éducatives dans l'enseignement secondaire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;670 ## $a Amicus (autor.) 2014-10-17 $b (Bergeron, Christian)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter une note 667 à une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour identifier le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité dans laquelle l'information sur cette personne a déjà été enregistrée :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices codées comme indifférenciées qui ne représentent en fait qu'une seule identité ====&lt;br /&gt;
À l'occasion, il arrive qu'une notice soit codée comme étant indifférenciée, mais que de nouvelles recherches indiquent qu'en fait la notice ne représente qu'une seule identité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut également arriver qu’on soupçonne que la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été codée par erreur dans la zone 008/32. Dans ces situations, procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter une zone 667 à la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée indiquant qu'elle a été signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'identité. Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette personne, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple d'une notice indifférenciée versée qui ne représente qu'une seule identité''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [aucun numéro Canadiana, utiliser le numéro OCLC de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==008/33 Niveau de l'établissement==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''provisoires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Coder une notice d'autorité de nom comme provisoire (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») si le point d'accès autorisé ne peut être formulé de manière satisfaisante en raison d'informations insuffisantes. Si les informations nécessaires deviennent disponibles ultérieurement, réévaluer la notice d'autorité de nom et la mettre à jour pour qu'elle soit pleinement établie (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;»). En aucun cas, il ne faut créer une notice d'autorité de niveau provisoire avec un point d'accès qui entre en conflit avec une notice d'autorité de nom existante selon les règles de normalisation du PFAN.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Régions administratives spéciales de Hong Kong et de Macao'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Étant donné qu'il n'est pas certain que Hong Kong et Macao continueront à avoir deux langues officielles, coder toutes les notice d'autorité de nom pour les organismes gouvernementaux dans ces deux endroits, au niveau de la région administrative spéciale et en dessous, comme provisoires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;»), quelle que soit la langue dans laquelle le point d'accès autorisé a été établi. Si une forme dans la deuxième langue officielle devient disponible, ajouter cette forme comme variante de point d'accès plutôt que de réviser le point d'accès autorisé existant. Consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] et l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html énoncé de politique connexe] pour obtenir des instructions sur le choix de la langue du nom privilégié. Noter que cette politique concernant le statut provisoire ne s'applique pas aux organismes non gouvernementaux.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Informations supplémentaires pour les participants au PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN peuvent créer des notices provisoires dans les deux situations exceptionnelles suivantes :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'a pas l'expertise linguistique nécessaire pour établir le point d'accès autorisé comme une notice d'autorité pleinement établie; cela comprend les situations où la bibliothèque ne dispose pas de sources de référence adéquates pour la recherche ou lorsque le catalogueur n'est pas sûr de la forme grammaticale correcte du point d'accès.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'est pas en mesure, en raison de ressources limitées ou d'autres contraintes, de compléter le travail pour les autorités en relation ou de déterminer la structure de renvois appropriée qui est requise pour les notices d'autorité pleinement établies.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''préliminaires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité préliminaires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») sont généralement le résultat de projets rétrospectifs. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs du PFAN procèdent régulièrement à des mises à jour des notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils apportent d'autres modifications à la notice d'autorité. À cause de cette exigence de mise à jour, les participants au PFAN sont priés de communiquer avec le Comité des normes avant d'entreprendre des projets qui pourraient entraîner l'ajout massif de notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» au fichier d'autorité Canadiana.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Au besoin, les catalogueurs peuvent mettre à jour les notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils travaillent avec des notices de collectivités antérieures/postérieures, bien que le ou les points d'accès dans les notices mises à jour ne soient pas utilisés dans la base de données bibliographiques locale. À l'occasion, les catalogueurs peuvent avoir besoin de créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom sans avoir de ressource en main, par exemple pour un nom de collectivité antérieur ou postérieur, en utilisant des renseignements provenant de sources de référence, ou pour un point d'accès basé sur des renseignements trouvés dans la sous-zone «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» de la zone 245 de notices bibliographiques, lorsqu'ils résolvent des conflits entre notices d'autorité de noms. Ne pas coder ces notices d'autorité de noms occasionnelles comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaires&amp;amp;nbsp;» .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, les éléments de données des collections doivent être vérifiés sur la publication et les notices d'autorité de collections doivent être codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (complet). Dans le travail d'autorité post-catalogage, il est permis de créer des notices d'autorité de collections sans la ressource en main; ces notices sont codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» (préliminaire). Lorsqu'une publication appartenant à la collection a été examinée et que la notice d'autorité préliminaire a été revue et mise à jour au besoin, mettre la notice d'autorité de collection au niveau complet.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F33_Niveau_de_l.27.C3.A9tablissement |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Source du catalogage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quelle que soit la valeur codée à l'origine dans cette zone, ne pas changer cette valeur lors de la mise à jour d'une notice, sauf si la valeur d'origine est incorrecte. La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;blanc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F39_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 Numéro de contrôle de la notice d'autorité de BAC = &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 016 est obligatoire lorsque le catalogueur crée, met à jour ou utilise une autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité et lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante sans numéro Canadiana, vérifier dans le LC/NAF si la même entité est représentée par une autorité et si celle-ci comporte un numéro Canadiana. Noter que le point d'accès autorisé dans le LC/NAF pourrait avoir une forme différente de celui dans Canadiana. Si la notice dans le LC/NAF comporte un numéro Canadiana, ajouter ce numéro dans la notice Canadiana. Si le numéro se termine par le code de langue E, le changer pour le code F. S'il n'y a pas de code de langue, ajouter le code F à la fin du numéro.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante avec numéro Canadiana, vérifier que le code de langue F est présent à la fin de la zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Doublons'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» un numéro Canadiana. Une fois qu'une notice d'autorité pour une entité donnée a été créée et qu'un numéro Canadiana lui a été attribué, ne pas changer les données dans cette notice pour représenter une entité DIFFÉRENTE. Par exemple, ne pas changer une notice d'autorité pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Dupont, Jean&amp;amp;nbsp;» en une pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Tremblay, Marie&amp;amp;nbsp;» (sauf si le nom de la personne a changé).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, demander à faire supprimer la notice (voir [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dures_sur_les_doublons|Procédures sur les doublons]]). NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il y a une zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, enregistrer le numéro Canadiana qui s'y trouve dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il n'y a pas de zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, en ajouter une en utilisant le numéro 0000X0000F. Ne pas enregistrer ce numéro dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée. Dans ce Guide, voir aussi «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Doublons|Doublons]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, supprimer la notice. NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer le numéro Canadiana de la notice supprimée dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice conservée.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Notices versées en lot partiellement modifiées'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité versées en lot qui sont modifiées partiellement selon la [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]] comportent le numéro Canadiana 1111X1111F. Ce numéro temporaire est ajouté pour permettre l'enregistrement de la notice en attendant que celle-ci soit évaluée pour s'assurer qu'elle répond aux normes du PFAN. Ce numéro doit être remplacé par un numéro unique lorsque la notice est évaluée et que la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;» est supprimée.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 Numéro international normalisé des publications en série =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'ISSN chaque fois qu'il est fourni dans le document en main, dans les notices bibliographiques analytiques ou dans la notice bibliographique pour la collection cataloguée dans son ensemble; sinon, enregistrer l'ISSN est facultatif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on sait que des ISSN distincts ont été attribués à différents formats d'une collection représentée par une seule notice d'autorité, il est préférable d'enregistrer dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 022 l'ISSN qui est l'ISSN de liaison (ISSN-L) pour ces différents formats. Enregistrer les ISSN pour les formats spécifiques dans des zones 667 distinctes, en suivant ce modèle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre d'une publication a changé, il est important de s'assurer que l'ISSN figurant sur la publication appartient au nouveau titre et non au titre précédent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un ISSN incorrect peut être indiqué dans une zone 667 (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;L'ISSN 1122-3344 n'est pas un ISSN valide pour cette publication&amp;amp;nbsp;»).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Autre numéro ou code normalisé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les lignes directrices des [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf ''NACO 024 Best Practices Guidelines'']. En règle générale, limiter à cinq le nombre de zones 024 dans une notice d'autorité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 024 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les identifiants codés dans la zone 024 des notices d'autorité du PFAN. Lorsqu'une zone 024 est présente dans une notice &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;d'autorité&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; qui fait l'objet d'une suppression (par exemple, dans le cas d'un doublon), les catalogueurs doivent transférer le contenu de la zone dans la notice qui doit être conservée. Lorsque deux notices d'autorité sont regroupées en une seule et que chacune des notices comporte une zone 024 différente, les catalogueurs doivent inclure les deux zones 024 dans la notice conservée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Données mathématiques codées sur les documents cartographiques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des pays, provinces, États, comtés'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les coordonnées des limites extérieures (rectangles de délimitation ou polygones) doivent généralement être utilisées avec des entités géographiques telles que des pays, des provinces, des États et des comtés pour identifier les coordonnées de l'entité. Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées en degrés/minutes/secondes, en degrés décimaux, en minutes décimales et/ou en secondes décimales. Les styles ne doivent pas être mélangés dans une même zone 034, mais la zone peut être répétée pour représenter les différents styles (voir ci-dessous pour les utilitaires de conversion); l'ordre des zones 034 lorsque les deux styles sont donnés n'a pas d'importance. Pour faciliter la réutilisation des coordonnées dans les applications géographiques, il faut employer le point et non la virgule comme signe décimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés/minutes/secondes''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux''' : enregistrement sous la forme hddd.dddddd (hémisphère-degrés.degrés décimaux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux avec plus et moins''' : enregistrer sous la forme +-ddd.dddddd (hémisphère[+/-]-degrés.décimaux) («&amp;amp;nbsp;+&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour N et E, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour S et W; le signe plus est facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple avec +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple sans le signe plus facultatif)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Minutes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmm.mmmm (hémisphère-degrés-minutes.minutes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Secondes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss.sss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes.secondes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons doivent généralement être enregistrées comme des points centraux plutôt que comme des limites extérieures. Pour la zone 034, la longitude et la latitude qui forment l'axe central sont enregistrées deux fois pour définir le point central (c'est-à-dire que les contenus des sous-zones $d et $e sont identiques et les contenus des sous-zones $f et $g sont identiques).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés/minutes/secondes)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux avec plus/moins)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Outils de conversion des coordonnées'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les institutions membres du PFAN sont encouragées à fournir des degrés/minutes/secondes et des degrés décimaux lorsqu'ils sont disponibles. De nombreux outils de conversion sont disponibles sur le Web pour dériver les uns des autres. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $2 a été définie pour l'enregistrement de la source des codes d'information sur les coordonnées - les sources couramment utilisées sont disponibles dans : [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CDC.html/view ''Codes sources pour les données cartographiques'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une citation de la source dans la zone 670 n'est pas nécessaire si la seule information provenant de la source est enregistrée dans la zone 034; une citation dans la zone 670 doit être faite si nécessaire pour enregistrer des informations en plus des coordonnées, telles que les variantes de nom, la hiérarchie, la période d'applicabilité, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#034_Donn.C3.A9es_math.C3.A9matiques_cod.C3.A9es_sur_les_documents_cartographiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 Numéro de contrôle de système =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#035_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_syst.C3.A8me |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Source du catalogage =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs doivent consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour les instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité nouvelles ou existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Langue de catalogage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $b fre ajoutée automatiquement par WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $d – Organisme responsable des modifications'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $d [code MARC 21] est ajoutée automatiquement par WMS lorsque la dernière sous-zone MARC $d dans la zone 040 n'est pas déjà celle de l'institution qui a modifié la notice. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $e – Règles de description'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on ajoute manuellement la sous-zone $e, ajouter la sous-zone après la sous-zone $b et avant la sous-zone $c. Il n'est pas nécessaire de déplacer la sous-zone $e à cette position si elle est déjà présente ailleurs dans le 040 ou si elle est ajoutée par une macro ou un gabarit. Lorsque la zone fixe 008/10 (Règles de catalogage descriptif) est changée pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Autre), la sous-zone $e rda est automatiquement ajoutée par le système.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#040_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Code d'authenticité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Cette zone se retrouve dans les notices d'autorité utilisées par BAC. Ne pas modifier ou supprimer cette zone lorsque le code CaOONL figure dans la 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les catalogueurs autres que ceux de BAC dérivent une notice à partir d'une notice de BAC contenant une zone 042, ils doivent s'assurer de supprimer cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les catalogueurs doivent ajouter la zone 042 $a nlc dans Canadiana chaque fois qu'ils créent, révisent ou dérivent une notice d'autorité. Ce code identifie le fichier «&amp;amp;nbsp;virtuel&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'autorité nationale canadienne qui est divisé en deux bases de données (LC/NAF et Canadiana).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-08]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#042_Code_d.27authenticit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Code de région géographique &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 043 peut seulement être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms géographiques (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone b – Code local de région géographique et Sous-zone $2 – Source du code local'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les lieux situés au Québec, les participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser la sous-zone $b pour enregistrer un code local tiré de la liste ci-dessous et représentant la région administrative du Québec où le lieu est situé. Ce code est formé du code de région géographique « n-cn--- » et d'un code local de sous-entité de deux lettres (p. ex., qa) qui identifie la région administrative et remplace les deux derniers caractères du code « n-cn--- » (p. ex. « n-cn-qa »). La sous-zone $b est enregistrée à la suite de la sous-zone $a et est suivie par la sous-zone $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Dates spéciales codées =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Lors de l'encodage de l'information sur la date, donner l'information la plus complète possible sur la date lorsque celle-ci est facilement disponible (la date dans la zone 046 peut être plus précise qu'une date utilisée dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2e_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Lors&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la révision des notices d'autorité existantes, enregistrer les dates dans la zone 046 même si le point d'accès lui-même n'a pas de dates dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d, lorsque l'information est facilement disponible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des dates dans la zone 046, utiliser la norme Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) dans tous les cas, sauf pour les siècles; fournir les dates en utilisant le modèle aaaa, aaaa-mm ou aaaa-mm-jj. Voir le tableau d'exemples dans l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Pour les spécifications complètes de l'EDTF, voir [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophoniste)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Blues around the clock, 1945 : $b étiquette (Johnny Hicks, saxophone ténor)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web Discogs, consulté le 27 mai 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; saxophoniste ténor qui a joué avec Tab Smith dans les années 1940)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de dates avant Jésus-Christ dans la zone 046, faire précéder les chiffres d'un trait d'union (signe moins). Comme il n'y a pas d'an zéro dans le calendrier de l'ère commune, il faut soustraire une année de la date réelle avant Jésus-Christ; par exemple, l'an 50 av. J.-C. est enregistré comme suit : -0049.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ##  $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement d'un siècle dans la zone 046, utiliser les deux premiers chiffres de l'intervalle de cent ans (par exemple, utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;16&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour représenter le 17&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle, 1600-1699).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Noter que le 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;er&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle apr. J.-C. est représenté par la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;00&amp;amp;nbsp;» et que les siècles av. J.-C. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sont précédés d'&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;un trait d'union &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(signe moins)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; avant les chiffres (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-04&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le 5&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle av. J.-C.). Un siècle approximatif (par exemple, activité environ 12&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle) ne peut pas être enregistré dans la zone 046.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Répétabilité'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;La zone 046 est répétable, mais les sous-zones de la zone 046 utilisées pour enregistrer les dates ne le sont pas. En général, une seule zone 046 avec des dates conformes à la norme EDTF devrait être suffisante. Cependant, les dates de siècles suivent la norme ISO 8601 et non la norme EDTF. Lors de l'enregistrement de dates de siècles en plus de dates plus précises, il faut donc répéter la zone 046.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates divergentes'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, les ressources consultées peuvent présenter des dates divergentes (par exemple, des dates de naissance ou de décès divergentes pour une personne ou des dates de début ou de fin divergentes pour une collectivité). Dans ces situations, la zone 046 doit refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'enregistrer toutes les dates divergentes en utilisant la zone 046, ni d'enregistrer une zone 046 pour chaque ressource consultée. L'évaluation des dates divergentes doit généralement avoir pour résultat une seule zone 046, contenant la ou les dates que le catalogueur juge les plus exactes pour représenter l'entité. Le catalogueur peut décider d'enregistrer ou non la ou les dates divergentes dans la zone 046 et il n'est pas nécessaire que la ou les dates enregistrées dans la zone 046 correspondent exactement à celle ou celles choisies pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;De même, toute date ajoutée au point d'accès autorisé devrait refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates, enregistrées conformément aux instructions de RDA et des énoncés de politique du PFAN. On peut considérer qu'une date qui prédomine dans les ressources consultées est la plus appropriée pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé. Si aucune date ne prédomine, le catalogueur peut décider d'utiliser le format «&amp;amp;nbsp;approximativement aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa?&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa ou aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans le point d'accès autorisé. Dans certains cas, des dates correspondant à la période d'activité de la personne (RDA 9.19.1.5) peuvent être préférables.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 157 av. J-C. comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce que c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 1907 comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Même exemple que ci-dessus illustrant une décision différente que le catalogueur aurait pu prendre concernant l'enregistrement de la sous-zone $f de la zone 046)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;La zone 046 étant basée sur des informations provenant de sources multiples, la justification ne peut être formulée avec précision dans une sous-zone $v/$u à la fin d'une zone 046. Les dates divergentes doivent être enregistrées dans des zones 670. Si une notice existante comporte une sous-zone $v/$u comme justification d'une zone 046 et que cette zone 046 est mise à jour comme décrit ci-dessus, il faut supprimer la sous-zone $v/$u et convertir la justification en une zone 670 si les dates divergentes ne sont pas déjà justifiées dans des zones 670 existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, il peut être nécessaire d'effectuer un calcul pour déterminer les dates à enregistrer dans la zone 046 et le point d'accès autorisé. De tels calculs peuvent produire des dates incertaines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Si les ressources consultées ne fournissent que la date de décès de la personne et son âge (en années) au moment du décès, comme cela se voit souvent dans les notices nécrologiques, l'année de naissance de la personne correspondra à l'une de deux années consécutives. Pour calculer ces années, il faut d'abord soustraire l'âge de l'année de décès, puis utiliser l'année ainsi obtenue et l'année précédente comme les deux possibilités pour l'année de naissance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a soustrait 75, l'âge au décès, de 1994, l'année du décès; l'année obtenue, 1919, et l'année qui la précède, 1918, représentent les deux années de naissance possibles)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si des dates non-grégoriennes figurent dans les ressources consultées, la conversion de ces dates en dates grégoriennes peut produire des dates incertaines. Il faut utiliser les dates du calendrier grégorien dans la zone 046 et dans le point d'accès autorisé. Il se peut qu'une même date dans un calendrier non-grégorien corresponde à l'une de deux dates grégoriennes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La date de 1346 dans le calendrier hégirien correspond à 1967 ou 1968 dans le calendrier grégorien.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de la norme de la date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter la sous-zone $2 edtf, sauf après un siècle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zones $q – Date de fondation, $r – Date de cessation,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Début de la période d'activité et $t – Fin de la période d'activité'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer les dates associées à un congrès, etc., ponctuel ou à une occurrence isolée dans une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] et [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), dans les sous-zones $s et $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer la date de fondation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) et la date de cessation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) d'une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]), si cette information est connue, dans les sous-zones $q et $r.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'utilisation des sous-zones $s et $t pour le début et la fin de la période d'activité dans les zones 368 et 370-376, voir les directives présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les instructions suivantes représentent la pratique du PFAN sur l'enregistrement des sources d'information dans les sous-zones $u et $v des zones où elles sont définies, et/ou dans la zone 670 :&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046$u$v&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Les zones 670 doivent être utilisées pour appuyer l'information utilisée comme une partie du point d'accès dans les zones 1XX et 4XX.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pour les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $v est facultatif si la même information/source est déjà citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;utiliser la sous-zone $v si l'information/source n'est pas citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $u est facultatif et celle-ci doit toujours être précédée de la sous-zone $v.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser une zone 670 si c'est nécessaire pour justifier l'information enregistrée dans d'autres zones pour lesquelles les sous-zones $u et $v ne sont pas définies ou sont définies différemment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des données dans la sous-zone $v (Source d'information) des zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381, suivre les mêmes principes de base pour la citation que ceux qui s'appliquent actuellement pour la zone 670, sous-zone $a (Citation de la source).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Fournir une information précise sur la citation (numéro de page, sous-page d'un site Web) dans la sous-zone $v si, selon le jugement du catalogueur, cette plus grande précision est nécessaire pour trouver l'information à l'intérieur de la source citée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information dans les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 est sous la même forme que celle trouvée dans la source, il n'est pas nécessaire de la citer. Si l'information enregistrée dans ces zones est sous une forme différente de celle dans la source, utiliser 670 $b (Information trouvée).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les sources matérielles :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information provient d'une source matérielle (par exemple, un livre imprimé, un support numérique amovible), la sous-zone $v doit contenir suffisamment d'information pour qu'un catalogueur puisse trouver la ressource citée dans un catalogue ou une base de données bibliographiques. Ceci peut généralement se limiter au titre propre et au nom de l'éditeur ou à la date. Si cette combinaison n'est pas unique, la citation du titre peut être précédée du nom du créateur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les ressources en ligne :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fournir suffisamment d'information pour permettre de trouver la ressource via un moteur de recherche. Inclure soit le titre et la date de publication (si c'est une ressource publiée formellement, tel un livre numérique), soit une description appropriée du document et la date d'accès (pour une ressource moins formelle). Facultativement, inclure la sous-zone $u.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-03]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Cote de la Library of Congress =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#050_Cote_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 Indice de la classification de la Library of Congress &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes pour enregistrer les indices de la classification LC des auteurs littéraires individuels, y compris les auteurs de littérature de jeunesse. Elle peut aussi être utilisée '''exceptionnellement''' dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes et de collectivités pour enregistrer les indices de biographie dans la fourchette ML410-429 de la classification LC lorsque le choix de l'indice ou du Cutter n'est pas évident. La zone 053 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il ne faut pas enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000 dans la zone 053. Pour l'utilisation des indices de la classe PS8000 dans les notices d'autorité de noms, voir la section [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]] de ce Guide. Une notice d'autorité pour un auteur littéraire canadien peut contenir à la fois une zone 053 et une zone 065.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Cote de Bibliothèque et Archives Canada =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#055_Cote_de_Biblioth.C3.A8que_et_Archives_Canada |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Autre indice de classification &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 065 sert à enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000. La zone 065 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $2 et une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [Code MARC de l’institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de l'indice'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour indiquer que l'indice provient de la classe PS8000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#065_Autre_indice_de_classification |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Cote de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#082_Cote_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Indice de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#083_Indice_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Cote de publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#086_Cote_de_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Indice de classification d'une publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#087_Indice_de_classification_d.27une_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Vedette – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participant au programme PFAN sont invités à consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour obtenir des instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité existantes ou nouvelles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer la ponctuation de fin de zone dans la zone 1XX à moins qu'elle ne fasse partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou qu'elle ne soit requise par les instructions de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Afin de minimiser l'impact de la maintenance de la base de données sur les notices bibliographiques associées et/ou les notices d'autorité associées, les catalogueurs sont priés de s'abstenir d'apporter des changements qui ne sont pas essentiels aux zones 1XX.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour le titre propre d'une monographie en plusieurs parties, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choix du titre propre d'une collection pour une monographie :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte plus d'une forme de mention de collection, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource porte une mention de collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture dans la même source, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte des pages de titre pour la collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2915.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Tenir compte de l'espacement et des changements dans la typographie au moment de déterminer où le titre de la collection commence et se termine. Consulter également [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Établissement d'un point d'accès pour une collection :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Déterminer le choix du point d'accès autorisé en fonction de l'instruction [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] et des énoncés de politique de BAC/BAnQ pour cette instruction.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclure du point d'accès autorisé les renseignements suivants inclus dans la mention de collection dans la notice bibliographique de la partie composante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'article initial dans les sous-zones $a, $t, $n et $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les compléments de titre;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;la mention de responsabilité;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les titres parallèles;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;les désignations numériques/chronologiques.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter un ou plusieurs qualificatifs entre parenthèses, le cas échéant, conformément aux énoncés de politique de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour obtenir des instructions sur la conversion d'une notice d'autorité de nom en notice d'autorité de collection, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Should an SAR be made?&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Vedette – Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour les familles'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;3&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une famille. Voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Les ajouts au nom sont contenus dans une seule paire de parenthèses séparées par des deux-points. &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Le terme pour le type de famille est ajouté après le nom et il est enregistré dans la sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $d (date) suit le terme pour le type de famille.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $c est utilisée pour un lieu associé à une famille et suit la date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $g est utilisée pour un membre illustre d'une famille. Donner le point d'accès autorisé pour la personne tel que trouvé dans la 1XX de la notice d'autorité de nom sans garder aucun codage de sous-zone interne.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour des personnes'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] fournit des directives sur l'emplacement des mots indiquant une relation (par exemple, Jr.) et le MARC définit la sous-zone $q comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme développée du nom de personne.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) La sous-zone $d (date) doit toujours être le dernier élément dans une zone 100 sauf si le terme (Esprit) est ajouté au nom. Ajouter $c (Esprit) comme dernier élément d'une zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) En général ajouter la sous-zone $c avant la sous-zone $q lorsqu'on ajoute aussi des mots, des chiffres, etc., indiquant une relation. (Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5.] pour le traitement des noms portugais)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MAIS&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
3) Pour les situations exceptionnelles, par exemple lorsque la sous-zone $a ne contient qu'un nom de famille ou qu'un prénom ou que le nom inclut un préfixe, etc., consulter le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#100_Vedette_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Contenu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 336 peut seulement être utilisée pour les notices d'autorité représentant des expressions. La zone 336 est toujours suivie d'une sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;rdacontent/fre&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser les termes fournis dans [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html RDA 6.9.1.3]. La liste des termes est également disponible dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Code du type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si on enregistre une sous-zone $b à la place ou en plus d'une sous-zone $a, utiliser les codes fournis dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''] du MARC 21.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#336_Contenu |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Autres attributs associés à des personnes ou des collectivités =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé pour les termes dans les sous-zones $a, $b et $c. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a, $b et $c. Lorsque les termes dans les sous-zones $a et $b ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer de professions ou d'occupations dans la sous-zone $c (Autre désignation). La profession ou l'occupation peut être enregistrée dans la zone 374.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les titres de royauté, de noblesse ou de rang ecclésiastique ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) dans la sous-zone $d dans la forme utilisée dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'une période et Sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#368_Autres_attributs_associ.C3.A9s_.C3.A0_des_personnes_ou_des_collectivit.C3.A9s |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Lieu associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de juridictions ou d'autres lieux, utiliser la forme trouvée dans Canadiana ou, à défaut, celle trouvée dans le RVM, en enregistrant la source dans la sous-zone $2. La forme du nom de lieu utilisée dans la zone 370 peut différer de la forme du nom de lieu ajoutée à un nom privilégié de lieu ou à un point d'accès construit selon les instructions de RDA ou des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie du nom d'une localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut une autre désignation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de lieu)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié du lieu plus vaste)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom de lieu ajouté à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Autre nom de lieu dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité pour le lieu n'existe pas dans Canadiana ni dans le RVM, il n'est pas nécessaire d'en créer une pour enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370. Enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370 selon les instructions de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ, en consultant les sources appropriées et en ajoutant des éléments additionnels (par exemple, le type de juridiction) afin d'éviter les conflits. Ne pas ajouter de sous-zone $2 si aucune notice d'autorité n'a été créée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom du lieu associé a changé, le nom du lieu qui s'appliquait à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré à la place ou en plus de la forme actuelle du nom. Il n'est pas nécessaire de suivre les politiques d'indexation et d'utiliser uniquement la forme la plus récente du nom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemples :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne née dans la ville de Salisbury avant que son nom ne devienne Harare; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme de nom qui s'appliquait au moment de la naissance de la personne)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne résidant dans la ville de Milan pendant la Renaissance, avant la formation du pays moderne de l'Italie; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme actuelle du nom pour le pays)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de lieux qui ne sont pas des juridictions, préférer les noms provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM et identifier la source dans la sous-zone $2. Si le nom ne provient pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, l'enregistrer dans la zone 370 sans ajouter de sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zone $c – Pays associé&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;En général, ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $c pour enregistrer les lieux qui ne sont pas des entités souveraines. Ces lieux peuvent être enregistrés dans la sous-zone $f ou dans d'autres sous-zones selon le cas.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La Martinique est un département français d'outre-mer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, si une entité souveraine comporte (ou comportait auparavant) un ou plusieurs pays constitutifs, n'importe lequel des pays constitutifs associés à la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré dans la sous-zone $c en plus ou à la place de l'entité souveraine plus vaste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à la Grande-Bretagne qui a des liens étroits avec le Pays de Galles; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Union soviétique, en particulier au Kirghizistan; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à Aruba, un pays constitutif des Pays-Bas; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer les Pays-Bas)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Inde avant son indépendance de la Grande-Bretagne; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer la Grande-Bretagne)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms d'entités des Premières Nations au Canada ainsi que les tribus indiennes («&amp;amp;nbsp;Indian tribes&amp;amp;nbsp;») reconnues par le gouvernement des États-Unis comme des entités juridiques peuvent être incluses dans la sous-zone $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Enregistrer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre dans la zone 370, sauf s'il s'agit simplement d'un lieu de publication ou d'un autre lieu associé à une manifestation (auquel cas utiliser la zone 643, le cas échéant). Bien que le «&amp;amp;nbsp;lieu d'origine&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'une œuvre en série puisse être le même que le lieu de publication de l'œuvre pour laquelle la notice d'autorité de collection (ou la notice bibliographique de publication en série) a été créée, faire preuve de jugement pour distinguer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre d'un lieu de publication qui n'est pas réellement lié à l'œuvre elle-même.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Adresse =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Selon le jugement du catalogueur, fournir une adresse si les informations sont facilement disponibles et n'ont pas déjà été enregistrées dans la sous-zone $e (Lieu de résidence, de sièges sociaux) de la zone 370.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Dans les cas où la sous-zone $a n'est pas enregistrée, inclure au minimum la sous-zone $m (Adresse de courriel) ou la sous-zone $b (Ville). &lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas enregistrer les adresses physiques &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou courriels&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; des personnes vivantes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les informations reliées à l'adresse lors de la mise à jour d'une notice contenant une adresse.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer plusieurs adresses, avec ou sans plages de dates, dans des zones 371 distinctes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Adresse de courriel'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $m doit contenir uniquement une adresse de courriel. Ne pas ajouter d'adresse Internet pour la 1XX dans cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#371_Adresse |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Domaine d'activité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée pour le domaine d'activité, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une entité provenant de Canadiana est utilisée comme domaine d'activité, enlever tout codage de sous-zone qui n'est pas autorisé dans la zone 372.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Domaine d'activité dans la 372 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel que la plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Zones 372 avec un terme provenant du RVM et un terme de vocabulaire non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'un période et la sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Groupe associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le fichier d'autorité Canadiana ou le fichier LC/NAF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Dans la zone 373, le codage de sous-zone n'est pas employé pour les collectivités subordonnées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom d'un groupe associé a changé, enregistrer le ou les noms du groupe qui s'appliquaient à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates). Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec des sous-zones $2 et des dates :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec différentes sources de vocabulaires :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $ s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $ t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : même si le format MARC ne spécifie pas de forme de date dans ces sous-zones, la pratique suivante est recommandée par souci de cohérence. Enregistrer les dates selon le calendrier grégorien dans le format AAAA. Si une date plus précise est nécessaire, considérer la possibilité de l'enregistrer dans une autre zone (par exemple, 670, 678). Il n'est pas nécessaire de reformuler les dates déjà inscrites dans les notices d'autorité pour se conformer à cette pratique. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Profession =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;6.1.3 pour des instructions sur l'enregistrement de la profession ou de l'occupation comme élément. Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.19.1.6 pour des instructions sur l'utilisation d'un terme indiquant la profession ou l'occupation dans un point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : répéter la zone si nécessaire pour plus de clarté.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du terme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les codes enregistrés dans la sous-zone $2 de la zone 374 peuvent provenir soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-TIO.html/view ''Codes sources pour les termes de profession''], soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-VM-C.html/view ''Codes sources pour les vedettes-matière et termes d'indexation''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#374_Profession |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Sexe de la personne =&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Ne pas utiliser cette zone dans les nouvelles notices d'autorité. Lorsqu'une notice existante doit être modifiée pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer toute occurrence de la zone 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Renseignements sur la famille =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Personnalité importante de la famille'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement du nom d'un membre illustre d'une famille dans la sous-zone $b, utiliser la forme du nom de la personne telle que mentionnée dans la sous-zone $g de la zone 100 dans la notice d'autorité pour la famille. Les codages internes de sous-zones ne doivent pas être inclus dans la sous-zone $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Langue associée =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier les codes de langues plutôt que des termes, en utilisant la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21. La sous-zone $l (Nom de la langue) doit être utilisée uniquement pour fournir des informations non disponibles dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/LNG-C.html ''Liste des codes de langue''] du MARC 21. Enregistrer plusieurs codes de langue seulement si la personne ou la collectivité fait usage de plusieurs langages dans ses publications, communications, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;À titre facultatif, enregistrer un ou plusieurs codes de langue ISO 639-3 dans une zone 377 supplémentaire. Cette pratique est particulièrement recommandée lorsqu’un code ISO 639-3 permet d’identifier une langue plus précisément que le code MARC. Pour plus d’informations, voir les [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $2 n'est pas requise lorsque la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 est utilisée pour représenter la langue (le deuxième indicateur «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» mentionne déjà la source). Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent utiliser une autre source de codes de langue peuvent ajouter une zone 377 supplémentaire en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur et en mentionnant la source utilisée dans la sous-zone $2 . Cette source doit cependant provenir d'une des sources fournies dans la liste intitulée [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CTL.html ''Codes sources pour les codes et termes de langue''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Code ISO 639-3 pour la langue Achi : acr. Code pour cette même langue, laquelle fait partie des langues maya, dans la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 : myn)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Forme développée du nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer la forme développée du nom dans la zone 378 lorsque l'information est facilement disponible, même si l'information est déjà présente dans la zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#378_Forme_d.C3.A9velopp.C3.A9e_du_nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Genre de l'œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM ou le RVMGF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'enregistrement du genre de l'œuvre comme élément dans les notices d'autorité de collections représentant des œuvres (et non des expressions), voir l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.3.1.3.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#380_Genre_de_l.27.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Autres caractéristiques distinctes d'une œuvre ou d'une expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée pour enregistrer les éléments RDA Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) et Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Les autres caractéristiques distinctives des expressions qui sont spécifiques aux œuvres musicales (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4–6.18.1.6]) peuvent être aussi enregistrées dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Numéro de Franklin enregistré comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version enregistrée comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut être approprié que certains des termes enregistrés pour une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression soient enregistrés dans la zone 381 ou dans une autre zone MARC pour laquelle il n'y a pas d'élément RDA correspondant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, une collectivité (tel un éditeur) utilisée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ou d'une œuvre peut être enregistrée soit dans la zone 373 (Groupe associé), soit dans la zone 381, soit dans les deux zones. ''Note :'' Le codage de sous-zone pour les collectivités subordonnées n'est pas utilisé dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme groupe associé et comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA n'a pas d'élément particulier pour les lieux associés aux expressions, mais la zone 370 sous-zone $f (Autre lieu associé) et la sous-zone $g (Lieu d'origine de l'œuvre ou de l'expression) peuvent être utilisées dans les notices d'autorité pour les expressions. Dans certains cas, des lieux associés aux œuvres ou aux expressions sont considérés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression selon RDA et peuvent être enregistrés dans la zone 370, dans la zone 381 ou dans les deux zones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Lieux utilisés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre juridique; enregistrés dans les zones 370 et 381)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'élément RDA lieu d'origine d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.5]) dans une zone 370 (voir la section [[#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]] de ce Guide).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression a été utilisée dans un point d'accès autorisé et est aussi enregistrée comme élément dans une zone 3XX, utiliser la zone 381 pour enregistrer une autre caractéristique distinctive. À titre facultatif, enregistrer aussi la même information dans une autre zone 3XX appropriée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#381_Autres_caract.C3.A9ristiques_distinctes_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_ou_d.27une_expression |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en utilisant les termes du thésaurus ''Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM'' (RVMMEM). Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en appliquant les instructions de RDA ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6]) et les ÉP de BAC-BAnQ associés. ''Note :'' La zone 382 peut également être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité d'expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :''' Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère. Si c'est jugé important pour l'identification et l'accès, ajouter une zone 382 additionnelle qui ne répond pas aux présentes lignes directrices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-04-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#382_Distribution_d.27.C3.A9x.C3.A9cution_d.27une_.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numéro d'identification d'une œuvre &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou d'une expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; musicale =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible. Créer des zones 383 distinctes pour les différents systèmes de numérotation associés à une même œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#383_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27identification_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Tonalité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible pour les œuvres. En cas de doute, ne pas enregistrer. Ne pas enregistrer pour les expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Caractéristiques du public cible =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer le public cible d'une œuvre ou d'une expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices  du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a : Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Termes provenant de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé et terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-07-17]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Caractéristiques du créateur ou du collaborateur &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer les caractéristiques démographiques d'un ou plusieurs créateurs ou contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression, notamment pour enregistrer les caractéristiques communes à un groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression. Cette zone sera généralement utilisée dans des notices d'autorité établies pour des agrégats par regroupement matérialisant deux ou plusieurs expressions de deux ou plusieurs œuvres indépendantes créées par des agents différents, ainsi que pour les œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre (par exemple, les œuvres d'auteurs inconnus ou les collections de monographies). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Personnes âgées $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Terme démographique non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bien que cette zone soit principalement utilisée pour des œuvres agrégées et pour des œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre, il existe des situations où il est également approprié de l'utiliser pour une œuvre individuelle d'un ou plusieurs créateurs nommés. Par exemple, pour une œuvre musicale composée pendant l'enfance ou l'adolescence d'un créateur, il ne serait pas approprié d'enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;Enfants&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Adolescents&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme caractéristiques dans la notice d'autorité du compositeur. Au lieu de cela, les caractéristiques démographiques applicables uniquement à certaines des œuvres d'un créateur doivent être enregistrées dans les notices d'autorité établies pour ces œuvres.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Œuvre composée en 2003-2005, achevée lorsque le compositeur avait 14 ans)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Termes issus de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;''(Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau; terme non contrôlé et termes provenant du même vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $i – Information sur la relation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il est possible d'utiliser la sous-zone $i pour enregistrer un terme désignant la nature de la relation entre les groupes démographiques enregistrés dans la zone et l'œuvre ou l'expression. Préférer un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que les termes de relation du format MARC ou les indicateurs de relation RDA. Mettre une majuscule à la première lettre du terme de relation et utiliser la forme au singulier. Faire suivre le terme de relation par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998-February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer plusieurs occurrences de la sous-zone $i dans une même occurrence de la zone 386. Si plusieurs termes de relation s'appliquent à un seul groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs (par exemple, une œuvre réunissant des auteurs et des artistes du même groupe démographique ou une expression dont les éditeurs et les traducteurs appartiennent au même groupe démographique), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Compilation d'œuvres d'auteurs et d'artistes du Massachusetts)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différents termes de relation s'appliquent à différents créateurs et contributeurs (par exemple, si les auteurs font partie d'un groupe démographique et les artistes d'un autre), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents. Si le même terme de relation s'applique à plus d'un groupe démographique, répéter la sous-zone $a dans une même zone ou répéter la zone. Pour plus de clarté, en cas de doute, répéter la zone 386 autant que nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Partition comprenant des œuvres de Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler et Strauss, ainsi que les paroles imprimées sous forme de texte, en allemand et en traduction anglaise)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-12]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Période associée à la création =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine d'une œuvre ou d'une expression. Le nom de la période peut préciser ou sous-entendre un lieu pour lequel la période de temps est pertinente. Il peut aussi préciser le nom d'un événement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM ou le RVMFAST. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les compilations, la zone peut être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine des œuvres/expressions contenues dans la compilation, considérées collectivement (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur). Elle peut également être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine de la compilation elle-même (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;2&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour un recueil de poésie de la Renaissance compilé au XIXe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 388 peut être utilisée en conjonction avec ou à la place de la zone 046. Lorsque la ou les dates précises de création ou d'origine ne sont pas connues ou qu'elles s'étendent sur une longue période, il peut être utile d'enregistrer des termes chronologiques textuels dans la zone 388.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour une œuvre anonyme du XIVe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si la valeur de l'indicateur diffère, répéter la zone. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom avec zones 388 contenant des termes provenant de différents vocabulaires)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour une autre raison, supprimer tout signe de ponctuation à la fin d'une zone 4XX sauf s'il fait partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou est requis par les règles de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'est pas nécessaire de justifier tous les renvois 4XX; voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès|Justification des variantes de point d'accès]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 670 de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas faire un renvoi 4XX qui se normalise sous la même forme qu'une autre zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité ou une zone 1XX dans toute autre notice d'autorité de nom. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;NACO normalization&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratiques à privilégier pour le catalogage selon RDA :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Enregistrer les variantes trouvées dans la manifestation cataloguée :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Utiliser le jugement du catalogueur;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Il n'y a pas de limite quant au nombre ou à la forme des renvois;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Au lieu ou en plus d'ajouter des variantes, envisager de fournir un accès en ajoutant des zones 37X.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Exemple montrant une zone 378 sans une variante pour la forme développée du nom :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Établir des notices d'autorité de noms supplémentaires pour les points d'accès autorisés nécessaires pour soutenir les éléments utilisés dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX (par exemple, la collectivité supérieure associée à la collectivité subordonnée qui doit être établie).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, fournir une variante de point d'accès 4XX pour un ancien point d'accès autorisé 1XX, sauf si l'ancien point d'accès autorisé est manifestement incorrect. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#4XX$w|Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour plus d'information.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Utiliser la forme établie des composantes dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX, à l'exception des variantes en écriture non latine, qui peuvent présenter un mélange d'écritures ou être entièrement dans une écriture non latine.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, ne pas supprimer des variantes sauf si elles sont manifestement incorrectes (par exemple, une variante en écriture non latine qui ne représente pas la même personne).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si une forme trouvée dans la manifestation cataloguée inclut une variante de forme d'une composante d'une variante de point d'accès en 4XX, cette forme peut être utilisée dans son intégralité comme une variante de point d'accès supplémentaire en 4XX, à condition que des sous-zones ne soient pas utilisées pour diviser ses parties constitutives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on change la forme d'une collectivité hiérarchiquement supérieure, d'un nom géographique ou d'un nom de personne dans une 1XX, mettre à jour toutes les notices d'autorité existantes qui utilisent cette composante dans une zone 4XX, sauf si la 4XX représente l'ancien point d'accès autorisé (par exemple, $w/2=e). Exception : Ne pas appliquer cette instruction dans le cas des notices d'autorité migrées qui n'ont pas été réévaluées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est modifié parce que la personne a changé de nom, enregistrer l'ancienne forme du nom dans une zone 400 avec $w nne si la variante est valide selon les instructions de RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après l'élection comme pape)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est mis à jour pour fermer la date, il est recommandé d'enregistrer l'ancienne forme avec la date ouverte dans une zone 4XX avec $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) basé sur le catalogage CIP est modifié parce que sa forme sur la ressource publiée est différente de celle sur la demande CIP, une zone 4XX pour l'ancienne forme du point d'accès autorisé avec la sous-zone $w nne peut être ajoutée sauf si l'ancienne forme 1XX est manifestement incorrecte (par exemple, la date de naissance de l'auteur a été donnée comme étant 1775 au lieu de 1975 dans la demande CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) est modifié en raison d'un changement dans les instructions de catalogage, enregistrer l'ancienne forme dans une zone 4XX en utilisant $w. Si la variante de forme est un renvoi valide selon les instructions actuelles de RDA, utiliser $w nne. Si la variante de forme n'est pas un renvoi valide selon les instructions RDA actuelles, utiliser $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante n'est pas valide selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nne&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante est valide selon RDA; le changement de la forme en 100 est basé sur l'utilisation du nom et les dates de naissance et de mort ont été ajoutées parce que la 100 a été changée)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429 av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que l'abréviation «&amp;amp;nbsp;ca&amp;amp;nbsp;» n'est pas valide pour une période d'activité selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé est corrigé parce que des dates ont été enregistrées de manière inexacte ou qu'un catalogueur a introduit une faute de frappe dans le point d'accès autorisé, ne pas faire de renvoi à la forme incorrecte. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche des notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel des collections et la création et la tenue à jour des notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des variantes de point d'accès peuvent être enregistrées dans toute notice d'autorité de collection, y compris celles pour des phrases analogues à des collections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si les volumes d'une monographie en plusieurs parties portent des formes différentes du titre commun, faire un renvoi 4XX plutôt qu'un renvoi 5XX pour la forme de titre non choisie comme titre propre de la monographie en plusieurs parties.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w. Lorsqu'on utilise les indicateurs de relation RDA dans les zones 5XX, utiliser les termes des annexes I, J ou K; mettre une majuscule au premier terme et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour de l'information sur l'utilisation des indicateurs de relation et/ou les codes $w dans une zone 5XX spécifique, voir la section de ce Guide concernant cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les conventions du format autorités en ce qui concerne l'utilisation de la sous-zone $w. Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $w sauf si une valeur autre que «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» est appropriée dans l'une des positions. Lorsqu'on utilise la sous-zone $w, enregistrer la sous-zone comme première sous-zone de la zone. Fournir les positions de caractères qui précèdent la valeur mais pas celles qui lui succèdent, par exemple,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé antérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé ultérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = pour indiquer qu'une sous-zone $i ou une sous-zone $2 est utilisée pour donner de l'information sur la relation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = pour indiquer un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour des pseudonymes multiples (la notice comprend aussi une zone 663)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» (5XX) ne doit pas se normaliser sous la même forme qu'un autre renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la même notice d'autorité, sauf si les deux zones 5XX contiennent un indicateur de relation dans la sous-zone $i et que les textes des indicateurs de relation sont différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre un nom de personne et 1) le nom d'une autre personne, d'une famille ou d'une collectivité ou 2) le point d'accès autorisé pour une œuvre ou une expression. Cette technique peut également être utilisée pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres et des expressions et contenant des noms de personnes. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe I, J ou K dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on enregistre des relations entre noms de personnes impliquant des pseudonymes et que seulement deux notices d'autorité sont en cause, les catalogueurs peuvent soit 1) utiliser la sous-zone $i et le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w ou 2) utiliser des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» simples. Pour plus d'information sur ces techniques et des instructions sur l'enregistrement de pseudonymes multiples (c'est-à-dire ceux qui requièrent une zone 663), voir la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rappel aux catalogueurs : Lorsqu'une variante de nom (400) et un point d'accès autorisé (100) sont en conflit, il faut faire un ajout à la zone 400 ou à la zone 100 pour résoudre le conflit (par exemple, une forme développée du nom, une date d'activité, etc.); la pratique antérieure consistant à changer la zone 400 en 500 pour résoudre le conflit n'est plus une option. Lorsque les catalogueurs trouvent une variante de forme dans une zone 500 au cours de la mise à jour d'une notice d'autorité de nom, ils doivent résoudre le conflit et modifier la zone en 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de collectivité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de réunion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8] pour des directives sur les relations entre les notices d'autorité pour des séries de conférences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Titre uniforme =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés pour des œuvres ou des expressions. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe J dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $i avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w tant que les indicateurs de relation pour les lieux ne seront pas développés. (RDA a prévu un espace pour l'annexe L.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Traitement de collection – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 640 Dates de publication et/ou indication séquentielle de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#640_Dates_de_publication_et.2Fou_indication_s.C3.A9quentielle_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Exemple de numérotation de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#642_Exemple_de_num.C3.A9rotation_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Lieu et éditeur de la collection/organisme de publication =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#643_Lieu_et_.C3.A9diteur_de_la_collection.2Forganisme_de_publication |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Usage en matière d'analyse de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#644_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_d.27analyse_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Usage en matière de rappel de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#645_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_rappel_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Usage en matière de classification de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#646_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_classification_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Renvoi complexe «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 663 comprend le texte explicatif et les points d'accès autorisés pour les relations entre une zone 100 (nom établi) et d'autres zones 100 (noms établis) qui ne peuvent pas être correctement exprimées par un ou plusieurs renvois simples générés à partir de zones 500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Généralement, cette situation se produit lorsqu'une personne utilise plus de deux identités, lorsque plus d'une personne partage une identité avec une ou plusieurs autres personnes, ou lorsque plusieurs personnes utilisent le même pseudonyme indépendamment les unes des autres ou en raison d'un autre arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le texte de la zone 663 peut être adapté pour répondre à des situations exceptionnelles; toutefois, il faut garder le texte aussi simple que possible et laisser les zones et le codage MARC communiquer l'information souhaitée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la technique de la zone 663 pour établir des relations entre collectivités ou entre personnes et collectivités.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Seulement deux identités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque seulement deux notices d'autorité de noms sont créées pour une personne, les notices d'autorité de noms sont généralement reliées par des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500, sans aucune zone 663. Toutefois, lorsque l'une des notices d'autorité de noms est établie pour un pseudonyme commun ou un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment les unes des autres, la technique de la zone 663 est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Plus de deux identités - point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» et renvois ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plus de deux points d'accès autorisés sont créés pour la même personne, identifier un point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» en utilisant la technique de la zone 663. Cette décision est fondée sur le désir de simplifier la structure de renvois et d'aider les catalogueurs à déterminer le nom à utiliser comme sujet des œuvres biographiques ou critiques. Le point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» doit être déterminé par la forme de nom qui prédomine dans l'usage ou, en l'absence de preuves suffisantes, en choisissant le nom réel de la personne comme forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Dans la notice d'autorité pour la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», ajouter des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour tous les autres noms utilisés. Justifier les renvois en 500 par des zones 670 selon la pratique normale. Fournir une zone 663 énumérant tous les autres noms avec le texte suivant (celui-ci peut être modifié pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom] $b [forme établie du nom]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans chacune des autres notices d'autorité de noms, ajouter un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», en justifiant ce renvoi par une zone 670, selon la pratique normale. D'autres noms peuvent être mentionnés dans le 670 s'il est pratique de le faire. Fournir une zone 663 avec le texte suivant ou un texte similaire (le texte peut être ajusté pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom choisie comme vedette de base]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque l'auteur utilise un autre nouveau nom, créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour ce nom et l'ajouter à la structure de renvois ainsi qu'à la liste de la zone 663 dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;». Les renvois au nouveau nom dans les zones 500 et 663 sont ajoutés seulement dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes conjoints ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un pseudonyme conjoint est une identité utilisée par deux ou plusieurs personnes travaillant en collaboration. Si une personne utilise un pseudonyme conjoint et un autre nom (tel que trouvé dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes utilisés par plusieurs personnes ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment l'une de l'autre utilisent le même pseudonyme et un ou plusieurs autres noms (tels que trouvés dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisée par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(L'auteur a un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes et des pseudonymes individuels)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Note générale non destinée au public =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Donner des informations de valeur permanente et d'intérêt général qui seraient également utiles aux autres institutions du PFAN ou à celles qui n'y participent pas. Une liste représentative des notes est donnée ci-dessous. En général, le libellé est recommandé, mais n'est pas prescriptif, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions. Les zones 667 distinctes peuvent être données dans n'importe quel ordre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [raison de l'encodage].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date de la mise à jour].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Utilisée pour les changements de langue officielle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Annexe_2_:_Projets_sp.C3.A9ciaux|Annexe 2]] de ce Guide pour des informations et des instructions sur les zones 667 ajoutées aux notices d'autorité dans le cadre d'un projet spécial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes dont certaines identités ne sont pas établies ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une personne utilise deux ou plusieurs identités dans les manifestations, des notices d'autorité de noms peuvent être créées pour chaque identité. Dans un souci d'efficacité, les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser une zone 667 pour énumérer les pseudonymes non trouvés dans les publications au lieu de créer des notices d'autorité de noms pour ces pseudonymes inutilisés. Dans ce cas, énumérer les pseudonymes inutilisés dans une zone 667 après l'expression : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette note peut aussi être ajoutée dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne qui a plusieurs notices d'autorité de noms pour plusieurs identités lorsque certains des pseudonymes ne sont pas trouvés dans des publications. Dans ce cas, énumérer seulement les pseudonymes inutilisés dans la zone 667 et suivre les instructions appropriées pour les autres pseudonymes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, […] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la section [[#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom|663]] de ce Guide ainsi que dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les séries de congrès, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter une zone 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour une série de congrès lorsqu'il y a des notices d'autorité autant pour la série que pour les occurrences isolées du congrès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appliquer ces instructions lors de la création de nouvelles notices d'autorité de noms et lors de la révision de notices d'autorité de noms existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Ajouter des notes indiquant l'utilisation en indexation lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé n'est pas approprié pour utilisation comme vedette-matière dans ces situations :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Chefs d'État, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette instruction s'applique aux notices d'autorité de noms pour les collectivités représentant la fonction lorsque le nom du titulaire est inclus comme partie du point d'accès autorisé de la collectivité. Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Dignitaires gouvernementaux)] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html 11.2.2.26 (Dignitaires religieux)] pour les instructions sur les collectivités. Utiliser cette note 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour la collectivité pour indiquer l'utilisation en indexation :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [vedette du nom de la personne].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi les sections [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Changements linéaires entre noms antérieurs et ultérieurs d'une juridiction'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La politique d'indexation du RVM est d'employer comme point d'accès matière ou comme subdivision géographique uniquement le dernier nom d'une juridiction politique qui a eu un ou plusieurs noms antérieurs, aussi longtemps que l'identité territoriale demeure essentiellement la même (voir ''Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval'', 5.14.3.1). Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom ayant un point d'accès autorisé antérieur/ultérieur pour un lieu dans cette situation, les catalogueurs doivent ajouter une note 667 sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom antérieur du lieu et modifier les zones 008 appropriés (008/11 et 008/15).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Notices d'autorité de personnes fictives'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les points d'accès autorisés pour les personnes fictives ne doivent pas être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, la zone 008/11 doit être codée avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» et la zone 008/15 doit être codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;». Selon l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 9.0, lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, ajouter cette zone 667 pour indiquer l'utilisation comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une partie d'une ville, en indiquant qu'il n'est pas approprié de l'utiliser comme une subdivision géographique :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) Notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les points d'accès autorisés pour les noms de familles peuvent être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Pour les notices d'autorité de noms de familles qui reflètent la pratique antérieure (qui interdisait de les utiliser comme vedettes-matière), mettre à jour les notices pour attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et supprimer la note sur l’utilisation comme vedette-matière suivante :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes pour les renvois en écriture non latine ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans une notice d'autorité qui comprend une variante de point d'accès dans une écriture non latine, utiliser la zone 667 avec une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.&amp;amp;nbsp;» S'il y a plusieurs variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, utiliser une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» à la zone 008/29 pour indiquer que la variante de point d'accès n'a pas été évaluée. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Doublons&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Doublons ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice à conserver&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Source des données =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone a pour but d'enregistrer des informations sur le nom ou le titre représenté dans la zone 1XX. Elle comprend des renseignements qui contribuent à l'identification de l'entité et qui justifient le choix du nom ou du titre de même que tout élément supplémentaire utilisé pour construire le point d'accès autorisé (1XX). Les informations consignées justifient également, le cas échéant, des variantes de forme du nom ou du titre (4XX), d'autres éléments d'identification (046, 3XX et 678), et clarifient les relations entre la 1XX et les autres entités représentées dans le fichier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Fonctions de la zone 670 :'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations, provenant de sources (par exemple, livres, appels téléphoniques, sites Web), à l'appui du choix et de la forme du point d'accès autorisé, des variantes de point d'accès et d'autres éléments d'identification&lt;br /&gt;
* Stocker des informations qui pourront être utilisées pour résoudre un conflit par la suite&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations sur les relations entre entités (par exemple, une personne est l'auteur d'une œuvre, une collectivité a été absorbée par une autre collectivité)&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier une personne qui a produit des œuvres dans différents domaines ou sous des formes diverses&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier des personnes différentes dont les points d'accès doivent rester identiques pour le moment (c'est-à-dire des noms de personnes indifférenciés)&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour préciser si les différentes formes d'un nom ou d'un titre sont de simples variations ou reflètent un changement de nom ou de titre&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer les recherches requises par les lignes directrices actuelles&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour faciliter la maintenance des fichiers d'autorité et bibliographiques étant donné que les informations dans les zones 670 aident à la prise de décisions concernant les points d'accès autorisés en double et les attributions erronées&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour soutenir les manipulations informatiques basées sur des algorithmes utilisant les informations du 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, la première zone 670 cite la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est établie, c'est-à-dire la ressource en cours de catalogage. Si la ressource en cours de catalogage ou de consultation ne fournit aucune information justifiant le point d'accès autorisé, les variantes de point d'accès ou les autres éléments enregistrés dans la notice d'autorité, voir la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur la façon de citer la ressource dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les zones 670 suivantes dans n'importe quel ordre, en ajoutant les nouvelles zones après celles qui existent déjà. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 670 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670, préférer les sources objectives et faisant autorité (par exemple, une encyclopédie) et les sources qui fournissent des informations de première main (par exemple, un blogue d'auteur). Utiliser des sources qui fournissent des informations supplémentaires plutôt que celles qui répètent des informations déjà présentes dans les autres zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Pratiques à privilégier pour les zones 670 : '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans la sous-zone $b, résumer et modifier les informations trouvées, selon les besoins, pour éviter les informations superflues ou répétitives.&lt;br /&gt;
* Éviter de citer des informations subjectives ou des informations dont la valeur est douteuse pour identifier une entité dans un contexte bibliographique.&lt;br /&gt;
* Faire preuve de prudence lors de l'enregistrement d'informations sur des personnes vivantes lorsque ces informations sont susceptibles d'être de nature privée ou controversée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité existantes peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices. Par exemple, dans les zones 670 des notices d'autorité plus anciennes, la sous-zone $b contenant des informations justificatives pourrait être absente. Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité qui faisaient partie d'un projet spécial peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices et/ou peuvent contenir des informations qui semblent inhabituelles ou incorrectes.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Les exemples donnés tout au long du texte suivant présentent diverses conventions en ce qui concerne la ponctuation et le style. Ces conventions ne sont pas prescriptives et doivent être considérées comme des pratiques à privilégier pour faciliter l'échange d'informations dans le contexte d'une base de données partagée. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs fassent preuve de jugement et de bon sens. La ponctuation et le style ne doivent pas nécessairement être cohérents d'une notice à l'autre tant que l'information est claire et précise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format des zones 670 ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
À l'exception de l'eszett (ß ou ſʒ) et du symbole euro (€), tous les caractères figurant dans le [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/M9230.html tableau des codes MARC] peuvent être utilisés dans les notices d'autorité ajoutées au fichier d'autorité Canadiana (voir le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). Lorsque des données provenant d'un site Web sont copiées/collées dans une zone 670, vérifier que tous les caractères peuvent être utilisés dans la notice. Certains caractères non valides ressemblent à ceux qui sont valides. Par exemple, le tiret (–) non valide ressemble au trait d'union (-) valide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une substitution pour un symbole non reproductible est indiquée entre parenthèses (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.5]), une explication de cette interpolation peut également être fournie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les données doivent être fournies sous forme romanisée. Normalement, il est entendu que le catalogueur a fourni la romanisation; par conséquent, lors de la transcription de données trouvées dans la source sous forme romanisée, ajouter après celle-ci l'expression entre crochets ['''forme romanisée''']. Dans des langues telles que l'arabe et l'hébreu, où les voyelles sont généralement omises dans l'orthographe des textes, le catalogueur fournit les voyelles manquantes lors de la transcription des données. Lors de la transcription de texte qui inclut les voyelles, ajouter après entre parenthèses ['''vocalisé'''] ou ['''en partie vocalisé'''] selon le cas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un catalogueur choisit de fournir des variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, les 670 $b doivent contenir aussi bien la transcription du ou des textes en écriture non latine trouvés dans la source que la ou les formes systématiquement romanisées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les notices d'autorité sont créées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, il est possible que de l'information supplémentaire soit incluse. Ces données peuvent également être formatées d'une manière différente de celle indiquée dans le présent document. En général, ces données doivent être conservées telles qu'elles sont générées afin de maintenir la rentabilité de ce processus, à moins que les données ne prêtent à confusion ou ne provoquent des erreurs de validation. Les noms et les titres pour lesquels les notices d'autorité sont créées constituent l'exception à cette règle. Suivre les instructions de ces sections pour enregistrer ces données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Citation de la source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Le titre propre de la ressource citée, suffisamment complet pour permettre une identification ultérieure dans un catalogue en ligne. Des abréviations et des points de suspension peuvent être utilisés. Faire précéder un titre générique ou non distinctif du nom du créateur par lequel commencerait le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre. Si le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre est le même que le titre propre plus un qualificatif, il peut être fourni à la place du titre propre pour éviter toute ambiguïté. Lorsque des informations sont fournies dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 pour justifier un point d'accès autorisé ou une variante de point d'accès, suivre les instructions supplémentaires sous Enregistrement des noms et des titres. &lt;br /&gt;
# La date de publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Monographies en plusieurs parties. S'il s'agit de la première partie, indiquer la date de publication sous forme de date ouverte.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Publications en série autres que les collections de monographies. En général, utiliser une désignation chronologique au lieu d'une date de publication. S'il n'y a pas de désignation chronologique, utiliser la désignation numérique et la date de publication. Le cas échéant, indiquer à la suite de la désignation qu'un «&amp;amp;nbsp;substitut&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été utilisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:15px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ressources intégratrices. Appliquer les instructions de [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] pour la source du titre propre d'un site Web. Identifier l'itération à partir de laquelle les informations ont été prises (par exemple «&amp;amp;nbsp;consulté(e) le&amp;amp;nbsp;» suivi d'une date pour un site Web mis à jour de façon continue, le numéro de mise à jour ou le numéro de révision pour les publication à feuillets mobiles à mise à jour).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Informations trouvées'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $b :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# L'emplacement spécifique où les informations ont été trouvées. Pour les ressources en plusieurs parties avec parties numérotées, indiquer la désignation de la partie et l'emplacement dans la partie (par exemple, vol. 6, page 10; recto de la carte, étiquette). Des abréviations ou des formes au long peuvent être utilisées (par exemple, p. de t. ou page de titre, couv. ou couverture, vol. 6 ou volume 6). &lt;br /&gt;
# Informations trouvées. À la suite de l'emplacement, citer les informations qui y ont été trouvées, entre parenthèses. Le cas échéant, indiquer différentes occurrences d'informations provenant de la même source à la suite de l'emplacement de l'information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' Si le point d'accès autorisé est construit à partir des données de catalogage avant publication, inclure «&amp;amp;nbsp;CIP&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la mention de l'emplacement (par exemple, formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The greenhouse approach, 2019: $b page de titre du CIP (Chitra Anand) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Canadienne)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Ressources Internet.''' Pour les sites Web, indiquer s'il y a lieu le nom de l'emplacement à l'intérieur du site (par exemple, À propos; Notre histoire, Chronologie; Government, Executive Branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Plusieurs emplacements dans une ressource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' Lorsqu'on ajoute de nouvelles informations à une zone 670 créée pour un CIP, indiquer que les nouvelles informations proviennent de la ressource publiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; Canadienne) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; Canadienne) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de noms, utiliser généralement «&amp;amp;nbsp;etc.&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour éviter de donner plus de deux emplacements ou une séquence d'emplacements (par exemple, p. 316, etc., pour la séquence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de collections, toujours indiquer chaque emplacement séparément.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Lors du travail d'autorité post-catalogage sans le document en main, utiliser l'emplacement « ressource non disponible ». Si le document est examiné à nouveau et que la notice d'autorité est mise à jour, il est permis de modifier la zone 670 correspondante afin de fournir un emplacement et des formes supplémentaires de titres de collection si nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source des informations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent facultativement fournir un identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) dans la sous-zone $u de la zone 670 pour établir un lien avec la ressource citée si celle-ci contient des informations importantes sur l'entité établie qui ne peuvent être citées succinctement dans la notice d'autorité. Noter que l'utilisation d'un URI dans la zone 670 $u ne supplée pas à l'obligation de citer dans les sous-zones $a et $b de la zone 670 les données pertinentes nécessaires pour justifier le point d'accès autorisé (y compris les ajouts) ou les variantes (cette information continuera d'être disponible si le site change ou disparaît). Toutefois, les informations trouvées dans les sources en ligne peuvent être ajoutées aux zones 046 ou 3XX avec les citations appropriées dans les sous-zones $v et $u et ne pas être répétées dans une 670 lorsque ces informations ne sont pas utilisées dans une 1XX ou une 4XX. Si un URI est inclus dans une 670, il doit être indiqué dans la sous-zone $u. La sous-zone $u doit contenir uniquement l'URI sans aucune autre donnée (par exemple, ne pas mettre l'URI entre parenthèses ni inclure de mots dans la sous-zone $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des noms et des titres ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer intégralement les noms ou les titres de collections utilisés dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès, comme ils apparaissent dans la source, sans abréviation par le catalogueur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la préparation d'une notice d'autorité pour le texte d'une loi ou d'un recueil de lois par sujet, si une source citée contient un titre abrégé ou un titre de référence officiels, citer ce titre, précédé du terme «&amp;amp;nbsp;titre de référence&amp;amp;nbsp;» et de son emplacement exact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les autorités de collectivités, inclure dans les données citées toute la hiérarchie requise pour justifier toutes les variantes de point d'accès nécessaires. Faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles informations (par exemple, le nom de l'organisme subordonné) sont étrangères à la notice créée et ne doivent pas être enregistrées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toutes les catégories ci-dessus, si la seule présentation du nom ou du titre sur la source d'information privilégiée se trouve dans le titre de la ressource donné dans la sous-zone $a de la 670, la répétition du nom dans la sous-zone $b peut être omise, à condition qu'aucune information importante ne soit perdue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si des informations sur un nom ou un titre antérieur ou postérieur se trouvent dans la même source que le nom ou le titre dans le point d'accès autorisé, donner toutes les informations dans la zone 670. Ne pas séparer les informations sur le nom ou le titre antérieur ou postérieur pour les donner dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour faciliter la contribution internationale et l'utilisation des notices d'autorité, lors de l'enregistrement des dates, utiliser généralement les noms de mois, sous forme longue ou [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abrégée]. (Pour les dates enregistrées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, voir la section [[#Format_des_zones_670|Format des zones 670]] de ce Guide). Ne pas modifier le style des dates dans les notices existantes. Comme pratique à privilégier, si une date n'est pas incluse dans la sous-zone $d de la zone 100, envisager d'ajouter une zone 046 si les dates sont disponibles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification des variantes de point d'accès ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justifier les noms ou les titres donnés comme variantes de point d'accès par des informations citées des sources. Toutefois, une justification n'est pas requise dans les cas suivants :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variantes de point d'accès reflétant différentes romanisations ou orthographes connues du catalogueur;&lt;br /&gt;
# Une variante de titre dérivée de la ressource cataloguée, d'autres ressources cataloguées sous le même point d'accès ou de sources de référence standard;&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois pour des points d'accès autorisés de collectivités reflétant des changements dus à une réforme orthographique nationale, des changements de noms dus à un changement de langue officielle ou des changements impliquant uniquement une collectivité supérieure à laquelle la collectivité en cours d'établissement est subordonnée.&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois facultatifs à partir de formes RCAA2 ou pré-RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité de collections et les notices d'autorité de noms rétrospectives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification d'autres éléments ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les informations enregistrées dans les zones 046, 3XX ou 678 de la notice d'autorité doivent généralement être justifiées, à moins qu'elles ne ressortent clairement dans les informations enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 ou qu'elles puissent être facilement déduites d'autres éléments d'identification enregistrés, y compris le nom privilégié.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour la zone 046 et plusieurs des zones 3XX, une sous-zone $u ou une sous-zone $v enregistrée dans la même zone peut être utilisée à la place ou en plus d'une 670. Voir la section [[#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]] de ce Guide pour les directives concernant les sous-zones $u et $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des autres données ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. Ne pas abréger ou traduire des attributs tels que le titre d'une personne ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) qui apparaissent en conjonction avec les noms de personnes dans les mentions de responsabilité et qui pourraient potentiellement être utilisés comme partie du point d'accès. Les autres données peuvent être abrégées ou résumées. En général, traduire les données en langues étrangères de manière informelle en français, en les paraphrasant ou en les résumant selon ce qui convient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données autres que les formes du titre (ou de la phrase analogue à une collection) à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. La numérotation et les noms des organismes de publication ne sont pas obligatoires mais peuvent être indiqués.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Types particuliers de citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les citations les plus courantes sont énumérées ci-dessous. Si celles-ci ne sont pas appropriées, en formuler d'autres selon les besoins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la conversion des informations trouvées dans des zones MARC obsolètes ou non actives (par exemple, 664, 665, 666) en une note 670, citer Canadiana dans une citation telle que celles fournies dans les exemples ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date de la conversion] $b ([données converties à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([données déplacées à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC et fichier interne de BAnQ'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La façon de citer ces fichiers dans la zone 670 est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; usage: [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de noms.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations. Entre parenthèses, précédé par la mention '''point d'accès :''' ou '''points d'accès :''' , mentionner le ou les points d'accès trouvés, même si le point d'accès autorisé actuel est identique. S'il est jugé utile de mentionner une ou plusieurs variantes de point d'accès trouvées dans une notice d'autorité, les mentionner en les faisant précéder de la mention '''variante :''' ou '''variantes :'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différentes formes du nom apparaissent dans les notices bibliographiques, enregistrer le point d'accès ainsi que toutes les formes trouvées, y compris les formes identiques au point d'accès autorisé. Séparer le point d'accès des autres formes de nom et faire précéder les autres formes d'une mention appropriée, par exemple, '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' ou '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas citer les notices bibliographiques ou l'emplacement exact des variations trouvées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de collections.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations, suivie de la citation de la notice bibliographique. Entre parenthèses, indiquer la mention de la collection qui se trouve dans cette notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 27 janv. 2021, Les Déchets ménagers, c1980 $b (Les Cahiers de l'AGHTM)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] Le fichier LC/NAF a aussi été cité antérieurement sous d'autres noms, par exemple Base de données LC/NACO et Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;usage&amp;amp;nbsp;» désigne les formes de noms transcrites que l'on trouve habituellement dans les mentions de responsabilité des notices bibliographiques. On peut également trouver ces formes dans d'autres parties de la notice bibliographique telles que le titre propre ou une note citée. En raison des changements apportés aux instructions de catalogage, les catalogueurs doivent être prudents lorsqu'ils prennent les informations de la mention de publication, de la mention de distribution, etc. et de la mention de collection.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») désigne une forme de nom qui ne correspond pas nécessairement à une forme transcrite. Par exemple, dans les notices RCAA2, le nom d'un éditeur qui figure sur la ressource comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Publishing Company&amp;amp;nbsp;» pourrait avoir été enregistré dans la mention de publication sous la forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Pub. Co&amp;amp;nbsp;». Normalement, il n'est pas nécessaire de citer une telle forme dans une zone 670.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Autres fichiers ou catalogues'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un point d'accès est trouvé dans un catalogue ou une base de données en ligne, utiliser son jugement pour créer une citation 670. Commencer la zone 670 par une désignation du catalogue ou de la base de données dans laquelle ces autres notices bibliographiques ont été trouvées. Il n'y a pas de formulation prescrite pour ces citations; des exemples sont donnés ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Bases de données toponymiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer le nom de la base de données et la date de la recherche dans la sous-zone $a. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Le nom de la base de données peut être cité sous forme d'acronyme ou en toutes lettres.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Dans la sous-zone $b, indiquer le ou les noms de l'entité, le type d'entité, la désignation ou la classe de l'élément (par exemple, ADM1, PPL, civil), les coordonnées et le nom du lieu plus vaste, s'il y a lieu. (D'autres informations pertinentes peuvent également être fournies.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de la désignation ou de la classe de l'élément, il est possible d'utiliser soit le code (par exemple, PPL) ou sa forme en toutes lettres (par exemple, populated place). Pour les noms étrangers, indiquer le type de nom (par exemple, forme conventionnelle, forme approuvée, forme courte, etc.) entre crochets ou parenthèses après le nom. Répéter les crochets ou les parenthèses après chaque nom de ce type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Les noms de variantes (y compris les noms en caractères non latins) peuvent être donnés dans une seule liste, comme indiqué ci-dessous. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement des coordonnées, il est possible d'utiliser le format DMS (degrés, minutes, secondes), le format DD (degrés décimaux) ou les deux formats.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a choisi d’enregistrer les coordonnées DMS)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées telles que trouvées. Toutefois, si la base de données affiche les coordonnées en utilisant des deux-points pour séparer les composantes DMS et des valeurs positives et négatives pour communiquer l'hémisphère, il est acceptable de traduire les coordonnées au format DMS traditionnel si souhaité. Utiliser le symbole du degré (et non le zéro en exposant) pour indiquer les degrés, le signe mou (lettre modificative prime) pour les minutes et le signe dur (lettre modificative double prime) pour les secondes. Pour les coordonnées de latitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère sud. Pour les coordonnées de longitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère occidental.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a enregistré les coordonnées DMS telles qu'elles ont été trouvées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a traduit les coordonnées DMS au format traditionnel à partir de : -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic names server&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, consulté le &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;17 août 2022&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;$b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;22:53:01, 121:02:54&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources non bibliographiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer la source non bibliographique, la date et les informations. La source peut être indiquée de manière spécifique («&amp;amp;nbsp;Lettre de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.) ou en termes généraux («&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.). Lorsqu'on indique une source spécifique, il n'est pas nécessaire de montrer comment l'information a été reçue, par exemple, que la lettre a été reçue par télécopieur plutôt que par courrier. Lorsqu'un appel téléphonique à un éditeur, une agence ou une organisation est cité, il convient généralement de donner le nom du groupe appelé, plutôt que le titre ou le nom de la personne contactée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de collections de rééditions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité de collection concerne uniquement une réédition, commencer la 670 par le terme correspondant au type de réédition et une barre oblique. Ne pas inclure une 670 pour une réédition si la notice d'autorité sujet couvre à la fois l'original et une ou plusieurs rééditions. Ne pas ajouter de zones 670 supplémentaires pour d'autres types de rééditions cataloguées ultérieurement. (Voir 64X Traitement de la collection, Rééditions pour plus d'informations sur les rééditions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciés'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour des informations sur les citations existantes dans les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciées, voir la section [[#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32 Nom de personne indifférencié]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-11-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Titre associé de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 672 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui est associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité de collectivité, des zones 672 peuvent être utilisées pour enregistrer des titres de ressources dont la collectivité est la créatrice, l'organisme de publication ou le sujet. Le but premier de la zone 672 consiste principalement à documenter le fait qu'il existe un lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 672 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 670 pour consigner le titre de la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est créée, ni d'utiliser des zones 670 pour justifier les informations enregistrées dans les zones 1XX et 4XX, telles que le nom privilégié et les variantes de noms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 672 peuvent être ajoutées après les zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 672 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 672 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans la classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 672 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zones 672 avec titres propres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Cervantes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre propre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre uniforme)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec une variante de titre pour l'œuvre associée à l'expression catalane de l'œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Reste du titre'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'on enregistre un titre propre, la sous-zone $b peut être utilisée pour enregistrer le complément de titre ou le titre propre parallèle afin d'éviter toute confusion lorsque des titres nécessitent une meilleure identification.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le complément de titre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le titre propre parallèle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $f – Date'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $f est utilisée pour enregistrer une date appropriée à l'entité enregistrée dans la sous-zone $a (par exemple, utiliser la date d'une œuvre pour un titre privilégié et la date de publication pour un titre propre). Ne pas utiliser les crochets carrés dans la sous-zone $f pour enregistrer une date de publication ou de production. Ne pas mettre de date de distribution, de date de fabrication ou de date de copyright en $f.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une œuvre :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de l'œuvre)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une expression :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date d'une expression française de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une manifestation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de publication d'une manifestation d'une expression polonaise de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Numéro de contrôle de la notice bibliographique'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $w est utilisée pour enregistrer des numéros de contrôle de notices bibliographiques (par exemple, les zones 001, 010 et 016 dans les notices bibliographiques). Il est recommandé de fournir la sous-zone $w lorsque l'information est facilement accessible. La sous-zone $w doit être répétée pour chaque numéro de contrôle distinct (par exemple, un LCCN et un numéro de notice OCLC doivent être fournis dans des sous-zones séparées). Pour plus d'instructions sur la saisie d'un numéro de contrôle dans la notice, voir la section sur la sous-zone $w dans le ''CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E. Format MARC 21 for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' la sous-zone $w doit seulement être utilisée pour les titres de manifestations.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Titre distinct de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui n'est pas associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom. Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité pour une personne, la zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer les titres d'œuvres écrites par une personne différente portant un nom semblable. L'objectif principal de la zone 673 est de documenter le fait qu'il n'existe aucun lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 673.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 673 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 675, comme le décrit la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 673 peuvent être ajoutées après des zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires non associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 673 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 673.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 673 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans le classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 673 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245. Pour les sous-zones spécifiques de la zone 673, appliquer les mêmes instructions que celles données dans la section [[#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Titre propre associé à un autre Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)###47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title propre associé à la National Gallery de Londres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
ET NON&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Même si la National Gallery of Art n'est pas la créatrice de la ressource mentionnée, elle en est l'éditrice et ce titre devrait donc être enregistré en 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#673_Titre_distinct_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Source des données non trouvées =&lt;br /&gt;
En avril 2012, cette zone a été redéfinie comme : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Citation d'une source consultée dans laquelle aucune information ne se trouve liée en aucune manière avec l'entité représentée par la notice d'autorité ou par des entités liées.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Les catalogueurs participant au PFAN ne sont pas tenus de modifier les zones 675 existantes simplement pour répondre à cette nouvelle définition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une nouvelle notice d'autorité, toujours citer la ressource cataloguée dans la zone 675 si la ressource cataloguée ne fournit aucune information liée de quelque façon que ce soit à l'entité représentée dans la notice d'autorité. Citer également dans la zone 675 d'autres sources consultées qui ne contiennent aucune information, lorsqu'on juge que cette absence même d'information mérite d'être consignée pour les futurs utilisateurs de la notice d'autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, il n'est pas toujours nécessaire d'inclure dans la zone 675 toutes les sources de référence consultées; il faut faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles sources sont suffisamment importantes pour être conservées de façon permanente dans la notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Données biographiques ou historiques =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsque des données biographiques ou historiques sont fournies dans une zone de note 678, rédiger la note en employant des phrases concises mais complètes et en gardant à l'esprit que l'information sera utilisée dans des affichages publics.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En prévision de la constitution par BAC du fichier dans WMS et de l'ajout en lot des notices d'autorité des autres institutions, le contenu de toutes les zones 665 dans les notices de BAC et de BAnQ a été déplacé vers la zone 678. Il se pourrait que la zone 665 originale ait contenu des instructions sur le ou les points d'accès à employer comme auteur et comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec); Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec); Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec); Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supprimer ces instructions dans la zone 678 si elles ont été conservées. Penser à ajouter la zone 667 sur l'emploi comme vedette-matière le cas échéant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification de la zone 678'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Généralement, une zone 678 doit être justifiée par une zone 670. Si elle n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu est approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, conserver la zone et ajouter une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678 comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [abréviation de la bibliothèque participante], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la notice a été modifiée après avoir été migrée, il faut consulter l'historique de la notice pour déterminer qui a ajouté la zone 678 à l'origine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la zone 678 n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, ne pas conserver la zone 678 sauf si une note appropriée peut être rédigée avec les informations dont on dispose. Noter que la zone 678 est facultative. Si le contenu de la zone doit être conservé parce qu'il ne se trouve nulle part ailleurs dans la notice, le transférer dans une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 678 existante qui sera supprimée car le contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 670 ajoutée :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Ne pas répéter cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#678_Donn.C3.A9es_biographiques_ou_historiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Liaison des vedettes établies – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note'' : Cette section ne s'applique pas à la zone 781 utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms 151 pour fournir des informations sur les subdivisions géographiques. Voir la section [[#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique|781]] de ce Guide pour les instructions relatives à cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;L'utilisation d'une vedette établie dans une zone de liaison 7XX dans une notice d'autorité de nom ou une notice d'autorité de collection est limitée à l'enregistrement du point d'accès autorisé à partir d'une bibliographie nationale ou d'un fichier d'autorité national ou équivalent séparé. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La forme de la vedette dans une zone 7XX peut correspondre à la forme dans la zone 1XX ou à une forme dans la zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité. Ceci est approprié lorsque la forme de la zone 7XX représente une forme se trouvant dans un fichier d'autorité différent de Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La source de la vedette dans la zone 7XX peut être précisée en utilisant soit la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur avec une sous-zone $2, soit une valeur pour le deuxième indicateur qui précise la source. Pour les points d'accès provenant du fichier LC/NAF, privilégier le deuxième indicateur avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Liaison des vedettes de subdivision - Subdivision géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pratique facultative du PFAN :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pour une vedette de nom géographique qui peut également être utilisée comme subdivision géographique, déterminer la forme sous laquelle la vedette doit être utilisée comme subdivision géographique en suivant les lignes directrices de la feuille d'instructions [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 du ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Entrer la forme de la subdivision géographique dans une zone 781 en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;6&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur. Pour une vedette géographique utilisée directement, comme un pays, saisir les données dans une seule sous-zone $z. Pour une vedette géographique qui est utilisée indirectement en subdivision d'une entité géographique plus vaste, telle qu'une ville, saisir les données dans deux sous-zones $z successives. Ne pas modifier les valeurs des positions de la zone 008. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice pour une vedette de nom géographique qui ne peut pas être utilisée comme vedette secondaire matière (008/15 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;»), comme le nom antérieur d'une juridiction qui a subi un changement de nom linéaire, par exemple, '''Ceylan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice d'autorité de nom pour un nom de lieu qui ne peut pas être utilisé comme une subdivision géographique, comme une section d'une ville, par exemple, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Ajouter une zone 781 à une notice existante lorsqu'une autre modification est faite dans la notice. Lors de la révision d'une notice existante qui contient une note d'utilisation pour l'indexation dans une zone 667 indiquant la forme de la subdivision géographique appropriée, supprimer la zone 667 et la remplacer par une zone 781.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 1 : Entités ambiguës =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 2 : Projets spéciaux =&lt;br /&gt;
Cette annexe fournit des informations sur les projets spéciaux impliquant des notices d'autorité créées et modifiées dans le fichier d'autorité Canadiana. Les notices créées ou modifiées pour ces projets peuvent contenir certaines zones et valeurs dans des zones qui ne sont généralement pas conformes aux politiques de catalogage actuelles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des instructions sur la modification de ces notices sont fournies afin d'indiquer si ces zones et valeurs doivent être conservées ou non.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 1. Notices créées ou révisées dans le cadre du projet de révision de notices de l'UQAM ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de révision de notices d'autorité dirigé par l'UQAM. Il s'agit des notices créées ou modifiées dans Canadiana par l'équipe du traitement documentaire de cette institution. Ces notices sont ensuite révisées par deux bibliothécaires et une technicienne de l'UQAM. Le projet s'est terminé le 31 mars 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces nouvelles notices présentaient les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles ont été ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices peuvent être modifiées de la même manière que les autres notices d'autorité de noms conformément aux politiques de catalogage en vigueur.&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un catalogueur modifie ces notices, il doit :&lt;br /&gt;
* changer la valeur du Guide/17 pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Notice d'autorité complète);&lt;br /&gt;
* supprimer la zone 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;amp;nbsp;»; &lt;br /&gt;
* évaluer la notice comme une notice versée en lot. Toutefois, comme la notice est en cours de révision, le point d'accès autorisé peut être modifié s'il n'est pas conforme aux pratiques du PFAN (p. ex., une date de naissance ou de décès peut être ajoutée si elle est disponible et a été omise dans le point d'accès).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 2. Notices créées et révisées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de mentorat &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui, depuis février 2021, permet aux&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; bibliothèques universitaires de créer des notices d'autorité de nom qui sont révisées par une autre institution universitaire. Les notices d'autorité créées ou modifiées par &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;les bibliothèques mentorées&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; sont révisées par des techniciens en documentation de l'Université &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui les mentore&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices présentent les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles sont ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abréviation, c'est-à-dire UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices ne doivent pas être modifiées.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN&amp;diff=144995</id>
		<title>PFAN - Formation PFAN</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN&amp;diff=144995"/>
		<updated>2026-03-13T16:48:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - PFAN Training]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:80%;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+  &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top; background-color:gray; color:white; border:solid 0 1px white; width:30%;&amp;quot;|Module&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top; background-color:gray; color:white; border:solid 0 1px white; width:35%;&amp;quot;|Présentation PowerPoint&lt;br /&gt;
Format PPTX&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top; background-color:gray; color:white; border:solid 0 1px white; width:35%;&amp;quot;|Présentation PowerPoint&lt;br /&gt;
Format PDF (sans les notes du présentateur)&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 1&lt;br /&gt;
Fondements du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Media:Module 1 Fondements du PFAN.pptx|Module 1 _ Fondements du PFAN.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_1___Fondements_du_PFAN.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 1 Fondements du PFAN.pdf|Module 1 _ Fondements du PFAN.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_1___Fondements_du_PFAN.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 2&lt;br /&gt;
Description des personnes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 2 Description des personnes.pptx|Module 2 _ Description des personnes.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_2___Description_des_personnes.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
||[[Media:Module 2 Description des personnes.pdf|Module 2 _ Description des personnes.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_2___Description_des_personnes.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 3 &lt;br /&gt;
Description des familles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Dernière mise à jour : 2020-05-04)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 3 Description des familles.pptx|Module 3 _ Description des familles.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_3___Description_des_familles.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
||[[Media:Module 3 Description des familles.pdf|Module 3 _ Description des familles.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_3___Description_des_familles.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 4&lt;br /&gt;
Description des collectivité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 4 Description des collectivités.pptx|Module 4 _ Description des collectivités.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_4___Description_des_collectivités.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
||[[Media:Module 4 Description des collectivités.pdf|Module 4 _ Description des collectivités.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_4___Description_des_collectivités.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 5&lt;br /&gt;
Description des lieux&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 5 Description des lieux.pptx|Module 5 _ Description des lieux.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_5___Description_des_lieux.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 5 Description des lieux.pdf|Module 5 _ Description des lieux.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_5___Description_des_lieux.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 6&lt;br /&gt;
Description des œuvres et des expressions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Dernière mise à jour : 2020-05-17)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 6 Description des oeuvres et des expressions.pptx|Module 6 _ Description des oeuvres et des expressions.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_6___Description_des_oeuvres_et_des_expressions.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 6 Description des oeuvres et des expressions.pdf|Module 6 _ Description des oeuvres et des expressions.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_6___Description_des_oeuvres_et_des_expressions.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 6a&lt;br /&gt;
Description des œuvres et des expressions musicales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2024-06-05; Corrections mineures : 2025-02-13)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 6a Description des oeuvres et des expressions musicales.pptx|Module 6a _ Description des oeuvres et des expressions musicales.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_6a_Description_des_oeuvres_et_des_expressions_musicales.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 6 Description des oeuvres et des expressions musicales.pdf|Module 6a _ Description des oeuvres et des expressions musicales.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_6___Description_des_oeuvres_et_des_expressions_musicales.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 7&lt;br /&gt;
Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 7 Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms.pptx|Module 7 _ Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_7___Changements_apportés_aux_notices_d'autorité_de_noms.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 7 Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms.pdf|Module 7 _ Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_7___Changements_apportés_aux_notices_d'autorité_de_noms.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 8&lt;br /&gt;
Administration du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Dernière mise à jour : 2020-05-04)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 8 Administration du PFAN.pptx|Module 8 _ Administration du PFAN.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_8___Administration_du_PFAN.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 8 Administration du PFAN.pdf|Module 8 _ Administration du PFAN.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_8___Administration_du_PFAN.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|La romanisation des noms&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Dernière mise à jour : 2025-11-17; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Corrections mineures : 2025-12-03)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Arbres de décisions'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Romanisation_Nom_privilégié_d'une_personne.pdf|&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Romanisation - Nom privilégié d'une personne&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Romanisation_Titre_privilégié_d'une_œuvre.pdf|&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Romanisation - Titre privilégié d'une œuvre&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Romanisation_des_noms.pptx|Romanisation_des_noms.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Romanisation_des_noms.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Romanisation_des_noms.pdf|Romanisation_des_noms.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Romanisation_des_noms.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=File:Romanisation_Nom_privil%C3%A9gi%C3%A9_d%27une_personne.pdf&amp;diff=144950</id>
		<title>File:Romanisation Nom privilégié d'une personne.pdf</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=File:Romanisation_Nom_privil%C3%A9gi%C3%A9_d%27une_personne.pdf&amp;diff=144950"/>
		<updated>2026-03-11T20:31:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=File:Romanisation_Titre_privil%C3%A9gi%C3%A9_d%27une_%C5%93uvre.pdf&amp;diff=144939</id>
		<title>File:Romanisation Titre privilégié d'une œuvre.pdf</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=File:Romanisation_Titre_privil%C3%A9gi%C3%A9_d%27une_%C5%93uvre.pdf&amp;diff=144939"/>
		<updated>2026-03-11T19:48:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program&amp;diff=144925</id>
		<title>PFAN - Francophone Name Authority Program</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program&amp;diff=144925"/>
		<updated>2026-03-11T17:50:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!-- {{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by A. Dunnett, LAC)}}  --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Programme francophone des autorités de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
= About Francophone Name Authority Program (PFAN) =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Established in 2020 by [https://www.bac-lac.gc.ca/eng/Pages/home.aspx Library and Archives Canada], [https://www.banq.qc.ca/accueil/ Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec] and 15 Quebec francophone libraries from the [https://pbuq.ca/en/about-us Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec], the Francophone Name Authority Program (PFAN) is the programme by which participating institutions contribute to the [https://library-archives.canada.ca/eng/services/services-libraries/cataloguing/pages/canadian-name-authorities.aspx Canadiana name authority file] by supplying authority records for agents, places, works and expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about PFAN, please visit the [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications_.5BNEW.5D|Communications section]] or contact [Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--For any information on new features and changes added to the wiki, please consult  [[PFAN - Additions and changes to wiki|Additions and changes to wiki]].--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--Hidden update date: 2022-04-29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General Principles =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The Canadiana name authority file is hosted by OCLC.&lt;br /&gt;
# There is only one French authority file in WMS, Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
# Contributions of authority records in the Canadiana file by participants of the program must be performed using the WorldShare Record Manager service using the WMS platform.&lt;br /&gt;
# The governance of the program is ensured by a Steering Committee, and the standards and practices are stipulated by the Standards Committee.&lt;br /&gt;
# The PFAN standards and practices guide the creation of authorities and are based on those created by NACO. These are available in French. Libraries participating in the program commit to following the rules for contributions devised by the Standards Committee.&lt;br /&gt;
# Participating libraries are responsible for training their staff and could be called upon to validate the quality of authority records contributed by other member libraries.&lt;br /&gt;
# PFAN is open to all French-language partners &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;according to the established criteria.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# This file is created collaboratively and the authority records must be &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;free of local practices.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A new partner cannot &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;batch&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; load authority records from their local file even if these are unique.&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Membership is free.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-04-18 &amp;lt;!--(2023-04-18)--&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PFAN eligibility criteria =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Be a French-language institution or library&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;An institution that serves a French-speaking community and has the capacity to participate in the program in French&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Not be a fee-for-service institution or agency&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Be able to create name authority records &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Be able to create authority records in MARC21 format&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Be committed to following the policies established by the PFAN and the standards issued by the Standards Committee&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Have a subscription to an OCLC product for authority processing&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Subscription to the RDA Toolkit&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-09-20 &amp;lt;!--(2023-09-20)--&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Expectations of new members =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Share the following values:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Working for the user&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Work collaboratively&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Value commitments&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Reconcile institutional and collective interests&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Commit to:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Respect the general principles&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Harmonize local practices with those of PFAN &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Participate in PFAN committees in French&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assume part of the development costs, if necessary (no membership fees are charged)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-09-20 &amp;lt;!--(2023-09-20)--&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Steering Committee =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/1/1f/Comit%C3%A9Directeur-Mandat.pdf Mandate]===&lt;br /&gt;
[PDF, 48 Ko] ([[:File:Comit%C3%A9Directeur-Mandat.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
* Project planning for the Francophone Name Authority Program &lt;br /&gt;
* Supervision and administration of the Francophone Name Authority Program / Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2020-12-08 &amp;lt;!--(2020-12-08)--&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Membership ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Isabelle Dallaire, HEC Montréal, 2022-&lt;br /&gt;
* Thi Bao Tran Phan, Library and Archives Canada, 2022-&lt;br /&gt;
* Danielle Poirier,  Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:15px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable  mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ class=&amp;quot;nowrap&amp;quot; | '''Past&amp;amp;nbsp;members'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal, Université de Montréal, 2019-2022&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Caitlin Horrall, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, 2019-2022&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-03-31''&amp;lt;!--(2023-03-31)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Planning ===&lt;br /&gt;
[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/9/9e/PFAN_-_Planification_2020-2022.pdf 2020-2022] [PDF, 62 Ko] ([[:File:PFAN_-_Planification_2020-2022.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2021-07-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Standards Committee =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/fa/Comit%C3%A9DesNormes-Mandat.pdf Mandate]===&lt;br /&gt;
[PDF, 74 Ko] ([[:File:Comit%C3%A9DesNormes-Mandat.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2021-07-28''&amp;lt;!--(2021-07-28)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Membership ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Bernard Bérubé, Library and Archives Canada, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
* Julie Gauthier, Université Laval, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Marilyne Guertin, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, co-chair, 2026-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Marie-Chantal L'Ecuyer-Coelho, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2024-&lt;br /&gt;
* Bernard Lemieux, Université de Montréal, 2023-&lt;br /&gt;
* Nathalie Mainville, Library and Archives Canada, co-chair, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ class=&amp;quot;nowrap&amp;quot; | '''Anciens&amp;amp;nbsp;membres'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Philippe Brosseau, Université du Québec à Montréal, 2019-2023&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Izidor Cirnatiu,  Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2019-2026&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Daniel Paradis,  Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, co-chair, 2019-2024.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-01-15''&amp;lt;!--(2026-01-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Participating Libraries =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Note that the abbreviations &amp;quot;BAC&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;BAnQ&amp;quot; are not preceded by an article. For example, &amp;quot;Fichier interne de BAnQ&amp;quot; and not &amp;quot;Fichier interne de la BAnQ&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Institution&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Symbol&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Abbreviation to use&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; in field 670&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Name of person responding &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; on behalf of the institution&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
|CaOONL&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC*&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca Nathalie Mainville]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMBN&lt;br /&gt;
|BAnQ*&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:marilyne.guertin@banq.qc.ca &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Marilyne Guertin&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|École nationale d'administration publique (ENAP)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQUQEN&lt;br /&gt;
|ENAP&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:hardy.julie@enap.ca Julie Hardy]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|HEC Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMHE&lt;br /&gt;
|HEC&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:isabelle.dallaire@hec.ca Isabelle Dallaire]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Institut national de la recherche scientifique (INRS)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQINRS&lt;br /&gt;
|INRS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:anne.robitaille@ete.inrs.ca Anne Robitaille]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Polytechnique Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMEP&lt;br /&gt;
|PolyMtl&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:irina.gherasim@polymtl.ca Irina Gherasim]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université TÉLUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQUQT&lt;br /&gt;
|TÉLUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:bahija.talal@teluq.ca Bahija Talal]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université de Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMU&lt;br /&gt;
|UdeM&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:pierre-etienne.lepine@umontreal.ca Pierre-Étienne Lépine]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université de Sherbrooke&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQSHERU&lt;br /&gt;
|UdeS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:troy.pouliot@usherbrooke.ca Troy Pouliot]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQLA&lt;br /&gt;
|ULaval&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:julie.gauthier@bibl.ulaval.ca Julie Gauthier]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Chicoutimi (UQAC)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQCU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAC&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Luc-c_Tremblay@uqac.ca Luc Tremblay]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Montréal (UQAM)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAM&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:bilodeau.robert@uqam.ca Robert Georges Bilodeau]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Rimouski (UQAR)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQRU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAR&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:suzie_pelletier@uqar.ca Suzie   Pelletier]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec en Abitibi-Témiscamingue (UQAT)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQRUQR&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAT&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:camee.toupin-lefebvre@uqat.ca Camée Toupin-Lefebvre]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec en Outaouais (UQO)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQHU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQO&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:samuel.ouellette@uqo.ca Samuel Ouellette]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Trois-Rivières (UQTR)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQTU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQTR&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Lucie.Hamelin2@uqtr.ca Lucie Hamelin]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|École de technologie supérieure (ÉTS)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMUQET&lt;br /&gt;
|ÉTS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Marie-Renee.DeSeveLeboeuf@etsmtl.ca Marie-Renée De Sève Leboeuf]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-01-15''&amp;lt;!--(2026-01-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Communications =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Year&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Title&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Author&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2020&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.bac-lac.gc.ca/eng/about-us/publications/signatures/Pages/signatures-fall-winter-2020.aspx#art07 First Steps for the Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Bernard Bérubé &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Nathalie Mainville&lt;br /&gt;
|Article published in ''Signatures'', Fall-Winter 2020, p. 12-13.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2020&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/0/00/PFAN_CPI2020.pdf Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Caitlin Horrall &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Presentation given at the Congrès des professionnel·le·s de l'information, Fall 2020.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.affairesuniversitaires.ca/actualites/actualites-article/le-programme-francophone-des-autorites-de-nom-prend-forme/?utm_source=Affaires+universitaires+-+Bulletin&amp;amp;utm_campaign=49bb362a0f-EMAIL_CAMPAIGN_2021_05_20&amp;amp;utm_medium=email&amp;amp;utm_term=0_3acf7cc134-49bb362a0f-426947657 Le Programme francophone des autorités de nom prend forme]&lt;br /&gt;
|Catherine Couturier&lt;br /&gt;
|Article published on ''Affaires universitaires'' webpage, 20 may 2021.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.ifla.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/05/assets/classification-and-indexing/newsletters/ifla_metadata_newsletter_june_2021_updated.pdf First Steps for the Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Bernard Bérubé &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Nathalie Mainville&lt;br /&gt;
|Article published in ''Metadata Newsletter'', June 2021, p. 14-15.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8f/PFAN_ACIGJuly2021.pdf The Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Caitlin Horrall &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Presentation given to ALA'S Authority Control Interest Group, July 2021.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://doi.org/10.7202/1092261ar Le Programme francophone des autorités de noms : une collaboration prometteuse]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal&lt;br /&gt;
|Article published in ''Documentation et bibliothèques'', vol. 68, no 3 (juillet-septembre 2022), p. 5-13.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/59/PFAN_AIFBD_vf_%28002%29.pdf Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Thi Bao Tran Phan &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Presentation given to the congrès de l'Association internationale francophone des bibliothécaires et documentalistes (AIFBD), August 2023.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-10-24''&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Discussion Lists =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PFAN-L ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== About the Discussion List ===&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L is a bilingual discussion list established by the Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) to participating libraries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
List participants are encouraged to use the list to:&lt;br /&gt;
* provide information of interest to PFAN participating libraries;&lt;br /&gt;
* ask questions and propose solutions to other PFAN libraries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the listserv web interface to configure your user profile, to use basic listserv commands and to search discussion list archives.  Please visit: https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For questions and concerns relating to the list, please contact: [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Archives:  https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa?A0=PFAN-L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List Commands ===&lt;br /&gt;
To send a message to all of the people currently subscribed to the list, just send mail to [Mailto:PFAN-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA PFAN-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], which is called the list address. You must never try to send  any command to that  address, as it would be distributed to all the  people who have subscribed. All commands must be  sent to  [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], which is  the LISTSERV address. It is important to understand the difference between the two.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may leave the list at any  time by sending a &amp;quot;'''SIGNOFF PFAN-L'''&amp;quot; command to [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA].  You can also tell LISTSERV  how you want it to confirm the receipt of  messages you send to the list. To send yourself a copy of your own  messages, send a &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L REPRO'''&amp;quot; command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, to have LISTSERV send  you a short acknowledgement instead of the entire message, send a  &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L ACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; command. Finally, you can turn  off acknowledgements completely with the  &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L NOACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L uses a UNIX-based LISTSERV software. Information about advanced commands for LISTSERV can be retrieved by sending the following message:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To: '''LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Message: '''INFO REFCARD'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;All commands to LISTSERV should be in the body of the message.  Since the software is English, all commands to LISTSERV must be in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SIGNOFF PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To remove your name from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
'''INFO PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain information about PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L NOMAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* This will stop sending you PFAN-L postings until your reset your status - please use this when you go on holidays or will not be taking email regularly.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L MAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* This will reset your status and allow you to begin receiving messages from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L DIGEST''' &lt;br /&gt;
* To receive a message per day that contains all the daily postings to PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L REPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To get a copy of a message that you post to PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L NOREPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To NOT receive a copy of what you post to PFAN-L (this is the default).&lt;br /&gt;
'''HELP PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain a list of commands.&lt;br /&gt;
'''INDEX PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain an index of what has been posted to PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''REVIEW PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To get information about a list including subscribers.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L CONCEAL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To conceal your name from anyone using the REVIEW command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PFAN-MUSIQUE-L ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== About the Discussion List ===&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-MUSIQUE-L is a bilingual discussion list established by the Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) for the participants who are interested in questions related to the authority control of entities associated with musical resources in the Canadiana file..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
List participants are encouraged to use the list to:&lt;br /&gt;
* share information of interest to PFAN participating libraries that create or revise authority records for entities associated with musical resources;&lt;br /&gt;
* ask questions concerning the authority control of entities associated with musical resources and to propose solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the listserv web interface to configure your user profile, to use basic listserv commands and to search discussion list archives.  Please visit: https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For questions and concerns relating to the list, please contact: [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Archives:  https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa?A0=PFAN-MUSIQUE-L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List Commands ===&lt;br /&gt;
To send a message to all of the people currently subscribed to the list, just send mail to [Mailto:PFAN-MUSIQUE-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA PFAN-MUSIQUE-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], which is called the list address. You must never try to send  any command to that  address, as it would be distributed to all the  people who have subscribed. All commands must be  sent to  [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], which is  the LISTSERV address. It is important to understand the difference between the two.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may leave the list at any  time by sending a &amp;quot;'''SIGNOFF PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&amp;quot; command to [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA].  You can also tell LISTSERV  how you want it to confirm the receipt of  messages you send to the list. To send yourself a copy of your own  messages, send a &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L REPRO'''&amp;quot; command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, to have LISTSERV send  you a short acknowledgement instead of the entire message, send a  &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L ACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; command. Finally, you can turn  off acknowledgements completely with the  &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L uses a UNIX-based LISTSERV software. Information about advanced commands for LISTSERV can be retrieved by sending the following message:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To: '''LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Message: '''INFO REFCARD'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;All commands to LISTSERV should be in the body of the message.  Since the software is English, all commands to LISTSERV must be in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SIGNOFF PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To remove your name from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
'''INFO PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain information about PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOMAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* This will stop sending you PFAN-L postings until your reset your status - please use this when you go on holidays or will not be taking email regularly.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L MAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* This will reset your status and allow you to begin receiving messages from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L DIGEST''' &lt;br /&gt;
* To receive a message per day that contains all the daily postings to PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L REPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To get a copy of a message that you post to PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOREPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To NOT receive a copy of what you post to PFAN-MUSIQUE-L (this is the default).&lt;br /&gt;
'''HELP PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain a list of commands.&lt;br /&gt;
'''INDEX PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain an index of what has been posted to PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''REVIEW PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To get information about a list including subscribers.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L CONCEAL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To conceal your name from anyone using the REVIEW command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2022-12-10''&amp;lt;!--(2022-12-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Contact PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
Please send all questions to [Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- The following two lines are here for test purposes only.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Name Authority Manual v 1 13.docx|LAC Name Authority Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
([[:File:Name_Authority_Manual_v_1_13.docx |Versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=144924</id>
		<title>PFAN - Programme francophone des autorités de noms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=144924"/>
		<updated>2026-03-11T17:47:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:PFAN - Francophone Name Authority Program ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= À propos du Programme francophone des autorités de noms  =&lt;br /&gt;
Mis sur pied en 2020 par [https://www.bac-lac.gc.ca/fra/Pages/accueil.aspx Bibliothèque et Archives Canada], [https://www.banq.qc.ca/accueil/ Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec] et 15 bibliothèques francophones du [https://pbuq.ca/fr Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec], le Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) est le programme par lequel les institutions participantes contribuent au [https://bibliotheque-archives.canada.ca/fra/services/services-bibliotheques/catalogage/Pages/autorites-noms-canadiens.aspx fichier d'autorité Canadiana] en fournissant des notices d'autorité pour les agents, les lieux, les œuvres et les expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour de plus amples informations sur le PFAN, veuillez consulter [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|la section Communications]] ou contacter [Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[PFAN – Ajouts et modifications au wiki|Ajouts et modifications au wiki]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''Date de mise à jour cachée: 2022-04-29'' --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Principes généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Le fichier d'autorité Canadiana est hébergé par OCLC.&lt;br /&gt;
# Il n'y a qu'un seul fichier d'autorité en français dans WMS, Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
# Les contributions de notices d'autorité dans le fichier Canadiana par les participants au programme doivent se faire par le service Gestion des notices WorldShare de la plateforme WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
# La gouvernance du programme est assurée par un Comité directeur et les normes et pratiques sont édictées par le Comité des normes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Les normes et pratiques du PFAN guident la création des autorités et sont basées sur celles de NACO. Elles sont disponibles en français. Les bibliothèques participantes au programme s'engagent à suivre les règles de contribution élaborées par le Comité des normes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Les bibliothèques participantes sont responsables de former leur personnel et pourraient être appelées à valider la qualité des notices d'autorité contribuées par d'autres bibliothèques membres.&lt;br /&gt;
# Le PFAN est ouvert à tout partenaire francophone &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;selon les critères établis.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Ce fichier est collaboratif et les notices d'autorité doivent être &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;exemptes de pratiques locales.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Un nouveau partenaire ne peut verser &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;en lot&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; les notices d'autorité de son fichier local même si celles-ci sont uniques.&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;L'adhésion est sans frais.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-04-18''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Critères d'admissibilité au PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Être une institution ou une bibliothèque francophone&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Une institution qui dessert une communauté en langue française et qui a la capacité de participer au programme en français&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ne pas être une institution ou agence avec des frais de services payants&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pouvoir créer des notices d’autorité de noms &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pouvoir créer des notices d’autorité en format MARC21&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;S'engager à suivre les politiques établies par le PFAN et les normes édictées par le Comité des normes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Avoir un abonnement à un produit OCLC pour le traitement des autorités&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Être abonné au RDA Toolkit&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-09-20''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Attentes envers les nouveaux membres =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Partager les valeurs suivantes :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Travailler pour l'usager&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Travailler en mode collaboratif&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Valoriser les engagements&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Réconcilier intérêt institutionnel et collectif&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''S’engager à :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Respecter les principes généraux&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Harmoniser ses pratiques locales avec celles du PFAN &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Participer aux comités du PFAN en langue française&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assumer une partie des coûts du développement, si nécessaire (aucuns frais d'adhésion ne sont demandés)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-09-20''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Comité directeur =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/1/1f/Comit%C3%A9Directeur-Mandat.pdf Mandat]===&lt;br /&gt;
[PDF, 48 Ko] ([[:File:Comit%C3%A9Directeur-Mandat.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2020-12-08''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Composition ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Isabelle Dallaire, HEC Montréal, 2022-&lt;br /&gt;
* Thi Bao Tran Phan, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, 2022-&lt;br /&gt;
* Danielle Poirier,  Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:15px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable  mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ class=&amp;quot;nowrap&amp;quot; | '''Anciens&amp;amp;nbsp;membres'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal, Université de Montréal, 2019-2022&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Caitlin Horrall, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, 2019-2022&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-03-31''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Planification ===&lt;br /&gt;
[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/9/9e/PFAN_-_Planification_2020-2022.pdf 2020-2022] [PDF, 62 Ko] ([[:File:PFAN_-_Planification_2020-2022.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2021-07-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Comité des normes =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/fa/Comit%C3%A9DesNormes-Mandat.pdf Mandat]===&lt;br /&gt;
[PDF, 74 Ko] ([[:File:Comit%C3%A9DesNormes-Mandat.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2021-07-28''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Composition === &lt;br /&gt;
* Bernard Bérubé, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
* Julie Gauthier, Université Laval, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Marilyne Guertin, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, coprésidente, 2026-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Marie-Chantal L'Ecuyer-Coelho, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2024-&lt;br /&gt;
* Bernard Lemieux, Université de Montréal, 2023-&lt;br /&gt;
* Nathalie Mainville, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, coprésidente, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:15px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ class=&amp;quot;nowrap&amp;quot; | '''Anciens&amp;amp;nbsp;membres'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Philippe Brosseau, Université du Québec à Montréal, 2019-2023&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Izidor Cirnatiu, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2019-2026&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Daniel Paradis, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, coprésident, 2019-2024&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Bibliothèques participantes =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Noter que les abréviations &amp;quot;BAC&amp;quot; et &amp;quot;BAnQ&amp;quot; ne sont pas précédées d'un article. Par exemple, on écrit  &amp;quot;Fichier interne de BAnQ&amp;quot; et non &amp;quot;Fichier interne de la BAnQ&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Institution&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Sigle&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Abréviation à employer &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;dans la zone 670&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Nom de la personne répondante &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;pour l'institution&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
|CaOONL&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC*&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca Nathalie Mainville]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMBN&lt;br /&gt;
|BAnQ*&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:marilyne.guertin@banq.qc.ca &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Marilyne Guertin&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|École nationale d'administration publique (ENAP)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQUQEN&lt;br /&gt;
|ENAP&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:hardy.julie@enap.ca Julie Hardy]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|HEC Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMHE&lt;br /&gt;
|HEC&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:isabelle.dallaire@hec.ca Isabelle Dallaire]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Institut national de la recherche scientifique (INRS)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQINRS&lt;br /&gt;
|INRS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:anne.robitaille@ete.inrs.ca Anne Robitaille]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Polytechnique Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMEP&lt;br /&gt;
|PolyMtl&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:anita.mazur@polymtl.ca Anita Mazur]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université TÉLUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQUQT&lt;br /&gt;
|TÉLUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:bahija.talal@teluq.ca Bahija Talal]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université de Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMU&lt;br /&gt;
|UdeM&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:pierre-etienne.lepine@umontreal.ca Pierre-Étienne Lépine]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université de Sherbrooke&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQSHERU&lt;br /&gt;
|UdeS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:carl.brouillard@usherbrooke.ca Carl Brouillard]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQLA&lt;br /&gt;
|ULaval&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:julie.gauthier@bibl.ulaval.ca Julie Gauthier]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Chicoutimi (UQAC)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQCU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAC&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Luc-c_Tremblay@uqac.ca Luc Tremblay]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Montréal (UQAM)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAM&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:bilodeau.robert@uqam.ca Robert Georges Bilodeau]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Rimouski (UQAR)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQRU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAR&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:suzie_pelletier@uqar.ca Suzie   Pelletier]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec en Abitibi-Témiscamingue (UQAT)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQRUQR&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAT&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:camee.toupin-lefebvre@uqat.ca Camée Toupin-Lefebvre]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec en Outaouais (UQO)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQHU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQO&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:samuel.ouellette@uqo.ca Samuel Ouellette]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Trois-Rivières (UQTR)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQTU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQTR&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Lucie.Hamelin2@uqtr.ca Lucie Hamelin]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|École de technologie supérieure (ÉTS)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMUQET&lt;br /&gt;
|ÉTS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Marie-Renee.DeSeveLeboeuf@etsmtl.ca Marie-Renée De Sève Leboeuf]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Communications =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Année&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Titre&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Auteur/Autrice&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2020&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.bac-lac.gc.ca/fra/a-notre-sujet/publications/signatures/Pages/signatures-automne-hiver-2020.aspx?wbdisable=true#art07 Un premier pas pour le Programme francophone des autorités de noms]&lt;br /&gt;
|Bernard Bérubé &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Nathalie Mainville&lt;br /&gt;
|Article paru dans ''Signatures'', automne-hiver 2020, p. 12-13.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2020&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/0/00/PFAN_CPI2020.pdf Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Caitlin Horrall &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Présentation faite dans le cadre du Congrès des professionnel·le·s de l'information, automne 2020.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.affairesuniversitaires.ca/actualites/actualites-article/le-programme-francophone-des-autorites-de-nom-prend-forme/?utm_source=Affaires+universitaires+-+Bulletin&amp;amp;utm_campaign=49bb362a0f-EMAIL_CAMPAIGN_2021_05_20&amp;amp;utm_medium=email&amp;amp;utm_term=0_3acf7cc134-49bb362a0f-426947657 Le Programme francophone des autorités de nom prend forme]&lt;br /&gt;
|Catherine Couturier&lt;br /&gt;
|Article paru sur le site ''Affaires universitaires'', 20 mai 2021.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.ifla.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/05/assets/classification-and-indexing/newsletters/ifla_metadata_newsletter_june_2021_updated.pdf First Steps for the Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Bernard Bérubé &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Nathalie Mainville&lt;br /&gt;
|Article paru dans ''Metadata newsletter'', June 2021, p. 14-15.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8f/PFAN_ACIGJuly2021.pdf The Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Caitlin Horrall &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Présentation faite à l'ALA's Authority Control Interest Group, juillet 2021.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://doi.org/10.7202/1092261ar Le Programme francophone des autorités de noms : une collaboration prometteuse]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal&lt;br /&gt;
|Article paru dans ''Documentation et bibliothèques'', vol. 68, no 3 (juillet-septembre 2022), p. 5-13.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/59/PFAN_AIFBD_vf_%28002%29.pdf Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Thi Bao Tran Phan &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Présentation faite dans le cadre du congrès de l'Association internationale francophone des bibliothécaires et documentalistes (AIFBD), août 2023.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-10-24''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Listes de discussion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PFAN-L ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== À propos de la liste de discussion ===&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L est une liste de discussion bilingue établie par le Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) et réservée aux bibliothèques participantes.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les participants à la liste sont invités à s'en servir pour :&lt;br /&gt;
* partager des renseignements d'intérêt pour les bibliothèques participantes au PFAN;&lt;br /&gt;
* poser des questions et proposer des solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent s'inscrire à la liste sont invités à en faire la demande à la personne répondante de leur institution (voir la liste de ces personnes sous [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Bibliothèques participantes]]), laquelle transmettra le nom et l'adresse de courriel de la personne à inscrire à l'adresse suivante : [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser l'interface Web du listserv afin de configurer votre profil d'utilisateur, pour utiliser des commandes de base et pour effectuer des recherches dans les archives des forums de discussion.  Veuillez visiter : https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa?A0=PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toute question ou préoccupation relative au forum de discussion, veuillez contacter : [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Liste des commandes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser l'interface Web du listserv afin de configurer votre profil d'utilisateur, pour utiliser des commandes de base et pour effectuer des recherches dans les archives des forums de discussion. Veuillez visiter : https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de communiquer avec tous les abonnés, envoyez un courriel à [Mailto:PFAN-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA PFAN-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], ce qu'on appelle l'adresse du forum de discussion. Il ne faut pas envoyer de commandes à cette adresse, car elles seront distribuées à tous les abonnés du forum. On doit envoyer toute commande à [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], ce qu'on appelle l'adresse du serveur LISTSERV. Il est important de comprendre cette distinction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pourrez vous désabonner du forum n'importe quand en envoyant la commande &amp;quot;'''SIGNOFF PFAN-L'''&amp;quot; à [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA]. Vous pourrez aussi configurer vos préférences d'envoi de messages. Pour recevoir une copie des messages que vous enverrez au forum, envoyez la commande &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L REPRO'''&amp;quot; au serveur. Ou bien, si vous souhaitez recevoir un accusé de réception plutôt que votre message original, envoyez la commande &amp;quot;SET PFAN-L ACK NOREPRO&amp;quot; au serveur. Finalement, vous pourrez désactiver complètement tout accusé en envoyant la commande &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L NOACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; au serveur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L se sert d'un logiciel LISTSERV base sur UNIX. On peut récupérer des renseignements au sujet des commandes avancées de LISTSERV en envoyant le message suivant :&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;À : '''LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA''' &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Message : '''INFO REFCARD'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt; Toutes les commandes à LISTSERV doivent figurer dans le corps du message. Puisque le logiciel est en anglais, toutes les commandes à LISTSERV doivent être en anglais.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SIGNOFF PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour retirer votre nom de la liste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''INFO PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la liste PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L NOMAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande permettra l'arrêt des affichages PFAN-L que vous recevez jusqu'a ce que vous redéfinissiez votre état; veuillez vous en servir lorsque vous allez en vacances ou que vous ne répondez pas a votre courrier électronique à intervalles réguliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L MAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande vous permet de réactiver votre état afin de pouvoir commencer à recevoir des messages de la liste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L DIGEST'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour recevoir un message par jour qui contient tous les affichages quotidiens à PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L REPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir une copie d'un message que vous affichez dans PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L NOREPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour ne PAS recevoir une copie de ce que vous affichez dans PFAN-L (c'est la valeur par défaut).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''HELP PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir une liste des commandes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''INDEX PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir un index de ce qui a été affiché dans PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''REVIEW PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir des renseignements au sujet d'une liste, notamment des abonnés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L CONCEAL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande vous permet de cacher votre nom aux autres abonnés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PFAN-MUSIQUE-L ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== À propos de la liste de discussion ===&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-MUSIQUE-L est une liste de discussion bilingue établie par le Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) et réservée aux participants intéressés par des questions touchant le contrôle d'autorité des entités associées aux ressources musicales dans le fichier Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les participants à la liste sont invités à s'en servir pour :&lt;br /&gt;
* partager des renseignements d'intérêt pour les participants au PFAN qui créent ou révisent des notices d'autorité pour des entités associées aux ressources musicales;&lt;br /&gt;
* poser des questions concernant le contrôle d'autorité des entités associées aux ressources musicales et proposer des solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent s'inscrire à la liste sont invités à en faire la demande à la personne répondante de leur institution (voir la liste de ces personnes sous [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Bibliothèques participantes]]), laquelle transmettra le nom et l'adresse de courriel de la personne à inscrire à l'adresse suivante : [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser l'interface Web du listserv afin de configurer votre profil d'utilisateur, pour utiliser des commandes de base et pour effectuer des recherches dans les archives des forums de discussion.  Veuillez visiter : https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa?A0=PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toute question ou préoccupation relative au forum de discussion, veuillez contacter : [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Liste des commandes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser l'interface Web du listserv afin de configurer votre profil d'utilisateur, pour utiliser des commandes de base et pour effectuer des recherches dans les archives des forums de discussion. Veuillez visiter : https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de communiquer avec tous les abonnés, envoyez un courriel à [Mailto:PFAN-MUSIQUE-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA PFAN-MUSIQUE-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], ce qu'on appelle l'adresse du forum de discussion. Il ne faut pas envoyer de commandes à cette adresse, car elles seront distribuées à tous les abonnés du forum. On doit envoyer toute commande à [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], ce qu'on appelle l'adresse du serveur LISTSERV. Il est important de comprendre cette distinction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pourrez vous désabonner du forum n'importe quand en envoyant la commande &amp;quot;'''SIGNOFF PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&amp;quot; à [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA]. Vous pourrez aussi configurer vos préférences d'envoi de messages. Pour recevoir une copie des messages que vous enverrez au forum, envoyez la commande &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L REPRO'''&amp;quot; au serveur. Ou bien, si vous souhaitez recevoir un accusé de réception plutôt que votre message original, envoyez la commande &amp;quot;SET PFAN-L ACK NOREPRO&amp;quot; au serveur. Finalement, vous pourrez désactiver complètement tout accusé en envoyant la commande &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; au serveur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-MUSIQUE-L se sert d'un logiciel LISTSERV base sur UNIX. On peut récupérer des renseignements au sujet des commandes avancées de LISTSERV en envoyant le message suivant :&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;À : '''LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA''' &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Message : '''INFO REFCARD'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt; Toutes les commandes à LISTSERV doivent figurer dans le corps du message. Puisque le logiciel est en anglais, toutes les commandes à LISTSERV doivent être en anglais.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SIGNOFF PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour retirer votre nom de la liste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''INFO PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la liste PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOMAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande permettra l'arrêt des affichages PFAN-L que vous recevez jusqu'à ce que vous redéfinissiez votre état; veuillez vous en servir lorsque vous allez en vacances ou que vous ne répondez pas a votre courrier électronique à intervalles réguliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L MAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande vous permet de réactiver votre état afin de pouvoir commencer à recevoir des messages de la liste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L DIGEST'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour recevoir un message par jour qui contient tous les affichages quotidiens à PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L REPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir une copie d'un message que vous affichez dans PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOREPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour ne PAS recevoir une copie de ce que vous affichez dans PFAN-MUSIQUE-L (c'est la valeur par défaut).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''HELP PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir une liste des commandes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''INDEX PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir un index de ce qui a été affiché dans PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''REVIEW PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir des renseignements au sujet d'une liste, notamment des abonnés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L CONCEAL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande vous permet de cacher votre nom aux autres abonnés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2022-12-10''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Contacter le PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
Transmettre toute question à [Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN&amp;diff=144879</id>
		<title>PFAN - Formation PFAN</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Formation_PFAN&amp;diff=144879"/>
		<updated>2026-03-11T14:48:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - PFAN Training]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:80%;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+  &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top; background-color:gray; color:white; border:solid 0 1px white; width:30%;&amp;quot;|Module&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top; background-color:gray; color:white; border:solid 0 1px white; width:35%;&amp;quot;|Présentation PowerPoint&lt;br /&gt;
Format PPTX&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top; background-color:gray; color:white; border:solid 0 1px white; width:35%;&amp;quot;|Présentation PowerPoint&lt;br /&gt;
Format PDF (sans les notes du présentateur)&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 1&lt;br /&gt;
Fondements du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Media:Module 1 Fondements du PFAN.pptx|Module 1 _ Fondements du PFAN.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_1___Fondements_du_PFAN.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 1 Fondements du PFAN.pdf|Module 1 _ Fondements du PFAN.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_1___Fondements_du_PFAN.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 2&lt;br /&gt;
Description des personnes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 2 Description des personnes.pptx|Module 2 _ Description des personnes.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_2___Description_des_personnes.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
||[[Media:Module 2 Description des personnes.pdf|Module 2 _ Description des personnes.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_2___Description_des_personnes.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 3 &lt;br /&gt;
Description des familles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Dernière mise à jour : 2020-05-04)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 3 Description des familles.pptx|Module 3 _ Description des familles.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_3___Description_des_familles.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
||[[Media:Module 3 Description des familles.pdf|Module 3 _ Description des familles.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_3___Description_des_familles.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 4&lt;br /&gt;
Description des collectivité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 4 Description des collectivités.pptx|Module 4 _ Description des collectivités.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_4___Description_des_collectivités.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
||[[Media:Module 4 Description des collectivités.pdf|Module 4 _ Description des collectivités.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_4___Description_des_collectivités.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 5&lt;br /&gt;
Description des lieux&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 5 Description des lieux.pptx|Module 5 _ Description des lieux.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_5___Description_des_lieux.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 5 Description des lieux.pdf|Module 5 _ Description des lieux.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_5___Description_des_lieux.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 6&lt;br /&gt;
Description des œuvres et des expressions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Dernière mise à jour : 2020-05-17)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 6 Description des oeuvres et des expressions.pptx|Module 6 _ Description des oeuvres et des expressions.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_6___Description_des_oeuvres_et_des_expressions.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 6 Description des oeuvres et des expressions.pdf|Module 6 _ Description des oeuvres et des expressions.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_6___Description_des_oeuvres_et_des_expressions.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 6a&lt;br /&gt;
Description des œuvres et des expressions musicales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2024-06-05; Corrections mineures : 2025-02-13)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 6a Description des oeuvres et des expressions musicales.pptx|Module 6a _ Description des oeuvres et des expressions musicales.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_6a_Description_des_oeuvres_et_des_expressions_musicales.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 6 Description des oeuvres et des expressions musicales.pdf|Module 6a _ Description des oeuvres et des expressions musicales.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_6___Description_des_oeuvres_et_des_expressions_musicales.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 7&lt;br /&gt;
Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Version du 2020-05-04; Corrections mineures : 2024-05-14)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 7 Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms.pptx|Module 7 _ Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_7___Changements_apportés_aux_notices_d'autorité_de_noms.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 7 Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms.pdf|Module 7 _ Changements apportés aux notices d'autorité de noms.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_7___Changements_apportés_aux_notices_d'autorité_de_noms.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Module 8&lt;br /&gt;
Administration du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Dernière mise à jour : 2020-05-04)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 8 Administration du PFAN.pptx|Module 8 _ Administration du PFAN.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_8___Administration_du_PFAN.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Module 8 Administration du PFAN.pdf|Module 8 _ Administration du PFAN.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Module_8___Administration_du_PFAN.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align:top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|La romanisation des noms&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(Dernière mise à jour : 2025-11-17; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Corrections mineures : 2025-12-03)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Arbres de décisions'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Romanisation - Nom privilégié d'une personne&lt;br /&gt;
Romanisation - Titre privilégié d'une oeuvre--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Romanisation_des_noms.pptx|Romanisation_des_noms.pptx]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Romanisation_des_noms.pptx|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Media:Romanisation_des_noms.pdf|Romanisation_des_noms.pdf]]&amp;amp;nbsp;  ([[:File:Romanisation_des_noms.pdf|versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=144877</id>
		<title>PFAN - Annonces et mises à jour</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=144877"/>
		<updated>2026-03-11T14:34:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Ajouts et modifications au wiki du PFAN */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - News and Updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annonces =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Annonce'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Nous sommes ravis d’accueillir Marilyne Guertin, de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 13 janvier 2026, elle succède à Marie Chantal L’Ecuyer Coelho à titre de représentante de BAnQ et de coprésidente du Comité. De son côté, Marie Chantal remplacera Izidor Cirnatiu, qui quitte le Comité après sept années d’implication. Nous tenons à exprimer notre sincère gratitude à Izidor pour son engagement au sein du PFAN. Son expertise et son engagement ont été essentiels à la création du Comité et à ses nombreuses réalisations. Merci Izidor, et bienvenue à Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une '''formation sur la romanisation''' sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 18 et 25 novembre prochains, de 10 h à 12 h. Cette activité a été préparée par Rachel Gagnon et Daniel Paradis, et sera présentée par Rachel Gagnon, bibliothécaire principale à Bibliothèque et Archives Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN, auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la romanisation selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter la formation générale offerte en 2020 et à savoir quand appliquer les tables de romanisation du PFAN.  Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; par conséquent, elle ne répétera pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 2 heures chacune.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''18 novembre''', la première partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les principes de bases et les définitions&lt;br /&gt;
* RDA et le début de la démarche&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de personnes&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''25 novembre''', la deuxième partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de familles&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de collectivités&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
* Les titres privilégiés pour les œuvres&lt;br /&gt;
* La foire aux questions&lt;br /&gt;
* Les zones MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/01367886-b1fd-434a-bccb-a4b86931f74f@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 1]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/5822e340-3ced-4d47-905e-2f658e7dc7f6@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Marie-Chantal L’Écuyer-Coelho de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 23 septembre 2024, elle remplace Daniel Paradis comme représentante de BAnQ et co-présidente du comité.  Nous remercions chaleureusement Daniel Paradis pour sa grande contribution au PFAN. Sa participation et son expertise ont grandement influencé la création et les nombreuses réalisations du Comité.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une formation gratuite sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales dans le fichier Canadiana sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 28 et 30 mai prochains, de 9 h à 12 h 30. Elle a été préparée et sera présentée par les spécialistes du catalogage de la musique que sont :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Rachel Gagnon, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
* Guillaume Lizotte, Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
* Daniel Paradis, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
* Lina Picard, Université de Montréal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter le module 6 de la formation générale donnée en 2020, lequel excluait les œuvres et les expressions musicales. Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; elle ne répétera donc pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées. Afin de mieux se préparer à la formation, il est quand même fortement recommandé de réviser le [[/wiki.gccollab.ca/PFAN - Formation PFAN|module 6 de la formation générale]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 3 heures et demie chacune. La première partie couvrira les attributs des œuvres et des expressions musicales, c’est-à-dire :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* titre privilégié d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* distribution d’exécution&lt;br /&gt;
* désignation numérique d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* tonalité et&lt;br /&gt;
* autre caractéristique d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La deuxième partie couvrira quant à elle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* la construction des points d'accès et des variantes de point d’accès représentant des œuvres et des expressions musicales&lt;br /&gt;
* les entités en relation ainsi que&lt;br /&gt;
* la maintenance du fichier Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/8148f230-56d9-4833-a25c-7f6baac6c2fb@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/cf33ae27-958d-40ab-baff-efe2f158a858@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Bernard Lemieux de l'Université de Montréal au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 28 mars 2023, il remplace officiellement Philippe Brosseau comme l'un des représentants du Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. Nous remercions chaleureusement Philippe pour sa contribution au comité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ajouts et modifications au wiki du PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le wiki, le '''contenu ajouté''' est identifié par l'étiquette &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. Le '''contenu modifié''' est identifié par du &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;texte en rouge&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9|Nouvel exemple avec $2 rvmgf]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-30&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions pour les langues de la norme ISO 15919:2001 (Information et documentation -- Translittération du Devanagari et des écritures indiennes liées en caractères latins)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Correction des exemples de l'étape 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Bibliothèques participantes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Mise à jour des répondants]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Compilation et Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ sur les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_géographiques|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e|16.2.2.5, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Bases de données toponymiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Retrait des phrases &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser la sous-zone $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0 ou $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0, $1, $3, $4 ou $i.&amp;quot; dans différentes zones]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Point 2.c. sur les variantes de point d'accès sous l'étape 2 pour les modifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ sur les numéros Canadiana (zone 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_numéros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Quels_sont_les_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9riques_utilis.C3.A9s_dans_les_notices_Canadiana.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question sur les numéros Canadiana génériques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Entretien_du_fichier_bibliographique_.28EFB.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Entretien du fichier bibliographique (EFB)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3., Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification d'un énoncé]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_.E2.80.93_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision sur les renvois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Enregistrement_des_attributs_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_et_d.27une_expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Enregistrement des attributs d'une œuvre et d'une expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Titre_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9_constitu.C3.A9_uniquement_du_nom_d.27un_type_de_composition|6.14.2.5.2, Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type de composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choix_de_la_langue|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choix de la langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Forme_au_singulier_ou_au_pluriel|6.14.2.5.2.2, Forme au singulier ou au pluriel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Partie_identifi.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_fois_par_un_num.C3.A9ro_et_par_un_titre_ou_une_autre_d.C3.A9signation_verbale.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Partie identifiée à la fois par un numéro et par un titre ou une autre désignation verbale, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Deux_ou_plusieurs_parties.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Deux ou plusieurs parties, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.8.3.2C_.C5.92uvres_compl.C3.A8tes_d.27un_m.C3.AAme_type_de_composition_pour_une_m.C3.AAme_distribution_sp.C3.A9cifique_ou_diverses_distributions|6.14.2.8.3, Œuvres complètes d'un même type de composition pour une même distribution spécifique ou diverses distributions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|6.15.1.3, Enregistrement d'une distribution d'exécution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.5.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.5, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.1, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.3, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27ordre|6.16.1.3.1, Numéro d'ordre]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_de_catalogue_th.C3.A9matique|6.16.1.3.3, Numéro de catalogue thématique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_transcriptions.2C_etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, transcriptions, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.27.1.9.2C_Ajouts_aux_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres|6.27.1.9, Ajouts aux points d'accès représentant des œuvres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1, Lignes directrices générales sur la construction des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Œuvres musicales avec des paroles, un livret, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1.9, Éléments additionnels dans les points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.3.2C_Point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_expression_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale|6.28.3, Point d'accès autorisé représentant une expression d'une œuvre musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.4.2C_Variante_de_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_.C5.93uvre_ou_une_expression_musicale|6.28.4, Variante de point d'accès représentant une œuvre ou une expression musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|Précision pour les notices d'autorité existante]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.17.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_tonalit.C3.A9|6.17.1.3, Enregistrement d'une tonalité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#.C3.89tablissement_de_certaines_entit.C3.A9s_dans_le_fichier_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms|Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-mati.C3.A8re|Instruction pour les notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|Instruction pour les sous-zones obsolètes $l et $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#023_ISSN_de_regroupement|Zone 023, ISSN de regroupement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille|Instruction pour la sous-zone $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.E2.80.99une_relation_.C3.A0_une_collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation|32.1.1.3, Enregistrement d’une relation à une collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Groupe_1_-_Vedettes_du_groupe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_de_noms|Catégorie « Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named » révisée pour « Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual » (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Suppression de : préférer une notice qui a déjà une 016 à une qui n'en a pas.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_FAQ_sur_les_compilations_d%27œuvres_d%27un_même_agent|FAQ sur les compilations d'œuvres d'un même agent.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#10.0.2C_Identification_des_familles|10.0, Identification des familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Enfants_et_petits-enfants_de_personnes_royales|9.4.1.4.3, Enfants et petits-enfants de personnes royales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms|Précisions apportées dans les zones 008/32, 371, 377 et 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles| Lien pour Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Format_des_zones_670| Nouvel exemple illustrant comment citer une sous-page de site Web]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667| Modification de la note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Foire aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_la_romanisation| FAQ sur la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité directeur&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_directeur| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité des normes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_des_normes| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précision pour le numéro à indiquer dans la note 667 sous Étape 2, Notice à supprimer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Bibliothèque_et_Archives_Canada|Lien pour le wiki de BAC]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision pour certains principes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.2C_Collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|32.1, Collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Lorsqu.E2.80.99une_collectivit.C3.A9_a_port.C3.A9_plus_d.E2.80.99un_nom_et_qu.E2.80.99il_existe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_pour_les_autres_noms_dans_Canadiana.2C_lesquelles_doit-on_mettre_en_relation_avec_des_zones_5XX.3F_Dans_quels_cas_doit-on_r.C3.A9viser_les_autorit.C3.A9s_des_collectivit.C3.A9s_mises_en_relation.3F|Question 7 sur les collectivités en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Nouveaux répondants pour certaines institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Mise_.C3.A0_jour_des_notices_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_existantes|Précision importante concernant les notices indifférenciées existantes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.3.4.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_p.C3.A9riode_d.27activit.C3.A9_d.27une_personne_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.3.4.3, Enregistrement d'une période d'activité d'une personne]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour le terme &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; ajoutée à la zone 1XX de la liste]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9|Précision sur les changements de nom des groupes associés]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour les notices d'autorité codées FrPBN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Comment_d.C3.A9terminer_l.27usage_pour_le_nom_d.27un_agent_dans_WMS.3F|Question 8 sur l'usage du nom d'un agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation de l'hébreu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision ajoutée pour la zone 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#G.C3.A9n.C3.A9ralit.C3.A9s|Généralités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Précision concernant les comtés aux États-Unis]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur_.5BNouveau.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées dans la section Généralités; ajout de sections sur la répétabilité, les dates divergentes et les dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées pour un URI inclus dans la sous-zone $u]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Crit.C3.A8res_d.27admissibilit.C3.A9_au_PFAN_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Critères d'admissibilité et attentes envers les nouveaux membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Correction de l'indice PQ pour la littérature canadienne française]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Instruction sur les sous-zones $q et $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress_.5BNouveau.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21/053&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress|Précision concernant le deuxième indicateur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Table pour l'amharique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|Ne plus utiliser cette zone]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles|Lien vers &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Présentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 sur les congrès, etc., annulés ou hybrides]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précisions ajoutées aux zones 046 et 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_cod.C3.A9es_comme_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_qui_ne_repr.C3.A9sentent_en_fait_qu.27une_seule_identit.C3.A9|Précision ajoutée pour les notices codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» par erreur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation du yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique_.5BNouveau.5D|Code local de région géographique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_de_promulgation_d.E2.80.99une_loi.2C_etc._.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.29.1.29, Date de promulgation d’une loi, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2C_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2, Nom de collectivité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information_.5BNouveau.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources d'information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Doit-on_modifier_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions_d.27un_agent_.28p._ex._un_auteur_ou_un_compositeur.29_si_la_forme_retenue_pour_l.27agent_seul_est_diff.C3.A9rente_de_celle_utilis.C3.A9e_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions.3F|Question 4 sur la modification des points d'accès autorisés pour les œuvres et expressions d'un agent]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_g%C3%A9ographiques|FAQ sur les noms géographiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation_.5BNouveau.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667|Deux nouveaux exemples de notes 667 (pour les notices d'autorité de nom indifférenciées représentant une seule identité et celles faisant l'objet d'une modification partielle)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Renvois (4XX et 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ-Numéros Canadiana&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_num%C3%A9ros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Qui_contacter_lorsqu.27on_a_besoin_d.27une_nouvelle_liste_de_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_pour_la_zone_016.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question 4 sur l'obtention d'une nouvelle liste de numéros Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Livret et Paroles)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions ajoutées en ce qui concerne le chinois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible_.5BNouveau.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Communications_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Principles généraux]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|022]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9|024]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#335_Plan_d.27extension_.5BNouveau.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|375]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9|384]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible|385]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur|386]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9|510]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme|530]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Deux nouvelles langues (coréen et japonais)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Ajout d'une instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Projet_2._Notices_cr.C3.A9.C3.A9es_et_r.C3.A9vis.C3.A9es_dans_le_cadre_du_projet_de_mentorat_des_universit.C3.A9s|Précisions ajoutées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |Renvois « voir » (4XX) simples]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Composition|Composition du Comité directeur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Nouvel article sur le PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNouveau.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Ajout de tables de romanisation de la BnF pour l'arménien, le biélorusse, le bulgare, le géorgien, le macédonien, le russe et l'ukrainien]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|Remplacement d'exemples RVM par RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précisions apportées à l'instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions|Précisions apportées au point 3 et à l'exemple 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure pour les notices dérivées du LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_pour_les_notices_d.C3.A9riv.C3.A9es_du_LC.2FNAF|Précision apportée à l'exemple du modèle d'une note 670 ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#PFAN-MUSIQUE-L_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Liste de discussion PFAN-MUSIQUE-L]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Ajout d'information dans différentes zones.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Éléments RDA fondamentaux pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Éléments_RDA_fondamentaux_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous l'élément ''collectivités en relation''.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Zones MARC obligatoires pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Zones_MARC_obligatoires_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous les zones 510, 511, 551.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouvelle introduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-03-11''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=144876</id>
		<title>PFAN - News and Updates</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=144876"/>
		<updated>2026-03-11T14:32:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Additions and changes on the PFAN wiki */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[fr:PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= News =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''News'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|We are delighted to welcome Marilyne Guertin, from Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of January 13, 2026, she succeeds Marie-Chantal L’Ecuyer-Coelho as BAnQ’s representative and co-chair of the Committee. Marie-Chantal will replace Izidor Cirnatiu, who is leaving the Committee after seven years of involvement. We would like to express our sincere gratitude to Izidor for his commitment to the PFAN. His expertise and dedication were essential to the creation of the Committee and its many achievements. Thank you, Izidor, and welcome, Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome Marie-Chantal L'Écuyer-Coelho of the Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of September 23, 2024, she replaces Daniel Paradis as BAnQ representative and co-chair of the committee.  We would like to thank Daniel Paradis for his great contribution to PFAN. His participation and expertise have greatly influenced the creation and many accomplishments of the committee.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome to Bernard Lemieux of the Université de Montréal on the PFAN Standards Committee. As of March 28, 2023, he officially replaces Philippe Brosseau as one of the representatives of the Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. We warmly thank Philippe for his contribution to the committee. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additions and changes on the PFAN wiki =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the wiki, '''Added content''' is identified by the tag &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. '''Updated content''' is identified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#372_Field_of_activity|New example with $2 rvmgf]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Details for the languages of ISO 15919:2001 (Information and documentation -- Transliteration of Devanagari and related Indian scripts into Latin characters)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Correction of the examples in step 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Participating Libraries&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|Updating respondents]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new French terms (Compilation and Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#377_Associated_language|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_Information|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ on geographic names&lt;br /&gt;
|'''updated content''' : [[FAQ_on_geographic_names|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script|16.2.2.5, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Geographical Names Database]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Removal of the phrases &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfield $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0 or $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0, $1, $3, $4 or $i.&amp;quot; in various fields.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Point 2.c. on variants under step 2 for modifications.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers (field 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)|Question about Canadiana generic numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Bibliographic_file_maintenance_.28BFM.29_.5BNew.5D|Bibliographic file maintenance (BFM)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3.,Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification of the statement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX_-_See_From_Tracings_-_General_Information|Clarification on cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Establishing_certain_entities_in_the_name_authority_file|Establishing certain entities in the name authority file]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|Instructions for name authority records for families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|Instruction for obsolete subfields $l and $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#023_Cluster_ISSN|023 field, Cluster ISSN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|Instruction for subfield $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Recording_Attributes_of_Work_and_Expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Recording Attributes of Work and Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Preferred_Title_Consisting_Solely_of_the_Name_of_One_Type_of_Composition|6.14.2.5.2, Preferred Title Consisting Solely of the Name of One Type of Composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choice_of_language|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choice of language]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Singular_or_Plural_Form|6.14.2.5.2.2, Singular or Plural Form]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Part_Identified_Both_by_a_Number_and_by_a_Title_or_Other_Verbal_Designation.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Part Identified Both by a Number and by a Title or Other Verbal Designation, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Two_or_More_Parts.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Two or More Parts, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.8.3.2C_Complete_Works_of_a_Single_Type_of_Composition_for_One_Specific_Medium_or_Various_Media|6.14.2.8.3, Complete Works of a Single Type of Composition for One Specific Medium or Various Media]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.3.2C_Recording_Medium_of_Performance|6.15.1.3, Recording Medium of Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.5.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.5, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.1, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.3, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Serial_Number|6.16.1.3.1, Serial Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Thematic_Index_Number|6.16.1.3.3, Thematic Index Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_Transcriptions.2C_Etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, Transcriptions, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.27.1.9.2C_Additions_to_access_points_representing_works|6.27.1.9, Additions to access points representing works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2C_General_Guidelines_on_Constructing_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1, General Guidelines on Constructing Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2.2C_Musical_Works_With_Lyrics.2C_Libretto.2C_Text.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Musical Works With Lyrics, Libretto, Text, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.2C_Additional_Elements_in_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1.9, Additional Elements in Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.3.2C_Authorized_Access_Point_Representing_an_Expression_of_Musical_Work|6.28.3, Authorized Access Point Representing an Expression of Musical Work]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.4.2C_Variant_Access_Point_Representing_a_Musical_Work_or_Expression|6.28.4, Variant Access Point Representing a Musical Work or Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Medium_of_performance|Clarification of existing authority records.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.1.3.2C_Recording_Relationship_to_Related_Corporate_Body|32.1.1.3, Recording Relationship to Related Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Establishing certain entities in the name authority file&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Group_1_-_Name_Authority_Group_Headings|Category “Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named” revised for “Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual” (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Suppression of: prefer a notice that already has an 016 to one that doesn't.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_FAQ_on_Compilations_of_Works_by_One_Agent|FAQ on Compilations of Works by One Agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#10.0.2C_Identifying_families|10.0, Identifying families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Children_and_Grandchildren_of_Royal_Persons|9.4.1.4.3, Children and Grandchildren of Royal Persons]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual|Clarifications made in field 008/32, 371, 377 and 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link for Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|New example of how to cite a website subpage]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Editing the note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_on_romanization|FAQ on romanization]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Steering Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Standards Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership_2|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Details about the number to be provided in 667 note at Step 2, Record to be deleted]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|LAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Library_and_Archives_Canada|Link for LAC Wiki]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles|Clarification of certain principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.2C_Related_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|32.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#When_a_corporate_body_has_gone_through_a_name_change.2C_or_several_name_changes.2C_and_there_are_authority_records.2C_in_Canadiana.2C_for_the_other_names.2C_which_relationships_should_be_recorded_in_an_authority_record_.28field_5XX.29.3F_In_which_cases_should_cataloguers_revise_the_authority_records_for_those_related_corporate_bodies.3F|Question 7 on related corporate bodies]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|New respondents for some institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Correction of an example in field 008/15]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Maintenance_of_existing_undifferentiated_records:|Important clarification added in field 008/32 regarding existing undifferentiated records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for the term &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; added to field 1XX of the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|Clarification of associated group name changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for FrPBN-coded authority records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#How_do_I_determine_the_usage_for_an_agent_name_in_WMS.3F|Question 8 on the usage of an agent's name]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New document for the romanization of Hebrew]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification added for field 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#General|008/32, General]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information|Clarification for counties in the United States]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#386_Creator.2Fcontributor_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|Details added to field 046]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Details added for an URI included in a 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#PFAN_eligibility_criteria_.5BNew.5D|Eligibility criteria and expectations of new members]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Correction of the PQ numbers for French Canadian literature]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|New instruction for subfields $q and $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#053_LC_classification_number_.5BNew.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#065_Other_Classification_Number_.5BNew.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|Clarification for the second indicator]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Amharic table]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#375_Gender|Do not use this field]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link to &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 on cancelled or hybrid conference]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarifications added for fields 046 and 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/032&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Records_coded_as_undifferentiated_that_actually_represent_only_one_identity|Clarification added for records coded &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; by mistake]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation|New document on the romanization of Yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#043_Geographic_Area_Code_.5BNew.5D|Local Geographic area code]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_of_Promulgation_of_a_Law.2C_Etc._.5BNew.5D|6.29.1.29, Date of Promulgation of a Law, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2C_Name_of_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|11.2, Name of Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information_.5BNEW.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources of information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)#FAQ_on_geographic_names|FAQ on geographic names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation_.5BNew.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name9|008/32]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Two new 667 field examples (for undifferentiated name authority records representing a single identity and those undergoing partial modifications)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|Cross-references (4XX and 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_on_Canadiana_numbers_(field_016)#Who_do_I_contact_if_I_need_a_new_list_of_Canadiana_numbers_for_field_016.3F_.5BNew.5D|Question 4 on obtaining a new list of Canadian numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new terms (Lyrics and Libretto)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Clarifications added for Chinese]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#385_Audience_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications_.5BNEW.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles_.5BNEW.5D|General Principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNEW.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|022]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|024]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|046]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#335_Extension_Plan_.5BNew.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|375]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|384]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|385]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Char|386]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|510]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#530_See_Also_From_Tracing-Uniform_Title|530]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Two new languages (Korean and Japanese)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Add an instruction to 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Project_2._Records_created_and_revised_as_part_of_the_Universities_Mentoring_Project|Clarifications added for the Universities Mentoring Project ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D|Simple 4XX &amp;quot;see&amp;quot; cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Membership of the Steering Committee]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|New article on PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Addition of romanization tables from BnF (Armenian, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Georgian, Macedonian, Russian, Ukrainian]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation|RVM examples are replaced by RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Clarifications added for the instruction on 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions|Clarifications added on point 3 and example 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Correction of an example]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for records derived from LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_records_derived_from_LC.2FNAF|Clarification of the example of a 670 field]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Discussion Lists&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|New PFAN-MUSIQUE-L discussion list.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Added information in different fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Core RDA Elements for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Core_RDA_Elements_for_PFAN|Additional information under Related Corporate Bodies element.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Mandatory MARC Fields for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Mandatory_MARC_Fields_for_PFAN|Added information in 510, 511, 551 fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New introduction.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-03-11''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=144875</id>
		<title>PFAN - Annonces et mises à jour</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=144875"/>
		<updated>2026-03-11T14:28:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Ajouts et modifications au wiki du PFAN */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - News and Updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annonces =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Annonce'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Nous sommes ravis d’accueillir Marilyne Guertin, de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 13 janvier 2026, elle succède à Marie Chantal L’Ecuyer Coelho à titre de représentante de BAnQ et de coprésidente du Comité. De son côté, Marie Chantal remplacera Izidor Cirnatiu, qui quitte le Comité après sept années d’implication. Nous tenons à exprimer notre sincère gratitude à Izidor pour son engagement au sein du PFAN. Son expertise et son engagement ont été essentiels à la création du Comité et à ses nombreuses réalisations. Merci Izidor, et bienvenue à Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une '''formation sur la romanisation''' sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 18 et 25 novembre prochains, de 10 h à 12 h. Cette activité a été préparée par Rachel Gagnon et Daniel Paradis, et sera présentée par Rachel Gagnon, bibliothécaire principale à Bibliothèque et Archives Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN, auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la romanisation selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter la formation générale offerte en 2020 et à savoir quand appliquer les tables de romanisation du PFAN.  Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; par conséquent, elle ne répétera pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 2 heures chacune.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''18 novembre''', la première partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les principes de bases et les définitions&lt;br /&gt;
* RDA et le début de la démarche&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de personnes&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''25 novembre''', la deuxième partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de familles&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de collectivités&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
* Les titres privilégiés pour les œuvres&lt;br /&gt;
* La foire aux questions&lt;br /&gt;
* Les zones MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/01367886-b1fd-434a-bccb-a4b86931f74f@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 1]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/5822e340-3ced-4d47-905e-2f658e7dc7f6@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Marie-Chantal L’Écuyer-Coelho de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 23 septembre 2024, elle remplace Daniel Paradis comme représentante de BAnQ et co-présidente du comité.  Nous remercions chaleureusement Daniel Paradis pour sa grande contribution au PFAN. Sa participation et son expertise ont grandement influencé la création et les nombreuses réalisations du Comité.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une formation gratuite sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales dans le fichier Canadiana sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 28 et 30 mai prochains, de 9 h à 12 h 30. Elle a été préparée et sera présentée par les spécialistes du catalogage de la musique que sont :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Rachel Gagnon, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
* Guillaume Lizotte, Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
* Daniel Paradis, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
* Lina Picard, Université de Montréal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter le module 6 de la formation générale donnée en 2020, lequel excluait les œuvres et les expressions musicales. Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; elle ne répétera donc pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées. Afin de mieux se préparer à la formation, il est quand même fortement recommandé de réviser le [[/wiki.gccollab.ca/PFAN - Formation PFAN|module 6 de la formation générale]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 3 heures et demie chacune. La première partie couvrira les attributs des œuvres et des expressions musicales, c’est-à-dire :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* titre privilégié d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* distribution d’exécution&lt;br /&gt;
* désignation numérique d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* tonalité et&lt;br /&gt;
* autre caractéristique d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La deuxième partie couvrira quant à elle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* la construction des points d'accès et des variantes de point d’accès représentant des œuvres et des expressions musicales&lt;br /&gt;
* les entités en relation ainsi que&lt;br /&gt;
* la maintenance du fichier Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/8148f230-56d9-4833-a25c-7f6baac6c2fb@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/cf33ae27-958d-40ab-baff-efe2f158a858@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Bernard Lemieux de l'Université de Montréal au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 28 mars 2023, il remplace officiellement Philippe Brosseau comme l'un des représentants du Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. Nous remercions chaleureusement Philippe pour sa contribution au comité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ajouts et modifications au wiki du PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le wiki, le '''contenu ajouté''' est identifié par l'étiquette &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. Le '''contenu modifié''' est identifié par du &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;texte en rouge&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/372&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9|Nouvel exemple avec $2 rvmgf]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-30&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions pour les langues de la norme ISO 15919:2001 (Information et documentation -- Translittération du Devanagari et des écritures indiennes liées en caractères latins)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Correction des exemples de l'étape 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Bibliothèques participantes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Mise à jour des répondants]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Compilation et Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ sur les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_géographiques|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e|16.2.2.5, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Bases de données toponymiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Retrait des phrases &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser la sous-zone $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0 ou $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0, $1, $3, $4 ou $i.&amp;quot; dans différentes zones]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Point 2.c. sur les variantes de point d'accès sous l'étape 2 pour les modifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ sur les numéros Canadiana (zone 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_numéros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Quels_sont_les_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9riques_utilis.C3.A9s_dans_les_notices_Canadiana.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question sur les numéros Canadiana génériques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Entretien_du_fichier_bibliographique_.28EFB.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Entretien du fichier bibliographique (EFB)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3., Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification d'un énoncé]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_.E2.80.93_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision sur les renvois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Enregistrement_des_attributs_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_et_d.27une_expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Enregistrement des attributs d'une œuvre et d'une expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Titre_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9_constitu.C3.A9_uniquement_du_nom_d.27un_type_de_composition|6.14.2.5.2, Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type de composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choix_de_la_langue|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choix de la langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Forme_au_singulier_ou_au_pluriel|6.14.2.5.2.2, Forme au singulier ou au pluriel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Partie_identifi.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_fois_par_un_num.C3.A9ro_et_par_un_titre_ou_une_autre_d.C3.A9signation_verbale.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Partie identifiée à la fois par un numéro et par un titre ou une autre désignation verbale, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Deux_ou_plusieurs_parties.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Deux ou plusieurs parties, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.8.3.2C_.C5.92uvres_compl.C3.A8tes_d.27un_m.C3.AAme_type_de_composition_pour_une_m.C3.AAme_distribution_sp.C3.A9cifique_ou_diverses_distributions|6.14.2.8.3, Œuvres complètes d'un même type de composition pour une même distribution spécifique ou diverses distributions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|6.15.1.3, Enregistrement d'une distribution d'exécution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.5.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.5, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.1, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.3, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27ordre|6.16.1.3.1, Numéro d'ordre]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_de_catalogue_th.C3.A9matique|6.16.1.3.3, Numéro de catalogue thématique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_transcriptions.2C_etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, transcriptions, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.27.1.9.2C_Ajouts_aux_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres|6.27.1.9, Ajouts aux points d'accès représentant des œuvres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1, Lignes directrices générales sur la construction des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Œuvres musicales avec des paroles, un livret, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1.9, Éléments additionnels dans les points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.3.2C_Point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_expression_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale|6.28.3, Point d'accès autorisé représentant une expression d'une œuvre musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.4.2C_Variante_de_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_.C5.93uvre_ou_une_expression_musicale|6.28.4, Variante de point d'accès représentant une œuvre ou une expression musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|Précision pour les notices d'autorité existante]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.17.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_tonalit.C3.A9|6.17.1.3, Enregistrement d'une tonalité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#.C3.89tablissement_de_certaines_entit.C3.A9s_dans_le_fichier_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms|Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-mati.C3.A8re|Instruction pour les notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|Instruction pour les sous-zones obsolètes $l et $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#023_ISSN_de_regroupement|Zone 023, ISSN de regroupement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille|Instruction pour la sous-zone $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.E2.80.99une_relation_.C3.A0_une_collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation|32.1.1.3, Enregistrement d’une relation à une collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Groupe_1_-_Vedettes_du_groupe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_de_noms|Catégorie « Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named » révisée pour « Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual » (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Suppression de : préférer une notice qui a déjà une 016 à une qui n'en a pas.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_FAQ_sur_les_compilations_d%27œuvres_d%27un_même_agent|FAQ sur les compilations d'œuvres d'un même agent.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#10.0.2C_Identification_des_familles|10.0, Identification des familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Enfants_et_petits-enfants_de_personnes_royales|9.4.1.4.3, Enfants et petits-enfants de personnes royales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms|Précisions apportées dans les zones 008/32, 371, 377 et 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles| Lien pour Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Format_des_zones_670| Nouvel exemple illustrant comment citer une sous-page de site Web]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667| Modification de la note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Foire aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_la_romanisation| FAQ sur la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité directeur&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_directeur| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité des normes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_des_normes| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précision pour le numéro à indiquer dans la note 667 sous Étape 2, Notice à supprimer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Bibliothèque_et_Archives_Canada|Lien pour le wiki de BAC]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision pour certains principes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.2C_Collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|32.1, Collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Lorsqu.E2.80.99une_collectivit.C3.A9_a_port.C3.A9_plus_d.E2.80.99un_nom_et_qu.E2.80.99il_existe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_pour_les_autres_noms_dans_Canadiana.2C_lesquelles_doit-on_mettre_en_relation_avec_des_zones_5XX.3F_Dans_quels_cas_doit-on_r.C3.A9viser_les_autorit.C3.A9s_des_collectivit.C3.A9s_mises_en_relation.3F|Question 7 sur les collectivités en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Nouveaux répondants pour certaines institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Mise_.C3.A0_jour_des_notices_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_existantes|Précision importante concernant les notices indifférenciées existantes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.3.4.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_p.C3.A9riode_d.27activit.C3.A9_d.27une_personne_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.3.4.3, Enregistrement d'une période d'activité d'une personne]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour le terme &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; ajoutée à la zone 1XX de la liste]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9|Précision sur les changements de nom des groupes associés]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour les notices d'autorité codées FrPBN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Comment_d.C3.A9terminer_l.27usage_pour_le_nom_d.27un_agent_dans_WMS.3F|Question 8 sur l'usage du nom d'un agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation de l'hébreu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision ajoutée pour la zone 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#G.C3.A9n.C3.A9ralit.C3.A9s|Généralités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Précision concernant les comtés aux États-Unis]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur_.5BNouveau.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées dans la section Généralités; ajout de sections sur la répétabilité, les dates divergentes et les dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées pour un URI inclus dans la sous-zone $u]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Crit.C3.A8res_d.27admissibilit.C3.A9_au_PFAN_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Critères d'admissibilité et attentes envers les nouveaux membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Correction de l'indice PQ pour la littérature canadienne française]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Instruction sur les sous-zones $q et $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress_.5BNouveau.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21/053&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress|Précision concernant le deuxième indicateur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Table pour l'amharique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|Ne plus utiliser cette zone]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles|Lien vers &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Présentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 sur les congrès, etc., annulés ou hybrides]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précisions ajoutées aux zones 046 et 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_cod.C3.A9es_comme_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_qui_ne_repr.C3.A9sentent_en_fait_qu.27une_seule_identit.C3.A9|Précision ajoutée pour les notices codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» par erreur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation du yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique_.5BNouveau.5D|Code local de région géographique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_de_promulgation_d.E2.80.99une_loi.2C_etc._.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.29.1.29, Date de promulgation d’une loi, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2C_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2, Nom de collectivité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information_.5BNouveau.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources d'information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Doit-on_modifier_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions_d.27un_agent_.28p._ex._un_auteur_ou_un_compositeur.29_si_la_forme_retenue_pour_l.27agent_seul_est_diff.C3.A9rente_de_celle_utilis.C3.A9e_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions.3F|Question 4 sur la modification des points d'accès autorisés pour les œuvres et expressions d'un agent]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_g%C3%A9ographiques|FAQ sur les noms géographiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation_.5BNouveau.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667|Deux nouveaux exemples de notes 667 (pour les notices d'autorité de nom indifférenciées représentant une seule identité et celles faisant l'objet d'une modification partielle)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Renvois (4XX et 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ-Numéros Canadiana&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_num%C3%A9ros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Qui_contacter_lorsqu.27on_a_besoin_d.27une_nouvelle_liste_de_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_pour_la_zone_016.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question 4 sur l'obtention d'une nouvelle liste de numéros Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Livret et Paroles)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions ajoutées en ce qui concerne le chinois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible_.5BNouveau.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Communications_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Principles généraux]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|022]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9|024]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#335_Plan_d.27extension_.5BNouveau.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|375]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9|384]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible|385]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur|386]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9|510]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme|530]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Deux nouvelles langues (coréen et japonais)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Ajout d'une instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Projet_2._Notices_cr.C3.A9.C3.A9es_et_r.C3.A9vis.C3.A9es_dans_le_cadre_du_projet_de_mentorat_des_universit.C3.A9s|Précisions ajoutées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |Renvois « voir » (4XX) simples]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Composition|Composition du Comité directeur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Nouvel article sur le PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNouveau.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Ajout de tables de romanisation de la BnF pour l'arménien, le biélorusse, le bulgare, le géorgien, le macédonien, le russe et l'ukrainien]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|Remplacement d'exemples RVM par RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précisions apportées à l'instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions|Précisions apportées au point 3 et à l'exemple 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure pour les notices dérivées du LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_pour_les_notices_d.C3.A9riv.C3.A9es_du_LC.2FNAF|Précision apportée à l'exemple du modèle d'une note 670 ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#PFAN-MUSIQUE-L_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Liste de discussion PFAN-MUSIQUE-L]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Ajout d'information dans différentes zones.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Éléments RDA fondamentaux pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Éléments_RDA_fondamentaux_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous l'élément ''collectivités en relation''.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Zones MARC obligatoires pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Zones_MARC_obligatoires_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous les zones 510, 511, 551.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouvelle introduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-11-04''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=144874</id>
		<title>PFAN - Annonces et mises à jour</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=144874"/>
		<updated>2026-03-11T14:04:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Ajouts et modifications au wiki du PFAN */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - News and Updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annonces =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Annonce'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Nous sommes ravis d’accueillir Marilyne Guertin, de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 13 janvier 2026, elle succède à Marie Chantal L’Ecuyer Coelho à titre de représentante de BAnQ et de coprésidente du Comité. De son côté, Marie Chantal remplacera Izidor Cirnatiu, qui quitte le Comité après sept années d’implication. Nous tenons à exprimer notre sincère gratitude à Izidor pour son engagement au sein du PFAN. Son expertise et son engagement ont été essentiels à la création du Comité et à ses nombreuses réalisations. Merci Izidor, et bienvenue à Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une '''formation sur la romanisation''' sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 18 et 25 novembre prochains, de 10 h à 12 h. Cette activité a été préparée par Rachel Gagnon et Daniel Paradis, et sera présentée par Rachel Gagnon, bibliothécaire principale à Bibliothèque et Archives Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN, auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la romanisation selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter la formation générale offerte en 2020 et à savoir quand appliquer les tables de romanisation du PFAN.  Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; par conséquent, elle ne répétera pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 2 heures chacune.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''18 novembre''', la première partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les principes de bases et les définitions&lt;br /&gt;
* RDA et le début de la démarche&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de personnes&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''25 novembre''', la deuxième partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de familles&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de collectivités&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
* Les titres privilégiés pour les œuvres&lt;br /&gt;
* La foire aux questions&lt;br /&gt;
* Les zones MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/01367886-b1fd-434a-bccb-a4b86931f74f@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 1]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/5822e340-3ced-4d47-905e-2f658e7dc7f6@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Marie-Chantal L’Écuyer-Coelho de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 23 septembre 2024, elle remplace Daniel Paradis comme représentante de BAnQ et co-présidente du comité.  Nous remercions chaleureusement Daniel Paradis pour sa grande contribution au PFAN. Sa participation et son expertise ont grandement influencé la création et les nombreuses réalisations du Comité.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une formation gratuite sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales dans le fichier Canadiana sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 28 et 30 mai prochains, de 9 h à 12 h 30. Elle a été préparée et sera présentée par les spécialistes du catalogage de la musique que sont :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Rachel Gagnon, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
* Guillaume Lizotte, Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
* Daniel Paradis, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
* Lina Picard, Université de Montréal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter le module 6 de la formation générale donnée en 2020, lequel excluait les œuvres et les expressions musicales. Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; elle ne répétera donc pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées. Afin de mieux se préparer à la formation, il est quand même fortement recommandé de réviser le [[/wiki.gccollab.ca/PFAN - Formation PFAN|module 6 de la formation générale]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 3 heures et demie chacune. La première partie couvrira les attributs des œuvres et des expressions musicales, c’est-à-dire :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* titre privilégié d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* distribution d’exécution&lt;br /&gt;
* désignation numérique d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* tonalité et&lt;br /&gt;
* autre caractéristique d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La deuxième partie couvrira quant à elle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* la construction des points d'accès et des variantes de point d’accès représentant des œuvres et des expressions musicales&lt;br /&gt;
* les entités en relation ainsi que&lt;br /&gt;
* la maintenance du fichier Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/8148f230-56d9-4833-a25c-7f6baac6c2fb@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/cf33ae27-958d-40ab-baff-efe2f158a858@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Bernard Lemieux de l'Université de Montréal au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 28 mars 2023, il remplace officiellement Philippe Brosseau comme l'un des représentants du Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. Nous remercions chaleureusement Philippe pour sa contribution au comité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ajouts et modifications au wiki du PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le wiki, le '''contenu ajouté''' est identifié par l'étiquette &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. Le '''contenu modifié''' est identifié par du &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;texte en rouge&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2026 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-03-10&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-30&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions pour les langues de la norme ISO 15919:2001 (Information et documentation -- Translittération du Devanagari et des écritures indiennes liées en caractères latins)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Correction des exemples de l'étape 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Bibliothèques participantes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Mise à jour des répondants]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Compilation et Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ sur les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_géographiques|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e|16.2.2.5, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Bases de données toponymiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Retrait des phrases &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser la sous-zone $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0 ou $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0, $1, $3, $4 ou $i.&amp;quot; dans différentes zones]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Point 2.c. sur les variantes de point d'accès sous l'étape 2 pour les modifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ sur les numéros Canadiana (zone 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_numéros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Quels_sont_les_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9riques_utilis.C3.A9s_dans_les_notices_Canadiana.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question sur les numéros Canadiana génériques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Entretien_du_fichier_bibliographique_.28EFB.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Entretien du fichier bibliographique (EFB)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3., Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification d'un énoncé]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_.E2.80.93_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision sur les renvois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Enregistrement_des_attributs_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_et_d.27une_expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Enregistrement des attributs d'une œuvre et d'une expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Titre_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9_constitu.C3.A9_uniquement_du_nom_d.27un_type_de_composition|6.14.2.5.2, Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type de composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choix_de_la_langue|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choix de la langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Forme_au_singulier_ou_au_pluriel|6.14.2.5.2.2, Forme au singulier ou au pluriel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Partie_identifi.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_fois_par_un_num.C3.A9ro_et_par_un_titre_ou_une_autre_d.C3.A9signation_verbale.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Partie identifiée à la fois par un numéro et par un titre ou une autre désignation verbale, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Deux_ou_plusieurs_parties.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Deux ou plusieurs parties, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.8.3.2C_.C5.92uvres_compl.C3.A8tes_d.27un_m.C3.AAme_type_de_composition_pour_une_m.C3.AAme_distribution_sp.C3.A9cifique_ou_diverses_distributions|6.14.2.8.3, Œuvres complètes d'un même type de composition pour une même distribution spécifique ou diverses distributions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|6.15.1.3, Enregistrement d'une distribution d'exécution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.5.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.5, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.1, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.3, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27ordre|6.16.1.3.1, Numéro d'ordre]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_de_catalogue_th.C3.A9matique|6.16.1.3.3, Numéro de catalogue thématique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_transcriptions.2C_etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, transcriptions, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.27.1.9.2C_Ajouts_aux_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres|6.27.1.9, Ajouts aux points d'accès représentant des œuvres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1, Lignes directrices générales sur la construction des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Œuvres musicales avec des paroles, un livret, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1.9, Éléments additionnels dans les points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.3.2C_Point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_expression_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale|6.28.3, Point d'accès autorisé représentant une expression d'une œuvre musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.4.2C_Variante_de_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_.C5.93uvre_ou_une_expression_musicale|6.28.4, Variante de point d'accès représentant une œuvre ou une expression musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|Précision pour les notices d'autorité existante]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.17.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_tonalit.C3.A9|6.17.1.3, Enregistrement d'une tonalité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#.C3.89tablissement_de_certaines_entit.C3.A9s_dans_le_fichier_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms|Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-mati.C3.A8re|Instruction pour les notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|Instruction pour les sous-zones obsolètes $l et $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#023_ISSN_de_regroupement|Zone 023, ISSN de regroupement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille|Instruction pour la sous-zone $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.E2.80.99une_relation_.C3.A0_une_collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation|32.1.1.3, Enregistrement d’une relation à une collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Groupe_1_-_Vedettes_du_groupe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_de_noms|Catégorie « Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named » révisée pour « Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual » (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Suppression de : préférer une notice qui a déjà une 016 à une qui n'en a pas.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_FAQ_sur_les_compilations_d%27œuvres_d%27un_même_agent|FAQ sur les compilations d'œuvres d'un même agent.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#10.0.2C_Identification_des_familles|10.0, Identification des familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Enfants_et_petits-enfants_de_personnes_royales|9.4.1.4.3, Enfants et petits-enfants de personnes royales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms|Précisions apportées dans les zones 008/32, 371, 377 et 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles| Lien pour Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Format_des_zones_670| Nouvel exemple illustrant comment citer une sous-page de site Web]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667| Modification de la note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Foire aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_la_romanisation| FAQ sur la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité directeur&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_directeur| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité des normes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_des_normes| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précision pour le numéro à indiquer dans la note 667 sous Étape 2, Notice à supprimer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Bibliothèque_et_Archives_Canada|Lien pour le wiki de BAC]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision pour certains principes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.2C_Collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|32.1, Collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Lorsqu.E2.80.99une_collectivit.C3.A9_a_port.C3.A9_plus_d.E2.80.99un_nom_et_qu.E2.80.99il_existe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_pour_les_autres_noms_dans_Canadiana.2C_lesquelles_doit-on_mettre_en_relation_avec_des_zones_5XX.3F_Dans_quels_cas_doit-on_r.C3.A9viser_les_autorit.C3.A9s_des_collectivit.C3.A9s_mises_en_relation.3F|Question 7 sur les collectivités en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Nouveaux répondants pour certaines institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Mise_.C3.A0_jour_des_notices_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_existantes|Précision importante concernant les notices indifférenciées existantes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.3.4.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_p.C3.A9riode_d.27activit.C3.A9_d.27une_personne_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.3.4.3, Enregistrement d'une période d'activité d'une personne]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour le terme &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; ajoutée à la zone 1XX de la liste]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9|Précision sur les changements de nom des groupes associés]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour les notices d'autorité codées FrPBN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Comment_d.C3.A9terminer_l.27usage_pour_le_nom_d.27un_agent_dans_WMS.3F|Question 8 sur l'usage du nom d'un agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation de l'hébreu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision ajoutée pour la zone 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#G.C3.A9n.C3.A9ralit.C3.A9s|Généralités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Précision concernant les comtés aux États-Unis]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur_.5BNouveau.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées dans la section Généralités; ajout de sections sur la répétabilité, les dates divergentes et les dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées pour un URI inclus dans la sous-zone $u]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Crit.C3.A8res_d.27admissibilit.C3.A9_au_PFAN_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Critères d'admissibilité et attentes envers les nouveaux membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Correction de l'indice PQ pour la littérature canadienne française]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Instruction sur les sous-zones $q et $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress_.5BNouveau.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21/053&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress|Précision concernant le deuxième indicateur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Table pour l'amharique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|Ne plus utiliser cette zone]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles|Lien vers &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Présentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 sur les congrès, etc., annulés ou hybrides]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précisions ajoutées aux zones 046 et 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_cod.C3.A9es_comme_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_qui_ne_repr.C3.A9sentent_en_fait_qu.27une_seule_identit.C3.A9|Précision ajoutée pour les notices codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» par erreur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation du yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique_.5BNouveau.5D|Code local de région géographique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_de_promulgation_d.E2.80.99une_loi.2C_etc._.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.29.1.29, Date de promulgation d’une loi, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2C_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2, Nom de collectivité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information_.5BNouveau.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources d'information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Doit-on_modifier_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions_d.27un_agent_.28p._ex._un_auteur_ou_un_compositeur.29_si_la_forme_retenue_pour_l.27agent_seul_est_diff.C3.A9rente_de_celle_utilis.C3.A9e_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions.3F|Question 4 sur la modification des points d'accès autorisés pour les œuvres et expressions d'un agent]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_g%C3%A9ographiques|FAQ sur les noms géographiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation_.5BNouveau.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667|Deux nouveaux exemples de notes 667 (pour les notices d'autorité de nom indifférenciées représentant une seule identité et celles faisant l'objet d'une modification partielle)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Renvois (4XX et 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ-Numéros Canadiana&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_num%C3%A9ros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Qui_contacter_lorsqu.27on_a_besoin_d.27une_nouvelle_liste_de_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_pour_la_zone_016.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question 4 sur l'obtention d'une nouvelle liste de numéros Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Livret et Paroles)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions ajoutées en ce qui concerne le chinois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible_.5BNouveau.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Communications_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Principles généraux]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|022]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9|024]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#335_Plan_d.27extension_.5BNouveau.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|375]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9|384]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible|385]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur|386]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9|510]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme|530]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Deux nouvelles langues (coréen et japonais)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Ajout d'une instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Projet_2._Notices_cr.C3.A9.C3.A9es_et_r.C3.A9vis.C3.A9es_dans_le_cadre_du_projet_de_mentorat_des_universit.C3.A9s|Précisions ajoutées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |Renvois « voir » (4XX) simples]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Composition|Composition du Comité directeur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Nouvel article sur le PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNouveau.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Ajout de tables de romanisation de la BnF pour l'arménien, le biélorusse, le bulgare, le géorgien, le macédonien, le russe et l'ukrainien]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|Remplacement d'exemples RVM par RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précisions apportées à l'instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions|Précisions apportées au point 3 et à l'exemple 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure pour les notices dérivées du LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_pour_les_notices_d.C3.A9riv.C3.A9es_du_LC.2FNAF|Précision apportée à l'exemple du modèle d'une note 670 ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#PFAN-MUSIQUE-L_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Liste de discussion PFAN-MUSIQUE-L]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Ajout d'information dans différentes zones.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Éléments RDA fondamentaux pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Éléments_RDA_fondamentaux_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous l'élément ''collectivités en relation''.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Zones MARC obligatoires pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Zones_MARC_obligatoires_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous les zones 510, 511, 551.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouvelle introduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-11-04''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=144835</id>
		<title>PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=144835"/>
		<updated>2026-03-09T20:33:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 372 Domaine d'activité */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par D. Paradis, 12 septembre)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par N. Mainville, 26 février)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours| 24 h (En cours d'édition par A. Dunnett, BAC, 24 mars)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Guide}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:PFAN - Name Authority Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  Notices d'autorité de nom ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notices d'autorité de collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--En octobre et novembre 2021, les passages du Guide concernant les collections ont été cachés par souci de cohérence avec la décision de ne pas permettre la création ni la révision des notices d'autorité de collections. DP 1er novembre 2021--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 008 Éléments de données de longueur fixe =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Règles de catalogage descriptif ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée de quelque façon que ce soit, évaluer la notice d'autorité et la modifier pour qu'elle soit conforme à RDA, en modifiant le codage de la zone 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1 : Si une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée uniquement par la modification ou l'ajout d'une zone 5XX, on encourage fortement les catalogueurs, bien qu'il n'y ait pas d'obligation, à évaluer la notice et à la modifier selon RDA, en changeant le 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2 : Les autorités de noms indifférenciés codées 008/10 «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;», peuvent être modifiées de manière à enlever une ou plusieurs identités afin de créer des notices différenciées conformes à RDA. Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié à cette fin, la notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié mise à jour doit conserver le code 008/10 existant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-24]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F10 R.C3.A8gles de catalogage descriptif|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Système de vedettes-matière / Thésaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone 008/11 de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) dans la zone 008/11 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) dans la zone 008/11, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/15 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;dans la zone 008/11 des&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples de noms de collectivités ne pouvant être utilisés comme vedettes-matière :''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis.  Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran.  Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois.  Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique.  Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; margin-left: 0px; padding-left: 15px; padding-top: 10px; padding-bottom: 10px; text-indent: 0px; line-height: 1.0; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;tats-Unis. Pr&amp;amp;eacute;sident (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;glise catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Church of England. Dioc&amp;amp;egrave;se de Londres. &amp;amp;Eacute;v&amp;amp;ecirc;que (1675-1713 : Compton)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F11 Syst.C3.A8me de vedettes-mati.C3.A8re .2F Th.C3.A9saurus|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Utilisation de la vedette – vedette-matière secondaire ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Généralités&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de famille&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Appropriée) dans la zone 008/15 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) dans la zone 008/15, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/11 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Contexte'' : Pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, les catalogueurs descriptifs peuvent être amenés à établir un point d'accès autorisé pour le nom de la collectivité pour la fonction ainsi qu'un nom personnel pour le titulaire de la fonction. La politique d'indexation est d'attribuer seulement le nom personnel, et non le nom de la collectivité, comme point d'accès matière. Cette politique a été établie à des fins de colocalisation (voir [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). Par exemple, le point d'accès :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
peut être utilisé dans le catalogage descriptif comme point d'accès, mais en indexation seul le nom personnel serait utilisé comme point d'accès matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) aux notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F15 Utilisation de la vedette - vedette-mati.C3.A8re secondaire|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Nom de personne non différencié ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser le code 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (non différencié) dans une notice d'autorité de nom RDA. Attribuer la valeur 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes. Utiliser le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les familles, les collectivités et les lieux. Pour les œuvres et les expressions, attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» si le point d'accès commence par un nom de personne, sinon attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par le passé, la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 permettait de coder les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes comme non différenciées lorsque le catalogueur n'avait aucun moyen acceptable de différencier plusieurs personnes portant le même nom privilégié. Depuis sa création, le PFAN a suivi ces directives pour les notices d’autorité de noms de personnes :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas créer de nouvelles notices non différenciées codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Toutes les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes codéees RDA doivent être différenciées.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas ajouter une nouvelle identité à une notice d'autorité de nom de personne existante codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&lt;br /&gt;
* Appliquer plutôt [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] pour créer un point d'accès autorisé unique pour la personne, en utilisant des éléments additionnels appropriés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mise à jour des notices indifférenciées existantes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' Pour une entité donnée, si la seule notice trouvée est une notice indifférenciée (dont la zone 008/32 est codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;») versée par une université et comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;», ne pas l'utiliser.  Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité pour l'entité.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler à BAC la notice indifférenciée en communiquant son numéro de contrôle OCLC par courriel à l'adresse pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca et en mentionnant comme objet : Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice indifférenciée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante, en particulier une notice qui a été importée du LC/NAF, comprenne des paires de zones 670 utilisées pour regrouper l'information sur chaque personne visée par la notice d'autorité de nom. La première zone 670 de chaque paire est une zone 670 d'identification qui comprend un terme décrivant la relation de la personne avec le titre cité dans la deuxième zone 670 de la paire. Les données de la zone 670 d'identification sont enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a et sont mises entre crochets. La deuxième zone 670 de la paire est une zone 670 de citation qui comprend les éléments de données normaux dans la citation d'une ressource cataloguée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Auteur de Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Point d'accès supplémentaire pour Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Éditeur intellectuel de Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut aussi arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante comprenne une note 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée et identifiant la ou les ressources associées aux autres personnes portant le même nom. Dans ce cas, la notice ne comprend généralement pas de zones 670 pour les personnes autres que la première qui a été identifiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque de l'information pour distinguer une personne dans une notice d'autorité existante indifférenciée provenant de BAC ou de BAnQ est trouvée :&lt;br /&gt;
* Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour cette personne avec des informations distinctives et ajouter une indication que la personne était auparavant sur une notice indifférenciée (voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées|Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées]]&amp;amp;nbsp;», ci-dessous). Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette personne, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* Le cas échéant, transférer la &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;zone 670 de citation&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; se rapportant à cette personne depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Ne pas transférer la zone 670 d'identification vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* Si la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée n'est pas supprimée parce que plusieurs identités restent, supprimer les zones 670 qui se rapportent à la personne maintenant représentée sur la nouvelle notice d'autorité &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(c’est-à-dire, dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, supprimer à la fois la zone 670 d’identification et la zone 670 de citation)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; et, le cas échéant, éditer ou supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée pour supprimer la mention de cette personne.&lt;br /&gt;
* S'il reste plus d'une identité dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée et qu'il n'y a pas suffisamment d'information pour créer de nouvelles notices d'autorité de nom pour chaque nom, laisser la notice d'autorité de nom codée RCAA2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de faciliter le traitement automatisé des notices d'autorité (par exemple, appariement, liaison), lorsqu'il ne reste qu'une seule identité dans une notice d'autorité de nom de personne indifférenciée (c'est-à-dire lorsque les autres identités sont désambiguïsées et enlevées), procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'unique identité restante. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette identité, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;». Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Dans la nouvelle notice :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le cas échéant, transférer la citation 670 se rapportant à l'unique identité restante depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;S'assurer que la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée contient seulement de l'information se rapportant à l'unique identité restante (par exemple, les zones 670). Le cas échéant, supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, ajouter la notice 667 suivante pour garantir qu'une notice d'autorité de nom ne sera pas créée en double :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAC''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana] $z [Numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée dérivée du LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'autrice d'Esperanza :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter une note 667 à une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour identifier le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité dans laquelle l'information sur cette personne a déjà été enregistrée :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices codées comme indifférenciées qui ne représentent en fait qu'une seule identité ====&lt;br /&gt;
À l'occasion, il arrive qu'une notice soit codée comme étant indifférenciée, mais que de nouvelles recherches indiquent qu'en fait la notice ne représente qu'une seule identité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut également arriver qu’on soupçonne que la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été codée par erreur dans la zone 008/32. Dans ces situations, procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter une zone 667 à la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée indiquant qu'elle a été signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'identité. Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette personne, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple d'une notice indifférenciée versée qui ne représente qu'une seule identité''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [aucun numéro Canadiana, utiliser le numéro OCLC de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==008/33 Niveau de l'établissement==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''provisoires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Coder une notice d'autorité de nom comme provisoire (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») si le point d'accès autorisé ne peut être formulé de manière satisfaisante en raison d'informations insuffisantes. Si les informations nécessaires deviennent disponibles ultérieurement, réévaluer la notice d'autorité de nom et la mettre à jour pour qu'elle soit pleinement établie (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;»). En aucun cas, il ne faut créer une notice d'autorité de niveau provisoire avec un point d'accès qui entre en conflit avec une notice d'autorité de nom existante selon les règles de normalisation du PFAN.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Régions administratives spéciales de Hong Kong et de Macao'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Étant donné qu'il n'est pas certain que Hong Kong et Macao continueront à avoir deux langues officielles, coder toutes les notice d'autorité de nom pour les organismes gouvernementaux dans ces deux endroits, au niveau de la région administrative spéciale et en dessous, comme provisoires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;»), quelle que soit la langue dans laquelle le point d'accès autorisé a été établi. Si une forme dans la deuxième langue officielle devient disponible, ajouter cette forme comme variante de point d'accès plutôt que de réviser le point d'accès autorisé existant. Consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] et l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html énoncé de politique connexe] pour obtenir des instructions sur le choix de la langue du nom privilégié. Noter que cette politique concernant le statut provisoire ne s'applique pas aux organismes non gouvernementaux.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Informations supplémentaires pour les participants au PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN peuvent créer des notices provisoires dans les deux situations exceptionnelles suivantes :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'a pas l'expertise linguistique nécessaire pour établir le point d'accès autorisé comme une notice d'autorité pleinement établie; cela comprend les situations où la bibliothèque ne dispose pas de sources de référence adéquates pour la recherche ou lorsque le catalogueur n'est pas sûr de la forme grammaticale correcte du point d'accès.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'est pas en mesure, en raison de ressources limitées ou d'autres contraintes, de compléter le travail pour les autorités en relation ou de déterminer la structure de renvois appropriée qui est requise pour les notices d'autorité pleinement établies.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''préliminaires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité préliminaires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») sont généralement le résultat de projets rétrospectifs. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs du PFAN procèdent régulièrement à des mises à jour des notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils apportent d'autres modifications à la notice d'autorité. À cause de cette exigence de mise à jour, les participants au PFAN sont priés de communiquer avec le Comité des normes avant d'entreprendre des projets qui pourraient entraîner l'ajout massif de notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» au fichier d'autorité Canadiana.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Au besoin, les catalogueurs peuvent mettre à jour les notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils travaillent avec des notices de collectivités antérieures/postérieures, bien que le ou les points d'accès dans les notices mises à jour ne soient pas utilisés dans la base de données bibliographiques locale. À l'occasion, les catalogueurs peuvent avoir besoin de créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom sans avoir de ressource en main, par exemple pour un nom de collectivité antérieur ou postérieur, en utilisant des renseignements provenant de sources de référence, ou pour un point d'accès basé sur des renseignements trouvés dans la sous-zone «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» de la zone 245 de notices bibliographiques, lorsqu'ils résolvent des conflits entre notices d'autorité de noms. Ne pas coder ces notices d'autorité de noms occasionnelles comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaires&amp;amp;nbsp;» .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, les éléments de données des collections doivent être vérifiés sur la publication et les notices d'autorité de collections doivent être codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (complet). Dans le travail d'autorité post-catalogage, il est permis de créer des notices d'autorité de collections sans la ressource en main; ces notices sont codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» (préliminaire). Lorsqu'une publication appartenant à la collection a été examinée et que la notice d'autorité préliminaire a été revue et mise à jour au besoin, mettre la notice d'autorité de collection au niveau complet.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F33_Niveau_de_l.27.C3.A9tablissement |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Source du catalogage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quelle que soit la valeur codée à l'origine dans cette zone, ne pas changer cette valeur lors de la mise à jour d'une notice, sauf si la valeur d'origine est incorrecte. La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;blanc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F39_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 Numéro de contrôle de la notice d'autorité de BAC = &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 016 est obligatoire lorsque le catalogueur crée, met à jour ou utilise une autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité et lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante sans numéro Canadiana, vérifier dans le LC/NAF si la même entité est représentée par une autorité et si celle-ci comporte un numéro Canadiana. Noter que le point d'accès autorisé dans le LC/NAF pourrait avoir une forme différente de celui dans Canadiana. Si la notice dans le LC/NAF comporte un numéro Canadiana, ajouter ce numéro dans la notice Canadiana. Si le numéro se termine par le code de langue E, le changer pour le code F. S'il n'y a pas de code de langue, ajouter le code F à la fin du numéro.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante avec numéro Canadiana, vérifier que le code de langue F est présent à la fin de la zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Doublons'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» un numéro Canadiana. Une fois qu'une notice d'autorité pour une entité donnée a été créée et qu'un numéro Canadiana lui a été attribué, ne pas changer les données dans cette notice pour représenter une entité DIFFÉRENTE. Par exemple, ne pas changer une notice d'autorité pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Dupont, Jean&amp;amp;nbsp;» en une pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Tremblay, Marie&amp;amp;nbsp;» (sauf si le nom de la personne a changé).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, demander à faire supprimer la notice (voir [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dures_sur_les_doublons|Procédures sur les doublons]]). NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il y a une zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, enregistrer le numéro Canadiana qui s'y trouve dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il n'y a pas de zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, en ajouter une en utilisant le numéro 0000X0000F. Ne pas enregistrer ce numéro dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée. Dans ce Guide, voir aussi «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Doublons|Doublons]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, supprimer la notice. NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer le numéro Canadiana de la notice supprimée dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice conservée.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Notices versées en lot partiellement modifiées'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité versées en lot qui sont modifiées partiellement selon la [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]] comportent le numéro Canadiana 1111X1111F. Ce numéro temporaire est ajouté pour permettre l'enregistrement de la notice en attendant que celle-ci soit évaluée pour s'assurer qu'elle répond aux normes du PFAN. Ce numéro doit être remplacé par un numéro unique lorsque la notice est évaluée et que la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;» est supprimée.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 Numéro international normalisé des publications en série =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'ISSN chaque fois qu'il est fourni dans le document en main, dans les notices bibliographiques analytiques ou dans la notice bibliographique pour la collection cataloguée dans son ensemble; sinon, enregistrer l'ISSN est facultatif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on sait que des ISSN distincts ont été attribués à différents formats d'une collection représentée par une seule notice d'autorité, il est préférable d'enregistrer dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 022 l'ISSN qui est l'ISSN de liaison (ISSN-L) pour ces différents formats. Enregistrer les ISSN pour les formats spécifiques dans des zones 667 distinctes, en suivant ce modèle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre d'une publication a changé, il est important de s'assurer que l'ISSN figurant sur la publication appartient au nouveau titre et non au titre précédent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un ISSN incorrect peut être indiqué dans une zone 667 (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;L'ISSN 1122-3344 n'est pas un ISSN valide pour cette publication&amp;amp;nbsp;»).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Autre numéro ou code normalisé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les lignes directrices des [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf ''NACO 024 Best Practices Guidelines'']. En règle générale, limiter à cinq le nombre de zones 024 dans une notice d'autorité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 024 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les identifiants codés dans la zone 024 des notices d'autorité du PFAN. Lorsqu'une zone 024 est présente dans une notice &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;d'autorité&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; qui fait l'objet d'une suppression (par exemple, dans le cas d'un doublon), les catalogueurs doivent transférer le contenu de la zone dans la notice qui doit être conservée. Lorsque deux notices d'autorité sont regroupées en une seule et que chacune des notices comporte une zone 024 différente, les catalogueurs doivent inclure les deux zones 024 dans la notice conservée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Données mathématiques codées sur les documents cartographiques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des pays, provinces, États, comtés'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les coordonnées des limites extérieures (rectangles de délimitation ou polygones) doivent généralement être utilisées avec des entités géographiques telles que des pays, des provinces, des États et des comtés pour identifier les coordonnées de l'entité. Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées en degrés/minutes/secondes, en degrés décimaux, en minutes décimales et/ou en secondes décimales. Les styles ne doivent pas être mélangés dans une même zone 034, mais la zone peut être répétée pour représenter les différents styles (voir ci-dessous pour les utilitaires de conversion); l'ordre des zones 034 lorsque les deux styles sont donnés n'a pas d'importance. Pour faciliter la réutilisation des coordonnées dans les applications géographiques, il faut employer le point et non la virgule comme signe décimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés/minutes/secondes''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux''' : enregistrement sous la forme hddd.dddddd (hémisphère-degrés.degrés décimaux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux avec plus et moins''' : enregistrer sous la forme +-ddd.dddddd (hémisphère[+/-]-degrés.décimaux) («&amp;amp;nbsp;+&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour N et E, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour S et W; le signe plus est facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple avec +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple sans le signe plus facultatif)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Minutes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmm.mmmm (hémisphère-degrés-minutes.minutes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Secondes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss.sss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes.secondes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons doivent généralement être enregistrées comme des points centraux plutôt que comme des limites extérieures. Pour la zone 034, la longitude et la latitude qui forment l'axe central sont enregistrées deux fois pour définir le point central (c'est-à-dire que les contenus des sous-zones $d et $e sont identiques et les contenus des sous-zones $f et $g sont identiques).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés/minutes/secondes)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux avec plus/moins)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Outils de conversion des coordonnées'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les institutions membres du PFAN sont encouragées à fournir des degrés/minutes/secondes et des degrés décimaux lorsqu'ils sont disponibles. De nombreux outils de conversion sont disponibles sur le Web pour dériver les uns des autres. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $2 a été définie pour l'enregistrement de la source des codes d'information sur les coordonnées - les sources couramment utilisées sont disponibles dans : [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CDC.html/view ''Codes sources pour les données cartographiques'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une citation de la source dans la zone 670 n'est pas nécessaire si la seule information provenant de la source est enregistrée dans la zone 034; une citation dans la zone 670 doit être faite si nécessaire pour enregistrer des informations en plus des coordonnées, telles que les variantes de nom, la hiérarchie, la période d'applicabilité, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#034_Donn.C3.A9es_math.C3.A9matiques_cod.C3.A9es_sur_les_documents_cartographiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 Numéro de contrôle de système =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#035_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_syst.C3.A8me |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Source du catalogage =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs doivent consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour les instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité nouvelles ou existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Langue de catalogage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $b fre ajoutée automatiquement par WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $d – Organisme responsable des modifications'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $d [code MARC 21] est ajoutée automatiquement par WMS lorsque la dernière sous-zone MARC $d dans la zone 040 n'est pas déjà celle de l'institution qui a modifié la notice. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $e – Règles de description'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on ajoute manuellement la sous-zone $e, ajouter la sous-zone après la sous-zone $b et avant la sous-zone $c. Il n'est pas nécessaire de déplacer la sous-zone $e à cette position si elle est déjà présente ailleurs dans le 040 ou si elle est ajoutée par une macro ou un gabarit. Lorsque la zone fixe 008/10 (Règles de catalogage descriptif) est changée pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Autre), la sous-zone $e rda est automatiquement ajoutée par le système.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#040_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Code d'authenticité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Cette zone se retrouve dans les notices d'autorité utilisées par BAC. Ne pas modifier ou supprimer cette zone lorsque le code CaOONL figure dans la 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les catalogueurs autres que ceux de BAC dérivent une notice à partir d'une notice de BAC contenant une zone 042, ils doivent s'assurer de supprimer cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les catalogueurs doivent ajouter la zone 042 $a nlc dans Canadiana chaque fois qu'ils créent, révisent ou dérivent une notice d'autorité. Ce code identifie le fichier «&amp;amp;nbsp;virtuel&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'autorité nationale canadienne qui est divisé en deux bases de données (LC/NAF et Canadiana).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-08]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#042_Code_d.27authenticit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Code de région géographique &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 043 peut seulement être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms géographiques (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone b – Code local de région géographique et Sous-zone $2 – Source du code local'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les lieux situés au Québec, les participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser la sous-zone $b pour enregistrer un code local tiré de la liste ci-dessous et représentant la région administrative du Québec où le lieu est situé. Ce code est formé du code de région géographique « n-cn--- » et d'un code local de sous-entité de deux lettres (p. ex., qa) qui identifie la région administrative et remplace les deux derniers caractères du code « n-cn--- » (p. ex. « n-cn-qa »). La sous-zone $b est enregistrée à la suite de la sous-zone $a et est suivie par la sous-zone $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Dates spéciales codées =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Lors de l'encodage de l'information sur la date, donner l'information la plus complète possible sur la date lorsque celle-ci est facilement disponible (la date dans la zone 046 peut être plus précise qu'une date utilisée dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2e_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Lors&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la révision des notices d'autorité existantes, enregistrer les dates dans la zone 046 même si le point d'accès lui-même n'a pas de dates dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d, lorsque l'information est facilement disponible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des dates dans la zone 046, utiliser la norme Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) dans tous les cas, sauf pour les siècles; fournir les dates en utilisant le modèle aaaa, aaaa-mm ou aaaa-mm-jj. Voir le tableau d'exemples dans l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Pour les spécifications complètes de l'EDTF, voir [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophoniste)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Blues around the clock, 1945 : $b étiquette (Johnny Hicks, saxophone ténor)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web Discogs, consulté le 27 mai 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; saxophoniste ténor qui a joué avec Tab Smith dans les années 1940)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de dates avant Jésus-Christ dans la zone 046, faire précéder les chiffres d'un trait d'union (signe moins). Comme il n'y a pas d'an zéro dans le calendrier de l'ère commune, il faut soustraire une année de la date réelle avant Jésus-Christ; par exemple, l'an 50 av. J.-C. est enregistré comme suit : -0049.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ##  $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement d'un siècle dans la zone 046, utiliser les deux premiers chiffres de l'intervalle de cent ans (par exemple, utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;16&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour représenter le 17&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle, 1600-1699).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Noter que le 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;er&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle apr. J.-C. est représenté par la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;00&amp;amp;nbsp;» et que les siècles av. J.-C. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sont précédés d'&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;un trait d'union &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(signe moins)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; avant les chiffres (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-04&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le 5&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle av. J.-C.). Un siècle approximatif (par exemple, activité environ 12&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle) ne peut pas être enregistré dans la zone 046.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Répétabilité'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;La zone 046 est répétable, mais les sous-zones de la zone 046 utilisées pour enregistrer les dates ne le sont pas. En général, une seule zone 046 avec des dates conformes à la norme EDTF devrait être suffisante. Cependant, les dates de siècles suivent la norme ISO 8601 et non la norme EDTF. Lors de l'enregistrement de dates de siècles en plus de dates plus précises, il faut donc répéter la zone 046.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates divergentes'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, les ressources consultées peuvent présenter des dates divergentes (par exemple, des dates de naissance ou de décès divergentes pour une personne ou des dates de début ou de fin divergentes pour une collectivité). Dans ces situations, la zone 046 doit refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'enregistrer toutes les dates divergentes en utilisant la zone 046, ni d'enregistrer une zone 046 pour chaque ressource consultée. L'évaluation des dates divergentes doit généralement avoir pour résultat une seule zone 046, contenant la ou les dates que le catalogueur juge les plus exactes pour représenter l'entité. Le catalogueur peut décider d'enregistrer ou non la ou les dates divergentes dans la zone 046 et il n'est pas nécessaire que la ou les dates enregistrées dans la zone 046 correspondent exactement à celle ou celles choisies pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;De même, toute date ajoutée au point d'accès autorisé devrait refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates, enregistrées conformément aux instructions de RDA et des énoncés de politique du PFAN. On peut considérer qu'une date qui prédomine dans les ressources consultées est la plus appropriée pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé. Si aucune date ne prédomine, le catalogueur peut décider d'utiliser le format «&amp;amp;nbsp;approximativement aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa?&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa ou aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans le point d'accès autorisé. Dans certains cas, des dates correspondant à la période d'activité de la personne (RDA 9.19.1.5) peuvent être préférables.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 157 av. J-C. comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce que c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 1907 comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Même exemple que ci-dessus illustrant une décision différente que le catalogueur aurait pu prendre concernant l'enregistrement de la sous-zone $f de la zone 046)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;La zone 046 étant basée sur des informations provenant de sources multiples, la justification ne peut être formulée avec précision dans une sous-zone $v/$u à la fin d'une zone 046. Les dates divergentes doivent être enregistrées dans des zones 670. Si une notice existante comporte une sous-zone $v/$u comme justification d'une zone 046 et que cette zone 046 est mise à jour comme décrit ci-dessus, il faut supprimer la sous-zone $v/$u et convertir la justification en une zone 670 si les dates divergentes ne sont pas déjà justifiées dans des zones 670 existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, il peut être nécessaire d'effectuer un calcul pour déterminer les dates à enregistrer dans la zone 046 et le point d'accès autorisé. De tels calculs peuvent produire des dates incertaines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Si les ressources consultées ne fournissent que la date de décès de la personne et son âge (en années) au moment du décès, comme cela se voit souvent dans les notices nécrologiques, l'année de naissance de la personne correspondra à l'une de deux années consécutives. Pour calculer ces années, il faut d'abord soustraire l'âge de l'année de décès, puis utiliser l'année ainsi obtenue et l'année précédente comme les deux possibilités pour l'année de naissance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a soustrait 75, l'âge au décès, de 1994, l'année du décès; l'année obtenue, 1919, et l'année qui la précède, 1918, représentent les deux années de naissance possibles)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si des dates non-grégoriennes figurent dans les ressources consultées, la conversion de ces dates en dates grégoriennes peut produire des dates incertaines. Il faut utiliser les dates du calendrier grégorien dans la zone 046 et dans le point d'accès autorisé. Il se peut qu'une même date dans un calendrier non-grégorien corresponde à l'une de deux dates grégoriennes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La date de 1346 dans le calendrier hégirien correspond à 1967 ou 1968 dans le calendrier grégorien.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de la norme de la date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter la sous-zone $2 edtf, sauf après un siècle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zones $q – Date de fondation, $r – Date de cessation,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Début de la période d'activité et $t – Fin de la période d'activité'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer les dates associées à un congrès, etc., ponctuel ou à une occurrence isolée dans une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] et [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), dans les sous-zones $s et $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer la date de fondation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) et la date de cessation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) d'une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]), si cette information est connue, dans les sous-zones $q et $r.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'utilisation des sous-zones $s et $t pour le début et la fin de la période d'activité dans les zones 368 et 370-376, voir les directives présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les instructions suivantes représentent la pratique du PFAN sur l'enregistrement des sources d'information dans les sous-zones $u et $v des zones où elles sont définies, et/ou dans la zone 670 :&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046$u$v&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Les zones 670 doivent être utilisées pour appuyer l'information utilisée comme une partie du point d'accès dans les zones 1XX et 4XX.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pour les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $v est facultatif si la même information/source est déjà citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;utiliser la sous-zone $v si l'information/source n'est pas citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $u est facultatif et celle-ci doit toujours être précédée de la sous-zone $v.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser une zone 670 si c'est nécessaire pour justifier l'information enregistrée dans d'autres zones pour lesquelles les sous-zones $u et $v ne sont pas définies ou sont définies différemment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des données dans la sous-zone $v (Source d'information) des zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381, suivre les mêmes principes de base pour la citation que ceux qui s'appliquent actuellement pour la zone 670, sous-zone $a (Citation de la source).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Fournir une information précise sur la citation (numéro de page, sous-page d'un site Web) dans la sous-zone $v si, selon le jugement du catalogueur, cette plus grande précision est nécessaire pour trouver l'information à l'intérieur de la source citée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information dans les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 est sous la même forme que celle trouvée dans la source, il n'est pas nécessaire de la citer. Si l'information enregistrée dans ces zones est sous une forme différente de celle dans la source, utiliser 670 $b (Information trouvée).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les sources matérielles :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information provient d'une source matérielle (par exemple, un livre imprimé, un support numérique amovible), la sous-zone $v doit contenir suffisamment d'information pour qu'un catalogueur puisse trouver la ressource citée dans un catalogue ou une base de données bibliographiques. Ceci peut généralement se limiter au titre propre et au nom de l'éditeur ou à la date. Si cette combinaison n'est pas unique, la citation du titre peut être précédée du nom du créateur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les ressources en ligne :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fournir suffisamment d'information pour permettre de trouver la ressource via un moteur de recherche. Inclure soit le titre et la date de publication (si c'est une ressource publiée formellement, tel un livre numérique), soit une description appropriée du document et la date d'accès (pour une ressource moins formelle). Facultativement, inclure la sous-zone $u.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-03]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Cote de la Library of Congress =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#050_Cote_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 Indice de la classification de la Library of Congress &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes pour enregistrer les indices de la classification LC des auteurs littéraires individuels, y compris les auteurs de littérature de jeunesse. Elle peut aussi être utilisée '''exceptionnellement''' dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes et de collectivités pour enregistrer les indices de biographie dans la fourchette ML410-429 de la classification LC lorsque le choix de l'indice ou du Cutter n'est pas évident. La zone 053 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il ne faut pas enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000 dans la zone 053. Pour l'utilisation des indices de la classe PS8000 dans les notices d'autorité de noms, voir la section [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]] de ce Guide. Une notice d'autorité pour un auteur littéraire canadien peut contenir à la fois une zone 053 et une zone 065.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Cote de Bibliothèque et Archives Canada =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#055_Cote_de_Biblioth.C3.A8que_et_Archives_Canada |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Autre indice de classification &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 065 sert à enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000. La zone 065 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $2 et une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [Code MARC de l’institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de l'indice'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour indiquer que l'indice provient de la classe PS8000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#065_Autre_indice_de_classification |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Cote de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#082_Cote_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Indice de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#083_Indice_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Cote de publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#086_Cote_de_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Indice de classification d'une publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#087_Indice_de_classification_d.27une_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Vedette – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participant au programme PFAN sont invités à consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour obtenir des instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité existantes ou nouvelles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer la ponctuation de fin de zone dans la zone 1XX à moins qu'elle ne fasse partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou qu'elle ne soit requise par les instructions de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Afin de minimiser l'impact de la maintenance de la base de données sur les notices bibliographiques associées et/ou les notices d'autorité associées, les catalogueurs sont priés de s'abstenir d'apporter des changements qui ne sont pas essentiels aux zones 1XX.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour le titre propre d'une monographie en plusieurs parties, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choix du titre propre d'une collection pour une monographie :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte plus d'une forme de mention de collection, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource porte une mention de collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture dans la même source, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte des pages de titre pour la collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2915.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Tenir compte de l'espacement et des changements dans la typographie au moment de déterminer où le titre de la collection commence et se termine. Consulter également [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Établissement d'un point d'accès pour une collection :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Déterminer le choix du point d'accès autorisé en fonction de l'instruction [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] et des énoncés de politique de BAC/BAnQ pour cette instruction.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclure du point d'accès autorisé les renseignements suivants inclus dans la mention de collection dans la notice bibliographique de la partie composante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'article initial dans les sous-zones $a, $t, $n et $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les compléments de titre;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;la mention de responsabilité;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les titres parallèles;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;les désignations numériques/chronologiques.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter un ou plusieurs qualificatifs entre parenthèses, le cas échéant, conformément aux énoncés de politique de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour obtenir des instructions sur la conversion d'une notice d'autorité de nom en notice d'autorité de collection, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Should an SAR be made?&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Vedette – Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour les familles'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;3&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une famille. Voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Les ajouts au nom sont contenus dans une seule paire de parenthèses séparées par des deux-points. &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Le terme pour le type de famille est ajouté après le nom et il est enregistré dans la sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $d (date) suit le terme pour le type de famille.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $c est utilisée pour un lieu associé à une famille et suit la date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $g est utilisée pour un membre illustre d'une famille. Donner le point d'accès autorisé pour la personne tel que trouvé dans la 1XX de la notice d'autorité de nom sans garder aucun codage de sous-zone interne.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour des personnes'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] fournit des directives sur l'emplacement des mots indiquant une relation (par exemple, Jr.) et le MARC définit la sous-zone $q comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme développée du nom de personne.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) La sous-zone $d (date) doit toujours être le dernier élément dans une zone 100 sauf si le terme (Esprit) est ajouté au nom. Ajouter $c (Esprit) comme dernier élément d'une zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) En général ajouter la sous-zone $c avant la sous-zone $q lorsqu'on ajoute aussi des mots, des chiffres, etc., indiquant une relation. (Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5.] pour le traitement des noms portugais)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MAIS&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
3) Pour les situations exceptionnelles, par exemple lorsque la sous-zone $a ne contient qu'un nom de famille ou qu'un prénom ou que le nom inclut un préfixe, etc., consulter le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#100_Vedette_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Contenu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 336 peut seulement être utilisée pour les notices d'autorité représentant des expressions. La zone 336 est toujours suivie d'une sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;rdacontent/fre&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser les termes fournis dans [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html RDA 6.9.1.3]. La liste des termes est également disponible dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Code du type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si on enregistre une sous-zone $b à la place ou en plus d'une sous-zone $a, utiliser les codes fournis dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''] du MARC 21.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#336_Contenu |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Autres attributs associés à des personnes ou des collectivités =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé pour les termes dans les sous-zones $a, $b et $c. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a, $b et $c. Lorsque les termes dans les sous-zones $a et $b ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer de professions ou d'occupations dans la sous-zone $c (Autre désignation). La profession ou l'occupation peut être enregistrée dans la zone 374.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les titres de royauté, de noblesse ou de rang ecclésiastique ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) dans la sous-zone $d dans la forme utilisée dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'une période et Sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#368_Autres_attributs_associ.C3.A9s_.C3.A0_des_personnes_ou_des_collectivit.C3.A9s |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Lieu associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de juridictions ou d'autres lieux, utiliser la forme trouvée dans Canadiana ou, à défaut, celle trouvée dans le RVM, en enregistrant la source dans la sous-zone $2. La forme du nom de lieu utilisée dans la zone 370 peut différer de la forme du nom de lieu ajoutée à un nom privilégié de lieu ou à un point d'accès construit selon les instructions de RDA ou des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie du nom d'une localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut une autre désignation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de lieu)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié du lieu plus vaste)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom de lieu ajouté à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Autre nom de lieu dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité pour le lieu n'existe pas dans Canadiana ni dans le RVM, il n'est pas nécessaire d'en créer une pour enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370. Enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370 selon les instructions de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ, en consultant les sources appropriées et en ajoutant des éléments additionnels (par exemple, le type de juridiction) afin d'éviter les conflits. Ne pas ajouter de sous-zone $2 si aucune notice d'autorité n'a été créée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom du lieu associé a changé, le nom du lieu qui s'appliquait à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré à la place ou en plus de la forme actuelle du nom. Il n'est pas nécessaire de suivre les politiques d'indexation et d'utiliser uniquement la forme la plus récente du nom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemples :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne née dans la ville de Salisbury avant que son nom ne devienne Harare; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme de nom qui s'appliquait au moment de la naissance de la personne)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne résidant dans la ville de Milan pendant la Renaissance, avant la formation du pays moderne de l'Italie; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme actuelle du nom pour le pays)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de lieux qui ne sont pas des juridictions, préférer les noms provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM et identifier la source dans la sous-zone $2. Si le nom ne provient pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, l'enregistrer dans la zone 370 sans ajouter de sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zone $c – Pays associé&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;En général, ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $c pour enregistrer les lieux qui ne sont pas des entités souveraines. Ces lieux peuvent être enregistrés dans la sous-zone $f ou dans d'autres sous-zones selon le cas.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La Martinique est un département français d'outre-mer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, si une entité souveraine comporte (ou comportait auparavant) un ou plusieurs pays constitutifs, n'importe lequel des pays constitutifs associés à la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré dans la sous-zone $c en plus ou à la place de l'entité souveraine plus vaste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à la Grande-Bretagne qui a des liens étroits avec le Pays de Galles; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Union soviétique, en particulier au Kirghizistan; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à Aruba, un pays constitutif des Pays-Bas; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer les Pays-Bas)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Inde avant son indépendance de la Grande-Bretagne; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer la Grande-Bretagne)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms d'entités des Premières Nations au Canada ainsi que les tribus indiennes («&amp;amp;nbsp;Indian tribes&amp;amp;nbsp;») reconnues par le gouvernement des États-Unis comme des entités juridiques peuvent être incluses dans la sous-zone $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Enregistrer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre dans la zone 370, sauf s'il s'agit simplement d'un lieu de publication ou d'un autre lieu associé à une manifestation (auquel cas utiliser la zone 643, le cas échéant). Bien que le «&amp;amp;nbsp;lieu d'origine&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'une œuvre en série puisse être le même que le lieu de publication de l'œuvre pour laquelle la notice d'autorité de collection (ou la notice bibliographique de publication en série) a été créée, faire preuve de jugement pour distinguer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre d'un lieu de publication qui n'est pas réellement lié à l'œuvre elle-même.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Adresse =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Selon le jugement du catalogueur, fournir une adresse si les informations sont facilement disponibles et n'ont pas déjà été enregistrées dans la sous-zone $e (Lieu de résidence, de sièges sociaux) de la zone 370.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Dans les cas où la sous-zone $a n'est pas enregistrée, inclure au minimum la sous-zone $m (Adresse de courriel) ou la sous-zone $b (Ville). &lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas enregistrer les adresses physiques &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou courriels&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; des personnes vivantes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les informations reliées à l'adresse lors de la mise à jour d'une notice contenant une adresse.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer plusieurs adresses, avec ou sans plages de dates, dans des zones 371 distinctes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Adresse de courriel'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $m doit contenir uniquement une adresse de courriel. Ne pas ajouter d'adresse Internet pour la 1XX dans cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#371_Adresse |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Domaine d'activité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée pour le domaine d'activité, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une entité provenant de Canadiana est utilisée comme domaine d'activité, enlever tout codage de sous-zone qui n'est pas autorisé dans la zone 372.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Domaine d'activité dans la 372 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel que la plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Zones 372 avec un terme provenant du RVM et un terme de vocabulaire non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'un période et la sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Groupe associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le fichier d'autorité Canadiana ou le fichier LC/NAF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Dans la zone 373, le codage de sous-zone n'est pas employé pour les collectivités subordonnées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom d'un groupe associé a changé, enregistrer le ou les noms du groupe qui s'appliquaient à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates). Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec des sous-zones $2 et des dates :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec différentes sources de vocabulaires :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $ s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $ t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : même si le format MARC ne spécifie pas de forme de date dans ces sous-zones, la pratique suivante est recommandée par souci de cohérence. Enregistrer les dates selon le calendrier grégorien dans le format AAAA. Si une date plus précise est nécessaire, considérer la possibilité de l'enregistrer dans une autre zone (par exemple, 670, 678). Il n'est pas nécessaire de reformuler les dates déjà inscrites dans les notices d'autorité pour se conformer à cette pratique. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Profession =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;6.1.3 pour des instructions sur l'enregistrement de la profession ou de l'occupation comme élément. Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.19.1.6 pour des instructions sur l'utilisation d'un terme indiquant la profession ou l'occupation dans un point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : répéter la zone si nécessaire pour plus de clarté.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du terme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les codes enregistrés dans la sous-zone $2 de la zone 374 peuvent provenir soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-TIO.html/view ''Codes sources pour les termes de profession''], soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-VM-C.html/view ''Codes sources pour les vedettes-matière et termes d'indexation''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#374_Profession |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Sexe de la personne =&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Ne pas utiliser cette zone dans les nouvelles notices d'autorité. Lorsqu'une notice existante doit être modifiée pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer toute occurrence de la zone 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Renseignements sur la famille =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Personnalité importante de la famille'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement du nom d'un membre illustre d'une famille dans la sous-zone $b, utiliser la forme du nom de la personne telle que mentionnée dans la sous-zone $g de la zone 100 dans la notice d'autorité pour la famille. Les codages internes de sous-zones ne doivent pas être inclus dans la sous-zone $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Langue associée =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier les codes de langues plutôt que des termes, en utilisant la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21. La sous-zone $l (Nom de la langue) doit être utilisée uniquement pour fournir des informations non disponibles dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/LNG-C.html ''Liste des codes de langue''] du MARC 21. Enregistrer plusieurs codes de langue seulement si la personne ou la collectivité fait usage de plusieurs langages dans ses publications, communications, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;À titre facultatif, enregistrer un ou plusieurs codes de langue ISO 639-3 dans une zone 377 supplémentaire. Cette pratique est particulièrement recommandée lorsqu’un code ISO 639-3 permet d’identifier une langue plus précisément que le code MARC. Pour plus d’informations, voir les [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $2 n'est pas requise lorsque la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 est utilisée pour représenter la langue (le deuxième indicateur «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» mentionne déjà la source). Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent utiliser une autre source de codes de langue peuvent ajouter une zone 377 supplémentaire en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur et en mentionnant la source utilisée dans la sous-zone $2 . Cette source doit cependant provenir d'une des sources fournies dans la liste intitulée [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CTL.html ''Codes sources pour les codes et termes de langue''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Code ISO 639-3 pour la langue Achi : acr. Code pour cette même langue, laquelle fait partie des langues maya, dans la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 : myn)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Forme développée du nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer la forme développée du nom dans la zone 378 lorsque l'information est facilement disponible, même si l'information est déjà présente dans la zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#378_Forme_d.C3.A9velopp.C3.A9e_du_nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Genre de l'œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM ou le RVMGF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'enregistrement du genre de l'œuvre comme élément dans les notices d'autorité de collections représentant des œuvres (et non des expressions), voir l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.3.1.3.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#380_Genre_de_l.27.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Autres caractéristiques distinctes d'une œuvre ou d'une expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée pour enregistrer les éléments RDA Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) et Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Les autres caractéristiques distinctives des expressions qui sont spécifiques aux œuvres musicales (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4–6.18.1.6]) peuvent être aussi enregistrées dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Numéro de Franklin enregistré comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version enregistrée comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut être approprié que certains des termes enregistrés pour une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression soient enregistrés dans la zone 381 ou dans une autre zone MARC pour laquelle il n'y a pas d'élément RDA correspondant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, une collectivité (tel un éditeur) utilisée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ou d'une œuvre peut être enregistrée soit dans la zone 373 (Groupe associé), soit dans la zone 381, soit dans les deux zones. ''Note :'' Le codage de sous-zone pour les collectivités subordonnées n'est pas utilisé dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme groupe associé et comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA n'a pas d'élément particulier pour les lieux associés aux expressions, mais la zone 370 sous-zone $f (Autre lieu associé) et la sous-zone $g (Lieu d'origine de l'œuvre ou de l'expression) peuvent être utilisées dans les notices d'autorité pour les expressions. Dans certains cas, des lieux associés aux œuvres ou aux expressions sont considérés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression selon RDA et peuvent être enregistrés dans la zone 370, dans la zone 381 ou dans les deux zones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Lieux utilisés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre juridique; enregistrés dans les zones 370 et 381)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'élément RDA lieu d'origine d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.5]) dans une zone 370 (voir la section [[#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]] de ce Guide).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression a été utilisée dans un point d'accès autorisé et est aussi enregistrée comme élément dans une zone 3XX, utiliser la zone 381 pour enregistrer une autre caractéristique distinctive. À titre facultatif, enregistrer aussi la même information dans une autre zone 3XX appropriée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#381_Autres_caract.C3.A9ristiques_distinctes_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_ou_d.27une_expression |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en utilisant les termes du thésaurus ''Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM'' (RVMMEM). Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en appliquant les instructions de RDA ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6]) et les ÉP de BAC-BAnQ associés. ''Note :'' La zone 382 peut également être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité d'expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :''' Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère. Si c'est jugé important pour l'identification et l'accès, ajouter une zone 382 additionnelle qui ne répond pas aux présentes lignes directrices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-04-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#382_Distribution_d.27.C3.A9x.C3.A9cution_d.27une_.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numéro d'identification d'une œuvre &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou d'une expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; musicale =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible. Créer des zones 383 distinctes pour les différents systèmes de numérotation associés à une même œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#383_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27identification_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Tonalité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible pour les œuvres. En cas de doute, ne pas enregistrer. Ne pas enregistrer pour les expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Caractéristiques du public cible =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer le public cible d'une œuvre ou d'une expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices  du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a : Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Termes provenant de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé et terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-07-17]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Caractéristiques du créateur ou du collaborateur &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer les caractéristiques démographiques d'un ou plusieurs créateurs ou contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression, notamment pour enregistrer les caractéristiques communes à un groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression. Cette zone sera généralement utilisée dans des notices d'autorité établies pour des agrégats par regroupement matérialisant deux ou plusieurs expressions de deux ou plusieurs œuvres indépendantes créées par des agents différents, ainsi que pour les œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre (par exemple, les œuvres d'auteurs inconnus ou les collections de monographies). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Personnes âgées $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Terme démographique non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bien que cette zone soit principalement utilisée pour des œuvres agrégées et pour des œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre, il existe des situations où il est également approprié de l'utiliser pour une œuvre individuelle d'un ou plusieurs créateurs nommés. Par exemple, pour une œuvre musicale composée pendant l'enfance ou l'adolescence d'un créateur, il ne serait pas approprié d'enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;Enfants&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Adolescents&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme caractéristiques dans la notice d'autorité du compositeur. Au lieu de cela, les caractéristiques démographiques applicables uniquement à certaines des œuvres d'un créateur doivent être enregistrées dans les notices d'autorité établies pour ces œuvres.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Œuvre composée en 2003-2005, achevée lorsque le compositeur avait 14 ans)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Termes issus de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;''(Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau; terme non contrôlé et termes provenant du même vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $i – Information sur la relation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il est possible d'utiliser la sous-zone $i pour enregistrer un terme désignant la nature de la relation entre les groupes démographiques enregistrés dans la zone et l'œuvre ou l'expression. Préférer un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que les termes de relation du format MARC ou les indicateurs de relation RDA. Mettre une majuscule à la première lettre du terme de relation et utiliser la forme au singulier. Faire suivre le terme de relation par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998-February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer plusieurs occurrences de la sous-zone $i dans une même occurrence de la zone 386. Si plusieurs termes de relation s'appliquent à un seul groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs (par exemple, une œuvre réunissant des auteurs et des artistes du même groupe démographique ou une expression dont les éditeurs et les traducteurs appartiennent au même groupe démographique), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Compilation d'œuvres d'auteurs et d'artistes du Massachusetts)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différents termes de relation s'appliquent à différents créateurs et contributeurs (par exemple, si les auteurs font partie d'un groupe démographique et les artistes d'un autre), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents. Si le même terme de relation s'applique à plus d'un groupe démographique, répéter la sous-zone $a dans une même zone ou répéter la zone. Pour plus de clarté, en cas de doute, répéter la zone 386 autant que nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Partition comprenant des œuvres de Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler et Strauss, ainsi que les paroles imprimées sous forme de texte, en allemand et en traduction anglaise)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-12]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Période associée à la création =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine d'une œuvre ou d'une expression. Le nom de la période peut préciser ou sous-entendre un lieu pour lequel la période de temps est pertinente. Il peut aussi préciser le nom d'un événement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM ou le RVMFAST. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les compilations, la zone peut être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine des œuvres/expressions contenues dans la compilation, considérées collectivement (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur). Elle peut également être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine de la compilation elle-même (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;2&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour un recueil de poésie de la Renaissance compilé au XIXe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 388 peut être utilisée en conjonction avec ou à la place de la zone 046. Lorsque la ou les dates précises de création ou d'origine ne sont pas connues ou qu'elles s'étendent sur une longue période, il peut être utile d'enregistrer des termes chronologiques textuels dans la zone 388.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour une œuvre anonyme du XIVe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si la valeur de l'indicateur diffère, répéter la zone. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom avec zones 388 contenant des termes provenant de différents vocabulaires)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour une autre raison, supprimer tout signe de ponctuation à la fin d'une zone 4XX sauf s'il fait partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou est requis par les règles de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'est pas nécessaire de justifier tous les renvois 4XX; voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès|Justification des variantes de point d'accès]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 670 de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas faire un renvoi 4XX qui se normalise sous la même forme qu'une autre zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité ou une zone 1XX dans toute autre notice d'autorité de nom. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;NACO normalization&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratiques à privilégier pour le catalogage selon RDA :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Enregistrer les variantes trouvées dans la manifestation cataloguée :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Utiliser le jugement du catalogueur;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Il n'y a pas de limite quant au nombre ou à la forme des renvois;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Au lieu ou en plus d'ajouter des variantes, envisager de fournir un accès en ajoutant des zones 37X.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Exemple montrant une zone 378 sans une variante pour la forme développée du nom :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Établir des notices d'autorité de noms supplémentaires pour les points d'accès autorisés nécessaires pour soutenir les éléments utilisés dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX (par exemple, la collectivité supérieure associée à la collectivité subordonnée qui doit être établie).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, fournir une variante de point d'accès 4XX pour un ancien point d'accès autorisé 1XX, sauf si l'ancien point d'accès autorisé est manifestement incorrect. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#4XX$w|Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour plus d'information.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Utiliser la forme établie des composantes dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX, à l'exception des variantes en écriture non latine, qui peuvent présenter un mélange d'écritures ou être entièrement dans une écriture non latine.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, ne pas supprimer des variantes sauf si elles sont manifestement incorrectes (par exemple, une variante en écriture non latine qui ne représente pas la même personne).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si une forme trouvée dans la manifestation cataloguée inclut une variante de forme d'une composante d'une variante de point d'accès en 4XX, cette forme peut être utilisée dans son intégralité comme une variante de point d'accès supplémentaire en 4XX, à condition que des sous-zones ne soient pas utilisées pour diviser ses parties constitutives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on change la forme d'une collectivité hiérarchiquement supérieure, d'un nom géographique ou d'un nom de personne dans une 1XX, mettre à jour toutes les notices d'autorité existantes qui utilisent cette composante dans une zone 4XX, sauf si la 4XX représente l'ancien point d'accès autorisé (par exemple, $w/2=e). Exception : Ne pas appliquer cette instruction dans le cas des notices d'autorité migrées qui n'ont pas été réévaluées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est modifié parce que la personne a changé de nom, enregistrer l'ancienne forme du nom dans une zone 400 avec $w nne si la variante est valide selon les instructions de RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après l'élection comme pape)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est mis à jour pour fermer la date, il est recommandé d'enregistrer l'ancienne forme avec la date ouverte dans une zone 4XX avec $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) basé sur le catalogage CIP est modifié parce que sa forme sur la ressource publiée est différente de celle sur la demande CIP, une zone 4XX pour l'ancienne forme du point d'accès autorisé avec la sous-zone $w nne peut être ajoutée sauf si l'ancienne forme 1XX est manifestement incorrecte (par exemple, la date de naissance de l'auteur a été donnée comme étant 1775 au lieu de 1975 dans la demande CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) est modifié en raison d'un changement dans les instructions de catalogage, enregistrer l'ancienne forme dans une zone 4XX en utilisant $w. Si la variante de forme est un renvoi valide selon les instructions actuelles de RDA, utiliser $w nne. Si la variante de forme n'est pas un renvoi valide selon les instructions RDA actuelles, utiliser $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante n'est pas valide selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nne&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante est valide selon RDA; le changement de la forme en 100 est basé sur l'utilisation du nom et les dates de naissance et de mort ont été ajoutées parce que la 100 a été changée)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429 av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que l'abréviation «&amp;amp;nbsp;ca&amp;amp;nbsp;» n'est pas valide pour une période d'activité selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé est corrigé parce que des dates ont été enregistrées de manière inexacte ou qu'un catalogueur a introduit une faute de frappe dans le point d'accès autorisé, ne pas faire de renvoi à la forme incorrecte. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche des notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel des collections et la création et la tenue à jour des notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des variantes de point d'accès peuvent être enregistrées dans toute notice d'autorité de collection, y compris celles pour des phrases analogues à des collections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si les volumes d'une monographie en plusieurs parties portent des formes différentes du titre commun, faire un renvoi 4XX plutôt qu'un renvoi 5XX pour la forme de titre non choisie comme titre propre de la monographie en plusieurs parties.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w. Lorsqu'on utilise les indicateurs de relation RDA dans les zones 5XX, utiliser les termes des annexes I, J ou K; mettre une majuscule au premier terme et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour de l'information sur l'utilisation des indicateurs de relation et/ou les codes $w dans une zone 5XX spécifique, voir la section de ce Guide concernant cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les conventions du format autorités en ce qui concerne l'utilisation de la sous-zone $w. Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $w sauf si une valeur autre que «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» est appropriée dans l'une des positions. Lorsqu'on utilise la sous-zone $w, enregistrer la sous-zone comme première sous-zone de la zone. Fournir les positions de caractères qui précèdent la valeur mais pas celles qui lui succèdent, par exemple,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé antérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé ultérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = pour indiquer qu'une sous-zone $i ou une sous-zone $2 est utilisée pour donner de l'information sur la relation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = pour indiquer un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour des pseudonymes multiples (la notice comprend aussi une zone 663)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» (5XX) ne doit pas se normaliser sous la même forme qu'un autre renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la même notice d'autorité, sauf si les deux zones 5XX contiennent un indicateur de relation dans la sous-zone $i et que les textes des indicateurs de relation sont différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre un nom de personne et 1) le nom d'une autre personne, d'une famille ou d'une collectivité ou 2) le point d'accès autorisé pour une œuvre ou une expression. Cette technique peut également être utilisée pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres et des expressions et contenant des noms de personnes. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe I, J ou K dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on enregistre des relations entre noms de personnes impliquant des pseudonymes et que seulement deux notices d'autorité sont en cause, les catalogueurs peuvent soit 1) utiliser la sous-zone $i et le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w ou 2) utiliser des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» simples. Pour plus d'information sur ces techniques et des instructions sur l'enregistrement de pseudonymes multiples (c'est-à-dire ceux qui requièrent une zone 663), voir la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rappel aux catalogueurs : Lorsqu'une variante de nom (400) et un point d'accès autorisé (100) sont en conflit, il faut faire un ajout à la zone 400 ou à la zone 100 pour résoudre le conflit (par exemple, une forme développée du nom, une date d'activité, etc.); la pratique antérieure consistant à changer la zone 400 en 500 pour résoudre le conflit n'est plus une option. Lorsque les catalogueurs trouvent une variante de forme dans une zone 500 au cours de la mise à jour d'une notice d'autorité de nom, ils doivent résoudre le conflit et modifier la zone en 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de collectivité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de réunion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8] pour des directives sur les relations entre les notices d'autorité pour des séries de conférences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Titre uniforme =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés pour des œuvres ou des expressions. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe J dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $i avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w tant que les indicateurs de relation pour les lieux ne seront pas développés. (RDA a prévu un espace pour l'annexe L.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Traitement de collection – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 640 Dates de publication et/ou indication séquentielle de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#640_Dates_de_publication_et.2Fou_indication_s.C3.A9quentielle_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Exemple de numérotation de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#642_Exemple_de_num.C3.A9rotation_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Lieu et éditeur de la collection/organisme de publication =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#643_Lieu_et_.C3.A9diteur_de_la_collection.2Forganisme_de_publication |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Usage en matière d'analyse de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#644_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_d.27analyse_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Usage en matière de rappel de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#645_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_rappel_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Usage en matière de classification de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#646_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_classification_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Renvoi complexe «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 663 comprend le texte explicatif et les points d'accès autorisés pour les relations entre une zone 100 (nom établi) et d'autres zones 100 (noms établis) qui ne peuvent pas être correctement exprimées par un ou plusieurs renvois simples générés à partir de zones 500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Généralement, cette situation se produit lorsqu'une personne utilise plus de deux identités, lorsque plus d'une personne partage une identité avec une ou plusieurs autres personnes, ou lorsque plusieurs personnes utilisent le même pseudonyme indépendamment les unes des autres ou en raison d'un autre arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le texte de la zone 663 peut être adapté pour répondre à des situations exceptionnelles; toutefois, il faut garder le texte aussi simple que possible et laisser les zones et le codage MARC communiquer l'information souhaitée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la technique de la zone 663 pour établir des relations entre collectivités ou entre personnes et collectivités.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Seulement deux identités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque seulement deux notices d'autorité de noms sont créées pour une personne, les notices d'autorité de noms sont généralement reliées par des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500, sans aucune zone 663. Toutefois, lorsque l'une des notices d'autorité de noms est établie pour un pseudonyme commun ou un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment les unes des autres, la technique de la zone 663 est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Plus de deux identités - point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» et renvois ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plus de deux points d'accès autorisés sont créés pour la même personne, identifier un point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» en utilisant la technique de la zone 663. Cette décision est fondée sur le désir de simplifier la structure de renvois et d'aider les catalogueurs à déterminer le nom à utiliser comme sujet des œuvres biographiques ou critiques. Le point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» doit être déterminé par la forme de nom qui prédomine dans l'usage ou, en l'absence de preuves suffisantes, en choisissant le nom réel de la personne comme forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Dans la notice d'autorité pour la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», ajouter des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour tous les autres noms utilisés. Justifier les renvois en 500 par des zones 670 selon la pratique normale. Fournir une zone 663 énumérant tous les autres noms avec le texte suivant (celui-ci peut être modifié pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom] $b [forme établie du nom]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans chacune des autres notices d'autorité de noms, ajouter un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», en justifiant ce renvoi par une zone 670, selon la pratique normale. D'autres noms peuvent être mentionnés dans le 670 s'il est pratique de le faire. Fournir une zone 663 avec le texte suivant ou un texte similaire (le texte peut être ajusté pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom choisie comme vedette de base]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque l'auteur utilise un autre nouveau nom, créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour ce nom et l'ajouter à la structure de renvois ainsi qu'à la liste de la zone 663 dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;». Les renvois au nouveau nom dans les zones 500 et 663 sont ajoutés seulement dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes conjoints ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un pseudonyme conjoint est une identité utilisée par deux ou plusieurs personnes travaillant en collaboration. Si une personne utilise un pseudonyme conjoint et un autre nom (tel que trouvé dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes utilisés par plusieurs personnes ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment l'une de l'autre utilisent le même pseudonyme et un ou plusieurs autres noms (tels que trouvés dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisée par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(L'auteur a un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes et des pseudonymes individuels)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Note générale non destinée au public =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Donner des informations de valeur permanente et d'intérêt général qui seraient également utiles aux autres institutions du PFAN ou à celles qui n'y participent pas. Une liste représentative des notes est donnée ci-dessous. En général, le libellé est recommandé, mais n'est pas prescriptif, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions. Les zones 667 distinctes peuvent être données dans n'importe quel ordre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [raison de l'encodage].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date de la mise à jour].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Utilisée pour les changements de langue officielle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Annexe_2_:_Projets_sp.C3.A9ciaux|Annexe 2]] de ce Guide pour des informations et des instructions sur les zones 667 ajoutées aux notices d'autorité dans le cadre d'un projet spécial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes dont certaines identités ne sont pas établies ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une personne utilise deux ou plusieurs identités dans les manifestations, des notices d'autorité de noms peuvent être créées pour chaque identité. Dans un souci d'efficacité, les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser une zone 667 pour énumérer les pseudonymes non trouvés dans les publications au lieu de créer des notices d'autorité de noms pour ces pseudonymes inutilisés. Dans ce cas, énumérer les pseudonymes inutilisés dans une zone 667 après l'expression : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette note peut aussi être ajoutée dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne qui a plusieurs notices d'autorité de noms pour plusieurs identités lorsque certains des pseudonymes ne sont pas trouvés dans des publications. Dans ce cas, énumérer seulement les pseudonymes inutilisés dans la zone 667 et suivre les instructions appropriées pour les autres pseudonymes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, […] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la section [[#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom|663]] de ce Guide ainsi que dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les séries de congrès, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter une zone 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour une série de congrès lorsqu'il y a des notices d'autorité autant pour la série que pour les occurrences isolées du congrès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appliquer ces instructions lors de la création de nouvelles notices d'autorité de noms et lors de la révision de notices d'autorité de noms existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Ajouter des notes indiquant l'utilisation en indexation lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé n'est pas approprié pour utilisation comme vedette-matière dans ces situations :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Chefs d'État, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette instruction s'applique aux notices d'autorité de noms pour les collectivités représentant la fonction lorsque le nom du titulaire est inclus comme partie du point d'accès autorisé de la collectivité. Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Dignitaires gouvernementaux)] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html 11.2.2.26 (Dignitaires religieux)] pour les instructions sur les collectivités. Utiliser cette note 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour la collectivité pour indiquer l'utilisation en indexation :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [vedette du nom de la personne].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi les sections [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Changements linéaires entre noms antérieurs et ultérieurs d'une juridiction'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La politique d'indexation du RVM est d'employer comme point d'accès matière ou comme subdivision géographique uniquement le dernier nom d'une juridiction politique qui a eu un ou plusieurs noms antérieurs, aussi longtemps que l'identité territoriale demeure essentiellement la même (voir ''Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval'', 5.14.3.1). Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom ayant un point d'accès autorisé antérieur/ultérieur pour un lieu dans cette situation, les catalogueurs doivent ajouter une note 667 sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom antérieur du lieu et modifier les zones 008 appropriés (008/11 et 008/15).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Notices d'autorité de personnes fictives'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les points d'accès autorisés pour les personnes fictives ne doivent pas être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, la zone 008/11 doit être codée avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» et la zone 008/15 doit être codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;». Selon l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 9.0, lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, ajouter cette zone 667 pour indiquer l'utilisation comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une partie d'une ville, en indiquant qu'il n'est pas approprié de l'utiliser comme une subdivision géographique :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) Notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les points d'accès autorisés pour les noms de familles peuvent être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Pour les notices d'autorité de noms de familles qui reflètent la pratique antérieure (qui interdisait de les utiliser comme vedettes-matière), mettre à jour les notices pour attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et supprimer la note sur l’utilisation comme vedette-matière suivante :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes pour les renvois en écriture non latine ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans une notice d'autorité qui comprend une variante de point d'accès dans une écriture non latine, utiliser la zone 667 avec une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.&amp;amp;nbsp;» S'il y a plusieurs variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, utiliser une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» à la zone 008/29 pour indiquer que la variante de point d'accès n'a pas été évaluée. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Doublons&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Doublons ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice à conserver&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Source des données =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone a pour but d'enregistrer des informations sur le nom ou le titre représenté dans la zone 1XX. Elle comprend des renseignements qui contribuent à l'identification de l'entité et qui justifient le choix du nom ou du titre de même que tout élément supplémentaire utilisé pour construire le point d'accès autorisé (1XX). Les informations consignées justifient également, le cas échéant, des variantes de forme du nom ou du titre (4XX), d'autres éléments d'identification (046, 3XX et 678), et clarifient les relations entre la 1XX et les autres entités représentées dans le fichier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Fonctions de la zone 670 :'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations, provenant de sources (par exemple, livres, appels téléphoniques, sites Web), à l'appui du choix et de la forme du point d'accès autorisé, des variantes de point d'accès et d'autres éléments d'identification&lt;br /&gt;
* Stocker des informations qui pourront être utilisées pour résoudre un conflit par la suite&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations sur les relations entre entités (par exemple, une personne est l'auteur d'une œuvre, une collectivité a été absorbée par une autre collectivité)&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier une personne qui a produit des œuvres dans différents domaines ou sous des formes diverses&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier des personnes différentes dont les points d'accès doivent rester identiques pour le moment (c'est-à-dire des noms de personnes indifférenciés)&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour préciser si les différentes formes d'un nom ou d'un titre sont de simples variations ou reflètent un changement de nom ou de titre&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer les recherches requises par les lignes directrices actuelles&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour faciliter la maintenance des fichiers d'autorité et bibliographiques étant donné que les informations dans les zones 670 aident à la prise de décisions concernant les points d'accès autorisés en double et les attributions erronées&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour soutenir les manipulations informatiques basées sur des algorithmes utilisant les informations du 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, la première zone 670 cite la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est établie, c'est-à-dire la ressource en cours de catalogage. Si la ressource en cours de catalogage ou de consultation ne fournit aucune information justifiant le point d'accès autorisé, les variantes de point d'accès ou les autres éléments enregistrés dans la notice d'autorité, voir la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur la façon de citer la ressource dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les zones 670 suivantes dans n'importe quel ordre, en ajoutant les nouvelles zones après celles qui existent déjà. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 670 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670, préférer les sources objectives et faisant autorité (par exemple, une encyclopédie) et les sources qui fournissent des informations de première main (par exemple, un blogue d'auteur). Utiliser des sources qui fournissent des informations supplémentaires plutôt que celles qui répètent des informations déjà présentes dans les autres zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Pratiques à privilégier pour les zones 670 : '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans la sous-zone $b, résumer et modifier les informations trouvées, selon les besoins, pour éviter les informations superflues ou répétitives.&lt;br /&gt;
* Éviter de citer des informations subjectives ou des informations dont la valeur est douteuse pour identifier une entité dans un contexte bibliographique.&lt;br /&gt;
* Faire preuve de prudence lors de l'enregistrement d'informations sur des personnes vivantes lorsque ces informations sont susceptibles d'être de nature privée ou controversée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité existantes peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices. Par exemple, dans les zones 670 des notices d'autorité plus anciennes, la sous-zone $b contenant des informations justificatives pourrait être absente. Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité qui faisaient partie d'un projet spécial peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices et/ou peuvent contenir des informations qui semblent inhabituelles ou incorrectes.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Les exemples donnés tout au long du texte suivant présentent diverses conventions en ce qui concerne la ponctuation et le style. Ces conventions ne sont pas prescriptives et doivent être considérées comme des pratiques à privilégier pour faciliter l'échange d'informations dans le contexte d'une base de données partagée. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs fassent preuve de jugement et de bon sens. La ponctuation et le style ne doivent pas nécessairement être cohérents d'une notice à l'autre tant que l'information est claire et précise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format des zones 670 ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
À l'exception de l'eszett (ß ou ſʒ) et du symbole euro (€), tous les caractères figurant dans le [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/M9230.html tableau des codes MARC] peuvent être utilisés dans les notices d'autorité ajoutées au fichier d'autorité Canadiana (voir le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). Lorsque des données provenant d'un site Web sont copiées/collées dans une zone 670, vérifier que tous les caractères peuvent être utilisés dans la notice. Certains caractères non valides ressemblent à ceux qui sont valides. Par exemple, le tiret (–) non valide ressemble au trait d'union (-) valide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une substitution pour un symbole non reproductible est indiquée entre parenthèses (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.5]), une explication de cette interpolation peut également être fournie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les données doivent être fournies sous forme romanisée. Normalement, il est entendu que le catalogueur a fourni la romanisation; par conséquent, lors de la transcription de données trouvées dans la source sous forme romanisée, ajouter après celle-ci l'expression entre crochets ['''forme romanisée''']. Dans des langues telles que l'arabe et l'hébreu, où les voyelles sont généralement omises dans l'orthographe des textes, le catalogueur fournit les voyelles manquantes lors de la transcription des données. Lors de la transcription de texte qui inclut les voyelles, ajouter après entre parenthèses ['''vocalisé'''] ou ['''en partie vocalisé'''] selon le cas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un catalogueur choisit de fournir des variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, les 670 $b doivent contenir aussi bien la transcription du ou des textes en écriture non latine trouvés dans la source que la ou les formes systématiquement romanisées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les notices d'autorité sont créées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, il est possible que de l'information supplémentaire soit incluse. Ces données peuvent également être formatées d'une manière différente de celle indiquée dans le présent document. En général, ces données doivent être conservées telles qu'elles sont générées afin de maintenir la rentabilité de ce processus, à moins que les données ne prêtent à confusion ou ne provoquent des erreurs de validation. Les noms et les titres pour lesquels les notices d'autorité sont créées constituent l'exception à cette règle. Suivre les instructions de ces sections pour enregistrer ces données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Citation de la source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Le titre propre de la ressource citée, suffisamment complet pour permettre une identification ultérieure dans un catalogue en ligne. Des abréviations et des points de suspension peuvent être utilisés. Faire précéder un titre générique ou non distinctif du nom du créateur par lequel commencerait le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre. Si le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre est le même que le titre propre plus un qualificatif, il peut être fourni à la place du titre propre pour éviter toute ambiguïté. Lorsque des informations sont fournies dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 pour justifier un point d'accès autorisé ou une variante de point d'accès, suivre les instructions supplémentaires sous Enregistrement des noms et des titres. &lt;br /&gt;
# La date de publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Monographies en plusieurs parties. S'il s'agit de la première partie, indiquer la date de publication sous forme de date ouverte.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Publications en série autres que les collections de monographies. En général, utiliser une désignation chronologique au lieu d'une date de publication. S'il n'y a pas de désignation chronologique, utiliser la désignation numérique et la date de publication. Le cas échéant, indiquer à la suite de la désignation qu'un «&amp;amp;nbsp;substitut&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été utilisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:15px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ressources intégratrices. Appliquer les instructions de [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] pour la source du titre propre d'un site Web. Identifier l'itération à partir de laquelle les informations ont été prises (par exemple «&amp;amp;nbsp;consulté(e) le&amp;amp;nbsp;» suivi d'une date pour un site Web mis à jour de façon continue, le numéro de mise à jour ou le numéro de révision pour les publication à feuillets mobiles à mise à jour).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Informations trouvées'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $b :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# L'emplacement spécifique où les informations ont été trouvées. Pour les ressources en plusieurs parties avec parties numérotées, indiquer la désignation de la partie et l'emplacement dans la partie (par exemple, vol. 6, page 10; recto de la carte, étiquette). Des abréviations ou des formes au long peuvent être utilisées (par exemple, p. de t. ou page de titre, couv. ou couverture, vol. 6 ou volume 6). &lt;br /&gt;
# Informations trouvées. À la suite de l'emplacement, citer les informations qui y ont été trouvées, entre parenthèses. Le cas échéant, indiquer différentes occurrences d'informations provenant de la même source à la suite de l'emplacement de l'information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' Si le point d'accès autorisé est construit à partir des données de catalogage avant publication, inclure «&amp;amp;nbsp;CIP&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la mention de l'emplacement (par exemple, formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The greenhouse approach, 2019: $b page de titre du CIP (Chitra Anand) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Canadienne)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Ressources Internet.''' Pour les sites Web, indiquer s'il y a lieu le nom de l'emplacement à l'intérieur du site (par exemple, À propos; Notre histoire, Chronologie; Government, Executive Branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Plusieurs emplacements dans une ressource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' Lorsqu'on ajoute de nouvelles informations à une zone 670 créée pour un CIP, indiquer que les nouvelles informations proviennent de la ressource publiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; Canadienne) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; Canadienne) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de noms, utiliser généralement «&amp;amp;nbsp;etc.&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour éviter de donner plus de deux emplacements ou une séquence d'emplacements (par exemple, p. 316, etc., pour la séquence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de collections, toujours indiquer chaque emplacement séparément.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Lors du travail d'autorité post-catalogage sans le document en main, utiliser l'emplacement « ressource non disponible ». Si le document est examiné à nouveau et que la notice d'autorité est mise à jour, il est permis de modifier la zone 670 correspondante afin de fournir un emplacement et des formes supplémentaires de titres de collection si nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source des informations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent facultativement fournir un identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) dans la sous-zone $u de la zone 670 pour établir un lien avec la ressource citée si celle-ci contient des informations importantes sur l'entité établie qui ne peuvent être citées succinctement dans la notice d'autorité. Noter que l'utilisation d'un URI dans la zone 670 $u ne supplée pas à l'obligation de citer dans les sous-zones $a et $b de la zone 670 les données pertinentes nécessaires pour justifier le point d'accès autorisé (y compris les ajouts) ou les variantes (cette information continuera d'être disponible si le site change ou disparaît). Toutefois, les informations trouvées dans les sources en ligne peuvent être ajoutées aux zones 046 ou 3XX avec les citations appropriées dans les sous-zones $v et $u et ne pas être répétées dans une 670 lorsque ces informations ne sont pas utilisées dans une 1XX ou une 4XX. Si un URI est inclus dans une 670, il doit être indiqué dans la sous-zone $u. La sous-zone $u doit contenir uniquement l'URI sans aucune autre donnée (par exemple, ne pas mettre l'URI entre parenthèses ni inclure de mots dans la sous-zone $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des noms et des titres ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer intégralement les noms ou les titres de collections utilisés dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès, comme ils apparaissent dans la source, sans abréviation par le catalogueur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la préparation d'une notice d'autorité pour le texte d'une loi ou d'un recueil de lois par sujet, si une source citée contient un titre abrégé ou un titre de référence officiels, citer ce titre, précédé du terme «&amp;amp;nbsp;titre de référence&amp;amp;nbsp;» et de son emplacement exact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les autorités de collectivités, inclure dans les données citées toute la hiérarchie requise pour justifier toutes les variantes de point d'accès nécessaires. Faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles informations (par exemple, le nom de l'organisme subordonné) sont étrangères à la notice créée et ne doivent pas être enregistrées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toutes les catégories ci-dessus, si la seule présentation du nom ou du titre sur la source d'information privilégiée se trouve dans le titre de la ressource donné dans la sous-zone $a de la 670, la répétition du nom dans la sous-zone $b peut être omise, à condition qu'aucune information importante ne soit perdue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si des informations sur un nom ou un titre antérieur ou postérieur se trouvent dans la même source que le nom ou le titre dans le point d'accès autorisé, donner toutes les informations dans la zone 670. Ne pas séparer les informations sur le nom ou le titre antérieur ou postérieur pour les donner dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour faciliter la contribution internationale et l'utilisation des notices d'autorité, lors de l'enregistrement des dates, utiliser généralement les noms de mois, sous forme longue ou [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abrégée]. (Pour les dates enregistrées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, voir la section [[#Format_des_zones_670|Format des zones 670]] de ce Guide). Ne pas modifier le style des dates dans les notices existantes. Comme pratique à privilégier, si une date n'est pas incluse dans la sous-zone $d de la zone 100, envisager d'ajouter une zone 046 si les dates sont disponibles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification des variantes de point d'accès ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justifier les noms ou les titres donnés comme variantes de point d'accès par des informations citées des sources. Toutefois, une justification n'est pas requise dans les cas suivants :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variantes de point d'accès reflétant différentes romanisations ou orthographes connues du catalogueur;&lt;br /&gt;
# Une variante de titre dérivée de la ressource cataloguée, d'autres ressources cataloguées sous le même point d'accès ou de sources de référence standard;&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois pour des points d'accès autorisés de collectivités reflétant des changements dus à une réforme orthographique nationale, des changements de noms dus à un changement de langue officielle ou des changements impliquant uniquement une collectivité supérieure à laquelle la collectivité en cours d'établissement est subordonnée.&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois facultatifs à partir de formes RCAA2 ou pré-RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité de collections et les notices d'autorité de noms rétrospectives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification d'autres éléments ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les informations enregistrées dans les zones 046, 3XX ou 678 de la notice d'autorité doivent généralement être justifiées, à moins qu'elles ne ressortent clairement dans les informations enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 ou qu'elles puissent être facilement déduites d'autres éléments d'identification enregistrés, y compris le nom privilégié.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour la zone 046 et plusieurs des zones 3XX, une sous-zone $u ou une sous-zone $v enregistrée dans la même zone peut être utilisée à la place ou en plus d'une 670. Voir la section [[#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]] de ce Guide pour les directives concernant les sous-zones $u et $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des autres données ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. Ne pas abréger ou traduire des attributs tels que le titre d'une personne ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) qui apparaissent en conjonction avec les noms de personnes dans les mentions de responsabilité et qui pourraient potentiellement être utilisés comme partie du point d'accès. Les autres données peuvent être abrégées ou résumées. En général, traduire les données en langues étrangères de manière informelle en français, en les paraphrasant ou en les résumant selon ce qui convient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données autres que les formes du titre (ou de la phrase analogue à une collection) à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. La numérotation et les noms des organismes de publication ne sont pas obligatoires mais peuvent être indiqués.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Types particuliers de citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les citations les plus courantes sont énumérées ci-dessous. Si celles-ci ne sont pas appropriées, en formuler d'autres selon les besoins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la conversion des informations trouvées dans des zones MARC obsolètes ou non actives (par exemple, 664, 665, 666) en une note 670, citer Canadiana dans une citation telle que celles fournies dans les exemples ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date de la conversion] $b ([données converties à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([données déplacées à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC et fichier interne de BAnQ'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La façon de citer ces fichiers dans la zone 670 est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; usage: [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de noms.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations. Entre parenthèses, précédé par la mention '''point d'accès :''' ou '''points d'accès :''' , mentionner le ou les points d'accès trouvés, même si le point d'accès autorisé actuel est identique. S'il est jugé utile de mentionner une ou plusieurs variantes de point d'accès trouvées dans une notice d'autorité, les mentionner en les faisant précéder de la mention '''variante :''' ou '''variantes :'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différentes formes du nom apparaissent dans les notices bibliographiques, enregistrer le point d'accès ainsi que toutes les formes trouvées, y compris les formes identiques au point d'accès autorisé. Séparer le point d'accès des autres formes de nom et faire précéder les autres formes d'une mention appropriée, par exemple, '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' ou '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas citer les notices bibliographiques ou l'emplacement exact des variations trouvées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de collections.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations, suivie de la citation de la notice bibliographique. Entre parenthèses, indiquer la mention de la collection qui se trouve dans cette notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 27 janv. 2021, Les Déchets ménagers, c1980 $b (Les Cahiers de l'AGHTM)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] Le fichier LC/NAF a aussi été cité antérieurement sous d'autres noms, par exemple Base de données LC/NACO et Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;usage&amp;amp;nbsp;» désigne les formes de noms transcrites que l'on trouve habituellement dans les mentions de responsabilité des notices bibliographiques. On peut également trouver ces formes dans d'autres parties de la notice bibliographique telles que le titre propre ou une note citée. En raison des changements apportés aux instructions de catalogage, les catalogueurs doivent être prudents lorsqu'ils prennent les informations de la mention de publication, de la mention de distribution, etc. et de la mention de collection.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») désigne une forme de nom qui ne correspond pas nécessairement à une forme transcrite. Par exemple, dans les notices RCAA2, le nom d'un éditeur qui figure sur la ressource comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Publishing Company&amp;amp;nbsp;» pourrait avoir été enregistré dans la mention de publication sous la forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Pub. Co&amp;amp;nbsp;». Normalement, il n'est pas nécessaire de citer une telle forme dans une zone 670.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Autres fichiers ou catalogues'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un point d'accès est trouvé dans un catalogue ou une base de données en ligne, utiliser son jugement pour créer une citation 670. Commencer la zone 670 par une désignation du catalogue ou de la base de données dans laquelle ces autres notices bibliographiques ont été trouvées. Il n'y a pas de formulation prescrite pour ces citations; des exemples sont donnés ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Bases de données toponymiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer le nom de la base de données et la date de la recherche dans la sous-zone $a. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Le nom de la base de données peut être cité sous forme d'acronyme ou en toutes lettres.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Dans la sous-zone $b, indiquer le ou les noms de l'entité, le type d'entité, la désignation ou la classe de l'élément (par exemple, ADM1, PPL, civil), les coordonnées et le nom du lieu plus vaste, s'il y a lieu. (D'autres informations pertinentes peuvent également être fournies.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de la désignation ou de la classe de l'élément, il est possible d'utiliser soit le code (par exemple, PPL) ou sa forme en toutes lettres (par exemple, populated place). Pour les noms étrangers, indiquer le type de nom (par exemple, forme conventionnelle, forme approuvée, forme courte, etc.) entre crochets ou parenthèses après le nom. Répéter les crochets ou les parenthèses après chaque nom de ce type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Les noms de variantes (y compris les noms en caractères non latins) peuvent être donnés dans une seule liste, comme indiqué ci-dessous. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement des coordonnées, il est possible d'utiliser le format DMS (degrés, minutes, secondes), le format DD (degrés décimaux) ou les deux formats.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a choisi d’enregistrer les coordonnées DMS)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées telles que trouvées. Toutefois, si la base de données affiche les coordonnées en utilisant des deux-points pour séparer les composantes DMS et des valeurs positives et négatives pour communiquer l'hémisphère, il est acceptable de traduire les coordonnées au format DMS traditionnel si souhaité. Utiliser le symbole du degré (et non le zéro en exposant) pour indiquer les degrés, le signe mou (lettre modificative prime) pour les minutes et le signe dur (lettre modificative double prime) pour les secondes. Pour les coordonnées de latitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère sud. Pour les coordonnées de longitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère occidental.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a enregistré les coordonnées DMS telles qu'elles ont été trouvées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a traduit les coordonnées DMS au format traditionnel à partir de : -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic names server&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, consulté le &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;17 août 2022&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;$b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;22:53:01, 121:02:54&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources non bibliographiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer la source non bibliographique, la date et les informations. La source peut être indiquée de manière spécifique («&amp;amp;nbsp;Lettre de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.) ou en termes généraux («&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.). Lorsqu'on indique une source spécifique, il n'est pas nécessaire de montrer comment l'information a été reçue, par exemple, que la lettre a été reçue par télécopieur plutôt que par courrier. Lorsqu'un appel téléphonique à un éditeur, une agence ou une organisation est cité, il convient généralement de donner le nom du groupe appelé, plutôt que le titre ou le nom de la personne contactée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de collections de rééditions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité de collection concerne uniquement une réédition, commencer la 670 par le terme correspondant au type de réédition et une barre oblique. Ne pas inclure une 670 pour une réédition si la notice d'autorité sujet couvre à la fois l'original et une ou plusieurs rééditions. Ne pas ajouter de zones 670 supplémentaires pour d'autres types de rééditions cataloguées ultérieurement. (Voir 64X Traitement de la collection, Rééditions pour plus d'informations sur les rééditions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciés'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour des informations sur les citations existantes dans les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciées, voir la section [[#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32 Nom de personne indifférencié]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-11-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Titre associé de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 672 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui est associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité de collectivité, des zones 672 peuvent être utilisées pour enregistrer des titres de ressources dont la collectivité est la créatrice, l'organisme de publication ou le sujet. Le but premier de la zone 672 consiste principalement à documenter le fait qu'il existe un lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 672 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 670 pour consigner le titre de la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est créée, ni d'utiliser des zones 670 pour justifier les informations enregistrées dans les zones 1XX et 4XX, telles que le nom privilégié et les variantes de noms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 672 peuvent être ajoutées après les zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 672 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 672 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans la classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 672 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zones 672 avec titres propres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Cervantes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre propre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre uniforme)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec une variante de titre pour l'œuvre associée à l'expression catalane de l'œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Reste du titre'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'on enregistre un titre propre, la sous-zone $b peut être utilisée pour enregistrer le complément de titre ou le titre propre parallèle afin d'éviter toute confusion lorsque des titres nécessitent une meilleure identification.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le complément de titre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le titre propre parallèle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $f – Date'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $f est utilisée pour enregistrer une date appropriée à l'entité enregistrée dans la sous-zone $a (par exemple, utiliser la date d'une œuvre pour un titre privilégié et la date de publication pour un titre propre). Ne pas utiliser les crochets carrés dans la sous-zone $f pour enregistrer une date de publication ou de production. Ne pas mettre de date de distribution, de date de fabrication ou de date de copyright en $f.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une œuvre :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de l'œuvre)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une expression :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date d'une expression française de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une manifestation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de publication d'une manifestation d'une expression polonaise de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Numéro de contrôle de la notice bibliographique'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $w est utilisée pour enregistrer des numéros de contrôle de notices bibliographiques (par exemple, les zones 001, 010 et 016 dans les notices bibliographiques). Il est recommandé de fournir la sous-zone $w lorsque l'information est facilement accessible. La sous-zone $w doit être répétée pour chaque numéro de contrôle distinct (par exemple, un LCCN et un numéro de notice OCLC doivent être fournis dans des sous-zones séparées). Pour plus d'instructions sur la saisie d'un numéro de contrôle dans la notice, voir la section sur la sous-zone $w dans le ''CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E. Format MARC 21 for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' la sous-zone $w doit seulement être utilisée pour les titres de manifestations.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Titre distinct de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui n'est pas associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom. Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité pour une personne, la zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer les titres d'œuvres écrites par une personne différente portant un nom semblable. L'objectif principal de la zone 673 est de documenter le fait qu'il n'existe aucun lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 673.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 673 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 675, comme le décrit la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 673 peuvent être ajoutées après des zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires non associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 673 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 673.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 673 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans le classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 673 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245. Pour les sous-zones spécifiques de la zone 673, appliquer les mêmes instructions que celles données dans la section [[#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Titre propre associé à un autre Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)###47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title propre associé à la National Gallery de Londres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
ET NON&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Même si la National Gallery of Art n'est pas la créatrice de la ressource mentionnée, elle en est l'éditrice et ce titre devrait donc être enregistré en 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#673_Titre_distinct_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Source des données non trouvées =&lt;br /&gt;
En avril 2012, cette zone a été redéfinie comme : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Citation d'une source consultée dans laquelle aucune information ne se trouve liée en aucune manière avec l'entité représentée par la notice d'autorité ou par des entités liées.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Les catalogueurs participant au PFAN ne sont pas tenus de modifier les zones 675 existantes simplement pour répondre à cette nouvelle définition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une nouvelle notice d'autorité, toujours citer la ressource cataloguée dans la zone 675 si la ressource cataloguée ne fournit aucune information liée de quelque façon que ce soit à l'entité représentée dans la notice d'autorité. Citer également dans la zone 675 d'autres sources consultées qui ne contiennent aucune information, lorsqu'on juge que cette absence même d'information mérite d'être consignée pour les futurs utilisateurs de la notice d'autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, il n'est pas toujours nécessaire d'inclure dans la zone 675 toutes les sources de référence consultées; il faut faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles sources sont suffisamment importantes pour être conservées de façon permanente dans la notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Données biographiques ou historiques =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsque des données biographiques ou historiques sont fournies dans une zone de note 678, rédiger la note en employant des phrases concises mais complètes et en gardant à l'esprit que l'information sera utilisée dans des affichages publics.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En prévision de la constitution par BAC du fichier dans WMS et de l'ajout en lot des notices d'autorité des autres institutions, le contenu de toutes les zones 665 dans les notices de BAC et de BAnQ a été déplacé vers la zone 678. Il se pourrait que la zone 665 originale ait contenu des instructions sur le ou les points d'accès à employer comme auteur et comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec); Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec); Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec); Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supprimer ces instructions dans la zone 678 si elles ont été conservées. Penser à ajouter la zone 667 sur l'emploi comme vedette-matière le cas échéant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification de la zone 678'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Généralement, une zone 678 doit être justifiée par une zone 670. Si elle n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu est approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, conserver la zone et ajouter une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678 comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [abréviation de la bibliothèque participante], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la notice a été modifiée après avoir été migrée, il faut consulter l'historique de la notice pour déterminer qui a ajouté la zone 678 à l'origine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la zone 678 n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, ne pas conserver la zone 678 sauf si une note appropriée peut être rédigée avec les informations dont on dispose. Noter que la zone 678 est facultative. Si le contenu de la zone doit être conservé parce qu'il ne se trouve nulle part ailleurs dans la notice, le transférer dans une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 678 existante qui sera supprimée car le contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 670 ajoutée :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Ne pas répéter cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#678_Donn.C3.A9es_biographiques_ou_historiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Liaison des vedettes établies – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note'' : Cette section ne s'applique pas à la zone 781 utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms 151 pour fournir des informations sur les subdivisions géographiques. Voir la section [[#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique|781]] de ce Guide pour les instructions relatives à cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;L'utilisation d'une vedette établie dans une zone de liaison 7XX dans une notice d'autorité de nom ou une notice d'autorité de collection est limitée à l'enregistrement du point d'accès autorisé à partir d'une bibliographie nationale ou d'un fichier d'autorité national ou équivalent séparé. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La forme de la vedette dans une zone 7XX peut correspondre à la forme dans la zone 1XX ou à une forme dans la zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité. Ceci est approprié lorsque la forme de la zone 7XX représente une forme se trouvant dans un fichier d'autorité différent de Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La source de la vedette dans la zone 7XX peut être précisée en utilisant soit la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur avec une sous-zone $2, soit une valeur pour le deuxième indicateur qui précise la source. Pour les points d'accès provenant du fichier LC/NAF, privilégier le deuxième indicateur avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Liaison des vedettes de subdivision - Subdivision géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pratique facultative du PFAN :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pour une vedette de nom géographique qui peut également être utilisée comme subdivision géographique, déterminer la forme sous laquelle la vedette doit être utilisée comme subdivision géographique en suivant les lignes directrices de la feuille d'instructions [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 du ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Entrer la forme de la subdivision géographique dans une zone 781 en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;6&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur. Pour une vedette géographique utilisée directement, comme un pays, saisir les données dans une seule sous-zone $z. Pour une vedette géographique qui est utilisée indirectement en subdivision d'une entité géographique plus vaste, telle qu'une ville, saisir les données dans deux sous-zones $z successives. Ne pas modifier les valeurs des positions de la zone 008. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice pour une vedette de nom géographique qui ne peut pas être utilisée comme vedette secondaire matière (008/15 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;»), comme le nom antérieur d'une juridiction qui a subi un changement de nom linéaire, par exemple, '''Ceylan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice d'autorité de nom pour un nom de lieu qui ne peut pas être utilisé comme une subdivision géographique, comme une section d'une ville, par exemple, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Ajouter une zone 781 à une notice existante lorsqu'une autre modification est faite dans la notice. Lors de la révision d'une notice existante qui contient une note d'utilisation pour l'indexation dans une zone 667 indiquant la forme de la subdivision géographique appropriée, supprimer la zone 667 et la remplacer par une zone 781.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 1 : Entités ambiguës =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 2 : Projets spéciaux =&lt;br /&gt;
Cette annexe fournit des informations sur les projets spéciaux impliquant des notices d'autorité créées et modifiées dans le fichier d'autorité Canadiana. Les notices créées ou modifiées pour ces projets peuvent contenir certaines zones et valeurs dans des zones qui ne sont généralement pas conformes aux politiques de catalogage actuelles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des instructions sur la modification de ces notices sont fournies afin d'indiquer si ces zones et valeurs doivent être conservées ou non.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 1. Notices créées ou révisées dans le cadre du projet de révision de notices de l'UQAM ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de révision de notices d'autorité dirigé par l'UQAM. Il s'agit des notices créées ou modifiées dans Canadiana par l'équipe du traitement documentaire de cette institution. Ces notices sont ensuite révisées par deux bibliothécaires et une technicienne de l'UQAM. Le projet s'est terminé le 31 mars 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces nouvelles notices présentaient les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles ont été ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices peuvent être modifiées de la même manière que les autres notices d'autorité de noms conformément aux politiques de catalogage en vigueur.&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un catalogueur modifie ces notices, il doit :&lt;br /&gt;
* changer la valeur du Guide/17 pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Notice d'autorité complète);&lt;br /&gt;
* supprimer la zone 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;amp;nbsp;»; &lt;br /&gt;
* évaluer la notice comme une notice versée en lot. Toutefois, comme la notice est en cours de révision, le point d'accès autorisé peut être modifié s'il n'est pas conforme aux pratiques du PFAN (p. ex., une date de naissance ou de décès peut être ajoutée si elle est disponible et a été omise dans le point d'accès).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 2. Notices créées et révisées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de mentorat &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui, depuis février 2021, permet aux&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; bibliothèques universitaires de créer des notices d'autorité de nom qui sont révisées par une autre institution universitaire. Les notices d'autorité créées ou modifiées par &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;les bibliothèques mentorées&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; sont révisées par des techniciens en documentation de l'Université &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui les mentore&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices présentent les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles sont ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abréviation, c'est-à-dire UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices ne doivent pas être modifiées.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=144834</id>
		<title>PFAN - Name Authority Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=144834"/>
		<updated>2026-03-09T20:33:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 372 Field of activity */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by N. Mainville, LAC, )}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Manual}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Name Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Series Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Fixed Fields =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Descriptive cataloging code  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;All new name authority records created and contributed by PFAN catalogers must use code 008/10 “z” and include subfield $e rda in the 040 (Cataloging source) field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an existing NAR using code “a”, “b”, “c”, or “d” is modified in any way, evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA, changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1: If an existing NAR using code “c” is modified only to change or add a 5XX field, catalogers are strongly encouraged, but not required, to evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA,&lt;br /&gt;
changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2: Existing undifferentiated name authority records coded 008/10 “c” may be modified to remove one or more identities in order to create differentiated RDA authority records. When modifying&lt;br /&gt;
an existing undifferentiated name authority record for this purpose, the updated undifferentiated name authority record must retain the existing 008/10 code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F10 Descriptive Cataloging Rules|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Subject heading system/thesaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR 008/11 is set to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/11 value “v” (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/11 value “n” (Not applicable), representing past practice, change the value to “v.” In the Manual, see also 008/15 for instructions on changing that value to “a” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/11&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (Not applicable) to name authority records for corporate names representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point. Also assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; in 008/15, and make a 667 note indicating the form of the access point used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples of corporate names not appropriate for use as subject headings:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F15 Heading use-subject added entry|Manual 008/15]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]].&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created NARs. Make these changes also when modifying&lt;br /&gt;
existing name authority records for any reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F11 Subject Heading System.2FThesaurus|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Heading use-subject added entry ==&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;General&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; is set to &amp;quot;b.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/15 value “a” (Appropriate) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/15 value “b” (Not appropriate), representing past practice, change the value to “a.” In the Manual, see also 008/11 for instructions on changing that value to “v” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Background:'' For Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental&lt;br /&gt;
bodies, Religious officials, and Popes, descriptive catalogers may be required to establish an authorized&lt;br /&gt;
access point for the corporate name for the office as well as a personal name for the office holder. It is&lt;br /&gt;
subject cataloging policy to assign only the personal name, not the corporate name, as a subject access&lt;br /&gt;
point. This policy was established for collocation purposes (cf. [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
may be used in descriptive cataloging as an access point, but in subject cataloging only the personal name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
would be used as a subject access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; (Not appropriate) to name authority records for corporate entities representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the entry. Also assign value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; in 008/11, and make a 667 note indicating the form used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F11 Subject heading system.2Fthesaurus|Manual 008/11]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;NARs and subject usage.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Correct existing records when making any other change to the records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19]&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F15 Heading Use-Subject Added Entry|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Undifferentiated personal name ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== General === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use 008/32 code “b” (undifferentiated) in an RDA name authority record. Assign 008/32 value “a” for personal name NARs. Use code “n” for families, corporate bodies, and places. For works and expressions, assign value “a” if the access point begins with a personal name, otherwise assign value “n”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the past, personal name NARs could be coded as undifferentiated using 008/32 value “b” when the cataloger had no acceptable way of differentiating multiple persons with the same preferred name. Since then, PFAN have followed these guidelines for personal name NARs:&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not create new undifferentiated records coded 008/32 “b”. All personal name authority records coded RDA should be differentiated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not add a new identity to an existing personal name authority record coded 008/32 “b.”&lt;br /&gt;
* Instead, apply [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] to create a unique authorized access point for the person, using suitable additional elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' If the only record found for an entity is an undifferentiated record (with field 008/32 coded &amp;quot;b&amp;quot;) from a university with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN », do not use it.  Create a new authority record for the entity.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated record to LAC by emailing the OCLC control number to pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca with the subject line: Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may happen that an existing undifferentiated name authority record, especially one that has been imported from LC/NAF, contains pairs of 670 fields used to group information about each individual covered by the NAR. The first 670 in the pair is an “identifying” 670 field containing a term descriptive of the person's relationship to the title cited in the second 670 of the pair. The data in the identifying 670 field is contained in subfield $a and enclosed in square brackets. The second 670 in the pair is a “citation” 670 that contains the normal data elements in a resource being cataloged citation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Added entry for Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Editor of Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, an existing undifferentiated name authority record may include a 667 note indicating that the record is undifferentiated and identifying the resource(s) associated with other persons with the same name. In this case, the record generally does not include 670 fields for persons other than the first one identified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When information is found to distinguish a person in an existing undifferentiated from LAC or BAnQ name record:&lt;br /&gt;
* Always create a new name authority record for that person, with distinguishing information, and add an indication that the person was formerly on an undifferentiated record (see &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_notes_on_records_for_identities_previously_on_undifferentiated_records|667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records]]&amp;quot; below). If an authority record already exists for that person with the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer the &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;citation&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not transfer the “identifying” 670 to the new NAR.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the undifferentiated NAR is not being deleted because multiple identities remain, delete the pair of 670 fields pertaining to the newly created NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(i.e., in the undifferentiated NAR, delete both the &amp;quot;identifying&amp;quot; 670 and the &amp;quot;citation&amp;quot; 670)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If more than one identity remains in the undifferentiated NAR, and there is not sufficient information in the NAR to create new NARs for each name, leave the NAR coded AACR2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to facilitate machine processing of authority records (e.g., matching, linking), when only one identity is left on an undifferentiated personal name authority record (i.e., other identities are being&lt;br /&gt;
disambiguated and removed), take the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Create a new NAR for the remaining single identity. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ») and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.  The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. In the new record:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer the citation 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 note:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note  « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assure that the undifferentiated NAR only contains information relevant to the single identity remaining (e.g., 670s). If applicable, delete field 667 indicating that the record is undifferentiated.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add that information in the 667 note on the undifferentiated record to assure that a duplicate NAR will not be created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of differentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated LAC record''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New notice for the author of Histoire du département de la Manche:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number] $z [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of undifferentiated record derived from LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Esperanza:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the illustrator of Reptiles:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the illustrator of Reptiles :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008red/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add a 667 note to a new NAR to identify the Canadiana number of the authority record in which information about that person had been recorded:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Records coded as undifferentiated that actually represent only one identity ====&lt;br /&gt;
Occasionally an existing record will be coded undifferentiated, but new research indicates that in fact the record represents only one identity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may also happen that we suspect that the value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; has been mistakenly coded in field 008/32. In such cases, proceed as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 field to the undifferentiated NAR indicating that it has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a new name authority record for the identity. The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 note: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number..)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the note 667 &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated record that represents a single identity''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation  :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;New authority record after disambiguation&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [no Canadiana number, use OCLC number from undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F32 Undifferentiated personal name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/33 Level of establishment  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Provisional''' (008/33 value “c”) records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Code an NAR as provisional (008/33 value “c”) if the authorized access point cannot be formulated satisfactorily because of inadequate information. If the necessary information later becomes available, re-evaluate the NAR and upgrade it to fully established (008/33 value “a”). In no case should a provisional-level authority record be created with an access point that conflicts with an existing NAR according to PFAN normalization rules.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Special administrative regions of Hong Kong and Macau'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Because there is uncertainty about whether Hong Kong and Macau will continue to have two official languages, code all NARs for government bodies in these two places, at the level of the special administrative region and below, as provisional (008/33 value “c”), regardless of the language in which the authorized access point has been established. If a form in the second of the two official languages becomes available, add that form as a variant access point rather than revising the existing authorized access point. Consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] and the [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html related policy statement] for instructions on choosing the language of the referred name. Please note that this policy for provisional status does not apply to non-government bodies.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional information for PFAN participants'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN participants may also create provisional records in the following two exceptional situations:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library does not have the language expertise to establish the authorized access point as a fully established authority record; this would include situations where the library lacked adequate reference sources for research or where the cataloger was not confident of the correct grammatical form for the access point.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library is unable, due to limited resources or other constraints, to complete related authority work or to determine the appropriate reference structure that is required for fully established authority records.&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preliminary''' (008/33 value “d”) records:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Preliminary authority records (008/33 value “d”) generally are the result of retrospective projects. PFAN catalogers are expected to routinely upgrade NARs coded preliminary when making other modifications to the record. Because of this maintenance requirement, PFAN participants are asked to contact the PFAN Standards Committee before embarking on projects that may result in large numbers of NARs coded preliminary being added to the NACO Authority File.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;As needed, catalogers may upgrade NARs coded preliminary when working with earlier/later corporate body records, even if the access points in the records being upgraded are not used in the local bibliographic database. Occasionally catalogers may need to create a new NAR without having an item in hand, e.g., for an earlier or later name heading using information from reference sources, or a heading based on information found in field 245 subfield “c” of bibliographic records when resolving NAR conflicts. Do not code these occasional NARs as “preliminary”.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records&lt;br /&gt;
are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, series data elements should be viewed on the publication and series authority records should be coded “a” (full). In post-cataloging authority work it is permissible to create SARs without the piece in hand; these records are coded “d” (preliminary). When a publication in the series has been examined and the preliminary authority record reviewed and updated as necessary, upgrade the SAR to full level.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F33_Level_of_establishment|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Cataloging source ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever value is originally input into this field remains; do not change this value when updating a record unless the original value was incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas « blanc » pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou « c » (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a). --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F39_Cataloging_source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 National Bibliographic Agency Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 016 is mandatory whenever a cataloguer creates, updates or uses an authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an authority record, and when updating or using an existing record without a Canadiana number in field 016, first check the LC/NAF to see if the same entity is represented by an authority record, and if this authority record includes a Canadiana number. Note that the authorized access point, in the LC/NAF, may be different from the Canadiana access point.  If the LC/NAF record does include a Canadiana number, add this number to the Canadiana record, changing the final E to an F (or adding an F at the end of the Canadiana number, if there is no final letter). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When updating or using an existing authority record that includes a Canadiana number, please check that the language code F is present at the end of the field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Duplicates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not “reuse” a Canadiana number. Once an authority record has been created for a given entity, and once a Canadiana number has been attributed, do not change the data in this authority record to describe a DIFFERENT entity. For instance, do not change the authority record for “Dupont, Jean” to transform it into an authority record describing “Tremblay, Marie” (except if the person's name has changed). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, ask that the duplicate be deleted (see [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Procedures for duplicates]]). DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no field 016 in the record to be deleted, please add one, using the number 0000X0000F. Do not record this number in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
See also the “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Duplicates|Duplicates]]” section in this Manual, field 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, delete it. DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Partially modified batch-loaded authority records'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Batch-loaded authority records which are partially modified, according to the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]], will include Canadiana number 1111X1111F. This temporary number is added in order to allow the cataloguer to save the record, until such time as the entire record is evaluated to make sure it follows all PFAN standards. This number will have to be replaced by a unique number once the record is evaluated, when the 667 note “CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN” is deleted. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 International Standard Serial Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Record the ISSN whenever it is available from the item in hand, from analytic bibliographic records, or from the collected set bibliographic record for the series; otherwise, recording the ISSN is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it is known there are separate ISSN assigned to different formats of a series represented by a single SAR, prefer to record in 022 subfield $a the ISSN that is the linking ISSN (ISSN-L) for the different formats. Identify ISSN for specific formats in separate 667 fields, following this pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the title of a publication has changed, confirm that an ISSN appearing on the publication belongs to the new title and not to the earlier title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An incorrect ISSN can be given in a 667 field (e.g., “ISSN 1122-3344 is not a valid ISSN for this publication”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-11-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Other standard identifier =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the guidelines in [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf NACO Best Practices] for the 024 Field. As a general rule, limit the number of 024 fields in a NACO authority record to five. Do not routinely delete or change existing 024 fields when adding new ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are not required to maintain identifiers coded in the 024 field of PFAN authority records. When an 024 field is present in an authority record that is being reported for deletion (for example, in the case of a duplicate), catalogers should transfer the field to the record that is to be retained. When two authority records are being collapsed into one, and each record has a different 024 field, catalogers should include both 024 fields in the updated record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Coded cartographic mathematical data =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for countries, states, counties'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for outside limits (bounding boxes or polygons) should generally be used with larger geographic entities such as countries, states, and counties to identify the coordinates of the entity. The&lt;br /&gt;
coordinates may be recorded in either degrees/minutes/seconds, decimal degrees, decimal minutes, and/or decimal seconds. Styles should not be mixed in a single 034 field, but the field may be repeated to&lt;br /&gt;
represent the different styles (see below for conversion utilities); the order of 034 fields when both styles are given does not matter. To facilitate the reuse of coordinates in geographic applications, the point (not the comma) should be used as the decimal point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrees/minutes/seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees''': record in the form hddd.dddddd (hemisphere-degrees.decimal degrees)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees with plus ou minus''': record in the form +-ddd.dddddd (hemisphere[+/-]-degrees.decimal degrees) (“+” or N and E, “-” for S and W ; the plus sign is optional)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example with +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example without the optional plus sign)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal minutes''': record in the form hdddmm.mmmm (hemisphere-degrees-minutes.decimal minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss.sss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds.decimal seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for cities, towns, and townships'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for cities, towns, and townships should generally be recorded as center points rather than outside limits. For the 034 field, the longitude and latitude that form the central axis are recorded&lt;br /&gt;
twice to define the center point (i.e., the contents of $d and $e are identical, the contents of $f and $g are identical).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing degrees/minutes/seconds)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees with plus/minus)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Coordinate Conversion Tools'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN institutions are encouraged to provide both degrees/minutes/seconds and decimal degrees when available. Numerous conversion tools are available on the Web to derive one from the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 has been defined for recording the source of the coordinate information– codes for commonly used sources are available from: [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/cartographic-data.html ''Cartographic Data Source Codes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 citation to the source would not be required if the only information from the source is recorded in field 034; a 670 citation should be made if necessary to record information beyond coordinates, such as variant names, hierarchy, time period of applicability, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#034_Coded_Carographic_Mathematical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 System Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#035_System_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Cataloging source =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Language of cataloging'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $b fre added automatically by WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $d – Modifying agency'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $d [MARC 21 code] is added automatically by WMS when modifying NARs or SARs unless your institution's is already the last MARC subfield $d in the 040 field. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $e – Description conventions'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All new authority records created and submitted by PFAN cataloguers must have the code &amp;quot;z&amp;quot; in Field 008/10 and include the $e rda subfield in Field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding the subfield $e manually, add it after subfield $b and before $c. It is not necessary to move the subfield $e to this position if it is already present elsewhere in the 040 or if it is being added by a macro or a template. Subfield $e rda is automatically added by the system in NARs and SARs when fixed field 008/10 (Rules) is set to “z” (Other).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#040_Cataloging_Source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Authentication Code =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This field is found in all authority records used by LAC. Do not modify or delete this field when code CaOONL appears in field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers (other than LAC cataloguers) derive an authority record from an LAC record which includes field 042, they must remember to delete this field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the Canadiana authority file, cataloguers must add 042 $a nlc every time they create, derive or revise an authority record. This code identifies the “virtual” Canadian authority file, which is spread across two separate authority files (LC/NAF and Canadiana). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#042_Authentication_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Geographic Area Code &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 043 can only be used in authority records for geographical names (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield b – Local GAC code and Subfield $2 – Source of local code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For sites located in Quebec, PFAN participants can use subfield $b to record a local code from the list below, representing the administrative region of Quebec where the site is located. This code is formed by the geographic region code &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; and a two-letter sub-entity local code (e.g., qa) that identifies the administrative region and replaces the last two characters of the &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; code (e.g., &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot;). (e.g. &amp;quot;n-cn-qa&amp;quot;). Subfield $b is recorded after subfield $a and is followed by subfield $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#043_Geographic_Area_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Special coded dates =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: When encoding date information, give the fullest information about the date that is readily available (the date in field 046 may be more precise than a date used in the 100 subfield $d). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2nd_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;When&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; revising existing authority records, record dates in field 046 even if the heading itself does not have dates in 100 subfield $d, when the information is readily available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording dates in field 046, use the Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) schema in all cases except for centuries; supply dates using the pattern yyyy, yyyy-mm, or yyyy-mm-dd. See date table in [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html LAC-BanQ PS 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt; For the full EDTF specification, see [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophonist)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bryant, W. Blues around the clock [SR] 1945: $b label (Johnny Hicks, tenor sax)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Discogs website, May 27, 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; tenor sax player who performed with Tab Smith in the 1940s)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording B.C. dates in the 046 field, precede the digits by a hyphen (minus sign). Because there is no year “zero” in the common era calendar, subtract one year from the actual B.C. date, e.g., the year 50 B.C. is recorded -0049.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a century in the 046 field, use the first two digits of the hundred year span (e.g., use “16” to represent the 17th century, 1600–1699). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the 1st century A.D. is represented by value “00” and B.C. centuries have a hyphen &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;minus &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sign)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; before the digits (e.g., “-04” for the 5th century B.C.). An approximate century (e.g., active approximately 12th century) cannot be recorded in the 046 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Repeatability:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Field 046 is repeatable, but the 046 subfields used to record the dates are not repeatable. Generally, one 046 field with dates conforming to the EDTF schema should be sufficient. However, century dates follow the ISO 8601 standard, not EDTF. When recording century dates in addition to more precise dates, it is therefore necessary to repeat the 046 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Conflicting dates'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, resources consulted may present conflicting dates (e.g., conflicting birth or death dates for a person, or start or end dates for a corporate body). In these situations, the 046 field should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information. It is not necessary to record all the conflicting dates using field 046, nor is it necessary to give a 046 field for each resource consulted. Evaluation of the conflicting dates should generally result in a single 046 field, containing the date(s) the cataloger judges to be most accurate in representing the entity. At the cataloger's discretion, the date(s) recorded in that 046 field may incorporate the conflicting date information and need not correspond exactly to the date(s) selected for the authorized access point.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Similarly, any dates added to the authorized access point should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information, recorded in conformance with the instructions in RDA and the PFAN Policy Statements. If one date predominates in the resources consulted, that date may be considered the most appropriate to use in the authorized access point. If a single date does not predominate, the cataloger may decide to use the “approximately yyyy”, “yyyy?”, or “yyyy or yyyy” format in the authorized access point. In some cases, dates corresponding to the period of activity of the person (RDA 9.19.1.5) may be considered the best choice.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 157 B.C. as the approximate date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary. authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 1907 as the date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Same example as above, reflecting a different decision the cataloger might have made for recording 046 subfield $f)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Because the 046 field will be based on information from multiple sources, justification cannot be accurately expressed in subfield $v/$u at the end of the 046 field. The conflicting dates should be recorded in 670 fields. If an existing record has subfield $v/$u as 046 field justification, and the 046 field is being updated as described above, the subfield $v/$u should be removed, and the justification converted to a 670 field, if the conflicting dates are not already justified in an existing 670 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Uncertain dates resulting from date calculations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, a calculation may be required to determine which dates to record in the 046 field and the authorized access point. Such calculations may result in uncertain dates.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the consulted resources provide only the person's date of death and their age (in years) at the time of death, as often happens with obituaries, their year of birth will correspond to one of two consecutive years. To calculate those years, first subtract the age from the year of death, then use the resulting year plus its preceding year as the two alternatives for the year of birth.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger subtracted 75, the age at death, from 1994, the year of death; the resulting year, 1919, and the year preceding it, 1918, represent the two possible alternatives for the year of birth)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If non-Gregorian dates are found in consulted resources, uncertain dates may result from calendar conversion differences. Gregorian calendar dates are used in the 046 field and authorized access point. A single date in a non-Gregorian calendar may correspond to one of two Gregorian dates. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(The Hijri calendar date 1346 H converts to either 1967 or 1968 in the Gregorian calendar.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of date scheme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add subfield $2 edtf except after a century. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfields $q – Establishment date, $r – Termination date,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Start period, and $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Record dates associated with a one-time conference, etc., or a single instance of a&lt;br /&gt;
series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] and [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), use subfields $s and $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Use the establishment date  ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) and the termination date ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) of a series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]) in subfields $q and $r, if that information is known.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on using $s and $t for start and end periods in fields 368, and 370-376, see the instructions provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following represents PFAN practice on recording sources of information in $u and $v in fields where they are defined, and/or in field 670: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;670s must be used to support information used as part of a heading in 1XX and 4XX fields.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;For fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $v is optional if the same information/source is already cited in the 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use $v if the information/source is not cited in a 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $u is optional, and should always be preceded by $v&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Use a 670 field if needed to justify information recorded in other fields for which subfields $u and/or $v are not defined or defined differently. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the same basic citation principles when recording data in subfield $v (Source of information) of fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 that currently apply to field 670 subfield $a (Source citation).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Supply specific citation information (page number, sub-page of website) in subfield $v if, in the cataloger's judgment, this greater specificity is needed to find the information within the source cited. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information in fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 is in the same form as found in the source, there is no need to cite usage information. If the information recorded in those fields is in a different form from that in the source, use 670 $b (Information found). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For tangibles sources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information was derived from a tangible source (e.g., a print book, removable digital media) subfield $v should contain sufficient information for a cataloger to find the item cited in a catalog&lt;br /&gt;
or bibliographic database. This can usually be limited to title proper and imprint or date. If that combination is not unique, the title citation may be preceded by the creator's name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For online resources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide information sufficient to find the resource via a search engine. Include either title and publication date (if it is a formally-published resource, such as an e-book) or a suitable description of the&lt;br /&gt;
document and date accessed (for a less formal resource). Optionally include subfield $u. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-03)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Library of Congress Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#050_Library_of_Congress_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 LC classification number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used in personal name authority records to record LC classification numbers for individual literary authors, including authors of children's literature. It may also be used '''exceptionally'' in personal and corporate name authority records to record biography numbers in the ML410-429 range of the LC classification when the choice of index or cutter is not obvious. Field 053 must always include a $5 subfield.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class PS8000 numbers should not be recorded in field 053. For the use of PS8000 numbers in name authority records, see section 065 of this Manual. An authority record for a Canadian literary author may contain both a 053 and a 065 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Library and Archives Canada Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#055_Library_and_Archives_Canada_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Other Classification Number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 065 is used to record PS8000 class numbers. Field 065 must always include a subfield $2 and a subfield $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [MARC code of institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Number source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2, record &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; to indicate that the number comes from the PS8000 class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#065_Other_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 080 Universal Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#080_Universal_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Dewey Decimal Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#082_Dewey_Decimal_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Dewey Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#083_Dewey_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Government Document Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#086_Government_Document_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Government Document Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#087_Government_Document_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Headings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for any reason, delete a final mark of punctuation in the 1XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging&lt;br /&gt;
instructions (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: in order to minimize the impact of database maintenance with associated bibliographic records and/or related authority records, catalogers are urged to refrain from making unnecessary changes to 1XXs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN series practice: Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the title proper of a multipart monograph, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choosing a monographic series title proper:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has more than one form of series title, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has the series title in more than one language or script on the same source, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has series title pages in more than one language and or script, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#Consider spacing and changes in typography when determining where the series title begins and ends. Also consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Establishing an SAR access point:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Determine choice of authorized access point based on [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] and its associated LAC-BAnQ PS.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclude from the authorized access point the following information included in the series statement in the bibliographic record for the component part:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;initial article in subfields $a, $t, $n, and $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;other title information;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;statement of responsibility;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;parallel title(s);&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;numeric/chronological designations.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a parenthetical qualifier(s) if appropriate according to the guidelines in LAC-BAnQ PS 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on converting an existing NAR to an SAR, see Should an SAR be made? in the Introduction of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Heading - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for families'''&lt;br /&gt;
'''''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “3” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a family. See in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_Nonpublic_general_note|667]] section, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]], for subject usage instructions in NARs for families.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Additions to the name are contained in a single set of parentheses separated by colons.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# The term for the type of family is added after the name and is contained in subfield $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $d (date) follows the term for the type of family.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $c is used for place associated with family and follows the date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $g is used for prominent member of family. Give authorized access point for the person as found in the 1XX of the NAR without any internal subfield coding.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for persons'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “0” or “1” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] provides guidance for the placement of words indicating relationship (e.g., Jr.) and MARC defines subfield $q as “Forme développée du nom de personne.” When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Subfield $d (date) should always be the last element in a 100 string unless the term (Esprit) is being added to the name. Add $c (Esprit) as the last element in a 100 string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Example:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Generally add subfield $c before subfield $q when also adding words, numerals, etc. indicating relationship. (See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] for treatment of Portuguese names)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) For exceptional situations, such as when subfield $a contains only a surname or only a forename or the name includes a prefix, etc. consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2020-12-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#100_Heading-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Content Type =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 336 may only be used in NARs and SARs for expressions. 336 is always accompanied by a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2 give “rdacontent/fre.” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Content type term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use terms from [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html/view RDA 6.9.1.3]. The list of terms is also available in the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Content type code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If giving subfield $b instead of/or in addition to subfield $a, use the code from the MARC format [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#336_Content_Type|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Other attributes of person or corporate body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary for terms in subfields $a, $b, and $c, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a, $b and $c. When terms in subfields $a and $b do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record professions or occupations in subfield $c (Other designation). Profession or occupation may be recorded in field [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#374_Occupation|374]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record titles of royalty, nobility or religious rank ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) in subfield $d in the form used in the authorized or variant access points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#368_Other_Attributes_of_Person_or_Corporate_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Associated place =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For jurisdictions or other place names with authority records in Canadiana or, failing that, the form found in the RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. The form of place name in the 370 field may differ from the form of place name added to a preferred name of place or an access point per RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Authorized access point for the place includes type of jurisdiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name for the larger place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Other place name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no authorized access point for the place in Canadiana or RVM, it is not necessary to create an NAR in order to code the 370 field. Record the place in the 370 field following RDA and the LAC-BAnQ PSs, including consulting appropriate sources and adding additional elements (e.g., type of jurisdiction) to break conflicts. Do not add a subfield $2 if no NAR is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of the associated place has changed, the name of the place that applied in the time of the entity being established in the 1XX may optionally be recorded in place of, or in addition to, the current form of name. It is not necessary to follow subject cataloging policies to use the latest form of name only.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person born in the city of Calcutta before its name changed to Kolkata; cataloger has chosen to record the form of name that applied at the time the person was born)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person residing in the city of Milan during the Renaissance, prior to the formation of the modern country of Italy; cataloger has chosen to record the current form of name for the country)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For non-jurisdictions, prefer names from an authorized vocabulary such as RVM and identify the source in subfield $2. If the name is not found in an authorized vocabulary, record it in field 370 without&lt;br /&gt;
giving a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
When determining when to create a name authority record for a geographic name, consult the “Name Authority Records (NARs)” section of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1], Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary&lt;br /&gt;
source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfield $c – Associated country&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Generally, do not use subfield $c to record places that are not sovereign entities. Such places may be recorded in subfield $f or other subfields as appropriate.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Martinique is an overseas department of France)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if a sovereign entity has (or previously had) one or more constituent countries, any of the constituent countries associated with the 1XX may optionally be recorded in subfield $c in addition to, or instead of, the larger sovereign entity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Great Britain who has strong ties to Wales; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with the Soviet Union, particularly the Kirghiz Soviet Socialist Republic; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Aruba, a constituent country of the Netherlands; cataloger has chosen not to record the Netherlands)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with India prior to its independence from Great Britain; cataloger has chosen not to record Great Britain)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entity names of First Nations in Canada and Indian tribes recognized by the United States government as legal entities may be included in subfield $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Record the place of origin of the work in field 370, unless it is merely a place of publication or other place associated with a manifestation (use field 643, when appropriate, for the latter). Although the “place of origin” of a serial work may be the same as the place of publication of the component part for which the SAR (or serial bibliographic record) was created, use judgment in distinguishing between place of origin of the work and a place of publication not actually related to the work itself.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-24]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-22)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#370_Associated_Place|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Address =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice:&lt;br /&gt;
* Supply based on cataloger's judgment, if the information is readily available and not already being recorded in field 370 subfield $e (Place of residence/headquarters).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* In cases where subfield $a is not recorded, include at a minimum subfield $m (Electronic mail address) or subfield $b (City).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not record physical &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or e-mail&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; addresses for living persons.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Catalogers are not required to maintain address information when updating a record that contains an address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record multiple addresses, with or without ranges of dates, in separate occurrences of field 371.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Electronic mail address'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $m should contain only an e-mail address. Do not add an internet address for the 1XX in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#371_Address|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Field of activity =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM heading string for field of activity, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmgf&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an entity from Canadiana for field of activity, remove any subfield coding not authorized for use in the 372 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point in Canadiana:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Field of activity in 372:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall&lt;br /&gt;
best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''372 fields with a term from RVM and a non-controlled vocabulary term'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#372_Field_of_Activity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Associated group =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the Canadiana or LC/NACO Authority File, recording the source in subfield $2. Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 373 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of an associated group has changed, record the group name(s) that applied at the time of the entity being established in the 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with subfield $2 and dates:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with different vocabulary sources:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Although the MARC format does not specify a form of date in these subfields, the following practice is recommended for consistency. Input dates using the Gregorian calendar in the form yyyy. If more specific dates are necessary, consider recording them in another field (e.g., 670, 678). It is&lt;br /&gt;
not necessary to reformulate dates in existing NARs to conform to this practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&amp;lt;!--(2023-06-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#373_Associated_Group|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Occupation =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.16.1.3 for instructions on recording profession or occupation as an element. See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.19.1.6 for instructions using a profession or occupation term in an access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Codes from either the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/occupation.html/view Occupation Term Source Codes] or the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/subject.html/view Subject Source Codes] lists may be recorded in subfield $2 for the 374 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#374_Occupation|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Gender =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not use this field in new authority records. Whenever an existing record must be changed for any reason, delete any occurrence of field 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Family information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Name of prominent member'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When giving the name of the prominent member of the family in 376 subfield $b, give the form for the person as found in subfield $g of the 100 field of the NAR for the family. Do not include any internal subfield coding in subfield $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start''' period and Subfield $t – End period&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Associated language =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer language codes over language terms, using codes from the Code List for Languages in MARC21.  Use subfield $l (Language term) only to provide information not available in the [https://loc.gov/marc/languages/language_code.html MARC Code List for Languages]. Encode multiple languages for a person or corporate body only if more than one language is used for publication, communication, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Optionally, record an ISO 639-3 language code (or codes) in an additional 377 field. This practice is especially recommended when an ISO 639-3 code will identify a language more specifically than the MARC code does. For more information, see the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of the code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 is not required when the MARC Code List for Languages is used as the language source code (second indicator value “#”). PFAN institutions may supply an additional 377 field from another language code list by using second indicator value “7,” with subfield $2 containing a code for a language source list taken from the list in [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/language.html/view Language Code and Term Source Codes]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(ISO 639-3 code for Achi (acr); assigned a collective code (myn) for Mayan languages in the MARC Code List for Languages)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#377_Associated_Language|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Fuller form of personal name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode the fuller form of name in the 378 field when this information is readily available, even if the same information is already present in the 100 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the Information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#378_Fuller_Form_of_Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Form of work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMGF, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on recording form of work as an element in a work-level series authority record, see LAC-BAnQ PS 6.3.1.3.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#380_Form_of_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Other distinguishing characteristics of work or expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used to record the RDA elements other distinguishing characteristic of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) and other distinguishing characteristic of expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Other characteristics of expressions that are unique to musical works (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4-6.18.1.6]) may also be recorded in the 381 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Franklin number recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Other distinguishing characteristic of expression of musical work'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some terms recorded for other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression may be appropriate to record in field 381 and another MARC field for which there is no corresponding RDA element. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a corporate body (such as a publisher) used as an other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression could be recorded in either the 373 field (associated group), the 381 field or both.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 381 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as associated group and other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA has no specific element for places associated with expressions, but field 370 subfield $f (Other associated place) and subfield $g (Place of origin of work or expression) may be used in authority records for expressions. Some places associated with works or expressions would be considered other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression in RDA and could be recorded in the 370 field, the 381 field, or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Places used as other distinguishing characteristic of a legal work; recorded in 370 and 381 fields)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the RDA element place of origin of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.6]) in a 370 field (see Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]] section).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When other distinguishing characteristic of work or other distinguishing characteristic of expression has been used in an authorized access point and is also being recorded as an element in a 3XX&lt;br /&gt;
field, use the 381 field to record the other distinguishing characteristic. Optionally, also record the same information in any other appropriate 3XX field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#381_Other_Distinguishing_Characteristics_of_Work_or_Expression|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 Medium of performance =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the medium of performance using thesaurus terms from &amp;quot;Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM (RVMMEM)&amp;quot;. Record the medium of performance by applying the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html RDA 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6], the associated LAC-BAnQ PSs. ''Note:'' The 382 field may also be used in authority records for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. If considered important for identification and access, provide an additional 382 that does not apply these guidelines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#382_Medium_of_Performance|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numeric designation of musical work &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available. Create separate 383 fields for different numbering schemes associated with a single work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#383_Numeric_Designation_of_Musical_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Key =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available for works. In case of doubt, do not encode. Do not encode for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Audience characteristics =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the intended audience of a work or expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. In particular, consult instruction sheet L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ##  $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvmt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a: If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term and term from a controlled vocabulary)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''or''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-10-14]&amp;lt;!--(2022-10-14)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Creator/contributor characteristics &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record demographic characteristics of one or more creators or contributors associated with a work or expression, in particular for characteristics common to a group of creators or contributors associated with a work or expression. The field will most commonly be used in authority records for collection aggregates embodying two or more expressions of two or more independent works by different agents, and for individual works named by title alone (e.g., works of unknown authorship; monographic series).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the draft Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html].  In particular, consult instruction sheet L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator and Contributor Characteristics, available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled demographic term)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While this field will be used primarily for aggregated works and for individual works named by title alone, there are situations when it will be appropriate for an individual work by one or more named creators. For example, for a musical work composed during childhood or adolescence, it would not be appropriate to record “Enfants” or “Adolescents” as a characteristic in the composer’s authority record. Instead, demographic characteristics applicable to only some of a creator’s works should be recorded in the authority records for those works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Work composed 2003-2005, completed when the composer was 14 years old)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014 $b page 4 de la couverture (Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled term and terms from one controlled vocabulary)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $i – Relationship information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, use subfield $i to record a term designating the nature of the relationship between the demographic groups recorded in the field and the work or expression. Prefer a term from a controlled vocabulary, such as the MARC relator terms, RDA relationship designators, or RBMS relationship designators. Capitalize the first letter of the relationship term and record it in the singular. Follow the relationship term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998- February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record multiple subfield $i’s in a single 386 field. If multiple relationship terms apply to a single group of creators or contributors (e.g., a work with authors and artists from the same demographic group or an expression with editors and translators from the same demographic group), repeat the field, using different relationship terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(A compilation of works by authors and artists from Massachusetts)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different relationship terms apply to some of the creators and contributors (e.g., authors are in one demographic group and artists are in another), repeat the field, using different relationship terms. If the same relationship term applies to more than one demographic group, either repeat subfield $a in one field, or repeat the field. For clarity, when in doubt, repeat the 386 field as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Score containing works by Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler, and Strauss, with lyrics also printed as text in German and English translation)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-11]&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Time Period of Creation =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the time period of creation or origin of a work or expression. The name of the time period may specify or imply a place for which the time period is relevant. It may also specify the name of an event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMFAST, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM subject heading string, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For compilations, the field may be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the works/expressions contained within the compilation, considered collectively (using first indicator value “1”). It may also be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the compilation itself (using first indicator value “2”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR for a collection of Renaissance poetry compiled in the nineteenth century)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 388 field may be used in conjunction with, or instead of, the 046 field. When specific date(s) of creation or origin are not known, or span a long period of time, recording textual chronological terms in the 388 field may be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the indicator value differs, repeat the field. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR with 388 fields containing terms from different vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-07] &amp;lt;!--(2022-11-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX - See From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for another reason, delete any final mark of punctuation in a 4XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging rules (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying NARs or SARs that contain obsolete codes such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all 4XX references require justification; see “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Justifying_variant_access_points|Justifying variant access points]]” in the 670 section of this document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not make a 4XX that normalizes to the same form as another 4XX on the same authority record or a 1XX on any name authority record. See the section “NACO normalization” in the [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf/view DCM Z1] Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice guidelines for RDA:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Record variants found in the manifestation being cataloged:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Use cataloger's judgment;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; No limitation on the number or form of references;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Instead of or in addition to adding variants, consider providing access by adding 37X fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Example showing 378 without a variant for the fuller form of name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Establish additional NARs for the authorized access points needed to support elements used in 4XX variant access points (e.g., parent body associated with subordinate body being established).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally provide a variant form 4XX access point for a former 1XX authorized access point, unless the former authorized access point was egregiously incorrect. See the section “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX$w|Subfield $w – Control subfield]]” for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Use the established form of components in 4XX variant access points, except for non-Latin script variants, which may represent a mixture of scripts or may be entirely in a non-Latin script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally, do not remove variants unless egregiously incorrect (e.g., a non-Latin script variant that does not represent the same person).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If a form found on the manifestation being cataloged includes a variant form of a component of a 4XX variant access point, that form may be used in its entirety as an additional 4XX variant access point, provided that it is not divided into its component parts through the use of subfields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When changing the form of a superordinate body, a geographic name, or a personal name in a 1XX, update all of the existing NARs that use that component in a 4XX, unless the 4XX represents the former authorized access point (e.g., $w/2=e). ''Exception:'' Do not apply this instruction in the case of migrated authority records that have not been re-evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point for a person (100) is changed because the person has changed his or her name, record the earlier form of name in a 400 with $w nne if the variant is valid under RDA instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Name changed upon election as pope)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When an authorized access point for a person (100) is updated to close the date, it is recommended to save the former form with the open date in a 4XX field with $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) based on CIP cataloging is changed because its form on the published resource is different from that on the CIP galley, a 4XX from the previous authorized access point form with subfield $w nne may be added unless the former 1XX form was egregiously incorrect (e.g., the author's date of birth was given as 1775 instead of 1975 in the CIP galley).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) is changed because of a change in cataloging instructions, record the earlier form in a 4XX using $w. If the variant form is a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nne. If the variant form is not a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA; 100 form changed based on usage and dates of birth and death added because 100 was being changed)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429  av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nnea&amp;quot; because the abbreviation &amp;quot;ca.&amp;quot; is not valid for period of activity in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When changing an authorized access point because dates were recorded inaccurately or a cataloger entered a typo in the authorized access point, do not add the inaccurate form as a cross reference.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, providing authorized access points for the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Variant access points may be recorded in any SAR, including those for series-like phrases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the volumes of a multipart monograph have different forms of the common title, use a 4XX reference rather than a 5XX reference for the form of the title not chosen as the title proper of the multipart monograph.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27] &amp;lt;!--(2024-03-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D |''Manual 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX - See Also From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying a NAR that contain codes that are no longer used such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d” or “f,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers applying RDA instructions may use subfield $i in conjunction with subfield $w code “r” for relationship designators. When applying RDA relationship designators in 5XXs, supply terms from Appendix I, J or K; capitalize the initial letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the use of relationship designators and/or $w codes in a specific 5XX field, see the section in this Manual for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the conventions in the authority format for use of subfield $w. Do not supply subfield $w unless a value other than “n” would be appropriate in one of the positions. When supplying subfield $w,&lt;br /&gt;
give it as the first subfield in the field. Supply character positions preceding, but not succeeding, the value, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = to indicate a reference from an earlier authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = to indicate a reference from a later authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = to indicate that a subfield $i or subfield $4 is used to denote relationship information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = to indicate a see also reference for multiple pseudonyms (record also contains a 663 field)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A see also reference tracing (5XX) must not normalize to the same as another see also reference in the same authority record, unless both 5XX fields contain a relationship designator in subfield $i, and&lt;br /&gt;
the texts of the relationship designators are different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500  See Also From Tracing - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” when providing relationship links between a personal name and 1) the name of another person, family, or corporate body or 2) the authorized access point for a work or expression. This technique may also be used to relate authorized access points for works and expressions containing personal names. When using a term from Appendix I, J or K in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording pseudonymous relationships for personal names when only two authority records are involved, catalogers may either 1) use subfield $i and code “r” in subfield $w or 2) use simple see-also references. For more information on these techniques and instructions on recording multiple pseudonyms (i.e., those involving a 663 field), see the [http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/pseud.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA Practice for Creating NARs for Persons Who Use Pseudonyms]. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are reminded that when a variant name (400) and an authorized access point (100) are in conflict an addition should be made to either the 400 or 100 to resolve the conflict (e.g., fuller form of name, date of activity, etc.); the previous practice of changing the 400 to a 500 to resolve the conflict is no longer an option. When catalogers encounter a variant form in a 500 field in the course of updating a NAR, they should resolve the conflict and change the field to a 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510  See Also From Tracing - Corporate Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511  See Also From Tracing - Meeting Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html BAC-BAnQ PS 11.13.1.8] for guidance on relating authority records for ongoing conferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530  See Also From Tracing - Uniform Title =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded &amp;quot;r&amp;quot; when providing relationship links between authorized access points for works or expressions. When supplying RDA Appendix J terms in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551  See Also From Tracing - Geographic Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” until relationship designators for places are developed. (Currently RDA has a placeholder for Appendix L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Series Numbering Peculiarities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#641_Series_Numbering_Peculiarities|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Series Numbering Example =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#642_Series_Numbering_Example|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Series Place and Publisher/Issuing Body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#643_Series_Place_and_Publisher.2FIssuing_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Series Analysis Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#644_Series_Analysis_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Series Tracing Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#645_Series_Tracing_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Series Classification Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#646_Series_Classification_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Complex See Also Reference - Name =&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 663 field contains the explanatory text and authorized access points for relationships between a 100 (established name) and other 100s (established names) that cannot be adequately conveyed by one or more simple see also references generated from 500 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, this situation occurs when a person uses more than two identities, when more than one person shares an identity with one or more others, or when multiple persons use the same pseudonym independent of each other or as a result of some other arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text of the 663 may be adjusted to fit extraordinary situations; however, keep the text as simple as possible, allowing the MARC fields and coding to convey the information desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use the 663 technique to show relationships between corporate bodies or between persons and corporate bodies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is found in the [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA and AACR2 practice for creating NARs for persons who use pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Only two identities ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When only two NARs are created for a person, the NARs are generally connected with 500 see also references and no 663 field. However, when one of the NARs is for a joint pseudonym or a pseudonym used by several persons working independently of each other, the 663 technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== More than two identities - &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; authorized access point and references ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more than two authorized access points are created for the same person, identify a “basic” authorized access point using the 663 field technique. This decision is based on the desire to simplify the reference structure and to assist catalogers in determining which name to use as the subject of biographical or critical works. The “basic” authorized access point should be determined by the predominantly used form of name or, lacking sufficient evidence, by choosing the real name of the person as the “basic” form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the authority record for the “basic” name authority record add 500 see also references with a subfield w coded “nnnc” from all other names used. Justify the 500 in 670 citations according to normal practice. Provide a 663 field listing all the other names with the following text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name] $b [established form of&lt;br /&gt;
name]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On each of the other name authority records, trace a 500 see also reference with subfield $w coded “nnnc” from the “basic” name, justifying that reference in a 670 citation, according to normal practice. Other names may be mentioned in the 670 if it is convenient to do so. Provide a 663 field with the following or similar text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name chosen as the basic heading]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the author uses another new name, create a new name authority record for that name and also add it to the reference structure and 663 listing on the authority record for the “basic” name. References to the new name in the 500 and 663 fields are only added to the “basic” NAR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Joint pseudonyms ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A joint pseudonym represents one identity used by two or more persons working in collaboration with each other. If a person uses a joint pseudonym and another name (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for joint pseudonym:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer.  Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on joint pseudonym NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on joint pseudonym NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonyms used by multiple persons ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When multiple persons working independently of each other use the same pseudonym and one or more other names (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for pseudonym used by multiple persons:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; NAR for first 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;(''Author has a pseudonym used by multiple persons and individual pseudonyms'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#663_Complex_See_Also_Reference-Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Nonpublic general note =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give information of permanent value and general interest that would be useful also to PFAN institutions and outside of PFAN. A representative listing of notes is given below. Generally, wording is recommended but not prescriptive unless specified in the instructions. The separate 667 fields may be given in any order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use OCLC record)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [reason for coding].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date updated].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Used for official language changes'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Appendice 1 in this manual for information and instructions about 667 fields added to authority records as part of a special project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for persons with identities not established ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a person uses two or more identities in manifestations, name authority records may be created for each identity. In the interest of efficiency, catalogers may use a 667 field to list pseudonyms not found in publications instead of creating NARs for these unused pseudonyms. In this case, list the unused pseudonyms in a 667 field following the phrase: “Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This note may also be added to an NAR for a person who has multiple NARs for multiple identities when some of the pseudonyms are not found in publications. In this case, list only the unused pseudonyms in the 667 field, and follow appropriate instructions for the other pseudonyms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is available in the manual, 663 section, and the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/ LC/PCC Practice for Creating NARs for Persons who use Pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for series of conferences, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 field on the NAR for the collective conference when there are authority records for both collective and individual instances of an ongoing conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs and subject usage ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply these instructions when creating new NARs and revising existing NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Add notes indicating subject cataloging usage when an authorized access point is not appropriate for use as a subject heading for these situations:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Heads of state, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This instruction applies to NARS for corporate bodies representing the office when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point for the corporate body. See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Government Officials)] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html RDA 11.2.2.26 (Religious Officials)] for instructions on the corporate bodies. Use this 667 note on the NAR for the corporate body to indicate subject cataloging usage:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [personal name heading].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value “n” in 008/11 and value “b” in 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|008/11]] and [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|008/15]] in this manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Earlier/later linear jurisdictional name changes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;politique d'indexation du RVM&amp;quot; is to assign as a subject access point or as a geographic subdivision only the latest name of a political jurisdiction that has had one or more earlier names, as long&lt;br /&gt;
as the territorial identity remains essentially unchanged (see &amp;quot;Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval&amp;quot;, 5.14.3.1). When creating a NAR with an earlier/later authorized access point for a place in in this situation, catalogers must add a 667 subject usage note to the authority record with the earlier place name and adjust the appropriate 008 fields (008/11 and 008/15).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NARs for fictitious characters'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access points for families are not valid for subject use. In an NAR for a family, 008/11 should be set to value “n” and 008/15 should be set to “b.” Per LAC-BAnQ PS 9.0, when creating an NAR&lt;br /&gt;
for a family add this 667 field noting subject usage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Add this note to a name authority record for a city section indicating that it is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision (see SHM H 835 for more information):&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) NARs for families&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Authorized access points for family names are valid for subject use. For family name authority records that reflect past practice (which considered them invalid for subject use), update the records to set the 008/11 values to “v” and 008/15 values to “a” and delete the following subject usage note:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Non-Latin script reference notes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In an authority record that contains a non-Latin script variant access point, use the 667 field with a note stating: “Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.” If there are multiple non-Latin script variant access points, use a note stating: “Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.” Assign 008/29 value “b” to indicate that the variant access point is not evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Duplicates ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add the following note to a name authority record that has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number from the record to keep&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#667_Nonpublic_General_Note|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Sources found =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of this field is to record information about the name or title represented in the 1XX field. It includes facts that contribute to the identification of the entity, that justify the choice of the name&lt;br /&gt;
or title and any additional elements used to construct the authorized access point (1XX). The information also justifies, as needed, variant forms of the name or title (4XX), other identifying elements (046, 3XX,&lt;br /&gt;
and 678), and clarifies relationships between the 1XX and other entities in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Functions of the 670 field:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information, from sources (e.g., books, phone calls, websites), in support of the choice and form of the authorized access point, variants, and other identifying elements&lt;br /&gt;
* To store information that may be used to break a conflict later&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information on relationships between entities (e.g., a person is the author of a work, a corporate body was absorbed by another corporate body)&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify a person with works in diverse subject areas or of diverse forms&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify different individuals whose access points must remain identical for now (i.e., undifferentiated personal names) &lt;br /&gt;
* To clarify whether different forms of a name or of a title are simply variations or reflect a  change in the name or title&lt;br /&gt;
* To record research required by the current guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
* To facilitate authority and bibliographic file maintenance, i.e., the information in 670 fields aids in making decisions about duplicate authorized access points and misattributions&lt;br /&gt;
* To support machine manipulation based on algorithms using information in the 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, the first 670 field cites the resource for which the authority record is being established, i.e., the resource being cataloged. If the resource being cataloged or consulted provides no information to&lt;br /&gt;
justify the authorized access point, variants, or other elements recorded in the NAR, see the 675 section of this Manual for instructions on citing the resource in a 675 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give subsequent 670 fields in any order, adding new fields after existing ones. Do not routinely delete or change existing 670 fields when adding new 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding subsequent 670 fields, prefer objective, authoritative sources (e.g., an encyclopedia) and those sources that provide firsthand information (e.g., an author's blog). Use sources that provide additional information rather than repeating information that is already present in other 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Best practices for 670 fields:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* In subfield $b, summarize and edit information found as needed to avoid extraneous or repetitive information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Avoid citing subjective information or information that is of dubious value in identifying an entity within a bibliographic context.&lt;br /&gt;
* Exercise caution when recording information about living persons that may be private or controversial in nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 fields in existing NARs may not conform to these guidelines. For example, 670 fields in older NARs may lack subfield $b with justifying information. 670 fields in NARs that were part of a special project may not conform to these guidelines and/or may contain information that seems unusual or incorrect. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' The examples given throughout the following text have various conventions in regard to punctuation and style. These conventions are not prescriptive and should be considered as best practices to facilitate the exchange of information in a shared database environment. Catalogers are expected to use judgment and common sense. Punctuation and style need not be consistent from record to record as long as the information is clear and accurate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format of 670 fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the exception of the eszett (ß or ſʒ) and the euro sign (€), all characters found in the [http://www.loc.gov/marc/specifications/specchartables.html MARC code table] are valid for use in authority records contributed to the Canadiana Authority File ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html voir LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). When pasting data from a website into a 670 field, verify that all characters are valid for use in the record. Some non-valid characters resemble those that are valid. For example, the invalid en dash (–) resembles the valid hyphenminus (-).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a substitution for a symbol that cannot be reproduced is given in brackets (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html LAC-BAnQ PS for 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS for 1.7.5]),  an explanation of that interpolation may also be provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data must be given in romanized form. Normally it is understood that the cataloger has provided the romanization; therefore, when transcribing romanization found in the source, add after it the bracketed&lt;br /&gt;
phrase ['''forme romanisée''']. In such languages as Arabic and Hebrew, where vowels are commonly omitted from the orthography of texts, the cataloger supplies the missing vowels when transcribing data. When&lt;br /&gt;
transcribing text that does include the vowels, add after it in brackets ['''vocalisé'''] or ['''en partie vocalisé'''] as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a cataloger chooses to provide nonroman script variant access points, the 670 $b should contain both the nonroman script transcription(s) found in the source, and the systematically romanized form(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When authority records are created using automated authority generation programs, additional information may be included. This data may also be formatted in a different way than instructed in this document. Generally, this data should be retained as generated to maintain the cost effectiveness of this process unless the data is confusing or causes validation errors. The exceptions to this are names and&lt;br /&gt;
titles for which NARs are created. Follow the instructions in those sections for recording this data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Source citation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The title proper of the resource being cited, complete enough for later identification in an online catalog. Abbreviations and ellipses may be used. Precede a generic or indistinctive title with the creator's name that would begin the authorized access point for the work. If the authorized access point for the work is the same as the title proper plus a qualifier, it may be provided instead of the title proper to avoid ambiguity. When information in subfield $a of a 670 field is provided to justify an authorized or variant access point, follow the additional instructions at ''Recording names and titles''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The date of publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Multipart monographs.'' If the part is the first part, give the date of publication as an open date.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Serials other than monographic series.'' Generally, use a chronological designation instead of a publication date. If there is no designation date, use the numeric designation and the date of publication. Indicate, following the designation statement, if a “surrogate” was used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Integrating resources.'' Apply the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] for source of the title proper of a website. Identify the iteration from which information was taken (e.g., “viewed on”dates for updating websites, update number or release number for updating loose-leafs).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Information found'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $b:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The specific location(s) of the information found. For multipart resources with numbered parts, provide the designation of the part and the location within the part (e.g., v. 6, page 10; map recto, label). Abbreviations or spelled-out forms may be used (e.g., t.p. or title page, v. 6 or volume 6).&lt;br /&gt;
# Information found. Following the location, cite the information found there, enclosed in parentheses. As appropriate, give multiple occurrences of information from the same source following the location of the information. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George ; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' If the authorized access point is built from Cataloguing in Publication data, include &amp;quot;CIP&amp;quot; in the location statement (e.g., formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The greenhouse approach, 2019 : $b page de titre du CIP (Chitra Anand) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Canadienne)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Internet resources.''' For websites, provide the name of the location within the website if appropriate (e.g., about us; history, timeline; government, executive branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Multiple locations within a resource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' When adding new information to a 670 field created for a CIP, indicate that the new information is from the published resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; Canadienne) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; Canadienne) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs.''' For NARs, generally, use “etc.” to avoid giving more than two locations or a sequence of locations (e.g., p. 316, etc., for sequence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs.''' For SARs, always give each location separately.&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' In post-cataloging authority work without the piece in hand, use the location “ressource non disponible.” If the piece is examined again and the authority record is updated, it is allowable to edit the corresponding 670 field to provide a location and additional forms of series titles as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions from the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may optionally provide a uniform resource identifier (URI) in subfield $u of the 670 citation to link to the cited resource if it contains significant information related to the established entity&lt;br /&gt;
that cannot be cited succinctly in the authority record. Note that use of a URI in the 670 $u does not take the place of the requirement to cite relevant data in subfields $a and $b of the 670 field needed to support the authorized access point (including additions) or variants (this information will continue to be available if the site changes or disappears). However, information found in online sources may be added to the 046 or 3XX fields with the appropriate citations in subfields $v and $u and not repeated in a 670 when that information is not used in the 1XX or a 4XX. If a URI is included in a 670, it must be given in subfield $u. The subfield $u should contain only the URI and no additional data (e.g., do not enclose the URI within parentheses and do not include words in the subfield $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording names and titles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record names or series titles used in the authorized access point or variant access points in full, as they appear in the source, without abbreviation by the cataloger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When preparing an authority record for the text of a law or a subject compilation of laws, if a source being cited contains an official short title or citation title, cite that title, preceded by the term&lt;br /&gt;
“citation title” and its exact location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For corporate name authorities, include in the data cited all the hierarchy required to justify needed variant access points, Use judgment in deciding what information (e.g., subordinate body's name) is extraneous to the record being created and should not be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all of the above categories, if the only presentation of the name or title on the chief source of information is in the bibliographic title given in subfield $a of the 670 citation, repetition of the name in&lt;br /&gt;
subfield $b may be omitted, provided no important information is lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If information about an earlier or later name or title is found in the same source as the name or title in the authorized access point, give all the information in the 670 field. Do not separate the&lt;br /&gt;
information about the earlier or later name or title in order to give it in a 675 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To facilitate international contribution and use of authority records, when recording dates, generally use the spelled out or [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abbreviated] forms for months. (For dates recorded using automated authority generation programs, see the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Format of 670 fields]] section of this document.) Do not change the style of dates in existing records. As a best practice, if a date is not included in subfield $d of the 100 field, consider adding a 046 field if dates are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying variant access points ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justify names or titles given as variant access points by information cited from sources. However, justification is not required in the following cases:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variant access points made on the basis of the cataloger's awareness of different romanizations or orthographies;&lt;br /&gt;
# A variant title derived from the resource being cataloged, from other resources cataloged under the same access point, or from information in standard reference sources;&lt;br /&gt;
# References for authorized access points of corporate bodies reflecting changes due to national orthographic reform, changes in names due to an official language change, or changes involving only a parent body to which the body being established is subordinate.&lt;br /&gt;
# Optional references from AACR2 or pre-AACR 2 forms on SARs and on retrospective NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying other elements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information recorded in the 046, 3XX, or 678 field of the authority record should generally be justified unless it is otherwise obvious from information recorded in subfield $a of a 670 citation or it can&lt;br /&gt;
be easily inferred from other identifying elements recorded, including the preferred name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the 046 field and many of the 3XX fields, a subfield $u or subfield $v recorded in the same field may be used instead of or in addition to a 670. See the 046 section of this document for guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
on subfield $u and subfield $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording other data ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data to record in the authority record. Do not abbreviate or translate attributes such as title of the person ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) that appear in conjunction with personal names in statements of responsibility and that potentially could be used as part of the access point. Other data may be abbreviated or summarized. Generally informally translate other data from foreign languages into English, paraphrasing or summarizing as convenient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data other than forms of the title/phrase to record in the permanent authority record. Numbering and names of issuing bodies are not required but may be given.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special types of citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most commonly occurring citations are listed below. If these are not appropriate, devise others as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When converting information found in obsolete or non-active MARC fields (e.g., 664, 665, 666) into a 670 note, cite Canadiana in a citation such as those provided in the examples below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date of conversion] $b ([data converted from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([data moved from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC and fichier interne de BAnQ [BAnQ internal file]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cite these files in zone 670 as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; usage: [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''NARs''. Give the date of the search, using month names or abbreviations. In parentheses, prefaced by the label '''point d'accès :''' or '''points d'accès :''', give the access point (or access points) found, even if it is the same as the current authorized access point. If it is judged useful to mention one or more variants found in an authority record, give them with the label '''variante :''' or '''variantes :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different forms of the name appear in the bibliographic records, record the access point and also any forms found, including usage identical to the authorized access point. Separate the access point from the other forms, and preface the other forms with an appropriate label, e.g., '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' or '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not normally cite specific bibliographic records or the exact location of the variations found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''SARs.''. Give the date of the search, using month abbreviations, followed by the citation of the bibliographic record. In parentheses give the series statement found in that record.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] LC/NAF has been cited previously under other names, e.g., Base de données LC/NACO and Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] &amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot; for bibliographic records refers to the transcribed forms of name usually found in statements of responsibility of bibliographic records. It may also appear in other parts of the bibliographic record such as a title proper or a quoted note. Because of changes in cataloging instructions, catalogers should be careful when taking information from the publication statement, distribution statement, etc. and the series statement.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (or «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») for bibliographic records refers to a form of the name that may not represent a transcribed form. For example, in AACR2 records, a publisher's name that appeared on the resource as “ABC Publishing Company” might have been recorded in the publication statement as “ABC Pub. Co.” Normally, there is no need to cite such a form in a 670 field..&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citing other files or catalogs.''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an access point is found in a manual catalog or online database, use judgment in creating a 670 citation. Begin the 670 field with a designation of the catalog/database in which these other bibliographic records were found. There is no prescribed formulation of such citations; examples are listed below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, , [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Geographical Names Database'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide the name of the database and the date searched in subfield $a. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;The name of the database may be cited as an acronym or in full.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; In subfield $b provide names given for the entity, feature designation or class (e.g., ADM1, PPL, civil) coordinates, and name of larger place if appropriate. (Other relevant information may also be provided.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording the feature designation or class, it is acceptable to use either the code (e.g., PPL) or its spelled-out form (e.g., populated place). For foreign names, convey the name type (e.g., conventional, approved, short, etc.) within brackets or parentheses after the name. Repeat the brackets or parentheses after each name of this type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Variant names (including non-roman script names) may be given in a single listing as shown below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording the coordinates, it is acceptable to use the DMS format (degrees, minutes, seconds), the DD format (decimal degrees), or both formats.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has opted to record the DMS coordinates)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;The coordinates may be recorded as found. However, if the database displays the coordinates using colons to separate the DMS components and positive and negative values to convey the hemisphere, it is acceptable to translate the coordinates to traditional DMS format if desired. Use the degree sign (not superscript zero) to show degrees, the soft sign (modifier letter prime) for minutes, and the hard sign (modifier letter double prime) for seconds. For coordinates of latitude, a negative value corresponds to the Southern hemisphere. For coordinates of longitude, a negative value corresponds to the Western hemisphere.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has recorded the DMS coordinates as found)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has translated the DMS coordinates to traditional format from: -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic names server&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, consulté le &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;17 août 2022&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;$b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;22:53:01, 121:02:54&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Non-bibliographic sources'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the non-bibliographic source, the date, and the information. The source can be given specifically (« Lettre de l'auteur » , « Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur » , etc.) or in general terms (« Information de l'auteur » , « Information de l'éditeur » , etc.).  When noting a specific source, it isn't necessary to show how information was received, e.g, that letter was received via FAX rather than via mail. When a telephone call to a publisher/agency/organization is cited, usually give the name of the group called, rather than the title or name of the person contacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''Citations for republication SARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an SAR is for a republication only, begin the 670 with the term for the type of republication and a slash. Do not include a 670 for a republication if the SAR covers both the original and one or more republications. Do not add additional 670 fields for other types of republications cataloged later. (See 64X Series Treatment, Republications for more information about republications.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations for undifferentiated NARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on existing 670 citations found in undifferentiated NARs, see in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32 Undifferentiated Personal Name]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-11-21]&amp;lt;!--(2025-11-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#670_Source_Data_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Title related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 672 field may be used to record a title that is related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in an authority record for a corporate body, 672 fields may be used to record titles for which the corporate body is a creator, issuing body, or subject. The primary purpose of the 672 field is to document that there is a relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 672 field does not negate the need to use the 670 field for the title for which the authority record is being created, nor to use the 670 fields to justify information recorded in the 1XX and 4XX such as preferred and variant forms of name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 672 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 672 fields when inputting new 672 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 672 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 fields with titles proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Cervantes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with preferred title)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with variant title for the work associated with the Catalan expression of the work and date of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Remainder of title'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a title proper, subfield $b may be used to record the other title information or parallel title proper to eliminate confusion for titles needing further identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains other title information)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains parallel title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $f – Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $f is used to record a date appropriate to the entity recorded in $a (e.g., use date of work for a preferred title and date of publication for a title proper). Do not use brackets in $f when recording a supplied date of publication or production. Do not give a date of distribution, date of manufacture, or copyright date in $f.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for work:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of  work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for expression:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of French expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for manifestation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of publication of manifestation of Polish expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Bibliographic record control number'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $w is used to record bibliographic record control numbers (e.g., 001, 010, and 016 fields in bibliographic records). It is recommended that catalogers provide $w when readily available. Subfield $w should be repeated for each instance of a separate control number (e.g., an LCCN and an OCLC record number should be provided in separate subfields). For further instructions on inputting record control numbers, see the subfield $w section within the CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MARC 21 Format for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' subfield $w should only be used with titles for the manifestation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Title not related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 673 field may be used to record a title that is not related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. For example, in an authority record for a person, the 673 may be used to record the titles of works written by a different person with a similar name. The primary purpose of the 673 field is to document that there is no relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 673 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 673 field does not negate the need to use the 675 field as described in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#675_Sources_not_found|675 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 673 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 673 fields when inputting new 673 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 673 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 673 field. For specific subfields in the 673 field, apply the same instructions given in the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#672 Title related to the entity|672 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961- &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with different Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)### 47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with the National Gallery in London)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT NOT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #4 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Although the National of Art is not the creator, it is the publisher so this title should be record in a 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-25]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#673_Title_Not_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Sources not found =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:''Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In April 2012 this field was redefined as: “Citation for a consulted source in which no information is found related in any manner to the entity represented by the authority record or related entities.” PFAN catalogers are not required to change any existing 675 fields simply to meet this new definition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a new NAR always cite the resource being cataloged in the 675 field if the item being cataloged provides no information related in any manner to the entity represented in the authority record. Also cite in the 675 field other sources consulted that contain no information, when that very lack of information is considered worth recording for future users of the authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, it is not always necessary to include in the 675 field every reference source consulted; use judgment in deciding what sources are important enough to retain in the permanent record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#675_Source_Data_Not_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Biographical or historical data =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When supplying biographical or historical data in a 678 note field, construct the note in concise but complete sentences, keeping in mind that the information will be used in public displays.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In anticipation of LAC building the file in WMS and the batch addition of authority records from other institutions, the contents of all 665 fields in LAC and BAnQ records have been moved to 678 field. The original 665 field may have contained instructions on the access point(s) to be used as author and subject heading :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec) ; Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec) ; Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec) ; Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Delete these instructions in 678 field if they have been retained. Consider adding a 667 field as a subject heading if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification of field 678'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, a 678 field must be justified by a 670 field. If it is not justified and its contents are appropriate for a biographical or historical note, retain the field and add a 670 note citing the internal file of the institution that provided 678 field as follows :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [ [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|abréviation de la bibliothèque participante]] ], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the record has been modified after being migrated, the record history must be consulted to determine who originally added zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Existing Field 678 which will be deleted as the content is not appropriate for a biographical note.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;670 field added:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not repeat this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#678_Biographical_or_Historical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Heading linking entries =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' This section does not apply to the 781 field used in 151 name authority records to provide geographic subdivision information. See Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#781_Subdivision_linking_entry|781 section]], for instructions for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of an established heading linking entry 7XX field in an NAR or SAR is limited to recording the authorized access point from a national bibliography or in a separate national authority file or a separate equivalence.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form of heading in a 7XX field may match the 1XX form or a 4XX form in the same authority record. This is appropriate when the 7XX field form represents a form found in a different authority file than Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source of the heading in the 7XX field may be specified using either second indicator value “7” with subfield $2 or a second indicator value that specifies the source. For access points coming from the LC/NAF file, prefer the second indicator with the value &amp;quot;0&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-17]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Subdivision linking entry =&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN optional practice:'' For a geographic name heading that may also be used as a geographic subdivision, determine the form in which the heading is to be used as a geographic subdivision following the guidelines in instruction sheet [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 of the ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Enter the text of the geographic subdivision form in a 781 field with second indicator 0. For a geographic heading that is used directly, such as a country, enter the data in a single $z subfield. For a geographic heading that is used indirectly through a larger geographic entity, such as a city, enter the data in two successive $z subfields. Use no other subfields. Make no changes to values in bytes of the 008.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a record for a geographic name heading that is not appropriate for use as a subject added entry (008/15 value Ab@), such as the earlier name of a jurisdiction that has undergone a linear name change, for example, '''Ceylon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a NAR for a place name that is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision, such as a city section, for example, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Add a 781 field to an existing record when making any other change to it. If revising an existing record that contains a 667 field subject cataloging usage note indicating the proper geographic subdivision form, delete the 667 field and replace it with a 781 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-11]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#781_Subdivision_Heading_Linking_Entry-Geographic_Subdivision|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 1: Undifferentiated entities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 2: Special projects =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This appendix presents information regarding some special projects involving authority records created or modified in the Canadiana authority file. The records created or modified within the context of these special projects may include some fields or some values not normally attributed according to current cataloguing policies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instructions regarding changes to these records are given here in order to indicate whether these fields and values are to be kept or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 1. Records created or revised as part of the UQAM records revision project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is an authority records revision project, led by UQAM. These records have been created or modified in Canadiana by UQAM's cataloguing “traitement documentaire” team. These records were then revised by two librarians and a library technician, also at UQAM. This project ended March 31, 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records may be modified, like any other name authority records, according to current cataloguing policies.&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers update these records, they should:&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the value of position Leader/17 to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (full record);&lt;br /&gt;
* Delete field 667 &amp;quot;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;quot;;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Evaluate the record as they would evaluate any batch-loaded record. However, as the record is being revised, the authorized access point may be modified, if it does not follow the current PFAN practices (for instance, birth or death dates may be added, if available and if omitted from the access point).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 2. Records created and revised as part of the Universities Mentoring Project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General Information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This mentoring project &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;that, as of February,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; allows university libraries to create name authority records that are revised by another university.  Authority records created or modified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;mentored libraries&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; are revised by library technicians &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;at the mentoring university.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abbreviation, e.g. UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;, etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records should not be modified.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15] &amp;lt;!--(2022-07-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=144833</id>
		<title>PFAN - Name Authority Manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual&amp;diff=144833"/>
		<updated>2026-03-09T20:32:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 372 Field of activity */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by N. Mainville, LAC, )}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Manual}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Name Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Series Authority Records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Fixed Fields =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Descriptive cataloging code  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;All new name authority records created and contributed by PFAN catalogers must use code 008/10 “z” and include subfield $e rda in the 040 (Cataloging source) field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an existing NAR using code “a”, “b”, “c”, or “d” is modified in any way, evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA, changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1: If an existing NAR using code “c” is modified only to change or add a 5XX field, catalogers are strongly encouraged, but not required, to evaluate the NAR and re-code it to RDA,&lt;br /&gt;
changing the 008/10 code accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2: Existing undifferentiated name authority records coded 008/10 “c” may be modified to remove one or more identities in order to create differentiated RDA authority records. When modifying&lt;br /&gt;
an existing undifferentiated name authority record for this purpose, the updated undifferentiated name authority record must retain the existing 008/10 code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F10 Descriptive Cataloging Rules|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Subject heading system/thesaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR 008/11 is set to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/11 value “v” (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/11 value “n” (Not applicable), representing past practice, change the value to “v.” In the Manual, see also 008/15 for instructions on changing that value to “a” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/11&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (Not applicable) to name authority records for corporate names representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point. Also assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; in 008/15, and make a 667 note indicating the form of the access point used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples of corporate names not appropriate for use as subject headings:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F15 Heading use-subject added entry|Manual 008/15]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]].&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created NARs. Make these changes also when modifying&lt;br /&gt;
existing name authority records for any reason.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F11 Subject Heading System.2FThesaurus|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Heading use-subject added entry ==&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;General&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When applying RDA Chapter 9 for fictitious characters assure that the NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; is set to &amp;quot;b.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Family names&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Assign 008/15 value “a” (Appropriate) to name authority records for families.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If an existing name authority record for a family has 008/15 value “b” (Not appropriate), representing past practice, change the value to “a.” In the Manual, see also 008/11 for instructions on changing that value to “v” and 667 section “NARs and subject usage” on deleting the subject usage note.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Corporate names for high government and religious officials'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Background:'' For Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental&lt;br /&gt;
bodies, Religious officials, and Popes, descriptive catalogers may be required to establish an authorized&lt;br /&gt;
access point for the corporate name for the office as well as a personal name for the office holder. It is&lt;br /&gt;
subject cataloging policy to assign only the personal name, not the corporate name, as a subject access&lt;br /&gt;
point. This policy was established for collocation purposes (cf. [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
may be used in descriptive cataloging as an access point, but in subject cataloging only the personal name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
would be used as a subject access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; (Not appropriate) to name authority records for corporate entities representing the office held for Heads of state, heads of governments, etc., International intergovernmental bodies, Religious officials, and Popes when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the entry. Also assign value &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; in 008/11, and make a 667 note indicating the form used in subject cataloging.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#008.2F11 Subject heading system.2Fthesaurus|Manual 008/11]] and the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#667 Nonpublic general note|Manual 667]] section &amp;quot;NARs and subject usage.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Correct existing records when making any other change to the records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19]&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F15 Heading Use-Subject Added Entry|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Undifferentiated personal name ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== General === &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use 008/32 code “b” (undifferentiated) in an RDA name authority record. Assign 008/32 value “a” for personal name NARs. Use code “n” for families, corporate bodies, and places. For works and expressions, assign value “a” if the access point begins with a personal name, otherwise assign value “n”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the past, personal name NARs could be coded as undifferentiated using 008/32 value “b” when the cataloger had no acceptable way of differentiating multiple persons with the same preferred name. Since then, PFAN have followed these guidelines for personal name NARs:&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not create new undifferentiated records coded 008/32 “b”. All personal name authority records coded RDA should be differentiated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not add a new identity to an existing personal name authority record coded 008/32 “b.”&lt;br /&gt;
* Instead, apply [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] to create a unique authorized access point for the person, using suitable additional elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Maintenance of existing undifferentiated records: ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' If the only record found for an entity is an undifferentiated record (with field 008/32 coded &amp;quot;b&amp;quot;) from a university with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN », do not use it.  Create a new authority record for the entity.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated record to LAC by emailing the OCLC control number to pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca with the subject line: Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
LAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may happen that an existing undifferentiated name authority record, especially one that has been imported from LC/NAF, contains pairs of 670 fields used to group information about each individual covered by the NAR. The first 670 in the pair is an “identifying” 670 field containing a term descriptive of the person's relationship to the title cited in the second 670 of the pair. The data in the identifying 670 field is contained in subfield $a and enclosed in square brackets. The second 670 in the pair is a “citation” 670 that contains the normal data elements in a resource being cataloged citation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Added entry for Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Editor of Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, an existing undifferentiated name authority record may include a 667 note indicating that the record is undifferentiated and identifying the resource(s) associated with other persons with the same name. In this case, the record generally does not include 670 fields for persons other than the first one identified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When information is found to distinguish a person in an existing undifferentiated from LAC or BAnQ name record:&lt;br /&gt;
* Always create a new name authority record for that person, with distinguishing information, and add an indication that the person was formerly on an undifferentiated record (see &amp;quot;[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_notes_on_records_for_identities_previously_on_undifferentiated_records|667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records]]&amp;quot; below). If an authority record already exists for that person with the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer the &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;citation&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not transfer the “identifying” 670 to the new NAR.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note &amp;quot;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the undifferentiated NAR is not being deleted because multiple identities remain, delete the pair of 670 fields pertaining to the newly created NAR &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(i.e., in the undifferentiated NAR, delete both the &amp;quot;identifying&amp;quot; 670 and the &amp;quot;citation&amp;quot; 670)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
* If more than one identity remains in the undifferentiated NAR, and there is not sufficient information in the NAR to create new NARs for each name, leave the NAR coded AACR2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to facilitate machine processing of authority records (e.g., matching, linking), when only one identity is left on an undifferentiated personal name authority record (i.e., other identities are being&lt;br /&gt;
disambiguated and removed), take the following steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Create a new NAR for the remaining single identity. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ») and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.  The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. In the new record:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Transfer the citation 670 pertaining to that person from the undifferentiated name record to the new name authority record and edit as necessary.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 note:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the 667 note  « CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN ».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assure that the undifferentiated NAR only contains information relevant to the single identity remaining (e.g., 670s). If applicable, delete field 667 indicating that the record is undifferentiated.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add that information in the 667 note on the undifferentiated record to assure that a duplicate NAR will not be created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of differentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated LAC record''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New notice for the author of Histoire du département de la Manche:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Hydraulique urbaine:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number] $z [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of undifferentiated record derived from LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the author of Esperanza:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation. Remained identify is for the illustrator of Reptiles:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
New record for the illustrator of Reptiles :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008red/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 667 notes on records for identities previously on undifferentiated records ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add a 667 note to a new NAR to identify the Canadiana number of the authority record in which information about that person had been recorded:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Records coded as undifferentiated that actually represent only one identity ====&lt;br /&gt;
Occasionally an existing record will be coded undifferentiated, but new research indicates that in fact the record represents only one identity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may also happen that we suspect that the value &amp;quot;b&amp;quot; has been mistakenly coded in field 008/32. In such cases, proceed as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 field to the undifferentiated NAR indicating that it has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Create a new name authority record for the identity. The authorized access point itself may be differentiated or it may be identical to the authorized access point in the undifferentiated NAR. If an authority record already exists for that entity with the 667 note &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot; and coded &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; in field 008/32, use that notice as the &amp;quot;new record&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a 667 note: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use the OCLC control number..)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add in 016 field subfield $z the Canadiana number of the undifferentiated name authority record to be deleted, if any.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Re-evaluate the new name authority record if it contains the note 667 &amp;quot; CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN &amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;PFAN cataloguer: Report the undifferentiated name authority record to [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suggested generic message:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BAC cataloguer: Delete the undifferentiated authority record.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example of an undifferentiated record that represents a single identity''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record before disambiguation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Undifferentiated authority record after disambiguation  :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;New authority record after disambiguation&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [New Canadiana number]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [no Canadiana number, use OCLC number from undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement#008.2F32 Undifferentiated personal name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/33 Level of establishment  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARS'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Provisional''' (008/33 value “c”) records:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Code an NAR as provisional (008/33 value “c”) if the authorized access point cannot be formulated satisfactorily because of inadequate information. If the necessary information later becomes available, re-evaluate the NAR and upgrade it to fully established (008/33 value “a”). In no case should a provisional-level authority record be created with an access point that conflicts with an existing NAR according to PFAN normalization rules.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Special administrative regions of Hong Kong and Macau'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Because there is uncertainty about whether Hong Kong and Macau will continue to have two official languages, code all NARs for government bodies in these two places, at the level of the special administrative region and below, as provisional (008/33 value “c”), regardless of the language in which the authorized access point has been established. If a form in the second of the two official languages becomes available, add that form as a variant access point rather than revising the existing authorized access point. Consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] and the [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html related policy statement] for instructions on choosing the language of the referred name. Please note that this policy for provisional status does not apply to non-government bodies.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additional information for PFAN participants'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN participants may also create provisional records in the following two exceptional situations:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library does not have the language expertise to establish the authorized access point as a fully established authority record; this would include situations where the library lacked adequate reference sources for research or where the cataloger was not confident of the correct grammatical form for the access point.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the contributing library is unable, due to limited resources or other constraints, to complete related authority work or to determine the appropriate reference structure that is required for fully established authority records.&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preliminary''' (008/33 value “d”) records:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Preliminary authority records (008/33 value “d”) generally are the result of retrospective projects. PFAN catalogers are expected to routinely upgrade NARs coded preliminary when making other modifications to the record. Because of this maintenance requirement, PFAN participants are asked to contact the PFAN Standards Committee before embarking on projects that may result in large numbers of NARs coded preliminary being added to the NACO Authority File.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;As needed, catalogers may upgrade NARs coded preliminary when working with earlier/later corporate body records, even if the access points in the records being upgraded are not used in the local bibliographic database. Occasionally catalogers may need to create a new NAR without having an item in hand, e.g., for an earlier or later name heading using information from reference sources, or a heading based on information found in field 245 subfield “c” of bibliographic records when resolving NAR conflicts. Do not code these occasional NARs as “preliminary”.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records&lt;br /&gt;
are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, series data elements should be viewed on the publication and series authority records should be coded “a” (full). In post-cataloging authority work it is permissible to create SARs without the piece in hand; these records are coded “d” (preliminary). When a publication in the series has been examined and the preliminary authority record reviewed and updated as necessary, upgrade the SAR to full level.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F33_Level_of_establishment|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Cataloging source ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Whatever value is originally input into this field remains; do not change this value when updating a record unless the original value was incorrect.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas « blanc » pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou « c » (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a). --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#008.2F39_Cataloging_source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 National Bibliographic Agency Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 016 is mandatory whenever a cataloguer creates, updates or uses an authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an authority record, and when updating or using an existing record without a Canadiana number in field 016, first check the LC/NAF to see if the same entity is represented by an authority record, and if this authority record includes a Canadiana number. Note that the authorized access point, in the LC/NAF, may be different from the Canadiana access point.  If the LC/NAF record does include a Canadiana number, add this number to the Canadiana record, changing the final E to an F (or adding an F at the end of the Canadiana number, if there is no final letter). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When updating or using an existing authority record that includes a Canadiana number, please check that the language code F is present at the end of the field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Duplicates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not “reuse” a Canadiana number. Once an authority record has been created for a given entity, and once a Canadiana number has been attributed, do not change the data in this authority record to describe a DIFFERENT entity. For instance, do not change the authority record for “Dupont, Jean” to transform it into an authority record describing “Tremblay, Marie” (except if the person's name has changed). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, ask that the duplicate be deleted (see [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Procedures for duplicates]]). DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no field 016 in the record to be deleted, please add one, using the number 0000X0000F. Do not record this number in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
See also the “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Duplicates|Duplicates]]” section in this Manual, field 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When identifying a duplicate, delete it. DO NOT “reuse” the authority record to describe a different entity. This causes problems for bibliographic services and for other library systems. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If field 016 is present in the authority record to be deleted, record the Canadiana number of the deleted record in field 016, subfield $z, in the preferred authority record.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Partially modified batch-loaded authority records'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Batch-loaded authority records which are partially modified, according to the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]], will include Canadiana number 1111X1111F. This temporary number is added in order to allow the cataloguer to save the record, until such time as the entire record is evaluated to make sure it follows all PFAN standards. This number will have to be replaced by a unique number once the record is evaluated, when the 667 note “CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN” is deleted. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 International Standard Serial Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Record the ISSN whenever it is available from the item in hand, from analytic bibliographic records, or from the collected set bibliographic record for the series; otherwise, recording the ISSN is optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it is known there are separate ISSN assigned to different formats of a series represented by a single SAR, prefer to record in 022 subfield $a the ISSN that is the linking ISSN (ISSN-L) for the different formats. Identify ISSN for specific formats in separate 667 fields, following this pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the title of a publication has changed, confirm that an ISSN appearing on the publication belongs to the new title and not to the earlier title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An incorrect ISSN can be given in a 667 field (e.g., “ISSN 1122-3344 is not a valid ISSN for this publication”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03] &amp;lt;!--(2021-11-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Other standard identifier =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the guidelines in [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf NACO Best Practices] for the 024 Field. As a general rule, limit the number of 024 fields in a NACO authority record to five. Do not routinely delete or change existing 024 fields when adding new ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are not required to maintain identifiers coded in the 024 field of PFAN authority records. When an 024 field is present in an authority record that is being reported for deletion (for example, in the case of a duplicate), catalogers should transfer the field to the record that is to be retained. When two authority records are being collapsed into one, and each record has a different 024 field, catalogers should include both 024 fields in the updated record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Coded cartographic mathematical data =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for countries, states, counties'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for outside limits (bounding boxes or polygons) should generally be used with larger geographic entities such as countries, states, and counties to identify the coordinates of the entity. The&lt;br /&gt;
coordinates may be recorded in either degrees/minutes/seconds, decimal degrees, decimal minutes, and/or decimal seconds. Styles should not be mixed in a single 034 field, but the field may be repeated to&lt;br /&gt;
represent the different styles (see below for conversion utilities); the order of 034 fields when both styles are given does not matter. To facilitate the reuse of coordinates in geographic applications, the point (not the comma) should be used as the decimal point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrees/minutes/seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees''': record in the form hddd.dddddd (hemisphere-degrees.decimal degrees)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal degrees with plus ou minus''': record in the form +-ddd.dddddd (hemisphere[+/-]-degrees.decimal degrees) (“+” or N and E, “-” for S and W ; the plus sign is optional)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example with +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example without the optional plus sign)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal minutes''': record in the form hdddmm.mmmm (hemisphere-degrees-minutes.decimal minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Decimal seconds''': record in the form hdddmmss.sss (hemisphere-degrees-minutes-seconds.decimal seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Recording coordinates for cities, towns, and townships'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Coordinates for cities, towns, and townships should generally be recorded as center points rather than outside limits. For the 034 field, the longitude and latitude that form the central axis are recorded&lt;br /&gt;
twice to define the center point (i.e., the contents of $d and $e are identical, the contents of $f and $g are identical).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing degrees/minutes/seconds)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Example showing decimal degrees with plus/minus)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Coordinate Conversion Tools'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN institutions are encouraged to provide both degrees/minutes/seconds and decimal degrees when available. Numerous conversion tools are available on the Web to derive one from the other.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 has been defined for recording the source of the coordinate information– codes for commonly used sources are available from: [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/cartographic-data.html ''Cartographic Data Source Codes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 citation to the source would not be required if the only information from the source is recorded in field 034; a 670 citation should be made if necessary to record information beyond coordinates, such as variant names, hierarchy, time period of applicability, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#034_Coded_Carographic_Mathematical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 System Control Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#035_System_Control_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Cataloging source =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Language of cataloging'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $b fre added automatically by WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $d – Modifying agency'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $d [MARC 21 code] is added automatically by WMS when modifying NARs or SARs unless your institution's is already the last MARC subfield $d in the 040 field. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $e – Description conventions'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
All new authority records created and submitted by PFAN cataloguers must have the code &amp;quot;z&amp;quot; in Field 008/10 and include the $e rda subfield in Field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding the subfield $e manually, add it after subfield $b and before $c. It is not necessary to move the subfield $e to this position if it is already present elsewhere in the 040 or if it is being added by a macro or a template. Subfield $e rda is automatically added by the system in NARs and SARs when fixed field 008/10 (Rules) is set to “z” (Other).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#040_Cataloging_Source|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Authentication Code =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This field is found in all authority records used by LAC. Do not modify or delete this field when code CaOONL appears in field 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers (other than LAC cataloguers) derive an authority record from an LAC record which includes field 042, they must remember to delete this field.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the Canadiana authority file, cataloguers must add 042 $a nlc every time they create, derive or revise an authority record. This code identifies the “virtual” Canadian authority file, which is spread across two separate authority files (LC/NAF and Canadiana). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#042_Authentication_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Geographic Area Code &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 043 can only be used in authority records for geographical names (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield b – Local GAC code and Subfield $2 – Source of local code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For sites located in Quebec, PFAN participants can use subfield $b to record a local code from the list below, representing the administrative region of Quebec where the site is located. This code is formed by the geographic region code &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; and a two-letter sub-entity local code (e.g., qa) that identifies the administrative region and replaces the last two characters of the &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot; code (e.g., &amp;quot;n-cn---&amp;quot;). (e.g. &amp;quot;n-cn-qa&amp;quot;). Subfield $b is recorded after subfield $a and is followed by subfield $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#043_Geographic_Area_Code|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Special coded dates =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: When encoding date information, give the fullest information about the date that is readily available (the date in field 046 may be more precise than a date used in the 100 subfield $d). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2nd_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;When&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; revising existing authority records, record dates in field 046 even if the heading itself does not have dates in 100 subfield $d, when the information is readily available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording dates in field 046, use the Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) schema in all cases except for centuries; supply dates using the pattern yyyy, yyyy-mm, or yyyy-mm-dd. See date table in [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html LAC-BanQ PS 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt; For the full EDTF specification, see [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophonist)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bryant, W. Blues around the clock [SR] 1945: $b label (Johnny Hicks, tenor sax)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Discogs website, May 27, 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; tenor sax player who performed with Tab Smith in the 1940s)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording B.C. dates in the 046 field, precede the digits by a hyphen (minus sign). Because there is no year “zero” in the common era calendar, subtract one year from the actual B.C. date, e.g., the year 50 B.C. is recorded -0049.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a century in the 046 field, use the first two digits of the hundred year span (e.g., use “16” to represent the 17th century, 1600–1699). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the 1st century A.D. is represented by value “00” and B.C. centuries have a hyphen &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;minus &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sign)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; before the digits (e.g., “-04” for the 5th century B.C.). An approximate century (e.g., active approximately 12th century) cannot be recorded in the 046 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Repeatability:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Field 046 is repeatable, but the 046 subfields used to record the dates are not repeatable. Generally, one 046 field with dates conforming to the EDTF schema should be sufficient. However, century dates follow the ISO 8601 standard, not EDTF. When recording century dates in addition to more precise dates, it is therefore necessary to repeat the 046 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Conflicting dates'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, resources consulted may present conflicting dates (e.g., conflicting birth or death dates for a person, or start or end dates for a corporate body). In these situations, the 046 field should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information. It is not necessary to record all the conflicting dates using field 046, nor is it necessary to give a 046 field for each resource consulted. Evaluation of the conflicting dates should generally result in a single 046 field, containing the date(s) the cataloger judges to be most accurate in representing the entity. At the cataloger's discretion, the date(s) recorded in that 046 field may incorporate the conflicting date information and need not correspond exactly to the date(s) selected for the authorized access point.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Similarly, any dates added to the authorized access point should reflect the cataloger's evaluation of the conflicting date information, recorded in conformance with the instructions in RDA and the PFAN Policy Statements. If one date predominates in the resources consulted, that date may be considered the most appropriate to use in the authorized access point. If a single date does not predominate, the cataloger may decide to use the “approximately yyyy”, “yyyy?”, or “yyyy or yyyy” format in the authorized access point. In some cases, dates corresponding to the period of activity of the person (RDA 9.19.1.5) may be considered the best choice.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 157 B.C. as the approximate date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary. authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger has chosen 1907 as the date of birth in both the authorized access point and field 046 because it occurs most frequently in the sources consulted)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Same example as above, reflecting a different decision the cataloger might have made for recording 046 subfield $f)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Because the 046 field will be based on information from multiple sources, justification cannot be accurately expressed in subfield $v/$u at the end of the 046 field. The conflicting dates should be recorded in 670 fields. If an existing record has subfield $v/$u as 046 field justification, and the 046 field is being updated as described above, the subfield $v/$u should be removed, and the justification converted to a 670 field, if the conflicting dates are not already justified in an existing 670 field.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Uncertain dates resulting from date calculations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;In some situations, a calculation may be required to determine which dates to record in the 046 field and the authorized access point. Such calculations may result in uncertain dates.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the consulted resources provide only the person's date of death and their age (in years) at the time of death, as often happens with obituaries, their year of birth will correspond to one of two consecutive years. To calculate those years, first subtract the age from the year of death, then use the resulting year plus its preceding year as the two alternatives for the year of birth.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Cataloger subtracted 75, the age at death, from 1994, the year of death; the resulting year, 1919, and the year preceding it, 1918, represent the two possible alternatives for the year of birth)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If non-Gregorian dates are found in consulted resources, uncertain dates may result from calendar conversion differences. Gregorian calendar dates are used in the 046 field and authorized access point. A single date in a non-Gregorian calendar may correspond to one of two Gregorian dates. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(The Hijri calendar date 1346 H converts to either 1967 or 1968 in the Gregorian calendar.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of date scheme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always add subfield $2 edtf except after a century. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfields $q – Establishment date, $r – Termination date,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Start period, and $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Record dates associated with a one-time conference, etc., or a single instance of a&lt;br /&gt;
series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] and [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), use subfields $s and $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Use the establishment date  ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) and the termination date ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) of a series of conferences, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-en_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]) in subfields $q and $r, if that information is known.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on using $s and $t for start and end periods in fields 368, and 370-376, see the instructions provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following represents PFAN practice on recording sources of information in $u and $v in fields where they are defined, and/or in field 670: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;670s must be used to support information used as part of a heading in 1XX and 4XX fields.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;For fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $v is optional if the same information/source is already cited in the 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use $v if the information/source is not cited in a 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;use of $u is optional, and should always be preceded by $v&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Use a 670 field if needed to justify information recorded in other fields for which subfields $u and/or $v are not defined or defined differently. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the same basic citation principles when recording data in subfield $v (Source of information) of fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 that currently apply to field 670 subfield $a (Source citation).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Supply specific citation information (page number, sub-page of website) in subfield $v if, in the cataloger's judgment, this greater specificity is needed to find the information within the source cited. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information in fields 046, 368, 370-378, and 381 is in the same form as found in the source, there is no need to cite usage information. If the information recorded in those fields is in a different form from that in the source, use 670 $b (Information found). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For tangibles sources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the information was derived from a tangible source (e.g., a print book, removable digital media) subfield $v should contain sufficient information for a cataloger to find the item cited in a catalog&lt;br /&gt;
or bibliographic database. This can usually be limited to title proper and imprint or date. If that combination is not unique, the title citation may be preceded by the creator's name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''For online resources:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide information sufficient to find the resource via a search engine. Include either title and publication date (if it is a formally-published resource, such as an e-book) or a suitable description of the&lt;br /&gt;
document and date accessed (for a less formal resource). Optionally include subfield $u. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-03)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Library of Congress Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#050_Library_of_Congress_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 LC classification number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used in personal name authority records to record LC classification numbers for individual literary authors, including authors of children's literature. It may also be used '''exceptionally'' in personal and corporate name authority records to record biography numbers in the ML410-429 range of the LC classification when the choice of index or cutter is not obvious. Field 053 must always include a $5 subfield.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Institution MARC Code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Class PS8000 numbers should not be recorded in field 053. For the use of PS8000 numbers in name authority records, see section 065 of this Manual. An authority record for a Canadian literary author may contain both a 053 and a 065 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Library and Archives Canada Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#055_Library_and_Archives_Canada_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Other Classification Number &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 065 is used to record PS8000 class numbers. Field 065 must always include a subfield $2 and a subfield $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [MARC code of institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Number source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2, record &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; to indicate that the number comes from the PS8000 class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#065_Other_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 080 Universal Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#080_Universal_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Dewey Decimal Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#082_Dewey_Decimal_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Dewey Decimal Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#083_Dewey_Decimal_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Government Document Call Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#086_Government_Document_Call_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Government Document Classification Number =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#087_Government_Document_Classification_Number|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Headings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers should consult the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/rda/PCC%20Post%20RDA%20Test%20Guidelines.html PCC Post RDA Test Guidelines] for instructions on using RDA and/or AACR2 in new and existing authority records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for any reason, delete a final mark of punctuation in the 1XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging&lt;br /&gt;
instructions (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: in order to minimize the impact of database maintenance with associated bibliographic records and/or related authority records, catalogers are urged to refrain from making unnecessary changes to 1XXs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN series practice: Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the title proper of a multipart monograph, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choosing a monographic series title proper:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has more than one form of series title, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has the series title in more than one language or script on the same source, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#If the resource has series title pages in more than one language and or script, consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1].&lt;br /&gt;
#&lt;br /&gt;
#Consider spacing and changes in typography when determining where the series title begins and ends. Also consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Establishing an SAR access point:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Determine choice of authorized access point based on [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] and its associated LAC-BAnQ PS.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclude from the authorized access point the following information included in the series statement in the bibliographic record for the component part:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;initial article in subfields $a, $t, $n, and $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;other title information;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;statement of responsibility;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;parallel title(s);&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;numeric/chronological designations.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Add a parenthetical qualifier(s) if appropriate according to the guidelines in LAC-BAnQ PS 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on converting an existing NAR to an SAR, see Should an SAR be made? in the Introduction of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-10-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Heading - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for families'''&lt;br /&gt;
'''''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “3” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a family. See in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#667_Nonpublic_general_note|667]] section, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|NARs and subject usage]], for subject usage instructions in NARs for families.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Additions to the name are contained in a single set of parentheses separated by colons.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# The term for the type of family is added after the name and is contained in subfield $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $d (date) follows the term for the type of family.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $c is used for place associated with family and follows the date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Subfield $g is used for prominent member of family. Give authorized access point for the person as found in the 1XX of the NAR without any internal subfield coding.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Authorized access points for persons'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use first indicator value “0” or “1” in field 100 when creating an NAR for a person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield instructions''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no prescribed MARC order for the subfields beyond subfield $a in the X00 fields. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] provides guidance for the placement of words indicating relationship (e.g., Jr.) and MARC defines subfield $q as “Forme développée du nom de personne.” When providing multiple additions to the name generally follow these guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) Subfield $d (date) should always be the last element in a 100 string unless the term (Esprit) is being added to the name. Add $c (Esprit) as the last element in a 100 string.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Example:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) Generally add subfield $c before subfield $q when also adding words, numerals, etc. indicating relationship. (See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] for treatment of Portuguese names)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Example:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) For exceptional situations, such as when subfield $a contains only a surname or only a forename or the name includes a prefix, etc. consult [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&amp;lt;!--(2020-12-08)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#100_Heading-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Content Type =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Field 336 may only be used in NARs and SARs for expressions. 336 is always accompanied by a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In subfield $2 give “rdacontent/fre.” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Content type term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use terms from [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html/view RDA 6.9.1.3]. The list of terms is also available in the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Content type code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If giving subfield $b instead of/or in addition to subfield $a, use the code from the MARC format [http://www.loc.gov/standards/valuelist/rdacontent.html ''Term and Code List for RDA Content Types''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#336_Content_Type|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Other attributes of person or corporate body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary for terms in subfields $a, $b, and $c, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a, $b and $c. When terms in subfields $a and $b do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record professions or occupations in subfield $c (Other designation). Profession or occupation may be recorded in field [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#374_Occupation|374]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record titles of royalty, nobility or religious rank ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) in subfield $d in the form used in the authorized or variant access points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#368_Other_Attributes_of_Person_or_Corporate_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Associated place =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For jurisdictions or other place names with authority records in Canadiana or, failing that, the form found in the RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. The form of place name in the 370 field may differ from the form of place name added to a preferred name of place or an access point per RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Authorized access point for the place includes type of jurisdiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Authorized access point for the place includes an other designation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as part of preferred name of a local place:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name for the larger place)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Geographic name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abbreviation for the larger place per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Form of name as an addition in an access point:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Preferred name of local place modified per [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Other place name in Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point recorded in 370:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If there is no authorized access point for the place in Canadiana or RVM, it is not necessary to create an NAR in order to code the 370 field. Record the place in the 370 field following RDA and the LAC-BAnQ PSs, including consulting appropriate sources and adding additional elements (e.g., type of jurisdiction) to break conflicts. Do not add a subfield $2 if no NAR is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of the associated place has changed, the name of the place that applied in the time of the entity being established in the 1XX may optionally be recorded in place of, or in addition to, the current form of name. It is not necessary to follow subject cataloging policies to use the latest form of name only.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Examples:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person born in the city of Calcutta before its name changed to Kolkata; cataloger has chosen to record the form of name that applied at the time the person was born)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person residing in the city of Milan during the Renaissance, prior to the formation of the modern country of Italy; cataloger has chosen to record the current form of name for the country)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For non-jurisdictions, prefer names from an authorized vocabulary such as RVM and identify the source in subfield $2. If the name is not found in an authorized vocabulary, record it in field 370 without&lt;br /&gt;
giving a subfield $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
When determining when to create a name authority record for a geographic name, consult the “Name Authority Records (NARs)” section of [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1], Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary&lt;br /&gt;
source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Subfield $c – Associated country&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Generally, do not use subfield $c to record places that are not sovereign entities. Such places may be recorded in subfield $f or other subfields as appropriate.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Example:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Martinique is an overseas department of France)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, if a sovereign entity has (or previously had) one or more constituent countries, any of the constituent countries associated with the 1XX may optionally be recorded in subfield $c in addition to, or instead of, the larger sovereign entity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Great Britain who has strong ties to Wales; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with the Soviet Union, particularly the Kirghiz Soviet Socialist Republic; cataloger has chosen to record both places)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with Aruba, a constituent country of the Netherlands; cataloger has chosen not to record the Netherlands)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(For a person associated with India prior to its independence from Great Britain; cataloger has chosen not to record Great Britain)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entity names of First Nations in Canada and Indian tribes recognized by the United States government as legal entities may be included in subfield $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions given in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Record the place of origin of the work in field 370, unless it is merely a place of publication or other place associated with a manifestation (use field 643, when appropriate, for the latter). Although the “place of origin” of a serial work may be the same as the place of publication of the component part for which the SAR (or serial bibliographic record) was created, use judgment in distinguishing between place of origin of the work and a place of publication not actually related to the work itself.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-24]&amp;lt;!--(2022-01-22)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#370_Associated_Place|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Address =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice:&lt;br /&gt;
* Supply based on cataloger's judgment, if the information is readily available and not already being recorded in field 370 subfield $e (Place of residence/headquarters).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* In cases where subfield $a is not recorded, include at a minimum subfield $m (Electronic mail address) or subfield $b (City).&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Do not record physical &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or e-mail&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; addresses for living persons.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
* Catalogers are not required to maintain address information when updating a record that contains an address.&lt;br /&gt;
*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record multiple addresses, with or without ranges of dates, in separate occurrences of field 371.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Electronic mail address'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $m should contain only an e-mail address. Do not add an internet address for the 1XX in this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#371_Address|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Field of activity =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM heading string for field of activity, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmfg&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an entity from Canadiana for field of activity, remove any subfield coding not authorized for use in the 372 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access point in Canadiana:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Field of activity in 372:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall&lt;br /&gt;
best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''372 fields with a term from RVM and a non-controlled vocabulary term'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&amp;lt;!--(2026-03-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#372_Field_of_Activity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Associated group =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the Canadiana or LC/NACO Authority File, recording the source in subfield $2. Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 373 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;If the name of an associated group has changed, record the group name(s) that applied at the time of the entity being established in the 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Corporate name in Canadiana:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Authorized access point in 373:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with subfield $2 and dates:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR with 373s with different vocabulary sources:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Although the MARC format does not specify a form of date in these subfields, the following practice is recommended for consistency. Input dates using the Gregorian calendar in the form yyyy. If more specific dates are necessary, consider recording them in another field (e.g., 670, 678). It is&lt;br /&gt;
not necessary to reformulate dates in existing NARs to conform to this practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&amp;lt;!--(2023-06-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#373_Associated_Group|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Occupation =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as the RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.16.1.3 for instructions on recording profession or occupation as an element. See LAC-BAnQ PS 9.19.1.6 for instructions using a profession or occupation term in an access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of term'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Codes from either the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/occupation.html/view Occupation Term Source Codes] or the [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/subject.html/view Subject Source Codes] lists may be recorded in subfield $2 for the 374 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start period and Subfield $t – End period'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#374_Occupation|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Gender =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Do not use this field in new authority records. Whenever an existing record must be changed for any reason, delete any occurrence of field 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-20)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Family information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs (such as a range of dates), repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Name of prominent member'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When giving the name of the prominent member of the family in 376 subfield $b, give the form for the person as found in subfield $g of the 100 field of the NAR for the family. Do not include any internal subfield coding in subfield $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $s – Start''' period and Subfield $t – End period&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $s and subfield $t provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|373]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Associated language =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer language codes over language terms, using codes from the Code List for Languages in MARC21.  Use subfield $l (Language term) only to provide information not available in the [https://loc.gov/marc/languages/language_code.html MARC Code List for Languages]. Encode multiple languages for a person or corporate body only if more than one language is used for publication, communication, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Optionally, record an ISO 639-3 language code (or codes) in an additional 377 field. This practice is especially recommended when an ISO 639-3 code will identify a language more specifically than the MARC code does. For more information, see the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $2 – Source of the code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $2 is not required when the MARC Code List for Languages is used as the language source code (second indicator value “#”). PFAN institutions may supply an additional 377 field from another language code list by using second indicator value “7,” with subfield $2 containing a code for a language source list taken from the list in [http://www.loc.gov/standards/sourcelist/language.html/view Language Code and Term Source Codes]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(ISO 639-3 code for Achi (acr); assigned a collective code (myn) for Mayan languages in the MARC Code List for Languages)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#377_Associated_Language|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Fuller form of personal name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode the fuller form of name in the 378 field when this information is readily available, even if the same information is already present in the 100 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the Information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#378_Fuller_Form_of_Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Form of work =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMGF, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. When terms do not come from a controlled vocabulary, use a singular form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on recording form of work as an element in a work-level series authority record, see LAC-BAnQ PS 6.3.1.3.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#380_Form_of_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Other distinguishing characteristics of work or expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This field is used to record the RDA elements other distinguishing characteristic of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) and other distinguishing characteristic of expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Other characteristics of expressions that are unique to musical works (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4-6.18.1.6]) may also be recorded in the 381 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Franklin number recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Other distinguishing characteristic of expression of musical work'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some terms recorded for other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression may be appropriate to record in field 381 and another MARC field for which there is no corresponding RDA element. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, a corporate body (such as a publisher) used as an other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression could be recorded in either the 373 field (associated group), the 381 field or both.&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Subfield coding for subordinate bodies is not used in the 381 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as other distinguishing characteristic of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Corporate body recorded as associated group and other distinguishing characteristic of work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA has no specific element for places associated with expressions, but field 370 subfield $f (Other associated place) and subfield $g (Place of origin of work or expression) may be used in authority records for expressions. Some places associated with works or expressions would be considered other distinguishing characteristic of work or expression in RDA and could be recorded in the 370 field, the 381 field, or both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Places used as other distinguishing characteristic of a legal work; recorded in 370 and 381 fields)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the RDA element place of origin of work ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.6]) in a 370 field (see Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]] section).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When other distinguishing characteristic of work or other distinguishing characteristic of expression has been used in an authorized access point and is also being recorded as an element in a 3XX&lt;br /&gt;
field, use the 381 field to record the other distinguishing characteristic. Optionally, also record the same information in any other appropriate 3XX field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field vs. repeating a subfield: If the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the affected subfield. If the&lt;br /&gt;
vocabulary source differs, or if another associated element differs, repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u – Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v – Source of information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions in the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-02)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#381_Other_Distinguishing_Characteristics_of_Work_or_Expression|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 Medium of performance =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the medium of performance using thesaurus terms from &amp;quot;Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM (RVMMEM)&amp;quot;. Record the medium of performance by applying the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html RDA 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6], the associated LAC-BAnQ PSs. ''Note:'' The 382 field may also be used in authority records for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. If considered important for identification and access, provide an additional 382 that does not apply these guidelines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#382_Medium_of_Performance|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numeric designation of musical work &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;or expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available. Create separate 383 fields for different numbering schemes associated with a single work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-13)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#383_Numeric_Designation_of_Musical_Work|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Key =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice: Encode when available for works. In case of doubt, do not encode. Do not encode for expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-22]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Audience characteristics =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the intended audience of a work or expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. In particular, consult instruction sheet L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ##  $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvmt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a: If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Uncontrolled term and term from a controlled vocabulary)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''or''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-10-14]&amp;lt;!--(2022-10-14)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Creator/contributor characteristics &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[New]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record demographic characteristics of one or more creators or contributors associated with a work or expression, in particular for characteristics common to a group of creators or contributors associated with a work or expression. The field will most commonly be used in authority records for collection aggregates embodying two or more expressions of two or more independent works by different agents, and for individual works named by title alone (e.g., works of unknown authorship; monographic series).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVMGD or RVM, recording the source code in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. Record uncontrolled terms in the plural form. Follow the guidelines for coding and assignment of terms in the draft Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual, available at [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html].  In particular, consult instruction sheet L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator and Contributor Characteristics, available at  [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled demographic term)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While this field will be used primarily for aggregated works and for individual works named by title alone, there are situations when it will be appropriate for an individual work by one or more named creators. For example, for a musical work composed during childhood or adolescence, it would not be appropriate to record “Enfants” or “Adolescents” as a characteristic in the composer’s authority record. Instead, demographic characteristics applicable to only some of a creator’s works should be recorded in the authority records for those works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Work composed 2003-2005, completed when the composer was 14 years old)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 If the vocabulary source differs or if some terms come from a controlled vocabulary and others are uncontrolled, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, either repeat subfield $a or repeat the field. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Terms from different controlled vocabularies)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014 $b page 4 de la couverture (Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Uncontrolled term and terms from one controlled vocabulary)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $i – Relationship information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, use subfield $i to record a term designating the nature of the relationship between the demographic groups recorded in the field and the work or expression. Prefer a term from a controlled vocabulary, such as the MARC relator terms, RDA relationship designators, or RBMS relationship designators. Capitalize the first letter of the relationship term and record it in the singular. Follow the relationship term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998- February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not record multiple subfield $i’s in a single 386 field. If multiple relationship terms apply to a single group of creators or contributors (e.g., a work with authors and artists from the same demographic group or an expression with editors and translators from the same demographic group), repeat the field, using different relationship terms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(A compilation of works by authors and artists from Massachusetts)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different relationship terms apply to some of the creators and contributors (e.g., authors are in one demographic group and artists are in another), repeat the field, using different relationship terms. If the same relationship term applies to more than one demographic group, either repeat subfield $a in one field, or repeat the field. For clarity, when in doubt, repeat the 386 field as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ou&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Score containing works by Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler, and Strauss, with lyrics also printed as text in German and English translation)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $m – Demographic group term and Subfield $n – Demographic group code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use these subfields, but do not remove them from existing records if they are correctly coded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-11]&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-09)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Characteristics|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Time Period of Creation =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers may use this field to record the time period of creation or origin of a work or expression. The name of the time period may specify or imply a place for which the time period is relevant. It may also specify the name of an event.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prefer a controlled vocabulary, such as RVM or RVMFAST, recording the source in subfield $2. For consistency, capitalize the first term in each subfield $a. &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using an RVM subject heading string, replace the subfield coding for the subdivision(s) with two hyphens and close up the spaces between the main heading and subdivision(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For compilations, the field may be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the works/expressions contained within the compilation, considered collectively (using first indicator value “1”). It may also be used to record the time period of creation or origin of the compilation itself (using first indicator value “2”).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR for a collection of Renaissance poetry compiled in the nineteenth century)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 388 field may be used in conjunction with, or instead of, the 046 field. When specific date(s) of creation or origin are not known, or span a long period of time, recording textual chronological terms in the 388 field may be useful.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In choosing between repeating a field and repeating a subfield: If the indicator value differs, repeat the field. If the vocabulary source differs, repeat the field. Otherwise, if the only addition to an existing field is an additional term from the same vocabulary, repeat the subfield. Overall best practice: repeat the field when needed for clarity&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(NAR with 388 fields containing terms from different vocabularies)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-07] &amp;lt;!--(2022-11-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX - See From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When modifying an authority record for another reason, delete any final mark of punctuation in a 4XX field unless it is a part of the data (e.g., a period in an abbreviation) or is called for by the cataloging rules (e.g., a parenthetical qualifier).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying NARs or SARs that contain obsolete codes such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not all 4XX references require justification; see “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Justifying_variant_access_points|Justifying variant access points]]” in the 670 section of this document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not make a 4XX that normalizes to the same form as another 4XX on the same authority record or a 1XX on any name authority record. See the section “NACO normalization” in the [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf/view DCM Z1] Introduction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Best practice guidelines for RDA:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Record variants found in the manifestation being cataloged:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Use cataloger's judgment;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; No limitation on the number or form of references;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Instead of or in addition to adding variants, consider providing access by adding 37X fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Example showing 378 without a variant for the fuller form of name:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Establish additional NARs for the authorized access points needed to support elements used in 4XX variant access points (e.g., parent body associated with subordinate body being established).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally provide a variant form 4XX access point for a former 1XX authorized access point, unless the former authorized access point was egregiously incorrect. See the section “[[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX$w|Subfield $w – Control subfield]]” for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Use the established form of components in 4XX variant access points, except for non-Latin script variants, which may represent a mixture of scripts or may be entirely in a non-Latin script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Generally, do not remove variants unless egregiously incorrect (e.g., a non-Latin script variant that does not represent the same person).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If a form found on the manifestation being cataloged includes a variant form of a component of a 4XX variant access point, that form may be used in its entirety as an additional 4XX variant access point, provided that it is not divided into its component parts through the use of subfields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;and not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When changing the form of a superordinate body, a geographic name, or a personal name in a 1XX, update all of the existing NARs that use that component in a 4XX, unless the 4XX represents the former authorized access point (e.g., $w/2=e). ''Exception:'' Do not apply this instruction in the case of migrated authority records that have not been re-evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point for a person (100) is changed because the person has changed his or her name, record the earlier form of name in a 400 with $w nne if the variant is valid under RDA instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Name changed upon election as pope)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When an authorized access point for a person (100) is updated to close the date, it is recommended to save the former form with the open date in a 4XX field with $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Example :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) based on CIP cataloging is changed because its form on the published resource is different from that on the CIP galley, a 4XX from the previous authorized access point form with subfield $w nne may be added unless the former 1XX form was egregiously incorrect (e.g., the author's date of birth was given as 1775 instead of 1975 in the CIP galley).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an authorized access point (1XX) is changed because of a change in cataloging instructions, record the earlier form in a 4XX using $w. If the variant form is a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nne. If the variant form is not a valid reference under current RDA instructions, use $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nne&amp;quot; because the variant is valid in RDA; 100 form changed based on usage and dates of birth and death added because 100 was being changed)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429  av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Coded &amp;quot;nnea&amp;quot; because the abbreviation &amp;quot;ca.&amp;quot; is not valid for period of activity in RDA)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When changing an authorized access point because dates were recorded inaccurately or a cataloger entered a typo in the authorized access point, do not add the inaccurate form as a cross reference.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, providing authorized access points for the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Variant access points may be recorded in any SAR, including those for series-like phrases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the volumes of a multipart monograph have different forms of the common title, use a 4XX reference rather than a 5XX reference for the form of the title not chosen as the title proper of the multipart monograph.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27] &amp;lt;!--(2024-03-27)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D |''Manual 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX - See Also From Tracings - General Information =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When otherwise modifying a NAR that contain codes that are no longer used such as subfield $w position zero (0) code “d” or “f,” PFAN catalogers should upgrade the NAR to RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN catalogers applying RDA instructions may use subfield $i in conjunction with subfield $w code “r” for relationship designators. When applying RDA relationship designators in 5XXs, supply terms from Appendix I, J or K; capitalize the initial letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the use of relationship designators and/or $w codes in a specific 5XX field, see the section in this Manual for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Control subfield'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the conventions in the authority format for use of subfield $w. Do not supply subfield $w unless a value other than “n” would be appropriate in one of the positions. When supplying subfield $w,&lt;br /&gt;
give it as the first subfield in the field. Supply character positions preceding, but not succeeding, the value, e.g.,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = to indicate a reference from an earlier authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = to indicate a reference from a later authorized access point&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = to indicate that a subfield $i or subfield $4 is used to denote relationship information&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = to indicate a see also reference for multiple pseudonyms (record also contains a 663 field)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A see also reference tracing (5XX) must not normalize to the same as another see also reference in the same authority record, unless both 5XX fields contain a relationship designator in subfield $i, and&lt;br /&gt;
the texts of the relationship designators are different.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500  See Also From Tracing - Personal Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” when providing relationship links between a personal name and 1) the name of another person, family, or corporate body or 2) the authorized access point for a work or expression. This technique may also be used to relate authorized access points for works and expressions containing personal names. When using a term from Appendix I, J or K in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording pseudonymous relationships for personal names when only two authority records are involved, catalogers may either 1) use subfield $i and code “r” in subfield $w or 2) use simple see-also references. For more information on these techniques and instructions on recording multiple pseudonyms (i.e., those involving a 663 field), see the [http://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/pseud.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA Practice for Creating NARs for Persons Who Use Pseudonyms]. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers are reminded that when a variant name (400) and an authorized access point (100) are in conflict an addition should be made to either the 400 or 100 to resolve the conflict (e.g., fuller form of name, date of activity, etc.); the previous practice of changing the 400 to a 500 to resolve the conflict is no longer an option. When catalogers encounter a variant form in a 500 field in the course of updating a NAR, they should resolve the conflict and change the field to a 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|''Manual 4XX and 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510  See Also From Tracing - Corporate Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511  See Also From Tracing - Meeting Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow instructions provided in the PCC Guidelines for the Application of Relationship Designators in NACO Authority Records.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html BAC-BAnQ PS 11.13.1.8] for guidance on relating authority records for ongoing conferences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530  See Also From Tracing - Uniform Title =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may use subfield $i with subfield $w coded &amp;quot;r&amp;quot; when providing relationship links between authorized access points for works or expressions. When supplying RDA Appendix J terms in subfield $i, use a capital letter for the first letter of the term and follow the term with a colon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551  See Also From Tracing - Geographic Name =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use subfield $i with subfield $w coded “r” until relationship designators for places are developed. (Currently RDA has a placeholder for Appendix L).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Series Numbering Peculiarities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#641_Series_Numbering_Peculiarities|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Series Numbering Example =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#642_Series_Numbering_Example|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Series Place and Publisher/Issuing Body =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#643_Series_Place_and_Publisher.2FIssuing_Body|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Series Analysis Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#644_Series_Analysis_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Series Tracing Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#645_Series_Tracing_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Series Classification Practice =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#646_Series_Classification_Practice|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Complex See Also Reference - Name =&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 663 field contains the explanatory text and authorized access points for relationships between a 100 (established name) and other 100s (established names) that cannot be adequately conveyed by one or more simple see also references generated from 500 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, this situation occurs when a person uses more than two identities, when more than one person shares an identity with one or more others, or when multiple persons use the same pseudonym independent of each other or as a result of some other arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text of the 663 may be adjusted to fit extraordinary situations; however, keep the text as simple as possible, allowing the MARC fields and coding to convey the information desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not use the 663 technique to show relationships between corporate bodies or between persons and corporate bodies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is found in the [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf FAQ – LC/PCC RDA and AACR2 practice for creating NARs for persons who use pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Only two identities ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When only two NARs are created for a person, the NARs are generally connected with 500 see also references and no 663 field. However, when one of the NARs is for a joint pseudonym or a pseudonym used by several persons working independently of each other, the 663 technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== More than two identities - &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; authorized access point and references ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When more than two authorized access points are created for the same person, identify a “basic” authorized access point using the 663 field technique. This decision is based on the desire to simplify the reference structure and to assist catalogers in determining which name to use as the subject of biographical or critical works. The “basic” authorized access point should be determined by the predominantly used form of name or, lacking sufficient evidence, by choosing the real name of the person as the “basic” form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the authority record for the “basic” name authority record add 500 see also references with a subfield w coded “nnnc” from all other names used. Justify the 500 in 670 citations according to normal practice. Provide a 663 field listing all the other names with the following text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name] $b [established form of&lt;br /&gt;
name]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On each of the other name authority records, trace a 500 see also reference with subfield $w coded “nnnc” from the “basic” name, justifying that reference in a 670 citation, according to normal practice. Other names may be mentioned in the 670 if it is convenient to do so. Provide a 663 field with the following or similar text (may be adjusted to fit the situation):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [established form of name chosen as the basic heading]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the author uses another new name, create a new name authority record for that name and also add it to the reference structure and 663 listing on the authority record for the “basic” name. References to the new name in the 500 and 663 fields are only added to the “basic” NAR.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;quot;Basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on &amp;quot;basic&amp;quot; NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Joint pseudonyms ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A joint pseudonym represents one identity used by two or more persons working in collaboration with each other. If a person uses a joint pseudonym and another name (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for joint pseudonym:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer.  Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for first 500 on joint pseudonym NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on joint pseudonym NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonyms used by multiple persons ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When multiple persons working independently of each other use the same pseudonym and one or more other names (as found in the catalog), the “basic” authorized access point technique is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for pseudonym used by multiple persons:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; NAR for first 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;NAR for second 500 on pseudonym used by multiple persons NAR: &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;(''Author has a pseudonym used by multiple persons and individual pseudonyms'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-10]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#663_Complex_See_Also_Reference-Name|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Nonpublic general note =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== General ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give information of permanent value and general interest that would be useful also to PFAN institutions and outside of PFAN. A representative listing of notes is given below. Generally, wording is recommended but not prescriptive unless specified in the instructions. The separate 667 fields may be given in any order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [name or title, Canadiana number].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [Canadiana number of undifferentiated name record].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(If the undifferentiated name record does not have a Canadiana number other than 0000X0000E, use OCLC record)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [reason for coding].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date updated].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(''Used for official language changes'')&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Appendice 1 in this manual for information and instructions about 667 fields added to authority records as part of a special project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for persons with identities not established ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a person uses two or more identities in manifestations, name authority records may be created for each identity. In the interest of efficiency, catalogers may use a 667 field to list pseudonyms not found in publications instead of creating NARs for these unused pseudonyms. In this case, list the unused pseudonyms in a 667 field following the phrase: “Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This note may also be added to an NAR for a person who has multiple NARs for multiple identities when some of the pseudonyms are not found in publications. In this case, list only the unused pseudonyms in the 667 field, and follow appropriate instructions for the other pseudonyms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More information on creating NARs for persons with alternate identities is available in the manual, 663 section, and the [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/ LC/PCC Practice for Creating NARs for Persons who use Pseudonyms].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs for series of conferences, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a 667 field on the NAR for the collective conference when there are authority records for both collective and individual instances of an ongoing conference.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== NARs and subject usage ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply these instructions when creating new NARs and revising existing NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Add notes indicating subject cataloging usage when an authorized access point is not appropriate for use as a subject heading for these situations:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Heads of state, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This instruction applies to NARS for corporate bodies representing the office when the name of the incumbent is included as part of the authorized access point for the corporate body. See [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Government Officials)] and [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html RDA 11.2.2.26 (Religious Officials)] for instructions on the corporate bodies. Use this 667 note on the NAR for the corporate body to indicate subject cataloging usage:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [personal name heading].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign value “n” in 008/11 and value “b” in 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|008/11]] and [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|008/15]] in this manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Earlier/later linear jurisdictional name changes'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;politique d'indexation du RVM&amp;quot; is to assign as a subject access point or as a geographic subdivision only the latest name of a political jurisdiction that has had one or more earlier names, as long&lt;br /&gt;
as the territorial identity remains essentially unchanged (see &amp;quot;Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval&amp;quot;, 5.14.3.1). When creating a NAR with an earlier/later authorized access point for a place in in this situation, catalogers must add a 667 subject usage note to the authority record with the earlier place name and adjust the appropriate 008 fields (008/11 and 008/15).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''NARs for fictitious characters'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access points for families are not valid for subject use. In an NAR for a family, 008/11 should be set to value “n” and 008/15 should be set to “b.” Per LAC-BAnQ PS 9.0, when creating an NAR&lt;br /&gt;
for a family add this 667 field noting subject usage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Add this note to a name authority record for a city section indicating that it is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision (see SHM H 835 for more information):&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) NARs for families&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Authorized access points for family names are valid for subject use. For family name authority records that reflect past practice (which considered them invalid for subject use), update the records to set the 008/11 values to “v” and 008/15 values to “a” and delete the following subject usage note:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Non-Latin script reference notes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In an authority record that contains a non-Latin script variant access point, use the 667 field with a note stating: “Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.” If there are multiple non-Latin script variant access points, use a note stating: “Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.” Assign 008/29 value “b” to indicate that the variant access point is not evaluated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Duplicates ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add the following note to a name authority record that has been reported for deletion:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [Canadiana number from the record to keep&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-19] &amp;lt;!--(2024-04-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#667_Nonpublic_General_Note|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Sources found =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:'' Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The purpose of this field is to record information about the name or title represented in the 1XX field. It includes facts that contribute to the identification of the entity, that justify the choice of the name&lt;br /&gt;
or title and any additional elements used to construct the authorized access point (1XX). The information also justifies, as needed, variant forms of the name or title (4XX), other identifying elements (046, 3XX,&lt;br /&gt;
and 678), and clarifies relationships between the 1XX and other entities in the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Functions of the 670 field:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information, from sources (e.g., books, phone calls, websites), in support of the choice and form of the authorized access point, variants, and other identifying elements&lt;br /&gt;
* To store information that may be used to break a conflict later&lt;br /&gt;
* To record information on relationships between entities (e.g., a person is the author of a work, a corporate body was absorbed by another corporate body)&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify a person with works in diverse subject areas or of diverse forms&lt;br /&gt;
* To identify different individuals whose access points must remain identical for now (i.e., undifferentiated personal names) &lt;br /&gt;
* To clarify whether different forms of a name or of a title are simply variations or reflect a  change in the name or title&lt;br /&gt;
* To record research required by the current guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
* To facilitate authority and bibliographic file maintenance, i.e., the information in 670 fields aids in making decisions about duplicate authorized access points and misattributions&lt;br /&gt;
* To support machine manipulation based on algorithms using information in the 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, the first 670 field cites the resource for which the authority record is being established, i.e., the resource being cataloged. If the resource being cataloged or consulted provides no information to&lt;br /&gt;
justify the authorized access point, variants, or other elements recorded in the NAR, see the 675 section of this Manual for instructions on citing the resource in a 675 field. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give subsequent 670 fields in any order, adding new fields after existing ones. Do not routinely delete or change existing 670 fields when adding new 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding subsequent 670 fields, prefer objective, authoritative sources (e.g., an encyclopedia) and those sources that provide firsthand information (e.g., an author's blog). Use sources that provide additional information rather than repeating information that is already present in other 670 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Best practices for 670 fields:'''&lt;br /&gt;
* In subfield $b, summarize and edit information found as needed to avoid extraneous or repetitive information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Avoid citing subjective information or information that is of dubious value in identifying an entity within a bibliographic context.&lt;br /&gt;
* Exercise caution when recording information about living persons that may be private or controversial in nature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 fields in existing NARs may not conform to these guidelines. For example, 670 fields in older NARs may lack subfield $b with justifying information. 670 fields in NARs that were part of a special project may not conform to these guidelines and/or may contain information that seems unusual or incorrect. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' The examples given throughout the following text have various conventions in regard to punctuation and style. These conventions are not prescriptive and should be considered as best practices to facilitate the exchange of information in a shared database environment. Catalogers are expected to use judgment and common sense. Punctuation and style need not be consistent from record to record as long as the information is clear and accurate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format of 670 fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the exception of the eszett (ß or ſʒ) and the euro sign (€), all characters found in the [http://www.loc.gov/marc/specifications/specchartables.html MARC code table] are valid for use in authority records contributed to the Canadiana Authority File ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html voir LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). When pasting data from a website into a 670 field, verify that all characters are valid for use in the record. Some non-valid characters resemble those that are valid. For example, the invalid en dash (–) resembles the valid hyphenminus (-).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a substitution for a symbol that cannot be reproduced is given in brackets (see [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html LAC-BAnQ PS for 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS for 1.7.5]),  an explanation of that interpolation may also be provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Data must be given in romanized form. Normally it is understood that the cataloger has provided the romanization; therefore, when transcribing romanization found in the source, add after it the bracketed&lt;br /&gt;
phrase ['''forme romanisée''']. In such languages as Arabic and Hebrew, where vowels are commonly omitted from the orthography of texts, the cataloger supplies the missing vowels when transcribing data. When&lt;br /&gt;
transcribing text that does include the vowels, add after it in brackets ['''vocalisé'''] or ['''en partie vocalisé'''] as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a cataloger chooses to provide nonroman script variant access points, the 670 $b should contain both the nonroman script transcription(s) found in the source, and the systematically romanized form(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When authority records are created using automated authority generation programs, additional information may be included. This data may also be formatted in a different way than instructed in this document. Generally, this data should be retained as generated to maintain the cost effectiveness of this process unless the data is confusing or causes validation errors. The exceptions to this are names and&lt;br /&gt;
titles for which NARs are created. Follow the instructions in those sections for recording this data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $a – Source citation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $a:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The title proper of the resource being cited, complete enough for later identification in an online catalog. Abbreviations and ellipses may be used. Precede a generic or indistinctive title with the creator's name that would begin the authorized access point for the work. If the authorized access point for the work is the same as the title proper plus a qualifier, it may be provided instead of the title proper to avoid ambiguity. When information in subfield $a of a 670 field is provided to justify an authorized or variant access point, follow the additional instructions at ''Recording names and titles''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The date of publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Multipart monographs.'' If the part is the first part, give the date of publication as an open date.&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Serials other than monographic series.'' Generally, use a chronological designation instead of a publication date. If there is no designation date, use the numeric designation and the date of publication. Indicate, following the designation statement, if a “surrogate” was used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([data]) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;not&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ''Integrating resources.'' Apply the instructions at [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] for source of the title proper of a website. Identify the iteration from which information was taken (e.g., “viewed on”dates for updating websites, update number or release number for updating loose-leafs).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Information found'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A 670 field should include the following data in subfield $b:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The specific location(s) of the information found. For multipart resources with numbered parts, provide the designation of the part and the location within the part (e.g., v. 6, page 10; map recto, label). Abbreviations or spelled-out forms may be used (e.g., t.p. or title page, v. 6 or volume 6).&lt;br /&gt;
# Information found. Following the location, cite the information found there, enclosed in parentheses. As appropriate, give multiple occurrences of information from the same source following the location of the information. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George ; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also see the guidelines below for specific categories:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' If the authorized access point is built from Cataloguing in Publication data, include &amp;quot;CIP&amp;quot; in the location statement (e.g., formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The greenhouse approach, 2019 : $b page de titre du CIP (Chitra Anand) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Canadienne)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Internet resources.''' For websites, provide the name of the location within the website if appropriate (e.g., about us; history, timeline; government, executive branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Multiple locations within a resource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' When adding new information to a 670 field created for a CIP, indicate that the new information is from the published resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; Canadienne) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; Canadienne) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs.''' For NARs, generally, use “etc.” to avoid giving more than two locations or a sequence of locations (e.g., p. 316, etc., for sequence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs.''' For SARs, always give each location separately.&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN series practice:'' In post-cataloging authority work without the piece in hand, use the location “ressource non disponible.” If the piece is examined again and the authority record is updated, it is allowable to edit the corresponding 670 field to provide a location and additional forms of series titles as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $u - Uniform Resource Identifier and Subfield $v - Source of the information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the instructions from the Manual for subfield $u and subfield $v provided in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|046]] field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogers may optionally provide a uniform resource identifier (URI) in subfield $u of the 670 citation to link to the cited resource if it contains significant information related to the established entity&lt;br /&gt;
that cannot be cited succinctly in the authority record. Note that use of a URI in the 670 $u does not take the place of the requirement to cite relevant data in subfields $a and $b of the 670 field needed to support the authorized access point (including additions) or variants (this information will continue to be available if the site changes or disappears). However, information found in online sources may be added to the 046 or 3XX fields with the appropriate citations in subfields $v and $u and not repeated in a 670 when that information is not used in the 1XX or a 4XX. If a URI is included in a 670, it must be given in subfield $u. The subfield $u should contain only the URI and no additional data (e.g., do not enclose the URI within parentheses and do not include words in the subfield $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording names and titles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record names or series titles used in the authorized access point or variant access points in full, as they appear in the source, without abbreviation by the cataloger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When preparing an authority record for the text of a law or a subject compilation of laws, if a source being cited contains an official short title or citation title, cite that title, preceded by the term&lt;br /&gt;
“citation title” and its exact location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For corporate name authorities, include in the data cited all the hierarchy required to justify needed variant access points, Use judgment in deciding what information (e.g., subordinate body's name) is extraneous to the record being created and should not be recorded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all of the above categories, if the only presentation of the name or title on the chief source of information is in the bibliographic title given in subfield $a of the 670 citation, repetition of the name in&lt;br /&gt;
subfield $b may be omitted, provided no important information is lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If information about an earlier or later name or title is found in the same source as the name or title in the authorized access point, give all the information in the 670 field. Do not separate the&lt;br /&gt;
information about the earlier or later name or title in order to give it in a 675 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To facilitate international contribution and use of authority records, when recording dates, generally use the spelled out or [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abbreviated] forms for months. (For dates recorded using automated authority generation programs, see the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Format of 670 fields]] section of this document.) Do not change the style of dates in existing records. As a best practice, if a date is not included in subfield $d of the 100 field, consider adding a 046 field if dates are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying variant access points ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justify names or titles given as variant access points by information cited from sources. However, justification is not required in the following cases:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variant access points made on the basis of the cataloger's awareness of different romanizations or orthographies;&lt;br /&gt;
# A variant title derived from the resource being cataloged, from other resources cataloged under the same access point, or from information in standard reference sources;&lt;br /&gt;
# References for authorized access points of corporate bodies reflecting changes due to national orthographic reform, changes in names due to an official language change, or changes involving only a parent body to which the body being established is subordinate.&lt;br /&gt;
# Optional references from AACR2 or pre-AACR 2 forms on SARs and on retrospective NARs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justifying other elements ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Information recorded in the 046, 3XX, or 678 field of the authority record should generally be justified unless it is otherwise obvious from information recorded in subfield $a of a 670 citation or it can&lt;br /&gt;
be easily inferred from other identifying elements recorded, including the preferred name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the 046 field and many of the 3XX fields, a subfield $u or subfield $v recorded in the same field may be used instead of or in addition to a 670. See the 046 section of this document for guidelines&lt;br /&gt;
on subfield $u and subfield $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recording other data ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data to record in the authority record. Do not abbreviate or translate attributes such as title of the person ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) that appear in conjunction with personal names in statements of responsibility and that potentially could be used as part of the access point. Other data may be abbreviated or summarized. Generally informally translate other data from foreign languages into English, paraphrasing or summarizing as convenient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''SARs''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use judgment to determine how much data other than forms of the title/phrase to record in the permanent authority record. Numbering and names of issuing bodies are not required but may be given.&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Special types of citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most commonly occurring citations are listed below. If these are not appropriate, devise others as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When converting information found in obsolete or non-active MARC fields (e.g., 664, 665, 666) into a 670 note, cite Canadiana in a citation such as those provided in the examples below:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date of conversion] $b ([data converted from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([data moved from 665 field])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC and fichier interne de BAnQ [BAnQ internal file]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cite these files in zone 670 as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; usage: [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date of the search] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [data]; variantes : [data])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''NARs''. Give the date of the search, using month names or abbreviations. In parentheses, prefaced by the label '''point d'accès :''' or '''points d'accès :''', give the access point (or access points) found, even if it is the same as the current authorized access point. If it is judged useful to mention one or more variants found in an authority record, give them with the label '''variante :''' or '''variantes :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If different forms of the name appear in the bibliographic records, record the access point and also any forms found, including usage identical to the authorized access point. Separate the access point from the other forms, and preface the other forms with an appropriate label, e.g., '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' or '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not normally cite specific bibliographic records or the exact location of the variations found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''SARs.''. Give the date of the search, using month abbreviations, followed by the citation of the bibliographic record. In parentheses give the series statement found in that record.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] LC/NAF has been cited previously under other names, e.g., Base de données LC/NACO and Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] &amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot; for bibliographic records refers to the transcribed forms of name usually found in statements of responsibility of bibliographic records. It may also appear in other parts of the bibliographic record such as a title proper or a quoted note. Because of changes in cataloging instructions, catalogers should be careful when taking information from the publication statement, distribution statement, etc. and the series statement.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (or «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») for bibliographic records refers to a form of the name that may not represent a transcribed form. For example, in AACR2 records, a publisher's name that appeared on the resource as “ABC Publishing Company” might have been recorded in the publication statement as “ABC Pub. Co.” Normally, there is no need to cite such a form in a 670 field..&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citing other files or catalogs.''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an access point is found in a manual catalog or online database, use judgment in creating a 670 citation. Begin the 670 field with a designation of the catalog/database in which these other bibliographic records were found. There is no prescribed formulation of such citations; examples are listed below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, , [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([data])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Geographical Names Database'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provide the name of the database and the date searched in subfield $a. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;The name of the database may be cited as an acronym or in full.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; In subfield $b provide names given for the entity, feature designation or class (e.g., ADM1, PPL, civil) coordinates, and name of larger place if appropriate. (Other relevant information may also be provided.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording the feature designation or class, it is acceptable to use either the code (e.g., PPL) or its spelled-out form (e.g., populated place). For foreign names, convey the name type (e.g., conventional, approved, short, etc.) within brackets or parentheses after the name. Repeat the brackets or parentheses after each name of this type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Variant names (including non-roman script names) may be given in a single listing as shown below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;When recording the coordinates, it is acceptable to use the DMS format (degrees, minutes, seconds), the DD format (decimal degrees), or both formats.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has opted to record the DMS coordinates)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;The coordinates may be recorded as found. However, if the database displays the coordinates using colons to separate the DMS components and positive and negative values to convey the hemisphere, it is acceptable to translate the coordinates to traditional DMS format if desired. Use the degree sign (not superscript zero) to show degrees, the soft sign (modifier letter prime) for minutes, and the hard sign (modifier letter double prime) for seconds. For coordinates of latitude, a negative value corresponds to the Southern hemisphere. For coordinates of longitude, a negative value corresponds to the Western hemisphere.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has recorded the DMS coordinates as found)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Cataloger has translated the DMS coordinates to traditional format from: -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic names server&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, consulté le &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;17 août 2022&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;$b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;22:53:01, 121:02:54&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Non-bibliographic sources'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Give the non-bibliographic source, the date, and the information. The source can be given specifically (« Lettre de l'auteur » , « Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur » , etc.) or in general terms (« Information de l'auteur » , « Information de l'éditeur » , etc.).  When noting a specific source, it isn't necessary to show how information was received, e.g, that letter was received via FAX rather than via mail. When a telephone call to a publisher/agency/organization is cited, usually give the name of the group called, rather than the title or name of the person contacted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--'''Citations for republication SARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an SAR is for a republication only, begin the 670 with the term for the type of republication and a slash. Do not include a 670 for a republication if the SAR covers both the original and one or more republications. Do not add additional 670 fields for other types of republications cataloged later. (See 64X Series Treatment, Republications for more information about republications.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations for undifferentiated NARs.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on existing 670 citations found in undifferentiated NARs, see in this Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32 Undifferentiated Personal Name]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-11-21]&amp;lt;!--(2025-11-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#670_Source_Data_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Title related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 672 field may be used to record a title that is related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, in an authority record for a corporate body, 672 fields may be used to record titles for which the corporate body is a creator, issuing body, or subject. The primary purpose of the 672 field is to document that there is a relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 672 field does not negate the need to use the 670 field for the title for which the authority record is being created, nor to use the 670 fields to justify information recorded in the 1XX and 4XX such as preferred and variant forms of name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 672 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 672 fields when inputting new 672 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 672 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 672 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 fields with titles proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Cervantes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with preferred title)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(672 field with variant title for the work associated with the Catalan expression of the work and date of expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $b – Remainder of title'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a title proper, subfield $b may be used to record the other title information or parallel title proper to eliminate confusion for titles needing further identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains other title information)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Subfield $b contains parallel title proper)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $f – Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $f is used to record a date appropriate to the entity recorded in $a (e.g., use date of work for a preferred title and date of publication for a title proper). Do not use brackets in $f when recording a supplied date of publication or production. Do not give a date of distribution, date of manufacture, or copyright date in $f.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for work:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of  work)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for expression:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of French expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 for manifestation:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date of publication of manifestation of Polish expression of Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Subfield $w – Bibliographic record control number'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subfield $w is used to record bibliographic record control numbers (e.g., 001, 010, and 016 fields in bibliographic records). It is recommended that catalogers provide $w when readily available. Subfield $w should be repeated for each instance of a separate control number (e.g., an LCCN and an OCLC record number should be provided in separate subfields). For further instructions on inputting record control numbers, see the subfield $w section within the CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MARC 21 Format for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' subfield $w should only be used with titles for the manifestation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Title not related to the entity =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 673 field may be used to record a title that is not related to the entity represented by the 100, 110, 111, or 151 in the name authority record. For example, in an authority record for a person, the 673 may be used to record the titles of works written by a different person with a similar name. The primary purpose of the 673 field is to document that there is no relationship between the 1XX entity and the title recorded in the 673 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use of the 673 field does not negate the need to use the 675 field as described in the [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#675_Sources_not_found|675 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New 673 fields may be added after existing ones to record additional titles associated with the entity. Do not routinely delete or change existing 673 fields when inputting new 673 fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin script elements should be given in romanized form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title recorded in a 673 field in subfield $a may be a title proper, title proper of series, preferred title, etc. Titles should be recorded following the appropriate RDA and LAC-BAnQ PS instructions for that element. Apply the same instructions on non-filing characters in the 245 field to record the number of non-filing characters in the second indicator of the 673 field. For specific subfields in the 673 field, apply the same instructions given in the [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual#672 Title related to the entity|672 section]] of this Manual.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[in $w “#” = space input by cataloger]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961- &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with different Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)### 47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title proper associated with the National Gallery in London)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
BUT NOT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #4 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Although the National of Art is not the creator, it is the publisher so this title should be record in a 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-25]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#673_Title_Not_Related_to_the_Entity|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Sources not found =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''PFAN series practice:''Transcription of the series statement is mandatory if applicable. Searching for series authority records, tracing the series, and the creation and maintenance of series authority records are optional.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In April 2012 this field was redefined as: “Citation for a consulted source in which no information is found related in any manner to the entity represented by the authority record or related entities.” PFAN catalogers are not required to change any existing 675 fields simply to meet this new definition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a new NAR always cite the resource being cataloged in the 675 field if the item being cataloged provides no information related in any manner to the entity represented in the authority record. Also cite in the 675 field other sources consulted that contain no information, when that very lack of information is considered worth recording for future users of the authority record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, it is not always necessary to include in the 675 field every reference source consulted; use judgment in deciding what sources are important enough to retain in the permanent record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-03]&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-01)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#675_Source_Data_Not_Found|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Biographical or historical data =&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When supplying biographical or historical data in a 678 note field, construct the note in concise but complete sentences, keeping in mind that the information will be used in public displays.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In anticipation of LAC building the file in WMS and the batch addition of authority records from other institutions, the contents of all 665 fields in LAC and BAnQ records have been moved to 678 field. The original 665 field may have contained instructions on the access point(s) to be used as author and subject heading :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec) ; Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec) ; Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec) ; Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Delete these instructions in 678 field if they have been retained. Consider adding a 667 field as a subject heading if applicable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification of field 678'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generally, a 678 field must be justified by a 670 field. If it is not justified and its contents are appropriate for a biographical or historical note, retain the field and add a 670 note citing the internal file of the institution that provided 678 field as follows :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [ [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|abréviation de la bibliothèque participante]] ], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the record has been modified after being migrated, the record history must be consulted to determine who originally added zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Existing Field 678 which will be deleted as the content is not appropriate for a biographical note.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;670 field added:&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Repeatability:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not repeat this field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-12-14]&amp;lt;!--(2020-11-26)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#678_Biographical_or_Historical_Data|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Heading linking entries =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note:'' This section does not apply to the 781 field used in 151 name authority records to provide geographic subdivision information. See Manual, [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#781_Subdivision_linking_entry|781 section]], for instructions for that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The use of an established heading linking entry 7XX field in an NAR or SAR is limited to recording the authorized access point from a national bibliography or in a separate national authority file or a separate equivalence.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form of heading in a 7XX field may match the 1XX form or a 4XX form in the same authority record. This is appropriate when the 7XX field form represents a form found in a different authority file than Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example:''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The source of the heading in the 7XX field may be specified using either second indicator value “7” with subfield $2 or a second indicator value that specifies the source. For access points coming from the LC/NAF file, prefer the second indicator with the value &amp;quot;0&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-17]&amp;lt;!--(2021-02-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Subdivision linking entry =&lt;br /&gt;
''PFAN optional practice:'' For a geographic name heading that may also be used as a geographic subdivision, determine the form in which the heading is to be used as a geographic subdivision following the guidelines in instruction sheet [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 of the ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Enter the text of the geographic subdivision form in a 781 field with second indicator 0. For a geographic heading that is used directly, such as a country, enter the data in a single $z subfield. For a geographic heading that is used indirectly through a larger geographic entity, such as a city, enter the data in two successive $z subfields. Use no other subfields. Make no changes to values in bytes of the 008.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a record for a geographic name heading that is not appropriate for use as a subject added entry (008/15 value Ab@), such as the earlier name of a jurisdiction that has undergone a linear name change, for example, '''Ceylon'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a 781 field to a NAR for a place name that is not appropriate for use as a geographic subdivision, such as a city section, for example, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these guidelines for newly-created authority records. Add a 781 field to an existing record when making any other change to it. If revising an existing record that contains a 667 field subject cataloging usage note indicating the proper geographic subdivision form, delete the 667 field and replace it with a 781 field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-11]&amp;lt;!--(2021-03-05)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#781_Subdivision_Heading_Linking_Entry-Geographic_Subdivision|''Supplement'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 1: Undifferentiated entities =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Appendix 2: Special projects =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This appendix presents information regarding some special projects involving authority records created or modified in the Canadiana authority file. The records created or modified within the context of these special projects may include some fields or some values not normally attributed according to current cataloguing policies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instructions regarding changes to these records are given here in order to indicate whether these fields and values are to be kept or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 1. Records created or revised as part of the UQAM records revision project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This is an authority records revision project, led by UQAM. These records have been created or modified in Canadiana by UQAM's cataloguing “traitement documentaire” team. These records were then revised by two librarians and a library technician, also at UQAM. This project ended March 31, 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records may be modified, like any other name authority records, according to current cataloguing policies.&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloguers update these records, they should:&lt;br /&gt;
* Change the value of position Leader/17 to &amp;quot;n&amp;quot; (full record);&lt;br /&gt;
* Delete field 667 &amp;quot;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;quot;;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Evaluate the record as they would evaluate any batch-loaded record. However, as the record is being revised, the authorized access point may be modified, if it does not follow the current PFAN practices (for instance, birth or death dates may be added, if available and if omitted from the access point).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Project 2. Records created and revised as part of the Universities Mentoring Project  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) General Information'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This mentoring project &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;that, as of February,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; allows university libraries to create name authority records that are revised by another university.  Authority records created or modified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;mentored libraries&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; are revised by library technicians &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;at the mentoring university.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When added to Canadiana, these new records contained the following elements: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Leader/17, the value was &amp;quot;o&amp;quot; (Incomplete authority record).&lt;br /&gt;
* The following 667 note was added: NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abbreviation, e.g. UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;, etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions for revision of the record''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
These records should not be modified.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15] &amp;lt;!--(2022-07-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[#toc|''Return to Table of Contents'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=144832</id>
		<title>PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=144832"/>
		<updated>2026-03-09T20:31:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 372 Domaine d'activité */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par D. Paradis, 12 septembre)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours|  24 h (En cours d'édition par N. Mainville, 26 février)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours| 24 h (En cours d'édition par A. Dunnett, BAC, 24 mars)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Guide}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:PFAN - Name Authority Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===  Notices d'autorité de nom ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notices d'autorité de collection ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--En octobre et novembre 2021, les passages du Guide concernant les collections ont été cachés par souci de cohérence avec la décision de ne pas permettre la création ni la révision des notices d'autorité de collections. DP 1er novembre 2021--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 008 Éléments de données de longueur fixe =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/10 Règles de catalogage descriptif ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée de quelque façon que ce soit, évaluer la notice d'autorité et la modifier pour qu'elle soit conforme à RDA, en modifiant le codage de la zone 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 1 : Si une notice d'autorité codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» est modifiée uniquement par la modification ou l'ajout d'une zone 5XX, on encourage fortement les catalogueurs, bien qu'il n'y ait pas d'obligation, à évaluer la notice et à la modifier selon RDA, en changeant le 008/10 en conséquence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exception 2 : Les autorités de noms indifférenciés codées 008/10 «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;», peuvent être modifiées de manière à enlever une ou plusieurs identités afin de créer des notices différenciées conformes à RDA. Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié à cette fin, la notice d'autorité de nom indifférencié mise à jour doit conserver le code 008/10 existant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-24]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F10 R.C3.A8gles de catalogage descriptif|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/11 Système de vedettes-matière / Thésaurus ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone 008/11 de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Répertoire de vedettes-matière) dans la zone 008/11 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) dans la zone 008/11, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/15 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Sans objet) &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;dans la zone 008/11 des&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples de noms de collectivités ne pouvant être utilisés comme vedettes-matière :''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis.  Président (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Iran.  Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illinois.  Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Église catholique.  Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Church of England. Diocèse de Londres. Évêque (1675-1713 : Compton)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; margin-left: 0px; padding-left: 15px; padding-top: 10px; padding-bottom: 10px; text-indent: 0px; line-height: 1.0; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;tats-Unis. Pr&amp;amp;eacute;sident (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Iran. Shah (1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Illinois. Gouverneur (1973-1977 : Walker)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;Eacute;glise catholique. Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Church of England. Dioc&amp;amp;egrave;se de Londres. &amp;amp;Eacute;v&amp;amp;ecirc;que (1675-1713 : Compton)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F11 Syst.C3.A8me de vedettes-mati.C3.A8re .2F Th.C3.A9saurus|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/15 Utilisation de la vedette – vedette-matière secondaire ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Généralités&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'application du chapitre 9 de RDA pour les noms de personnes fictives s'assurer que la valeur de la zone &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;008/15&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la notice d'autorité est «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Noms de famille&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Appropriée) dans la zone 008/15 des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si une notice d'autorité de nom existante pour une famille a la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) dans la zone 008/15, selon l'ancienne pratique, changer la valeur pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;». Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section 008/11 pour changer la valeur de cette zone pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667 pour supprimer la note sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms de collectivités pour les hauts dignitaires gouvernementaux et religieux'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Contexte'' : Pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, les catalogueurs descriptifs peuvent être amenés à établir un point d'accès autorisé pour le nom de la collectivité pour la fonction ainsi qu'un nom personnel pour le titulaire de la fonction. La politique d'indexation est d'attribuer seulement le nom personnel, et non le nom de la collectivité, comme point d'accès matière. Cette politique a été établie à des fins de colocalisation (voir [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0430.pdf SHM H 430]). Par exemple, le point d'accès :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
États-Unis. Président (1789-1797 : Washington)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
peut être utilisé dans le catalogage descriptif comme point d'accès, mais en indexation seul le nom personnel serait utilisé comme point d'accès matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Washington, George, 1732-1799&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Non appropriée) aux notices d'autorité pour les noms de collectivités qui représentent la fonction occupée pour les chefs d'État, les chefs de gouvernement, etc., les organismes intergouvernementaux internationaux, les dignitaires religieux et les papes, lorsque le nom du titulaire fait partie du point d'accès autorisé. Attribuer également la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et ajouter une note dans la zone 667 indiquant la forme du point d'accès utilisé en indexation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1958-1963 : Jean XXIII)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jean XXIII, pape, 1881-1963.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi la section [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Apporter également ces modifications lorsqu'on modifie les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour quelque raison que ce soit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN - Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC_21#008.2F15 Utilisation de la vedette - vedette-mati.C3.A8re secondaire|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/32 Nom de personne non différencié ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser le code 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» (non différencié) dans une notice d'autorité de nom RDA. Attribuer la valeur 008/32 «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes. Utiliser le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour les familles, les collectivités et les lieux. Pour les œuvres et les expressions, attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» si le point d'accès commence par un nom de personne, sinon attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par le passé, la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 permettait de coder les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes comme non différenciées lorsque le catalogueur n'avait aucun moyen acceptable de différencier plusieurs personnes portant le même nom privilégié. Depuis sa création, le PFAN a suivi ces directives pour les notices d’autorité de noms de personnes :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas créer de nouvelles notices non différenciées codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Toutes les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes codéees RDA doivent être différenciées.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas ajouter une nouvelle identité à une notice d'autorité de nom de personne existante codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32.&lt;br /&gt;
* Appliquer plutôt [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-5465.html RDA 9.19.1] pour créer un point d'accès autorisé unique pour la personne, en utilisant des éléments additionnels appropriés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mise à jour des notices indifférenciées existantes ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Important :''' Pour une entité donnée, si la seule notice trouvée est une notice indifférenciée (dont la zone 008/32 est codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;») versée par une université et comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;», ne pas l'utiliser.  Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité pour l'entité.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler à BAC la notice indifférenciée en communiquant son numéro de contrôle OCLC par courriel à l'adresse pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca et en mentionnant comme objet : Notice indifférenciée versée par une université.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice indifférenciée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante, en particulier une notice qui a été importée du LC/NAF, comprenne des paires de zones 670 utilisées pour regrouper l'information sur chaque personne visée par la notice d'autorité de nom. La première zone 670 de chaque paire est une zone 670 d'identification qui comprend un terme décrivant la relation de la personne avec le titre cité dans la deuxième zone 670 de la paire. Les données de la zone 670 d'identification sont enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a et sont mises entre crochets. La deuxième zone 670 de la paire est une zone 670 de citation qui comprend les éléments de données normaux dans la citation d'une ressource cataloguée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lloyd, Richard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Auteur de Bound and minor words in Baruya]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bound and minor words in Baruya, 1989: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Point d'accès supplémentaire pour Alex, the amazing juggler]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Alex, the amazing juggler, 1981: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Éditeur intellectuel de Allen Jones]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Allen Jones, 1995: $b p. de t. (Richard Lloyd)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut aussi arriver qu'une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée existante comprenne une note 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée et identifiant la ou les ressources associées aux autres personnes portant le même nom. Dans ce cas, la notice ne comprend généralement pas de zones 670 pour les personnes autres que la première qui a été identifiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Jacques, Pierre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur de Les gouvernements au Canada n'est pas la même personne que le co-auteur de Esteve, A. Inventaire des secteurs résidentiels soumis ... ni la même personne que le co-éditeur de Les plus beaux textes sur les jeux ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les gouvernements au Canada, ©1978 : $b p. de t. (Pierre Jacques)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque de l'information pour distinguer une personne dans une notice d'autorité existante indifférenciée provenant de BAC ou de BAnQ est trouvée :&lt;br /&gt;
* Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour cette personne avec des informations distinctives et ajouter une indication que la personne était auparavant sur une notice indifférenciée (voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées|Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées]]&amp;amp;nbsp;», ci-dessous). Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette personne, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* Le cas échéant, transférer la &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;zone 670 de citation&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; se rapportant à cette personne depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Ne pas transférer la zone 670 d'identification vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* Si la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée n'est pas supprimée parce que plusieurs identités restent, supprimer les zones 670 qui se rapportent à la personne maintenant représentée sur la nouvelle notice d'autorité &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(c’est-à-dire, dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, supprimer à la fois la zone 670 d’identification et la zone 670 de citation)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; et, le cas échéant, éditer ou supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée pour supprimer la mention de cette personne.&lt;br /&gt;
* S'il reste plus d'une identité dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée et qu'il n'y a pas suffisamment d'information pour créer de nouvelles notices d'autorité de nom pour chaque nom, laisser la notice d'autorité de nom codée RCAA2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de faciliter le traitement automatisé des notices d'autorité (par exemple, appariement, liaison), lorsqu'il ne reste qu'une seule identité dans une notice d'autorité de nom de personne indifférenciée (c'est-à-dire lorsque les autres identités sont désambiguïsées et enlevées), procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'unique identité restante. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette identité, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;». Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Dans la nouvelle notice :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Le cas échéant, transférer la citation 670 se rapportant à l'unique identité restante depuis la notice d'autorité indifférenciée vers la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom et modifier l'information si c'est nécessaire.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;S'assurer que la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée contient seulement de l'information se rapportant à l'unique identité restante (par exemple, les zones 670). Le cas échéant, supprimer la zone 667 indiquant que la notice est indifférenciée.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée, ajouter la notice 667 suivante pour garantir qu'une notice d'autorité de nom ne sera pas créée en double :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:50px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée de BAC''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a L'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche n'est pas la même personne que l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Histoire du département de la Manche :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André, $d 1920-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Histoire du département de la Manche, c1975- : $b vol. 6, p. de t. (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 24 février 2021 $b (point d'accès : Dupont, André, 1920-)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'auteur d'Hydraulique urbaine :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana] $z [Numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dupont, André&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Hydraulique urbaine, 1965 : $b page de titre (André Dupont)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple de notice indifférenciée dérivée du LC/NAF''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Author of Esperanza]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Her Esperanza, 1855: $b t.p. (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a [Illustrator of Reptiles]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'autrice d'Esperanza :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne, $d activité 19e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Esperanza, 1855 : $b page de titre (Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation. L'identité qui reste est pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a 0000X0000F&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Dernière identité sur notice indifférenciée; signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom différenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996: $b copyr. p. (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice pour l'illustratrice de Reptiles :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bowman, Anne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Reptiles, c1996 : $b page de copyright (illus.: Anne Bowman)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;667_Identités_auparavant_indifférenciées&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes 667 dans les notices pour les identités qui figuraient auparavant sur des notices indifférenciées ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter une note 667 à une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour identifier le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité dans laquelle l'information sur cette personne a déjà été enregistrée :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices codées comme indifférenciées qui ne représentent en fait qu'une seule identité ====&lt;br /&gt;
À l'occasion, il arrive qu'une notice soit codée comme étant indifférenciée, mais que de nouvelles recherches indiquent qu'en fait la notice ne représente qu'une seule identité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'autrice et illustratrice de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut également arriver qu’on soupçonne que la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été codée par erreur dans la zone 008/32. Dans ces situations, procéder comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter une zone 667 à la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée indiquant qu'elle a été signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour l'identité. Le point d'accès autorisé lui-même peut être différent ou il peut être identique au point d'accès autorisé dans la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée. Si une notice d'autorité comportant la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;») et codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/32 existe déjà pour cette personne, utiliser cette notice comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;nouvelle notice&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter la note 667 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter dans la zone 016, sous-zone $z le numéro Canadiana de la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée qui sera supprimée, s'il y en a un.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Réévaluer la nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom si celle-ci contient la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;».&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Catalogueur du PFAN : Signaler la notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée au [mailto:pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca?subject=Notice%20non%20différenciée%20à%20supprimer&amp;amp;body=Bonjour,%0D%0DLa%20notice%20doit%20être%20vue%20par%20un%20catalogueur.%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20%C3%A0%20conserver%20%3A%0D%0DNotice%20à%20supprimer%20%3A%0D%0D pfansuppression-deletionfnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Message générique suggéré :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px; width:500px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4;  border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Objet : Notice non différenciée à supprimer&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
La notice doit être vue par un catalogueur.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à conserver :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notice à supprimer :   &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Catalogueur de BAC : Supprimer la notice d'autorité indifférenciée. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple d'une notice indifférenciée versée qui ne représente qu'une seule identité''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée avant la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité indifférenciée après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice d'autorité de nom indifférenciée représentant une seule identité; signalée pour suppression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Cas possible d'homonymie avec l'auteur et illustrateur de : Le cadeau de Kato, 2016.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Ds: Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nouvelle notice après la désambiguïsation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/32 = a&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
016 ## $a [Nouveau numéro Canadiana]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lemieux, Claire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [aucun numéro Canadiana, utiliser le numéro OCLC de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Bouchard, J. Espace mathématique 1 $b (illustratrice)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Le cadeau de Kato, 2016 $b (Claire Lemieux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[...]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Téléphone à l'artiste, 13 septembre 2021 $b (confirme que l'autrice de Le cadeau de Kato est la même personne que l'illustratrice de Espace mathématique et des affiches Double trouble et Opération Nez rouge)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==008/33 Niveau de l'établissement==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''provisoires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Coder une notice d'autorité de nom comme provisoire (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;») si le point d'accès autorisé ne peut être formulé de manière satisfaisante en raison d'informations insuffisantes. Si les informations nécessaires deviennent disponibles ultérieurement, réévaluer la notice d'autorité de nom et la mettre à jour pour qu'elle soit pleinement établie (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;»). En aucun cas, il ne faut créer une notice d'autorité de niveau provisoire avec un point d'accès qui entre en conflit avec une notice d'autorité de nom existante selon les règles de normalisation du PFAN.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Régions administratives spéciales de Hong Kong et de Macao'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Étant donné qu'il n'est pas certain que Hong Kong et Macao continueront à avoir deux langues officielles, coder toutes les notice d'autorité de nom pour les organismes gouvernementaux dans ces deux endroits, au niveau de la région administrative spéciale et en dessous, comme provisoires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;»), quelle que soit la langue dans laquelle le point d'accès autorisé a été établi. Si une forme dans la deuxième langue officielle devient disponible, ajouter cette forme comme variante de point d'accès plutôt que de réviser le point d'accès autorisé existant. Consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-1365.html RDA 11.2.2.5.2] et l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-105.html énoncé de politique connexe] pour obtenir des instructions sur le choix de la langue du nom privilégié. Noter que cette politique concernant le statut provisoire ne s'applique pas aux organismes non gouvernementaux.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Informations supplémentaires pour les participants au PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN peuvent créer des notices provisoires dans les deux situations exceptionnelles suivantes :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'a pas l'expertise linguistique nécessaire pour établir le point d'accès autorisé comme une notice d'autorité pleinement établie; cela comprend les situations où la bibliothèque ne dispose pas de sources de référence adéquates pour la recherche ou lorsque le catalogueur n'est pas sûr de la forme grammaticale correcte du point d'accès.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la bibliothèque contributrice n'est pas en mesure, en raison de ressources limitées ou d'autres contraintes, de compléter le travail pour les autorités en relation ou de déterminer la structure de renvois appropriée qui est requise pour les notices d'autorité pleinement établies.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Notices '''préliminaires''' (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité préliminaires (008/33 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;») sont généralement le résultat de projets rétrospectifs. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs du PFAN procèdent régulièrement à des mises à jour des notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils apportent d'autres modifications à la notice d'autorité. À cause de cette exigence de mise à jour, les participants au PFAN sont priés de communiquer avec le Comité des normes avant d'entreprendre des projets qui pourraient entraîner l'ajout massif de notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» au fichier d'autorité Canadiana.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Au besoin, les catalogueurs peuvent mettre à jour les notices d'autorité de noms codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaire&amp;amp;nbsp;» lorsqu'ils travaillent avec des notices de collectivités antérieures/postérieures, bien que le ou les points d'accès dans les notices mises à jour ne soient pas utilisés dans la base de données bibliographiques locale. À l'occasion, les catalogueurs peuvent avoir besoin de créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom sans avoir de ressource en main, par exemple pour un nom de collectivité antérieur ou postérieur, en utilisant des renseignements provenant de sources de référence, ou pour un point d'accès basé sur des renseignements trouvés dans la sous-zone «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» de la zone 245 de notices bibliographiques, lorsqu'ils résolvent des conflits entre notices d'autorité de noms. Ne pas coder ces notices d'autorité de noms occasionnelles comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;préliminaires&amp;amp;nbsp;» .&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, les éléments de données des collections doivent être vérifiés sur la publication et les notices d'autorité de collections doivent être codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» (complet). Dans le travail d'autorité post-catalogage, il est permis de créer des notices d'autorité de collections sans la ressource en main; ces notices sont codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» (préliminaire). Lorsqu'une publication appartenant à la collection a été examinée et que la notice d'autorité préliminaire a été revue et mise à jour au besoin, mettre la notice d'autorité de collection au niveau complet.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F33_Niveau_de_l.27.C3.A9tablissement |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 008/39 Source du catalogage ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quelle que soit la valeur codée à l'origine dans cette zone, ne pas changer cette valeur lors de la mise à jour d'une notice, sauf si la valeur d'origine est incorrecte. La valeur d'origine est incorrecte si elle n'est pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;blanc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour une notice créée à l'origine par BAC, BAnQ ou LC (sigle CaOONL, CaQMBN ou DLC dans la 040 $a) ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;c&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Programme de catalogage coopératif) pour une notice créée à l'origine par une université ou un participant NACO (sigle de l'université ou du participant NACO dans la 040 $a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#008.2F39_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 016 Numéro de contrôle de la notice d'autorité de BAC = &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 016 est obligatoire lorsque le catalogueur crée, met à jour ou utilise une autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité et lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante sans numéro Canadiana, vérifier dans le LC/NAF si la même entité est représentée par une autorité et si celle-ci comporte un numéro Canadiana. Noter que le point d'accès autorisé dans le LC/NAF pourrait avoir une forme différente de celui dans Canadiana. Si la notice dans le LC/NAF comporte un numéro Canadiana, ajouter ce numéro dans la notice Canadiana. Si le numéro se termine par le code de langue E, le changer pour le code F. S'il n'y a pas de code de langue, ajouter le code F à la fin du numéro.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la mise à jour ou de l'utilisation d'une notice existante avec numéro Canadiana, vérifier que le code de langue F est présent à la fin de la zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Doublons'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» un numéro Canadiana. Une fois qu'une notice d'autorité pour une entité donnée a été créée et qu'un numéro Canadiana lui a été attribué, ne pas changer les données dans cette notice pour représenter une entité DIFFÉRENTE. Par exemple, ne pas changer une notice d'autorité pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Dupont, Jean&amp;amp;nbsp;» en une pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Tremblay, Marie&amp;amp;nbsp;» (sauf si le nom de la personne a changé).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, demander à faire supprimer la notice (voir [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dures_sur_les_doublons|Procédures sur les doublons]]). NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il y a une zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, enregistrer le numéro Canadiana qui s'y trouve dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il n'y a pas de zone 016 dans une notice à supprimer, en ajouter une en utilisant le numéro 0000X0000F. Ne pas enregistrer ce numéro dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice qui sera conservée. Dans ce Guide, voir aussi «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Doublons|Doublons]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 667.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
______&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une notice d'autorité en double est identifiée, supprimer la notice. NE PAS «&amp;amp;nbsp;réutiliser&amp;amp;nbsp;» la notice pour représenter une autre entité. Cette action pose des problèmes aux services bibliographiques et aux autres systèmes de bibliothèques.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer le numéro Canadiana de la notice supprimée dans la sous-zone $z de la zone 016 de la notice conservée.&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Notices versées en lot partiellement modifiées'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les notices d'autorité versées en lot qui sont modifiées partiellement selon la [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]] comportent le numéro Canadiana 1111X1111F. Ce numéro temporaire est ajouté pour permettre l'enregistrement de la notice en attendant que celle-ci soit évaluée pour s'assurer qu'elle répond aux normes du PFAN. Ce numéro doit être remplacé par un numéro unique lorsque la notice est évaluée et que la note 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;CETTE NOTICE VERSÉE EN LOT DOIT ÊTRE ÉVALUÉE AVANT D'ÊTRE UTILISÉE, POUR S'ASSURER QU'ELLE RÉPONDE AUX NORMES DU PFAN&amp;amp;nbsp;» est supprimée.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 022 Numéro international normalisé des publications en série =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'ISSN chaque fois qu'il est fourni dans le document en main, dans les notices bibliographiques analytiques ou dans la notice bibliographique pour la collection cataloguée dans son ensemble; sinon, enregistrer l'ISSN est facultatif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on sait que des ISSN distincts ont été attribués à différents formats d'une collection représentée par une seule notice d'autorité, il est préférable d'enregistrer dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 022 l'ISSN qui est l'ISSN de liaison (ISSN-L) pour ces différents formats. Enregistrer les ISSN pour les formats spécifiques dans des zones 667 distinctes, en suivant ce modèle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version imprimée : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 $a Version en ligne : ISSN YYYY-ZZZZ&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre d'une publication a changé, il est important de s'assurer que l'ISSN figurant sur la publication appartient au nouveau titre et non au titre précédent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un ISSN incorrect peut être indiqué dans une zone 667 (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;L'ISSN 1122-3344 n'est pas un ISSN valide pour cette publication&amp;amp;nbsp;»).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 024 Autre numéro ou code normalisé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les lignes directrices des [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/naco/documents/NACO-024-Best-Practices.pdf ''NACO 024 Best Practices Guidelines'']. En règle générale, limiter à cinq le nombre de zones 024 dans une notice d'autorité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 024 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Maintenance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les identifiants codés dans la zone 024 des notices d'autorité du PFAN. Lorsqu'une zone 024 est présente dans une notice &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;d'autorité&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; qui fait l'objet d'une suppression (par exemple, dans le cas d'un doublon), les catalogueurs doivent transférer le contenu de la zone dans la notice qui doit être conservée. Lorsque deux notices d'autorité sont regroupées en une seule et que chacune des notices comporte une zone 024 différente, les catalogueurs doivent inclure les deux zones 024 dans la notice conservée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 034 Données mathématiques codées sur les documents cartographiques =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des pays, provinces, États, comtés'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les coordonnées des limites extérieures (rectangles de délimitation ou polygones) doivent généralement être utilisées avec des entités géographiques telles que des pays, des provinces, des États et des comtés pour identifier les coordonnées de l'entité. Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées en degrés/minutes/secondes, en degrés décimaux, en minutes décimales et/ou en secondes décimales. Les styles ne doivent pas être mélangés dans une même zone 034, mais la zone peut être répétée pour représenter les différents styles (voir ci-dessous pour les utilitaires de conversion); l'ordre des zones 034 lorsque les deux styles sont donnés n'a pas d'importance. Pour faciliter la réutilisation des coordonnées dans les applications géographiques, il faut employer le point et non la virgule comme signe décimal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés/minutes/secondes''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W1800000 $e E1800000 $f N0840000 $g S0700000&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux''' : enregistrement sous la forme hddd.dddddd (hémisphère-degrés.degrés décimaux)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E079.533265 $e E086.216635 $f S012.583377 $g S020.419532&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Degrés décimaux avec plus et moins''' : enregistrer sous la forme +-ddd.dddddd (hémisphère[+/-]-degrés.décimaux) («&amp;amp;nbsp;+&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour N et E, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour S et W; le signe plus est facultatif)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d +079.533265 $e +086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple avec +/-)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d 079.533265 $e 086.216635 $f -012.583377 $g -020.419532&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple sans le signe plus facultatif)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Minutes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmm.mmmm (hémisphère-degrés-minutes.minutes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E07932.5332 $e E08607.4478 $f S01235.5421 $g S02028.9704&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
:'''Secondes décimales''' : enregistrement sous la forme hdddmmss.sss (hémisphère-degrés-minutes-secondes.secondes décimales)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d E0793235.575 $e E0860727.350 $f S0123536.895 $g S0202858.125&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enregistrement des coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les coordonnées des municipalités et des cantons doivent généralement être enregistrées comme des points centraux plutôt que comme des limites extérieures. Pour la zone 034, la longitude et la latitude qui forment l'axe central sont enregistrées deux fois pour définir le point central (c'est-à-dire que les contenus des sous-zones $d et $e sont identiques et les contenus des sous-zones $f et $g sont identiques).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;034 ## $d W0950500 $e W0950500 $f N0303000 $g N0303000&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés/minutes/secondes)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d W119.697222 $e W119.697222 $f N034.420833 $g N034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
034 ## $d -119.697222 $e -119.697222 $f +034.420833 $g +034.420833&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Exemple montrant les degrés décimaux avec plus/moins)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Outils de conversion des coordonnées'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les institutions membres du PFAN sont encouragées à fournir des degrés/minutes/secondes et des degrés décimaux lorsqu'ils sont disponibles. De nombreux outils de conversion sont disponibles sur le Web pour dériver les uns des autres. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $2 a été définie pour l'enregistrement de la source des codes d'information sur les coordonnées - les sources couramment utilisées sont disponibles dans : [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CDC.html/view ''Codes sources pour les données cartographiques'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une citation de la source dans la zone 670 n'est pas nécessaire si la seule information provenant de la source est enregistrée dans la zone 034; une citation dans la zone 670 doit être faite si nécessaire pour enregistrer des informations en plus des coordonnées, telles que les variantes de nom, la hiérarchie, la période d'applicabilité, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#034_Donn.C3.A9es_math.C3.A9matiques_cod.C3.A9es_sur_les_documents_cartographiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 035 Numéro de contrôle de système =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#035_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_syst.C3.A8me |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 040 Source du catalogage =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs doivent consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour les instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité nouvelles ou existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Langue de catalogage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $b fre ajoutée automatiquement par WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $d – Organisme responsable des modifications'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $d [code MARC 21] est ajoutée automatiquement par WMS lorsque la dernière sous-zone MARC $d dans la zone 040 n'est pas déjà celle de l'institution qui a modifié la notice. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $e – Règles de description'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Toutes les nouvelles notices d'autorité créées et versées par les catalogueurs participant au PFAN doivent avoir le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/10 et inclure la sous-zone $e rda dans la zone 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on ajoute manuellement la sous-zone $e, ajouter la sous-zone après la sous-zone $b et avant la sous-zone $c. Il n'est pas nécessaire de déplacer la sous-zone $e à cette position si elle est déjà présente ailleurs dans le 040 ou si elle est ajoutée par une macro ou un gabarit. Lorsque la zone fixe 008/10 (Règles de catalogage descriptif) est changée pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;z&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Autre), la sous-zone $e rda est automatiquement ajoutée par le système.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#040_Source_du_catalogage |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 042 Code d'authenticité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Cette zone se retrouve dans les notices d'autorité utilisées par BAC. Ne pas modifier ou supprimer cette zone lorsque le code CaOONL figure dans la 040.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les catalogueurs autres que ceux de BAC dérivent une notice à partir d'une notice de BAC contenant une zone 042, ils doivent s'assurer de supprimer cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
_____&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''BAC'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Les catalogueurs doivent ajouter la zone 042 $a nlc dans Canadiana chaque fois qu'ils créent, révisent ou dérivent une notice d'autorité. Ce code identifie le fichier «&amp;amp;nbsp;virtuel&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'autorité nationale canadienne qui est divisé en deux bases de données (LC/NAF et Canadiana).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-08]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#042_Code_d.27authenticit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 043 Code de région géographique &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 043 peut seulement être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms géographiques (151).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone b – Code local de région géographique et Sous-zone $2 – Source du code local'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les lieux situés au Québec, les participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser la sous-zone $b pour enregistrer un code local tiré de la liste ci-dessous et représentant la région administrative du Québec où le lieu est situé. Ce code est formé du code de région géographique « n-cn--- » et d'un code local de sous-entité de deux lettres (p. ex., qa) qui identifie la région administrative et remplace les deux derniers caractères du code « n-cn--- » (p. ex. « n-cn-qa »). La sous-zone $b est enregistrée à la suite de la sous-zone $a et est suivie par la sous-zone $2 cagraq.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
043 ## $a n-cn-qu $b n-cn-qj $2 cagraq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Le Golfe-du-Saint-Laurent (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Codes d’aires géographiques pour les régions administratives du Québec'''&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none; width:40%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:20%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black; width:10%&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qa&lt;br /&gt;
|Bas-Saint-Laurent&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 01&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qb&lt;br /&gt;
|Saguenay–Lac-Saint-Jean&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 02&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qc&lt;br /&gt;
|Capitale-Nationale&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 03&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qd&lt;br /&gt;
|Mauricie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 04&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qe&lt;br /&gt;
|Estrie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 05&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qf&lt;br /&gt;
|Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 06&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qg&lt;br /&gt;
|Outaouais&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 07&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qh&lt;br /&gt;
|Abitibi-Témiscamingue&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 08&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qj&lt;br /&gt;
|Côte-Nord&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 09&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qk&lt;br /&gt;
|Nord-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 10&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-ql&lt;br /&gt;
|Gaspésie–Îles-de-la-Madeleine&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 11&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qm&lt;br /&gt;
|Chaudière-Appalaches&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 12&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qn&lt;br /&gt;
|Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 13&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qo&lt;br /&gt;
|Lanaudière&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 14&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qp&lt;br /&gt;
|Laurentides&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 15&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qq&lt;br /&gt;
|Montérégie&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 16&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|n-cn-qr&lt;br /&gt;
|Centre-du-Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|Région 17&lt;br /&gt;
|- style=&amp;quot;vertical-align: top;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-11-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 046 Dates spéciales codées =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Lors de l'encodage de l'information sur la date, donner l'information la plus complète possible sur la date lorsque celle-ci est facilement disponible (la date dans la zone 046 peut être plus précise qu'une date utilisée dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d).&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046_2e_par&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Lors&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; de la révision des notices d'autorité existantes, enregistrer les dates dans la zone 046 même si le point d'accès lui-même n'a pas de dates dans la zone 100, sous-zone $d, lorsque l'information est facilement disponible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des dates dans la zone 046, utiliser la norme Extended Date Time Format (EDTF) dans tous les cas, sauf pour les siècles; fournir les dates en utilisant le modèle aaaa, aaaa-mm ou aaaa-mm-jj. Voir le tableau d'exemples dans l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp9_lacbanqps9-304.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.3.1.3]. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Pour les spécifications complètes de l'EDTF, voir [https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/ https://www.loc.gov/standards/datetime/].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1884-10-11 $g 1962-11-07 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Roosevelt, Eleanor, $d 1884-1962&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a When you grow up to vote, 1932 : $b p. de t. (Eleanor Roosevelt (Mrs. Franklin D. Roosevelt))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 21 juillet 2010 $b (Eleanor Roosevelt; Anna Eleanor Roosevelt; née le 11 octobre 1884 à Manhattan, à New York; morte le 7 novembre 1962)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1946-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Vickers, Roy Henry, $d 1946-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Solstice, c1988 : $b p. de t. (Roy Henry Vickers) jaquette (artiste amérindien; né en juin 1946 à Greenville, Colombie-Britannique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 1981 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Allende, Isabel. $t Casa de los espíritus&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cox, Karen Castellucci. Isabel Allende, 2003 : $b p. 4-5 (en 1981 Allende a commencé à écrire une version romancée des histoires qu'elle avait entendues dans son enfance, qui a été publiée en Espagne en 1982)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-top:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 194X $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Hicks, Johnny $c (Saxophoniste)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Blues around the clock, 1945 : $b étiquette (Johnny Hicks, saxophone ténor)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web Discogs, consulté le 27 mai 2021 $b (Johnny Hicks; saxophoniste ténor qui a joué avec Tab Smith dans les années 1940)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de dates avant Jésus-Christ dans la zone 046, faire précéder les chiffres d'un trait d'union (signe moins). Comme il n'y a pas d'an zéro dans le calendrier de l'ère commune, il faut soustraire une année de la date réelle avant Jésus-Christ; par exemple, l'an 50 av. J.-C. est enregistré comme suit : -0049.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ##  $s -0199~ $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hellanicus $c (Grammairien), $d environ 200 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Brill's new Pauly, consulté le 2 août 2011 $b (Hellanicus; grammairien d'Alexandrie; environ 200 av. J.-C.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement d'un siècle dans la zone 046, utiliser les deux premiers chiffres de l'intervalle de cent ans (par exemple, utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;16&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour représenter le 17&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle, 1600-1699).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 17&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Turner, Elizabeth, $d activité 18e siècle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Cohen, A.I. Int'l encycl. of women composers, 2nd ed. $b (Turner, Elizabeth, compositrice anglaise du 18e siècle) &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Noter que le 1&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;er&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle apr. J.-C. est représenté par la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;00&amp;amp;nbsp;» et que les siècles av. J.-C. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;sont précédés d'&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;un trait d'union &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;(signe moins)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; avant les chiffres (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;-04&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le 5&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle av. J.-C.). Un siècle approximatif (par exemple, activité environ 12&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;e&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; siècle) ne peut pas être enregistré dans la zone 046.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Répétabilité'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;La zone 046 est répétable, mais les sous-zones de la zone 046 utilisées pour enregistrer les dates ne le sont pas. En général, une seule zone 046 avec des dates conformes à la norme EDTF devrait être suffisante. Cependant, les dates de siècles suivent la norme ISO 8601 et non la norme EDTF. Lors de l'enregistrement de dates de siècles en plus de dates plus précises, il faut donc répéter la zone 046.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates divergentes'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, les ressources consultées peuvent présenter des dates divergentes (par exemple, des dates de naissance ou de décès divergentes pour une personne ou des dates de début ou de fin divergentes pour une collectivité). Dans ces situations, la zone 046 doit refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'enregistrer toutes les dates divergentes en utilisant la zone 046, ni d'enregistrer une zone 046 pour chaque ressource consultée. L'évaluation des dates divergentes doit généralement avoir pour résultat une seule zone 046, contenant la ou les dates que le catalogueur juge les plus exactes pour représenter l'entité. Le catalogueur peut décider d'enregistrer ou non la ou les dates divergentes dans la zone 046 et il n'est pas nécessaire que la ou les dates enregistrées dans la zone 046 correspondent exactement à celle ou celles choisies pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;De même, toute date ajoutée au point d'accès autorisé devrait refléter la façon dont le catalogueur évalue les informations divergentes sur la ou les dates, enregistrées conformément aux instructions de RDA et des énoncés de politique du PFAN. On peut considérer qu'une date qui prédomine dans les ressources consultées est la plus appropriée pour figurer dans le point d'accès autorisé. Si aucune date ne prédomine, le catalogueur peut décider d'utiliser le format «&amp;amp;nbsp;approximativement aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa?&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;aaaa ou aaaa&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans le point d'accès autorisé. Dans certains cas, des dates correspondant à la période d'activité de la personne (RDA 9.19.1.5) peuvent être préférables.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f -0156 $g -0085-01-13 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Marius, Caius, $d 157 av. J.-C.-86 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Syllana varia : aux sources de la première guerre civile romaine, 2008 : $b ressource non disponible (Marius)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Grand dictionnaire encyclopédique Larousse, 1984 $b (Marius (Caius); général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157-Rome 86 av. J.-C.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique Quillet, 1983 $b (Marius (Caius) (156-86 av. J.-C.); né à Arpinium, général romain d'origine plébéienne)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Petit Robert des noms propres, 2006 $b (Marius, en lat. Caius Marius; général et homme politique romain (Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, -157 - Rome -86))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Dictionnaire encyclopédique d'histoire, 1978 $b (Marius, Caius (né à Cereatae, près d'Arpinum, 157, mort à Rome 13.I.86 av. J.-C.); général et homme politique romain)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 157 av. J-C. comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce que c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f 1907-05-12 $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moi : histoires de ma vie, 1994 : $b page de titre (Katharine Hepburn) page 27 (née le 12 mai 1907)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Contemporary theatre, film &amp;amp; television, c1996 : $b (Katharine Houghton Hepburn, née le 9 novembre 1909 à Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Biography resource center, 2 juillet 2003 $b (Katharine Hepburn (actrice américaine, 1907-2003) ; Contemporary authors : Katharine (Houghton) Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Conn.; Complete Marquis who's who : Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Conn.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a IMDb, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907, Hartford, Connecticut; morte le 29 juin 2003, Old Saybrook, Connecticut)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Wikipédia, 5 septembre 2023 $b (Katharine Hepburn; née le 12 mai 1907 à Hartford (Connecticut) et morte le 29 juin 2003 à Old Saybrook (Connecticut); actrice américaine)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a choisi 1907 comme date de naissance à la fois dans le point d'accès autorisé et dans la zone 046 parce c'est cette date qui figure le plus fréquemment dans les sources consultées)''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1907-05-12,1909-11-09] $g 2003-06-29 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hepburn, Katharine, $d 1907-2003&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Même exemple que ci-dessus illustrant une décision différente que le catalogueur aurait pu prendre concernant l'enregistrement de la sous-zone $f de la zone 046)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;La zone 046 étant basée sur des informations provenant de sources multiples, la justification ne peut être formulée avec précision dans une sous-zone $v/$u à la fin d'une zone 046. Les dates divergentes doivent être enregistrées dans des zones 670. Si une notice existante comporte une sous-zone $v/$u comme justification d'une zone 046 et que cette zone 046 est mise à jour comme décrit ci-dessus, il faut supprimer la sous-zone $v/$u et convertir la justification en une zone 670 si les dates divergentes ne sont pas déjà justifiées dans des zones 670 existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;'''Dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Dans certaines situations, il peut être nécessaire d'effectuer un calcul pour déterminer les dates à enregistrer dans la zone 046 et le point d'accès autorisé. De tels calculs peuvent produire des dates incertaines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Si les ressources consultées ne fournissent que la date de décès de la personne et son âge (en années) au moment du décès, comme cela se voit souvent dans les notices nécrologiques, l'année de naissance de la personne correspondra à l'une de deux années consécutives. Pour calculer ces années, il faut d'abord soustraire l'âge de l'année de décès, puis utiliser l'année ainsi obtenue et l'année précédente comme les deux possibilités pour l'année de naissance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1918,1919] $g 1994-04 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dalpé, Paul-Émile, $d 1918 ou 1919-1994&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Analyse du marché du travail des infirmières au Québec, 1964 : $b page 9 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président, Fédération nationale des services inc. (C.S.N.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La Presse, 31 décembre 1994 :$b page B 7 (Paul-Émile Dalpé, président fondateur de la Centrale des syndicats démocratiques, mort en avril 1994 à l'âge de 75 ans)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le catalogueur a soustrait 75, l'âge au décès, de 1994, l'année du décès; l'année obtenue, 1919, et l'année qui la précède, 1918, représentent les deux années de naissance possibles)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si des dates non-grégoriennes figurent dans les ressources consultées, la conversion de ces dates en dates grégoriennes peut produire des dates incertaines. Il faut utiliser les dates du calendrier grégorien dans la zone 046 et dans le point d'accès autorisé. Il se peut qu'une même date dans un calendrier non-grégorien corresponde à l'une de deux dates grégoriennes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $f [1967,1968] $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Zaeef, Abdul Salam, $d 1967 ou 1968-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Prisonnier à Guantanamo, 2008 : $b page de titre (Mollah Abdul Salam Zaeef)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 25 août 2023 $b (point d'accès : Z̤aʻīf, ʻAbd al-Salām, 1967 or 1968- ; né en 1346 [1967 ou 68])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La date de 1346 dans le calendrier hégirien correspond à 1967 ou 1968 dans le calendrier grégorien.)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de la norme de la date'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toujours ajouter la sous-zone $2 edtf, sauf après un siècle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zones $q – Date de fondation, $r – Date de cessation,&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; $s – Début de la période d'activité et $t – Fin de la période d'activité'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer les dates associées à un congrès, etc., ponctuel ou à une occurrence isolée dans une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.2] et [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5252.html RDA 11.13.1.8.1]), dans les sous-zones $s et $t.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $s 2017-07-27 $t 2017-08-06 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
111 2# $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur $n (26e : $d 2017 : $c Saint-Sauveur, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Festival des arts de Saint-Sauveur, du 27 juillet au 6 août 2017, 2017&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Enregistrer la date de fondation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4572.html RDA 11.4.3]) et la date de cessation ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-4628.html RDA 11.4.4]) d'une série de congrès, etc. ([https://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-5691.html RDA 11.13.1.8.2]), si cette information est connue, dans les sous-zones $q et $r.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $q 2019 $2 edtf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Acfas (Association). $b Congrès&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a L'université du XXIe siècle, 2020 : $b page de titre (87e Congrès de l'Acfas, tenu à l'Université du Québec en Outaouais) page 3 (2019)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Congrès de l'Acfas. Programme général, 70e (2002), substitut : $b page de titre (76e Congrès de l'Acfas, du 5 au 9 mai 2008, Centre des congrès de Québec) page ii (Association francophone pour le savoir-Acfas)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'utilisation des sous-zones $s et $t pour le début et la fin de la période d'activité dans les zones 368 et 370-376, voir les directives présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les instructions suivantes représentent la pratique du PFAN sur l'enregistrement des sources d'information dans les sous-zones $u et $v des zones où elles sont définies, et/ou dans la zone 670 :&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;046$u$v&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Les zones 670 doivent être utilisées pour appuyer l'information utilisée comme une partie du point d'accès dans les zones 1XX et 4XX.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pour les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $v est facultatif si la même information/source est déjà citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;utiliser la sous-zone $v si l'information/source n'est pas citée dans la zone 670&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'emploi de la sous-zone $u est facultatif et celle-ci doit toujours être précédée de la sous-zone $v.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser une zone 670 si c'est nécessaire pour justifier l'information enregistrée dans d'autres zones pour lesquelles les sous-zones $u et $v ne sont pas définies ou sont définies différemment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $v – Source d'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement des données dans la sous-zone $v (Source d'information) des zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381, suivre les mêmes principes de base pour la citation que ceux qui s'appliquent actuellement pour la zone 670, sous-zone $a (Citation de la source).&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Fournir une information précise sur la citation (numéro de page, sous-page d'un site Web) dans la sous-zone $v si, selon le jugement du catalogueur, cette plus grande précision est nécessaire pour trouver l'information à l'intérieur de la source citée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information dans les zones 046, 368, 370-378 et 381 est sous la même forme que celle trouvée dans la source, il n'est pas nécessaire de la citer. Si l'information enregistrée dans ces zones est sous une forme différente de celle dans la source, utiliser 670 $b (Information trouvée).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les sources matérielles :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l'information provient d'une source matérielle (par exemple, un livre imprimé, un support numérique amovible), la sous-zone $v doit contenir suffisamment d'information pour qu'un catalogueur puisse trouver la ressource citée dans un catalogue ou une base de données bibliographiques. Ceci peut généralement se limiter au titre propre et au nom de l'éditeur ou à la date. Si cette combinaison n'est pas unique, la citation du titre peut être précédée du nom du créateur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour les ressources en ligne :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fournir suffisamment d'information pour permettre de trouver la ressource via un moteur de recherche. Inclure soit le titre et la date de publication (si c'est une ressource publiée formellement, tel un livre numérique), soit une description appropriée du document et la date d'accès (pour une ressource moins formelle). Facultativement, inclure la sous-zone $u.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lazzarini, Sérgio G.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Relations industrielles $2 rvm $v Lazzarini, Sergio G. CV-English, consulté le 22 février 2012 $u http ://www.sergiolazzarini.insper.edu.br/indexelazza.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Capitalismo de laçeos, 2011 : $b page de titre (Sérgio G. Lazzarini)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-03]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 050 Cote de la Library of Congress =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#050_Cote_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 053 Indice de la classification de la Library of Congress &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes pour enregistrer les indices de la classification LC des auteurs littéraires individuels, y compris les auteurs de littérature de jeunesse. Elle peut aussi être utilisée '''exceptionnellement''' dans les notices d'autorité de noms de personnes et de collectivités pour enregistrer les indices de biographie dans la fourchette ML410-429 de la classification LC lorsque le choix de l'indice ou du Cutter n'est pas évident. La zone 053 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a PZ7.T378 $c Littérature de jeunesse anglaise $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Thomson, Sarah L. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
053 #4 $a ML410.S716 $c Biographie $5 [Code MARC de l'institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Chostakovitch, Dmitri Dmitrievitch, $d 1906-1975&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il ne faut pas enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000 dans la zone 053. Pour l'utilisation des indices de la classe PS8000 dans les notices d'autorité de noms, voir la section [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]] de ce Guide. Une notice d'autorité pour un auteur littéraire canadien peut contenir à la fois une zone 053 et une zone 065.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 055 Cote de Bibliothèque et Archives Canada =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#055_Cote_de_Biblioth.C3.A8que_et_Archives_Canada |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 065 Autre indice de classification &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 065 sert à enregistrer les indices de la classe PS8000. La zone 065 doit toujours comprendre une sous-zone $2 et une sous-zone $5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
065 ## $a PS8576.U57 $2 fcps $5 [Code MARC de l’institution]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source de l'indice'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;fcps&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour indiquer que l'indice provient de la classe PS8000.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#065_Autre_indice_de_classification |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 082 Cote de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#082_Cote_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 083 Indice de la Classification décimale Dewey =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#083_Indice_de_la_Classification_d.C3.A9cimale_Dewey |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 086 Cote de publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#086_Cote_de_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 087 Indice de classification d'une publication officielle =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#087_Indice_de_classification_d.27une_publication_officielle |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 1XX Vedette – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participant au programme PFAN sont invités à consulter les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8c/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_en_vigueur_apr%C3%A8s_le_test_de_RDA.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC en vigueur après le test de RDA''] pour obtenir des instructions sur l'utilisation de RDA et/ou des RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité existantes ou nouvelles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer la ponctuation de fin de zone dans la zone 1XX à moins qu'elle ne fasse partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou qu'elle ne soit requise par les instructions de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Afin de minimiser l'impact de la maintenance de la base de données sur les notices bibliographiques associées et/ou les notices d'autorité associées, les catalogueurs sont priés de s'abstenir d'apporter des changements qui ne sont pas essentiels aux zones 1XX.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour le titre propre d'une monographie en plusieurs parties, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2781.html/view RDA 2.1.2.3].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choix du titre propre d'une collection pour une monographie :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte plus d'une forme de mention de collection, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7766.html/view RDA 2.12.2.2] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view 2.12.2.5.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource porte une mention de collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture dans la même source, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7759.html/view RDA 2.12.2.4.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si la ressource comporte des pages de titre pour la collection dans plus d'une langue ou écriture, consulter [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-2915.html/view RDA 2.2.3.1.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Tenir compte de l'espacement et des changements dans la typographie au moment de déterminer où le titre de la collection commence et se termine. Consulter également [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-7778.html/view RDA 2.12.2.3.]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Établissement d'un point d'accès pour une collection :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Déterminer le choix du point d'accès autorisé en fonction de l'instruction [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-6412.html/view RDA 6.27] et des énoncés de politique de BAC/BAnQ pour cette instruction.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Exclure du point d'accès autorisé les renseignements suivants inclus dans la mention de collection dans la notice bibliographique de la partie composante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'article initial dans les sous-zones $a, $t, $n et $p;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les compléments de titre;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;la mention de responsabilité;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;le ou les titres parallèles;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;l'ISSN;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;les désignations numériques/chronologiques.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ajouter un ou plusieurs qualificatifs entre parenthèses, le cas échéant, conformément aux énoncés de politique de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.27.1.9.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour obtenir des instructions sur la conversion d'une notice d'autorité de nom en notice d'autorité de collection, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Should an SAR be made?&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1].--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-10-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 100 Vedette – Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour les familles'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;3&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une famille. Voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière|Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section [[#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public|667]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière des notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Les ajouts au nom sont contenus dans une seule paire de parenthèses séparées par des deux-points. &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# Le terme pour le type de famille est ajouté après le nom et il est enregistré dans la sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $d (date) suit le terme pour le type de famille.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $c est utilisée pour un lieu associé à une famille et suit la date.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
# La sous-zone $g est utilisée pour un membre illustre d'une famille. Donner le point d'accès autorisé pour la personne tel que trouvé dans la 1XX de la notice d'autorité de nom sans garder aucun codage de sous-zone interne.&lt;br /&gt;
# &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Jones (Famille : $d 1801-1950 : $c New York, N.Y. : $g Jones, Samuel, 1830-1899)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''''Points d'accès autorisés pour des personnes'''''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur dans la zone 100 lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instructions pour les sous-zones'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'y a pas d'ordre MARC prescrit pour les sous-zones au-delà de la sous-zone $a dans les zones X00. [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5] fournit des directives sur l'emplacement des mots indiquant une relation (par exemple, Jr.) et le MARC définit la sous-zone $q comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;Forme développée du nom de personne.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Lorsqu'on fournit plusieurs ajouts au nom, suivre en général ces instructions :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) La sous-zone $d (date) doit toujours être le dernier élément dans une zone 100 sauf si le terme (Esprit) est ajouté au nom. Ajouter $c (Esprit) comme dernier élément d'une zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Élisabeth $b Ire, $c reine d'Angleterre, $d 1533-1603 $c (Esprit)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) En général ajouter la sous-zone $c avant la sous-zone $q lorsqu'on ajoute aussi des mots, des chiffres, etc., indiquant une relation. (Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-2234.html/view RDA 9.2.2.9.5.] pour le traitement des noms portugais)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a McCauley, Robert H., $c Jr. $q (Robert Henry), $d 1913-1979&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MAIS&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a M. Alicia $q (Mary Alicia), $c Sister, S.C.N.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
3) Pour les situations exceptionnelles, par exemple lorsque la sous-zone $a ne contient qu'un nom de famille ou qu'un prénom ou que le nom inclut un préfixe, etc., consulter le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-224.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.1].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#100_Vedette_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 336 Contenu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 336 peut seulement être utilisée pour les notices d'autorité représentant des expressions. La zone 336 est toujours suivie d'une sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans la sous-zone $2, enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;rdacontent/fre&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser les termes fournis dans [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3421.html RDA 6.9.1.3]. La liste des termes est également disponible dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Code du type de contenu'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si on enregistre une sous-zone $b à la place ou en plus d'une sous-zone $a, utiliser les codes fournis dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/RDA-CON-MARC.html ''Liste des termes et des codes RDA pour les types de contenu''] du MARC 21.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#336_Contenu |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 368 Autres attributs associés à des personnes ou des collectivités =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé pour les termes dans les sous-zones $a, $b et $c. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a, $b et $c. Lorsque les termes dans les sous-zones $a et $b ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Freer Gallery of Art&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Musées d'art $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b États $2 ram&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Garwolin (Pologne : Powiat)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $b Powiat&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne, $c d'Arc, sainte, $d 1412-1431&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Palamède $c (Personnage du cycle arthurien)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Personnage du cycle arthurien&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Church of Christ (Rigdonites) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Rigdonites  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Indiana (Cuirassé : BB-50)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $a Cuirassés $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c BB-50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer de professions ou d'occupations dans la sous-zone $c (Autre désignation). La profession ou l'occupation peut être enregistrée dans la zone 374.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les titres de royauté, de noblesse ou de rang ecclésiastique ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4646.html RDA 9.4.1.4–9.4.1.8]) dans la sous-zone $d dans la forme utilisée dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Alexandre $b VI, $c pape, $d 1431-1503&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d pape $s 1492 $t 1503&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jane Seymour, $c reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre, $d 1509?-1537&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d reine, épouse d'Henri VIII, roi d'Angleterre&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Jeanne Marie, $c sœur, $d 1926-2013&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d sœur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Walsh, Joseph-Alexis, $c vicomte, $d 1782-1860&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d vicomte&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $c Saints $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
368 ## $d métropolite de Rostov&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La première 368 renferme un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé mais pas la seconde)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'une période et Sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#368_Autres_attributs_associ.C3.A9s_.C3.A0_des_personnes_ou_des_collectivit.C3.A9s |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 370 Lieu associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de juridictions ou d'autres lieux, utiliser la forme trouvée dans Canadiana ou, à défaut, celle trouvée dans le RVM, en enregistrant la source dans la sous-zone $2. La forme du nom de lieu utilisée dans la zone 370 peut différer de la forme du nom de lieu ajoutée à un nom privilégié de lieu ou à un point d'accès construit selon les instructions de RDA ou des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Washington (État)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Washington (État) $2 lacnaf &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Program (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Seattle (Wash.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Québec (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut le type de juridiction)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Québec (Province) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Parti libéral du Canada (Québec) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie du nom d'une localité&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Rimouski (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana : &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Congo (République démocratique)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le point d'accès autorisé pour le lieu inclut une autre désignation)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Congo (République démocratique) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Centre d'information et d'animation missionnaire (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de lieu)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme partie d'un nom de localité :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lubumbashi (Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié du lieu plus vaste)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $e Lubumbashi (Congo) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom comme ajout à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Institut Imara (Lubumbashi, Congo)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nom géographique dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ottawa (Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Abréviation du nom de lieu plus vaste selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdaappb-fr_rdab-388.html RDA B.11])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $g Ottawa (Ont.) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Forme du nom de lieu ajouté à un point d'accès :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Histoire et généalogie (Ottawa, Ont.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Nom privilégié de la localité modifié selon [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp16-fr_rda16-351.html RDA 16.2.2.4])''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Autre nom de lieu dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point d'accès autorisé enregistré dans la zone 370 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Auschwitz (Camp de concentration) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité pour le lieu n'existe pas dans Canadiana ni dans le RVM, il n'est pas nécessaire d'en créer une pour enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370. Enregistrer le lieu dans la zone 370 selon les instructions de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ, en consultant les sources appropriées et en ajoutant des éléments additionnels (par exemple, le type de juridiction) afin d'éviter les conflits. Ne pas ajouter de sous-zone $2 si aucune notice d'autorité n'a été créée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom du lieu associé a changé, le nom du lieu qui s'appliquait à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré à la place ou en plus de la forme actuelle du nom. Il n'est pas nécessaire de suivre les politiques d'indexation et d'utiliser uniquement la forme la plus récente du nom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemples :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Salisbury (Zimbabwe)$c Zimbabwe $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne née dans la ville de Salisbury avant que son nom ne devienne Harare; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme de nom qui s'appliquait au moment de la naissance de la personne)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $a Italie $e Milan (Italie) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne résidant dans la ville de Milan pendant la Renaissance, avant la formation du pays moderne de l'Italie; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer la forme actuelle du nom pour le pays)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les noms de lieux qui ne sont pas des juridictions, préférer les noms provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM et identifier la source dans la sous-zone $2. Si le nom ne provient pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, l'enregistrer dans la zone 370 sans ajouter de sous-zone $2.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer quand créer une notice d'autorité pour un nom géographique, consulter la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;Name Authority Records (NARs)&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Sous-zone $c – Pays associé&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;En général, ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $c pour enregistrer les lieux qui ne sont pas des entités souveraines. Ces lieux peuvent être enregistrés dans la sous-zone $f ou dans d'autres sous-zones selon le cas.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Exemple :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c France $f Martinique $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(La Martinique est un département français d'outre-mer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, si une entité souveraine comporte (ou comportait auparavant) un ou plusieurs pays constitutifs, n'importe lequel des pays constitutifs associés à la 1XX peut facultativement être enregistré dans la sous-zone $c en plus ou à la place de l'entité souveraine plus vaste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Grande-Bretagne $c Pays de Galles $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à la Grande-Bretagne qui a des liens étroits avec le Pays de Galles; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c URSS $c Kirghizistan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Union soviétique, en particulier au Kirghizistan; le catalogueur a choisi d'enregistrer les deux lieux)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Aruba $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à Aruba, un pays constitutif des Pays-Bas; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer les Pays-Bas)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Inde $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Pour une personne associée à l'Inde avant son indépendance de la Grande-Bretagne; le catalogueur a choisi de ne pas enregistrer la Grande-Bretagne)''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les noms d'entités des Premières Nations au Canada ainsi que les tribus indiennes («&amp;amp;nbsp;Indian tribes&amp;amp;nbsp;») reconnues par le gouvernement des États-Unis comme des entités juridiques peuvent être incluses dans la sous-zone $c.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $c Première nation de Natashkuan $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Enregistrer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre dans la zone 370, sauf s'il s'agit simplement d'un lieu de publication ou d'un autre lieu associé à une manifestation (auquel cas utiliser la zone 643, le cas échéant). Bien que le «&amp;amp;nbsp;lieu d'origine&amp;amp;nbsp;» d'une œuvre en série puisse être le même que le lieu de publication de l'œuvre pour laquelle la notice d'autorité de collection (ou la notice bibliographique de publication en série) a été créée, faire preuve de jugement pour distinguer le lieu d'origine de l'œuvre d'un lieu de publication qui n'est pas réellement lié à l'œuvre elle-même.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-01-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 371 Adresse =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier :&lt;br /&gt;
* Selon le jugement du catalogueur, fournir une adresse si les informations sont facilement disponibles et n'ont pas déjà été enregistrées dans la sous-zone $e (Lieu de résidence, de sièges sociaux) de la zone 370.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Dans les cas où la sous-zone $a n'est pas enregistrée, inclure au minimum la sous-zone $m (Adresse de courriel) ou la sous-zone $b (Ville). &lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Ne pas enregistrer les adresses physiques &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou courriels&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; des personnes vivantes.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
* Les catalogueurs ne sont pas tenus de mettre à jour les informations reliées à l'adresse lors de la mise à jour d'une notice contenant une adresse.&lt;br /&gt;
* &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer plusieurs adresses, avec ou sans plages de dates, dans des zones 371 distinctes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Adresse de courriel'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $m doit contenir uniquement une adresse de courriel. Ne pas ajouter d'adresse Internet pour la 1XX dans cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-12-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#371_Adresse |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 372 Domaine d'activité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée pour le domaine d'activité, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Japon--Histoire $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;372 ## $a Grunge $2 rvmfg&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une entité provenant de Canadiana est utilisée comme domaine d'activité, enlever tout codage de sous-zone qui n'est pas autorisé dans la zone 372.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Nouveau Testament&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Domaine d'activité dans la 372 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372## $a Bible. Nouveau Testament $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel que la plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Poésie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
372 ## $a Brasserie artisanale&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Zones 372 avec un terme provenant du RVM et un terme de vocabulaire non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – début d'un période et la sous-zone $t – Fin d'une période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2026-03-09]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#372_Domaine_d.27activit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 373 Groupe associé =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le fichier d'autorité Canadiana ou le fichier LC/NAF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Dans la zone 373, le codage de sous-zone n'est pas employé pour les collectivités subordonnées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Si le nom d'un groupe associé a changé, enregistrer le ou les noms du groupe qui s'appliquaient à l'époque de l'entité en cours d'établissement dans la 1XX.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Canadiens de Montréal (Équipe de hockey) $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Nom de la collectivité dans Canadiana :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Québec (Province). $b Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. $b Direction de la recherche&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Point d'accès autorisé dans la zone 373 :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ##  $a Québec (Province). Conseil supérieur de l'éducation. Direction de la recherche $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates). Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec des sous-zones $2 et des dates :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2006 $t 2009&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Vancouver Grizzlies (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2009 $t 2011&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Toronto Raptors (Équipe de basketball) $2 lacnaf $s 2012 $t 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom contenant des zones 373 avec différentes sources de vocabulaires :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Gendarmerie royale du Canada. Liaison Branch $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a Buffalo State College $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;373$s$t&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $ s – Début de la période et Sous-zone $ t – Fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : même si le format MARC ne spécifie pas de forme de date dans ces sous-zones, la pratique suivante est recommandée par souci de cohérence. Enregistrer les dates selon le calendrier grégorien dans le format AAAA. Si une date plus précise est nécessaire, considérer la possibilité de l'enregistrer dans une autre zone (par exemple, 670, 678). Il n'est pas nécessaire de reformuler les dates déjà inscrites dans les notices d'autorité pour se conformer à cette pratique. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-06-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 374 Profession =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;6.1.3 pour des instructions sur l'enregistrement de la profession ou de l'occupation comme élément. Se référer à l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 9.19.1.6 pour des instructions sur l'utilisation d'un terme indiquant la profession ou l'occupation dans un point d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : répéter la zone si nécessaire pour plus de clarté.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du terme'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les codes enregistrés dans la sous-zone $2 de la zone 374 peuvent provenir soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-TIO.html/view ''Codes sources pour les termes de profession''], soit des [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-VM-C.html/view ''Codes sources pour les vedettes-matière et termes d'indexation''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#374_Profession |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 375 Sexe de la personne =&lt;br /&gt;
'''PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Ne pas utiliser cette zone dans les nouvelles notices d'autorité. Lorsqu'une notice existante doit être modifiée pour quelque raison que ce soit, supprimer toute occurrence de la zone 375.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-10-20]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 376 Renseignements sur la famille =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère (tel qu'une plage de dates), répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Personnalité importante de la famille'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement du nom d'un membre illustre d'une famille dans la sous-zone $b, utiliser la forme du nom de la personne telle que mentionnée dans la sous-zone $g de la zone 100 dans la notice d'autorité pour la famille. Les codages internes de sous-zones ne doivent pas être inclus dans la sous-zone $b.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $s – Date de début de la période et Sous-zone $t – Date de fin de la période'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $s et $t présentées à la zone [[#373$s$t|373]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 377 Langue associée =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier les codes de langues plutôt que des termes, en utilisant la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21. La sous-zone $l (Nom de la langue) doit être utilisée uniquement pour fournir des informations non disponibles dans la [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/LNG-C.html ''Liste des codes de langue''] du MARC 21. Enregistrer plusieurs codes de langue seulement si la personne ou la collectivité fait usage de plusieurs langages dans ses publications, communications, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;À titre facultatif, enregistrer un ou plusieurs codes de langue ISO 639-3 dans une zone 377 supplémentaire. Cette pratique est particulièrement recommandée lorsqu’un code ISO 639-3 permet d’identifier une langue plus précisément que le code MARC. Pour plus d’informations, voir les [https://www.loc.gov/aba/pcc/scs/documents/ISO-639-3-guidelines.pdf PCC Guidelines for the Use of ISO 639-3 Language Codes in MARC].&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $2 – Source du code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La sous-zone $2 n'est pas requise lorsque la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 est utilisée pour représenter la langue (le deuxième indicateur «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» mentionne déjà la source). Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent utiliser une autre source de codes de langue peuvent ajouter une zone 377 supplémentaire en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur et en mentionnant la source utilisée dans la sous-zone $2 . Cette source doit cependant provenir d'une des sources fournies dans la liste intitulée [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/COD/CS-CTL.html ''Codes sources pour les codes et termes de langue''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :'' &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
377 ## $a myn &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;$l Achi&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
377 #7 $a acr $2 iso639-3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Code ISO 639-3 pour la langue Achi : acr. Code pour cette même langue, laquelle fait partie des langues maya, dans la Liste des codes de langue du MARC 21 : myn)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 378 Forme développée du nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer la forme développée du nom dans la zone 378 lorsque l'information est facilement disponible, même si l'information est déjà présente dans la zone 100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Lennon, John, $d 1940-1980&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q John Winston&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eliot, T. S. $q (Thomas Stearns), $d 1888-1965&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Thomas Stearns&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Guiles, Kay D.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q Kay Dean&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#378_Forme_d.C3.A9velopp.C3.A9e_du_nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 380 Genre de l'œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé tel que le RVM ou le RVMGF. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Picasso, Pablo, $d 1881-1973. $t Gertrude Stein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Portraits $a Peintures $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Shakespeare, William, $d 1564-1616. $t Hamlet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédies $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
380 ## $a Tragédie $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'enregistrement du genre de l'œuvre comme élément dans les notices d'autorité de collections représentant des œuvres (et non des expressions), voir l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 6.3.1.3.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#380_Genre_de_l.27.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 381 Autres caractéristiques distinctes d'une œuvre ou d'une expression =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone est utilisée pour enregistrer les éléments RDA Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3204.html RDA 6.6]) et Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3584.html RDA 6.12]). Les autres caractéristiques distinctives des expressions qui sont spécifiques aux œuvres musicales (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4857.html RDA 6.18.1.4–6.18.1.6]) peuvent être aussi enregistrées dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dickinson, Emily, $d 1830-1886. $t Because I could not stop for Death&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Fr. 712&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Numéro de Franklin enregistré comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Psaumes. $l Anglais. $s New American. $f 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a New American&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Version enregistrée comme autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750. $t Chorals. $s Partitions de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Partitions de chant $2 rvmgf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il peut être approprié que certains des termes enregistrés pour une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression soient enregistrés dans la zone 381 ou dans une autre zone MARC pour laquelle il n'y a pas d'élément RDA correspondant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, une collectivité (tel un éditeur) utilisée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression ou d'une œuvre peut être enregistrée soit dans la zone 373 (Groupe associé), soit dans la zone 381, soit dans les deux zones. ''Note :'' Le codage de sous-zone pour les collectivités subordonnées n'est pas utilisé dans la zone 381.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $l Français. $s Bayard. $f 2001&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Bayard éditions $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Journal of adult education (University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
373 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a University of Zambia. Centre for Continuing Education $2 naf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Collectivité enregistrée comme groupe associé et comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
RDA n'a pas d'élément particulier pour les lieux associés aux expressions, mais la zone 370 sous-zone $f (Autre lieu associé) et la sous-zone $g (Lieu d'origine de l'œuvre ou de l'expression) peuvent être utilisées dans les notices d'autorité pour les expressions. Dans certains cas, des lieux associés aux œuvres ou aux expressions sont considérés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou d'une expression selon RDA et peuvent être enregistrés dans la zone 370, dans la zone 381 ou dans les deux zones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Ley de Enjuiciamiento Criminal para las Islas de Cuba y Puerto Rico (Cuba; Porto Rico)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
370 ## $f Cuba $f Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
381 ## $a Cuba $a Porto Rico $2 lacnaf&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Lieux utilisés comme une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre juridique; enregistrés dans les zones 370 et 381)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer l'élément RDA lieu d'origine d'une œuvre ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-3163.html RDA 6.5]) dans une zone 370 (voir la section [[#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]] de ce Guide).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une œuvre ou une autre caractéristique distinctive d'une expression a été utilisée dans un point d'accès autorisé et est aussi enregistrée comme élément dans une zone 3XX, utiliser la zone 381 pour enregistrer une autre caractéristique distinctive. À titre facultatif, enregistrer aussi la même information dans une autre zone 3XX appropriée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si le seul ajout à une zone déjà existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone concernée. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère ou si un autre élément associé diffère, répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme et Sous-zone $v – Source de l'information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-02]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#381_Autres_caract.C3.A9ristiques_distinctes_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_ou_d.27une_expression |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 382 &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en utilisant les termes du thésaurus ''Moyens d'exécution en musique du RVM'' (RVMMEM). Enregistrer &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;la distribution&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; d'exécution d'une œuvre en appliquant les instructions de RDA ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp6-fr_rda6-4362.html 6.15.1.3–6.15.1.6]) et les ÉP de BAC-BAnQ associés. ''Note :'' La zone 382 peut également être utilisée dans les notices d'autorité d'expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :''' Répéter la zone si la source du vocabulaire diffère. Si c'est jugé important pour l'identification et l'accès, ajouter une zone 382 additionnelle qui ne répond pas aux présentes lignes directrices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-04-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#382_Distribution_d.27.C3.A9x.C3.A9cution_d.27une_.C5.93uvre |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 383 Numéro d'identification d'une œuvre &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ou d'une expression&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; musicale =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible. Créer des zones 383 distinctes pour les différents systèmes de numérotation associés à une même œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-06-13]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#383_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27identification_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 384 Tonalité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratique à privilégier : Enregistrer lorsque disponible pour les œuvres. En cas de doute, ne pas enregistrer. Ne pas enregistrer pour les expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-19]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 385 Caractéristiques du public cible =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer le public cible d'une œuvre ou d'une expression.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices  du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html  https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 480, Assignment of Terms: Audience Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L480.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Préadolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Familles de militaires $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Élève-maître $2 unescot&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Acheteurs potentiels de logement&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a : Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Anglophones $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Commerçants $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Termes provenant de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Créolophones à base française&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Personnel de l'industrie de la construction $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Terme non contrôlé et terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
385 ## $a Enfants de divorcés $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-07-17]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 386 Caractéristiques du créateur ou du collaborateur &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[Nouveau]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer les caractéristiques démographiques d'un ou plusieurs créateurs ou contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression, notamment pour enregistrer les caractéristiques communes à un groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs associés à une œuvre ou à une expression. Cette zone sera généralement utilisée dans des notices d'autorité établies pour des agrégats par regroupement matérialisant deux ou plusieurs expressions de deux ou plusieurs œuvres indépendantes créées par des agents différents, ainsi que pour les œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre (par exemple, les œuvres d'auteurs inconnus ou les collections de monographies). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVMGD ou le RVM. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a. Lorsque les termes ne proviennent pas d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, utiliser la forme au pluriel. Pour le codage et l'attribution des termes, suivre les lignes directrices du ''Library of Congress Demographic Group Terms Manual'', disponible au : [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/freelcdgt.html]. Consulter notamment la fiche d'instruction L 485, Assignment of Terms: Creator Characteristics, disponible au [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeLCDGT/L485.pdf].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Pièces pour piano composées par des enfants &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Enfants $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Beowulf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Anglo-Saxons $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a De l'infidélité&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Taiwanais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a De l'infidélité, 2008 : $b page de titre (anthologie de la poésie contemporaine de Taiwan)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Spoke (Birstall, Kirklees, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a personne queer $2 gsdg/fre&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Spoke : new queer voices, 2014 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;poetry, prose, drama, maps &amp;amp; comics&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Parcours ombragés&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Bas-Laurentiens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Personnes âgées $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Parcours ombragés, 2020 : $b couverture (nouvelles rédigées par des aînés du Bas-Saint-Laurent)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Terme démographique non contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bien que cette zone soit principalement utilisée pour des œuvres agrégées et pour des œuvres individuelles identifiées uniquement par leur titre, il existe des situations où il est également approprié de l'utiliser pour une œuvre individuelle d'un ou plusieurs créateurs nommés. Par exemple, pour une œuvre musicale composée pendant l'enfance ou l'adolescence d'un créateur, il ne serait pas approprié d'enregistrer «&amp;amp;nbsp;Enfants&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Adolescents&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme caractéristiques dans la notice d'autorité du compositeur. Au lieu de cela, les caractéristiques démographiques applicables uniquement à certaines des œuvres d'un créateur doivent être enregistrées dans les notices d'autorité établies pour ces œuvres.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Greenberg, Jay, $d 1991- $t Symphonies, $n no 5 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $a Garçons $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Œuvre composée en 2003-2005, achevée lorsque le compositeur avait 14 ans)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, ou si certains termes proviennent d'un vocabulaire contrôlé tandis que d'autres sont non contrôlés, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone $a ou répéter la zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Latin American women writers &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Latino-Américains $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Femmes $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Termes issus de différents vocabulaires contrôlés)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Cowboy poetry from Utah &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $a Utahains $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Cowboys $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Utahains $2rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Faux pas&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $a Adolescents $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Gatinois&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Élèves du secondaire $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Adolescents $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $a Québécois $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Faux pas, 2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;gt;''(Textes écrits par les élèves de 5e secondaire du Collège Saint-Alexandre à Gatineau; terme non contrôlé et termes provenant du même vocabulaire contrôlé)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $i – Information sur la relation'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il est possible d'utiliser la sous-zone $i pour enregistrer un terme désignant la nature de la relation entre les groupes démographiques enregistrés dans la zone et l'œuvre ou l'expression. Préférer un terme provenant d'un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que les termes de relation du format MARC ou les indicateurs de relation RDA. Mettre une majuscule à la première lettre du terme de relation et utiliser la forme au singulier. Faire suivre le terme de relation par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Best of Indian English poetry&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Indiens de l'Inde $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Private worlds (Catalogue d'exposition : 1998)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Européens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Private worlds, 1998 : $b page de titre (&amp;quot;classic outsider art from Europe : Katonah Museum of Art, December 13, 1998-February 28, 1999&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas enregistrer plusieurs occurrences de la sous-zone $i dans une même occurrence de la zone 386. Si plusieurs termes de relation s'appliquent à un seul groupe de créateurs ou de contributeurs (par exemple, une œuvre réunissant des auteurs et des artistes du même groupe démographique ou une expression dont les éditeurs et les traducteurs appartiennent au même groupe démographique), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a City lights (Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts (Mass.))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Artiste : $a Massachusettais $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a City lights, 2009 : $b page de titre (anthologie de poésie et d'art de la Greater Brockton Society for Poetry and the Arts; éditrice intellectuelle, Sheila Mullen Twyman)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Compilation d'œuvres d'auteurs et d'artistes du Massachusetts)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différents termes de relation s'appliquent à différents créateurs et contributeurs (par exemple, si les auteurs font partie d'un groupe démographique et les artistes d'un autre), répéter la zone en utilisant des termes de relation différents. Si le même terme de relation s'applique à plus d'un groupe démographique, répéter la sous-zone $a dans une même zone ou répéter la zone. Pour plus de clarté, en cas de doute, répéter la zone 386 autant que nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a 50 German songs (Voix aiguë)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''ou''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Compositeur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Allemands $2 rvmgd&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
386 ## $i Auteur : $a Autrichiens $2 rvmgd&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Partition comprenant des œuvres de Schubert, Schumann, Franz, Brahms, Wolf, Mahler et Strauss, ainsi que les paroles imprimées sous forme de texte, en allemand et en traduction anglaise)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $m – Terme identifiant le groupe démographique et Sous-zone $n – Code identifiant le groupe démographique'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser ces sous-zones. Toutefois, ne pas les supprimer des notices existantes si elles sont correctement codées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2023-09-12]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 388 Période associée à la création =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs participants au PFAN peuvent utiliser cette zone pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine d'une œuvre ou d'une expression. Le nom de la période peut préciser ou sous-entendre un lieu pour lequel la période de temps est pertinente. Il peut aussi préciser le nom d'un événement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Privilégier un vocabulaire contrôlé, tel que le RVM ou le RVMFAST. Le cas échéant, enregistrer la source dans la sous-zone $2. Par souci de cohérence, mettre une majuscule au premier terme de chaque sous-zone $a.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Harlem Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Dynastie des Han (Chine) $2 rvmfast&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Rébellion des Patriotes (Canada : 1837-1838) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une vedette provenant du RVM est utilisée, remplacer le codage de sous-zone par deux traits d'union et ne pas laisser d'espace entre la tête de vedette et la subdivision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Crises économiques--1929 $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les compilations, la zone peut être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine des œuvres/expressions contenues dans la compilation, considérées collectivement (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;1&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur). Elle peut également être utilisée pour enregistrer la période de création ou d'origine de la compilation elle-même (en utilisant «&amp;amp;nbsp;2&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme valeur du premier indicateur).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Renaissance $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 2# $a Dix-neuvième siècle  $2 rvm &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour un recueil de poésie de la Renaissance compilé au XIXe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 388 peut être utilisée en conjonction avec ou à la place de la zone 046. Lorsque la ou les dates précises de création ou d'origine ne sont pas connues ou qu'elles s'étendent sur une longue période, il peut être utile d'enregistrer des termes chronologiques textuels dans la zone 388.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
046 ## $k 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Moyen Âge $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom pour une œuvre anonyme du XIVe siècle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choix entre répéter une zone et répéter une sous-zone : Si la valeur de l'indicateur diffère, répéter la zone. Si la source du vocabulaire diffère, répéter la zone. Sinon, si le seul ajout à une zone existante est un terme additionnel provenant du même vocabulaire, répéter la sous-zone. Pratique à privilégier : pour plus de clarté, répéter la zone lorsque c'est nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a Guerre mondiale, 1939-1945 $2 rvm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
388 1# $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Occupation allemande de la France (France : 1940-1945) $2 rvmfast&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:60px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Notice d'autorité de nom avec zones 388 contenant des termes provenant de différents vocabulaires)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-11-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 4XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie une notice d'autorité pour une autre raison, supprimer tout signe de ponctuation à la fin d'une zone 4XX sauf s'il fait partie des données (par exemple, un point dans une abréviation) ou est requis par les règles de catalogage (par exemple, un qualificatif entre parenthèses).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il n'est pas nécessaire de justifier tous les renvois 4XX; voir «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès|Justification des variantes de point d'accès]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la section 670 de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas faire un renvoi 4XX qui se normalise sous la même forme qu'une autre zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité ou une zone 1XX dans toute autre notice d'autorité de nom. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;NACO normalization&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans l'introduction du manuel [https://www.loc.gov/catdir/cpso/dcmz1.pdf DCM Z1]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pratiques à privilégier pour le catalogage selon RDA :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Enregistrer les variantes trouvées dans la manifestation cataloguée :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Utiliser le jugement du catalogueur;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Il n'y a pas de limite quant au nombre ou à la forme des renvois;&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;dd&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#9675; Au lieu ou en plus d'ajouter des variantes, envisager de fournir un accès en ajoutant des zones 37X.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Exemple montrant une zone 378 sans une variante pour la forme développée du nom :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Bucknum, David W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
378 ## $q David Walter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dd&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/dl&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Établir des notices d'autorité de noms supplémentaires pour les points d'accès autorisés nécessaires pour soutenir les éléments utilisés dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX (par exemple, la collectivité supérieure associée à la collectivité subordonnée qui doit être établie).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, fournir une variante de point d'accès 4XX pour un ancien point d'accès autorisé 1XX, sauf si l'ancien point d'accès autorisé est manifestement incorrect. Voir la section «&amp;amp;nbsp;[[#4XX$w|Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour plus d'information.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Utiliser la forme établie des composantes dans les variantes de point d'accès en 4XX, à l'exception des variantes en écriture non latine, qui peuvent présenter un mélange d'écritures ou être entièrement dans une écriture non latine.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;En général, ne pas supprimer des variantes sauf si elles sont manifestement incorrectes (par exemple, une variante en écriture non latine qui ne représente pas la même personne).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si une forme trouvée dans la manifestation cataloguée inclut une variante de forme d'une composante d'une variante de point d'accès en 4XX, cette forme peut être utilisée dans son intégralité comme une variante de point d'accès supplémentaire en 4XX, à condition que des sous-zones ne soient pas utilisées pour diviser ses parties constitutives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;100 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Nouvelles. $k Extraits&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $a Faulkner, William, $d 1897-1962. $t Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $a Uncollected stories of William Faulkner&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Bureau of Labor Statistics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América, Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a Estados Unidos de América. $b Buró de Estadísticas Laborales&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Zhongguo yi ke da xue. $b Fu shu di 1 yi yuan&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;410 2# $a China Medical University, First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
410 2# $a China Medical University. $b First Affiliated Hospital&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on change la forme d'une collectivité hiérarchiquement supérieure, d'un nom géographique ou d'un nom de personne dans une 1XX, mettre à jour toutes les notices d'autorité existantes qui utilisent cette composante dans une zone 4XX, sauf si la 4XX représente l'ancien point d'accès autorisé (par exemple, $w/2=e). Exception : Ne pas appliquer cette instruction dans le cas des notices d'autorité migrées qui n'ont pas été réévaluées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;4XX$w&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est modifié parce que la personne a changé de nom, enregistrer l'ancienne forme du nom dans une zone 400 avec $w nne si la variante est valide selon les instructions de RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a François, $c pape, $d 1936-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Bergoglio, Jorge Mario, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après l'élection comme pape)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Rancic, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a DePandi, Giuliana&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Nom changé après le mariage)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé pour une personne (100) est mis à jour pour fermer la date, il est recommandé d'enregistrer l'ancienne forme avec la date ouverte dans une zone 4XX avec $w nnea.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;''Exemple :''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;100 1# $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-2023&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $w nnea $a Laurin, Rachel, $d 1961-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) basé sur le catalogage CIP est modifié parce que sa forme sur la ressource publiée est différente de celle sur la demande CIP, une zone 4XX pour l'ancienne forme du point d'accès autorisé avec la sous-zone $w nne peut être ajoutée sauf si l'ancienne forme 1XX est manifestement incorrecte (par exemple, la date de naissance de l'auteur a été donnée comme étant 1775 au lieu de 1975 dans la demande CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé (1XX) est modifié en raison d'un changement dans les instructions de catalogage, enregistrer l'ancienne forme dans une zone 4XX en utilisant $w. Si la variante de forme est un renvoi valide selon les instructions actuelles de RDA, utiliser $w nne. Si la variante de forme n'est pas un renvoi valide selon les instructions RDA actuelles, utiliser $w nnea.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Bible. $p Matthieu &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;430 #0 $w nnea $a Bible. $p N.T. $p Matthieu&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante n'est pas valide selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon Thompson, $d 1939-2014&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 1# $w nne $a Smith, Jonathan Kennon&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nne&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que la variante est valide selon RDA; le changement de la forme en 100 est basé sur l'utilisation du nom et les dates de naissance et de mort ont été ajoutées parce que la 100 a été changée)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 0# $a Périclès, $d environ 495 av. J.-C.-429 av. J.-C.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;400 0# $w nnea $a Périclès, $d ca 495-429 av. J.-C.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Codé «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnea&amp;amp;nbsp;» parce que l'abréviation «&amp;amp;nbsp;ca&amp;amp;nbsp;» n'est pas valide pour une période d'activité selon RDA)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé est corrigé parce que des dates ont été enregistrées de manière inexacte ou qu'un catalogueur a introduit une faute de frappe dans le point d'accès autorisé, ne pas faire de renvoi à la forme incorrecte. &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche des notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel des collections et la création et la tenue à jour des notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des variantes de point d'accès peuvent être enregistrées dans toute notice d'autorité de collection, y compris celles pour des phrases analogues à des collections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si les volumes d'une monographie en plusieurs parties portent des formes différentes du titre commun, faire un renvoi 4XX plutôt qu'un renvoi 5XX pour la forme de titre non choisie comme titre propre de la monographie en plusieurs parties.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-03-27]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 5XX Rappels et renvois – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on modifie des notices d'autorité de noms ou de collections contenant des codes qui ne sont plus utilisés tel le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;d&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans une sous-zone $w position zéro (0), les catalogueurs doivent mettre à niveau les notices d'autorité selon RDA.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w. Lorsqu'on utilise les indicateurs de relation RDA dans les zones 5XX, utiliser les termes des annexes I, J ou K; mettre une majuscule au premier terme et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour de l'information sur l'utilisation des indicateurs de relation et/ou les codes $w dans une zone 5XX spécifique, voir la section de ce Guide concernant cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Sous-zone de contrôle'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les conventions du format autorités en ce qui concerne l'utilisation de la sous-zone $w. Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $w sauf si une valeur autre que «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» est appropriée dans l'une des positions. Lorsqu'on utilise la sous-zone $w, enregistrer la sous-zone comme première sous-zone de la zone. Fournir les positions de caractères qui précèdent la valeur mais pas celles qui lui succèdent, par exemple,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
$w a = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé antérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w b = pour indiquer un renvoi depuis un point d'accès autorisé ultérieur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w r = pour indiquer qu'une sous-zone $i ou une sous-zone $2 est utilisée pour donner de l'information sur la relation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
$w nnnc = pour indiquer un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour des pseudonymes multiples (la notice comprend aussi une zone 663)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» (5XX) ne doit pas se normaliser sous la même forme qu'un autre renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la même notice d'autorité, sauf si les deux zones 5XX contiennent un indicateur de relation dans la sous-zone $i et que les textes des indicateurs de relation sont différents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D |''Manuel 4XX et 5XX'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 500 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de personne =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre un nom de personne et 1) le nom d'une autre personne, d'une famille ou d'une collectivité ou 2) le point d'accès autorisé pour une œuvre ou une expression. Cette technique peut également être utilisée pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres et des expressions et contenant des noms de personnes. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe I, J ou K dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
130 #0 $a Yentl (Film)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Réalisateur de cinéma : $a Streisand, Barbra&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little men&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w r $i Suite de : $a Alcott, Louisa May, $d 1832-1888. $t Little women&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on enregistre des relations entre noms de personnes impliquant des pseudonymes et que seulement deux notices d'autorité sont en cause, les catalogueurs peuvent soit 1) utiliser la sous-zone $i et le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w ou 2) utiliser des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» simples. Pour plus d'information sur ces techniques et des instructions sur l'enregistrement de pseudonymes multiples (c'est-à-dire ceux qui requièrent une zone 663), voir la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Rappel aux catalogueurs : Lorsqu'une variante de nom (400) et un point d'accès autorisé (100) sont en conflit, il faut faire un ajout à la zone 400 ou à la zone 100 pour résoudre le conflit (par exemple, une forme développée du nom, une date d'activité, etc.); la pratique antérieure consistant à changer la zone 400 en 500 pour résoudre le conflit n'est plus une option. Lorsque les catalogueurs trouvent une variante de forme dans une zone 500 au cours de la mise à jour d'une notice d'autorité de nom, ils doivent résoudre le conflit et modifier la zone en 400.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 510 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de collectivité =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 511 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom de réunion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les instructions fournies dans les [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/53/Lignes_directrices_du_PCC_pour_l%27application_des_indicateurs_de_relation_dans_les_notices_d%27autorit%C3%A9_de_NACO.pdf ''Lignes directrices du PCC pour l'application des indicateurs de relation dans les notices d'autorité de NACO'']. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp11_lacbanqps11-478.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8] pour des directives sur les relations entre les notices d'autorité pour des séries de conférences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 530 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Titre uniforme =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser des indicateurs de relation dans la sous-zone $i conjointement avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w pour établir des relations entre des points d'accès autorisés pour des œuvres ou des expressions. Lorsqu'on utilise un terme de l'annexe J dans la sous-zone $i, mettre la première lettre du terme en majuscule et faire suivre le terme par une espace, deux-points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 551 Rappel de renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la sous-zone $i avec le code «&amp;amp;nbsp;r&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la sous-zone $w tant que les indicateurs de relation pour les lieux ne seront pas développés. (RDA a prévu un espace pour l'annexe L.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-10]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 64X Traitement de collection – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 640 Dates de publication et/ou indication séquentielle de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#640_Dates_de_publication_et.2Fou_indication_s.C3.A9quentielle_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 642 Exemple de numérotation de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#642_Exemple_de_num.C3.A9rotation_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 643 Lieu et éditeur de la collection/organisme de publication =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#643_Lieu_et_.C3.A9diteur_de_la_collection.2Forganisme_de_publication |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 644 Usage en matière d'analyse de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#644_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_d.27analyse_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 645 Usage en matière de rappel de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#645_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_rappel_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 646 Usage en matière de classification de collection =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#646_Usage_en_mati.C3.A8re_de_classification_de_collection |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 663 Renvoi complexe «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» - Nom =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La zone 663 comprend le texte explicatif et les points d'accès autorisés pour les relations entre une zone 100 (nom établi) et d'autres zones 100 (noms établis) qui ne peuvent pas être correctement exprimées par un ou plusieurs renvois simples générés à partir de zones 500.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Généralement, cette situation se produit lorsqu'une personne utilise plus de deux identités, lorsque plus d'une personne partage une identité avec une ou plusieurs autres personnes, ou lorsque plusieurs personnes utilisent le même pseudonyme indépendamment les unes des autres ou en raison d'un autre arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le texte de la zone 663 peut être adapté pour répondre à des situations exceptionnelles; toutefois, il faut garder le texte aussi simple que possible et laisser les zones et le codage MARC communiquer l'information souhaitée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas utiliser la technique de la zone 663 pour établir des relations entre collectivités ou entre personnes et collectivités.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Seulement deux identités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque seulement deux notices d'autorité de noms sont créées pour une personne, les notices d'autorité de noms sont généralement reliées par des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500, sans aucune zone 663. Toutefois, lorsque l'une des notices d'autorité de noms est établie pour un pseudonyme commun ou un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment les unes des autres, la technique de la zone 663 est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==== Plus de deux identités - point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» et renvois ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plus de deux points d'accès autorisés sont créés pour la même personne, identifier un point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» en utilisant la technique de la zone 663. Cette décision est fondée sur le désir de simplifier la structure de renvois et d'aider les catalogueurs à déterminer le nom à utiliser comme sujet des œuvres biographiques ou critiques. Le point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» doit être déterminé par la forme de nom qui prédomine dans l'usage ou, en l'absence de preuves suffisantes, en choisissant le nom réel de la personne comme forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Dans la notice d'autorité pour la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», ajouter des renvois «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour tous les autres noms utilisés. Justifier les renvois en 500 par des zones 670 selon la pratique normale. Fournir une zone 663 énumérant tous les autres noms avec le texte suivant (celui-ci peut être modifié pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom] $b [forme établie du nom]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans chacune des autres notices d'autorité de noms, ajouter un renvoi «&amp;amp;nbsp;voir aussi&amp;amp;nbsp;» 500 avec une sous-zone $w codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;nnnc&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;», en justifiant ce renvoi par une zone 670, selon la pratique normale. D'autres noms peuvent être mentionnés dans le 670 s'il est pratique de le faire. Fournir une zone 663 avec le texte suivant ou un texte similaire (le texte peut être ajusté pour s'adapter à la situation) :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b [forme établie du nom choisie comme vedette de base]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque l'auteur utilise un autre nouveau nom, créer une nouvelle notice d'autorité de nom pour ce nom et l'ajouter à la structure de renvois ainsi qu'à la liste de la zone 663 dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;». Les renvois au nouveau nom dans les zones 500 et 663 sont ajoutés seulement dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personnes écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Hebden, Mark, 1916-1991 $b Hennessy, Max, 1916-1991 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hennessy, Max, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Hebden, Mark, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Harris, John, $d 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Les œuvres de cette personne sont identifiées par le nom utilisé dans le document. Pour une liste d'autres noms utilisés par cette personne, chercher aussi sous : $b Harris, John, 1916-1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes conjoints ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un pseudonyme conjoint est une identité utilisée par deux ou plusieurs personnes travaillant en collaboration. Si une personne utilise un pseudonyme conjoint et un autre nom (tel que trouvé dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme conjoint de Randall Garrett et Laurence M. Janifer. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Garrett, Randell $b Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Garrett, Randall&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Laurence M. Janifer, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme conjoint :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Janifer, Laurence M.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites en collaboration avec Randall Garrett, chercher aussi sous : $b Phillips, Mark&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt; --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pseudonymes utilisés par plusieurs personnes ==== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque plusieurs personnes travaillant indépendamment l'une de l'autre utilisent le même pseudonyme et un ou plusieurs autres noms (tels que trouvés dans le catalogue), la technique du point d'accès autorisé «&amp;amp;nbsp;de base&amp;amp;nbsp;» est utilisée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Goulart, Ron, 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes qui écrivent individuellement. Pour les œuvres de ces personnes écrites sous leurs propres noms ou d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dent, Lester, 1904-1959 $b Goulart, Ron, 1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le premier renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dent, Lester, $d 1904-1959&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous un autre nom, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Notice d'autorité de nom pour le deuxième renvoi 500 dans la notice d'autorité de nom du pseudonyme utilisée par plusieurs personnes :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Goulart, Ron, ‡d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Robeson, Kenneth&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Silva, Joseph, $d 1933-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[…]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Robeson, Kenneth $b Silva, Joseph,1933- […]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(L'auteur a un pseudonyme utilisé par plusieurs personnes et des pseudonymes individuels)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-04]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 667 Note générale non destinée au public =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Généralités ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Donner des informations de valeur permanente et d'intérêt général qui seraient également utiles aux autres institutions du PFAN ou à celles qui n'y participent pas. Une liste représentative des notes est donnée ci-dessous. En général, le libellé est recommandé, mais n'est pas prescriptif, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions. Les zones 667 distinctes peuvent être données dans n'importe quel ordre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a N'est pas la même personne [ou œuvre] que : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Ne peut être identifié comme étant : [nom ou titre, numéro Canadiana].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Réexaminer avant de réutiliser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Anciennement incluse dans une notice de nom indifférenciée : [numéro Canadiana de la notice de nom indifférenciée].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Si la notice de nom indifférenciée n'a pas de numéro Canadiana autre que 0000X0000F, utiliser le numéro de contrôle OCLC)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Codée &amp;quot;provisoire&amp;quot; car [raison de l'encodage].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones suite à la demande de l'auteur, [date de la mise à jour].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pour les œuvres parues avant/après [date].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''(Utilisée pour les changements de langue officielle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'[[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Annexe_2_:_Projets_sp.C3.A9ciaux|Annexe 2]] de ce Guide pour des informations et des instructions sur les zones 667 ajoutées aux notices d'autorité dans le cadre d'un projet spécial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes dont certaines identités ne sont pas établies ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'une personne utilise deux ou plusieurs identités dans les manifestations, des notices d'autorité de noms peuvent être créées pour chaque identité. Dans un souci d'efficacité, les catalogueurs peuvent utiliser une zone 667 pour énumérer les pseudonymes non trouvés dans les publications au lieu de créer des notices d'autorité de noms pour ces pseudonymes inutilisés. Dans ce cas, énumérer les pseudonymes inutilisés dans une zone 667 après l'expression : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées.&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Miz Scarlett, SCC et Stevenopolis.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette note peut aussi être ajoutée dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne qui a plusieurs notices d'autorité de noms pour plusieurs identités lorsque certains des pseudonymes ne sont pas trouvés dans des publications. Dans ce cas, énumérer seulement les pseudonymes inutilisés dans la zone 667 et suivre les instructions appropriées pour les autres pseudonymes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Gorey, Edward, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Dowdy, Regera, $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 1# $w nnnc $a Mude, O., $d 1925-2000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
663 ## $a Pour les œuvres de cette personne écrites sous d'autres noms, chercher aussi sous : $b Dowdy, Regera, 1925-2000 […]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Pseudonymes non trouvés dans les œuvres publiées : Drew Dogyear, Wardore Edgy, […] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Plus d'information sur la création des notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes ayant des identités alternatives se trouve dans la section [[#663_Renvoi_complexe_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom|663]] de ce Guide ainsi que dans la [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/f3/FAQ_%E2%80%93_Pratique_de_LC-PCC_pour_la_cr%C3%A9ation_de_notices_d%E2%80%99autorit%C3%A9_de_nom_pour_les_personnes_qui_utilisent_des_pseudonymes.pdf ''FAQ – Pratique de LC-PCC pour la création de notices d'autorité de noms pour les personnes qui utilisent des pseudonymes''].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms pour les séries de congrès, etc. (ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 11.13.1.8.2) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter une zone 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour une série de congrès lorsqu'il y a des notices d'autorité autant pour la série que pour les occurrences isolées du congrès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Veterinary Orthopedic Society. $b Annual Conference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Voir aussi les points d'accès connexes pour les occurrences individuelles de cette conférence, qui comprennent de l'information spécifique sur le numéro, la date ou le lieu de la conférence individuelle.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Notices_d'autorité_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-matière&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notices d'autorité de noms et utilisation comme vedette-matière ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appliquer ces instructions lors de la création de nouvelles notices d'autorité de noms et lors de la révision de notices d'autorité de noms existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1) Ajouter des notes indiquant l'utilisation en indexation lorsqu'un point d'accès autorisé n'est pas approprié pour utilisation comme vedette-matière dans ces situations :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Chefs d'État, etc.'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette instruction s'applique aux notices d'autorité de noms pour les collectivités représentant la fonction lorsque le nom du titulaire est inclus comme partie du point d'accès autorisé de la collectivité. Voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-2653.html RDA 11.2.2.18 (Dignitaires gouvernementaux)] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp11-fr_rda11-3233.html 11.2.2.26 (Dignitaires religieux)] pour les instructions sur les collectivités. Utiliser cette note 667 dans la notice d'autorité de nom pour la collectivité pour indiquer l'utilisation en indexation :&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous [vedette du nom de la personne].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $b Président (1923-1929 : Coolidge)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Coolidge, Calvin, 1872-1933.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Église catholique. $b Pape (1503-1513 : Jules II)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur cette personne se trouvent sous Jules II, pape, 1443-1513.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans ce Guide, voir aussi les sections [[#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|008/11]] et [[#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|008/15]].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Changements linéaires entre noms antérieurs et ultérieurs d'une juridiction'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La politique d'indexation du RVM est d'employer comme point d'accès matière ou comme subdivision géographique uniquement le dernier nom d'une juridiction politique qui a eu un ou plusieurs noms antérieurs, aussi longtemps que l'identité territoriale demeure essentiellement la même (voir ''Guide pratique du Répertoire de vedettes-matière de l'Université Laval'', 5.14.3.1). Lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom ayant un point d'accès autorisé antérieur/ultérieur pour un lieu dans cette situation, les catalogueurs doivent ajouter une note 667 sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière dans la notice d'autorité pour le nom antérieur du lieu et modifier les zones 008 appropriés (008/11 et 008/15).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/11 = n&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
008/15 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Ceylan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Sri Lanka.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li type=&amp;quot;a&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Notices d'autorité de personnes fictives'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les points d'accès autorisés pour les personnes fictives ne doivent pas être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, la zone 008/11 doit être codée avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» et la zone 008/15 doit être codée «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;». Selon l'ÉP de BAC-BAnQ 9.0, lors de la création d'une notice d'autorité de nom pour une personne fictive, ajouter cette zone 667 pour indiquer l'utilisation comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de personnage fictif provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2) Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom pour une partie d'une ville, en indiquant qu'il n'est pas approprié de l'utiliser comme une subdivision géographique :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Hollywood (Los Angeles, Calif.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme subdivision géographique.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:16px; text-indent:-16px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3) Notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les points d'accès autorisés pour les noms de familles peuvent être utilisés comme vedettes-matière. Pour les notices d'autorité de noms de familles qui reflètent la pratique antérieure (qui interdisait de les utiliser comme vedettes-matière), mettre à jour les notices pour attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;v&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/11 et la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;a&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la zone 008/15 et supprimer la note sur l’utilisation comme vedette-matière suivante :&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes pour les renvois en écriture non latine ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans une notice d'autorité qui comprend une variante de point d'accès dans une écriture non latine, utiliser la zone 667 avec une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Le renvoi en écriture non latine n'a pas été évalué.&amp;amp;nbsp;» S'il y a plusieurs variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, utiliser une note indiquant : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Attribuer la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» à la zone 008/29 pour indiquer que la variante de point d'accès n'a pas été évaluée. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
008/29 = b&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moroz, Valentin, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, В. Я. $q (Валентин Якович), $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Мороз, Валентин Якович, $d 1936-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Les renvois en écriture non latine n'ont pas été évalués.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Doublons&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Doublons ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter cette note dans une notice d'autorité de nom signalée pour suppression :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a Notice doublon, signalée pour suppression car remplacée par [numéro Canadiana de la notice à conserver&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ([date]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2024-04-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#667_Note_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9rale_non_destin.C3.A9e_au_public |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 670 Source des données =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' La transcription de la mention de collection est obligatoire, s'il y a lieu. La recherche de notices d'autorité de collections, le rappel de la collection, ainsi que la création et la mise à jour de notices d'autorité de collections sont facultatifs.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette zone a pour but d'enregistrer des informations sur le nom ou le titre représenté dans la zone 1XX. Elle comprend des renseignements qui contribuent à l'identification de l'entité et qui justifient le choix du nom ou du titre de même que tout élément supplémentaire utilisé pour construire le point d'accès autorisé (1XX). Les informations consignées justifient également, le cas échéant, des variantes de forme du nom ou du titre (4XX), d'autres éléments d'identification (046, 3XX et 678), et clarifient les relations entre la 1XX et les autres entités représentées dans le fichier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Fonctions de la zone 670 :'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations, provenant de sources (par exemple, livres, appels téléphoniques, sites Web), à l'appui du choix et de la forme du point d'accès autorisé, des variantes de point d'accès et d'autres éléments d'identification&lt;br /&gt;
* Stocker des informations qui pourront être utilisées pour résoudre un conflit par la suite&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer des informations sur les relations entre entités (par exemple, une personne est l'auteur d'une œuvre, une collectivité a été absorbée par une autre collectivité)&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier une personne qui a produit des œuvres dans différents domaines ou sous des formes diverses&lt;br /&gt;
* Identifier des personnes différentes dont les points d'accès doivent rester identiques pour le moment (c'est-à-dire des noms de personnes indifférenciés)&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour préciser si les différentes formes d'un nom ou d'un titre sont de simples variations ou reflètent un changement de nom ou de titre&lt;br /&gt;
* Enregistrer les recherches requises par les lignes directrices actuelles&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour faciliter la maintenance des fichiers d'autorité et bibliographiques étant donné que les informations dans les zones 670 aident à la prise de décisions concernant les points d'accès autorisés en double et les attributions erronées&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour soutenir les manipulations informatiques basées sur des algorithmes utilisant les informations du 670&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En général, la première zone 670 cite la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est établie, c'est-à-dire la ressource en cours de catalogage. Si la ressource en cours de catalogage ou de consultation ne fournit aucune information justifiant le point d'accès autorisé, les variantes de point d'accès ou les autres éléments enregistrés dans la notice d'autorité, voir la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide pour les instructions sur la façon de citer la ressource dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer les zones 670 suivantes dans n'importe quel ordre, en ajoutant les nouvelles zones après celles qui existent déjà. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 670 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 670, préférer les sources objectives et faisant autorité (par exemple, une encyclopédie) et les sources qui fournissent des informations de première main (par exemple, un blogue d'auteur). Utiliser des sources qui fournissent des informations supplémentaires plutôt que celles qui répètent des informations déjà présentes dans les autres zones 670.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;'''Pratiques à privilégier pour les zones 670 : '''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans la sous-zone $b, résumer et modifier les informations trouvées, selon les besoins, pour éviter les informations superflues ou répétitives.&lt;br /&gt;
* Éviter de citer des informations subjectives ou des informations dont la valeur est douteuse pour identifier une entité dans un contexte bibliographique.&lt;br /&gt;
* Faire preuve de prudence lors de l'enregistrement d'informations sur des personnes vivantes lorsque ces informations sont susceptibles d'être de nature privée ou controversée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité existantes peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices. Par exemple, dans les zones 670 des notices d'autorité plus anciennes, la sous-zone $b contenant des informations justificatives pourrait être absente. Les zones 670 dans les notices d'autorité qui faisaient partie d'un projet spécial peuvent ne pas être conformes à ces lignes directrices et/ou peuvent contenir des informations qui semblent inhabituelles ou incorrectes.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' Les exemples donnés tout au long du texte suivant présentent diverses conventions en ce qui concerne la ponctuation et le style. Ces conventions ne sont pas prescriptives et doivent être considérées comme des pratiques à privilégier pour faciliter l'échange d'informations dans le contexte d'une base de données partagée. On s'attend à ce que les catalogueurs fassent preuve de jugement et de bon sens. La ponctuation et le style ne doivent pas nécessairement être cohérents d'une notice à l'autre tant que l'information est claire et précise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Format des zones 670 ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
À l'exception de l'eszett (ß ou ſʒ) et du symbole euro (€), tous les caractères figurant dans le [https://www.marc21.ca/M21/M9230.html tableau des codes MARC] peuvent être utilisés dans les notices d'autorité ajoutées au fichier d'autorité Canadiana (voir le [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-39.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.4]). Lorsque des données provenant d'un site Web sont copiées/collées dans une zone 670, vérifier que tous les caractères peuvent être utilisés dans la notice. Certains caractères non valides ressemblent à ceux qui sont valides. Par exemple, le tiret (–) non valide ressemble au trait d'union (-) valide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une substitution pour un symbole non reproductible est indiquée entre parenthèses (voir [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lacbanqpschp1_lacbanqps1-574.html ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour 1.7.5] et [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp1_lcps1-747.html LC-PCC PS pour 1.7.5]), une explication de cette interpolation peut également être fournie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Poch, Dina K. I [love] my in-laws, 2007 : $b page de titre (I [love] my in-laws; &amp;quot;[love]&amp;quot; est représenté par un symbole de cœur sur la page de titre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les données doivent être fournies sous forme romanisée. Normalement, il est entendu que le catalogueur a fourni la romanisation; par conséquent, lors de la transcription de données trouvées dans la source sous forme romanisée, ajouter après celle-ci l'expression entre crochets ['''forme romanisée''']. Dans des langues telles que l'arabe et l'hébreu, où les voyelles sont généralement omises dans l'orthographe des textes, le catalogueur fournit les voyelles manquantes lors de la transcription des données. Lors de la transcription de texte qui inclut les voyelles, ajouter après entre parenthèses ['''vocalisé'''] ou ['''en partie vocalisé'''] selon le cas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un catalogueur choisit de fournir des variantes de point d'accès en écriture non latine, les 670 $b doivent contenir aussi bien la transcription du ou des textes en écriture non latine trouvés dans la source que la ou les formes systématiquement romanisées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Moskovskie matematičeskie olimpiady 1993-2005 g., 2006 : $b page de titre (Р.М. Федоров = R.M. Fedorov)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque les notices d'autorité sont créées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, il est possible que de l'information supplémentaire soit incluse. Ces données peuvent également être formatées d'une manière différente de celle indiquée dans le présent document. En général, ces données doivent être conservées telles qu'elles sont générées afin de maintenir la rentabilité de ce processus, à moins que les données ne prêtent à confusion ou ne provoquent des erreurs de validation. Les noms et les titres pour lesquels les notices d'autorité sont créées constituent l'exception à cette règle. Suivre les instructions de ces sections pour enregistrer ces données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $a – Citation de la source'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $a :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Le titre propre de la ressource citée, suffisamment complet pour permettre une identification ultérieure dans un catalogue en ligne. Des abréviations et des points de suspension peuvent être utilisés. Faire précéder un titre générique ou non distinctif du nom du créateur par lequel commencerait le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre. Si le point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre est le même que le titre propre plus un qualificatif, il peut être fourni à la place du titre propre pour éviter toute ambiguïté. Lorsque des informations sont fournies dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 pour justifier un point d'accès autorisé ou une variante de point d'accès, suivre les instructions supplémentaires sous Enregistrement des noms et des titres. &lt;br /&gt;
# La date de publication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Barlow, Nadine G. Mars, 2008 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Socialism (Routledge (Firme)), 2003 : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Monographies en plusieurs parties. S'il s'agit de la première partie, indiquer la date de publication sous forme de date ouverte.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Publications en série autres que les collections de monographies. En général, utiliser une désignation chronologique au lieu d'une date de publication. S'il n'y a pas de désignation chronologique, utiliser la désignation numérique et la date de publication. Le cas échéant, indiquer à la suite de la désignation qu'un «&amp;amp;nbsp;substitut&amp;amp;nbsp;» a été utilisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:15px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, February 1975 : $b page de titre ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The Verdict, vol. 2, no. 1 (February 1975) : $b page de titre ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, No. 1 (1966), substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;em&amp;gt;et non&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Studies in Confederate history, 1966, substitut : $b couverture ([données])&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ressources intégratrices. Appliquer les instructions de [http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp2-fr_rda2-9147.html RDA 2.2.2.4.2] pour la source du titre propre d'un site Web. Identifier l'itération à partir de laquelle les informations ont été prises (par exemple «&amp;amp;nbsp;consulté(e) le&amp;amp;nbsp;» suivi d'une date pour un site Web mis à jour de façon continue, le numéro de mise à jour ou le numéro de révision pour les publication à feuillets mobiles à mise à jour).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Internet Broadway database, consulté le 21 janvier 2003 : $b about IBDB (League of American Theatres and Producers)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Informations trouvées'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une zone 670 doit comprendre les données suivantes dans la sous-zone $b :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# L'emplacement spécifique où les informations ont été trouvées. Pour les ressources en plusieurs parties avec parties numérotées, indiquer la désignation de la partie et l'emplacement dans la partie (par exemple, vol. 6, page 10; recto de la carte, étiquette). Des abréviations ou des formes au long peuvent être utilisées (par exemple, p. de t. ou page de titre, couv. ou couverture, vol. 6 ou volume 6). &lt;br /&gt;
# Informations trouvées. À la suite de l'emplacement, citer les informations qui y ont été trouvées, entre parenthèses. Le cas échéant, indiquer différentes occurrences d'informations provenant de la même source à la suite de l'emplacement de l'information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The complete guide to creating enduring festivals, 2015 : $b page de titre (Dr. Ros Derrett, OAM) page xi (Roslyn Derrett)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Da real world, 1999 : $b conteneur (Beyoncé)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The World Book encyclopedia, 2010 : $b v. 17, p. 106 (Sand, George; 1804-1876; nom de plume de Amantine-Lucile-Aurore Dupin)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir également les lignes directrices ci-dessous pour les catégories de ressources spécifiques :&lt;br /&gt;
* '''CIP.''' Si le point d'accès autorisé est construit à partir des données de catalogage avant publication, inclure «&amp;amp;nbsp;CIP&amp;amp;nbsp;» dans la mention de l'emplacement (par exemple, formulaire du CIP de BAC, page de titre du CIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a The greenhouse approach, 2019: $b page de titre du CIP (Chitra Anand) formulaire du CIP de BAC (Canadienne)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Ressources Internet.''' Pour les sites Web, indiquer s'il y a lieu le nom de l'emplacement à l'intérieur du site (par exemple, À propos; Notre histoire, Chronologie; Government, Executive Branch).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de l'organisme, consulté le 16 août 2019 : $b page d'accueil (Carrefour jeunesse-emploi Drummond; CJE Drummond) À propos (ouvre ses portes en novembre 1998; organisme sans but lucratif) Nous joindre (749, boul. Mercure Drummondville (Québec) J2B 3K6; cjed@cgocable.ca)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web du Réseau Mentorat, consulté le 23 décembre 2021 : $b Accueil (Réseau Mentorat (Fondation de l'entrepreneurship)) Accueil; À propos; Nous connaître; Notre histoire (en 2020, le Réseau M devient le Réseau Mentorat)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Plusieurs emplacements dans une ressource.'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''CIP et ressource publiée.''' Lorsqu'on ajoute de nouvelles informations à une zone 670 créée pour un CIP, indiquer que les nouvelles informations proviennent de la ressource publiée.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Les salades de Mandy, 2020 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Amanda Wolfe; Canadienne) page de titre (Mandy Wolfe) page 3 (copropriétaire des restaurants Mandy's)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Comment se fixer des buts et les atteindre, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Jack Ensign Addington) épreuves du CIP (avocat, pasteur et pionnier de la pensée positive; décédé en 1998) page de titre (Jack Ensign Addington)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px; padding-top:1.3em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a La maternité en toute sérénité, 2021 : $b formulaire du CIP de BAC (Valériane Labroche; Canadienne) dossier du CIP (réside à Montréal; originaire de la France) page de titre (Valériane Labroche) page 3 de la couverture (elle travaille en jeu vidéo en tant que concept artist et directrice artistique, tout en continuant de faire de la BD)&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de noms, utiliser généralement «&amp;amp;nbsp;etc.&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour éviter de donner plus de deux emplacements ou une séquence d'emplacements (par exemple, p. 316, etc., pour la séquence p. 316-325, 329-331).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Drevon, André. Alice Milliat, 2005 : $b page de titre (Alice Milliat) page 9, etc. (née Alice Joséphine Marie Million le 5 mai 1884 à Nantes; morte le 19 mai 1957; athlète féminine)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections.''' Pour les notices d'autorité de collections, toujours indiquer chaque emplacement séparément.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Pratique du PFAN pour les collections :'' Lors du travail d'autorité post-catalogage sans le document en main, utiliser l'emplacement « ressource non disponible ». Si le document est examiné à nouveau et que la notice d'autorité est mise à jour, il est permis de modifier la zone 670 correspondante afin de fournir un emplacement et des formes supplémentaires de titres de collection si nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a From child to adult, 1970 : $b ressource non disponible (American Museum sourcebooks in anthropology)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $u – Identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) et Sous-zone $v – Source des informations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les directives de ce Guide pour les sous-zones $u et $v présentées à la zone [[#046$u$v|046]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les catalogueurs peuvent facultativement fournir un identificateur de ressource uniforme (URI) dans la sous-zone $u de la zone 670 pour établir un lien avec la ressource citée si celle-ci contient des informations importantes sur l'entité établie qui ne peuvent être citées succinctement dans la notice d'autorité. Noter que l'utilisation d'un URI dans la zone 670 $u ne supplée pas à l'obligation de citer dans les sous-zones $a et $b de la zone 670 les données pertinentes nécessaires pour justifier le point d'accès autorisé (y compris les ajouts) ou les variantes (cette information continuera d'être disponible si le site change ou disparaît). Toutefois, les informations trouvées dans les sources en ligne peuvent être ajoutées aux zones 046 ou 3XX avec les citations appropriées dans les sous-zones $v et $u et ne pas être répétées dans une 670 lorsque ces informations ne sont pas utilisées dans une 1XX ou une 4XX. Si un URI est inclus dans une 670, il doit être indiqué dans la sous-zone $u. La sous-zone $u doit contenir uniquement l'URI sans aucune autre donnée (par exemple, ne pas mettre l'URI entre parenthèses ni inclure de mots dans la sous-zone $u).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a British Oceanographic Data Centre, consulté le 23 novembre 2009 : $b About us (British Oceanographic Data Centre, National Environment Research Council; le BODC est un organisme national chargé de la gestion et de la diffusion des données relatives au milieu marin) $u http ://www.bodc.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des noms et des titres ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer intégralement les noms ou les titres de collections utilisés dans les points d'accès autorisés ou les variantes de point d'accès, comme ils apparaissent dans la source, sans abréviation par le catalogueur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la préparation d'une notice d'autorité pour le texte d'une loi ou d'un recueil de lois par sujet, si une source citée contient un titre abrégé ou un titre de référence officiels, citer ce titre, précédé du terme «&amp;amp;nbsp;titre de référence&amp;amp;nbsp;» et de son emplacement exact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina, c1980 : $b page de titre (Workers' compensation law of the state of North Carolina) titre de référence, p. 49 (The North Carolina Workers' Compensation Act)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les autorités de collectivités, inclure dans les données citées toute la hiérarchie requise pour justifier toutes les variantes de point d'accès nécessaires. Faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles informations (par exemple, le nom de l'organisme subordonné) sont étrangères à la notice créée et ne doivent pas être enregistrées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toutes les catégories ci-dessus, si la seule présentation du nom ou du titre sur la source d'information privilégiée se trouve dans le titre de la ressource donné dans la sous-zone $a de la 670, la répétition du nom dans la sous-zone $b peut être omise, à condition qu'aucune information importante ne soit perdue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si des informations sur un nom ou un titre antérieur ou postérieur se trouvent dans la même source que le nom ou le titre dans le point d'accès autorisé, donner toutes les informations dans la zone 670. Ne pas séparer les informations sur le nom ou le titre antérieur ou postérieur pour les donner dans une zone 675.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Strafvollzug, 1985 : $b page de titre (Rechtsgeschichte) p. 2 (Suite de : Veröffentlichungen / Justizministerium Nordrhein-Westfalen)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des dates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour faciliter la contribution internationale et l'utilisation des notices d'autorité, lors de l'enregistrement des dates, utiliser généralement les noms de mois, sous forme longue ou [https://www.noslangues-ourlanguages.gc.ca/fr/cles-de-la-redaction/mois#2 abrégée]. (Pour les dates enregistrées à l'aide de programmes de génération automatique d'autorités, voir la section [[#Format_des_zones_670|Format des zones 670]] de ce Guide). Ne pas modifier le style des dates dans les notices existantes. Comme pratique à privilégier, si une date n'est pas incluse dans la sous-zone $d de la zone 100, envisager d'ajouter une zone 046 si les dates sont disponibles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Justification_des_variantes_de_point_d'accès&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification des variantes de point d'accès ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Justifier les noms ou les titres donnés comme variantes de point d'accès par des informations citées des sources. Toutefois, une justification n'est pas requise dans les cas suivants :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Variantes de point d'accès reflétant différentes romanisations ou orthographes connues du catalogueur;&lt;br /&gt;
# Une variante de titre dérivée de la ressource cataloguée, d'autres ressources cataloguées sous le même point d'accès ou de sources de référence standard;&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois pour des points d'accès autorisés de collectivités reflétant des changements dus à une réforme orthographique nationale, des changements de noms dus à un changement de langue officielle ou des changements impliquant uniquement une collectivité supérieure à laquelle la collectivité en cours d'établissement est subordonnée.&lt;br /&gt;
# Renvois facultatifs à partir de formes RCAA2 ou pré-RCAA2 dans les notices d'autorité de collections et les notices d'autorité de noms rétrospectives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Justification d'autres éléments ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les informations enregistrées dans les zones 046, 3XX ou 678 de la notice d'autorité doivent généralement être justifiées, à moins qu'elles ne ressortent clairement dans les informations enregistrées dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 670 ou qu'elles puissent être facilement déduites d'autres éléments d'identification enregistrés, y compris le nom privilégié.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour la zone 046 et plusieurs des zones 3XX, une sous-zone $u ou une sous-zone $v enregistrée dans la même zone peut être utilisée à la place ou en plus d'une 670. Voir la section [[#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]] de ce Guide pour les directives concernant les sous-zones $u et $v.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enregistrement des autres données ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de noms''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. Ne pas abréger ou traduire des attributs tels que le titre d'une personne ([http://original.rdatoolkit.org/rdachp9-fr_rda9-4630.html RDA 9.4]) qui apparaissent en conjonction avec les noms de personnes dans les mentions de responsabilité et qui pourraient potentiellement être utilisés comme partie du point d'accès. Les autres données peuvent être abrégées ou résumées. En général, traduire les données en langues étrangères de manière informelle en français, en les paraphrasant ou en les résumant selon ce qui convient.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité de collections''' &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Faire preuve de discernement pour déterminer la quantité de données autres que les formes du titre (ou de la phrase analogue à une collection) à enregistrer dans la notice d'autorité. La numérotation et les noms des organismes de publication ne sont pas obligatoires mais peuvent être indiqués.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Types particuliers de citations ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les citations les plus courantes sont énumérées ci-dessous. Si celles-ci ne sont pas appropriées, en formuler d'autres selon les besoins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Canadiana'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la conversion des informations trouvées dans des zones MARC obsolètes ou non actives (par exemple, 664, 665, 666) en une note 670, citer Canadiana dans une citation telle que celles fournies dans les exemples ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information convertie à partir d'une zone 665 dans cette notice, [date de la conversion] $b ([données converties à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de la zone 665 anciennement dans cette notice ([données déplacées à partir de la zone 665])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''LC/NAF, OCLC et fichier interne de BAnQ'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La façon de citer ces fichiers dans la zone 670 est la suivante :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family: courier new; text-indent: -85px; line-height: 1.4; border: 1px solid #eaecf0; background-color: #f8f9fa; padding: 10px 25px 10px 100px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#LC/NAF|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[1]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a OCLC, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; usage: [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAnQ, [date de la recherche] $b (point d'acc&amp;amp;egrave;s : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es]; variantes : [donn&amp;amp;eacute;es])&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de noms.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations. Entre parenthèses, précédé par la mention '''point d'accès :''' ou '''points d'accès :''' , mentionner le ou les points d'accès trouvés, même si le point d'accès autorisé actuel est identique. S'il est jugé utile de mentionner une ou plusieurs variantes de point d'accès trouvées dans une notice d'autorité, les mentionner en les faisant précéder de la mention '''variante :''' ou '''variantes :'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si différentes formes du nom apparaissent dans les notices bibliographiques, enregistrer le point d'accès ainsi que toutes les formes trouvées, y compris les formes identiques au point d'accès autorisé. Séparer le point d'accès des autres formes de nom et faire précéder les autres formes d'une mention appropriée, par exemple, '''usage :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^2&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Usage|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[2]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]], '''forme non transcrite :''' ou '''formes non transcrites :'''&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;^3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;[[#Forme_non_transcrite|&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;[3]&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas citer les notices bibliographiques ou l'emplacement exact des variations trouvées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 7 août 2020 $b (points d'accès : Riva, J.; Riva, J. (John), 1929- ; Riva, John; Riva, John, 1929- ; Riva, John F.; Riva, John Fioretto Valder; usage : John Riva [forme prédominante]; J. Riva; John F. Riva)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a LC/NAF, 7 janvier 2020 $b (point d'accès : Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896; variantes : Shuman, Klara, 1819-1896; Shūman, Kurara, 1819-1896; Vik, Klara, 1819-1896; Wieck-Schumann, Clara, 1819-1896)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
''Notices d'autorité de collections.'' Indiquer la date de la recherche, en utilisant les noms de mois ou leurs abréviations, suivie de la citation de la notice bibliographique. Entre parenthèses, indiquer la mention de la collection qui se trouve dans cette notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a OCLC, 27 janv. 2021, Les Déchets ménagers, c1980 $b (Les Cahiers de l'AGHTM)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;LC/NAF&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;1. [[#^1|^]] Le fichier LC/NAF a aussi été cité antérieurement sous d'autres noms, par exemple Base de données LC/NACO et Fichier de LC/NACO.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Usage&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;2. [[#^2|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;usage&amp;amp;nbsp;» désigne les formes de noms transcrites que l'on trouve habituellement dans les mentions de responsabilité des notices bibliographiques. On peut également trouver ces formes dans d'autres parties de la notice bibliographique telles que le titre propre ou une note citée. En raison des changements apportés aux instructions de catalogage, les catalogueurs doivent être prudents lorsqu'ils prennent les informations de la mention de publication, de la mention de distribution, etc. et de la mention de collection.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span id=&amp;quot;Forme_non_transcrite&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;3. [[#^3|^]] S'agissant des notices bibliographiques, «&amp;amp;nbsp;forme non transcrite&amp;amp;nbsp;» (ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;formes non transcrites&amp;amp;nbsp;») désigne une forme de nom qui ne correspond pas nécessairement à une forme transcrite. Par exemple, dans les notices RCAA2, le nom d'un éditeur qui figure sur la ressource comme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Publishing Company&amp;amp;nbsp;» pourrait avoir été enregistré dans la mention de publication sous la forme «&amp;amp;nbsp;ABC Pub. Co&amp;amp;nbsp;». Normalement, il n'est pas nécessaire de citer une telle forme dans une zone 670.&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Autres fichiers ou catalogues'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un point d'accès est trouvé dans un catalogue ou une base de données en ligne, utiliser son jugement pour créer une citation 670. Commencer la zone 670 par une désignation du catalogue ou de la base de données dans laquelle ces autres notices bibliographiques ont été trouvées. Il n'y a pas de formulation prescrite pour ces citations; des exemples sont donnés ci-dessous :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a NUC pre-56 $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Catalogue de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a BnF dans VIAF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Autorités BnF, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a SUDOC, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier ISNI de BAnQ, [date] $b ([données])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Advitam, [date] $b ([données])&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Bases de données toponymiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer le nom de la base de données et la date de la recherche dans la sous-zone $a. &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Le nom de la base de données peut être cité sous forme d'acronyme ou en toutes lettres.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Dans la sous-zone $b, indiquer le ou les noms de l'entité, le type d'entité, la désignation ou la classe de l'élément (par exemple, ADM1, PPL, civil), les coordonnées et le nom du lieu plus vaste, s'il y a lieu. (D'autres informations pertinentes peuvent également être fournies.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement de la désignation ou de la classe de l'élément, il est possible d'utiliser soit le code (par exemple, PPL) ou sa forme en toutes lettres (par exemple, populated place). Pour les noms étrangers, indiquer le type de nom (par exemple, forme conventionnelle, forme approuvée, forme courte, etc.) entre crochets ou parenthèses après le nom. Répéter les crochets ou les parenthèses après chaque nom de ce type.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Les noms de variantes (y compris les noms en caractères non latins) peuvent être donnés dans une seule liste, comme indiqué ci-dessous. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Lors de l'enregistrement des coordonnées, il est possible d'utiliser le format DMS (degrés, minutes, secondes), le format DD (degrés décimaux) ou les deux formats.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 4 décembre 2020 $b (nom : Avonmore; lieu : Stormont; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-Lieu non organisé; terme générique : localité; latitude - longitude : 45° 10ʹ 17ʺ N, 74° 58ʹ 2ʺ W; 45.17152, -74.96713)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Banque de noms de lieux du Québec, consultée le 3 septembre 2020 $b (Rouville; type d'entité : municipalité régionale de comté; établie en janvier 1982, la MRC de Rouville a succédé à l'ancienne municipalité du comté de Rouville d'où elle tire son nom; coordonnées : latitude nord 45° 26ʹ 00ʺ, longitude ouest 73° 03ʹ 00ʺ; coordonnées décimales : -73.05, 45.43333)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNIS, consulté le 5 mai  2016 $b (Allegany County; civil, 39°37ʹ17ʺN 078°41ʹ56ʺW, situé au Maryland; variante : Alligany County)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a choisi d’enregistrer les coordonnées DMS)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Les coordonnées peuvent être enregistrées telles que trouvées. Toutefois, si la base de données affiche les coordonnées en utilisant des deux-points pour séparer les composantes DMS et des valeurs positives et négatives pour communiquer l'hémisphère, il est acceptable de traduire les coordonnées au format DMS traditionnel si souhaité. Utiliser le symbole du degré (et non le zéro en exposant) pour indiquer les degrés, le signe mou (lettre modificative prime) pour les minutes et le signe dur (lettre modificative double prime) pour les secondes. Pour les coordonnées de latitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère sud. Pour les coordonnées de longitude, une valeur négative correspond à l'hémisphère occidental.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador; -1:31:58, -80:44:16; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a enregistré les coordonnées DMS telles qu'elles ont été trouvées)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a GNS, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Agua Blanca [forme approuvée]; lieu habité à Manabí, Ecuador;  1°31ʹ58ʺS, 80°44ʹ16ʺW;; variante : Agua Clara)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:90px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Le catalogueur a traduit les coordonnées DMS au format traditionnel à partir de : -1:31:58, -80:44:16)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Geographic names server, consulté le 17 août 2022 $b (Moca (forme approuvée); PPLA2 à Cibao Norte, République dominicaine, 19:23:37, -70:31:34; également une division administrative du  même nom à Cibao Norte)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic names server&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, consulté le &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;17 août 2022&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;$b (Taitung [forme conventionnelle], Taitung County [forme conventionnelle], Taidong [forme approuvée], Taidong Xian [forme approuvée]; ADM1 à Taiwan, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;22:53:01, 121:02:54&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;; variantes : Taidong Sian; T'ai-tung; T'aitung Hsien; écriture non latine : 臺東縣; 臺東)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, 11 février 2021 $b (Quesnel; ville; localisation: Cariboo Land District, Colombie-Britannique; 52°58ʹ47ʺN, 122°29ʹ37ʺW; 52.979722, -122.493611)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Base de données toponymiques du Canada, consultée le 14 septembre 2023 $b (nom : Ansonville; lieu : Cochrane; province : Ontario; terme concis : UNP-lieu non organisé; terme générique : agglomération urbaine; latitude - longitude (DMS) : 48° 45ʹ 23ʺ N, 80° 41ʹ 10ʺ W; 48.7563889, -80.6861111)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sources non bibliographiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Indiquer la source non bibliographique, la date et les informations. La source peut être indiquée de manière spécifique («&amp;amp;nbsp;Lettre de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Appel téléphonique à l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.) ou en termes généraux («&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'auteur&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Information de l'éditeur&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc.). Lorsqu'on indique une source spécifique, il n'est pas nécessaire de montrer comment l'information a été reçue, par exemple, que la lettre a été reçue par télécopieur plutôt que par courrier. Lorsqu'un appel téléphonique à un éditeur, une agence ou une organisation est cité, il convient généralement de donner le nom du groupe appelé, plutôt que le titre ou le nom de la personne contactée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Appel téléphonique à H. Jones, 31 janvier 1992 $b (Harry Jones est le vrai nom de Lionel Jones)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Lettre de l'auteur, 29 mai 1994 $b (la date de naissance correcte pour ______________ est le 14 octobre 1950)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Information de l'éditeur, 6 février 1991 $b (le deuxième prénom de James Allan est Stephen, pas Steven)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Courriel de l'éditeur, 6 avril 2016 $b (__________)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de collections de rééditions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si une notice d'autorité de collection concerne uniquement une réédition, commencer la 670 par le terme correspondant au type de réédition et une barre oblique. Ne pas inclure une 670 pour une réédition si la notice d'autorité sujet couvre à la fois l'original et une ou plusieurs rééditions. Ne pas ajouter de zones 670 supplémentaires pour d'autres types de rééditions cataloguées ultérieurement. (Voir 64X Traitement de la collection, Rééditions pour plus d'informations sur les rééditions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Édition en gros caractères/La diligence du fou, c1989 : $b page de titre du CIP (Un roman de l'Ouest d'Evans)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Citations pour les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciés'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour des informations sur les citations existantes dans les notices d'autorité de noms indifférenciées, voir la section [[#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32 Nom de personne indifférencié]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2025-11-21]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 672 Titre associé de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 672 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui est associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité de collectivité, des zones 672 peuvent être utilisées pour enregistrer des titres de ressources dont la collectivité est la créatrice, l'organisme de publication ou le sujet. Le but premier de la zone 672 consiste principalement à documenter le fait qu'il existe un lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 672 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 670 pour consigner le titre de la ressource pour laquelle la notice d'autorité est créée, ni d'utiliser des zones 670 pour justifier les informations enregistrées dans les zones 1XX et 4XX, telles que le nom privilégié et les variantes de noms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 672 peuvent être ajoutées après les zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 672 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 672.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a de la zone 672 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans la classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 672 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #3 $a La consolation&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Yeux noirs&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zones 672 avec titres propres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #0 $a Cervantes&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre propre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;111 2# $a Concile du Vatican $n (2e : $d 1962-1965 : $c Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Constitutio de sacra liturgia&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec titre uniforme)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;151 ## $a Espagne&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Llei d'enjudiciament civil i normes complementàries&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Zone 672 avec une variante de titre pour l'œuvre associée à l'expression catalane de l'œuvre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $b – Reste du titre'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsqu'on enregistre un titre propre, la sous-zone $b peut être utilisée pour enregistrer le complément de titre ou le titre propre parallèle afin d'éviter toute confusion lorsque des titres nécessitent une meilleure identification.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #3 $a La rivière $b initiations outaouaises&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le complément de titre)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;672 #4 $a Las estrellas $b Stars&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(La sous-zone $b contient le titre propre parallèle)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $f – Date'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $f est utilisée pour enregistrer une date appropriée à l'entité enregistrée dans la sous-zone $a (par exemple, utiliser la date d'une œuvre pour un titre privilégié et la date de publication pour un titre propre). Ne pas utiliser les crochets carrés dans la sous-zone $f pour enregistrer une date de publication ou de production. Ne pas mettre de date de distribution, de date de fabrication ou de date de copyright en $f.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une œuvre :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Amor en los tiempos del cólera $f 1985&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de l'œuvre)'' &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une expression :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #2 $a L'amour aux temps du choléra $f 1987&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date d'une expression française de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;672 pour une manifestation :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Miłość w czasach zarazy $f 2005&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Date de publication d'une manifestation d'une expression polonaise de Amor en los tiempos del cólera)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sous-zone $w – Numéro de contrôle de la notice bibliographique'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La sous-zone $w est utilisée pour enregistrer des numéros de contrôle de notices bibliographiques (par exemple, les zones 001, 010 et 016 dans les notices bibliographiques). Il est recommandé de fournir la sous-zone $w lorsque l'information est facilement accessible. La sous-zone $w doit être répétée pour chaque numéro de contrôle distinct (par exemple, un LCCN et un numéro de notice OCLC doivent être fournis dans des sous-zones séparées). Pour plus d'instructions sur la saisie d'un numéro de contrôle dans la notice, voir la section sur la sous-zone $w dans le ''CONSER Editing Guide (CEG) – Section E. Format MARC 21 for Serials as Applied within CONSER – Variable Data Fields – 76X-78X Linking Entries – Linking Entry Fields General Information''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Note :'' la sous-zone $w doit seulement être utilisée pour les titres de manifestations.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:75px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-60px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
672 #0 $a Bread and other bakery products industry $w (DLC)###88646267 $w (OCoLC)3774505 $w (CaOONL)84079116XE&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 673 Titre distinct de l'entité =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;La zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer un titre qui n'est pas associé à l'entité représentée dans la zone 100, 110, 111 ou 151 de la notice d'autorité de nom. Par exemple, dans une notice d'autorité pour une personne, la zone 673 peut être utilisée pour enregistrer les titres d'œuvres écrites par une personne différente portant un nom semblable. L'objectif principal de la zone 673 est de documenter le fait qu'il n'existe aucun lien entre l'entité de la zone 1XX et le titre enregistré dans la zone 673.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
L'utilisation de la zone 673 n'annule en rien la nécessité d'utiliser la zone 675, comme le décrit la section [[#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es|675]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
De nouvelles zones 673 peuvent être ajoutées après des zones existantes pour enregistrer des titres supplémentaires non associés à l'entité. Ne pas prendre pour habitude de supprimer ou de modifier les zones 673 existantes lors de l'ajout de nouvelles zones 673.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les éléments en écriture non latine doivent être translittérés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un titre enregistré dans la sous-zone $a d'une zone 673 peut être un titre propre, un titre propre de collection, un titre privilégié, etc. Les titres doivent être enregistrés en suivant les instructions appropriées de RDA et des ÉP de BAC-BAnQ pour cet élément. Appliquer les mêmes instructions sur les caractères à ignorer dans le classement pour le deuxième indicateur de la zone 673 que celles utilisées pour la zone 245. Pour les sous-zones spécifiques de la zone 673, appliquer les mêmes instructions que celles données dans la section [[#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]] de ce Guide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[dans la sous-zone $w, «&amp;amp;nbsp;#&amp;amp;nbsp;» = espace insérée par le catalogueur]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Boyer, Frédéric, $d 1961-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
67&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; #0 $a Cervantes $f 1977&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Titre propre associé à un autre Frédéric Boyer)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Paintings and drawings on the backs of National Gallery pictures $w (DLC)###47008205 $w (OCoLC)1654530&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Title propre associé à la National Gallery de Londres)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
ET NON&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:20px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a National Gallery of Art (É.-U.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
673 #0 $a Impressed by light : $b British photographs from paper negatives, 1840-1860&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''(Même si la National Gallery of Art n'est pas la créatrice de la ressource mentionnée, elle en est l'éditrice et ce titre devrait donc être enregistré en 672)''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#673_Titre_distinct_de_l.27entit.C3.A9 |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 675 Source des données non trouvées =&lt;br /&gt;
En avril 2012, cette zone a été redéfinie comme : «&amp;amp;nbsp;Citation d'une source consultée dans laquelle aucune information ne se trouve liée en aucune manière avec l'entité représentée par la notice d'autorité ou par des entités liées.&amp;amp;nbsp;» Les catalogueurs participant au PFAN ne sont pas tenus de modifier les zones 675 existantes simplement pour répondre à cette nouvelle définition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de la création d'une nouvelle notice d'autorité, toujours citer la ressource cataloguée dans la zone 675 si la ressource cataloguée ne fournit aucune information liée de quelque façon que ce soit à l'entité représentée dans la notice d'autorité. Citer également dans la zone 675 d'autres sources consultées qui ne contiennent aucune information, lorsqu'on juge que cette absence même d'information mérite d'être consignée pour les futurs utilisateurs de la notice d'autorité.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a Oxford classical dictionary, 1996&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
675 ## $a GEOnet, consulté le 2 avril 2014&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Toutefois, il n'est pas toujours nécessaire d'inclure dans la zone 675 toutes les sources de référence consultées; il faut faire preuve de jugement pour décider quelles sources sont suffisamment importantes pour être conservées de façon permanente dans la notice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-11-01]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#675_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es_non_trouv.C3.A9es |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 678 Données biographiques ou historiques =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Lorsque des données biographiques ou historiques sont fournies dans une zone de note 678, rédiger la note en employant des phrases concises mais complètes et en gardant à l'esprit que l'information sera utilisée dans des affichages publics.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 0# $a Joseph Smith, Jr. (1805-1844) était un prophète mormon et le fondateur de l'Église de Jésus-Christ des saints des derniers jours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a L'Organisation du traité de l'Atlantique Nord (OTAN) est une alliance politique et militaire créée par la signature du Traité de l'Atlantique Nord, le 4 avril 1949. Elle regroupe des pays membres d'Amérique du Nord et d'Europe. Depuis 1999, plusieurs pays anciennement membres du Pacte de Varsovie ont rejoint l'OTAN, y compris la Hongrie, la Bulgarie et la Roumanie. D'autres pays non-membres participent aux programmes de l'OTAN tels que le Partenariat pour la paix.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En prévision de la constitution par BAC du fichier dans WMS et de l'ajout en lot des notices d'autorité des autres institutions, le contenu de toutes les zones 665 dans les notices de BAC et de BAnQ a été déplacé vers la zone 678. Il se pourrait que la zone 665 originale ait contenu des instructions sur le ou les points d'accès à employer comme auteur et comme vedette-matière :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules. Comme auteur, on utilise : Cascapédia (Québec); Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec); Grande-Cascapédia (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec); Saint-Jules (Cascapédia-Saint-Jules, Québec). Comme vedette-matière, on utilise Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supprimer ces instructions dans la zone 678 si elles ont été conservées. Penser à ajouter la zone 667 sur l'emploi comme vedette-matière le cas échéant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Cascapédia (Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding-left:85px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:0px; padding-right: 20px; text-indent:-85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme vedette-matière. Les œuvres sur ce lieu se trouvent sous Cascapédia-Saint-Jules (Québec).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Saint-Jules et Grande-Cascapédia fusionnent le 2 juin 1999 pour former Cascapédia. Cascapédia devient le 26 juin 2000 Cascapédia-Saint-Jules.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Justification de la zone 678'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Généralement, une zone 678 doit être justifiée par une zone 670. Si elle n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu est approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, conserver la zone et ajouter une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678 comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de [abréviation de la bibliothèque participante], [date de consultation de Canadiana] …&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-left:100px; margin-top:0px; padding-top:10px; padding-right:25px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Fichier interne de BAC, 29 octobre 2020 $b (établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# $a Établie en 1940, la Commission du salaire minimum devient le 16 avril 1980 la Commission des normes du travail.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la notice a été modifiée après avoir été migrée, il faut consulter l'historique de la notice pour déterminer qui a ajouté la zone 678 à l'origine. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la zone 678 n'est pas justifiée et que son contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique ou historique, ne pas conserver la zone 678 sauf si une note appropriée peut être rédigée avec les informations dont on dispose. Noter que la zone 678 est facultative. Si le contenu de la zone doit être conservé parce qu'il ne se trouve nulle part ailleurs dans la notice, le transférer dans une note 670 citant le fichier interne de l'institution qui a fourni la zone 678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:15px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 678 existante qui sera supprimée car le contenu n'est pas approprié pour une note biographique&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
678 1# Né le 6 juin 1973.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Zone 670 ajoutée :&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## Fichier interne de l'ULaval, 29 octobre 2020 $b (né le 6 juin 1973)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Répétabilité :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Ne pas répéter cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2020-11-26]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#678_Donn.C3.A9es_biographiques_ou_historiques |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 7XX Liaison des vedettes établies – Renseignements généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
''Note'' : Cette section ne s'applique pas à la zone 781 utilisée dans les notices d'autorité de noms 151 pour fournir des informations sur les subdivisions géographiques. Voir la section [[#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique|781]] de ce Guide pour les instructions relatives à cette zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;L'utilisation d'une vedette établie dans une zone de liaison 7XX dans une notice d'autorité de nom ou une notice d'autorité de collection est limitée à l'enregistrement du point d'accès autorisé à partir d'une bibliographie nationale ou d'un fichier d'autorité national ou équivalent séparé. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La forme de la vedette dans une zone 7XX peut correspondre à la forme dans la zone 1XX ou à une forme dans la zone 4XX dans la même notice d'autorité. Ceci est approprié lorsque la forme de la zone 7XX représente une forme se trouvant dans un fichier d'autorité différent de Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Dion, Céline&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
700 10 $a Dion, Céline $0 (DLC)n 87834212&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La source de la vedette dans la zone 7XX peut être précisée en utilisant soit la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;7&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur avec une sous-zone $2, soit une valeur pour le deuxième indicateur qui précise la source. Pour les points d'accès provenant du fichier LC/NAF, privilégier le deuxième indicateur avec la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;0&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[2021-02-18]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= 781 Liaison des vedettes de subdivision - Subdivision géographique =&lt;br /&gt;
'''Pratique facultative du PFAN :'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pour une vedette de nom géographique qui peut également être utilisée comme subdivision géographique, déterminer la forme sous laquelle la vedette doit être utilisée comme subdivision géographique en suivant les lignes directrices de la feuille d'instructions [https://www.loc.gov/aba/publications/FreeSHM/H0830.pdf H 830 du ''Subject Headings Manual'']. Entrer la forme de la subdivision géographique dans une zone 781 en utilisant la valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;6&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour le deuxième indicateur. Pour une vedette géographique utilisée directement, comme un pays, saisir les données dans une seule sous-zone $z. Pour une vedette géographique qui est utilisée indirectement en subdivision d'une entité géographique plus vaste, telle qu'une ville, saisir les données dans deux sous-zones $z successives. Ne pas modifier les valeurs des positions de la zone 008. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; line-height:1.4; text-indent:-85px; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a France&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Paris (France)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z France $z Paris&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Turquie $z Lycie&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Australie $z Sydney (N.-G. du S.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
151 ## $a León (Espagne : Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
781 #6 $z Espagne $z León (Province)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice pour une vedette de nom géographique qui ne peut pas être utilisée comme vedette secondaire matière (008/15 valeur «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;»), comme le nom antérieur d'une juridiction qui a subi un changement de nom linéaire, par exemple, '''Ceylan'''.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter une zone 781 à une notice d'autorité de nom pour un nom de lieu qui ne peut pas être utilisé comme une subdivision géographique, comme une section d'une ville, par exemple, '''North End (Boston, Mass.)'''&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Suivre ces lignes directrices pour les notices d'autorité nouvellement créées. Ajouter une zone 781 à une notice existante lorsqu'une autre modification est faite dans la notice. Lors de la révision d'une notice existante qui contient une note d'utilisation pour l'indexation dans une zone 667 indiquant la forme de la subdivision géographique appropriée, supprimer la zone 667 et la remplacer par une zone 781.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[2021-03-05]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &amp;amp;nbsp;|&amp;amp;nbsp; [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms_-_Suppl%C3%A9ment_MARC_21#781_Liaison_des_vedettes_de_subdivision_-_Subdivision_g.C3.A9ographique |''Supplément'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮞&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 1 : Entités ambiguës =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annexe 2 : Projets spéciaux =&lt;br /&gt;
Cette annexe fournit des informations sur les projets spéciaux impliquant des notices d'autorité créées et modifiées dans le fichier d'autorité Canadiana. Les notices créées ou modifiées pour ces projets peuvent contenir certaines zones et valeurs dans des zones qui ne sont généralement pas conformes aux politiques de catalogage actuelles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des instructions sur la modification de ces notices sont fournies afin d'indiquer si ces zones et valeurs doivent être conservées ou non.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 1. Notices créées ou révisées dans le cadre du projet de révision de notices de l'UQAM ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de révision de notices d'autorité dirigé par l'UQAM. Il s'agit des notices créées ou modifiées dans Canadiana par l'équipe du traitement documentaire de cette institution. Ces notices sont ensuite révisées par deux bibliothécaires et une technicienne de l'UQAM. Le projet s'est terminé le 31 mars 2021.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces nouvelles notices présentaient les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles ont été ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices peuvent être modifiées de la même manière que les autres notices d'autorité de noms conformément aux politiques de catalogage en vigueur.&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un catalogueur modifie ces notices, il doit :&lt;br /&gt;
* changer la valeur du Guide/17 pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;n&amp;amp;nbsp;» (Notice d'autorité complète);&lt;br /&gt;
* supprimer la zone 667 «&amp;amp;nbsp;NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (UQAM)&amp;amp;nbsp;»; &lt;br /&gt;
* évaluer la notice comme une notice versée en lot. Toutefois, comme la notice est en cours de révision, le point d'accès autorisé peut être modifié s'il n'est pas conforme aux pratiques du PFAN (p. ex., une date de naissance ou de décès peut être ajoutée si elle est disponible et a été omise dans le point d'accès).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Projet 2. Notices créées et révisées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités ===&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A) Informations générales'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Projet de mentorat &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui, depuis février 2021, permet aux&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; bibliothèques universitaires de créer des notices d'autorité de nom qui sont révisées par une autre institution universitaire. Les notices d'autorité créées ou modifiées par &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;les bibliothèques mentorées&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; sont révisées par des techniciens en documentation de l'Université &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;qui les mentore&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices présentent les caractéristiques suivantes au moment où elles sont ajoutées à Canadiana :&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Dans le Guide/17, la valeur était «&amp;amp;nbsp;o&amp;amp;nbsp;» pour «&amp;amp;nbsp;Notice d'autorité incomplète&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
* La note 667 suivante a été ajoutée : NOTICE EN COURS DE RÉVISION (PROJET DE MENTORAT [abréviation, c'est-à-dire UdeS, ÉTS, UQTR, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;etc.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''B) Instructions pour réviser la notice'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ces notices ne doivent pas être modifiées.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[2022-07-15]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN&amp;diff=144047</id>
		<title>PFAN - Énoncés de politique du PFAN</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN&amp;diff=144047"/>
		<updated>2026-02-13T15:01:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 9.2.2.5.3, Alternative */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - PFAN Policy Statements]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours| 24 h (En cours d'édition par Daniel Paradis, BAnQ)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 0 =&lt;br /&gt;
== 0.6.6, Section 2 : Enregistrement des attributs d'une œuvre et d'une expression ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour une œuvre musicale ayant un titre non distinctif, toujours enregistrer les éléments applicables en tant qu'ajouts au point d'accès autorisé. Lors de l'enregistrement d'éléments afin de différencier le point d'accès autorisé représentant une œuvre du point d'accès autorisé représentant une autre œuvre, personne, famille ou collectivité, toujours effectuer l'ajout d'un ou plusieurs éléments différenciateurs au point d'accès. S'en remettre au jugement afin de décider s'il convient d'enregistrer également ces éléments en tant qu'éléments séparés et s'il convient d'enregistrer les éléments d'identification additionnels (ceux qui ne sont pas nécessaires pour la différenciation) comme des éléments séparés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 6 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.2.2.5, Exception ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les œuvres grecques classiques et byzantines couvertes par l'exception, choisir comme titre privilégié un titre consacré par l'usage en français.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-11-24''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.2.2.7, Alternative == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appliquer l'alternative pour les œuvres anonymes créées avant 1501 et qui ne sont ni en grec ni en écriture latine. Choisir comme titre privilégié un titre consacré par l'usage en français s'il en existe un.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2022-09-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.2.2.10.3, Alternative == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les compilations contenant des œuvres créées après 1500 : Ne pas appliquer l'alternative. Enregistrer le titre propre de la compilation comme titre privilégié. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les compilations contenant des œuvres créées avant 1501 : Si l'alternative est appliquée, inscrire un titre collectif conventionnel suivi de « Extraits ».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-05-07''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.1, Omissions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les œuvres antérieures au 20e siècle, considérer généralement les locutions telles que «&amp;amp;nbsp;a due&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;a cinque&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme des mentions de distribution d'exécution et les omettre lors de l'enregistrement du titre privilégié conformément à cette instruction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2, Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type de composition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas considérer des titres tels que «&amp;amp;nbsp;Double concerto&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Tripelkonzert&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc. comme des noms de types de compositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un compositeur utilise un mot qui est normalement le nom d'un type de composition comme titre d'une œuvre qui n'est absolument pas une œuvre du type désigné par ce mot, ne pas considérer le titre comme le nom d'un type de composition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Poulenc, Francis, $d 1899-1963. $t Aubade&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Titre&amp;amp;nbsp;: Aubade&amp;amp;nbsp;: concerto chorégraphique pour piano et 18 instruments.''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un titre constitué de deux mots, dont chacun pris individuellement est le nom d'un type de composition, peut, lorsque ces deux mots sont combinés, constituer un titre distinctif. Traiter généralement un tel titre composé comme un titre distinctif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Nielsen, Carl, $d 1865-1931. $t Humoreske-bagateller&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.1, Choix de la langue ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer la forme acceptée du nom en français si le nom a une forme apparentée en français ou que le même nom est utilisé en français.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Mélodie/Mélodies'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le mot français «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodie&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodies&amp;amp;nbsp;», ou leurs équivalents dans une autre langue, est le titre d'une œuvre qui n'est pas pour voix soliste et instrument à clavier et à cordes, considérer qu'il s'agit d'un type de composition. Utiliser la forme française comme titre privilégié et ajouter la distribution d'exécution conformément à [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas appliquer l'alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.2, Forme au singulier ou au pluriel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Une œuvre d'un type particulier'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors du catalogage de la première occurrence d'une œuvre d'un type particulier de composition par un compositeur, enregistrer la forme du nom du type de composition comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le compositeur est décédé, consulter les sources de référence pour vérifier si le compositeur a écrit plus d'une œuvre de ce type, et choisir la forme au singulier ou au pluriel du nom du type de composition en fonction des informations trouvées.&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le compositeur est vivant, choisir la forme au singulier du nom du type de composition, sauf si l'œuvre en cours de catalogage porte un numéro d'ordre (y compris 1); dans ce cas, utiliser le pluriel en supposant que le compositeur a écrit ou a l'intention d'écrire d'autres œuvres de ce type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors du catalogage de la deuxième occurrence d'une œuvre d'un type particulier d'un compositeur, si la forme au singulier a été utilisée dans le point d'accès autorisé pour la première œuvre de ce type, réviser le titre privilégié pour le mettre au pluriel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas oublier que la distribution d'exécution est un élément distinct du titre privilégié. Si le compositeur a écrit une sonate pour piano et une sonate pour violon, il a écrit deux sonates, et la forme au pluriel du nom du type de composition doit donc être utilisée comme titre privilégié.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Mots ou locutions liturgiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre privilégié est un mot ou une locution liturgiques en latin, enregistrer le titre au singulier lorsque le mot ou la locution sont invariables (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;Gloria&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Magnificat&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Requiem&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Salve Regina&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Te Deum&amp;amp;nbsp;»). Utiliser la forme au pluriel lorsque cela est approprié (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;Introïts&amp;amp;nbsp;»). En règle générale, ne pas ajouter la distribution d'exécution dans le point d'accès autorisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Indications de tempo avec mots qualificatifs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre privilégié est une indication de tempo avec un ou plusieurs mots qualificatifs (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;Andante sostenuto&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Allegro con brio&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Moderato ma non tanto&amp;amp;nbsp;»), enregistrer le titre au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas appliquer l'alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.7.1.3, Partie identifiée à la fois par un numéro et par un titre ou une autre désignation verbale, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas appliquer l'alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.7.2, Deux ou plusieurs parties, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si deux ou plusieurs parties d'une œuvre constituent l'unique contenu de la manifestation en cours de description, enregistrer le titre collectif conventionnel ''Extraits'' comme titre privilégié des parties. Si une ou plusieurs parties sont particulièrement importantes, enregistrer également le ou les titres de la ou des parties dans des points d'accès autorisés analytiques.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si deux ou plusieurs parties d'une œuvre font partie d'une compilation d'œuvres ou de parties d'œuvres et que des points d'accès autorisés analytiques sont établis, enregistrer le titre collectif conventionnel ''Extraits'' comme titre privilégié des parties ou enregistrer le ou les titres d'une ou plusieurs parties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.8.3, Œuvres complètes d'un même type de composition pour une même distribution spécifique ou diverses distributions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Employer des termes du RVMGF dans la mesure du possible. Lors de l'enregistrement du titre privilégié, omettre tout qualificatif du RVMGF figurant entre parenthèses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Terme RVMGF'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:30px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Tangos (Musique)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:-30px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Titre collectif conventionnel'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:0px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Tangos&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.3, Enregistrement d'une distribution d'exécution ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Employer des termes du RVMMEM dans la mesure du possible. '''''Exception :''''' employer ''orchestre à cordes'' pour un orchestre constitué principalement d'instruments à cordes s'il ne comprend pas d'instruments à vent (même s'il peut aussi comprendre une basse continue, des instruments à clavier, des instruments à cordes pincées ou des instruments à percussion). Enregistrer ''orchestre'' pour un orchestre comprenant des instruments à cordes ainsi que des instruments à vent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'emploi des termes du RVMMEM dans les points d'accès autorisés, voir l'énoncé de politique [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|6.28.1.9.1]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.5, Omission facultative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas omettre les voix et instruments supplémentaires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.6.1, Omission facultative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas omettre le nombre de parties ou d'exécutants pour un instrument ou une voix, même s'il y en a seulement un ou une pour cet instrument ou cette voix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.6.3, Omission facultative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas omettre le nombre d'ensembles pour chaque type d'ensemble, même s'il y a seulement un ensemble de ce type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.16.1.3.1, Numéro d'ordre ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer un numéro d'ordre même si les œuvres portant le même titre n'ont pas la même distribution d'exécution, si ces œuvres sont numérotées consécutivement dans les sources de référence musicales.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement d'un numéro d'ordre accompagné dans la source d'un terme tel que «&amp;amp;nbsp;numéro&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;livre&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;collection&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc., appliquer ce qui suit&amp;amp;nbsp;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le terme est le mot français «&amp;amp;nbsp;numéro&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou son abréviation, ou bien un mot équivalent ou une abréviation équivalente dans une autre langue, faire précéder le nombre dans le point d'accès autorisé de l'abréviation française «&amp;amp;nbsp;no&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le terme n'est pas en français et ne signifie pas « numéro » et que le titre privilégié est en français en raison de l'application de [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-100001354#rda6-100001354 6.14.2.5.2.1], le remplacer par son équivalent français, en utilisant une abréviation française selon les instructions de l'annexe B (B.5.4).&lt;br /&gt;
# Dans tous les autres cas, enregistrer le terme tel qu'il figure dans la source en utilisant sa forme abrégée telle qu'elle figure dans l'annexe B (B.5.4). Si le terme ne figure pas dans l'annexe B, enregistrer le terme tel qu'il figure dans la source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si aucun terme n'apparaît avec le nombre, enregistrer le nombre comme un nombre cardinal et le faire précéder de l'abréviation française «&amp;amp;nbsp;no&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser des chiffres arabes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.16.1.3.3, Numéro de catalogue thématique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les abréviations de catalogues thématiques, consulter la bibliographie ''Thematic Indexes Used in the Library of Congress/NACO Authority File'' disponible en ligne à l'adresse : [https://cmc.wp.musiclibraryassoc.org/thematic-indexes-used-in-library-of-congress-naco-authority-files/ https://cmc.wp.musiclibraryassoc.org/thematic-indexes-used-in-library-of-congress-naco-authority-files/].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.17.1.3, Enregistrement d'une tonalité  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les mêmes critères pour enregistrer le mode («&amp;amp;nbsp;majeur&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;mineur&amp;amp;nbsp;») que pour enregistrer le centre tonal, c'est-à-dire que si le centre tonal est indiqué ou évident, mais que le mode ne l'est pas, enregistrer uniquement le centre tonal. Suivre les exemples de RDA et employer les termes «&amp;amp;nbsp;dièse&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;bémol&amp;amp;nbsp;» plutôt que les symboles ♯ et ♭.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-17''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.18.1.4, Arrangements, transcriptions, etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Révisions par le compositeur original'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un compositeur révise une œuvre en conservant le titre original et le numéro d'opus et que la révision consiste en une instrumentation différente à l'intérieur d'une même distribution générale (par ex., orchestre, ensemble instrumental, harmonie), ne pas considérer la révision comme un arrangement. Utiliser le même point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre originale et la révision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Stravinsky, Igor, $d 1882-1971.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Petruška&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Petrushka : $b complete original 1911 version ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Stravinsky, Igor, $d 1882-1971.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Petruška&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Petrouchka : $b burleske in four scenes (revised 1947 version) ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instruments alternatifs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans les cas suivants, ne pas considérer l'utilisation d'instruments alternatifs comme un arrangement :​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Une œuvre composée avant 1800 pour un instrument du Moyen Âge, de la Renaissance ou de la période baroque (viole de gambe, flûte à bec, etc.), ou pour la voix, qui est éditée pour ou interprétée sur un instrument moderne ou par une voix alternative, à condition que la tonalité soit inchangée et que la notation n'ait pas été modifiée de façon significative.​&lt;br /&gt;
# Une œuvre pour un instrument mélodique qui est éditée pour ou interprétée sur un instrument alternatif spécifié par le compositeur dans la ou les premières éditions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Notice bibliographique''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897.​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Sonates, $m clarinette, piano, $n op. 120​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Sonatas opus 120, for viola and piano ...​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 ## $a À l'origine pour clarinette ou alto et piano.​​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
650 #6 $a Sonates (Alto et piano) $v Partitions et parties.​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Notice d'autorité''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897. $t Sonates, $m clarinette, piano, $n op. 120​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
382 0# $a clarinette $n 1 $p alto $n 1 $a piano $n 1 $s 2 $2 rvmmem​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897. $t Sonates, $m alto, piano, $n op. 120&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Transpositions de chants'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le cas d'une ressource contenant un ou plusieurs chants transposés pour une tessiture vocale différente de l'originale, ne pas considérer la transposition comme un arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Schubert, Franz, $d 1797-1828.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Lieder&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Lieder, Gesang und Klavier / $c Franz Schubert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
250 ## $a Neue Ausg. / $b herausgegeben von Dietrich Fischer-Dieskau ; musikwissenschaftliche Revision von Elmar Budde, tiefe Stimme.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''À l'origine pour voix aiguë''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.27.1.9, Ajouts aux points d'accès représentant des œuvres ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Livrets'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si le livret d'une œuvre musicale dramatique est écrit par le compositeur et est manifesté séparément en tant qu'œuvre littéraire, distinguer l'œuvre littéraire de l'œuvre musicale avec ''(Livret)'' (voir l'énoncé de politique [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Wagner, Richard, $d 1813-1883. $t Meistersinger von Nürnberg (Livret)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1, Lignes directrices générales sur la construction des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Ajouts aux points d'accès autorisés'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas faire d'ajout au point d'accès autorisé lorsqu'une ou plusieurs parties instrumentales d'une œuvre ou d'une compilation d'œuvres d'un compositeur sont publiées séparément. Utiliser le même point d'accès autorisé que celui qui serait utilisé pour une partition ou un ensemble complet de parties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 10	$a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10	$a Wer mich liebet, der wird mein Wort halten, $n BWV 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10	$a Kantate Nr. 74 : $b Wer mich liebet, der wird mein Wort halten : BWV 74 / $c Joh. Seb. Bach ; Continuo-Aussetzung von Ulrich Haverkampf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
250 ##	$a Orgel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
264 #1	$a Wiesbaden : $b Breitkopf &amp;amp; Härtel, $c [1982]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
300 ##	$a 1 partie (32 pages) ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10	$a Musique vocale. $k Extraits&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 14	$a The flute solos from the Bach cantatas, passions, and oratorios ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le terme «&amp;amp;nbsp;Extraits&amp;amp;nbsp;» fait référence au fait que les solos de flûte contenus dans la ressource ne proviennent pas de toutes les œuvre&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;s&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; vocale&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;s&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;  de Bach; il ne s'agit pas non plus de l'intégralité de la partie de flûte de chacune des œuvres incluses.''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Strauss, Richard, $d 1864-1949.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10	$a Musique pour orchestre. $k Extraits&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10	$a Orchesterstudien aus Richard Strauss' symphonischen Werken : $b für Flöte ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le terme «&amp;amp;nbsp;Extraits&amp;amp;nbsp;» fait référence au fait que les solos de flûte contenus dans la ressource ne proviennent pas de toutes les œuvres &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;pour orchestre&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;  de &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Strauss&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ; il ne s'agit pas non plus de l'intégralité de la partie de flûte de chacune des œuvres incluses.''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Mélodie/Mélodies'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le mot français «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodie&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodies&amp;amp;nbsp;» est le titre d'une œuvre pour voix soliste avec accompagnement d'instrument à clavier et à cordes, considérer que la distribution d'exécution est implicite dans le titre (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9]) et omettre la distribution d'exécution dans le point d'accès autorisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le mot français «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodie&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodies&amp;amp;nbsp;» est le titre d'une œuvre pour voix soliste avec accompagnement autre qu'un instrument à clavier et à cordes seul ou sans accompagnement, appliquer [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9] et ajouter la distribution d'exécution de l'accompagnement, ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;sans accompagnement&amp;amp;nbsp;», dans le point d'accès autorisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le mot français «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodie&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodies&amp;amp;nbsp;», ou leurs équivalents dans une autre langue, est le titre d'une œuvre qui n'est pas pour voix soliste et instrument à clavier et à cordes, considérer qu'il s'agit d'un type de composition. Utiliser la forme française comme titre privilégié et ajouter la distribution d'exécution conformément à [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Mots ou locutions liturgiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre privilégié est un mot ou une locution liturgiques en latin, enregistrer le titre au singulier lorsque le mot ou la locution sont invariables (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;Gloria&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Magnificat&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Requiem&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Salve Regina&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Te Deum&amp;amp;nbsp;»). Utiliser la forme au pluriel lorsque cela est approprié (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;Introïts&amp;amp;nbsp;»). En règle générale, ne pas ajouter la distribution d'exécution dans le point d'accès autorisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-05-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.2, Œuvres musicales avec des paroles, un livret, etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un compositeur a également créé le livret d'une œuvre musicale dramatique et que le livret est manifesté séparément en tant qu'œuvre littéraire, distinguer l'œuvre littéraire de l'œuvre musicale avec ''(Livret)'', mais ne pas faire d'ajout au point d'accès pour l'œuvre musicale (voir l'énoncé de politique [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.27.1.9.2C_Ajouts_aux_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres|6.27.1.9]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Wagner, Richard, $d 1813-1883. $t Meistersinger von Nürnberg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Wagner, Richard, $d 1813-1883. $t Meistersinger von Nürnberg (Livret)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.9, Éléments additionnels dans les points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'en remettre au jugement du catalogueur pour le choix du ou des éléments les plus appropriés, parmi ceux listés sous 6.28.1.9, à inclure dans le point d'accès autorisé d'une œuvre musicale, sauf si d'autres instructions dans cet énoncé de politique s'appliquent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type ou des noms de deux ou plusieurs types de compositions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour préserver l'intégrité du fichier, ajouter les éléments suivants dans le point d'accès autorisé dans cet ordre, selon le cas :&lt;br /&gt;
# distribution d'exécution (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-12575#rda6-12575 6.28.1.9.1])&lt;br /&gt;
# désignation numérique d'une œuvre musicale (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-4713#rda6-4713 6.16])&lt;br /&gt;
# tonalité (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-4791#rda6-4791 6.17]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on ajoute plusieurs désignations numériques, les ajouter dans cet ordre :&lt;br /&gt;
# numéro d'ordre&lt;br /&gt;
# numéro d'opus&lt;br /&gt;
# numéro à l'intérieur de l'opus, s'il y en a un.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter de numéro d'ordre ni de numéro d'opus si un numéro de catalogue thématique est ajouté.​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897. $t Concertos, $m violon, orchestre, $n op. 77, $r ré majeur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Schumann, Clara, $d 1819-1896. $t Scherzos, $m piano, $n no 1, op. 10, $r ré mineur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Beethoven, Ludwig van, $d 1770-1827. $t Sonates, $m piano, $n no 14, op. 27, no 2, $r do dièse mineur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Schubert, Franz, $d 1797-1828. $t Trios, $m piano, violon, violoncelle, $n D. 929, $r mi bémol majeur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le numéro d'ordre (no 2) et le numéro d'opus (op. 100) ne sont pas enregistrés car le numéro de catalogue thématique est enregistré''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eckhardt-Gramatté, S. C. $q (Sophie-Carmen), $d 1899-1974. $t Symphonies, $n E. 104, $r do&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le numéro d'ordre (no 1) n'est pas enregistré car le numéro de catalogue thématique est enregistré; la distribution d'exécution n'est pas enregistrée car elle est implicite dans le titre''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter d'autres éléments au point d'accès autorisé si celui-ci doit être différencié d'un autre point d'accès autorisé (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-6847#rda6-6847 6.27.1.9]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Numéro d'ordre'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer un numéro d'ordre dans un point d'accès autorisé si des œuvres ayant le même titre et la même distribution d'exécution sont numérotées consécutivement dans les sources de référence musicales. Enregistrer un numéro d'ordre si des œuvres ayant le même titre mais des distributions différentes sont numérotées consécutivement dans les sources de référence musicales et que la distribution est omise du point d'accès autorisé en vertu de [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-7730#rda6-7730 6.28.1.9.1 exception a) ii)].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour des directives supplémentaires sur l'enregistrement des numéros d'ordre, voir l'énoncé de politique pour [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27ordre|6.16.1.3.1]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Livrets et œuvres musicales dramatiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'énoncé de politique [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2]] pour établir une distinction entre les points d'accès représentant les livrets et les œuvres musicales dramatiques écrites par la même personne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.9.1, Distribution d'exécution ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Employer des termes du RVMMEM dans le point d'accès autorisé en donnant le terme au pluriel si nécessaire conformément à [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-12602#rda6-12602 6.28.1.9.1 exception d)]. Enregistrer les termes dans cet ordre :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
a) les voix &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;b) l'instrument à clavier s'il y a plus d'un instrument d'un autre genre&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;c) les autres instruments dans l'ordre de la partition&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;d) la basse continue.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour une œuvre pour un ou plusieurs instruments solistes et un ou plusieurs ensembles accompagnateurs, ajouter le ou les termes désignant le ou les instruments solistes suivis du terme désignant le ou les ensembles accompagnateurs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Baker, David, $d 1931-2016. $t Sonates, $m violon, ensemble à cordes frottées&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour violon solo et quatuor à cordes''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Nouvelles notices d'autorité'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Titre privilégié identique et distribution d'exécution inconnue'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il existe deux ou plusieurs œuvres du même compositeur ayant le même titre privilégié et si la distribution d'exécution est inconnue mais que le nombre de parties est connu, enregistrer le nombre de parties après le terme ''interprètes'' dans le point d'accès autorisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Œuvres pour instruments à clavier'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si un compositeur a écrit plus d'une œuvre d'un type de composition particulier destinée à ou incluant différents instruments à cordes et à clavier, utiliser celui qui prédomine dans les œuvres de ce type lors de l'ajout de la distribution d'exécution. S'il n'est pas clair qu'un instrument prédomine, utiliser le terme ''instrument à clavier''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Bach, Carl Phillipp Emanuel, $d 1714-1788. $t Sonates, $m instrument à clavier, $n H. 53, $r ré mineur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
382 0#	$a clavecin $n 1 $s 1 $2 rvmmem&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour toutes les œuvres ayant le titre privilégié « Sonates » et écrites pour un instrument à clavier, le terme « instrument à clavier » est enregistré dans le point d'accès autorisé car aucun type d'instrument à clavier spécifique ne prédomine''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité existantes'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Il est possible qu'un terme désignant la distribution d'exécution et employé dans la zone 1XX d'une notice d'autorité existante diffère d'un terme du RVMMEM pour cette voix ou cet instrument. Ne pas modifier le terme désignant la distribution d'exécution dans un point d'accès autorisé RCAA2 ou RDA existant pour qu'il corresponde au terme du RVMMEM, sauf si &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ce terme est «&amp;amp;nbsp;continuo&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou si &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;le point d'accès autorisé a besoin d'être modifié pour une autre raison.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.9.1, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas appliquer la deuxième phrase de l'exception d). Toujours fournir le nombre de parties s'il y en a plus d'une pour un instrument particulier ou une voix particulière, même si le nombre de parties est implicite dans le titre privilégié. Appliquer toutes les autres exceptions sous 6.28.1.9.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2021-11-18''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.3, Point d'accès autorisé représentant une expression d'une œuvre musicale ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de maintenir l'intégrité actuelle du fichier, lors de la construction d'un point d'accès autorisé pour une expression d'une œuvre musicale, utiliser l'ordre de priorité suivant si plus d'une des caractéristiques d'une expression énumérées ci-dessous doit être enregistrée, en omettant celles qui ne sont pas applicables&amp;amp;nbsp;:&lt;br /&gt;
# Arrangements, transcriptions, etc. (utiliser le terme ''arrangé'')&lt;br /&gt;
# Esquisses&lt;br /&gt;
# Partition de chant&lt;br /&gt;
# Partitions de chant&lt;br /&gt;
# Partition de chœur&lt;br /&gt;
# Partitions de chœur&lt;br /&gt;
# Traductions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Strauss, Richard, $d 1864-1959.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Lieder, $n op. 10. $p Allerseelen; $o arrangé. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a All souls' day = $b Allerseelen : four-part song for mixed voices : op. 10, no. 8 / $c Richard Strauss ; arranged by George Shackely ; original German text by Hermann von Gilm ; English text by George Shackley.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Kodály, Zoltán, $d 1882-1967.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Háry János. $s Partition de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Háry János : $b Hungarian folk opera / $c Zoltán Kodály ; Hungarian libretto by Béla Paulini and Zsolt Harsányi ; English version by Olga Latham and Tony Butterfield.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moore, Douglas, $d 1893-1969.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Œuvre. $k Extraits (Esquisses)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.4, Variante de point d'accès représentant une œuvre ou une expression musicale ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Œuvres et expressions musicales dont l'attribution est erronée'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour une œuvre musicale ou une expression d'une œuvre musicale dont l'attribution est erronée, fournir les points d'accès supplémentaires appropriés pour identifier l'œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.29.1.29, Date de promulgation d'une loi, etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'établissement d'un nouveau point d'accès autorisé pour une loi, etc., s'il existe un point d'accès ayant un titre identique ou semblable mais sans date de promulgation, ajouter les dates de promulgation au nouveau point d'accès ainsi qu'au point d'accès existant. Si la date de promulgation pour le point d'accès existant sans date est inconnue et qu'elle ne peut être facilement déterminée, ou s'il s'avère que le point d'accès existant sans date a été utilisé pour des lois promulguées à des dates différentes, ajouter la date de promulgation uniquement à la loi, etc., en cours d'établissement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a France. $t Code de procédure civile (1806)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a France. $t Code de procédure civile (1975)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le premier point d'accès avait initialement été établi sans date''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Pérou. $t Código procesal penal (1991)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Pérou. $t Código procesal penal (2004)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le premier point d'accès avait initialement été établi sans date''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:-5px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''''par contre'''''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $t Civil Rights Act of 1964&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $t Civil Rights Act of 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Les dates de promulgation ne sont pas ajoutées, puisqu'elles figurent déjà dans les titres privilégiés des lois''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est possible, à titre facultatif, d'ajouter la date de promulgation à un nouveau point d'accès autorisé, même s'il n'est pas nécessaire d'établir une distinction entre les points d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Ghana. $t Criminal Procedure Code (1997)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-11-24''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 9 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9.2.2.5.3, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aux fins de l'application de RDA 9.2.2.5.3, la langue privilégiée pour les sources de référence est le français; l'écriture privilégiée est l'écriture latine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les points d'accès autorisés doivent être en écriture latine. Utiliser les [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|tables de romanisation]] approuvées par le PFAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des formes non latines peuvent être enregistrées comme variantes de point d'accès (zones MARC 4XX) pour les langues et écritures suivantes : écriture perso-arabe (p. ex., arabe, persan, ourdou, pachto); hébreu, yiddish; chinois, coréen, japonais; écritures basées sur le cyrillique; et grec.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Applicabilité'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les personnes qui portent des noms dérivés d'une écriture non latine mais qui écrivent dans une langue à écriture latine ne doivent pas être traitées selon cette instruction. La décision selon laquelle la personne écrit dans une langue à écriture latine est basée sur la première ressource cataloguée, c'est-à-dire le fait que le texte de cette ressource a été écrit à l'origine dans une langue à écriture latine. S'il devient évident par la suite que la plupart des œuvres de la personne ont été écrites dans une écriture non latine, appliquer les dispositions du présent énoncé de politique.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2022-04-19''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9.2.2.5.3, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Toutes les langues écrites en écritures non latines (sauf l'hébreu) :''' Appliquer l'alternative lorsque le premier élément du nom privilégié commence par un prénom ou un nom de famille. Si une personne est susceptible de figurer dans les sources de référence générales en français, faire une recherche dans l' ''[https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse]'', le ''Petit Robert'' et l' ''[https://www.universalis.fr/ Encyclopædia Universalis]'' dans cet ordre de priorité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si le nom est trouvé dans l' ''[https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse]'' utiliser la forme qui y est trouvée si celle-ci n'en propose qu'une ou la première forme si elle en propose plus d'une dans un même article. Si l' ''[https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse]'' propose des formes différentes trouvées dans des articles différents, préférer une forme provenant de l'encyclopédie générale à une forme provenant d'un ouvrage spécialisé. Si le nom n'est pas trouvé dans l'''Encyclopédie Larousse'', faire une recherche dans le ''Petit Robert'' et, le cas échéant, utiliser la forme qui y est trouvée. Sinon, faire une recherche dans l' ''[https://www.universalis.fr/ Encyclopædia Universalis]'' et utiliser la forme qui y est trouvée s'il y en a une. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Les catalogueurs sont encouragés à consulter les trois sources peu importe le résultat des recherches pour identifier des variantes susceptibles de faire l'objet de renvois.) Si le nom ne se trouve dans aucune de ces trois sources, utiliser la forme systématiquement romanisée du nom (c'est-à-dire une forme romanisée à partir d'une [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation| table de romanisation]] acceptée par le PFAN).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exception :'' Pour les personnes célèbres dont le premier élément du nom est un prénom mais qui ne se trouvent pas dans les trois encyclopédies générales de langue française en raison de leur renommée spécialisée, consulter les principales encyclopédies spécialisées (par exemple, ''Le nouveau Théo'' de Michel Dubost et Stanislas Lalanne, le ''Dictionnaire de l'Antiquité'' de Jean Leclant) pour déterminer s'il existe une forme française bien établie du nom. (&amp;amp;laquo;&amp;amp;nbsp;Trouvé dans&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;raquo; la source de référence signifie qu'il existe un article sous le nom de la personne).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les personnes qui ne sont pas incluses dans les trois encyclopédies générales de langue française mentionnées ci-dessus parce que leur renommée est trop récente (par exemple, les nouveaux auteurs, les danseurs, les personnes devenues célèbres récemment en tant que personnalités politiques ou culturelles), suivre cet ordre de préférence :&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le nom est trouvé sous une forme romanisée dans une source en ligne gratuite largement connue et facile à consulter, utiliser cette forme, en particulier lorsqu'une personne qui écrit ou sur laquelle on écrit principalement dans ces écritures fournit une forme romanisée privilégiée du nom dans cette source (par exemple, [https://www.facebook.com/ Facebook], [https://www.linkedin.com/hp LinkedIn]) ou, à défaut d'une telle source, une source générale (par exemple, [https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikip%C3%A9dia:Accueil_principal Wikipédia &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;en français&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
# Consulter les annuaires des encyclopédies, et de grands journaux tels que [https://www.lemonde.fr/ Le monde] et [https://www.lapresse.ca/ La presse] pour déterminer s'il existe une forme française bien établie du nom. &lt;br /&gt;
# Sinon, utiliser la forme systématiquement romanisée du nom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alphabet hébreu :''' Suivre cet ordre de préférence dans le choix de la vedette pour les personnes dont les noms sont en alphabet hébreu :&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le nom se trouve en évidence sous une forme romanisée dans la ressource &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;en main&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; dans une langue utilisant l'alphabet hébreu, utiliser cette forme.&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le nom est trouvé comme titre d'un article sur la personne dans le ''Dictionnaire encyclopédique du judaïsme'', utiliser cette forme.&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le nom est trouvé sous une forme romanisée dans une source en ligne gratuite largement connue et facile à consulter, utiliser cette forme, en particulier lorsqu'une personne qui écrit ou sur laquelle on écrit principalement en hébreu fournit une forme romanisée privilégiée du nom dans cette source (par exemple, [http://www.facebook.com/ Facebook], [http://www.linkedin.com/ LinkedIn]) ou, à défaut d'une telle source, une source générale (par exemple, [https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikip%C3%A9dia:Accueil_principal Wikipédia &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;en français&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
# Sinon, utiliser la forme systématiquement romanisée du nom.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cependant,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol style=&amp;quot;list-style-type: lower-alpha; padding-left:30px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si le point d'accès autorisé pour un auteur qui écrit dans une langue utilisant l'alphabet hébreu reflète la forme systématiquement romanisée et qu'une ressource reçue ultérieurement contenant le nom dans une langue utilisant l'alphabet hébreu montre un nom non systématiquement romanisé (c'est-à-dire une « romanisation trouvée »), de manière générale, ne pas modifier le point d'accès autorisé. Cela signifie que les noms systématiquement romanisés ne seront candidats au changement que dans des cas exceptionnels.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si le point d'accès autorisé pour un auteur qui écrit dans une langue utilisant l'alphabet hébreu reflète une forme non systématiquement romanisée et qu'une ressource reçue ultérieurement contenant le nom dans une langue utilisant l'alphabet hébreu montre une forme non systématiquement romanisée différente (c'est-à-dire une « romanisation trouvée » différente), ne pas changer le point d'accès autorisé jusqu'à ce que la forme différente prédomine clairement.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-03-18''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9.3.4.3, Enregistrement d'une période d'activité d'une personne ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement de la période d'activité, utiliser le terme « activité » et non « époque », « actif » ou « active ». Le terme « activité » doit figurer avant la première date de la période d'activité (par ex., « activité 12e siècle »), sauf si un autre terme tel que « jin shi » est utilisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-05-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9.4.1.4.3, Enfants et petits-enfants de personnes royales ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer le titre prince ou princesse ou un titre semblable en français s’il existe un équivalent satisfaisant dans cette langue. Enregistrer également tout autre titre associé au nom en français s’il existe un équivalent satisfaisant dans cette langue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-12-04''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 10 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 10.0, Identification des familles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appliquer les instructions de ce chapitre pour une famille spécifique.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En ce qui concerne la politique d’indexation, le point d'accès autorisé provenant de la notice d'autorité de nom d’une famille peut désormais être utilisé comme vedette-matière en plus de la vedette-matière pour les groupes familiaux généraux.  Des notices d’autorité distinctes existent dans Canadiana/PFAN et dans le Répertoire des vedettes-matière (RVM).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Point d'accès RDA dans la notice bibliographique lorsqu'une famille est le créateur'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Brontë (Famille : $d 1812-  : $c Haworth, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;gt;'''Vedette-matière dans une notice bibliographique lorsqu'une famille est le sujet d'une ressource'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
600 36 $a Brontë (Famille)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
600 36 $a Brontë (Famille : $d 1812-  : $c Haworth, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour permettre ce changement de pratique, attribuer la valeur « v » dans la zone 008/11 (Système de vedettes-matière), attribuer la valeur « a » dans la zone 008/15 (Utilisation de la vedette) et ne pas fournir de note dans la zone 667 sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière dans la notice d’autorité de nom :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme  vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modifier les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour une famille spécifique lorsqu'elles sont utilisées comme vedette-matière lors du catalogage courant ou lorsque des mises à jour sont nécessaires. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- 008/11 : « n » à « v »&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- 008/15 : « b » à « a »&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Supprimer la note 667 sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-11-06''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 11 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 11.2, Nom de collectivité ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le nom d'un interprète figure conjointement avec le nom d'un groupe d'interprètes, à moins qu'il y ait une preuve du contraire, ne pas considérer de façon générale le nom de la personne comme faisant partie du nom du groupe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;source&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
J.D. Crowe and the New South&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;point d'accès autorisé&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2#	$a New South (Groupe musical)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;source&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Artie Shaw and his orchestra&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:30px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Sans nom parce que la collectivité n'est pas nommée''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-11-24''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 11.2.2.12, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer une forme translittérée du nom de collectivité dans les points d'accès autorisés, le cas échéant, en utilisant les [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|tables de romanisation]] approuvées par le PFAN. Les formes non latines qui figurent sur la source peuvent être enregistrées comme variantes de point d'accès dans les notices d'autorité (zones MARC 4XX) pour les langues et écritures suivantes : écriture perso-arabe (p. ex., arabe, persan, ourdou, pachto); hébreu, yiddish; chinois, coréen, japonais; écritures basées sur le cyrillique; et grec.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-11-24''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 11.2.2.12, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas appliquer l'alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-11-24''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 16 =&lt;br /&gt;
== 16.2.2.2, Sources d'information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les lieux au Canada, se fonder sur la forme trouvée dans la [https://geonames.nrcan.gc.ca/recherche-de-noms-de-lieux/search Base de données toponymiques du Canada (BDTC)] de Ressources naturelles Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les municipalités au Québec, se fonder sur la forme trouvée dans les sources suivantes (dans cet ordre de préférence) :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# le [https://www.mamh.gouv.qc.ca/repertoire-des-municipalites/ Répertoire des municipalités]&lt;br /&gt;
# la  [http://www.toponymie.gouv.qc.ca/ct/accueil.aspx Banque de noms de lieux du Québec]&lt;br /&gt;
# d'autres sources de référence&lt;br /&gt;
# la manifestation cataloguée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les lieux autres que les municipalités au Québec, se fonder sur la forme trouvée dans la [http://www.toponymie.gouv.qc.ca/ct/accueil.aspx Banque de noms de lieux du Québec].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les comtés aux États-Unis, se fonder sur la forme trouvée dans la version française de Wikipédia.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les pays suivants, se fonder sur la forme trouvée dans les sources énumérées ci-dessous (dans l'ordre de préférence indiqué) si les sources en français sont consultées en vain ou ne sont pas disponibles et que des sources en anglais doivent être consultées :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:30px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Pays !! Sources&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Australie || 1. [http://viaf.org/ VIAF]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. [http://www.ga.gov.au/map/names Geoscience Australia Place Name Search]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| États-Unis || 1. Fichier LC/NAF &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. [http://geonames.usgs.gov/pls/gnispublic Geographic Names Information System (GNIS)]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Grande-Bretagne || 1. Fichier LC/NAF &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. The Ordnance Survey gazetteer of Great Britain ou [https://geonames.nga.mil/geonames/GeographicNamesSearch/ &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic Names Server (GNS)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Nouvelle-Zélande || 1. Fichier LC/NAF &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. [http://www.linz.govt.nz/placenames/find-names/nz-gazetteer-official-names New Zealand Gazetteer of Place Names]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-06-18''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 16.2.2.5, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si le nom de lieu est dans une langue écrite en caractères non latins, translittérer le nom en se référant aux [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|tables de romanisation du PFAN]] pour cette langue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-11-04''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 16.2.2.5, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas appliquer l'alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-11-04''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 32 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==32.1, Collectivité en relation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Élément fondamental pour le PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L'élément Collectivité en relation est fondamental pour le PFAN dans le cas des relations séquentielles entre les collectivités (excepté les congrès) qui se précèdent et se succèdent immédiatement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ces instructions s'appliquent également aux lieux établis dans le fichier d'autorité Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-05-02''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==32.1.1.3, Enregistrement d’une relation à une collectivité en relation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms antérieurs peu susceptibles de faire l’objet de relations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans certaines circonstances, la recherche peut indiquer que la collectivité en cours d’établissement avait des noms antérieurs qui ne seront probablement jamais nécessaires comme points d'accès dans les notices bibliographiques. S’il est décidé de ne pas créer de notices d’autorité distinctes pour ces noms antérieurs, enregistrer ceux-ci dans la citation de la source avec une indication que des notices distinctes ne sont pas nécessaires, telle que «&amp;amp;nbsp;[aucune publication dans la base de données de [sigle de la bibliothèque]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;[aucun point d’accès trouvé dans OCLC].&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Télésystème (Firme)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de Telesystem, consulté le 29 novembre 2023 : $b Accueil; À propos; Histoire (Télésystème; Serelco [aucune publication dans la base de données de BAnQ] devient en 1978 Télésystème) page Contact (Télésystème; situé à Montréal, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-05-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements&amp;diff=144046</id>
		<title>PFAN - PFAN Policy Statements</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements&amp;diff=144046"/>
		<updated>2026-02-13T15:00:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 9.2.2.5.3, Alternative */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by A. Dunnett, LAC)}} --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Énoncés de politique du PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp9_lcps9-66.html--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapiter 0 =&lt;br /&gt;
== 0.6.6, Section 2 : Recording Attributes of Work and Expression ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a musical work with a title that is not distinctive, always record the applicable elements as additions to the authorized access point. When recording elements to differentiate the authorized access point of a work from the authorized access point of another work, person, family, or corporate body, always add one or more differentiating elements to the access point. Use judgment in deciding whether to also record these elements as separate elements and whether to record additional identifying elements (those not needed for differentiation) as separate elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Chapter 6=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.2.2.5, Exception  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the Classical and Byzantine Greek works listed in the Exception, choose a well-established title in French as the preferred title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-11-24''&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.2.2.7, Alternative  == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply the alternative for anonymous works created before 1501 and written neither in Greek nor in the Latin alphabet. Choose as the preferred title an established title in French if there is one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2022-09-15''&amp;lt;!--(2022-09-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.2.2.10.3, Alternative == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For compilations containing works created after 1500: Do not apply the alternative. Record the title proper of the compilation as its preferred title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For compilations containing works created before 1501: If applying the alternative, record a conventional collective title followed by &amp;quot;Extraits.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2025-05-07'&amp;lt;!--(2025-05-07)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.1, Omissions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For pre-twentieth century works, normally consider phrases such as &amp;quot;a due,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;a cinque&amp;quot; to be statements of medium of performance and omit them when recording the preferred title according to this instruction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2, Preferred Title Consisting Solely of the Name of One Type of Composition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not consider such titles as &amp;quot;Double concerto,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Tripelkonzert&amp;quot;, etc. to be names of types of compositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a composer uses a word which is normally the name of a type of composition as the title of a work which is definitely not a work of the type designated by the word, do not consider the title to be the name of a type of composition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Poulenc, Francis, $d 1899-1963. $t Aubade&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Title&amp;amp;nbsp;: Aubade: concerto chorégraphique pour piano et 18 instruments.''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title consisting of two words, each of which alone would be the name of a type of composition, may in combination produce a distinctive title. Generally treat such a compound title as a distinctive title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Nielsen, Carl, $d 1865-1931. $t Humoreske-bagateller&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.1, Choice of language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the accepted form of name in French if the name has an French cognate form or if the same name is used in French.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Melody/Melodies'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the French word &amp;quot;Mélodie&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Mélodies,&amp;quot; or their cognates in another language, is the title of a work that is not for solo voice and keyboard stringed instrument, consider it the name of a type of composition. Use the French form as the preferred title and add the medium of performance according to [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not apply the alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.2, Singular or Plural Form ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''One Work of One Type'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloging the first occurrence of a work of a particular type of composition by a composer, choose the preferred title as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
# If the composer is deceased, consult reference sources to ascertain whether the composer wrote more than one work of that type, and use the singular or plural form as the preferred title according to the information found.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the composer is living, choose the singular form of the type of composition as the preferred title unless the work being cataloged bears a serial number (including 1); in that case use the plural form on the assumption that the composer has written or intends to write more works of that type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloging the second occurrence of a work of a particular type by a composer, if the singular form has been used in the authorized access point for the first work of that type, revise the preferred title to the plural.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remember that medium of performance is a separate element from the preferred title. If the composer wrote one piano sonata and one violin sonata, he or she wrote two sonatas, and therefore the plural form for the type of composition must be used as the preferred title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Liturgical Words or Phrases'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the preferred title is a Latin liturgical word or phrase, record it in the singular if the word or phrase has no plural form  (e.g., &amp;quot;Gloria,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Magnificat,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Requiem,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Salve Regina,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Te Deum&amp;quot;). Use the plural form (e.g., &amp;quot;Introïts&amp;quot;) when appropriate. Generally, do not add the medium of performance in the authorized access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tempo Markings with Modifying Words'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the preferred title is a tempo marking with a modifying word or words (e.g., &amp;quot;Andante sostenuto,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Allegro con brio,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Moderato ma non tanto&amp;quot;), record it in the singular.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not apply the alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.7.1.3, Part Identified Both by a Number and by a Title or Other Verbal Designation, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not apply the alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.7.2, Two or More Parts, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more parts of a work constitute the only content of the manifestation being described, record the conventional collective title ''Extraits'' as the preferred title for the parts. If one or more parts is especially important, also record the part title(s) as analytical authorized access points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more parts of a work are part of a compilation of works or parts of works, and that analytical authorized access points are established, record the conventional collective title ''Extraits'' as the preferred title for the parts, or record the part title(s) of one or more parts. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.8.3, Complete Works of a Single Type of Composition for One Specific Medium or Various Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use terms from the RVMGF (RVM’s Genre/Forme thesaurus) when possible. When recording the preferred title, omit any parenthetical qualifier from RVMGF. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''RVMGF term'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:30px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Tangos (Musique)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:-30px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Conventional collective title'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:0px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Tangos&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.3, Recording Medium of Performance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use terms from the RVMMEM (Répertoire de vedettes-matière, Moyens d’exécution en musique) when possible. '''''Exception:''''' use &amp;quot;orchestre à cordes&amp;quot; for an orchestra consisting primarily of string instruments and no wind instruments (even when it may include continuo, keyboard instruments, plucked instruments, or percussion). Use &amp;quot;orchestre&amp;quot; for an orchestra that has both string and wind instruments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on using RVMMEM terms in authorized access points, see Policy Statement for [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Medium_of_performance|6.28.1.9.1]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.5, Optional Omission ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not omit doubling instruments and voices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.6.1, Optional Omission ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not omit the number of parts or performers for an instrument or voice, even if there is only one for that instrument or voice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.6.3, Optional Omission ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not omit the number of ensembles for a type of ensemble, even if there is only one ensemble of that type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.16.1.3.1, Serial Number ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record a serial number even if works with the same title do not have the same medium of performance, if such works are consecutively numbered in music reference sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a serial number that is accompanied in the source by a term such as &amp;quot;numéro,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;livre,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;collection,&amp;quot; etc., apply the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# If the term is the French word &amp;quot;numéro&amp;quot; or its abbreviation, or an equivalent word or abbreviation in another language, precede the number in the preferred title by the French abbreviation &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the term is a non-French term not meaning &amp;quot;numéro&amp;quot; and the preferred title is in French because of the application of [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-100001354#rda6-100001354 6.14.2.5.1], substitute the French equivalent of the term, using an French abbreviation as instructed in appendix B (B.5.4).&lt;br /&gt;
# In all other cases give the term as it appears in the source using its abbreviated form as found in appendix B (B.5.4). If the term is not found in appendix B, give the term as it appears in the source&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no term appears with the number, give the number as a cardinal number and precede it by the French abbreviation &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use Arabic numerals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.16.1.3.3, Thematic Index Number ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For thematic index abbreviations, consult the bibliography of ''Thematic Indexes Used in the Library of Congress/NACO Authority File'' available online at: [https://cmc.wp.musiclibraryassoc.org/thematic-indexes-used-in-library-of-congress-naco-authority-files/ https://cmc.wp.musiclibraryassoc.org/thematic-indexes-used-in-library-of-congress-naco-authority-files/].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.17.1.3, Recording Key  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the same criteria for recording the mode (“major” or “minor”) as for recording the pitch center, that is, if pitch center is given or apparent, but mode is not, record only the pitch center. Follow the RDA examples, and record the words “dièse” and “bémol” rather than the symbols  ♯ and ♭ .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-17)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.18.1.4, Arrangements, Transcriptions, Etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Revisions by the Original Composer'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a composer revises a work, retaining the original title and opus number, and the revision is one of a different instrumentation within the same broad medium (e.g., orchestre, ensemble instrumental, harmonie), do not consider the revision to be an arrangement. Use the same authorized access point for the original and the revision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Stravinsky, Igor, $d 1882-1971.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Petruška&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Petrushka : $b complete original 1911 version ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Stravinsky, Igor, $d 1882-1971.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Petruška&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Petrouchka : $b burleske in four scenes (revised 1947 version) ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alternative Instruments'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not consider as arrangements the following uses of alternative instruments:​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A work composed before 1800 for a baroque, renaissance, or other early instrument (viole de gambe, flûte à bec, etc.), or for voice, in a resource that is edited for or performed on a modern instrument or by an alternative voice, provided the key is unchanged and the notation has not been significantly changed.&lt;br /&gt;
# A work for a melody instrument which is edited for or performed on an alternative instrument specified by the composer in first or early editions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Bibliographic record''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897.​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Sonates, $m clarinette, piano, $n op. 120​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Sonatas opus 120, for viola and piano ...​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 ## $a À l'origine pour clarinette ou alto et piano.​​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
650 #6 $a Sonates (Alto et piano) $v Partitions et parties.​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Authority record''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897. $t Sonates, $m clarinette, piano, $n op. 120​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
382 0# $a clarinette $n 1 $p alto $n 1 $a piano $n 1 $s 2 $2 rvmmem​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897. $t Sonates, $m alto, piano, $n op. 120&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Song Transpositions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a resource containing one or more songs transposed to accommodate a voice range different from the original, do not consider the transposition to be an arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Schubert, Franz, $d 1797-1828.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Lieder&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Lieder, Gesang und Klavier / $c Franz Schubert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
250 ## $a Neue Ausg. / $b herausgegeben von Dietrich Fischer-Dieskau ; musikwissenschaftliche Revision von Elmar Budde, tiefe Stimme.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Originally for high voice''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.27.1.9, Additions to access points representing works ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Librettos'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a libretto for a dramatic musical work is written by the composer and is manifested separately as a literary work, distinguish the literary work from the musical work with &amp;quot;(Livret)&amp;quot; (see Policy Statement for  [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2.2C_Musical_Works_With_Lyrics.2C_Libretto.2C_Text.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Wagner, Richard, $d 1813-1883. $t Meistersinger von Nürnberg (Livret)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1, General Guidelines on Constructing Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additions to Authorized Access Points'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not make an addition to the authorized access point when one or more instrumental parts for a work or a compilation of works by one composer are published separately. Use the same authorized access point that would be used for a score or a complete set of parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 10	$a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10	$a Wer mich liebet, der wird mein Wort halten, $n BWV 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10	$a Kantate Nr. 74 : $b Wer mich liebet, der wird mein Wort halten : BWV 74 / $c Joh. Seb. Bach ; Continuo-Aussetzung von Ulrich Haverkampf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
250 ##	$a Orgel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
264 #1	$a Wiesbaden : $b Breitkopf &amp;amp; Härtel, $c [1982]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
300 ##	$a 1 partie (32 pages) ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10	$a Musique vocale. $k Extraits&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 14	$a The flute solos from the Bach cantatas, passions, and oratorios ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''«&amp;amp;nbsp;Extraits&amp;amp;nbsp;» refers to the fact that the flute solos in the resource are not from all of Bach’s vocal music works; nor are they the entire flute part from each of the works included.''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Strauss, Richard, $d 1864-1949.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10	$a Musique pour orchestre. $k Extraits&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10	$a Orchesterstudien aus Richard Strauss' symphonischen Werken : $b für Flöte ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''«&amp;amp;nbsp;Extraits&amp;amp;nbsp;» refers to the fact that the flute selections in the resource are not from all of Strauss’ orchestral music; nor are they the entire flute part from each of the works included.''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Melody/Melodies'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the French word &amp;quot;Mélodie&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Mélodies&amp;quot; is the title of a work for solo voice and keyboard stringed instrument, consider the medium of performance to be implied by the French title (see [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9]) and do not add medium of performance in the authorized access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the French word &amp;quot;Mélodie&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Mélodies&amp;quot; is the title of a work for solo voice with accompaniment other than a keyboard stringed instrument alone or without accompaniment, apply  [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9] and add the medium of performance of the accompaniment, or &amp;quot;sans accompagnement,&amp;quot; in the authorized access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the French word &amp;quot;Mélodie&amp;quot; ou &amp;quot;Mélodies&amp;quot;, or their cognates in another language, is the title of a work that is not for solo voice and keyboard stringed instrument, consider it the name of a type of composition. Use the French form as the preferred title and add the medium of performance according to [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Liturgical Words or Phrases'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the preferred title is a Latin liturgical word or phrase (e.g., &amp;quot;Gloria,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Magnificat,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Requiem,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Salve Regina,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Te Deum&amp;quot;), record it in the singular when the word or phrase is invariable. Use the plural form &amp;quot;Introïts,&amp;quot; when appropriate. Generally, do not add the medium of performance in the authorized access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.2, Musical Works With Lyrics, Libretto, Text, etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a composer also created the libretto for a dramatic musical work and the libretto is manifested separately as a literary work, distinguish the literary work from the musical work with ''(Livret)'', but do not make an addition to the access point for the musical work (see Policy Statement [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.27.1.9.2C_Additions_to_access_points_representing_works|6.27.1.9]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Wagner, Richard, $d 1813-1883. $t Meistersinger von Nürnberg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Wagner, Richard, $d 1813-1883. $t Meistersinger von Nürnberg (Livret)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.9, Additional Elements in Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use cataloger's judgment in choosing the most appropriate element or elements listed in 6.28.1.9 to include in the authorized access point for a musical work unless other instructions in this Policy Statement apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preferred Title Consists Solely of the Name of a Type, or of Two or More Types, of Composition'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To maintain file integrity, add these elements in the authorized access point in this order, as applicable:&lt;br /&gt;
# medium of performance (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-12575#rda6-12575 6.28.1.9.1])&lt;br /&gt;
# numeric designation of musical work (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-4713#rda6-4713 6.16])&lt;br /&gt;
# key (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-4791#rda6-4791 6.17]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding several numeric designations, add them in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
# serial number&lt;br /&gt;
# opus number&lt;br /&gt;
# number within the opus, if there is one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a serial number or an opus number if a thematic catalogue number is added. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897. $t Concertos, $m violon, orchestre, $n op. 77, $r ré majeur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Schumann, Clara, $d 1819-1896. $t Scherzos, $m piano, $n no 1, op. 10, $r ré mineur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Beethoven, Ludwig van, $d 1770-1827. $t Sonates, $m piano, $n no 14, op. 27, no 2, $r do dièse mineur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Schubert, Franz, $d 1797-1828. $t Trios, $m piano, violon, violoncelle, $n D. 929, $r mi bémol majeur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le numéro d'ordre (no 2) et le numéro d'opus (op. 100) ne sont pas enregistrés car le numéro de catalogue thématique est enregistré''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eckhardt-Gramatté, S. C. $q (Sophie-Carmen), $d 1899-1974. $t Symphonies, $n E. 104, $r do&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le numéro d'ordre (no 1) n'est pas enregistré car le numéro de catalogue thématique est enregistré; la distribution d'exécution n'est pas enregistrée car elle est implicite dans le titre''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add other elements to the authorized access point if it needs to be differentiated from another authorized access point (see [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-6847#rda6-6847 6.27.1.9]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serial Number'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record a serial number in an authorized access point if works with the same title and the same medium of performance are consecutively numbered in music reference sources. Record serial number if works with the same title for different media are consecutively numbered in music reference sources if the medium of performance is omitted from the authorized access point per [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-100005398#rda6-100005398 6.28.1.9.1 exception a) ii)].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See additional guidance on recording serial numbers in the Policy Statement for [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Serial_Number|6.16.1.3.1]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Librettos and Dramatic Musical Works'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Policy Statement [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2.2C_Musical_Works_With_Lyrics.2C_Libretto.2C_Text.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2]] for distinguishing access points representing librettos and dramatic musical works written by the same person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.9.1, Medium of performance == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use RVMMEM terms in the authorized access point, adjusting the form to plural if needed according to [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-12603#rda6-12603 6.28.1.9.1 Exception d)]. Record terms in this order:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
a) voices &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
b) keyboard instrument if there is more than one non-keyboard instrument&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
c) the other instruments in score order&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
d) continuo.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a work for solo instrument or instruments and accompanying ensemble or ensembles, add the terms for the solo instrument or instruments followed by the term for the accompanying ensemble or ensembles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Baker, David, $d 1931-2016. $t Sonates, $m violon, ensemble à cordes frottées&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''For solo violin and string quartet''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''New Authority Records'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Same Preferred Title and Unknown Medium of Performance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If there are two or more works by the same composer with the same preferred title and the medium of performance is unknown but the number of parts is known, record the number of parts following the term ''interprètes'' in the authorized access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Works for Keyboard Instruments'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a composer wrote more than one work of a particular type of composition that is for or includes various keyboard stringed instruments, use the one that predominates in the works of that type when adding the medium of performance. If no predominant instrument is apparent, use the term ''instrument à clavier''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Bach, Carl Phillipp Emanuel, $d 1714-1788. $t Sonates, $m instrument à clavier, $n H. 53, $r ré mineur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
382 0#	$a clavecin $n 1 $s 1 $2 rvmmem&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''For all works with preferred title &amp;quot;Sonates&amp;quot; written for a keyboard instrument, the term &amp;quot;instrument à clavier&amp;quot; is recorded in the authorized access point because no specific type of keyboard instrument is predominant&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Existing Authority Records'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A medium of performance term used in the 1XX field in an existing authority record may differ from the RVMMEM term for that voice or instrument. Do not modify the existing medium of performance term in an AACR2 or RDA authorized access point to match the RVMMEM term, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;unless that term is &amp;quot;continuo&amp;quot; or the authorized access point needs to be modified for some other reason.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.9.1, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not apply the 2nd sentence of Exception d). Always supply the number of parts if more than one for a particular instrument or voice, even if the number of parts is implicit in the preferred title. Apply all other exceptions in 6.28.1.9.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2021-11-19''&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-19)--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.3, Authorized Access Point Representing an Expression of Musical Work ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to maintain current file integrity, when constructing an authorized access point for an expression of a musical work, if more than one characteristic of an an expression listed below is to be recorded, use the following priority order, omitting the ones that are not applicable:&lt;br /&gt;
# Arrangements, transcriptions, etc. (use the term ''arrangé'')&lt;br /&gt;
# Esquisses [Sketches]&lt;br /&gt;
# Partition de chant [Vocal score]&lt;br /&gt;
# Partitions de chant [Vocal scores]&lt;br /&gt;
# Partition de chœur [Chorus score]&lt;br /&gt;
# Partitions de chœur [Chorus scores]&lt;br /&gt;
# Traductions [Translations].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Strauss, Richard, $d 1864-1959.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Lieder, $n op. 10. $p Allerseelen; $o arrangé. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a All souls' day = $b Allerseelen : four-part song for mixed voices : op. 10, no. 8 / $c Richard Strauss ; arranged by George Shackely ; original German text by Hermann von Gilm ; English text by George Shackley.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Kodály, Zoltán, $d 1882-1967.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Háry János. $s Partition de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Háry János : $b Hungarian folk opera / $c Zoltán Kodály ; Hungarian libretto by Béla Paulini and Zsolt Harsányi ; English version by Olga Latham and Tony Butterfield.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moore, Douglas, $d 1893-1969.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Œuvre. $k Extraits (Esquisses)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.4, Variant Access Point Representing a Musical Work or Expression ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Misattributed Musical Works and Expressions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a misattributed musical work, or expression of a work, provide additional access points as may be appropriate to identify the work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.29.1.29, Date of Promulgation of a Law, Etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When establishing a new authorized access point for a law, etc., and there is an existing access point with the same or similar title without a date of promulgation, add the dates of promulgation to both the new and existing access points.  If the date of promulgation of the existing undated access point is unknown and cannot be readily ascertained, or if there is evidence that the existing undated access point has been used for laws promulgated on different dates, add the date of promulgation only to the law, etc. being established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a France. $t Code de procédure civile (1806)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a France. $t Code de procédure civile (1975)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''The first access point was originally established without a date''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Pérou. $t Código procesal penal (1991)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Pérou. $t Código procesal penal (2004)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''The first access point was originally established without a date''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:-5px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''''but'''''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $t Civil Rights Act of 1964&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $t Civil Rights Act of 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''The dates of promulgation are not added, as they are already in the preferred titles of the laws''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, add the date of promulgation to a new authorized access point, even if there is no need to distinguish between access points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a $a Ghana. $t Criminal Procedure Code (1997)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2023-11-24''&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Chapter 9=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==9.2.2.5.3, Names Found in a Non-preferred Script ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the instructions related to RDA 9.2.2.5.3, the language preferred for reference sources is French; the preferred script is the Latin script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access points should be in the Latin script. Follow the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|romanization tables]] approved by PFAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin forms may be recorded as variant access points (MARC field 4XX) for these languages/scripts: Perso-Arabic script (e.g., Arabic, Persian, Pushto, Urdu); Hebrew, Yiddish; Chinese, Japanese, Korean; Cyrillic-based scripts; and Greek.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Applicability'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Persons who bear names derived from a non-Latin script but who write in a Latin script language should not be treated under this instruction. The decision that the person is writing in a Latin script language is based on the first item cataloged, i.e., the fact that the text of this item was originally written in a Latin script language. If it becomes evident later that most of the person's works were written in a non-Latin script, apply the provisions of this policy statement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2022-04-19''&amp;lt;!--(2022-04-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==9.2.2.5.3, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''All Other Languages Written in Non-Latin Scripts:''' Apply the alternative when the first element of the preferred name begins with either a given name or a surname. If a person is likely to appear in general English-language reference sources, search the ''[https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse]'', the ''Petit Robert'' and the ''[https://www.universalis.fr/ Encyclopædia Universalis]'' in this order of priority&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. If the name is found in all three sources in a single form, use that form. If the form varies in these three sources, use the form found in the ''[https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse]''. If the name is not found in all three of these sources, use the systematically romanized form of the name. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the name is found in the ''[https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse]'', use the name found there, if the encyclopedia only presents one form of name, or use the first form given, if two forms of name are given in the same article. If the [https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse] offers different forms found in different articles, prefer a form from the general encyclopedia to one from a specialized work. If the name is not found in the Encyclopédie Larousse, search the ''Petit Robert'', and if the name appears, use the form found there.  If the name is not found there, search the ''[https://www.universalis.fr/ Encyclopædia Universalis]'' and use the form found there. (Catalogers are encouraged to consult all three sources regardless of the search results to identify variants that may be cross-referenced).&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If the name is not found in any of these sources, use the systematically romanized form of the name (i.e., a romanized form from a  [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization/ romanization table] approved by PFAN).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exception:'' For famous persons entered under given name but not found in all three of the general French-language encyclopedias because of specialized fame, consult major specialized encyclopedias (e.g.,  Le nouveau Théo de Michel Dubost et Stanislas Lalanne, le Dictionnaire de l'Antiquité de Jean Leclant to determine if there is a well-established French-language form of the name. (&amp;quot;Found in&amp;quot; the reference source means that there is an article under the person's name.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For persons who are not included in the three French general encyclopedia named above because their fame is too recent (for instance new authors, dancers, or people recently becoming famous as cultural or political figures), follow this order of preference:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#  If the name is found in a romanized source in a free, well-known and easy to consult online source, use this form, especially if a person who writes (or about whom others write) chiefly in another script provides a romanized form in such a source (e.g., [http://www.facebook.com/ Facebook], [http://www.linkedin.com/ Linkedin]) or, failing such a source, a general source (e.g., [https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikip%C3%A9dia:Accueil_principal Wikipédia &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;in French&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]). &lt;br /&gt;
# Consult major newspapers such as ''[https://www.lemonde.fr/ Le monde]'' or [https://www.lapresse.ca/ La presse] in order to determine if there already exists a well-established French form of the name. &lt;br /&gt;
# Otherwise, use a systematically romanized form of the name. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Hebrew Alphabet:''' Follow this order of preference in choosing the heading for persons with names in the Hebrew alphabet:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# If the name is found prominently in a romanized form in the resource being cataloged in a language using the Hebrew alphabet, use this form.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the name is found as the heading for an article about the person in  Dictionnaire encyclopédique du judaïsme &amp;lt;!--The Encyclopaedia Judaica or The Encyclopedia of Jews in the Islamic World--&amp;gt;, use this form. &amp;lt;!--If the form varies in these two sources, use the form found in The Encyclopaedia Judaica.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# If the name is found in a romanized form in a widely-known and easily-consulted free online source, use this form, especially where a person who writes or is written about primarily in the Hebrew script provides a preferred romanized form of the name in that source (e.g., [http://www.facebook.com/ Facebook], [http://www.linkedin.com/ Linkedin]) or, failing such a source, a general source (e.g., [https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikip%C3%A9dia:Accueil_principal Wikipédia &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;in French&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
# Otherwise, use the systematically romanized form of the name.&lt;br /&gt;
# However,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol style=&amp;quot;list-style-type: lower-alpha; padding-left:30px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the authorized access point for an author who writes in a language using the Hebrew alphabet reflects the systematically romanized form and a subsequently-received resource containing the name in a Hebrew-alphabet language shows a non-systematically romanized name (i.e., a “found romanization”), generally do not change the authorized access point. This means that only in exceptional cases will systematically romanized names be candidates for change.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the authorized access point for an author who writes in a language using the Hebrew alphabet reflects a non-systematically romanized form and a subsequently received resource containing the name in a Hebrew-alphabet language shows a different non-systematically romanized form (i.e., a different “found romanization”), do not change the authorized access point until the different form clearly predominates.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2025-03-21''&amp;lt;!--(2025-03-18)--&amp;gt;  &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp9_lcps9-66.html Adapted from RDA LC-PCC PS]&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9.3.4.3, Recording Period of Activity of Person ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the period of activity, use “activité” not &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;actif&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;active&amp;quot;.  The term &amp;quot;activité&amp;quot; should appear before the first period of activity date (e.g., &amp;quot;activité 12e siècle&amp;quot;), unless another term such as &amp;quot;jin shi&amp;quot; is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2023-05-16''&amp;lt;!--(2023-05-16)--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9.4.1.4.3, Children and Grandchildren of Royal Persons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the title &amp;quot;prince&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;princesse&amp;quot; or a similar title in French if an appropriate equivalent exists in that language. Record any other title associated with the name in French if an appropriate equivalent exists in that language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2024-12-04''&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-04)--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapiter 10 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 10.0, Identifying families ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply this chapter for distinctive family entities.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For subject cataloging policy, the authorized access point for family name authority record may now be used as a subject access point in addition to a subject access point for general family groupings. Separate authority records will exist in Canadiana/PFAN file and in the Répertoire des vedettes-matière (RVM).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''RDA access point in bibliographic record when a family is the creator'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Brontë (Famille : $d 1812-  : $c Haworth, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;gt;'''Subject headings in bibliographic record when a family is the subject of a resource'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
600 36 $a Brontë (Famille)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
600 36 $a Brontë (Famille : $d 1812-  : $c Haworth, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow this change in practice, code the 008/11 (Subj) &amp;quot;a&amp;quot;; 008/15 (Subj use) &amp;quot;a&amp;quot;; and do not provide a 667 subject usage note in the name authority record: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme  vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Meaning: SUBJECT USAGE: This heading is not valid for use as a subject; use a family name heading from RVM.]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modify existing name authority records for a specific family when using them as a subject access point for current cataloging or updates are otherwise needed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- 008/11 : « n » to « v »&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- 008/15 : « b » to « a »&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Delete the 667 subject usage note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2024-11-06''&amp;lt;!--(2024-11-06)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapiter 11 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 11.2, Name of Corporate Body ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the name of an individual performer appears in conjunction with the name of a performing group, unless there is other evidence generally do not consider the person's name to be part of the name of the group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;source&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
J.D. Crowe and the New South&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;authorized access point&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2#	$a New South (Groupe musical)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;source&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Artie Shaw and his orchestra&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:30px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''No name because body is unnamed''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2023-11-24''&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 11.2.2.12, Names Found in a Non-preferred Script  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record a transliterated form of the corporate name in authorized access points where applicable, following the  [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|romanization tables]] approved by PFAN. Non-Latin forms that appear on the source may be recorded as variant access points in authority records (MARC field 4XX )for the following languages and scripts: Perso-Arabic script (e.g. Arabic, Persian, Pashto, Urdu); Hebrew, Yiddish; Chinese, Japanese, Korean; Cyrillic-based scripts; and Greek.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2023-11-24''&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 11.2.2.12, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not apply the alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2023-11-24''&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapter 16 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 16.2.2.2, Sources of Information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For names in Canada, base the form found in [http://www4.nrcan.gc.ca/search-place-names/search Canadian Geographical Names Database (CGNDB)] from  Natural Resources Canada&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For names in Québec, base the form found in the following sources (in this order of preference):&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://www.mamh.gouv.qc.ca/repertoire-des-municipalites/ Répertoire des municipalités]&lt;br /&gt;
# [http://www.toponymie.gouv.qc.ca/ct/accueil.aspx Banque de noms de lieux du Québec]&lt;br /&gt;
# other reference sources&lt;br /&gt;
# the catalogued manifestation.&lt;br /&gt;
For names other than municipalities in Quebec, base the form found in the [http://www.toponymie.gouv.qc.ca/ct/accueil.aspx Banque de noms de lieux du Québec]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For counties in the United States, use the form found in the French version of Wikipedia.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For the following countries, base the form found in the sources listed below (in the order of preference indicated) if French sources are consulted in vain or are not available and English sources must be consulted:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Country !! Sources&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Australia || 1. [http://viaf.org/ VIAF]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. [http://www.ga.gov.au/map/names Geoscience Australia Place Name Search]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| United States || 1. LC/NAF &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. [http://geonames.usgs.gov/pls/gnispublic Geographic Names Information System (GNIS)]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Great Britain || 1. LC/NAF &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. The Ordnance Survey gazetteer of Great Britain ou [https://geonames.nga.mil/geonames/GeographicNamesSearch/ &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic Names Server (GNS)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| New Zealand || 1. LC/NAF &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. [http://www.linz.govt.nz/placenames/find-names/nz-gazetteer-official-names New Zealand Gazetteer of Place Names]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2025-06-18''&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 16.2.2.5, Names found in a non-preferred script ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the name of the place is in a language written in a non-Latin script, transliterate the name according to the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization| PFAN Romanization Tables]] for that language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2025-11-04''&amp;lt;!--(2025-11-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 16.2.2.5, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not apply the alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2025-11-04''&amp;lt;!--(2025-11-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapter 32 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==32.1, Related Corporate Body ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Core element for PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related corporate body is a core element for PFAN for sequential relationships with immediately preceding and immediately succeeding corporate bodies (except conferences).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These instructions also apply to places established in the Canadiana authority file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2023-05-02''&amp;lt;!--(2023-05-02)--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==32.1.1.3, Recording Relationship to Related Corporate Body ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Earlier Names Not Likely to be Needed as Relationships'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some circumstances, research will indicate that the corporate body being established had earlier names that are not likely ever to be needed as access points in bibliographic records. If a decision is made not to create separate authority records for these earlier names, record them in the source citation along with an indication that separate records were not needed, such as  &amp;quot;[aucune publication dans la base de données de [library symbol]]&amp;quot;» or &amp;quot;[aucun point d’accès trouvé dans OCLC].&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Télésystème (Firme)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de Telesystem, consulté le 29 novembre 2023 : $b Accueil; À propos; Histoire (Télésystème; Serelco [aucune publication dans la base de données de BAnQ] devient en 1978 Télésystème) page Contact (Télésystème; situé à Montréal, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2024-05-15''&amp;lt;!--(2024-05-15)--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements&amp;diff=144045</id>
		<title>PFAN - PFAN Policy Statements</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements&amp;diff=144045"/>
		<updated>2026-02-13T14:58:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 9.2.2.5.3, Alternative */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!--{{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by A. Dunnett, LAC)}} --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Énoncés de politique du PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp9_lcps9-66.html--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapiter 0 =&lt;br /&gt;
== 0.6.6, Section 2 : Recording Attributes of Work and Expression ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a musical work with a title that is not distinctive, always record the applicable elements as additions to the authorized access point. When recording elements to differentiate the authorized access point of a work from the authorized access point of another work, person, family, or corporate body, always add one or more differentiating elements to the access point. Use judgment in deciding whether to also record these elements as separate elements and whether to record additional identifying elements (those not needed for differentiation) as separate elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Chapter 6=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.2.2.5, Exception  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the Classical and Byzantine Greek works listed in the Exception, choose a well-established title in French as the preferred title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-11-24''&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.2.2.7, Alternative  == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply the alternative for anonymous works created before 1501 and written neither in Greek nor in the Latin alphabet. Choose as the preferred title an established title in French if there is one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2022-09-15''&amp;lt;!--(2022-09-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.2.2.10.3, Alternative == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For compilations containing works created after 1500: Do not apply the alternative. Record the title proper of the compilation as its preferred title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For compilations containing works created before 1501: If applying the alternative, record a conventional collective title followed by &amp;quot;Extraits.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2025-05-07'&amp;lt;!--(2025-05-07)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.1, Omissions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For pre-twentieth century works, normally consider phrases such as &amp;quot;a due,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;a cinque&amp;quot; to be statements of medium of performance and omit them when recording the preferred title according to this instruction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2, Preferred Title Consisting Solely of the Name of One Type of Composition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not consider such titles as &amp;quot;Double concerto,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Tripelkonzert&amp;quot;, etc. to be names of types of compositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a composer uses a word which is normally the name of a type of composition as the title of a work which is definitely not a work of the type designated by the word, do not consider the title to be the name of a type of composition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Poulenc, Francis, $d 1899-1963. $t Aubade&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Title&amp;amp;nbsp;: Aubade: concerto chorégraphique pour piano et 18 instruments.''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A title consisting of two words, each of which alone would be the name of a type of composition, may in combination produce a distinctive title. Generally treat such a compound title as a distinctive title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Nielsen, Carl, $d 1865-1931. $t Humoreske-bagateller&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.1, Choice of language ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the accepted form of name in French if the name has an French cognate form or if the same name is used in French.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Melody/Melodies'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the French word &amp;quot;Mélodie&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Mélodies,&amp;quot; or their cognates in another language, is the title of a work that is not for solo voice and keyboard stringed instrument, consider it the name of a type of composition. Use the French form as the preferred title and add the medium of performance according to [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not apply the alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.2, Singular or Plural Form ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''One Work of One Type'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloging the first occurrence of a work of a particular type of composition by a composer, choose the preferred title as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
# If the composer is deceased, consult reference sources to ascertain whether the composer wrote more than one work of that type, and use the singular or plural form as the preferred title according to the information found.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the composer is living, choose the singular form of the type of composition as the preferred title unless the work being cataloged bears a serial number (including 1); in that case use the plural form on the assumption that the composer has written or intends to write more works of that type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When cataloging the second occurrence of a work of a particular type by a composer, if the singular form has been used in the authorized access point for the first work of that type, revise the preferred title to the plural.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remember that medium of performance is a separate element from the preferred title. If the composer wrote one piano sonata and one violin sonata, he or she wrote two sonatas, and therefore the plural form for the type of composition must be used as the preferred title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Liturgical Words or Phrases'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the preferred title is a Latin liturgical word or phrase, record it in the singular if the word or phrase has no plural form  (e.g., &amp;quot;Gloria,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Magnificat,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Requiem,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Salve Regina,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Te Deum&amp;quot;). Use the plural form (e.g., &amp;quot;Introïts&amp;quot;) when appropriate. Generally, do not add the medium of performance in the authorized access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tempo Markings with Modifying Words'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the preferred title is a tempo marking with a modifying word or words (e.g., &amp;quot;Andante sostenuto,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Allegro con brio,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Moderato ma non tanto&amp;quot;), record it in the singular.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not apply the alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.7.1.3, Part Identified Both by a Number and by a Title or Other Verbal Designation, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not apply the alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.7.2, Two or More Parts, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more parts of a work constitute the only content of the manifestation being described, record the conventional collective title ''Extraits'' as the preferred title for the parts. If one or more parts is especially important, also record the part title(s) as analytical authorized access points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If two or more parts of a work are part of a compilation of works or parts of works, and that analytical authorized access points are established, record the conventional collective title ''Extraits'' as the preferred title for the parts, or record the part title(s) of one or more parts. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.8.3, Complete Works of a Single Type of Composition for One Specific Medium or Various Media ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use terms from the RVMGF (RVM’s Genre/Forme thesaurus) when possible. When recording the preferred title, omit any parenthetical qualifier from RVMGF. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''RVMGF term'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:30px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Tangos (Musique)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:-30px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Conventional collective title'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:0px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Tangos&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.3, Recording Medium of Performance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use terms from the RVMMEM (Répertoire de vedettes-matière, Moyens d’exécution en musique) when possible. '''''Exception:''''' use &amp;quot;orchestre à cordes&amp;quot; for an orchestra consisting primarily of string instruments and no wind instruments (even when it may include continuo, keyboard instruments, plucked instruments, or percussion). Use &amp;quot;orchestre&amp;quot; for an orchestra that has both string and wind instruments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on using RVMMEM terms in authorized access points, see Policy Statement for [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Medium_of_performance|6.28.1.9.1]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.5, Optional Omission ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not omit doubling instruments and voices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.6.1, Optional Omission ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not omit the number of parts or performers for an instrument or voice, even if there is only one for that instrument or voice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.6.3, Optional Omission ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not omit the number of ensembles for a type of ensemble, even if there is only one ensemble of that type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.16.1.3.1, Serial Number ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record a serial number even if works with the same title do not have the same medium of performance, if such works are consecutively numbered in music reference sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording a serial number that is accompanied in the source by a term such as &amp;quot;numéro,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;livre,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;collection,&amp;quot; etc., apply the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# If the term is the French word &amp;quot;numéro&amp;quot; or its abbreviation, or an equivalent word or abbreviation in another language, precede the number in the preferred title by the French abbreviation &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the term is a non-French term not meaning &amp;quot;numéro&amp;quot; and the preferred title is in French because of the application of [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-100001354#rda6-100001354 6.14.2.5.1], substitute the French equivalent of the term, using an French abbreviation as instructed in appendix B (B.5.4).&lt;br /&gt;
# In all other cases give the term as it appears in the source using its abbreviated form as found in appendix B (B.5.4). If the term is not found in appendix B, give the term as it appears in the source&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no term appears with the number, give the number as a cardinal number and precede it by the French abbreviation &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use Arabic numerals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.16.1.3.3, Thematic Index Number ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For thematic index abbreviations, consult the bibliography of ''Thematic Indexes Used in the Library of Congress/NACO Authority File'' available online at: [https://cmc.wp.musiclibraryassoc.org/thematic-indexes-used-in-library-of-congress-naco-authority-files/ https://cmc.wp.musiclibraryassoc.org/thematic-indexes-used-in-library-of-congress-naco-authority-files/].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.17.1.3, Recording Key  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the same criteria for recording the mode (“major” or “minor”) as for recording the pitch center, that is, if pitch center is given or apparent, but mode is not, record only the pitch center. Follow the RDA examples, and record the words “dièse” and “bémol” rather than the symbols  ♯ and ♭ .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-17)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.18.1.4, Arrangements, Transcriptions, Etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Revisions by the Original Composer'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a composer revises a work, retaining the original title and opus number, and the revision is one of a different instrumentation within the same broad medium (e.g., orchestre, ensemble instrumental, harmonie), do not consider the revision to be an arrangement. Use the same authorized access point for the original and the revision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Stravinsky, Igor, $d 1882-1971.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Petruška&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Petrushka : $b complete original 1911 version ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Stravinsky, Igor, $d 1882-1971.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Petruška&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Petrouchka : $b burleske in four scenes (revised 1947 version) ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alternative Instruments'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not consider as arrangements the following uses of alternative instruments:​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# A work composed before 1800 for a baroque, renaissance, or other early instrument (viole de gambe, flûte à bec, etc.), or for voice, in a resource that is edited for or performed on a modern instrument or by an alternative voice, provided the key is unchanged and the notation has not been significantly changed.&lt;br /&gt;
# A work for a melody instrument which is edited for or performed on an alternative instrument specified by the composer in first or early editions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Bibliographic record''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897.​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Sonates, $m clarinette, piano, $n op. 120​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Sonatas opus 120, for viola and piano ...​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 ## $a À l'origine pour clarinette ou alto et piano.​​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
650 #6 $a Sonates (Alto et piano) $v Partitions et parties.​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Authority record''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897. $t Sonates, $m clarinette, piano, $n op. 120​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
382 0# $a clarinette $n 1 $p alto $n 1 $a piano $n 1 $s 2 $2 rvmmem​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897. $t Sonates, $m alto, piano, $n op. 120&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Song Transpositions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a resource containing one or more songs transposed to accommodate a voice range different from the original, do not consider the transposition to be an arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Schubert, Franz, $d 1797-1828.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Lieder&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Lieder, Gesang und Klavier / $c Franz Schubert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
250 ## $a Neue Ausg. / $b herausgegeben von Dietrich Fischer-Dieskau ; musikwissenschaftliche Revision von Elmar Budde, tiefe Stimme.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Originally for high voice''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.27.1.9, Additions to access points representing works ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Librettos'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a libretto for a dramatic musical work is written by the composer and is manifested separately as a literary work, distinguish the literary work from the musical work with &amp;quot;(Livret)&amp;quot; (see Policy Statement for  [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2.2C_Musical_Works_With_Lyrics.2C_Libretto.2C_Text.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Wagner, Richard, $d 1813-1883. $t Meistersinger von Nürnberg (Livret)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1, General Guidelines on Constructing Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Additions to Authorized Access Points'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not make an addition to the authorized access point when one or more instrumental parts for a work or a compilation of works by one composer are published separately. Use the same authorized access point that would be used for a score or a complete set of parts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 10	$a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10	$a Wer mich liebet, der wird mein Wort halten, $n BWV 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10	$a Kantate Nr. 74 : $b Wer mich liebet, der wird mein Wort halten : BWV 74 / $c Joh. Seb. Bach ; Continuo-Aussetzung von Ulrich Haverkampf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
250 ##	$a Orgel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
264 #1	$a Wiesbaden : $b Breitkopf &amp;amp; Härtel, $c [1982]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
300 ##	$a 1 partie (32 pages) ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10	$a Musique vocale. $k Extraits&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 14	$a The flute solos from the Bach cantatas, passions, and oratorios ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''«&amp;amp;nbsp;Extraits&amp;amp;nbsp;» refers to the fact that the flute solos in the resource are not from all of Bach’s vocal music works; nor are they the entire flute part from each of the works included.''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Strauss, Richard, $d 1864-1949.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10	$a Musique pour orchestre. $k Extraits&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10	$a Orchesterstudien aus Richard Strauss' symphonischen Werken : $b für Flöte ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''«&amp;amp;nbsp;Extraits&amp;amp;nbsp;» refers to the fact that the flute selections in the resource are not from all of Strauss’ orchestral music; nor are they the entire flute part from each of the works included.''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Melody/Melodies'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the French word &amp;quot;Mélodie&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Mélodies&amp;quot; is the title of a work for solo voice and keyboard stringed instrument, consider the medium of performance to be implied by the French title (see [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9]) and do not add medium of performance in the authorized access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the French word &amp;quot;Mélodie&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Mélodies&amp;quot; is the title of a work for solo voice with accompaniment other than a keyboard stringed instrument alone or without accompaniment, apply  [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9] and add the medium of performance of the accompaniment, or &amp;quot;sans accompagnement,&amp;quot; in the authorized access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the French word &amp;quot;Mélodie&amp;quot; ou &amp;quot;Mélodies&amp;quot;, or their cognates in another language, is the title of a work that is not for solo voice and keyboard stringed instrument, consider it the name of a type of composition. Use the French form as the preferred title and add the medium of performance according to [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Liturgical Words or Phrases'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the preferred title is a Latin liturgical word or phrase (e.g., &amp;quot;Gloria,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Magnificat,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Requiem,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Salve Regina,&amp;quot; &amp;quot;Te Deum&amp;quot;), record it in the singular when the word or phrase is invariable. Use the plural form &amp;quot;Introïts,&amp;quot; when appropriate. Generally, do not add the medium of performance in the authorized access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.2, Musical Works With Lyrics, Libretto, Text, etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a composer also created the libretto for a dramatic musical work and the libretto is manifested separately as a literary work, distinguish the literary work from the musical work with ''(Livret)'', but do not make an addition to the access point for the musical work (see Policy Statement [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.27.1.9.2C_Additions_to_access_points_representing_works|6.27.1.9]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Wagner, Richard, $d 1813-1883. $t Meistersinger von Nürnberg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Wagner, Richard, $d 1813-1883. $t Meistersinger von Nürnberg (Livret)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.9, Additional Elements in Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use cataloger's judgment in choosing the most appropriate element or elements listed in 6.28.1.9 to include in the authorized access point for a musical work unless other instructions in this Policy Statement apply.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Preferred Title Consists Solely of the Name of a Type, or of Two or More Types, of Composition'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To maintain file integrity, add these elements in the authorized access point in this order, as applicable:&lt;br /&gt;
# medium of performance (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-12575#rda6-12575 6.28.1.9.1])&lt;br /&gt;
# numeric designation of musical work (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-4713#rda6-4713 6.16])&lt;br /&gt;
# key (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-4791#rda6-4791 6.17]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding several numeric designations, add them in the following order:&lt;br /&gt;
# serial number&lt;br /&gt;
# opus number&lt;br /&gt;
# number within the opus, if there is one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not add a serial number or an opus number if a thematic catalogue number is added. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897. $t Concertos, $m violon, orchestre, $n op. 77, $r ré majeur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Schumann, Clara, $d 1819-1896. $t Scherzos, $m piano, $n no 1, op. 10, $r ré mineur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Beethoven, Ludwig van, $d 1770-1827. $t Sonates, $m piano, $n no 14, op. 27, no 2, $r do dièse mineur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Schubert, Franz, $d 1797-1828. $t Trios, $m piano, violon, violoncelle, $n D. 929, $r mi bémol majeur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le numéro d'ordre (no 2) et le numéro d'opus (op. 100) ne sont pas enregistrés car le numéro de catalogue thématique est enregistré''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eckhardt-Gramatté, S. C. $q (Sophie-Carmen), $d 1899-1974. $t Symphonies, $n E. 104, $r do&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le numéro d'ordre (no 1) n'est pas enregistré car le numéro de catalogue thématique est enregistré; la distribution d'exécution n'est pas enregistrée car elle est implicite dans le titre''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Add other elements to the authorized access point if it needs to be differentiated from another authorized access point (see [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-6847#rda6-6847 6.27.1.9]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Serial Number'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record a serial number in an authorized access point if works with the same title and the same medium of performance are consecutively numbered in music reference sources. Record serial number if works with the same title for different media are consecutively numbered in music reference sources if the medium of performance is omitted from the authorized access point per [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-100005398#rda6-100005398 6.28.1.9.1 exception a) ii)].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See additional guidance on recording serial numbers in the Policy Statement for [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Serial_Number|6.16.1.3.1]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Librettos and Dramatic Musical Works'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See Policy Statement [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2.2C_Musical_Works_With_Lyrics.2C_Libretto.2C_Text.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2]] for distinguishing access points representing librettos and dramatic musical works written by the same person.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.9.1, Medium of performance == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''General'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use RVMMEM terms in the authorized access point, adjusting the form to plural if needed according to [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;lang=en&amp;amp;target=rda6-12603#rda6-12603 6.28.1.9.1 Exception d)]. Record terms in this order:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
a) voices &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
b) keyboard instrument if there is more than one non-keyboard instrument&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
c) the other instruments in score order&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
d) continuo.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a work for solo instrument or instruments and accompanying ensemble or ensembles, add the terms for the solo instrument or instruments followed by the term for the accompanying ensemble or ensembles.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Baker, David, $d 1931-2016. $t Sonates, $m violon, ensemble à cordes frottées&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''For solo violin and string quartet''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''New Authority Records'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Same Preferred Title and Unknown Medium of Performance'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If there are two or more works by the same composer with the same preferred title and the medium of performance is unknown but the number of parts is known, record the number of parts following the term ''interprètes'' in the authorized access point.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Works for Keyboard Instruments'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If a composer wrote more than one work of a particular type of composition that is for or includes various keyboard stringed instruments, use the one that predominates in the works of that type when adding the medium of performance. If no predominant instrument is apparent, use the term ''instrument à clavier''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Bach, Carl Phillipp Emanuel, $d 1714-1788. $t Sonates, $m instrument à clavier, $n H. 53, $r ré mineur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
382 0#	$a clavecin $n 1 $s 1 $2 rvmmem&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''For all works with preferred title &amp;quot;Sonates&amp;quot; written for a keyboard instrument, the term &amp;quot;instrument à clavier&amp;quot; is recorded in the authorized access point because no specific type of keyboard instrument is predominant&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Existing Authority Records'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A medium of performance term used in the 1XX field in an existing authority record may differ from the RVMMEM term for that voice or instrument. Do not modify the existing medium of performance term in an AACR2 or RDA authorized access point to match the RVMMEM term, &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;unless that term is &amp;quot;continuo&amp;quot; or the authorized access point needs to be modified for some other reason.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.9.1, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not apply the 2nd sentence of Exception d). Always supply the number of parts if more than one for a particular instrument or voice, even if the number of parts is implicit in the preferred title. Apply all other exceptions in 6.28.1.9.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2021-11-19''&amp;lt;!--(2021-11-19)--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.3, Authorized Access Point Representing an Expression of Musical Work ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to maintain current file integrity, when constructing an authorized access point for an expression of a musical work, if more than one characteristic of an an expression listed below is to be recorded, use the following priority order, omitting the ones that are not applicable:&lt;br /&gt;
# Arrangements, transcriptions, etc. (use the term ''arrangé'')&lt;br /&gt;
# Esquisses [Sketches]&lt;br /&gt;
# Partition de chant [Vocal score]&lt;br /&gt;
# Partitions de chant [Vocal scores]&lt;br /&gt;
# Partition de chœur [Chorus score]&lt;br /&gt;
# Partitions de chœur [Chorus scores]&lt;br /&gt;
# Traductions [Translations].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Strauss, Richard, $d 1864-1959.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Lieder, $n op. 10. $p Allerseelen; $o arrangé. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a All souls' day = $b Allerseelen : four-part song for mixed voices : op. 10, no. 8 / $c Richard Strauss ; arranged by George Shackely ; original German text by Hermann von Gilm ; English text by George Shackley.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Kodály, Zoltán, $d 1882-1967.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Háry János. $s Partition de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Háry János : $b Hungarian folk opera / $c Zoltán Kodály ; Hungarian libretto by Béla Paulini and Zsolt Harsányi ; English version by Olga Latham and Tony Butterfield.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moore, Douglas, $d 1893-1969.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Œuvre. $k Extraits (Esquisses)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.4, Variant Access Point Representing a Musical Work or Expression ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Misattributed Musical Works and Expressions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a misattributed musical work, or expression of a work, provide additional access points as may be appropriate to identify the work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-04-24''&amp;lt;!--(2024-04-16)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.29.1.29, Date of Promulgation of a Law, Etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When establishing a new authorized access point for a law, etc., and there is an existing access point with the same or similar title without a date of promulgation, add the dates of promulgation to both the new and existing access points.  If the date of promulgation of the existing undated access point is unknown and cannot be readily ascertained, or if there is evidence that the existing undated access point has been used for laws promulgated on different dates, add the date of promulgation only to the law, etc. being established.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a France. $t Code de procédure civile (1806)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a France. $t Code de procédure civile (1975)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''The first access point was originally established without a date''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Pérou. $t Código procesal penal (1991)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Pérou. $t Código procesal penal (2004)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''The first access point was originally established without a date''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:-5px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''''but'''''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $t Civil Rights Act of 1964&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $t Civil Rights Act of 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''The dates of promulgation are not added, as they are already in the preferred titles of the laws''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Optionally, add the date of promulgation to a new authorized access point, even if there is no need to distinguish between access points.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a $a Ghana. $t Criminal Procedure Code (1997)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2023-11-24''&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Chapter 9=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==9.2.2.5.3, Names Found in a Non-preferred Script ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the instructions related to RDA 9.2.2.5.3, the language preferred for reference sources is French; the preferred script is the Latin script.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Authorized access points should be in the Latin script. Follow the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|romanization tables]] approved by PFAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Non-Latin forms may be recorded as variant access points (MARC field 4XX) for these languages/scripts: Perso-Arabic script (e.g., Arabic, Persian, Pushto, Urdu); Hebrew, Yiddish; Chinese, Japanese, Korean; Cyrillic-based scripts; and Greek.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Applicability'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Persons who bear names derived from a non-Latin script but who write in a Latin script language should not be treated under this instruction. The decision that the person is writing in a Latin script language is based on the first item cataloged, i.e., the fact that the text of this item was originally written in a Latin script language. If it becomes evident later that most of the person's works were written in a non-Latin script, apply the provisions of this policy statement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2022-04-19''&amp;lt;!--(2022-04-19)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==9.2.2.5.3, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''All Other Languages Written in Non-Latin Scripts:''' Apply the alternative when the first element of the preferred name begins with either a given name or a surname. If a person is likely to appear in general English-language reference sources, search the ''[https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse]'', the ''Petit Robert'' and the ''[http://www.universalis-edu.com/ Encyclopædia Universalis]'' in this order of priority&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. If the name is found in all three sources in a single form, use that form. If the form varies in these three sources, use the form found in the ''[https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse]''. If the name is not found in all three of these sources, use the systematically romanized form of the name. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the name is found in the ''[https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse]'', use the name found there, if the encyclopedia only presents one form of name, or use the first form given, if two forms of name are given in the same article. If the [https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse] offers different forms found in different articles, prefer a form from the general encyclopedia to one from a specialized work. If the name is not found in the Encyclopédie Larousse, search the ''Petit Robert'', and if the name appears, use the form found there.  If the name is not found there, search the ''[https://www.universalis.fr/ Encyclopædia Universalis]'' and use the form found there. (Catalogers are encouraged to consult all three sources regardless of the search results to identify variants that may be cross-referenced).&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If the name is not found in any of these sources, use the systematically romanized form of the name (i.e., a romanized form from a  [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization/ romanization table] approved by PFAN).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exception:'' For famous persons entered under given name but not found in all three of the general French-language encyclopedias because of specialized fame, consult major specialized encyclopedias (e.g.,  Le nouveau Théo de Michel Dubost et Stanislas Lalanne, le Dictionnaire de l'Antiquité de Jean Leclant to determine if there is a well-established French-language form of the name. (&amp;quot;Found in&amp;quot; the reference source means that there is an article under the person's name.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For persons who are not included in the three French general encyclopedia named above because their fame is too recent (for instance new authors, dancers, or people recently becoming famous as cultural or political figures), follow this order of preference:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#  If the name is found in a romanized source in a free, well-known and easy to consult online source, use this form, especially if a person who writes (or about whom others write) chiefly in another script provides a romanized form in such a source (e.g., [http://www.facebook.com/ Facebook], [http://www.linkedin.com/ Linkedin]) or, failing such a source, a general source (e.g., [https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikip%C3%A9dia:Accueil_principal Wikipédia &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;in French&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]). &lt;br /&gt;
# Consult major newspapers such as ''[https://www.lemonde.fr/ Le monde]'' or [https://www.lapresse.ca/ La presse] in order to determine if there already exists a well-established French form of the name. &lt;br /&gt;
# Otherwise, use a systematically romanized form of the name. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Hebrew Alphabet:''' Follow this order of preference in choosing the heading for persons with names in the Hebrew alphabet:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# If the name is found prominently in a romanized form in the resource being cataloged in a language using the Hebrew alphabet, use this form.&lt;br /&gt;
# If the name is found as the heading for an article about the person in  Dictionnaire encyclopédique du judaïsme &amp;lt;!--The Encyclopaedia Judaica or The Encyclopedia of Jews in the Islamic World--&amp;gt;, use this form. &amp;lt;!--If the form varies in these two sources, use the form found in The Encyclopaedia Judaica.--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# If the name is found in a romanized form in a widely-known and easily-consulted free online source, use this form, especially where a person who writes or is written about primarily in the Hebrew script provides a preferred romanized form of the name in that source (e.g., [http://www.facebook.com/ Facebook], [http://www.linkedin.com/ Linkedin]) or, failing such a source, a general source (e.g., [https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikip%C3%A9dia:Accueil_principal Wikipédia &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;in French&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
# Otherwise, use the systematically romanized form of the name.&lt;br /&gt;
# However,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol style=&amp;quot;list-style-type: lower-alpha; padding-left:30px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the authorized access point for an author who writes in a language using the Hebrew alphabet reflects the systematically romanized form and a subsequently-received resource containing the name in a Hebrew-alphabet language shows a non-systematically romanized name (i.e., a “found romanization”), generally do not change the authorized access point. This means that only in exceptional cases will systematically romanized names be candidates for change.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;If the authorized access point for an author who writes in a language using the Hebrew alphabet reflects a non-systematically romanized form and a subsequently received resource containing the name in a Hebrew-alphabet language shows a different non-systematically romanized form (i.e., a different “found romanization”), do not change the authorized access point until the different form clearly predominates.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2025-03-21''&amp;lt;!--(2025-03-18)--&amp;gt;  &amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;small&amp;gt;[http://original.rdatoolkit.org/lcpschp9_lcps9-66.html Adapted from RDA LC-PCC PS]&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9.3.4.3, Recording Period of Activity of Person ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When recording the period of activity, use “activité” not &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;actif&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;active&amp;quot;.  The term &amp;quot;activité&amp;quot; should appear before the first period of activity date (e.g., &amp;quot;activité 12e siècle&amp;quot;), unless another term such as &amp;quot;jin shi&amp;quot; is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2023-05-16''&amp;lt;!--(2023-05-16)--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9.4.1.4.3, Children and Grandchildren of Royal Persons ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record the title &amp;quot;prince&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;princesse&amp;quot; or a similar title in French if an appropriate equivalent exists in that language. Record any other title associated with the name in French if an appropriate equivalent exists in that language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2024-12-04''&amp;lt;!--(2024-12-04)--&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapiter 10 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 10.0, Identifying families ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apply this chapter for distinctive family entities.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For subject cataloging policy, the authorized access point for family name authority record may now be used as a subject access point in addition to a subject access point for general family groupings. Separate authority records will exist in Canadiana/PFAN file and in the Répertoire des vedettes-matière (RVM).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''RDA access point in bibliographic record when a family is the creator'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Brontë (Famille : $d 1812-  : $c Haworth, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;gt;'''Subject headings in bibliographic record when a family is the subject of a resource'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
600 36 $a Brontë (Famille)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
600 36 $a Brontë (Famille : $d 1812-  : $c Haworth, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To allow this change in practice, code the 008/11 (Subj) &amp;quot;a&amp;quot;; 008/15 (Subj use) &amp;quot;a&amp;quot;; and do not provide a 667 subject usage note in the name authority record: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme  vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[Meaning: SUBJECT USAGE: This heading is not valid for use as a subject; use a family name heading from RVM.]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modify existing name authority records for a specific family when using them as a subject access point for current cataloging or updates are otherwise needed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- 008/11 : « n » to « v »&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- 008/15 : « b » to « a »&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Delete the 667 subject usage note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2024-11-06''&amp;lt;!--(2024-11-06)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapiter 11 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 11.2, Name of Corporate Body ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the name of an individual performer appears in conjunction with the name of a performing group, unless there is other evidence generally do not consider the person's name to be part of the name of the group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Examples''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;source&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
J.D. Crowe and the New South&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;authorized access point&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2#	$a New South (Groupe musical)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;source&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Artie Shaw and his orchestra&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:30px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''No name because body is unnamed''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2023-11-24''&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 11.2.2.12, Names Found in a Non-preferred Script  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record a transliterated form of the corporate name in authorized access points where applicable, following the  [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|romanization tables]] approved by PFAN. Non-Latin forms that appear on the source may be recorded as variant access points in authority records (MARC field 4XX )for the following languages and scripts: Perso-Arabic script (e.g. Arabic, Persian, Pashto, Urdu); Hebrew, Yiddish; Chinese, Japanese, Korean; Cyrillic-based scripts; and Greek.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2023-11-24''&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 11.2.2.12, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not apply the alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2023-11-24''&amp;lt;!--(2023-11-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapter 16 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 16.2.2.2, Sources of Information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For names in Canada, base the form found in [http://www4.nrcan.gc.ca/search-place-names/search Canadian Geographical Names Database (CGNDB)] from  Natural Resources Canada&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For names in Québec, base the form found in the following sources (in this order of preference):&lt;br /&gt;
# [https://www.mamh.gouv.qc.ca/repertoire-des-municipalites/ Répertoire des municipalités]&lt;br /&gt;
# [http://www.toponymie.gouv.qc.ca/ct/accueil.aspx Banque de noms de lieux du Québec]&lt;br /&gt;
# other reference sources&lt;br /&gt;
# the catalogued manifestation.&lt;br /&gt;
For names other than municipalities in Quebec, base the form found in the [http://www.toponymie.gouv.qc.ca/ct/accueil.aspx Banque de noms de lieux du Québec]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For counties in the United States, use the form found in the French version of Wikipedia.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For the following countries, base the form found in the sources listed below (in the order of preference indicated) if French sources are consulted in vain or are not available and English sources must be consulted:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Country !! Sources&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Australia || 1. [http://viaf.org/ VIAF]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. [http://www.ga.gov.au/map/names Geoscience Australia Place Name Search]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| United States || 1. LC/NAF &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. [http://geonames.usgs.gov/pls/gnispublic Geographic Names Information System (GNIS)]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Great Britain || 1. LC/NAF &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. The Ordnance Survey gazetteer of Great Britain ou [https://geonames.nga.mil/geonames/GeographicNamesSearch/ &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic Names Server (GNS)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| New Zealand || 1. LC/NAF &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. [http://www.linz.govt.nz/placenames/find-names/nz-gazetteer-official-names New Zealand Gazetteer of Place Names]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2025-06-18''&amp;lt;!--(2025-06-18)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 16.2.2.5, Names found in a non-preferred script ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the name of the place is in a language written in a non-Latin script, transliterate the name according to the [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization| PFAN Romanization Tables]] for that language.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2025-11-04''&amp;lt;!--(2025-11-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 16.2.2.5, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not apply the alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2025-11-04''&amp;lt;!--(2025-11-04)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapter 32 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==32.1, Related Corporate Body ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Core element for PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Related corporate body is a core element for PFAN for sequential relationships with immediately preceding and immediately succeeding corporate bodies (except conferences).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These instructions also apply to places established in the Canadiana authority file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2023-05-02''&amp;lt;!--(2023-05-02)--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==32.1.1.3, Recording Relationship to Related Corporate Body ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Earlier Names Not Likely to be Needed as Relationships'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some circumstances, research will indicate that the corporate body being established had earlier names that are not likely ever to be needed as access points in bibliographic records. If a decision is made not to create separate authority records for these earlier names, record them in the source citation along with an indication that separate records were not needed, such as  &amp;quot;[aucune publication dans la base de données de [library symbol]]&amp;quot;» or &amp;quot;[aucun point d’accès trouvé dans OCLC].&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Example :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Télésystème (Firme)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de Telesystem, consulté le 29 novembre 2023 : $b Accueil; À propos; Histoire (Télésystème; Serelco [aucune publication dans la base de données de BAnQ] devient en 1978 Télésystème) page Contact (Télésystème; situé à Montréal, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last Update: 2024-05-15''&amp;lt;!--(2024-05-15)--&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc | ''Return to Table of Contents''  &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN&amp;diff=144044</id>
		<title>PFAN - Énoncés de politique du PFAN</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN&amp;diff=144044"/>
		<updated>2026-02-13T14:55:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* 9.2.2.5.3, Alternative */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - PFAN Policy Statements]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--{{En cours| 24 h (En cours d'édition par Daniel Paradis, BAnQ)}}--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 0 =&lt;br /&gt;
== 0.6.6, Section 2 : Enregistrement des attributs d'une œuvre et d'une expression ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour une œuvre musicale ayant un titre non distinctif, toujours enregistrer les éléments applicables en tant qu'ajouts au point d'accès autorisé. Lors de l'enregistrement d'éléments afin de différencier le point d'accès autorisé représentant une œuvre du point d'accès autorisé représentant une autre œuvre, personne, famille ou collectivité, toujours effectuer l'ajout d'un ou plusieurs éléments différenciateurs au point d'accès. S'en remettre au jugement afin de décider s'il convient d'enregistrer également ces éléments en tant qu'éléments séparés et s'il convient d'enregistrer les éléments d'identification additionnels (ceux qui ne sont pas nécessaires pour la différenciation) comme des éléments séparés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 6 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.2.2.5, Exception ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les œuvres grecques classiques et byzantines couvertes par l'exception, choisir comme titre privilégié un titre consacré par l'usage en français.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-11-24''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.2.2.7, Alternative == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appliquer l'alternative pour les œuvres anonymes créées avant 1501 et qui ne sont ni en grec ni en écriture latine. Choisir comme titre privilégié un titre consacré par l'usage en français s'il en existe un.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2022-09-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.2.2.10.3, Alternative == &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les compilations contenant des œuvres créées après 1500 : Ne pas appliquer l'alternative. Enregistrer le titre propre de la compilation comme titre privilégié. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les compilations contenant des œuvres créées avant 1501 : Si l'alternative est appliquée, inscrire un titre collectif conventionnel suivi de « Extraits ».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-05-07''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.1, Omissions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les œuvres antérieures au 20e siècle, considérer généralement les locutions telles que «&amp;amp;nbsp;a due&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;a cinque&amp;amp;nbsp;» comme des mentions de distribution d'exécution et les omettre lors de l'enregistrement du titre privilégié conformément à cette instruction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2, Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type de composition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas considérer des titres tels que «&amp;amp;nbsp;Double concerto&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Tripelkonzert&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc. comme des noms de types de compositions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'un compositeur utilise un mot qui est normalement le nom d'un type de composition comme titre d'une œuvre qui n'est absolument pas une œuvre du type désigné par ce mot, ne pas considérer le titre comme le nom d'un type de composition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Poulenc, Francis, $d 1899-1963. $t Aubade&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Titre&amp;amp;nbsp;: Aubade&amp;amp;nbsp;: concerto chorégraphique pour piano et 18 instruments.''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un titre constitué de deux mots, dont chacun pris individuellement est le nom d'un type de composition, peut, lorsque ces deux mots sont combinés, constituer un titre distinctif. Traiter généralement un tel titre composé comme un titre distinctif.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Nielsen, Carl, $d 1865-1931. $t Humoreske-bagateller&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.1, Choix de la langue ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer la forme acceptée du nom en français si le nom a une forme apparentée en français ou que le même nom est utilisé en français.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Mélodie/Mélodies'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le mot français «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodie&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodies&amp;amp;nbsp;», ou leurs équivalents dans une autre langue, est le titre d'une œuvre qui n'est pas pour voix soliste et instrument à clavier et à cordes, considérer qu'il s'agit d'un type de composition. Utiliser la forme française comme titre privilégié et ajouter la distribution d'exécution conformément à [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas appliquer l'alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.2, Forme au singulier ou au pluriel ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Une œuvre d'un type particulier'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors du catalogage de la première occurrence d'une œuvre d'un type particulier de composition par un compositeur, enregistrer la forme du nom du type de composition comme suit :&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le compositeur est décédé, consulter les sources de référence pour vérifier si le compositeur a écrit plus d'une œuvre de ce type, et choisir la forme au singulier ou au pluriel du nom du type de composition en fonction des informations trouvées.&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le compositeur est vivant, choisir la forme au singulier du nom du type de composition, sauf si l'œuvre en cours de catalogage porte un numéro d'ordre (y compris 1); dans ce cas, utiliser le pluriel en supposant que le compositeur a écrit ou a l'intention d'écrire d'autres œuvres de ce type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors du catalogage de la deuxième occurrence d'une œuvre d'un type particulier d'un compositeur, si la forme au singulier a été utilisée dans le point d'accès autorisé pour la première œuvre de ce type, réviser le titre privilégié pour le mettre au pluriel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas oublier que la distribution d'exécution est un élément distinct du titre privilégié. Si le compositeur a écrit une sonate pour piano et une sonate pour violon, il a écrit deux sonates, et la forme au pluriel du nom du type de composition doit donc être utilisée comme titre privilégié.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Mots ou locutions liturgiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre privilégié est un mot ou une locution liturgiques en latin, enregistrer le titre au singulier lorsque le mot ou la locution sont invariables (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;Gloria&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Magnificat&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Requiem&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Salve Regina&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Te Deum&amp;amp;nbsp;»). Utiliser la forme au pluriel lorsque cela est approprié (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;Introïts&amp;amp;nbsp;»). En règle générale, ne pas ajouter la distribution d'exécution dans le point d'accès autorisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Indications de tempo avec mots qualificatifs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre privilégié est une indication de tempo avec un ou plusieurs mots qualificatifs (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;Andante sostenuto&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Allegro con brio&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Moderato ma non tanto&amp;amp;nbsp;»), enregistrer le titre au singulier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas appliquer l'alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.7.1.3, Partie identifiée à la fois par un numéro et par un titre ou une autre désignation verbale, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas appliquer l'alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.7.2, Deux ou plusieurs parties, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si deux ou plusieurs parties d'une œuvre constituent l'unique contenu de la manifestation en cours de description, enregistrer le titre collectif conventionnel ''Extraits'' comme titre privilégié des parties. Si une ou plusieurs parties sont particulièrement importantes, enregistrer également le ou les titres de la ou des parties dans des points d'accès autorisés analytiques.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si deux ou plusieurs parties d'une œuvre font partie d'une compilation d'œuvres ou de parties d'œuvres et que des points d'accès autorisés analytiques sont établis, enregistrer le titre collectif conventionnel ''Extraits'' comme titre privilégié des parties ou enregistrer le ou les titres d'une ou plusieurs parties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.14.2.8.3, Œuvres complètes d'un même type de composition pour une même distribution spécifique ou diverses distributions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Employer des termes du RVMGF dans la mesure du possible. Lors de l'enregistrement du titre privilégié, omettre tout qualificatif du RVMGF figurant entre parenthèses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Terme RVMGF'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:30px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Tangos (Musique)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:-30px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Titre collectif conventionnel'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:0px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Tangos&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.3, Enregistrement d'une distribution d'exécution ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Employer des termes du RVMMEM dans la mesure du possible. '''''Exception :''''' employer ''orchestre à cordes'' pour un orchestre constitué principalement d'instruments à cordes s'il ne comprend pas d'instruments à vent (même s'il peut aussi comprendre une basse continue, des instruments à clavier, des instruments à cordes pincées ou des instruments à percussion). Enregistrer ''orchestre'' pour un orchestre comprenant des instruments à cordes ainsi que des instruments à vent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les instructions sur l'emploi des termes du RVMMEM dans les points d'accès autorisés, voir l'énoncé de politique [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|6.28.1.9.1]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.5, Omission facultative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas omettre les voix et instruments supplémentaires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.6.1, Omission facultative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas omettre le nombre de parties ou d'exécutants pour un instrument ou une voix, même s'il y en a seulement un ou une pour cet instrument ou cette voix.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.15.1.6.3, Omission facultative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas omettre le nombre d'ensembles pour chaque type d'ensemble, même s'il y a seulement un ensemble de ce type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.16.1.3.1, Numéro d'ordre ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer un numéro d'ordre même si les œuvres portant le même titre n'ont pas la même distribution d'exécution, si ces œuvres sont numérotées consécutivement dans les sources de référence musicales.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement d'un numéro d'ordre accompagné dans la source d'un terme tel que «&amp;amp;nbsp;numéro&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;livre&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;collection&amp;amp;nbsp;», etc., appliquer ce qui suit&amp;amp;nbsp;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le terme est le mot français «&amp;amp;nbsp;numéro&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou son abréviation, ou bien un mot équivalent ou une abréviation équivalente dans une autre langue, faire précéder le nombre dans le point d'accès autorisé de l'abréviation française «&amp;amp;nbsp;no&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le terme n'est pas en français et ne signifie pas « numéro » et que le titre privilégié est en français en raison de l'application de [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-100001354#rda6-100001354 6.14.2.5.2.1], le remplacer par son équivalent français, en utilisant une abréviation française selon les instructions de l'annexe B (B.5.4).&lt;br /&gt;
# Dans tous les autres cas, enregistrer le terme tel qu'il figure dans la source en utilisant sa forme abrégée telle qu'elle figure dans l'annexe B (B.5.4). Si le terme ne figure pas dans l'annexe B, enregistrer le terme tel qu'il figure dans la source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si aucun terme n'apparaît avec le nombre, enregistrer le nombre comme un nombre cardinal et le faire précéder de l'abréviation française «&amp;amp;nbsp;no&amp;amp;nbsp;».&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Utiliser des chiffres arabes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.16.1.3.3, Numéro de catalogue thématique ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les abréviations de catalogues thématiques, consulter la bibliographie ''Thematic Indexes Used in the Library of Congress/NACO Authority File'' disponible en ligne à l'adresse : [https://cmc.wp.musiclibraryassoc.org/thematic-indexes-used-in-library-of-congress-naco-authority-files/ https://cmc.wp.musiclibraryassoc.org/thematic-indexes-used-in-library-of-congress-naco-authority-files/].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.17.1.3, Enregistrement d'une tonalité  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suivre les mêmes critères pour enregistrer le mode («&amp;amp;nbsp;majeur&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;mineur&amp;amp;nbsp;») que pour enregistrer le centre tonal, c'est-à-dire que si le centre tonal est indiqué ou évident, mais que le mode ne l'est pas, enregistrer uniquement le centre tonal. Suivre les exemples de RDA et employer les termes «&amp;amp;nbsp;dièse&amp;amp;nbsp;» et «&amp;amp;nbsp;bémol&amp;amp;nbsp;» plutôt que les symboles ♯ et ♭.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-17''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.18.1.4, Arrangements, transcriptions, etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Révisions par le compositeur original'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un compositeur révise une œuvre en conservant le titre original et le numéro d'opus et que la révision consiste en une instrumentation différente à l'intérieur d'une même distribution générale (par ex., orchestre, ensemble instrumental, harmonie), ne pas considérer la révision comme un arrangement. Utiliser le même point d'accès autorisé pour l'œuvre originale et la révision.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Stravinsky, Igor, $d 1882-1971.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Petruška&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Petrushka : $b complete original 1911 version ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Stravinsky, Igor, $d 1882-1971.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Petruška&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Petrouchka : $b burleske in four scenes (revised 1947 version) ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Instruments alternatifs'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans les cas suivants, ne pas considérer l'utilisation d'instruments alternatifs comme un arrangement :​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Une œuvre composée avant 1800 pour un instrument du Moyen Âge, de la Renaissance ou de la période baroque (viole de gambe, flûte à bec, etc.), ou pour la voix, qui est éditée pour ou interprétée sur un instrument moderne ou par une voix alternative, à condition que la tonalité soit inchangée et que la notation n'ait pas été modifiée de façon significative.​&lt;br /&gt;
# Une œuvre pour un instrument mélodique qui est éditée pour ou interprétée sur un instrument alternatif spécifié par le compositeur dans la ou les premières éditions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Notice bibliographique''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897.​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Sonates, $m clarinette, piano, $n op. 120​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Sonatas opus 120, for viola and piano ...​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
500 ## $a À l'origine pour clarinette ou alto et piano.​​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
650 #6 $a Sonates (Alto et piano) $v Partitions et parties.​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Notice d'autorité''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897. $t Sonates, $m clarinette, piano, $n op. 120​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
382 0# $a clarinette $n 1 $p alto $n 1 $a piano $n 1 $s 2 $2 rvmmem​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
400 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897. $t Sonates, $m alto, piano, $n op. 120&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Transpositions de chants'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le cas d'une ressource contenant un ou plusieurs chants transposés pour une tessiture vocale différente de l'originale, ne pas considérer la transposition comme un arrangement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Schubert, Franz, $d 1797-1828.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Lieder&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Lieder, Gesang und Klavier / $c Franz Schubert.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
250 ## $a Neue Ausg. / $b herausgegeben von Dietrich Fischer-Dieskau ; musikwissenschaftliche Revision von Elmar Budde, tiefe Stimme.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''À l'origine pour voix aiguë''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.27.1.9, Ajouts aux points d'accès représentant des œuvres ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Livrets'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si le livret d'une œuvre musicale dramatique est écrit par le compositeur et est manifesté séparément en tant qu'œuvre littéraire, distinguer l'œuvre littéraire de l'œuvre musicale avec ''(Livret)'' (voir l'énoncé de politique [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Wagner, Richard, $d 1813-1883. $t Meistersinger von Nürnberg (Livret)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1, Lignes directrices générales sur la construction des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Ajouts aux points d'accès autorisés'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas faire d'ajout au point d'accès autorisé lorsqu'une ou plusieurs parties instrumentales d'une œuvre ou d'une compilation d'œuvres d'un compositeur sont publiées séparément. Utiliser le même point d'accès autorisé que celui qui serait utilisé pour une partition ou un ensemble complet de parties.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 10	$a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10	$a Wer mich liebet, der wird mein Wort halten, $n BWV 74&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10	$a Kantate Nr. 74 : $b Wer mich liebet, der wird mein Wort halten : BWV 74 / $c Joh. Seb. Bach ; Continuo-Aussetzung von Ulrich Haverkampf.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
250 ##	$a Orgel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
264 #1	$a Wiesbaden : $b Breitkopf &amp;amp; Härtel, $c [1982]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
300 ##	$a 1 partie (32 pages) ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Bach, Johann Sebastian, $d 1685-1750.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10	$a Musique vocale. $k Extraits&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 14	$a The flute solos from the Bach cantatas, passions, and oratorios ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le terme «&amp;amp;nbsp;Extraits&amp;amp;nbsp;» fait référence au fait que les solos de flûte contenus dans la ressource ne proviennent pas de toutes les œuvre&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;s&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; vocale&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;s&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;  de Bach; il ne s'agit pas non plus de l'intégralité de la partie de flûte de chacune des œuvres incluses.''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Strauss, Richard, $d 1864-1949.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10	$a Musique pour orchestre. $k Extraits&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10	$a Orchesterstudien aus Richard Strauss' symphonischen Werken : $b für Flöte ...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le terme «&amp;amp;nbsp;Extraits&amp;amp;nbsp;» fait référence au fait que les solos de flûte contenus dans la ressource ne proviennent pas de toutes les œuvres &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;pour orchestre&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;  de &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Strauss&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; ; il ne s'agit pas non plus de l'intégralité de la partie de flûte de chacune des œuvres incluses.''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Mélodie/Mélodies'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le mot français «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodie&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodies&amp;amp;nbsp;» est le titre d'une œuvre pour voix soliste avec accompagnement d'instrument à clavier et à cordes, considérer que la distribution d'exécution est implicite dans le titre (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9]) et omettre la distribution d'exécution dans le point d'accès autorisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le mot français «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodie&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodies&amp;amp;nbsp;» est le titre d'une œuvre pour voix soliste avec accompagnement autre qu'un instrument à clavier et à cordes seul ou sans accompagnement, appliquer [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9] et ajouter la distribution d'exécution de l'accompagnement, ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;sans accompagnement&amp;amp;nbsp;», dans le point d'accès autorisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le mot français «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodie&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;Mélodies&amp;amp;nbsp;», ou leurs équivalents dans une autre langue, est le titre d'une œuvre qui n'est pas pour voix soliste et instrument à clavier et à cordes, considérer qu'il s'agit d'un type de composition. Utiliser la forme française comme titre privilégié et ajouter la distribution d'exécution conformément à [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-7660#rda6-7660 RDA 6.28.1.9].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Mots ou locutions liturgiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le titre privilégié est un mot ou une locution liturgiques en latin, enregistrer le titre au singulier lorsque le mot ou la locution sont invariables (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;Gloria&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Magnificat&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Requiem&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Salve Regina&amp;amp;nbsp;», «&amp;amp;nbsp;Te Deum&amp;amp;nbsp;»). Utiliser la forme au pluriel lorsque cela est approprié (par exemple, «&amp;amp;nbsp;Introïts&amp;amp;nbsp;»). En règle générale, ne pas ajouter la distribution d'exécution dans le point d'accès autorisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-05-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.2, Œuvres musicales avec des paroles, un livret, etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un compositeur a également créé le livret d'une œuvre musicale dramatique et que le livret est manifesté séparément en tant qu'œuvre littéraire, distinguer l'œuvre littéraire de l'œuvre musicale avec ''(Livret)'', mais ne pas faire d'ajout au point d'accès pour l'œuvre musicale (voir l'énoncé de politique [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.27.1.9.2C_Ajouts_aux_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres|6.27.1.9]]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Wagner, Richard, $d 1813-1883. $t Meistersinger von Nürnberg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Wagner, Richard, $d 1813-1883. $t Meistersinger von Nürnberg (Livret)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.9, Éléments additionnels dans les points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'en remettre au jugement du catalogueur pour le choix du ou des éléments les plus appropriés, parmi ceux listés sous 6.28.1.9, à inclure dans le point d'accès autorisé d'une œuvre musicale, sauf si d'autres instructions dans cet énoncé de politique s'appliquent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type ou des noms de deux ou plusieurs types de compositions'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour préserver l'intégrité du fichier, ajouter les éléments suivants dans le point d'accès autorisé dans cet ordre, selon le cas :&lt;br /&gt;
# distribution d'exécution (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-12575#rda6-12575 6.28.1.9.1])&lt;br /&gt;
# désignation numérique d'une œuvre musicale (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-4713#rda6-4713 6.16])&lt;br /&gt;
# tonalité (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-4791#rda6-4791 6.17]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu'on ajoute plusieurs désignations numériques, les ajouter dans cet ordre :&lt;br /&gt;
# numéro d'ordre&lt;br /&gt;
# numéro d'opus&lt;br /&gt;
# numéro à l'intérieur de l'opus, s'il y en a un.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas ajouter de numéro d'ordre ni de numéro d'opus si un numéro de catalogue thématique est ajouté.​&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Brahms, Johannes, $d 1833-1897. $t Concertos, $m violon, orchestre, $n op. 77, $r ré majeur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Schumann, Clara, $d 1819-1896. $t Scherzos, $m piano, $n no 1, op. 10, $r ré mineur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Beethoven, Ludwig van, $d 1770-1827. $t Sonates, $m piano, $n no 14, op. 27, no 2, $r do dièse mineur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Schubert, Franz, $d 1797-1828. $t Trios, $m piano, violon, violoncelle, $n D. 929, $r mi bémol majeur&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le numéro d'ordre (no 2) et le numéro d'opus (op. 100) ne sont pas enregistrés car le numéro de catalogue thématique est enregistré''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Eckhardt-Gramatté, S. C. $q (Sophie-Carmen), $d 1899-1974. $t Symphonies, $n E. 104, $r do&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le numéro d'ordre (no 1) n'est pas enregistré car le numéro de catalogue thématique est enregistré; la distribution d'exécution n'est pas enregistrée car elle est implicite dans le titre''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Ajouter d'autres éléments au point d'accès autorisé si celui-ci doit être différencié d'un autre point d'accès autorisé (voir [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-6847#rda6-6847 6.27.1.9]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Numéro d'ordre'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer un numéro d'ordre dans un point d'accès autorisé si des œuvres ayant le même titre et la même distribution d'exécution sont numérotées consécutivement dans les sources de référence musicales. Enregistrer un numéro d'ordre si des œuvres ayant le même titre mais des distributions différentes sont numérotées consécutivement dans les sources de référence musicales et que la distribution est omise du point d'accès autorisé en vertu de [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-7730#rda6-7730 6.28.1.9.1 exception a) ii)].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour des directives supplémentaires sur l'enregistrement des numéros d'ordre, voir l'énoncé de politique pour [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27ordre|6.16.1.3.1]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Livrets et œuvres musicales dramatiques'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Voir l'énoncé de politique [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2]] pour établir une distinction entre les points d'accès représentant les livrets et les œuvres musicales dramatiques écrites par la même personne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.9.1, Distribution d'exécution ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Généralités'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Employer des termes du RVMMEM dans le point d'accès autorisé en donnant le terme au pluriel si nécessaire conformément à [https://original.rdatoolkit.org/document.php?id=rdachp6&amp;amp;target=rda6-12602#rda6-12602 6.28.1.9.1 exception d)]. Enregistrer les termes dans cet ordre :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:50px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
a) les voix &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;b) l'instrument à clavier s'il y a plus d'un instrument d'un autre genre&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;c) les autres instruments dans l'ordre de la partition&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;d) la basse continue.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour une œuvre pour un ou plusieurs instruments solistes et un ou plusieurs ensembles accompagnateurs, ajouter le ou les termes désignant le ou les instruments solistes suivis du terme désignant le ou les ensembles accompagnateurs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Baker, David, $d 1931-2016. $t Sonates, $m violon, ensemble à cordes frottées&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:85px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour violon solo et quatuor à cordes''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Nouvelles notices d'autorité'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:25px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Titre privilégié identique et distribution d'exécution inconnue'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
S'il existe deux ou plusieurs œuvres du même compositeur ayant le même titre privilégié et si la distribution d'exécution est inconnue mais que le nombre de parties est connu, enregistrer le nombre de parties après le terme ''interprètes'' dans le point d'accès autorisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Œuvres pour instruments à clavier'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Si un compositeur a écrit plus d'une œuvre d'un type de composition particulier destinée à ou incluant différents instruments à cordes et à clavier, utiliser celui qui prédomine dans les œuvres de ce type lors de l'ajout de la distribution d'exécution. S'il n'est pas clair qu'un instrument prédomine, utiliser le terme ''instrument à clavier''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1#	$a Bach, Carl Phillipp Emanuel, $d 1714-1788. $t Sonates, $m instrument à clavier, $n H. 53, $r ré mineur&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
382 0#	$a clavecin $n 1 $s 1 $2 rvmmem&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;margin-left:0px;text-indent:0px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Pour toutes les œuvres ayant le titre privilégié « Sonates » et écrites pour un instrument à clavier, le terme « instrument à clavier » est enregistré dans le point d'accès autorisé car aucun type d'instrument à clavier spécifique ne prédomine''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notices d'autorité existantes'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Il est possible qu'un terme désignant la distribution d'exécution et employé dans la zone 1XX d'une notice d'autorité existante diffère d'un terme du RVMMEM pour cette voix ou cet instrument. Ne pas modifier le terme désignant la distribution d'exécution dans un point d'accès autorisé RCAA2 ou RDA existant pour qu'il corresponde au terme du RVMMEM, sauf si &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;ce terme est «&amp;amp;nbsp;continuo&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou si &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;le point d'accès autorisé a besoin d'être modifié pour une autre raison.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.1.9.1, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas appliquer la deuxième phrase de l'exception d). Toujours fournir le nombre de parties s'il y en a plus d'une pour un instrument particulier ou une voix particulière, même si le nombre de parties est implicite dans le titre privilégié. Appliquer toutes les autres exceptions sous 6.28.1.9.1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2021-11-18''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.3, Point d'accès autorisé représentant une expression d'une œuvre musicale ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de maintenir l'intégrité actuelle du fichier, lors de la construction d'un point d'accès autorisé pour une expression d'une œuvre musicale, utiliser l'ordre de priorité suivant si plus d'une des caractéristiques d'une expression énumérées ci-dessous doit être enregistrée, en omettant celles qui ne sont pas applicables&amp;amp;nbsp;:&lt;br /&gt;
# Arrangements, transcriptions, etc. (utiliser le terme ''arrangé'')&lt;br /&gt;
# Esquisses&lt;br /&gt;
# Partition de chant&lt;br /&gt;
# Partitions de chant&lt;br /&gt;
# Partition de chœur&lt;br /&gt;
# Partitions de chœur&lt;br /&gt;
# Traductions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Strauss, Richard, $d 1864-1959.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Lieder, $n op. 10. $p Allerseelen; $o arrangé. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a All souls' day = $b Allerseelen : four-part song for mixed voices : op. 10, no. 8 / $c Richard Strauss ; arranged by George Shackely ; original German text by Hermann von Gilm ; English text by George Shackley.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Kodály, Zoltán, $d 1882-1967.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Háry János. $s Partition de chant. $l Anglais&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
245 10 $a Háry János : $b Hungarian folk opera / $c Zoltán Kodály ; Hungarian libretto by Béla Paulini and Zsolt Harsányi ; English version by Olga Latham and Tony Butterfield.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 1# $a Moore, Douglas, $d 1893-1969.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
240 10 $a Œuvre. $k Extraits (Esquisses)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.28.4, Variante de point d'accès représentant une œuvre ou une expression musicale ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Œuvres et expressions musicales dont l'attribution est erronée'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour une œuvre musicale ou une expression d'une œuvre musicale dont l'attribution est erronée, fournir les points d'accès supplémentaires appropriés pour identifier l'œuvre.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-04-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 6.29.1.29, Date de promulgation d'une loi, etc. ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'établissement d'un nouveau point d'accès autorisé pour une loi, etc., s'il existe un point d'accès ayant un titre identique ou semblable mais sans date de promulgation, ajouter les dates de promulgation au nouveau point d'accès ainsi qu'au point d'accès existant. Si la date de promulgation pour le point d'accès existant sans date est inconnue et qu'elle ne peut être facilement déterminée, ou s'il s'avère que le point d'accès existant sans date a été utilisé pour des lois promulguées à des dates différentes, ajouter la date de promulgation uniquement à la loi, etc., en cours d'établissement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a France. $t Code de procédure civile (1806)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a France. $t Code de procédure civile (1975)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le premier point d'accès avait initialement été établi sans date''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Pérou. $t Código procesal penal (1991)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Pérou. $t Código procesal penal (2004)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Le premier point d'accès avait initialement été établi sans date''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:-5px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''''par contre'''''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $t Civil Rights Act of 1964&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a États-Unis. $t Civil Rights Act of 1991&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:50px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Les dates de promulgation ne sont pas ajoutées, puisqu'elles figurent déjà dans les titres privilégiés des lois''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Il est possible, à titre facultatif, d'ajouter la date de promulgation à un nouveau point d'accès autorisé, même s'il n'est pas nécessaire d'établir une distinction entre les points d'accès.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; padding-left:100px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 1# $a Ghana. $t Criminal Procedure Code (1997)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-11-24''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 9 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9.2.2.5.3, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aux fins de l'application de RDA 9.2.2.5.3, la langue privilégiée pour les sources de référence est le français; l'écriture privilégiée est l'écriture latine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les points d'accès autorisés doivent être en écriture latine. Utiliser les [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|tables de romanisation]] approuvées par le PFAN.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Des formes non latines peuvent être enregistrées comme variantes de point d'accès (zones MARC 4XX) pour les langues et écritures suivantes : écriture perso-arabe (p. ex., arabe, persan, ourdou, pachto); hébreu, yiddish; chinois, coréen, japonais; écritures basées sur le cyrillique; et grec.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Applicabilité'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les personnes qui portent des noms dérivés d'une écriture non latine mais qui écrivent dans une langue à écriture latine ne doivent pas être traitées selon cette instruction. La décision selon laquelle la personne écrit dans une langue à écriture latine est basée sur la première ressource cataloguée, c'est-à-dire le fait que le texte de cette ressource a été écrit à l'origine dans une langue à écriture latine. S'il devient évident par la suite que la plupart des œuvres de la personne ont été écrites dans une écriture non latine, appliquer les dispositions du présent énoncé de politique.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2022-04-19''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9.2.2.5.3, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
'''Toutes les langues écrites en écritures non latines (sauf l'hébreu) :''' Appliquer l'alternative lorsque le premier élément du nom privilégié commence par un prénom ou un nom de famille. Si une personne est susceptible de figurer dans les sources de référence générales en français, faire une recherche dans l' ''[https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse]'', le ''Petit Robert'' et l' ''[http://www.universalis-edu.com/ Encyclopædia Universalis]'' dans cet ordre de priorité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si le nom est trouvé dans l' ''[https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse]'' utiliser la forme qui y est trouvée si celle-ci n'en propose qu'une ou la première forme si elle en propose plus d'une dans un même article. Si l' ''[https://www.larousse.fr/ Encyclopédie Larousse]'' propose des formes différentes trouvées dans des articles différents, préférer une forme provenant de l'encyclopédie générale à une forme provenant d'un ouvrage spécialisé. Si le nom n'est pas trouvé dans l'''Encyclopédie Larousse'', faire une recherche dans le ''Petit Robert'' et, le cas échéant, utiliser la forme qui y est trouvée. Sinon, faire une recherche dans l' ''[https://www.universalis.fr/ Encyclopædia Universalis]'' et utiliser la forme qui y est trouvée s'il y en a une. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Les catalogueurs sont encouragés à consulter les trois sources peu importe le résultat des recherches pour identifier des variantes susceptibles de faire l'objet de renvois.) Si le nom ne se trouve dans aucune de ces trois sources, utiliser la forme systématiquement romanisée du nom (c'est-à-dire une forme romanisée à partir d'une [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation| table de romanisation]] acceptée par le PFAN).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exception :'' Pour les personnes célèbres dont le premier élément du nom est un prénom mais qui ne se trouvent pas dans les trois encyclopédies générales de langue française en raison de leur renommée spécialisée, consulter les principales encyclopédies spécialisées (par exemple, ''Le nouveau Théo'' de Michel Dubost et Stanislas Lalanne, le ''Dictionnaire de l'Antiquité'' de Jean Leclant) pour déterminer s'il existe une forme française bien établie du nom. (&amp;amp;laquo;&amp;amp;nbsp;Trouvé dans&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;raquo; la source de référence signifie qu'il existe un article sous le nom de la personne).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les personnes qui ne sont pas incluses dans les trois encyclopédies générales de langue française mentionnées ci-dessus parce que leur renommée est trop récente (par exemple, les nouveaux auteurs, les danseurs, les personnes devenues célèbres récemment en tant que personnalités politiques ou culturelles), suivre cet ordre de préférence :&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le nom est trouvé sous une forme romanisée dans une source en ligne gratuite largement connue et facile à consulter, utiliser cette forme, en particulier lorsqu'une personne qui écrit ou sur laquelle on écrit principalement dans ces écritures fournit une forme romanisée privilégiée du nom dans cette source (par exemple, [https://www.facebook.com/ Facebook], [https://www.linkedin.com/hp LinkedIn]) ou, à défaut d'une telle source, une source générale (par exemple, [https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikip%C3%A9dia:Accueil_principal Wikipédia &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;en français&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
# Consulter les annuaires des encyclopédies, et de grands journaux tels que [https://www.lemonde.fr/ Le monde] et [https://www.lapresse.ca/ La presse] pour déterminer s'il existe une forme française bien établie du nom. &lt;br /&gt;
# Sinon, utiliser la forme systématiquement romanisée du nom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Alphabet hébreu :''' Suivre cet ordre de préférence dans le choix de la vedette pour les personnes dont les noms sont en alphabet hébreu :&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le nom se trouve en évidence sous une forme romanisée dans la ressource &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;en main&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; dans une langue utilisant l'alphabet hébreu, utiliser cette forme.&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le nom est trouvé comme titre d'un article sur la personne dans le ''Dictionnaire encyclopédique du judaïsme'', utiliser cette forme.&lt;br /&gt;
# Si le nom est trouvé sous une forme romanisée dans une source en ligne gratuite largement connue et facile à consulter, utiliser cette forme, en particulier lorsqu'une personne qui écrit ou sur laquelle on écrit principalement en hébreu fournit une forme romanisée privilégiée du nom dans cette source (par exemple, [http://www.facebook.com/ Facebook], [http://www.linkedin.com/ LinkedIn]) ou, à défaut d'une telle source, une source générale (par exemple, [https://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikip%C3%A9dia:Accueil_principal Wikipédia &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;en français&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]).&lt;br /&gt;
# Sinon, utiliser la forme systématiquement romanisée du nom.&lt;br /&gt;
# Cependant,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol style=&amp;quot;list-style-type: lower-alpha; padding-left:30px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si le point d'accès autorisé pour un auteur qui écrit dans une langue utilisant l'alphabet hébreu reflète la forme systématiquement romanisée et qu'une ressource reçue ultérieurement contenant le nom dans une langue utilisant l'alphabet hébreu montre un nom non systématiquement romanisé (c'est-à-dire une « romanisation trouvée »), de manière générale, ne pas modifier le point d'accès autorisé. Cela signifie que les noms systématiquement romanisés ne seront candidats au changement que dans des cas exceptionnels.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Si le point d'accès autorisé pour un auteur qui écrit dans une langue utilisant l'alphabet hébreu reflète une forme non systématiquement romanisée et qu'une ressource reçue ultérieurement contenant le nom dans une langue utilisant l'alphabet hébreu montre une forme non systématiquement romanisée différente (c'est-à-dire une « romanisation trouvée » différente), ne pas changer le point d'accès autorisé jusqu'à ce que la forme différente prédomine clairement.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-03-18''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9.3.4.3, Enregistrement d'une période d'activité d'une personne ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lors de l'enregistrement de la période d'activité, utiliser le terme « activité » et non « époque », « actif » ou « active ». Le terme « activité » doit figurer avant la première date de la période d'activité (par ex., « activité 12e siècle »), sauf si un autre terme tel que « jin shi » est utilisé.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-05-16''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 9.4.1.4.3, Enfants et petits-enfants de personnes royales ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer le titre prince ou princesse ou un titre semblable en français s’il existe un équivalent satisfaisant dans cette langue. Enregistrer également tout autre titre associé au nom en français s’il existe un équivalent satisfaisant dans cette langue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-12-04''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 10 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 10.0, Identification des familles ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Appliquer les instructions de ce chapitre pour une famille spécifique.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En ce qui concerne la politique d’indexation, le point d'accès autorisé provenant de la notice d'autorité de nom d’une famille peut désormais être utilisé comme vedette-matière en plus de la vedette-matière pour les groupes familiaux généraux.  Des notices d’autorité distinctes existent dans Canadiana/PFAN et dans le Répertoire des vedettes-matière (RVM).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Point d'accès RDA dans la notice bibliographique lorsqu'une famille est le créateur'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
100 3# $a Brontë (Famille : $d 1812-  : $c Haworth, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;gt;'''Vedette-matière dans une notice bibliographique lorsqu'une famille est le sujet d'une ressource'''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
600 36 $a Brontë (Famille)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
600 36 $a Brontë (Famille : $d 1812-  : $c Haworth, Angleterre)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour permettre ce changement de pratique, attribuer la valeur « v » dans la zone 008/11 (Système de vedettes-matière), attribuer la valeur « a » dans la zone 008/15 (Utilisation de la vedette) et ne pas fournir de note dans la zone 667 sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière dans la notice d’autorité de nom :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
667 ## $a UTILISATION COMME VEDETTE-MATIÈRE : Ce point d'accès ne peut pas être employé comme  vedette-matière; utiliser une vedette de nom de famille provenant du RVM.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modifier les notices d'autorité de nom existantes pour une famille spécifique lorsqu'elles sont utilisées comme vedette-matière lors du catalogage courant ou lorsque des mises à jour sont nécessaires. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- 008/11 : « n » à « v »&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- 008/15 : « b » à « a »&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Supprimer la note 667 sur l'utilisation comme vedette-matière&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-11-06''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 11 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 11.2, Nom de collectivité ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsque le nom d'un interprète figure conjointement avec le nom d'un groupe d'interprètes, à moins qu'il y ait une preuve du contraire, ne pas considérer de façon générale le nom de la personne comme faisant partie du nom du groupe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemples''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;source&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
J.D. Crowe and the New South&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;point d'accès autorisé&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
110 2#	$a New South (Groupe musical)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-bottom:20px; margin-left:0px; padding-right:25px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;source&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Artie Shaw and his orchestra&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:sans-serif; margin-left:30px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;''Sans nom parce que la collectivité n'est pas nommée''&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-11-24''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 11.2.2.12, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enregistrer une forme translittérée du nom de collectivité dans les points d'accès autorisés, le cas échéant, en utilisant les [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|tables de romanisation]] approuvées par le PFAN. Les formes non latines qui figurent sur la source peuvent être enregistrées comme variantes de point d'accès dans les notices d'autorité (zones MARC 4XX) pour les langues et écritures suivantes : écriture perso-arabe (p. ex., arabe, persan, ourdou, pachto); hébreu, yiddish; chinois, coréen, japonais; écritures basées sur le cyrillique; et grec.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-11-24''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 11.2.2.12, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas appliquer l'alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-11-24''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 16 =&lt;br /&gt;
== 16.2.2.2, Sources d'information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les lieux au Canada, se fonder sur la forme trouvée dans la [https://geonames.nrcan.gc.ca/recherche-de-noms-de-lieux/search Base de données toponymiques du Canada (BDTC)] de Ressources naturelles Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les municipalités au Québec, se fonder sur la forme trouvée dans les sources suivantes (dans cet ordre de préférence) :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# le [https://www.mamh.gouv.qc.ca/repertoire-des-municipalites/ Répertoire des municipalités]&lt;br /&gt;
# la  [http://www.toponymie.gouv.qc.ca/ct/accueil.aspx Banque de noms de lieux du Québec]&lt;br /&gt;
# d'autres sources de référence&lt;br /&gt;
# la manifestation cataloguée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les lieux autres que les municipalités au Québec, se fonder sur la forme trouvée dans la [http://www.toponymie.gouv.qc.ca/ct/accueil.aspx Banque de noms de lieux du Québec].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les comtés aux États-Unis, se fonder sur la forme trouvée dans la version française de Wikipédia.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Pour les pays suivants, se fonder sur la forme trouvée dans les sources énumérées ci-dessous (dans l'ordre de préférence indiqué) si les sources en français sont consultées en vain ou ne sont pas disponibles et que des sources en anglais doivent être consultées :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:30px;&amp;amp;quot;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Pays !! Sources&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Australie || 1. [http://viaf.org/ VIAF]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. [http://www.ga.gov.au/map/names Geoscience Australia Place Name Search]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| États-Unis || 1. Fichier LC/NAF &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. [http://geonames.usgs.gov/pls/gnispublic Geographic Names Information System (GNIS)]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Grande-Bretagne || 1. Fichier LC/NAF &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. The Ordnance Survey gazetteer of Great Britain ou [https://geonames.nga.mil/geonames/GeographicNamesSearch/ &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Geographic Names Server (GNS)&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Nouvelle-Zélande || 1. Fichier LC/NAF &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 2. [http://www.linz.govt.nz/placenames/find-names/nz-gazetteer-official-names New Zealand Gazetteer of Place Names]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-06-18''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 16.2.2.5, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si le nom de lieu est dans une langue écrite en caractères non latins, translittérer le nom en se référant aux [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|tables de romanisation du PFAN]] pour cette langue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-11-04''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== 16.2.2.5, Alternative ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ne pas appliquer l'alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-11-04''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Chapitre 32 =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==32.1, Collectivité en relation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Élément fondamental pour le PFAN'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L'élément Collectivité en relation est fondamental pour le PFAN dans le cas des relations séquentielles entre les collectivités (excepté les congrès) qui se précèdent et se succèdent immédiatement.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ces instructions s'appliquent également aux lieux établis dans le fichier d'autorité Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-05-02''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==32.1.1.3, Enregistrement d’une relation à une collectivité en relation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Noms antérieurs peu susceptibles de faire l’objet de relations'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans certaines circonstances, la recherche peut indiquer que la collectivité en cours d’établissement avait des noms antérieurs qui ne seront probablement jamais nécessaires comme points d'accès dans les notices bibliographiques. S’il est décidé de ne pas créer de notices d’autorité distinctes pour ces noms antérieurs, enregistrer ceux-ci dans la citation de la source avec une indication que des notices distinctes ne sont pas nécessaires, telle que «&amp;amp;nbsp;[aucune publication dans la base de données de [sigle de la bibliothèque]]&amp;amp;nbsp;» ou «&amp;amp;nbsp;[aucun point d’accès trouvé dans OCLC].&amp;amp;nbsp;»&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Exemple :''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;font-family:courier new; margin-left:0px; padding-left:100px; padding-top:10px; padding-bottom:10px; text-indent:-85px; line-height:1.4; border:1px solid #eaecf0; background-color:#f8f9fa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
110 2# $a Télésystème (Firme)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
670 ## $a Site Web de Telesystem, consulté le 29 novembre 2023 : $b Accueil; À propos; Histoire (Télésystème; Serelco [aucune publication dans la base de données de BAnQ] devient en 1978 Télésystème) page Contact (Télésystème; situé à Montréal, Québec)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2024-05-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#toc|''Retour au sommaire'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;amp;#11165;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=143345</id>
		<title>PFAN - News and Updates</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=143345"/>
		<updated>2026-01-15T20:40:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* News */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[fr:PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= News =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''News'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|We are delighted to welcome Marilyne Guertin, from Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of January 13, 2026, she succeeds Marie-Chantal L’Ecuyer-Coelho as BAnQ’s representative and co-chair of the Committee. Marie-Chantal will replace Izidor Cirnatiu, who is leaving the Committee after seven years of involvement. We would like to express our sincere gratitude to Izidor for his commitment to the PFAN. His expertise and dedication were essential to the creation of the Committee and its many achievements. Thank you, Izidor, and welcome, Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome Marie-Chantal L'Écuyer-Coelho of the Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of September 23, 2024, she replaces Daniel Paradis as BAnQ representative and co-chair of the committee.  We would like to thank Daniel Paradis for his great contribution to PFAN. His participation and expertise have greatly influenced the creation and many accomplishments of the committee.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome to Bernard Lemieux of the Université de Montréal on the PFAN Standards Committee. As of March 28, 2023, he officially replaces Philippe Brosseau as one of the representatives of the Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. We warmly thank Philippe for his contribution to the committee. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additions and changes on the PFAN wiki =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the wiki, '''Added content''' is identified by the tag &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. '''Updated content''' is identified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Details for the languages of ISO 15919:2001 (Information and documentation -- Transliteration of Devanagari and related Indian scripts into Latin characters)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Correction of the examples in step 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Participating Libraries&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|Updating respondents]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new French terms (Compilation and Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#377_Associated_language|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_Information|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ on geographic names&lt;br /&gt;
|'''updated content''' : [[FAQ_on_geographic_names|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script|16.2.2.5, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Geographical Names Database]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Removal of the phrases &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfield $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0 or $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0, $1, $3, $4 or $i.&amp;quot; in various fields.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Point 2.c. on variants under step 2 for modifications.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers (field 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)|Question about Canadiana generic numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Bibliographic_file_maintenance_.28BFM.29_.5BNew.5D|Bibliographic file maintenance (BFM)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3.,Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification of the statement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX_-_See_From_Tracings_-_General_Information|Clarification on cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Establishing_certain_entities_in_the_name_authority_file|Establishing certain entities in the name authority file]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|Instructions for name authority records for families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|Instruction for obsolete subfields $l and $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#023_Cluster_ISSN|023 field, Cluster ISSN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|Instruction for subfield $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Recording_Attributes_of_Work_and_Expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Recording Attributes of Work and Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Preferred_Title_Consisting_Solely_of_the_Name_of_One_Type_of_Composition|6.14.2.5.2, Preferred Title Consisting Solely of the Name of One Type of Composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choice_of_language|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choice of language]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Singular_or_Plural_Form|6.14.2.5.2.2, Singular or Plural Form]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Part_Identified_Both_by_a_Number_and_by_a_Title_or_Other_Verbal_Designation.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Part Identified Both by a Number and by a Title or Other Verbal Designation, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Two_or_More_Parts.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Two or More Parts, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.8.3.2C_Complete_Works_of_a_Single_Type_of_Composition_for_One_Specific_Medium_or_Various_Media|6.14.2.8.3, Complete Works of a Single Type of Composition for One Specific Medium or Various Media]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.3.2C_Recording_Medium_of_Performance|6.15.1.3, Recording Medium of Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.5.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.5, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.1, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.3, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Serial_Number|6.16.1.3.1, Serial Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Thematic_Index_Number|6.16.1.3.3, Thematic Index Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_Transcriptions.2C_Etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, Transcriptions, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.27.1.9.2C_Additions_to_access_points_representing_works|6.27.1.9, Additions to access points representing works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2C_General_Guidelines_on_Constructing_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1, General Guidelines on Constructing Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2.2C_Musical_Works_With_Lyrics.2C_Libretto.2C_Text.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Musical Works With Lyrics, Libretto, Text, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.2C_Additional_Elements_in_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1.9, Additional Elements in Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.3.2C_Authorized_Access_Point_Representing_an_Expression_of_Musical_Work|6.28.3, Authorized Access Point Representing an Expression of Musical Work]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.4.2C_Variant_Access_Point_Representing_a_Musical_Work_or_Expression|6.28.4, Variant Access Point Representing a Musical Work or Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Medium_of_performance|Clarification of existing authority records.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.1.3.2C_Recording_Relationship_to_Related_Corporate_Body|32.1.1.3, Recording Relationship to Related Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Establishing certain entities in the name authority file&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Group_1_-_Name_Authority_Group_Headings|Category “Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named” revised for “Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual” (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Suppression of: prefer a notice that already has an 016 to one that doesn't.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_FAQ_on_Compilations_of_Works_by_One_Agent|FAQ on Compilations of Works by One Agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#10.0.2C_Identifying_families|10.0, Identifying families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Children_and_Grandchildren_of_Royal_Persons|9.4.1.4.3, Children and Grandchildren of Royal Persons]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual|Clarifications made in field 008/32, 371, 377 and 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link for Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|New example of how to cite a website subpage]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Editing the note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_on_romanization|FAQ on romanization]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Steering Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Standards Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership_2|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Details about the number to be provided in 667 note at Step 2, Record to be deleted]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|LAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Library_and_Archives_Canada|Link for LAC Wiki]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles|Clarification of certain principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.2C_Related_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|32.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#When_a_corporate_body_has_gone_through_a_name_change.2C_or_several_name_changes.2C_and_there_are_authority_records.2C_in_Canadiana.2C_for_the_other_names.2C_which_relationships_should_be_recorded_in_an_authority_record_.28field_5XX.29.3F_In_which_cases_should_cataloguers_revise_the_authority_records_for_those_related_corporate_bodies.3F|Question 7 on related corporate bodies]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|New respondents for some institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Correction of an example in field 008/15]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Maintenance_of_existing_undifferentiated_records:|Important clarification added in field 008/32 regarding existing undifferentiated records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for the term &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; added to field 1XX of the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|Clarification of associated group name changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for FrPBN-coded authority records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#How_do_I_determine_the_usage_for_an_agent_name_in_WMS.3F|Question 8 on the usage of an agent's name]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New document for the romanization of Hebrew]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification added for field 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#General|008/32, General]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information|Clarification for counties in the United States]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#386_Creator.2Fcontributor_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|Details added to field 046]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Details added for an URI included in a 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#PFAN_eligibility_criteria_.5BNew.5D|Eligibility criteria and expectations of new members]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Correction of the PQ numbers for French Canadian literature]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|New instruction for subfields $q and $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#053_LC_classification_number_.5BNew.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#065_Other_Classification_Number_.5BNew.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|Clarification for the second indicator]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Amharic table]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#375_Gender|Do not use this field]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link to &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 on cancelled or hybrid conference]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarifications added for fields 046 and 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/032&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Records_coded_as_undifferentiated_that_actually_represent_only_one_identity|Clarification added for records coded &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; by mistake]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation|New document on the romanization of Yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#043_Geographic_Area_Code_.5BNew.5D|Local Geographic area code]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_of_Promulgation_of_a_Law.2C_Etc._.5BNew.5D|6.29.1.29, Date of Promulgation of a Law, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2C_Name_of_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|11.2, Name of Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information_.5BNEW.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources of information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)#FAQ_on_geographic_names|FAQ on geographic names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation_.5BNew.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name9|008/32]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Two new 667 field examples (for undifferentiated name authority records representing a single identity and those undergoing partial modifications)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|Cross-references (4XX and 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_on_Canadiana_numbers_(field_016)#Who_do_I_contact_if_I_need_a_new_list_of_Canadiana_numbers_for_field_016.3F_.5BNew.5D|Question 4 on obtaining a new list of Canadian numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new terms (Lyrics and Libretto)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Clarifications added for Chinese]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#385_Audience_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications_.5BNEW.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles_.5BNEW.5D|General Principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNEW.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|022]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|024]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|046]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#335_Extension_Plan_.5BNew.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|375]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|384]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|385]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Char|386]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|510]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#530_See_Also_From_Tracing-Uniform_Title|530]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Two new languages (Korean and Japanese)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Add an instruction to 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Project_2._Records_created_and_revised_as_part_of_the_Universities_Mentoring_Project|Clarifications added for the Universities Mentoring Project ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D|Simple 4XX &amp;quot;see&amp;quot; cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Membership of the Steering Committee]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|New article on PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Addition of romanization tables from BnF (Armenian, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Georgian, Macedonian, Russian, Ukrainian]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation|RVM examples are replaced by RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Clarifications added for the instruction on 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions|Clarifications added on point 3 and example 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Correction of an example]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for records derived from LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_records_derived_from_LC.2FNAF|Clarification of the example of a 670 field]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Discussion Lists&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|New PFAN-MUSIQUE-L discussion list.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Added information in different fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Core RDA Elements for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Core_RDA_Elements_for_PFAN|Additional information under Related Corporate Bodies element.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Mandatory MARC Fields for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Mandatory_MARC_Fields_for_PFAN|Added information in 510, 511, 551 fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New introduction.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2025-11-21''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=143344</id>
		<title>PFAN - News and Updates</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_News_and_Updates&amp;diff=143344"/>
		<updated>2026-01-15T20:39:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* News */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[fr:PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= News =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''News'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|We are delighted to welcome Marilyne Guertin, from Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of January 13, 2026, she succeeds Marie-Chantal L’Ecuyer-Coelho as BAnQ’s representative and co-chair of the Committee. Marie-Chantal will replace Izidor Cirnatiu, who is leaving the Committee after seven years of involvement. We would like to express our sincere gratitude to Izidor for his commitment to the PFAN. His expertise and dedication were essential to the creation of the Committee and its many achievements. Thank you, Izidor, and welcome, Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome Marie-Chantal L'Écuyer-Coelho of the Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec to the PFAN Standards Committee. As of September 23, 2024, she replaces Daniel Paradis as BAnQ representative and co-chair of the committee.  We would like to thank Daniel Paradis for his great contribution to PFAN. His participation and expertise have greatly influenced the creation and many accomplishments of the committee.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Welcome to Bernard Lemieux of the Université de Montréal on the PFAN Standards Committee. As of March 28, 2023, he officially replaces Philippe Brosseau as one of the representatives of the Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. We warmly thank Philippe for his contribution to the committee. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2024-10-09''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Additions and changes on the PFAN wiki =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the wiki, '''Added content''' is identified by the tag &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NEW]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. '''Updated content''' is identified by &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Details for the languages of ISO 15919:2001 (Information and documentation -- Transliteration of Devanagari and related Indian scripts into Latin characters)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Correction of the examples in step 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Participating Libraries&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|Updating respondents]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new French terms (Compilation and Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#377_Associated_language|Clarification]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_Information|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ on geographic names&lt;br /&gt;
|'''updated content''' : [[FAQ_on_geographic_names|Link to Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script|16.2.2.5, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Geographical Names Database]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Removal of the phrases &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfield $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0 or $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consult the Standards Committee before using subfields $0, $1, $3, $4 or $i.&amp;quot; in various fields.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Point 2.c. on variants under step 2 for modifications.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers (field 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)|Question about Canadiana generic numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Bibliographic_file_maintenance_.28BFM.29_.5BNew.5D|Bibliographic file maintenance (BFM)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/9.2.2.5.3.,Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification of the statement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#4XX_-_See_From_Tracings_-_General_Information|Clarification on cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Establishing_certain_entities_in_the_name_authority_file|Establishing certain entities in the name authority file]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F11_Subject_heading_system.2Fthesaurus|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Instructions for family names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#NARs_and_subject_usage|Instructions for name authority records for families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|Instruction for obsolete subfields $l and $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#023_Cluster_ISSN|023 field, Cluster ISSN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#376_Family_Information|Instruction for subfield $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Recording_Attributes_of_Work_and_Expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Recording Attributes of Work and Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Preferred_Title_Consisting_Solely_of_the_Name_of_One_Type_of_Composition|6.14.2.5.2, Preferred Title Consisting Solely of the Name of One Type of Composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choice_of_language|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choice of language]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Singular_or_Plural_Form|6.14.2.5.2.2, Singular or Plural Form]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Part_Identified_Both_by_a_Number_and_by_a_Title_or_Other_Verbal_Designation.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Part Identified Both by a Number and by a Title or Other Verbal Designation, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Two_or_More_Parts.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Two or More Parts, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.14.2.8.3.2C_Complete_Works_of_a_Single_Type_of_Composition_for_One_Specific_Medium_or_Various_Media|6.14.2.8.3, Complete Works of a Single Type of Composition for One Specific Medium or Various Media]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.3.2C_Recording_Medium_of_Performance|6.15.1.3, Recording Medium of Performance]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.5.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.5, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.1, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Optional_Omission|6.15.1.6.3, Optional Omission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Serial_Number|6.16.1.3.1, Serial Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Thematic_Index_Number|6.16.1.3.3, Thematic Index Number]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_Transcriptions.2C_Etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, Transcriptions, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.27.1.9.2C_Additions_to_access_points_representing_works|6.27.1.9, Additions to access points representing works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2C_General_Guidelines_on_Constructing_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1, General Guidelines on Constructing Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.2.2C_Musical_Works_With_Lyrics.2C_Libretto.2C_Text.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Musical Works With Lyrics, Libretto, Text, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.2C_Additional_Elements_in_Authorized_Access_Points_Representing_Musical_Works|6.28.1.9, Additional Elements in Authorized Access Points Representing Musical Works]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.3.2C_Authorized_Access_Point_Representing_an_Expression_of_Musical_Work|6.28.3, Authorized Access Point Representing an Expression of Musical Work]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.4.2C_Variant_Access_Point_Representing_a_Musical_Work_or_Expression|6.28.4, Variant Access Point Representing a Musical Work or Expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Medium_of_performance|Clarification of existing authority records.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.1.3.2C_Recording_Relationship_to_Related_Corporate_Body|32.1.1.3, Recording Relationship to Related Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Establishing certain entities in the name authority file&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Group_1_-_Name_Authority_Group_Headings|Category “Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named” revised for “Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual” (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Suppression of: prefer a notice that already has an 016 to one that doesn't.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_FAQ_on_Compilations_of_Works_by_One_Agent|FAQ on Compilations of Works by One Agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#10.0.2C_Identifying_families|10.0, Identifying families]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Children_and_Grandchildren_of_Royal_Persons|9.4.1.4.3, Children and Grandchildren of Royal Persons]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual|Clarifications made in field 008/32, 371, 377 and 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link for Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|New example of how to cite a website subpage]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Editing the note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_on_romanization|FAQ on romanization]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Steering Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Standards Committee&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership_2|Past members section]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Details about the number to be provided in 667 note at Step 2, Record to be deleted]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|LAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Library_and_Archives_Canada|Link for LAC Wiki]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles|Clarification of certain principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#32.1.2C_Related_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|32.1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#When_a_corporate_body_has_gone_through_a_name_change.2C_or_several_name_changes.2C_and_there_are_authority_records.2C_in_Canadiana.2C_for_the_other_names.2C_which_relationships_should_be_recorded_in_an_authority_record_.28field_5XX.29.3F_In_which_cases_should_cataloguers_revise_the_authority_records_for_those_related_corporate_bodies.3F|Question 7 on related corporate bodies]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Participating_Libraries|New respondents for some institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F15_Heading_use-subject_added_entry|Correction of an example in field 008/15]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Maintenance_of_existing_undifferentiated_records:|Important clarification added in field 008/32 regarding existing undifferentiated records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for the term &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; added to field 1XX of the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#373_Associated_group|Clarification of associated group name changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification for FrPBN-coded authority records]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[FAQ_-_General#How_do_I_determine_the_usage_for_an_agent_name_in_WMS.3F|Question 8 on the usage of an agent's name]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New document for the romanization of Hebrew]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarification added for field 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''': [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#General|008/32, General]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''': [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information|Clarification for counties in the United States]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#386_Creator.2Fcontributor_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|Details added to field 046]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Format_of_670_fields|Details added for an URI included in a 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#PFAN_eligibility_criteria_.5BNew.5D|Eligibility criteria and expectations of new members]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Correction of the PQ numbers for French Canadian literature]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#046_Special_coded_dates|New instruction for subfields $q and $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#053_LC_classification_number_.5BNew.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#065_Other_Classification_Number_.5BNew.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#053_LC_Classification_Number|Clarification for the second indicator]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Amharic table]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#375_Gender|Do not use this field]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Useful External Resources&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Useful_External_Resources|Link to &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 on cancelled or hybrid conference]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|Presentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Verifications to Make to an Existing Record&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Verifications_to_Make_to_an_Existing_Record|Clarifications added for fields 046 and 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/008/032&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Records_coded_as_undifferentiated_that_actually_represent_only_one_identity|Clarification added for records coded &amp;quot;&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;quot; by mistake]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation|New document on the romanization of Yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#043_Geographic_Area_Code_.5BNew.5D|Local Geographic area code]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_of_Promulgation_of_a_Law.2C_Etc._.5BNew.5D|6.29.1.29, Date of Promulgation of a Law, Etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2C_Name_of_Corporate_Body_.5BNew.5D|11.2, Name of Corporate Body]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Names_found_in_a_non-preferred_script_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Names found in a non-preferred script]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page or title'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_of_information_.5BNEW.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources of information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Frequently_Asked_Questions_(FAQ)#FAQ_on_geographic_names|FAQ on geographic names]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation_.5BNew.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name9|008/32]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#370_Associated_place|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/667 Field Examples&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_667_Field_Examples|Two new 667 field examples (for undifferentiated name authority records representing a single identity and those undergoing partial modifications)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions_.5BNEW.5D|Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ - General&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[FAQ_-_General#Are_we_expected_to_change_the_authorized_access_points_for_an_agent.E2.80.99s_works_and_expressions_.28such_as_authorized_access_points_for_an_author.E2.80.99s_or_a_composer.E2.80.99s_works.29.2C_if_the_preferred_form_for_the_agent_alone_is_different_from_the_form_used_in_the_access_points_for_the_works_and_expressions.3F|Question 4 on changing the authorized access points for an agent's works and expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#016_National_Bibliographic_Agency_Control_Number|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#008.2F32_Undifferentiated_personal_name|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Cross-references_.284XX_and_5XX.29_.5BNew.5D|Cross-references (4XX and 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)/FAQ on Canadiana numbers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[FAQ_on_Canadiana_numbers_(field_016)#Who_do_I_contact_if_I_need_a_new_list_of_Canadiana_numbers_for_field_016.3F_.5BNew.5D|Question 4 on obtaining a new list of Canadian numbers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Non-exhaustive List of Qualifiers&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Non-exhaustive_List_of_Qualifiers|Two new terms (Lyrics and Libretto)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Clarifications added for Chinese]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#385_Audience_characteristics_.5BNew.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications_.5BNEW.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#General_Principles_.5BNEW.5D|General Principles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNEW.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#022_International_Standard_Serial_Number|022]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#024_Other_Standard_Identifier|024]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#046_Special_Coded_Dates|046]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#335_Extension_Plan_.5BNew.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#375_Gender|375]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#384_Key|384]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#385_Audience_Characteristics|385]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#386_Creator.2FContributor_Char|386]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#4XX_Fields_Tracings_and_References_-_General_Information|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#5XX_Fields_Tracing_and_References_-_General_Information|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#500_See_Also_From_Tracing-Personal_Name|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#510_See_Also_From_Tracing-Corporate_Name|510]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#530_See_Also_From_Tracing-Uniform_Title|530]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#551_See_Also_From_Tracing-Geographic_Name|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Two new languages (Korean and Japanese)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Add an instruction to 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual - MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#511_See_Also_From_Tracing-Meeting_Name|511]], [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement#672_Title_Related_to_the_Entity|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#Project_2._Records_created_and_revised_as_part_of_the_Universities_Mentoring_Project|Clarifications added for the Universities Mentoring Project ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Participant's Manual&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Participant%27s_Manual#Simple_4XX_.22see.22_cross-references_.5BNew.5D|Simple 4XX &amp;quot;see&amp;quot; cross-references]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Membership|Membership of the Steering Committee]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|About PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications|New article on PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|PFAN Policy Statements&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_PFAN_Policy_Statements#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNew.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|Addition of romanization tables from BnF (Armenian, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Georgian, Macedonian, Russian, Ukrainian]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#388_Time_Period_of_Creation|RVM examples are replaced by RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedures for Duplicates&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_Duplicates|Clarifications added for the instruction on 035 field in step 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Procedure for partial modification of records describing works and expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedure_for_partial_modification_of_records_describing_works_and_expressions|Clarifications added on point 3 and example 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Name Authority Manual/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual#670_Sources_found|Correction of an example]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Other Documentation/Procedures for records derived from LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Procedures_for_records_derived_from_LC.2FNAF|Clarification of the example of a 670 field]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Discussion Lists&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|New PFAN-MUSIQUE-L discussion list.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|MARC 21 Supplement&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Name_Authority_Manual_-_MARC_21_Supplement|Added information in different fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Core RDA Elements for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Core_RDA_Elements_for_PFAN|Additional information under Related Corporate Bodies element.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Mandatory MARC Fields for PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Updated content''' : [[PFAN_-_Mandatory_MARC_Fields_for_PFAN|Added information in 510, 511, 551 fields.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Other documentation/Romanization&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Added content''' : [[PFAN_-_Other_Documentation#Romanization|New introduction.]] &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2025-11-21''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program&amp;diff=143343</id>
		<title>PFAN - Francophone Name Authority Program</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program&amp;diff=143343"/>
		<updated>2026-01-15T20:32:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Participating Libraries */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!-- {{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by A. Dunnett, LAC)}}  --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Programme francophone des autorités de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
= About Francophone Name Authority Program (PFAN) =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Established in 2020 by [https://www.bac-lac.gc.ca/eng/Pages/home.aspx Library and Archives Canada], [https://www.banq.qc.ca/accueil/ Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec] and 15 Quebec francophone libraries from the [https://biblios-uni-qc.org/ Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec], the Francophone Name Authority Program (PFAN) is the programme by which participating institutions contribute to the [https://library-archives.canada.ca/eng/services/services-libraries/cataloguing/pages/canadian-name-authorities.aspx Canadiana name authority file] by supplying authority records for agents, places, works and expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about PFAN, please visit the [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications_.5BNEW.5D|Communications section]] or contact [Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--For any information on new features and changes added to the wiki, please consult  [[PFAN - Additions and changes to wiki|Additions and changes to wiki]].--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--Hidden update date: 2022-04-29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General Principles =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The Canadiana name authority file is hosted by OCLC.&lt;br /&gt;
# There is only one French authority file in WMS, Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
# Contributions of authority records in the Canadiana file by participants of the program must be performed using the WorldShare Record Manager service using the WMS platform.&lt;br /&gt;
# The governance of the program is ensured by a Steering Committee, and the standards and practices are stipulated by the Standards Committee.&lt;br /&gt;
# The PFAN standards and practices guide the creation of authorities and are based on those created by NACO. These are available in French. Libraries participating in the program commit to following the rules for contributions devised by the Standards Committee.&lt;br /&gt;
# Participating libraries are responsible for training their staff and could be called upon to validate the quality of authority records contributed by other member libraries.&lt;br /&gt;
# PFAN is open to all French-language partners &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;according to the established criteria.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# This file is created collaboratively and the authority records must be &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;free of local practices.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A new partner cannot &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;batch&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; load authority records from their local file even if these are unique.&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Membership is free.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-04-18 &amp;lt;!--(2023-04-18)--&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PFAN eligibility criteria =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Be a French-language institution or library&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;An institution that serves a French-speaking community and has the capacity to participate in the program in French&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Not be a fee-for-service institution or agency&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Be able to create name authority records &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Be able to create authority records in MARC21 format&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Be committed to following the policies established by the PFAN and the standards issued by the Standards Committee&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Have a subscription to an OCLC product for authority processing&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Subscription to the RDA Toolkit&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-09-20 &amp;lt;!--(2023-09-20)--&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Expectations of new members =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Share the following values:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Working for the user&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Work collaboratively&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Value commitments&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Reconcile institutional and collective interests&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Commit to:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Respect the general principles&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Harmonize local practices with those of PFAN &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Participate in PFAN committees in French&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assume part of the development costs, if necessary (no membership fees are charged)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-09-20 &amp;lt;!--(2023-09-20)--&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Steering Committee =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/1/1f/Comit%C3%A9Directeur-Mandat.pdf Mandate]===&lt;br /&gt;
[PDF, 48 Ko] ([[:File:Comit%C3%A9Directeur-Mandat.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
* Project planning for the Francophone Name Authority Program &lt;br /&gt;
* Supervision and administration of the Francophone Name Authority Program / Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2020-12-08 &amp;lt;!--(2020-12-08)--&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Membership ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Isabelle Dallaire, HEC Montréal, 2022-&lt;br /&gt;
* Thi Bao Tran Phan, Library and Archives Canada, 2022-&lt;br /&gt;
* Danielle Poirier,  Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:15px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable  mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ class=&amp;quot;nowrap&amp;quot; | '''Past&amp;amp;nbsp;members'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal, Université de Montréal, 2019-2022&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Caitlin Horrall, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, 2019-2022&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-03-31''&amp;lt;!--(2023-03-31)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Planning ===&lt;br /&gt;
[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/9/9e/PFAN_-_Planification_2020-2022.pdf 2020-2022] [PDF, 62 Ko] ([[:File:PFAN_-_Planification_2020-2022.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2021-07-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Standards Committee =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/fa/Comit%C3%A9DesNormes-Mandat.pdf Mandate]===&lt;br /&gt;
[PDF, 74 Ko] ([[:File:Comit%C3%A9DesNormes-Mandat.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2021-07-28''&amp;lt;!--(2021-07-28)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Membership ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Bernard Bérubé, Library and Archives Canada, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
* Julie Gauthier, Université Laval, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Marilyne Guertin, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, co-chair, 2026-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Marie-Chantal L'Ecuyer-Coelho, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2024-&lt;br /&gt;
* Bernard Lemieux, Université de Montréal, 2023-&lt;br /&gt;
* Nathalie Mainville, Library and Archives Canada, co-chair, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ class=&amp;quot;nowrap&amp;quot; | '''Anciens&amp;amp;nbsp;membres'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Philippe Brosseau, Université du Québec à Montréal, 2019-2023&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Izidor Cirnatiu,  Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2019-2026&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Daniel Paradis,  Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, co-chair, 2019-2024.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-01-15''&amp;lt;!--(2026-01-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Participating Libraries =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Note that the abbreviations &amp;quot;BAC&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;BAnQ&amp;quot; are not preceded by an article. For example, &amp;quot;Fichier interne de BAnQ&amp;quot; and not &amp;quot;Fichier interne de la BAnQ&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Institution&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Symbol&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Abbreviation to use&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; in field 670&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Name of person responding &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; on behalf of the institution&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
|CaOONL&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC*&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca Nathalie Mainville]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMBN&lt;br /&gt;
|BAnQ*&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:marilyne.guertin@banq.qc.ca &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Marilyne Guertin&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|École nationale d'administration publique (ENAP)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQUQEN&lt;br /&gt;
|ENAP&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:hardy.julie@enap.ca Julie Hardy]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|HEC Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMHE&lt;br /&gt;
|HEC&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:isabelle.dallaire@hec.ca Isabelle Dallaire]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Institut national de la recherche scientifique (INRS)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQINRS&lt;br /&gt;
|INRS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:anne.robitaille@ete.inrs.ca Anne Robitaille]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Polytechnique Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMEP&lt;br /&gt;
|PolyMtl&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:irina.gherasim@polymtl.ca Irina Gherasim]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université TÉLUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQUQT&lt;br /&gt;
|TÉLUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:bahija.talal@teluq.ca Bahija Talal]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université de Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMU&lt;br /&gt;
|UdeM&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:pierre-etienne.lepine@umontreal.ca Pierre-Étienne Lépine]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université de Sherbrooke&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQSHERU&lt;br /&gt;
|UdeS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:troy.pouliot@usherbrooke.ca Troy Pouliot]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQLA&lt;br /&gt;
|ULaval&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:julie.gauthier@bibl.ulaval.ca Julie Gauthier]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Chicoutimi (UQAC)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQCU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAC&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Luc-c_Tremblay@uqac.ca Luc Tremblay]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Montréal (UQAM)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAM&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:bilodeau.robert@uqam.ca Robert Georges Bilodeau]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Rimouski (UQAR)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQRU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAR&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:suzie_pelletier@uqar.ca Suzie   Pelletier]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec en Abitibi-Témiscamingue (UQAT)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQRUQR&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAT&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:camee.toupin-lefebvre@uqat.ca Camée Toupin-Lefebvre]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec en Outaouais (UQO)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQHU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQO&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:samuel.ouellette@uqo.ca Samuel Ouellette]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Trois-Rivières (UQTR)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQTU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQTR&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Lucie.Hamelin2@uqtr.ca Lucie Hamelin]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|École de technologie supérieure (ÉTS)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMUQET&lt;br /&gt;
|ÉTS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Marie-Renee.DeSeveLeboeuf@etsmtl.ca Marie-Renée De Sève Leboeuf]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-01-15''&amp;lt;!--(2026-01-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Communications =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Year&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Title&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Author&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2020&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.bac-lac.gc.ca/eng/about-us/publications/signatures/Pages/signatures-fall-winter-2020.aspx#art07 First Steps for the Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Bernard Bérubé &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Nathalie Mainville&lt;br /&gt;
|Article published in ''Signatures'', Fall-Winter 2020, p. 12-13.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2020&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/0/00/PFAN_CPI2020.pdf Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Caitlin Horrall &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Presentation given at the Congrès des professionnel·le·s de l'information, Fall 2020.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.affairesuniversitaires.ca/actualites/actualites-article/le-programme-francophone-des-autorites-de-nom-prend-forme/?utm_source=Affaires+universitaires+-+Bulletin&amp;amp;utm_campaign=49bb362a0f-EMAIL_CAMPAIGN_2021_05_20&amp;amp;utm_medium=email&amp;amp;utm_term=0_3acf7cc134-49bb362a0f-426947657 Le Programme francophone des autorités de nom prend forme]&lt;br /&gt;
|Catherine Couturier&lt;br /&gt;
|Article published on ''Affaires universitaires'' webpage, 20 may 2021.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.ifla.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/05/assets/classification-and-indexing/newsletters/ifla_metadata_newsletter_june_2021_updated.pdf First Steps for the Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Bernard Bérubé &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Nathalie Mainville&lt;br /&gt;
|Article published in ''Metadata Newsletter'', June 2021, p. 14-15.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8f/PFAN_ACIGJuly2021.pdf The Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Caitlin Horrall &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Presentation given to ALA'S Authority Control Interest Group, July 2021.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://doi.org/10.7202/1092261ar Le Programme francophone des autorités de noms : une collaboration prometteuse]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal&lt;br /&gt;
|Article published in ''Documentation et bibliothèques'', vol. 68, no 3 (juillet-septembre 2022), p. 5-13.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/59/PFAN_AIFBD_vf_%28002%29.pdf Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Thi Bao Tran Phan &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Presentation given to the congrès de l'Association internationale francophone des bibliothécaires et documentalistes (AIFBD), August 2023.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-10-24''&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Discussion Lists =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PFAN-L ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== About the Discussion List ===&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L is a bilingual discussion list established by the Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) to participating libraries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
List participants are encouraged to use the list to:&lt;br /&gt;
* provide information of interest to PFAN participating libraries;&lt;br /&gt;
* ask questions and propose solutions to other PFAN libraries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the listserv web interface to configure your user profile, to use basic listserv commands and to search discussion list archives.  Please visit: https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For questions and concerns relating to the list, please contact: [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Archives:  https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa?A0=PFAN-L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List Commands ===&lt;br /&gt;
To send a message to all of the people currently subscribed to the list, just send mail to [Mailto:PFAN-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA PFAN-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], which is called the list address. You must never try to send  any command to that  address, as it would be distributed to all the  people who have subscribed. All commands must be  sent to  [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], which is  the LISTSERV address. It is important to understand the difference between the two.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may leave the list at any  time by sending a &amp;quot;'''SIGNOFF PFAN-L'''&amp;quot; command to [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA].  You can also tell LISTSERV  how you want it to confirm the receipt of  messages you send to the list. To send yourself a copy of your own  messages, send a &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L REPRO'''&amp;quot; command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, to have LISTSERV send  you a short acknowledgement instead of the entire message, send a  &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L ACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; command. Finally, you can turn  off acknowledgements completely with the  &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L NOACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L uses a UNIX-based LISTSERV software. Information about advanced commands for LISTSERV can be retrieved by sending the following message:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To: '''LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Message: '''INFO REFCARD'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;All commands to LISTSERV should be in the body of the message.  Since the software is English, all commands to LISTSERV must be in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SIGNOFF PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To remove your name from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
'''INFO PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain information about PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L NOMAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* This will stop sending you PFAN-L postings until your reset your status - please use this when you go on holidays or will not be taking email regularly.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L MAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* This will reset your status and allow you to begin receiving messages from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L DIGEST''' &lt;br /&gt;
* To receive a message per day that contains all the daily postings to PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L REPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To get a copy of a message that you post to PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L NOREPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To NOT receive a copy of what you post to PFAN-L (this is the default).&lt;br /&gt;
'''HELP PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain a list of commands.&lt;br /&gt;
'''INDEX PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain an index of what has been posted to PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''REVIEW PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To get information about a list including subscribers.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L CONCEAL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To conceal your name from anyone using the REVIEW command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PFAN-MUSIQUE-L ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== About the Discussion List ===&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-MUSIQUE-L is a bilingual discussion list established by the Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) for the participants who are interested in questions related to the authority control of entities associated with musical resources in the Canadiana file..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
List participants are encouraged to use the list to:&lt;br /&gt;
* share information of interest to PFAN participating libraries that create or revise authority records for entities associated with musical resources;&lt;br /&gt;
* ask questions concerning the authority control of entities associated with musical resources and to propose solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the listserv web interface to configure your user profile, to use basic listserv commands and to search discussion list archives.  Please visit: https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For questions and concerns relating to the list, please contact: [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Archives:  https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa?A0=PFAN-MUSIQUE-L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List Commands ===&lt;br /&gt;
To send a message to all of the people currently subscribed to the list, just send mail to [Mailto:PFAN-MUSIQUE-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA PFAN-MUSIQUE-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], which is called the list address. You must never try to send  any command to that  address, as it would be distributed to all the  people who have subscribed. All commands must be  sent to  [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], which is  the LISTSERV address. It is important to understand the difference between the two.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may leave the list at any  time by sending a &amp;quot;'''SIGNOFF PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&amp;quot; command to [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA].  You can also tell LISTSERV  how you want it to confirm the receipt of  messages you send to the list. To send yourself a copy of your own  messages, send a &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L REPRO'''&amp;quot; command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, to have LISTSERV send  you a short acknowledgement instead of the entire message, send a  &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L ACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; command. Finally, you can turn  off acknowledgements completely with the  &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L uses a UNIX-based LISTSERV software. Information about advanced commands for LISTSERV can be retrieved by sending the following message:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To: '''LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Message: '''INFO REFCARD'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;All commands to LISTSERV should be in the body of the message.  Since the software is English, all commands to LISTSERV must be in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SIGNOFF PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To remove your name from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
'''INFO PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain information about PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOMAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* This will stop sending you PFAN-L postings until your reset your status - please use this when you go on holidays or will not be taking email regularly.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L MAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* This will reset your status and allow you to begin receiving messages from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L DIGEST''' &lt;br /&gt;
* To receive a message per day that contains all the daily postings to PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L REPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To get a copy of a message that you post to PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOREPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To NOT receive a copy of what you post to PFAN-MUSIQUE-L (this is the default).&lt;br /&gt;
'''HELP PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain a list of commands.&lt;br /&gt;
'''INDEX PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain an index of what has been posted to PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''REVIEW PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To get information about a list including subscribers.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L CONCEAL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To conceal your name from anyone using the REVIEW command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2022-12-10''&amp;lt;!--(2022-12-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Contact PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
Please send all questions to [Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- The following two lines are here for test purposes only.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Name Authority Manual v 1 13.docx|LAC Name Authority Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
([[:File:Name_Authority_Manual_v_1_13.docx |Versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program&amp;diff=143342</id>
		<title>PFAN - Francophone Name Authority Program</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program&amp;diff=143342"/>
		<updated>2026-01-15T20:31:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Membership */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;!-- {{In use| 24 h (Currently being edited by A. Dunnett, LAC)}}  --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:PFAN - Programme francophone des autorités de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Tabs}}&lt;br /&gt;
= About Francophone Name Authority Program (PFAN) =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Established in 2020 by [https://www.bac-lac.gc.ca/eng/Pages/home.aspx Library and Archives Canada], [https://www.banq.qc.ca/accueil/ Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec] and 15 Quebec francophone libraries from the [https://biblios-uni-qc.org/ Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec], the Francophone Name Authority Program (PFAN) is the programme by which participating institutions contribute to the [https://library-archives.canada.ca/eng/services/services-libraries/cataloguing/pages/canadian-name-authorities.aspx Canadiana name authority file] by supplying authority records for agents, places, works and expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information about PFAN, please visit the [[PFAN_-_Francophone_Name_Authority_Program#Communications_.5BNEW.5D|Communications section]] or contact [Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--For any information on new features and changes added to the wiki, please consult  [[PFAN - Additions and changes to wiki|Additions and changes to wiki]].--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--Hidden update date: 2022-04-29--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General Principles =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# The Canadiana name authority file is hosted by OCLC.&lt;br /&gt;
# There is only one French authority file in WMS, Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
# Contributions of authority records in the Canadiana file by participants of the program must be performed using the WorldShare Record Manager service using the WMS platform.&lt;br /&gt;
# The governance of the program is ensured by a Steering Committee, and the standards and practices are stipulated by the Standards Committee.&lt;br /&gt;
# The PFAN standards and practices guide the creation of authorities and are based on those created by NACO. These are available in French. Libraries participating in the program commit to following the rules for contributions devised by the Standards Committee.&lt;br /&gt;
# Participating libraries are responsible for training their staff and could be called upon to validate the quality of authority records contributed by other member libraries.&lt;br /&gt;
# PFAN is open to all French-language partners &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;according to the established criteria.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# This file is created collaboratively and the authority records must be &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;free of local practices.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# A new partner cannot &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;batch&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; load authority records from their local file even if these are unique.&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Membership is free.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-04-18 &amp;lt;!--(2023-04-18)--&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= PFAN eligibility criteria =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Be a French-language institution or library&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;An institution that serves a French-speaking community and has the capacity to participate in the program in French&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Not be a fee-for-service institution or agency&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Be able to create name authority records &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Be able to create authority records in MARC21 format&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Be committed to following the policies established by the PFAN and the standards issued by the Standards Committee&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Have a subscription to an OCLC product for authority processing&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Subscription to the RDA Toolkit&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-09-20 &amp;lt;!--(2023-09-20)--&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Expectations of new members =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Share the following values:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Working for the user&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Work collaboratively&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Value commitments&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Reconcile institutional and collective interests&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Commit to:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Respect the general principles&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Harmonize local practices with those of PFAN &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Participate in PFAN committees in French&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assume part of the development costs, if necessary (no membership fees are charged)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-09-20 &amp;lt;!--(2023-09-20)--&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Steering Committee =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/1/1f/Comit%C3%A9Directeur-Mandat.pdf Mandate]===&lt;br /&gt;
[PDF, 48 Ko] ([[:File:Comit%C3%A9Directeur-Mandat.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--&lt;br /&gt;
* Project planning for the Francophone Name Authority Program &lt;br /&gt;
* Supervision and administration of the Francophone Name Authority Program / Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2020-12-08 &amp;lt;!--(2020-12-08)--&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Membership ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Isabelle Dallaire, HEC Montréal, 2022-&lt;br /&gt;
* Thi Bao Tran Phan, Library and Archives Canada, 2022-&lt;br /&gt;
* Danielle Poirier,  Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:15px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable  mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ class=&amp;quot;nowrap&amp;quot; | '''Past&amp;amp;nbsp;members'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal, Université de Montréal, 2019-2022&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Caitlin Horrall, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, 2019-2022&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-03-31''&amp;lt;!--(2023-03-31)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Planning ===&lt;br /&gt;
[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/9/9e/PFAN_-_Planification_2020-2022.pdf 2020-2022] [PDF, 62 Ko] ([[:File:PFAN_-_Planification_2020-2022.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2021-07-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Standards Committee =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/fa/Comit%C3%A9DesNormes-Mandat.pdf Mandate]===&lt;br /&gt;
[PDF, 74 Ko] ([[:File:Comit%C3%A9DesNormes-Mandat.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2021-07-28''&amp;lt;!--(2021-07-28)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Membership ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Bernard Bérubé, Library and Archives Canada, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
* Julie Gauthier, Université Laval, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Marilyne Guertin, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, co-chair, 2026-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Marie-Chantal L'Ecuyer-Coelho, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2024-&lt;br /&gt;
* Bernard Lemieux, Université de Montréal, 2023-&lt;br /&gt;
* Nathalie Mainville, Library and Archives Canada, co-chair, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ class=&amp;quot;nowrap&amp;quot; | '''Anciens&amp;amp;nbsp;membres'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Philippe Brosseau, Université du Québec à Montréal, 2019-2023&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Izidor Cirnatiu,  Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2019-2026&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Daniel Paradis,  Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, co-chair, 2019-2024.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2026-01-15''&amp;lt;!--(2026-01-15)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Participating Libraries =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Note that the abbreviations &amp;quot;BAC&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;BAnQ&amp;quot; are not preceded by an article. For example, &amp;quot;Fichier interne de BAnQ&amp;quot; and not &amp;quot;Fichier interne de la BAnQ&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Institution&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Symbol&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Abbreviation to use&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; in field 670&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Name of person responding &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; on behalf of the institution&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
|CaOONL&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC*&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca Nathalie Mainville]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMBN&lt;br /&gt;
|BAnQ*&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:MC.Coelho@banq.qc.ca &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Marie-Chantal L'Écuyer-Coelho&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|École nationale d'administration publique (ENAP)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQUQEN&lt;br /&gt;
|ENAP&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:hardy.julie@enap.ca Julie Hardy]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|HEC Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMHE&lt;br /&gt;
|HEC&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:isabelle.dallaire@hec.ca Isabelle Dallaire]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Institut national de la recherche scientifique (INRS)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQINRS&lt;br /&gt;
|INRS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:anne.robitaille@ete.inrs.ca Anne Robitaille]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Polytechnique Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMEP&lt;br /&gt;
|PolyMtl&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:irina.gherasim@polymtl.ca Irina Gherasim]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université TÉLUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQUQT&lt;br /&gt;
|TÉLUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:bahija.talal@teluq.ca Bahija Talal]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université de Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMU&lt;br /&gt;
|UdeM&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:pierre-etienne.lepine@umontreal.ca Pierre-Étienne Lépine]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université de Sherbrooke&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQSHERU&lt;br /&gt;
|UdeS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:troy.pouliot@usherbrooke.ca Troy Pouliot]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQLA&lt;br /&gt;
|ULaval&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:julie.gauthier@bibl.ulaval.ca Julie Gauthier]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Chicoutimi (UQAC)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQCU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAC&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Luc-c_Tremblay@uqac.ca &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Luc Tremblay&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Montréal (UQAM)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAM&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:bilodeau.robert@uqam.ca &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Robert Georges Bilodeau&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Rimouski (UQAR)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQRU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAR&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:suzie_pelletier@uqar.ca Suzie   Pelletier]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec en Abitibi-Témiscamingue (UQAT)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQRUQR&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAT&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:camee.toupin-lefebvre@uqat.ca Camée Toupin-Lefebvre]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec en Outaouais (UQO)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQHU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQO&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:samuel.ouellette@uqo.ca Samuel Ouellette]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Trois-Rivières (UQTR)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQTU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQTR&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Lucie.Hamelin2@uqtr.ca Lucie Hamelin]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|École de technologie supérieure (ÉTS)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMUQET&lt;br /&gt;
|ÉTS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Marie-Renee.DeSeveLeboeuf@etsmtl.ca Marie-Renée De Sève Leboeuf]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2025-03-21''&amp;lt;!--(2025-03-21)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Communications =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Year&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Title&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Author&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2020&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.bac-lac.gc.ca/eng/about-us/publications/signatures/Pages/signatures-fall-winter-2020.aspx#art07 First Steps for the Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Bernard Bérubé &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Nathalie Mainville&lt;br /&gt;
|Article published in ''Signatures'', Fall-Winter 2020, p. 12-13.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2020&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/0/00/PFAN_CPI2020.pdf Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Caitlin Horrall &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Presentation given at the Congrès des professionnel·le·s de l'information, Fall 2020.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.affairesuniversitaires.ca/actualites/actualites-article/le-programme-francophone-des-autorites-de-nom-prend-forme/?utm_source=Affaires+universitaires+-+Bulletin&amp;amp;utm_campaign=49bb362a0f-EMAIL_CAMPAIGN_2021_05_20&amp;amp;utm_medium=email&amp;amp;utm_term=0_3acf7cc134-49bb362a0f-426947657 Le Programme francophone des autorités de nom prend forme]&lt;br /&gt;
|Catherine Couturier&lt;br /&gt;
|Article published on ''Affaires universitaires'' webpage, 20 may 2021.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.ifla.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/05/assets/classification-and-indexing/newsletters/ifla_metadata_newsletter_june_2021_updated.pdf First Steps for the Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Bernard Bérubé &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Nathalie Mainville&lt;br /&gt;
|Article published in ''Metadata Newsletter'', June 2021, p. 14-15.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8f/PFAN_ACIGJuly2021.pdf The Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Caitlin Horrall &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Presentation given to ALA'S Authority Control Interest Group, July 2021.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://doi.org/10.7202/1092261ar Le Programme francophone des autorités de noms : une collaboration prometteuse]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal&lt;br /&gt;
|Article published in ''Documentation et bibliothèques'', vol. 68, no 3 (juillet-septembre 2022), p. 5-13.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/59/PFAN_AIFBD_vf_%28002%29.pdf Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Thi Bao Tran Phan &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Presentation given to the congrès de l'Association internationale francophone des bibliothécaires et documentalistes (AIFBD), August 2023.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2023-10-24''&amp;lt;!--(2023-10-24)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Discussion Lists =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PFAN-L ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== About the Discussion List ===&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L is a bilingual discussion list established by the Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) to participating libraries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
List participants are encouraged to use the list to:&lt;br /&gt;
* provide information of interest to PFAN participating libraries;&lt;br /&gt;
* ask questions and propose solutions to other PFAN libraries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the listserv web interface to configure your user profile, to use basic listserv commands and to search discussion list archives.  Please visit: https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For questions and concerns relating to the list, please contact: [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Archives:  https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa?A0=PFAN-L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List Commands ===&lt;br /&gt;
To send a message to all of the people currently subscribed to the list, just send mail to [Mailto:PFAN-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA PFAN-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], which is called the list address. You must never try to send  any command to that  address, as it would be distributed to all the  people who have subscribed. All commands must be  sent to  [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], which is  the LISTSERV address. It is important to understand the difference between the two.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may leave the list at any  time by sending a &amp;quot;'''SIGNOFF PFAN-L'''&amp;quot; command to [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA].  You can also tell LISTSERV  how you want it to confirm the receipt of  messages you send to the list. To send yourself a copy of your own  messages, send a &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L REPRO'''&amp;quot; command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, to have LISTSERV send  you a short acknowledgement instead of the entire message, send a  &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L ACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; command. Finally, you can turn  off acknowledgements completely with the  &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L NOACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L uses a UNIX-based LISTSERV software. Information about advanced commands for LISTSERV can be retrieved by sending the following message:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To: '''LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Message: '''INFO REFCARD'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;All commands to LISTSERV should be in the body of the message.  Since the software is English, all commands to LISTSERV must be in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SIGNOFF PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To remove your name from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
'''INFO PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain information about PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L NOMAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* This will stop sending you PFAN-L postings until your reset your status - please use this when you go on holidays or will not be taking email regularly.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L MAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* This will reset your status and allow you to begin receiving messages from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L DIGEST''' &lt;br /&gt;
* To receive a message per day that contains all the daily postings to PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L REPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To get a copy of a message that you post to PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L NOREPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To NOT receive a copy of what you post to PFAN-L (this is the default).&lt;br /&gt;
'''HELP PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain a list of commands.&lt;br /&gt;
'''INDEX PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain an index of what has been posted to PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''REVIEW PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To get information about a list including subscribers.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L CONCEAL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To conceal your name from anyone using the REVIEW command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PFAN-MUSIQUE-L ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== About the Discussion List ===&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-MUSIQUE-L is a bilingual discussion list established by the Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) for the participants who are interested in questions related to the authority control of entities associated with musical resources in the Canadiana file..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
List participants are encouraged to use the list to:&lt;br /&gt;
* share information of interest to PFAN participating libraries that create or revise authority records for entities associated with musical resources;&lt;br /&gt;
* ask questions concerning the authority control of entities associated with musical resources and to propose solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
You may use the listserv web interface to configure your user profile, to use basic listserv commands and to search discussion list archives.  Please visit: https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For questions and concerns relating to the list, please contact: [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Archives:  https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa?A0=PFAN-MUSIQUE-L&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== List Commands ===&lt;br /&gt;
To send a message to all of the people currently subscribed to the list, just send mail to [Mailto:PFAN-MUSIQUE-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA PFAN-MUSIQUE-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], which is called the list address. You must never try to send  any command to that  address, as it would be distributed to all the  people who have subscribed. All commands must be  sent to  [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], which is  the LISTSERV address. It is important to understand the difference between the two.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may leave the list at any  time by sending a &amp;quot;'''SIGNOFF PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&amp;quot; command to [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA].  You can also tell LISTSERV  how you want it to confirm the receipt of  messages you send to the list. To send yourself a copy of your own  messages, send a &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L REPRO'''&amp;quot; command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, to have LISTSERV send  you a short acknowledgement instead of the entire message, send a  &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L ACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; command. Finally, you can turn  off acknowledgements completely with the  &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L uses a UNIX-based LISTSERV software. Information about advanced commands for LISTSERV can be retrieved by sending the following message:&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;To: '''LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Message: '''INFO REFCARD'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;All commands to LISTSERV should be in the body of the message.  Since the software is English, all commands to LISTSERV must be in English.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SIGNOFF PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To remove your name from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
'''INFO PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain information about PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOMAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* This will stop sending you PFAN-L postings until your reset your status - please use this when you go on holidays or will not be taking email regularly.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L MAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* This will reset your status and allow you to begin receiving messages from the list.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L DIGEST''' &lt;br /&gt;
* To receive a message per day that contains all the daily postings to PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L REPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To get a copy of a message that you post to PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOREPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To NOT receive a copy of what you post to PFAN-MUSIQUE-L (this is the default).&lt;br /&gt;
'''HELP PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain a list of commands.&lt;br /&gt;
'''INDEX PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To obtain an index of what has been posted to PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
'''REVIEW PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To get information about a list including subscribers.&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L CONCEAL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* To conceal your name from anyone using the REVIEW command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Last update: 2022-12-10''&amp;lt;!--(2022-12-10)--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Contact PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
Please send all questions to [Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- The following two lines are here for test purposes only.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Media:Name Authority Manual v 1 13.docx|LAC Name Authority Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
([[:File:Name_Authority_Manual_v_1_13.docx |Versions]])&lt;br /&gt;
--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Return to Top of Page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=143341</id>
		<title>PFAN - Programme francophone des autorités de noms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=143341"/>
		<updated>2026-01-15T20:19:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Bibliothèques participantes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:PFAN - Francophone Name Authority Program ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= À propos du Programme francophone des autorités de noms  =&lt;br /&gt;
Mis sur pied en 2020 par [https://www.bac-lac.gc.ca/fra/Pages/accueil.aspx Bibliothèque et Archives Canada], [https://www.banq.qc.ca/accueil/ Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec] et 15 bibliothèques francophones du [https://biblios-uni-qc.org/ Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec], le Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) est le programme par lequel les institutions participantes contribuent au [https://bibliotheque-archives.canada.ca/fra/services/services-bibliotheques/catalogage/Pages/autorites-noms-canadiens.aspx fichier d'autorité Canadiana] en fournissant des notices d'autorité pour les agents, les lieux, les œuvres et les expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour de plus amples informations sur le PFAN, veuillez consulter [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|la section Communications]] ou contacter [Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[PFAN – Ajouts et modifications au wiki|Ajouts et modifications au wiki]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''Date de mise à jour cachée: 2022-04-29'' --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Principes généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Le fichier d'autorité Canadiana est hébergé par OCLC.&lt;br /&gt;
# Il n'y a qu'un seul fichier d'autorité en français dans WMS, Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
# Les contributions de notices d'autorité dans le fichier Canadiana par les participants au programme doivent se faire par le service Gestion des notices WorldShare de la plateforme WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
# La gouvernance du programme est assurée par un Comité directeur et les normes et pratiques sont édictées par le Comité des normes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Les normes et pratiques du PFAN guident la création des autorités et sont basées sur celles de NACO. Elles sont disponibles en français. Les bibliothèques participantes au programme s'engagent à suivre les règles de contribution élaborées par le Comité des normes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Les bibliothèques participantes sont responsables de former leur personnel et pourraient être appelées à valider la qualité des notices d'autorité contribuées par d'autres bibliothèques membres.&lt;br /&gt;
# Le PFAN est ouvert à tout partenaire francophone &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;selon les critères établis.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Ce fichier est collaboratif et les notices d'autorité doivent être &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;exemptes de pratiques locales.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Un nouveau partenaire ne peut verser &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;en lot&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; les notices d'autorité de son fichier local même si celles-ci sont uniques.&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;L'adhésion est sans frais.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-04-18''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Critères d'admissibilité au PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Être une institution ou une bibliothèque francophone&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Une institution qui dessert une communauté en langue française et qui a la capacité de participer au programme en français&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ne pas être une institution ou agence avec des frais de services payants&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pouvoir créer des notices d’autorité de noms &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pouvoir créer des notices d’autorité en format MARC21&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;S'engager à suivre les politiques établies par le PFAN et les normes édictées par le Comité des normes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Avoir un abonnement à un produit OCLC pour le traitement des autorités&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Être abonné au RDA Toolkit&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-09-20''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Attentes envers les nouveaux membres =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Partager les valeurs suivantes :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Travailler pour l'usager&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Travailler en mode collaboratif&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Valoriser les engagements&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Réconcilier intérêt institutionnel et collectif&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''S’engager à :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Respecter les principes généraux&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Harmoniser ses pratiques locales avec celles du PFAN &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Participer aux comités du PFAN en langue française&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assumer une partie des coûts du développement, si nécessaire (aucuns frais d'adhésion ne sont demandés)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-09-20''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Comité directeur =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/1/1f/Comit%C3%A9Directeur-Mandat.pdf Mandat]===&lt;br /&gt;
[PDF, 48 Ko] ([[:File:Comit%C3%A9Directeur-Mandat.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2020-12-08''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Composition ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Isabelle Dallaire, HEC Montréal, 2022-&lt;br /&gt;
* Thi Bao Tran Phan, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, 2022-&lt;br /&gt;
* Danielle Poirier,  Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:15px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable  mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ class=&amp;quot;nowrap&amp;quot; | '''Anciens&amp;amp;nbsp;membres'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal, Université de Montréal, 2019-2022&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Caitlin Horrall, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, 2019-2022&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-03-31''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Planification ===&lt;br /&gt;
[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/9/9e/PFAN_-_Planification_2020-2022.pdf 2020-2022] [PDF, 62 Ko] ([[:File:PFAN_-_Planification_2020-2022.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2021-07-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Comité des normes =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/fa/Comit%C3%A9DesNormes-Mandat.pdf Mandat]===&lt;br /&gt;
[PDF, 74 Ko] ([[:File:Comit%C3%A9DesNormes-Mandat.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2021-07-28''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Composition === &lt;br /&gt;
* Bernard Bérubé, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
* Julie Gauthier, Université Laval, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Marilyne Guertin, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, coprésidente, 2026-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Marie-Chantal L'Ecuyer-Coelho, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2024-&lt;br /&gt;
* Bernard Lemieux, Université de Montréal, 2023-&lt;br /&gt;
* Nathalie Mainville, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, coprésidente, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:15px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ class=&amp;quot;nowrap&amp;quot; | '''Anciens&amp;amp;nbsp;membres'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Philippe Brosseau, Université du Québec à Montréal, 2019-2023&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Izidor Cirnatiu, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2019-2026&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Daniel Paradis, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, coprésident, 2019-2024&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Bibliothèques participantes =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Noter que les abréviations &amp;quot;BAC&amp;quot; et &amp;quot;BAnQ&amp;quot; ne sont pas précédées d'un article. Par exemple, on écrit  &amp;quot;Fichier interne de BAnQ&amp;quot; et non &amp;quot;Fichier interne de la BAnQ&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Institution&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Sigle&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Abréviation à employer &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;dans la zone 670&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Nom de la personne répondante &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;pour l'institution&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
|CaOONL&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC*&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca Nathalie Mainville]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMBN&lt;br /&gt;
|BAnQ*&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:marilyne.guertin@banq.qc.ca &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Marilyne Guertin&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|École nationale d'administration publique (ENAP)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQUQEN&lt;br /&gt;
|ENAP&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:hardy.julie@enap.ca Julie Hardy]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|HEC Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMHE&lt;br /&gt;
|HEC&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:isabelle.dallaire@hec.ca Isabelle Dallaire]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Institut national de la recherche scientifique (INRS)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQINRS&lt;br /&gt;
|INRS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:anne.robitaille@ete.inrs.ca Anne Robitaille]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Polytechnique Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMEP&lt;br /&gt;
|PolyMtl&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:anita.mazur@polymtl.ca Anita Mazur]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université TÉLUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQUQT&lt;br /&gt;
|TÉLUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:bahija.talal@teluq.ca Bahija Talal]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université de Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMU&lt;br /&gt;
|UdeM&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:pierre-etienne.lepine@umontreal.ca Pierre-Étienne Lépine]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université de Sherbrooke&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQSHERU&lt;br /&gt;
|UdeS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:carl.brouillard@usherbrooke.ca Carl Brouillard]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQLA&lt;br /&gt;
|ULaval&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:julie.gauthier@bibl.ulaval.ca Julie Gauthier]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Chicoutimi (UQAC)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQCU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAC&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Luc-c_Tremblay@uqac.ca Luc Tremblay]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Montréal (UQAM)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAM&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:bilodeau.robert@uqam.ca Robert Georges Bilodeau]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Rimouski (UQAR)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQRU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAR&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:suzie_pelletier@uqar.ca Suzie   Pelletier]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec en Abitibi-Témiscamingue (UQAT)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQRUQR&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAT&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:camee.toupin-lefebvre@uqat.ca Camée Toupin-Lefebvre]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec en Outaouais (UQO)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQHU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQO&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:samuel.ouellette@uqo.ca Samuel Ouellette]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Trois-Rivières (UQTR)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQTU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQTR&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Lucie.Hamelin2@uqtr.ca Lucie Hamelin]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|École de technologie supérieure (ÉTS)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMUQET&lt;br /&gt;
|ÉTS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Marie-Renee.DeSeveLeboeuf@etsmtl.ca Marie-Renée De Sève Leboeuf]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Communications =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Année&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Titre&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Auteur/Autrice&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2020&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.bac-lac.gc.ca/fra/a-notre-sujet/publications/signatures/Pages/signatures-automne-hiver-2020.aspx?wbdisable=true#art07 Un premier pas pour le Programme francophone des autorités de noms]&lt;br /&gt;
|Bernard Bérubé &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Nathalie Mainville&lt;br /&gt;
|Article paru dans ''Signatures'', automne-hiver 2020, p. 12-13.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2020&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/0/00/PFAN_CPI2020.pdf Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Caitlin Horrall &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Présentation faite dans le cadre du Congrès des professionnel·le·s de l'information, automne 2020.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.affairesuniversitaires.ca/actualites/actualites-article/le-programme-francophone-des-autorites-de-nom-prend-forme/?utm_source=Affaires+universitaires+-+Bulletin&amp;amp;utm_campaign=49bb362a0f-EMAIL_CAMPAIGN_2021_05_20&amp;amp;utm_medium=email&amp;amp;utm_term=0_3acf7cc134-49bb362a0f-426947657 Le Programme francophone des autorités de nom prend forme]&lt;br /&gt;
|Catherine Couturier&lt;br /&gt;
|Article paru sur le site ''Affaires universitaires'', 20 mai 2021.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.ifla.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/05/assets/classification-and-indexing/newsletters/ifla_metadata_newsletter_june_2021_updated.pdf First Steps for the Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Bernard Bérubé &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Nathalie Mainville&lt;br /&gt;
|Article paru dans ''Metadata newsletter'', June 2021, p. 14-15.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8f/PFAN_ACIGJuly2021.pdf The Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Caitlin Horrall &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Présentation faite à l'ALA's Authority Control Interest Group, juillet 2021.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://doi.org/10.7202/1092261ar Le Programme francophone des autorités de noms : une collaboration prometteuse]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal&lt;br /&gt;
|Article paru dans ''Documentation et bibliothèques'', vol. 68, no 3 (juillet-septembre 2022), p. 5-13.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/59/PFAN_AIFBD_vf_%28002%29.pdf Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Thi Bao Tran Phan &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Présentation faite dans le cadre du congrès de l'Association internationale francophone des bibliothécaires et documentalistes (AIFBD), août 2023.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-10-24''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Listes de discussion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PFAN-L ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== À propos de la liste de discussion ===&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L est une liste de discussion bilingue établie par le Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) et réservée aux bibliothèques participantes.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les participants à la liste sont invités à s'en servir pour :&lt;br /&gt;
* partager des renseignements d'intérêt pour les bibliothèques participantes au PFAN;&lt;br /&gt;
* poser des questions et proposer des solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent s'inscrire à la liste sont invités à en faire la demande à la personne répondante de leur institution (voir la liste de ces personnes sous [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Bibliothèques participantes]]), laquelle transmettra le nom et l'adresse de courriel de la personne à inscrire à l'adresse suivante : [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser l'interface Web du listserv afin de configurer votre profil d'utilisateur, pour utiliser des commandes de base et pour effectuer des recherches dans les archives des forums de discussion.  Veuillez visiter : https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa?A0=PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toute question ou préoccupation relative au forum de discussion, veuillez contacter : [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Liste des commandes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser l'interface Web du listserv afin de configurer votre profil d'utilisateur, pour utiliser des commandes de base et pour effectuer des recherches dans les archives des forums de discussion. Veuillez visiter : https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de communiquer avec tous les abonnés, envoyez un courriel à [Mailto:PFAN-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA PFAN-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], ce qu'on appelle l'adresse du forum de discussion. Il ne faut pas envoyer de commandes à cette adresse, car elles seront distribuées à tous les abonnés du forum. On doit envoyer toute commande à [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], ce qu'on appelle l'adresse du serveur LISTSERV. Il est important de comprendre cette distinction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pourrez vous désabonner du forum n'importe quand en envoyant la commande &amp;quot;'''SIGNOFF PFAN-L'''&amp;quot; à [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA]. Vous pourrez aussi configurer vos préférences d'envoi de messages. Pour recevoir une copie des messages que vous enverrez au forum, envoyez la commande &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L REPRO'''&amp;quot; au serveur. Ou bien, si vous souhaitez recevoir un accusé de réception plutôt que votre message original, envoyez la commande &amp;quot;SET PFAN-L ACK NOREPRO&amp;quot; au serveur. Finalement, vous pourrez désactiver complètement tout accusé en envoyant la commande &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L NOACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; au serveur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L se sert d'un logiciel LISTSERV base sur UNIX. On peut récupérer des renseignements au sujet des commandes avancées de LISTSERV en envoyant le message suivant :&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;À : '''LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA''' &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Message : '''INFO REFCARD'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt; Toutes les commandes à LISTSERV doivent figurer dans le corps du message. Puisque le logiciel est en anglais, toutes les commandes à LISTSERV doivent être en anglais.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SIGNOFF PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour retirer votre nom de la liste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''INFO PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la liste PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L NOMAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande permettra l'arrêt des affichages PFAN-L que vous recevez jusqu'a ce que vous redéfinissiez votre état; veuillez vous en servir lorsque vous allez en vacances ou que vous ne répondez pas a votre courrier électronique à intervalles réguliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L MAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande vous permet de réactiver votre état afin de pouvoir commencer à recevoir des messages de la liste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L DIGEST'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour recevoir un message par jour qui contient tous les affichages quotidiens à PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L REPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir une copie d'un message que vous affichez dans PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L NOREPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour ne PAS recevoir une copie de ce que vous affichez dans PFAN-L (c'est la valeur par défaut).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''HELP PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir une liste des commandes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''INDEX PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir un index de ce qui a été affiché dans PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''REVIEW PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir des renseignements au sujet d'une liste, notamment des abonnés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L CONCEAL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande vous permet de cacher votre nom aux autres abonnés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PFAN-MUSIQUE-L ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== À propos de la liste de discussion ===&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-MUSIQUE-L est une liste de discussion bilingue établie par le Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) et réservée aux participants intéressés par des questions touchant le contrôle d'autorité des entités associées aux ressources musicales dans le fichier Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les participants à la liste sont invités à s'en servir pour :&lt;br /&gt;
* partager des renseignements d'intérêt pour les participants au PFAN qui créent ou révisent des notices d'autorité pour des entités associées aux ressources musicales;&lt;br /&gt;
* poser des questions concernant le contrôle d'autorité des entités associées aux ressources musicales et proposer des solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent s'inscrire à la liste sont invités à en faire la demande à la personne répondante de leur institution (voir la liste de ces personnes sous [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Bibliothèques participantes]]), laquelle transmettra le nom et l'adresse de courriel de la personne à inscrire à l'adresse suivante : [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser l'interface Web du listserv afin de configurer votre profil d'utilisateur, pour utiliser des commandes de base et pour effectuer des recherches dans les archives des forums de discussion.  Veuillez visiter : https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa?A0=PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toute question ou préoccupation relative au forum de discussion, veuillez contacter : [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Liste des commandes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser l'interface Web du listserv afin de configurer votre profil d'utilisateur, pour utiliser des commandes de base et pour effectuer des recherches dans les archives des forums de discussion. Veuillez visiter : https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de communiquer avec tous les abonnés, envoyez un courriel à [Mailto:PFAN-MUSIQUE-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA PFAN-MUSIQUE-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], ce qu'on appelle l'adresse du forum de discussion. Il ne faut pas envoyer de commandes à cette adresse, car elles seront distribuées à tous les abonnés du forum. On doit envoyer toute commande à [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], ce qu'on appelle l'adresse du serveur LISTSERV. Il est important de comprendre cette distinction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pourrez vous désabonner du forum n'importe quand en envoyant la commande &amp;quot;'''SIGNOFF PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&amp;quot; à [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA]. Vous pourrez aussi configurer vos préférences d'envoi de messages. Pour recevoir une copie des messages que vous enverrez au forum, envoyez la commande &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L REPRO'''&amp;quot; au serveur. Ou bien, si vous souhaitez recevoir un accusé de réception plutôt que votre message original, envoyez la commande &amp;quot;SET PFAN-L ACK NOREPRO&amp;quot; au serveur. Finalement, vous pourrez désactiver complètement tout accusé en envoyant la commande &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; au serveur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-MUSIQUE-L se sert d'un logiciel LISTSERV base sur UNIX. On peut récupérer des renseignements au sujet des commandes avancées de LISTSERV en envoyant le message suivant :&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;À : '''LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA''' &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Message : '''INFO REFCARD'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt; Toutes les commandes à LISTSERV doivent figurer dans le corps du message. Puisque le logiciel est en anglais, toutes les commandes à LISTSERV doivent être en anglais.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SIGNOFF PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour retirer votre nom de la liste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''INFO PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la liste PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOMAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande permettra l'arrêt des affichages PFAN-L que vous recevez jusqu'à ce que vous redéfinissiez votre état; veuillez vous en servir lorsque vous allez en vacances ou que vous ne répondez pas a votre courrier électronique à intervalles réguliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L MAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande vous permet de réactiver votre état afin de pouvoir commencer à recevoir des messages de la liste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L DIGEST'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour recevoir un message par jour qui contient tous les affichages quotidiens à PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L REPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir une copie d'un message que vous affichez dans PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOREPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour ne PAS recevoir une copie de ce que vous affichez dans PFAN-MUSIQUE-L (c'est la valeur par défaut).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''HELP PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir une liste des commandes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''INDEX PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir un index de ce qui a été affiché dans PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''REVIEW PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir des renseignements au sujet d'une liste, notamment des abonnés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L CONCEAL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande vous permet de cacher votre nom aux autres abonnés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2022-12-10''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Contacter le PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
Transmettre toute question à [Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=143339</id>
		<title>PFAN - Programme francophone des autorités de noms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms&amp;diff=143339"/>
		<updated>2026-01-15T20:12:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Comité des normes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:PFAN - Francophone Name Authority Program ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= À propos du Programme francophone des autorités de noms  =&lt;br /&gt;
Mis sur pied en 2020 par [https://www.bac-lac.gc.ca/fra/Pages/accueil.aspx Bibliothèque et Archives Canada], [https://www.banq.qc.ca/accueil/ Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec] et 15 bibliothèques francophones du [https://biblios-uni-qc.org/ Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec], le Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) est le programme par lequel les institutions participantes contribuent au [https://bibliotheque-archives.canada.ca/fra/services/services-bibliotheques/catalogage/Pages/autorites-noms-canadiens.aspx fichier d'autorité Canadiana] en fournissant des notices d'autorité pour les agents, les lieux, les œuvres et les expressions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour de plus amples informations sur le PFAN, veuillez consulter [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|la section Communications]] ou contacter [Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- [[PFAN – Ajouts et modifications au wiki|Ajouts et modifications au wiki]]--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!--''Date de mise à jour cachée: 2022-04-29'' --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Principes généraux =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Le fichier d'autorité Canadiana est hébergé par OCLC.&lt;br /&gt;
# Il n'y a qu'un seul fichier d'autorité en français dans WMS, Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
# Les contributions de notices d'autorité dans le fichier Canadiana par les participants au programme doivent se faire par le service Gestion des notices WorldShare de la plateforme WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
# La gouvernance du programme est assurée par un Comité directeur et les normes et pratiques sont édictées par le Comité des normes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Les normes et pratiques du PFAN guident la création des autorités et sont basées sur celles de NACO. Elles sont disponibles en français. Les bibliothèques participantes au programme s'engagent à suivre les règles de contribution élaborées par le Comité des normes.&lt;br /&gt;
# Les bibliothèques participantes sont responsables de former leur personnel et pourraient être appelées à valider la qualité des notices d'autorité contribuées par d'autres bibliothèques membres.&lt;br /&gt;
# Le PFAN est ouvert à tout partenaire francophone &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;selon les critères établis.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
# Ce fichier est collaboratif et les notices d'autorité doivent être &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;exemptes de pratiques locales.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Un nouveau partenaire ne peut verser &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;en lot&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; les notices d'autorité de son fichier local même si celles-ci sont uniques.&lt;br /&gt;
# &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;L'adhésion est sans frais.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-04-18''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Critères d'admissibilité au PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Être une institution ou une bibliothèque francophone&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li style=&amp;quot;list-style-image: none; list-style-type:circle;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Une institution qui dessert une communauté en langue française et qui a la capacité de participer au programme en français&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Ne pas être une institution ou agence avec des frais de services payants&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pouvoir créer des notices d’autorité de noms &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Pouvoir créer des notices d’autorité en format MARC21&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;S'engager à suivre les politiques établies par le PFAN et les normes édictées par le Comité des normes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Avoir un abonnement à un produit OCLC pour le traitement des autorités&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Être abonné au RDA Toolkit&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-09-20''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Attentes envers les nouveaux membres =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Partager les valeurs suivantes :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Travailler pour l'usager&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Travailler en mode collaboratif&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Valoriser les engagements&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Réconcilier intérêt institutionnel et collectif&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''S’engager à :'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Respecter les principes généraux&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Harmoniser ses pratiques locales avec celles du PFAN &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Participer aux comités du PFAN en langue française&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Assumer une partie des coûts du développement, si nécessaire (aucuns frais d'adhésion ne sont demandés)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-09-20''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Comité directeur =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/1/1f/Comit%C3%A9Directeur-Mandat.pdf Mandat]===&lt;br /&gt;
[PDF, 48 Ko] ([[:File:Comit%C3%A9Directeur-Mandat.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2020-12-08''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Composition ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Isabelle Dallaire, HEC Montréal, 2022-&lt;br /&gt;
* Thi Bao Tran Phan, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, 2022-&lt;br /&gt;
* Danielle Poirier,  Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:15px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable  mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ class=&amp;quot;nowrap&amp;quot; | '''Anciens&amp;amp;nbsp;membres'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal, Université de Montréal, 2019-2022&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Caitlin Horrall, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, 2019-2022&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-03-31''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Planification ===&lt;br /&gt;
[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/9/9e/PFAN_-_Planification_2020-2022.pdf 2020-2022] [PDF, 62 Ko] ([[:File:PFAN_-_Planification_2020-2022.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2021-07-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Comité des normes =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/f/fa/Comit%C3%A9DesNormes-Mandat.pdf Mandat]===&lt;br /&gt;
[PDF, 74 Ko] ([[:File:Comit%C3%A9DesNormes-Mandat.pdf|Versions]])&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2021-07-28''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Composition === &lt;br /&gt;
* Bernard Bérubé, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
* Julie Gauthier, Université Laval, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Marilyne Guertin, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, coprésidente, 2026-&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Marie-Chantal L'Ecuyer-Coelho, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2024-&lt;br /&gt;
* Bernard Lemieux, Université de Montréal, 2023-&lt;br /&gt;
* Nathalie Mainville, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada, coprésidente, 2019-&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;margin-left:15px; margin-bottom:25px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+ class=&amp;quot;nowrap&amp;quot; | '''Anciens&amp;amp;nbsp;membres'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Philippe Brosseau, Université du Québec à Montréal, 2019-2023&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Izidor Cirnatiu, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, 2019-2026&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Daniel Paradis, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, coprésident, 2019-2024&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Bibliothèques participantes =&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; Noter que les abréviations &amp;quot;BAC&amp;quot; et &amp;quot;BAnQ&amp;quot; ne sont pas précédées d'un article. Par exemple, on écrit  &amp;quot;Fichier interne de BAnQ&amp;quot; et non &amp;quot;Fichier interne de la BAnQ&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Institution&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Sigle&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Abréviation à employer &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;dans la zone 670&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Nom de la personne répondante &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;pour l'institution&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
|CaOONL&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC*&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca Nathalie Mainville]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMBN&lt;br /&gt;
|BAnQ*&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:MC.Coelho@banq.qc.ca &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Marie-Chantal L'Écuyer-Coelho&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|École nationale d'administration publique (ENAP)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQUQEN&lt;br /&gt;
|ENAP&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:hardy.julie@enap.ca Julie Hardy]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|HEC Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMHE&lt;br /&gt;
|HEC&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:isabelle.dallaire@hec.ca Isabelle Dallaire]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Institut national de la recherche scientifique (INRS)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQINRS&lt;br /&gt;
|INRS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:anne.robitaille@ete.inrs.ca Anne Robitaille]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Polytechnique Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMEP&lt;br /&gt;
|PolyMtl&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:anita.mazur@polymtl.ca Anita Mazur]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université TÉLUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQUQT&lt;br /&gt;
|TÉLUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:bahija.talal@teluq.ca Bahija Talal]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université de Montréal&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMU&lt;br /&gt;
|UdeM&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:pierre-etienne.lepine@umontreal.ca Pierre-Étienne Lépine]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université de Sherbrooke&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQSHERU&lt;br /&gt;
|UdeS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:carl.brouillard@usherbrooke.ca Carl Brouillard]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQQLA&lt;br /&gt;
|ULaval&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:julie.gauthier@bibl.ulaval.ca Julie Gauthier]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Chicoutimi (UQAC)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQCU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAC&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Luc-c_Tremblay@uqac.ca &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Luc Tremblay&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Montréal (UQAM)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMUQ&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAM&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:bilodeau.robert@uqam.ca &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;Robert Georges Bilodeau&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Rimouski (UQAR)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQRU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAR&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:suzie_pelletier@uqar.ca Suzie   Pelletier]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec en Abitibi-Témiscamingue (UQAT)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQRUQR&lt;br /&gt;
|UQAT&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:camee.toupin-lefebvre@uqat.ca Camée Toupin-Lefebvre]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec en Outaouais (UQO)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQHU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQO&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:samuel.ouellette@uqo.ca Samuel Ouellette]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Université du Québec à Trois-Rivières (UQTR)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQTU&lt;br /&gt;
|UQTR&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Lucie.Hamelin2@uqtr.ca Lucie Hamelin]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|École de technologie supérieure (ÉTS)&lt;br /&gt;
|CaQMUQET&lt;br /&gt;
|ÉTS&lt;br /&gt;
|[Mailto:Marie-Renee.DeSeveLeboeuf@etsmtl.ca Marie-Renée De Sève Leboeuf]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-03-21''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Communications =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Année&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Titre&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Auteur/Autrice&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;&amp;quot; |Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2020&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.bac-lac.gc.ca/fra/a-notre-sujet/publications/signatures/Pages/signatures-automne-hiver-2020.aspx?wbdisable=true#art07 Un premier pas pour le Programme francophone des autorités de noms]&lt;br /&gt;
|Bernard Bérubé &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Nathalie Mainville&lt;br /&gt;
|Article paru dans ''Signatures'', automne-hiver 2020, p. 12-13.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2020&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/0/00/PFAN_CPI2020.pdf Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Caitlin Horrall &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Présentation faite dans le cadre du Congrès des professionnel·le·s de l'information, automne 2020.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.affairesuniversitaires.ca/actualites/actualites-article/le-programme-francophone-des-autorites-de-nom-prend-forme/?utm_source=Affaires+universitaires+-+Bulletin&amp;amp;utm_campaign=49bb362a0f-EMAIL_CAMPAIGN_2021_05_20&amp;amp;utm_medium=email&amp;amp;utm_term=0_3acf7cc134-49bb362a0f-426947657 Le Programme francophone des autorités de nom prend forme]&lt;br /&gt;
|Catherine Couturier&lt;br /&gt;
|Article paru sur le site ''Affaires universitaires'', 20 mai 2021.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://www.ifla.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/05/assets/classification-and-indexing/newsletters/ifla_metadata_newsletter_june_2021_updated.pdf First Steps for the Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Bernard Bérubé &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Nathalie Mainville&lt;br /&gt;
|Article paru dans ''Metadata newsletter'', June 2021, p. 14-15.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2021&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/8/8f/PFAN_ACIGJuly2021.pdf The Francophone Name Authority Program]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Caitlin Horrall &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Présentation faite à l'ALA's Authority Control Interest Group, juillet 2021.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://doi.org/10.7202/1092261ar Le Programme francophone des autorités de noms : une collaboration prometteuse]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal&lt;br /&gt;
|Article paru dans ''Documentation et bibliothèques'', vol. 68, no 3 (juillet-septembre 2022), p. 5-13.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023&lt;br /&gt;
|[https://wiki.gccollab.ca/images/5/59/PFAN_AIFBD_vf_%28002%29.pdf Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN)]&lt;br /&gt;
|Julie Cardinal &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Thi Bao Tran Phan &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Danielle Poirier&lt;br /&gt;
|Présentation faite dans le cadre du congrès de l'Association internationale francophone des bibliothécaires et documentalistes (AIFBD), août 2023.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2023-10-24''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Listes de discussion =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PFAN-L ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== À propos de la liste de discussion ===&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L est une liste de discussion bilingue établie par le Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) et réservée aux bibliothèques participantes.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les participants à la liste sont invités à s'en servir pour :&lt;br /&gt;
* partager des renseignements d'intérêt pour les bibliothèques participantes au PFAN;&lt;br /&gt;
* poser des questions et proposer des solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent s'inscrire à la liste sont invités à en faire la demande à la personne répondante de leur institution (voir la liste de ces personnes sous [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Bibliothèques participantes]]), laquelle transmettra le nom et l'adresse de courriel de la personne à inscrire à l'adresse suivante : [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser l'interface Web du listserv afin de configurer votre profil d'utilisateur, pour utiliser des commandes de base et pour effectuer des recherches dans les archives des forums de discussion.  Veuillez visiter : https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa?A0=PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toute question ou préoccupation relative au forum de discussion, veuillez contacter : [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Liste des commandes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser l'interface Web du listserv afin de configurer votre profil d'utilisateur, pour utiliser des commandes de base et pour effectuer des recherches dans les archives des forums de discussion. Veuillez visiter : https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de communiquer avec tous les abonnés, envoyez un courriel à [Mailto:PFAN-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA PFAN-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], ce qu'on appelle l'adresse du forum de discussion. Il ne faut pas envoyer de commandes à cette adresse, car elles seront distribuées à tous les abonnés du forum. On doit envoyer toute commande à [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], ce qu'on appelle l'adresse du serveur LISTSERV. Il est important de comprendre cette distinction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pourrez vous désabonner du forum n'importe quand en envoyant la commande &amp;quot;'''SIGNOFF PFAN-L'''&amp;quot; à [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA]. Vous pourrez aussi configurer vos préférences d'envoi de messages. Pour recevoir une copie des messages que vous enverrez au forum, envoyez la commande &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L REPRO'''&amp;quot; au serveur. Ou bien, si vous souhaitez recevoir un accusé de réception plutôt que votre message original, envoyez la commande &amp;quot;SET PFAN-L ACK NOREPRO&amp;quot; au serveur. Finalement, vous pourrez désactiver complètement tout accusé en envoyant la commande &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-L NOACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; au serveur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-L se sert d'un logiciel LISTSERV base sur UNIX. On peut récupérer des renseignements au sujet des commandes avancées de LISTSERV en envoyant le message suivant :&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;À : '''LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA''' &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Message : '''INFO REFCARD'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt; Toutes les commandes à LISTSERV doivent figurer dans le corps du message. Puisque le logiciel est en anglais, toutes les commandes à LISTSERV doivent être en anglais.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SIGNOFF PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour retirer votre nom de la liste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''INFO PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la liste PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L NOMAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande permettra l'arrêt des affichages PFAN-L que vous recevez jusqu'a ce que vous redéfinissiez votre état; veuillez vous en servir lorsque vous allez en vacances ou que vous ne répondez pas a votre courrier électronique à intervalles réguliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L MAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande vous permet de réactiver votre état afin de pouvoir commencer à recevoir des messages de la liste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L DIGEST'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour recevoir un message par jour qui contient tous les affichages quotidiens à PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L REPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir une copie d'un message que vous affichez dans PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L NOREPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour ne PAS recevoir une copie de ce que vous affichez dans PFAN-L (c'est la valeur par défaut).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''HELP PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir une liste des commandes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''INDEX PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir un index de ce qui a été affiché dans PFAN-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''REVIEW PFAN-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir des renseignements au sujet d'une liste, notamment des abonnés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-L CONCEAL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande vous permet de cacher votre nom aux autres abonnés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PFAN-MUSIQUE-L ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== À propos de la liste de discussion ===&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-MUSIQUE-L est une liste de discussion bilingue établie par le Programme francophone des autorités de noms (PFAN) et réservée aux participants intéressés par des questions touchant le contrôle d'autorité des entités associées aux ressources musicales dans le fichier Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Les participants à la liste sont invités à s'en servir pour :&lt;br /&gt;
* partager des renseignements d'intérêt pour les participants au PFAN qui créent ou révisent des notices d'autorité pour des entités associées aux ressources musicales;&lt;br /&gt;
* poser des questions concernant le contrôle d'autorité des entités associées aux ressources musicales et proposer des solutions.&lt;br /&gt;
Les participants au PFAN qui souhaitent s'inscrire à la liste sont invités à en faire la demande à la personne répondante de leur institution (voir la liste de ces personnes sous [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Bibliothèques participantes]]), laquelle transmettra le nom et l'adresse de courriel de la personne à inscrire à l'adresse suivante : [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser l'interface Web du listserv afin de configurer votre profil d'utilisateur, pour utiliser des commandes de base et pour effectuer des recherches dans les archives des forums de discussion.  Veuillez visiter : https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa?A0=PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour toute question ou préoccupation relative au forum de discussion, veuillez contacter : [Mailto:coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca coorddeliste-listcoord@bac-lac.gc.ca].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Liste des commandes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser l'interface Web du listserv afin de configurer votre profil d'utilisateur, pour utiliser des commandes de base et pour effectuer des recherches dans les archives des forums de discussion. Veuillez visiter : https://listserv.collectionscanada.gc.ca/cgi-bin/wa .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afin de communiquer avec tous les abonnés, envoyez un courriel à [Mailto:PFAN-MUSIQUE-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA PFAN-MUSIQUE-L@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], ce qu'on appelle l'adresse du forum de discussion. Il ne faut pas envoyer de commandes à cette adresse, car elles seront distribuées à tous les abonnés du forum. On doit envoyer toute commande à [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA], ce qu'on appelle l'adresse du serveur LISTSERV. Il est important de comprendre cette distinction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pourrez vous désabonner du forum n'importe quand en envoyant la commande &amp;quot;'''SIGNOFF PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&amp;quot; à [Mailto:LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA]. Vous pourrez aussi configurer vos préférences d'envoi de messages. Pour recevoir une copie des messages que vous enverrez au forum, envoyez la commande &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L REPRO'''&amp;quot; au serveur. Ou bien, si vous souhaitez recevoir un accusé de réception plutôt que votre message original, envoyez la commande &amp;quot;SET PFAN-L ACK NOREPRO&amp;quot; au serveur. Finalement, vous pourrez désactiver complètement tout accusé en envoyant la commande &amp;quot;'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOACK NOREPRO'''&amp;quot; au serveur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
PFAN-MUSIQUE-L se sert d'un logiciel LISTSERV base sur UNIX. On peut récupérer des renseignements au sujet des commandes avancées de LISTSERV en envoyant le message suivant :&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;À : '''LISTSERV@LISTSERV.LAC-BAC.GC.CA''' &amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt;&amp;lt;blockquote&amp;gt;Message : '''INFO REFCARD'''&amp;lt;/blockquote&amp;gt; Toutes les commandes à LISTSERV doivent figurer dans le corps du message. Puisque le logiciel est en anglais, toutes les commandes à LISTSERV doivent être en anglais.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SIGNOFF PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour retirer votre nom de la liste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''INFO PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la liste PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOMAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande permettra l'arrêt des affichages PFAN-L que vous recevez jusqu'à ce que vous redéfinissiez votre état; veuillez vous en servir lorsque vous allez en vacances ou que vous ne répondez pas a votre courrier électronique à intervalles réguliers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L MAIL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande vous permet de réactiver votre état afin de pouvoir commencer à recevoir des messages de la liste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L DIGEST'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour recevoir un message par jour qui contient tous les affichages quotidiens à PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L REPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir une copie d'un message que vous affichez dans PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L NOREPRO'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour ne PAS recevoir une copie de ce que vous affichez dans PFAN-MUSIQUE-L (c'est la valeur par défaut).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''HELP PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir une liste des commandes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''INDEX PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir un index de ce qui a été affiché dans PFAN-MUSIQUE-L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''REVIEW PFAN-MUSIQUE-L'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Pour obtenir des renseignements au sujet d'une liste, notamment des abonnés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SET PFAN-MUSIQUE-L CONCEAL'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Cette commande vous permet de cacher votre nom aux autres abonnés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2022-12-10''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Contacter le PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
Transmettre toute question à [Mailto:pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca pfan-fnap@bac-lac.gc.ca]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:PFAN]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=143338</id>
		<title>PFAN - Annonces et mises à jour</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.gccollab.ca/index.php?title=PFAN_-_Annonces_et_mises_%C3%A0_jour&amp;diff=143338"/>
		<updated>2026-01-15T20:08:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Nathalie.mainville: /* Annonces */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[en:PFAN - News and Updates]]&lt;br /&gt;
{{Template:PFAN Onglets}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Annonces =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Annonce'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2026-01-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Nous sommes ravis d’accueillir Marilyne Guertin, de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec, au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 13 janvier 2026, elle succède à Marie Chantal L’Ecuyer Coelho à titre de représentante de BAnQ et de coprésidente du Comité. De son côté, Marie Chantal remplacera Izidor Cirnatiu, qui quitte le Comité après sept années d’implication. Nous tenons à exprimer notre sincère gratitude à Izidor pour son engagement au sein du PFAN. Son expertise et son engagement ont été essentiels à la création du Comité et à ses nombreuses réalisations. Merci Izidor, et bienvenue à Marilyne!&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une '''formation sur la romanisation''' sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 18 et 25 novembre prochains, de 10 h à 12 h. Cette activité a été préparée par Rachel Gagnon et Daniel Paradis, et sera présentée par Rachel Gagnon, bibliothécaire principale à Bibliothèque et Archives Canada.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN, auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la romanisation selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter la formation générale offerte en 2020 et à savoir quand appliquer les tables de romanisation du PFAN.  Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; par conséquent, elle ne répétera pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 2 heures chacune.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''18 novembre''', la première partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les principes de bases et les définitions&lt;br /&gt;
* RDA et le début de la démarche&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de personnes&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Le '''25 novembre''', la deuxième partie couvrira :&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de familles&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms de collectivités&lt;br /&gt;
* Les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
* Les titres privilégiés pour les œuvres&lt;br /&gt;
* La foire aux questions&lt;br /&gt;
* Les zones MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
18 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/01367886-b1fd-434a-bccb-a4b86931f74f@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 1]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
25 novembre : [[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/5822e340-3ced-4d47-905e-2f658e7dc7f6@098ab454-2808-4984-b40d-04d49415677b Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Marie-Chantal L’Écuyer-Coelho de Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 23 septembre 2024, elle remplace Daniel Paradis comme représentante de BAnQ et co-présidente du comité.  Nous remercions chaleureusement Daniel Paradis pour sa grande contribution au PFAN. Sa participation et son expertise ont grandement influencé la création et les nombreuses réalisations du Comité.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Le Comité des normes du PFAN a le plaisir de vous informer qu’une formation gratuite sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales dans le fichier Canadiana sera offerte en deux parties via Teams les 28 et 30 mai prochains, de 9 h à 12 h 30. Elle a été préparée et sera présentée par les spécialistes du catalogage de la musique que sont :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Rachel Gagnon, Bibliothèque et Archives Canada&lt;br /&gt;
* Guillaume Lizotte, Université Laval&lt;br /&gt;
* Daniel Paradis, Bibliothèque et Archives nationales du Québec&lt;br /&gt;
* Lina Picard, Université de Montréal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette formation a été conçue pour les participants au PFAN auxquels elle s’adresse principalement, mais pourra intéresser toute personne désireuse d’en apprendre davantage sur la description des œuvres et des expressions musicales selon RDA et les pratiques du PFAN. Elle vise à compléter le module 6 de la formation générale donnée en 2020, lequel excluait les œuvres et les expressions musicales. Elle tient pour acquis que les personnes qui s’y inscriront ont déjà suivi la formation générale; elle ne répétera donc pas les notions qui y avaient été présentées. Afin de mieux se préparer à la formation, il est quand même fortement recommandé de réviser le [[/wiki.gccollab.ca/PFAN - Formation PFAN|module 6 de la formation générale]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation sera donnée en deux parties de 3 heures et demie chacune. La première partie couvrira les attributs des œuvres et des expressions musicales, c’est-à-dire :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* titre privilégié d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* distribution d’exécution&lt;br /&gt;
* désignation numérique d'une œuvre musicale&lt;br /&gt;
* tonalité et&lt;br /&gt;
* autre caractéristique d'une expression d'une œuvre musicale.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La deuxième partie couvrira quant à elle :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* la construction des points d'accès et des variantes de point d’accès représentant des œuvres et des expressions musicales&lt;br /&gt;
* les entités en relation ainsi que&lt;br /&gt;
* la maintenance du fichier Canadiana.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La formation fera l’objet d’un enregistrement qui pourra être téléchargé à la fin de chaque partie.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chacune des deux parties nécessite une inscription distincte. Pour vous inscrire, veuillez consulter le site de chaque partie et cliquez sur le bouton « S’inscrire » :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/8148f230-56d9-4833-a25c-7f6baac6c2fb@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[https://events.teams.microsoft.com/event/cf33ae27-958d-40ab-baff-efe2f158a858@bd0afe0e-492c-4254-9520-bcf19fc758e7 Partie 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Bienvenue à Bernard Lemieux de l'Université de Montréal au sein du Comité des normes du PFAN. Depuis le 28 mars 2023, il remplace officiellement Philippe Brosseau comme l'un des représentants du Partenariat des bibliothèques universitaires du Québec. Nous remercions chaleureusement Philippe pour sa contribution au comité. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2026-01-15''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Ajouts et modifications au wiki du PFAN =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dans le wiki, le '''contenu ajouté''' est identifié par l'étiquette &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;[NOUVEAU]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. Le '''contenu modifié''' est identifié par du &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;gt;texte en rouge&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2025 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-30&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions pour les langues de la norme ISO 15919:2001 (Information et documentation -- Translittération du Devanagari et des écritures indiennes liées en caractères latins)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-01-31&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Correction des exemples de l'étape 1.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3, Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-03-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Bibliothèques participantes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Mise à jour des répondants]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-05-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.10.3.2C_Alternative|6.2.2.10.3, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Compilation et Cycle romanesque)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/377&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#377_Langue_associ.C3.A9e|Précision]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-06-18&lt;br /&gt;
|FAQ sur les noms géographiques&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_géographiques|Lien Web de Geographic Names Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e|16.2.2.5, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.5.2C_Alternative|16.2.2.5, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2025-11-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Bases de données toponymiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2024 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-02-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Retrait des phrases &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser la sous-zone $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0 ou $1.&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Consulter le Comité des normes avant d'utiliser les sous-zones $0, $1, $3, $4 ou $i.&amp;quot; dans différentes zones]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Point 2.c. sur les variantes de point d'accès sous l'étape 2 pour les modifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ sur les numéros Canadiana (zone 016)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_numéros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Quels_sont_les_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9riques_utilis.C3.A9s_dans_les_notices_Canadiana.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question sur les numéros Canadiana génériques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Entretien_du_fichier_bibliographique_.28EFB.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Entretien du fichier bibliographique (EFB)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/9.2.2.5.3., Alternative&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|Clarification d'un énoncé]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-03-27&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/4XX&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_.E2.80.93_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision sur les renvois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#0.6.6.2C_Section_2_:_Enregistrement_des_attributs_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_et_d.27une_expression|0.6.6, Section 2 : Enregistrement des attributs d'une œuvre et d'une expression]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.1.2C_Omissions|6.14.2.5.1, Omissions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2C_Titre_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9_constitu.C3.A9_uniquement_du_nom_d.27un_type_de_composition|6.14.2.5.2, Titre privilégié constitué uniquement du nom d'un type de composition]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Choix_de_la_langue|6.14.2.5.2.1, Choix de la langue]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.1.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.1, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Forme_au_singulier_ou_au_pluriel|6.14.2.5.2.2, Forme au singulier ou au pluriel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.5.2.2.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.5.2.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.1.3.2C_Partie_identifi.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_fois_par_un_num.C3.A9ro_et_par_un_titre_ou_une_autre_d.C3.A9signation_verbale.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.1.3, Partie identifiée à la fois par un numéro et par un titre ou une autre désignation verbale, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.7.2.2C_Deux_ou_plusieurs_parties.2C_Alternative|6.14.2.7.2, Deux ou plusieurs parties, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.14.2.8.3.2C_.C5.92uvres_compl.C3.A8tes_d.27un_m.C3.AAme_type_de_composition_pour_une_m.C3.AAme_distribution_sp.C3.A9cifique_ou_diverses_distributions|6.14.2.8.3, Œuvres complètes d'un même type de composition pour une même distribution spécifique ou diverses distributions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|6.15.1.3, Enregistrement d'une distribution d'exécution]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.5.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.5, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.1.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.1, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.15.1.6.3.2C_Omission_facultative|6.15.1.6.3, Omission facultative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.1.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_d.27ordre|6.16.1.3.1, Numéro d'ordre]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.16.1.3.3.2C_Num.C3.A9ro_de_catalogue_th.C3.A9matique|6.16.1.3.3, Numéro de catalogue thématique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.18.1.4.2C_Arrangements.2C_transcriptions.2C_etc.|6.18.1.4, Arrangements, transcriptions, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.27.1.9.2C_Ajouts_aux_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres|6.27.1.9, Ajouts aux points d'accès représentant des œuvres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1, Lignes directrices générales sur la construction des points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.2.2C_.C5.92uvres_musicales_avec_des_paroles.2C_un_livret.2C_etc.|6.28.1.2, Œuvres musicales avec des paroles, un livret, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.2C_.C3.89l.C3.A9ments_additionnels_dans_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_repr.C3.A9sentant_des_.C5.93uvres_musicales|6.28.1.9, Éléments additionnels dans les points d'accès autorisés représentant des œuvres musicales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.3.2C_Point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_expression_d.27une_.C5.93uvre_musicale|6.28.3, Point d'accès autorisé représentant une expression d'une œuvre musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.4.2C_Variante_de_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_repr.C3.A9sentant_une_.C5.93uvre_ou_une_expression_musicale|6.28.4, Variante de point d'accès représentant une œuvre ou une expression musicale]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/6.28.1.9.1&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.28.1.9.1.2C_Distribution_d.27ex.C3.A9cution|Précision pour les notices d'autorité existante]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.17.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_tonalit.C3.A9|6.17.1.3, Enregistrement d'une tonalité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#.C3.89tablissement_de_certaines_entit.C3.A9s_dans_le_fichier_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms|Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/11&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F11_Syst.C3.A8me_de_vedettes-mati.C3.A8re_.2F_Th.C3.A9saurus|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/15&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Instruction pour les noms de familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_noms_et_utilisation_comme_vedette-mati.C3.A8re|Instruction pour les notices d'autorité de noms pour les familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/022&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|Instruction pour les sous-zones obsolètes $l et $m]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#023_ISSN_de_regroupement|Zone 023, ISSN de regroupement]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplément MARC 21/376&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#376_Renseignements_sur_la_famille|Instruction pour la sous-zone $d]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-05-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.1.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.E2.80.99une_relation_.C3.A0_une_collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation|32.1.1.3, Enregistrement d’une relation à une collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-08-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Établissement de certaines entités dans le fichier d'autorité de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Groupe_1_-_Vedettes_du_groupe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_de_noms|Catégorie « Avions nommés/Airplanes, Named » révisée pour « Avions individuels/Airplanes, Individual » (SHM H05)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Suppression de : préférer une notice qui a déjà une 016 à une qui n'en a pas.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-10-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_FAQ_sur_les_compilations_d%27œuvres_d%27un_même_agent|FAQ sur les compilations d'œuvres d'un même agent.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-11-06&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#10.0.2C_Identification_des_familles|10.0, Identification des familles]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-04&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.4.1.4.3.2C_Enfants_et_petits-enfants_de_personnes_royales|9.4.1.4.3, Enfants et petits-enfants de personnes royales]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2024-12-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms|Précisions apportées dans les zones 008/32, 371, 377 et 670]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2023 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible collapsable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles| Lien pour Bounding Box Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Format_des_zones_670| Nouvel exemple illustrant comment citer une sous-page de site Web]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-01-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667| Modification de la note &amp;quot;Date de naissance supprimée de toutes les zones à la demande de l'auteur&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-02-14&lt;br /&gt;
|Foire aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_la_romanisation| FAQ sur la romanisation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité directeur&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_directeur| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Comité des normes&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Comit.C3.A9_des_normes| Section pour anciens membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-03-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précision pour le numéro à indiquer dans la note 667 sous Étape 2, Notice à supprimer]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-05&lt;br /&gt;
|BAC&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Bibliothèque_et_Archives_Canada|Lien pour le wiki de BAC]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-04-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|Précision pour certains principes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-02&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#32.1.2C_Collectivit.C3.A9_en_relation_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|32.1, Collectivité en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Lorsqu.E2.80.99une_collectivit.C3.A9_a_port.C3.A9_plus_d.E2.80.99un_nom_et_qu.E2.80.99il_existe_des_autorit.C3.A9s_pour_les_autres_noms_dans_Canadiana.2C_lesquelles_doit-on_mettre_en_relation_avec_des_zones_5XX.3F_Dans_quels_cas_doit-on_r.C3.A9viser_les_autorit.C3.A9s_des_collectivit.C3.A9s_mises_en_relation.3F|Question 7 sur les collectivités en relation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Biblioth.C3.A8ques_participantes|Nouveaux répondants pour certaines institutions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#008.2F15_Utilisation_de_la_vedette_.E2.80.93_vedette-mati.C3.A8re_secondaire|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Mise_.C3.A0_jour_des_notices_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_existantes|Précision importante concernant les notices indifférenciées existantes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-05-16&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.3.4.3.2C_Enregistrement_d.27une_p.C3.A9riode_d.27activit.C3.A9_d.27une_personne_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.3.4.3, Enregistrement d'une période d'activité d'une personne]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour le terme &amp;quot;époque&amp;quot; ajoutée à la zone 1XX de la liste]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/373&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#373_Groupe_associ.C3.A9|Précision sur les changements de nom des groupes associés]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-06-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision pour les notices d'autorité codées FrPBN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Comment_d.C3.A9terminer_l.27usage_pour_le_nom_d.27un_agent_dans_WMS.3F|Question 8 sur l'usage du nom d'un agent]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation de l'hébreu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précision ajoutée pour la zone 035]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008/32&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#G.C3.A9n.C3.A9ralit.C3.A9s|Généralités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-07-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN/16.2.2.2&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information|Précision concernant les comtés aux États-Unis]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur_.5BNouveau.5D|386]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées dans la section Généralités; ajout de sections sur la répétabilité, les dates divergentes et les dates incertaines résultant de calculs de dates ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Précisions ajoutées pour un URI inclus dans la sous-zone $u]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Crit.C3.A8res_d.27admissibilit.C3.A9_au_PFAN_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Critères d'admissibilité et attentes envers les nouveaux membres]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-09-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Correction de l'indice PQ pour la littérature canadienne française]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-03&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/046&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|Instruction sur les sous-zones $q et $r]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress_.5BNouveau.5D|053]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-05&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#065_Autre_indice_de_classification_.5BNouveau.5D|065]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-11&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21/053&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#053_Indice_de_la_classification_de_la_Library_of_Congress|Précision concernant le deuxième indicateur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-17&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Table pour l'amharique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/375&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|Ne plus utiliser cette zone]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Ressources externes utiles&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Ressources_externes_utiles|Lien vers &amp;quot;Extended Date Time Format Levels 0, 1 and 2 Validation Service&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Présentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_générale#Je_dois_.C3.A9tablir_un_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9_pour_un_congr.C3.A8s.2C_etc..2C_qui_a_.C3.A9t.C3.A9_annul.C3.A9_ou_s.27est_tenu_en_mode_hybride_.28.C3.A0_la_fois_dans_un_lieu_physique_et_en_ligne.29._Quel_emplacement_dois-je_enregistrer_dans_le_point_d.27acc.C3.A8s.3F|Question 9 sur les congrès, etc., annulés ou hybrides]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de vérifications à faire dans une notice existante&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_v.C3.A9rifications_.C3.A0_faire_dans_une_notice_existante|Précisions ajoutées aux zones 046 et 667]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-10-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/008&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#Notices_cod.C3.A9es_comme_indiff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9es_qui_ne_repr.C3.A9sentent_en_fait_qu.27une_seule_identit.C3.A9|Précision ajoutée pour les notices codées «&amp;amp;nbsp;b&amp;amp;nbsp;» par erreur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-01&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouveau document pour la romanisation du yiddish]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/043&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#043_Code_de_r.C3.A9gion_g.C3.A9ographique_.5BNouveau.5D|Code local de région géographique]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.29.1.29.2C_Date_de_promulgation_d.E2.80.99une_loi.2C_etc._.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.29.1.29, Date de promulgation d’une loi, etc.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2C_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2, Nom de collectivité]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.5.2C_Exception_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|6.2.2.5, Exception]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Noms_trouv.C3.A9s_dans_une_.C3.A9criture_non_privil.C3.A9gi.C3.A9e_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Noms trouvés dans une écriture non privilégiée]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2023-11-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#11.2.2.12.2C_Alternative_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|11.2.2.12, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2022 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable sortable mw-collapsible mw-collapsed&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background:none;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|+&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:5%&amp;quot; |'''Date'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:35%&amp;quot; |'''Page ou titre'''&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;background-color:darkgray; border:solid 1px black;width:65%&amp;quot; |'''Modifications'''&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#16.2.2.2.2C_Sources_d.27information_.5BNouveau.5D|16.2.2.2, Sources d'information]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#370_Lieu_associ.C3.A9|370]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-21&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ générale&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[FAQ_g%C3%A9n%C3%A9rale#Doit-on_modifier_les_points_d.27acc.C3.A8s_autoris.C3.A9s_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions_d.27un_agent_.28p._ex._un_auteur_ou_un_compositeur.29_si_la_forme_retenue_pour_l.27agent_seul_est_diff.C3.A9rente_de_celle_utilis.C3.A9e_pour_les_.C5.93uvres_et_expressions.3F|Question 4 sur la modification des points d'accès autorisés pour les œuvres et expressions d'un agent]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_noms_g%C3%A9ographiques|FAQ sur les noms géographiques]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation_.5BNouveau.5D|388]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-24&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/Exemples de notes 667&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Exemples_de_notes_667|Deux nouveaux exemples de notes 667 (pour les notices d'autorité de nom indifférenciées représentant une seule identité et celles faisant l'objet d'une modification partielle)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-01-26&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#016_Num.C3.A9ro_de_contr.C3.B4le_de_la_notice_d.27autorit.C3.A9_de_BAC|016]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-02-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#008.2F32_Nom_de_personne_non_diff.C3.A9renci.C3.A9|008/32]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.284XX_et_5XX.29_.5BNouveau.5D|Renvois (4XX et 5XX)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Foires aux questions (FAQ)/FAQ-Numéros Canadiana&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[FAQ_sur_les_num%C3%A9ros_Canadiana_(zone_016)#Qui_contacter_lorsqu.27on_a_besoin_d.27une_nouvelle_liste_de_num.C3.A9ros_Canadiana_pour_la_zone_016.3F_.5BNouveau.5D|Question 4 sur l'obtention d'une nouvelle liste de numéros Canadiana]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Liste non exhaustive de qualificatifs&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Liste_non_exhaustive_de_qualificatifs|Deux nouveaux termes (Livret et Paroles)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Précisions ajoutées en ce qui concerne le chinois]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-03-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible_.5BNouveau.5D|385]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Communications_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Communications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Principes_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Principles généraux]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_%C3%89nonc%C3%A9s_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|9.2.2.5.3]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-19&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#022_Num.C3.A9ro_international_normalis.C3.A9_des_publications_en_s.C3.A9rie|022]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#024_Autre_num.C3.A9ro_ou_code_normalis.C3.A9|024]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#046_Dates_sp.C3.A9ciales_cod.C3.A9es|046]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#335_Plan_d.27extension_.5BNouveau.5D|335]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#375_Sexe_de_la_personne|375]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#384_Tonalit.C3.A9|384]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#385_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_public_cible|385]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#386_Caract.C3.A9ristiques_du_cr.C3.A9ateur_ou_du_collaborateur|386]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#4XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|4XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#5XX_Rappels_et_renvois_-_Renseignements_g.C3.A9n.C3.A9raux|5XX]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#500_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_personne|500]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-04-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#510_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_collectivit.C3.A9|510]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#530_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Titre_uniforme|530]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#551_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_g.C3.A9ographique|551]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-05-20&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Deux nouvelles langues (coréen et japonais)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-08&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Ajout d'une instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-06-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#511_Rappel_de_renvoi_.C2.AB_voir_aussi_.C2.BB_-_Nom_de_r.C3.A9union|511]], [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21#672_Titre_associ.C3.A9_de_l.27entit.C3.A9|672]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Projet_2._Notices_cr.C3.A9.C3.A9es_et_r.C3.A9vis.C3.A9es_dans_le_cadre_du_projet_de_mentorat_des_universit.C3.A9s|Précisions ajoutées dans le cadre du projet de mentorat des universités]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Manuel du participant&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Manuel_du_participant#Renvois_.C2.AB_voir_.C2.BB_.284XX.29_simples_.5BNouveau.5D |Renvois « voir » (4XX) simples]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-07-18&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorit%C3%A9s_de_noms#Composition|Composition du Comité directeur]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-08-25&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#9.2.2.5.3.2C_Alternative|9.2.2.5.3.2, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN/Communications&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#Communications|Nouvel article sur le PFAN]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-09-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Énoncés de politique du PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Énoncés_de_politique_du_PFAN#6.2.2.7.2C_Alternative_.5BNouveau.5D|6.2.2.7, Alternative]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-10-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Ajout de tables de romanisation de la BnF pour l'arménien, le biélorusse, le bulgare, le géorgien, le macédonien, le russe et l'ukrainien]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-07&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/388&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#388_P.C3.A9riode_associ.C3.A9e_.C3.A0_la_cr.C3.A9ation|Remplacement d'exemples RVM par RVMFAST]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur les doublons&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_les_doublons|Précisions apportées à l'instruction sur la zone 035 à l'étape 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure sur la modification partielle des notices d'œuvres et d'expressions&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_sur_la_modification_partielle_des_notices_d.27.C5.93uvres_et_d.27expressions|Précisions apportées au point 3 et à l'exemple 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-11-22&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms/670&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms#670_Source_des_donn.C3.A9es|Correction d'un exemple]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-09&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Procédure pour les notices dérivées du LC/NAF&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Proc.C3.A9dure_pour_les_notices_d.C3.A9riv.C3.A9es_du_LC.2FNAF|Précision apportée à l'exemple du modèle d'une note 670 ]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-10&lt;br /&gt;
|Le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Programme_francophone_des_autorités_de_noms#PFAN-MUSIQUE-L_.5BNOUVEAU.5D|Liste de discussion PFAN-MUSIQUE-L]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-12&lt;br /&gt;
|Guide des autorités de noms - Supplément MARC 21&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Guide_des_autorités_de_noms_-_Supplément_MARC_21|Ajout d'information dans différentes zones.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Éléments RDA fondamentaux pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Éléments_RDA_fondamentaux_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous l'élément ''collectivités en relation''.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-13&lt;br /&gt;
|Zones MARC obligatoires pour le PFAN&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu modifié''' : [[PFAN_-_Zones_MARC_obligatoires_pour_le_PFAN|Ajout d'information sous les zones 510, 511, 551.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|2022-12-15&lt;br /&gt;
|Autre documentation/Romanisation&lt;br /&gt;
|'''Contenu ajouté''' : [[PFAN_-_Autre_documentation#Romanisation|Nouvelle introduction]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Dernière mise à jour : 2025-11-04''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[#top|''Retour au haut de la page'' &amp;lt;big&amp;gt;⮝&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Nathalie.mainville</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>